The Curse

My name is Awesome, but everyone calls me Zombie Awesome… because I’m a zombie. All our first names are Zombie, in our house full of 23 other zombies. My best friend, Cool, is actually Zombie Cool. Read is actually Zombie Read. (He reads a lot.) Then, there’s Zombie Funny. And there’s Zombie Brain. He’s really smart and likes to eat brains, but he’s not allowed to because we zombies die if we eat anything besides candy and chocolate.

Cool and I like to eat candy, and on Halloween, we act like we’re fakes. So when we get candy, we don’t scare the humans giving out candy and chocolate.

But that means I can’t eat food that I like, like Oreos. If I eat Oreos, I die. The only way I can eat Oreos is if I climb halfway up Mount Olympus on Mars (It’s the tallest mountain on Mars, three times the size of the tallest mountain on Earth) and find a scroll with words that makes me able to eat anything I want, but I’ll still be a zombie. It’s the best thing ever made because I like being a zombie, and I like Oreos, and I like Taco Bell!

Even though I’m a zombie, I don’t like to scare people, but I accidentally do because it’s very easy. I just walk into a room, and all the humans go “Ahhh!” It’s kind of funny. But everyone knows zombies aren’t really scary.

When I was human, I was cursed by a wizard to become a zombie. I was 24 years old when I went to kill a bear.  The reason I had to kill the bear was because I made a bet when I was arm wrestling and lost. I went to a place for shelter in the woods, and when I was sleeping, the wizard cursed me. Everyone else was zapped in the palace and became zombies.

It’s been three years since. I don’t want to be a human again because humans are boring. I was 24 when the wizard cursed me. Now I’m 156 years old in zombie years. Every week I become a year older. I am three years old in human years. When I was 52 in zombie years, I was one in human years.

My worst fear is coffee. It tastes disgusting. Also, I am afraid I will die like a regular human.

I’m at my house, and I decide that I’m going to go to the wizard. I want to threaten to kill him if he doesn’t give me a potion that will give me money or another way to eat oreos and Taco Bell.

From my house, I walk to Cool’s house. I tell my friend that he could eat Oreos if he comes to the wizard in the woods. 

“I will join if you pay for the Oreos once a week.”
“Okay,” I say.

 

***

We’re in the woods. But then a tree falls down! We have to jump, but we can’t do it. We go around, and there is the wizard’s house. We are in the middle of nowhere!

We hear “muhahaha” from the wizard, and we are a little scared. Inca Cola falls out of our arms like human sweat. It becomes fresh right away.  Then, we drink it because it’s like, totally fresh Inca Cola.

The wizard doesn’t speak. We use a truth spell called truthalishous. The wizard has to say the truth no matter what. He says what we want is in his spellbook. Pages 69 and 370 have the scroll. It says, “Candy and chocolate aren’t good for you.” The wizard names it something a zombie of our kind would never say.  Every zombie is able to eat any food.   

We go home and tell everyone, and they are so happy. It is awesome.

 

The End

 

Loop

Mason Sheppard.

Pretty much the opposite of the poster boy almost every kid wanted to be.

Whiny, stupid, and spoiled.

He got into fights all the time at school.

Detention, detention, detention.

Once he hit the triple digits, his parents stopped caring about the constant calls that would wake them up from their afternoon nap.

“Your son, Mason, received a detention today for — ”, followed by a dial tone.

These fights he got into, however, didn’t just stay at school.

If you came to Mason’s house one day, you would usually open the door to see Mason in a heated argument with his parents.

One day, after one of these fights, Mason’s parents sent him to his room and opened the front door.

His mother shouted, “Mason! We’re going outside for 30 minutes to get away from you and these stupid arguments. Stay in your room and don’t even think about leaving the house!”

Mason flopped on the bed and opened up his phone.

Almost immediately, he received a text message from an unknown number.

“Mason, I assume this is your current number, 202-555-0189. Please, I need you to listen to me.”


Mason sent one back.


“Ugh, why? Is this one of those stupid pranks?”


Ignoring what he sent, the unknown person sent back a text.

“You need to stop being a whiny little brat to your parents and to your teachers. Bad things that you can’t even comprehend are going to happen.”


Mason thought for a second, then replied, “What? Why?”


The reply came back immediately.

“This phone has insufficient funds to send messages.”

Mason sent back, “Is this a prank?”

“This phone has insufficient funds to send messages.”


Realizing that this was an automatic message, Mason turned off his phone.


Thirty minutes passed.

His parents were not home yet.

One hour passed.

Not yet.

Two hours passed.

Nothing.

Suddenly, there was a knock on the door.

Mason opened the door, and a policeman stood there.

“Son, your parents died in a car crash. We are on the phone with Child Services right now.”


Mason was sent to an orphanage. In the years that passed, the fights continued at school.

When he was 18, Mason was convicted of assault and murder, and he was sent to prison for 20 years.

When he got out of prison, he was homeless and living on the streets with nothing but the clothes on his back.
One day, a man in all-black attire came up to him.

“Hey, do you want my phone? It only has a couple of minutes left, but you look like you need it more than I do.”
Mason replied, “Yes sir! Thank you so much!”


The man gave a curt nod and walked off.

Mason opened up messages, punched in the number on the keypad, and typed in a message.

“Mason, I assume this is your current number, 202-555-0189. Please, I need you to listen to me.”

 

Talent Show Drama

“Okay, I’m ready if you guys are,” I said, handing the girl holding a flute my talent show sign-up sheet. “Here. Pass it on when you’re done.”

The girl pushed her hair behind her ear and smiled.

“Hey, are you practicing, too?” she asked. “Well, as soon as a few more band members come, we’re good. Sorry to bother you.”

“Bother?” I repeated. “Excuse me, aren’t you participating in the talent show?”

“Yes. Why? Are you not?” she asked.

“No. I mean, I am in the talent show. Are you playing the flute? My band will rock with a lovely, soft blow.”

“Your band?” She cocked her head to the side. “You’re joining? What’s your name?”

“Mary.”

“Strange. Are you new? I didn’t see your name on my sign-up sheet. Oh, wait, I didn’t give it to you yet!” She handed me her sign-up sheet.

“Aren’t you joining my band?” I asked.

She laughed.

“No,” she replied. “I’m part of Splashing Tale Wonders, not your band. What’s your band name?”

“I haven’t chosen one yet . . .”

Soon, three band players rushed in, and everyone filed out of the room. I glanced at the clock. 4:08. 4:13. 4:15. I pulled out my phone as it chimed.

 

Sasha: Mary, are you putting a band together for the talent show?

Mary: Yes. Why?

Sasha: I really want that free scholarship prize. If I’m in your band, will you help me get it?

 

My heart sank. She only wanted to come into my dorky band for a scholarship? So not happening.

 

Mary: I mean, no, I’m not. I changed my mind. I have too much schoolwork, homework, and work. Too many classes too.

Sasha: You’re the best dancer & singer in the school. It wouldn’t hurt to be in my band, then, right? Come on, aren’t you a true friend?

Mary: Sorry.

 

When the school bell rang, I rushed outside, shouldering my backpack. Violet walked up to me.

“Mary, are you still entering the talent show?” she asked. “You’re so talented, and I really want to be in the talent show with you. Please? I bet John would be in it too.”

“You want to be in my band?” I asked, my eyes growing wide. “No way! Really? You’re going to ask John? Isn’t he the most talented drum player in the school? No way he’d want to hang out dorkily with me!”

Violet shrugged.

“He said he’s dying to rock in any band that’s entering the talent show!” she exclaimed, giving me jazz hands.

“Sure, I’ll come back in,” I agreed. “What should we call ourselves? Oh, I’ve got one! Break-Dancing Bookworms! It sounds so cute, right?”

“I love it!” Violet yelled, giving me a high five. “I bet I could get a few other friends to join, if it’s okay with you.”

“Sure, we can practice in the band room tomorrow during all lunch recesses for two weeks!”

 

***

My mom, when I got home, said, “Mary, darling, your aunt, Sienna, is getting married in a week! Maybe you could skip lunch on Thursday, next week, to come? Your lunch is three hours, anyways, and the wedding will only take two.”

“Thursday?” I asked. “Like, during next week? One week before the talent show?”

“Yes. Why?”

“Well, Violet and John and I and some other friends are starting a band for the talent show,” I explained. “We’re practicing every day from tomorrow, including Thursday, during lunch recess.”
“You have to go, even if you lead the band.”

The next day, Violet got Chloe and Zoey, her best friends, to join. John got Jessica, a girl crushing on him, to join.

“Violet, me, Chloe, Zoey, John, and Jessica!” I cheered. “Wait, we need at least two more boys!”

“Well, I know someone who’s an excellent bass guitar player and a good violin player. Can they join? Of course they’re boys,” John said.

“Sure,” I responded. “Can you ask them to come to our band practice today? Tell them we’re Break-Dancing Bookworms.”

During lunch, Sasha marched over to my lunch table angrily.

“I thought you weren’t putting together a band,” she said. “Mia, one of my friends who’s just joining your band, told me that Violet, Marcus, Tim, and Sam are just joining your band, too. Why did you lie?”

“W-w-well, Sasha, I thought about it at the last minute,” I stammered. “I mean, Violet asked me if I was still putting together a band because she wanted to hang out with me. I have a really cute idea for Break-Dancing Bookworms! We’re going to write a song about books and libraries! We’re going to wear fuzzy, purple outfits and carry books! I think Mia and Sam could be in my band.”
“I already talked them out of your band,” she snapped. “Good luck. I’m putting together a dance group. We’re dancing to “It Ain’t Me.” Hmm . . . my group is going to be called . . . Dance Of The Death.”

I scrunched up my nose. “You mean, dances that dead people do?” I asked. “No one would ever join.”

“Fine. Sashie’s Dancies!” Sasha replied. “It rhymes.”

I told my band about the wedding, and they understood.

Finally, two weeks later, the day of the talent show on Saturday came. I was a nervous wreck, and my friends and I were sweating bullets. We reviewed our song during the talent show warm-ups.

 

Library is a wonderful thing,

l-l-l-library, l-l-l-library.

Books ’n’ , books ’n’, books ’n’ library.

Reading helps your brain

understand more things.

It comes all to reading, all to reading, reading is the free-time fill-up.

Get funny books, read all day

Nothing, not even games can get in the way

of books.

Books, books, books ’n’ books.

Wonderful reading, never regret

reading all day, morning to night.

It’s fun, get learning, never ever think you’re wrong.

Books, books, books ’n’ books.

Out of the world, yeah, out of the world, yeah

we could read forever, yeah.

Why regret reading, why regret reading, that’s the reason

you’re smart.

Why are you you, yeah, why are you you, yeah

maybe soon you’ll be in a book.

Get famous, happy, all comes to why your brains work

and reading just did all the work . . . ’cause of books.

Books are such a wonderful thing.

 

I smiled. “Perfect! What do you guys think?”

“Awesome!” Tim said happily, strumming his bass guitar. “You know what? I think we do stand a chance to win.”

“Sashie’s Dancies are so lame!” Frank, Sam’s replacement, added. He was playing the regular guitar.

Chloe and Zoey were dancers and singers, and Violet was on the keyboard. I was a dancer and singer, too.

We were first up.

“Now, a band made up of Chloe, Zoey, Mary, Violet, John, Frank, Tim, and Jessica . . .  BREAK-DANCING BOOKWORMS!!!”

My band and I took our places and sang the song again.

 

Library is a wonderful thing,

l-l-l-library, l-l-l-library.

Books ’n’ , books ’n’, books ’n’ library.

Reading helps your brain

understand more things…

 

“That was awesome, guys! Please, step off the stage, and Sashie’s Dances are next. Over.”

Finally, it was over.

“Do you guys think we won?” I asked. “Sasha’s group was super good.”

“And the winner is . . . Sashie’s Dancies! Losers, report to the gym.”

“I knew it!” I said sadly. “We were going to lose.”

Not so quick! My group got second place, and our very own TV channel! Sasha’s group only got a TV news section, but I got that too.

 

The Wrong Door

Original

I was laying on a bed, in a room, not knowing where I was, or even who I was. The room was a bright lime color, just the kind that could burn your eyes out. Luckily my eyesight was not quite recovered from my unconsciousness yet, so my eyes did not burn out. The room was very tall, with a chandelier that had sharp, metal points on the end and crystal-like shapes made of glass hanging higher on the chandelier. The floor was cold stone, and it was polished and reflective. In the reflection, I could see that there were some strings on my head. Oh no! They were stitches.

I was sore, especially my head, and the soreness was radiating from my forehead, where the stitches were. On the wall, there were three doors. One said, Locks from the outside. Another said, Locks from the inside. The last one said, The key. There was one more thing I could see from my vantage point: some small, printed words. They were so easy to see because they were dark red in stark contrast to the lime ceiling. They said, Test Room: Prototype 1 for scientific use only!

 

Original

I could not have dreamt up something as crazy as this. I was being tested, and I was the first recipient of this experiment. I was being tested, apparently, on my puzzling skills. Now I needed to solve the puzzle.

To look at the first two doors, I needed to confirm which side was outside, and which side was inside. I opened the outside door, and suddenly, crash! A metal sheet slid down and blocked me from exiting the door. The jarring sound terrified me, and I jumped a foot in the air. It made my stitches hurt. There were clear, black words on the white wall that said, You Failed. There was a vent on the right wall. There was also a machine on the floor. I picked it up. There was only one button on the machine. I pressed it.

 

Original

First, I tried banging on the metal wall. It just made an interesting sound. That was no use. There was also a vent in the right wall. I guess I had no choice but to enter the vent and test my luck. I could hear voices coming through the vent, but I could not understand the words; they were too far away. I kicked apart the weak metal bars and crawled through. I was just small enough to fit. If I had not been put in that cell for about a week, I wouldn’t have fit…

Wow! How did I remember! My memory was accompanied with a jab of pain in my forehead. I think my memory may be returning. As I crawled further into the vent, I could make out the voices now.

The first one, a screechy, high-pitched intonation said, “The cameras have had a small malfunction. They should be up and running in moments.”

Another, a very deep rumble, said, “If we lose subject one, the experiment will be ruined! How would we explain that to the government!”

That meant that the voices, and the people attached to them, did not see me escape.

Suddenly, I was feeling tired. It must’ve been the aftereffect of some drug that they used to put me to sleep during the surgery. I decided to take a little nap.

 

The Second One

Somehow, the machine with the button had teleported me into the room where I woke up. It was all the same, except for the facts that:

1) The metal sheet had not slid down.

2) There was no bed.

3) There was an open door behind me.

I heard footsteps coming from the doorway that belonged to the open door. I saw a bed on wheels slowly rolling in, around the corner, and soon, the people pushing it followed. I needed to think faster and act quicker. I slipped down under the bed, which was still turning the corner, and grabbed onto a plank underneath the bed. I clung onto the board, and the bed slid into place with a creak that made me wince. The people rolling the bed finally left the room and closed the door.

After the door was closed, it looked exactly like the wall. I knew to wait patiently under the bed, because I did not know when my past self would wake up. Even I knew enough about the space-time continuum to know that it would not be a good idea to meet my past self, or change any of his actions, or else he might not press the button, and my future self, me, would exist, but not exist, and there would be a paradox. The kind that could end the world.

So, I waited patiently until I heard stirring from above. I watched with slight amusement as my past self realized how he had stitches. I waited for the metal to clang down, and then finally, with sore muscles, slipped out from underneath the bed.

 

Original

When I woke up, I felt much less sore and better overall. I must have slept for a short time, because I could still hear the people talking about the camera malfunction. I could hear the voices switching to a different conversation.

The deep voice said,  “Have you seen the time machine? How many times will you have to learn! Don’t lose the time machine!”

So that was a time machine! That time machine was not supposed to be there. It wasn’t part of the puzzle! I continued to crawl in the vents like the good old days, when I robbed banks all the time… robbing a bank! How could I ever do something like this!

Oh, I must have been a criminal before! That is why they were using me as a test subject, because I am an expendable human. Someone that anyone would be happy to get rid of. After I got out, I would need to convince the public that I was not a criminal anymore. If I ever got out of here.

I needed to go on, further through the vent. I could just hear the people from the room leaving, and one of them muttering, “Lunch break.”

I entered the room. Inside were two computers and two desks, each with three giant drawers underneath them, probably big enough to fit a person inside. I found a pair of scissors that could be used as a weapon and some rope inside one of the giant drawers. I also put on a lab coat I found on top of a chair. I waited, ready to ambush the lab workers, and get a clue of what exactly was happening.

 

The Second One

Now that I knew where the door was, I could exit. It took a long time to pry open the door because the crack was miniscule.

I eventually got the door open, and then I entered the hallway. There were three doors: one in front, one to the left, and one to the right. I opened the door on the right, because right is right, and peeked around the corner. I saw an empty hallway and a single door at the end of it. I quickly closed the door, so that no one would be suspicious, and I started towards the door at the end of the hallway. As I got closer, I could read the label above the door. It said, Invention Room, and below it, on a post-it, Ed, please do not lose any inventions again. I entered the room, and it was a sterile, clean, white color. Just like the color of the lobby of my old terrorist base… Ahhhh! I actually screamed with this one. I am a low-born, filthy rat! How could I have been so evil! I can never have a life again! I think even my family hates me, whoever they are. At least I liked the smell of it.

I was looking up at the chandeliers when I stepped on something round, and it pushed down when my foot went down. After I stepped on it, it slipped into a hole in the floor, from which I could just make out the words on the white wall, You Failed. I just created myself.

 

The Third One

I popped up right when I saw a person in a white coat leaving the room, and I saw a machine still whirring. It was labelled, Food Machine. I saw a white coat on a chair, and a thought occurred to me. I could dress up as a lab worker and get into the project’s deepest and darkest secrets. I could attack them and ask them to tell me what was happening.

I quickly got the lab coat on and followed the other worker, trying to look very inconspicuous and unintelligent.

 

Original

I waited for about five minutes in my position, behind the door, before I heard two pairs of footsteps in the hallway. I waited until both of them had entered the door, and then I threatened them with my scissors, and I asked one of them, who did not look very intelligent, to get into the cabinet already; he would not have any useful information. I asked the other one what was happening and why was I here.

He said, “You were a terrorist, and you disguised yourself as a government agent, and you asked us to conduct this experiment to find people who were smart, and fit to be recruits to the army. That is what you told us. Our agents revealed that you were a terrorist trying to get recruits for your terrorist group, qwertyuiop, and then we conducted the experiment on you, as a punishment.”

This was all very heavy for me. I did not want to be a terrorist, I don’t even like to talk about those things. Note the use of the word “thing.” I tied him up and put him in the drawer, and I left the room.

 

The Second One

I saw another door at the end of the room. I did not want to go back because they might have seen the machine slip into the room, and they might come here to check it out. Since the hall I came out of looked like a main hallway, I thought I should exit through the other door, since the lab people might come through the door leading to the main hallway. I opened the door slightly, and there were lab workers everywhere. It was like a beehive but with giant, white bees. It was the dreaded, despised cafeteria. At the other end of the cafeteria, there was a door with blue peeking out from the edges. There was an exit sign above it, so it was definitely an exit!

I tried to hear some of the other conversations. I heard, “I’ve always wanted to fly to Zimbabwe.” “Me too!” and, “I wonder how Prototype 1 is faring in the testing. Hopefully not too well. I heard he failed in the first room,” and, “I wish that Ed hadn’t lost the Ice Cream Chip. The machine cannot make ice cream without that computer chip.”

I poked my head farther into the door and looked to the left, and there, peeking out of a locker door, was a computer chip, in a Ziploc™ bag, labeled Ice Cream Chip. An idea was starting to form in my head. I reached out a quick hand and snatched the chip from the locker. I went over to the food machine and put in the chip. First, I ordered a hamburger, a milkshake, and some ice cream. I don’t usually eat like that, but I needed carbs; I was starving and weak from hunger.

After about five minutes, about the time it took me to inhale my food, I called out to the cafeteria, “The ice cream machine is working!”

Then I hid behind the door, waiting for my intended effect. It definitely worked. A stampede of lab workers came flooding out of the cafeteria.

 

The Third One

The other lab worker in the closet had gotten a letter opener from the cabinet floor, and he was cutting apart the ropes on my arms. After he cut the ropes on my arm, I took off the duct tape on my mouth and cut the ropes around my legs. I put my arms on the back of the drawer, and my legs on the front, pushed, and the door was open.

Thankfully, the lab worker who had ambushed me was gone. I held the letter opener like a weapon and rounded the corner. I was tracking the attacker, and it looked like he had forgotten his way or something, because he was uncertainly turning corners and doubling back on himself. I was very happy that there were no lab workers in the hallways; I think they might have still been eating lunch. When he passed an exit sign, it caught his eye, and he suddenly started running towards the exit.

It just dawned on me that I wanted to get revenge on the person who had locked me in a closet. But how? If he reached the exit, I could not do anything because there would be witnesses. How would I do this?

 

The Second One

I exited and waited to hear the screaming from all the people gathered around the building, probably waiting for the result of my experiment. I did.

“Subject 1 has escaped!” and, “Help!”

“Wait! Wait! Just listen for one second!” The screaming stopped, and I started talking. I had planned a speech while I was eating my delicious food, and it was pretty good for having been written while I ate a whole three pounds of food.

I started, “I ate a hamburger five minutes ago, and — ”

Poof.

I disappeared, and all I saw was blackness, and then the world was gone.

 

The Third One

I pursued the man, and I pushed him through a door. I did not pause to look at the label above the door. It said, Bottomless Pit, with a bottom.

 

Original

I turned around to see who had pushed me, and to my surprise, it was me. I screamed and fell down, and after a few seconds, I hit the ground, and died in the darkness.

 

The Third One

My own scream was the last sound I heard until I disappeared into nothingness.

 

The Boy With Future Senses

Once upon a time, there was a little boy named Jake with future senses, although he no had clue he had them. One day, he had dream about a video game. In the dream, he was playing a video game with three other people, and he was playing as some kind of hero with a jetpack and a sword. The second person was huge; he had a huge hammer with a huge shield. The third person was a guy with a machine gun and grenades. Jake thought it was cool, but it wasn’t possible to make the game because he was only eight years old, so he forgot about it.

Ten years later, Jake had to choose a profession because he was going to college. Then he had a tingly feeling that he knew what to do. He remembered that when he was eight, he had a dream about a videogame, but he couldn’t make it because he was too little at the time. So he chose his major, programing video games! Although it was hard, he studied and studied.  He woke up at 6:00 AM and worked until 7:00 PM five times a week. On the weekends, he played video games to get the feeling of how to program good video games. Classes were hard, but he did great. Jake was the teacher’s pet and got straight A+s.

His roommate wasn’t nice to him because he was smart and his roommate was dumb. He pranked Jake by covering his bed with bugs, locking him outside, hiding his food, and even making him pay the rent! These tricks never worked though, because Jake saw them in the future, but they were still hard to deal with.

After a few semesters, he got so good that he could make a video game with his eyes closed. When Jake was done with college, he bought his own place to live and program video games. His two best friends, Gideon and Beni, also lived with him because they were amazing at programming video games. They had scholarships for programming video games, and they worked with him too.

They started working on the game from Jake’s dream, and it was hard as hell. It took five years to make the game, but those years were great. When they were done with the game, they named it War And Destruction. There were 79 characters. One turned invisible, one could heal people and revive the dead, one was a ninja throwing axes and a sword, one could control animals, and so on. Also, the characters in his dream were also in the game. The game had different modes; Survival, Arcade, Custom, 6 vs 6, 1 vs 1, and Domination. Survival is where you have to fight animals and try to survive for the longest time. Arcade is mini games, Custom is where you can create your own game. Domination is capture-the-flag.

They sold their game to Zekrome, and so many people bought the game that it became the most popular game in the world, and everyone was talking about it. They made millions, and they were also on the news.

A news reporter asked them, ”How did you get the idea to make this game?”

Jake said, “Nothing special,” and they lived happily ever after.

 

                                                                  The End

 

The Adventure of Princess Awesome!!!

Princess Awesome was in her castle when she heard Silverback, the King’s speaker, outside in the courtyard.

He yelled, “There is a 100 dollar bill.”

No one had ever had a 100 dollar bill before. The richest person had 99 dollars.

Silverback said, “It could be found in another land called THE TOWN OF AWESOME.” Then he said suspiciously, “I definitely don’t have it.”

Suddenly an arrow flew from a bow and killed him. Someone killed Silverback because they thought he had the $100 bill. People came rushing towards Silverback, searching his coat. Princess Awesome thought, Greedy people, killed a man and now searching him. Something urged her to set off on her adventure. She had never done this before.

On his tombstone it said, “Born 1832. Killed 1855. Born in the town of Penekise.” The next day, a man named Lame Person captured the man who had killed Silverback. His name was Sank Wan. He was only the man who looked like the man who killed Silverback! He disappeared after he was captured, and no one really cared.

Then a mighty eagle swept across the castle. The great eagle was the symbol of the castle. This meant that good luck would happen to those in need. The castle’s name was AWESOME. Princess Awesome knew Silverback was lying about the hundred dollar bill being in the town of Awesome. He wanted to keep the money for himself.

She set off on her adventure. She got a boat and sailed to the island named Gummies. There were a million islands, and she guessed that this was the one. The island had only one tree, and she thought she saw a box. Suddenly, she heard a box fall behind her, and she jumped in horror. She saw three chests. She saw a hundred dollar bill inside one of the chests, then another. There were two of them. She grabbed them and left. She was filled with joy and excitement, but then her boat went loose and sailed by itself.

She was so nervous that she was running out of options. So she swam home. She was miserable and worried that the hundred dollar bills would get soaked. It took her a couple days to get home, and she felt relieved that the money was dry.

When she was in her town, she showed it to everyone and gave it to charity. The charity bought tacos for everyone. All the hungry people, who acted like they hadn’t eaten in 70 days, loved tacos. She felt so good that she partied and ate a taco.

 

THE END

 

Lazy Saturday

The day my mom sued the school was AWESOME! Well, for me, awesome, but for her, “terrible.” I mean it’s not like I meant to tick the bully off so much that he headbutted me! But anywho, I haven’t been to school since because my dad is who-knows-where (my mom won’t tell me a single fact about him) and my mom is a president of a perfume company, so that means I’m left alone at home 24/7 and 365 days a year.

You’re probably thinking, Woah!! Awesome! But no. I would DIE just to go to school because, one day, I saw my old friend, and I asked what were they learning at school, and they said some math problem I didn’t know. My friend asked if I knew. I stuttered. I actually didn’t know. I dashed down the street, sad and left behind that I wasn’t as smart as them.

But it’s okay. Being home alone is awesome because I get to watch TV, eat oreos, and play on my 3DS. Which is a kid HEAVEN!!! Oh, and where are my manners? I’m Flynn Watters, a nine-year-old kid born on March 3rd, 2008.

***

“Flynn! Bye, honey, I’m leaving!” says my mom.

“Yeah. Bye, Mom!” I say.

I’ll note this to you: Mom says bye, fun comes by. So when she shuts the door, what I do is: go upstairs, get my 3DS, come back down, get oreos from the cupboard, sit on the couch, get a blanket, and then turn on Netflix!

“Oh. My. Gosh!! Yes!! Yessss! Wait. NO. Nooooo!!!” I shout.

Sorry, just anime excitement, but yeah that’s how I spend my days of the year. Oh! And obviously I nap! But sometimes, I go out. I mean, just to see all the other houses in Haystack Court which, by the way, is my small, little neighborhood where all the houses make a semi-circle. It’s cute, and my life is cute and calm, but that all changed.

***

Okay, so my mom came home one night, and I was eating a microwaved cup of noodles when she walked in.

“Mind if I talk to you?” said Mom.

“Um. it’s a free country, so yes,” I said, rolling my eyes.

“Okay, so I noticed you’ve been a little droopy and sad. Why?” Mom said.

Ohhh lordd.

“Umm?” I said, playing dumb.

“Is it because you don’t go outside much?”

Okay, BIG decision. I’d either admit it, because I want to go to school, or lie and agree that I don’t get outside much. I lied.

“Yeah, I just want to go outside,” I said.

“Okay. So this Saturday, I’ll take you to the beach,” Mom said, smiling.

That was easy.

***

OH MY GOSH! My mom was GIDDY!! She jumped around, cleaned, and got the stuff in the car.

“Ready?” said my mom, poking her head through the screen door.

“YES!!! Oh my gosh, you asked me that, like, 30 times!!!” I said.

My mom shut the door. I got a towel and walked to the car. I hopped in, wondering if this was a good idea after all. The drive was LONG! But, finally we were here. I stepped out of the car and dashed to the ocean.

Hello, fish!!” I said, screaming as I jumped in the water.

I played in the water for an hour or two. Then mom called me and said that we were going to the boardwalk. We got cotton candy and hotdogs and everything was swell until… we got back to the beach.

I was playing in the sand, and I saw my mom peeking looks at a man with a woman. It was strange because it looked like the two people were being flirty. And get this! The man went down on his knees and PROPOSED!!! But that’s not the strangest part: My mom walked over to the people and interrupted the guy, who was proposing, and scolded him!!! And the guy called me over. Mom’s face said stay back because this wouldn’t go good. But I went over anyway.

“Heyyyy, Flynn!” He said.

“Um, do I know you?” I said.

Look, I know he’s nice, but he’s a stranger!

“Flynn, he’s your dad,” said my mom.

I fainted into a big, sandy mess.

***

Ow, my life hurts. A LOT!

Okay, you’re probably thinking, WHAT?! Okay, I’ll explain.

It turned out my dad and my mom divorced right after I was born. I was left at home with a nanny, named Juidel, who was from the Philippines. But then, one day, Mom sat me down and taught me how to stay at home alone because Juidel left for the Philippines. And for, like, two years after school, I would come home and just be home alone. But that changed when I ticked off that bully.

And now I’m sitting at the dining room table with my mom, my dad, and my dad’s girlfriend/wife (she said yes! And he went to Jared) Brenda.

“Why would you divorce?!” shouted my mom.

“WELL, you became a total different woman!!!” shouted my dad.

And it went on like that for 20 minutes. And get this! Throughout the whole thing, Brenda was staring into space!!!

But soon, things got a little language-y because my mom said some words NOT child approved.

“Flynn, go upstairs. Oh, and your dad asked if you want to help them move their stuff to their new house,” said my mom.

“Sure,” I said.

***

Today was hot, and I walked down the street with my dad, holding big, brown boxes.

“Ey, champ, wanna get ice cream?” said my dad, like he was in those ‘grain berry’ ads.

“Sure,” I said, keeping my cool.

So we stopped in front of the deli. I picked out a king cone, and my dad got an ice pop. We sat on a bench and ate in silence.

“Well, we better hurry. Your mom’s gonna overreact if we’re late,” said my dad.

Oh, I forgot to tell you my dad is moving into Haystack Court. I KNOW!!! He probably did that just to annoy Mom or because the houses in Haystack Court are RICH!!!

After that, we walked home, and I saw my dad’s new house. He said I could move my stuff in to make my own room.

Then I said bye to Dad and Brenda, who was on snapchat. I walked into my house, and my mom practically lunged at me.

“Honey!!! Guess what!” said my mom.

“Umm, you bought your Fitness4U treadmill?” I asked sarcastically.

“NO. I found this flyer in the main desk, and it’s a history report contest! And the main prize is an application to Berkman Elementary!!!” said my mom.

Ohh my goshhh!” I screamed.

“I know! So I entered you!” said my mom.

“Okay, but what history thing should I do?” I said.

“Well, I made you do World War I,” said my mom.

I rolled my eyes. That’s gonna be EASY!

***

After a month of researching, it was time for the report. I was in the car, driving to the community center, where the event is happening.

“OOH! We’re here!” said my mom.

We walked inside, and a lady gave me a number slip. I was number six. A lot of the reports were good, but now, it was my time. I’m not gonna say my report, but it went like this…

“Blah, blah, drone, drone, gabble, gabble.”

I know! So detailed! Ohhh lord. The lady was announcing the runner ups.

“In third place… Lisa McGuckin! Here is your coupon to Ben and Jerry’s!” said the announcer.

“And in 2nd place… Tom Baloush! Here is your master pass to the Museum of Natural History!!” she said.

“And in 1st place… the kid who gets the application to Berkman is… Flynn Watters!!” she said.

OHMYGOSH! I WON! I WON!!! I stepped up and took the paper.

After the event, my mom hugged me, and my dad congratulated me, and Brenda was on Twitter. Goodbye, lazy Saturdays! Hello, Busy mondays!

 

The End

 

The Clown Meets the Mouse

Once there was a clown named Clown. Clown dug a hole in the park because he was hoping to find a mouse for the circus. He needed the mouse for a magic trick he wanted to do.

Luckily for Clown, he found a mouse when he dug the hole. The mouse was a normal, gray mouse named Mouse. Mouse standed still and didn’t run away. He was happy! He wanted to be famous.

Clown brought Mouse to the circus, but once he got there the mouse was dead. Mouse got sick because the cage was covered for the whole trip and he couldn’t breathe. The Clown’s water bottle also fell over and flooded one inch of the cage. Clown shaked his fists and he scrunched his eyebrows. Then, he had two tears, one from each eye.

Clown was also mad because he lost money. Since the mouse died before Clown got to the circus, now he couldn’t do his magic trick where he made the mouse disappear. This made Clown sad. Clown still did his performance, but he gave up on his mouse trick. He flipped in the air and landed on his feet. He also got a volunteer and made them disappear.

After his show, Clown went back to the park and gave Mouse’s body back to the mouse family. He learned not to cover the cage and also learned never to put the water bottle in the trunk.

 

The Bully Story

Catherine’s Perspective

“NO, Eddie!” I scream loudly.

I mean, it wasn’t that loud, but I mean, like, it was still pretty loud.

“Okay?”

He is SO annoying. Eddie growls at me but does not say a word.

I am Catherine Rose Henry, and my twin brother is Eddie Marc Henry. We have a game, a really cool game.

Some say it is bullying, but bullying is when you, like, push and shove, and become physical, so they are, like, totally, wrong. Anyways, so first, you have to choose a dumbbell, like Opal or Flora or Ned, or someone like them. Next, you have to find them. The best spot is the old tree by Eagle Street.

Finally, as they pass by, you jump out and make them scream their pants off. Then, you block them, so that they don’t run away. Now, here comes the best part! You start yelling things that are strange or different about them.

So anyway, today, we find John Benson. He loses in practically everything. Even soccer tryouts. (He didn’t get on the team of course.)

“Hello, John,” says Eddie, trying to make John stop to talk.

“Uh, hi,” he says, nervously. (He knows our game.)

“What’s up, loser?” I say, laughing.

  “I am not a loser!” He says, bursting into tears.   

“Bye, cry baby!” says Eddie, smirking.

“See you at school.” I snicker.

The thing is: John does not actually like school. These days, he’ll race to school and back. I am not sure why.

The rest of the way to school, Eddie and I talk about lunchtime plans. We plan to find Bob Tyler. Most people think of him as a soccer star captain for the grade, but we think of him as a maggot with a mop head because of his floppy, red hair.

By the time we get to school, the classroom is almost full.  Except, the teacher has gone to get something, so we have some fun with Lena. Lena is really popular. She has a great, great-aunt, named Rosy. She often says that Rosy is her best friend and that, if anyone dares to hurt her, Rosy would save her. But a few days earlier, Rosy had died of old age.

So, she is a victim in our game. We walk over to her and she moves out of our way, knocking her open backpack off her chair.  Everything spills out of it, and then, something catches my eye: a book. In fancy letters, it spells, “My Diary”.

Slowly, I pick it up, hold it in the air, and shout, “Wittle Wena’s got a diawy! I wonder what wittle Wena wote?”

There is a long, deafening silence, and then suddenly Lena shouts, “Give that back!  It’s mine!” She continues to shriek. Her shrieks are like knives that she lashes at us, like a shark trying to eat a fish out of his reach.

“Come and get it if you want it,” I laugh. Lena starts to jump up to get the diary but doesn’t succeed.

“No more Aunt Wosy to save you,” I say. Suddenly, the teacher, Ms. Cally, walks into the classroom.  

“Catherine, put Lena’s diary down,” she says, sternly. “Opal, take Lena to the nurse.” The backpack had fallen on Lena’s toe, and her toe was bleeding.  

Ms. Cally goes to her desk, takes a post it note, scribbles something quickly, and hands it to me and Eddie.

“Give this to your mother as soon as you get home, and don’t look at it.”  

When we get home, we throw our backpacks on the floor and rush upstairs. Mom, however, looks through our bags to see if we have homework, but instead, she finds the note.  

“Catherine! Eddie!” She shouts.

“Yeah, Mom?” I say, trying to act natural.

“You come down here this instant and sit down,” she clenches her teeth. 

When we are seated, Mom says, “Do you have any idea what this is about?” She holds up the crumpled note that Ms. Cally had written.  

“No,” Eddie and I say in unison, which isn’t true.

“Then read it, and go to your room,” she shouts. “You should be ashamed of yourselves!”

I go to my room and flop on my bed. When you first walk into my room, the dresser is to the right, and my bed is to the left. I have a twin bed, which I used to think I had because I was a twin. My bedroom is painted white, but I sometimes pick at the paint, so it is a little dirty. My floor is kinda messy ‘cause cleaning up is definitely not my thing. I just lay there for quite a few minutes thinking. Then, suddenly, I ask myself: when did this game start? So, I think back to when it started. It was after my parents’ divorce.

***

Here’s the story…

How the game started:

We were in the kitchen.

“Where’s Daddy?” I had asked.

“Gone.” Mom had said, as if it was obvious.  

“Where?” Eddie and I had wailed.  

“Look, we filed for a divorce last night. He moved out, and I don’t know where he is!” She had shouted in a no-questions tone.

But we hadn’t cared about questions. We just raced upstairs to our closet, in our room, that had three sliding doors. One set in my room, one in Eddie’s room, one next door, and one to connect them in the middle. So, Eddie and I had shut ourselves in our closets (with blankets), and we opened the middle doors and cried.

While crying, we had realized something. We had realized that it’s not okay to be different. So, we decided that we had to make everybody seem more different than we were. Then, we decided to make up: OUR GAME.

***

I am still thinking about it when I hear Mom calling us for dinner. By the time we finish dinner, I completely recover from my flashback, and am back to my normal self. But when bedtime comes, I can’t sleep. I don’t know what has come over me.

A few days later, Ms. Cally announces that the fifth grade play is coming up. A great time for our game, I think, and I suspect Eddie would think that too.  

“What’s the story?” Someone calls out.

“Please don’t call out, Robert,” Ms. Cally says.

“It’s Rob, please,” he reminds her.

“So,” Ms. Cally continues. “The whole fifth grade will be doin–” She says, but she is interrupted by Rob again.

“What’s the story?” Rob repeats, more impatiently.

“Robert, please don’t call out,” Ms. Cally reminds him, in a slightly sharper tone.

“It’s Rob, okay?” Rob says.

“Anyways,” Ms. Cally says, ignoring Rob. “As I was saying, the whole fifth grade will be doing it together. For that, we must work together as a grade, okay?”

“Yes, Ms. Cally,” choruses the whole class (except Rob, of course).

“But,” says Rob, “WHAT’S THE STORY??!!”

“Rob!” Ms. Cally shouts angrily. “I’m going to call your mother! Go and sit in the time-out chair!” Sulkily, Rob stomps towards the awful, the dreaded, time-out chair.

Take that, Rob! I think. You deserve it.

Ms. Cally goes on about the play, but I sort of tune it out.

Rob must’ve done the same, because Ms. Cally shouts, “Rob, you just missed the story!”

“What is it?!” Rob says, annoyed with himself for tuning out.

Ms. Cally says, “It is about a mean man, named Tom, and a nice man, named Ned, and they both want to be king, so they split the land, and whomever wants to be on the bad guy’s side stays there, unless they are permanently moving forever, and the same with the good guy. Well, it started out pretty evenly, but then, gradually, people started moving to the good guy’s side, until no one was on the bad guy’s side, and that’s when the bad guy gave up.”

Rob glances at me and then says, “Okay.”

“Excuse me, Ms. Cally?” Opal says.

“Yes, sweetheart?” Ms. Cally answers, glad to have a new topic.

“May I use the bathroom?” She asks. Ms. Cally nods.

“Me too?” I ask.

“Yes, yes,” sighs Ms. Cally. I zoom to the girl’s bathroom. Opal isn’t there yet because she’s pretty slow, but when she comes in, the fun begins. I shove her against the blue tiled wall.

“P-p-please s-s-stop!” Opal cries, trembling. “I-I f-fell on th-that a-arm y-yesterday,” she whispers, still trembling. “C-can y-you l-loosen y-your grip?”

“NO,” I say through clenched teeth. Opal’s legs are trembling. Then, I remember: Opal still has to use the bathroom. Boy, is this going to be fun.

“P-p-please,” Opal manages to force out, through my grip. Suddenly, I have the most amazing idea. If you laugh while trying to wait for the bathroom, it’s really hard to hold it. I am going to make Opal laugh.

“Hey Opal, ya wanna hear a joke?”

“S-sure,” she says, desperately.

“Knock, Knock.”

“Who’s there?”

“Orange.” I tighten my grip on Opal’s legs, so that she can’t run away.

“Orange, who?” She asks, and we go on from there with the orange joke.

When I am finished, Opal begins to giggle. All of a sudden, I feel a warm, wet liquid on the hand that is holding her pants. She wets her pants. I feel a leap of triumph within me as Opal looks like a tomato, flushing.

“Hey, Opal. I’m loving those pants!” I tease. Opal’s lip quivers.

Suddenly, she slips right out of my grasp and runs into the classroom. I run after her. As I take my seat again, I sneak a note to Eddie, saying that I made Opal wet her pants. He reads it and grins. Suddenly, Ms. Cally strides over to where Eddie is sitting and lifts the note out of Eddie’s reach. She reads it and eyes Opal.

“Opal, may I speak with you?” Ms. Cally says, leading Opal into the hall. I feel good.

 

Eddie’s Perspective

I think school is going well. I think. I hope. But, like, I need time to play Our Game, so, besides my MILLION TUTORS, I need to still have time for that. Mom says I fail in school, and I have learning issues. Catherine says that I care too much about how school is going and not enough about Our Game.

“Hey, Cath, a little help with my homework?”

“UGH, okay. So you kind of just long divide here, and then add it with the original number, and multiply it by thirteen, and then write the answer.”

“JUST?!” I cry, incredulously. “My goodness, why do they give us so much homework? And they make it SO complicated.”

“It’s as easy as pie, Eddie, come on.” Catherine say, sounding annoyed.

Finally, I am fed up with her telling me how stupid I am, so I decide to give her a piece of my mind.

Hey, Cath – the – new – teacher’s – pet / goody – two – shoes / smartest – kid – in – the – universe.”

I can see Catherine’s anger rising, uncontrollably, like a pitcher of hot water spilling.

Finally, we jump out of our seats, rolling on the ground, wrestling, like professional wrestlers. But, of course, I win, pinning her to the ground.

“Now, who’s the ‘Eddie – the – new – teacher’s – pet / goody – two – shoes / smartest – kid – in – the – universe?’” Catherine asks, squirming out of my hold.

I stare at Catherine as if she is the stupidest person.

“Really, Catherine, wrestling class?”

Before I know it, Catherine is upstairs. Well, I don’t waste any time following her upstairs. I know she is in her room, so I run into my room and through the double closet.

The rest is a blur.

The next thing I know, I am in a hospital bed and a stupid hospital gown.

Then, I am at home.

Mom says something through tears, and then, tells me that I had passed out.

Catherine and I aren’t in school because, for whatever reason, Catherine is still in the hospital, (Mom and Dad still haven’t been able to tell me without bursting into tears) and I am still woozy.

Suddenly, without warning, the phone rings.

“I’ll get it.” I lunge for the phone, but Dad gets it first, and Mom holds me back. Then, something that has never happened before happened: Mom starts trembling and clutching me, and Dad’s face becomes white and worried. They exchange worried looks before we all go running to the car. I have absolutely no idea what is going on. All I know is that it is nighttime, and we are in the car.

Before I know it, we are at my least favorite place. If you guessed school, you’re wrong. We are at the hospital.

A rush of understanding flows through me.

“What happened to Catherine?” I ask. I don’t get an answer.

“We’re here to see Catherine Rose Henry.” Dad informs the receptionist.

The receptionist takes one look at me and says, briskly, “How ald ayre ya?”

“Ten.” I say, honestly.

“Ya nat allawed upsais untail ya twailve.” She gives me a huge, fake grin. “Ya cayn staiy dayn here aynd rayd the fayshin maygazaines. Too bayd foyr ya.”

Mom and Dad exchange worried glances and give me a sympathetic look. Dad glares at the receptionist.

I sit down on the bench and flip through the newspaper to see if the sports section is in there. No sports section.

BORING!

Then, an unfamiliar voice says, “Eddie?” It is a kind voice.

“Huh?” I say, looking into the eyes of a doctor.

“I am Catherine’s doctor, Dr. Sellsnack. Apparently, it’s been difficult for them to tell you about your sister. As I have heard, a closet door was opened-”

“That was me.” I tell him before he says anything else.

“That’s okay, but anyways, back to Catherine. So, she was sitting in the closet, and the door hit her head. She was knocked unconscious, and she isn’t responding. We think she may have a concussion.”

Concussion. The word cuts under my skin like one of the sewing needles that my mom has in the tackle box, shoved in the back of the hall closet, from the two weeks that she was in the sewing club before she quit.

“Oh. It’s my fault.” I say.

The doctor pats me on the back and says, “That’s okay.” Then, he leaves.

Okay? Like that was true.

***

A few days later, old Catherine is back. I try to hide that I care.

Back to school. What the heck? I was actually doing okay staying home everyday. More than okay.

Catherine has this huge, bulky cast on her head. Her head is shaved completely.

Back at school, we play Our Game a few times.

The next morning, I awake to ominous, gray clouds that look like gray shirts on a clothesline. I know something bad will happen.

And it does. Well, it isn’t exactly bad, but it isn’t necessarily good either. It is just plain weird: Catherine doesn’t play Our Game. She did, in the morning, but not wholeheartedly. By the end of the day, she has completely stopped.

“What’s wrong with you?” I ask Catherine.

“What do you mean, what’s wrong with me?” she snaps.

“Well, you haven’t been playing Our Game this afternoon.”

“It isn’t your business what I do, and what I don’t do.” She replies.

Sheesh.

***

The next morning, Catherine and I walk to school separately, me stopping at the big, old tree by Eagle Street.

Later that morning, Ms. Cally announces who is in the fifth grade play. I’m not. I had tried out, knowing that I wouldn’t get in, but even so, when Catherine is called, I turn green with envy. I always wished that I had the talent that Catherine has.

Suddenly, I see Lena pass Opal a note. As Opal grabs the note with her small, grubby hand, I snatch the note away. On it, in Lena’s dainty handwriting, says:

Look at the big, white-head

Who is the ‘big, white-head’? And then it comes to me. Catherine.

I almost glare at them, but with an afterthought, I don’t.

They’re just big, fat bullies, is my first thought.

They’re copying Our Game, is my second thought.

How dare they make fun of Catherine? is my third thought.

Then, they start to come together.

If they’re copying Our Game, doesn’t that mean that Catherine and I are also big, fat bullies? Did people feel like, “How dare they make fun of _____(so and so)?”

I feel like thanking Lena.

***

That same day, I am walking home from school. Suddenly, I know what I have to do.

“I’m sorry.” I whisper to Catherine, almost in tears.

Catherine’s hard face softens, but then she says, “I’ve got rehearsal” and runs back to the school yelling, “Last one there is the rotten egg!” I follow, waving to Opal, Lena, Flora, John, and Ned, as we pass.

 

The Miracle

Once upon a time, a little unicorn was only one year old. She went to visit her grandfather. The little unicorn’s name was Lily. While she was with her grandfather, she was sleeping and her grandfather did a magic trick. Her grandfather said the magic words, “Alakazoo! Alakazoo! Make you bad for the magic!” And it happened.

On Lily’s second birthday, she ate some cupcakes made out of carrots and strawberries. After that, she went to test out her magic.

She went inside her magic tree house, and she said the magic words. Only one of the lights ran out of its electricity. It was still Lily’s birthday, so she was going to open her present from her great-great-grandfather. She opened it, and inside, there was a magic rose with a note on it.

The note said, “Every night, if you say something, the flower will do it.”

The next day, the magic trick Lily’s grandpa did did not work anymore. He forgot to say a word. He was supposed to say, “Alakazoo! Alakazoo! Make you bad for the magic and forever.”

During the night, Lily said, “I wish I was bad.” It worked because the rose had special hearing, but did not have ears. It heard by actually using its magic, and the rose was good and bad.

When it was the morning, her grandfather remembered that he forgot to say the words. While Lily was sleeping in her treehouse, her grandfather flew up to the treehouse and said it very quietly so Lily would not hear it. This time, he said “forever.” When Lily woke up again, it wasn’t even night. Lily said something to the magic rose, and during nighttime, it happened. It was kinda funny, because the note said it would only work at night.

So in the morning, Lily said “I wish, I wish that the spells my grandpa did would never work.” Lily had a memory that made her think her grandfather might be making spells every time she took a nap.

The rose did not do that because it was out of its magic. The note forgot to say, “If you use the rose too much, it will run out of magic.”

Lily only knew one trick. The rose only taught her to make unicorns good and bad, but she forgot how to do it.

So then Lily’s parents took her to a magic school. In magic school, she learned the perfect spell to make her grandfather stop doing those tricks. It was not really a good trick, but was a good trick for her because she wanted to make her grandpa stop. The trick said, “Make you go away until forever.”

The trick didn’t work because Lily was a kid.

***

When Lily was a grown up, she had kids and then her rose that she had when she was a kid had its magic again. Her kids all had the same birthday. The rose was for all of them. One of the kids’ names was Emily. The next kid’s name was Isabelle. The last kid’s name was Zoe. When it was their birthday, they finally got the rose.

After they got the rose, Lily’s grandpa was a little sad because he always wanted his granddaughter to not know magic tricks. That’s why he did the spell. After that, he had an idea. The idea was to do a trick on Lily’s kids. He knew it was the perfect time because they were all turning one, and it was almost nighttime. When unicorns are one, they don’t know any tricks. So, that’s why he thought it was a good time. He was actually in his house, and the girls were playing with their new friend.

The new friend’s name was Ellie. They met Ellie on her birthday. The mother of Ellie was Lily’s friend. When Ellie was playing with Lily’s kids, Lily’s grandpa did not use his voice to say the magic trick. He used the magic rose to do it.

Lily had given it to him after he asked, “May I please have the rose back so I can make a lovely rose in your bed?” But that was just a little lie.

The rose said with its magic, “Please please make the magic bad just for a day.” When the kids were playing a game called loops a loops hoops, they jumped over the hoops and spun. The kids had wings but did not know how to fly. Then, Lily’s grandpa sprinkled some of the magic all over the little girls — except for Ellie. While they were playing, all of the kids of Lily were spinning Ellie and they dropped her. The whole day, they kept dropping her. Then, when it was night, their great-great-grandpa came in the room.

When he came into the room, he put the magic rose into a cage. When it was daytime, the cage always went away. It went away in the daytime because the grandpa could go into the bedroom he made a spell. The spell was that the cage would not like the light so it would only come at night.

One day, it was Lily’s kid’s birthday. It was nighttime. When it was night time, Lily was not at the party because she was asleep. The door opened, so Lily woke up. She saw Grandpa Ricky. He was holding the magic rose. It had been hers as a kid. She saw that Grandpa Ricky was making a spell on it. Then Lily made a spell on Grandpa Ricky. She saw that Grandpa Ricky was holding the flower when she woke up. She did the spell because she remembered that she heard what her grandpa did when she was a kid. So she knew it was the same trick, so Lily made a trick.

The trick was to make the grandpa away. When she did the trick when she was a kid, what happened is that it would only work if she was a grown-up. Grandpa Ricky tried to camouflage with his magic, but it didn’t work because he didn’t really have magic. He made a trick. He wasn’t really a unicorn. He just dressed up and used the magic rose that was his and just sprinkled a lot of it. Lily was surprised. She knew it was her friend and the friend was a donkey. She knew what the donkey did. She made a bad spell to make Grandpa Ricky in deep sleep. Her grandpa’s grandpa made a spell so when she looks at the donkey, she would remember what happened when she was a kid. So she saw that the donkey dressed up as Grandpa Ricky and made a spell and he didn’t even know anything about the rose, he only knew what the magic looked like, so he just got the magic. She remembered that she thought that the donkey made a spell on her real grandpa.

So she saw that Grandpa Ricky was in a deep sleep. That’s the only thing she saw, but she did hear the magic words. It was “Alakazam, make you in deep sleep for a long time!” But then when she saw the spell, she saw Grandpa Ricky for real. She knew it was him because she tried to take off the skin and it didn’t work, so she knew it was Grandpa Ricky. Grandpa Ricky was happy because he hadn’t seen Lily in a long long time. Lily was happy too. Grandpa Ricky woke up because the donkey didn’t say forever, and it had been a long time. And because the donkey didn’t have real magic, Grandpa Ricky wouldn’t sleep for that long of a time.

When she was still a kid, and she visited her grandpa, it still wasn’t her grandpa. She saw her grandpa when she was zero, not even one year old. So she is now 37 years old, and Lily always thought that the Grandpa Ricky she saw when she was one was Grandpa Ricky. So thank goodness Lily made a spell on the donkey. It was weird because when Donkey took the costume off, he went back to Donkeyland.

So then they had a party of all of Lily’s friends and her kids, but not Donkey. And so Grandpa Ricky, the real Grandpa Ricky, got to play loops a loops with Lily’s kids and Ellie. Grandpa Ricky spinned the hula hoops and then the kids started to jump and jump and jump! And then their wings grew bigger and bigger and bigger and then they could fly! And Grandpa Ricky was happy and Lily was amazed and the kids were still one. And Lily was amazed because when she was a kid she could not fly, she could only fly two miles, but the kids could fly for three hours. Lily started to run, and she started to fly. She was flying because she wanted to fly with all her kids. So she started to fly nine miles and the kids flew eight miles for the first time ever!

***

Then another big problem happened. It was that there was a cheetah in the sky that had wings. This cheetah was very hungry and only ate unicorns. She is a girl and her name is Nina. She started to run fast in the air, and very carefully running on the clouds, and they didn’t even break because she was running carefully and her tail was made out of cotton. If the clouds were going to break, her tail would just pad it and it would be better right away.

Then the cheetah started to go on land. She saw that all the unicorns were flying, and she had a little power so she would be right in front of them to be ready. She did her spell right away. She flapped her wings super hard, and at the last bit of hardness, she turned invisible, zoomed really fast and then poof! That was how she got there. She was super fast, and she went to the last cloud. She knew if she waited for them to run slowly, they would go faster to the last bit. They thought that she was not there. Then she was going to appear. Then she did another magic spell. She made two of herself so they could not escape. She also made all of her selves everywhere. Her mouth was way open, and her little, sharp teeth were getting hungry. She licked herself.

The cheetah didn’t catch any unicorns, because there was a new ruler of unicorns. The Grandpa of Lily chose Lily to be the queen of the unicorns. She was really surprised and so were her kids. Grandpa Ricky, Lily, and her kids started to use their really, really good magic.

Before they made the cheetah go away, they saw a vision. They saw that the cheetah was not trying to eat them. Lily forgot something about the cheetah. She remembered that the cheetah was also her friend. But the cheetah was from the same mean man. Except Unicorn Land and Cheetah Land were together, but they had different names for where they lived.

She told the unicorns to not be afraid and told Grandpa Ricky and her kids to stop right now. She said, “I forgot that this is my friend. She was my friend growing up. You should remember Grandpa Ricky!”

Then she told Nina to stop. She said, “You were my best friend growing up and you saw Grandpa Ricky and me. All these other unicorns are my friends, and some of the kids are my friends kids. Some kids are mine.”

Nina said, “Okay.”

Then Nina ran back to the queen in her land. She said, “I am really sorry, but the people in your vision are my friends so I’m not going to give you her for your dinner.”

The queen cheetah, Reese, was really mad. She ran all the way to Unicorn Land. She went inside the castle and stopped. “I really wanted you for my dinner,” she said to Lily, “and you wouldn’t let me eat you so I’m going to eat you now!”

She let Nina come in front of her, did a magic spell for all of her friends and Nina, and then she told Reese, “I’m going to leave this place and go to Christmas World!”

Then she said, “I wish Kazoom to go there.”

They went through this magic, magic door. It took them to two places. It was a secret. One side was Christmas World, and one was Halloween. They got mixed up, all of Nina’s friends and Nina went to Halloween World. Lily, Grandpa Ricky, and the kids went to Christmas World. Then there was a problem.

There was an evil queen sitting in an evil chair. It looked like a green monster with yellow hair. She said, “I will take you to this bad, bad world, where you will not see anyone else. Only one person can come to this world, even if they have family.” Then she started running towards them.

Lily made a braid in her hair, and put a sword in it, and started to say the magic words. “Please, please hair and tail. Just this once, when I tell you, do something bad to the evil queen, okay?” And poof! That happened.

Before she even disappeared with the Evil Queen, Lily made a force field to make sure nothing hit them. And then Lily left. She saw her mom and and dad. She was still the same age then. She remembered that she never saw her mom wearing the necklace that she got for her birthday. The necklace was gold with a magical heart.

Mom and Lily did not know that Grandpa Ricky had an evil badge. The evil badge was under his nice, nice tail and Lily saw it and she knew which badge it was. It wasn’t her dad and it wasn’t her mom. She then knew that the evil queen had that badge on.

She had a vision. When Lily had visions, she looked like she was asleep. But actually, she was awake. Lily saw a picture of the evil queen. Inside, there was a magic headband. She saw inside, the headband had a magic badge.

So then she blinked once. She was back home, to the real world where ponies live. But there was no one there. She blinked one more time. She was in Christmas World. There were lots of Christmas trees. It smelled like candy. She heard the sled of Santa and Christmas songs.

She walked towards a castle. There was a fancy cane entrance. In the middle, there was Santa. She saw that her friends were in a cage. She saw the queen. She blinked one more time. When she blinked one more time, she was inside the cage. But then after that, she made herself invisible, so then she sneaked out of the cage. She had the key because the queen hid it inside the Castle of Santa, and then she went into the castle of Santa and found the key. Then she put herself on fire and ran around the queen 90 times in one second. And, then in a dash, the queen was on fire. And then, they never saw the queen ever again.

But Lily was not on fire because she just used a magic trick. She took her friends out, but something was wrong. There were cameras in the middle of Christmas World and Halloween World. And the soldiers saw the queen disappear, so they ran out of their cages. The queen had made cages for the soldiers way high up. They ran out of their cages to make sure that Lily and her friends would never come back. But before the queen could do that, Lily started flapping her wings and sang a signal that they all need to fly, and they did.

When they started flying, they started singing a song, and the song meant their cheetah friend Nina would come. She came flying towards them, above the clouds. Lily had a page that could write anything in cheetah language. So she told the paper, “Go to Nina and say, ‘Can you come down and help Lily fly?’”

Then, it flew up to Nina and then Nina stopped. Nina landed on the clouds, but she did not fall because she had a tail made of cloud fluff. Then, she patted the cloud to make sure that no holes were going to come. She didn’t want any holes that would turn into stones or metal.

Then she read the page. She flew down to help Lily get up into the sky before the evil witch. Because the evil witch cannot fly. Then an old tooth fairy put a spell on Lily. It was a good spell. Then she disappeared into the tiny house.

***

Then Lily turned into the new queen toothfairy. She grew tiny wings, and her horn and four legs turned into two legs and two arms. Then that old tooth fairy said, “You are the new queen tooth fairy.”  

Lily gasped in her head. She was so surprised. Then she went shopping inside the store. She opened her wallet and said, “What? Why is there teeth instead of money?”

Then one of her students said, “We use teeth to buy our stuff.”

Then Lily got shoes. She also got three gowns. One was a ball gown, the second was a gown made out of rose petals, and the third one was made out of dandelions. Then she went to the front of the market and opened her wallet again. She put down all her clothes and shoes on the scanner.

The guy said, “Three teeth please.”

And she gave him three teeth. Then, she saw a horse with wings and there was a guard on it at the castle. He said, “You are now the new queen,” and she hopped on the horse. They flew to the castle door.

Another guard asked, “Who are you?”

The other guard said, “I am the other guard who helped you and I dropped off the queen at the castle.”

Then the other guard put down his sword. The queen went into main area where she saw thirty other good fairies. She asked, “Why are there more fairies in here?”

They said: “We are your helpers, what do you want?”

“I want to know, where is the bedroom for me?”

All the fairies grouped up and said: “Should we show her?”

They decided to. They showed her the master bedroom. It had a bed with white curtains on top, and there were four dressers with three lamps on each one. Then Lily went out of the room and she asked, “Now where is the bathroom?”

The fairies took her into the bedroom, opened the door, led her in, and said: “Here is your master bathroom.” She was amazed because in her own castle, when she was a unicorn, her bathroom was just a circle pond with one little heart on the wall. And in this new bathroom, she saw a nice toilet, paper towel, and a sink where there was a mirror with a gold and pink frame.

She even saw an extra door to go outside faster. She walked out the door, and all the fairies asked, “Did you like it?”

She said, “I loved it!”

“Now, we are going to show you your private room.”

She went to the private room and got her nails done, then she got a massage, and a foot massage. She was so relaxed that she fell asleep in the middle of the massage. Then she woke up and said, “I loved it! I was asleep the whole time.”

Then she went to this massive hall with so many pictures of fairies with crowns on their head. She wondered what room it was. The fairies said, “This was the room where we remember the other queens who lived here.”

Then she goes into another big hall with 77 chairs and five tables. One table is for the west side, and another table was for the east side, the other was for the north, and the last was for the south. The very last table was for the castle people. There were lots and lots of people at each table. She went to another room. It had a humongous golden chair, with two purple crystals on each side, one pink crystal in the middle, two blue on the other, and then, two green as well.  There were 33 chairs that had four golden triangle crystals on the top and cushions on the bottom of them all. That was where they sat when the guards had to give the queen a message from someone else.

Then Lily went to a room that had a lot of gowns and shoes and it had lots of closets too. The assistant fairies said to her, “This is the closet where you put all your clothes and shoes.”

She saw a dress with red ribbons and blue dots. She also saw a tiara with red rubies, green diamonds, and in the lace of the tiara she put brown dots. She also saw two pairs of shoes. One was a shoe that she could wear for that night and another one was high heels. The high heels were red, blue, and brown. The night shoes looked like red bunnies. On the back was blue and red little lines.

Then she went to another room. This was the hospital room. There was a big, big bed and a little crib. This was the room where the people had their babies. Then the guards came. There was a bad message in the card. It said that there was a war between unicorns and fairies to get back the queen or keep the queen.

Lily flew all the way to her village and said to her children, “Please do not fight because I’m both your queens except I had to got to a different village because someone thought the old queen was going to die. So I’m really both queens and please do not go the war.” She went to her grandpa and said, “Grandpa, please take good care of the kids while I am going to rule a different town for two months.”

Grandma agreed with Lily. Then Lily flew back. After Lily was gone, the kids decided that they didn’t want to miss their mom so they wrote her a letter. They drew pictures of them hugging and they wrote, “Don’t worry. Grandma is taking care of us.”

Later, they found a book. The book had a fairy on the cover. “How to Write in Fairy Language,” it said. The girls felt happy because now they could have their letters sent to Lily. Her guards were fairies and only understood fairy language. When they opened it, they saw that one sentence was in their language and the next sentence was in a language that they didn’t recognize and the letters were filled with curls.

The sentence in their language said, “To mom, love, the kids.” Then they went to their card and brought the book. They brought it to the living room and started to use it to finish the cover. Then they sent the card.

Lily was in her chair when the guards came over and said, “You… have… a… message… from… your… kids.”

Lily opened the card, she started to read it out loud, and then she started to read in her normal voice that is a unicorn voice. Everyone was shocked because they never heard her talking in a creepy language! Then, she ran away from the place because she didn’t want them to know her secret ever again.

***

She went back to her town, but first entered the invisible force field. This made her back into herself that was a unicorn. Inside the machine, they put a unicorn horn and sprayed magic to make it look like a horn, then she glued the horn on, and went into this machine, and she was back into her town. Her mom came running back to her and gave her a little snuggle.

Then the kids came running, and they didn’t just snuggle, they tried to get her horn, meaning they were hugging! They ran around and said, “Yippie, yippie, yippie!”

Then she got a message who lived in fairyland who said there is a big wolf. But she forgot she wanted the big bad wolf’s beautiful tiara.

She took all her unicorns and said, “Follow me. Do you have your unicorn wand?”

They all said, “Yes!”

They followed Lily into the machine again. First, Lily said, “Go super fast!” So everyone could look like a fairy in one second. Inside of the machine they got wings, shoes, dresses, legs,  arms and a sword and shield. Then, they went out of the invisible force field. But luckily, the unicorns learned how to speak fairy language because Lily said to the other fairy, “Let’s go!”

Then Lily put her magic scarf that made her invisible and scattered around the place to the wolf castle. She was going to get her most favorite thing in the world: a necklace to make her the queen of every town, village, and kingdom. Then she found it and put it on. But then she felt the earth quaking and felt part of her body quaking.

So she took it off! Because first, she had to save the people. Then she ran back and they made a statue that looked like a carnivore wolf. Then he ran as fast as he could to his house ,but Lily remembered he only had one room. So she decided to make a fake necklace and put it back. She hid into a cave so no one knew that parts of her were falling off because she put on the necklace.

Then all the kings and queens of the villages died. But the parts of Lily turned into more Lillies and some of them changed their shape.

No one knew who the real one was, but every Lily knew that the real one had the necklace. And that’s how they lived, happily ever after!

 

Princess Mermaid

Once upon a time, there was a princess who got turned into a mermaid. Her name was Jamie. Her legs turned into a blue tail! She was confused, she didn’t understand what happened. She thought it was something magical, and she was right!

When she got turned into a mermaid, she was playing by the water with her puppy. Her puppy’s name was Delilah. She had brown and black fur. Purple dust flew out of the water and touched the princess and her puppy. Delilah also got turned into a mermaid!

Jamie and Delilah were both a little bit scared, but they swam, and then they found a cave in the water. They went inside, but it was a dark cave, and they couldn’t see.

Inside the cave, they found a flashlight. They also found a catfish that was stuck in seaweed.

The catfish said, “I was delivering magical purple dust to someone, but I got stuck, and some of the dust flew out, and I didn’t see it because I lost my flashlight. You can help me deliver my dust to the turtle who needs it! He’s going to trade the dust so I can turn back into a cat. The three of us can go back to land and you can play games with me!”

Jamie said, “That sounds great! You can be my other pet and you can have dinner with me. I’ll give you a different plate to eat on and I’ll tell my father that you’ll be my pet.”

When they got him out of the seaweed, they saw a door in the cave to the turtle’s house. The turtle was rainbow and teensy! The catfish gave the turtle the teensy bag of purple dust.

He turned them back into a human and a puppy and a cat, and they went back to the castle. The dog had his puppy food, the cat had cat food, and the princess had lettuce with rice for dinner. They went to bed and she lived happily ever after.

 

The Final Battle

It’s a dark night tonight, but the sky is clear, and for the first time in a long time, I can see the stars. I duck out of my tent into camp and view it for the last time. The place I’ve lived for the last three months. Miles and miles of deerskin tents, with posts bearing torches glowing golden bright. The rain is moving at a fast pace now. How strange that the sky is clear, yet rain falls from it. I step forward and mud squishes beneath my bare feet. I should be in my tent, where it’s safe, but I have a message for The Great One that must get to him before morning. I pass the horses, all tied to their posts, and they neigh for oats. I can’t stop now, though.

As I walk through the darkness, I see sparks flying, and I smell the rotting of meat. I look up again at the sky and see small specks of red flying through the air. It’s normal, but I can’t help but cringe as they hit the east side of camp, and it bursts into flame. I hear the shouts of men as they frantically pass water- filled wooden buckets in a line and try to save their few belongings.

Finally, when my legs are ready to collapse from exhaustion, I reach his tent. It’s beautiful. Made of white elk pelt and at least nine feet tall. He ducks out of his tent. I can’t help staring at him for a moment. He has long, silver- white hair to his waist and a beard nearly as long. He is dressed very simply, in a long, dark blue robe sprinkled with golden moons. He smiles when he sees me, and it brings me a feeling of complete joy. But then I remember what I’m here for and the joy leaves me.

“Why are you here, child?,” he asks me in a voice as soothing as star dust.

I straighten.

“I have a message for you.”

“Excellent. Whisper it into my ear.” He leans down, and I whisper my message to him. He nods and straightens.

“Thank you, child. This information is crucial to winning the war. Come in, come in. The least I could do is pay you for your services.” He lifts the flap of his tent and beckons me to come in. I follow and am immediately greeted with the smell of incense and the familiar flickering of candles. The Great One goes to the back of his tent and returns holding a small knapsack.

“There’s food in there,” he says, nodding to it. “And some other things you may need. Best eat up while you can though, you may not get another chance after tonight.” He gives a hollow laugh and places his hand on my head. His other hand slips a coin into mine. He sighs.

“You’d best be going now, before the bombing starts.”

I nod, and he bids me a last farewell. I slip into the night, but I can’t go back to my tent now. I keep finding myself making detours. This is the first place I’ve actually had a purpose. It’s the first place I’ve actually felt important. When this war ends, I’ll have to go back to the streets. The streets full of sewage and carcasses of dead animals. The streets where rat and caterpillar stew is common and where you must not own anything except the clothes on your back, or it will mysteriously disappear. I can’t go back there. Now that I’ve seen the world… and now I’m crying. Crying so hard my whole body shakes. I sink down into the mud and bring my knees to my chin and sob. I feel two arms around me, lifting me up.

“Sshh,” The Great One whispers. “Everything will be okay.” He carries me back to his tent and sits me in a chair woven from Goosespur weed. I sit there for a long time until my sobbing subsides. The Great One kneels beside me.

 

Sherman

Sherman walked the streets alone, like he always did. He wondered what time of day it was, but he didn’t even know. The sun never came up anymore, the stars never came out. It was as if they had died long, long ago. This was normal for Sherman though.                   

For as long as he could remember, Sherman had been walking the streets, sleeping in caves (if they weren’t reduced to rubble), eating from the resource dump (surprisingly, the food was better than the food that people with actual homes ate), and evading the resource collectors.

The resource collectors were sent out to displace people so the government could use their house resources. Since 2246, over 100,000,000 people were displaced (or, at least, that’s what he heard from others.)

Sherman had tried to search for water to fill up his canteen that was mostly just rust. But there had been no rainfall for a decade. Most of the streams had dried up, and people could barely sustain themselves.

The entire world seemed to be broken. Fires raged across the crumbled cities. People disappeared and reappeared in the shadows, judging how well their victims would taste.

Sherman didn’t even want to eat people, but sometimes… he just didn’t have enough food.

There was still worse though.

The sun’s deadly rays had become more intense than they had been in over 200 years. And the sun put out more solar flares than usual.

Walking around the roads (mostly reduced to rubble), Sherman found two, tall figures standing near one of the only alleyways that hadn’t been blocked by decaying buildings.

The men started to move towards Sherman, and Sherman knew it was either the resource collectors or two people who were displaced. No matter who they were, they were equally as dangerous. Sherman had to run.

Stumbling over the mountains of rubble, Sherman didn’t know how he would get away. It was easy if they were far away and didn’t notice him until after a while, but these two were, at most, five yards away. He wouldn’t be able to outrun them.

But he knew that he had to outrun them, or they would strip him of his resources.

The resource collectors didn’t just collect resources from streams and buildings, they also took people who were on the run and would drain them of their natural resources. Which was why Sherman needed to leave quickly.

Grabbing onto a pole, from a crumbling casino building, Sherman hoisted himself up onto the roof. Standing, he watched the men slowly inch closer. Their movements didn’t seem erratic, but Sherman could tell that they were distressed about something.

It could have possibly been the small fissure that had just opened up between them but, in a world like this one, that was normal. Fissures (larger than the one that had just opened) were scattered around the entire area. But this one seemed to give off some sort of red glow. Sherman did not have any time to think about that though.

Running across the roof, Sherman jumped from the next roof to the next. The men ran below Sherman, continuously following him. Sherman realized that these people were probably scavengers, like him. Resource collectors wouldn’t waste this much time on him. Sherman realized he maybe had something that these people wanted.

But that wasn’t possible. Sherman didn’t really have much. A pack of burnt playing cards, a small whistle, a rusty canteen, and a golden locket that his mother had given him. He had attached it to his neck with a piece of string that he had found when scavenging the resource dump. It flowed in the wind behind him, almost making him seem fiercer than he really was.

As he went to jump, he slipped. Tripping off the side of the building, Sherman crashed into a small alleyway. Getting up, Sherman saw the two men advance towards him quicker now. He looked around for a hole to climb through, but he saw nothing.

As the men came towards Sherman, the air seemed to chill (which was strange considering that it was always above 104°F.)

One of the men took off his glove to reveal a crippled and scarred hand. The bruises looked like they had taken a long time to heal, and the scars seemed oddly fresh, as if he had just fought someone.

The man took his hand and started to reach for Sherman. Backing up, Sherman realized there was no way out. He would be captured and sent to a tube and drained of his organs and other resources, most likely so these two could go on living. He felt like he should just give up because what was the point of fighting for a lost cause?

Before Sherman realized that the chills were probably making him think this, the ground opened up at his feet.

The man who was about to touch Sherman stopped, and backed away. The two men ran away quickly and disappeared.

Sherman regained thoughts of his own when the air started to get warmer. He had barely managed two steps before he slipped, fell, and was swallowed by the red glow of the fissure.

***

Sherman didn’t even know if he was conscious during the fall. He had hit his head right after he had fallen into the fissure and, after that, he couldn’t move his body.

He vaguely remembered the wind in his ears, the feeling of gravity pulling him downwards, but that didn’t matter. His brain was still trying to process what had happened. Why did the two men leave when the hole opened? Did they see something else that Sherman didn’t see? Sherman didn’t know.

As soon as he hit the water, Sherman’s nerves kicked into full gear: he felt an unbearable pain in his chest, his brain banged against his skull, and he was almost certain his leg was broken.

He still managed to kick to the surface and barely made it to the shore. He looked down at his right leg and saw, to his horror, blood spread across his entire leg. Besides that, nothing else seemed to be severely damaged.

Though, that wasn’t the thing Sherman was most surprised about. One word kept coursing through his brain, removing any other pain he felt. Water, Sherman thought. How is that possible?

Sherman had never seen this much water in his entire life. Usually, he found tiny springs, or a trickle of what was left of a stream, and took it gratefully, but this seemed like too much.

There were at least five huge pools of water next to each other.

Sherman walked over to the pools of water and touched it. A cold feeling washed over Sherman. He bent down and started to drink from the pools.

The water felt so refreshing, trickling to the back of his mouth as he drank. It felt as if he was in the North Pole (if the North Pole hadn’t melted 100 years ago.)

Sherman filled up his canteen and dragged his leg with him into a dark cave that seemed to be staring him in the face.

Strangely, it reminded him of home. His house was mostly stone. But that didn’t matter to the government. They took it anyway.

He had been kicked out of his home as well as the other millions. The locket was the only thing he had left that reminded him of his family and of his sorrow.

He remembered his mom being dragged away by the resource collectors. He remembered her screams echoing in the cave that Sherman had hid in to evade the collectors. It took many days for Sherman to muster the courage to come out. And when he did, his mother was nowhere to be found.

Sherman instinctively touched the slash mark on his face, where the resource collectors had hit him when he tried to protect his mother.

His mother was probably dead, drained of her resources. But Sherman had always held on to a little hope. Hope that his mother was still alive.

Walking through the cave, Sherman looked around at the strange drawings on the walls, trying to make sense of them. The drawings didn’t make sense to Sherman. Some had very large marks on them, and others were very small. They just seemed to be regular sketch marks, but he gazed at every picture as if it would save his life someday.

Then, he found a collection that almost made his heart stop. It showed a boy and his mother being attacked by two people in cloaks and masks.The next one showed a boy hiding in a cave with marks on his head. After, it showed the boy walking through a broken city, grown up. And very faintly on the next wall, it showed a boy falling down into a chasm. This seemed to be the only drawing that was in color. The chasm was painted red. The next one confused Sherman. It was blurred, but he could make out two faces fighting side by side. But he knew one thing. None were his mother. Then, Sherman saw the last picture. A picture of (presumably) the same boy hugging the mother that was in the first picture, as a giant tower collapsed on the two.

Sherman backed away from the paintings. It couldn’t be possible.

The red chasm had happened, at most, an hour ago. No one could have drawn that, that quickly.

No one could have written Sherman’s entire life in advance. Then again, there shouldn’t have been water down here with the harsh climate looming above.

He stared at the last painting. Was it true that his mother was still alive? Had she really not been killed or drained?

He found it hard to believe his mother was still alive. But if everything up to this point had already happened, maybe he would see her again.

Then, he realized, this would mean they would die in the end. The building… no one could escape that, even if they were the fastest people alive.

Then Sherman realized there was no reason to dawdle on the fact that these paintings may or may not be true. What was more important was to find a way out of this cave.

Sherman looked around to find a way to escape. All of the tunnels seemed to be blocked off. And all that was in this room-like cave was water, string, sticks, rocks, flint… and the paintings. No food. The prospect of not having (at least) a morsel of food scared Sherman.

Sherman decided to make the best of it. He found some sticks and rested them on a rock. He took some flint out of the wall and nearly cut himself. But to stay warm, Sherman would take any risk. Funny, you wish you could be in a normal climate up above, but once it gets cold, all you want to do is seek warmth.

Sherman took the flint and tried to remember how to light a fire. He remembered hazily that he needed steel. But he didn’t have that down here. So, he decided to do the more tortuous method. Sherman grabbed two sticks and anxiously rubbed them together. One spark flew, then two. Suddenly, Sherman saw a tiny flame erupt from the two sticks. Shocked, Sherman almost dropped it. But he managed to keep the flames going on the sticks and not on his tattered shirt. He blew the flames to the larger pile of sticks, and immediately, a roar was heard.

Flames erupted, and for once, Sherman felt proud of himself. He remembered how to make a fire.

Sherman sat around the flames for a while, looking around to find any place that could serve as an exit.

He admired the embers giving off warmth and smoke. Smoke, Sherman thought. Where was the smoke going to go to? He looked around to find a place where the smoke left. Then, he saw it. A small cave, maybe six inches tall, leading into this one. And just maybe, it led back out into the world above. Though, Sherman had a problem. How could he get up there?

The cave seemed to be perched on a ledge, almost at the top of the cave.

Then he saw it.

Spider webs. They didn’t seem strong enough to hold a human for 24 hours, but they could hold him for maybe five minutes. Just enough time to grab a ledge closer to the bottom. And then start climbing up to the higher ledge.

Sherman decided to take his chances.

Not knowing when he would get another drink of water, Sherman used some sticks stuck together with spider webs, to make a makeshift canteen. He made three and filled all of them with cool, refreshing water. Sherman was surprised that the webs could hold all of the sticks and water. It was as if the spider that made them had some magical properties. After, Sherman decided to start making his journey upwards.

He ran over to where he found the spider web and jumped on. He felt the shake of the web and the breaking of some strands, but he continued to climb.

Sherman found many small bugs and critters in the web on his way up. He had never been fond of these creatures. But he continued to climb.

Just before he could jump to the second to last ledge, the web gave way. Without a second thought, adrenaline now coursing through his veins, Sherman jumped and reached for the ledge.

He felt a stab of pain on his hand. He winced but managed to pull himself up.

Feeling a wash of relief, Sherman looked for the last ledge that housed the small cave that he had saw before. There, right on the ledge, was the cave.

Sherman had done too much to turn back now. The cave was only a few inches away.

If only he could reach the ledge and pull himself up…

He heard a growl. Thinking it was his stomach, Sherman continued to try and reach for the ledge. Then, he heard another growl. Followed by a stomp. Followed by one more growl.

Sherman turned around. Just in time.

He hit the spider with his fist. Sending it flying backwards. It hit the ground with a satisfying thud. It shuddered for a bit, then got back up.

Usually, Sherman would just squash a normal spider out of disgust. But this wasn’t an ordinary spider.

It was 10 times its size. 10 inches. Bigger than Sherman. Its eyes were green. It didn’t look as lifeless as the other spiders Sherman had seen. It was as if it had been awakened. With the intent to kill.

Sherman backed away from the giant creature. Smaller spiders started to crawl down from the walls of the cavern. But they weren’t small enough to easily get rid of. Sherman tried to run in the other direction of the spiders but stopped when he realized he was behind a ledge. He was cornered.

The spiders drew closer to Sherman, their mouths foaming with the poison in their bite. Poison, Sherman thought. And just as fast as the spiders had leaped at him, he came up with a plan.

Sherman kicked one of the smaller spiders jumping at him. Sherman stomped on the spider, turning it into a gooey mess. Quickly, Sherman reached into the spider and pulled out one of its teeth.

With a weapon in his hand, Sherman ran towards the spiders. A small spider lunged at him, its jaw open. Sherman looked for a weak point. Then he saw it. A small, dark bruise in the spider’s chest. It was as if the spider had been hit there before.

Sherman took the deceased spider’s venomous tooth and jabbed it at the bruise of the spider.

The tooth collided with the bruise, and the spider screeched, shuddered, then collapsed. The venom had destroyed the target in a matter of seconds.

Sherman looked down at his hand. It was oozing blood. But the blood wasn’t red. It was purple. The venom had entered his bloodstream. Sherman’s eyes blurred. He could barely make out the large, fuzzy shape in front of him. Sherman knew he had to do something. If this spider ever got out, the world could be in serious danger. He took the spider fang and lunged towards the spider. He heard a screech right before he collapsed. His vision swam. He saw the spider collapse as well. He had done it. He had killed the spider. While not his goal in the beginning, he had saved at least one life. He closed his eyes and drifted off into unconsciousness.

 

 

The Travel Through Time

Once, in time, there were dinosaurs. But, who knows what other species there were? There might have been aliens but we took over the Earth.

In present time, there were three kids — all boys. Their names were Jay, Luke, and Jason. They were in fifth grade when they had a crazy science teacher. He was a mad scientist, and every mad scientist is crazy. Mr. Dublin hated the three boys for no reason. In the evening, they had science class, and they were all in the same class. While the other kids were working, the science teacher, Mr. Dublin, called the three of them over to speak with him.

Mr. Dublin said, “Meet me tomorrow morning at 9:30,” and then he sent the three of them back to work.

They kept asking each other at a table, where Mr. Dublin couldn’t hear them, “Are we in trouble? Did you do something wrong? What did we do?”

Then the bell rang. Class was over. When the day was over, they left school.

***

The next day, in the morning, they had homeroom at 8:30. Then at 9:30, they told their teacher, and they went to Mr. Dublin. He said he had made a time machine, and he wanted them to help him. He was going to send them to the days where there were dinosaurs. The three thought it would be fun.

Mr. Dublin said, “Okay, and you might need this,” and gave them three swords.

Then, they got sent back in time, and they fainted.When they woke up, they found themselves in a nest. It looked like a tropical area… a dinosaur nest! They bolted out of the nest! Then, they ran into a Stegosaurus! They were back peddling and landed on a Pterodactyl and flew away! They saw two  flashes of light and then saw themselves back in Mr. Dublin’s science room.

When they arrived they yelled, “It worked! It actually worked!”

Then, they ran out of the room and went to their homeroom because they were so excited.

When they left, Mr. Dublin said, “Muahahahaha.”

Their homeroom teacher told the class it was recess. They played soccer together on the same team. They won 23-5. Then it was lunch. Their fat, lunch lady dumped slop on their plates. They threw it out.

Now it was actual science class. When the whole class entered, they got to work. Then, there was a sudden rumbling noise inside Mr. Dublin’s closet. The three boys went to investigate. The door burst open, and zombie clones jumped out and attacked the three boys. The three boys punched and killed the clones.

The professor yelled to the boys, “No, don’t kill them!’’

But the clones were already dead.

The professor yelled, “Nooo! My only clones!”

Then everybody in the room wondered about the clones. They wondered if they were good or bad. The professor said he was going to the bathroom. Then the three boys snuck behind Mr. Dublin’s desk. Without anyone noticing, they searched through Mr. Dublin’s drawers and found a paper, which had the code to Mr. Dublin’s safe. They opened Mr. Dublin’s safe and stole the recipe to the clones. Then, they stuck it in Jay’s pocket. Then, they snuck to their table, and Mr. Dublin came back and class was over.

But Mr. Dublin held them back and said, “I need you to go on a mission for me again tomorrow. Come at 9:30.”

Mr. Dublin sent them off.

***

The next day, at 9:30, they went to Mr. Dublin’s room, and Mr. Dublin had more clones. They wondered how Mr. Dublin had more.

He must’ve memorized the recipe because he said, “Here, take these swords and clones to go.”

They didn’t want to go, but they wanted to get more information. When Mr. Dublin was about to send them back, they hid behind the machine and only the clones went back.

When Mr. Dublin thought he was alone he said, “Muahahahahaha, I will take over the world!

Then, the three boys took the phone on the wall and called the police and told the police to come there. Then Mr. Dublin found them, but the three boys pointed their swords at him and made him stay there until the police came.

Then, Mr. Dublin got arrested.

 

THE END

 

Oh My Gosh!

Chapter 1

“Oh my gosh!” Elsa said. “Thank you so much for inviting me and Sidney to this water park!”

And then Sydney said, “I know right, I just can’t believe that we are staying here for 10 days without your parents. Without your parents!”

“Calm down, guys. It’s just a water park!” I said.

Even though I was excited myself, this was supposed to be New York’s best water park. “Bye, Mom and Dad!” I yelled.

I was 15 years old.

“Hey, do you guys want to go to the restaurant? I’m starving,” Sydney said.

We went to the restaurant, video game arcade, and then we had the best time going down slides and splashing through waves.

“Is it just me or are we the only ones here!” Elsa said.

“Calm down,” Sidney told her.

“I think Elsa’s right!” I said, in horror. “We are the only ones here!” I screamed.

 

Chapter 2

“She is right, you know,” Elsa said to Sydney.

“And I did scream, and no one even came to tell me to be quiet!” I said again, horrified of the thought that we may be the only ones here!
“But, if we’re the only ones here, shouldn’t we take advantage of it?” Sydney asked.

“Yes, we should definitely do that!” I shouted happily.

“I’m not so sure,” Elsa said. “Shouldn’t we call the police to tell them we are stuck!”

“Calm down!” I told her.

“Yeah, and I wouldn’t call it stuck, it’s more like a dream come true!” Sydney added.

“I guess,” Elsa said.

“What should we do first?” I asked.

“Go on the blue swirl!” Elsa and Sydney shouted in chorus.

“Okay!” I said, excited as can be.

The blue swirl was super fun.

“Watch out! Super Sydney coming through!” she shouted.

Then we went to the cafe and ate some chocolate cupcakes with chocolate frosting and rainbow sprinkles.

“Aren’t you guys worried? We don’t even know why nobody’s here!” I said.

“Okay, let’s go check the main office at the entrance to check if anything happened.” Ella said.

“Good idea,” Sydney and I told her.

When we found the place, we were surprised to find nothing but a note. A suspicious note. Sydney read the note… her face turned white… she fainted.

 

Chapter 3

“Sydney! Are you okay?” Elsa and I asked desperately.

“I’ll call my mom,” I told Ella.

“Uh oh!” I said.

“What?” Elsa asked.

“No internet connection!” I screamed.

My. Phone. Was. My life! Sydney woke up a couple hours later. We didn’t read the note.

 

Chapter 4: Tummy Hurts

We wanted to wait.

“I waaaant to go hoooome!” Sydney cried.

“Why?” we asked.

“Read the note. Then you’ll understand!” Sydney told us.

“Why don’t we read it at the cafe?” I asked. “We can have ice cream?”

They agreed. I was starting to grow scared. I missed my parents… we read the note… I screamed!

 

Chapter 5: Weird Note

The note said:

Hello, Sydney, Elsa, and Lindy! I have trapped you here because Sydney’s parents stole diamonds from me. Then, they turned me to the police and gave the diamonds to them too! I have kidnapped you guys. If your parents don’t pay the ransom note of $2,000, I will drop you in the middle of the forest, where you will be eaten! In ten days, I will be back. There’s no way out! You can thank Sydney’s spy parents! I have kidnapped you.

 

Chapter 6: Questions and Paper Clips

“Wait, your parents are spies?” I asked.

“Yes,” Elsa answered.

“Well, why didn’t you just tell us?” Sydney finally said.

“I’m sorry I wouldn’t tell you! But when I saw how you guys reacted to finding out that Max’s parents are mad scientists, well… uh… I didn’t want you guys to think I was weird.”  

“Ella Bradforth, I just can’t believe you!” Sydney screamed.

“Look, I understand if you guys don’t want to be friends with me!” Ella told us.

“We were weirded out about Max’s parents because they were eeeeew!!! You parents aren’t eeeewww!!!” I told her.

“Now, let’s escape!” Sydney said, in a determined voice. “Also… watch me swallow a paper clip! I have done it many times!”

Two minutes later…

“Yep, it’s not coming out!” Sydney answered.

“Yikes,” Ella gasped.

“Hey, guys! Look, there’s a hidden door!”

 

Chapter 7: Almost There

We walked in.

“Hello,” a booming voice said.

“Huh? Who’s there?” I asked.

“Rumplerum.” a voice answered.

“That’s the guy who wrote the note,” Ella answered.

“Oh no,” I said to myself.

Scratching???

“What was that?” Sydney asked.

“Umm,” I murmured.

“Look around,” Ella told Sydney.

There was a cage around us with just one lock.

“Hey, it’s not locked,” I said.

“Now it is,” Rumplerum answered.

“How do we get out?” I asked.

“I know!” Sydney answered.

Then, she began gagging, and out came a paper clip. Then, Ella took the paper clip and hid it behind her back when Rumperum came.

“Hah,” he muttered.

Quickly, Ella continued opening the lock because her parents taught her how.

Ten minutes later, we ran out of the waterpark.

“Hey, come back!” Rumplerum shouted.

But, it was too late.

 

Finley’s First Charm Bracelet

This is a story about a charm bracelet that leads you to another world.

The first charm is a mint-candy-green cat for friendship. It leads you to a world where everybody is friendly. So, you think it might be the same exact world, but, this time, nobody can harm you there.

The second charm is a lemon-drop-yellow dog that represents fun. It takes you to a world where it is always fun. So, wherever you go, there is always a playground or a sleepover. Anything fun for you.

The third charm is a grape drop, shaped like a shell, that represents peace. It takes you to an ocean where it’s peaceful, and nothing can bother you there. You can never get a sunburn.

The fourth charm is last. The apple heart charm represents love. It leads you to a world where everyone loves you, even though you don’t know who they are.

***

For Finley’s fourth birthday, her great-uncle gave her a charm bracelet.

Finley said, “Thank you, Great-Uncle Charles. It’s adorable,” in a not-so-surprised, but still surprised, way. She thought it was just an ordinary charm bracelet that didn’t do anything special, but she loved the cat, dog, shell, and heart charms!

Her great-uncle said, “Ahh, you will see what’s so special about it,” with a smile on his face, like he couldn’t wait to see something.

It was vacation time from pre-school, so Finley and her family went to Hawaii on a boat. When she landed in Honolulu, she put the charm bracelet on, and she disappeared like POOF!

Nobody said anything because, then, there was just a fake Finley who could also talk and do things. There was a fake Finley because her great-grandpa is an inventor, and he built a fake Finley that could talk and do things just like the real Finley.

Meanwhile, Finley found out that she was up in the clouds, falling down like a piece of rock.

She yelled, “Ahhhhhhh!!!” She was scared that she was going to break every bone she had!

Then, everybody in town looked way up in the sky.

Finley’s friendly great-uncle said, “Look up in the sky!” and everybody held their hands out so that their palms faced the sky, and then Finley fell into everybody’s hands. Their hands were so soft, like a million pillows!

The green cat charm was shining in her eyes. Then, she saw something in her brain. It was the great wizard!

He said, “My name is Marcas. You have been sent to another world.”

Finley said, “Then how come everyone looks exactly the same?”

Marcas said, “This is still another world. It just looks exactly the same, but this time, nobody can harm you here.”

Finley felt a powerful charge of electricity from the charm of friendship. She hurt herself a lot in the other world because she was clumsy, but she felt safe now.

She saw everyone looking at her, and she said, “Why are you all looking at me?”

Her great-uncle said, “Because we’re friendly! Welcome to our world!”

Finley said, with a scared, toothy look, “Well, how come you are my great-uncle?” She could feel her skin stretching in her neck because she was forcing a smile.

In the world of friendship, you always had to be friendly because Marcas would kick you out if you weren’t, and you’d go to the evil world. You would see him up in the sky with a big face in the clouds, and he would say a spell to keep you there forever. The spell was, “Razzle dazzle doozle dreer, make you stay here forever ever.”

Finley felt kind of nervous because she didn’t want to get kicked out of the good world and go to the evil world.

The next day, Finley woke up and found out that she was in the regular world, back in the real Hawaii. Marcas took her because he wasn’t sure that everybody would know her and be friendly enough.

When she got out of bed, Finley dressed as best as she could: a white dress with real, pink diamonds and yellow, sparkly, thunderstorm sneakers. She put on pink lipstick (it’s kids lipstick), curled her eyelashes, and put on kid’s mascara. She had a cute, big head, so she put a crown on top. She wanted to look nice for the beach boardwalk. She didn’t put on the charm bracelet, though, because the paint would wash off in the ocean, and then, she would never be able to get to the all worlds. Marcas told her in her head that the only way she could travel without the bracelet was to go up to the Rainbow Falls in the sky.

“Wow! You look so beautiful, Finley! We should definitely go to the beach,” said her mom and dad.

And they went to the beach. It was soooo hot that they went right into the water to cool off. They saw tiny, yellow and black zebra fish, and then, they saw squid! So, they ran back to the beach. They got cold, so they laid out on the sand and got hot again! They went back to the water, but this time, they saw pink, crowned fish.

Her wrist was still wet, so she didn’t put on the bracelet. She kept it on the dry, dry, dry shelf. When it was time to go back to the ferry to go back home, she brought the bracelet.

But then, when she got home, there was a party with people she didn’t know!

Her mom said, “Oopsie! I think I forgot to lock the door.”

Finley said, “Get out of our home, or else I’ll kick you out on your butts! With my feet!”

So, everybody ran out the door. But there was one guy who didn’t, so Finley kicked him out. She was so mad, but she felt relaxed after she kicked his butt. In the world of friendliness, you couldn’t be mad, but over here, you could! She was so relaxed that she peed her pants. Then, at dinnertime, her dad told a joke, and she laughed so hard that she pooped in her pants!

When they saw the wetness, they said, “What are you doing?!”

She said in a relaxed voice, “I’m peeing and pooping in my pants, and I don’t care.” Then, she kept peeing. She was a little too relaxed.

So, then, she put on her charm bracelet. Then, she figured out that she was somewhere where everything was fun! Everyone was smiling and laughing. There were parks that looked like Central Park, and there were toy trains that were real trains with miniature cabooses that moved around by themselves. There was a cart by the river that sold blueberry lemonade, and an ice cream cart that sold any ice cream you wished (that your parents would normally say no to…). But they would say yes because this is the land of fun, and your parents don’t care if it’s bad for you. All they care about is that you have fun!

Finley’s parents trusted her, so it was the charm bracelet that guided her. If she went forward, and she was supposed to go backwards, the charm would point the direction.

Finley’s dog charm glowed, so she took three more steps, and the charm bracelet turned east, so she turned east. She saw someone, someone from the real world… It was her friend, Mila!

Finley’s eyes got bigger, and there was happy sweat coming out and flicking off of her forehead.

Milaaaaaaaa!!!” she yelled.

Mila turned around and, with one eyebrow up and one eyebrow down, she said, “How did you know my name was Mila? I never saw you around!” Her hair was blonder than the Mila that Finley knew. When this Mila got happy, her hair got shinier and shiner, and actually lit up!

“Well, I saw you in the other world I live — ”

Mila gasped and yelled, “You are from another world?!” in a high-pitched voice.

Finley said, in a very slow, high-pitched voice, “Yeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees.”

Mila crossed her arms and said, “That. Is…” She uncrossed her arms and pointed her fingers down and puffed out her neck. “Awesooome!!!”

Finley said, “Let’s go to Central Park!” And they did.

They went on the seesaw, the monkey bars, the slide, and the swings. And then, they went to the ice cream cart, and Finley wanted chocolate ice cream with rainbow sprinkles and so did Mila.

Before Mila got her scoop, she said, “You read my mind!”

Finley said, “You mean you wanted chocolate ice cream with rainbow sprinkles, too?”

Mila sang in a loud and proud voice, “Yeees.”

Then, they went to the other park that was also Central Park, and they had different items to play. You could rock in the rocking chair, that was actually a playing horse. Finley got on, but she got dizzy.

Finley put her hand on the left side of her head. “My head is starting to hurt!”

Mila said, “Okay. I’ll let you go back home.”

At the end of the day, Finley went back home. She was glad to be home, because there was not too much fun. And then, the next day, she found out that her purple shell charm was glowing bright purple. Then she disappeared with a Poof! She found out that she was on a beach when she landed. No one was there, and all she heard was a small wave crashing.

Then, she found the original shell from her charm bracelet.

She said, “It’s as small as my charm of peace.” But the shell was different. The shell was grey. It wasn’t shiny, it was dull. And some of its shell broke off, but she found the piece to put it together. Then, she found her old house and put on her pink bathing suit with white polka dots. She went back to the beach to take a swim, but before she even went in the water, she found a stingray.

She stepped around him and said, “I’m not going to creep him out.”

Then, she went back into the store and dried herself with her towel. She took the shell with her and went to her old home. Then, she figured out that it had everything she needed to fix the shell. It had crazy glue, colorback, and a shiny machine. First, she used crazy glue to glue the pieces of the shell back together. The shiny machine was next. Finley shined the glued shell with the shiny machine, and the color of  the shell was silver, but the shell had to be purple. The last step was to put the color back onto the shell, and the colorback was a spray. So, she used the colorback as purple, and then sprayed it on the silver shell, and the silver shell tuned purple. Then, the shell of peace glowed on her bracelet and, all of a sudden, she was back at home without even noticing!

She asked, “How did I get here? Oh well.”

Then the last charm was glowing red, and she disappeared with a puff of smoke. Poof! She was gone. Then, she was in a world where the only colors were red, pink, purple, and blue. Except for the people. They were different colors. Then, around the corner of the big building, she found her friend, Mila. She was wearing clothing Finely had never seen in the original world. She was wearing a dress with pink flowers, and around the flowers, it was purple. She had green shorts, and her shoes were the color orange.

Finely said, “Mila! How are you doing?”

Mila said, “Fine. Whoever you are, how are you?”

Finely said, “What do you mean ‘whoever’? I’m your friend, Finley!”

Mila said, “I don’t know you. Are you from a different world? I see you have a special charm bracelet.”

And then Finley said, “Yes, what is this world? A world of love?”

“Yes, you see, everything here is full of red, and purple, and pink,” Mila said.

“This special charm bracelet was from my uncle,” Finley said.

“From your uncle? I thought he was my uncle!” Mila said.

“You mean Uncle Charles?”

“Yes! That’s my uncle,” Mila said.

“But in the other world, when I was two years old, I didn’t know what he was. But as I grew, my mother said that person is Uncle Charles, my uncle.”

“But in this world things are different. So he is my uncle, and you are my new friend that I never met before because you don’t live in this world!” Mila said.

Then, Mila said, “This world is the world where everybody loves each other, even people who rob banks. They apologize, and the police will believe them since this is the world of love. I know where your parents are. They are on the next block across the street on your right. Your parents will be pleased to see you.’’

Finley did as Mila said. She went to the next block, across the street on her right. Then she saw a small door, tall enough for her to go through, but she knew her parents had to bend down because she measured them before. So she went inside the small door, and there was a big room, decorated with purple walls and pink letters that spelled her name: Finley. The lanterns were much more fancier. They were hanging from the ceiling, looking like glass teardrops. Then, she saw a door to the closet and saw all the fancy clothing! The color of the clothing were all Finley’s favorite colors: pink, red, blue, green, and purple. There was another door. Finley opened the door, and there were her parents.

Finley went into the room and jumped on her parents with a big smile that touched ear to ear.

Her parents said, “Oh, how are you doing? I missed you so much! Did you make any new friends?”

Finley said, “Uh, new friends? I already had a friend in the other world, which was Mila, duh!” Her eyebrows looked sad, but she made a ridiculous face, and was smiling with her mouth open.

Then, her parents said, “You should go on a time out.”

She said, “Nuh uh!” She touched her charm and went back to the other world. She went back so fast, she didn’t even notice. She was so tired because it was already midnight, and so, she got into her pajamas, brushed her teeth, and went to bed while her parents were sleeping. But before she went to her parents’ bed, she went to her old crib with her new stuffed animals, blankets, and pillows. She got out one of her new pillows with pink and purple flowers, with blue around them, and got a brown blanket with pink small hearts. She got her stuffed unicorn animal with big, blue, sparkly eyes, and a purple horn. It was a very, very, light-pinkish purple. She had a dream about the adventures she had.

 

THE END

 

Kendall’s Story

Kendall is a ten-year-old girl who has huge, brown hair with a purple streak. She also really loves hair bows, like Jojo Siwa, and she also likes to dance, like Jojo Siwa. Kendall loves watching Jojo Siwa, her friends, and Abby (her teacher) get into drama on Dance Moms. Today is her first day at a new school, and she is really nervous.

When Kendall looks at the time, it says 7:36 A.M. She is supposed to be at the bus stop at exactly 7:25 A.M. Kendall quickly runs outside and sees her bus leaving.

“Oh shoot!” says Kendall.

Kendall goes back in the house and runs up the stairs to her room and gets her headphones, phone, and backpack. Then, Kendall tries to chase the bus, but she is too slow. She doesn’t want her mom to find out that she missed the bus. So she walks to school because it is a five minute walk. She takes her phone out and sticks her headphones in. She listens to “How Deep Is Your Love” by Calvin Harris. That is one of Kendall’s favorite songs, but Kendall has lots and lots of favorite songs. As Kendall is crossing one of the streets, a moving truck almost runs over her foot. Kendall takes her headphones off and puts her hands on her hips.

“Are you crazy or what?” says Kendall.

“No, I am not crazy! Are you crazy?!” says the guy driving the truck.

Kick.

“Why would you kick my truck, you crazy, little girl?” says the annoying guy in the truck.

Then Kendall flips her hair and walks away from that crazy guy. When Kendall reaches her new school, she puts her phone and headphones away. It’s bigger than her old school, and she can tell from the outside that it looks cleaner. Her old school was all brick and there was only one window, which was on the top floor. This school is made of all glass. She feels like she’s lucky because it’s hard to get into this school. When Kendall is walking up the stairs to the school, she sees her best friend, Isabelle, and runs to give her a hug.

“Ew, who is that giving me a hug?” says a mean girl named Bridget.

“Why are you calling me ‘ew,’ Isabelle?”

Kendall looks up at the girl and notices it is not her friend, Isabelle. Kendall feels very embarrassed.

Another mean girl walks towards them and says, “Hi Bridget!”

Kendall asks, “Who is that?”

“This is my best friend, Hazel. Actually, who are you?” she says sassily.

“My name is Kendall, and I am a huge fan of JoJo Siwa,” says Kendall to Bridget and Hazel.

Kendall tries acting sassy like Bridget and Hazel so she can fit in. She needs new friends because she misses her friend, Isabelle. Isabelle has brown, wavy hair like Bridget. Bridget dyed her hair purple at her ends. Isabelle also has her ends dyed purple. That’s why Kendall thought Bridget was Isabelle.

Then the bell rings, and that means they have to go to class. The first class for Kendall is dance. Kendall is so excited because dancing is her favorite hobby. As she walks, she notices Bridget and Hazel are going in the same direction.

Kendall quickly catches up to them and says, “I can’t wait to start dancing!”

“Me too,” Hazel says.

Bridget says, “Me three.”

Kendall notices that there are only eight kids in the dance class. When she looks into the other room, the music class, there are twenty kids! Maybe music class is good at this school, she thinks.

Then, their dance teacher claps her hands and says, “Get in line everybody!”

The teacher has brown hair, light brown eyes, and she looks really nice.

“Now it’s time for everybody to say our names. My name is Ms. Cheatham,” she says with a huge smile that goes all the way up to her cheeks.

The students’ names are Kristy, Stacey, Mary-Anne, Dawn, Hazel, Bridget, Claudia, and Kendall. There are only girls in the class.

She sees the boys entering the room, saying, “Ew. There are only girls here. We’re only interested in hip hop, not that tap you’re doing.”

Kendall puts on her tap shoes and taps her feet on the floor lightly. Then, she likes the rhythm to it, so she starts dancing and going around the studio and doing ballet and jumping in the air.

Everybody opens their mouths wide, in a shocked way, and starts clapping loudly. Even Ms. Cheatham starts clapping!

Then, Kendall takes a bow and starts tapping to the line everyone is in.

“That was awesome,” Hazel and Bridget whisper.

Now they like her, just because she did something cool.

Then, Kendall straightens her bow out and says, “You guys like my bow?”

She is showing off now. The other girls have fake bows cut out from paper, but Bridget, Hazel, and Kendall have black, sparkly bows. They didn’t even plan it! Kendall has the biggest bow because her hair is so big. Now that she is hanging out with Bridget and Hazel, she thinks she’s the coolest.

Then, Kendall sees one of the weirdest people at her school. She’s wearing glasses, and her nose is all scrunched up. She’s wearing one rainbow sock and one glittery sock that says, “I love Elmo,” and they go all the way up to her knees.

Hazel says, “Hey. Go over to that weird kid, Sally, and do something mean to her.”

Then Bridget says, “Yeah. Something really mean.”

Kendall walks to Sally and says, “Hey Sally. There’s something on your shirt.”

Sally looks down and says, “I don’t see anything.”

Then, Kendall slaps Sally’s chin up really hard, and it hurts because Sally’s mouth is open while she is talking.

Then Kendall smiles and says, “Oh, I’m so sorry. That was an accident.”

Sally says, “Oh, it’s okay!” because she actually thought it was an accident.

Then Kendall says, “Hi-five, Sally!”

Sally says, “Okay,” and tries to slap Kendall’s hand, but then, Kendall bends her elbow, moves her hand towards her head, and leans over.

“Dab on it.”

Bridget and Hazel start giggling.

In a high voice, Sally says, “I thought you were nice, but you’re really mean!”

Then, Kendall steps on Sally’s toes and walks away.

Finally, the bell rings. Briiiiiiing! It’s a half day because it’s the first day of school.

I never heard a bell ring in school before, Kendall says in her head. It’s too noisy. Usually, the teachers walk the kids from class to class at my old school.

She feels bad about Sally, but she feels happier that she’s getting close to the most popular girls at school.  

DDDIIINNNGGG!

“Yay, it’s the end of the day,” says Hazel.

“See you guys tomorrow,” says Kendall.

As Kendall starts walking to her house, she sees her mom waiting outside for her.

“How was school today?”

“It was good,” says Kendall with a sad face.

“You sure?” says her mom.

“Yeah, I’m sure,” she says.

Then Kendall runs up to her room, slams her pillow on her face, and starts yelling.

Her mom, downstairs, says, “I thought I heard a noise? But I guess I was just hearing stuff.”

“I wish I could still go to school with Isabelle,” Kendall says to herself.

Then she has an idea. She’ll just call Isabelle and ask her to ask her parents to sign up for the school she’s going to. Kendall picks up the phone and dials Isabelle’s phone number.

“Hello, is Isabelle home right now, Ms. Jenkins?” asks Kendall.

“Yes! Would you like to speak with her? She has been dying to talk to you,” says Ms. Jenkins.

“Wait, Ms. Jenkins, can I ask you a question first?” says Kendall.

“Sure!”

“Ok, Ms. Jenkins, the question is. . .  would you, please, please, please, pleeeease sign your daughter up for my school? I know she loves to dance, and we get one hour of dance a day! She is my best friend ever, and I miss her so much! So please, enroll her!”

“I’ll think about it. . . ”

***

As Kendall walks up the stairs to her school, she sees Bridget and runs over to her.

“Hey Bridget, I know I saw you yesterday but it felt like forever,” says Kendall.

“My name is not Bridget. My name is Isabelle,” Isabelle says.

“Oh my god, Isabelle! This is the best day of my life!” says Kendall.

Bridget walks in and says, “Who’s that girl?”

Then Kendall replies, “This is my best friend from my old school! And believe it or not, you guys look just like twins!”

Then Isabelle and Bridget examine each other up and down. They both are wearing glittery high-tops and shirts that say “Keep On Dreaming.”

They simultaneously say, “O-M-G, we are like twins!”

The bell rings, and it is time for dance class. They all hold hands together and start walking there.

“I see there is a new student today,” says Ms.Cheatham.

Everybody crowds around Isabelle, noticing how pretty she is. Kendall is standing far from everyone, crossing her arms.

“Now look at who is getting all the attention,” whispers Kendall.

“What did you say, Kendall? Sorry, I didn’t hear,” says Isabelle.

“Nothing, really,” Kendall insists.

“Okay, if you say so,” says Isabelle.

Then, Isabelle and Bridget come up with the idea to do a ballet, hiphop mash-up duet. But Hazel and Kendall feel mad and jealous. Kendall and Hazel also have a plan…

“Pillow fight!” says Kendall.

“It’s on!” replies Hazel.

Kendall sees Bridget and Isabelle from her window doing their annoying duet together. She feels like calling them and saying, “We are having so much fun,” to make them jealous.

“Can we do something? Or can I go home? Because I’m super bored,” says Hazel.

“Okay, what if we sneak over to their house and take their music tape,” says Kendall.

Hazel puts her hands together and starts wiggling her fingers, agreeing with the evil plan.

Kendall and Hazel start walking out of her room and outside.

***

Kendall and Hazel stand in front of Isabelle’s house. There is a huge oak tree right in front of Isabelle’s house that has tons of branches. They climb to the top and reach Isabelle’s window. They climb into the window and see the tape on Isabelle’s desk, shiny and gold! Hazel hears the door opening and loudly whispers, “Hide! Hide, Kendall! Hide!”

Kendall moves her foot and the carpet slightly slides, sending her falling out the window. Luckily she lands in a huge pile of stacked leaves.

Isabelle, Bridget, and Hazel run downstairs and outside to check on Kendall. Bridget asks, “Do you need an ambulance?”

“No, I think I’m good,” says Kendall.

Isabelle and Bridget look on the floor and see crumbled pieces of their gold tape.

“Why would you take our tape?! The song was about our friendship,” says Isabelle.

“It was also about our friendship, Hazel,” says Bridget.

“We are really, really, really, really, really sorry,” they say simultaneously.

“Of course, that’s what friends are for,” says Isabelle.

“Yeah, whatever she said,” Bridget replies.

They all started laughing.

“We will always be best friends,” they say together.

 

The End

 

Life

 

“Don’t tell me the sky’s the limit, when there are footprints on the moon.” – Paul Brandt

 

Prologue

My mom and I were making chocolate pudding as the sunlight streamed through the window. Dad had already gone to work. He was proud to have a job in the World Trade Center, NYC. Who knew that early Tuesday morning would hold a lot of surprises?

***

At around nine, we got a call from my brother, Austin, in college.

“Mom,” he said, his voice all shaky, “Something bad has happened.”

I wish, now, that I didn’t hear those words. It was all wrong. I was so scared. He continued talking.

“Guys, I’m coming back home.”

I glanced out the window. It started drizzling. Split. Splat. Drip. Drop. Mom dropped the phone. She leaned against the mahogany table and knocked over the bowl of pudding. It spilled all over the shiny, white floor. Mom didn’t clean it up, but her eyes got all misty and the coat of fresh mascara dripped down her face.

 

9/9 Sunday

“Where are we going?” I asked aloud.

“Somewhere.” Dad grinned.

When we finally arrived at our destination, I still didn’t get it until we reached the ticket booth.

“Wicked!”

We bought some bright candies and went into the theatre.

The lights flashed and people chattered.

GROARRR! The dragon’s roar had the “quiet-down-now-I’m-starting” effect like Mrs. Tackus, the school principal. As the volume of the theater went down, the stage curtains went up.

A group of munchkins burst into song while Glinda came down in a bubble.

“And Goodness knows

The Wicked’s lives are lonely

Goodness knows

The Wicked die alone

It just shows when you’re Wicked

You’re left only

On your own”

 

9/10 Monday

“See you later, just going to pick your grandpops.”

“Kay, see you.”

I stared at the white cadillac until it rounded the corner and went off to JFK. Or, as my arch nemesis, Bridget, would say, #THEAIRPORTOFTHENYC. I hated any type of hashtags and puns. Not the “popular girl”, if you know what I mean. I went into my room and took out my diary.

 

9/10

Someday, I hope the world will be easier to understand. Anyway, today I have sooo much homework! Mrs. Robinson had us read two chapters of Esperanza Rising, a math worksheet, vocab words of the week, spelling words of the week, studying for the science test, a social studies worksheet and… well I have to stop now, partly because there is no other homework assignments.

 

“Difficult roads often lead to beautiful destinations.”

 

9/11 Tuesday

I was working on a math worksheet when I heard Mrs. Robinson’s phone ringing. It seemed as if no time had passed, but when I looked back, I saw her phone on the ground. A look of confusement, surprise, and fear passed across her face, and it seemed long before that first tear fell off her face.

She asked for all the people that had a parent working in the World Trade Center to raise their hands. She then told those people(including me) to go out into the hallway with her.

“My husband works in the World Trade Center,” she started, “and… sniffle… the um… sorry, some terrorists… “

With that, everyone was looking at everybody else. To me, the word, terrorists, was a bright, green, neon sign.

I looked outside the window.

A tower.

I looked back into the classroom and saw Bobby doodling in his notebook.

A bomb.

I heard someone screaming in the distance. This isn’t your life, Brooklyn. It’s okay, it has to be a mistake.

But I realized that it wasn’t mistaken. It was all real.

My limp body dropped to the ground, and I screamed even louder.

 

9/12 Wednesday

“I don’t want to go to school today.” I looked up from my cereal expectantly, waiting for an answer.

“Well, Mrs. Brooks just texted me.” I peered across the table and read:

Caroline, I hope that Brooklyn can make it to school today. Just having someone that understands will help me, and her too.

I decided then that I would go.

***

In school, Mrs. Brooks went easy on all of us. She asked us to write a poem.

 

Colors swirl through the universe bringing hope to all people

Wind swirls through the world bringing dreams that will flower

Smoke swirls out of the brick chimney and out beyond

Sneakers screech and slide across the floors of the gym

Flowers open and bloom across a bright and sunny field

Summer brings freedom and sunshine where it’s needed the most

Snow makes the bitter cold fall upon those not lucky

There is no light or warmth here; it’s pitch Black

Queen sits proudly on her never-melting throne of ice

Tower

 

I stopped abruptly, tears streaming down my face again. I turned on my heel and ran to the bathroom, ignoring everyone’s stares and Mrs. Robinson’s exclamation.

Why did I write TOWER on my poem? Why? Why? Why?

***

Three years later…

I wake up with gum stuck in my hair and moan. Today isn’t going to be that bad, I think, trying to trick myself. Today is the day we call, “Mourning.” It is either the beginning or the end. It doesn’t matter though, it’s a sad, personal holiday.

I slip out of bed and did what I never do: I made my bed. Dad deserves that, I think. The last time I saw him…  

Mom is in the kitchen cooking something when I come down. She gives me a weak smile, but I see the worry on her face. I need to be ready for what was coming next. For both of us.

My knees feel like cooked spaghetti.

Mom didn’t say anything, but I knew what she was thinking. I don’t think I was ready. “Wait…” I wanted to say, so I could run into my room and hide under the covers. It was too late.

I go upstairs and put my black dress on. As soon as I am downstairs, we drive off. It is snowing very hard. I feel the graveness settling over the church.  I see a bunch of old grannies crying into lace handkerchiefs. That’s what I saw, but other people had lost something more important in their lives. A part of their soul was taken away. Everyone in the room just lost something important in their lives.

My father.

I pause and look up at the congregation in the synagogue and see Mom dabbing her eyes. I realize that she is now a widow. I smile weakly at her.

“It was special, the relationship I had with my dad, but I was too full of teenage angst to see it. But I think he knows how much we all loved him. He is still going to be with me every time I play poker or bingo, or watch the movies that he loved, and all of the movies I loved. He’ll be with me whenever I eat popcorn or have a starburst.”

I look my mom right in the eye.

“He’ll be with all of you too, in all of your favorite activities. Nobody can take away our memories of him. Nobody can, unless you let them. Things happen, and we just have to move on.”

And then there wasn’t a dry eye in the house.

Dad will be with us all, forever, until the end of time.

***

 

12/11

Someday, I hope the world will be easier to understand.

“When it’s raining, look for rainbows. When it’s dark, look for stars.”

 

The Portal of Time

One morning, on April 30th, 2017, Bob woke up and went to the market for milk. When he was walking, he saw an old man at the entrance to the market. He was pale but looked wise. He told Bob he would tell him the future if Bob paid him three dollars. Bob agreed because he wanted to know the future and because he did not want to die.

The man said, “When you wake up, Earth will interact with the past and the present. Everyone will find half of the world is prehistoric and half modern. You will live four years in the past/present like everyone else and then the world will change back.”

As Bob walked away, he wondered what the future would bring.

***

The next morning Bob woke up and screamed! He saw a dinosaur with a gaping jaw and huge tail eating leaves off of his palm tree! He rolled off the wrong side of his bed. One half was all right but the split between time had made half of his bed broken. He tumbled down into the ground. He was in shock so he did not feel any pain but still saw everything just as scary as when he had seen them from up in his bed. He was wondering about why he was seeing dinosaurs mixing with human life and his mind flashed back to the old man. He wondered if the old man could stop the dinosaurs. Bob traveled to the market, or what was left, to find the old man. Unfortunately, the man was being cornered by a velociraptor. Bob picked up a stick and tried to kill the velociraptor but Bob missed and the man was eaten. Bob lost all hope and fell asleep for four years because he was super stressed.

***

When he woke up, he was a dinosaur in prehistoric times! He had switched places and needed to get out of there before the asteroid that killed all the dinosaurs really killed him. His new body was difficult to move in because it was bulky and had stubby arms. He was a T-Rex and Bob thought he was hopeless for dinosaur life. The world was different and he would not be able to adapt. He wondered if once he was in that crazy time thing again he would turn into a human again. So he waited, and waited, and got bored. So he ate a dinosaur to fill his belly.

***

After a few years of exploring prehistoric life, the asteroid that killed the dinosaurs struck. The world turned gray, and smoke filled the air as dinosaurs perished. Bob was nervous but he knew he would be human. Soon, he perished and was floating in endless darkness when he saw a portal. He went through it and poof! He turned back to a human. Bob knew that listening to the old man probably caused this, so he knew if he got the conversation out of his mind the world would be the same again. Bob brainwashed himself so he would not be a dinosaur. Bob learned to never listen to old men who told the future.

 

One in a Million

 

PART 1

I run to the gates with my cheerleading skirt swaying and my blonde ponytail bouncing around. Alexia and Alison hug me as I pant.

“Happy birthday Alex!” I gasp, as she laughs.

“Thanks. I am having a big party! It is tonight and I am inviting the whole cheer squad. My place, 12. Be there, or else.” Alex laughs as she skips off to find her boyfriend. I forgot his name because it is her fifth boyfriend this week so I lost track.

* * * 

I do the rest of my homework and I slip on a dress. My tan skin glows as I rush over to Alex’s house. Alex is at the door, greeting me.

“Welcome to the biggest party of 2009 in Newton, Arizona!” she says with a drink in her hand.

“Is that wine?” I shout over the music.

“Maybe…come on! We are 18! Let’s live it up!” Alex sighs and I laugh. She is right–I need to live it up!

As I dance with Gracey and Em, the door creaks open. Alison comes in with her long, brown hair in a bun. Her red lipstick stands out brightly against her hot cocoa skin. She looks so beautiful. I stare like a madwoman. I fall in love with her instantly.

***

I walk into the halls with my head up high. This year was going to be better, I thought. I was driven out of my school in California. It was all because of me falling in love with Daphie. I loved her from the moment I saw her, but she didn’t love me back.

I told my best friend about me liking her, and she looked at me and ran away. The next day the whole school was buzzing about it, so I moved to my aunt’s place in Newton. Then my parents moved, and we got this big house up in the suburbs.

I walk around the school and I sigh. I am hopeless. I can’t find my way around a two-story school and I am doomed with my sense of direction.

Suddenly, a girl comes around the corner. She has very fair skin. Her blonde hair falls just below her shoulders. I can’t fall in love again. I can’t.

“Hey. You look lost,” she says with a smile on her face. By the look of her outfit, she’s a cheerleader. “Hello?” she asks again.

“Oh, yes. I am lost, I am looking for Mr. Jason’s class. Do you know where it is?” I ask, lifting my shoulders up like a magnet is pulling them.

“Hey! That’s my class! I can show you the way. My name is Alexandra, but people call me Alex. What’s yours?” she asks as she starts to walk. I run up next to her and she laughs.

“My name is Charlotte, but people call me Charlie. I am new,” I say casually. I really want to burst out jumping and screaming, “Yay!” but I don’t.

“I can see! I heard you are from California, right?”

“Yes, I lived in Hollywood. My aunt is a director and my uncle is an actor,” I say, strutting like I’ve made an achievement.

“Oh, famous family, I see. Well, meet us at lunch today, you seem nice. I can introduce you to my friends.”

“See you at lunch!” I say, running into my class.

***

“Alison…” I say, at a loss of words.

“What? Have I got something on my face?” she says, confused.

I want to say, “You look beautiful,” but instead I say, “Um…never mind.” I praise myself silently for not saying that out loud.

But what happened next changed my life forever.

 

PART 2

A girl enters the room with short, blonde hair above her shoulders. She wears a pink dress and a black purse was swung over her shoulders.

“Hey Alex! Why is there a party here? You know Aunt Kathy said no people are allowed over,” the girl shouts over to Alex.

“Okay Daphie, I will end the party…” She laughs and runs away. The girl rolls her eyes. “Mom doesn’t care, Daphie. I have parties all the time,” Alex says as she goes to her boyfriend.

Daphie… Daphie. There are a million people named Daphie, right? I close my eyes and pray as I feel someone gently tap my shoulder.

“Charlie? Is that you?” I turn around to see Daphie. I sigh and smile. I nod my head slowly.

“Hi!” I say, forcing a smile. I turn to meet Ali’s eyes. “Oh um…I think my friend needs help with…her food! Yeah her food! Bye!” I run over to Ali and she laughs.

“In a mad rush, I see.”

“Tell me about it!”

We laugh some more and she gasps.

“I am so tired…” she says.

“You drank so much Ali, I think I’ll drive you home.” I lead her by the hand into the front seat of my car. The rain is making my hair feel heavy on my head. She starts to giggle uncontrollably. Yeah, she for sure had too much to drink. The car suddenly comes to a stop. Ugh. Flat tire.

Ali looks at me as I sigh. She leans in and her lips land on mine. I push her away and a tear trickles down my cheek.

“I can’t, Ali. I just can’t.” I run out of the car and I sigh. I run home and I cry. I cry myself to sleep because she reminds me too much of Daphie. I go to sleep that night dreaming of them.

 

PART 3

Four months later …

It is a beautiful night as the wind sprays softly against the leaves. The leaves dance to the howling of the wind.

“Okay, truth or dare?” Ali asks me with a smirk.

“Truth.” I respond, lifting my shoulders.

“Okay, who is your crush?” she asks with a big smile.

I can’t say her. She would hate me. “Um, Kevin,” I say, anxious.

“My brother?” she asks with confusion in her eyes. Suddenly, that smirk turns into a smile.

One week later…

ALISON

Hey! Meet me at The White Lily. It is on 5th ave. Dress nice :). Xoxo Ali

I put on a blue strapless dress and I walk out the door.

Waiting there is Ali and her brother Kevin. Oh god.

“Ali…” I stutter.

“Thank me later. You know he likes you too. You are so lucky!” She laughs and runs away.

Ali is so annoying. I hate her sometimes.

The date was horrible, but I went on a second one, otherwise Ali would get suspicious. And I went on a third one and a fourth one until we were actually dating. I was with someone I disliked. Good for me.

 

PART 4

Nine years later…

“Honey, I am home!” Kevin shouts as he puts his jacket on the hook.

I hold Rosa in my arms. She has black hair and dark skin. I adopted her one year ago when she was one month old. Her mother died in Africa at her birth. My beautiful Rosa.

I twist my diamond ring as he plants a kiss on my cheek. I smile as I hand him Rosa.

“Where is Emma?” Kevin asks, shrugging his shoulders. I laugh.

“In her room doing homework.” I smile. Emma is seven years old. We also adopted her since I am infertile because of a surgery when I was 16.

***

Two years later …

“29-year-old Charlotte Reynolds today committed suicide at 12:32 pm. Her suicide note only said this: ‘Love is a path everyone should follow.’ It is a sad death that everyone should mourn. It will be a mystery why.”

A picture of a girl with blonde hair and tan skin appears, smiling with her grey eyes.

“We will all gather at the park to mourn her death. She was loved by many.”

Alison Reynolds cried with her brother. Only she knew why Charlie died. She loved Charlie with all her heart. She was her one and only true love. Only now did she realize Charlie loved her back…

 

THE END

 

Eggs

One day, I walked down the dirt road on my way home from school. As I rounded the corner, I noticed a small, blue tassel bag lying in the bushes. As I approached, it I saw the intricate and complicated lines of a thin, gold thread woven in and out of the blue canvas pouch. The thread drew winding, dragon-like creatures with wings and fiery breath. I knelt down to pick up the pouch and ran off.

Later that night I opened up the bag to reveal a small leather rectangular box. I carefully opened the box, holding my breath. I opened my eyes and let out my breath. Inside were seven eggs. Each were completely unique, and none had the same color or pattern. One was all white with thin gold streaks, while another was a navy blue with a small star in the middle. That night I rushed to bed, wondering what could possibly be inside of the eggs.

The next morning, I awoke at the crack of dawn. I rushed to the table where I had put the box of the eggs. I slowly opened it, almost as nervous as the first time I opened this mythical box. I was just in time! The eggs began to crack and out crawled the seven little creatures. The first one to come out was a small cloud-like creature that jumped into my hand only to disappear immediately. I looked around the room, confused as to where the funny creature might have gone. I looked back down at the other eggs and saw the cloud creature reappear right back in my hand! The second thing to come out was a small rabbit with beautiful, intricate lines, forever changing colors and designs. The rabbit itself was exactly like every other rabbit but nearly ten times smaller. Immediately after it hatched, the rabbit sprang away, perhaps in search of food. I quickly realized that the animals might be a tad hungry after hatching. I got up and ran to the kitchen and grabbed pretty much anything I thought might please a mythical beast. I came back with a sliced apple, Chinese leftovers, nuts and seeds, along with a banana. I poured out a bowl of water, too. I hurried back in time to catch the fifth creature hatching. The three others consisted of a tiny silverback or male gorillait was currently pounding its chest and running to the apple slices and banana. The fourth was a small fox licking its paws. It had bright red fur with a cream colored chest. Its tail was extremely fluffy, and I was very tempted to pick it up and brush her tiny tail. The fifth was a creature similar to the silverback although it was standing on two legs and looked like a yeti or Bigfoot. The food was being devoured very quickly and I had to make a few more trips back to the kitchen. The sixth creature was a tree. The tree, however, had a face with two eyes, a mouth, and a nose. The tree slowly opened its eyesthey were green with hints of blue and gold. His leaves spread far above his trunk and they were an emerald-green against the soil colored branches. The seventh creature was the strangest of them all. It was a tiny human and he had a stick, a hat, boots, clothes, and a jacket that seemed a bit too big. The human looked up at me while I stared at him in awe. He jumped up on my shoulder and jumped again, over my head onto my other shoulder. He took a final leap into the water bowl.

As I remember that day, I think about how I now live with them, go on adventures with them, and wake up every day with them. They have showed me so many things, given me so many things. Literally just last week the little human, who I’ve named Tam Lin, found an emerald in my toilet pipes. Also, the tree (Arlo) knows the infinite past, even before the world was created. Arlo also knows about everything in the universe. That’s pretty impressive, right? The creatures have their own way of mating too. They break off a part of themselves and mix it together. A couple of days later, the mixture takes form into a hybrid of the two parents. Within months, there were almost 20 new creatures.

All of these creatures are equally interesting. They have showed me more than I could imagine. I wish that everyone in the world could experience something like this. Everyone deserves an abnormal or strange life, you can’t have any fun if your life is just a pattern.

 

The End

The Adventures of Bowser and Chip

Hi! My name is Bowser and this is my friend, Chip. I am a golden retriever puppy, and Chip is a black, white, and tan Cavalier King Charles spaniel puppy. Right now, we are in the pound. Anyway, this is our life.

In the morning, we wake up on our very uncomfortable beds with this yucky soup in front of our noses and it smells disgusting. Anyway, you get that it is disgusting. Then, here comes the boring part, we bark for the rest of the day until the dog catcher (Bob) comes back with another dog.

One day, two girls came in, and they looked at all of us. I was trying to cross my paws but it was hard. Anyway, getting back to the story, they took 15 minutes. I was surprised, but people choose at different paces. Finally, they chose.

“I want Bowser,” said the younger girl. I was so happy. But what about Chip?

Now I was happy and scared, and then the older girl said, “I want…Chip!”

Chip and I jumped for joy. Bob picked us out of our crates and handed us to the two girls. Then, they paid for us and took us outside. The summer breeze brushed against our fur, ruffling it up. They took us into the car and the younger girl, named Sam, picked us up and put us in the back seat. Then, she sat with us. The older girl, Bella, started driving out of the parking lot.

I stuck my head out the window and started to bark. Chip wanted to get up too, but she was too tiny. So, she climbed on my back. Suddenly, the car screeched.

“We’re here!” said the older girl.

This time, Bella took out Chip and Sam took out me. They put us on the ground and we ran around in the yard. We couldn’t wait to go inside.

Bella opened the door and said, “Mom, we’re home!”

Then, a grown-up came and said, “These dogs are so cute!” I guess that was the mom.

Then, the dad came out and said, “Who wants some lemonade in the backyard?”

I tried to raise my paw. Chip and I ran outside again and Sam came after us. We ran two laps around the house, then she got us, carried us to the backyard, and closed the gate. Their dad poured us a big bowl of lemonade and put it on the ground. We drank it as fast as we could. It was very yummy and sweet. We pushed our bowl to the dad’s feet.

He said, “Oh you guys want more?”

And he poured us a big bowl of lemonade. We were so happy. We drank it, and we drank it all.

“Dinnertime!” called the mom. Chip and I ran through the door.

Sam stopped for a minute and scratched her head. “Maybe we should get a doggie door for them.”

“Okay,” their dad said. “Maybe we’ll go to Petco tomorrow.”

“Great!” said Sam.

Bella and Mom were setting the table. Chip was sniffing the kitchen.“This kitchen smells yummy.”

I sniffed. “You’re right!”

We went out to our bowls. There were yummy kibble all over! I howled and wagged my tail!

Chip said to me, “Finally! Yummy food!”

We ate all the food and licked the bowl clean.

“Bedtime!” called Dad.

Bella and Sam raced up the stairs. Then, me and Chip. I won. I ran to Sam’s room and Chip ran to Bella’s room. They were both brushing their teeth. Sam came out, picked me up, and put me on her bed. I sank into the mattress. It was puffy and soft. It was so much more comfortable than the one in the pound! She got in and, as soon as she laid down on her bed, she fell asleep.

***

“Cock-a-doodle-doo!” said the rooster on the roof.

“It’s morning,” I barked. Sam woke up. I looked at her then I rushed down the stairs.

“Wait,” she said as she ran down the stairs.

I waited at the bottom of the staircase with my tail wagging and my tongue hanging out of my mouth.

Sam came running down the stairs and picked me up and giggled, “You’re such a naughty dog, Bowser!”

I gave her a small grin, and she laughed. She put me down. I walked into the kitchen. The sweet smell of my new food was going up my nose. Chip wasn’t down in the kitchen yet. So I waited for her. While they weren’t looking, I jumped up on the chair and grabbed a piece of pancake on the table… but they never noticed! The pancake tasted sweet and sticky! It was one of the most yummiest things I’ve ever tasted in my life.

Then, I heard the soft click of Chip’s nails on the staircase.

“Good morning,” Chip said to me as she walked into the kitchen. “It smells good in here!”

“Yeah, it does, right?” I said.

We went over to our bowls. We smelled it (it smelled like dog food, but not the kind of dog food we had in the pound, the kind of dog food that tastes really good.) and then we ate it all.

“That was so good!” I said to Chip.

“Yeah it was!” said Chip.

We looked out the window. It was a nice summer day. Bella and Sam took us to Petco after breakfast. We walked without leashes, but we were going to get some just in case the dogcatcher came and took us away. Or at least that’s why I thought we were going to get them.

When we got there, we looked at all the doggie doors they had. Finally, Chip and I chose one that was blue and pink, both of our favorite colors. My favorite color is pink, and Chip’s favorite color is blue, so it was perfect for us.

When we got home, Dad cut a hole in the backyard door and installed the doggie door. Chip and I ran through the front door and out through the backdoor. It was so fun, we tried it ten times. Soon we got dizzy, and we fell on the kitchen floor. Sam and Bella picked us up, put us on the couch, and sat with us. When we woke up, Bella was looking on her phone, and Sam was just watching us.

“Why are you always on your phone?” Sam asked Bella calmly, trying to ignore her. “Why don’t you spend some time with the dogs?”

“Can’t you just leave me alone?” Bella said, in a mean voice.

“Sam, Bella, be nice to each other!” Mom called from the kitchen.

“Okay,” both of therm said in a grumpy voice.

Chip and I were watching the whole conversation. We were very confused about what was happening. But whatever, let’s get back to the story. As soon as Bella left the room, we started licking Sam to make her feel better because we thought she looked sad. Then, she got up and stomped around the coffee table angrily. Then, she stomped into the kitchen. Chip and I jumped down from the sofa and ran after Sam.

When we got into the kitchen, Dad was washing the dishes, and Mom was setting up the table for lunch.

“What’s wrong?” Dad asked.

“Bella just won’t spend any time with the dogs.”

“It’s okay. She’s older. Let her do what she wants.”

“Fine,” Sam groaned and walked into the dining room and sat down on her chair. Soon, Dad called, “Lunch time!” to Bella and she came down.

Mom said, “I have special news for you guys!”

“What is it?” Sam asked, her frown turning into a smile.

“We’re going to Hawaii.”

Bella screamed and dropped her phone. The back case fell off, but she didn’t care. “When are we going?” she screamed.

“Tomorrow night, so you have time to pack.”

“I need to start packing right away!” said Bella.

“First, you need to eat lunch,” said Mom and pulled her daughter by the arm back to the table.

“Fine,” she groaned and ate her sandwich as fast as possible.

Chip and I didn’t notice until Sam bent down and said, “We’re going to Hawaii. Please keep the house safe.”

We decided from that moment to be the guard dogs.

The next morning, Sam and Bella woke up at 5:00 a.m. to start packing. Chip and I brought all their stuff to them when they pointed to it. It was kind of fun! We got to carry their backpacks, notebooks, shirts, shorts, and headbands. We wondered why they got up so early, because they had at least 12 hours until their flight. But I guess they just wanted to pack early. So Chip and I brought their sunglasses.

We were a little sad that they were leaving. But we were happy that we could keep the house safe, or at least the nanny that was staying with us would. We heard that they were giving us a nanny. We thought we would be staying here alone, but I guess not. Anyway, we can still protect the house, and that’s what’s important.

Then, Chip asked, “How long are they going to be there?”

“I don’t know,” I said. “Maybe we can go check Mom and Dad’s calendar in their room. Maybe they wrote it in!”

So we ran into the hallway, our paws skidding on the wood floor. Then, we ran down to Mom and Dad’s room. We passed Bella’s room. Then, we passed the bathroom. Then, we passed Dad’s office. And then, we passed Mom’s office. Then, finally, we reached their bedroom. And there it was: the calendar was right on the bed, and July 8th to July 22nd was highlighted in blue.

As soon as we saw it, Chip said automatically, “That’s two weeks!”

I was still counting in my head!

“Sam! Bella!” called Mom and Dad. We ran down the hallway again and jumped down the stairs. Sam and Bella came right behind us.

“Yes?” Sam and Bella said.

“Do you want to go get some tags for Bowser and Chip before we leave in case they get lost?”

“Sure!” They said.

So Mom grabbed the keys, and Dad grabbed me and Chip, and said, “Come on little guys! We’re going to Petco again!”

So Chip and I barked and ran along. Soon, we were at Petco. The sliding doors opened as we walked through. We walked to the tag-making machine, a big square, that looked kind of like an ATM! Sam showed us each color in front of our faces, and if we didn’t like it, we put our ears down. And if we liked it, we put our ears up! At that point, we chose pink and blue tags. I picked pink, and Chip picked blue!

We loved going to Petco because some of our best friends lived there, like Pinky the Guinea Pig and Squeaky the Mouse. And we have one friend that’s kind of unusual… Her name is Silky the Cat and she loves to play with her friends, but sometimes she gets really excited and she scratches them, or she sits on them. And the reason why she sits on them is because they’re mice and they’re tiny. But she’s friendly with us because we’re too big and she can’t sit on us! Bella knew about our friends so she took us to see our friends. We had a fun time.

Then, Bella’s dad told us to come so we said goodbye to our friends and ran to him in the dog food section. We paid for the tags at the cash register and then we left.

When we got home, Dad said, “Uh-oh! We’re a bit late. We’ve got to go now.”

So Bella and Sam said goodbye to us, and they left. We noticed the nanny sitting on the couch in the living room watching TV. Chip started running towards her, but I pulled her back because we had no idea who she was and what she was doing here.

Chip said, “Why are you doing that?! I want to say hi to the nanny.”

I said, “Oh! So that’s who she is!” and I let Chip go over. She ran to the nanny and jumped on her lap.

The nanny said, “Hello! What’s your name?”

Chip put up her head so the nanny could see her tag.

The nanny said, “Oh! You’re Chip! And who’s your friend over there?”

So Chip dragged me over to her, saying, “Come Bowser! Meet the new nanny. She’s really nice.”

I said, “Okay,” because after Chip said hello to the nanny, and she was nice to her so I thought she would be nice to me too! Chip told me to lift up my head so she could see my tag. So I did.

She said, “Oh! You’re Bowser! I’m Kathleen. I’ll be spending the next few weeks with you.”

“Okay!” We both barked.

“And we’ll have a great time. I’ll take you to the park, and I’ll give you lots of yummy food. But not too much! Otherwise, you’ll get sick.”

A few minutes later, she said, “Bowser and Chip, lunch is ready!”

We ran into the kitchen, the smell of our delicious new food came through the air. We both stopped and sniffed the air.

“Yummy!” Chip said.

“Yumzo,” I said.

The last time we had it, it tasted like something so delicious, I can’t even explain it. Wait! I can! It was the yummiest chicken noodle soup in the whole entire universe! The next thing we knew, we were smashing our faces into the bowl. It was so good. Soon, we finished it, and Kathleen gave us some more. We smashed our faces into that too, and then we ate it.

Then, she said, “That’s enough. You guys want to go to the park?”

We barked, “Yes!”

She put on our leashes and collars and took us outside. It was a really nice, sunny day with a little wind. We went to the doggie playground, and we met our friend Ziggy from the pound! He got adopted a few days before us! He was a French bulldog with a French accent. We know a bit of French because he taught us in the pound, but after he got adopted, we didn’t know if we would ever see him again.

When we walked up to him, he said, “Bonjour!”

We said, “Bonjour!”

He said, “Comment ca va?”

We said, “Ca va bien, et toi?”

Ziggy said, “Moi aussi.”

And then we said, “Can we speak in English now? We’re kind of having a hard time…”

He said, “Okay!” And then we had a conversation about how happy we were to be adopted and how we met him again!

Then, we went home and took a little nap. After that, we went to the park again because it was such a nice day. We were sitting on a bench with Kathleen when we saw two people across from us sitting on another bench.

A minute later, Kathleen said, “I’ll be right back. I’m going to get you guys some water, and me some lemonade, at the little food stand right down there.”

We looked down there. Then, she walked off. A couple minutes later, the two people who were on the bench in front of us got up and ran to get us. We ran away as fast as we could but then one of them caught Chip, because her legs were smaller. So, I decided to give up and let them take us because they took Chip. And me and Chip were best friends. As we were walking through the park, they held us so tight it was hard to breathe. But, I kind of moved around on the person that was holding me, and so her arms loosened up. So Chip did the same too.

Once the two people carried us for about ten minutes, Chip said to me, “I think that those are Bella’s friends. I know that because today when we were in the park, they were looking at us. Also when they were at our house, they were wearing the same clothes that they are wearing today. So, that gives me a lot of information about them.”  

“Oh no, I think they want to steal us! But maybe they aren’t nice to us,” I said in a very, very, nervous voice.

“It will be okay, you’ll be with me the whole time,” said Chip.

That calmed me down a little bit, but still, we were stolen by our owner’s own friends! That was really weird when I said it. Eh, whatever! Soon we were at what seemed to be Bella’s friends’ house. Their house was different from our house, Their house was cream-colored and ours was brick, and their door was dark blue and ours was brown. Then all of a sudden, the door opened and we were in the house. Then, one of the girls called out to her mom that she found some dogs on the street and that she wanted to keep us.

The mom said, “You can keep them if they do not have a collar.”

One of the girls quickly took off our collars and threw them in the yard.

“But I like that collar! That’s my favorite color!” I said in a sad voice.

“Okay,” they said. Then, they ran up the stairs with us in their hands.

Later that night, the two girls were asleep. I pushed the window open and and let Chip jump out. Then I jumped out. Then, we started running down the street. I remembered that we lived on Ellington Road, and they also lived on Ellington Road, so all we had to do was go down a few houses and we would be there! So Chip and I started to go down the street. Soon, we were there. We went through the doggy door and went into our beds and fell asleep.

The next morning, we had our yummy breakfast.

Then Kathleen said, “I thought you guys went home while I was getting us some water and lemonade! Well, Bella, Sam, and their parents are coming home this morning.”

Then, suddenly, the doorbell rang, and we saw Bella’s friends’ mom. Kathleen opened the door.

The mom said, “I found Bowser and Chip’s collars on the ground.”  

“Thank you,” Kathleen said, and closed the door.

She put the collars back on us, and then we heard another ding-dong. It was Bella, Sam, and their parents. They were back. Yay! Chip and I played with Bella and Sam for the rest of day. We had so much fun. Then, it was time to go to bed. Chip and I dreamed about Bella and Sam and how we would play for the rest of our lives. And this was true because we would live with them for the rest of our lives!

 

The End  

 

Chip says, “Bye!”       

 

The Dark Thing

There is something under the [[bed]]. [[Who]] is it? What is [[it?]] It could just be a [[mouse]]… [[Right?]] No. It [[looks]] too big. No. It [[sounds]] too big for a mouse. [[help]]. [[Growling]] is coming from under the bed. The [[shadows]] are everywhere. You are [[alone.]] [[Alone]]. The wind is howling, the air is [[cold.]] [[Freezing.]] The only thing you can hear is a dark… [[dark…]] [[laugh.]] there is [[positively]], [[definitely]].. [[Something under the bed.]]

Stem curled up in his blankets, attempting to warm himself up. It didn’t work very well, but at least it would warm up in a while. The dark and terrible laughing continued. The wind continued to howl. Trying to go to sleep in the alien forest was such a [[bad idea.]] But the bed was just there! And how was he supposed to get back to the [[satellite?]]

Finally, gaining all of the courage that he could muster, the four-year-old shouted, “Stop it! I’m trying to sleep!”  

The laughing stopped quickly, and the coldest wind blew into the bed. Fed up with all of this nonsense, Stem stood up on the bed and jumped off of the bed. [[Bad Idea.]] Whatever was [[laughing earlier]] grabbed his ankle and pulled  him under.  Stem fell down a deep, dark hole and landed, breaking all of his [[bones]] into a cage. He looked up, with the [[one bone]] that wasn’t broken, his spine. Before him was a being from [[another realm.]] It had two eyes, no, five. There were three under his left eye. All of them were a milky white. Its entire body seemed to be made out of shadows–no, a fire. A fire made out of shadows; a shadow fire. It made him feel like he would never be happy and unafraid. He felt like his heart had [[pneumonoultramicroscopicsilicovolcanoconiosis.]] — he was very good with words.

[[“How very interesting. Your soul isn’t enough, though. I’d hate to waste a potential ally. Oh well. Goodbye.”]]

Suddenly, Stem woke up back in his satellite home.

 

Dragon Days

 

CHAPTER 1

Once upon a time, there was a little boy. His name was Timmy. He loved to play with his pet hamster. One day, they went to the playground to the sand box. He noticed that someone had dug to the bottom. He stepped towards it and fell right to the bottom.

“Grrrr,” something said.

“Grrr,” it said again. He saw a pair of red glowing eyes. They seemed to get closer and closer and then… wham! He got whacked in the face! He woke up about one hour later. He was lying close to a fire. He realised that when he fell down, something or someone had hit him and knocked him back, but what was it?   

 

CHAPTER 2

He lay there, sad and alone all by himself. Then, suddenly it hit him. It was a dragon!

He saw the end of the cave and started walking. There were dead fish skeletons everywhere. They were gooey and green. It was gross. He saw dragon skin and then, suddenly, there was a pair of red eyes glowing very close to the ceiling. They were enormous! But it was kind of cute when it stepped out. Timmy learned that the dragon was good, and over time, they became friends. Until one day, the world turned upside down. Somehow, the cave seemed different, and the dragon was gone!

 

CHAPTER 3

He frantically looked around. He was very worried about the dragon. He heard the dragon’s roar. It sounded like he was hurt! Timmy rushed towards the sound of his roar. Then, suddenly, the sounds stopped. Timmy stopped, and everything went silent. His whole world stopped, and the ground shook. Timmy fell to the ground. He saw birds flying around. He was knocked out!

He woke up, and the cave had closed in, and Timmy had hurt his leg badly. He tried to walk, but he couldn’t! And there was hole in the ceiling! He saw the sky, but it wasn’t bright blue. It was dark grey! He realised that it wasn’t an earthquake. It was a hurricane! He leaned over as far as he could, and finally reached far enough so he could push off the rocks. He quickly slumped over to the other side of the cave where there was no hole above him, and he tried to hide. Suddenly, he heard a booming sound above. Then, a crash. He was scared. Then, suddenly, water came rushing down through the hole. He had to get away.

Then, he remembered that one day, that there was a secret chamber by the old fireplace. Before the water could reach him, he tried to climb up above and then, like a monkey, he swung right over to the fireplace and pushed it over. There was a deep tunnel down there with a ladder. He climbed down the ladder and pulled the fireplace back over.  He was breathing very hard now. But, still there was more to do. He continued down the ladder, and found an underground home. There were broken beds, a bent sink, no toilet, and in the middle of the room, there was a gem, a little blue gem. He limped over toward the gem and saw something very peculiar in it. There was this little, small, black dot inside the gem. He decided he probably shouldn’t touch it. He walked away. He tried to fix things up a little bit, at least so that he could stay there until the hurricane passed over.

He found a dirty blanket in the cupboard and put it over the bed. The bed still had a mattress, but it was very dusty. Then, he felt like he was missing something. Or someone. Then, it struck his mind.

“Dragon!!!” he screamed.

He ran towards the ladder, but then stopped.

“I can’t go out there. I’ll drown.” He walked back, but something looked familiar. The kitchen had looked very familiar to him, like he had seen it before or he had been there before. But, he didn’t know when. So, he ignored it.

He was exhausted from what he had done to get up there. He laydown on the bed. When he put his head down on the pillow, dust flew up everywhere. He started to cough, but then it cleared. Soon, he fell fast asleep.

 

CHAPTER 4

Then, he felt his stomach grumble. He was starving! He jumped out of bed and ran to the kitchen. He looked in the cupboard, but all there was in there was some pretzels and crackers. When he got to the end of the bag of pretzels, he found a paper. The paper was a picture of the dragon. It was a picture of the dragon chained up. On the front of the paper, the chains were lit up. He realized it was draining the dragon’s powers. He touched the picture of the dragon’s wing, and it glowed. This was the moment of his goal. His goal was to help the dragon and figure out why he got chained up.

He touched the other wing. It glowed. The whole thing lit up! Then, the black dot in the gem made it light up. The gem turned black. A dark purple portal opened into the cave house. But then, he saw shadows though the gem. Then, something jumped out of the portal.

At first, Timmy was like, “What in the world is that?” Then, something very odd happened. It jumped on him, and more things came over. It felt slimy but heavy. As more things jumped on him, he saw one of them that had one eye. Their ears were very pointy. Then, he thought, I’ve seen those before. They were goblins from the underworld!! He tried to kick them off. Kick, kick, kick, kick, kick. He scrambled to the ladder. He went up to the top, but he didn’t push the fireplace over. The goblins tried to climb up, but they were way too short.

He accidentally pushed over the fireplace. He braced for water rushing down. But, nothing happened. He peeked his head out, and he saw some puddles, a tree branch, and the dragon. He was on top of the ceiling. He was clinging to the ceiling.

Meanwhile, the goblins were still after him! But then, he forgot about the gem. He closed the fireplace. He slid back down the ladder and kicked one of the goblins in the face. Wham! And he knocked him all the way back into the portal. Now, he knew what to do. He could kick all the goblins back into the portal by using the tree branch that had fallen over. The gem was getting darker and darker. He whacked them one by one. Whack, whack, whack, whack, whack, whack, whack! There were three more left. He could get them all in one whack. He ran towards them. They stopped. He hid the tree branch behind his back and suddenly, he hit them right in the face, up the nose like an uppercut punch and back into where they came from. He took the gem off the stand and as the portal was still open, he threw the gem back into the portal and suddenly, it closed. Once the gem was completely into the portal, he ran towards the ladder, pushed the fireplace completely over, brought the stick, and climbed up the walls like a monkey and towards the dragon – as far as he could get.

And he saw the dragon’s wing literally hanging backwards. He gasped.

“Dragon, are you okay?” he screamed.

 

CHAPTER 5

Timmy scrambled across the ceiling over to the dragon by hanging onto vines and on the last line, it was just close enough to reach for the dragon’s wing and jump right onto it. He climbed up to the shoulder socket and realized that it was out of the place.

“Huhh!” he gasped. He climbed back over to the vine, swung back over to the dragon’s wing, and kicked the wing up.

The dragon roared.

Timmy had popped the wing back in! Yay!!! Now, the dragon could fly. Timmy jumped onto dragon and tried to fly towards the opening in the ceiling.

His wing flapped, flapped, flapped higher and higher towards the hole.

“It works! The dragon’s wing is fixed!”

They saw a bright light.

Timmy cried, “Yess!!”

Timmy was going home.

***

As they emerged from the hole, Timmy saw the destroyed playground. The slide was flipped upside down, the swings were twisted up, and the see-saw was on top of the slide. Everything was destroyed. Except for a tiny sand castle.

The playground was deserted. The hurricane must have made everyone go back to their homes to try and take cover. Timmy and the dragon flew above the clouds, but the storm hadn’t fully passed. It was still drizzling, and the clouds were still grey.

Timmy felt scared. He was worried that he might never find a home. He didn’t know who his parents were, so he wanted to find a home.

“What are we gonna do?” Timmy said to the dragon.

The dragon turned his head to the side and looked at Timmy. Then, suddenly, they saw a small house on top of a hill. He remembered this place from when he was a child. Timmy realized that that was his home.     

Then, he said, “I’m going hooooommme!”

                                                           The End

 

The Three Witches

 

Chapter One

Once upon a time, there were three witches. Their names were Violet, Aliss, and Kate. They all had magic wands, and the three witches had special magic spells, and a special magic school. They lived on top of the sky of the Earth, and above them was a friendly planet named Perth.

Violet had orange hair and a blue wand. She liked hearts. Her special power was to create heart designs anywhere. Aliss had blue hair and a gold wand. Kate had silver hair and a red wand.

 

Perth was green because it had pollution from Earth. (That’s why it has a “P.”) Aliens from Mars started to invade Perth because they liked the pollution. It was yummy for them, like cake. The aliens looked like garbage trash cans. Their heads were like smelly toe goo and earwax. Their hair was made of toilet paper tissue, and their brains were popping out. Their brains were made out of boogers. The water they drank was toilet water. These aliens were called Carbon Dioxide aliens.

Earthlings had no idea about these aliens, until Perth scientists came to Earth. They captured one of the aliens in a cage in the 1950s and found out that if you cooked the aliens, they would taste like cake because the garbage in them was cake! But they smelled like rotten fish. Perth scientists fried them and tried them in all kinds of ways. Then they made up the oven zipper, a quick oven that could cook things very fastly!

The three witches were brought from Uranus to live on top of the sky of the Earth, but they didn’t know about the aliens until the Lord told them. They found that above them was Perth! All of them thought it was ugly!

Violet said, “The aliens are ugly too!”

Kate said, “I think the same!”

Aliss said, “Me three!”

So they used their wands, and they made things appear, like weird people who liked to eat pollution, and sucked up all the pollution like a vacuum. Perth looked just like the rainforest without animals. It smelled like nature and pretzels.

The aliens said, “We want more pollution!”  

The witches sent the aliens back to the middle of nowhere.

God thanked them. The people of Earth would have thanked the witches, but they didn’t know about Perth or the three witches.

 

The End

 

The Butter Story

Once upon a time, there was a butter named Butter. One day, he got eaten by a man. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he ran away, but fell on a piece of toast. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he ran over the toast, but a can of jelly got poured over him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he knocked over the jelly and ran over the toast, but he fell onto a pancake. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he ran over the pancake, but a can of syrup got poured on him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he knocked over the syrup and ran over the pancake, but fell into a waffle. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he tried to run over the waffle, but he couldn’t climb over the squares. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he got a ladder and climbed over the squares, but then another can of syrup got poured on him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.
Then there was another butter. He knocked over the syrup and used the ladder to climb the waffle. Then, he fell onto an English muffin. He got spiked. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. He wore a bulletproof vest. Then he tried to jump over the English muffin, but another can of jelly got poured on him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he knocked over the jelly and used his vest to save him from the English muffin. But then, he fell onto a bagel. He was about to get eaten, but then he found a hole in the bagel. He jumped through it and escaped. Unfortunately, he hit the ground too hard and died.

Then there was another butter. He got a parachute, and when he fell from the bagel, he landed softly. Unfortunately, he was made of butter and he slipped. The man found him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. Then he got sticky boots. He walked on the ground without slipping. Unfortunately, he walked into the oven. He melted. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. He walked away from the oven. Unfortunately, there was no exit. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. He got a piece of dynamite and blew up the house. Unfortunately, he blew himself up. Then he died.

Then there was another butter. He ran away but fell into a hole. A bunny found him. Then he got eaten. Then he died.

Then the bunny called all of his friends. They ate all of the butters. Then butter went extinct. The end.

 

Jeff and Timmy Save the World

The glass shattered. The clock stopped. It felt like the whole world stopped. It was the end — game over. First, the lights went out, and then, the cars stopped. Next, the weapons broke in half and, as the disease spread, the virus hit the people nearest to it first — spreading forward, backward, and all over.

People started to run like the wind, and they didn’t stop until they got to where they were safe.

* * *

It was the smell that woke Jeff up every morning. He wished that he didn’t have to wake up, that he could keep on dreaming. He wanted to keep on dreaming about the way life used to be, instead of laying on the floor of his school gym with at least a hundred other people who hadn’t taken a shower since they had locked themselves away in the school.

He didn’t understand how his parents and the other grown ups could tell who had been infected with the Merde Disease or not – for all he knew, the person next to him could be infected, or HE could be himself. He also didn’t understand why they all had to lock themselves in the gym and huddle together at nighttime when, during the day, they could roam the school. He DID know that some of the grown ups were arguing that they needed to go out and scavenge for food and another water source – Jeff couldn’t argue with that. All they had been eating were the very moldy and old, canned dog food and beans, and they were drinking the salted and rusted sink water.

So, of course he wanted to go with whoever volunteered.

Who happened to be his own mother.

When the virus from the Merde Disease infects a body, it looks as if leeches are covering its face, arms, and torso – and each of the leeches have two brains. It’s a fact – so that’s double, evil brains. I know, it’s horrible, and I wrote this for you future guys.  And you’re lucky you have fresh water and a real bathroom, and I bet the 21-year-old Maserati Project is done.  

Anyway, back to the story of Jeff, who also happens to be me if you haven’t figured that out by now.

My mother wasn’t too keen on letting me come along. After all, I was only eleven.

“But mom – I’m dying in here! And I can help – you know I can.” And nobody else had volunteered.

“Oh, let him go Giselle,” my dad said. “We’ve got a 50/50 chance wherever we are.”

My dad walked us down to the front doors and unbolted them. We stepped outside and breathed in the delicious fresh air — the world hadn’t quite ended, just as I’d suspected. Still, my heart gave a little jump when I heard the door lock behind me.

“Ready, Jeff?” Mom said.

“Ready,” I said firmly.

“There’s the car,” Giselle said.

“Yup,” I said. “That’s the car.”

“Yep.”

“Oh.” There really wasn’t much to say.

So, we drove around, hoping to find some water and food. We had already scavenged our town, so we had to head over to the next one. After driving for a long time, we saw a broken deli with the roof blown off and the windows cracked and shattered. We got out of the car and started walking towards the store. I looked at the windows, and I saw my reflection – my orange flat hair and my freckles looked darker than ever, and my skin was so pale because I was too nervous to be hopeful. We peeked into the store, and I fell to my knees with joy because I saw candy and milk, and no zombies. I dared to hope that there were other supplies as well. The refrigerators were broken, so we didn’t want the milk, but there were plenty of bottles of water. Looking around some more, we found a few bags of chips and several cans of tuna, along with the water and candy. We went back and forth a bunch of times to the car to get as much as we could. On my last look around, I heard a sound and went in the back of the store. There was a scrawny, black alley cat meowing. I picked him up, and he had a collar on. TIMMY, it read.

“Hey, Timmy,” I said, and he purred.

My mom was taking money out of the cash register. There was only about $50.

“Yeah, we don’t use cash anymore, but you never know.”

Then, she saw Timmy in my arms and raised her eyebrows at me.

“We’re keeping him.” She just nodded. We got back into the car, and Mom started driving.

Soon, the car sputtered.

“Oh darn. We must need gas or something.” The odometer had been broken, so we never knew how much gas was in the car. It came to a complete stop.

“We saw a gas station nearby, didn’t we?” I asked Mom.

“Let’s go.”

We got out of the car, and as I closed the door, I saw Timmy’s pouty face and big cat eyes. I couldn’t leave him behind – what if something happened to him? So I picked him up, settled him in my arms, and we started walking, hoping to find a gas station. Fortunately, it wasn’t far, and it looked like someone was there.

But as we got closer, we realized he looked dead – but he was alive. His body made spastic movements, going crazy for sure. So we grabbed a bottle of gas and began walking back to the car. But when we looked behind us, he was slowly following us. But then he started running, so we ran as fast as we could back to the car. He was running fast for an infected person. I was terrified, and Timmy was shrieking, but then he fell down and scraped up his face which slowed him down only a little.

In the meantime, my mom was able to quickly pour the gas in the hole of the car. We were able to get away and drive off.

By the time we got home, everyone was so happy to see us and the food. However, a few members of our community had passed. I started looking at everyone closely for signs of infection.

But we still needed to celebrate, so we had a big feast.

But before we went to bed, Timmy and I had an idea to go out alone and try to find a cure for this sickness before everyone got even more infected.

So when we went out in the morning, Timmy started sniffing the air right away, and then, he started to lick me! I knelt down to pet him, and he licked my arms and hands. I started to walk out, but Timmy wouldn’t budge, so I decided to stay back yet another day.

People were really starting to get sick and I didn’t know how long we were going to last. Timmy licked my mom, but he wouldn’t lick anybody else. (Well, he tried to lick my dad, but my dad pushed him away saying, “I don’t want to be licked by a stray cat!”)

The next morning I woke up and started to wake everyone else up. After that, I asked my mom if we could go out and take a walk to just get to know everything.

“Yes honey, just stay close.” So, we walked out with Timmy following us and met a man. Although he looked okay, I stayed away.  Then, I recognized him — it was the crazy guy!

“Mom! It’s the guy! Let’s go!”  

We started running, but he was prepared this time. He had a knife and started slashing at us. He missed and then threw it at Timmy! Right in the heart!

We picked Timmy up and ran back inside.

“Timmy! I’m sorry are you okay?” I said, holding him in my arms. When I looked at Timmy, his eyes were still open and his heart was pumping, but he had metal sticking out of him.

“Is that the knife?” My mom asked.

“I don’t think… Wow!” I took out the piece of metal and realized that Timmy was a robot. Timmy was made of metal and covered in fur. But he was holding some kind of blue poison or liquid which was leaking, so I opened it more (it was strange to think I was opening Timmy!). I saw that he was kind of like a case protecting the liquid, so I thought that maybe the liquid was very important. On the case was a label that said: ANTIDOTE FOR THE MERDE DISEASE!!!

My mom was so surprised that she started jumping and yelling. “Everyone! Jeff found a cure! Jeff found a cure!”  

“I think the way to be cured is through Timmy’s saliva. So, we should put the antidote back in him and let him lick everyone.”

My mom responded by giving me a big hug.

It was a good thing I did, too, because Timmy had been frozen when I took out the case. When I put it back in him, he was back to his old self. “Ready to save the world Timmy?”

Everyone gathered around, and Timmy started licking them. But I wondered where dad was, and we looked everywhere, but we couldn’t find him. In the last place we looked, we found him he was in the bathroom, dead. He was 100% D-E-A-D.

At least, I had my mom and a billion dollars for finding and duplicating the cure for the world. I lived the rest of my life knowing that I saved the world.

 

Behind That Door…

 

Chapter 1

It was a sunny, humid Monday morning. I felt the cold breeze against my thrilling face. I walked through my wooden, oak door and quickly ran upstairs to my bedroom. I touched my thin piece of drafting paper and started drawing my new puppy.

“I don’t think my new puppy likes me,” I stated in a low mumbling voice, looking at my worn out dolls. My puppy jumped up and licked my drafting paper, vapidly not caring about the drawing. I looked at Caroline, my dog, and saw her big, blue, puppy eyes shining bright, like a raccoon’s in the darkness. I picked up one of my dolls and looked at them suspiciously, like they were my friends. I could see them walking and staring deep into my soul, trying to stop and warn me about something. I could see their big, shimmery, button eyes glowing luminously in my dark green room. Then, I heard a rumbling noise from the distance. My ears perked up, and I walked down the stairs.

“Mom! Dad! Yay! You’re here,” I yelled excitedly. I quickly saw the doorknob turn, and there were my mom and dad with their golden hair gleaming against the luminous sun.

                                         

Chapter 2

Their faces looked stern as usual. They dropped their suitcases and hugged me. They kissed me on the cheek and, mysteriously, asked the same question they always ask me.

“Did you go into the basement?” They asked in a low, lucid voice. I turned my head and looked at the old, rusted, basement door and wondered what was in there. But then I shook my head at them and started into the dining hall for breakfast. They sat down and sighed in relief at my answer.

Day and night I thought about the basement. I heard this voice, echoing through my room whispering, “Go to the basement…”

I quickly had enough of this demon crawling into me. Shattering piece by piece of me each day. Everyday, I would run to my parents and ask them the same question: “Can I go into the basement?”

And every time I asked them, they would reply the same answer they always had: “No.”

But I had enough of their replies pulling me back and forth every time. I always wanted to obey them, but there was something about this basement that I had to find out. Desperately.

One day, at dinner, I asked my father again hoping he would say the answer I always dreamed he’d say. But once my father heard that dreadful question again…there was no going back. He slammed his fist on the table and yelled again, and again, and again.

“NO! NO! NO! NO! NO! YOU WILL NEVER GO DOWN THERE!!!!”  He yelled, fiercely.

I got up from the table, knocking over my milk, and ran upstairs to my bedroom. There was nothing slowing me down. I slammed the door and tears started rolling down my red, rosy cheeks.The tears splattered on the carpet and that was when I saw a red liquid. I looked down on my carpet and there was blood.

Where was my puppy? I looked up at my ceiling. There, was my dog hanging from the ceiling, with its body covered in blood. I screamed. I did it again and again and again. But no one came to my room to help me.

 

Chapter 3

I walked down my stairs one by one without lifting my head up to see my mother and father. There was silence. I quickly looked up and my mother and father were covered in blood. I turned to the basement door, and it was open.

“Mom? Dad?” I muttered under my hot, deep breath.

There was only one way to know how they died. I had to go into the basement. I ran upstairs and brought my flashlight and phone. I quickly ran downstairs and saw a note on the dining table with blood. I read it carefully:

Search this house address up and then you will know who I am…

 

Chapter 4

I brought the note with me, and when I reached the basement door, there were bloody footprints going all the way into the basement. It was pitch black. I quickly grabbed my flashlight and turned it on quietly. The flashlight beamed and I could see bloody messages on the old dusty walls. “I Will Kill You” one said.

Then, I came to a stop. I held the note in my trembling hands and read it again. I turned on my phone, searched my house address up, and I was in shock. My mouth dropped, and I felt a shiver down my spine. I read the text carefully…

The Night of Friday the 13th 1765:

In the town of Moonlodge, there was a house that stood out from all sides. A beautiful, wooden, oak house filled with the kindness and respect of a benevolent family named the Sinols. But someone came upon this town, and Friday the 13th struck this house with terror. Robert had lived with his wife, Marie, and his daughter, Adele. Friday had brought noxious horror to this town and to this family.

Robert was a patient in a hospital named the Seanol. Robert had gone horrific. He vapidly killed his daughter and wife. He tried running off to the neighbor’s house, but the police had beaten him to it. He was surrounded by hundreds of them. He became startled and started threatening them. He went to the only place he believed the police would never find him…

The basement.

But one police man was in there hoping to find Robert running down the soulless stairs. The policeman, Jeffrey Gomber, shot him. But the body was never found anywhere. There are rumors in this town about the absence of the body. They say he ran off and faked his death. But we don’t know. No one has seen him in 20 years.

 

Chapter 5

Her voice lost its rhythm. Her skin turned pale, and her eyes started looking around. Her flashlight lost its power. And she was alone. Alone with Robert…

She closed her eyes and felt a cold bloody knife poking through her. And that was the end for her. The end for Abby Seanol…

 

The Siblinghood of Art

One morning, in New York City, my two friends and I were in the Met for a field trip. My friends, Sam, Nat, and I went to the Greek and Roman god section of the museum. There, we saw an enormous column that was fascinating.

“Sir,” I asked the tour guide. “When was this column made?”

“This column was carved in 3000 B.C.E,” the tour guide responded. “This column will be moving to the Natural History Museum in D.C. in two days, so please come and see it before it’s gone,” he said.

“I’m so sad,” said Nat. “I love this column.”

“Well, I do not care. This is boring. Can we go see the painting of George Washington crossing the Delaware?” Sam asked.

“No, the Gods are important. They started life,” I exclaimed.  

After two hours of looking at ancient relics, we had to go back to the bus. On the bus, we talked about the column.

“Did you know that the column is from the Hellenistic period?” Nat asked.

“No, I didn’t. That’s cool,” I said to the short, glasses-wearing, attractive Natalie.  

“Blah blah blah. Stupid info. Yankees trivia please,” said Sam.

“What is it with you and the Yankees?” I asked the tall, blond, and pretty Sam.

“It’s true love,” said Sam.

“I don’t think she even knows what true love is,” said Nat.  

“Nat, be nice to your sister,” I told her.

After we got off the bus, I went home. I had a lot of homework.

At dinner, in our small town house on Broadway, my mom and I had pasta and sausage, my favorite. We talked about the Met and the awesome column.

“So is the column tall?” Mom asked me.

“Yep, 361 cm tall,” I said.

“Ha, ha, ha,” Mom laughed.

“About eleven feet tall,” I clarified. “I’m tired, Mom. I’m going to bed.”

“Okay, sugar plum, night night.”

The next day flew by like a cheetah. Math was fun, social studies was boring, and music was great. The sisters also argued over the best chick flick, not my thing. Instead, I talked with Alex about Marvel movies.

“You know Guardians of the Galaxy Vol. two is coming out.” Alex told me.

“Cool.”

“Did you know that a column from the Met is moving to D.C. tomorrow?” I asked Alex.

“No, but that’s boring,” he said.

I thought about what Alex said. Myths were the only thing I had to read when I grew up. My dad got me the Percy Jackson books when I was eight. Then he died. That’s why I loved them.

I couldn’t wait for the day to end. I called the girls so we could talk about the column.

“Yo, guys, the column is leaving tonight.”

“Nooooooooooooooo!!!”

“Was that Nat or Sam?” I asked them.

“What do you think? Obviously, Nat,” said Sam.

“Okay, I have to go to bed. Bye.”

“See you tomorrow,” Nat said.

After eating green eggs and ham, I went to see the news on my phone. The first headline was “Breaking News: The Marble column from the Temple of Artemis at Sardis was stolen last night when en route to the National History Museum in Washington D.C.”  

I must call the sisters, I thought.

“Did you hear…” I started to say.

“WWWHHHYYYY!” yelled Nat.

“Okay, drama queen, what’s wrong?” I talked over the loud crying.

“It’s… it’s gone. We lost the column!”

“Well, I’m glad,” Sam said snarkily. “Waste of space.”

“We are going to find the column,” I demanded.

“Did you watch Finding Mary Mcguffin from Phineas and Ferb?” Nat asked me.

“No.”

Pink Panther?

“No, I just think that we should find it.”

“Okay. Let’s do it,” Nat said enthusiastically.

“If she goes, I will go,” Sam said.

After school, let’s find some clues!” I exclaimed.    

At school, I told them what to do.

“First, we need to get to the Met. There will be clues there.”

“Um, why will there be clues?” Sam asked.

“If the thief wants money, then he would send a ransom note to the museum.”

“Okay. Let’s go.” the girls cheered.

When we got there, we walked to the empty exhibit. We saw a piece of paper on the marble floor.

“To pick up the paper or not to pick up the paper, that is the question.” Nat said.

“What do you think?” I asked her.

Sam grabbed the paper and gave it to me.

“Well, read it,” Sam said.

It read:  

Ares was banished

Banished to Richard Rogers

He got money there

 

“That’s a haiku.” I said.  

“Yeah, but who is this Richard Rogers.”

“Richard Rogers…” I thought out loud.

“Eureka, I got it! The Richard Rogers theater!” Sam yelled.

“You’re right, Sam. Good work, Einstein.”

“Tomorrow, after school, we’ll meet at R and R theater.”

“Cool,” the girls said.

School went by as fast as lighting. At home, I told Mom I was going to see the sisters. The lie worked. We walked to the theater and tried to get in.

“The door’s locked, guys,” Sam yelled to me and Nat.

“Let’s look for a secret door,” I told them.

We walked around, pushing bricks.

“Guys, I found something,” Nat yelled to us.

We walked to her and saw a metal door with a speaker and mike.

“Hello?” I called.

A robotic voice answered: “In order to enter, you will have to complete this test. There will be three sections. First, Yankees trivia, then, Cold War trivia, and finally, Greek myths trivia. Starting now.”

Sam killed the Yankees trivia. Nat kicked butt on the Cold War stuff. I destroyed the myth questions. After that, the door opened, and we ran in. Inside, there was a trailer with the column in it and three guys sleeping. I did not recognize them.

“No way, we found them,” I whispered. “We should tie them up and call the police.”

“We have no rope, genius,” Sam pointed out.

“In the van,” Nat said.

“Thank you, Nat,” I exclaimed.

After we tied up the culprits and called the police and told them who we were, we went home.

At home, my family got a call from the police. They said that I had found the culprits and the stolen column and asked me to speak at the reopening of the column exhibit the next day.

I stood in the the Metropolitan Museum of Art’s Greek Gods exhibit hall. Marble and glass walls surrounded me, and the soaring ceiling made me feel small. The crowd of reporters pushed to get to me before I spoke. The column I just saved was right in front of my face with a ribbon I was about to cut. My gray suit shone brightly from a flash of a camera. The sea of people clapped as I cut the red ribbon and touched the ionic column. Wow, the Met will always be great if this 361 cm tall column is here in this temple like-hallway.

 

Pokemon Showdown is Life

He was playing Pokemon Showdown on an iMac. He wanted to win. He was playing a kid with the username Dank Meme 1738. He was left with one more Pokemon in the battle, Blastoise. Dank Meme 1738 had a Steelix.  LeBron used flash cannon on Steelix. LeBron’s friend, Stephen, had the highest score in the history of Pokemon Showdown.

LeBron’s mom had been away in Florida for three months, and his dad was always working. LeBron had been playing since his mom went to Florida — without any bathroom breaks or interruptions. His room had only Pokemon stuff with images on it. It had a blue Squirtle on it that looked like a little, blue turtle.

When his mom called him, he was multitasking.

“What are you doing, and how are you?” she said.

LeBron stuttered, “Um, um, um… I am just doing my homework.”

“Are you sure? I can tell you’re lying. I know your username. Your username is Deliciousness 123. I am playing you.”

Shoot, she knows, he thought. He was mad because his mom knew his username, and she might call his dad, and his dad might come home and stop him from playing and take away his computer. LeBron wanted to be the best like Stephen, because he sucked at everything else he tried to do.

“No, I’m not lying. I’m doing my homework,” he said. “Mom, what is nine times five?”

“Oh, it’s 36,” she said. “No, it’s 45.”

He didn’t hear her second answer because the music was on, and the game was too loud.

“Mom, did you say something?”

“No, I didn’t say anything.”

“Okay, thanks, Mom. Got to call you later because I just found a really good math problem that I want to solve.”

“Okay, LeBron. I guess your math problem is more important than me.”

“Thanks for understanding, Mom. Bye, Mom.”

“Bye, LeBron.”

He was very mad, so he closed his computer and smashed it on the floor. It broke into pieces. He went down stairs mad and ignored everyone.

 

An hour later…

LeBron finally started to do his homework.

“Oh my gosh, I found the math problem, nine times five! I remember this math problem. Mom told me it’s 36. I will get that math problem right because Mom told me the answer.”

 

The next day

Lebron got the very easy math problem wrong. So, he got a punishment for the very easy math problem. He had to go to detention. He learned that he should not play video games all the time because then he would get addicted, and it would affect school.  

  

The Girl, the Grandma Ghost, and the Goblin

There once was a girl who most wanted love. But she lived all alone in a cottage in the woods, where no one knew about her.

“Oh, how will I get love if no one knows about me?” Grace cried.

As she accidentally knocked over her grandma’s ancient spellbook, it suddenly opened, and her grandmother’s ghost popped out of the book.

“Ahhhhhh!” she said.

“No need to scream,” her grandmother said.

Grace said, “Wh-wh-wh-wh-wh-who are you?”

She didn’t know it was her grandmother. Her grandmother had special powers, and her parents kept that a secret from Grace.

Then her grandmother asked her, “Why are you in such a fuss?”

“Love,” said Grace. “I want love.”

“I think I can help you,” said the grandmother. “Follow me.”

So she followed the ghost into the basement. It was a dark room, and she’d never been in there because it was too scary. She walked after the ghost, and the ghost showed her to a portal standing upright. The portal was round and swirly, and when she went in, it went poom!

At first it was dark, and then she saw a wonderful place with lots of pretty flowers and a wonderful lake. Then she saw a mean ugly goblin. He had big curved ears, and his nose was really long and pointy.

“Who dares enter my portal?”

“It is only I. I came to get love,” said Grace.

“No love,” said the goblin. “Go away!”

The goblin turned her away, so she went away, very scared. She came back to the lake and snuck into a big tower. Then she saw a flower, the most beautiful flower she had ever seen. The pink, purple, and orange flower bloomed out of magical dust. It shimmered in the light. Then a boy appeared from inside the flower.

He saw the girl and said, “The goblin took me and put me inside the flower. Do you want to be my friend?”

The girl’s eyes opened wide, and she started to smile. She said, “Yes.”

So he went with her, and then, they became boyfriend and girlfriend. They went through the portal, and they went to Boston and found a house.

One day he asked her, “Will you marry me?”

She said, “Yes.”

Grace’s grandmother visited her every once in awhile. They all lived happily ever after.

 

The End

 

Alison the Mermaid

Alison the mermaid lived near the beach in New York City with her mermaid friends and her pet dolphin, Candy. She liked to play catch with Candy using blue and pink seashells. Alison loved to eat fish, especially salmon. She was happy.

But she wanted another friend, a special friend… a human friend. But she was really scared to find one. She was afraid that they were going to tell everyone in the city that they saw a mermaid. She thought they might take off the rainbow scales on her tail and sell them so they could get rich!

One day in spring, she felt brave and confident that she would find one, so she started looking on the beach. And then, she was going to go somewhere off the beach, but she didn’t know which way because there were so many paths going to different places. Then, she knew which way to go to because the other paths had sand, but there was one stone path. In stories she read, humans lived in cities where the roads were made of stone.

She was really light, so the wind picked her up and took her over the path. She had to steer the wind to go the way she wanted, which was one of her mermaid powers.

She met animals along the way. She met a seagull. Her second power was that she knew how to talk to animals, so she said, “Do you know where New York City is?”

The seagull said, “Just keep on following the stone path!”

And Alison kept on following the stone path. But it stopped at the end of the road. Then, she saw a path, but it had lots of dirt. And she knew if she went on that path, she would be going the right way, because New York City has a lot of dirt! She was a little tired, but she followed the dirt path.

On the way, she met a blue butterfly! She said, “Do you know where New York City is?”

The butterfly said, “Just keep on following the dirt path!”

And Alison followed the dirt path. Then, she stopped because she saw a big hole in the ground. The wind suddenly stopped carrying her because it was now sunny like summer, and she was too far from the ocean, so her powers dried up!

She fell into the hole, but there was water at the bottom! She tried to swim back up, but she couldn’t because the hole was too deep. But then, it started raining! The hole filled up with water, and it carried the little mermaid all the way to the top. And then, when it was up to the top, the rain stopped, and the hole filled up with dirt. It was because she had good luck!

Then, when she got up, the wind started carrying her again since there was moisture from the rain.

Then, Alison found the city. It had big towers and glass buildings and some houses. But it was kind of far away. So she had to go faster. She put her hands forward and used her breast strokes to swim through the air. She wasn’t tired, so she got to the city.

But then, she had to hide because lots of people would see her. She needed a way to get to a school, where she could start finding a friend her own age that wouldn’t be scared of her.

She brought her favorite mermaid doll, and she finally got an idea to test it out to see if a child would see the doll and think if it was a real mermaid and get scared.

Alison tested it by throwing the doll outside the school. When school was over, a little human girl with long, black hair wearing a long, puffy dress found it. She was kind and was not scared. The girl took the doll home, so Alison followed her, and the girl even pretended that the doll was real and it was her best friend.

Alison felt really happy that she finally found one friend. She jumped out and looked at the girl and saw that she wasn’t frightened.

“I know you are not afraid of me,” Alison said. “So can you be my best friend?”

The little girl’s face turned red because she was about to scream out of happiness. She said, “Yes, but only on days that I have school because my mom and dad are not here! I’m so excited I get to be friends with a real mermaid! My name is Rose!”

“Well, I’m really glad to see you!” said Alison. “And my name is Alison.”

When they were done playing with the toys, Rose’s mom and dad came home. They called Rose.

“I have to go home, but don’t tell your parents,” Alison said.

She went home. When Alison got home, she was so happy she found a friend. She bet that Rose was a good friend, and that tomorrow she would be a good day again.

In the morning, Alison’s mother made her a special breakfast celebration for Alison at Breakfast Cafe. It was Alison’s birthday! Alison had chocolate covered waffles, orange juice, and french toast. And then she swam back home. Then she took a bath, splashing around thinking about how lonely she was. When she was done taking a bath, she did a puzzle. She felt sad that she was doing it all alone. The puzzle was a picture of herself in the rain. This made her feel even more sad, but she tried not to think about it.

“Each time your birthday comes, you will get powers,” said Alison’s mom. “Since you are ten, I am giving you extra powers.” It got really bright, and then it turned dark again. Alison felt powerful. The first power she got was changing from a mermaid to human, and then the second power her mom gave her was when Allison wished to get something, she got it right away.

Then she had lunch. She had salmon. This made her miss playing with her friends in the ocean. Then she wanted to go the aquarium, so she turned into a human. When she got there, she wanted to look at the fish first. She wanted to see the angel fish. Ted, Marly, and Happy were her friends from when she lived in the ocean.

“Hello,” Alison said to the fish. They didn’t recognize her at first, but when they heard her voice, they remembered who she was.

“Hi Alison!” They sang.

“What are you doing?” Asked Alison.

“We’re trying to get out of here,” said the fish. “The food here is terrible and we miss all of our friends. Our tanks are so small. We miss being able to swim in the ocean.” Then Alison gave a slight smile.

“In the night, I will come and open the tank,” whispered Alison. The fish screamed with excitement.

Alison went back home and started collecting the things that she needed: a paperclip to unlock the doors, salt water, and a bag to bring the fish back in so they didn’t die. Then, when it was night, she went to the aquarium and locked the door. Then she ran to the tank where the angel fish lived. But there were two guards in front of the angel fish. Then, Alison had an idea to be a policeman. She used her magical powers to turn into a policeman, and then she said, “Hello. Can I unlock the angel fish please?”

The guards thought it was their buddy policeman, so they said, “Sure!”

She put Ted, Marly, and Happy in the bag and brought them to the nearest beach. Then, she put them carefully into the water.

They said, “Thank you Alison!”

She felt really proud because she saved her friends, and the fish were really excited to be back in the water.

Alison the mermaid was once really lonely, but she saved her fish friends and now she had a human friend too!

 

The End

 

Booger and Booger, Jr.

There once lived a man. He picked his nose and saw a booger. It was so magical. It turned into a boy!

“I’ll call you Booger, Jr.”

They called the father “Booger” for picking his nose. Well, this is weird talking about boogers. But once, they had a fight about whose boogers were better!!!

They said very mean things to each other, like “Your boogers are sloppy! They are so blue because you’re sick, and they’re frozen, so you don’t even have boogers!”

“Well, I’m newer, so my boogers are newer and improved,” said Booger, Jr.

“My boogers gave birth to you, so I should have better boogers!”

Well, let’s say things didn’t go so well after that. They separated from each other. Booger, Jr. tried to find somewhere to live. He stayed in a hotel for a while until he couldn’t pay for it anymore. He took some money from his dad.

His dad was pissed that his son took his money, but he didn’t do anything about it. Booger thought it was reasonable because he kicked his son out of the house. Booger, Jr. was a young man, a little boy. He had nothing.

Booger, Jr. needed to make some money, so he started to pick himself on the street. He did it for an hour and only made five cents to stop doing anything. He tried again, but instead of picking anywhere, he picked in a certain spot. His belly button! Then, he made $100 bucks! He was only going to pay for meals and stay on the street for a little bit longer, so that he could save his money for a home.

Meanwhile, the dad was just a drunk, being a big hunk of funk. He was depressed that he said all those things and that his son left him. He decided to look for him and take him home.

Booger, Jr. was sitting very sadly on the street, regretting all those words he said to his father. Then, his dad came.

“Hi, Dad! I’m sorry I said all those things to you.”

“It’s okay. I was thinking about that too. Now, let’s go home and give our boogers a cup of hot cocoa.”

They walked home, and they had the cocoa.

 

The End

 

A Bottle Flipping Story

“Mmmmm! This is good,” said Olracnaig, as he munched on a Big Mac at McDonalds. He was alone, after school, at one of the tables in the back. He loved bottle flipping, but he sucked at it. He couldn’t even flip a regular bottle on the table. He was so jealous of his friends because they were so good at it and he wasn’t. He just wanted to get a little bit better. Maybe eating some more will help me feel better. He thought. He decided that he should try to flip a bottle that he had in his bag. He took it out and prayed to God. “Please, let me make this bottle flip.” He got ready to flip. Three… two… one… flip! He saw the bottle in the air. THUD. The bottle laid flat on the table.

Olracnaig felt depressed. No matter how much he tried, he could not get better at bottle flipping. After he finished his Big Mac and fries, Olracnaig decided to head home. As he was about to cross the street, he saw something on the huge McDonald’s sign. It looked like the bottle that How Ridiculous used. (How Ridiculous is a group of men that makes bottle flipping videos on YouTube). Sure enough, it was. Before he knew it, he was climbing up the pole to get the bottle. At last, he was on top of it. He was about to grab the bottle when he lost his grip and fell off the sign. But, just as he was falling, his right hand grabbed the ledge of the sign and he was able to hold on. He pulled himself up and grabbed the bottle. “Yes!” He said. He now had the bottle. He climbed down from the sign and got on the bus. At least Olracnaig had the bottle.

When he got home, he took the bottle to his room. He sat down at his desk and flipped it. It landed! He tried again. Again it landed! He kept flipping the bottle and it always landed. The bottle always landed. He decided that he needed to test it out. He took the bottle and decided to flip it on top of his building. It was twenty flights up. He took the bottle and flipped in the air. It landed on top of his building! He decided to do a crazy thing. In the morning, he got dressed and put on his clothes, then took the train to Fulton street. To the One World Trade Center. Once he got in, he took the elevator to the top of the building. He got to the rooftop. He looked down. Man! It was scary being up that high! Olracnaig took the bottle and flipped it over the side of the building. Down and down the bottle went. He saw it descend towards the ground.

Olracgnaig woke up in the morning. Feeling drowsy. He got on his phone and went to YouTube. He looked at the most popular video. He saw somebody, on top of the One World Trade Center, flipping a bottle off of the roof and having it land on the street. He couldn’t believe his eyes! All of a sudden, Olracnaig’s phone was ringing. He picked it up.

“Congratulations.” The voice said. “This is the NBFA calling to let you know that you have been accepted into the the bottle flipping championship for the NBFA. Your video was amazing!”

“What does NBFA stand for?”

“National Bottle Flipping Association.”

“Oh.”

“Do you want to be in the finals or not.”

“Absolutely.”

“Well, then what are you waiting for? Say yes.”

“Yes.”

“Alright. You and How Ridiculous will be competing in the finals.”

“Wait, what?!”

“I said, you and How Ridiculous will be competing together in the finals.”

“Great. I’m in.”

“Great. Do you have anything else to say?”

“No.”

“Then, you’re in.”

“Wait, what do I have to do?”

“You have to stop talking to me and hang up.”

“I mean, what do I have to do in the finals?”

“You have to flip bottles.”

“I mean–”

“Just shut up. You’re in the finals. Be happy now. Got it?”

“But–”

“Got it? Alright. Now I’m going to hang up.”

Jesus! They could have been there all night. Who hired that woman? She was so terrible at her job that she only made one tiyin a year (a tiyin is from the country Uzbekistan. It is the world’s least valuable coin. It would take about 2,546 tiyin to equal just one penny). But, at least he made it to the finals.

Olracnaig woke up in the morning, excited. He had a big day ahead of him. Today was the bottle flipping finals. The finals were in Los Angeles. Wooooooo Hollywood! Here I come! I need to start packing. He packed his clothing and his special bottle. He couldn’t lose it or he would be doomed. His dad drove him to the airport and left him there. Olracnaig looked for his plane and got on it. Shortly after he left the ground, he remembered that he forgot to take his pills, so he might do something crazy.

Sure enough, Olracnaig felt an urge to open the window of the plane and get on one of the wings and flip a bottle on the plane while it was moving. So, he smashed the window with his laptop, and the whole thing crashed into little bits of glass. Luckily, no one heard because they were all on their phones listening to music. He pulled himself out the window. Bam! A gust of wind knocked him off his feet. Olracnaig pulled himself up on the wing of the plane. He grabbed his special bottle and flipped it on the top of the plane, and it landed. Bam! Another gust of wind knocked Olracnaig off of the wing and he flew through the air. He quickly grabbed the edge of the wing just by his pinkie.

But, then the bottle flew off the end of the plane and descended towards the ground. Oh no! Olracnaig couldn’t just let his bottle get away from him like that. So, he pulled himself up and laid down, exhausted on the wing. He climbed back through the window and grabbed some rope from the emergency closet in the plane, climbed out the window, and attached the rope to the wing. To save time, he dove off of the plane, next to the rope, so he could grab the bottle when he neared the end of the rope. As he fell, he thought of his family and how they would be so devastated if he died. They would be so sad. He would let them down. But, he was sure it was not going to happen.

So, Olracnaig quickly grabbed the rope. Phew! That was a close call. He grabbed the very end of the rope. The rope was so long that he was just above one of the Great Lakes! He looked around for the bottle and saw it! It was drifting away in the water! Olracnaig jumped off of the rope and swam towards the bottle. At last, Olracnaig had it. He swam back toward the rope and pulled himself onto it. He didn’t have any more strength to pull himself up to the plane.

“Please, bottle,” Olracnaig prayed. “Help me get to the plane. Don’t let me die. Just let out your magic powers and do something. Help me get to the plane so I can win the finals. Please. Just do something.”

At that moment, the bottle skyrocketed up while he was holding onto it, as if answering his prayers. Olracnaig could see the plane! He wasn’t going to die! But, the bottle stopped shooting up and he started to fall back down towards the water. But, he grabbed the edge of the wing with his pinkie fingernail, while still holding onto the bottle with his other hand. But, after ten seconds of holding on, Olracnaig couldn’t use any more strength and fell toward the ground. Bam! He hit something hard. He looked at what he hit. It was another plane! Some people got out of the plane and climbed on top of the plane, where he was lying. They had AK-47s and M-16s!

They were going to kill him! But, he could see his plane in sight too! He was saved! He kicked the guys in the nuts, and they fell off of the plane and died. But, there was only one more guy left to get rid of. He had a gun in his hand and was about to shoot Olracnaig. He heard the trigger click and he saw the bullet coming his way. It was like they were in a world of slow-mo. He saw his fate coming towards him. Closer and closer and closer. But, Olracnaig wasn’t going to let himself die like that.

Olracnaig quickly did a flip, while the bullet passed him and hit the tail of the plane. All of a sudden, the plane caught on fire and came crashing down to the ground. He saw the flames creeping toward him. He saw his plane hovering above him. But, that plane was falling down, too, since everyone in it was freaking out, and the pilots couldn’t control the chaos. But, it was falling faster because it was a jumbo jet, and the one that he was standing on was lighter. Soon, Olracnaig’s plane was below the plane that he was standing on. He couldn’t stay on this plane any longer, so he flipped over the guy with the gun and landed on his plane that was heading to Los Angeles. Or used to be, anyway.

Once he got into his plane, Olracnaig went to the cockpit and thought about flying, but then he stopped. He had no flight lessons, so he could endanger all of the humans on this plane. But, he needed to get to Hollywood, and so did the people on the plane. So, Olracnaig grabbed the handles and started to fly the plane. He had to admit, he was actually pretty good at it. He flew the plane all the way to Los Angeles. Once he got to the airport, Olracnaig snuck off the plane and took a bus to the hotel that he would be staying at. Once he got to his room, he fell asleep on the bed. He was so stressed. It had been a long day.

Olracnaig woke up feeling pumped. Today was the day of the finals! But, how could he beat How Ridiculous? They were so good at bottle flipping. But, Olracnaig had the bottle. He was safe. For now. Then he heard a knock on his door. It was the people who were taking him to the finals. They took Olracnaig to their bus, and they drove off to the building where the finals would take place. The place was an auditorium with three balconies and posters all over of Olracnaig and How Ridiculous. Everyone was screaming. There were two gigantic TVs on the stage.

This was how the finals went: Both teams went out, to any destination they wanted, to do the craziest bottle flip ever, and they only got one try and if the bottle didn’t land, then all the other people just had to flip and land a bottle to win. The two TVs showed footage, from cameras, that were on the teams everywhere they went to do a bottle flip. Olracnaig decided to watch what How Ridiculous would do and then do something. When he walked out of the building, all three members of How Ridiculous came up to him and said all together, “You’re going down, boy. Ain’t no shrimp boy gonna beat us.”

Right when Olracnaig heard them say that, he felt so scared. But, Olracnaig knew he could win. If he just believed it. He watched on the TV as How Ridiculous flipped a bottle on top of the Burj Khalifa (the tallest building in the world). But, then he looked closer and saw that they were using the bottle. And it was no ordinary bottle. It was the magic one! Olracnaig ran as fast as he could to his locker room. He looked in his locker and saw that it wasn’t there. How Ridiculous stole it! What was he going to do? Olracnaig was just going to try. But, how could he beat flipping a bottle onto the Burj Khalifa?

Olracnaig decided to do something crazy. He grabbed a regular bottle and walked just outside the building. Then, he threw the bottle up as high as he could throw. He waited. He walked back in the building and watched on the TV as his bottle soared through the air. Somehow, they had put a camera on the bottle. He saw the bottle going up… up… up. And then, after a couple minutes, they all saw the bottle land on the moon. And then, he won. The best thing was that Olracnaig saw How Ridiculous crying. All of the members cried. He hated that group now. Yeah, that was pretty much it. He won, there was nothing much more to explain. Olracnaig was crowned the greatest bottle flipper of all time. What more could he wish for?

 

Rise of the Dabbing Bottles

San Francisco, CA 12:00 pm

Christian, a 13-year-old boy, was bored at home because his phone was dead and his PS4 wasn’t working correctly. He watched all the episodes of South Park at least five times. All he had was a water bottle filled up to the fourth line. He held the water bottle by the bottom and flipped it into the air. It landed on the cap.

“Oh my God!!!” Christian yelled, loud enough for the windows to shatter and fall on some angry construction workers below. But he was still thinking about bottle flipping. He went to Rite Aid and got more water bottles. As he practiced flipping the bottle, Christian thought this could be his job. Groups like How Ridiculous and Dude Perfect were famous, and he wanted to follow their footsteps. He could even compete with them! Little did he know that this new hobby would later turn against him.

 

Fliptopia, a planet in a galaxy not so far away

Fliptopia was a planet covered in water. Bottles of all kinds lived there. They were clever and smart, skilled in parkour and gymnastics, armed with water guns and knives, and they loved to dab. They moved by hopping around and other types of transportation we have never heard of. The bottles could also float, and eat and drink. They played sports and had skillz like a boss. But, they were vulnerable to fire.

One day, Flippy Sr., the leader of Fliptopia, was looking through a telescope and saw Earth. Instantly, Flippy Sr. wanted to take over Earth. He gathered all the bottles to the water rocket. Since the bottles had high tech stuff, it only took five minutes to get there.

 

Washington D.C. 3:00 pm

When the bottles landed, they headed toward the Washington Monument. Once they got there, they got in the catapult one at a time and launched themselves at the monument. Each time a bottle hit the monument, they would dab. All those hits made the monument unstable, and it started to collapse. The other bottles started attacking, and squirting people, and everything else. The humans were fleeing and structures were being blown up. Washington D.C. was being flooded and destroyed!

“Mr. Trump, what are we gonna do?” asked the news reporter.

“Gather the army,” Donald Trump told the general.

Soon the sky was filled with planes and choppers. There were no tanks, soldiers, or ATVs on the ground because it was flooded. They searched the whole capital for the bottles, but Flippy Sr. spied on the president and knew they were wanted, so he told the bottles to hide in a deli so they would fit in with the regular bottles and look like them. Then one dark and quiet night, Flippy Sr. and the dabbing bottles snuck onto a plane to San Francisco.

 

Austin, TX  2:00 am

About two hours after the plane left D.C., the plane flew into bad weather and had to make a stop at Austin, TX. The news about D.C. was spread around the U.S, and everyone was on the lookout. The general sent troops all around America, so the bottles had to be very careful. They stopped at a bar for some Hennessy. Luckily, the bartender had bad eyesight and didn’t know the bottles were there. The bottles tried to get on a different plane, but this time they were caught by the sheriff.

“Sonny, where th’ heck d’ y’all thank y’all ‘re goin?”

The other cowboys tied the bottles to the horses. Luckily, Flippy Sr. cut through the ropes and escaped.

“Yo boss, should we kill ‘em, or hand ‘em over to the fuzz?” asked cowboy Bob.

“Y’all can’t kill a bottle. How ‘bout we drink ‘em?” the sheriff replied.

The thing was, the water inside the bottles was what made them intelligent and athletic, so the water was like fuel and energy for the bottles. So they are normal, empty bottles without water. The cowboys were about to chug, but Flippy Sr. appeared, behind the cowboys, with the water rocket, and threatened to blast the cowboys if they didn’t let all the bottles go. The bottles tied the cowboys up and left with their horses.

“You-mmph!” The bottles led the horses to the water rocket and then went to California. It only took them thirty seconds to get there.

 

San Francisco, CA 12:00 pm

Christian walked to ELA with his friends.

“I hate ELA.“

When he got there, everyone was already working on the “Do Now.”

“You’re 10 minutes late to class, boys,” said Mr. Pittard.

Everybody hated him because he made class hard and boring. He made the 8th graders write a three  page essay every week and gave so much HW, even on break. Once, he made the 8th graders read 500 pages of The Biographies of the 45 Presidents, a 2000 page book the 8th graders were reading in ELA. When someone was the first to finish the classwork, he just gave them another essay.

If you didn’t finish the classwork, you stayed in after-school detention from 3:00-6:30 P.M. He also asked the principal to have an extra period for ELA instead of PE, because he thought one hour was too short. So now, ELA was two hours of prison. But today, Christian brought his drone to school, and during homeroom (thank god Christian and his friends weren’t in the ELA homeroom with Mr. Pittard), the drone flew to Mr. Pittard’s office and took a video of him watching Deadpool and playing Black Ops 3 and NBA 2K17 with a milkshake and pizza, and a poster that had a picture of the whole school with a big sticker that said R.I.P. on top.

Christian first posted the video on Snapchat, Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter, and it went viral. So many people retweeted and replied to the video with comments that violated, roasted, and put down Mr. Pittard. Then Christian showed the video to the principal and he said he would fire Mr. Pittard after the day ended.

“That’s detention for you boys.”

“I didn’t do nothin’!” Christian and his friends angrily sat at their table.

Later during class, Christian asked, “Can I go to the bathroom?“

“Can you?” replied Mr. Pittard.

“I dunno. Can you get a full time job? You got fired for watching Deadpool and playing Black Ops 3.    

You’re terrible at Call of Duty. You can’t even beat the first level.”

“Ooouuu!” shouted the rest of the class. Mr. Pittard’s face grew red, but then the bell rang.

Aaaaahhhh! When they got outside, everyone was screaming and running all over the place. The bottles were attacking outside!               

Christian didn’t know what to do. He ran home and got some weapons. He got his Nerf Terra scout, RC Car, Drone, and BB and Nerf Guns for his friends. He put on a bandana, snowpants, ski goggles and gloves, a coat, a camo winter hat (it was Friday, December 23rd and it was already snowing), and a leaf blower with some matches. Now he looked like a terrorist. He got all the stuff for him and his friends. He met them at his school and started attacking the bottles.

The bottles were blowing up and water was everywhere! Luckily, Christian brought big buckets and put them under the bottles, but some water didn’t land in the buckets. It seemed like every time a bottle was shot, more kept coming. Christian and his friends couldn’t hold them off much longer. To make matters worse, his BB Gun was jammed, and his friends barely had any ammunition. They had to surrender. Christian looked around for the nearest hiding spot, but then the bottles were closing in. The last thing he saw was bottles inches away from him. Then everything went black.

 

Fliptopia

When Christian woke up, he didn’t know where he was. He tried to speak, but his mouth wouldn’t move. Neither would the rest of his body. All around him he saw bottles and water. It reminded him of an execution. But, he didn’t know he was right. He was tied tight to the ground and tall gates blocked his exit. Security cameras and bottles, with weapons, were watching his every move. One of them came to him with his whole army. It was Flippy Sr.!

“Bring out the torturer.”

Seconds later, several bottles came back with a dangerous obstacle course. It had swinging blades, axes, daggers, arrows, and every other sharp weapon that kills.

“If you don’t want to die the hard way, you will tell us how to take over Earth, and we will give you anything you want for the rest of your life,” proposed Flippy Sr.

“What about my friends and family, and everyone and everything I know and love?”

“They will not be spared. Only you. We’ll come back in ten minutes. If you haven’t decided then, you will die.”

Luckily for him, Christian had the leaf blower attached to his back and matches in his pocket. But that was his only weapon. He scraped the match across the matchbox and attached the flaming match to the leafblower. By now it was getting dark. All the guards were going to their houses for some sleep. Most of them left their weapons behind. Christian grabbed some and hid in some bushes. When it was all clear, he snuck into       Flippy Sr.’s headquarters. He overheard talking.

“It doesn’t make sense. I sent you to look for that kid ten minutes ago! And you come back with nothing?! Get out of here and gather everyone to look for him!”

Then Christian heard two  guards coming downstairs. He went to the elevator. The doors closed just as the guards reached the bottom of the stairs.

“Phew! Made it. Now what?”

The doors opened to Flippy Sr.’s office. The doors locked behind him.

“I’ve been expecting you, kid,” Flippy Sr. said with an evil grin.

Christian was doomed. Flippy Sr. had an AK-47 in his hands. On the walls were rocket launchers, snipers, uzis, machine guns, shotguns, revolvers, flamethrowers, M9s, M16s, and other guns. Jetpacks, traps, lasers, magazines (the ones you put in machine guns), detonators, and bombs were all over the place. One false move, and Christian would die instantly.

“What did you want me for, your honor?” Christian asked.

“This is the final battle. Your death is coming soon.”

Flippy Sr. loaded his AK-47 and pulled the trigger.

“Ugh!” Christian faked it and dropped to the ground.

“I killed him!” Flippy Sr. said as he walked out of the room.

Then Christian got up and got the flamethrower and started burning up the whole place. “Nooooooooooooo!” Flippy Sr. said. “You haven’t seen the last of me!” Then he disappeared in mid-air.

“You haven’t seen the last of me.”

 

#What Happens When You’re On Your Phone

“O-M-G, O-M-G, O-M-G!!!” I scream. Trey Walker is following me! I am so happy, and I go to sleep. I wake up at 12AM because my boyfriend wants to Facetime me, and I see that I have over 12 million followers on Memed. Memed is basically a social media platform where you make your own memes. I scream softly so I won’t wake up my parents, but then I see that I got featured. Featured is when the Memed company takes one meme once a week and sends it to all of its users!!! I scream softly again.

Then, my phone starts to buzz. It must be my boyfriend, so I pick up.

“Hey girl,” says my boyfriend.

“What’s up,” I say.

He says, “I’m breaking up with you.”

I love the way he talks, I think to myself. But, then I say, “Wait, what?!”

Then, he hangs up. I stuff my face in my soft pillow, and I want to cry all night, but my phone buzzes. It’s a call from Trey Walker.

“O-M-G,” I say. “He can be my new boyfriend!”

I hear a voice in my head saying, “Don’t answer it, don’t answer it!” I answer it, and then I find myself in a black and white dome.

***

“Hello!!!” I scream, and my voice echoes.

“HELLO!” I scream again.

Something is pecking at me.

“Who are you?” I say.

“I’m a heart from Memed.”

“Wait, so you’re a heart?”

“Yep, when you like someone’s meme on Memed, I’m the heart.”

“Do you know where I am?”

“You’re in your phone.”

”My phone! How do I get out?!”

“Well, after the phone runs out of battery, you die! You will die if someone does not charge it. You get out by being on 100 percent.”

“But, my phone is not charging.” Well, I guess my mom will put it in the charger. “What’s that?” I say.

It looks like a rainbow.

“Oh,” says Heart, “that’s Instagram Land.”

“What’s Instagram Land?”

“Instagram Land is a place, where, when you walk into Instagram Land, you’re inside Instagram!”

“That’s so cool!” I say. “What’s that noise?”

“Oh no!” says Heart. “The Glitches and Bugs are coming. They’re trying to destroy your phone! We better hide. Quick, over there!”

I follow him because I don’t really understand what he’s saying.

He says, “Jump in this tube.”

“What tube?”

“The Youtube tube! It leads us to Google, the safest place in your phone.”

“What’s that thing in the air?” I say.

“Those are the Twitter birds. They are fleeing to Google.”

“They’re so cute,” I say.  

I hear a buzz. Where is the noise coming from?

“Is that the bugs?” I say.

“No, that’s the mobile strike army. They protect us.”

“But, I never downloaded that,” I say. “Only my brother has it.”

“Exactly, it’s from the Cloud.”

I look up and see clouds.

“When it rains, stuff drops. For example, your brother’s mobile strike, it knows a secret land in your phone.” Heart says.

“Oh, that makes sense,” I say.

“No more talking,” he says. “Jump into the tube!”

***

I do what he says. When I was in the tube, it went so fast, it only took half a second!

“Whoa!” I say. “Who are these guys?” I ask Heart.

“Oh, those are the googlets.”

“Who are the googlets?” I say.

“They are the people who manage your phone. They are basically your minions,” he says. “Just ask them to give you a bag of chips.”

“Okay,” I say.

I ask one of the googlets, “Can I have a bag of potato chips?”

The googlet says, “Anything for you, Princess Violet.”

Then he says, “Guys, Princess Violet is here! She wants chips!”

A hundred little googlets come running at me, carrying bags of chips. Hundreds of googlets say, “Please, can I have your autograph?”

“Okay, okay,” I say. “I will give you all autographs.”

It must have taken a hour to sign them all. I see one huge googlet walking towards me.

“Hello,” he says in a low voice. “I am your assistant. These are your minion googlets. We just heard some news that the mobile strike army won.”

“YAY!” The googlets scream.

“Oh, by the way, just call me Assistant James,” he says.

“Okay,” I say. “Assistant James, can you give me a tour of Google, please?”

“Of course, Master Violet, follow me. So, we start here at the Youtube tubes, then we come to your minions’ offices, they manage your whole phone, you know. Then, we come to my office. I have computers and everything you could possibly want in an office.”

“Cool,” I say.  

“Here are the bitbots. The bitbots help kill bugs and glitches that are hiding in Google. And finally, here are the emojis. The emojis help manage your texts and emails.”

“Hi, emojis!” I say.

One cute little angel emoji walks up to me. He says, “Should I delete your boyfriend’s contact because he broke up with you?”

“Please, do so.” I say.    

“And that’s the end of the tour,” says my assistant googlet.

“This place is awesome,” I say. “Thanks for the tour!”

“Anytime. You and your heart friend over there should explore your phone some more. There are so many great places in your phone, and if you ever need help, just ask me.”

“Okay, bye,” I say.

Then Heart and I head off to Instagram Land. I ask Heart, “Have you been everywhere in the phone?”

“No, I have only been to Memed land and Google.”

“Well, I guess we’re going to see something new today!”

“We don’t have days here because when you’re asleep, I’m still up.”

***

“Hey, look at the sign. It says Instagram Land is only a megabyte away.”  

“A mega bite?” I ask, “what’s that?”

“Instead of half a mile, we have megabytes. Gigabytes are our miles.”

“Wow. What’s that tall building?” I ask.

“It’s the great battery clock,” he says. “Oh, I forgot to tell you, silly me. There is another way to escape. You have to climb to the top of the battery clock, and once you reach the top, you solve a riddle. After you answer the riddle, you open a door, and then you go into a secret room, which I’ve never been in.”

“Why did you not tell me?!” I yell. “Sorry, I get really mad sometimes.”

“Do you want to go in the tower?”

“Sure,” I say. “Let’s go.”

I walk into the tower. I see a fat googlet, who says in a loud voice,”NO ONE BESIDES THE PRINCESS CAN ENTER.”

“I am the Princess,” I say.

“Oh, Princess, I have heard rumors that you were here. Oh, by the way, I’m Axel, chief of the police.”

“Oh, hi Axel. I’m Violet. I’m trying to escape this phone, but I need to get to the top of this tower.”

“It’s 500 stories, are you sure you can climb up all those stairs?” he asks.

“I’m positive.”

After a lot of walking up the stairs, I’m so tired.

“Are we there yet?” I ask Axel.

He says, “Nope, just 490 more floors to go!”

“Can we take a break?” I say.

“Sure,” says Axel.

After a few minutes of resting, I go back to climbing the stairs. Heart says, “My heart is beating so fast!”

I burst out laughing. “Good one, Heart,” I tell him.

After four hours of walking, I’m finally at the top.

“I feel like I’m gonna faint,” I say.

“Let’s take a break,” says Heart, and we do.

***

A few minutes later, we start the riddle. There is a sign that says the riddle. It reads:

You entered this everyday, everywhere. TW, TW. That is who you love. Dum dum dum dum dum. That is what you sum.

“What do you do everyday?” asks Axel.

“Well, I go on my phone,” I say.

“That’s it,” says Heart. “It’s your phone password!”

“But, what about the sum part?” says Axel.

“I know,” I say. “Maybe it’s the numbers of the password added up!”

This is the smartest I have ever been.

“Wow, that’s a good idea,” says Axel. “But, there is still the TW, TW, who you love.”

Heart says, “It must be Trey Walker. Maybe it’s the numbers added up and Trey Walker!”

“What are the numbers added up?” says Axel.

“Well, it’s 3+4+9+6+2. What does that add up to?” I say.

I am so stupid. Heart does a facepalm.

“It’s 24,” says Heart.

“Look, there is the door to enter the code to get in,” says Axel.

I enter the code “24TreyWalker”. It does not work, so I enter “TreyWalker24”. This time it works. I see an elevator, and it says “To enter the human world”.

“I will miss you guys,” I say. “Tell the googlets I say bye.”

Heart runs up to me and hugs me. After the hug, I step into the elevator. They say bye and I say bye back. I press the button in the elevator, and I end up in my bed.

***

“Wake up, honey,” says Mom. “You have been sleeping for two days!”

My body must have been in the real world, but my mind was in my phone.

“I’m gonna take a break from the phone,” I say.

And for the first time, I turn the power off.

 

The Three Teddy Bears

Once upon a time, there was a teddy bear. His name was Fuzzy. He had many scars. He had so many scars because he was often attacked by a teddy bear named Puffy, who had no hair. Puffy had made a potion to make himself fuzzy. But, there was one problem. Puffy needed a sample of Fuzzy’s hair. Fuzzy was super fuzzy because he had a lot of fuzzy brown hair.

One day, Puffy decided to ask Fuzzy for some hair. They lived in a bedroom with three dollhouses. Fuzzy lived in the middle, Puffy lived in the house on the far right, and on the very left lived a bear, who was named Candy Bear, because Candy Bear could make candy. The bears’ owner was on vacation, so that meant the bears were on their own. While Puffy was getting ready to ask Fuzzy his question, Fuzzy saw Puffy’s checklist.The first thing on Puffy’s checklist was to ask Fuzzy for a sample of his hair.

Fuzzy immediately went to Candy Bear’s house. Candy Bear was playing darts with candy darts. As Fuzzy entered, a dart nearly hit him in the head.

”Yikes! What was that for?” Fuzzy exclaimed.

“Sorry! You should have knocked first, ya know,” said Candy Bear.

“Can I ask you a question?” asked Fuzzy.

“Sure. Shoot,” said Candy Bear.

”If an enemy came up to your door, and knocked, and you opened the door, what would you do?”

”I would ask them what they wanted. If I was okay with want they wanted, and I had what they wanted, I would give it to them,” answered Candy Bear.

”Okay, if that’s what you think,” said Fuzzy as he went back to his house.

But, Puffy was already at his front door, so Fuzzy took the backdoor route. When Fuzzy got in, he heard the doorbell ring. He grabbed a bat for protection, then he opened the door.

”Hi!” said Puffy.

Puffy was a normal sized teddy bear, except he was bald. He used to have hair, but one day, when his owner had him on a hotel roof, a breeze picked up Puffy. Then, he went flying into a sandpaper factory, which shredded all of his hair off. You could hear his screams in China. Puffy felt naked. He was jealous of Fuzzy for having so much hair.

Fuzzy was surprised to see Puffy, and suspicious. He was afraid of Puffy.

“Aaaaaaaa!” screamed Fuzzy. Fuzzy swung his bat back.

Puffy asked, “What’s with the bat?”

“Oh, the bat’s for protection,” answered Fuzzy.

“Okay,” said Puffy. “This time, I am not going to fight you.”

“And how can I trust you?” asked Fuzzy.

”Well, I don’t know,” replied Puffy. “But, let’s get along, okay?”

”Hmmmmm,” said Fuzzy.

“Okay, so what I want is just one piece of your hair,” said Puffy.

“Sure,” said Fuzzy, who thought one piece of hair couldn’t really hurt. So, Fuzzy agreed to give Puffy one piece of hair.

When Puffy tried out the formula with Fuzzy’s hair, it worked! A few seconds later, Puffy went to the mirror. He saw that he had thick brown fur again. He felt happy.

When Fuzzy saw Puffy with all his new hair, he congratulated him.

Now every time he meets Puffy, he does not have to fight him.

And the three bears lived happily ever after.

 

The Underworld

Chapter 1: The Underworld

“Where am I?” I said. I wasn’t in the freezing chamber. I was somewhere else. The last thing I remembered was that I was a servant, and the king was mean to me. I got beheaded for trying to escape and wanting to be a king.

I saw people, with green faces, on gray ladders connected to the red floor. They were holding gray hammers and hammering a red ceiling. I saw a green person, with a gray bow tie, walk towards me.

“Welcome to the Underworld, where all dreams are crushed,” he said.

“What?” I said, confused.

“You’re in the Underworld. You’re dead!” the man with the bow tie said.

“I’m dead?!” I said a little too loud. The green people all looked at me.

“Oops,” I said, embarrassed.

“Get to work,” the bow tie man said.

“What?” I said.

“Hammers,” he said and pushed me into a pile of hammers, which would have hurt, but luckily, I stopped myself before hitting the pile. I saw another pile of hammers and thought I could take it. I took a hammer and followed all the other gray people, marching single file.

“Hello, friend!” one of the gray persons said. “I’m Bill. This is Jack, Bob, Simon, Logan, James, Thomas, Alexander, Aaron, John, Philip, George, Charles, Samuel…”

*Two hours later*

“And Noah,” Bill said.

“Okay, let me try. John,” I tried.

“Bob,” Bill corrected me.

*Four  hours later*

“And James,” I guessed.

“Noah,” Bill corrected me.

“Sorry,” I said. “I’ll try again.”

*Two hours later*

“And Noah,” I said.

“You learn fast. Some people take a year before they get all the names right.”

By the time we were finished, it was time to go back, but before we went, Bill told me that I was in workspace 10,000,002,020,000,456,000,700,001,000,445,006,000,002 with Bill, Jack, Bob, Simon, Logan, James, Thomas, Alexander, Aaron, John, Philip, George, Charles, Samuel, and Lucas. I went to the Agdadey Hotel (their catchphrase is “Where all dreams are crushed”). The place was covered in black and skulls. Instead of having classical music in the lobby, they played scary and dark music, the kind that made you fall to the ground. I walked around the lobby, trying to find someone to help me find my room. Then, I shrieked.

“Hello!” a joyful voice said. “I’m Goodandbad. I’ll be your guide through this wonderful adventure of death!” He said death in a horrifying voice. “I’ll show you to your room!”

“Okay,” I said, a little scared.

“This way!” he said. “Your room is 100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,034 on floor 67,567,567,480,846,895,067. Yay!” he said.

“Thanks,” I said, and walked into my room and turned the light on.

“Roooar!” a voice said. Then, I got punched in the face by something that fell from the ceiling.

“Ow!” I said to myself. “This is going to be a long Underworld!”

I saw a hammer and a pin on my bed. Then I saw a keyhole. I took the pin and made it like a key, and then put it in the keyhole and twisted it. Then I took the pin out, and a door opened like magic. There was another locked door, but this time there was no slot for a key. I started to feel hopeless. I wondered what was behind the door, but I walked to my bed.

“Oww!” I said. My head hit something. I grabbed it. It was the hammer! I took the hammer, forming an idea in my mind. I slammed the hammer on the door. A little piece broke. I kept slamming it, and soon the door was ruined. I touched it with my finger, and the whole thing went down. I saw a circular switch behind the door. I saw a pointy thing that was pointing to Scary, but there were other things, like Christmas and Amusement Park. I touched the switch and the pointy thing moved a little bit. I touched it again, and it landed on Christmas. Then, the whole room changed to red and green, and a Christmas tree was next to my bed. Under the Christmas tree were lots of presents. I tried to open them, but when I looked at myself in the mirror, I was Santa. I had a white beard and red coat on. I decided to ignore my Santa outfit and open the presents to see if there was anything important. I opened one, and it was a crown.

“Ooh, a crown,” I said to myself.

I tried it on, and it fit perfectly on me. I opened a big present. It was a throne. I sat on the throne, wondering if every hotel room had the same presents. The third and last present was a staff made of gold. I felt like a king, and put the crown and staff on my bed. I moved the throne to right next to my bed. I walked toward the door to see if other switches were like this. I touched the switch in my room, and it changed to Halloween. The lights turned off, and jack-o-lanterns lit up the room. I looked at myself, and I was a skeleton. I saw a pot of candy on my throne, and so I unwrapped it, but instead of having candy behind the wrapper, the candy instantly turned into a crown. Surprised, I unwrapped another one, and it turned into a throne. Another one turned into a staff.

Suddenly the throne, the crown, and the staff, that I had opened in the presents, disappeared. I opened other candy wrappers, but they were just candy. I walked to the door and flicked it to Amusement Parks. The room changed into chaos. There were sounds of people screaming, and in the middle of the room, there was a huge big roller coaster, and there was cotton candy hanging from the wall. I changed this to movie theater, and a big screen on the wall appeared. There were big, red seats in front of the screen. Instead of cotton candy on the wall, there was popcorn. This seemed cool, but I changed it to fancy restaurant, and the room played fancy music. There were candles on each table, and invisible waiters were handing out food. I changed it to the last option, video games. I turned into pixels, and the hotel changed into my course. I ran around the hotel room, but a shell hit me.                             

 

Chapter 2: Day One

“Wake up. Wake up, room 100,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,034.”

“Wha-wha,” I said, confused, but the sound of a loud trumpet woke me up.

“You’re late for work,” the voice said. I opened the door and saw Goodandbad standing outside in the hall.

“You’re late for work!”

“Okay,” I said. Then, I raced out of the hotel and onto the main grounds. The elevator ride took forever. I looked and saw hundreds of thousands of people working and hammering on the ceiling. The sound almost made me deaf. A person in a tie and suit gave me headphones. When I put them on, I could hear everything, except for the loud annoying sound of the hammering. I walked toward someone I knew: Bill. I asked him where to go, and he said to go on this ladder and start hammering.

“Where’s my hammer?” I asked.

“You’ll see,” Bill said with a wink.

I climbed up the ladder and at the top step, a hammer magically appeared. I started hammering the ceiling. I hammered and hammered and hammered, until my shoulders drooped, and I could barely hold the hammer. (Also, it was time for lunch.) I climbed down the ladder and followed the hundreds of thousands of people going into the enormous cafe. I grabbed a gray tray and waited in line, till I saw food. The food was mushy and wet. It was also gray. The food was not labeled, so I grabbed the first thing and then sat down. I sat down with my workspace people. They were furiously eating their food like it was the best thing in the world. I picked at my food, not wanting to eat it, but I was starving, so I took a very, very small bite. I expected it to taste like poop, but instead, it tasted like s’mores and candy mixed. I ate another bite, and it tasted like it was supposed to, gray and mushy.

“Yuck,” I said.

“What’s wrong?” asked Bill. “Ohh, you have the switcheroo mush.”

“The switcheroo what?”  

“It’s one of the meals where the taste changes every time. Try it again,” Bill said, pointing to my food.

“Okay,” I said, a little bit worried.

Then, I took a bite. It tasted like mashed potatoes.

“Try this one, it’s called the Underworld Heaven.”  

He pointed to his plate. I took a bite, and it tasted exactly like its title, Underworld Heaven. After eating a lot of my friend’s food, it was time to go back to work. But, before we all got back to hammering, we had to do our daily count. We all lined up in a big line. A robot quickly counted all the people and then told the head that one person was missing. Then, after the head person talked a little to his assistant, they told the robot to find the missing person. The robot turned into a smaller robot.

“For disguise,” Bill whispered to me. Then, the robot launched up into the air and, a few seconds later, came back down with a person, who was trying to struggle out of the robot’s tight grip. When the robot landed on the floor, the robot turned into a beheader, and the head of the Underworld pulled the beheader up and let it go. When the beheader thing hit the person’s head, the person disappeared into thin air. I watched like I was in a trance when Bill patted me on my back.

“Get used to it,” he said and then smiled at me.

The next four hours went by like a blur. While I was hammering, some people from the other work were next door.They looked at me and bowed, then they called me majesty. I didn’t know if it was a very weird welcoming gift, or if something was up. Either way, I was gonna find out. While I was hammering, I talked to the other people in my workspace. I figured out that they died a little before I died.

After I was done with work, I headed back to my room. I opened the door and saw that my room was totally trashed. I looked outside and saw all the rooms were trashed too. I followed the people to the elevator. One person told me that we were going to the head of the rooms. We rode the elevator ride down and stormed up to the head of the rooms. When the head of the rooms saw us, he acted surprised and tried to back up, but there wasn’t any room, so he banged his head and ended up on the floor.

“Why were our rooms a mess?!” one person said.

“Yeah, my bed was stolen!” another voice said.

“I-I don’t know,” the head of the rooms said, worried.

“I know,” a person approached. He had a black mustache, buck teeth, and looked very, very suspicious.

“At the bottom of my bed, there was a note. I’m sure all of you had it under your bed too, but you all were too lazy to find it.”

There was mad screaming in the crowd. The note said:

Hello fellow roommates,

I know you are mad

Your room was deserted.

It is very sad.

This is a clue.

To find your luck,

A special person must find you and find you, you’re cluck.

The person is a servant, but only right now, but soon, you’ll see that he is not me.

Your room will be back and so will your bed.

But, if you ignore me, it will be bad. So find the person, take a quiz.

The person is special and that’s no wiz.

The people mumbled to each other and then went back to their rooms. When I opened my door, my room was totally clean! The walls sparkled. Then, I wondered about the mystery person. I told myself not to worry about it and just ignore it. Then, I fell asleep.

 

Chapter 3: Day Two

This time, I made sure that I woke up early, so Goodandbad didn’t wake me up. When Goodandbad was at the door, I swung the door open, and hit him right in the face. Then, I totally ignored him, even though that was a bad idea because I forgot to close the door. At first, I was really worried because I thought my room was in video game or movie mode, but it wasn’t. Instead, it looked like a normal hotel room, with the bed neatly made and had no special surprises.

“Sorry,” I said and closed the door.

Then, I went to the elevator and started working.

“Good morning,” said Bill.

“Good morning,” I said.

“You forgot your headphones,” Bill said.

I was so happy about the day that I totally forgot about the loud, annoying sound. I climbed down the ladder and walked towards the headphone bin. I put on a pair and then adjusted the sound so that I could hear the people, but not the hammering. Then, I started hammering. I hammered until lunch. Then, I got in line. I waited, but not for too long, since there were 100 servers. I read the labels. Switcheroo, heaven, horrible, mashed potatoes, (they really like mashed potatoes)  dessert, old, boring, lunch, breakfast, dinner, brunch, wet red boots, car gas, page, word, book, and wet white boots. Some sounded disgusting! I looked at the special, “you’ll like it!” I decided on dessert and the special (“you’ll like it!”). I sat with my work space.  

“Yuck,” Logan said.

I looked at my food. It sure looked bad, but I knew that it was actually good. I took a bite of the special.

“Yuck,” I said and spit it out.

“You didn’t tell him?” Bill said to the other people.

“Tell me what?” I said.

“Listen, every other day is opposite day, so you have to take the bad food which is actually good.” Bill said.

“Oh, come on!” I said. There were a lot of things that I would have to learn about the Underworld.

“Is there any way I could clear my plate?” I asked.

“Sure,” Bill said, and then snapped his fingers.

My food vanished into thin air.

“Woah!” I said. Then, I snapped my fingers, but it wasn’t the best move since I pointed my snap to the ceiling. Everything in the room (including the room), except the people, vanished. The crowd turned towards me and started walking towards me, looking very angry. I snapped again and again, but it was no use.

“Ugh,” Bill said. “Do I have to do everything here!”  

Then he snapped his fingers, and everything turned back to normal.

“Don’t make me do that again,” Bill said, glaring at me.

My plate was cleared, so I went back and got more food. I got wet red boots. I sat back down at my table, but before I could take a single bite, a loudspeaker screamed into my ears and told us that lunch was over. I walked back over to my working space but before I got there, someone stopped me right in the tracks.

“Wait, are you the King Charles?” said the man.

“Sorry, what?” I replied, confused.

“The King Charles!” He replied. “Ehh, must be someone else, but you look just like the King Charles that I knew about when I was in the real world.”

And then he walked away.

I was getting kind of suspicious about this king thing. A lot of people were calling me king, even though I was the exact opposite of a king!

That night, I was in bed, and my dream was crazy. I was the king and I had lots of servants below me. I was a very mean king and had a servant as my foot rest. I had a servant who was just like me, who had the same job as me. But later, in my dream, it turned out he was a wizard! That was when I woke up.

 

Chapter 4: The Tour

I woke up and went to work. I saw Bill, and he told me he would take me on an Underworld tour. We started on the machine room. There was a big robot who had lots of hands.

“That’s the hammer robot,” Bill said. “It’s supposed to be faster, stronger, and quieter when it’s done.”

A guy with frizzy white hair and wrinkles was working on it.

“Wait, is that Albert Einstein?” I asked.

“No that’s Eibert Alnstien, Albert’s great-great-great-great-great-great-great-grandson.” Bill replied.

“Oh, I said.”

We approached a door that had a sign on it. The sign read: DO NOT ENTER. MAGICIANS AT WORK.

Bill ignored the sign and opened the door. When I saw the room, my eyes went crazy, and I thought I would die.

“Hey,” one man shouted. “What are you doing!”

Then, Bill quickly shooed me out of the room.

“W-wha,” I said, confused.

“Sorry about that,” Bill said. “It’s a little crazy in there.”

After two minutes, my eyes were back to normal. We went on to the next room, the hammer room.

“It’s where they make all the hammers,” Bill said. We opened the door. There were billions of hammers.

“Why do we hammer anyway?” I asked.

“So we can break through the Underworld and come alive again!” He said excitedly.

We went to the next room. I was surprised to see the label on the door: The Dream RoomThere was another sign below it that said: Do not come in!

Again, Bill ignored the sign and opened the door a little so I could see. I took a peek inside. There were a few people. There was a big screen in the front of the room. There were thousands of buttons. I closed the door. Then, I thought about my dream about me as a king.

“Do they actually control the dreams?” I asked.

“Yeah, why?” Bill replied.

“Nothing,” I said back.

I didn’t want to tell him about my dream. After that, we went to other rooms, like the aquarium, the zoo, the kitchen, the holiday room, the party room, and more. After the tour, we went to the cafe for lunch. I didn’t know what to get, so I got some good things and some bad.

At the table I ate in silence, thinking about my dream. If the people controlled the dream, they had to know something that I didn’t! I had to talk to them!

I secretly snuck out of the cafe. I went through the hallways, until I got to the Dream Room. I opened the door very carefully and tiptoed inside. No one had noticed me, so I decided to distract the workers. I pretended to be a worker and said that it was lunch break. That seemed to work, and all the dream workers left for lunch. I stayed back and saw my chance to figure out this mystery. I didn’t know how to control the keyboard, but I soon got the hang of it.

I saw thousands of pictures and people. Some were really cool; for example, one dream was with someone flying over everyone and killing zombies. But, other ones were really disturbing, like the one where an old man was taking a bath with his rubber ducky! I saw a button that would lead me to my dreams, and so I pressed it. I had only a few dreams in the Underworld, so it wasn’t hard to find the king one. I pressed it, and I replayed my dream.

After I watched it (twice), I saw a little writing below it. I zoomed in, and I almost fainted when I saw what it said: Charles is royalty, so make dreams about that.

How was I royalty?! I had to figure this mystery out! Then, I heard the door open. I had to hide. But where? I hid under a table and hoped that I wouldn’t be found. Then, I realized that I hadn’t closed the notes!

“Hey! Someone was messing with Charles’ dreams!”

Charles? That’s what the man said to me before, King Charles! Something was up! (Again.)

“Who was here?” asked another man. Then someone saw me.

“Him,” a person shouted and pointed to me.

I started to run out the door, but there were a lot of workers, and they caught up to me. Two people grabbed my shoulders. I squirmed, but the grip was too hard. I tried and tried, but still, I could not get out. They pulled me into a chair and strapped me down. A man walked into the room.

“What did you see?” he asked.

He was so close to my face. I could even smell his bad breath!

“I was only looking for my dreams,” I said, nervously.

“Didn’t you read the sign?” he asked.

“Yes,” I mumbled.

“Who are you?” he asked calmly.

“He’s Charles!” another man said.

“You!” he said, with a look of disgust on his face. “So, you’re that Charles guy.”

A man came forward and whispered something to the man in front of me. The man in front of me turned white as a ghost. He unstrapped me and let me go.  

I couldn’t believe my luck, but when I got back to hammering, everyone was staring at me. Then, they started walking towards me. I think it was because I missed work. I was too scared to move. They came closer and closer.

“Stop,” yelled the man, who was talking to me in the Dream Room. “He is a former king!”

Everyone gasped. Then, they backed up slowly, like they were afraid of me! I walked toward the ladder and started working.  How could I have been king? I thought. I needed to get back to the real world! I hammered with all my might, nothing. I got two hammers and hammered with all my might, nothing.

I hammered till it was time to leave. But, instead of leaving, I snuck out again. I went around the Underworld. Bill had showed me all of the rooms, except for one. I had noticed it when we were walking around. It was labeled Portal Room. I went inside and saw a round, blue thing. I put my hand in it, and it disappeared. I took my hand out and it reappeared again. I took a step back and saw a sign that said: Do Not Enter! Still Testing!

I shivered a little and took a step inside. Then, I took another.

 

To be continued…

 

The Smart Boy Who Could Write

This story starts with a little boy named Adam. Adam was a boy who lived in Ireland, in 1845, when the potato famine happened. He lived in a poor house because he was not the richest kid in Ireland. His family lived on top of a bakery. It smelled like baguettes when they would make them. The floor would creak, the doors would break, and the windows would shatter because the house was so cheap. Adam found a potato in a church, and it was glowing.

He was bullied at school because of his clothes. His clothes were ragged, and he wore the same outfit every two days. He also was sad because his family was very sick from the famine. He could not go to school because he had to take care of his family. Later that week, his family died. He hated life now that he had to quit school and work to keep the bakery.

One day, he saw a man, the landlord. He did not like the landlord. He was very tall and wore way more clothes than Adam.

The landlord said, “You’re a little under the house rent.”

Adam said, “I am not getting as many customers as I usually do.”

The landlord said, “I am sorry, but I will need to kick you out of this building. Take your stuff.”

When Adam was counting his money, he saw he had enough to go to America. Yes, he thought, I can finally fulfill my dreams and have a life. Why didn’t I think about this before? The next day, Adam went to the station to buy tickets for America, but then he realized he was one dollar short. He thought, I would have to work for a week! Oh no, the bakery is gone. I would have to wait on the streets for people to give me money… Oh God, please help.

The next day, Adam was on the street, and one person gave him 99 cents. He was happy and mad, but the next minute, a man gave him a full dollar.

“Yes!” Adam said.

So, he got his ticket and was the happiest kid on earth, until he got on the boat. It was terrible. I mean, he could not sleep, but with the power of his magical potato, he slept that night. But, the next day, he realized his potato was infected with the blight. He knew because it was turning black.

Adam made a friend named Paul. Paul had a family with a lot a food. Paul shared food with Adam because he was his friend, and he had a lot of food.

In the night, Adam was trying and trying to go to sleep, so Paul woke up and helped him go to sleep. Adam was so happy. Paul taught him how to go to sleep, so Paul and Adam had a great ride. On Ellis Island, he was so scared to be sent back to the streets of Ireland. He got inspected for everything, but he was safe. He could go to America and be safe. Yes! he thought.

Now, where would he work? His only real talent was writing. He learned to write because he went to Writopia in Ireland. His Writopia teacher was Kael. He heard Kael was the best teacher in Writopia. Paul gave Adam some paper to write on, so Adam got started. Paul also let Adam stay with him. Adam started writing about this boy whose family died in the famine. Paul did Adam a lot of favors, but Adam still had to pay half of the rent for their house.

He said to Paul, “I will pay my part of the rent when my book gets published,” but before Adam could get his book published, he had to get a publisher. This was another favor from Paul. Paul got him a publisher.

It took four months for Adam to finish his book. When Adam finished his book, he got it published by his publisher, and in a few days, it became a bestseller. Adam could pay the rent! Adam kept on writing, and he became a famous writer. Adam moved to the Upper West Side and bought a home for Paul too. Life was great for Adam and Paul, and Adam had ten best sellers! But, he missed the smell of those old baguettes.

 

The Revenge of the Future Thanksgiving Turkey

Once upon a Thanksgiving, there was a turkey’s dead friend, who was being eaten on Thanksgiving. The turkey (that was alive) was named Turkusin. He made it his goal to get revenge on the family that ate his friend. He only had one year to do it! So, now, he needed a plan to escape the evil demon cage. The cage was seven feet tall. Turkusin thought and thought, until he came up with a plan!

His plan was to play dead, so when the family came with a refill of turkeys, they would take him out, so that the other turkeys wouldn’t eat him and so the family could eat him.

When the mom took him out, he started to poke her with his beak. Turkusin knocked her out. He grabbed her shirt, and threw her in the basement, and locked the door.

One down, fourteen to go.

If you were thinking that there was no way he could do it, well, you were wrong because I tricked you. So you should be ashamed. It was one down, three to go.

The turkey hid under the porch, sneaked into the house, and hid there until nighttime, and that’s when he attacked. The family (not including the mom) was having dinner. They were talking about the mother and asking where she was. The turkey came out from his hiding place and made the noise that turkeys make.

The dad looked at the turkey and said, ‘’You mother turkey, you killed my wife.”

‘’I locked her in the basement,’’ replied the turkey in English.

‘’Did you just speak English?” asked the dad.

“Yes, I did,” said the turkey in English.

The dad picked up a knife to kill the turkey, but the turkey was too fast and took the dad and the two kids, and locked them up in the basement. He thought that was the end of them.

But the dad still had the knife in his hand, and so, he opened the door and tried to sneak up on the turkey. But the turkey had quick reflexes, and the dad missed him. The turkey took a step back, and the battle began!!!

It was the turkey versus the dad, the mom, the son, and the daughter.

The turkey was surrounded, and when the family attacked all at once, the turkey jumped up in the air, and the family all crashed into each other, and they fell on the floor. When they got back up, they continued to fight. The turkey started to scratch them.

The family went back into the house and locked the door. They packed their bags and ran away with everything they could carry! The turkey took all the turkeys out of the cage, and they kept the house. It was like a mansion for the turkeys! And the day they got it, they threw a gigantic party!

THE END!

 

Gummy Bunnies are Tough

First of all, you think that gummy bunnies are soft and harmless, but what you don’t know is that they have a secret weapon. It’s gummy, and it’s yummy, and you can’t resist it.

Everybody give it up for gummy bunnies’ favorite gummy men! Gummy bunnies!! That is how tough gummy bunnies really are. Gummy bunnies! Gummy bunnies!

Now that’s more like it. You think they’re just harmless, but they can be tough when they want to be tough. We weaklings just can’t see it in action. That’s why gummy bunnies are transparent. They don’t go around giving out presents and eating mint pie and orange juice. Instead, they go and fight the monsters that attack our dreams and turn into nightmares. Gummy bunnies do the best they can to fight off the nightmares, but sometimes, they miss the nightmares because one of us weaklings are walking by, and they can’t be discovered fighting. The reason we can’t see the nightmares go past us is because they’re invisible to the human eye.

 

Lesson 101

Which time did gummy bunnies come from?

They’re timeless and more are coming for the nightmares. More nightmares are coming for you too. If you have a dream catcher, throw it away. The dream catchers are useless. They never do anything good, except decorate your house. Bring gummy bunnies to the house, and they will defend your house, but don’t lock up your bunnies, or else they can’t defend your apartment or house, and the nightmares will come get you and take you to the dream world. The evil part, not the good part.  

There’s nothing funny about gummy bunnies… except that they leave gummies on the floor when they need to do their thing, you know what I mean? When they need to go?

Okay moving on to Lesson 102.

 

Lesson 102

Nightmares

The red gummy bunny means it doesn’t have an owner and is angry that he can’t find one.

The blue one means it’s excited because it thinks it’s almost won its owner. If you have any questions about when I said it’s almost won its owner, don’t ask it because I will teach you about it in Lesson 103.

Anyways, the reason the white ones are white is because uhm… the white one is just reformed out of your butt; it’s white because you sucked up all the color from it.

If there is a bunny that is suffering, it floats, and you eat it. Then, it gets better and is born again, and is also ready to start defending your house. Again.

 

Lesson 103

Winning your owner

There are tons of gummy bunnies out there wanting an owner, so they have a contest about who can fight the most nightmares in one hour. If you cheat, the same judges always goes with them. The bunnies never die unless they start to rot. Then, they have to join a battle in the underworld.

 

Lesson 104

The Battle

In the bunny underworld, there is a war between the daydreams and the nightmares which might never end again.

The gummies are on the daydream side, but when every nightmare dies in the underworld, they get transported back to the living. Then, the same thing happens in the living.

There is a way to defeat them but that’s lesson 106.

 

Lesson 105

Nightmares  

A good girl turns evil when she is possessed by the nightmares. Monn (Moon) is now Nightmare!

Oh, sorry. Let me be more specific. Her first name is Night and last name is Mare.

NM is creating more and more nightmares by the minute! She has been doing this for 10,000 years, and she started when she was only four and then got out of control when she had her nightmare test.

First, it was just a simulation. Then, the nightmare somehow thought that Monn was a good target and opened a portal in the simulation, Monn was so shocked, that she had lost her confidence and strength. So the nightmare went inside her and fought her soul, and since she had no confidence, the nightmare took over easily.

Monn is getting weaker and weaker, and the nightmare is getting stronger. It’s getting harder and harder for Monn to fight the queen and king of nightmares. Her soul is giving us messages, but they are very weak and fuzzy

Hopefully, more and more gummy bunnies are being pooped out and getting ready to fight, even if they don’t have a owner. The resulting color of a ready-to-fight gummy is a blend of red and brown and green. Even if you eat it, it will come back out as the war color.

The dark red stands for the bunny blood that pours out of the melting gummies, but then revives. The brown stands for the underworld and the war. The green stands for the gummies getting squashed, then turning green, and then reforming in the living world as a ghosts. The ghost has to fight a nightmare ghost to become living again. Nightmares are the foulest creatures on the face of the earth, but nobody believes us bunny researchers.

Back to the nightmares. They are called the lords of the dark, the kings of the darkness. Anything you can think of with evil sounding words in it.

In the gummy bunnies nursery, at first, all bunnies are different colors, but when they go through the door of life, they get transported to the human world. They get ready to be put in a bag or a jar. A nature fairy, who has a very close relationship with the lost fairy, takes care of and trains the baby gummies to prepare for the wars or to fight for the wars.

Her. The lost fairy. She can defeat the nightmares, her! She’s weak, alone, and lost, somewhere on the face of the earth. With one flick of the wrist, the nightmares will go away. We don’t know where she is, but she’s hurt.

We almost have enough research to find her and heal her, but we have a contact system. Since we have clear messages, then that means she’s nearby. Her notes are long, so she’s healing by herself, but she needs medicine. We will find her someday, I hope.

 

Helena the Husky Goes Camping

CHAPTER 1

“What, Hannah?” I ask.

We’re lounging, in our living room, on the sofa.

“We’re going camping!” she says.

“Camping?” I ask. “What’s that?”

“I don’t know,” she says, “but it sounds fun. Everyone is packing right now, if you want to see.”

“Yeah!” I say, wagging my tail. “Let’s go!”

When we enter Mr. and Mrs. Smith’s room, each member of our family has a suitcase. They are stuffing the suitcases with clothes, and shoes, and all kinds of unknown things. Whatever those things are, watching my owners pack fills my entire body with excitement. I thump my tail on the floor.

“Jewell!” calls Sadie. “Can I borrow your hiking boots for the trip?”

“Mmm…  Sure!” Jewell responds. “They don’t fit me!”

“Really, Jewell?! Thanks!” says Sadie as she tosses Jewell’s hiking boots into her suitcase.

“One more thing.” says Mrs. Smith to Mr. Smith. “Don’t forget to pack the bacon.”

“Of course I won’t!” says Mr. Smith. “The dogs will never forgive me, especially Helena.”

I am drooling already. I can’t wait for Saturday. Bacon is the best thing in the whole wide world if you ask me.

 

CHAPTER 2

After we pick up our six-room camper from the Rent-A-Camper downtown, and after what seems like a never-ending argument, our owners choose bedrooms. Here’s what the setup looks like:

“Hannah! What are you doing?” I call.

“Holly and Helen are fighting again!” Hannah says.

Sure enough. I hear “Oaf!” (from Helen) and “Clumsy!” (from Holly.)

“We’re all sleeping in Jewell’s room!” I try to distract them, but it doesn’t help.

They keep on bickering. Now I hear “Jewell! Holly stepped on my tail!” (from Helen) and “Jewell! Helen called me stupid!” (from Holly.)

“What is going on?!!!”Jewell walks into the camper dripping rain from her boots. (What a mess!)

Holly is in tears.

“Helen called me stupid!”

“Helen!!!” Jewell thunders. “Go to our parents’ room. And I’ll talk with you later.”

Helen sticks her tongue out at Holly.”

Jewell!” screams Holly. “Helen stuck her tongue out at me!”

                              

CHAPTER 3

I never thought a trip to Crispy Cream would lead to so much trouble. First, Helen starts whining that there’s no bacon.

I say, “There’s bacon doughnuts!” but then she goes to the counter and orders four dozen bacon doughnuts.

Jewell yells at her, but that doesn’t help either. She gobbles up all of them, and then she says she doesn’t feel good. Well, you know what’s going to happen right as she says it. She barfs four hundred pounds of barf. The servers are really mad because they have to clean it. Yes, Helen made them clean up her four hundred pounds of disgusting barf. Hannah, Holly, and I are so grossed out, that we have to go outside in the nice, barf-free, fresh air. And then, the next disgusting thing happens. Holly is so grossed out that she barfs too. Right on a nice, clean picnic table. So much for my nice, barf-free, fresh air.

Meanwhile, inside Crispy Cream, Jewell, Sadie, and Silvia are helping the grossed out servers clean up the mess. They are really mad at Helen, who is in the bathroom peeing. When she comes out, she runs out and barfs right on me. So much for my nice, barf-free fur!

I run inside the restaurant in a rage, while Helen runs after me yelling, “It was Holly! It was Holly!”

Jewell takes one look at me and says, “What’s the matter, Helena? Did Helen barf on you?”

“Yes!” I say.

But, at least the bacon doughnuts were delicious. I got some for myself at the end.

 

CHAPTER 4

“Good night, Helena. Tomorrow’s Saturday.” says Mr. Smith.

BACON! I GET BACON ON SATURDAYS!

“Yay!” I scream.

“I looove bacon!” says Hannah.

“I hate bacon.” says Helen.  

“Aw, come on Helen!”

But, I guess it’s no use because Helen hates everything, even bacon.

I am up early Saturday morning. I see Mr. Smith frying the bacon on the stove. The day is bright. I look out the window, but it still seems cold. Then, after I finish my bacon, I notice something. I look at an empty, purple dog bed.

Helen is gone!

 

CHAPTER 5    

How could I not have noticed! Helen must have left during the night. I search the camper with Hannah and Holly, but we cannot find Helen. We go to tell Jewell.

“Jewellit’sanemergencyHelenranawayandwecan’tfindher!” I blurt.

“Helen did what!?” shrieks Jewell. “We must search!”

Quickly she grabs our leashes, but I can’t help noticing the one she did not grab.

We go into the deep, dark woods to look for Helen. We can’t find her. But, then Hannah sees a trail of red liquid. It’s splattered all over the ground in little drops that shimmer as we look at them.

“It’s blood,” Holly whispers.

My heart creeps up into my throat. What if Helen is dead?

Then, faintly, we can hear little noises.

Wimph. Wi-wimph. Wimph, wi-wimph. Wi-wimph, wimph. Wimph.

We follow the wimphs. They lead us to a large cave with clear windows made out of thick candy wrappers stretched on sticks.

 

CHAPTER 6

Helen is stretched out on a bed made of large sticks and leaves inside the cave. She’s asleep. Four other beds are in the back of the cave.

“We’ll have to stay in this cave,” Jewell says. “I don’t know the way back to the camper.”

“There are enough beds for everyone,” I say.

“You’re right, Helena,” says Hannah. “We can live here.”

“Fine,” says Jewell, “Pick beds.”

I pick the bed in the very back. It’s the bed with a fur mattress and a pillow stuffed with leaves. I lie down. This feels good.  But, then I hear Jewell suck in her breath. I run to where she is examining Helen.

Helen’s foot is gashed and bleeding. The gash is so deep that I can see bone. Helen is very still, but she’s not dead because I can hear her hoarse breathing. Jewell swiftly takes out a surgical needle and silk thread. We’re lucky to have Jewell; she’s in vet school. But sometimes the animal is out of luck. I’m worried that Helen might be out of luck. But I can still hope. I go back to bed, not wanting to see Jewell perform surgery on Helen.

 

CHAPTER 7

I wake up early on Sunday morning. I go to Helen’s bed. The nasty gash is now closed. Except for the six loops of white silk holding it together, she looks like she did on Friday, before she had run away. But she can’t move. I am not sure what will happen to all of us, but I don’t have time to think.  I’ve got to go. Hannah’s calling me to come eat with her. See you later!

            

CHAPTER 8

Wow! Helen’s foot healed really well and, if you can believe it, we’re back in the campsite. We’re going home in three days, so we have very little time to have fun. But fun we shall have.

First, I have to tell you Mr. Smith’s story about the time we were gone and how we got back to the campsite. Wanna hear it? If not, you have to cope. ‘Cause I’m going to tell it. Here goes!

 

When you were Gone (told to Jewell)

By: Mr. Smith

“When you left, I was cleaning up the bacon mess with Mom. Suddenly, Sadie yelled ‘Jewell! Come see this new level in my video game!’ When you didn’t answer, and none of the dogs barked, I assumed that you had gone running with the dogs. I waited a few hours. Then, when you didn’t come back, I went looking for you.

I found the cave and saw you sewing up Helen’s paw through the window.  I didn’t want to interrupt you because I was afraid you would get nervous.  I was very proud to see you using your vet skills.

It was getting late, so I set up a tent near your cave. I waited the night.  Then, you know what happened.  I surprised you in the morning, picked all of you up, and took you back to the campsite.”

 

CHAPTER 9

The camper is quiet and cozy.  I am lounging on my dog bed, chewing on my rubber bone.  My dog bed and rubber bone came in a set from Peace Pets, so they are both turquoise (my absolute favorite color.) Suddenly…

“Helena!” Hannah’s voice booms over my head.

So much for peace and quiet.

“What?!!!” I woo back, “You hurt my ears!”

“Sorry,” she says, “but you have to see what I just saw.”

“What did you just see?” I ask.

“Something really, really cool!” she says.

“What’s the really cool thing?!” I ask.

“I can’t tell you,” she says, “but it is really cool.”

Tell me,” I warn, “or I’ll tickle you.”

“Okay!” she woos. “It’s Holly and Hel…”

“How is that cool?!” I thunder. “I see them every day.”

“Because they’re not fighting!” she yells over me.

“Fine!!” I say. “I’ll come.”

Holly and Helen are in the parents’ room. Hannah is right.  They are not fighting. Then, I hear something I have never heard before.

“Let’s not fight anymore.” Helen says to Holly.

“Agreed!”

Holly shakes Helen’s paw.

“I’m sick of fighting!” she adds.

I cannot believe my ears!             

 

CHAPTER 10

Bump, bump, ca-THUMP. The camper thumps and bumps along the wide road. Holly and Helen are bickering in the parents’ room. Bicker, bicker, bicker. They are arguing again. So much for “I’m sick of fighting!” I knew it wouldn’t last longer than one minute.

 

EPILOGUE

BACK AT HOME, we are sitting around. (What a good way to end our camping trip.) But, I forgot it’s Saturday. I have to go, because Mr. Smith is calling me to the kitchen…

 

The Ghost Story

Chapter One

It was a dark and stormy night. I was fast asleep when a big flash of lightning woke me up.

I checked the time. It was midnight. I climbed down from my bunk bed, drank some water, went to the bathroom, and got back in bed. My dad woke me up in what seemed like seconds. It was the last day of school, so I was excited. As usual, my dad had to pry my brother out of bed, while I was getting ready. I changed, brushed my teeth, ate my breakfast, put on my shoes and backpack, and walked out the door with my brother and my mom.

When I went out the door, I immediately noticed something strange. It was really windy and very quiet. There weren’t that many people on the street. When I got to school, everybody had transferred from breakfast to our first subject. It was a half day, so we got picked up at twelve o’clock.

Finally, it was twelve o’clock. My babysitter picked me up from school. I was walking home, when suddenly something came out of the ground (which I thought was a white race car going three hundred miles per hour). And before I could tell everyone, it was gone in one big flash of light. When I got home, I started playing on my phone. I decided to forget what had happened on the street.

 

Chapter Two

When I got home, I immediately started playing on my phone. My baby sister kept tapping on my leg. I asked my dad to bring snacks for the movie that we were going to watch. He said he would. He also said he would get pizza. When my dad came home, we started the movie. When it ended (which was at midnight), we went to bed. I tried to go to sleep. Then, I saw something that made my eyeballs pop out. I knew right away that it was a ghost.

First, it was quiet, and then it said, “I will haunt you.”

And then, in a flash, it was gone. I instantly fell asleep, and in the morning, I washed my face and forgot about what had happened at night. My dad told me that my brother and I had to go to baseball camp tomorrow. I liked baseball, so I immediately got excited. I was not really happy that I had to go to sleep, because the ghost would maybe appear, like it did the other night. But it did not show. I think that meant something, but I did not know.

 

Chapter Three                          

The next day, I woke up early to go to baseball camp. It started at nine o’clock a.m., so I had to be very quick. I got changed, brushed my teeth, put on my clothes and shoes, and waited for my mom and brother to get ready. Once they were ready, we got into a taxi and went to seventy-fourth street.

My coach told us that we had to go to the park to play baseball. We went down to the park and started a game of baseball. My team won. It was finally time to go home. I took the bus home. But when I came home, I saw something that made me faint. My parents were gone.

I was so stunned, I almost jumped out the window. Once I told my brother what happened, he passed out. It took him a long time to recover. I looked in their bedroom, and they were not there. I looked in my bedroom, and they were not there. Then, I went to the kitchen, and I found a note. It said: I have captured your parents. I have taken them all the way to LA.

“Darn it,” I said. “Now I have to get on a plane, and go to LA!!!”

But I did not have enough money. I went to my parents room. Luckily, the ghost did not take my parents’ credit card. I took the credit card and booked a flight for tomorrow, at seven p.m. I didn’t think my parents were ever going to forgive me for stealing their credit card, but I had to for their sake. I put everything I needed for the flight, and the ghost catcher, because I had to catch the ghost. I also helped my brother while he watched the duck song. I went to bed early. When I woke up, it was four o’clock.

“Perfect” I said.

My brother was already awake, which was good since he usually got up late. We got ready and went to the airport. It was 5:59. We got out of our taxi, checked in, and went through security. Then, we went to Shake Shack and got hamburgers. Our plane was at gate B7. We boarded the plane. I had booked a business class seat for me and my brother. So, that meant I would probably be grounded for some time. But I guess it was worth it. I watched a movie, took a nap, and then we were there!

We got into a taxi and went to the building the ghost said to go to. And they were there. I snuck in, past the doorman, and went to the elevator. When we reached the top, we saw our parents. Still alive, thank goodness.

“Hey,” we both said.

“Hey,” my parents said.

I tried to untie the rope they were tied to, when something hard hit me and made me bleed. It was the ghost.

He shook the ground and said, “Wah-Ha-Ha-Haaa.”

“Let them go,” I said.

“Never,” he said. “They did not believe in me, so I captured them.”

Then, I got an idea. I was going to make my parents fake believe that they believed in the ghost, and then I would capture it and free my parents.

I said to the ghost, “My parents believe in you.”

I gave them the stare that said, “Say yes.”

Then my parents said, “Yes, we believe in you.”

So then the ghost let them free, and then I immediately opened the ghost catcher, and captured the ghost! I untied the rope, and my parents and my brother and I went all the way back to the airport, got on the plane, and went back home.

When we got home my dad immediately started the punishments!

“Punishment number one, you are not even touching your electronics for one month!” my dad said. “Punishment number two, no movie night on Fridays for one month. Punishment number three, because of what happened just now, we will not be going anywhere, anytime soon.”

I shrugged and went to my bedroom to play with my puddy. My parents were back, and I was feeling… okay and my brother was playing with my sister. That night when I went to sleep, I tried to forget what happened. I could not wait for the day ahead of me.

 

Bobzilla the Brick!

There was a brick named Bobzilla. He was in a mud pile on a grassy field far away from his wall, where his family was. His dream was to fit in with his family.

His family made fun of him. They were normal, red bricks, but he was pink. His brothers and sisters said that they didn’t want a pig in their family. He was really sad. He was crying and making a sad face. So, he ran away from his family, never looking back.

He ran to a field of grass — nice, pretty green, fresh grass. He felt happy because he was away from his family, and there would be no one to call him a pig.

He met his best friend. His best friend’s name was Bob. Bob was a frog. They both loved doing the same games and eating the same foods. But, Bobzilla didn’t know if he could trust Bob completely, yet, because they had just met a few minutes ago. So, he didn’t tell him why he ran away.

They played a game of truth or dare, and Bob told Bobzilla about a secret that he didn’t tell anyone before. Bob’s secret was that he was originally a person, and an evil sorceress turned him into a frog. He started eating things as a frog and doing the things that a frog would do, and he finally realized that it was kind of fun to be a frog because you get to jump around everywhere. He was still himself.

Bob asked Bobzilla if there was anything wrong.

Bobzilla said, “Yes, there is.”

But, Bobzilla didn’t know if he wanted to tell Bob. So, Bobzilla told Bob if he could play a round of truth or dare to tell a secret.

“Yes,” Bob agreed.

“Truth or dare?”

“Truth,”said Bob.

“Tell me your biggest secret,” Bobzilla asked.

Bob said,  “My biggest secret is that I was once a person, but an evil sorceress turned me into a frog, but I like my frog life too…”

The bridge broke! Oh no!!!

He was then stuck in a big pile of cement for a long time, and he didn’t even know how long he was stuck in there because he wasn’t paying attention. So, he thought about a way to get out of the pile of cement. Eventually, he found a way to get out. He thought he could call Bob the frog to come over and help him get out. But, Bobzilla wasn’t an ordinary brick, although he was pink instead of the actual red. That made him unique, he could do tricks, he could walk, he could talk, he could do anything that an ordinary brick couldn’t do.

Then Bob came, and he was so strong that he was able to pull Bobzilla out of the cement pile!

The End

 

A Trip to Colombia

Landon is a boy who wants to go to Colombia by himself. Colombia is like New York, but with houses instead of apartments and trolleys and a lot of nice trees. It smells good because there’s a lot of Colombian food and restaurants. It sounds loud because there are a lot of people trying to get into restaurants.

Landon is all packed up to go to Colombia, and when Landon wakes up in the morning, his mom and dad say that Landon can’t go to Colombia by himself. And that day, at school, Landon is very mad and sad. Also, Landon gets in trouble because he pushes some kids, because he is mad about his mom and dad’s decision. When Landon gets home, his mom and dad are still not letting him go to Colombia. Landon is holding a cold spoon in cold milk. Landon has tears on his face.

Most of Landon’s family in Colombia are from Bogota, and Landon is from Bogota too. Landon wants to go to Colombia by himself because the last time Landon went with his mom and dad, Landon had a very bad time. They were not paying attention to him. They were mostly talking to family members. So, that’s why Landon wants to go to Colombia by himself.

A year later, Landon asks his mom and dad again if he can go to Colombia. Landon’s parents are more convinced, than a year ago, about Landon going to Colombia. They forgot about what happened last time he asked to go, and he has been better. A week later, Landon’s parents tell Landon that he can go to Colombia by himself. In school, Landon has no problems this year because he can go to Colombia by himself. When he couldn’t go to Colombia last year, bad things happened to him.

Landon goes to Colombia the next day and when he is on the plane, the flight attendant asks Landon where his parents are, and Landon says that his parents let him go to Colombia by himself. So, Landon has to go back to the United States, and when he gets home, his parents say, “Why are you back home, Landon?”

Landon says, “The flight attendant on the plane made me come back home.”

Landon’s parents agree to not be annoying and go with him to Colombia, so he can have a fun time. When Landon gets on the plane, he sees the same flight attendant and the flight attendant tells Landon, “I see you brought your parents along.”

When Landon gets to Colombia, it is very warm and sunny. Landon has a house in Bogota that is very big. Landon has a lot of stuff that not all kids have. Landon has a very big and deep pool, and Landon also has a pretty, nice garden with a lot of plants and flowers. Landon’s favorite meal from Colombia is the bandeja paisa. The bandeja paisa is basically ground meat, beans, arepa, charon, rice, and sausage. And with it, you can drink a soda that’s called mazana or hot chocolate.

One day, Landon’s family says to Landon, ’’Do you want to stay in Colombia?’’

They’re in his aunt’s house. His parents are most likely thinking that he is thinking about staying.

Landon says, “I want to stay in the United States.”

His parents are very surprised. Their eyebrows are lifted, and their mouths are open.

“Why do you want to go back to the United States?” his mom asks.

“I want to go to the United States because I actually like to be with you. When I said to you guys that you ruined my trip, I was trying to hide that I really like to be with you guys.”

His parents are surprised, and they are closer to him now. They semi-hug him.

“Okay, we can leave tomorrow,” his dad says.

“That sounds good.”

“If you would have stayed in Colombia, I would have been sad.”

 

The Star, the Heart, and the Walking Fish (Part Two)

Chapter 2: Kurt

I looked up at the face of a young boy, but he was distorted by some unknown substance. It was evening, so was it just darkness messing up my vision? No, there was some gurgling sound as well. Suddenly, it had hit me. That sound was water! I had never liked the stale biscuits that the boy shoved into my mouth. They tasted like a species of cardboard, and yes, I meant species. They didn’t taste like normal biscuits, they tasted like crap, but delicious crap that I was eternally grateful for. The water flowed across my face, and since my lips were cracked, it gave me brief relief, until I saw the Kaiser’s crest on his shoulder. Wilber! Was he okay? What happened? My mind was prepared to burst with questions.

“Where is Wilber?” I asked with a frantic air.

Was he dead? Wait, wasn’t Wilber evil? Maybe. No. Half? No. Enough to keep an eye on him, I guess. I was delirious. I thought he was my friend, but the real question was: who was this German idiot  who would help soldiers of the Triple Entente? We had the French symbol, and he was definitely German. Something didn’t add up.

“Your friend awake,” said the boy, “vision too fuzzy, but I have pistol to your friend and knife that any moment go into stomach.”

So that was the catch. This German boy was after information. Well, the minute he looked at Wilber, I would take out my knife, and the positions would be flipped. Wilber knew this as well and smiled briefly at me as he slowly edged out of the boy’s vision. When his eyes flicked to Wilber, I sliced his knife hand, and Wilber preemptively jumped out of the way of his instinctive pull of the trigger. The boy screamed and dropped his knife, which was grabbed by me, and the gun was quickly grabbed by Wilber, who stood uneasily with the firearm pointed at the boy, lying in a sort of turtle position with his hands raised in a halfhearted attempt to protect himself.

“Who are you, and why did you come to our camp?” Wilber asked with a now rightly earned air of superiority.

“Don’t have camp,” the boy stuttered out in his broken English. “Have piles of dirt.”

Wilber and I shared another look. He may be German, but insulting your captors tended to yield worse results than complimenting or praising them did.

“You were trying to extract information from us, the least you can do is grovel,” replied Wilber, flecks of spit flying out of his mouth in rage.

Wilber was born in Metz, Germany, a harsh place in a neighborhood where the Germans practiced firing shells. Wilber didn’t really know how to talk to people, a thing that had begun in his childhood when he had lost his home to a stray German test shell when he was eleven. He went to find work, but strayed too far once, and while he was away, his family was accused of being French spies and were put before a firing squad three days before he returned. He finally, after staying in his childhood home for a while, discovered extra money that his father hid. He used it to buy his way to Britain, where he became a newspaper boy until he scraped together just enough money to go to America, where he met me. He was an orphan when I found him in the streets after his immigration from Britain. We had become friends ever since I ran away to France, and we joined the French Army together. The Orphan Duo, as we were known. Our ages had become a carefully guarded secret, and one that we kept with our lives. But this German boy seemed almost fourteen, way too young for an army man even by our standards.

“Grovel? I not bow.” He seemed more confident now. “I never betray Kaiser Vilhelm.”

“Then that will be your own demise,” said Wilber as he leveled the gun towards him.

“Stop!” I shouted as Wilber prepared to shoot the proud German.

Wilber turned to me questioningly.

“Russell, this traitor to the world killed my family.”

I opened my mouth, but he cut me off.

“You know what I mean. Germans. In fact, you do not have a say in this. This is strictly personal between me and the filth he owes his allegiance to. Don’t you know Germans are the filthiest type of organism on the planet? They are lower than scum, not worth the dirt he says our camp is made of. I have every right on the planet and tens of thousands of grieving families to back me up. What do you have? Some foolhardy, chivalrous code that will get you nowhere but death by snakes like this one. You cannot blame this choice on lethargy. You have to capitulate to these instincts, Russell. They are there for a reason,” Wilber said heatedly.

I sighed. Wilber did have a point, but he made a mistake in telling me to capitulate. I didn’t give in to anything, and I wouldn’t start now. I knew Wilber would let down his guard easily with a well placed stroke, and so I began to put on an indifferent and apathetic air.

“Look Wilber-” I began, but Wilber cut me off.

“That was a rhetorical comment. You don’t respond to it. We can either waste time arguing over this and then kill him, or take advantage of the cool night, get back to the Hope Reservoir with his canteen, and be off. Your choice.”

I glared at him. It was hard to argue with someone who wouldn’t let you finish a sentence.

“Wilber, stop and think for a second. If we went from the trenches to the Hope Reservoir, which was parallel to the battle lines, then went in circles, randomly picked a direction, and saw a random German strolling-”

I was interrupted again, but by someone different.

“Then you are in Deutschland, obviously.” The German boy smirked, resembling a gangster from a story, with his word choice and fake accent he put on. I suddenly felt an urge to go with Wilber’s strategy, but I stopped myself quickly.

“As annoying as you are, sadly, we’re going to keep you,” I said to the kneeling teen as he slowly moved forward, now back in his turtle.

Wilber now appeared resigned to the German’s fate, but he still wanted to belittle the German one last time as the boy crawled towards them.

“You know, Napoleon once said that an army moves on its stomach. I’m now sure he was talking about German soldiers.”

I couldn’t help sniggering at that last comment, but I immediately reproached myself as Kurt became flushed, got up, and dusted himself off. I thought that we were somewhere near the French city of Somme, but we could’ve been near Verdun or Switzerland. Anyway, given our predicament, It didn’t really matter.

“So, what’s your name?”

We needed something to pass the time before I could figure out where we were.

“Kurt,” the boy said.

“Where’s your family?” I asked, slightly over eager in my joy at finally making headway.

“They were murdered in cold blood,” he said stonily. “I left them for the army, and when I came back, they were dead. I don’t know how it happened, so I just stayed in the army.”

Okay, that didn’t work, I thought to myself. I was about to try a different angle to get in, but he cut me off.

“What do you plan on doing with me? And your dilemma? How will you handle that?” he said, trying to stop my efforts for enjoyment before anything became of him, his usual strategy.

I was actually now getting very worried about Kurt calling to the Germans, or waving a flag of surrender. It was hard to guard to him from anything white and even harder to have to watch him constantly. It was out of the question, though, to leave Kurt even slightly unattended. Kurt was really getting on my nerves, but he was our only chance out, unless we wanted risk a hit or miss in a random direction and end up in Berlin. The sun was already pretty low on the horizon, and by the time it became too dark to continue, we had laid down in a cluster of rocks, and I went on guard to watch the camp. I turned around and saw Kurt staring at my back. I turned around to look at him.

“What?” I asked, feeling somewhat unnerved.

He kept staring at me until he finally said something.

“Say it again. What you were muttering,” he asked.

“You mean my prayers?”

He nodded.

“If that is what you call them.”

Suddenly, I was struck with a thought. What religion did this boy — sorry, Kurt — identify with? Wilber was an atheist, and I was a Jew, but what did this new member of our crew believe in?

“Are you a Jew?” I asked tentatively.

“No. And no other religion either,” he responded.

Ah, so the boy was an atheist, like Wilber. Darn. I wondered why they hadn’t bonded over the fact yet. Something was wrong. I felt another pair of eyes bore into my back. I turned around, Kurt’s gun in my hand, and prepared to fire as I turned. It turned out to be Wilber angrily staring at me.

“What?” I asked, in a slightly provocative tone.

“He is not an atheist.”

Wilber stared at me with such an unrivaled intensity, it made me flinch.

“How can you be so sure?” I asked him.

I wondered now if there was some kind of aura, a vibe that atheists gave off, or a somewhat secret signal that only other atheists picked up on. I tried to imagine Wilber with a halo or some kind of invisible radio signal that he radiated from his head, or something like that.

“He is too devoted. He fights for something, I can tell. There is something he hides from us, and he better come clean to me.”

A small smile appeared on Wilber’s face, but one devoid of real happiness. It looked more like a grimace or a scowl, but really, it was just a smile with no life. I shriveled away from his smile to make him focus the spotlight on Kurt. His eyes remained so fixated on Kurt, as if he were some kind of grotesque specimen.

Wilber followed his instincts when he ran from the German shell. He followed his heart when he immigrated to Britain from France on his family’s money, and from Britain to America as a stowaway. He followed his heart when he gave up the notion of monotheism and all faith for atheism. Wilber had followed his heart his whole life and would never take orders from anyone or, for that matter, give them. He strongly opposed change, and he had a very clear cut belief system that he would always follow and go by.

But, most of all, Wilber knew people. Wilber knew when people were lying and what they were hiding from him, but his gaping flaw was that he didn’t know himself nearly as well as he knew other people. Wilber could not, for the life of him, decipher himself, and had really only branded himself an atheist out of necessity. He liked to say that he was a powerful disciple and devotee to the heart, and I was fully prepared to see this seemingly innocent conversation go up in flames because of him. Kurt gave him a wolfish grin and stood up, fully prepared to meet the obvious challenge of his loyalty. He stood close to Wilber and paused momentarily.

“I owe my faith to only Germany. Religion is passing thought, no real importance. Loyalty to your nation is what counts. Nations will stand, but atheists are fools. Jews will die out because their numbers are so low, but Germans will always remain the utmost on the egalitarian chain. We are the true heroes of the war, and all who doubt us will fall. Nationality is the only thing that will persist throughout the ages, where beliefs will fail and religion will fall. And yes, my broken English was fake. You, Russell, believed me every moment for your religion, and Wilber here overlooked it, forsaking his true ulterior suspicions for exterior ones. You people are too predictable.”

Wilber and I sat in a stunned silence, too dumbfounded to speak. The wolfish grin still inhabited Kurt’s face, making it look as if he presided over all of this. He then went back to bed using his kingly walk, making him look smugly royal, as if he had just expounded the answer to the meaning of life onto peasants who were struggling to comprehend life at its smallest.
Chapter 3: Rats and Rabbits

After the argument from the night before, I thought that we really needed to watch more attentively while in the camp. We packed our, well, nothing, as our camp was only shrubberies. That day, as we set off to make our way across the French border, a thought suddenly struck me. We had a German prisoner, which we couldn’t take with us across the border. We also couldn’t leave him stranded here without proper provisions, although the minute I told this to Wilber, he raised his eyebrows and muttered “Why not?” under his breath.

It had a certain paradoxical element, not only within itself, but also the fact that it did kind of help me get through the days, weighing pros and cons of both. We covered Kurt’s mouth with my torn jacket and tied it so that he wouldn’t call out to the Germans, but we were still worried about him somehow being like a beacon to German troops, that his mere presence, unless somehow guarded by some kind of shrubbery, would alert them. Hunger now began to gnaw at me, like a feral animal trying to escape the prison that was my stomach. We kept on going, wearily trudging through the landscape that had become all too familiar to me and my companions throughout these past days. Finally, our weary sights turned to the abundance of game that seemed to surround us.

Kurt was almost to the point of trying to shoot the both of us, and to the casual observer, he would have no premise to shoot us besides the fact that we had captured him. But, crazily enough, that was not the case with him. When I had first brought up the irony that we had had nothing to eat since Kurt had exhausted his rations nursing us to health, and yet we were surrounded by game, he looked at me, with a somewhat destabilized look of insanity, and started to yell.

“Why are you complaining about hunger when we have my gun and bullets for the rabbits and rats all around us? You are swimming in a freshwater lake, and you are complaining that there is no water to go around.”

He shook his head half in disgust and half, truthfully, in shock. Where he came from, utilizing nature was a part of life, an accepted fact that everyone seemed to understand and did so without hesitation or thought. He was appalled by the fact that we didn’t immediately understand his perspective and that we struggled to kill the rats and rabbits around us for one simple reason: we held respect for the life around us, and as I had thought earlier, we couldn’t kill with the same intensity of the bullets in our gun. It was different in the haze of the battlefield, when you were shooting at a somewhat unidentified foe, just randomly shooting your gun at what might as well be some kind of deformed beast. It was much different when the eyes of the creature looked at you hard beneath the fur, or scuttled to hide childishly under some remarkably insufficient barrier like a fallen leaf. What person could bring themselves to kill a living, breathing creature that you would then proceed to eat?

In this matter, I was somewhat influenced by Judaism, not a huge amount but somewhat, in my wariness against killing and eating another living creature in cold blood. It seemed much more innocent to eat meat that somebody else killed, knowing in some form or another that it wasn’t my fault, that it would be eaten anyway. Now pictures of the rabbit frolicking in a field harassed my mind. When I turned around, Wilber and Kurt were arguing loudly. I wonder why I hadn’t heard them in my reverie.

“You have no respect for any life!” Kurt screamed.

“I’m not the one who wants to kill your precious life, you are!” Wilber returned with fury.

“I mean life that COUNTS ME!”

“Well, at least I’m not killing my own kind!”

“What the hell are you talking about?”

“You’re lower than a rat. I thought he had some authority over you! Frankly, I’d rather you have the mind of a rat, it’d be such an improvement.”

Wilber’s tension from the other day had boiled into today. Wilber’s grimace-smile resurfaced again, this time in a more sarcastic form.

Suddenly, a bang rocked the ground around us. We were being shot at! Then, I saw that Kurt, in a quick maneuver, had grabbed the gun and shot the rabbit, leaving the rat to run away. Wilber stared at him with such an anger that I had never seen solicited from him before, and charged the few paces between them. He punched Kurt in the jaw, and I watched Kurt crumble before Wilber’s stocky form. Then, Wilber let out a cry of pain. Kurt had used a rock to hit him in the shins. Wilber jumped on Kurt, elbow forward, and jabbed him straight in the nose, hearing a crack. He got on top of Kurt and was immediately toppled off by Kurt’s hit to his right shoulder. He fell over and as he tried to get up, Kurt slugged him in the stomach.

But Kurt didn’t notice that Wilber’s left hand had moved behind him and only realized the fact when he received a crushing uppercut that almost sent him towards Wilber, but he fell backwards. Kurt then hooked Wilber’s leg and began to pull him downwards, all the while raining punches on his stomach, his mouth, and his cheeks. I suddenly realized that I had just been standing here the whole time, and I moved to intervene. I tried to break them up and received my fair share of punches in the process, but I finally succeeded in stopping them.

“What’s the matter with you?!” I asked heatedly, although I knew both their answers and the real one.

“Here’s the matter,” Kurt said,”You people are-”

“Would you shut up for just one damn second?” I said. Then, regaining my composure, I continued on. “Here’s the reason that you two are squabbling like this: You don’t have any food.”

Kurt started to get the gun, but Wilber stiff-armed him.

“Not yet, Kurt. If I know my friend,” he paused to slam in the emphasis, “he’ll have more to say on the matter, won’t you, Russell?”

He stared at me so hard that I flinched, for the second time in the last seventy-two hours.

“No, Wilber, I hate to concur with Kurt, but he’s right. We need the food.”

The dancing rabbit in my head began to seep blood from the numerous bullet holes I now imagined him with.

“The rats will destroy the rabbit then.” He turned to me.”I thought it was the other way around.”

It seemed like a very vague statement to anyone else, but it made perfect sense to me, and it hurt me to my core. Wilber sat down on one of the rocks in our den in disgust and went to sulk in a corner. Whenever I came near him, he would show his front teeth, chitter, and shy away from me angrily to prove his point. What he meant was that he thought that us, as white, pure, good creatures, were rabbits to Kurt’s alter-ego of a rat. When I had allegedly joined with Kurt in their disagreement, I had betrayed him and became a rat alongside Kurt, allied against the rabbit that was still and would always be Wilber.

Another crack rang through the air. I turned to Kurt, prepared to punch him nearly as hard as Wilber did, when I saw that the gun was lying on the floor near Wilber. We were being shot at! I got a glimpse of grey fabric as I glanced upwards to a tree grove we were planning to avoid for that very reason. During Wilber and Kurt’s fight, we had apparently moved our positions from our previous ones, throwing off our plans to go in one direction and hope for the best of luck. And now, we had to scratch our course because of Wilber’s rabbit drama and Kurt’s obstinacy.

Why was I the one who was caught between these two idiots all the time? Why did I have to suffer for their ridiculous qualms with eating or not eating? Really, I didn’t have to put up with it, I could just shoot the rabbits, shoot Kurt, and start walking, leaving the gun with Wilber. But, that was a crazy thought, especially when we were being shot at. I ran for cover near Wilber under an overhang, and Kurt was seeking shelter in a smaller alcove. Our two hideouts were now under machine gun fire, and there was no real cover. Wilber was too frightened to chitter at me again as bullets rained down on us.

“Damn it!” I whispered to no one in particular.

I picked the gun up off the ground, advanced towards Kurt, and crouched. I had just realized that he was left unattended, no less than 60 feet from the enemy. Kurt reached into his pants and gave me a hard stare. What was he doing? I kept moving. He pulled a bit of his underwear out. What was he threatening me with? He grimly smiled and mouthed the word “white” to me. Oh, his underwear was white. He wanted to surrender with it, show his Eagle. Then we would be killed as Allies. Brilliant. I stayed in my position as rain began to come down. That was actually a blessing in disguise, as rain would hopefully distort the sniper and the machine gunner’s accuracy. Now our only hope was that they would think we were a whole brigade, so they wouldn’t advance. I was only twenty feet away from Kurt, and I was seriously debating shooting him. We crouched there for a while, each eyeing the other, trying to predict their opponent’s next move, a deadly standstill.

After a few minutes, Kurt spoke. “Get the hell away from me now,” Kurt said, “And you know why you better do it fast.”

He held up his underwear. No! I hadn’t realized that he couldn’t get it off in sixteen paces, the distance I’d have to go to get to him, but he could if I stared at him for five minutes looking like a dumb cow. Now I had no advantages, and no Wilber, because any more movement would have the sniper’s gun on me. Then, a body fell out of the tree. More gunshots were heard, and shouts of pain and the enraged buffalo shrieks I knew filled the air. Destruction seemed to reign in this terrible landscape, without even some semblance of authority. I saw that all the Germans actually seemed to be dying and falling out of the tree. There were people in gray-green cloaks, more practical, but apparently no side either. Rogue Germans? Green Berets gone wild? Who knows? But I would soon find out. They were all coming down the trees in droves and looked to be swarming us.

“Leon.”

I heard Kurt muttering a few unintelligible words in German.

“Hello, fellow soldiers!” The man in the front of the leading group of five looked at us and smiled. “Little young to be in a war now, aren’t you?”

Then he looked in surprise at Kurt’s Eagle.

“And a German? One confusing group, I’ll tell you that much, little sirrahs, huh?”

He seemed to quite a merry, jubilant man, but I was still suspicious.

“Who are you?” I asked, a now ingrained distrust of nice people bearing the Kaiser’s Crest.

“His name’s Leon,” Kurt said darkly again.

I turned around to stare at him in surprise. I then became very conscious of everyone else staring at my back. But when I turned around, I realised that they were all staring at Kurt like I was, only they were behind me. I turned awkwardly back to Kurt, and then, ironically, all eyes shifted to me. I decided to break the silence.

“How do you know?” I asked quickly, before anyone could comment on my strange turning.

I knew it was worthless to try to explain, so I made it look like they were the ones being weird, what with their not answering. The rain was pouring down outside our little outcrop, and it almost made me reminiscent of the old days back home. The constant patter had almost lulled me to sleep when I finally got an answer.

“He’s a filthy traitor and a liar!” Kurt screamed.

Leon appeared unfazed by the vocal assault. He, however, was fazed when Kurt ran and got the gun.

“You damn murderer! You coward! You scum!”

Kurt had worked himself into such a rage that he was visibly sweating, even during the rain.

“Crook! Vandal! You have no honor! You are not German, nor are you human!” Kurt shot at Leon, just missing his arm.

He turned to me. He looked at me hard. We had both just realized that he had the gun. In my pity for him, I had allowed him passage to the gun, and as a defense, I reached into my pocket for a lighter. I found it. Then I reached for my extra gunpowder in my army jacket. Kurt was still focused on Leon. I pressed myself against the wall and tossed some powder behind Kurt, and fumbled to light the lighter for a second. It wouldn’t light. Kurt stared at me for a second when he heard scratching. One of Leon’s four men tried to jump on him. That turned out to be a bad move. Kurt shot grimly, and the man slumped mid-jump, staring into the ether that surrounded us, staring into nothing.

I sprang into motion, throwing the powder in his face along with the lighter. An acrid smell filled the air, and the air around Kurt turned into a whirlwind of fire, flaring up around him. He screamed, not in pain but in surprise, more of a yelp than a yell. I ran into the fire, knowing that it only lasted for a few seconds, and grabbed the gun from the ground where Kurt had dropped it. I held it to the back of his head. It felt a little weird to hold something as unwieldy as a rifle to someone’s head. I suddenly wished I had a pistol, which would also look much cooler. Kurt trembled and slowly walked forward, away from me.

Quickly, he pivoted and leaped on Leon before anyone could get a word out, and put his hands around Leon’s throat, his eyes burning with cold fury. Leon delivered a crushing punch to Kurt’s rib cage, and Kurt flew off of him with a loud crunch. Kurt gritted his teeth, and when Leon’s remaining three bodyguards tried to apprehend him, he outmaneuvered them and rammed into Leon’s slightly stout frame, head first.

“DIE, you thief! You damn murderer! You ingrate!”

Kurt shoved his elbow into the outside of Leon’s throat.

“Gurk!” Leon said, in a slightly strangled voice. He again bashed Kurt, now on the side of the neck, forcing him into two of the bodyguard’s arms. His jaw was taut, and eyes wild, thrashing at the bodyguards.

I watched in wonder at Kurt’s outburst, and I wondered exactly what had happened between the two men. I would soon get my answer.

“You lied to me!” Kurt’s left side was sagging, and he was bleeding hard from his dislocated nose. “We trusted you, and you betrayed us!”

I was staring at Kurt in a very new light, a light of determination and ferocity. He turned to me, a smart move on his part, isolating himself from the physical conflict that he actually started. He began to tell what had happened, with sporadic spasms of pain and screaming peppering his speech.

“This vagrant– aaaah!– my family had pity on him — graah! — he destroyed our house — gracch! — stole everything we owned.” He began to sob. “He tried to kill us all, and thank God, that in his blunderous rage, he stepped on some of the nail’s that pocketed our floor.”

“AGH!!” Kurt was obviously in a lot of pain, but I was, in a morbid sense, riveted by his tale. It also seemed to have some truth to it. Leon seemed appalled by the story, like he didn’t believe it. Kurt sat with his jacket to his ribs but immediately threw it away, now a damp cloth full of blood. Leon’s three remaining men began to set up camp near us, driving the stakes through the fabric and into the ground.

Kurt was a wreck, shivering in the corner. I almost made a move to help his pathetic form but a stern glance from Wilber told me not to. I didn’t know what I was supposed to do, with Kurt in the corner, Leon’s men and Wilber bonding and setting up the camp, and Leon calling in the rest of his meager force in with a horn. I elected to go and talk to Leon.

“Well hello, mister!” He said jovially “I’m really sorry that your friend, Kurt, feels that way, but I think that he’s just trying to cope with what-”

He pronounced ‘what’ in a weird way, with the ‘wh’ in who, and the ‘at’ like the end of cot.

“-happened in the past. I used to be a beggar, but his house burned down, and he blamed me for it. I didn’t try to kill his parents either. I’m actually from the West, ya know, if you couldn’t tell already, but my parents moved to Germany when I was a young kid. I ran ‘way though, and that’s how I became a beggar. But now I’m just boring ya. What are you doin’ with the little murderer? You know, by the way, the man he shot isn’t actually dead. So I guess he’s not really a murderer, more of a coma-creator.”

He chuckled at his morbid joke.

“Now I’m really prattling, tell me about yourself.”

I was enthralled by the way that he could talk, winding me into his yarn without me noticing anything. I liked him immediately, but I was also wary of it, knowing full well how dangerous a person is when they could do that. But he was very comforting to listen to, and it almost made me want to ask him to just keep going. But, my addled mind went on. He won’t think the same if you keep staring at him like this with your mouth open.

“I-I-”

I couldn’t get through anything, and I didn’t want to either. My past was something that I’d rather not delve into, especially when I could be listening to him.

“I don’t know what to tell you” I said, “I’m a Jew, and we picked Kurt up when he tried to get information from me and my friend, Wilber.”

When I said the word ‘Jew’, his nose wrinkled a little bit, and his warm and friendly face got a little colder. I didn’t really expect that kind of a reaction from this kind of a man, but I was getting used to it. I excused myself and started back to the camp, happy with my discovery of a new friend in our merry band. I settled down on some moss, glad that the overhang protected me from the rain. I looked over at Kurt, who seemed to be doing something to his face. I shook my head in capitulation and laid my head down on the leaves that Leon’s men had gathered for us. I heard another bang and a scream of pain. Kurt had knocked his nose back in place.

 

Karen’s Diary

Saturday, May 1

O-M-G! The craziest thing in the world happened last night! Sandra had made me lose my boyfriend, and I wanted to seek revenge. So, I planned to throw her dolls in the attic while she was doing her homework.

I went to the playroom to grab her dolls when I forgot that all of her favorites, including Elsie number two, were in her room, and that was where she was doing her homework! I realized I could trick her into leaving the room long enough to grab all of those dolls and throw them through the attic door.

I got a great idea to tell her that Mom wanted her to help wash the dishes. Sandra always listened to Mom. Going down the stairs (Sandra was very slow when it involved stairs), and finding Mom (I don’t know where in the world she was.) gave me more than enough time to do my plan.

The crazy part started here: after I tricked her, she was slowly dragging her feet down the stairs. So I grabbed the dolls and climbed the ladder to the attic. When I got there, I couldn’t believe who I saw: Mom!

She was suspicious, so I stammered that Sandra wanted me to throw the dolls into the attic for her. My mom reluctantly believed me. I dumped the dolls onto the attic floor, scrambled down the ladder, and jumped to my desk, pretending to read, just in time to hear my sister come up the stairs and scream, “Where are my dolls?!”

I know my mom will know I was lying to her, eventually, but who cares? Even if I get into trouble, all Sandra’s favorite dolls are covered in attic dust, so we are basically even!

 

Monday, May 3

I am freaking out right now. Last night I had a nightmare involving Elsie (the original one). In my dream, I was in the attic for some reason, where all the dolls were.

Sandra screaming, “Where are my dolls?!” was echoing all around me, and I kept hearing thump thump thump, as if somebody was walking towards me. I wanted to get out of the attic, but suddenly, everything grew silent, and I could make out the shape of a doll.

Elsie. Sandra’s favorite doll. She was walking by herself. There was no hair on her head. I don’t know why I dreamed of that, because even though I gave her a “haircut” before, it wasn’t a bald one.

“Ah, it’s you again, Karen Maxwell. I have come for revenge,” Elsie said.

Her voice was eerie, echoing, yet calm.

All of a sudden, every single doll in the attic stood up. Their eyes were glowing red. They were all chanting in Elsie’s calm but eerie voice, “Revenge! Revenge! Revenge!”

Their echo was peculiar. Sandra’s voice screaming, “Where are my dolls?!” started again. It was all a mess of random voices echoing everywhere. I couldn’t bear it.

“AUGH!!!” I screamed in my nightmare. “I can’t take it anymore!”

Then, I woke up.

I am having an absolute breakdown right now. I am in my bed shaking and writing in my diary. Now, I suddenly have the urge to check the dolls in the attic. Goodbye for now. (And wish me luck.)

* * *

There were no dolls in the attic. I suddenly got a scary feeling that the dolls got up and left, but I came to my senses and told myself that was ridiculous. I guess Mom figured it out and put the dolls back in Sandra’s room.

I started worrying about what my mom would say when I went downstairs. Mom was crazy about us lying to her. Once, Sandra lied to her saying that she wanted to do some chores outside but ended up going to her friend’s house. Mom was so mad that she grounded Sandra in her room for a month!

I went downstairs, and Mom was glaring at me as I expected her to be.

“Karen Jane Maxwell! I think you lied to me last night! You are to apologize to Sandra and to me. And you are grounded in your room for a month. Do you understand me, young lady?”

“Yeah,” I muttered.

I hate it when my mom talks to me like a little girl (even though I might still be a little immature. Just a little.) Later.

 

Wednesday, May 5

Getting grounded was never a big deal for me, until I suddenly remembered that the middle school dance was the day after tomorrow and I couldn’t go! This also reminded me of the boyfriend problem! This was a big deal, and my friends would definitely think I was a pathetic idiot.

Sandra told me that she had a five-hour science class on Friday, Mom was out, and as always, Dad was still on his work trip. I was going to be home alone, and the sudden thought of being alone with those crazy dolls struck me. For a second, I seemed to be in the attic again.

I shook myself out of it. It was ridiculous! What was it with me being afraid of those crazy dolls?

I realized that because everybody was going to be out, I could possibly, secretly sneak out of the house to go the party. I liked that idea. I then reminded myself that I couldn’t go to the dance without a boyfriend.

I seriously needed to find a new boyfriend by text, email, phone, anything! I was desperate. I reached out for my cell phone and dialed 348-493… the number of a boy in my class named Austin, who was pretty cute.

“Hello?”

It was a gruff voice, not like Austin’s voice. Maybe it’s his dad, I thought to myself.

“Um, th-this is Karen Maxwell. B-by any chance, are you Austin Grewal’s father?”

“I don’t know who the hell Austin Grewal is, and I shall never care.”

I heard the phone hang up. Did I dial the wrong number? Maybe it was 348-493….

I decided to try again with 348-493… I bit my lip and pressed each number so slowly and carefully that I was pretty sure my phone would explode from impatience.

Beep. Beep. Hi. Leave a message if you must but I, Austin, ain’t have no time to check it. Now bye. Beeep.

I sighed. Austin was off my list for now. I thought about Christopher, my old boyfriend who broke up with me (because of Sandra). The truth was, I still liked him, so I decided to call him. Maybe we could get along again.

Oops, Mom is calling me. I’ll call him tomorrow!

 

Thursday, May 6

AUGH!!! The reason why I’m screaming is because of Chris and Sandra. I hate them! I called Chris today. My fingers were shaking when I reached for my phone, but somehow I managed to dial his number. He picked up on the first ring.

“Hello?”

“Um, hi. I-I w-was wondering i-if you w-would be interested in going to the dance with me. S-sorry about the, you know…” I stopped myself.

I had forgotten to introduce myself. AUGH! I felt like crying because I messed up. But before I could say my name…

“Who is this?”

“Uh, this is like, uhm Karen, y-you know. Uh, yeah, so…”

Stop being nervous! I told myself.

“Oh, right. Karen. I’m kind of busy. Could you make this quick?”

“Uh, yeah, sure! So, uhm, are you available f-for the dance on Friday, so, like, we can go, like, together and stuff?”

“Sorry. I’m going with someone else.”

I was filled with grief.

“Oh, okay.”

Suddenly I got hyper.

“Who you goin’ with?” I demanded.

I heard muffled voices. Then. . .

“Yeah, Sandra. Your sister’s on the phone.”

“Wait, what?”

Was he talking to Sandra? But how?

“Sorry, your sister was just telling me how excited she was for the dance. Who’s your date? That gross kid Mark?”

“No, of course not! Wait, is Sandra–” I stopped myself again.

I understood. Sandra was at Chris’s house. They were going to the dance together. Hold on! What about that five-hour science class that Sandra was supposed to go to when the dance took place? Sandra loved science, so she couldn’t possibly miss science to go to a dance! Did she make Chris break up with me just so she could go to the dance with him? Everything was mixed up, and I was so confused.

“At my house? Yeah. Duh! And yes, Sandra did lie about the class. She prefers me! Did you really think you could get me back that easily? I broke up with you because you were creepy. You’re just too paranoid, girl!”

“Uhm, okay. I need to go.”

“Bye, Carrot Maxwell.”

Beeep.

That was what happened. I don’t feel like writing right now. Bye.

 

Friday, May 7

I am so happy right now. I finally got a boyfriend! And, in case you are not paying attention to the date, today is the dance.

Okay, so this is what happened yesterday. After writing in my diary, I had a complete meltdown, and then I cursed Chris’s name and my sister’s for, like, three hours, which totally made me feel a whole lot better about the incident.

Then, I grabbed my phone and texted with my BFFs for, like, another three hours.

After that, it was two o’clock. My sister was at Chris’s house, and Mom left for work.

Then, I decided to do part three for my boyfriend thing. I knew this was already the day of the dance, so it was kinda late, but there were always a couple of other stragglers like me hanging around, trying to find a date. You never know!

Suddenly, before I could grab my phone from the charger (it was running low at 2%), it started ringing like crazy.

I hastily ran to the phone and answered on the second ring.

“Hello? Karen Maxwell speaking.”

“Uh, hi. I’m Alex Rieful, from, y’know, math class?”

I was excited! This was Sandra’s boss! I was sure that he was going to ask me to the dance. I crossed my fingers (and my toes for extra luck).

“Yeah, and…?”

I thought I might’ve made myself sound too demanding, but I just couldn’t help it!

“Well, I was wondering if y-you weren’t yet occupied for the dance, no?”

Yes! Finally! Yes! Yes! Yes!

“Well, I am actually also looking for a date, so yes!” I tried to hide my excitement, but I just couldn’t.

I then covered my phone with a tissue and ran to the other side of the room and screamed, “Yes! I Finally have a date! And a good one! Hula! Wooo!”

I was pretty sure Alex was doing the same thing because when I came back to my phone, he didn’t ask something like, “What was that about?”

“Okay, then, how about you come over for a while, and then we can carpool to the high school?”

There was excitement in his voice.

“Oh, yes! Of course!”

I was so glad that I finally found a boyfriend just in time! Hula!

I will have a lot of things to write about in my next entry, about the dance, etc. Well, no time to write. Gotta dress up!

 

The Elf’s Axe

Doesn’t it seem odd when one object creates such an exciting adventure? No, such a thrilling tale. Yeah, that’s better. Okay, okay, I’ll get going.

It all started in the bustling Elf Town, where the elves woke up at the start of dawn to work in their woodcutting business. There was one elf, Mark, who had a strong-built axe that was passed down in his family. It could cut the strongest trees in a mere five seconds.

One morning, Mark woke up with a yawn. Straightening out his messed up, black hair, he sat up in bed.

“Hmph, another normal… WHAT?!”

Mark stared, bewildered at the sight of the empty wooden hanger on the wall where his axe should have been.

“I couldn’t have misplaced it… unless…”

Mark didn’t want to think that the axe could have been stolen. He ran out of the house, his green, cotton shirt untucked. All the other elves were working already, whistling as they did their hard work.

“Uhm, excuse me, did anyone see my axe?” Mark asked.

“Maybe the dressmaker knows,” replied an elf.

Mark slouched off.

***

“Oh! Mark,” the dressmaker said, jumping up from her rusty chair and straightening her gray, tattered dress.

“I was wondering if you knew where my axe went. I mean, it’s urgent,” Mark said.

“Oh, really?” The dressmaker blushed. “Phew, it’s hot today. Don’t you have extra axes?”

“You know that I don’t have extras, and it can’t be lost…”

“Maybe someone in the neighboring kingdom has it. Anyone would want to get their hands on that axe!”

“I guess…” Mark heaved a great sigh.

He stepped out of Elf Town, looked back at the rising sun, and set off.

 

The Kingdom

As Mark set off on the pebble road, the clouds turned grey and bam! It started to pour. Mark was drenched in seconds. Maybe the royals would be kind enough to let me in, Mark thought, seeing the lights of the stone castle and a grand carriage parked in front. When he arrived, two guards came up to him.

“What are you here for?” asked a tall knight as he strode up to Mark.

“Are you an elf?” the second knight asked.

“Yes,” Mark replied. At least he hadn’t called him a little person. “Do you need glasses?”

“Excuse me?” the second knight said, offended.

The first knight rolled his eyes.

“What’s all the commotion?” a low voice chuckled from inside the castle.

It was the king. A regal figure stepped outside. The king had a bushy beard and wide, brown eyes.

“Uhm, your Majesty, I was wondering if… ” Mark began.

“Oh, come in, come in!” the king said happily, gently pushing Mark inside. “You’re drenched!”

“Dearie, now is not the time,” said a woman who was clearly the queen, nodding to another royal family who seemed to be visiting.

They wore very fancy clothing and held planning notepads. Mark stared, rooted to the spot. A beautiful princess, with long, brown hair and a flowy, green dress, stood next to a prim prince. She did not seem to be enjoying herself. The second royal family turned toward Mark, including a giggly twelve-year-old, who seemed to be the prince’s sister.

The princess turned, her eyes shining.

She ran over to Mark, whispering, “Thank you, this Prince Tom is just ehh!” She covered her mouth. “I shouldn’t have said that.”

“What is wrong, my love?” Prince Tom asked, raising his eyebrows.

“Uhm, I should show our guest his room,” the princess said hastily, pulling Mark up the grand marble staircase.

“But, Annie dear… ” the queen called, followed by the other royal family’s angry retorts.

“Who is this young man?” Prince Tom exclaimed.

Once they were on the second flight, Annie (who was the princess it seemed) said, “So, what brings you here?”

“Oh,” Mark exclaimed, “I was wondering if you have seen an axe with rubies in the handle.”

“Oh, no, the Kingdom of Burke uses shovels, that’s how we dig up stone from the ground. It’s even on our flag.” Annie stopped in her tracks, her eyes sparked. “Okay, here is your guest room. My room is five doors away. While this storm goes on, meet me in my room at eight.”

Mark stared after her, aghast. Mark stared up at the ceiling, the thunder bellowing and echoing across the grounds. He was quite surprised the king let him stay. He looked at the clock for the fortieth time in a row. The clock struck eight. He sprang from bed and gently knocked on Annie’s door.

She opened it. She wore a dark blue dress, with a leather belt across her shoulder, and her hair was tied in a long braid.

“I’m going to help you find your axe.” Annie said clearly.

“What? No! You are a princess… ” Mark stuttered.

His mind raced. He kind of wanted to be with Annie but, at the same time, he didn’t.

“Uhh… ” was all he managed to say.

Annie grabbed a thick rope that was tied to a rusty anchor.

“Look, I always wanted to be an adventurer, and this is my chance! I want to be who I want to be and help you,” she said.

She slipped a leather-bound notebook with a pen in her belt. Mark sighed. He did need to find his axe soon, and some help wouldn’t hurt. Annie flung the rope out the window. The anchor thudded to the ground.

“Okay, we climb the rope. I memorized where the fewest guards are, or uhm, the lazy ones at least. I have an idea who might have stolen your axe,” Annie exclaimed excitedly.

She flung herself across the rope like it was a zipline. Mark was shaking, but he jumped through the window, stumbling a bit. The storm had calmed down by then.

“I left a letter to my parents,” Annie panted, her hair swaying in the wind.

“Who did you say might have stolen my axe?” Mark asked quietly, breaking the awkward silence.

“Ninjas,” Annie said. “I’ve read about them. They are quite secretive. Their footsteps are silent when they stealthily go after treasure. That means you must have not heard them.”

“N-Ninjas? Really? Out of all the people in the world, ninjas? It’s dangerous,” Mark stammered.

He didn’t want to be a scaredy cat, but it was risky.

“It’s fine. It’s night now. When we get to ninja headquarters, they should be fast asleep.”

Annie climbed the rope and disappeared over the wall. She was a very good climber. Mark followed.

“Okay, shh… ”

Annie put a finger over her lip. Quietly, the two walked over the rainwashed village streets.

As they trudged forth, across wildflower fields in the silent night, Mark muttered to himself, “It’s fine, they are only dangerous, quiet ninjas that could kill us in one swipe of their katanas. What could go wrong?”

Mark thought of the short, sharp, light swords the ninjas were known for. Annie rolled her eyes. Mark covered his mouth so he wouldn’t shriek. Annie opened her mouth and closed it again. There, on a bridge going across a small stream, was a giant bridge troll with lumpy, grey skin and a big, long nose. He was snoring deeply. The two held their noses as they made their way carefully around the troll.

“We are here,” Annie said proudly, staring at a compass she hid in her notebook, a few minutes later.

Sure enough, there was a high mountain, the top shrouded in heavy mist, giving it an eerie feeling. A bright, full moon was all they could see. The pair climbed up. Luckily, the mountain had a lot of bumpy sections, making it easier to set the anchor.

“Are we… there… yet?” Mark panted heavily.

“Yes,” Annie coughed.

Mark helped heave Annie up, the cool night air soothing on their sweating faces.

“Oh dear,” Mark squeaked.

Annie squinted at a tall, black silhouette nearby. The man was holding a katana and looking over at a boy sharpening steel. He turned, staring right at Annie and Mark.

“How dare you, you filthy creatures,” the ninja cried raising his katana, which gleamed in the moonlight.

Annie tripped on her dress. The ninja turned his katana toward her. Mark jumped in front of Annie.

“Get away from her! You, you… ”

“You what? Want to be the first victim?” the ninja snarled.

“Master,” a younger voice said.

“Jack, get back to work,” the ninja master snapped.

“Master, I need to get something…”

Suddenly, a small boy with a ninja outfit, and small katana in his belt, came bounding over. He smacked hard into Mark and Annie, sending them tumbling over the edge of the mountain.

“Traitor!” the ninja bellowed, shaking his fists.

“Ahhhh! I’m dying,” Mark screamed as the three tumbled down the mountainside.

He didn’t know what was worse, being caught by ninjas or falling to their deaths. Annie’s mind raced, her heart pounding faster by the second. She clutched her rope and, with all her effort, swung it. It clung to a bumpy edge.

“Grab on!” Annie cried, swinging on the rope.

“Owww!” Mark shrieked as a pointy rock pierced his shoulder, ripping his shirt.

He grabbed on, holding Jack’s hand, his body shaking all over. Annie clambered over to the pointy slab where the anchor lay. Her dress was sprinkled with dirt, but she didn’t care. The three made their way down the mountainside. When they got to the bottom, Annie flung herself into Mark, shaking as well.

“What was that for?” Mark managed to say to Jack.

“Well, it was all I could think of, unless you wanted to be sliced up by Master Sling Chai,” Jack said sheepishly from under his mask.

He pulled it down. He had wavy, blond hair and wide, blue eyes. Jack massaged his hands.

“What were you and your master doing then?” Annie asked.

The sky was tinged pink.

“Oh, he was punishing me for accidentally making him trip and breaking one of his favourite treasures, his fire bow. He made me sharpen, like, forty or fifty katanas.” Jack sighed. “Guess I won’t be returning.”

“Do you know if any ninjas have stolen an axe? It has a golden handle encrusted with rubies,” Mark said worriedly.

“Hmm… not that I know… wait, did you hear that?” Jack exclaimed. He thought he heard a roar or a sigh from somewhere.

“Sorry,” Annie said, looking down.

Mark fumbled with his fingers, speechless. He suddenly clutched his shoulder.

“Are you ok?” Annie asked tenderly.

“Yeah,” Mark said softly.

The three fell asleep at the bottom of the mountain as the sun rose up and the songbirds twittered the day’s welcome. Mark yawned and rubbed his eyes. The sun was high in the sky. He gently nudged Annie.

“Oh, uhm, good morning,” she said unsurely.

Jack’s tummy rumbled.

“We’d better find something to eat,” she added, helping Jack up.

They headed off.

“I’m sure we will find your axe soon,” Annie told Mark reassuringly.

“Annie… ” Mark squeaked again.

He pointed a shaking finger at the figure standing right in front of her. The troll was awake now, raising his spiky club.

“Ahhhh!!!” they all screamed.

“I want food. Food!” the dim-witted troll cried. In a split second, he picked up Annie.

“Get off me! I’m not afraid of you!” Annie gasped.

“NOO!” Mark shouted.

He lunged for the troll’s leg but only injured his shoulder even more. Jack shakily raised his katana.

“Hey, big g-guy, come and get me!” he said.

“Yeah!” Mark said waving his hands around, trying to keep his body steady.

Annie frantically looked for something she could use against the troll. It was distracted, not sure who to pick on, but not for long.

“A-ha!” Annie exclaimed.

She grabbed the anchor at the bottom of the rope and smacked it hard on the troll’s beefy fingers.

“OWW!” the troll rumbled angrily.

“Whoa!” Annie shrieked as she fell and toppled over Mark.

“Sorry, I’m not that good at catching people,” he said shamefully.

The troll chased them as fast as it could. The three ran toward a thicket of trees and disappeared into the Enchanted Forest.

“We’re heading south right now,” Annie said, staring intently at her compass.

Mark kept looking back worriedly, but the troll’s foot steps sounded faint. He must have given up.

“At least we have something to eat here,” Jack said, reaching to pick a berry.

“It might be poisonous,” Mark warned.

“Nah, only the ones that grow on white and blue speckled flowers are poisonous. I read about it in Plants of the Deep Forests,” Annie said.

“I don’t want to be nosy or anything, but were you a good ninja?” Mark asked Jack.

“Oh no. Master Sling Chai would sometimes say I was a dishonor. I never really felt I belonged with the ninjas. I know some tricks all right, but I’m not like a champion.” Jack smiled as he munched on some berries.

Boom! Crash!

“What was that?” Mark exclaimed, staring at Annie’s compass.

They were around the middle of the woods. Annie looked up.

“The sound came from over there.”

The three passed a thicket of knobby rooted trees.

“Whoa, someone lives here,” Mark gasped.

There, in a clearing of the woods, was a small hut with fogged up windows and two berry bushes at the entrance.

“It looks like a witch’s hut.” Annie whispered worriedly.

A voice came from the hut.

“I did it… I actually did it… yes, yes, yes, yes! I did it! I did it! I made a healing…” an eighteen-year-old girl looked out through the window.

She spotted Annie, Mark, and Jack, who slowly backed away.

“Hello,” the girl said slowly, quivering.

Her black hair was lank. She had hazel brown eyes, and she wore a long cloak, tattered around the rim. Despite the dark clothes, her soft voice seemed as sweet as a flower petal opening up to meet the warming sun in the light of day. She smelled of odd flower herbs.

“She doesn’t look like much of a witch to me,” Jack muttered.

“But she has a wand,” Mark whispered, gesturing to the willow wood and vine covered wand.

“I haven’t seen anyone in a long time… you’re not spies, are you?” the girl asked worriedly.

“No. You’re not a witch then?” Annie asked.

The girl blushed.

“I am, but I’m not the evil one most people think I am. That’s why I have been in hiding ever since I was six. My name is Lisa.” Lisa waved the others into her hut.

Annie looked around. It was quite cozy. She liked it. All her life she had been living in vast stone and marble halls. In the corner, there was a rusty couch. On it was a small blanket and an overstuffed pillow. There was a small stove with a stone pot on it. There was a large cupboard with a pile of books on top and an assortment of odd bottles on a small, rickety table. In the middle of the table was a glass bottle with a golden shimmery liquid.

Mark turned. “Have you ever had visitors?” he asked suspiciously.

Lisa looked down.

“No, I haven’t seen anyone since I was six.”

“I’m so sorry,” Annie said.

“Well, at least I met you,” Lisa exclaimed, her eyes gleaming.

“What is that thing over there?”Jack asked, pointing to the glass bottle.

“It’s a healing potion. I wish I could sell it, but people would think I’m giving them poison.” Lisa looked away. “The only other person who treated me with kindness was my stepmother. She was a fairy.”

Lisa sighed. She hadn’t talked to anyone in twelve years. In truth, she wasn’t sure how she felt.

“When I was six, I fled from her house to here. I’ve been here ever since.”

She didn’t want to admit that her actual mother could have been a powerful, evil sorceress who left her on the forest floor as a baby, and that human spies had known she had a powerful wand, and that her stepmother had died.

Annie was silent as a thought dawned on her. Had her parents read her letter? Would they send knights? Would they catch Lisa?

“You guys look hungry,” Lisa said, breaking into Annie’s nervous thoughts.

She cleaned off the table with her wand. Annie, Mark, and Jack stared in awe. Then she carefully hid the glass bottle safely behind her books.

“Here, it’s my own fruit salad. I’m a vegetarian — hunting is not my thing,” Lisa said slowly, handing each person a clay bowl.

Jack easily devoured it, but Mark eyed it cautiously. Annie elbowed him.

“I have full trust in her, Mark. Trust me. Jack just ate it in front of you,” she whispered.

Mark nodded and took a small bite.

 

The Gem Of Truth

“You probably didn’t steal an axe, right?” Mark sighed.

He was tired of all this.

“Nope, but I know something that might help you,” Lisa said excitedly. As she reached for her books, she knocked the healing potion over on Mark.

Immediately, Mark’s shoulder healed. He gaped at it.

“You’re a genius!” Jack exclaimed.

“It works! It works! Yes!” Lisa smiled happily, and then her smile faded. “But I’m still in hiding. Anyway, look here.”

Lisa brought out a book with a worn cover. The title read: Tales of Magical Objects. Lisa flipped to the middle. Annie looked over the yellowed pages. She read: To find the answer you are looking for, look into the clear edges of this gem, say your wish, and it will appear.

“Is it real?” Mark asked, unsure.

“Yes. It is in a place called Gem Mountain,” Lisa continued.

“Oh no, no, no, no. I’m not going on another mountain!” Mark exclaimed, waving his hands in front of him.

“Mark, you are the one who wanted to find your axe, remember?”Annie said.

Mark looked down.

“I heard there is a dragon guarding Gem Mountain,” Jack said quietly.

Everyone stared at him.

“Oh, come on!” Mark said loudly. He face-palmed and flopped on the chair.

“Sorry,” Jack said sheepishly.

***

And so the foursome (including a partially reluctant Mark) set off to the mountain. Annie led them into the northwest with her compass. Lisa looked about in wonder. She hadn’t left the forest in so long.

A mystic mountain rose before them. Mark gulped. They climbed up once again, the wind whistling. The path at the top of the mountain led to a dark cave. Mark and Annie squinted into the depths of the cave but couldn’t make out anything. Jack and Lisa were the first to step in.

“Come on, Mark,” Jack called.

Mark had stayed back, eyeing the cave nervously. Annie stepped in next. Mark slowly and cautiously stepped inside. He shivered. It was much colder here. Annie squeezed Mark’s hand.

“I don’t see anything,” Lisa said.

She waved her wand in a swirl and a faint light appeared at the tip. It barely illuminated the pointed snout and brown eyes staring right at them. The creature huffed, a puff of dark smoke came from its nostrils. Lisa could make out sharp, pointy teeth and a lizard-like tongue. Lisa couldn’t move, her hand was shaking. It turned out that there truly was a dragon in Gem Mountain.

The dragon roared. It was nearly deafening. The dragon was ready to pounce. It lifted a sharp, bronze claw.

“Ahh!” Mark ducked.

He slid under the claw and crashed to the back of the cave. The dragon aimed again.

“Why does this always happen to me!” Mark cried desperately.

Jack flattened himself against the wall, cowering. He then heard a rumbling voice.

“How dare you? You have come to slay me, haven’t you?” it shouted.

Who was it though?

It couldn’t be the dragon. They can’t speak English, right? Jack thought.

“Woah!” Annie jumped over the dragon’s slashing tail like it was a jump rope. She flipped in the air, landing beside Mark.

Lisa was desperately trying to be invisible. She had never used magic on a creature like the dragon before. She spotted a little, glimmering light. She looked closer. It was the Truth Gem! It looked as clear as water. Lisa crawled towards it. As she reached out her hand, the dragon’s claw aimed her way. She rolled under it, but her cloak caught on the sharp point.

“Get back,” she exclaimed.

She hurled a purple magnetic blast at the dragon.

“Irresponsible people! You thought you could just waltz in here now, did you?!”

Jack heard the voice again. He had been hiding behind a giant boulder. He saw the dragon’s mouth moving. The dragon was talking! And Jack could understand him.

“We are not here to slay you!” he cried.

Annie held her rope defensively. The dragon’s eyes were set on her and Mark. He roared louder than before.

“Watch out!” Mark exclaimed.

He leapt and pulled Annie’s arm. The dragon’s fire breath missed her by an inch.

“Wait… did I just do that?” Mark panted.

“I think you did.” Annie managed to smile.

The two stared at the flames. They kept on burning, but they didn’t spread or harm the stone. But still, they were surrounded by a ring of fire.

“Hey!! Over here!” Lisa cried.

She shot a spout of water from her wand as her black hair thrashed against her face in the howling wind. She had no intention of hurting the dragon. She just wanted to chase him off. The dragon glared, the burning embers reflected in his dark eyes, making him look more menacing than ever.

Annie took a leap of faith and jumped over the fire. Mark had his back against the wall. It was a life or death jump.

The dragon bellowed, “Don’t you fools learn anything?!”

The dragon smacked Lisa hard with its wing.

Whoa!!” Lisa said as she hung on by her fingertips, her long nails digging into the ground.

“WE AREN’T HERE TO SLAY YOU! I CAN UNDERSTAND WHAT YOU ARE SAYING!” Jack thundered.

He had finally jumped from his hiding spot. The dragon turned violently. His long, scaly tail smacked the delicate Truth Gem, and it fell down to earth, shattering.

Mark felt like fainting. He staggered, nearly walking into the fire. They were all silent. The dragon hadn’t meant to do that.

“What did you say?” the dragon said harshly, although for everyone but Jack, it was a growl.

Mark finally flipped over the fire, smacking his face on the stone.

“Oomph!” he said.

He had no idea how Annie was so agile.

It’s all over, he thought.

“What do you mean, Jack?” Annie asked desperately.

“I said, I can understand the dragon,” Jack managed to choke out. “All we wanted was the gem,” Jack said to the dragon.

The dragon stared deeply at Mark, then into Jack’s soft eyes. He somehow trusted this boy.

“Hmph, if that’s so, you aren’t as foolish as I thought. Listen to me closely, boy. I know what you want. I have stared into the gem. Go back and track your path, for some answers we seek are where we would most likely not peek.”

And that was all the dragon said.

“I can’t believe it! I talked to him!” Jack said excitedly.

“I still don’t get it,” Lisa said, shaking her head.

Mark had been silent the whole way back, thinking of the dragon’s riddle.

“Go back and track your path, for some answers we seek are where we would mostly likely not peek,” Mark repeated.

“That’s it, Mark! Where did you start?” Annie asked suddenly.

“What do you mean?” Mark asked.

“Where did you begin looking for your axe?”

“Elf Town,” Mark replied slowly.

“Exactly! The riddle said go back and track your path! The answer is where you began,” Annie said excitedly.

“You figured it out?” Lisa said, following them.

Mark sighed. “Who knows?”

The foursome walked back once again through the Enchanted Forest trees.

“I don’t get it, why would someone from Elf Town even steal it? Did you hear him right, Jack?” Mark asked.

“Positive.” Jack smiled.

He was so amazed by his newfound power.

The four of them froze as they heard a loud rumble, but it wasn’t the dragon.

“It’s a bridge troll, I think,” Lisa said, peeking through the lush bushes.

Mark groaned.

“Just ignore him! I don’t want to die again!”

“Mark, you didn’t even die,” Annie replied.

“Wait! Guys! There is a girl and a dog in trouble over there!” Jack exclaimed worriedly.

Immediately, Lisa leaped out of the bushes. “Hey, troll!” Lisa cried. She raised her wand. “Stay away from that dog and girl.”

The little girl whimpered. The troll ignored Lisa. As he reached for the poor dog, Lisa swung her wand in a high swirl. The violet sparkle hit the troll, sending him blasting into the river.

The girl’s mother ran up to them, but froze when she saw Lisa.

“A witch! Annabelle, stay away,” she cried.

“Witchy,” the girl cried happily.

She flung her arms around Lisa.

“Thank you!”

Lisa didn’t know what to say. Someone was actually hugging her. The mother blinked.

“She saved me! She saved me!” The girl jumped up and down.

By the look on the girl’s face, the woman knew her daughter wasn’t joking.

“Thank you,” she managed to say before they walked away.

Lisa turned as they left and saw Annie and Mark’s eyes appeared through the bush.

“That was amazing Lisa!”Annie exclaimed.

***

Finally, they made it back to Elf Town.

“Home!” Mark said.

He ran up to his house, nearly running into the dressmaker. The dressmaker looked very paranoid, and in her hands, she held Mark’s axe. Mark felt like his heart dropped to his feet.

“Is that your-your axe?” Annie stammered.

Mark’s mouth was agape. He just stared. He rubbed his eyes. He must be hallucinating.

“It was you? I don’t get it–what?!” Mark couldn’t even speak properly.

“Oh, Mark!” The dressmaker sobbed at Mark’s feet.

Annie grabbed his arm, taken aback.

“I’m confused,” Lisa and Jack both said.

“I have a lot of explaining to do.” The dressmaker sniffed. “I was becoming desperate. I barely have any coins, and you know the trades we do with the dwarves. They are never really generous. I have seven children, and they are not old enough to do woodcutting. My bones are too frail, but I knew I could cut wood if I used your axe. Once I stole it, however, I regretted it deeply. I knew I was doing the wrong thing. I didn’t tell anyone it was yours. I worried about you, and I was just going to s-set off after you,” the dressmaker continued sobbing. “My poverty had made me go mad. I’m sorry!”

At first, Mark felt angry, but then he looked at Annie’s dark brown eyes. He calmed and, surprisingly, smiled.

“It’s all right, Dressmaker. Because you told me to look for my axe, I was able to meet Lisa, Jack, and… Annie.”

All four smiled. The dressmaker looked up.

“May I see your shop?” Annie asked.

“Certainly.” The dressmaker sniffed again.

Annie then told the dressmaker she loved the dressmaker’s work and would be willing to help the dressmaker show off her creations.

“You see, you must convince the others that you will save their time by making their clothes for them,” Annie explained.

The dressmaker nodded. And so it was set. Mark didn’t believe he had his axe back.

The four set out for Annie’s palace, Mark carrying his valuable axe. Annie took a deep breath. Now, Annie had to face her parents.

“You’re going to get captured or something,”Annie said worriedly to Mark.

“I’ll be fine,” Mark replied. “If I can survive ninja’s and dragons, I can survive this.”

Annie stepped in the royal hall.

Where were you?!” the queen shrieked.

“We are most disappointed in you Annie. We were worried sick. I forbid you to leave the castle walls again! Did he kidnap you? Are you hurt?” the queen exclaimed.

Annie sighed. “I left with him of my own free will, Mother. I needed an adventure. I helped him find his magic axe along with two other friends.”

You escaped with an elf?” the king cried. “Guards!”

“I went on an adventure,” Annie continued. “You can’t capture him, because, because… I love him,” she said softly.

She had not expected to say that right away. Mark and Annie stared at each other. Over the journey, they had grown accustomed to each other.

“Wha-wha-what?” the queen stammered.

After a lot of persuading and explaining, the royals agreed that they had to set Annie free. Mark didn’t believe what was happening. Suddenly, he realized that being with Annie made him a better, braver person.

“Annie, you are the best thing that has happened to me. Will you marry me?”

Lisa and Jack were speechless.

All was well.

 

One Month Later…

The cool breeze flittered by as the newly married couple stood on the palace balcony. Mark wouldn’t agree to wear a crown. Not now at least. He glanced down at the letters from Jack and Lisa and smiled. Jack now went to Mythical Beast Academy, somewhere he really belonged. After speaking with the dragon, he had become fascinated by them. Lisa was able to sell her concoctions after the news was spread about the troll incident. The dressmaker also wrote that her shop had started gaining popularity. Mark had found his axe and Annie. It seemed to him that the axe had been meant to get stolen. Mark and Annie held hands.

“Who knew, this all began…” Annie started.

“Because of an axe,” Mark continued.

He smiled. The two kissed as the sky turned a brilliant orange.

 

Lucy the Pegasus (Part One)

Once upon a time, in Horselandia, there was a very poor horse. This horse’s name was Lucy, and she loved to collect stamps from lands far away from Horselandia. Lucy’s parents were famous explorers back in the day. Now, these days, no one cared about the treasures the explorers found. So the family was poor because the parents had searched a lot of lands for jobs, and on the way, the parents collected stamps, just for Lucy. The parents loved Lucy with all their heart.

In addition, Lucy had an interest in education. No one had taught her how to write, so Lucy made up her own language, and she wrote entries about her lifestyle. Lucy wanted to read entries even more than she wanted to write her own. Except other entries weren’t legible to Lucy because she wasn’t able to read the actual language in Horselandia, which was Horsish. The thing was, Lucy’s parents were poor, so they couldn’t afford to get a teacher, even though they loved Lucy so, so, much.

Throughout all the years, Lucy never stopped her love of reading and writing. For reading, Lucy wrote random silly stories that she didn’t revise or edit so that she could get a nice giggle out of her work. Lucy started from writing three sentences to elaborate essays, just in a matter of years, without any kind of teacher! Lucy was destined to do something amazing one day, and Lucy’s parents had faith in her.

When Lucy was 13, something very tragic happened. Lucy’s dad passed away of an unknown disease. There was yet to be a cure, and Lucy was determined to write a story about this in her own language, if someone could inform Lucy about what the disease was. This inspired Lucy to do something that was quite drastic in the measures. Lucy then set her dreams on something totally different. She wanted to become a pegasus. Lucy had no clue what she was going to face, but Lucy was determined to become a pegasus. She would do anything to become a pegasus.

A pegasus was a type of mythical hybrid that either you had to be born as one or you had to become one. To become a pegasus, you had to do something groundbreaking and impress the mythical judges. These mythical judges were a phoenix, griffin, alicorn, dragon, fairy, leprechaun, gnome, mermaid, elf, and unicorn. Of course, all these creatures were amiable and human sized or else everything would get out of hand and crazy. To add on, these judges were very stern and strict, and were very hard to convince, persuade, coax, and, last but not least, impress. Very few horses became pegasuses. The only reason why very few horses became pegasuses was because they were super famous for amusing people. These judges were very lazy. They just liked sitting and watching TV.

That was sort of the problem Lucy faced. She had no idea how to go on TV and contact these judges. First of all, Lucy didn’t have anything that she could contact them  with. Second of all, Lucy had no idea how to schedule a meeting with the judges because she had no idea where to meet and how to get there! Last, but the most important, Lucy had no clue how she was going to do all this planning herself. After all, Lucy was just 13 years old, and her mother was still searching for a job. Lucy most definitely did not see how she could achieve this now, but she still set her mind to it knowing she would, at least, be able to when she was older.

 

3 years later…

Chapter 1

“Are we there yet?!” Lucy asked impatiently.

“Hold on sweetie, just wait for one more hour, and I promise we will finally be there.” Lucy’s mom answered.

Over the last three years, Lucy’s mother managed to get a new job very close by. The job was like a meet-and-greet kind of thing but with used-to-be-famous horses. Who knew there were a lot of horses that were so interested in exploring?

Anyways, Lucy’s mother had been doing so well with her job that the family managed to get a decent house and a tiny car. To top that off, Lucy’s mother had a secret someone for a while! Lucy was still living in an alley, though, with her mom. Her mom had a car, but the house was very far away. The twist was that Lucy’s mom was working way too much, and she never had the time to move. But now, Lucy’s mother got her big break, so the first thing they did was leave the gross alley and go on a road trip to the new city!

“Screeech!” went the car Lucy’s mother bought.

“Lucy, time to wake up!” said Lucy’s mom in a sing-songy voice.

“Why do I have to wake up? It’s not like we’re here or anything.” Lucy replied very sourly.

She opened her eyes suddenly, saw a mansion, and pinched herself to see if she was dreaming.

“O-M-G! Is this our new house, Mom? If it is, you are really the best mom ever!!! I love you so much. Thank you, Mom.” Lucy squealed very loudly.

“Congratulations, sweetie! We finally got our dream house. It was an awesome deal. Anyways, get your bum up, and let’s get moving and see this place,” Lucy’s mom answered.

Lucy and Lucy’s mom made only two trips back and forth to get the bags, and drop them off by the door, because the family used to be poor, so the family didn’t really have that many things an average horse would have.

“That took forever!” Lucy complained. “But… I guess we can’t really afford movers at the moment. So I shouldn’t really be complaining.”

“Sweetie, time to get our feet on the ground and get to know every nook and cranny of this place that will be ours for the next few years.” Lucy’s mother told Lucy.

“Coming, Mom. I’ll just be there in a minute.” Lucy responded.

Lucy noticed the neighborhood. She felt her heart being completed. The neighborhood looked so average, like the life Lucy dreamed of but thought she would never have. She took a big breath, to take this all in, and put her hand on her heart. Lucy could feel it thumping, full with bliss.

 

Chapter 2

Lucy ran around the lawn once and felt the breeze sway past her, and the grass skid on her thighs. She then quickly rushed to the porch and rang the doorbell so that her mother would be informed that she was okay.

Ever since Lucy’s father had passed away, Lucy’s mother had been very paranoid about Lucy and what she was doing. Lucy’s mother did all of this because she didn’t want to lose someone else she cherished. Who knows what Lucy’s mother would act like if something happened to Lucy. Lucy had noticed this, so she was trying to do her best at helping her mom with this situation.

Lucy walked in the house.

“Hey, Mom, what are you doing?”

“I’m up here, sweetie. Look at the view! It’s awesome! You get to see the beach and the ocean on one side and the green forest on the other! Come on, sweetie. Come up!” Lucy’s mother yelled.

“Okay, I’m coming, Mom!” Lucy said and walked up the grand staircase of her mansion.

After Lucy was out of sight, a mysterious horse appeared. He was wearing all black and a face mask. He then grabbed his phone and called another mysterious horse.

“Hey, code blue, target acquired. We have gotten our subjects in the spot just like we wanted to. Now, phase two.”

 

Chapter 3

“Wow, Mom, you were right! This view is awesome! I can’t believe you managed to get this place!” Lucy squealed.

“What can I say, sweetie, it was an amazing deal.” Lucy’s mother replied. “Let’s start unpacking though. Try not to get too caught up with such a great deal. After all, last thing we need is for it to rain so all our stuff, that couldn’t fit on the porch, would get wet.”

Lucy topped off like a cherry on top of a sundae. All of a sudden, Lucy jinxed it and it started raining, but it had to happen sometime. After all, that was a disadvantage of living near a beach in the cold.

“Great, just my luck. And now I predict that it will be very cold and humid.” Lucy said in a magician-like voice.

“Come on, sweetie, just because we live near the beach doesn’t mean that it is the end of the world. So maybe it will rain a lot and it will be super cold in the winter, but in the summer, this beach is usually deserted, so lucky us! We get to play in the sand and run in the waters!” Lucy’s mother sassed back at Lucy.

“Okay. Fine. Maybe you are right. But once this rain is gone and we are done unpacking, I will try to make some new friends, and I will ask them why the beach is lonely. If they say something like, ‘if you go in the water, the Lochness Monster will eat you up’, I will not let you or me go one step near the beach. Okay? But if they say something like, ‘all the neighbors go on vacation there’ I will let you and me go. Is that clear? Just because I am your daughter doesn’t mean that you get to boss me around all the time. I should have a say in some things also. Okay?” Lucy said while thumping a box of clothes near the drawer.

“Sure thing, sweetie. And also, we are done unpacking so you can start getting your instincts around this place. Run free my child!” Lucy’s mom said.

“Got it.” Lucy replied.

Lucy wanted to go layer by layer, so she went up another staircase, looked at the ceiling to see if there was any attic vault, and there was. Lucy kicked the entrance and a ladder fell down. She climbed the ladder and went up.  

 

To Be Continued….

Happy Birthday Suzy Walter!

Suzy Walter was a little girl who wore glasses. She was eight and a half, and her birthday was going to be in two days. She was going to invite a few people to Six Flags. She was super excited for her party.

She invited Sarah and Molly, twins who fought all day long. Suzy sort of liked them because they had lots of cute clothes and awesome toys. But they were annoying. They thought Suzy was their best friend. Her mom told her to invite them because she liked their mom.

And Suzy was inviting a really, really annoying boy named Theodore. Any time someone said something to him, he mimicked them.

The only reason she was inviting him was because her dad told her to invite him. Theodore’s dad was friends with Suzy’s dad.

And she was inviting one more person: Jackie, her real friend. Jackie was always nice to her. She was never mean to her! They always sat together at lunch and talked and laughed. They laughed all day long, for no reason sometimes. Even when somebody else laughed, they started laughing too. Her favorite color was purple, and Jackie’s favorite color was pink.

***

One day later…

Suzy woke up her parents and said, “My birthday’s one day away!”

Her dad was sleeping, and Suzy saw her dad’s tongue bleeding. He was biting it because he thought it was food in his dream!

Suzy said, “Wake up!”

Then, he grumbled grumpily, “I’m up, I’m up,” but he was still sleeping. Then, Suzy tried waking up her mom.

Suzy’s mom said in her dream, “Grandma, I thought you were dead.”

“Wake up, Mom!”

“Okay. Go ahead and make yourself breakfast now.”

Then, Suzy said, “I’m just going to go to Jackie’s house next door. I’ll be back in the afternoon.”

***

Suzy reached Jackie’s door.

Knock knock.

Jackie opened the door.  “Hi, Suzy,” said Jackie.

Then Suzy walked into Jackie’s house.

“Did you come to visit me, or did you come to chat?” asked Jackie.

“Actually, I came here for you to help me plan for my birthday party, which is tomorrow, and by plan… I mean a sneaky idea,” said Suzy.

“Tell me what the plan is,” said Jackie.

“The plan is to tell my mom and dad that I called the twins and Theodore, but they were sick, so they can’t come to Six Flags. Isn’t that a perfect plan?”

“I don’t think that’s a good plan. You might get in trouble.”

“I won’t get in trouble. They won’t know a thing about it.”

Then, Suzy and Jackie went to the cake shop. It was one block away from Jackie’s house.

When they walked in, they saw a whole bunch of cakes. They had all different types of frosting and different flavors. It took a long time to pick a cake because all of them looked good. They saw a vanilla cake with chocolate frosting inside of it and rainbow frosting on the outside. They thought it looked the best, so they picked that one.

The person who worked at the cake shop said, “That will be 67 dollars.”

Suzy and Jackie didn’t have enough money. So they asked if 27 dollars was enough.

“No, 27 dollars isn’t enough.”

They looked at her nametag, and it said “Ms. Grumps.” Suzy and Jackie already knew why her name was Ms. Grumps.

Suzy said, “But it’s my birthday.”

Ms. Grumps said, “I’ll let you pay me 27 dollars, but tomorrow you’ll have to pay the rest.”

“Okay, I promise that I will pay tomorrow,” said Suzy.

***

The next day, Suzy woke up excited.

“Yay! I can’t wait to go to Six Flags and stuff cake in my mouth. Also, I can’t wait for my evil plan. Wah ha ha ha ha,” Suzy laughed loudly.

“Keep it down, Suzy. It’s four in the morning,” Suzy’s mom yelled.

“Yeah, Suzy, whatever your mom said,” Suzy’s dad yelled.

“Stop it, John,” said Suzy’s mom.

“Okay, Michelle, you need to chill out!” said Suzy’s dad.

“What did you just say?” asked Suzy’s mom.

“I-I-I didn’t say anything at all,” said Suzy’s father, John.

“Good, I thought so,” said Suzy’s mom.

Suzy stuck her head in the door and said, “It’s actually 12 in the afternoon!”

After Suzy told her parents, she walked away. She held the phone in her hand and called Theodore and said, “I am so sorry. The birthday is cancelled.”

She hung the phone up and called up the twins. Then she told them the same thing. She hung up the phone again and said, “I can’t believe my plan worked.”

“What did you say, sweetie? I didn’t hear you,” said Suzy’s mom.

“Nothing,” Suzy replied. “When is it time to go, Mom? I’ve been waiting for hours.”

“We will go in 30 minutes, and you were actually only waiting for 45 minutes,” replied Suzy’s mom.

***

30 minutes later…

“Mom! Is it time to go yet?!” yelled Suzy.

“Yes! It’s time to go. we are just getting the cake out of the fridge!”

“Okay, I’ll meet you in the car!”

“Okay, see you in the car.”

Suzy walked across the street and knocked on Jackie’s door first.

Knock. Knock.

“Who is at the door?” Jackie asked.

“It’s me, Suzy! Meet me at the car in two minutes!”

“Okay, I will.”

“I had an exhausting day, but it isn’t over,” said Suzy to herself.

Suzy quickly ran to her mother’s car. She leaned on the car as she waited. Finally, Suzy saw her mom and dad holding all the things for the birthday. Jackie walked towards Suzy from her house.

“Suzy, please open the door for us, this stuff is really heavy,” said Suzy’s mom. Then she asked, “Aren’t the twins and Theodore coming?”

“Uhhhh. I- I called Theodore and he said he had, uhhhh, a stomach ache,” stuttered Suzy.

“You know, Suzy? You didn’t have to invite Theodore and the twins since it’s your birthday.

Then Jackie said, “Suzy and I just wanted some time alone.”

Suzy’s mom said, “What?”

Jackie quickly answered, “Oh, wait, nevermind.”

Suzy elbowed Jackie and whispered, “Jaaackie!”

“Girls, are you up to something?” asked Suzy’s mom.

“No, not at all,” replied Jackie and Suzy simultaneously.

***

2 hours later…
“We are here, everyone!!!” yelled Suzy’s father.

As Suzy’s parents unpacked the cake and treats, Suzy and Jackie quickly ran to the rollercoaster.

“Wow! This is the first time I’m going on a rollercoaster, I am feeling nervous and excited,” said Suzy.

“This is going to be my second time on a rollercoaster,” said Jackie.

“Oh, that’s good for you. Anyway, it’s our turn to go on the rollercoaster!” said Suzy.

“Don’t be jealous, Suzy,” said Jackie.

“I am totally not jealous, Jackie,” replied Suzy.

Meanwhile, when Suzy and Jackie were on the rollercoaster, there was a phone call for Suzy’s mother…Theodore’s parents and the twins’ parents called Suzy’s mom.

Ring! Ring!

“Hello, who is it?” said Suzy’s mom.

“It’s the twins’ mom, Carol. Theodore’s mom, Elizabeth, is here in my house.”

“Weren’t you supposed to come to Suzy’s birthday?” asked Suzy’s mom.

“Suzy told our children that her birthday was cancelled.”

“What are you talking about?”

“You should ask your daughter if you really want to know.”

Beep.

“I wonder what all that was about. Maybe I should ask Suzy?” said Suzy’s mom.

As Suzy’s mom saw Suzy coming from the rollercoaster, she hollered out, “Suzy, get over here now!”

“Oh no, Suzy, this is not going to be good,” said Jackie.

Suzy walked over to her mom while she was looking down at her feet. She bit her fingernails.

Her mom said in a mad voice, “Did you tell Theodore and the twins’ mom that the party was cancelled?”

“No,” said Suzy.

Then Suzy’s mom asked Jackie, and Jackie didn’t respond until Suzy’s mom asked the question again.

“Yes,” said Jackie in a quiet voice.

Suzy’s face turned red and steam started coming out of her face, nose, and ears. Her eyes started to turn really watery.

Then, Suzy’s mom gave the phone to Suzy and yelled in a mad voice, “Apologize to Theodore and the twins now!”

“Okay,” said Suzy.

Then Jackie tried to walk away, but Suzy’s mom said, “Come over here, Jackie. You’re part of it too!”

“No, I’m not!” said Jackie.

“Then how did you know Suzy was coming up with her plan and told me yes?” Suzy’s mom said. “You have to apologize too.”

Jackie stomped her feet and put her hands on her hips and said, “No, I can’t. I didn’t do anything.”

Then Suzy’s mom said, “Yes, you did.”

Jackie still refused to apologize, so then Suzy’s mom said, “If you don’t, I’ll call your parents to pick you up now.”

Then Jackie said, “Fine,” because her parents were mean to her, and she was scared of them.

Suzy said into the phone, “I’m sorry, Theodore. And Sarah. And Molly. For telling you that my party was cancelled.”

Sarah and Molly said, “It’s okay,” but Theodore said, “It is not okay,” at the same time.

Suzy just ignored him.

After Suzy was finished with the phone, she gave it to Jackie, and Jackie said, “I’m sorry,” and gave the phone back.

Then, Suzy’s mom gave it back to Jackie and said, “You have to explain why you’re sorry.”

“Fine. I’m sorry for helping Suzy with her dumb plan!” said Jackie.

Then, Suzy’s mom took the phone back and said, “After we’re done eating the cake, we’re going straight back home!”

Jackie and Suzy didn’t respond. In Suzy’s head, she was thinking that she felt a little bad for telling Theodore and the twins that the party was cancelled. Suzy was mad at Jackie because she got her in trouble. In Jackie’s head, she felt a little bad, just for helping Suzy, and mad at Suzy because Suzy wasn’t talking to her. Jackie knew Suzy was mad because she rolled her eyes at Jackie.

While Suzy’s mom was carrying the vanilla cake to eat, she slipped on a banana peel, and it just fell out of her hands. But then, her husband came out of nowhere, and before she fell on her head, he held her. But the cake still fell on the ground.

Then, Suzy’s mom said, “I guess it’s time to go home since there’s no cake to eat.”

Suzy and Jackie were sad because there was no cake. Then Suzy and Jackie looked at each other and smiled.

“I’m so sorry,” Suzy and Jackie said simultaneously.

“Okay, let’s go home and have your birthday there,” said Suzy’s mom.

“Are the twins and Theodore coming?” asked Suzy.

“No, it’s only us, your dad, and Jackie,” replied Suzy’s mom.

“Good,” said Suzy and Jackie at the same time.

 

The End!

 

Super Mouse and the Diamond Thief

Ring! Ring! Ring! Ring!

“Hello, this is Super Mouse talking,” said Super Mouse into an old-fashioned phone.

He was a white mouse that never took off his superman costume. He was sitting in his brown living room and calling himself on the phone because he never had anything to do.

Today was a special day because today, he could convert his weapons into cheese. This happened two days every year. Whenever he put a bullet into his weapon today, it would turn into cheese. He just remembered all of this and put his phone down. He had to find all of his weapons. He was hungry, so he took a cheese block with him to his cheese cave, which was where he hid all of his vehicles and weapons.

The walls were made of stone and painted to look like cheese. Sometimes he forgot that the walls weren’t actually cheese, and he tried to eat them, just like in a cartoon. Everything, including the vehicles, looked like cheese.

Super Mouse’s phone began to ring in the cave. He was confused. Who’s calling me? he wondered. He hadn’t gotten a call in over a month. He then remembered that he was Super Mouse, not an ordinary mouse. Someone was probably calling him because they needed help.

“Hello?”

“Quick, Super Mouse! A robber is stealing diamonds from the diamond store,” said a screaming little boy with a mouse voice.

“Okay, I’m on my way.”

So he flew to the crime. But it was foggy, so none of the cops or Super Mouse could see the robber.

He flew back to his cave and got one of his weapons that cleared away fog. So then he flew back to the city, where the robbery happened, and the fog was still there. So he cleared back the fog, and the cops took the robber away.

“Thank you so much!” the mouse who owned the diamond store said.

And he gave Super Mouse a billion dollars because diamonds were very expensive. Super Mouse took the money and just flew away.

The next day, Super Mouse spent the money, that he got from the mouse who owned the diamond store, on a billion cheese blocks! Each cheese block was just one dollar, and he loved cheese.

Super Mouse suddenly heard screaming coming out of the diamond store.

A mean rat came flying on a jet pack and took the diamonds from the diamond store again. So Super Mouse flew to the rat and talked to him instead of fighting. But the rat just shot him with a sleeping ray.

Super Mouse dodged it, slapped the sleeping ray out of the rat’s hands, shot the ray at the rat, and took the diamonds. So, the rat just fell on the stone floor of Mouseville.

Then, Super Mouse flew to the diamond store and gave the diamonds back to the mouse who owned the diamond store again! Then, the mouse who owned the diamond store gave Super Mouse two billion dollars. And Super Mouse spent the money on two billion blocks of cheese again. He felt rich and excited to eat the cheese blocks!  

But… what happened to the rat who fell on the stone floor? Find out what happens to the rat in Super Mouse Two!

 

The End… for now.

Dun. Dun. DUNNN.

 

Cutie, Harry, & Friends

There once was a chipmunk. Her name was Cutie. She was a light fawn with white and black stripes. Her feet were pink. One day she went to go have lunch with the squirrels. They were going to have lunch in an oak tree. When Cutie arrived, she found out that her friends weren’t there yet. She waited about five minutes. When her friends got there, she discovered that they had a little baby sister squirrel.

During the picnic, a black crow with a hoarse voice flew in. He sat down next to them.

“Can I have some food too?” he asked.

Everyone screamed and ran away except for Cutie and the baby squirrel, Sarah.

“Everybody ran away because they’re still afraid of the birds. After the war, land animals don’t like them. I don’t mind birds that much, and little Sarah here was born after the war. She doesn’t know anything about it,” said Cutie.

The crow had a yellow beak, and red eyes, and black wings.

“I’m always trying to get the land animals to at least talk to me, but they always run away,” he said.

“I know,” said Cutie. ”At the very mention of birds, all the land animals run away.”

“Well, I’d better be going then,” said the crow.

“No, come back to my tree, please,” said Cutie. “Or there’s a very nice one near mine that you could have if you want it. It would be nice to have someone near or in my tree.”

“You live by yourself?” the crow asked.

“No. I have some pets.”

“Well, if we’re going to be friends, we should know each other’s names. I’m Harry.”

“And I’m Cutie.”

Then, Cutie said, “Can I fly home on your back?”

“Sure,” said Harry.

So they flew back to Cutie’s tree. As they flew, Cutie pointed out the tree where Harry might want to live.

Harry said, “That looks like a very nice, roomy tree.”

“Would you like to live in it?” Cutie asked.

“Yes, especially since it’s near you, Cutie.”

“This tree is my tree,” said Cutie.

“Landing!”

Cutie showed him around her tree, and said, “If you would like to live in my tree with me, this would be your room,” and she led him into a large, empty room. “You can take your bed and stuff and put it in here. There’s a bathroom off to the side too, just like there is in mine, and I can teach you how to weave a grass blanket if you like.”

“That would be nice,” said the crow.

“So you really are going to move in?” said Cutie, feeling very excited.

“I didn’t say that,” said the crow, “but now that you mention it, I think I will.”

“Great,” said Cutie, feeling more excited by the minute.

This was heading towards the best day ever! Then she thought, What about my friends? How will they like learning that there’s a crow living in my tree? But I don’t want Harry to feel left out. But I don’t want my friends to scream when they find all his bird stuff. But he wants to live here, and I don’t want to let him down.

Meanwhile, Harry was thinking, She’s so nice, and she’s not afraid of me, too. I’ve never met a land animal since the war ended. I would love to live with her.

Then there was a knock on the door. Cutie answered it. It was a little mouse. It was white.

“Hello. My name’s Amelia, but you can call me Milly. Are you Cutie?”

“How did you know about me?” Cutie asked.

“We both aren’t afraid of the birds,” said Milly.

“I thought that I was the only land animal who wasn’t afraid of the birds. Wow.”

Then she thought, Maybe Harry, Milly, and I can change a few other animals’ minds. Then we can get a few birds and go all over. When she told this to Harry and Milly, she thought they would explode with excitement.

They both gushed, “Wow, that is a great idea!!!”

“I’m glad you like it. Still, though, if you want,” (this part was directed to Milly), “you can get a few animals to come to me. And you,” she said, turning towards Harry, “can get some birds.”

Then there was another knock on the door.

“Another animal? We’ve two already.” Cutie said.

“Another?” Harry and Milly echoed.

“Mm-hm. Another,” Cutie answered. She went to the door. “It’s a gerbil.”

“Hello. Is this where Cutie the chipmunk lives?” It spoke so quietly that Cutie had to strain to hear it.

“I’m she. How did you know about me? Wait, don’t answer that. I think I know. We both aren’t afraid of the birds?”

“Yup. My name is Dora.”

Then the tree started to shake and groan.

“What’s happening?!” Dora shouted.

“I don’t know! Maybe an earthquake?! This has never happened before!” Cutie shouted back.

The tree became a mess of shouting as the animals conversed with each other. The tree slowly started to topple over a little bit.

“Everyone get out,” shouted Cutie, “and try to push the tree back up!”

The tree slowly started to lean to the other side.

“We did it,” cheered the animals.

“Now to convince the land animals and birds to live in harmony,” Cutie said to her friends.

They cheered again and clambered onto Harry’s back. Harry took off, and they soared over Cutie’s tree.

Cutie reached into her pocket and pulled out a bunch of brightly colored lollipops.

“I always leave home with a snack,” she said, and handed them each one.

“Yum,” the animals said. “Thanks, Cutie!”

“You’re welcome,” said Cutie. “Now let’s review our plan. First, we get a few birds. Second, we split up and go all over. Third, we convince the land and air animals to live in harmony!!”

They first went to Bird Land. Harry pointed out his former tree.

 

A Few Years Later…

Cutie was making a speech to the crowd.

She was saying, “And the only way we can truly be strong is when we work together, share our amazing ideas, and combine them into one, truly amazing idea. Do you agree?”

“Yes!” the crowd roared.

Cutie and her friends had been traveling around the forest and making speeches wherever they stopped. They had been a humongous success. All of the animals had agreed.

 

The End

 

Octopus

Once there was an octopus who only had five tentacles. His name was Fin. He wanted three more tentacles, but his parents said he just had to live with having only five.

He felt embarrassed because all his other octopus friends had eight tentacles, and he even asked his parents if he could get the other three for his birthday. His parents thought he could be unique with only five. Fin did not like that idea.

His birthday was in three weeks, and he thought his best friends forgot about his birthday because he didn’t know about any party. He spent all his time in his cave because he felt embarrassed that he was missing three tentacles. He had one best friend named Bianca the Catfish, who was missing half of her tail.

But then he overheard Bianca the Catfish say, “I can’t wait for Fin to find out about his surprise party!”

It must be for Finny, Fin thought. Finny was an angelfish who had a lot of friends. I’m not having a birthday party this year, my friends haven’t planned it yet. I’m going to ask Mom and Dad about a birthday party.

“No, honey, you can’t have a birthday party this year because we’re going on vacation,” his mom and dad said.

Come on! Fin thought to himself.

“I don’t want to go on a vacation. I want a party.”

Just then, his mermaid friend, Ariel, came to his house cave.

She said, “Come to the coral reef with me.”

Fin and Ariel swam to the coral reef, and all his friends were there.

They yelled, “SURPRISE! Happy birthday!”

“Is this for me?” Finn asked.

There were seaweed and sea plants everywhere. There was all of his favorite food, like clams and slugs. There was a coral cake.

“Yes!” they all said.

“Thank you, thank you. I wasn’t expecting a party. But why didn’t you tell me?”

“Because it was a surprise, and we know you like surprises!”

“I still wanted to know about it in the first place, but thank you.”

“Also, look at your present,” said Bianca the Catfish.

He opened his present. It was three foam tentacles. Finn realized that he liked the way he was before, and that he didn’t need any foam tentacles.

“Thank you! But I don’t want foam tentacles anymore. I like the way I am!”

“Me too!” they all agreed.

They all had a dance party and put lights on the tentacles and made them glow, and they all had a nice evening!

 

THE END

 

Finley’s First Day of School

It was Finley’s first day of preschool. Finley was very scared because she had never actually been to school before. She was three years old. She was feeling very scared because she was worried that everybody wouldn’t like her and they wouldn’t be her friends.

It was time to go to school, so Finley packed her apple for her snack, packed her pencil, packed Lunchables for her lunch, and packed her books. Then, she went off to school. It was very close, so she could walk alone.

When she got to school, everybody looked at her, and she said, confused, “What are you all looking at?”

Then everybody, including the teacher, said, “You, of course!”

Then, Finley thought in her head, Well, I’ll just go to my desk. She went to a desk that said her name at the top, and she learned something new! She learned that the long hand on the clock was the minute hand, and that the short hand on the clock was the hour hand.

And then, the teacher, whose name was Ms. Shelly, said, “Next week, we’re going to have a test! It’s going to be about numbers.”

Finley was very scared because she was worried. What if she got a bad grade? What if the teacher was upset at her?

Then it was time for writing.

The teacher said, “You are all going to write the scariest thing that has ever happened to you.”

Then the teacher said, “Get your pencils from your backpack.”

And everybody got their pencils from their backpacks, including Finley.

Finley tried to write the best she could, “The scariest thing that ever happened to me was when I was on the beach, and I was in the water, and then a big wave came, and then it brought me down on the wet sand in the water, and I didn’t even plug my nose. And I rolled on the beach, and I felt very tired.”

And then, when the teacher stopped at her desk to look at her paper, the teacher put a four on it, which meant that she did a great job.

And then, at the end of writing, the teacher said, “The best one that I put a four on was Finley’s!”

And Finley was so surprised and proud of herself. And then, it was time for snack. So she went to her backpack and got out her apple, and the people next to her were asking Finley questions on what she wrote for the scariest thing that happened.

Then, Finley took a bite and said, “I wrote that I was on the beach in the water, and this big wave came to me and brought me down on the sand in the water, and then I rolled on the sand without even plugging my nose.”

Everybody gasped and was like “Oh!” because they were so scared she rolled on the sand without even plugging her nose. They looked at her like that was an interesting story, and she became popular!

At recess, a girl named Mila was alone and had no one to play with, so Finley asked Mila, “Do you want to play with me?”

Finley thought it was a great idea that instead of them making friends with her, she’d make friends with them.

Mila said yes in a very quiet voice.

And then they played with blocks. They made a stage that wasn’t really one, just for accessories like people.

Then it was time to leave recess and go to the classroom, so they did.

They went straight to the rug, and Ms. Shelly said, “We’re going to sleep. We have blankets for you.”

But instead of sleeping, Mila and Finley talked to each other without Ms. Shelly noticing, because she was also sleeping!

And then, Finley said, “Did you bring your toothpaste and toothbrush?”

Mila said, “Yes.”

And Finley said, laughing, “Me too! Let’s brush our teeth in the bathroom!”

They tiptoed to their backpacks and opened their zippers slowly, so that they wouldn’t make any noise. They got out their toothbrushes and toothpaste, and then they snuck into the bathroom. Then they switched toothpastes and brushed their teeth with the toothpaste they switched. After they brushed their teeth, they went back to their beds, and then in one second, the teacher, Ms. Shelly, woke up and said, “Sleep time is over!”

Everybody woke up except Mila and Finley because they were already awake. So everybody stood up and took off their covers and blankets, and the teacher put the beds back where they belonged. Then it was time for play time, but they couldn’t go outside because, unfortunately, it just started raining.

The next day was Friday, the day before Finley’s birthday! She wanted everyone to be at her birthday, but uh-oh. She thought of something. She wanted to keep it a secret, but then nobody would come to her birthday party except Mila! Oh no!!! How am I going to invite everybody without ruining the surprise!!!

Then she had an idea. She was going to tell everybody to give her their phone numbers. So then, she packed her pencils again, she packed her apple again, and she packed her toothbrush again. And then, she was ready to go to school alone again!

At school, she told everybody in her class to give her their phone numbers, so the teacher said, “Oh, that’s a good idea for a class project! We’re each going to put our phone numbers on a piece of paper, and then we can call each other!”

So everybody did the project without even learning anything. Her classmates, including Mila, gave their papers to Finley. Finley put them in her backpack, and then it was time to go home, so Finley went home alone. She read the phone numbers and called everybody to tell them, “Come to 169th Street tomorrow at 11:00 AM.”

And then, she went to sleep… she didn’t hear her parents coming in. Her parents had all this stuff for her birthday: purple and pink streamers, blue and yellow balloons, a number four candle, and water for water balloons! The colors of the water balloons were all the colors in the rainbow. They were feeling super excited because they were so happy their own daughter would be happy! They started hanging all the decorations up in the backyard.

Then, the next day, when Finley woke up, she called everyone again and said, “Remember to come to my house on 169th Street at 11:00 AM.”

And then, she saw a little bit of streamers and water balloons in her bedroom. Her parents left that for her as a surprise! And then Finley went to the backyard, and she put up the streamers and put the water balloons in a basket, but before that, she saw everything hung up! She thought it was some sort of trick people were playing on her because she didn’t know her parents had come home for her birthday!

Then, for her surprise, her parents popped out of a bush and yelled really loudly, “Happy birthday, Finley!!!”

Finley’s mouth opened, and her cheeks turned as pink as tulips. She yelled back, “You came back!!!”

She was feeling very, very, very surprised.

Then, everybody in her class came out of the backyard door, and Mila was there too! Now, Finley’s parents were surprised because they didn’t know she had called all of these people to invite them to her birthday. They didn’t know she made so many friends on her first day of preschool!

They all said, “Happy Birthday, Finley!!!”

Lesson learned. Finley learned not to be scared to make a new friend… or twenty friends! And everybody ate cake and had a happy birthday party.

 

All the Wrong Questions

Chapter 1: The Incredible Sight

It was so big. Then it exploded. All over everyone. Everyone except me. So, technically, I was an outcast, again. Oh, hello, I’m Jake. You could kinda say I have special powers, but nobody notices when I use them, so I guess that was an upside to my plan.

It all started one day when Aunt Marge was babysitting me. I had just come home from school when she asked me if I wanted to go for a drive. It was my stupidness that made me say yes. We got in her old Jeep and drove off. The ride wasn’t comfortable. She wasn’t a good driver. Once she got on the road, she really stepped on it. We started to come to an area I didn’t recognize.

She said, “Welcome to Circus Mirandus.”

I started to get nervous. I saw the sign, and she wasn’t lying. I had heard of Circus Mirandus in stories Grandpa told me. I was always his favorite grandson ‘cause I was his only grandson. My older sister, Lise, died in World War ll. Lise was such a great sister. But anyways, Aunt Marge had parked the Jeep in a vacant parking lot, right next to Circus Mirandus. She told me to get out and stop daydreaming, as she always did. We walked inside the biggest tent and saw a pig the size of the sun.

That brings us back into the present. Suddenly, it exploded! The pig’s body split in half, and all the goop came flying out. That’s where my powers came in. Everyone got covered in the goop, except me. Aunt Marge had some old shrimp hanging off her T-shirt. Everyone looked at me, and I ran out of the tent and headed to the Jeep with Aunt Marge stumbling behind. I knew I couldn’t drive. I didn’t know what came over me. I opened the door and put my foot as hard as I could on the breaks. An angry mob, followed by Aunt Marge, was right behind me. I went as fast as I could and crashed into some trees not far from the mob. I hid behind the tree, and the mob ran past it, thinking that the car was just a decoy. I stumbled into the woods. My head was spinning, and I fell down on the ground and fainted.

 

Chapter 2: The Family of Beavers

I woke up in a lodge with a shadowed figure looming over me. I screamed. A hairy paw was put over my mouth. I screamed even more, but it turned into a muffled moan. Some sort of strange elixir was tossed into my mouth. It made me cringe.

I woke up again. There were needles all over my body. I got up and pulled all of the needles out of my body. They tried to give me something that looked like grilled worms. I didn’t want to eat it, so they stuck a needle between my eyes, and then I fainted. They put the worms in my mouth, then pulled the needle back out, and then I was back.

I asked them, “Why did you bring me into your lodge?”

“To save you,” they said.

They were furry. I hadn’t really noticed that, considering they were beavers. Their tails looked like spatulas as they slapped them against the floor. Seven children ran around the lodge, screaming. The mom tried to settle them down. The dad grunted. I thought I saw a grandma beaver. Her fur was all gray. The mom rushed over to me. I was lying in a bed made of leaves. My back ached, and I could feel my butt vibrating.

I can’t believe I’ve been rescued by beavers, I thought.

The mother came over to my bed and said, “Welcome to the lodge. I know you were chased by a mob, so we rushed out to save you. We put you in our boat and traveled down the river to our lodge. Eventually you started to move. We came over to you, but it was just the kids messing around. But when you actually did move, we tried to concoct a potion that would make you spontaneously combust, but we realized that wasn’t right. We searched all over the house to find the life potion. We found it in the the life potion bureau. So convenient!”

At this point, I started to get nervous and afraid. Talking beavers. I must have been mad!

 

Chapter 3: Three Questions

After a night’s rest, I woke up in the lodge and silently yelled at myself for thinking all this was a dream. The beavers started flocking me with questions about Aunt Marge and my powers that allowed me not to get spilled on by any substance. I know, I know, it was an extremely lame power, but it was given to me by the god, Stains the Magnificent.

The god of stains said, “JAKE, YOU ARE SPECIAL! YOU WILL HAVE THE POWER TO NOT GET ANYTHING SPILLED ON YOU!”

I was scared after that night when the god came. I didn’t eat for a week! Eventually, I tried his gift, and it worked! The beavers gawked at me like I was crazy! I bet I asked like a gazillion questions, but sadly, they allowed me three. So I said okay. It was my only way to really question them.

My first question was, of course, “Why did you save me?”

And they just said, “We saw someone worth saving.”

 

Chapter 4: Inquiry With The Beavers

I just stared at them. What did that mean, We saw someone worth saving? I was confused. My questions were running out, even though I had two more. And that was enough. But I still couldn’t figure out what made me worth saving. Then, I used my second question.

“Why was I worth saving?”

And they said, “You’re the one in the prophecy, Jake. You’ll restore the moonstone to the heart of the forest.”

“What’s the moonstone?” I said.

“Looks like you’re all out of questions after this one. But, since you asked, I can tell you,” said Granny Beaver from behind me.

“Once, long ago, the moonstone made the forest flourish. But one day, an evil man dressed in a black cloak came and stole it. He took it to his palace high above the clouds, where four evil dragons guarded it. They guard the moonstone to this day. But one day, a voice rang out from the clouds. ‘THE ONE WHO CANNOT BE SPILLED ON WILL COME AND STEAL THE MOONSTONE FROM YOUR CLUTCHES, ISAYA.’ Then the man in the cloak went into hiding and took the moonstone with him. On the eighth of September, 2017, the forest will die, and everything living inside will, too. That is why you, Jake, must go to the palace and find him.”

I want to help them, I thought, but I was too scared.

Granny said, “Even if you are scared, you must do it.”

I was scared, she could read my mind! But I wanted to help my furry friends.

So I said, “How do I get to the palace on the clouds?”

“I’m afraid you’re all out of questions, young man,” said Mother Beaver. ”But I guess we could make an exception, given that you’re going to save the forest and all.” “Thank you,” I said.

“To start,” said Grandma Beaver, “You need to go to the end of the world to find the lighthouse that reaches to the top of the world, and travel across the Bridge of Grace, and then you will reach the palace. But, there is a twist. You must answer a riddle that will open the doors to the palace. The answer is a river. Good luck.”

 

Chapter 5: The End of the World

The next day, I went to the docks and looked for port 45 ½, like Grandma Beaver told me, and waited the 17 minutes until the ferry arrived. When the ferry arrived, I got on, and the porter took my bag filled with food and supplies. I was directed to my seat and watched the ferry leave the docks, and when I looked to my left, I saw we were heading straight for a wall! The ferry started to speed up, and it went right through the wall. When we came out on the other side, we seemed to be heading down a river towards a lighthouse, the one that would take me to the top of the world. Suddenly, it looked like we had hit the rapids. The boat bounced up and down, and I flew across the room. I fell on the floor, and that was even worse! My body flew up and hit the floor. I felt like I could’ve thrown up. It felt like the end of the world.

 

Chapter 6: The Lighthouse

Eventually, the rapids stopped and night fell. I went into my bunk and fell asleep to the sound of waves. When I woke up, I saw that we were getting closer to the lighthouse! I felt the boat stop, and I rushed outside. I saw the lighthouse in all of its red and white glory. The porter handed me my bag, and I ran to the door. I handed my ticket to the person in the booth that was in front of the lighthouse. He asked me my purpose, why I was visiting the lighthouse. I told him I was meeting a friend. I lied. I couldn’t believe it. Every time I lied my cheeks turned red, so the guy at the booth became suspicious. But since I was a kid, he let me through.

I tried to rush up to the top floor, but on the 20th floor, I threw up all over the stairs. When did I have pizza? I thought. I tried to get to the top and made it, thankfully. The light flashed around the circular room. I rushed to the door and bolted it open. I saw a gate, but there was no bridge. I tried my luck. I opened the gate, took a good running start, and jumped right off the edge of the lighthouse.

I opened my eyes. I was flying! I flew over the edge of the world and saw the waterfall that took all the unfortunate boats off the cliff. My wings were a striking green. I flew above the clouds and spotted the Bridge of Grace and tried to maneuver my way over to the bridge. The maneuver was successful, but my landing wasn’t very graceful, and I crashed into the bridge. I managed to get up, and I noticed my wings were gone, and so I started my journey across the bridge.

 

Chapter 7: The Bridge of Grace

As I walked across the bridge, I felt the gentle ocean breeze, and it reminded me of the trips my family and I took to the beach every summer vacation. Lise and I would build sandcastles so big, crabs could come inside and live like kings! We would always have PB&J sandwiches and bask in sunlight, but those vacations were in easy times. After Lise’s death, we never went on any family vacations. After my long stretch of daydreaming, I realized that I was almost at the end of the bridge. I looked up and saw the dark pillars of a castle with angry gargoyles looking down at me like I had done them wrong. I knocked on the door, and it opened with a slam.

 

Chapter 8: The Castle

The doors opened, and I walked through them. There was a long corridor with a red carpet streaming through it. I started to walk down it, and I saw paintings of kings that had come before Isaya. I entered a throne room, and there was a golden throne plopped right in the center. A figure in a dark cloak sat there with his fingers together, in an almost scheming way. He stood up. His face was covered by his hood. He was a lanky sort of man, his skin was dark gray, and his eyes were a deep red. He lifted up his hood, and I saw his face. I gasped and fell down. Right smack down in the middle of his face was a scar the size of a watermelon.

He said, “Welcome, Jake Conboy. To your death! Muwahahaha! Here in this castle, you may find secret passages and death chambers, but I know why you are here. Not to be accommodated by me, but to steal my precious moonstone.”

Wow, he’s reading my mind just like the granny beaver did, I thought.

He said, “Try your best, Conboy, but you can never steal my moonstone.”

 

Chapter 9: The Dragons of the Earth

Isaya dropped through a hole in his throne. Water started to fill up the throne room. The clear liquid fell out through the gargoyles’ mouths and pooled onto the floor. I was scared. I didn’t know how to swim! I spotted a trap door in the floor, and I rushed to it. I opened it and dropped down the dark hole. When I got down, I noticed that there was a glass case with some sort of glowing orb inside it.

It looked like the moonstone! I reached out to get it, and then I heard a roar! Something moved in the corner, and a dark shadow rose, then three more. I gazed up at the dark shadows and screamed, but not just any scream. It was the loudest scream I could possibly generate. The dragons did not seem intimidated, so they roared back at me. Then, one of them spoke.

“I’m the Dragon of Water! My three siblings and I have guarded the moonstone for a million years. Now we shall destroy you because you have touched the moonstone!”

At this point, I was trembling. I grabbed the moonstone, and I ran up the ladder. They flew after me, their snake-like bodies slinking around the ladder. I ran through the corridor. The king saw me, and now all five of them were on my tail. I rushed out of the palace.

Then I heard the king shout, “Retract the drawbridge!”

Right then and there, I took the biggest risk of my life. I ran up the drawbridge and jumped right off the edge and landed on the platform that was on the other side. The drawbridge closed just before they could get there, and I could hear curses from the king. I ran across the Bridge of Grace, and came back to the lighthouse with the moonstone still in my clutches. I ran down the 30 flights of stairs, and I saw the ferry pulling out of the docks. I took another risk and jumped right onto the end of the ferry. The wind was almost knocked out of me. The moonstone rolled onto the floor and was so close to falling off the edge. I grabbed onto it just as it started to go over the edge. I looked back at the lighthouse, then I looked up. The bridge started to disappear. The forest was safe for another year.

 

Chapter 10: September 8, 2017           

The ferry got back to port 45 ½ by morning. I got off the ferry and walked towards the forest with the moonstone in my bag. I checked my watch. The date was September 8, 2017. I gasped! If I didn’t get the moonstone to the Grand Tree today, the forest would perish and everything in it too! I must have lost track of time when I was inside the palace!

I ran into the forest and hurried to the lodge where the beavers lived. I pushed the door open, and I held the moonstone to the ceiling so they could see it. But they weren’t there. Books were scattered all over the floor, the bed sheets had been ripped, and there was blood all over the walls. I ran upstairs and saw them huddling in a corner.

I asked them, “What’s going on, what happened?”

Granny Beaver said, “The dragons came. They attacked the lodge. They asked us where you were, and if we didn’t tell them, they would’ve kill us.”

“You told the dragons? They want to kill me!”

“Did you get the moonstone?” said Granny Beaver. “That’s the only thing that matters now.”

I showed it to them. They seemed to smile, even in this time of worry.

“Go to the middle of the forest,” said Granny Beaver. “There you will find the Grand Tree.”

“Okay,” I nodded.

I ran out of the lodge, took one last look, and ran into the dark forest. I started to see a glow of light in the distance. It must’ve been the Grand Tree! But, when I got closer, I saw it was four snake-like bodies around a dead-looking tree.

“No!” I screamed.

“Welcome, Jake Conboy,” said one of the dragons. “To your doom! Muwahahaha-ughughughugh. Sorry, got a little dust in my throat.”

They stood on their hind legs and blew fire out of their mouths. Then a thought struck me. If the tree is dead, how am I supposed to restore the moonstone? The tree has to be alive and well! I checked my watch. It was 10:59. I had one more hour. Then I asked a question.

“How did you get here? I thought I saw the bridge disappear.”

Then, a grainy voice said from behind, “You are asking all the wrong questions, Jake Conboy.” A hooded figure emerged. “I think we’ve met. My name is Isaya, king of the skies. I hope you like goobly-goo, because I have plenty in store for you.”

“Ah, but you have forgotten! Or, I just haven’t told you, I cannot be spilled on!”

I felt proud. I had stood up to a bully like Isaya.

“Ah, but you have forgotten, again,” said Isaya, “I am a god. Ruler of the skies. You might have heard of me in the life or death prophecy,” he cackled.

I was definitely afraid. Then I thought of something, but for it to work, I needed to ask another question.

“Why do you hate the forest?’

“Because,” he started to say, “When we were given the chance to pick who was to rule the earth, we fought over who would get it. So, we had a competition, and we rolled a dice, and whoever got the bigger number would get the Earth, and as you can see, I lost…”

He kept talking and didn’t notice me slide past his dragons, who were also listening. I gently pushed the moonstone into the hole that was in the tree’s roots, and a golden dust seeped through the tree, and it started to come to life. The sky king turned around and immediately went into a rage.

He shouted, “Idiots!” to the dragons as midnight struck. I felt triumphant for my achievement, but Isaya was still raging.

“Ahhh,” he shouted, and a blast of fire set the tree on fire! I was so scared as the flames blazed around the outside of the tree. Eventually, the flames died out, and all that was left was a smoldering shell of what was once the Grand Tree.

 

Chapter 11: The Grand Tree

I gasped. The tree was dead! I started to see the ground disintegrate around it. Isaya laughed and took to the skies, to his palace on the clouds. I ran back to the lodge, but I stopped in my tracks. I turned, ran back to the tree, grabbed the moonstone, and headed back. I opened the door to the lodge and went upstairs. The beavers were frightened by me and thought that I was a dragon. As I walked towards them, the wooden floorboards creaked, and my foot fell through the ceiling of the first floor. I pulled it up as quickly as I could, my heart racing.

I came closer to them and said, “The tree is dead. Pack your bags. We’re leaving.”

I slept there that night, and the next morning, I took them to my house. Suddenly, we heard a crash! A tree had fallen right onto the lodge! I saw a tear come out of Mommy Beaver’s eyes, so I tried to speed them up. I took them home and told them that they would stay in the tree house until I had enough guts to go back and defeat the evil sky king.

 

Chapter 12: Defiant Declarations

Three days later, I traveled back to the lighthouse, flew to the bridge, and walked across the drawbridge. I walked down the same corridor and put a decoy moonstone in the glass case. I went back and then went down the hole that the king had dropped through when he had disappeared the first time. It led to his room. Thankfully, he wasn’t there, so my plan sprung into action! I put death poison in the king’s soap and left without a trace. When the king got home, he thought he needed a nice, warm, eeeevil bath, so he poured the soap into the watery tub, and the water immediately turned black.

Hmmm, poison, he thought. He had been tricked! He went to the case and checked if the moonstone had been returned. He was surprised to see it had been returned! He thought he was back in power and took to the tree to have the power restored through his darkness!

Back at my house, I was getting ready for his return so that I could defeat the evil king.

 

Chapter 13: The Moonstone’s Triumph

The king traveled down into mortal territory, as he called it, to bloom the moonstone in the presence of the dying tree. He floated on a cloud to the middle of the forest and dropped the moonstone into the hole in the center of the tree, then watched the black dust flow throughout the dead tree.

I was getting ready to leave. I slid down my pole from the treehouse and started to run to the docks. I stopped in my tracks and looked at the forest, only to see a black glow coming from the center of the forest. I rushed toward the glow and was horrified to see the king raising the moonstone up to the clouds as the black dust came and was absorbed into the moonstone.

I rushed towards the king and slid down on the ground and tripped the king! The moonstone now had turned completely black, fell out of the king’s clutches, and was taken into the Grand Tree. The tree came back from its dead form into a black, live tree. The leaves withered away, and the bark started to peel off.

“Muwahahaha,” said the king. “I have defeated you, Jake Conboy!”

“Aha,” I said, “But what you don’t know is that was a fake moonstone all along! I have the real one right here!”

And I pulled it out of my messenger bag and lifted it up so that the lanky king could see it.

“Why, thank you, Jake,” said the king. He took the moonstone out of my clutches and lifted it up to the clouds.

“No, thank you!” I said.

I jumped up and grabbed it.

“No!! Thank you!!” said the king, and he grabbed it once again.

“Oh, for goodness sake!” said Granny Beaver, who came out of the treehouse. “I am going to end this madness once and for all!”

She slapped the sky king’s butt with her tail, and the moonstone slipped out of his hand and dropped into the dirty roots of the grand tree. The golden dust started to flow through the tree, once again bringing life to the forest around it. The tree that had fallen onto the beaver’s lodge came up and resumed its place as a sturdy elm.

The forest sprung back to life, and everything was back to normal!

“Nooo!!!” shouted the evil sky king as the positive, gold dust blasted him far, far away.

“Well, that’s the last we’ll be seeing of him,” said Granny Beaver, with a grainy voice. “Come! We must celebrate in the lodge!” she said.

After all the beavers had moved back into the lodge, they celebrated with a cup of hot cocoa. Dad Beaver banged a wooden drum as they danced in circles.

“Uggghh,” I said.

I spit out my cocoa when I found it was just water and dirt. We danced around the fire.

To this day, you can still hear the faint cries of the evil sky king if you listen very closely. His palace made of clouds is still there, and the dragons still fly around the sky, guarding the palace, and the Grand Tree guards the forest of Hobblenob every day.

 

THE END

 

Nothing But Different (Part Two)

Chapter 2

Opening my eyes, I feel fire swarming my small form. Normal. Then, a jet of magic blasts out of my hand.

“What?” I say simply.

This is my forbidden power coming out. I forgot about this. Well, at least it’s still normal. Walking outside of my small treehouse with the fire-fox that I named Flame, I go over my powers by testing each one.

“Invisibility.”

I look at a hand mirror to see that I completely disappear.

“Shapeshifting.”

I turn into a fire-fox, like Flame, then back into a human (Flame’s eyes are wide open with awe).

“Frost.”

I go over to the lake by my house and freeze the water.

“Psychics.”

I lift Flame and place her on my head (where she curls up, on top of my head, to take a nap).   

“Fire.”

I unfreeze the lake and take a drink.

“And water control.”  

I lift up the water and make it spin above my head. I frown, wondering if I should test my unforbidden power.

“Why not,” I say to myself. “But only for a second.”

Taking Flame off my head, I place her 20 feet in front of me. Then, I unleash my inner demon.

 

Chapter 3

A fire swarms around me as a white, blinding form comes out of me. This is what I call my inner demon. The first time it ever came out was a nightmare.

We were in the hut, not too far away from town, but far enough so I would have space to roam around freely, which was important to my mom and dad. As I was playing outside with a magic ball, I suddenly stopped. Before my parents could even move to see what was wrong, my eyes started to glow a bright red and my hair shot up like I just got shocked by lightning.

Fire and water chased itself around my head, opening a vortex-like element, where a black demon started to crawl slowly out of the vortex. My mom had the power to create force fields, or “bubbles,” as I used to call them. Wrapping me in a bubble, she carried me into the house while Dad (who controlled the element of fire) burned the demon. When the vortex was gone, I didn’t remember a thing. I just asked why we had gone inside and why I was in a bubble. Mom and Dad told me what had happened and told me that it was just a new power.

As I grew older, the new power happened a bit more often. Mom and Dad told me to only think good thoughts, and that bad thoughts were feeding the demon inside me. That is why I became so optimistic. I’m always scared that the demon inside me will one day come out and never go back into its weak state.

When the flashback is over, and the demon goes back inside my form, I see Flame standing up on the rock I had put her on less than five minutes ago. Now she looks tense, and she’s getting ready to pounce. Taking slow steps toward her, I whisper a calm lullaby.

She grows less tense as I stroke her soft, orange fur. I cuddle up next to her as I realize that I have school tomorrow. Looking up at the sun, I see that it’s starting to set. How long have I been out here? Well, whatever. Flying upwards, I go into my hut and start to fall asleep when the realization sets in. I am starting senior year of high school! Well, sleep comes first. Falling asleep with Flame curled up next to me, I wait for the torture to begin.

 

The Crime

Breaking news… someone has stolen the precious Pink Panther diamond from the museum. According to the police chief, the video surveillance cameras do not show who stole the diamond, although they contain the entire video footage of the museum rooms, including the room where the famous Pink Panther diamond was. The police are surprised and aren’t sure whether there really is a thief or if this is the work of a magician!

The case is assigned to Police Detective Longbottom who, after careful review of the video surveillance cameras, comes up with the following suspects: Boris — the Russian cook, Jimmy — the security guard for the museum, Shanti — the museum janitor, Al Capone — the notorious thief, and Craig — the museum owner. Based on eyewitness accounts, Longbottom concludes that the robbery occurred on Sunday between the hours of 4:00-5:00 PM, just before the museum closing time at 5:00PM. The authorities are working on finding the criminal and are announcing a reward of $500,000 to whoever helps identify the thief or thieves.

Detective Longbottom has been solving robberies for 20+ years, and it is not lost on him that the robbery could be the work of more than one person, as it would take more than one pair of hands to steal, disable museum security systems, and tamper with the video surveillance. Indeed, the thief could have tampered with the video surveillance in a manner to assign the blame on somebody innocent. Longbottom starts investigating the suspect’s daily schedule, job profile, credit history, bank accounts, recent travel and whereabouts, and criminal history, and he prepares the following worksheet for his analysis:

After another week of investigation and analyzing the clues, Longbottom’s initial conclusions are:

  1. It’s unlikely for Al Capone to get involved in the robbery himself, especially when visiting with his family (he could have any of his underlings do this).
  2. Shanti appears apprehensive, but there are no definite clues. Moreover, she has been a janitor for 10+ years and never had an incident like this.
  3. Craig appears very helpful, and no clues point to him.
  4. Jimmy, the security guard, has been questioned repeatedly by the police, but no clues point to him. He was seen interviewing for higher paying jobs.
  5. Boris does not seem to have much motive but is a person of interest. He has been spending a lot of money since the robbery occurred. He needs to be tracked even more closely.

Longbottom obtains search warrants and starts visiting each of the suspect’s houses and interviewing the residents, including family members. He finds a bag of museum maps, wire cutters, electric wire, and tape in Boris’ car garage at home, which makes Boris a top suspect. However, Longbottom is not sure what Boris’ motive is, since he does not have prior history of theft. And how can he pull off a grand robbery without any prior experience in disabling security systems and tampering cameras? If Boris is involved, he must have gotten help — meaning there is another thief.

One day, Longbottom follows Jimmy’s car and sees him pull into a car wash, where he sits next to a person for one hour while his car is being washed. Longbottom cannot identify the person who appears to be in some form of disguise, but he’s careful to note this person’s license plate. The police department report indicates that the car belongs to Craig Edgar — the museum owner! Longbottom is surprised and thinks he should interview Craig more closely. Up to now, he thought Craig was the most unlikely suspect.

Craig sounds upset and irritated when Longbottom starts to interview him. He goes to the extent of asking Longbottom why he is not questioning Jimmy, the security guard. Craig tells Longbottom that he was not in the museum room for long and that the detective could check the video footage. This makes Longbottom wonder when and how did Craig manage to change the video tapes. He starts following Craig and learns that Craig’s girlfriend is a graphic designer. Longbottom decides to visit with Craig again.

“Have a seat. Please. Now, Craig — where were you the night the diamond disappeared?

“I was at home watching TV!”

“What program were you watching?”

“Freeform, where all the movies are!”

“Anyone with you when you were watching TV?”

“No!”

“Then we just have your word for it. How do I know you’re not lying? How do I know you weren’t out there stealing a diamond?”

“Check the camera footage!”

“I have. The camera near the gas station next to the museum captures you briefly in front of the gas station close to the time of the theft, mumbling to yourself. What do you have to say about that?”

What?! Jimmy probably came and changed it!

“Here. Take a look yourself.” Longbottom shows him the image. “Isn’t that you?”

“I just said Jimmy changed it!”

“But Jimmy works at your museum and not at the gas station next to the museum.”

“I do not know. I swear I was not there.”

“Do you happen to know a lovely housekeeper named Shanti?”

“Yes!”

“She said she saw you right at the museum when you said you were watching TV at home.”

“She is also a big, fat liar. Plus, nobody likes her!”

“I seem to like her. Everyone seems to like Shanti. But from what I can gather, very few people like you.”

“What, I thought nobody liked her in real life!”

“She’s everyone’s favorite housekeeper. But you, Craig, you have a very bad disposition, which makes you unpopular. Now, tell me about that girlfriend of yours, who you wanted to buy a diamond for but didn’t, because you decided to steal one instead!”

“No, I didn’t!”

“The police just took your girlfriend into custody, as they found video files of the museum theft in her apartment. She has confessed that she helped you and Boris steal it. The police are just picking up Boris!”

Craig is unable to speak.

Longbottom says, “Game over, Craig! By the way, that was a nice mask you gave Boris to steal the diamond.”

 

Sign Language

“Why do I have to go to a Jewish school? I don’t even know any Hebrew!!!” Emma complained to her mom.

“It will be good for you,” her mom said.

Her older sister, Ruth, was listening in on the conversation.

“You’re going to need to learn Hebrew before next week. You know that we’re gonna be in Israel visiting relatives for a month,” Ruth said, seeming rather calm.

“You really expect me to learn Hebrew at my first week in a brand new school?!” Emma replied.

“Emma, Ruth!” their dad called, “It’s time for breakfast!”

Emma got up and ran to the kitchen. She sat in her chair and started to eat. Her dad had made waffles and syrup. It was delicious, but she hardly paid any attention. She was too nervous because on Monday, she would be going to a small school where she would know no one. A school with a different, unfamiliar environment. A school where she would be thought of as stupid because she didn’t know Hebrew, and it was a Jewish school.

***

Emma’s first day at her new school was a total disaster. Just kidding. All the kids were welcoming, along with the teachers, and no one, I repeat, no one, seemed to think of her as stupid. At one point, Emma forgot the name of the school, but because of how the rest of the day went, she wasn’t afraid to ask. It turned out that the name of the school was Beit Rabban. She made a few new friends. The names of her friends were Rose, Batya, and Isabelle. She even learned a few words in Hebrew. Yes is ken (כן), no is lo (לו), maybe is ooliy (אולי), and thank you is todah (תודה).

When Emma got home, she decided to watch a show. She walked over to the TV room. When she opened the door, she saw her sister watching a fashion show that she hated, so instead of watching TV, she had to do her stupid homework. Emma did her literacy and math homework easily, but when it came to Hebrew, she was stumped. She decided to just tell the teacher it was too hard. Then, she thought about Israel. What would she do?! She couldn’t spend a month with no way to talk to anyone!!

***

The day finally arrived. They were going to Israel for a whole month, and Emma still knew only a few words in Hebrew. After lunch, they went to the airport and did all of the boring things that people do in airports. Many adults call these things “important,” and “a good use of time,” but one thinks otherwise when they’re a child with no computer to play games on. The reason for this should be pretty obvious. If you don’t have your own computer, you are stuck watching all of the adults use their computers.

The plane was no better. All Emma did was sit around, eat, and sleep. Then, as soon as they got out of the airport in Israel, Emma’s life became a lot more interesting. She had heard that Israel was a little bit smaller than New Jersey, but because of all the stuff packed into it, it looked much bigger. They had rented a house in Tel Aviv (תל אביב) next to a bunch of playgrounds (which looked awesome!) While Emma’s dad and sister went to the house, Emma and her mother went to one of the playgrounds. Immediately, Emma saw a lonely looking girl sitting alone on one of the benches that circled the playground. Emma wanted to go up to her and cheer her up, but she knew that the girl wouldn’t be able to understand her, so she and her mother started towards the house to join the rest of the family.

On the way home, Emma and her mother passed a woman, who looked a little confused.

“Aypho hasifria?” she asked.

Emma’s mom pointed at a building not too far away, and the woman nodded, smiled, and said, “Todah.”

All this happened while Emma stood there completely dumbfounded.

Emma went to the playground again and again, only to find herself staring at the girl, who seemed to always be sitting on the same bench. Only once did she see someone talk to the girl. It was a woman, probably the girl’s mom. It sounded like the woman called the girl Tamar. Tamar always had that same look on her face, a look of loneliness, like she never had anyone to talk to. That was one of the main, and most important reasons, why Emma wanted to know Hebrew. If she knew Hebrew, she would be able to cheer Tamar up.

One day, the girl waved to Emma. Emma was shocked, but she tried not to show it, and just waved back. Then the next day, Emma decided to make a move. She walked up to the girl and motioned for her to come. The girl came, and they played together silently, but they constantly made hand motions to tell each other what they wanted to say.  Every day, when they were both at the playground, they would do it again and again and again. Slowly, day by day, they made up a whole language, and they called it Sign Language. A new and original name. When it was finally time for Emma to leave, instead of being happy to get home to her friends, she was sad to leave Tamar. But it didn’t matter. After all, they’d be coming back next year.

 

Back to Mars

The ship was flying really fast through space. The ship was red, and it was really big. It was the biggest ship in the galaxy. In the ship, there were about twenty aliens. About a month ago, a group of humans started to follow the aliens with space guns. But the ship was bullet proof, so when someone shot it, there was no damage to the ship.

Today the aliens were running away from an even bigger group of humans, and the humans had bigger space guns. The ship had space guns too, so the aliens shot back. But the humans were really good at dodging things. They were dodging all the shots. But then, the ship went as fast as it could to Mars. Mars was where the aliens lived. When they got to Mars, they ran to their alien houses.

There were two aliens named Joey and Bobby. They were playing soccer until they heard aliens running and screaming, “HUMANS!!!” They looked back, and there were about fifteen humans running after them.They ran until they were inside Joey’s house. They locked all the doors and all the windows. After an hour, they decided to look out their bedroom window to see if the humans were still there. They both screamed and ran out of the room. Outside, there were two humans right in front of the window, smiling in a really creepy way.

The aliens were in their garage with all the doors and windows locked, and the door was covered with wooden planks. Even after a whole day, they didn’t open the door or look out the window. Then, a week later, they finally looked out the window, and, luckily, there was nobody there. So they unlocked all the doors and took a walk around the city that they lived in to see if humans were still out there. Luckily, there were no humans out there, so they said bye to each other, and they each went to their own house.

When Bobby woke up, he had a super-duper, awesome idea. He ran to Joey’s house, and when he got there, he knocked on the door. Joey opened the door. He had his human pajamas on. Bobby laughed and told Joey his super-duper, awesome idea. His idea was that the next day, they were going to go to Human World on Joey’s spaceship and be the first aliens to step foot on Human World. They would explore Human World and take a space gun just in case they were attacked. They would also have human costumes so it wouldn’t be so easy to find out they were aliens.

Joey started jumping around in circles screaming, “That’s a great idea!!!” Bobby was really happy that Joey agreed to do it. After that, they went to the soccer field near Joey’s house and started to plan everything they were going to do in Human World. They were so excited!!! Then they each went to their own house.

The next morning, Bobby put on his human costume and went running to Joey’s house. When Joey opened the door, he yelled and locked all the doors and windows. So, Bobby had to take off his costume and call him and tell Joey it was only him. Then Joey came back outside. Bobby told him to put on his human costume. So, Joey and Bobby both put on their human costumes and went to Joey’s spaceship.

When Joey was in the spaceship, he started to jump in circles again. This time, Bobby started to jump around too. They were so excited to go to Earth. The flight would take a whole day long, but they didn’t care. They brought a soccer ball with them to play soccer, and they didn’t break anything because the spaceship was big. They also couldn’t break anything because everything in the spaceship was unbreakable. Even if they kicked the ball super hard, the ship wouldn’t break, so they were lucky to have that ship. They played soccer for hours until they were really tired and went to sleep.

A giant beep woke them up. That beep meant that they made it to Human World. They were so excited, but they were also scared. What if they got killed by humans? They left their spaceship in a hidden cave. They saw some people walking past them, but since the aliens had human costumes on, the humans couldn’t notice they were aliens. The aliens were so amazed. Since they were aliens, they thought everything in Human World was really strange. They saw a really big building with a human in front of it. There was also a huge crowd of humans right in front of the human. Everybody was screaming, “Mr. President!!!” Bobby and Joey were really confused, so they left. After a really long walk around the city in Human World, they sat under a tree. It was really hot in Human World. A lot hotter than on Mars. Bobby told Joey that he was really tired, so he was going to take a nap. Since Joey wasn’t too smart, when Bobby fell asleep, Joey took off his hot human costume and fell asleep too.

Joey felt someone shake him. It was Bobby. Bobby had a really scared face. Joey looked around and saw some humans dressed in blue with some weird looking guns. Joey took out his space gun and started shooting randomly. But, since the humans were really good at dodging things, they dodged every shot. Then Joey and Bobby started to run as fast as they could. Luckily, aliens were a lot faster than humans, so the humans couldn’t catch up. Then, when they couldn’t see the humans anymore, they decided to go look for their spaceship and leave Human World before they were killed.

They looked all over the forest, where they left their spaceship, but they couldn’t find it. They also looked all over the city, but they couldn’t find it. Joey was so mad. They didn’t know what to do. So they decided to walk around the city. When they got to a park, they sat down and thought of something to do.

While they were thinking, a man came and looked at them. He came up to them and asked them what they were thinking. The aliens thought that he was mean, so they ran and hid behind a bush. Then the man found them and told them that he was not mean. So Bobby and Joey came out of the bush and told him why they were sad. The man listened to them, and he invited them to his house. They accepted and went to his house.

When they got to his house, the man gave them things to eat that they never ate before. It was something called “candy.” Candy was their favorite thing they ate in Human World. But Joey thought it was a really weird name for such a tasty thing. But he didn’t really care. They also ate something called “tomatoes.” They didn’t like tomatoes, but they ate it anyway since they didn’t want to be rude. Aliens could speak every language in the whole universe very fluently. So they understood the man very well. The guy was very nice. He said his name was Peter. Peter was young. He was about 25 years old. He let Bobby and Joey go explore the house and touch everything in the house that they had never seen before. Bobby and Joey were such good friends with Peter that after a month, Peter asked Joey and Bobby if they wanted to live with him since they didn’t have any place to sleep.

***

On Mars…

Back on Mars, everybody that knew Joey and Bobby were gone. They were screaming all over the city, saying, “BOBBY!!! JOEY!!!” They didn’t know where the two went since they didn’t tell anybody where they were, just in case someone tried to stop them from going. Everyone was so scared because they thought that Joey and Bobby were dead or stolen by humans. They even tried to text the two and call them with their space phones, but Bobby and Joey didn’t answer!

***

Back in Human World…

Joey and Bobby heard their space phones ring, but they ignored it. They obviously said yes to the offer to stay at Peter’s house. Peter made a room for them. The room was black and had a sticker that looked like Mars with stars all around it. There was a king-sized bed for both of them. Peter lived in a mansion, so the two beds could fit in their gigantic room. Joey and Bobby were so happy with their new room that they went to Peter and gave him a giant hug!!! They were so happy that they got to live with Peter.

Peter gave them everything they wanted. They asked for a new soccer ball because their soccer ball was broken. When Peter brought them to the shop, he bought them the most expensive ball that never broke and never got dirty either.

Peter loved soccer, so every day when he came home from work, he took Bobby and Joey to the soccer field close to his house. They loved to play with Peter because he always made funny jokes when they played soccer, and he always played as easy as he could because he was too good for them. Sometimes Bobby or Joey asked him to show them how he played when he was actually trying to play the best he could. He was really good. After a week, Peter told them something awesome. He said that he was a professional soccer player!!! They were so happy! They were living with a professional soccer player! That was why he was so good at soccer!

After that, every day Peter taught the aliens how to play soccer very well for five whole hours. But since the aliens loved to play soccer, they never complained or got tired, and even if they did complain or get tired, Peter would get mad at them, so they just got used to it. After soccer, the aliens had a tutor who was Peter’s best friend, so he wasn’t scared of the aliens. The aliens learned quickly. It only took them one class to learn one thing. The aliens even made a new friend. He was fifteen years old, and he was very funny.     

After like two years, Bobby wanted to check his space phone. He went to his room and looked under the bed and got his space phone out. Since he hadn’t checked his space phone in about two whole years, the notifications said “10 missed calls from Mom” and “100 texts from Mom.” When he finished reading the texts, he ran downstairs and showed Joey all the messages that his mom texted. When Joey finished reading the texts, they both ran to Peter and told him that they needed to build a spaceship to get back to Mars. Peter told them that he would help them.

Bobby and Joey drew a picture of what the spaceship would look like and what it had to be made of. Then they showed the picture to Peter, and they all went running to the store to buy the materials. They needed a lot of materials, like metal and steel. The next day, they started to build the spaceship. The spaceship had to be very tall and very long. It had to be about fifteen feet tall because the aliens were very tall, and it needed to be 150 feet long so they could play soccer. It was really easy to make because the aliens knew exactly what to do, and since they were a lot faster than humans, they made it in about an hour.

When they finished making the spaceship, it looked awesome. The aliens were really happy and so was Peter. The aliens even thought that the spaceship looked a lot better than their other one. Peter asked if he could go with them to Mars. Bobby and Joey said yes!!! So they all went to the space shop and bought a space suit for Peter. Then they decided to leave two days later so they could say bye to Human World.

***

Two days later…

The aliens had put all their stuff in the spaceship, and Peter had just put in some things because he would be going back to Human World. They were all so excited to leave in a minute. Bobby and Joey wanted to see their family and tell them how it was in Human World, and Peter wanted to go to Mars to be the first human to step on Mars. Peter obviously brought his camera so he could take pictures of Mars.

When they got in, they were almost ready for blast off. They just needed to press some buttons and… 5… 4… 3… 2… 1… BLAST OFF!!!

Joey and Bobby started to jump all over the spaceship, and after a while, Peter started to jump with them. After an hour, they stopped jumping and started to play soccer. They only wanted to play soccer for fun, not to win. Peter was on one team, and Joey and Bobby were on a different team. At the end, the score was 31 to 3. Peter obviously won. He always won by a lot, but the aliens never really cared. They only wanted to play soccer for fun, not to win. After the game, the three of them fell asleep.

Beep!!! Beep!!! Beep!!!

They all woke up right away. That was the alarm that signaled they got to Mars. It was one in the afternoon. They were all thinking, Yay, we are here!!! They opened the door of the spaceship and started to take everything out. Then Joey went to his house, Bobby went to his house, and Peter went to Bobby’s house because Bobby’s house was bigger than Joey’s. After unpacking, Joey and Bobby went to the park to prepare a welcome back party for themselves while Peter stayed at home. They texted their family and friends to come to the park with a lot of food. Then they started to hide behind some bushes until their family and friends came. They were so excited to see them!

When their family and friends got there, they were really confused. Why did Joey and Bobby ask them to come to the park with food? Then the two jumped out of the bushes and surprised them. They started to talk and eat the food that the family and friends brought, until Peter jumped out of some bushes with a space gun and told Joey and Bobby that he wasn’t a soccer player. He worked for KARN (Kill Aliens Right Now)! The aliens were so surprised and mad at the same time. They trusted him!

Peter started to shoot. The aliens weren’t to good at dodging, but they managed to dodge all of the bullets. Then Joey remembered that his dad always brought a space gun, so he shouted to his dad to take out his space gun and start shooting Peter. But since humans were really good at dodging, Peter just dodged all the shots easily. After a while of trying to hit Peter, Joey’s dad decided to use the mega shot! The mega shot was made to kill every human who was on Mars and make their bodies disappear! But Joey didn’t care, he just wanted to get rid of Peter right then. When his dad shot the mega shot, all of Mars turned completely blue. It was really weird. No aliens that are alive at this time had ever seen this happen before. The last time that this happened was one thousand years ago. It took thirty seconds for Mars to turn back to its normal color again. After thirty seconds, Peter was gone. Everybody started celebrating.

 

The End!

 

Lucy and Her Friends

 

3/12/11

Dear Diary,                                                                                                                     

My name is Lucy. I am twelve years old, and I live in Liverpool, England.  I love to write. I wrote seventeen chapter books and five picture books. I like to write fantasy stories. In school, I have no friends. No one likes me, I guess. Whenever they see me, they walk past me like I’m a ghost. The only friend I have is Kaitlyn. She lives in Manchester, England. I go to see her once a month. It takes my family and I one hour and ten minutes to drive there. I’m just quiet.  A lot of girls at school get detention or suspension. These girls’ names are Amelia, Ella, Ashley, Allison, Isabella, and Lily. They’re all in, like, a “gang,” I guess. They are loud, rude, and just mean! I really want to see Kaitlyn more, and I want the girls at school to be nice to me.

From,

Lucy

 

3/24/11

Dear Diary,                                                                                                                   

Today, in recess, I was sitting down and knitting, when Ella and Alison came over to me and said, “Knitting is stupid, do something else with your life!” Then they took off sixteen stitches and threw what I was knitting onto the ground.

Everyone was playing, but since Kaitlyn didn’t go to my school, I couldn’t play with anyone. The girls from the “gang” were on the slide, the boys were on the monkey bars, and I was sitting on the steps with the teacher. I thought about the time when the “gang” was telling secrets about me.

Lily stood up and said, “Stop making fun of her, she’s kinder than you think!”

So, that day, I asked Lily if she wanted to be my friend, and she said, “I guess so.”

I know that you are probably like, Why did you ask a girl from the “gang” to be be your friend? But she’s nicer than the other girls and quiet like me. Maybe she still makes fun of me though.

From,

Lucy

 

4/12/11

Dear Diary,                                                                                                                

So it turns out that Kaitlyn is moving. So that’s great. Now we live seven hours and fifteen minutes away, and I have to take a plane there! Well, on the bright side, Lily’s my friend. But the rest of the “gang” are not my friends. Today I’m going to see Kaitlyn, and my family and I are in the car now. We are going to help her pack. I am going to miss her sooo much. We grew up together.

Lily doesn’t know that I’m going to visit Kaitlyn. She doesn’t even know about her, and Kaitlyn doesn’t know about Lily. Well, I mean I don’t want Kaitlyn to leave, but I sort of want to see what happens between me and Lily. Wow, I just saw a family of European rabbits and a pool frog! Well, I better go, I’m so excited! Bye!

From,

Lucy

 

Emy’s Jazz Club

It was only the second week that Emy’s Jazz Club was open when I broke the rule. I played the piano. I had longed to use it since opening day of the restaurant, but it was prohibited by all the people working there. The only person allowed to play it was my father. When he went on break, I played a short song. It was nothing really. It had just been torture for the past two weeks. Seeing everyone play it, I felt it was mine. And I didn’t want anybody touching what I thought was mine. It just didn’t feel right. But, when my father came back from the break room, I was just midway through the song. The crowd was sinking into it.

“Rene!” he screamed and yanked my hands off of the keys.

He brought me to my room and threw a box of crackers on my bed.

“Goodnight Rene,” he said. “If we wanted you to play, we would have said so.”

And with that, he slammed the door and left me with nothing but a bed and a box of stale saltines.

***

I woke up the next morning to screams and gasps. I ran down the stairs as fast as my legs could carry me. The jazz club was somewhat empty. Not because of the people, but because of something else… the piano!

“I’m sorry,” my father said. “I forgot to lock up the club. Someone must have noticed and stolen it.”

There were more gasps and screams.

“Without the piano, we could go out of business,” another cook exclaimed.

My father gave me a glare and told me, “If you go out and find the piano, you can take over and play it when you come back.”

For the first time, I stared into his eyes.

“I’ll go,” I said like a hero. “Anything for Emy’s.”

“That’s the spirit,” Christina, the barista, said.

Pretty soon, everyone was cheering for me. I walked out of the club with a reassuring “Be back soon!” so that everyone could feel comfortable with me walking around New Orleans by myself. I took a deep breath and set out to find my piano.

I started walking towards Port Trade & Exchange. Mr. Port loved music and would give up anything in his store for something so valuable. I have known him since I was born. He opened his store the day I was born. He was 60, but, hey, who’s counting?

“Good Morning, Mr. Port. How ya doing?” I asked the man.

“Very well, Rene,” he said very casually. “What brings you here, gal?”

“Well, is there any chance that you got a piano yesterday or early this morning?” I asked hopefully.

“No, no, no. What makes you think that? But I did see two men walking with a piano at four.” He sipped his coffee. A couple of minutes passed by. “Hurry along now. Go, go. This isn’t school, this is the proud store of Port Trade & Exchange.” He hurried me out the door.

I had collected some information. The people who stole the piano did so at four o’clock. They were men, two men. I scribbled down all the information I had collected on a Post-it. I headed back to the jazz club. The door swung open.

I walked in and had a seat at the bar. Christina was making me cheese and crackers.

“How was it, honey?” she said.

I ate a cracker. “Good. I found out some information about who stole it and when they stole the piano.”

“Really?” said Cristina, wide-eyed. “Tell me.”

“Ok. Well, they were two men. They stole the piano at four.”

I explained the story to her, telling her what I heard from Mr. Port. Then the band (without the piano) started practicing. The drums and trumpet sounded empty without the piano. I saw Father standing backstage. He was probably thinking about Mom. She worked for NASA and always left early in the morning and came home late at night, if she came home at all. When she was home, she baked cookies and left us enough to last until she came back later. I watched as Father started clapping to the music. When they finished, they took a bow like there were people watching them. In total, they did a good job. They were louder than usual. They weren’t as into the music as they were when they had my dad leading with the piano.

The person playing the trumpet was named Greg, and the person playing the drums was named Stewart. Sometimes, Stewart would let me hit the cymbals after a performance, but I didn’t ask. His band had enough to deal with without me getting cracker crumbs over his new instrument. All of a sudden, I had a thought. Could Mr. Port have stolen the piano? How could he know for sure that two men stole it at four o’clock? Maybe he was hiding the piano in the back closet! That was why he rushed me out of the shop so quickly!

I ran to his shop, and as I got closer, I got stealthier. When I finally got there, I snuck through the back entrance, where the storage room was. It was the only place he could hide a piano. He lived on the second floor of the large warehouse. I walked into the storage room. Things were piled up everywhere. There were statues and rocking chairs of all different kinds. Scarves and photographs with frames were put on any spare space in the stifling room. I wobbled my way over to the back space of the room. I saw a tarp covering something in the back of the room. Could it be?! I uncovered the tarp to find… a Pac Man Arcade Machine? So Mr. Port didn’t steal the piano after all. I felt kinda guilty for suspecting my closest family member (other than Christina) of stealing my father’s most prized possession. He would never want Emy’s to close. I walked slowly back to the club. I took out my cellphone and texted my friend, Nella.

Me: Can u help me with a mystery?

Nella: Sure. Is it about ur dad’s piano?

Me: Howda u know about it?

Nella: GOTTA NEWS projected it.

Me: Ohh

Nella: Am I coming or not?!

Me: Come.

As fast as I could turn off my cell, Nella was standing at the club stoop. Her hair was blowing in the wind as if she were a supermodel. I walked up to her. She was eating a blueberry scone.

“Hey, Nella.”

“Hey, Rene,” she said, giggling.

I guess she thought it was funny that Rene rhymed with hey.

“Let’s go, Nella.” I said.

She handed me a walkie talkie.

“We should spread out. You go in the club, I’ll go to Port Trade and-”

“Already checked there,” I said, not making eye contact with her.

“Okay, then I’ll go to the Instrument Shop instead.”

“Let’s go,” I said.  

I hooked up my walkie talkie to my pants and sprinted into the restaurant. I heard talking in my walkie-talkie.

“If you find anything, moo like a cow!”

Nella can be so weird sometimes. As I walked towards the storage closet, I heard something.

“If you tell Syd, we’re in big trouble.”

Syd was my dad’s name. That was Stewart’s voice.

“Yeah. If Syd finds out that we stole his piano, we’re both dead.”

That was Greg’s voice! They stole the piano! I mooed into the walkie talkie and barged into the closet.

“Ahhh!” they screamed.

The police came and, pretty soon, both of them were put in prison. Later, we found out that they stole the piano because they thought that they were not getting attention from the crowd, so they stole the main instrument. My father later came and put his shoulder around mine.

“Nice job, Rene. You ready for tonight?”

“What do you mean?”

“Mama’s coming, and you are playing the piano for everyone.”

“Oh, I forgot.”

That night, I put on my dark green dress with lace sleeves and my white flats. They were like ballet slippers. I thought it would be best to wear my flat shoes, because if I was going to be pushing the pedals, I needed flats. My hair was in one braid all the way down my back. Soon, I found myself on the stage with my hands on the keys again. I saw my mama, and my heart raced. I also saw all of my friends, Mr. Port, Christina, and people who came to watch. It was just like the night I last played. Except, instead of my hands being yanked off the keys, the spotlights went on. Click.

 

The Scary Puppets

Once upon a time, there lived a puppet named Trump. The girl that owned Trump loved him, but she grew old, and she wanted to be queen. She took the puppet to the graveyard and buried him there.

One day, on a full moon, he came out of the grave and said, “I will get my revenge on Georgegina.”

The day after, he was looking for some kind of weapon to kill her, but someone found him, picked him up, and took him to the store. But, good thing he did not move when the man found him. He was at the store, and the guy put him for sale. Someone bought him, and he got shipped to the home of the buyer.

At night, he found a knife and went to the parents’ bedroom and woke them up and said, “Here is Trump,” and stabbed them in the face and ran away.

Then, he saw into another house, and it looked like her, Georgegina, and went to the house and stabbed her in the face. But, it wasn’t Georgegina. It just looked like her. One day later, he found a newspaper, and it said,  “Georgegina, our new queen.”

So, then he said, “She probably has an army by now, so I probably need an army too.”

He went to a library and found a wizard book. He looked in the wizard book, and it said, “If you say ‘hogen blogen,’ then all of the puppets, that had been tortured, will come to life.”

So, he went to the graveyard and said ”hogen blogen.”

They got summoned, and he said, “Yes, Georgegina will die.”

And, by the way,  Georgegina threw all the puppets in the world out because she hated puppets and buried all the puppets in the graveyard! So, he had his army, and they were different. Some had glasses, and some puppets had robotic eyes. But, then he saw a kano puppet, and he knew that the kano puppet was strong because he saw him on TV once, and he was killing everything, so he made him co-captain.

So, he said, “Kano, take 60 puppets and try to find Georgegina.”

Then, he said to the other puppets, “We are going to make a plan to kill Georgegina”.

So, they went to Georgegina’s castle, and they saw the guards and split up and tried to find the room that Georgegina was in. But, the guards were in the way. Georgegina was on the top floor.

They did not know what room she was in. The guards saw them, but the puppets had a plan. They came in from different sides, right and left, and they sliced the guards in half with their knives, and they got past. They were on the first floor, so they found an elevator and went up. They were there, and they saw Georgegina, and then all the other puppets came.

And Trump said to Georgegina,  “You son of a Bush, why would you do this? Now, you’re going to die.”

She said, “What the hell are you guys doing here? Anyways, smell my butthole, suckers.”

So, they killed her, and each of them took turns stabbing her with a knife, and now it is an old wive’s tale, and it happened on January the 13th.

 

The End

 

A Stick Figure’s Life

Hi, I’m End. I obviously have the worst spot in a book… the last page.

I mean, who likes a thumb pressing on their face all the time? It’s horrible! I JUST WANT PEACE AND QUIET!!! Prisoners are bad people, and they still get good spots. When I mean good, I mean the reader doesn’t put their thumb on your face. It’s not like I can move in the comic while a person is reading. Then, they would freak out, they would know our secret, and all that stuff. Plus, it’s really annoying when I walk through the book. I always hit my head on the speech bubbles.

This is what I look like: I have a big, round head, pretty long arms, and, I guess, short legs. My house is made out of sticks. My whole world is made out of sticks. I mean, who likes their world being plain black-and-white and sticks? Especially in the worst part of the book.

I really want to find another place.

Recently, the author of this book, Gary L. Henderson, passed away. When the reader closed the book, obviously a bunch of us cried. But me, eh, I didn’t cry a lot. The reason I didn’t cry a lot is because number one, the author put me in the worst place, and number two, I have long arms, but short feet and a big head. Most people call me “Balloon Head,” but whatever.  When I mean whatever, I really mean whatever. I totally don’t care.

When the book is closed, I walk to the very back of the book and sit there. It’s the place that fits me the most in the book. It’s plain, it has no people in it, and when no one’s reading the book, it’s peaceful and quiet.

The president of stick figures, Bob Blob, declared that we should each trace a piece of Gary L. Henderson’s toenail so they could make a really small funeral at the end of the book, where the book cover is. Obviously, that really shocked me.

I climb up the cover. I get a little tired, so I go to the bottom of the book and sleep.

I end up outside. Being outside feels weird because when I come outside, I rip out a piece of paper that will keep me alive. Now, I just have to figure out a way to go back. Well, I actually don’t want to go back. Maybe I should have just figured out a way to hide.

So I wait and wait, until a cleaning lady sucks me up into the vacuum. Inside, there are gross stuff, like hair, dust, spider legs, and flies. It’s disgusting, but it’s okay because I find a piece of paper I can walk onto. A little bigger, but not a full piece of paper. I wait days, and those days turn into weeks.

Finally on the 11th week, the cleaning lady empties the vacuum. She drops a little on the floor, but gladly, I don’t fall on the floor. I find a paper shopping bag in the garbage. I go onto the bag and climb outside the trashcan. That’s when I get worried. I figure Gary L. Henderson has six hamsters. If only I could figure out a way to be a 3D object. Wait, I know, a 3D printer.

I waited another few weeks to go to the 3D printer. I’m an inch away from the 3D printer, but gladly, there’s a bunch of paper. I try to push my paper. It doesn’t work. So, I wait one hour, and the cleaning lady opens the window. A little wind pushes me onto the paper. I walk on the paper. Now, all I have to do is figure out a way to get into that 3D printer. I sadly waste 24 hours and six minutes printing myself when I can’t go into 3D printed-self.

I wake up. What actually happens is:

When I am at the end of the book, I start a huge ink-fire, and set a bone on fire, and go around town setting pretty much everything on fire. I know it’s a crazy thing. I mean, all I have to do is set fireworks all around the town without lighting them, so in my opinion, it is a great idea. Gladly, nobody is around because they are all huddled around the grave. I should burn the toenail too, but then they would kill me, so whatever.

But, I mean, who cares. Once I burn down all the stuff, it is still sticks, and plus, this is a stick figure comic book. I mean, the book’s called Ink City. They can just rebuild the stick city, but it’ll take a long time. But, who cares. All I have to do is, before they come, grab some sticks, and make a small hut by the end of the book.

 

Two years later…

Finally, they build the Stick Figure State Building. All the sticks do what you do in life. Mostly working, playing, and chilling. Isn’t that obvious?

Well, you see, for the last two years, I’ve been at the end of the book. Readers have not read this book in a while, so I made a creepy forest at the end of the book, so no readers would see me move around. Gladly, there are no speech bubbles that hit my head when I move around. I mean,  that’s the most annoying part about comic books.

The best part, yet, is that nobody dares to come in the woods that people now call, the Stickifying Woods. So, in the end, I don’t get what I want, but at least it’s much better than I thought it would be.

 

The End

 

… Or maybe. Or it might be the end if the hamsters attack.

 

Pac-Man is HERE

Once, there was a girl. She wrote what you will see. She thought it was all fun, but little did she know, it was going to come true. Here it is:

One day, three girls had a sleepover at a house that belonged to their friend, Lily.

There was a Pac-Man machine in her house. But they did not know Pac-Man was going to get out that day to rule the world. They did not know they were destined to stop him either.

That night, when the three friends were sleeping, they had the same dream. They dreamt that they released ghosts that died because of Pac-Man, so he went back into the game. They woke up the next morning in her room even though they went to sleep in the basement, so they knew something was wrong.

Asha said to play the Pac-Man game and they did, but Pac-Man was not there.

Then, Aliya suddenly saw Pac-Man and ran to the others. She told them Pac-Man said, “Never release the ghosts. Never find the four element keys of fire, air, earth, and water. I will not rule the world if you do.”

They knew where to find them because of the stories they had heard when they were kids. They would appear only to the known. Then, they saw the Key of Air. Asha got it, and Aliya asked where to find the next key. It said a poem for the next key, the Key of Earth:      

 

To find the key of earth, you see,

You’ll need to jump up with me.

I will then take you there,

Then, let go and stay in the air.

Look in the cloud, and you will find

The key of earth, I hope you don’t mind.

 

So they flew up holding the Key of Air and dug through the cloud. And there it was, the Key of Earth. Lily held the key, and it said:

 

Find the phoenix in the forest.

Then, it will appear,

The key of fire

Right there.

 

They went to the forest and saw a fire.

Asha said before anyone could, “The key must have meant a forest fire.”

They went to the forest fire, and then, it stopped. In the middle of it all was the Key of Fire.

The Key of Fire took them to a haunted house where the Key of Water was inside. As soon as they got there, a person came and told them they had to be killed in this house and that it had no power. He also said they had two choices: a chainsaw or an electric chair. They all chose the electric chair and got the Key of Water.

They took the keys to Lily’s house and put them in the machine. The ghosts came out and ran to Pac-Man. He tried to resist, but he could not so he ate one. So the rest ran away.

One went to the desert. Another went to the ocean. And the last went to Writopia Lab. The one at the desert was disguised as a cactus.The one at the ocean was disguised as a blue whale. And the one at Writopia Lab was disguised as the computer that I am writing this story on.

Suddenly, a note appeared in front of him. It said:

 

Deep beneath the darkened earth,

A place that you will never find,

Find me towards the north

And follow me to your favorite spot,

Or never conquer earth.

 

Since Pac-Man didn’t know which way was north, he turned into a compass and followed himself north. Eventually, he fell into a hole, and he saw a labyrinth in front of him. He went through the maze and fell into a pool of piranha families and got bitten badly.  

Meanwhile, the group of girls was busy blowing up all the buildings that Pac-Man had built. Pac-Man had built the buildings so that people would vote for him. Little did the girls know the buildings were magic, and they would always reappear. And little did Pac-Man know that the piranha that bit him would bring a ghost into his mouth any time he got near one. And little did the ghosts know that once they got eaten, they would go back into the game. Only the pink one, Pinky, knew. And little did Pac-Man know that the piranha families would make him never be able to rule the world.

The piranha took him to the desert. He appeared in front of the ghost, so the piranha put it in Pac-Man’s mouth. Then, he went into the maze and when he opened the next door, he fell into the sea. The Blue Whale ghost swam under him. The piranha put it in his mouth, and the ghosts took him to WritopiaLab before they disappeared.

I was writing at the time and the piranha was bored, so it left. So Pac-Man put on his ghost goggles. He dove right at me, and I screamed, but I saw him chewing the computer, so I kept typing and finished it just in time and that is the story you are holding right now.  

 

The Basement of the Dead (Chapter 1.)

I walked up to the house, but I didn’t know what was coming next. I looked back at the crowd standing behind me and sighed. My friends and I were about to enter the haunted house, the “Basement of the Dead.”

My friends and I had been dared by the whole class to enter the house. My friends were Ryan, Bryan, Dash, and Dawn. Ryan and Bryan were twins, as were Dash and Dawn. I, on the other hand, was an only child. I am now anyway…

I shook off that thought and went to another horrifying one. My friends and I were about to enter the most feared, and somehow loved, haunted house. I felt the hand of doom grab my shoulder. Actually, it was just Dawn.

“You scared?” she asked nervously.  “The boys definitely aren’t.” She waved toward them with a shaky hand. Ryan, Bryan, and Dash looked as if they were about to enter the coolest party in town. If you searched the meanings of their names, you’d know why. They all mean “brave” or “adventurous.”

“They certainly are living up to their names,” I said flatly.

My name is Zelda. I like to fight, but usually, I’m very kind.  I’m not so sure about haunted houses though. I have caramel hair and emerald-green eyes. My hair is long and wavy, but I usually keep it in a braid that goes down to the top of my knees. I was wearing a red tank top with a brown leather jacket and jeans.

Dawn had just-below-shoulder-length blonde hair in a ponytail. She had sky-blue eyes, matching her shirt. It read, “This girl is gonna change the world.” She wore lime-green shorts.

Dash had shaggy blonde hair and self-conscious blue eyes. He wore an army-green shirt and matching pants. He tapped his foot up and down on the rotten deck impatiently.

Ryan and Bryan both had red curls and the same kind but dangerous brown eyes. They wore dark blue shirts, on which read a lazy to-do list with a Minecraft character.  Both had orange jean shorts. The only difference between them that you could tell was that Ryan was a lot jumpier and immature. He bounced up and down on a torn up chair and laughed.

“Zelda!!!” Dash called.  

I straightened, realizing I was zoning out.  

“We’re going in now!”  

I scrambled to the end of the deck and threw my backpack on. “Coming!” I yelled back. I sprinted toward my friends, toward the beaten up door.

“Okay, all of us need to push on this door together, or the hunk of junk won’t ever move,” Ryan said. So we did. After about what seemed like 20 minutes, the door creaked under our weight. Then, there was a groan. Finally, the door burst open, and a cheer went up from our classmates.

The boys high-fived each other. Dawn shivered nervously, while I stood, fists clenched, staring into the dusty house. It was just like you would expect a huge haunted house to look like. The dust, the old smell, the cavern-like ceiling, and that once-grand-but-now-gross furniture. Although, there was something different about this house. It felt… good.

I shuddered.  

“Why is this called the ‘Basement of the Dead’ anyways? From what I’m seeing, there is no basement!” Bryan exclaimed. We all thought about that for a moment.  

“Good,” Dawn squeaked.  

We were soon a good ten feet into the house.

“Ugh,” I sighed. “I’m closing these doors. I hate being watched like this.” So that’s exactly what I did. I realized that was a bad idea. The house had more of a sense of dread now that the doors were closed. It felt so empty, but still, somehow comforting.

Dawn apparently did not feel comfortable. An amber light lit her face, which now seemed gray. Her whole body seemed to flicker, but it was hard to tell with the lack of light. Suddenly, she let out a piercing scream. Everyone flinched.

“Why would you do that?!!” she screeched. She stopped flickering. Dawn blinked, as if waking up from a bad dream. She walked over to the door and pulled on the handle.  Nothing. We were trapped…

 

The Adventures of Bub (Book 1)

Once, there was a guy named Bub. He made pizza for a living. He loved pizza. He worked on weekends. One time, he went skiing. He was skiing a lot.

Then, one day, there was a giant snowstorm. He needed to go into his house in the resort. He ran into the resort. He couldn’t get to sleep because there was snow and ice pounding on the window like a bear. He thought, I hope nothing breaks.

Then, all the electricity for the hotel went off.  He went under his covers and stayed there for a long time, thinking, This is horrible service.

He made a little hole for air, so it smelled like his room — his room smelled pretty good.

Then, a lot of ice hit the hotel, and the wall collapsed like sand. Bub took an air mattress and a blanket, and he went to the first floor and he under the hotel’s desk.  When the storm finally stopped a few days later, there was nobody else to be seen.

There were a few dead bodies and others he didn’t see.  He was really scared. He was lucky.

He went outside, praying that there would be something useful.

“I hope there’s some way to get out of here and get back home.”

He thought of his friend Bob, who made pizza too.  He wanted to be with him, because he was his friend. Then, he tried to clear his mind because he needed to think about what to do.

Then, he remembered the parking lot. He went and found his car! His car was not working well! Then, when he was near a Ferrari store, his car stopped working! So he got the Enzo Ferrari! He paid with his credit card, and what should have been a seven hour trip was only one.

Then, he watched the Super Bowl on TV. He also invited his best friend, Bob. Then, they they watched the Super Bowl. They watched the Broncos win, there was a big celebration and they were really happy cause they were rooting for the Broncos.

Bub and Bob screamed, “Yes!!” at the same time.

They both made pizza, just as a contest to see who could make the best pizza when they are tired.

Bob almost fell asleep, and Bub smacked him across the face to wake him up. In the end, Bub won. It takes a lot to get Bob mad, but if you manage to, he loses control of himself.

When Bub won, he said, “You look really tired, but I feel more tired.”

Bob said, “Thank God you woke me up, or else my head would have been on the stove.”

Bub said, “What happened? You actually fell asleep standing up? I could never do that. And I’m a very good sleeper.”

Bub felt happy because he won the contest.

Bob was happy for this friend, and he wasn’t such a sore loser, especially since they had many contests and each of them won a lot.

They ate their mini pizzas.  Now it was time for Bob to leave, ‘cause it was late.

When they both went outside, there was a huge thunderstorm. Lightning struck, and one just missed Bob. They went for cover under a tree, but then the tree got struck and it was a flaming torch.  Bob and Bub just jumped out of the way.

Bub said, “Holy cow, that was close!”

Bob said, ‘Run towards the house!”

When they got to Bob’s house, the door was locked, but no one had keys. There was a window that was slightly open, and they crawled through it.

He was happy he survived, and his house was okay. He couldn’t say that was the luckiest he had ever gotten.

Afterwards, Bub decided to get a few lottery tickets. If you won the lottery, you would get 200 million dollars. Bub was just thinking that there was a one in a thousand chance he would get it, so why not go for it.

I have been really lucky, he thought, why don’t I test my luck in the lottery. He’d never done the lottery before, and he purchased a ticket, two for himself and two for Bob just to increase his chances. Just two more dollars for more lottery tickets wouldn’t be bad for increasing their chances for getting two hundred million dollars.

He had no idea what to do with that money.

Bob also had no idea.

Bub scratched off his first lottery ticket. And so did Bob. Then, he let Bob do the second one first, Bob got nothing. There was one ticket left. Bub was scratching off the ticket, and he was really scared and his hand was shaking. It took him a few minutes to take off the ticket. He was right to scratch off the bottom 3. He scratched off two, and there was nothing. One more thing. He was doubting he was going to win, he was still shaking and he was sweating. He scratched off the last one and held up the ticket.  

Bob and him started celebrating when it said on the corner, “Jackpot!”

They were parading around the house, and he ran to the lottery store. When he handed it over to the manger, the manager couldn’t believe his eyes.  

“Okay,” said the manager, “We’ll send it to you in the mail next week, okay?”

Bub said, “Okay.”

Next week, he was standing at the mailbox, and he was waiting for mail. Then, Bub finally got a giant package from the lottery. He knew it could only be one thing. He took it home. He was looking for something to spend it on.  

Bub found a really nice yacht called “Okto” and told Bob about it. He bought it, and he realized that it was even better than it looked in the picture. It looked great in the picture, and standing right in front of it, he felt great owning it.  

Bub went inside. It was such a nice place. As he walked up the steps, he thought, I’m so glad I bought it. He had money left over. What should I spend that on? he thought.

He took it out and set sail a few days later. It was really nice. When he came back, he was thinking of doing something else. He was thinking of sailing around the world. There was a challenge to offer five million dollars to go around the world. He did it with his yacht. He was at sea for many days, stopped in some places, and went through the Panama Canal. There were some nice views, but he got bored of seeing water all the time.

There was a TV, a swimming pool, a hot tub, and anything else you could imagine.  When he got back, he thought, I still got a lot left over.

He thought, There are so many more things I could spend this on. And on top of it all, there’s still so much left. There’s still so many things I could do.

He started looking at Youtube videos, thinking that he’dl find something. Then, he looked at his wallet. His pilot license that he won a while ago was still there. Then, he got a great idea.

I could get a private jet — then, I’d still have a lot of money left over!

He found a really, really good looking, futuristic jet, and he had enough money to buy it from a jet show. He had no idea who the owner was. He got the first one in stock. He needed to find a car that could tow it. The company didn’t have service to do it, so Bub’s private jet was thirty miles away, and his house was five miles away from that. They gave the plane a full gas tank. So he took the plane out.

The plane looked like it could be easily maneuvered and was really fast. Bub had no trouble taking off, but then, a storm approached! The clouds were black. Bub took a weird approach. He went high speed towards the storm. Then, he started getting pushed around by the wind a bit. He was landing the plane, but at dangerous speed.  Then, he shifted to the side of the runway. The wind pushed him a bit, and then, he was completely lined up. He landed, but then, he started to slip around. The ground was so slippery, that his plane wouldn’t stop. He pulled on the breaks. It slowed down, and he still headed towards the edge of the runway.  He was going towards the grass, not at such a high speed because his plane was slowing down. The ground was slowing down. When he was about to miss, he turned the plane, escaped to the side of it, and ended up making the turn off the runway.

Then, another plane was landing after him. That plane landed, and it was going straight at Bub’s plane. Without thinking, Bub put the throttle forward — not too much — it wasn’t going as fast as it was supposed to as there was so much water. The other plane landed and missed Bub’s plane by an inch. He went to his hangar.  

Then, he took a ride home by taxi. It was still pouring, and by the time he got home, the water was up to his ankles. He called Bob to come over. He came over, and together, they just watched a football game. He liked just talking while watching a football game with the rain pounding on the door.

After the football game, Bob and Bub made pizza together.  He and Bob were talking while they were making pizza.

Bub was talking about his adventures, and Bob told him about what happened while he was gone.

Bub was having a good time with his best friend, and he was glad to be home. Bob slept over at Bub’s house just because the water was really high, and he didn’t want to go home in that weather.

By morning, the rain had stopped, but they had to stay inside because there was so much water. So the next day, there were floods in a lot of places. And then, out of nowhere, the water pressure on the door made the door fall over, and water spread all over the house.

Bub was walking from the kitchen to the couch to talk with Bob.

Bub ran and jumped onto the couch with Bob. Then, the couch started to float!

After the flood, they found themselves in an abandoned building. Bub thought it was a nice building, but it needed some fixing. Then, Bub said he liked the building.

Bob said, “Why not call the Mayor to see whose this is?”

They called the Mayor (Bob had his phone,) and it ended up being nobody’s. It was really close to Bub’s house. So, since it was nobody’s, Bub and Bob were allowed to have it.  

Bub had the idea for “Bub’s hotel.” Since their names were so close, Bob agreed.  They renovated the building, which surprisingly cost a lot, but Bub could afford it.  After a lot of planning and hard work, the hotel was finally ready and established. It was the nicest hotel in the area and the only hotel in the area, but it was a nice hotel.

They earned a lot of money on the first day or two, which was pretty surprising. They had so many guests since it was a tall building. The hotel was full for a week, and Bub was really happy because he was making a lot of money from it.

Bub decided the hotel should go worldwide. They established another hotel in New York City, and that was even more successful. Bub was about the happiest man on earth at that point.  He was thinking of maybe even another hotel.

He established one in Hollywood, which took a lot of traveling, which was pretty nice.  That one got even more people, even a few celebrities.

He thought, “I thought this would be hard.”

Bub had a few problems with the hotel, like one time, when somebody brought a pig into the hotel. The pig swallowed the soap bar and ate all of the snacks in the snack bar, including the wrappers. The pig was sick, and they tried to sue the hotel. And then, Bub pointed to the sign that said, “Only dogs, cats, or regular pets allowed.” Then, the people who sued the hotel actually had to pay fines for all of that damage. Bub knew there’d be obstacles. But he was also focusing on a new hotel in Florida that would be perfect. There were always lots of people in Florida, and he would get a lot of natives there.

The hotel opened in Florida, and Bub went there a few times, just to look at the hotel, and to see how it was going before it went out in public. Finally, it opened on the first day, and it was fully booked. It was crazy. Now, Bub was opening one up in every place in Europe.  In Greece, he opened one up near the Parthenon and in Crete. In Athens, he walked on the Parthenon, and in Crete, he was on the beaches. He also drove through twisty roads in the mountains. He felt really nice, especially since he rented a black Camaro convertible.  

He passed by a town every few minutes. They were all old. Then, he went back to the airport. He found a direct flight back to Albany. He got first class tickets. He’d never flown first class before, and he liked it. It was so comfy. They had a bumpy landing, but the plane landed decently. He had a private jet, but he didn’t bring it to Europe. He didn’t think it could fly so far. He wanted to see how business was going in New York City. He took off with his private jet.

He also knew that Bob was staying in New York City for a bit. He meant mostly to bring Bob back from New York to his hometown. It was a lot of work because New York had a lot of airplanes in the air. He was circling around the airport for one hour when he finally got clearance to land. He landed perfectly. He started looking for Bob at the hotel where he found him. He asked the people at the front desk if they knew where Bob was.

“How do you know Bob?” one of the people asked.

“I am Bob’s best friend and owner of this hotel.”

“Oh, you’re the owner? Sorry, sir.”

“It’s fine,” Bub said.

He knocked on the door, and Bob answered.

“Oh, hello,” Bob said.

“Hey, I think we need to go back home. You told me you wanted to go home.”

“Okay.”

Then, he found Bob. So he took off. He did pretty well with the take off. He was always changing where he had to go because there were so many planes. He saw many cool airplanes.

They were headed home because some people were doing bad stuff in New York, and Bob didn’t feel so comfortable. They went to Awesome Town in Ohio.

They went to Bub’s house and made some pizza. Bob and Bub felt happy to be home. No crime, nobody mean, nothing bad. Then, Bub went on a flight. Then, there was a weird sound. Bub checked the controls. The left engine was failing.

He started to descend very quickly. He went from 25,000 feet to 1,000 feet in 20 seconds. Then, he realized he had to turn on the failing engine. It turned on at 100 feet, and then at 10 feet, when he was about to die, it exploded. The explosion boosted it up a bit, and the plane wasn’t in good shape, but was alive. Bub couldn’t believe, it but he didn’t know where he was. He climbed to the top of a tree and saw the airport around a mile away. So he started to walk. It was hard finding his way, but after one hour, he finally stumbled into the airport. And then, they found him right before they were about to launch a search.

Bub thought of something that he never thought of before. He could make his own plane! He got a lot of scrap metal for free and started building up. He made a perfect airplane with two engines in the back that used electricity. He tested it out, and it flew perfectly. He was having a perfect time, and on landing, he realized that the landing gear wasn’t that good. He flew right back up and asked air-traffic control to make a straight path for him. He got onto the wing and attached himself to the door that he closed. He dropped down and started fixing it. There was only a small flaw: he accidentally forgot to make the thing split in half to make an opening for the wheel. He got his pocket knife and slashed through the middle of it. He could be forgetful. After he landed, he made some adjustments with his airplane.

It took him months. He slept at home, and he had a little workshop. It was electric and supersonic. He named it the “Bubflyer II.” He took it for a test flight, and it flew perfectly the whole time. It could do some spins too. The plane was very light, so it did get pushed around by the wind. Afterall, it was considered “ultra-light.” With his new plane, he could go anywhere. When he landed at the airport, he was very happy it worked. Then, he showed Bob. Bob thought it was awesome.

After a week, when Bub was away presenting his idea to the government, Bob got mad. Why does Bub get all the money? he thought, And he names everything after himself. Then, Bob knew what to do…

He went to New York City and found Bub’s hotel easily. He secretly had a bomb. Before he had made arrangements with ISIS, so he had a big bomb. Then, he went into Bub’s hotel and exploded it. The building crumbled down, but Bob didn’t know that Bub was in it. Bub jumped out and seconds later, medics appeared. They didn’t know if Bub was alive or not. They took him to the hospital, and they found out that he was barely alive. The heart rate monitor was barely moving.

National Security wanted to see why this massacre happened. Hundreds of people died. Some survived. One survivor who was on the first floor recalled hearing Allahu Akbar. National Security found out that it was Bob, and Bob was sentenced to death.

Bub went to visit Bob in prison. He was wheeled there in a wheelchair and told Bob, “I never knew you would do this to me, old friend.”

“Sorry,” Bob said.

Then, Bob went to court and explained the whole situation about why he did it. “It was both of our money,” Bob said.

Then, Bub went to court. And he was sentenced for 100 years because the money was supposed to be both of theirs.

Then, Bub argued that he was the one who bought all of the lottery tickets, and that the one who had gotten the jackpot was him.

After that, Bob was found guilty.  

So two days after, Bob was being executed. At the moment when he was about to be executed, Bub went into the court.

“Why is he being executed,” said Bub. “I thought he was going to jail.”

And then Bub started arguing with the people who were executing Bob. In that time, Bob escaped. Bub knew that Bob was going to escape, and he had wanted that to happen.

“Okay, bye,” said Bub.

“That was easy,” the executioners said. And they went to execute Bob only to find that he wasn’t there.

On the street, Bob and Bub saw each other. They were pretty stunned.

“Hello, old friend,” said Bub.

“Hi,” said Bob.  

 

The Mysteries of the Magic Pencil

Hello, my name is Elias, and today, I will tell you about a story that changed my life.

It starts with me going to my grandparents’ house. I was standing outside their house and rang the doorbell. They opened the door, and I went in their house. First, I chatted with them. Then, I asked them if I could look in their attic. My grandpa said yes.

So I went up in their attic, and I looked in their attic. I looked everywhere I could. I looked sideways, up, down, everywhere. Then, at the back of the attic, I found a pencil. In gold writing, it said “magic pencil.”

“This is exactly what I wanted,” I said.

I had read in a book that there was a magic pencil in an attic somewhere that had special powers, so I checked in my grandparents’ attic just in case he had a magic pencil. But let us resume the story.

So I ran down to my grandparents and said, “I found a very special pencil. I know it is a magic pencil because I found out there is a magic pencil in a book, and the book’s description matches the pencil.”

My grandparents reacted like I never told the truth. They said that could not be true. Then, I took out a piece of paper, and I wrote, “Make a red rose appear.” And a red rose appeared right in front of them, lying on the table.

My grandparents said, “That is really true, wow!” They acted very surprised. Their faces looked very shocked, and their mouths were wide open.

I thought, How come my grandparents can open their mouths so wide? Because in science class, we learned old people can’t open their mouths very wide.

Then, I told them that we could become very rich, and they looked even more shocked. I wrote, “Add 100 dollars to my grandparents bank account.” I asked my grandparents what the password was to their bank account.

My grandparents asked me, “Are you sure that’s safe?”

And I said, “Yes, because I’m writing it on a piece of paper that nobody can read.”

So my grandparents gave me the password to their bank account, and I wrote it down. And then, they checked their bank account, and it said, “One hundred dollars has been added to your bank account.”

My grandparents looked the most surprised they’d ever been (which is very suprised). And then, they said, “We really could become very rich with this.”

I asked my grandparents if I could keep this pencil, and my grandparents said yes, since they were so old, they wouldn’t need it and I had a long life ahead, so I could keep it.

They also said, “You should be careful with the pencil.”

I was as happy as I’d ever been. I grabbed my pencil and said, “Sorry, grandparents. I can’t stay with you any longer.”

And they said, “Okay.” I was supposed to be with my grandparents for another hour, but they thought that was very short for me to be with them.

 

Then, I ran home as fast as I could. It took me about ten minutes; it usually takes me, like, thirty minutes. When I reached home, I was very tired, but I still told my mom, whose name is Ederick, that I had found a magic pencil. My parents had already read the book. They looked at it and inspected it and saw that it matched the description perfectly.

They said, “It really does look like the magic pencil.” They looked surprised.

And then, I wrote down, “Make one hundred dollars appear in front of me.” And one hundred dollars appeared in front of me. I told my parents that we should also be careful because the government might find out, and they would think we stole money from the bank, and we could never convince the government about the pencil. So we would have to keep it very secretive, and we would have to hide it, so no one saw the magic pencil, even our friends.

My parents said, “Yes, we do need to keep it very secretive.” The next day, I woke up, and with the magic pencil, I wrote, “Make breakfast appear.” Then, scrambled eggs with liver pate appeared right in front of me.

After that, my dad came over and said, “That magic pencil is cool.”

My dad’s name is Josh, and he is always worried about me. My dad took the magic pencil and wrote, “Make coffe apper.”

“Nothing appeared. you spelled it wrong,” I said. (My dad is a very bad speller.)

“Oh no, I spelled it wrong,” my dad said.

“Yes, you did,” I said. At school, I knew I could not tell anyone about the magic pencil. It was tempting to tell one of my best friends, but luckily, I did not tell any of my friends about the magic pencil.

When school was over, I walked home with my dad, and we argued about animal extinction and the magic pencil. (Of course.) As we were walking, I noticed many more kids were walking behind us than usual. Then, I stopped to think for a moment. l thought that if all those kids were following us, they must have wanted something. But what did they want?

Then, I said, “The magic pencil! They must have heard about it.”

I told my dad to run to our house. Once we ran to our house, I locked the door, and kids were starting to pile up around our house. I told my dad that kids from my school heard about the magic pencil.

My dad yelled, “Why did you tell them about the magic pencil?!” (My dad gets angry very easily.)

“It was not my fault,” I said.

“Fine,” my dad said.

“They just learned that I had it,” I said after a long lecture.

My dad said “Alright, I forgive you.”

Then, when they left, I wrote with the magic pencil, “Make a guardian appear to defend our house.” Then, a tiger appeared right in front of our house.

The next morning, people were standing outside our house, protesting. My parents were contemplating leaving our house because of the protesters. Luckily, the protest was only thirty minutes long, but my mom still was about to throw away the magic pencil. I could not let that happen, so I convinced my mom to not throw it away.

My mom told me, “I am putting the magic pencil away because if you have protesters outside your house, it is very stressful.”

“Fine,” I said.

Then, I woke up, and it was the weekend. I was so happy because of the magic pencil until I remembered my mom had put away the magic pencil. I always hated my mom, but this time, I hated her so much, I made a plan. I would convince my parents to leave me at home because I am a very good convincer. I could take a ladder and reach for the magic pencil, and then, I would hide the magic pencil.

So I put my plan into action. I started by convincing my mom, and it took a very long time. It went like this:

“Mom, I am in fifth grade. So can I stay at home by myself?”

Mom asked, “Why?”

“I told you, I am in fifth grade. Every kid in my class stays by themselves.”

Mom said, ”Fine. On one condition: you do not do anything silly.”

“Okay.”

When I was at home alone, I decided to kick my plan into action. I first got a ladder. Then, I walked to the closet and opened the door. I took the magic pencil, and I hid it in my lockable drawer and locked the drawer.

Then, I waited until my mom and dad came home. Once they came home, I said nothing at all.

My mom said, “How are you?”

I said ‘I am fine.” I also said, “Can I go to the bedroom?”

My mom said, “Alright.”

So I went to the bedroom, and I wrote with the magic pencil, “Make paper appear,” and paper appeared out of the air. The reason I wanted paper to appear is because I love to draw, so I also wrote, “Make the most beautiful markers appear,” and markers that were so beautiful appeared.

The next morning, I woke up and went to the dining table.

My mom said, “How are –”

I cut her off and said, “Mom, I am going to make breakfast today, alright?”

My mom said, “Alright.”

I was appalled by my mom’s response.

So I went to my bedroom to get my magic pencil, and I wrote, “Make a very good breakfast appear,” and a very good breakfast appeared right in front of me. Then, I went to the table.

My mom said, “You must be a very good cook,” but I just went to another topic.

Then, my dad switched on the TV. There was news about Nepal having a war with China.

I thought, My grandparents live in Nepal. I ran to my bedroom, and with the magic pencil, I wrote, “Stop the war between Nepal and China.”

After that, my magic pencil said, “Out of power.”

I felt very unhappy that the magic pencil only lasted for less than a month. So then, I ran to the living room where my parents were chatting and guessing whether the war would end.

But then, the newscaster said, “We have new news in — the war has stopped.”

My parents said, “That was a very quick war.”

They called my grandparents in Nepal. The conversation went like this:

Parents: ”How are you? Is the war ok?”

Grandparents: ”Yes, it disappeared like magic.”

Parents: “Ok, I will call you later.”

(By the way, my grandparents in Nepal are different from the ones in the beginning of this story)

I was happy, even though I did not have the magic pencil, because the war ended, and I was happy for my grandparents who lived in Nepal.

 

The Break

“One hundred and ten! One hundred and eleven! What! Are you weak! Another one! Now!” screamed Nate’s so-called workout coach, Jacup. He was actually just a muscular guy who Nate paid to help him work out.

The cold sweat dripped off Nate’s face, staining his already sweat-logged orange jumpsuit, but he forced in another push-up. His body was screaming in discomfort. The yellow sand of the prison’s workout yard came up to meet him as his arms finally gave out. Rolling on his back, he looked up at the blindingly hot sun, then pushed himself to his feet.

“Pathetic,” murmured Jacup, pacing back and forth next to Nate. He let out a long sigh.

“Nate, m’boy, how do you expect to win the push-up competition if you can hardly manage 100! See Bill Cask over there.” Jacup pointed to a short-but-sturdy, extremely muscular and tattooed guy Nate had never seen before. “See him? He can do 300 easily. Even your friend Mitchell is better than you!”

Staring at Nate sadly, Jacup turned and walked away, shaking his head. “Go take a water break, son”

Nate stood there silently for a moment, then muttered “Goddamn it.”  He repeated the phrase with growing volume, “Goddamn it! Goddamn it! He can do three hundred goddamn push-ups! And what can I do! Nothing! Zip, zero, nada! Might as well be worth crap.”

Other prisoners had begun staring at him, but he didn’t care. Muttering a few well-placed curses, he gulped his entire water bottle in one sip, and slammed it back down on the bench so hard, a dent appeared.

He looked at the dent approvingly. It expressed his anger well enough. He was about to go do a set of pull-ups when the final bell rang. This symbolized that workout period was over, and that it was time to go back to your cell for bed.

Nate shared his cell with his best — and only — friend, Mitchell. They were both in for the same reason: robbery. But Nate still found himself the righteous one, which he had tried to prove in court (As you can see by his situation, that did not work.)

What had happened was Nate had seen a man being stabbed by another man. Nate had rushed over just as the man with the knife fled, leaving his knife at the scene. Nate grabbed the knife out of instinct, but set it down immediately afterwards. For several hours, he stayed next to the bleeding man. When the cops arrived, Nate was the only one who could have murdered the man, and he had even put his fingerprints on the knife. The deal was set.

Mitchell had done something like that, or so he said.

As Nate walked back to is cell, he heard shouting across the yard. He sighed. Another fight?! he thought to himself. It was the third one this week. With the Push-up Competition coming up next week there had been a lot of betting, and from that betting, more and more fights. He looked towards the commotion with little interest. He didn’t have much patience for the loud-mouthed, big-muscled, little-brained nimrods that usually got into fights.

But the moment he saw who was fighting, his whole perspective changed. Mitchell stood in a fighting stance, circling Samuel Campanelli, one of the most popular and most feared men in the prison. The two stood circling, eyes locked, looking for an open opportunity to strike. It was Mitchell who found one first.

Mitchell flung out a fist, slipping between Samuel’s guard, and getting solid impact on his ribcage. A fight-winning blow to a lesser opponent, but Samuel hardly flinched at the strike. Fear flashed in Mitchell’s eyes.

Nate dashed towards the pair, sure that no matter how hard he tried, Mitchell would lose. That would not only be painful, but after Samuel’s success, his cronies would become braver assuming that they could also beat Mitchell. This would be extremely dangerous, and it could put Mitchell at risk of being thrown in solitary, which would be bad for both of them. All of these thoughts whirled around in Nate’s head as he rushed to Mitchell’s aid.

Nate shouldered Samuel Blubb, the prison scapegoat, into the dirt as he dashed through the circular crowd that had gathered around the pair of fighters. He didn’t even have time to apologize.

I’ll do it later, he thought and continued to try to peek his head over the shoulder of Billy L. Jackson, Samuel’s main man, but Jackson kept on pushing Nate back persistently. Jackson finally turned around angrily and pushed Nate to the floor.

“Stoppit, dammit! Stoppit! Do you wanna fight Sam ‘long with Mitch, cause if yeah, I’ll grab you by yer damn, skinny neck and toss yee in there, damn bastard fool. I’ll smack yee so hard yer damned gramma‘ll feel it!” Billy muttered a few unintelligible curses before going back into his rant. “So yee wanna go in there? Issa yes er no, not maybe! C’mon Natey boy, yee damn bastard, whadda ya think, shorty?”

The two fell silent, Billy silently fuming, his phony question dangling in front of Nate like bait for a fish. Billy was asking Nate to go in there, but it wasn’t a question. Nate was going in there whether he wanted to or not. He half opened his mouth, but before any sounds could come out, Billy’s massive hands had picked up Nate by the back of his orange jumpsuit and pushed him into the circle.

“LOOK OUT LADIES AND GENTLEMEN!” Billy bellowed, making sure everyone in a ten-mile-radius could hear him. “A NEW FIGHTER HAS ENTERED THE RING!” he blasted, as if no one had noticed him pick-up Nate and practically throw him into the ring.

The crowd howled louder, the thought of even more people getting beaten to a bloody pulp whipping them into a bloodthirsty frenzy. People screamed Samuel’s name, booed, and chanted. It was like standing in a sound box. Too much to process. The sand rough against Nate’s hands as he lay on his knees where Billy had dropped him. Mitchell tugging on the back of his shirt, telling Nate he had to get up, that they had to fight together.

“C’mon, get up!” Mitchell was practically shouting, glancing nervously at the approaching Samuel. “No, no, no, no, no, no, no, no! Don’t go into one of your modes now! Why now?”

But Nate couldn’t hear a word Mitchell was saying. He was in his mode. The mode was… the mode. In the mode, the world is an observatory. You don’t move, you don’t hear, you just watch. Watch the world go by, like a lazy drifting river. There were many rules of the mode. Don’t talk, don’t move, don’t think, don’t blink, don’t listen. Only watch. Only watch.

As Samuel moved closer, Nate could only watch. Watch as Sam turned back his head and laughed, spitting out an insult Nate couldn’t hear. Watch him raise his foot back, and swinging it forward as if on a pivot. The solid connection of Sam’s foot on Nate’s temple. Pain lancing through Nate’s body. All Nate could do was watch. He landed back down on the ground from the force of the impact, and Nate’s vision slowly grew dark.

 

***

It was way too late when Nate opened his eyes. He still lay in the prison yard. Judging from his estimate, it was around 9:30. Not late enough for Nate to be in huge trouble, but he would be in trouble nonetheless. He dashed through the deserted halls, thankful that he didn’t run into any guard, and swung into his cell.

He checked his appearance. Nate had never been that good-looking, but never that bad-looking either. He was German, and had long dirty blonde, hair, which framed steel-gray eyes and sharp cheekbones on pale-ish skin. He was the complete opposite of Mitchell, who was Hispanic, with short, black hair and olive skin.

He sighed and leaned back onto his bed, sore and tired from the rough day he’d had. Taking off his boots and closing his eyes, he sunk into a deep, dreamless sleep.

 

***

A soft creak woke him from his sleep. He grunted, annoyed at being woken. There was another one, slightly louder this time. Suddenly, there was a crash, a shout, a bang, a curse. Nate jumped from his sleep.

“Did you hear that, Mitchell? Did you? Mitch?” Nate flicked on a light, and his heart stopped. Mitchell’s bunk stood empty, and the cell door wide open, creaking back and forth.

“Oh, no. No, no, no, no, no! Mitchell.”

The name came out hardly a whisper. A ghost of a sound that could be. A word that should exist, but can’t. He backed away until his back was pressed against the wall, and even then, kept on backing up. This couldn’t be real. He was already going into his mode, he couldn’t stop it.

He sunk to his knees, tears dripping from his eyes, muttering the name “Mitchell” until it had no meaning, and was just a sound. Just another sound in the midst of the dark night. Like the sirens that were wailing, the people that were shouting, the footsteps, rushing through the halls. The endless noise. That whole night seemed a dream. Nonexistent.

And through the whole night, he wished to be deaf. To end the noise. The endless horror of noise. He stared at the open cell door, but felt no inclination to go through it. To be with Mitchell. As far as Nate knew, or cared, Mitchell was gone.

Not a person, but a name. Like Bob. Or John. Or Gary. But not a person. Never a person. Never a friend. A friend would take his friend with him. At least say goodbye. And the horrible, bloodthirsty, mad part of Nate, the part we all have but choose to hide away deep within our consciousness pushed its way into his main stream of thoughts. And within Nate’s mind, he secretly hoped Mitchell had died.

He wished that Mitchell had died while escaping. But what did Nate know. If his only friend left him, without a “goodbye,” or even a “see you on the other side,” what was left of him?

He sat there the whole night, crying, letting his emotions disappear in the form of tears till he was nothing but an empty husk, dry and emotionless.

 

***

He woke up the next morning without ever remembering going to sleep. He stared in the mirror and tried to smile, but all that came out was a strange, open-mouthed, flat expression. Nate dunked his head under the pool of water that had been building up at the bottom of the sink. He combed his hair, brushed his teeth, put on some clean clothes, and took 50 deep, slow breaths.

Nate stepped out of his cell, steeling himself for the day to come. Sure enough, he had hardly taken ten steps when a prisoner rushed up to him. Surprisingly, it was the guy from yesterday, Bill Cask.

“Hey, there’s rumors going around that someone was trying to escape last night. And guess what? They’re saying he made it!” Nate stood there, unsure how he was supposed to feel about this. Happy? Disappointed? Amazed? So he just stood there with a blank expression on his face. Clearly this was not the reaction Bill wanted, so he went on.

“Aaaaand, they’re saying the person who escaped was your cellmate!” Clearly, Bill expected him to go absolutely insane, like he was on some game show.

He did not expect for Nate to turn around, and as he was walking away and say, “Well the rumors are true. Tell everyone: Mitchell A. Warren, cellmate of Nate J. Roosevelt, has escaped from Prison No. 61.”

 

Decisions

 

After a long day of being harassed by people who wanted to know what happened the night before, Nate’s bed seemed his only saviour. The day had seemed an endless punishment of questions. Like, “How’d it happen?” Or, “Did you see it?” Once he was even asked, “Who escaped?”

It seemed fruitless to even pretend he knew what happened, so he mostly responded in a grunt or a rough “I dunno.” But the one thing that irked him the most, out of all the things that were occurring at the prison, was that they had cancelled the push-up competition, though he seemed the only one annoyed by this.

Then, one day, seven days after the escape, as he was heading across the rough gravel of the abandoned basketball court, the loudspeaker blared its static message across the prison:

WILL NATE ROOSEVELT PLEASE REPORT TO THE MAIN OFFICE IMMEDIATELY.”

The loudspeaker flicked off and left the yard unusually quiet, all eyes on him. He walked across the yard, aware that the whole prison had their eyes on him, like guns tracking a target. The moment he left the yard and walked into the prison, he could hear the entire place erupting in conversation behind him, literally talking behind his back.

He made his way through the halls of pale blue marble, covered in stains of who-knows-what. Opening the dark green door to the office, he took his seat at the polished, wood table at the center of the office just as the warden walked in.

Two guards stood by the door, which seemed normal. But other than that, the office was strange, with trinkets perched all about the room; the assorted potted plants tossed about the area and scattered on various desks, stacks of papers which seemed to appear infinitely and placed precariously close to falling off of the edge, seemed to be a degree that certified he was, in fact, a warden.

The warden eyed Nate, scrutinizing every detail about him.

“Hello, Nate. I am not here to share pleasantries with you, and I can assume you are the same,” stated the warden. With his dark eyes, straight brown hair, and square features, he was clearly not one to be messed with. He even gave a cold demeanor, as if an aura of strictness surrounded him.

“I am here to talk to you about what happened the night of June 6th, seven days ago.”

There was a long silence. Nate wanted to speak, but words wouldn’t leave his mouth. Should he tell him? Rat out his only friend? But a true friend wouldn’t have left him alone? A true friend would have taken Nate with him. But should he?

All these thoughts whirled around in his head as the horrible disease that is indecision crept through his body. He took a long, deep breath.

“You want to know what happened on the night of June 6? Fine. But honestly? I think I know less than you do.”

And with that, he told him everything he knew (which wasn’t much.)

***

Many weeks had passed without Mitchell, and soon, the everlasting hunger of loneliness started clawing at his belly. He still had two years left in his sentence, so waiting to get out to find Mitchell was no option. Though there was still the nagging voice at the back of his head, saying “Escape! Go with him! Get out of this bottomless hell-hole!”

Of course, he ignored that voice and focused on his daily routine. (Heh, heh, heh. I make myself laugh sometimes. Yeah, I lied. I lied hard.)

The voice pestered him 24/7, digging its way into his thoughts, dreams, and subconsciousness. Every day, he wanted to do it more and more. He became obsessive, anxious, jumping at the slightest of sounds. Voices pierced his dreams, screaming at him to follow Mitchell. Every night, he watched the scene, the escape, and every morning, he awoke with a cold sweat. His heart beat out of rhythm, and instead, his fingers tapped at a fast pace. He could not stop the beat, whether the tap of the foot or finger; it seemed endless. His mind could not think. All he saw was Mitchell’s face laughing at Nate, endlessly. He was officially insane.

He needed to escape. He needed to escape! He needed to escape!

But how?

The question of “But how?” is one of the biggest and most challenging questions the Earth has ever faced. We wanted to make a teleporter. But how? We wanted to build a time-travel machine. But how? We wanted to build a super awesome deathray. But how? How? If we knew the answer to the question of “But how?” the world would be a very different place. And Nate was just about to find that out.

***

Nate sat on the small, wooden chair his cell came with, leaning back on it very precariously. He had given up his tapping habit, and was now completely focused on finding a way out. As simple as it seemed, it proved exceedingly difficult. It was not that hard coming up with ideas on breaking out. It was just that every time he did, he immediately thought up a reason why it wouldn’t work.

Cursing his own pessimistic personality, he got up and walked over to his bed for an evening nap. He had never before taken naps, but he found being well rested helped him think. He glanced over at Mitchell’s bed. He had not touched it since the day of the escape, and dust sheeted the unmade blankets.

Just as Nate started to get comfortable, a sudden thought struck him like a hammer blow to the temple. Leaping to his feet, he shot across the room and began rummaging through Mitchell’s blankets.

If Mitchell escaped with a tool of some kind, he might have left it on his bed!  Nate thought, his heart racing.

But as he continued his search, his hope slowly left, leaving him dead inside. There was nothing there! Nate’s eyes began to narrowed and his teeth clenched together.

Wait! Nate thought Maybe it’s under the bed! He searched relentlessly, trying to find anything, but all he found was a stupid comb. Fury built up inside of him. He threw the comb down so hard it shot halfway across the room, but he didn’t care.

“AAARRRGGGG!” Nate shouted. Disappointment seeped into his veins. He knew it wouldn’t happen, that of course Mitchell wouldn’t have left his tool there. But it had been his only hope, and getting your hope crushed makes you mad. And Nate was no exception. Every inch of his body was on fire with with hot rage. He stared at the wall, and then and there, punched the wall. Blood spurted from his knuckles, and his anger was now seconded by pain. But this only made him angrier.

He punched the wall, both fists drilling against it, blood splattering everywhere, until it looked like murder scene. Tears fells from his eyes, and time had no meaning. He could have been there for minutes, seconds, hours, years. But he would never know. All he remembered was passing out. His limp body falling to the floor.

Then, the darkness consumed him.

 

Escape

Nate woke up, the cold stone floor pressed against his cheek. Dried blood crusted his knuckles, and dried tears crusted his eyelashes. He was too tired to even yawn. He forced himself to his feet and began stumbling over to the sink.

Suddenly, before his slow feet had time to react, he felt something slide out from beneath him. He was unceremoniously tossed forward, his forehead bashing on the sink in front of him. Landing flat on his face, he struggled to roll over.

Reaching up, he felt his forehead. A large, goose-egg-sized bump was planted smack at the center. Cold blood slid down his face from a heavy nosebleed he’d gotten. Nate let out some words even he didn’t understand. He just wanted to say something offensive to whatever god did this to him.

He cleaned himself up, then bent down and started examining the floor where he tripped. He wanted to find the thing that had made him fall and make it pay. He knew he couldn’t make an inanimate object pay, but he didn’t care.

It was probably the comb I threw away earlier! Nate cursed.

He reached under the sink and let his fingers run wild over the surface of the floor, searching for anything that might cause him to trip. His fingers ran over something unusually cold, and he grabbed it and pulled the object into a better light.

He stared at it with wonder, his eyes glowing. A polished, silver key laid in his palm, sparkling in the warm light that the small window in his cell provided. It was small with a smooth edge. There was a little, round hole located in the corner, as if it was once attached to a ring of keys.

Rolling the key around in a closed fist, he realized the ingenuity of where the key was placed. It had been located between two pipes that formed almost a box around it. It was also smartly balanced against a wall, to block off one place in which it could be seen. Nate had found it out of sheer luck.

He glanced at the barred cell door, tilting his head. Cautiously, he got to two feet, approaching the cell door the same way you might approach a wild bear. Holding the key pinched between two fingers, he slid it into the lock. He took a deep breath, and turned the key. A soft click echoed through the prison.

Excitement built up in his chest. He gave the door a soft push, and it creaked open. Nate wanted to scream, dance, and sing at the same time. He had found a way to escape! But he needed to think. If he left now, he would be caught and the key confiscated.  

He needed a plan.

***

Locking the door so he wouldn’t arouse suspicion, he walked over to his bed, then to his sink, then to the door again. He repeated the walk for over 3 hours, but couldn’t think of a strategy. It was clear that he had to do it at night, to limit the guards’ vision, but he didn’t know anything else.

At last, he decided to make a map of the prison, so he could sneak out. Nate already knew his way around the prison, but he had to know more: where the security cameras were, where the entrance and exit to air vents were, what the guards’ shifts were. He had to know the prison inside and out.

***

For weeks onward, he made it his mission to map out the prison. He used paper and a pencil that were supposed to be used for writing letters to your family. Nate laughed at their stupidity. He had no family. He was an only child, he never met his father, his mother had died at birth, his mom had gotten into a fight with his uncle so he had never met his uncle, and his grandparents had died before he was born. It was fine though. You couldn’t miss something you never had.

Soon, he had a large and detailed map of the prison. Nate unfolded the map and laid it on the miniscule desk in the corner of his cell. Hunching over it, he began to devise a plan.

On the night of December 24, six months after the escape of Mitchell A. Warren, and the day before Christmas, Nate J. Roosevelt planned to escape from Prison No. 61. Nate had chosen this day specifically, because 1) No one expected it, and 2) The guards would also be partying and getting drunk.

Picking up the key from under his bed where he hid it, Nate scanned the area. On his left, a guard stood, although he was facing the other way and leaning on the railing of the second floor stairway. The man’s head lolled to the side, and he seemed pretty relaxed.

To his right, stood nothing but a dead end.

Unlocking the cell door, he slid out of his room and silently crept toward the guard. Nate had a plan, though he wasn’t sure it would work. At the guard’s side, a gun hung loosely in a holster, not strapped down by anything. It was probably just a mistake of the guards ignorance, but it proved greatly helpful to Nate.

Standing right behind the guard, Nate realized how easy it was to sneak up on him. Then, he realized the guard was asleep! He pulled the gun from the man’s holster, then suddenly put the officer in a chokehold. Weaponless and half asleep, the guard easily submitted and fell unconscious.

Stripping the guard of his uniform, Nate put on the officer’s outfit and gave the officer a prisoner’s outfit. In the dim light, Nate looked no different than the guard he had just knocked out. Checking his badge, he was now Officer Jasper H. Parkins.

Not a bad name, Nate thought.

He reached into the outfit’s pocket and found a large ring of keys. Putting them back, he moved the body to the bottom of the stairway. He had to play this off right.

Suddenly, Nate started shouting “Dear God! What happened! There-There’s a body on the stairwell! Oh Lord!” and stuff like that. Of course, Nate knew exactly what happened. He just needed needed to make at least one guard came over.

Sure enough, Nate soon heard footsteps rushing towards him. A group of three guards came rushing over and stopped in front of the body.

“Dear God, what happened! I see now why you were screaming…” the shortest of the guards assembled said.

Trying to sound as shocked as possible, Nate responded “I was just s-standing there, doing my job, when I heard a-a thump at the bottom of th-the stairwell. I go down to investigate, and this i-is what I find,” all the while shaking his head back and forth.

“Damn.”

“I’ll go tell the warden,” one of the guards volunteered.

“Not yet!” the short guard interrupted, “We need more details! Who is this prisoner anyway?” He said crouching over Jasper’s body. “He looks kinda familiar.”

Nate, sensing danger, immediately stepped in. “That’s because this fellow is Bill Cask!” The small group assembled all turned to look at Nate, blank expressions on their faces. “Oh, you probably don’t know that that’s his name, but you’ve definitely seen him before. He’s not too smart, not too funny, not too buff, but he’s just there.”

The other guards seemed to be okay with this explanation, but the short guard wasn’t having it.

“What’s his number?” Shortie inquired.

“212!” Nate blurted out.

“Isn’t that the number of that Mitchell kid?”

An erie silence seemed to spread almost cancerously about the area, until Nate finally broke it with a nervousness-filled word of, “No.”

No one bought it.

“No, I think that that is the escapee’s number. We’ve only been hearing it for the past 10 months!” This time, it was a taller, pale-as-the-moon guard who was talking. “I would know that damn number in my sleep.”

The small group laughed uneasily, but it only grew the tension, the guards becoming more sure that something was off.

Suddenly, Nate burst out laughing.

“Oh, you idiots!” he let loose another burst of giggles. “Once Mitchell got out, they switched around the numbers. Now a random kid, Nick, I think his name is, no Nate, is number 212!”

This explanation made absolutely no sense. Shortie was the only guard who seemed to have picked up what a BS answer it was, but the other guards were already laughing along, saying it was their bad, that they should have known.

“Go to the warden and ‘report the incident’ man,” the tallest guard said, as if it was a joke they had shared before. But Nate just laughed along, even though he had no idea what was so funny about that sentence. Nate just smiled, waving over his shoulder to say goodbye.

He walked through the prison at a measured and calm pace, walked to the exit, searched through the ring of keys till he found one labeled Exit Key, fit it into the lock, opened the door, and walked out.

He kept on walking away from the prison, shocked at what had happened. He had escaped so easily. It wasn’t mission impossible. But now, he had nothing to do. What was he supposed to accomplish with his life?

The answer came to him like a wave crashing onto the beach: Find Mitchell.

Mitchell had once told Nate his address: Brooklyn, NY 4th Street 1123. After asking a slightly rushed man out getting late Christmas gifts for directions, Nate was off.

After several hours of walking through the dark streets of Brooklyn, he was there. Standing in front of the house, Nate took a deep breath.

“Mitchell.”

The word echoed across the night, shooting about the universe. And then and there, Nate knew, that somewhere, on some alien planet, a far away alien just heard the word “Mitchell.”

 

Once Upon a Time

It’s crazy that every single fairy tale begins with those four tiny words: Once Upon A Time…

Once upon a time, there was a little girl. She lived in a land called Yaoi. Her name was Lin. She had three siblings: Soa, Tao-pay and Yerin.

One summer day, Yerin wandered off into the wind waters. There were rumors going around that a ghost was haunting the lake. The large, silver body of liquid was surrounded by a sakura blossom forest. Tiny, pinkish-red petals with a white inner circle fell upon the unusual water. Tao-pay had gone with the little girl, but when he came home with the moonlight covering his already pale face, Yerin was not there with him. Tao-pay claimed that a glowing iridescent spirit had pulled the defenseless girl under, and she sank below the swaying waves.                                                                                          

As Soa was the oldest, she didn’t believe poor Tao. So, after the night passed, she left the house with a shivering Tao-pay. Lin insisted that she stay home and keep watch for anything out of the ordinary. Just as Yerin had, when the jet black blanket of twilight fell, Soa returned without Tao-pay. She told the exact same story that she herself had not believed was true. But, unlike her siblings, Lin was clever. Even though she was overwhelmed with the pain of losing two of her siblings, she created a plan that she prayed would bring them back.                                                      

The next morning, at the crack of dawn, Soa and Lin walked down to the wind waters. But instead of letting herself be seen, Lin hid nearby behind a sakura tree. Soa swam in the silver currents, singing and swimming innocently, acting utterly oblivious.

When the beautiful moon came, after hours of waiting, a glowing spirit shaped like a woman emerged from the lake. Soa screamed. Lin wanted to yell at her. This was not part of the plan! The spirit reached out a glowing hand to grab Soa, but Lin jumped out of her hiding place armed with… A-a-a flashlight!

With it, Lin shone the white light at her sibling’s captor, and the spirit let out a gut-wrenching scream and dissolved into tiny droplets. Suddenly, Yerin and Tao-pay surfaced near the sand. They both coughed up decent amounts of water and then launched themselves into Soa and Lin’s arms.

“You saved us!” Yerin cried.

“How did you know to use the flashlight?” Soa asked Lin.

“Because she only came out of the lake at night.” Lin replied. Then, all four of the siblings walked home, together.

                                              

Girl and Squirrel (Part I)

“Okay, okay! I’m awake!” I shout. My brother is shaking me.

“It’s time for school,” Calvin says.

I jump out of bed. “I slept that late?!”

I yank my clothes on and run downstairs, grabbing my backpack and the piece of toast that my mom holds out to me as I speed out the door 100 miles per hour.

The bus shoots fumes into my face as it pulls away from the curb. I scream, then trudge back inside.

”Mooom, I need a ride to schoool,” I call.   

“Ride your bike, honey.”  

“Do I have to?”  

“Yes. I’m about to leave for work, and I can’t drive you.”  

I hate my bike. It’s three sizes too small for me and covered in Dora the Explorer stickers from when I was five, I gripe to myself as I roll my bicycle out the door and off the curb. I hop on, but my knees are almost up to my chest.

When I finally get to school, I toss my bike into a hedge. I don’t want anyone to see it. I run as fast I can into school, hoping I’m not late. In the main hall, I check the clock on the wall, but it is already 8:30. I am 20 minutes late. I walk into the main office to get a late pass. As soon as the lady behind the desk hands me the doom-promising slip of yellow paper, I walk back out. As the damage is already done, I take my time making my way up the three flights of stairs to my classroom. Although I go as slow as a sloth, I still pant for breath outside my classroom door.

***

I’m sitting at my tan desk in the classroom. The teacher, Mrs. O’Hara, is talking, talking, and talking about math strategies. I hate math strategies. I’m staring out the window, looking at the clouds changing when something big, brown, and feathery with a wingspan bigger than Mrs. O’Hara’s afro flaps against the window.

It’s an owl! I almost say it out loud, but then realize where I am. Suddenly, the owl flies up and perches on the edge of the window where it’s open. Nobody else seems to notice it. All of the sudden, it shakes its wing and out falls an envelope. I jump up and run over to the window. The owl flies away, but I pick up the creamy white envelope off the floor.

Mrs. O’Hara calls over, “Isabella! What are you doing?” I shove the letter into my pocket.

“I… I was just picking up some garbage that I saw on the ground.”

I dig in my pocket for something, anything that can stand in as trash. Finally, in the bottom of one of my jeans pockets, I find an old piece of ABC (already been chewed) gum. It’s nearly bursting out of the wrapper, and it’s stuck to the bottom of my pocket. I yank and I yank, and then finally, it pops out. I hold it up to show Mrs. O’Hara.  She looks disgusted.  

“Alright… come throw it away. But I’ve got my eye on you.”

I hurry to the trash can. Once I’m back at my desk, I try to focus on Mrs. O’Hara and her boring math lesson until I can’t stand the suspense of the mysterious letter anymore. I slip the envelope out of my pocket and carefully rip open the seal inside my desk. I slide out the letter and unfold it. It is written in fancy cursive.

 

Dear Isabella,

Come to the largest oak in Acorn Wood  

Someone will meet you there.

You are destined to become friends

and do great things together.

The two of you are so different, yet, the same.

The Wise Owl

“Oh. My. Gosh.”  I murmur.

 

Helena the Husky: A Diary

Have you ever thought that your parents or siblings were horrible? Well, my story is even worse. I’m a Siberian husky with horrible owners and annoying sisters, and we all have to participate in the 2016 Iditarod race. My diary follows all of us from our home by the Hudson River in New York to Alaska.

 

January 1, 2016:

Meet My Family

I wake up. I hear my younger sisters Hannah, Holly, and Helen howling in the other room. Purely annoying. That’s what they are. But before I tell you all about them, I guess I should introduce you to the rest of my family. Our owners are Mr. and Mrs. Smith, Jewell (their sixteen year old daughter,) Sadie (Jewell’s thirteen year old sister,) Silvia (who just turned eleven,) and baby Melanie (She’s a year old.) We live in New York by the Hudson River. We have a huge house, an even bigger yard (for running in the winter), and we get to swim in the Hudson every summer.

If my sisters are annoying, my owners are horrible, so horrible that they don’t even let me have extra bacon on Saturday mornings! When I talk to Hannah about them, she disagrees. You see how annoying she is? Holly and Helen are even worse. While I’m writing this story (and many others,) they are howling. They also think our owners are great. Humph! Too bad for me. I think my sisters just hope Jewell (who is our musher) makes them lead dogs in our Iditarod race this coming March.

 

January 9, 2016:

For Once!

It’s Saturday! This is my chance to get extra bacon. I go into the kitchen and see Mr. Smith frying bacon on the stove. I am drooling for a taste. Surprisingly, Mr. Smith reads my mind.

“Do you want bacon, Helena?”

I go to him and beg so hard, that I have to dig my claws into the fine, wood floor to stop myself from falling over. But, begging or not, he heaps my plate with crispy, scrumptious bacon. I am so happy! I wag my tail and jump up and down in excitement.

Hannah, Holly, and Helen come in and beg, too. Mr. Smith gives them each a strip of bacon. They eat it and beg once more.

“No more, you guys!” says Mr. Smith.

They come to me and ask for some of my bacon. “Please?”

“NO!” I say.

“Come on!” they plead.

“I said no!” I repeat firmly, and quickly finish my bacon. Got you, I think. For once.

 

January 17, 2016:

Peanut Butter Blues

Sunday! Not Sunday! Mrs. Smith is in the kitchen making peanut butter sandwiches for breakfast. (Mrs. Smith simply doesn’t know how to cook, not even how to fry bacon!) Every time I have a peanut butter sandwich, my mouth gets glued shut. But I have no choice. I take a big bite.

It’s noon. I wake up from my nap. I try to open my mouth. Uff! Ick! I can’t even move! I try to yell for help, but it just comes out as “HhHhHh!

My sisters just roll in their beds and continue to nap. Annoying! I take a sip of water. Phew! It helps. I take another sip, and the gluey feeling drifts away. I’m relieved.

At least my owners don’t have to yank it off like last time; a few of my teeth almost came out too! Then, I had to be tied to a chair while a dog dentist glued them back on with a special glue. I swallowed a little of that glue, and then wished I hadn’t. As the tears started streaming down my face, Jewell noticed and said something you would never believe she would say: “What’s the matter, Helena? Are you looking for some bacon?” No! I would have said, but all that came out was an “ooooooooo” sound.

At dinnertime, I want to ask Mr. Smith for extra meat, but all that comes out is a “thhhhhiiiiiicccccc” sound. It’s that peanut butter sandwich. I guess the water did not help. Nothing helps with it. Ugh! Meat will help, I’m sure, but Mr. Smith can’t understand me. That dumb peanut butter!

But this time, Jewell understands. She heaps my plate. I thump my tail and devour every single piece. Great! It helps. Then, my sisters and I go out for a run in the yard. The moon is full and the stars are shining. That helps too.

 

February 2, 2016:

Ha ha on Helen

Are you in the mood for a funny story? If you’re not, you’ll have to cope. If you are, great! Because I`m going to tell one. Here goes!

Yesterday, we were all out sledding. Sadie was mushing. Jewell was too busy doing homework, whatever that means. Now, I am usually our lead dog, but Sadie was so horrible, she let Helen be lead dog. Humph! I protested but Helen just laughed and bragged about being lead dog. Then, as soon as we started running, Helen started talking to Hannah.

“Oh no!” I told her to stop, and I howled at her three times, but she didn’t listen. We ran straight into a tree.

“Told you!” Sadie was really mad. We had to do the run all over again; this time, I was in the lead. Now, I am the lead dog permanently. Ha, ha on Helen.

Did you think that was funny? Imagine that — In a few weeks, we’re traveling to Alaska to participate in the Iditarod, and I get to be the lead dog. If my still annoying sisters follow me, we will win. If only they would…

 

February 9, 2016:

Our New Booties

I wake up and hear Jewell arguing with Silvia. Everyone else is still asleep, and it’s 9:30am!

I hear: “We have to go shopping for race supplies!” and “What for, the smelly, old huskies?”

I would have bitten Silvia’s foot, except for the fact that she hadn’t bathed for two weeks. A lot smellier, definitely!

Then, Sadie wakes up. She joins the argument. It is really loud!

Finally, Jewell’s voice cuts the noise. “Okay,you little maniacs! You don’t have to come. But behave with Mommy and Daddy, okay?”

“OK!” Sadie and Silvia answer together.

“Don’t worry. You’re going to love shopping. I know you will!” Jewell’s voice is soothing as we walk to the store. Helen, Hannah, and Holly are all for it, but I have a feeling that something is going to go wrong. You wait and see.

And something does.

The racing supplies store is huge! So many things to look at and sniff: booties, sleds, leashes, harnesses, collars, and yummy food. It takes Jewell a long time to get us out of the store, but as we walk out, we are all very excited. Jewell bought each of us a pair of new booties. They are leather, lined with fur. We didn’t have time to try them on in the store. So we rush home . . . and that’s when all the trouble begins…

We are trying on our booties and (you guessed it, right?)… Helen’s booties don’t fit!!!

 

February 9, 2016:

An exciting night

We have to go all the way back to the store.

And Helen keeps saying, “They won’t have my size! Why do I have to have smaller paws than everyone else?”

Why, why, why. Helen is full of whys. Why does she have to ask “why?” I think that is the correct question.

When we arrive at the store, I help Jewell pick out a new parka while Hannah and Holly help Helen get her new booties. Jewell wants me to help them too, but I insist that I help with the parka to make our midnight shopping trip a little shorter. I also hope I do not have to hear Helen whine about her paws.

So much for my wishes. Helen’s voice penetrates the store’s walls.

“I don’t like these!”

“But they’re the only ones in your size!” Hannah howls back.

“What!” barks Helen.

“I don’t like my paws!”

“Okay!” Jewell says, carrying a bag with her new parka. “Let’s go to another store.”

We leave the store after Jewell pays for her new parka. Then, we go to CheapThings4Pets.Com. Helen picks out a pair of booties identical to ours. They only cost $2.00!

 

You can only imagine how I look when the horrible shopping trip is over! But it’s late now. Everyone is finally asleep. All except me. ‘Cause if I were asleep, I wouldn’t be writing this story, would I? But I suddenly have a sensation to go to sleep. It’s all I want to d…o…o…

 

February 18, 2016:

Alaska

I wake up and feel the bite sinking into my ear. I recognize that bite. Hannah has stopped by to wake me up.

“Ow, Hannah, get off my ear!” I scream.

It’s 8:00am. We’re finally in Alaska. Snow is everywhere, and it seems like everyone has gotten up on the wrong side of the doggie-pad.

“Helen, you’re such an oaf!” Holly yells. “Didn’t you see my food dish before you knocked it over?!”

“No” Helen barks back. “It was an accident!”

“Liar!” Holly shouts.

“Helena, help me!” Holly continues.

“My ear still hurts!” I answer back.

“Wait!” tries Hannah, the peacemaker (who should be sorry for biting my ear!) “No arguing!” But it doesn’t work. We go back and forth for 15 minutes!

“Enough bickering!” announces Jewell. We stop immediately. Jewell gives Holly more breakfast and grabs our leashes. Running in the crisp, cold air makes everyone feel better.

               

March 5, 2016:

The Iditarod

“READY, SET, GO!” the Iditarod judge’s voice booms over our heads.

On cue, I leap into my harness and pull the gang line taut. Put put put! Our paws thunder over the snow. It’s cold, but we like it. We’ve had a wonderful breakfast complete with dumplings and rice. Almost as good as bacon. Everything seems perfect.

Only one piece of bad news: Jewell got sick with a cold the day before the big day, so Sadie is mushing us. But at least Helen’s not the lead dog. You know what happened.

I think we’re going to win. I really do. We’re almost at Finger Lake. But wait, something isn’t right. I feel a little queasy. Uh-oh I’m going to… barf!

Oh no! I shouldn’t have eaten that dumpling! Why did I eat that dumpling!? Why?! Why?! Why?!!! But I don’t have to worry because…

Helen takes over!!!             

Helen does a great job, but the next day, I’m back in the lead position. I’m feeling much better now. I lead my sisters across snowdrifts, over mountains. They follow me as fast as they can. We are so fast, that I can’t even hear the other teams following us. But I can hear the pounding of our feet, the wind in our ears, and the “hHhHhHhH” of our panting.

 

March 14, 20116:

Winning the Iditarod   

I hear the crowd cheering. We run on. Put. Put. Put. Have we won? I look at the finish line. No one else is there. Just snow. And judges waiting for us to cross the finish line.

We won!!!

The judges lift me from the lead position and put me on a platform shaped like a cone. I smile to the crowd. My big, bushy tail thumps on the ground. My sisters are no longer annoying. Our owners cheer for us the loudest.

Mr. Smith is shouting, “More bacon tonight, Helena!”

Behind me, Hannah whispers, “Our owners aren’t that bad,”

“Yeah,” I say as the judge interviews Sadie, “they are great.

 

EPILOGUE

 

After the race, everything is back to normal. We have a brand new trophy that says: Winner of the 2016 Iditarod.

Lead dog: Helena

Sub lead dog: Helen

Musher: Sadie Smith

Happy racing!

As for me, I think I learned my lesson. My sisters are my sisters, even if they are sometimes annoying, and we work best as a team. And our owners — well, there’s more to their love than extra bacon on Saturdays. But I guess I’ll have to say more on that another time because Mr. Smith is calling me to the kitchen…

 

The Trampoline

Hi, my name is Sam. I am a girl, and I have been wanting a trampoline all my life. So far, I have saved up to about $200, and the trampoline is $300!! A couple lemonade stands would work (giggles.)

“Mom!!” I yell, “Can I have a lemonade stand?”

“Sure!!” my mom says, “Just be careful!”

“Okay, I will!”

I run outside with the table, chair, cash register, and of course, the lemonade! I pour the lemonade, and soon enough, I have a customer!

A woman pulls up in a black limousine. Why would a fancy lady pull up to my lemonade stand? I think.

“Hi,” I say.

“Hello,” she says in a fancy British accent. “How much for three glasses?”

“$4,” I say.

“Here you go. $4. Thank you so much!”

She hands me two $2 bills. I’d never seen $2 bills before.

“Have a good day… oh wait, here’s your lemonade.”

I am so surprised that I almost forget to give her her lemonade!

The women giggles.

“Oh thank you, darling, Have a good day,” she says.

“You too,” I say.

I am so excited to have my first customer of the day!

At the end of they day, I have almost enough money for my trampoline.

“$50 more!” I say as I count my money.

“Mom! Mom!” I yell, “I only need $50 more!!”

“Let’s go to Toys R Us today. Want to?” my mom says.

“But I still need $50 more!?” I say.

“I will pay the extra $50,” my mom says.

“You will?? Oh my God, oh my God!” I yell, my heart pounding.“Thank you, thank you, thank you!!! Can we go now?”

“Yes, we can just take the chair, cash register, and lemonade inside.”

We get in the car and head to Toys R Us.

“We’re here!” Mom says.

“Yay! Come on let’s go!!!” I say.

We walk inside and ask someone for help to find a trampoline.

“It’s in aisle six,” the woman says.

“Thank you!” we say and we walk to aisle six.

Well, I run.

“Mom, Mom, this is the one!!!”

Mom comes and looks and she says, “Okay, let’s go pay for it!”

We walk to go pay for the trampoline. We pay for the it, and ask if someone can help us put it in our car.

“Okay,” the woman at the cash register says, “I am calling someone down to come help you with it.”

My heart beats so fast.

“Ready,” says the woman who is helping us, “I’m going to order a truck to take this to your house.”

“Okay!” my mom says.

Finally, the truck comes. They load the trampoline into the back of the truck and the truck follows us home. At last we reach home, and they unload the trampoline into my back yard.

“Bye!” I say.

“Thank you for helping us.” my mom says.

“Can I jump?” I ask my mom.

“Is it your trampoline?”

“Yes,” I say.

“Then, you may jump on it,” my mom says.

“Yay! Thank you!” I say.

“But under one condition.”

“Yes, okay, what?!” I ask.

“If I can try it. Haha, I am just kidding. Go jump on it!” my mom says.

So I run over into my trampoline, climb in, and jump! I feel excited.

A week later, I am jumping on my trampoline, and then, I look up and realize that the clouds have started to roll in over the sun.

“It will be fine,” I say. “It’s probably really fun to jump in the rain!”

So I keep on jumping.

“Whoa,” I say. “It’s pouring!”

I’m saying, “Wahooooooo!!!!” when ah! I slip and fall from the rain and land on my arm.

My parents rush outside (after all the screaming and yelling) and then rush me to the hospital. I have a broken arm and get a cast.

My parents tell me, “Honey, we are so so sorry, but I think we have to get rid of the trampoline. It’s too dangerous.”

“No!!” I say.

As we start to leave the hospital, my mom asks, “Is there anything that you want instead that’s not too dangerous?”

“No, nothing but a trampoline, but I promise I will never go on it when it’s raining,” I say. I know it hurts, but I’m happy I get to keep my trampoline.

 

Locked Out (Part I)

The light was blinding as Athena stepped out of her small, cramped tent of a home into the sun. It was time to try again.

“Dad, let me back in. Please. Think of Mom and what she would do!”

Those were the words she repeated every single day ever since her mom died and her dad kicked her out of the house.

Athena knew it would be the same. Her dad would just slam the door in her face and walk away. She ran across the street to her friend Lily’s house. Lily’s dad would drive them to school.

“How did it go this time?” she asked.

“Same as usual,” Athena replied.

Lily was the only person who knew her story and understood Athena’s problem.

***

The afternoon light peeked out over the high-rises as Athena and Lily approached the hill where they resided.

“Wanna crash at my house?” Lily said.

“Sure. Beats having to go back home,” Athena said back.

As if I have one, she thought.

Lily’s house was always very inviting, and every time she came in, Athena felt like she was in a fancy hotel.

The next day was basically the same. Except for one thing. Her dad didn’t slam the door, he closed it gently and gave her a sad look.

Maybe he’s had the slightest change of heart, Athena thought, He just needed some time to himself.

But that idea was quickly vanquished because her dad had all the time in the world to himself. He had been alone for 2 years.

When Athena tried the next day, her dad spoke to her for the first time in a long time. His voice was dry and raspy.

“I’m not your father,” he said.

***

Athena stormed into her house and sat down.

“You owe me a very long explanation,” she said angrily.

Her “dad” started to say, “You probably won’t — fine, I’ll tell you. Your mother was a doctor. Emmeline Carenlater. She was working late one night when a call came for a patient going into cardiac arrest. Emme got into her car and started driving, but a drunk guy slammed into her car. Then — well, you know the rest. I’m sorry I didn’t tell you how she died. You were only eight then.”

Silence.

“But if you’re not my dad, then who are you?” Athena said quietly.

“I’m your… your uncle.”

“You were hesitating. Tell me the truth!”

“Fine. I’m not your relative. Your mother, in her will, she entrusted me to you.”

Athena was slow to answer, “But who is my father?”

“You didn’t have one.”

The shock was too much for Athena, and she ran out the door, tears streaming down her face.

 

The Sleepover That Changed My Life

Hi, my name is Emma, and my life isn’t the same as others. You see, my mom won’t let me go to certain things without protection. So here is how one very special sleepover actually changed my life.

 

Chapter 1: My Life

Ever since I was in second grade, I’ve gotten invited to many sleepovers. This is what happened every single time I asked:

“Mom? I got invited to another sleepover. Can I go?”

“You know what our answer is. NO.”

Ugh, my parents are so overly strict. This had been happening every single time I asked. Until now: fourth grade.

 

Chapter 2: What Happens Every Single Time

“Mom! I got invited to another sleepover! Another tally mark to add to my notebook of how many sleepovers I can’t go to!” I screamed.

“I’m sorry, honey. You know that I have changed my mind, but your father doesn’t understand!”

“Alex, honey. Emma got invited to another sleepover,” my mom said to my dad while walking into their room.

“Oh great, I’m on the last page of the notebook!” I said as I drew the tally mark. I took out my diary and wrote:

Dear diary,

I got another invitation to another sleepover. I don’t understand why I never get to sleep over at my friends’ houses. Although I did have a sleepover with my cousins. But my mom, dad, and brother were there with me. I also have sleepovers at my grandparent’s house, but they don’t count at all. An actual sleepover is when you sleep over at someone else’s home by yourself without your family there with you. I just hate it when they say no! It’s like the only word that they say. No, no, no! I’m just so sick of it.

“Emma, dinner’s ready,” my mom said.

“Coming Mom,” I replied.

 

Chapter 3: Breakfast Talk

Beep, beep, beep. My alarm from my phone rang at 5:49. As I got out of my pig P.J.s and mask, my younger brother Evan came rushing in.

“Happy birthday to you, happy birthday to you, happy birthday dear Emma, happy birthday to you!” he sang.

“O-M-G!”

I can’t believe that I forgot my own birthday! As soon as I got out of bed, I got dressed and called my friends. Sniff, sniff. I smelled bagel.

“Breakfast!” I screamed while heading downstairs to the dining room.

“So Emma, you are now ten years old. What would you like as your birthday present?”my mom asked as I sat down in the lumpy seat with the scent of roses in the air.

I replied, “Do you want to know what I want? I want you to stop saying no and start saying yes!”

I screamed. There was a long silence…

  

Chapter 4: Shopping

An hour later at Andy’s Shoe Shop with Jojo…

“Happy Birthday!” Jojo said.

“Thanks,” I replied, “Now let’s do what we came here to do.”  “SHOPPING!” we said at the same time.

***

“That was awesome,” Jojo said.

“I can’t believe that almost every single thing that we bought was the exact same thing,” I said.

“Today was fun. I have to get to play rehearsals. See you on Monday,” Jojo said.

“See you on Monday,” I replied as we walked our separate ways.

      

Chapter 5: The Information

When I got home, this is what happened. It was dark. The only light that was on was the light above the dining table. When I heard my brother snoring, I realized that my mom and dad had to talk to me, so I walked to the dining table and sat down.

“We have news,” my mom said.

”We talked to your aunt, and she said that you could sleep over at her place on Friday with Anna,” my dad added.

Once he finished his statement, the main lights turned on. I looked at where the light switch was located, and there was my brother standing there. He agreed to this only because he would get our room for one day.

I went upstairs to my room and sat down on my bed with my diary in my hands. I wrote….

Dear diary,

My parents actually let me have a sleepover at my cousin’s. Now that I’m hearing that word ‘cousin,’ I realize that’s family. It’s at least a step closer with my friends. What are my chances. I just hope my first sleepover will be a great sleepover.

 

Chapter 6: The Sleepover

I sat in the car with my mom, dad, and brother, going to my cousin’s home to play for a little bit. After that, my parents and brother were going to leave me alone to have an actual sleepover. Just then, I realized that I had a lot planned out and needed a lot of energy. So I decided to take a nap until we got there so I could play and stay up all night.

***

I woke up to the sound of our car coming to an abrupt stop. I was still feeling a little drowsy; I looked up and realized that we were there.

“Finally,” I said as I yawned, “Time to get this party started.”

When we got there, there was already food prepped for us. About one hour later, my parents and brother finally left.

The first thing that we did was make a lot of musicals, games, and other internet stuff. While we were playing downstairs, dinner was being prepped.

Sizzle, sizzle went the pan.

As soon as we came upstairs, diner was ready. We had delicious chicken nuggets with mac and cheese on the side.

“Yummm!” I said, “This food is super good.”

“I agree” replied Anna.

***

“Do you want to make up a dance with me?” I asked.

“Sure” she replied.

So we worked on our dance till 10:02, bedtime. Before we went to bed, we had a pillow fight.

 

Chapter 7: In The Night

“Psst, Emma,” Anna said.

“What, Anna?” I replied in a sleepy voice. Yawn.

“Let’s go downstairs and get some candy,” she whispered, “We got a bowl full of candy.”

So we tiptoed down without making a sound. We opened the dark brown cabinet and saw the bowl full of candy. Anna took a Kitkat, and I took a Reese’s peanut butter cup and ate it without leaving a piece of evidence behind. After finishing our candy, we went back to bed.

 

Chapter 8: In The Morning

“Good morning, Emma,” Anna said.

“Good morning,” I replied.

We walked to the dining table where there was breakfast already prepared for us.

“Good morning, girls,” my aunt said in a pleasing voice.

We had donuts and ice cream for breakfast.

 

Chapter 9: Pickup

During the middle of the day, my parents came to pick me up.

“Mom!!! I don’t want to go!!!” I said.

“I’ll give you twenty bucks,” my mom said.

Right away, I changed my mind.

I actually couldn’t believe that I had an actual sleepover at my cousins by myself without my parents or brother. When I got home, I wrote

Dear diary,

Last night, I had an actual sleepover at my cousins, without my mom, dad or brother! I just can not believe that the sleepover actually happened. Maybe this is the next step to friends sleepover. What are my chances?

 

Harmony’s Destiny

Chapter One: Harmony

Ugh, today is off to a bad start.

First, my BFF Wilma has been kidnapped by the evil (in my words) Jade, who is “BBF” (Booty, Butts, and Fabulousness. In her words not mine.) E.J. (Evil Jade!!!) has cursed Wilma to think that I’m the mean girl, and that she’s the one who should stand up to me to protect everyone.

So I am going to tell the headmistress. She looks like a woman with long, flowing hair that’s golden blonde, and a dress made of water and plants.

She’s really good at magic, and she’s also one of the few fairies who can breathe underwater. We have to try to see if we can breathe underwater, and I’m #1837402, but there’s only two more people in front of me. Wilma’s behind me and the thing is that we already know we can breathe underwater so I tell her.

“How do you know?” she sneers at me.  

I say, “Because before Jade cursed you, we were playing by the river. Then, you fell in. Without thinking, I jumped in after you and didn’t take a breath, and we could breathe and talk underwater!”

She’s surprised, so I tell her the truth about E.J. and she remembers me being her real friend. Poof. The spell is broken.

                      

Chapter Two: Harmony & Jade

“It’s such a wonderful day! Ouch! Who did that… Jade!”

“What? You don’t have to scream to get me here, like, that’s so rude, and like, what do you want from me, because like, you always torture me. You took away my only BFF who liked me, and you are so mean, and everyone but you is like, nice to me. Like, you’re trying to take my prince away now!!!” she sneers.

“No, I’m not, Jade! First of all, I only have a crush on Jake, and maybe I do really like him, but that’s none of your business! Second of all, he didn’t like you anyway, and third of all, I never stole Jake from you!!!”

Then, Jade stiffens.

“You scared or what?”

I’m surprised that she doesn’t react. She seems to be staring at something behind me, so I turn around to see Jake!

He is blushing, and he says, “Hey Harmony, can we talk please?”

                 

Chapter Three: Jake & Harmony

“Um, hi Jake. Sure, we can talk. What time? Or now?”

“Uhm, after school, I guess. Is that an okay time Harmony? Is it okay if we meet at the fairy fountain?”

“Yeah, sure Jake. I just have to tell my mom where I’m going. I’ll give her a tweet.”

“See ya later.”

OMR (Oh my ra) I am going to talk to Jake, but it looks like Jade is fuming. You should see her. It’s hilarious. Even my club members are snickering. Oh yeah, I forgot to mention I have a group that follows me around, and the great part about that is that they used to be a part of E.J.s group. They dropped it because E.J. was like, so cruel to them.

 

After school, I go to the fairy fountain, and you know what I see? I see Jake and E.J. kissing. Yes, I am serious. Let me spell it out for you: K-I-S-S-I-N-G.

I was about to run away with tears in my eyes when Jake caught a glimpse of me and said, “This isn’t what it looks like, Harmony! I can explain!”

“No, you don’t have to explain. I can see the whole truth right here. All you have been doing is using me! I never want to see you again or talk to you again!”

                 

Chapter Four: Harmony’s Rage

I can’t believe it. Jake told me to talk to him, but what he really wanted me to see is that. He has been dreading me ever since I arrived at school. You know what, I’m going to ignore him in the halls whenever he tries to talk to me.

***

Grrrr!!! I hate everything and my whole life!!! (Except for Wilma and my group.) Jake, that no good ex-best boyfriend or ex-boyfriend, keeps on bothering me about how he’s really telling the truth, and how Jade was forcing him, and he didn’t want to k-i-s-s  E.J.

You know what I said in return?

I just wish I could be the girls in my favorite song, Black Magic by the Little Mix. I’m just gonna practice my magic for the rest of the afternoon. But first, I have to get my books.

 

Chapter Five: Jade’s Evil Plan

Mwa ha ha ha!! Finally, something unexpected happens! See here, you pile of dirty trash! I took Jake’s letter for Harmony about making out in the fairy bakery! Now I’ll go instead and spy on Jake!

(Little does Jade know she is being watched by someone named Wilma.)

                 

Chapter Six: How Harmony’s Going to Deal with this Mess

I’m just sitting here and letting everyone spoil my life, but now I’m not going to, and I’m going to make a spell to make me a person who will not be who I was before, and I think I might have found it…

           

Chapter Seven: Wilma’s Plan

“Where’s Harmony, Jake?” I say nervously with a tone of anger in my voice.  

“I…I… I don’t kn-kn-know,” Jake says, his voice sounding shaky.

“What happened to you? Also, I want to know why my best friend just ran past me saying you’re a big, fat, lying, flying toad-rat!!!”

But Jake just sits there mumbling something I can’t hear, but it kind of sounds like, “I never ever want to love anyone but Harmony. Where’s her reply?”

As I leave, I think, Didn’t I see Jade holding a letter that had the initials H.D.? Wait a second, those are Harmony’s initials. Gasp! Jade took harmony’s letter from Jake!!! It’s time for payback, slime time!

                 

Chapter Eight: Jade’s Rage

“Like, I need to change form and turn into stupid Harmony. So Jakey poo will think I am her, and then when he proposes to me (which he will in the future,) I will reveal myself. I bet he won’t even notice it was me the whole time!” I say cruelly to her magic mirror.

While I am learning how to change in my dorm, Willow, or whatever her name is, is spying on me, and I don’t even know, and what happens next is unbelievable. I open my closet to find the perfect dress to match my form, and then all of a sudden, almost permanent squishy slime comes pouring down on top of my beautiful hair.

The headmistress comes in and says, “ Why, uhm…Jade!! What are you doing in that slime? It will take forever to wash off. Your punishment is that you must clean yourself up, and since you’re already dirty, clean and plant new plants in the garden because this sort of slime is good for plants.”

When I finally see Wilma, she is slyly slipping out of my room, giggling. I will get revenge tomorrow!

“Jade, since you seem so excited, let’s have you do it until you’re done with your learning here,” said the headmistress.

 

Chapter Nine: Restoring Harmony Back To Normal (With the Headmistress)

“Harmony! Harmony! I got Jade, now you can have some time with Jake without getting interrupted!”

“Hey Wilma, who’s Jake?”

I am so shocked when I hear that!

“Harmony, don’t you remember Jake? He’s your crush!”

“Wilma, what are you talking about?”

Then, I see it. Her spell books are all open. The floor is a mess, and on the spell book table, is the forgetting spell. Almost irreversible! I have to get her to the headmistress right away!

“Headmistress! Harmony did the forgetting spell on herself!”

“Wilma I’m glad you told me as fast as you can. Please step out of my room, I will restore Harmony back to normal as fast as I can. Before this is permanent.”   

 

Chapter Ten: Harmony’s Back

“Wilma, I am so sorry!”

“Harmony, are you okay! What were you thinking!”

“I am so sorry. I just thought that if I forget some things, then life would feel better! But I just felt like a puzzle with the pieces of my picture missing.”

Then, all of a sudden, in comes a boy who has black hair with sky blue highlights and a pair of sweatpants and sweatshirt that says “Jake.”

“Harmony! You’re okay! Jade is gone from our life now, and we can all live in peace and Harmony!”

“I am so glad Jake, but why were you kissing Jade at the Fountain?”

“I was under a spell she cast on me, and I couldn’t stop following her orders, like “Love me forever.” But what she didn’t know is that if the person under the spell sees their true love, then the spell will be broken.”

“Now that’s the whole truth. We don’t have to worry any more!”  

 

The Green Place

Andy woke up one morning. He saw the stars over his head. For the first time in his life, they weren’t animated. His family had been on the camp’s waiting list for exactly 12 years: his entire life. The day had finally come, and he was camping. This was the only place left on Earth with greenery. The rest of Earth, besides anything historical, was either a factory, hover lane, or skyscraper.

There was no need for water, since the great reservoir had been put on the moon in 2159. His great-grandpa had actually worked on it too. It was something he had always bragged about to his friends, but now, he was regretting that he did. Because of that reservoir, all the farms were put on Mercury so that there could be more space on Earth. There was no need for plants on Earth, with water coming to Earth from the Moon and oxygen generators which were invented in 2239. But some botany activists worked their butts off for years trying to save this old piece of land, or as it was known as a few hundred years ago: the Amazon rainforest.

Andy lived on what was known as Halley’s Comet about 200 years back, but now it was a huge city, or one huge, glass building surrounding the comet completely. His house was newly connected to Earth by the flexible spaceway from the comet. His dad took the hover car to work every day. He was always really busy, especially now with his new invention of teleportation. This was known as teleX and was now in beta testing.

But Andy was here now, and he had two more nights left here at this camp, which didn’t even have a name. Well, it did, but the makers wanted it to be be as peaceful as possible, and they thought a name would hurt that in some way. Andy did not understand any of that. But really, he did not care. However, from the second he got there, he just called it “The Green Place.” A spinoff of the oldest ever recorded history of what historians called television. Anyway, the show was called “The Good Place” and he loved it. All 17 seasons.

Andy was depressed because he was going to go back to the comet early. Something had gone wrong with beta testing on teleX. They had to cut their trip short by one day. Something had gone wrong with the dark matter core on the planet x-38stv, a deserted planet where if the core exploded, there would not be that many problems. It had a direct tap of hot water from the moon’s reservoir to star in x-38stv’s solar system. This was because if the dark matter exploded, it would freeze the star, as his dad had told him as a joke, “That might not be that good.” But Andy had a feeling that he might not be kidding.

Later, he asked his science teacher about it, and she said that it could possibly cause a black hole only 1,934 million miles away from humans’ only intelligent life form connection. That could suck a planet into a black hole. This planet was inhabited by the alien species Qatari from the planet Quart. There were thousands of discovered life forms, but the most intelligent one resembled the Earth’s ape species and had shelter in trees. The Qatari had a highly advanced society, but was on shaky terms with Earth and were highly superior in technology. If the star froze and the Quart was destroyed, it could spark a war with the remaining colonies of the Qatari.

Andy had tried to talk his dad out of this invention, and even got his older sister Steff, short for Steffany, on board. Steff almost always disagreed with Andy. But his father assured both of them that there was nothing to worry about. However, his eye twitched, and Andy knew that his father’s eye twitched whenever he was lying.

Andy knew he had to get some information, and he had to act fast. The next day was a weekend, but his dad still had to work. Andy hid in the trunk of his dad’s hover car and flew down the spaceway to Earth. At Interstellar Labs, there were two soldiers guarding the entrance to the garage. They were going to check the car. He heard footsteps slowly advancing closer… and closer… and closer.

His dad was very high ranking at the company, so he had just gotten out when the guard opened the trunk. But they found nothing. He slammed the door of the trunk. The valet worker drove the car to the garage, parked it, and stepped out and walk away. As soon as he heard the worker leave, Andy crashed to the bottom of the trunk with a loud thump. He had managed  to cling to the top of the trunk and hold the position for five minutes. He lay down and dozed off for a short nap. He woke up in the trunk at 2:54. His holo watch informed him that he had been asleep for almost five hours.

Andy hopped out of the car and crawled out of the garage. He ran into the elevator and went to the 284th floor. This was in the middle of the lab building. He ran into his dad’s lab, hid in a closet, and looked through a crack in the door. It was 17 minutes before his dad came back with two astronomers in bright white coats and three military escorts with what looked like the chief of the Earth’s military behind them. Andy took out his new recorder download he got from his dad for his birthday. How ironic, he thought, with a smug look on his face. He then pressed the button and started recording.

The two astronomers were telling, fact after fact, about the location of the possible black hole and how in 1.263 seconds the planet Quart would be sucked into it. They also said that there was a 89.35% chance of teleX freezing the star, which the General heard and grinned at. After all the information had been spoken, his father simplified it and told it to the General. The General nodded and asked how quickly could they get teleX operational. He said they had new intel that the Quart we’re planning on attacking Earth in 17 days, and the Earth’s military, he said, would lose that battle.

Then, the General asked if they could plant an explosive in teleX to make a 100% chance that the star would freeze. One astronomer said that would be impossible. An explosion would cause the star to overheat and explode, creating larger damage, but in a smaller radius that would not affect Quart at all. The general nodded and said to start operation IAA in 15 days and come up with a plan B if it failed. With that, he stormed out with two of the three guards, leaving one to secure the area. His father then yelled over the loudspeaker that there were 12 hours till launch.

Suddenly, the guard pulled open the door and grabbed Andy by the shirt.

“Andy!” his father yelled.

His father was up against the glass opening in the door.

His father yelled, “You are not going to tell anybody. Do you understand?”

“Of course I am!” Andy angrily yelled back.

“You are not leaving this room until you realize what you’re doing,” he yelled and the lock clicked shut.

He stormed off and a guard walked in to take his place.

 

There were four minutes left until TeleX was turned on. After that, the army would release them to tell the public what had happened. But they were not there to say the truth. Instead, they were to lie to the world, say that they had no idea of the possible outcome of teleX, and that they would like to deeply apologize to the Quarti and blah, blah, blah. The speech was already written, and his father was probably memorizing it.

Andy suddenly hated his dad. He did not care about any of the good his dad had done. Rage slowly filled his body, engulfing him in a fire fueled by the hate for his father. It had been hours since that door was opened, and he was shoved inside. He knew he had to escape, and he set his mind to it.

He quickly assessed his surroundings. There was an air vent on the ceiling and a table in the corner. That was it. A plan had started to form in his mind. Inch by inch, he quietly moved the table to the spot right below the air vent. He then climbed on the table and took his lightweight, metal wallet out of his pocket. He got it for last Christmas. He threw it as hard as he could at the grate, and eventually, the grate fell into his arms. He hopped up and climbed through the grate system. Then, after what felt like hours of climbing downwards, the ground suddenly fell out under him. He fell out. He was falling for what felt like eternity, but he actually hit the ground in less than just two seconds. The grate exit was on the first floor.

He got up and could feel the deaths of millions of innocent Qarti; it shook him to his core. He knew that the best thing he could do to avenge them was to let the truth be told to the world. With that, he ran with his head held high to the news building.

As he reached to the news building, a reporter had his holoscreen on and was typing while walking home. He ran up to him and caught a glimpse of what the reporter was typing. The reporter had almost nothing written down, but the title was standing out to all willing to read it.

“Planet Destroyed,” it read.

This reporter was desperate for information. Andy could see it on his face.

Andy said, “I know what happened to planet Quart.” The reporter’s ears perked up. And with that, Andy told his story.

 

The Crazy Adventure

It all started when my bear named Caramel had a secret. His secret was that he was alive. It was Saturday night. While we were sleeping, I fell off my bed.

“Oof!”

Then, Caramel and I woke up, and it was 1:00 am! Since it was so early, I decided that we could have an adventure. I tiptoed downstairs and got our foldable zipline. Then, I set up the zipline and got on while Caramel sat in my lap.

When we were riding on the zipline, Caramel suddenly screamed, “Caramel alert!”

Then, I realized what he was screaming about. We were heading straight toward the pool! As soon as we hit the pool, we blacked out.

When I woke up, floating on my back, Caramel said “Wake up!” Caramel carried me out of the pool.

Then, we saw some rings. When we put them on, we were flying!

“Perfect, now we can fly!” I happily shouted. Then, my ring fell off.

“Aaah!” I screamed.

Then, just in time, Caramel flew down to me and caught me! By the time I knew it, we were in the sky!

“Wow!” Caramel exclaimed.

One hour later, we saw something ahead of us. When we got closer, we saw that it was a plane! We turned down and landed on another plane. When we went inside the plane, Caramel was hypnotized by the restaurant. I grabbed Caramel by the ear and dressed him up in fancy clothes and took him to the restaurant.

When we walked through the restaurant, Caramel snuck some food into his pockets. Then, Caramel asked the waiter to have a room to sleep in. When we got to the room, Caramel took the disguise off and started climbing out of the window. I held onto Caramel and flew down one mile until we saw something grey coming really fast toward us. It was a tornado!

“Aaahhh!!!”

When we both woke up, we realized that we were falling because Caramel didn’t have his ring! One minute later, we saw something blue. I realized that we were heading toward the same pool!

“Uuuuuhhhh” I whined.

When we got in the water, we fell asleep right away again. I was half-awake when Caramel shouted, “Wake up!!!”

We quickly tiptoed back to my room and had breakfast in bed. After that, we played outside all day long until lunch time.

All of a sudden, Caramel and I saw something big and blue in the distance. I noticed that it was a flood!

“Aaaaahhh!!!” I screamed. “Run, Caramel, run!!!”

As we were running, Caramel tripped onto me, and we fell into a huge, endless tunnel.

“Aaaaahh!!!” I screamed.

I woke up with a huge bonk on my head. I woke up in a snap. I realized that I was back in my bedroom.

It had all been a dream!

 

The Fashion Show

Hello, my name is Sage. I have friends named Sofia, Marli, and Amelia. I live in Orlando, Florida, and Sofia lives in Pierre, South Dakota, Marli lives in New York City, New York, and Amelia lives in L.A.

One evening, I called Marli on the phone.

“Hi! Is it okay if we come to New York to your house? I was thinking we could have a fashion show at The Cool Girl.”

That’s the name of the store I own in New York. Since I own it, we wouldn’t have to book ahead.

“Hi! Of course, Sage. Come tomorrow! We can get ready for the fashion show.”

“Well, let me call Amelia and Sofia and see if they can make it, and see what they’re up to.”

Then, I called Amelia. “Hi! We’re going to have a fashion show in New York.”
“I’m available, but I’m too nervous. Do I have to be the model?” Amelia said.

“Maybe. Or maybe it’ll be Sofia.”

“Okay, I’ll book my ticket,” Amelia said.

I got to the airport, and I got on a the plane. I flew up and up and up and up and up, and then, the plane landed. I was so excited to see my friends.

I called my friend and said, “Hi, Amelia! I just landed. I am in New York. Are you here?”

Amelia said, “Hi, I am so sorry I was late for the call. No, sorry, not yet.”

Then, I said, “Okay, honey. It is not your fault.”

And she said, “Thank you so much.”

So then, I called Sofia and she said, “Hey girl, what’s up? Whatcha think?”

“Hey, Sofia, I am in New York. Are you here?”

Sofia said, “I can’t talk right now.”

So I said, “Okay, later.”

Then, I called Marli, and she said, “Hi, where is everybody?”

And I said, “Sofia is on the plane, Amelia is still packing, and I am in New York just in the car. Lots of traffic!”

A few hours later, we were all in New York and checked into our rooms at the Princess Hotel. We got dressed and met at the hotel restaurant to eat dinner. We talked about the fashion show, and when we were done eating, we started to go up to our rooms again. We washed our faces, brushed our teeth so they were clean and shiny, and put makeup on. We were finally done. We went downstairs again and took a cab to my store.

We put on music and started setting up for the fashion show. It was empty, just us. We hung a disco ball in the center, and turned it on. We decorated the front, put out a red carpet and then chairs so people could watch. I felt really happy. We were starting our first fashion show together. We practiced before the real show. We all felt totally happy.

The next night, we all walked to The Cool Girl. I got Amelia dressed and ready, but she said to me, “I’m so scared, Sage.’’

I said, “It’s okay, honey, don’t worry at all. We are all good.’’

She sighed. “Okay, thanks, Sage.”
I gave her a hug.

“No problem, hon. Now we should get to work.”

She hugged me back.

“I agree.”

“I used to be scared of modeling. You know what? I will go with you.”

Amelia looked surprised. “Oh my god! Great, thanks!”

I walked with her on the red carpet. There was music and a disco ball. The room was really big with a lot of people. That was why she was so scared.

After walking, she said to me, “That was not bad.”

After that night, we had a party with music, a lot of people, and a disco ball. We hugged at the end, and everyone said “Yay!”

We all had fun, and we did it!

 

The Day the Crayons Went to the Moon

Estabon the Magnificent and his troop were building a spaceship, but they did not find the materials they needed: ice and fur. They went to Antarctica to look for ice, and they were freezing cold when they were carrying the ice. The ice was to build the spaceship, but they needed fur, too. They found a mammoth and used her fur to cover the walls.

Once they were done, there was a helicopter flying over the crayons, and the engine fell, so Estabon the Magnificent put the engine in their spaceship.

Finally, Estabon the Magnificent turned on the engine. It made a loud noise like “Boo!”

Estabon the Magnificent told his dad, who was part of his troop, to steer the wheel, so he did. His dad’s name was Estabon the Awesome. Soon, they started to fly.

Then, they arrived at the moon!!! So they came out of the spaceship. It was freezing. Estabon the Magnificent and Estabon the Awesome put their spacesuits on. They saw orange and blue robots. The robots had cameras, and there was a crayon scientist next to the robots. The scientist thought about joining Estabon the Magnificent’s troop.

The scientist told his robots to dig until they found a rainbow crystal. The robots were digging and digging until they found a red light, so they kept on digging. Then, they found the rainbow crystal! Inside the rainbow crystal was a frozen crayon, which was so frozen that he had white on him because of the ice.

Then, Estabon the Awesome loaded the frozen crayon inside of the rainbow crystal into the spaceship. The crystal was so rainbowy that it shined through the spaceship window. Red, blue, and yellow shone onto the top of the scientist’s head.

Then, the crayons started writing letters to Duncan, who lived on Earth. Duncan was the owner of the crayons — he was a human. The letters were about how they missed him.

I miss you, the crayons wrote.

Estabon the Magnificent wrote to Duncan:

 

I miss you. I hope I’ll come back soon. And can you build us another spaceship? Because there are more crayons on Earth that want to come with us to space and see. Do you mind making us a surprise? And are there any more crayon scientists on Earth?

P.S. We found a shiny crystal with a frozen crayon in it.

 

They sent the letters by putting it on one of the scientist’s space parachutes, and luckily, it landed in Duncan’s backyard.

Duncan sent a letter back by using the same parachute, but the parachute flew east and the crayons were in the west. The scientist saw the parachute and sent three of his robots to get the letter. Finally, three hours later, the robots brought back the letter.

Duncan wrote:

 

I am making a surprise, like you asked, and I am working on your new spaceship. The spaceship will be sent on the parachute if you can just send it back.

 

The parachute got to Duncan’s backyard, so then, he sent the awesome, fabulous, cool, great, amazing, unbelievable, outstanding, and spectacular spaceship.

The spaceship looked like the first spaceship that Estabon the Magnificent made, with ice for the walls and fur to cover the walls.

 

All About My Family

CHAPTER 1

I went to writing class, and we started to write on our computers. I felt excited because it was my first time writing on computers. I learned not to throw my computer on the floor, and I wrote a book about my family.

My family wanted to grow bigger, but the obstacle was the doctor, who wouldn’t let my family get another baby.

Then, my family went to another doctor, and that doctor said we could get another baby. My family felt happy because we wanted to grow a bigger family, and our wish came true.

 

CHAPTER 2

The baby was born too early, so my family had to go back to the hospital and get the baby better.

My family was not happy. They were worried.

The doctors opened the baby’s brain because a bone wasn’t straight, and if the bone wasn’t straight, the baby would have a pointed head.

They fixed the bone, and the baby was better.

My family was very, very happy.

 

 

Owlette and Sugar

Sugar was trying to figure out a way to give the crystal to somebody so they could watch the dogs. She decided to go onto her parents’ computer and make a flyer that said, “I will give you the crystal if you will come and watch the dogs.” She printed it and hung it in her neighborhood.

A lot of people came and looked at the dogs to see if they wanted to watch them, but Sugar couldn’t find anyone she liked yet, and nobody wanted to do it.

Sugar decided to call Owlette to help her get someone to watch the dogs. Owlette came over and helped Sugar find someone.

Then, they found someone they loved in the interview. It was a kid who loved crystals and dogs, so she’d decided to apply. The kid’s name was Emma.

But Emma wasn’t good in person. She had lied in the interview. When the dogs weren’t good, she hit them with a baseball bat. When the dogs didn’t eat all their dinner, she didn’t give them any bones. And when they growled at her, she put a cone around their head. She also taught them how to type so they could type for her.

So she got fired. Sugar and Owlette got upset that they had tried so many people, so they thought that getting the crystal hadn’t been worth it. They decided to make the crystal more exciting by trying something else. They decided to give people a little piece of the crystal each time, instead of giving the whole crystal at once.

Owlette had a tiny axe that was really sharp, so they broke the crystal one piece at a time. They thought they got one more person, but the person was bad. She was only there in the morning for a couple of minutes and at night for an hour. They wanted someone to be there with them all day, so they fired the new girl.

Owlette and Sugar went to the jewelry store and said, “I’ll give you this little piece of crystal for some jewelry.”

The jeweler said, “Yes.”

They gave him a piece of the crystal about the size of a marker, and he gave them some gold and silver rings and necklaces. Owlette and Sugar thought that this was better because normally, jewelry costs a lot of money, and since they had just given a little bit of crystal, it was a good trade.

They found a boy named Shoes who would watch the dogs. Shoes walked them every day, fed them, and groomed them. One day, while Shoes walked the dogs, Shoes wanted to know how they got the crystal. And Sugar didn’t like when she was asked that. She was about to say so, when she realized that she could talk, but dogs can’t talk. So she was just mad, and she tugged on the leash to go back home. Shoes finally decided to go home because he was about to fall from all the tugging.

When they got home, Sugar got no treat that night. Shoes was really mad at Sugar. Sugar did something one day so Shoes wouldn’t be mad anymore. It took Sugar a while to figure out what she could do, and she finally came up with a good idea. Sugar was going to go to the dog park, because she was old enough now to go by herself. At the dog park, Sugar found an empty bird nest, which she brought home for Shoes because she knew he loved birds. Shoes wasn’t mad at Sugar anymore. That night, Sugar got two treats.

The next day Shoes and Sugar went for a very long walk. During the walk, Sugar decided to jump in a big mud puddle and got all dirty. Shoes tried to get Sugar out of the mud, but Shoes also fell in the mud. Shoes was mad and got Sugar and ran home. Shoes jumped right into the shower and forgot about how Sugar was all messy. Sugar got all the furniture dirty!

When Shoes came out, he saw what was going on and ran to Sugar and brought her in the bath. After he cleaned up all the furniture, Shoes had to take another shower because he got all dusty and dirty. All the mud got on him, and then the dust got on the mud. When Shoes walked into the bathroom, he realized he’d forgotten to turn the water off in the bathtub so there was water everywhere! It looked like someone took buckets and poured water all over. Shoes cleaned it up, then dried up Sugar, and finally took a shower.

Owlette knocked on the door while Shoes was in the shower. Sugar barked to tell Owlette that the door was open. So Owlette opened the door and Sugar came running out. Then, Owlette and Sugar took a walk outside without Shoes! When Shoes got out of the shower, he didn’t see them anywhere.

He went outside and saw Sugar and Owlette two blocks away. Shoes was running to catch them, but Sugar thought it was a game so she kept running for many blocks. Finally, Sugar got tired and plopped down on someone’s yard. The person who owned that house walked out and started sneezing! He sneezed 100 times in a row. He was allergic to dogs! Shoes picked up Sugar and ran home so that nothing would happen. Owlette flew behind them.

Once they got back to the house, Sugar and Owlette had to go to Sugar’s bedroom.

“That was a close one!” Sugar said to Owlette.

“We cannot talk. We are not supposed to talk!” Owlette replied.

All of a sudden, Shoes walked in. This time he wasn’t mad. Shoes was laughing so hard that his eyes were turning purple. Sugar and Owlette had no idea why Shoes was laughing so hard. Then finally, Shoes stopped laughing.

“That was my friend, and we do lots of jokes on each other,” said Shoes.

He was really happy that Sugar landed on his yard because his friend was really just joking. He wasn’t actually allergic, Shoes was just pretending that he forgot that he knew that he wasn’t allergic. His friend got really mad.

That night, Shoes started laughing really hard again. He forgot to give Sugar her dinner. Sugar started barking and Shoes laughed all the way out the door. Shoes accidently left the dog food on the floor and Sugar ate the whole thing. Sugar didn’t realize it was the wrong bag — it was really rice.

Owlette then said to Sugar, “Where is your mom and dad and your two brothers and sisters?”

Then Sugar realized that when Owlette opened the door, everyone ran out. Now Sugar and Owlette had to find everyone.

Sugar’s sister Chewey loved the dog park, so they went there first. They didn’t see Chewey until they were walking out of the gate to the dog park. Chewey was behind the bush near the gate, and they saw her hiding. Chewy ran away fast because she didn’t want to go back home. Sugar forgot to tell Chewey that Owlette was friendly, and so Chewey thought that Owlette was going to eat her. Sugar ran off to catch Chewey, and finally, Chewey was tired from running.

Sugar said quietly, “Owlette won’t eat you.”

Chewey said, “It’s not Owlette that I’m running from. It’s that there’s a person going around the dog park trying to get all the dogs, and the person has not gotten a dog yet, but all of the dogs are trying not to get taken.”

Then, Chewey said, “RUN!” because the person was right behind them!

When Sugar turned around, she realized it was Shoes! Sugar was so shocked that she forgot she wasn’t supposed to talk.

She said, “Why are you chasing us, Shoes?”

Shoes was too focused on getting the dogs to realize she had even talked.

He said, “Because I’m mad at you guys, and I do not like dogs anymore. I want to get all the dogs. I’m mad because you got me all dirty, and I remembered that when I was a kid, my dad was in expensive clothes and our dog pushed him in the mud. It ruined his only pair of clothes because it had taken all his money to get those clothes, so he had no clothes. He never took off the clothes, not even to wash them. I’m tired of dogs making messes and walking them and doing whatever the dogs want to do. I’m tired of remembering to feed the dogs.”

Owlette saw Shoes running to get Sugar, and Sugar couldn’t run away because her leg was caught in a bush. Owlette came flying down, knocking down Shoes. She then helped Sugar escape from the bush. Sugar ran as fast as she could, and by that time, she had gotten out. Shoes wanted to get Owlette. Shoes decided to take a nap at Sugar’s home and go back to the dog park. When Shoes got back he decided to pack up all his stuff. He got in his car and drove to his house. He unpacked all of his stuff, went to his living room, and tried to come up with another plan.

He decided to call the police because he could not come up with anything else to do. But he called 911 with three ones, so 9111. They called the wrong police that were two hours away. When the police found out, they tried to find out what Shoes was going to do to the other dogs. The police wanted to help the dogs, not Shoes, so they searched for them. The police forgot to ask Shoes which dog park it was, causing them to go to the wrong one. They finally realized that this was a dog park not many people went to and the main dog park was two hours from them. So the police decided not to go to the main dog park.

Sugar remembered about Chewey and her family. They knew that Chewey had run to the other side of the dog park, and so they went to the grassy side of the dog park, where it smelled of flowers, to get Chewey. They saw Chewey and told Chewey very quietly that Shoes had gone back to his home.  

Chewey was mad at Sugar because Sugar had hired Shoes. Chewey said, “Why did you hire Shoes if he was going to chase after us?”

Sugar said, “Because I didn’t know that Shoes was going to chase us!”

Chewey replied, “Don’t you remember that Shoes has the crystal?”

Sugar retorted, “I forgot about the crystal!’’

Sugar didn’t really care about the crystal right now because she had to find her family.

“How are we going to find everyone if we don’t know where they are?” Chewey asked.

“I don’t know how we will find them, but we should try!”

Chewey remembered hearing that the brothers were going to the beach, but Chewey didn’t know which beach.

Sugar said, “I think that the only beach they know is Book Beach.”

So they took a taxi to Book Beach. All they saw were two dogs way out in the ocean. Chewey didn’t like to swim, but Sugar did as long as she had a vest. But they had only had enough money to get the taxi, so she couldn’t get a vest. They ran home to get Owlette and some money.

When they got back to Book Beach, Owlette flew over the ocean to get the brothers. The brothers came back to shore, but they were all wet so they couldn’t get in a taxi to go back home. They all walked home together.

The brothers remembered hearing the parents say, “Let’s go on vacation to Malibu,” when the door was open.

Owlette was able to catch them before they got in the car, and they went back home.

Then, everyone decided to get the crystal back. They knew where Shoes had gone off to, so they were going to go to Shoes’s house, knock on the door, hide, and sneak in while Shoes had the door open. Once they were inside, they would find the crystal, put it in Sugar’s big backpack, and take it back home. Then, they would use it to find another owner.

In the car on the way to Shoes’s house, Sugar forgot to bring the backpack, so they went back, got the backpack, and headed back to Shoes’s house. They knocked on the door. Shoes opened it, and they all snuck in and ran to Shoes’s bedroom. He didn’t notice them because they were quiet and close to the ground, and Shoes was very tall. They found the crystal under Shoes’s bed. They put it in Sugar’s backpack and zipped it up, but when they got back to the door, they had to find a way to get out!

Sugar remembered hearing Shoes talk about the doggie door at the back door. She told her family very quietly, “There’s a doggie door at the back. Let’s go.”

They got out, jumped over the fence, and headed back home.

When they got back to their house, Sugar said to everyone, “We don’t need to find an owner anymore. I think I’m old enough to take care of myself.”

The parents said that they didn’t know that the crystal had been to find an owner, but they agreed that Sugar could take care of herself.

Sugar decided to give the crystal to her grandma because her grandma loved crystals. She felt sad because she’d tried so hard and so long to find an owner, and she just couldn’t, no matter how hard she tried.

Owlette knew that Sugar was sad.

She said, “Since you’re not as busy now, and you don’t have an owner, you don’t have to worry about listening to the owner, and you can visit me more!”

Sugar felt a little better, but not too much. In her head, she secretly was happy to take care of herself, but she didn’t want to show it because she wanted her family to pay attention to her because she was sad!

 

The Chronicles of Lincoln Middle School

Penny, September 9th

Beep! Beep! Beep! I rolled over and threw my pillow under my bed at the alarm clock. As usual, I missed. Groaning, I got up and crawled under my bed where I kept my alarm clock. I felt around in the dark trying to find it. I found more than few long-lost library books and then my shrieking alarm. I whacked it.

Then, I stood up and started for the door, bumping my head and getting a giant bruise in the process. My tangled, brown hair was covered with dust bunnies. I went down the stairs walking almost zombie-like. I sat at the still brand new table and started on the bowl of Cheerios.

“So!” my mom said while spreading jelly on her eggs (She’s a horrible multi tasker.) “Are you excited for your first day at Lincoln?”

I shrugged. In August, my family had moved to this small town in Pennsylvania. Today was the first day of my new middle school.

After breakfast, I grabbed my stuffed (and really heavy) backpack and ran out the door. The bus was just leaving. I ran after it, waving my arms up and down. The driver looked at his mirror and suddenly stopped the bus with a screech. The doors opened, and I stumbled inside.

As I walked towards the back of the bus, I noticed a pair of striking blue eyes staring at me. I put my head down and walked to the nearest empty seat. I sat down and opened my book.

“Hi!” said a perky voice.

I jumped. Next to me was a girl with short, red hair and green eyes.

She looks like a talking Christmas card! I thought.

“My name’s Lila! It’s really nice to meet you. Are you nervous? I’m not. If I was nervous, I would be talking fast. Oh no! I’m talking fast, aren’t I?” She paused. “Hi! My name is Lila! It’s really nice to meet you. Are you–”

“I actually am sort of nervous. My name is Penny. I’m new here,” I interrupted.

“Oh cool! What grade are you in?”

“Sixth.”

“I am too!”

Nice! I thought. Maybe this school won’t be so bad after all!

***

I had managed to find my way through the crowded hallways and found a seat next to my new friend Lila. We were in the same homeroom! (Room 305)

“Okay, class! My name is Ms. Hicks. Today we will be reviewing some four-digit long division.”

The class groaned.

“But first, we have a surprise for you!”

Everyone exchanged glances. What was the surprise?

“We are going to have ballroom dancing lessons!” Ms. Hicks said.

This was followed by more groans.

“Allow me to introduce you to Miss Willow, your ballroom dancing teacher.”

Miss Willow? I thought. Ballroom dancing? What century is this?

A woman wearing a bright yellow skirt that blended into the classroom walls and a cherry-colored shirt walked into the room.

“Okay, everyone,” Miss Willow said. “Let’s move these desks.”  

Once the screeching had ended, Miss Willow began to speak.

“Today, we will learn the first few steps of the merengue,” Miss. Willow said. “But before that, I am wondering if anyone has any questions.”

“I do!” The same pair of blue eyes glanced at me. “Uhm, I was–I was wondering if we would have uh, uhm, partners.”

Some girls started to giggle. Miss Willow raised her hands for quiet.

She looked at a piece of paper in her hand.

“Yes, Timothy.” So that’s his name! I thought. “We will have partners but they will not be permanent. We will choose your real partners later. Any more questions? No? Okay. Let’s get started!”

After everyone stopped giggling and screaming whenever they were told to dance with someone, the class actually went pretty well! Miss Willow was a kind and silly teacher. (The best kind!) In the class, she made sort of half-jokes to help us learn.

Once, when she was teaching us the positions, she said, ”Never touch the lady’s hips. Her father will come and get you!”

Of course, that set the gigglers off again. A lot of partners made faces at each other. Lila stuck her tongue out at me. I waved.

My partner, Timothy didn’t do any of these things. He just smiled and chuckled instead. I tried to say something cool or interesting. In fact, I wished that I could have just said anything! Even just a “Hi!” would have been nice. But no. My throat was so dry that my “Hi!” turned into a coughing fit. Great first impression, Penny, great.

***

After the class, I went to English. There was no teacher in sight. On the whiteboard in big, bold letters were the words: “Read independently. I will back soon. – Mrs. Brown”

I happily plopped down in a chair. I looked around. Lila wasn’t in the class. Timothy was. I saw him and moved over a desk so he could sit next to me. He saw and sat down in it. He smiled at me. He had very white teeth. I giggled. He heard and smiled again. I blushed, then stuffed my nose into my book.  

We sixth graders have the earliest lunch in the school. It’s third period. In fifth grade, I had a sixth period lunch. Weird, right? Today, we had an even earlier lunch because at third period, an electrician was coming to fix the lights in the cafeteria. Anyway, I had just ran from English class to here. (The situation with Timothy had gotten worse.)

“Hey Penny!” called Lila, “Over here!”

I plopped down in the seat that Lila had saved me.

“What happened to you? Your face is as red as my hair!”

Chocolate milk spurted out of my mouth.

“Oh, uhm. Nothing,” I laughed nervously.

“What do you mean nothing? You can tell me. Come on.”

“Well, I–”

Luckily, my sentence was interrupted by–well, guess who?

“Hi, Penny! I, uhm, I was wondering if you wanted to come to my party on Sunday,” Timothy said.

I felt my face go red.

“Uhm, okay, uh, sure!”

I took his invitation with shaking hands and stuffed it into my pocket. He smiled, then went back to his table of loud boys. I turned around to Lila making kissing noises.

“Hey!” I said.

“What?” Lila said, “You can’t deny it.”

 

Penny, September 15th

I looked at the blue dress, then the red one. Then the blue one, then the red one. I had just woken up  and was trying on different outfits to wear to Timothy’s party. (It’s today!) I sighed then reread my invitation.

Come to My 12th Birthday Party!

Where: 233 Oak Street

When: 8:00 to 10:00

Activities: Dancing! Games! Fun Stuff!

-Timothy

Even though I was super excited to go to the party, I needed major help. Then, I remembered. Lila had given me her phone number! I picked up the phone and dialed the number. Ugh. Voicemail. I tried again. Nothing.

That was strange. I thought. Lila always answers my calls. Maybe she was abducted by aliens! Or was attacked by a creature with seven legs! Or–

Then, I remembered that she was on a plane to California to visit her Uncle Joe. Oops! It was going to be a long morning.

***

Once I had decided on a dress (the blue one) and brushed and curled my hair and ate breakfast and brushed my teeth about five times and ate about a thousand breath mints that smelled like cherry soda,  I was ready to go. I bought a present for Timothy, then climbed into the car with my dad.

“So Penny!” my dad said. “Is this Timothy a friend of yours or maybe a boy–”

“Dad! Shut up! I–”

“Hi, Penny!” Timothy was outside the car window waving at me.

“Bye Dad!”

I ran out of the car and followed Timothy into his house.

***

Timothy’s house had velvet chairs and chandeliers hanging from the ceiling. It did not seem like a place where loud music and flashing lights would be, but there they were. I joined in the the dancing. Timothy came over.

“Uh, hey Penny,” Timothy said.

“Hi,” I said.

“Uhm, what are you doing tomorrow?”

“Uh, no–nothing. Why?”

“Well, I was wondering if–”

Timothy was interrupted by a weird looking boy with long, red hair and dozens of freckles.

“Hey Timothy! Is that your girlfriend?” he said.

My face turned beet red.

“Shut up, Frank,” Timothy muttered.

“Is she? She better not be. She’s a total dork. And her friend Lila, don’t even get me started.”

Frank!!!” Timothy screamed.

He turned around towards me, but I was already out the door.

***

I ran through the now pouring rain with rivers of tears streaming down my face and questions running through my brain.

What was Timothy trying to ask me?  What if I really was as dorky as that boy said? Why had Timothy stood up for me like that?

I turned the corner and found what I had been looking for. A huge, brick building towered above me. The library. I climbed up the moss-covered stairs and slipped through the door. The inside was musty, and the chairs were breaking, but it was the safest place I could think of. Soaked and panting, I collapsed into a chair.

“Hello, Penelope!” a nearby librarian chirped.

“Hi, Beth,” I said quietly.

“What’s wrong, sweetheart?’

“It’s nothing,” I replied.

“Well, all right. If you need me, I’m always willing to listen.”

“Okay. Thanks.”

Beth smiled, then went back to stocking books.  

 

Penny, September 16th

Ring! Ring! Ring! Ring! Ring! Ring!

“Fire drill!” yelled Ms. Hicks, “Everyone make your way to the door!”

A horde of kids began to push their way to the door. I tried to walk forward while being jolted around, but it was almost impossible. I sighed, then made my way back to my desk. After the rest of the class had filed out of the classroom, I peeked around the doorway. The coast was clear. I finally ran out of the classroom to reunite with my class.

I tumbled down the stairs, then across the hall to the main door. I yanked at the door but it didn’t budge. I pulled it again. Nothing happened. Starting to panic, I ran across the hall to the other door. It didn’t open. Desperate, I ran over to the windows and try to pull one open. It didn’t move. I took a deep breath and tried to calm myself down. Clearly there was no way out. I’d just have to wait until my class came back and explain then.

As I sat in front of the door waiting for the drill to end, something strange happened. I began to smell smoke.

 

Timothy, September 16th

I watched Ms. Hicks as our worried looking history teacher whispered something to her.

“Oh my god!” Ms. Hicks exclaimed. “Uhm, okay everyone, I uh, need to take care of something. I’ll be right back.”

I looked around for Penny. I wanted to talk to her about last night. She wasn’t there.

That’s strange. I thought. Where’s Penny?  

I tried to remember when I last saw her. Well, I remembered seeing her in the corner of the room standing there when I left…OH! Why am I so stupid? While Penny patiently waited for all of us to get out of the building so she could leave, Mr. John (our principal) locked the door behind us. I sighed. Now she will never talk to me.

Just when I thought things couldn’t get any worse, I saw a cloud of smoke rising from the school.

“Penny!” I screamed.

Everyone looked up, then began to scream and cry. It was chaos. Teachers started to herd kids away from the school. I ran to our science teacher, Mr. Ross.

“Penny’s in there!”

His eyes grew wide, then he raced towards the fire, pushing though students and teachers. He unlocked the door, then cautiously pulled open the door.

“Stand back,” he warned.

As the door creaked open, an ash-covered hand poked out. I grabbed it, then gave a mighty pull. Out came Penny, covered in dirt and ash, but fine. She looked at me gratefully, then began to cough up tons of ash. Stunned, I stumbled backwards. Soft but strong hands catched me, then turned me around.

“Let’s go,” Mom said.

Nodding, I let her lead me back to our car and put me in my seat. I stared out the window looking at the familiar buildings that we drove by, but only thinking of the beautiful, brown eyes, covered in dirt, but shining like diamonds.

 

Mr. MacaroonVoh

Once upon a time, there lived Mr. MacaroonVoh. Mr. MacaroonVoh kept walking through lots of snow. Mr. MacaroonVoh had never had a place to live before, so he always carried plates with him, just in case he found food somewhere.

He didn’t want someone to say, “Where are your plates? You need plates to eat.”

Mr. MacaroonVoh was walking with his plates through the snow and thought maybe he would land there. Mr. MacaroonVoh liked snow because it was cold. Mr. MacaroonVoh was pretty much like a snowman, but he never melted. His body was all white, so everybody always mixed him up with a snowman. His name used to be called Lila Moon, but people called him Mr. MacaroonVoh because he looked like a white macaroon.

When Mr. MacaroonVoh was a kid named Lila Moon, he never listened. When his parents would tell him to go to the grocery store, he would go to the candy store instead and buy ten thousand candies. When his parents would tell him to write a story all about himself, he would sneak out the door and go to his backyard. He would swim in the pool in the backyard for ten minutes. When his parents were cooking in the kitchen, they heard the pool noises. Lila Moon  would only swim when the wind was blowing, because his parents would think it was the wind and not him swimming. Lila Moon’s parents hit him for misbehaving. If he sang out, “Blah blah you can’t hit me!” his parents would lock him in his bedroom.

One day, Lila Moon’s parents said, “You know what, Mr. Lila Moon? You have been troubling us for too long. If you trouble us one more time, you will have to go away.”

Lila Moon knew he wasn’t supposed to use washable markers on the chalkboard, but he took it down anyway and got some Expo markers. He used green, red, black, and blue markers and scribble-scrabbled all over the board. He erased it so the color would get all blurry all over the chalkboard.

When his parents saw what he had done, they said, “Sorry, Mr. Lila Moon. You have made too many mistakes. You are ten years old and will have to find a new place to live.”

“You cannot make me leave!” said Lila Moon.

“Fine, then you can go play in the pool in the backyard,” said Lila Moon’s parents.

As soon as he went outside to play in the pool, Lila Moon’s parents locked the door and said, “Nah, nah, nah, you cannot get back inside! You have troubled us too much.”

***

Lila Moon walked and walked and walked. He walked through snow and coldness. He hated the snow and cold. But then, he saw a snowman. Lila Moon had never seen a snowman before. At first, he thought it was a blind girl, but then everybody said, “Hi, Mr. MacaroonVoh.”

He said, “That’s not my name! My name is Lila Moon.”

Everybody said, “Well, sorry, this is Neverending Snow Land. And you have to be named something white. Everybody has to like vanilla, so we named you Mr. MacaroonVoh.”

Mr. MacaroonVoh said, “Okay. I would love to live here. Can I?”

Everybody said, “Yes!”

Mr. MacaroonVoh had already made a friend. Her name was Lighty Light. Lighty Light had asked Mr. MacaroonVoh where he came from. Mr. MacaroonVoh was not sure what to say because he wasn’t sure where he had come from; he had forgotten. He had already had so much fun in Neverending Snow Land that it was hard to remember what it was like to not have a home.

“I’ve never had a home, so I’ve just been walking. I thought it would maybe be fun to live here,” said Mr. MacaroonVoh.  

“That’s very sad! Are you very hungry? Because I could ask you what vanilla thing you’d like to eat,” said Lighty Light.

“I would like a chocolate cupcake!” said Mr. MacaroonVoh. “Where is my chocolate cupcake?!” he yelled. “I’ve been asking for it for hours!!”

“We are not going to give you a chocolate cupcake! Remember what we told you? You just got here! You must eat something vanilla! It is compulsory,” everyone yelled back.

Lighty Light looked at everyone from Neverending Snow Land. “Stop! If you don’t stop yelling at my friend, I will go to another home with him!”

“Okay, go to another home! We don’t care!”

Lighty Light was surprised that everyone was acting so mean.

“You haven’t been like this all year. You haven’t been like this since I arrived here. Why are you acting this way?” asked Lighty Light.

Someone pushed through the crowd.

She said, “I am Fantastic Paper. My old name used to be Virey Moon.”

“Virey Moon,” said Mr. MacaroonVoh. “I think I know you.”

“How can you know me? I don’t know anybody named Mr. MacaroonVoh,” said Fantastic Paper.

“Well, my name used to be Lila Moon.”

Fantastic Paper paused. “Wait a second,” she said. “Let me think.”

Mr. MacaroonVoh stared at her to try and figure out what she was thinking.

“We are cousins!” yelled Fantastic Paper.

“Oh yeah! Woohoo!” Mr. MacaroonVoh and Fantastic Paper danced.

“Now all we have to do is find a few more friends and we can go home.”

“Do I have a home?” asked Mr. MacaroonVoh. “Wait. I need time to think, like you needed time.”

Mr. MacaroonVoh sat down on some snow and crossed his legs.

“Wait!” he shouted. “I did have a home! I used to be a bad boy, and my parents said for me to leave. That’s all I know.”

“Okay now, Mr. MacaroonVoh. If you weren’t behaving back then, have you learned your lesson now?” asked Fantastic Paper.

“Yes,” said Mr. MacaroonVoh.

“Well, what did you learn?” asked Fantastic Paper.

“I learned that if I do not listen, I won’t have a home,” said Mr. MacaroonVoh.

Meanwhile, Lighty Light was listening to the conversation from behind. She wanted to know about this new person in Neverending Snow Land. Right after their conversation, Fantastic Paper and Mr. MacaroonVoh left.

“I’m coming with you!” shouted Lighty Light.

The three walked out of the snow garage of Neverending Snow Land. It had old snow cars and broken, old things inside. They walked and walked and walked until they were almost out of the land.

They found ten kids. Their names were Tulip, Romina, Charlit, Rarity, Lina, Charlie, Rosie, Rasly, Laurie, and Jordan.

Lighty Light asked everyone, “Do you think it would be good to make a clubhouse?”

“Yes indeed!”

Fantastic Paper, Mr. MacaroonVoh, and Lighty Light started asking the ten people questions about themselves so they could know more about them. They wanted to focus more on building later.

Lighty Light asked Rasly, “What is your favorite color?”

Rasly said, “Purple!”

Mr. MacaroonVoh asked Tulip, “What is your favorite place to go for vacation?”

Tulip said, “Poconos.”

Fantastic Paper asked Lina, “How many years have you been in Neverending Snow Land?”

“I have been there for at least ten years,” said Lina.

Fantastic Paper, Mr. MacaroonVoh, and Lighty Light said, “Wow! You guys have a lot of details about yourselves. Very good. That’s exactly what we wanted to know about you.”

They started looking for an empty block with no snow so they could build their clubhouse. Soon, they found the perfect block. It had a lot of grass, so everybody said, “Let’s cut this! Let’s cut this!”

“Yes!” said Lighty Light, Mr. MacaroonVoh, and Fantastic Paper.

Then, they started cutting the grass with scissors. It took them one day to cut the grass because of their teamwork. They put the grass in the garbage bag. Now, they were all done. All they had to do was get some wood and some tools. They started walking more. They asked a long-haired man for some tools.

He said, “I am a building guy, and I build a lot.”

“Do you have any wood?” they asked.

The man said, “No, I ran out of wood.”

They said, “No problem. We’re just going to have to go get it from a tree.”

Virey Moon said, “You know what? Oh my gosh! My old house is just two blocks away. We could go there and get some wood. I have a station of wood. I could just ask my parents if we could take some.”

Tulip said, “Do you live here?”

Virey Moon said, “Nope, not at all. One day, a long time ago, my parents said, ‘We found this cold place you would like living in.’ Then, they told me not to worry, and they would always live in this exact spot.”

Soon, they got some wood and started to go to the grassy place.

“Let’s start building,” everyone said.

They put some more wood up until they had made a big square. They made a triangle on top and a chimney too! Now, they started to paint pink, blue, and red. All they needed to do now is let the paint dry. And then they needed to make some windows, some doors, and start using the club house! They cut some squares from the clubhouse and used glass for windows.                

And then, they put a little rectangle over a little hole to make a door. Then, they put a doorknob, and they saw and made sure that the door could open. As soon as it was done, they said, “Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday to you. Happy birthday Mr. MacaroonVoh.  Happy birthday to you.”

And Mr. MacaroonVoh said, “It’s my birthday today, it’s my birthday today,” dancing, shaking his waist, pushing down, and kicking out the ground.  

And everybody sang this song: “Over the river and through the woods to grandmother’s house we go. Over the river and through the woods, oh, how the wind does blow. It stings the toes and bites the nose as over the ground we go. Over the river and through the woods, trust fast my dapple gray. Spring over the ground like a hunting hound for this Thanksgiving day. Over the river and through the woods, grandmother’s cap I spy. Hooray for the fun, it couldn’t be done, hooray for the pumpkin pie!”  

Mr. MacaroonVoh said, “It is finally a day to relax. It’s my birthday today. It’s my birthday today. It’s finally my birthday today, it’s finally my birthday today. Let’s start going in the clubhouse today!”  

They said, “Oh, my gosh, this clubhouse is the best house!”

“Wait a second,” Mr. MarcaroonVoh said, “Today is our day to go back home!  And we have our phones!  We can still give each other our phone numbers!  But wait a second, I need to go home now!  With Lighty Light and Fantastic Paper!  Let’s start going!  Bye, guys!  We’ll miss you!  It’s our time to go back home but soon we’ll meet up together in the clubhouse. It will be our secret clubhouse.”

***

When Mr. MacaroonVoh, Lighty Light, and Fantastic Paper reached home, Mr. MacaroonVoh’s family wasn’t there!  

So then, they said, “Let’s go look out.  Maybe they’re in the garden!”  

They went in the garden–they found Mr. MacaroonVoh’s family! Mr. MacaroonVoh started introducing his family to his cousin and his friend.  

First, he said, “Family, this is my friend Lighty Light!  She saved me!  And so did Fantastic Paper, my cousin!”

“Mr. MacaroonVoh, we’re sorry we told you to leave the house. We realized that it was the wrong thing to do. We would never want to leave you again.”

Mr. MacaroonVoh said, “I’m so sorry I didn’t listen. And I would never want to leave you either.”

 

Blue Dragon, Red Warrior, Young Boy

The Toy:

I was made in Japan. My name is Red Warrior, and I live in the middle of Japan. The store is a very big store called Toys in Japan. I am the only Red Warrior left in stock because no one wanted to buy me. It is mostly yellow everywhere in the store. My life is boring because nobody likes me because my head was supposed to light up, but instead, my toy maker made a very big mistake when he connected the wires to the batteries. He connected them in the wrong place and lost all his right-hand fingers, and caused parts of me to look droopy (some plastic, of course, melted.) And of course, I can’t light up now. I am tall for a toy, about a foot tall. My armor is red, and I have plastic samurai armor on my shoulders. I am wearing an oversized samurai helmet, and I have two long plastic swords in each hand. My swords are bent and twisted, and my horns on my helmet look like dripping wax on a candle.

 

The Toymaker:

My name I have forgotten a long, long time ago. I forgot it around the time I lost my left hand fingers due to a fire because of a bomb explosion down my street. The thing is, I can’t remember when I lost my left hand fingers either. I’m only sixty years old, so it’s strange. I have a bad memory already, especially for things a simple as my name. It might have been connected to working for all those hours in the sweatshop that I began to lose my memory. I only make a dollar an hour, and my mom and dad died when I was a baby because of working in unsanitary conditions which led to them getting diseases. Ever since then, I’ve lived with my grandparents. But my grandma and grandpa died two years ago because of a violent gunfight at store during a bombing raid.

 

The Boy:

I sat in the speeding, blue, old, dented car my uncle owns. I turned around and looked out the back of the car.

“Ahh!” I screamed.

“What!?” My uncle yelled back, then turned around.

“Oh my god!” he said, then asked me if I had recently been to KFC.

I was like, what is wrong with you (of course, I didn’t say that out loud. If I had, he’d have tried to throw me out the car). I replied that yes, I had been to KFC.

“Did you get the new Diet Diet .3701547382425 fifteen Letter Coke Bottle?” he asked me again.

Did his beer finally get to his head? I thought to myself.

“Of course uncle, that’s what everyone drinks.”

“Then, did you, by any chance, graffiti M. Feeny’s dog again?”

“C’mon uncle, I stopped doing that last Halloween.”

“Uhh, last Halloween was last night?!” he replied.

“Oh right, forgot. Really, I swear I didn’t do it,” I said back.

“Boy, one thing. After you go to KFC and get the new Diet Diet .3701547382425 fifteen Letter Coke Bottle, note that you are not yourself. So I would not blame you for painting Ms. Feeney’s dog bright orange.”

“Hey, the dog sunbathes in the middle of the road, I was just trying to help the dog survive by making him visible to the drivers. I swear, once that dog fell asleep on the top of Ms. Feeney’s speeding car, she didn’t even notice until the animal abuse truck pulled up next to her. Really, I swear I didn’t paint her dog.”

“Then, why is she playing ‘Thriller’ in her car and chasing us two hundred miles per hour — I really hope that’s not a machine gun she’s aiming at us right now,” my uncle replied.

“Hey! It might just be a really long, black can with small, golden chicken nuggets shooting out.”

“Son! You think way too much about chicken. By the way, don’t interrupt me. I’m in the middle of dialing the asylum so that they can pick her up.”

This is going to be a long drive to that toy store, I thought to myself.

I decided not to go with my parents to Egypt because right now I was  in my toy Warrior obsession phase. I had all the Warrior colors except for red.

 

The Boy and the Toy:

It was a bright, cold morning, but it wasn’t just any morning. It was the first morning a customer had come in three weeks! An old looking, blue car screeched into the paved drive, and a man and a small kid wearing a baseball hat that covered his eyes walked into the store, the adult hanging behind as the kid rushed to the aisle where all the plastic warriors were.

His eyes scanned the plastic, dimly-lit shelves for a Red Warrior. When he found it, he didn’t know what to say. His eyes opened wide, and a thin smile spread across his face.

I wonder why nobody wanted this? he thought to himself. He may be a little melted and scratched up, he doesn’t light up, but it doesn’t matter. In fact, it’s good; it shows this warrior has been through a lot. He has. It shows this guy has actually been through battle. Unlike any of the other guys I have, this one is a real, brave warrior.

He picked up the warrior from the aisle and showed it to his uncle to see if he could buy it. His uncle looked at him as if it was some sort of hilarious joke.

“Why, would you want a broken piece of junk like that?” he asked.

The boy scowled and responded, “It’s not a piece of junk.”

“Fine,” his uncle replied and handed him five dollars.

The boy went to the counter, beaming, gave the tired looking man at the counter $5.00, and walked out the store to his uncle’s car in the parking lot, his uncle trailing behind him. This was one of the happiest moments for both of them, the boy and the toy. The toy would be loved, and the boy would be happy. The hour long drive back to the boys house went by in a flash because the boy was having so much fun with the toy, flying it, making it battle imaginary dragons, and finally bringing it home. The car scraped into the drive, little stones grating under its wheels. The uncle rang the doorbell, and an elderly lady with a white apron opened the door into the two-story wooden house.

As soon as they got home, the boy picked the toy up and rushed with it up to his room so the toy would be able to meet all its brethren and have its first battle against the Blue Dragon, the boy’s favorite toy monster.

 

The Boy And The Battle:

I set up all of the seven Warriors. There were two rows of three, and in the front, there was the leader: The Red Warrior. And facing them all, was a clear blue, snarling dragon (their enemy.) This dragon had the power to freeze people.

Five years ago,the nuclear bomb fell on Hiroshima, killing most of my friends and family. Even if you survived the explosion, there was a good chance you would die of radiation poison before the doctor could make it through the glowing rubble to your house. The only reason I didn’t die was because I was living in Hawaii, where I grew up.

I remember my Japanese mother and father came out of a P.O.W. (Prisoner of War camp) after the bombing of Pearl Harbor which happened when I was two years old. As soon as he came out, he said, “Our Warriors will always fight strong, but this time the Dragon won.”

We spent a month living frightened in Hawaii. After that, my parents booked  themselves, me, and my baby sister, who is now in Egypt with my parents, a plane trip to Tokyo so that we could check on our relatives who had survived the bomb on Hiroshima in the hospital. I still remember the sound of young and old people crying, and faded, acrid smoke. I remember the sad, corrupt faces of my grandparents and uncle lying, shaking in blood-stained, white hospital cots within a plain, grey, brick building in the middle of a confused, screaming city which was more like an asylum for people gone shell-shocked and crazy than a physical hospital. The chipped, grey walls reminded of a prison.

 Since then, I had been living in Tokyo. I always thought the Dragon was America, but Japan also killed many people at Pearl Harbor. What America did to Japan was one of the worst things they could do.

So there was no Dragon. Each side thought they were the Warriors.

 

I Would Rather be Crushed by a Bowling Ball Than go to School

“Hello class,” says Ms. Johnson.

Oh hello, I’m James. I’m at school now. Usually, people hate this school. You will know why.

“Everyone, say hello to Mr. Petey,” says Ms. Johnson.

“Guess who’s back!” says Mr. Petey in a thundering voice. “So today, we have a bit of light classwork. You have 1,000 pounds of classwork and 100,000 pounds of homework, so this should be an easy day for you.”

“Wow, you are loud,” says a kid.

“Ten hours of after-school detention for you!” yells Mr. Petey. “What are you waiting for? Work!”

Soon, another kid asks, “Mr. Petey, may I please go to the bathroom?”

“No bathroom talk in class. Five hours of detention for a whole month!” says Mr.Petey.  

After the agonising class, I go to lunch. In the hallway, the principal barks, “No colorful lunchboxes! Three hours of detention for you, and no more home lunch for you for three months!”

Then, the principal snatches my lunch box and walks away.

I walk into the lunchroom. Good thing the lunch lady is serving really bad food instead of terrible food.

“Here is your vomit-colored trash soup,” thunders the lunch lady as she dumps the slop on my tray.

Now it is time to go into my secret stash. As I take my candy bar out of my pocket, the lunch lady barks, “No more food for you for ten months.”

Well, now you know why this school is the worst school ever. We tried to stop the principal from making the school worse, but the principal found out before we ever started it.

BRRRING! Oh, that was the bell that just rang. Oh great, it is time for recess. It is the second worst period today.

As soon as I walk outside and step on the doormat, I hear the recess counselor yell, “You just broke rule number 3,749,446. This means one month detention! Oh, now you broke another rule! Another month of detention!”

***

Finally, after the agonizing day, I start to head home. You are probably wondering why I don’t tell my parents. Well, apparently, my parents signed a contract that I have to stay in this school until I finish 12th grade and that the school is the “best school in the world.” And my parents don’t know because whenever they come, the teachers act like this is the “best school in the world.”

The next day, as I am walking to school, I see a kid walk next to me. I ask, “What school do you go to?”

The kid replies, “Dinkleburg school.”

I tell the kid, “That school is horrible. The nicest teacher gave a kid ten hours of detention.”

The kid replied, “Oh, I forgot to tell you. My name is Donald. Also, I know how to get the teachers afraid of the students, but it will take a week.”

***

Finally, our plan is ready.  

“Hey scums, get to worhey who pulled my pants down? You’re going to pay for this,” says Mr. Petey as he walks to me. But Mr. Petey is so surprised that he does not see a string, so he trips over the wire and his face plants into a pie.

“I am going to the bathroom,” announces Mr. Petey.

A video of what is in the boys’ bathroom appears on the board. “Hey, I got ketchup on my underwear!” yells Mr. Petey.

Then, when Mr. Petey walks back into the room, nobody is there. Mr. Petey reports it to the principal. When the principal comes in the room, everyone is back in the room.

“You’re fired, bub,” yells the principal.

“Bu-bu-but they were not here a minute ago,” says Mr. Petey.

The whole class laughs out loud. Everyone knows in less than ten seconds. Soon, it is time for second period. It is Mr. Peter Peterburg’s class. Everyone usually calls him Mr. PP.

Mr. PP yells at the very top of his lungs, “Everyone, you are going to run 100 miles in ten seconds. If you don’t, you will have detention for ten hours every day for ten years. Okay, so what are you waiting foAhhh, oh my god! Not again! Now, everybody knows I pee my pants. Oh no! Class is cancelled, and everyone, don’t tell anybody I have a pacifieroh, come on.”

It goes on like that for the rest of the day. Soon, the principal fires everyone, including himself.

 

NARRATOR: Well, as you can see, that school was not amazing experience for James. Then the school shut down, and everyone lived happily ever after.              

The end

Well, everybody except the the teachers of the school lived happily ever after…

 

Epilogue

We are sorry to tell you that there is no epilogue because the writer quit and sang the “Frozen” song for the rest of his life.  

 

Warren’s Welfare (Part One)

Fine, fine. But I don’t have a lot of time. Well, anyway, here it is: my life story. Oh, and don’t expect me to include all the sappy details. Can’t believe I’m doing this. Sigh! Well, here it is: WARREN’S WELFARE! Yeah, yeah, it sounds epic, but don’t set the bar too high. Just sayin’.

It all started when I was born. My parents being the king and queen of the Utopians, I was automatically the prince. Also, I was naturally my parents’ prized possession (and that’s saying a lot.) Well, anyway, being the prince, everybody had high expectations of me. The bar was so high, that my chubby, little, baby hands could barely reach it. And soon, the bar slipped out of my grasp, and I began my slow descent. My parents were disappointed. They expected more from me. Also, they felt as if I (that’s right, I) was giving them a bad reputation (and again, that’s saying a lot.) While all the nobles looked majestic in their fancy clothes, I looked like a slob in stained T-shirts and khakis.

Right when I thought it couldn’t get any worse, the war started. First, we ran out of fresh water while our nemesis city, Dystopia, thrived and had extra fresh water. (I wonder how that happened.) Then, we hit them back. We took all their fishing supplies. I know, I know, that might not sound so bad. But when you live on an island in the middle of an ocean, fishing is pretty much your only way to get food.

Now that we had both struck, we went into all out war. There were many casualties, including (collective gasp) my parents. But there were also great casualties for the Dystopians. The casualties were so great, that they surrendered and went into hiding. I felt like I only had one choice: to kill everyone that was responsible for my parents’ death.  

First, I had to acquire the Zyzerath blade. It was my only hope if I wanted to get revenge. I heard of a wizard who lived in Dystopia, and that she was also a Utopian. The reason I needed to find the Zyzerath blade was because it was the only blade strong enough to break through the five-foot thick metal surrounding the Dystopian society (otherwise, I would just nuke it, but meh.) Then, once I had the Zyzerath blade, I’d cut a small hole in the back of the fortress. After that, I would have to find the Utopian wizard who was feeding us information. Finally, the wizard and I would kill them all.

Let’s go back to reality for a second. Right now, the only thing I knew was where the Zyzerath blade was located. Drum roll please! The cavern of despair. Kazaa! Poof! Magic dust! Okay, well, let’s cut the drama now.

I began my journey by looking for wisdom on the island of 1000 souls. Even in the noon-day sun, it was still dark and gloomy. That’s kind of a bummer, but meh. On the bright side, giving people advice gives them a purpose in life. I was pretty much covered. I still remember my first step on the island. The temperature must have dropped 30 degrees. I could feel the life trying to escape out of me to join its companions.

You would not believe what happened. Well, I guess they have to rename the island “the Island of 1002 Souls,” because apparently, my mom and dad qualify to be one of the oh-so super important souls that get to spend the rest of their days in mindless despair. So great, I know. As I was walking through the paved, bone roads, that’s when I saw them.

I looked into their eyes, and they said to me, “You are a disgrace! How could you let this happen?”

I was too shocked for words, so they just carried on.

“Let me guess, you’re looking for Zyzerath blade so you can get revenge for us.”

My mouth gaped open. I started to say, “How di–”

My mom said, “Well there’s something I gotta tell ya about the Dystopians. We are the Dystopians, and they are the Utopians. I know, right. Gasp. We are just as bad as they are.”

With that, they walked away, with me still trying to process everything they told me. Then, I noticed a glimmering, metal object peeking through the dead grass. When I picked it up, I instantly knew what it was. THE ZYZERATH BLADE! Well, I guessed all I needed to do is break in and see if they were good. Luckily, it wasn’t that far from our island to theirs, so I just rowed over there in a canoe.

Once I got to the dome, I quickly sliced away some of the metal, so I could have a peephole. As I did, the sword felt one with my hand, and I could feel its voice entering my mind. The legends were true! The sword really could talk to you!

“Ay! What’s up my homie? Thanks for waking me from my deep slumber.”

“Good.”

Once that was all cleared up, I put my eye right next to the little hole. I almost jumped back and fell off the island when I saw that a little eye was staring back at me. Then, the alarm sounded. I quickly tried to jump back and run away, but then they were on me. They knocked me out, and next thing I knew, I was in their prison cell.

“No, no, no, no!!! How could this have happened?!”

“Shhh! Do you want them to come back?”

“Er, no.”

“Good”

“What is your name?”

“Mine’s Samantha, what’s yours?”

“My name is Warren. So, what did you do to get here?”

“Long story short, I worked for the Utopians, they found out, and yeah, I’m here. ”

“Where are you?”

“Er, are you blind? I’m literally right next to you.”

Warren turned his head to his left. Nothing. Then, he turned to the right. Two large eyes stared right back at him. He jumped and stumbled backwards. But then, he noticed something peculiar. She was floating in the air and had a ball of fire in her lap. Warren gasped. He just realized who he just met. This was the wizard. The myth. The legend. Samantha Odd.

“O-M-G, it’s you, Samantha Odd!!!”

“Yes, Warren, I’ve been waiting for you a long, long time!!!”

 

Atlantic (Excerpt)

Chapter 1:

“Lilie, are you sure that this is safe?”’ I asked.

“You can trust me, Rose.”

Lilie was my best friend, but I still thought her idea was a little sketchy.

“Look, Rose, I am a full two minutes older than you. Believe me. This is completely safe.”

Getting on a canoe illegally, sailing to a random place, and setting up camp for the week was a good idea?! You see, Lilie and I went to camp together, but it was awful! Like totally awful. Really bad, awful. Well, anyway, the camp stunk, so Lilie and I decided to run away. Because it stunk. And I know you are thinking that I’ve made myself clear about the whole camp-stinking thing, but I am making it clearer. So there.

So, we ran away from the terrible camp and stole a canoe. Did I mention that the camp stunk? Of course we had to rob much more than a single canoe. After packing, we had to rob the kitchen of the awful camp, but we didn’t take much, because the food stunk, too. I told you the camp really stunk. So, when most of the old counselors were asleep, we got up and ran to the lake and past the boundaries into a sandy beach, packed with dry seaweed at the top.

And that brings us to where we are now.

I took out the flip phone my mom got me as a gift for camp.

I texted her, “Hi, Mom! About camp… one word. It stinks! And so, maybe me and my twin ran away from camp and stole a canoe and food, so maybe you have to come pick us up past the boundaries of camp…We send out love! Lilie and Rose, your loving daughters that you never get mad at.”

Of course she immediately wrote back, “Hey Lilie. From Mom. You are so grounded when you get home!!!”

Lilie laughed out loud. “She always says that.”

A bell rang in the distance. Rising Bell! It was 4:30 p.m. already?!

“Lilie, into the boat now. With the stuff. Where’s the plastic bag??”

“Woah, Rose, slow down! It”s only 2:00 p.m..”

“No!!” I screamed. “It’s 4:30!!! We have to get out of here!”

“Okay, okay, I’ll take the luggage, and you take the food. God, dont freak out like that.”

Once we were loaded, I jumped out of the boat and pushed it in the water. Go go go! I was swimming by now. Go go go! Now, we were deep in the lake. I got back in the canoe, took off the muddy, wet clothes and changed into pajamas.

I hadn’t slept for the past week because I was planning. Not that I would get any sleep anyway. After some servant work (serving and cooking) for our counselors that lasted until one, they threw you into your “Child Home” (awful name!) AKA your counselor’s musty cellar full of moth-holed blankets. How did they make it look so cool on the website?! I took out a graphic novel. I was gonna make shelter out of the tent that I was required to bring for overnights, also known as mortal peril. I’ll get to that later. Lilie handed me her bow. Mom had bought them for us before we left for camp. Mine was a Rose and Lilie’s was a Lily (duh.) I put in my bag. I took mine out too. We never wore them while we were sleeping. I guess we both were gonna sleep for awhile. An island appeared in the distance. We were leaving camp for good! And then, nothing.

 

Chapter Two:

I opened my eyes. Looking around, it looked like an aquarium. But no. I was in the aquarium. No. I was in the water. It can’t be. I was breathing. What the…?

“Lilie!!!!” I screamed. “Where the heck are we?!”

I heard a gurgle from somewhere near by. I swam to some shreds of a canoe.

“Lilie?”

“Rose,” came a voice. Lilie’s voice.

“Lilie!” I giggled.

She was using a dying voice, almost as if she was sick. I pulled her limp body from the scraps of the canoe.

“Rose.”

“Stop it, Lilie. It’s not funny anymore.”

“Rose.”

“Stop it! You’re not going to die. I know that you are faking it.”

But deep down, I knew it was real. Suddenly, Lilie’s eyes glowed. She spoke again, but it was not Lilie’s voice.

“To cure your friend, you must bring the one into the cave. The one your sister loves.  And sometimes, love means sacrifice.” Her eyes dimmed. Her body sunk to the ocean floor. For once, I was glad to be under the water. No one was there to see the tears running from my eyes. Because I knew what I had to do.

I took the bows from my bags. I stared at Lilie’s bow. Then, I noticed something. There was a note on one of the petals. It read: Give it to Rose. What? What did she want to give to me? Or, what did she need me to have?

I turned the bow over and saw a little red flap. Strange. Mine didn’t have anything like this. I pulled the flap and something giant appeared in front of me. It was enormous and seemed as if the inside was made of–air? I screamed and swam. I never noticed how beautiful the ocean was. Soon, I forgot all about being chased by a giant water monster and stopped to look at some fish hiding in some coral. Look at that bright color! Pinks and blues and greens and yellows surrounded me. And blacks. Blacks? Oh no.

Once fresh water was revealed to my eyes, I tried to swim. But something held me back. I looked behind me and saw the monster again! Why did Lily want me to have this thing? But suddenly, the vicious creature transformed into a small blob. It curled up into a small spear.

God, I wish I had a cage to put this thing in. What if it transforms again? I thought.

But then, there it was. Instead of a small, air-ish looking ball, there was a cage. What the?

“I realIyyy waaanntttttt aaaa saaaaanndddwiiiiiiicchhhhhhh,” I said, very carefully and slowly. And there was an airy looking sandwich. I bit it, but it tasted like one thing. Air.

“I wish I had a bag.”

An airy bag appeared in front of me. It was time to have some fun.

“Make that a pocketbook with unlimited space for any object.”

The airy bag changed into a pocketbook with sparkles. Now to test it. I swam to an enormous chunk of coral with the pocketbook and opened it. I jammed the opening of the pocketbook on top of the coral and it fit! I put the pocketbook on and set off in the direction of Lilie. My twin. My only sibling. Who I wasn’t going to lose.

 

Chapter Three:

The body of my sister still lied at the bottom of the pool. I felt so alone without her. Seeing her, I was reminded of that voice. I knew the voice. And I realized. It was Dad’s voice. But Dad was gone. Or so we thought. Five years ago, Dad left for a trip at a lake. This lake. He went camping each year with his friends. I remember it all,

 “Dad, don’t leave!” I screamed.

“Yeah Dadda. Can’t you just skip one year?” said Lillie.

“Sorry Lilliekins. Daddy’s gotta go. It’s only for six days.”

“But Dadda. Six days is almost eleven monfs! Dat’s a lot!” I said.

“No, it’s not, Rosie. It’s almos free years! You were way off,” said Lillie.

“Rosie, it seems like nothing,” said Dad.

“Fine,” I whined. “But you have to bring back the crackers and chocolate with sticky sweet stuff. Peas, peas, peas?”

“Okay. One for Rosie, one for Lil-lil, none for Mom. And twelve for Daddy,” he said.

“Twelve! Add two more and its a million gazillion a hundred a million seventy-two!” I said.

“Yeah! That’s almost as old as Mommy!”

“I gotta go, girls. Benjamin is here to pick me up!”

“Bye, Dad!”

He hugged Mom and Lillie. Then, he hugged me.

I was only five when it happened, but I remember it so clearly. Maybe it was because I haven’t seen him since? Three days later–or seven million days–Benjamin called. Five-year-old me didn’t know what was wrong, until Mom started sobbing. Then, she broke the news to us. The boat had sank while they were fishing. And Dad had sunk with it. But what if Dad was here? Under the water, in this lake? I tripped on something and fell on my face. The thing I tripped on was cold, not like the coral in the reefs. I looked at it. It was a body. A dead body.

This is what will happen to Lillie if I don’t save her soon, I told myself. The body shook. And suddenly, it swam up. Millions of bodies, old and young, flew up with it.

“Rose Wentell.” they said in unison, “Goodbye, Rose Wentell.”

Before I was covered in dead, cold bodies, I saw a sign. Sea of the Dead.

 

To be Continued…

Bensy and His Quest

It was a breezy day in Alaska, and a group of puffins were playing by the snow. The king puffin was demanding more fish.

“Give me fish! I can’t do it! My beak just got polished!” he said.

Now, the main character came waddling along.

“Yes sir,” said a puffin named Bensy, “Salmon — I think? — for you!”

“Salmon! I hate! I despise! Salmon!” he shouted.

“Ok, I’ll get you a different fish,” said Bensy.

As he waddled across the snow, he looked at the city. And then, he saw his destiny behind a window.

“Oh my gosh!” said Bensy.

And you must be wondering what it was… and it was fried chicken!!

“Yaaaaaaaa!” shouted Bensy’s friend Amelia.

“Ow!” said Bensy.

“King Puffin wants his fish,” said Amelia.

“Ohh, you civil, boring, fish-eating puffins, there’s better food in life, you know,” said Bensy.

“But you’re a puffin,” said Amelia.

“Yeah, but I’m better,” said Bensy.

“You’re so full of yourself,” said Amelia.                                                                                                                                      

“Look, fried chicken,” said Bensy dreamily.

“That’s cannibalism,”said Amelia.

It was night in the puffin village. Everyone was inside because Gwen the fox was on the prowl.

“Everyone inside! Gwen is going to climb the gates!” said the speaker.

Bensy ran out of his house and to the gates at the front of the cave.

“Hey, I need your help!” he said shaking and waddling with fear.

He ran back home

“I was wrong!!’ screamed Bensy.

“I told you so!!’ Amelia said.

“Hello, tiny puffin! What do you want?” said Gwen the snow fox.

“I need your help,” said Bensy.  

“What do you want?” said Gwen.

“Uh, I want … fried chicken,” said Bensy.

“Uh, that’s cannibalis-”

“I know!!!’ interrupted Bensy.

Gwen rolled her eyes and said, “Tomorrow. Gates. Morning.”

***

It was early morning. Bensy was waiting.

“Foxes always lie,” he said.

“Uh, no. I’m here at the gates,” she said.

“Okay, let’s go,” Bensy said.

“Uh, remember you split fried chicken, or you will be chicken,” said Gwen.

They were walking to KFC, and they stopped at a sign.

“No pets! Technically, we’re not pets,” Gwen said.

 

Try 1:

Roz never smiled.

“Why did I have to work the 24/7 hour shift,” Roz said.

“Uh, hi, can I have some fried chicken?” said a lady.

“Sure, it’s made with the opposite things we say in the ad,” said Roz.

“Oh, um, ok, here is the money, crazy lady. Goodbye,” she said.

“Now!” said Bensy.

BOOM!

“Ah! Get off of me!!” she said as she stormed away.

“Aw, no fried chicken,” said Bensy.

“Yeah, next time, don’t tackle. It’s just sad,” said Gwen.

They were in front of KFC looking into the window at all the fried chicken.

 

TRY 2

“Ok, let’s just walk through the door,” said Bensy.

“Wait, uh no, don’t, nooo-’ said Gwen.

“Ding” went the doorbell.

“Hi, welco– Hey! No pets or animals allowed!!” said Roz with so much rage that she could blow a fuse.

“Wenk wenk weeeenk!!!” he said. [Can I have some fried chicken?]

“No!” screamed Roz.

Bam! Bensy flew out the door and onto the snow-covered street.

“Uh, let’s try again!” said Bensy dizzily

 

TRY 3

It was scary being a puffin because of trees, blizzards, and snow foxes (except Gwen). But this was the scariest. Bensy was in a cage in the dark, and it was moving. Scary!

“Bensy! Where are you! Did ya get it! Uh Bensy?” said Gwen nervously.

Then, she saw the worst thing ever, an animal truck which you don’t see much, so this meant that Bensy was in there! Padding against the fresh snow, Gwen was too slow.

“No, Bensy!” said Gwen sadly.

As Gwen was walking home, she had an idea. Maybe the person who understands me the most! thought Gwen.

“Dorothy!” said Gwen happily. So she sped to Dorothy’s house.

DING! went the doorbell.

“Oh, hi, Gwen. What are you doing here?” said Dorothy.

Now I know this was kind of far, but just go with it.

Ruff, grr, grr, barked Gwen.

‘Your friend’s in an animal control truck!’ said Dorothy understandingly.

“Yeah, that’s the crazy thing” said Gwen.

So Dorothy got a backpack that had a bunch of jangly things. They saw the animal control truck at the gas station near the ferry.

“Come on. The truck’s back door is open!” said Dorothy.

Slam! went the door just as they got in the back of the truck. And they were off!

But the ferry ride was short, so in a wink, the truck was on the road again.

All tries over!

Quickly, they drove the car into the ditch and climbed out.

“Okay the ferry dock is right there, so all we have to do is get on — Oh! That ferry,” said Dorothy.

They ran to the ferry dock and clambered on the ferry.

“Uh, are you sure they won’t get on?” said Gwen nervously.

“Yeah, I’m sure,” said Dorothy.

And as soon as that, they were off!

“Uh, this is kind of strange?” said Dorothy.

“Whats strange?” said Gwen.

“This ship! It’s, well, strange and shady!” said Dorothy nervously.

She was right; it was strange. The walls were rusty. It had graffiti all over the windows and only some of them because the rest of the windows were broken!

“Where, uh, am I?” said Bensy.

“Bensy! You’re awake! After being unconscious!” said Gwen.

“Yes, I am. Now seriously, where are we?” said Bensy.

They explained what happened, which in my opinion, took too long to write and so my fingers would get tired. Go figure.

“Oh, okay thanks for explaining, but I need that fried chicken!!” said Bensy.

“Yes I know, but right now, we have bigger problems!” said Dorothy.

“Yeah, Dorothy’s right, but I have a feeling someone’s watching us! But anyway, let’s go to bed.”

***

It was night on the mysterious boat, and everyone was sleeping. (Ha! It sounded like a nursery rhyme when I said it like that!) Mumbling was coming from the deck of the ship.

“Do you think they’re on the boat?” said Maxwell.

“Of course they’re on the ship. Otherwise, they wouldn’t exist!” said Pete, rolling his eyes.

“Yeah, and I don’t want Boss to be mad!” said Maxwell.

Now everyone knows that snow foxes have extraordinary hearing.

“What’s that noise?” said Gwen. “And whose boss? Guys?”

“What? I’m sleeping!” said Dorothy.

“The henchman are on the ship!” said Gwen.

“Uh oh! I was right!” said Dorothy.

“How will we escape!” said Bensy.

“Uh, I obviously don’t know!” said Dorothy.

“How can you not knoooooo– I see them!!” screamed Bensy.

“Run!” said Gwen.

So obviously, this was one of those cool scenes where everybody runs. Yeah, this story had to have one.

“I never run in gym class!” screamed Dorothy.

The only thing they could do was jump.

“Lets jump!” said Bensy.

So obviously, they disagreed..

“That’s crazy — okay, let’s do that. They’re coming!” screamed Dorothy.

So they jumped, yeah. Under the water, they pumped their legs as the water pushed them down. But then, a shadow stretched across the water.

“Uh, what’s that!” said Gwen.

Then, a wing stretched into the water and grabbed Bensy’s wing.

“Ahhhh!” said Bensy.

Then, he saw an amazing sight.

“Well hello, Bensy!” said KING PUFFIN!  

“The annoying girl puffin told me you were missing!” said King Puffin.

But then, Bensy remembered about his friends.

“Wait! My friends!” said Bensy.

So he dove into the water and grabbed Gwen and Dorothy.

“Uh, Amelia, King Puffin, meet Gwen and Dorothy,” said Bensy.

They all shook wings, hands, and paws. But they realized they were only on a wooden canoe.

“Uh, will this sink?” said Gwen.

“Bah! No, it’s made in my palace, so it’s the best!” said King Puffin.

He was back to his selfish self. But then, they saw Alaska!

“We’re home!” said Bensy.

As they got to the snowy beach, they relaxed, and Amelia said “Uh, Bensy, you know I have something for you.”

Bensy tilted his head.

“What is it?” he said.

Then, Amelia held out… fried chicken!!! Bensy passed out. Just kidding! Bensy screamed like he was on High School Musical!

Then, he asked, “How’d you get it?”  

‘“Dude, you literally just have to jump on a person who’s eating fried chicken and they’ll drop it on the ground!” said Amelia.

There was a moment of silence. Then, Bensy screamed like he was on High School Musical (again!) Then, Bensy said something

“Uh, can I live with you?” asked Bensy.

“Uh, why?” said King Puffin.

“Pwease Kwing Pwuffin!” said Bensy like a baby.  

“Fine,” said King Puffin.

But first, they ate the fried chicken that Bensy always wanted.

 

Christmas is Here

‘Twas two days before Christmas, and Tommy was grumpy and definitely bumby. Tommy didn’t get a present because he didn’t have much money. But he wasn’t grumpy or bumpy by Christmas Eve… Here is the story of how it happened:

“December by the fire, what a stupid month that has bloody Christmas with the New Year. It’s all stupid in its own way and wasting money on presents… It’s all wasted money, disappointment, and all things cheery!!! Mom, I finished my homework! It’s all incorrect. I don’t have the bloody time to do it again, baa humba,” Tommy said.

“Tommy, come help decorate the Christmas tree!!!”

“No!!!”

At that instant, Tommy fell asleep. Three spirits appeared before him: one of past, one of future, and one of present. This was actually reality, though Tommy thought it was a dream. The one of past stepped forward with a suspicious smile. She introduced herself. She was also wise and kind.

She said, “Come with me and see the past Christmases.”

Tommy was freaking out. He thought he was seeing things, and he was shocked. The spirit took him.

When he was five, he jumped on the Christmas tree and made it fall. When he was seven, he ripped up everyone’s presents, spoiling the whole holiday. When he was ten, he threw everything Christmas-like away.

The spirit said, “Fix your attitude, or the Ghost of Christmas Present will not approve of you.”

Then, the Ghost of Christmas Past disappeared. Tommy was pretty creeped out at this time.

The Ghost of Christmas Present was literally dressed as a present, and she whacked Tommy with a huge candy cane, saying what would happen on Christmas morning. His family would be disappointed in him, and he would be kicked to the curb. Literally. Kicked to the curb. Ghost of Christmas Present disappeared quickly.

The Ghost of Christmas Future stepped forward. Honestly, she looked like she had black and blue hair, a black robe, and a giant candy cane.

She said, “In the future, we’re in the world with big candy canes and we mind-text. Oh, you thought I was gonna hit you with the candy cane? The Ghost of Christmas Present plays cleanup on our softball team. About two years from now, you will be living in a box with no tree, no decorations, and no job. You must learn from the lessons that the other ghosts have taught you. Fix your attitude before Christmas eve or else, as Christmas Present told you, you will be kicked to the curb.”

He had been asleep the whole time until now.

Tommy changed his attitude, he bought a present for his sister with all the money he had, and laughed down the street. He thought he was doing the right thing, and he liked it.

”I love Christmas! It’s fantastic and marvelous.”

And so, Tommy fixed his attitude with Christmas and he had a merry, merry, merry Christmas.

Author’s note:

The lesson of the story is that you feel happiness when you do things for others, like when Tommy bought a gift for his sister.

 

The Cyclone and the Beach

Hi! My name is Bob. I love roller coasters (especially scary ones.) I live at Columbus Circle.

My mom came into the room.

“Bob,” she said. “We are going to Coney Island.”

“Yes!!!” I said.

We went to the 59th Street Columbus Circle station and got on the D train.

We passed 7th Ave/53rd Street. We passed 47th-50th Streets Rockefeller Center. We passed 42nd Street Bryant Park and 34th Street Herald Square. We passed West 4th Street, Broadway Lafayette Street, Grand Street, Atlantic Avenue/Pacific Street, and 36th Street.

Finally, we were there.

We headed towards the beach.

My dad asked, “Do you want to go into the waves?”

“No,” I said.

When my mom and dad went into the waves, I escaped and went towards the amusement park.

I bought a Luna card and headed towards the Cyclone.

I got on the Cyclone. This was the best day of my life!

The Cyclone went very fast, but then suddenly, it stopped.

The Cyclone had broken down.

I jumped off the Cyclone and ran. I did not know where.

Then, I saw it! A roller coaster with a vertical drop! It said “THUNDERBOLT” on the side. I watched a car for the thunderbolt go down the side of the track. I got onto a car for the Thunderbolt, and off it went.

Up the vertical drop.

Down the vertical drop.

Over the loop.

Then, the ride was over.

By that time, my mom and dad had come looking for me.

Finally, they found me.

“Why did you run away from us, Bob?”

I just grinned.

They rolled their eyes at me.

We went to Nathan’s. I could tell my mom was mad at me. But inside, I was happy. I was happy because I knew I had ridden the Thunderbolt.

 

The Cloud Race

Coral’s wings beat hard as she dove towards a cloud and swooshed right through it. She executed perfect loops and dove through the sky. Coral swirled around a huge cloud and sped forward. Then, she smacked into a cloud and spun in midair.

She always messed up that part.

Coral sighed and slowly flew home with her dark hair swirling around her. If she was going to win the yearly Cloud Race, Coral would have to work harder. She did not notice the sky turning grey.

Suddenly, a bolt of lightning ripped through the sky. Thunder crashed in her ears like the sound of waves. Frightened, Coral dodged another bolt and flew as fast as she could. Coral zipped through the storm towards a big cloud, and flew inside the cloud.

Coral then landed on the kitchen floor with a light thump. Her mother was at the stove.

“Hi, Mom,” she said.

Her mom turned around, “Oh, Coral, you got caught in the storm, didn’t you?”

Coral nodded.

“I made lentils and cookies. You can have two cookies after you eat dinner.”

Coral almost jumped for joy and almost yelled, “YES!”

But she didn’t. She sat down for dinner.

***

It was the day of the Cloud Race. Coral was nervously flying around the starting line. The fastest cloud racers in the whole sky were there. Coral identified Emaline Flisch, Sunna Kalibru, Sydney Jamonje, and several unfamiliar boys and girls.

Coral was determined to win the race.

The horn blew, and the racers began.

Coral had memorized the track.

She swished through a cloud. The unfamiliar racers all hit the cloud and didn’t get through.

Coral looped and dove through the sky, but Sunna got lost somewhere around the third big cloud.

Coral turned over around a cloud and lost Emaline.

Only Sidney was left. He gave her an aggravating grin and zoomed forward. Coral zoomed forward as well.

The last cloud was ahead. Coral swallowed, and suddenly swooped downward and dodged the cloud.

Sidney crashed into the cloud, and Coral passed the finish line!

She got the gold trophy for Racer of the Year!

The smile on Coral’s face was almost to her ears.

 

Car Accident

Once there was a guy named Paul.

He had a Maserati.

Paul was driving the Maserati so fast, that he couldn’t stop the brakes.

Then, there was a robbery at the bank, and the guy jumped up on Paul’s Maserati. His face was almost falling apart, and his skin was going turbo.

The Maserati was going too fast, and there was a big ramp.

The robber, who was robbing the bank, fell on the ground. The police were chasing after Paul, and the police were chasing after the robber.

While Paul was driving the Maserati, he had to go to the gas station, but the Maserati was going too fast. So Paul lowered the window down, and he took the gas station pump, and he climbed out of the window. He went to the gas filler, and he took the gas, and he put it in for 100 hours.

Then, the police were ambushing. There were 1,000 police people. The chief called a meeting with all of the policemen. The policemen surrounded Paul, but the Maserati drove right through them and there was blood all over them. The policemen were going to taser Paul, but that did not work so they just left Paul, and he went to Hawaii.

But, he felt guilty. So he went to the police station.

“I was the person who killed the 1,000 policemen.You can take me to  jail.”

So the policemen did.

 

THE END

 

Birdie and the Great Days

 

Chapter 1

A bird flies over buildings, brushing against the smooth and bumpy trees. It flies up and pecks on a leaf, and then, it soars off. It flies into the sun, its feathers shining. It pecks on the leaf again. The bird sees bees collecting pollen and people getting up. Then, the bird looks up and sees the sun rising, with yellow and pink colors.

Then, he studies the sparkling sun. He tilts his head and flies off. He flies more and then stops. He sees the most beautiful building ever as he flies up and up. Then, he goes to the very top, and he sees flowers and his friends. He flies down and tells them what he saw that day.

The birds play in the vines, jump, fly, eat leaves, and find worms. They throw the worms down and forget about them. They keep on playing for the rest of the day.

Then, they go back to the nest. Just then, they see a bat. They fly into the nest as fast as they can!! The bat sees them, but they curl up, and ten minutes later, they fall asleep. But the bat is still there.

“But, you guys! I’m your friend, remember?” says the bat, “Remember? My name is Blackie.”

But the two birds are fast asleep. The birds dream of going to see their old friend, but they don’t remember what their old friend looks like and what animal he is.

Meanwhile, the bat finds a spot to go to sleep. The next morning, the pigeons wake up. They go to examine the bat. They don’t remember anything they saw or dreamed about, but they decide to think, and think, and think. But still, they can’t remember. Just then, the bat wakes up.

The birds jump back, but the bat says, “Remember me? I’m Blackie.”

Then, they remember that it was Blackie, their friend.

“Oh, hi! We didn’t know it was you. Sorry, yesterday we couldn’t see you, and it was dark.”

“It’s okay, I came here to see you guys.”

Just then, the sun rises up.

Birdie says, “Let’s go look. I want to show you what we did yesterday, and then, we can do it again today too!”

“Okay,” says Blackie.

So they fly off. First, they stop and sit on the windowsill of a building. They see a cat, so they fly to another ledge. They see their friend Rattie.

“Rattie, wanna come play with us today?” they say.  

“Sorry, maybe tomorrow. I have to go and get to the grocery store.”

“Okay, it’s fine. We will go tomorrow.”

So, they fly off and go to the vine building.

“What’s this?” asks Rattie and Blackie.

“It’s a building with vines!” says Birdie and his other bird friend, Pinnie.

Blackie starts to fly up to the top. Rattie climbs and climbs to the top. Then, Birdie flies up and then Pinnie. They play hide and go seek. Then, they play tag.

“Tag, you’re it.”

Blackie is it. Rattie runs, and runs, and then, he tags Pinnie. Pinnie flies and tags Rattie. Rattie is very, very fast, but Birdie and the others can fly. But Rattie can jump too! He jumps into the air to Birdie, and now Birdie is it. Birdie flies and gets Blackie and Pinnie. They do rock paper scissors. Pinnie wins.

 

Chapter 2

They play hide and go seek. Pinnie is it, while the others go and hide.  First, he checks for Rattie because Rattie loves hiding in small corners. He looks in the top corner, and the bottom corner, the other top corner, and the other bottom corner. He finds Rattie in the other bottom corner. Rattie and Pinnie start looking for Blackie. Blackie loves hiding in the bushes. They look in parts of the building, for little parts that are small, that Blackie can hide behind. They find one, but he isn’t there. They find the second one, but he isn’t there. The third one is really big. They look and there is Blackie.

Then, they look for Birdie. Birdie isn’t particular to where he hides. They look under the building, on top the building, and around the building, but they still can’’t find him. They look at the side of window, but they still can’t find him. They go back to the nest, thinking he is right behind them. They look behind them, but he isn’t there. They keep walking, and he still isn’t there. Then suddenly, Birdie pops out of the nest.

“Boo!” he says.

They all jump back, and Rattie almost falls out of the tree, but Pinnie catches him and pulls him up. That night, they make another nest. Rattie sleeps in one nest and Pinnie and Birdie sleep in the other. And Blackie sleeps right above them. It is a full moon, so they don’t fall asleep for a while.

Finally, at 8 o’clock p.m., they fall asleep.

The next morning, they watch the sunrise. The colors are pink, purple, orange, and yellow. It is really fun. After that, they go into the train station. They find some tickets on the ground. They have one, two, three, but one was missing. They search the ground..

“Rattie, look at this! There’s two more tickets. What should we do?”

“Maybe we can print out more tickets and give them to the others.”

“Okay!”

So Rattie goes to print them, and Pinnie goes to tell the others. She calls Blackie and Birdie. They go to the printer all together. Rattie types it in, Blackie presses the button, puts the paper in, and Birdie takes the papers out. They have eight tickets now. They can go on two trips!

Birdie is looking at the tickets. Pinnie is walking over, and Rattie is jumping off the printer. He lands next to Pinnie, and he almost knocks his beak off.

Just then, Birdie screams, “These are tickets to India! And even better, plane tickets!”

One time, when Birdie was a baby pigeon, he wandered off and he snuck onto a plane. He didn’t know where it was, he didn’t know where he was going. He didn’t know how to fly. He got lost on the plane. He found his way into the cargo. He saw this little puppy.

He said, “Hi.”

The dog didn’t understand him, so he read his name tag and read, “Fluffy.” He knew a little English, so he said, “Hi, little puppy.”

The dog said, “Woof, woof, woof.”

“Maybe I should switch to dog,” he said. “Hello, little dog. What is your name?”

The dog said back, “My name’s Fluffy. I’m from India. My owner’s on the plane. I want some food. I’m really hungry. One second.”

He went back. He started walking down the aisle and saw some food. He picked it up and brought it back to the cargo.

“Thank you,” said Fluffy. “Can we be friends?”

“I’ll give you my phone number.”

And that is how they became friends.

Birdie is so happy that he is going to India because he is going to see his friend, Fluffy.

“Before I met Fluffy, I was afraid of dogs.”

“Cool!” say Pinnie and Rattie.

So, they put the tickets on top of the counter where the flight attendant checks them. They grab them down, and go onto the airplane. They sneak onto the plane, with snacks like gum, crackers, ice cream, and donuts. They drop their backpacks and give each other a piece of gum.

They sleep for a while. Then, they hear that dinner is coming around, and Birdie says, “Wake up, everyone! Dinner is here!”                         

Rattie goes up and gets two juices from the juice bar and two bowls of spaghetti with meatballs. Rattie runs across the bar, gets two juices and runs back. Then, he goes to the food bar and gets two plates of spaghetti and meatballs and scampers back.

“I wonder where we are going,” says Birdie.

“I will check,” says Rattie.

He runs down the aisle, reads the sign, and then he goes back to his friends.

He says, “We’re going to India!”

“Cool,” says Blackie.

 

Chapter 3

“I’m hungry for dinner,” says Birdie, “I’m going to go up to the dinner bar.”

So Birdie starts walking. He walks down the aisle like a person. But just then, a flight attendant walks down the aisle. She isn’t watching, and she steps on Birdie’s tail. He screeches. The flight attendant starts chasing after him. He runs into the food bar. He doesn’t get anything because he just starts running back down the aisle. He goes under the chair where all of his friends are.

He says, “There’s a flight attendant coming to get us! Quick, hold onto the top of the chair, so they don’t see us.”

But Blackie is too late. They see him. They take them all to the cargo and put them in a cage. They are so sad because they want to see what the view is like. But they can’t now. Now, they have to wait until they come out of the airplane. Just then, Birdie is reading the ticket because he still has it in his wing.

And he says, “Oh no, we don’t know if we are getting off on the right thing. We’re stopping in London, and we might not know when to get off.”

Blackie says, “I could try and gnaw off these bars.”

“No,” says Birdie. “That would hurt your teeth and you might break them.”

Rattie starts running around the cage like a maniac. Birdie has to calm him down and puts him on the little blanket that they put in the cages for animals. Just then, they hear a beeping sound from outside.

“Oh no! This might be India, or it could be London,” says Rattie.

“Quick!” says Birdie. “Gnaw off the lock for us! It won’t hurt your teeth because it’s only a lil bit of metal.”

Rattie starts gnawing off the metal, and there is a little hole that they can fit in. They squeeze out and push the button to open the door of the cargo. They walk against the wall.

“There’s the door,” says Birdie. “Come on! Go quick!”

They run down the aisle and out the door.

“Whew!” they say.

Birdie notices that it is much colder than in India at the airport. Then, he sees the plane leaving.

“Oh no! This is London! It’s not India!”

All of them start running toward the door to get to the plane, but it is leaving. Now, they have to sneak onto another plane and make sure it is going to India.

 

Chapter 4

“Now what are we going to do?” says Rattie in his annoying voice.

“Don’t worry,” says Birdie, “We will find a plane that’s somewhere close to India.”

“First of all, we need to find a place to sleep,” Pinnie says.  

“Look, we can go under that chair in the corner,” says Blackie.

They walk over to the chair and find a comfy space behind the leg of the chair.

“Perfect, and now we can see when the airplane’s coming, and we can hear if it’s for India.”

For the next two days, they play and steal food like birds and animals do. Then, they hear the announcer say, “The plane for India is leaving now. Please get in line if you are going to India.”

They get up as soon as they hear the word “India” and they run as fast as their little legs can carry them.

Birdie thinks for a second, Oh no! We’re going to get seen.

Just then, he sees another little bird in there flying around.

He says to the others, “You know how birds get stuck in airports sometimes? We should act like one of them.”

So, they start flying around like they are birds that just got stuck there. Then, they see the door opening. They swoop down. Rattie is holding onto Blackie’s back into the door.  

“Phew” says Blackie, “We got on! Now let’s find a place to sit where they won’t find us.

“Maybe behind the curtain,” says Rattie.

“Okay,” says Birdie.

They run over to the curtain. They get settled, and they stay there for the whole time. It is really hot in the curtain, so Birdie takes a walk under a seat.

Then, he notices a flight attendant coming. He runs back as fast as he can to the curtain.

“Phew! Don’t go out there, and be quiet,” he said to the others.

They all stay still for a few minutes. Then, Birdie peeks his eye out of the curtain. The flight attendant is gone. They are safe.

They look at the time. It was ten o’clock at night.

Birdie says, “I think we should all go to bed now.” So they all fall asleep.

The next morning, they hear that breakfast is coming. So, they sneak a little pretzel bag. They all share it.

Just then, they hear an announcement that says they are almost in India.

“Yay, we’re almost there!” says Birdie.

So, they spend the rest of the time enjoying the plane. Then, they see on the board that they are landing in two minutes! They count down.

“59, 58, 57…”

They are so excited!

Then, the flight attendant says, “Everyone who wants to get to India, get off.”

They run as fast as they can off the plane. They run through security, and they run through the door of the airport.

They say, “We’re finally here!!”

They sneak onto a taxi and ride all the way to the gate of India. There are a lot of people there! They walk around and look for dogs that look like Fluffy. Just then, they see a beautiful design on the gate of India. They walk around one more time, and they hear a barking noise! There is a dog jumping on someone!

Birdie looks over and says, “That’s my friend!!!”

But just then, Birdie walks up to Fluffy. He pauses. He is nervous. His wings start shaking. Then, he remembers Fluffy is his friend. He is not going to eat him.

Finally, he says, “Hello” to Fluffy.

But Fluffy doesn’t hear Birdie. Birdie runs over, but just then, Fluffy starts walking away!

“Don’t you remember me?” says Birdie.

Just then, they see each other. “You’re my friend that I met on the plane!” says the dog named Fluffy.

“Yeah,” says Birdie, “I came to see you!”

They laugh and play for the rest of the day, and Birdie ends up staying there for a whole month with this friends! Fluffy gets to know his friends, too. They eat a lot of dosas, flat pancakes that you can eat for any meal, and they’re not sweet. They also eat idli’s, rice shaped into balls.

Soon, they plan a date where Fluffy can come to New York! They are so happy. And they live happily ever after, for now.

 

The End!

(Birdie says goodbye!)

 

Ali’s Birds

Ali Staw lived in the mountains. She had two brothers. They were named Jack and Matt. They didn’t exactly have the Staw name, because they were orphans.

Ali also used to have a pet bird named Smudgy, but he died when he found a chocolate in her room and ate it. Ali didn’t really miss Smudgy, because he had been a bad bird. He always put raspberry smudges on her clothes. But Ali did like birds.

The mountains were Ali’s favorite place to go. She always went to the tallest mountain named Vine Master. When Ali got there, she sat on a carved wooden chair and stared at the sky.

One day, she saw a hut, but no chair on the mountain. She didn’t look at the sky that day. She listened. Ali listened all day long, not minding having to sit on the rough mountain.

“Enter the home of the brave, and find me. Listen for the clues of the nature, and you will discover who you are meant to be,” the bird called.

It was a male, Ali could tell. Ali stepped into the small, wood hut. There was the carved chair that she always sat in. She took her seat and tried to listen to the bird again. She sat down and heard an aggressive bird argument. Ali listened for the sound of the hundred birds disagreeing and heard them discussing a very important matter.

“No, master!!! You should not care about Ali,” the ninety-nine other birds tweeted.

The elder bird, who was the prettiest dove of all doves, said, “But I’ve seen the future! Ali is the only one who can save me from the seven-headed secret serpent monster!”

And so, he left to find Ali, not knowing Ali was sitting right on his old throne.

Then, Ali remembered! Her mom had asked her to be home by 10:00 PM, and right now, it was 10:37! As she raced through the ghostly winds of Pennsylvania, the dove appeared, smiling next to her. She ignored him. Ali got home by 12:00 AM. Everybody was already sleeping, except her. She decided to fix up some Caesar salad. She used her great-great-great-great-great-great-great-grandma Elise’s recipe. The secret ingredients were love and crushed up butter-salt snack cookies.

While Ali was eating, she read the news. The news said…

Oh no! The elder bird had gotten into Ali’s house. She did not care. Birds were her favorite animals. She wanted to take the elder bird to Pennsylvania State Elementary, so she put him in Smudgy’s old cage. Then, she jumped in her bed, thinking of which name would be best. The elder bird was happy to be safe, because he didn’t like living in that plain, drab hut anyway.

In the morning, she took her backpack, her mom’s coffee, and the bird to the ragged gray-yellow bus.

At first period, Mr. Aleru called Ali up to go to Mrs. Heidi. Ali left the dove with Mr. Aleru.

When she opened the door, Ali saw Mrs. Heidi lying dead with blood surrounding her temples.

Her hand had ink on it that said, “Go to the wandmaker’s house.”

Then, Ali looked at the wall. She saw a big hole in the wall. She heard a “Mchhhh…” She was in the core of doom. Ali felt really scared.

Last year, Mrs. Heidi, who Ali had always thought was magical, had told Ali to beware the seven-headed secret serpent. Ali rummaged through all the principal’s books. She finally found the principal’s ancient guide to fighting extreme monsters.

The page that was about that monster was page 88. It said to kill the monster, you need a saber tooth and the magical moonstone. Mrs. Heidi had the moonstone and the saber tooth! The bad news was they were in the velvet lockbox.

Then, Ali remembered! It was a bird school! And Mrs. Heidi loved things backwards, so that is why she loved subtraction more than addition. Ali typed the word bird in backwards (drib). The box opened. Ali carefully scooped the moonstone and the saber tooth, put them in Mrs. Heidi’s bookbag, and jumped through the hole.

Ali took a taxi to the wandmaker’s house. Ali thought that the last person the serpent killed was the wandmaker. She took the moonstone and the saber tooth, one in each hand, and put them together. They made a little fireball, and she shot it at the serpent, which was in the living room.

The serpent exploded. When he exploded, she found a golden heart in the middle of his skin and blood. Ali took the golden heart, and she suddenly could control the clouds! She flew back to the school to get the dove.

Ali said in bird language, “Eedtyioker medreddoped,” which meant that the serpent was dead. She took the remainder of the moonstone and saber tooth and found Mrs. Heidi sitting in her chair doing her work. Ali felt good that she saved Mrs. Heidi!

Then, when she took the dove home and to her room, the elder bird turned into a girl! The girl told Ali that she had been a dove, and all she needed was the heart that controlled the clouds.

The girl and Ali became sisters and best friends.

And Ali knew it all… She was a heroine.

 

THE END

 

U.T.S.

“Jake! Jake! Come on, you have to go to school,” my mom called from the kitchen.

“I’m not going. No one is going to be friends with me. I’m going to be…” I moaned.

Mom came into the room and opened up the window shades. I moaned and covered my eyes.

“Close the windows,” I said.

“But wait, isn’t Kyle going to be going to the same school as you?” she asked me, as I got up from bed.

“Nah Mom, he went with the rest of the bunch to Madeline Niles school,” I said, trying to act cool.

“Please treat me with respect,” she scolded, “I am your mother after all.”

“But Mom, I don’t know if anybody will like me.” I said.

“Honey, you know that will never happen,” she said.  “You are going to be completely okay.”

“Mom, I told you to knock before you come in.”

“Okay, I will be downstairs when you’re done.”

I took a quick shower and walked to the closet where I took out my burgundy uniform that had a touch of navy blue on it.

“Honey, don’t forget to brush your hair,” she said.

I paid no attention to it for once.

Hopefully the school does not have any bullies, I thought, just as I started to go down stairs.

I went downstairs to eat the breakfast that Mom had prepared for me. I took my oatmeal and sat on my orange Lazy-Boy couch in the living room.

“This oatmeal is rotten,” I told Mom.

“Jake, if you go to school looking that depressed, you’re going to start to look like you’re suicidal,” my mom called from the kitchen in a voice so annoying that I couldn’t stop myself from saying what I did.

“Can you stop nagging? You’re going to drive me insane. This is probably why David and Dad left us,” I yelled.  

“If you mention them in that way again, you’ll wish that you could not talk at all.”

She was absolutely pissed. She’s not normally like that. The mom I knew was kind and never yelled like that.

“Okay. Okay, just don’t hit me.”

I was worried, because when I said their names before she didn’t yell at me like she did now. I knew that I should not have mentioned Dad. She was super emotional when someone said their names in disrespect.

“Well Mom, I’m off to school,” I called, slinging my backpack over my shoulder and leaving in a rush before she could drag me back into the kitchen to scold me.

Even though I always say this, I really do wonder where he, no, they, might be. I thought to myself. Mom and I almost never get into arguments. It’s only only us in this world and nobody else. They all…

“Woof-woof”

I turned around to see what the racket was about, only to see a pitbull right behind me. As I saw this wild beast called a dog, I started to run all the way to school, because it was eating a pair of overgrown legs.

As I ran, the huge dog chased me.

* * *

Pant pant! That dog really got me working. As I walked through the archway, I was stunned.

“It is beautiful,” I barely managed to slip the words out of my mouth.

I looked around to see what else this school had in store for me. There it was, a brilliant red carpet that led to the entrance. The entrance was huge with a set of castle doors. There were a set of towers, which looked like they were used to defend the place. There was an archway of Sakura trees outlining the carpet into it.

Excalibur. I liked that name, I thought as I walked in.

As I looked around, I saw all of the school’s dignified students, walking elegantly into the school.

The interior design of this place seemed to be meant for the kings.

“Ding Dong Ding Dong,” the bell went for a moment.

“Oh no, oh no, oh no, I got to go!” I said, as I made a break for the entrance.

What class do I have to go? I thought, as I started to search for my schedule. It’s not there, why is it not there. It must of fell out of my pocket when I ran out of the house. Oh man, I’m totally going to get in trouble. This had to happen on the first day, this obviously means that I’m going to have a bad rest of the year.

I ran through the velvet hallways with a multitude of boards decorated with posters on it, to tell the First Years to join their clubs. I stopped in front of the board. I frantically searched the board to see if they would have a place for someone to go if they lost their schedule. Then, this one poster caught my eye.

“Thank God!”

I should have checked if I had the thing before I left the house.

Just as I was about to start looking, I saw a man walking through the hallway. I went to go talk to him, to ask if I was going the right way to the library.

“I suggest you don’t go that way if you truly value your life,” he said in an intriguing way.

When he said that, I glanced over to the area where he was walking towards, but all I saw was the burning glare of the sun coming down on the dazzling carpet. It was as if he just vanished in thin air.

I put my hand on the wall for a second to rest, for I felt dizzy but, only to see the most dazzling girl I ever seen. The sparkle in her light blue eyes suddenly made me get up and start walking to her unconsciously.

That man’s advice echoed in my mind as I kept on walking towards her.

“Ahhh,” I pinched myself to see if I would lose myself of this trance that was abruptly placed upon me.  

As soon as I did that, the girl turned around, and I made eye contact with her. Her eyes were opaque. Kind of like someone who had just died. The sparkle in her eyes was gone and was replaced with something more sinister. She started to come closer.

What are you doing here, leave now, I thought. Maybe it’s not too late, to turn around before she can come any closer.

But, it was too late, she had come too close.

“Help,” I shrieked, as she knocked me down and slowly took shards of my flesh with her.  


Game Over

 

The Diary Adventure

Sunday, October 30, 2016

Dear Diary,

Today after workshop, I’m going to a birthday party. I’m not supposed to go dressed in a costume, but I want to. I don’t think anybody’s going to notice me in my costume, so I’m not worried about it. This birthday party doesn’t have any theme. I want it to, though.

I’m going as a vampire.

This morning, I woke up at 1:00 in the morning. I don’t know why, but maybe you do. Maybe because my eczema was itching me. I kept having to wake up and put my cream on the back of my knees, but I’m not 100% sure that was the reason why I woke up early.

I stayed up until 3:00 a.m. in the morning, and then, I fell back asleep. I woke up at 8:30 AM, because I was really tired. But I didn’t feel tired. I felt like I normally do every morning, which is fine. Rested. Every morning, I feel–

”Come down, I need you to drink your water!” yelled my mom.

“Okay!”

–like an early bird. Finally, I walked down the stairs to the living room and started gulping down my water. And I forgot something I needed to add in my diary.

I said, “Mom, can I just be excused for a minute?”

“Why?” she wondered.

“Just because I forgot to add something in my diary.”

“You can do it later.”

But she didn’t know that my diary was quite emotional and real. I begged to go back upstairs, and finally she said yes, counting to ten. I heard her counting, “1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,” and I came panting downstairs and leaped onto the sofa just as she was about to say, “10.”

My twin screamed, “TV! TV!”

I covered my ears to stop the noise, but he was too loud.

My mom said, “No, you watched too much TV already.”

I wondered, “When?”

She said, “While you were writing in your diary.”

“Oh,” I said.

Just then, I finished my water, and at that exact same moment, my dad came striding in from his changing room, as he always does.

He looked everywhere and said, “Oh, there’s my breakfast. I’m starving.”

My mom said, “As a matter of fact–oh no! We’re very late. It’s already 9 o’clock!”

I asked, “Where do we have to go?”

“You’ll see when we get there,” my mom replied very cautiously and worried.

I said, “Can I just go get something from my room?”

She replied even more cautiously, “Hurry up.”

I ran upstairs, as quick as a flash, and came rushing down faster than I have ever gone, but slower than a flash because I was exhausted from running up.

I collapsed into the car, and my intention was to start writing in my diary, but I was too tired from running upstairs, so I started snoring louder than my brother was yelling “TV.”

I woke up fifteen minutes later, and as soon as the diary thought came across my mind, I sprang up from lying down, and started scribbling every word of what happened in my diary.

The car jerked, and what I saw next was a something big, but I didn’t know what it was. The shape of it had glass, colorful windows. I’m not sure if it was the sun’s rays shining on a raindrop, or if it was just meant to be that way. I scribbled all of this in my journal.

I hopped out of the car, and my mom said, “Stop writing in that journal, so you can enjoy the party.”

I grumbled to myself, “I want to keep writing, but I feel as if I’m a bandit from my home.”

She said, “Don’t have such a sad face. Enjoy the birthday, and stop writing in that diary, or you won’t have a birthday party this year.”

She looked at me as if she wouldn’t give me any presents for my birthday, and I heard her just snort to herself. I hurried inside and started scribbling again.

I saw a little corner where lots of children were reading and writing, and as soon as I saw them, I hurried over, but not as quick as a flash. I jogged over there and somebody had just left, so I tumbled onto that cushion. Just as I was about to put down the first word, I heard a loud voice say, “Game time!”

“Noooo!” I grumbled. I felt as if it were an autocracy.

They said, “The first game is… the rock climbing jump!”

As soon as I heard rock climbing, I couldn’t stop jumping up and running towards the wall, because I love rock climbing. I was in such a hurry, that I forgot to bring my diary with me. When the game was over, I said, “Ugh, let me start writing now.”

Just at that moment, I realized that I had lost it. I was startled. I hurried over to the corner in which I had been writing. I lifted up the cushions, but it was nowhere to be found. I started sobbing, but then, I said to myself, “I will find it. I’d rather miss the activities than lose my diary.”

I started asking everyone, “Have you seen a brown, leather-covered diary/journal?”

They said, “What are you talking about?”

Just as I left, I saw them grin at each other and heard, “Let’s look at the diary!”

“Yeah, let’s do it!”

They started opening the cover, and I leaped up and snatched it, landing in the cake. There was a big gasp, but the positive news was that I got my diary. The next negative news was that my diary was dirty! I hurried out of the cake and walked with icing dripping out of my hair. My parents scolded me, and my dad took me home and locked me in my room. I was half delighted and half sad. I was sad because I wanted to enjoy the birthday, but ended up not enjoying the birthday party at all. I’m happy because I have my diary, and I can clean it up here. As soon as the door closed, I grabbed a cloth that was always in my drawer and water from the water jug. I started cleaning it up. I was finished in about ten minutes and started scribbling again in my diary.

My family came home, and I heard my twin laughing and saying, “Ha! He didn’t get to come! I finally had an outing without him!”

I ground my teeth, just to show how angry I was. I opened my door and screamed, “Mom! Dad! Can you put him in another separate room and let me come out, please?”

The next thing I heard was wailing and crying, saying, “Don’t put me in! I’ll say sorry.”

I quickly scribbled all this in my diary.

Finally, I heard footsteps coming towards my room. Creak. I heard my front door being unlocked.

“Thank you!” I said in a relieved way, and I ran downstairs to the basement and found a comfy spot where I wasn’t too cold or too hot. It was just perfect. I started writing.

When I finished writing, which I thought was only five minutes, but was actually an hour, my mom shouted, “Come down for dinner.”

I grunted and started walking up the stairs gloomily. I sat down and started sobbing when I saw what was for dinner, which was cold, fried peas. My brother had already gulped all of the peas down his throat.

My mom said, “You have to eat it all.”

When I had finished my dinner, I went up to my room and wrote everything that had happened recently.

I felt really ashamed when I went to sleep, because I could’ve fought through eating the disgusting peas, just like my brother did.

Before I went to bed, my brother came into my room to apologize.

I said, “It’s okay, I’m sorry as well.”

I went back to sleep and thought in my head, Tomorrow is going to be a great day, because today was the worst day!

 

Mr. Maniac

Mr. Maniac has white hair. He is about five feet tall, he has glasses, he has a small army, he has enemies, and he has a power that can stop time with the small clock that he keeps inside his jacket.

Mr. Maniac likes to freeze time, steal money, and spill people’s coffee. His army has a watch too, so they don’t freeze when he clicks the watch.

Mr. Maniac wants to control the world.

He has no real reason, he just wants too. So he can have everything. He wants money and gold. He wants to be rich.

When he’s trying to control the world, he sends his army to defeat the people who are against him, but they steal the armies watches, and so when Mr. Maniac stops time, they don’t freeze.

In one of the big battles, Mr. Maniac is there, and only a few people in his army are left. People try to break his watch. Someone manages to find and break his watch.

Then, they take him to prison for life. His army also goes to prison, but not for life.

Mr. Maniac is lonely. He only sees the police.

In prison, he plays some games with his army friends. The police gives him food. The police don’t want him to die.

 

The Golden Heart Chronicles (Excerpt)

Chapter One

The bell rang as Kate Rosen ran to get to her classroom on time. She had spent all night finishing her English homework. Kate had gotten a C+ on her last English test, and her parents were really upset because they wanted Kate to be a straight-A student. So they had grounded her. That made Kate really mad, because she and her best friend Lucy had been planning a party with some of their friends from gymnastics.

So, when she got to school, Lucy asked why Kate hadn’t responded to her texts, and it was all very bad.

After studying all night, Kate had forgotten to set her alarm, and woke up with only fifteen minutes until school started, and it took five minutes for her dad to drive Kate to school. So that meant she had just ten minutes to get ready for school.

Now, there she was, sliding into her seat, just as the final bell rang.

“Where were you, Kate?” boomed Ms. Call, “You were almost late!! And you know I don’t like lateness!”

Ms. Call was a very loud person. Normally, she could be heard across the hall. And almost all the teachers complained about being able to hear the kids across the hall. Ms. Call was also very strict. It was no wonder that most kids were afraid of her. Mrs. V, the vice principal, was her sister, and that morning, she came into their classroom.

“Clarissa,” she said (Ms. Call’s first name was Clarissa), “Won’t you meet me during lunch?”

“Of course, of course!” Ms. Call responded.

After Ms. V left, Kate wondered what was up. Then, Ms. Call continued her lecture.   

* * *

After listening to a long lecture about the bad effects of being late, Ms. Call finally started the (boring) lesson. The day flew by, and by 3:50 PM, when it was time to go home, Kate was exhausted. When Ms. Call passed out a flyer for Golden Heart Middle & High School, Kate hardly paid any attention at all.

When Kate got home, she flopped on her bed, with orange stars on her quilt, in her room with the pretty, pink and yellow striped walls, and slept until her mom yelled at at her to get her homework done. Only a few minutes after Kate finished her math homework, there was a knock on the door.

“Mom, can you get the door?” Kate called up from her room. “I still have to do my writing homework!”

“Okay,” her mom responded. “I’ll tell you if it is someone you want to see!”

A few seconds later, there was a loud clomp-clomping of designer boots, and Kate knew exactly who had knocked on the door, even without her mom calling, “Lucy’s here!”

 

Chapter 2

Lucy was Kate’s best friend. Lucy used to live across the street from Kate, back before Lucy’s mom had made, like, a billion dollars as an award-winning actor, who starred in one of the most popular movies, even today, about three years after the movie had been released. The movie was called Queen of Wonder and was about ancient Greek royalty, and even though it sounded weird, it was really good! After the movie became a smash hit, and Lucy’s family was suddenly rich, they moved to a huge house on a nearby street, where all the big house were.

Kate still lived in her two-story brick house on Moon Street. The upper floor consisted of Kate’s room, her parents’ room, and a small bathroom that Kate and her parents shared. The bottom floor had a kitchen, living room, and dining room. It was identical to all the other houses on Moon Street.

Lucy was still Kate’s best friend, even though they didn’t live near each other. Practically every weekend, one was sleeping over at the other’s house.

Lucy ran into Kate’s room and started talking a mile a minute.  

“Oh my god!” screamed Lucy, waving her hands in the air, “Have you heard? Do you want to go?”

“What are you talking about?” asked Kate, “I don’t know know what you’re talking about!”

“You don’t know?” Lucy asked, shocked. “I thought you got the pamphlet!”

“Oh, this?” Kate threw the Golden Heart Middle and High School pamphlet on the ground. She was shocked at Lucy’s reaction.

“How dare you! This school is the key for us to become rich and famous like my mom!”

What?” Kate felt like she had missed something big.

“Oh,” Lucy said, her voice suddenly gentle. “Have you read the pamphlet at all?”

“No.”

“Oh, I see why you were so confused.”

“I still am confused!”

“Whatever. You need to know what’s in that pamphlet!”

“Okay.”

“So read it!”

“Fine, I was going to!”

Kate picked up the pamphlet and began to read.

 

Dear whoever is lucky enough to read this,

We hope by reading this, you decide that you will benefit from going to Golden Heart Middle and High School. If you do, we hope you enjoy the luxurious dorms, which you will share with a roommate of your choice. Your rooms will include two queen beds, a flat-screen TV, two mini fridges, the rest of your mini kitchenette, and laptops for you and your roommate. There are also special classes unique to Golden Heart, including our famous equestrian center, our star cooking class, our filmmaking class, our honored sports classes with all things from soccer to gymnastics, our first-class dancing classes, our writing classes, water sports, our wonderful art classes, and more! We hope you decide to come, like all the stars and world-famous people who have graduated from Golden Heart. If you cannot afford to go to Golden Heart, a full scholarship will be awarded to two exceptional students at participating schools by the principal, so try to do the best for your community, and you might just get into this elite school. Until the scholarship is awarded to the students, think about looking into it further.

Thank you,

Madam Finick, Headmistress of Golden Heart

 

“Wow…” Kate breathed, “This looks amazing!”

“I know!” cried Lucy, “We NEED to get in!”

Just then, Kate’s mother came upstairs to tell Lucy that her mother had called and said that Lucy could stay at Kate’s house for dinner, but couldn’t sleep over, because it was a school night.

“What are you talking about, girls?” she asked, “It was getting a little loud up here. I hope you weren’t arguing!”

Kate wordlessly handed her mom the pamphlet. Her mom looked it over and then read the inside of the pamphlet.

“Um, interesting….” Kate’s mom said, “I presume you just read this, Kate.”

“Yes.”

“And you were showing it to Kate, Lucy. Right?”

“How do you know these things?” Lucy wondered aloud.

“Mom power,” Kate’s mother responded.

She was always saying cheesy things like that, as an excuse for logic.

“Can you pleeease let us try to get in?!” Lucy and Kate asked in unison, “Please?”

“Well, if you want to so bad, then, yes.”

“Yay!”

“Lucy’s mother has to agree too, okay?”

“Okay.”

Her mom left the room, and a wordless message passed between Lucy and Kate: We have to get into Golden Heart!

Kate and Lucy had been friends for so long that they could communicate with each other with just their eyes.

 

The Meteor

Once upon a time, a ten-year-old girl tossed and turned in her bed, whipping the lavender-detergent-scented, ironed-to-a-fare-thee-well bed sheets into a sweaty, tangled web. She had a cold feeling in the pit of her stomach, as if she’d swallowed an iceberg. She didn’t know why.

Ashley Viva Stella, that was her name, although she hated to be called Ashley. She liked Ash better. When she looked at her clock, it was 1:33 a.m. Ash sighed. She had a long way till morning.

Ash switched on the lamp on her bedside table, casting a warm, yellow glow across the room. She picked up the book she had been reading, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer’s Stone. Ash passed about six or seven pages without retaining any information at all — literally, if you had walked into the room and asked Ash what she just read, she would not be able to answer that. Ash soon realized that she would not get anywhere by reading, so she switched off the light and stared at her ceiling. Soon, out of pure exhaustion, she fell into a restless sleep.

Ash was in a dark cavern, with the only illumination being her headlight on her uncomfortable plastic hat. Bats silently fluttered between the stalactites and stalagmites — the ones that were on the cavern ceiling, though Ash could never remember which was which. Ash was looking for something… something… something…

Ash sat up in bed, panting. She read her clock. It was 7:06 a.m. Ash had to read the clock twice, once to just read it and the second time, because she could barely believe her eyes. Even though her mom got up at six, there was no light from beneath the bedroom door, and the delectable smell of Saturday pancakes had not made its way up to her bedroom.

In fact, when she yelled, “Mom!” her voice had an echo to it that is only heard in particularly empty houses.

Frantic, Ash yanked the ruffled lace curtains away from the window so hard that she almost ripped one clean off. When she peered out the window, she thought she was hallucinating.

The neighbors across the street, the Goldmans, were stuffy, old grandparents. They lived in a great, big house, a Victorian-style beauty, as her mother always called it. Personally, Ash hated it. It made her feel cramped and claustrophobic, and Mrs. Goldman had a mania for cleanliness, so the Goldman place was always unnaturally clean. It made no sense, her claustrophobia — the Goldman house was huge! But she felt claustrophobic, all the same.

The Goldman house, the ‘Victorian-style beauty,’ was half-crushed by an enormous rock! It looked like a meteor, not that Ash had ever seen a meteor before. It’s not like meteors come crashing randomly down all over the place, but when you see one, you just kinda know it.    

As you’d expect, there was a huge crowd around the Goldman house. It looked like the whole neighborhood had come. Mrs. Goldman was being carried out of the rubble on a stretcher. Mr. Goldman was kneeling on the rough gravel beside her.

Ash was so shocked, that for a moment, she did nothing at all. Then, she finally came to her senses and stuffed her feet into a dirty pair of too-small yellow sneakers. Well, the sneakers used to be yellow. Now, they, like all the other well-used items in her wardrobe, were sort of an indeterminate gray, and her pajamas, which she was still wearing, were striped other shades of indeterminate gray. She ran down the stairs so fast, she seemed to be flying — her sneakers seemed hardly to be touching the wooden stairs at all.

Ash pushed open the door and slammed it behind her. She pushed through the huge crowd surrounding the Goldmans’ house, yelling to the annoyed people in her wake, “Sorry! Sorry! I have to find my mom!”  

Ash was so desperate to find her mom, that when she pushed through the crowd, she pushed away her mom and kept searching. But when she yelled, “Sorry! Sorry! I have to find my mom!” to her mom, Ash’s mom stepped in front of her and said quietly, “Ash, I’m your mom.”

Ash threw her arms around her mom, Jasmine Violet Stella. (Yeah, I know, Ash’s grandma was obsessed with flowers.) Ash’s mom smelled like salty sea air, the same way she always smelled, but after being so scared of losing her mom, Ash loved the smell more than ever.

“Ash, I’m so, so, sorry,” Ash’s mom breathed. She pulled Ash away from her and looked at her, mother to daughter, blue eye into deep, deep, brown eye. “When I looked outside the window and saw the meteor, I ran outside to help the Goldmans without a second thought.”

“So it is a meteor,” Ash remarked.

“Well, that’s another conversation we have to have later, isn’t it,” Ash’s mom said, sheepishly. Ash agreed.    

Ash twisted her head around to see the damage done to other houses. But it was weird — the other houses seemed to have gotten off easily, without a mark or a scratch. While Ash was inspecting the surrounding houses, she spotted, out of the corner of her eye, a greyish-white figure disappearing into the trees.

The town Ash lived in was densely wooded all around. This cut Ash off a little bit from the rest of the world. In fact, there was very bad cell phone connection, and Ash had only been outside of her town once, to visit her grandmother.

The town was self-contained, though. And that is why, just three months ago, a colony of aliens decided on that place as their landing place on Earth.

***

Earth was a prime spot. The aliens had decided on that long ago. It was virtually free of pollution. (Believe me, all the other inhabited planets had had organisms that were able to think and pollute billions of years longer, and were much, much, worse.) The organisms that lived on Earth were simple-minded and easy to manipulate, and overall, Earth was much younger than the aliens’ former planet, Planet 89k in the Andromeda Galaxy. To the aliens, Earth was a blank sheet of paper, a fresh start, with only a few faint marks.

Ash’s hometown was almost a little world in itself. Oh, sure, there were a few roads and paths through the woods, but they were far from the interconnected highways that generously decorated the rest of Earth. So in all ways, Ash’s hometown was the perfect landing spot.

Three months later, by catching onto a passing meteor and altering its course, the alien colony had arrived.

***

When Ash saw the greyish-white figure, she passed it off as nothing, just a trick of the eyes. But whatever had planted the iceberg in her stomach refused to allow Ash’s brain to think about anything else, or at least not for a long period of time. For the rest of the day, Ash thought about the greyish-white figure. She pushed it to the back of her brain. But the thought did not go away. Instead, Ash’s thought waited patiently at the back of her brain, and whenever there was nothing better to do, the thought waddled over to the front of her brain.

Ash lay in her bed. The thought about the greyish-white figure prevented her from sleeping. As soon as Ash began to close her eyes and think about puppies at the beach and other cute, comforting things, the greyish-white figure thought waddled over, and Ash opened her eyes in shock. This choppy, interrupted sleep got her some rest, but Ash was still grumpy and irritable the next morning from insomnia two nights in a row.

***

“Hi, sweetie!” Ash’s mom greeted her cheerily, “I made cinnamon toast!”

“I don’t want cinnamon toast, okay?” Ash snapped back.

“Ash…” her mom said, in a tone that warned Ash that her mom was not going to put up with that behavior. “I want to start this morning out in a good way. I don’t want to go there, Ash.”

“You don’t realize that the house across the street was just destroyed? By a meteor? How do you not expect me to be paranoid after that!” Ash shouted at her mom. She surprised herself by her tone.

I’m going to be in such big trouble… Ash thought nervously.

But instead of escalating the war, Ash’s mom took a deep breath and sighed. “I know what happened yesterday was scary, but I’m trying to keep my cool, okay?” Ash’s mom replied softly.

Ash was not comforted at all. Instead, this made her angrier.

“You don’t understand!” Ash yelled, “You may be trying to ‘keep your cool,’ but I am actually having a normal reaction to this enormous disaster! I am freaking out!”

“Are you overreacting?” Ash’s mom asked.

Ash considered what she was doing. Yelling and shouting was not going to stop the fact that life had to go on, despite this disaster.

“Uhm, sort of, not really… yeah,” Ash answered sheepishly.

“C’mere, sweetie,” Ash’s mom said, opening her arms.

Ash charged headfirst at her mom’s stomach, playfully. “Oof,” her mom grunted, as Ash knocked her over. “You’re getting strong!”

Mother and daughter wrestled on the floor, and all was forgotten for a couple minutes. But the looming threat of the meteor returned soon, when…

***

Ash’s mom switched on the kitchen TV.

“Scientists are still trying to figure out what is the meaning of this meteor…” the reporter droned on.

There was a photo of the destroyed Goldman house on Eyewitness News. Ash and her mom looked at each other. Without talking, each knew what the other wanted: Turn off the TV.

So Ash clicked the remote, and the screen went black. But once Ash and her mom had started thinking about the meteor, they couldn’t stop — it was like a magnet.

“Mom,” Ash started nervously. “Did you see any small, greyish-white figure?”

“When?” Ash’s mom replied wearily.

She was 99% sure that Ash was just being funny, or making some invisible joke, but she always tried to give Ash a fair chance to speak.  

“Uhm, yesterday?” Ash said.

“No, sweetie,” Ash’s mom answered.

The irrational part of Ash’s mom’s brain then considered a new possibility: Ash needed to go to the mental hospital, but that was so unlikely, that the one hundred times bigger, more rational part of her brain deleted the thought.

“Sweetie, is this some kind of joke? Because I’m really not in the mood.”  

“Ah, no,” Ash muttered softly, and that was it, conversation over, end of story. But this was only the beginning of her asking those questions.  

It was Sunday, and there was no school, though Ash wanted to have school. Anything, anything, to get away from this thought in the back of her mind, this growing thought that was slowly, painfully, taking over her mind.

Because Ash was just denying the truth–aliens were taking over the planet.

***

“Did you see a greyish-white figure? Two days ago?” Ash asked around.

It was Monday. Ash had thought that having school would help take her mind off the greyish-white figure, but here she was, asking about the very thing she didn’t want to think about. The front of her brain told her that she didn’t know why, but the always-more-truthful, sometimes-painful back, told her that she really just wanted to have people who knew that what she saw was real.

But to no avail — everybody looked at her as if she was crazy, or with worry, and said, “No, I haven’t, not at all.”

Well, almost everybody. The class clown, Robert Grimley, said, “D’you mean Mrs. Goldman? She looked pretty greyish-white, though more from her shock that her beautiful house was destroyed than from the pain of having the painting frame fall on her foot.”

When he said beautiful, he made his voice high and old-lady like. It was an uncannily good impersonation of Mrs. Goldman.

“You are so unfeeling,” Ash shot back, though she, too, found it hard to have emotion to spare for Mrs. Goldman.

She had invited Ash, and Robert too, at some point, over to her house, which was a fancy, stuffy place filled with priceless objects, uncomfortable designer furniture, and flax and granola cookies that were more like terrible crackers.

Ash heard a piercing whistle very near her ear.

“Aah!” Ash flinched involuntarily and covered her ears.

They rang loudly afterward, so that she could hardly hear anything. But she didn’t need to hear to see that the oblivious PE teacher, Coach Shea, walked away without a look back to see Ash’s pain.

The day went on. Humanities, math, and computer class, the three other subjects she had that day, didn’t help at all to take her mind off the figure. In humanities, they were asked to write their feelings about the meteor hitting the Goldmans’ house. In math, they were asked to calculate the mass of the meteor based on the length, width, and density. In computer class, they were asked to write a digital composition about the meteor.

Finally, school was dismissed. Ash slammed the door behind her, as she swung through the doorway of her house.

“Oh there you are,” Ash’s mom said, not looking up from her laptop, which she was rapidly typing on. “We need to go to the store.”

Ash sighed and flung her backpack onto the coffee table, causing the fortunately-plastic cup on it to tip over and thump onto the floor.

“Ay–Ash! Put your backpack somewhere safe and pick up that cup!” Ash’s mom groaned.

Ash did what she was told and headed out the door again with her mom.

At the grocery store, the air smelled heavily of fish. There were many signs everywhere for a sale on salmon. Ash’s mom never bought the food on sale. She said that they only put the food on sale when it was going bad, and they wouldn’t get much money for it, unless they put it on sale.

Ash’s mom immediately headed to the dairy section to get milk, cheese, and butter. Ash instead asked a bagger about the greyish-white figure. When the bagger said “no”, Ash told herself, I will ask one more person and then that’s it, I’m done, no more talk about the stupid greyish-white figure!

So Ash asked another bagger. This bagger she knew. She was twenty-one, and her name was Alex Seidra. Alex had babysat for Ash sometimes, when Ash was younger. Mostly, Alex was just doing odd jobs to earn money for college.

Alex said, “What do you mean? No, I didn’t see anything like that.”

Ash’s heart was in her shoes already, but Ash was pretty sure it had now tunnelled through the earth and ended up in Australia.

***

Even though Ash had vowed to ignore the memory of the figure, as she walked home, she kept thinking about it. She knew in the back of her brain that what she saw really was real. So, she decided to do something about it. But she couldn’t think what.

As Ash lay in bed that night, she couldn’t sleep (again!) She realized that this had happened every night since the meteor, and even the night before. Ash grew angrier and angrier.

This weird figure is taking over my brain! Thoughts raced furiously through Ash’s brain,  I have a constitutional right to be safe in my own home, but I’m not safe from this figure anywhere!

Ash got so angry that she decided to do something about it. Right then.

As if controlled by an invisible force, Ash methodically rose to her feet and dressed in a warm long-sleeve shirt and a jean jacket. It was a brisk fall night. Ash was still in her monkey pajama bottoms when she headed outside with a flashlight.

Previously, Ash had not known why she was going outside. She just felt really strongly compelled to. But as Ash was carefully closing the door of her house, it hit Ash like a ton of bricks.

She was looking for the aliens.

***

Ash took one last look at her house. She wasn’t sure she would ever see it again.

As Ash headed into the woods with a flashlight, she felt a very strong sense of deja vu.

I’ve been here before, Ash thought.

And then, she realized. Ash stood stock still, terrified.

The dream from Saturday night. The cavern.

***

Ash ventured deeper into the woods, swinging her flashlight wildly amongst the trees. She didn’t see anything. It was just dark, dank woods smelling of wet leaves. No moon glinted over her head as she headed into the menacing trees. Ash was just about to turn back when she saw a beautiful light.

Ash didn’t know what she was doing. She broke into a panting run for no reason, toward the light. Then, Ash fell down on the soft earth, out of breath and out of hope. “Aah…” Ash breathed heavily, and fell into a black hole of despair, darkness, and finally sleep.

***

Ash didn’t know she had been asleep until she woke up. At first, she didn’t know what she saw.

Then she realized. Ash was in a clearing of the woods. A bright globe, ten feet tall, radiated the soft glowing light that she had seen earlier. And what was that? Oh my gosh…

Hundreds of those small greyish-white figures were climbing expertly all over her. It tickled. Suddenly, Ash had a wave of tiredness. She fell asleep again. In her sleep, the aliens whispered to her…

Tell… everyone… you… know… about… us… our… only… request…  

One girl. Hundreds of aliens. The two worlds had always been separate. But this symbolized unity. Unity between two planets.

 

The End. Well, not really.

 

Epilogue: Tuesday morning

Ash ran home and told her mom about the aliens. She told everyone. And strangely, easily… everyone believed her. Maybe it was the aliens’ magic. Maybe it was something else. I don’t know.

Go to Ash’s hometown. Go to her house. By now, Ash is seventy-three. She has children and grandchildren. Ask her about the meteor, and this is what she will tell you:

Once upon a time, a ten-year-old girl tossed and turned in her bed…  

 

The End. Really.        

   

The Guy With The Top Hat

WARNING: Highly packed with violence, guaranteed.

 

Prologue

Whoosh. There was a scream. Slowly, Mark came closer and closer to the door, his top hat wobbling on his head. There was another scream. Mark saw blood through the crack in the door. Would you think this would happen in 1999? I didn’t think so.

Mark closed his swollen eyes and pushed the door open. A woman was lying on the floor, blood gushing down her lap. Her left eyeball looked like it was about to fall out. Her hair was as hard as bricks and her right leg was not attached to her body.

“Ha!” said Mark. “Serves her right. Don’t ever mess with my dad again!”

Mark checked her heartbeat, she was dead.

Mark picked her up along with her detached leg and carried her and walked for miles and miles, until he came to a halt in front of a cave. Mark put her in the cave and piled rocks in front of the opening of the cave. She stayed there ever since.

 

Chapter 1: Kidnapped

There was a myth that started ten years ago with a guy named Mark, who killed a woman who had gone missing. No one knew if the myth was true, or if Mark was alive or not. Ten years later, in the 2000’s, very few people in the town remembered the myth of the guy with the top hat.

A guy named Mike, who was twenty-seven years old, always wore a top hat to work. He even wore it when he showered or went to bed. His wife, Clarissa, moved to Greece to study the Greek language, so it was only Mike. No kids or pets.

People who knew the myth of the guy with the top hat always were suspicious of him. The people who were suspicious of him being a murderer were right.

One dark night, Mike was walking along the street. He saw a girl around the age of five about to walk into a closed store. This was his chance! He ran and grabbed her and kept running. When he got to his home, he handcuffed her and pushed her on the couch. She was crying so hard that soon, there would be no more water left in her body.  He went into a cabinet and pulled out a handgun. He pointed it at her.

“You have two choices.” said Mike, “You can either stay here for the rest of your life and not try to escape and not see your family again, or I can kill you right now.  The choice is yours.”

The little girl snapped her fingers, and she turned into a full grown adult. Mike was so surprised, his top hat flew off his head, and he dropped his handgun.

“Hello again, Mike.”

“Who are you?” asked Mike, his hands trembling.

“You don’t recognize me? I am your wife. I flew back from Greece yesterday, and I turned into a little girl to spy on you.  I always thought you had an urge to do something criminal. You would always stare at kids when they didn’t have parents around. But I would have never thought you would actually do it. Poor kids. While I was away, did you kidnap or kill anyone else? Be honest.”

Clarissa took off her handcuffs and handcuffed Mike.

“If I see you kidnap anyone ever again you’re going to have to deal with me, kid.”

Clarissa turned back into the little girl, gave him an, “I am watching you” look, then vanished.

“That woman has skills,” said Mike.

Mike only learned that Clarissa had powers two years ago, but he still was in awe when she did them in front of him.  

Why do I have the urge to kidnap kids? thought Mike.

 

Chapter 2: Exploring The Dead

After Mike’s little chat with Clarissa, he was very cautious when he saw a little girl. Mike was under a lot of stress from the chat, so he decided to take a walk in the woods near the park.

He was walking in the woods, the leaves crunching under his shoes, then he came to a halt right in front of a huge bramble. Beside the bramble, there was a whole field of dead people who had almost disintegrated. As you might think, Mike was in heaven. Even though he had the little chat with his wife, that still didn’t stop his criminal urge. He touched one of the dead people’s arms. Their arms felt like noodles. Really weak. Then he picked up one of the bodies and was about to walk away from the bramble, until the dead person fell out of Mike’s arms and turned into Clarissa.

“Caught you at it again!” said Clarissa.

It was windy out and Clarissa’s purple hair was flying in her face, but she was still staring at Mike intently.

“I knew that after our talk you still wouldn’t quit. I can’t believe I am still your wife. Which reminds me, I want a divorce.”

Clarissa gave him her ring, while she was staring at him rudely.

“But that doesn’t mean I am still not going to watch you. In fact, I am going to watch you more than ever, so don’t take advantage. Now, I have to go but don’t you think you’re going to get away with anything else.”

Clarissa snapped her fingers, and all the dead people disappeared. Then, Clarissa vanished.

 

Chapter 3: City Life

Mike pondered the scene in the woods in his head over and over.

“God, I wish I didn’t have the urge to do something so wrong.”

A fraction of a second after Mike thought that, a tall figure appeared in his room. He couldn’t make out what it was, because whatever it was, was too bright.

“Who are you?” asked Mike.

It wasn’t a person, but there were words written on the wall with blood.

The writing read, “Count On Blood.” The words didn’t disappear. Mike didn’t know what that meant, but he pushed the memory in the back of his head and started to think of what he was going to do.

Mike decided to go to the mall to go shopping for new guns. Now you might be thinking after two chats with Clarissa, he would probably stop. But his urge was too strong.  

As he was going to the gun store, he stopped by a store that had a variety of mannequins. As you might expect, Mike went into the store to steal the mannequin, when the mannequin he was about to take turned into Clarissa.

“You are such a nuisance,” said Clarissa. “Every hour of every day you either steal, kidnap/murder, or kill. I don’t know why I ever thought you were a good husband. I think I made the right decision to divorce you. But you need a punishment.”

Clarissa handcuffed Mike and turned herself and Mike invisible.

Clarissa transported Mike and herself to a cave that was days away from the mall. Mike and Clarissa walked into the cave. There lay a women on the cold floor of the cave who had a detached leg and dried blood all over her.

“Sit down,” said Clarissa, “There are some things about your family history that only I know and that you don’t.”

“Why do you know and not me?” asked Mike.

“That’s not important at the moment,” answered Clarissa.

“You know that top hat of yours? That was passed on for generations of men. Get ready for this. You know the myth about the guy named Mark who killed a woman who had gone missing? Well, one, he killed the woman that is lying in this cave right now. And two, Mark is your great- great- grandfather. That’s probably why you have the urge to do illegal things. The reason Mark killed that woman was because she put a curse on Mark’s father. The curse was to make him forget everything. Forget who he was, his children, his wife, and everything and everyone that he loved.

So,Mark and the woman were both criminals. But the funny thing is that Mark and the woman were husband and wife. The wife didn’t like Mark’s father. Then, Mark and the woman divorced. That’s when Mark killed his ex-wife.”

Mike was now lying on the floor next to his great-great-grandmother.

“Wouldn’t she have disintegrated by now?” asked Mark.

“No, because the dried blood has a reaction with the soil to prevent her body from disintegrating.”

“Now, can you tell me since when did you know all this information, and how did you get the information?” asked Mike.

“Fine,” answered Clarissa, “Your dad told me all of this. I swore to him that I would not tell a single soul about what he said to you, but here I am now. Your dad told me right before he died. But I thought it was the right time to tell you. Can you change Mike? Can you fight off that urge? Try to be a better person. Try, just try.”

There was a long uncomfortable silence between the two. After about an hour of silence, Mike spoke.

“I have something to tell you Clarissa. I barely remember this, but I remember one thing. When I was eight, a curse was put upon me when I was walking in the forest. Some figure popped out of a tree and placed something on the ground. I wasn’t looking and then bam! The curse made me do really bad things or want to. When I was fourteen, I tried to fight it off but it was too strong. Without the curse, I am a good-hearted man.”

“Okay,” said Clarissa. “If you really are a good-hearted man, then when we get to your place, you are going to throw out all of your guns and handcuffs. I am going to watch you.”

“Of course you are,” murmured Mike.

Clarissa transported Mike and herself back to Mike’s home.

 

Chapter 4: Good Hearted Man

When Clarissa and Mike got to Mike’s home, she said, “So are you going to throw the guns and handcuffs out or not?”

“Well, I was hoping you would forget that,” said Mike.

“Stay here,” said Clarissa, “I am am going to research how you lift the curse. Maybe that’s what we have to do, rather than trying to push through it.”

A few hours later, Clarissa came back in excitement. The whole time Mike was sitting on his couch worrying about whether the curse could be lifted.

“I know how to lift the curse! All you need to do is drink this!”

Clarissa was holding a cup with red liquid in it.

“What is that?” asked Mike.

“It’s blood from the dead people!” said Clarissa.

“Wait, I remember!” yelled Mike.

“What?” asked Clarissa.

“There were words written on my wall that said ‘Count on blood’. That’s what it meant to lift the curse!”

Mike took the cup from Clarissa and drank all of it in one gulp.

Two seconds after Mike finished the drink he said, “Wow, I feel awesome! I can help you clean up the mess on the floor!”

“Great!” thought Clarissa.

From then on, Mike always helped babies find their lollipops, or helped old ladies across the street, or helped find a missing dog.

His kids were angels, and so was his wife, Clarissa.

 

Madison the Writing Fairy

Emma Hieh was thirsty, so she went to the grocery store to buy some Vitamin Water. When she bought the lemonade and she drank it, a fairy popped out of the bottle. Emma was so surprised. She thought fairies weren’t real. The fairy had curly, black hair down to her feet and she had a light blue dress down to her ankles and she wore a headband that was light blue and matches her outfit and pink sparkly high heels.

Emma said, “Hi.”

The fairy questioned, “Who are you? What are you doing in my bottle?”

“I was drinking lemonade,” Emma answered.

“Will you come with me?” the fairy said                   

“No,’’ Emma said.

“Please, I’ll help you face problems that you face in the future.”

And then Emma sighed, “Fine.”

The fairy took her outside and hid her behind a tree. And used her magic wand and they were off to The Writing Lab. They were on the top of a rainbow and when they slid down, they were at The Writing Lab of Fairyland. Emma felt magical and afraid, because she thought she might do something wrong. She saw a Writing Lab. It looked like a palace, except it said, “Writing Lab of Fairyland” on the top and not a palace. It was light blue and light pink. At the end of the rainbow, there was a cushion.

“Where are we?” Emma asked.

“Fairyland Writing Lab,” the fairy answered.

“Where should we start?”

Fairy Lab had light blue curtains on it with dark blue stars and the dark blue stars shined in the nighttime. They had drawing stations and they also had a special train that led to every single room that only fairies were allowed to take. Fairies only showed themselves to girls.

First, the fairy showed Emma her five magical objects. The first one was a magical pen that helped everybody write well in neat handwriting. The next one was a magic notebook which helped everybody’s pages not be ripped or crumpled. One was a magical necklace that had good covers and always had good drawings. And the last one was a magical computer that helped everybody type and think well for typing and another one was the magical light bulb which helped them think of ideas. She was about to say, “My name is Madison,” but suddenly one of the magic objects disappeared. The magical pen was the first one to disappear.

“I can’t believe it! I asked my best friend, Mia the Drawing Fairy, to look after it and also my best friend, Lily the Cover Fairy.”

Then, she went to ask Mia the Drawing Fair and Lily the Cover Fairy.

“Didn’t you look after my magical objects?”

Mia answered, “Yes, but I thought Lily was looking after it!”

“I wasn’t! Mia was,” Lily argued.

Emma saw something dark while all the arguing was going on, and suddenly she called Lily, Madison, and Mia. And when they saw it too, they said it’s the monster of all fairies.

Emma wondered, “What’s the Monster of all Fairies? Doesn’t every fairy have a happy life?”

“No,” cried Madison, Lily, and Mia at the same time as they burst into tears.

‘’Why’’

‘’He loves to ruin us.’’ Mia sighed.

‘’Is he nice?’’

‘’No.’’

‘’We have no time to lose,’’ Madison cried.

Emma asked, “Where should we start?”

“Are you going anywhere that has writing involved in it?” Madison asked.

“Yes, I’m going to a writing camp,” Emma answered.

“Awesome,” Madison cried, “Luckily, my magical objects get goblins or anybody who has them to the closest place of writing.”

“Do you know where your writing camp is?” Mia asked.

“Yes, it’s on Pense Avenue in Australia.”

“Okay, I guess I’ll come with you,” Madison answered, “Mia and Lily, can you help me and Emma look for my magic objects?

“Of course,” Mia and Lily chimed in.

A second later Emma blinks, she remembered that she was at her house. But then, she realized three fairies were hiding in her pocket, because her parents said that she could ride her bike to the camp because it was only five miles away. She went to the garage to get her bike, decorated with blue, silver, and gold. She had a basket on her bike, so she put the fairies to hide inside there. Suddenly, Emma’s puppy, Sunny, rushed and almost drooled on her bike. Emma jumped off from her bike and calmed down Sunny. But, her parents said to take Sunny to writing camp, because they couldn’t look after Sunny because they both had jobs. Madison loved dogs because her sister Ava, the helpful Fairy, sometimes took care of puppies, so she liked to help her too.

“Ah!” Mia and Lily shrieked.

“It’s okay,” Emma and Madison said at the same time.

“It’s just my puppy,” Emma told to them.

Then, she picked up Sunny and said, “Calm down, boy.”

And then, she put the fairies in her bag she was carrying to writing camp with all of her materials and put Sunny in the basket.

“There you go,” Emma said.

But Madison flew out of the bag she was in.

“Can I sit inside with Sunny?” Madison asked.

“Of course!” Emma exclaimed.

Once they arrived, Madison sensed all around the room.

Then she said, “I know that the magical pen in this building, but it’s not in this room.”

Then Emma said, “Maybe we should check downstairs. It’s a big place.”

When they went downstairs, goblins were holding all types of pens.

“Oh no,’’ Madison cried, “My magic pen can be anywhere.”

“I have a idea’’ Emma smiled, “I bet the monster of all fairies would be really mad if they weren’t hiding.”

“Okay, but I still don’t understand your plan,”  Madison questioned curiously.

“I’ll explain it,” Emma said, “If we can tell the goblins that I am the Monster of All Fairies, then the goblins will give me the magic pen and maybe we can take it back to Fairyland Writing Lab.”

“Let’s try it,” Mia, Madison, and Lily said.

Madison tried her magic, but it couldn’t work without her magic pen, which also helps her magic. Then, she asked Mia and Lily to help her with her magic. And when they put the three wands together, the magic gets more powerful than one fairy that has all their magical objects. Then they put the loud booming voice together to Emma.

Emma whispers turned invisible.

“We lost a pen,” one told truthfully.

Then, Emma, Madison, Mia, and Lily looked together in dismay.

Then Mia spoke up. “Maybe we should be brave.”

Then Lily said, “Maybe me and Mia can make the pen not sparkly, so it’ll be easier to find.”

“Okay,” Emma answered happily.

All of a sudden, two people appeared. One was really dark, so she looked miscellaneous. The other one was Emma’s best friend. Emma looked worried. She would always tell her secrets to her best friend, Melissa Aslyn. She knew that Melissa was the type of girl who was the most popular girl (she really was number two, and Emma is number one) in class. She always acted like a queen and ordered them to do something such as this,

“If you don’t give me that cupcake, I will never be your friend again.”

Melissa was always trying to look for fairies, like Emma.

“Fairies, come here!” Melissa called.

Emma felt something bad coming on her way.

“Is there something wrong?” Emma asked Madison and Mia who were playing hand games.

Madison felt a shiver. Mia felt a snowball and Lily felt a snowflake. That meant they were really cold and knew that something bad was on the way.

All of sudden, the goblins cried, “We found it, we found a pen!”

“Oh no!” Madison whisper-cried.

Mia suddenly had an idea. She didn’t want Melissa to hear.

She whispered, “What if the goblins aren’t smart enough to find a real pen?”

Emma checked her watch. “The time that we made the magic pen non-sparkly was 2 o’clock exactly. Now it’s 3 o’clock and they just said fairy magic power only lasts for 30 minutes.”

“Yes!” Madison said, sadly.

“So, did you remember to look at the pen?” Emma asked.

“No!” They cried.

Emma talked a bit louder this time and Melissa could hear her, “I wish we could find it.”

“Emma, don’t be tricky,” Melissa called, “I know you’re here.”

Emma took a big breath.

“Fine, I am,” she answered.

As usual, Melissa knew everything. She was one of those girls who took classes in everything. Melissa loved school too. So, Melissa was always the smartest girl in class. Melissa grinned. She knew that her best friend, Emma, was going to the same camp as her. Emma’s mom and Melissa’s mom were best friends. Emma pulled out her phone and she texted Melissa. She didn’t want her to know that she was up in the sky. So this was how it went:

EH: Hey M.

MA: I’m mad @ you, E.

EH: Hey r u bored?

MA: No, I’m mad. If u didn’t know that.

EH: Don’t be so mad at me, it’s not a big deal.

MA: Do u even know what I’m talking about?

EH: I sure do.

MA: I’m mad at u b/c u didn’t say hi to me.

EH: R u jealous?

MA: Jealous of what?

EH: Jealous of not finding me.

MA: Humph u always have the luck.

EH: R u sure you don’t want to join me for my new story? Plus, there’s a big store outside that sells tons of yummy treats.

MA: U still r my best friend and I made a new friend named Rina.

EH: I can’t go, I’m working on my new story, bye!

Melissa skipped to the treat store. Emma and the fairies flew all over the basement. They didn’t even see a glimpse of sparkle.

Emma sighed, “Maybe we shouldn’t try again. Maybe we should follow the goblins this time.”

The three girls flew up to the roof. Madison, Mia, Lily, and Emma huddled up.

“I’ll take the basement,” Madison answered.

“I’ll take the roof,” Lily said, “Even though we can’t see it, Emma said the roof was bigger.”

“True,” Emma said, “I’ll take the workshop if you can turn me down to human size.”

“I’ll take the lobby to make sure that the pen’s not there.”

With a wave of two magic wands, Emma turned to human size. Emma dropped her friend at their stops. Emma hurried to her stop. She searched all around. All of a sudden, she saw a gleaming pen. She grabbed it. All of a sudden, she heard a voice. A really grumpy voice.

“What are you doing with the pens?”

Emma turned around. It was the principal of the camp.

“I was just going to think of an idea for my new story and I wanted to write it down on paper.”

“Okay,” he grumbled.

Emma hurried down to the basement.

All of a sudden, she saw goblins and they said, “Give us that pen and let your fairy friends go or keep the pen and let your fairy friends stay inside the nets.”

Then Emma said, “I don’t believe you. For proof, show me the net.”

The goblins huddled up.

“Okay,” one whispered, “It was your dumb plan to trick that girl and it didn’t work.”

“Hey! It wasn’t me! It was him!”

“It wasn’t me either.”

When the goblins started to talk, Emma put on her voice record.

“It wasn’t me either,” a short one said.

All of a sudden, one of the goblins said, “I have an idea. How about we do an arts and craft of the fairies.”

“But we’re not good at arts and crafts,” the plump one said.

“Only Master is good at them,” another one mentioned.

“But he’s so greedy, that he sits around in the castle all day, and eats frost pops,” a tall one mentioned.

And then all the goblins agreed.

“Okay,” they all mumbled.

Emma left the room and hurried up to the roof. She met Lily.

“Listen to this!”

She pressed the button and they heard what the goblins talked about.

“I hope they don’t spot me, so they don’t do a sketch of me,” Lily said, “I’m not sure if they’ll trick you much though. Because they are horrible at arts and crafts.”

“Let’s find the others and talk about this,” said Emma.  

They found the others and Madison came up with an idea after they heard the recording.

“How about we trick them!”

“How?” Lily questioned.

“We could do an arts and crafts. Let’s put some glitter on top of a pen and then trick the

goblins and say ‘We don’t need a silly pen, all we need is normal pen,’” Madison said.

The others agreed.

They quickly finished the arts and crafts. Emma carried a bag everywhere and it had stuff to do a writing and illustrations. Then, they hurried to the goblins.

“We found the pen! But we don’t need it,” Emma said.

She threw it at the goblins.

“Hip, hip, hooray!” the goblins said, “We finally got the pen.”

Madison, Mia, and Lily pretend to be mad.

“Why did you do it?” Lily grumbled to Emma.

“It’s not fair. We took so much time to find it,” Madison grumbled.

“The Queen and King of Fairy Land are going to be so mad, Emma,” Mia mumbled.

The goblins happily skipped back to the MFAF (Monster of all Fairies). When the goblins disappeared, the fairies flew back to fairy land. When the queen saw the fairies and Emma, they thanked Emma and the queen said, “Thank you for all the help that you did for Madison. As a gift, we will give you a gift.”

She handed Emma a box with gold and silver wrapping paper and a bow around it. Emma opened it. She found a necklace with locket.

The queen said, “The locket will have fairy magic and whenever you open it, you will come to us. And, your parents will know that you have met a new friend and think it is from them. You have to be careful. Make sure when you come here, your parents don’t see you.”

The queen waved her wand and all of a sudden, she transformed her back to her room in her house. Emma was all happy. She started texting Melissa. This was how it went this time:

EH: Hey, M.

MA: Hey, E. I’ve got something for u.

EH: What is it?

MA: Wait and find out! btw, my parents and yours r letting us have a sleepover.

EH: ?

 

The Ghost

One day, when the wind was howling like a wolf, and the bats were having a feast, Mr. Hyde was in his bedroom. It was midnight, but of course, he wasn’t sleeping. He never slept, always plotting his next evil plan. He was mumbling to himself, and tonight, it seemed like he was a dog. He was rolling around like a maniacal idiot (not that he wasn’t always.)

Then, I, the ghost who haunted the night, saw him through his window and thought that I should enter. Not his house, but his body.

So I flew through his window as fast as a falcon, and I entered his body. But again, of course, I was unlucky. Since the only reason he was rolling around like a stupid dog was that there was another ghost inside him. I never did work out at the gym, so obviously he won the fight.

So I was forced to haunt his house. The next morning, when Mr. Hyde woke up, he felt very eerie, like there was something inside of him, which both you and I certainly knew: there was a ghost inside him. And that ghost was powerful. He entered through your dreams. Through your biggest nightmares, like a spy. Like a robber.

But then Mr. Hyde? He was powerful, too. He may have even been the most powerful man on this earth. So, he broke free. That ghost went flying out the window, whining like a wet cat.

But then, he realized that there was another noise in that house. That noise was me.

Obviously, a ghost doesn’t go around saying “who, who!” (That’s him floating in the wind). So, now you know we didn’t like screaming. In fact, we didn’t even mean to make noise at all. But we had to. Unless we wanted to be still for life. Yet, other ghosts didn’t have an option. They were frozen. Frozen by hard magic. Turned to stone. Practically statues. And crushed under the power of good. I’m lucky that I wasn’t not crushed like that. Maybe one day I might be. But I hoped not.

But now, Mr. Hyde really noticed that there was something going on. And being a scientist, mad or not, you had to be smart. So he was, and then he held a seance to call the ghost, which he sensed in the house. So he called all his neighbors, all his close friends, and far friends, too. He called all his family members and everybody else he knew.

And then, that’s when I had to fight. I had to fight against all of the rituals they did to call me. And I could hear them. I could hear them like thunder in my ear. But my willpower didn’t let them call me, didn’t let them see me. And then, I had to do something.

My mother had once said, “Only use this spell in the deepest of dangers.” It was the only spell I knew. And this was dangerous. They were going to see me. They were going to kill me. I thought about it. For a long long time. Then, I decided I just had to do it. So I used it! I used the spell. In a booming voice, much stronger than theirs. And then, all of them froze. And then, I said the backup spell. The one that would crush them.

I thought, Should I crush them? Or should I not?

Then, I decided not to. I knew how I’d been crushed. Crushed with only my spirit left to roam. No one could hear me. No one could see me. Then, I would have gotten used to it. But still, I thought, No.

So then, I just left.

Now, Mr. Hyde — his story was one of the past. One that I will always tell. For eons and eons to come. And his story, I’ve just told you.

 

I Heard a Noise

I heard a noise. “Woo!”

I thought it was the wind but it was something far from the wind.

But then, I heard, “Come, come, KC.”

I stepped off my bed. My feet touched the cold bare floor. I put my slippers on. I looked out my window. I didn’t see a thing. I turned around. I screamed. There was a ghost.

***

30 years later…

“Jane, go tell your sister to come on.”

Jane said, “Liz, Mom wants you to come and see the new house.”

“I’ll be there in a second,” Liz said.

There was music playing.

 

Five minutes later…

“Why is there salt on the windows? There’s salt everywhere.”

“I don’t know,” said Jane in a very cheerful way, “I call the waterbed!”

“They’re all waterbeds.”

“Okay.”

“Mom, can I go to town?”

“Why?”

“Because I just want to.”

“Yes, but you have to bring your sister.”

“But why?”

“Jane, go grab your coat!”

“La la la,” Jane skipped on the road. “Can we get a cookie?”

“Fine.”

“Hello, miss. What are you doing out so late?”

“Yeah, it’s late, but I’m thirteen. I can walk around.”

“Oh, you’re the new family in town.”

“But don’t you know what happens when it’s this late?”

“No, what happens?”

“You don’t know the myth, do you? So a long time ago, about thirty years before, there was a girl named KC. She used to live in the house you live in. One night, she was in bed, and she woke up and she was bleeding. She had a knife in her leg.”

“Is she okay?”

“Yes, but she’s never gone back to that house.”

“That is why there is salt on the sides of the house?”

“Oh, she put that there when she sold the house.”

“Liz, can we get a cookie now?”

“Yes, here is some money now. But where does she live now?”

In the old car going home, Liz decided that she would be sure to go to talk to her mom about it…

 

One Lost Doll’s Journey

As I looked around the playroom, I could just remember all the great times we had. But they were all over now. I missed Alisha, and right now, I needed her. As I sat on a bed in the dusty, messy dollhouse, I looked around at the empty playroom with all of her old toys just sitting there, including me.

“I’ll come over in two hours,” I could hear Alisha say, “And I’ll give her to your little sister.”

Is she talking about me? I thought.

I walked around the dollhouse, so I could think. Then, I got an idea. I hid behind the sofa in the dollhouse so that Alisha couldn’t find me.

If she can’t find me, she can’t give me away.

I could hear Alisha’s footsteps coming into the playroom. She searched the dollhouse for me. She knocked over most of the furniture in the house until she found me curled up behind the sofa. She carried me down the steps and piled me into a huge box with a lot of her other toys. I felt unsteady and crushed by them. Suddenly, all of the colorful, square game pieces came flying at me. I tried to bury myself under all of the other toys.

When we reached the house, I recognized the girl who was on the other end of the phone. It was Briana Johnson. She and Alisha used to always have playdates and sleepovers just to play with their dolls. Now I belonged to someone else. Jenna, Brianna’s little sister, ran upstairs to her room with me in her hand and instantly started to play with me.

She brushed my hair for a while, which I enjoyed at first. But it went downhill from there. Jenna grabbed a purple marker and started to draw all over me, even my face and arms. Then, Jenna brought me downstairs to dinner, and unlucky for me, it was meatball night. By the time, dinner was over, I had red sauce everywhere—all over my favorite shirt and jeans.

As Jenna fell asleep, I thought hard about an escape plan. I might’ve just been an 18-inch doll, but I had big ideas. As I climbed up the nightstand, I checked Jenna’s alarm clock. She wakes up at 8:00 AM. First, I needed to somehow get a hand on her phone, since Alisha wakes up at 6:00 AM, which was perfect timing. I did my best not to go to sleep that night. I only closed my eyes. Each minute, it got harder and harder to stay awake. Eventually, I gave in and quickly drifted off.

The next day, I woke up to the sound of Disney Princess music from Jenna’s alarm clock. I had overslept. I desperately checked the clock to make sure this wasn’t a nightmare. Sadly, it was real life, not a dream.

I watched her check her calendar. Then, she threw me into her backpack.

“Today is show and tell!” she said excitedly.

Oh no! The longer we drove, the faster the butterflies in my stomach multiplied. I also felt a strong pulling on the top of my head. I could tell that I was hanging in her backpack, but how? When I looked up, I could see that my hair was caught in the zipper of her bag. I pulled and pulled and pulled, but nothing happened. I rumbled and rolled out of the car, still hanging inside as she walked into her preschool.

I’ve seen all the Toy Story movies, and the preschool life wasn’t that great for the toys. Jenna crammed me into a small, square cubby and unzipped her bag. Then, she pulled and pulled my body, hoping to get me out. When she finally did, I lost a lot of hair.

My heart was beating out of my chest as she carried me to center circle. Mrs. Amy, her teacher, asked her to share first. I was so scared to hear what she was going to say.

‘’This is my doll. I have not named her yet. My sister gave her to me from one of her friends. She wears a white tank top and skinny jeans. I am thinking of naming her Emma. The end.’’

Phew, I think it’s over, I thought.

“Can you pass her around?” a girl asked.

“Sure,” said Jenna.

Sooner or later, they were playing a game of hot potato with me, throwing me around as if I were a ball. The teacher didn’t seem to care. She was just sipping her coffee. I knew no one would hear me if I screamed out loud, so I did it in my head. Ahhhhhhhhh! I couldn’t stand it; this was torture. I hoped that Alisha would regret giving me away and that she would do it fast. As Alex threw me in the air, I felt like I was about to lose my limbs. The bell rang, and Jenna tossed me into her bag. This time, my hair didn’t get stuck.

I took a deep breath and thought about my escape plan. The problem with escaping was that Jenna would be crushed. I just had to face it. I would have to hurt her feelings.

I started to think of my plan. Tonight, I would fall asleep next to her alarm clock so I’d be able to hear it. Once Jenna went to get ready, I’d climb out of the window with a rope around me or some dental floss that I’d put around my waist tonight. Finally, I’d run across the street to Alisha’s house.

I thought I might change my mind, so that Jenna could be happy. On the other hand, would Alisha miss me? I didn’t know yet, but maybe not. But Jenna surely would.

I could hear the clock ticking, and I wondered when the bell would ring. I felt like both girls would not like my decision to leave, but I had to choose what’s best for me. I needed to do something to get my mind off of it. All that I could see was a pink folder and a Hello Kitty pencil that needed to be sharpened. I started to wish that this was a dream. I needed to get home. The bell finally rang, and I buried myself in her backpack. I felt like my life was going to end.

When Jenna got out the pencil for class, she saw me so she knew I was there. Her bag zipped closed, and I decided to rest up before I took action that night.

When I woke up, my heart was beating faster than it ever had before. I didn’t know where I was until I unzipped the bag and saw that I was in the car after school. I couldn’t believe that I had slept that long. Jenna was wearing a blush-pink leotard, and her hair was in a bun. I didn’t think that this could get worse, but it could. What if I got stepped on by sixteen little girls?

When she got out of the car, she didn’t bring me into the studio. It was a miracle. I didn’t have any worries. I could just relax in the back seat of the car.

I had always wondered what it was like in the driver’s seat. I climbed up to see all the controls. It was nice and sunny there so I stayed and closed my eyes for a minute. That minute turned into five minutes then ten then fifteen and eventually an hour. I felt so relaxed and calm. I thought nothing could bother me now.

Suddenly, I heard a car door open. A huge lady sat down, right on me, and she didn’t even feel me. I had no idea what was going to happen next.

“Mommy!’’ Jenna yelled from the backseat.

“Yes, sweetie,” her mom said in a voice not seeming to care.

‘“Where’s my doll?’’ she replied, desperate for an answer.

“Please, don’t tell me you left her at preschool,” her mom sighed.

“Nope, I remember putting her in my bag like it happened a second ago,” Jenna said with a positive attitude.

“Well, check the back seat. You might be sitting on her?’’

How about you check under yourself, lady! I thought.

“She’s not there. I lost my doll. Sissy gave her to me. I need my doll!” Jenna said sobbing.

I hope she finds me. This reminds me of Alisha. She couldn’t stand being separated from me. Now that I think about it, everything that happened to me with Jenna so far has happened to me with Alisha. Tears stung my eyes when I thought about missing Alisha, but this was all to keep Jenna happy.

The car pulled to a stop, and I tried to forget all of my sad thoughts. As her mom got up, I quickly got out of that seat. Out the window, I could see that we had stopped at a gas station. I crept to the back seat right beside Jenna, hoping that she would notice me. After minutes of waiting, she didn’t even look down.

“Why did I think this would work? She already thinks I’m lost. I’ll never get to Alisha ever again,” I said, sobbing.

I thought about giving up and just having to deal with being a lost doll. I calmed myself down. I wondered what would happen to me. Maybe I will find a new owner or even better, Alisha. The car door slammed and the engine roared. Jenna popped up and yawned as the car cut through the grass.

“What’s going on, Mom?’’ Jenna asked, waiting for an answer.

“A guy in there asked me for some money, and I said no, which I regret now.”

“Why?’’

“Because now he’s chasing us, and he won’t stop!”

“Give me your phone,” Jenna yelled.

“Why?’’ her mom asked, panting.

“I need to call 911!”

Her mom tossed the phone back to Jenna, trying to keep her eyes on the road and not on the rearview mirror. The police rushed down the road. Jenna’s mom smashed the gas pedal, trying to get away from the guy at the gas station.

The police pulled us over, thinking we were the criminals. I watched Jenna try to stay calm while she was thinking that her mom might go to jail. The police knocked on the window and asked for her to roll it down. Once the window was rolled down, he explained for what seemed like hours the rules of the road. The guy that was originally chasing us was getting away as he spoke.

I looked up to see Jenna with her head propped against the window of the car and a worried frown on her face. I thought of a way to comfort her. Suddenly, I remembered that she hadn’t found me yet. I quietly crept into her hands. Jenna squeezed me and gave me a big hug. I felt like I had just found the perfect owner. The only problem with that was, Alisha was my owner. She did give me away though. Why was I worrying? I needed to enjoy this moment.

Her little palms warmed me. I forgot about all the things that she had done to me and instead thought about how nice it would be to have someone younger who would play with me more. Then, I thought about all the times that Alisha had played with me and all the laughs we had. I had to figure out who I was going to stay with. I looked up at Jenna and felt like I had just found the perfect owner. I was sure of it.

 

Fort Knox

Hunter swallowed the small packet of powder. He felt empty inside, quite literally.

The weight-destroying powder made him completely weightless, and therefore, immune to Fort Knox’s motion detectors. It also made him fly, as gravity would have no effect on him without weight. He sprayed himself once, twice, and then thrice. This made him immune to visible light cameras, infrared cameras, and heat cameras. He sprayed his bag as well. He sprayed himself and his bag one more time to be able to go through the wall. The spray would add extra stems to his brain, which allowed him to split his and his bag’s atoms at will.

He closed his eyes, took a deep breath, and then floated through the wall. He had one hour before his extra brain stems would overload his body, and he would die. He had to make it back out with the gold to spray himself with the mixture that would safely destroy the brain stems, as well as remove all of his masking effects.

He would have to bring this gold to the UWDA (Underground World Domination Association,) which was going to take over the world. They had promised him a position in the new world.

A security guard stood at the entrance of Fort Knox. Hunter floated over the man, but his leg brushed against a wire in the air.

Immediately, the alarms sounded. Fifteen armed men entered the building, holding guns and firing everywhere. Hunter heard twenty helicopters emerging from the night patrol.

“Oh shoot,” he muttered very inaudibly.

But not inaudible enough. Fifteen lasers aimed directly at his head and fired. Hunter immediately ducked. The lasers burst through the wall where he just was. Hunter immediately pulled out a small unconsciousness grenade and tossed it below him. The men shouted something he couldn’t hear, but their voices were cut short as they fell unconscious. Hunter reminded himself of his second main priority: Do not kill anyone. The best thing he could do besides that is knock them out.

He slid through the next door, and checked his Series Two $1200 Hermes Apple Watch. 0:55. Only five minutes had passed. Suddenly, Hunter peered to the side to see a small cone-shaped detector with an antenna in it.

Oh shoot, again. It was a sound detector. Hunter hadn’t had the money to buy soundproof spray. The alarm went off. Lights blared everywhere, and Hunter heard a railgun shot.

Oh shoot, oh shoot, oh shoot! There was a boom as the room exploded in a flash of light. Hunter beamed himself through the wall just in time as the room burst into flames.

Cries were heard, along with fire truck sirens in the distance.

Just grab the gold and go, Hunter told himself.

He tried to go into the next room, but the fire was spreading, and it was spreading fast. Just grab the gold and go, just grab the gold and… suddenly, the invisible spray wore off. Hunter reached into his rucksack quickly and grabbed the spray, but fifteen light detectors were aiming lasers at his head. Thirty marines immediately arrived.

“Target visualized! Neutralize immediately!”

Hunter sprayed himself again, and he put his invisible spray back into the bag. The marines looked at each other.

“Where did he go?”

The light sensors turned off, and Hunter moved on, still flying.

Hunter burst into the room with the gold. Just take it and go. True to his word, Hunter broke into the metal safe holding the gold. Gold bars were inside. He grabbed as much as would fit into his rucksack, and he left the safe. He left the room, and smelled the rain that was starting to fall. Hunter took out his spray, and prepared to spray it on himself. He left the area and checked his watch. Thirteen minutes left.

He sprayed himself, and he fell to the ground. Ow. He brushed himself off.

“That’s what you should be doing.”
A marine was standing behind him, aiming a gun straight at Hunter. The marine grabbed a small towel from his pocket and threw it at him. Hunter caught it with one hand.

“Wipe yourself off, man,” he said, “You’re dead.”

The man fired. Hunter caught the bullet in his hand. He grabbed the towel in his hand and wiped the bullet clean.

“Not today!” he said.

He threw one of his grenades at the marine and heard him crumple to the ground.

Then, Hunter remembered. That was an infinite coma grenade.

Oh shoot.

Hunter pressed his finger against the small sensor. The marshy ground in front of him opened up, revealing a small marble staircase. He walked down heavily, holding his bag of gold on his back. The ground above him closed up, and he walked into a small living room.

A tall, muscular man with chocolate brown skin stood there. He stared at the wall, not even looking to the side.

“Operation Flying Fortress. Status?”

Hunter replied calmly, without shuddering at the man’s sonorous voice, “Success.”

The man turned to the side, revealing the scars on his face. His face eased.

“Good. Now prepare to attack the White House. Spend the funds at will.”

Hunter walked out of the room, hearing the man say one last thing, “It’s time to take over the world.”

 

Helen Patrick Human

Hi, I am H.P.H. (Helen Patrick Human.) I am not a girl or a boy.  Here is my story:

I was born on February 6, 2003 at 8:57 P.M., and the first thing the doctors who took care of my mother did was to identify what gender I was, like they do to everyone. All tests made were unsuccessful. I was always 50.555555% girl, 50.555555% boy. So I was a half boy, half girl human.

My mom and my dad, the doctors, my grandma and my grandpa, my aunt and my uncle, my sister and my brother, and everyone that knew me or my mom decided that I would get to choose what gender I would be considered as when I got older. So as soon as I could speak, I was given a choice: girl or boy?

My mom wanted me to be a sweet little girl, and my dad wanted a sporty boy. I did not know what to chose, so now, as a 13-year-old, I am still known as the genderless person.

So, now that I am a mixed-gender person, what is my name? I have no middle name, my first name is Helen Patrick, and my last name is just simply Human. But most people just call me HP.

Since I am a mix between two genders, what clothing am I supposed to wear? I just wear solid color shirts of blue, green, or orange. My pants are usually tan or black, nice and loose. If I need to wear a jacket, I just stick with blue or green. Perfectly reasonable for a girl or a boy. My hat is a white fox.

So, what does my room look like? Well, it is blue, again. I have no posters, and I have a boring, blue bunk bed with a blue T.V. and a blue table with a blue sofa in front of it. I keep most of my things just blue, so no one would call me a boy or a girl.

So, another way you would probably identify if someone is a girl or a boy is by how they look and how long their hair is. My hair goes up to my shoulders, and is able to be a boy’s hairstyle or a girl’s. My face makes me also look like a mix because of my hair. That is technically how I look like.

So, now that you know a lot about me, don’t feel sorry. I have friends. Two of them are girls, two of them are boys.

So here is one day of life: I wake up at 6:30am as a person. I eat breakfast, brush my teeth, and wash my face. Then, I am off to school. I walk into my classroom and sit down. We have math, science, reading, and then lunch. My day is normal. I am a human, after all. After lunch, I have science, and gym, then bye! School is over. I go home, do homework, and watch some T.V. Then, I brush my teeth and go to sleep. Like I said, I am a normal human. When I wake up the next day, my day repeats. And that is just life.

So, I was just walking home from school one day, and I was greeted by my mom at the doorstep, which is not often. She is usually just working at her art studio as an artist. She is very good.

Anyway, she said, “HP, answer me! You must make a choice, a girl or a boy? You are almost fourteen now, you can’t be two genders forever. You hear me? CAN NOT!”

“But mom! I have been a cool person all my life, how long do you think it will take for me to adjust to being ‘not double gendered?” I added, offended, “What about friends? What about my life? What about everything in life? Mom, listen, I don’t want my life to change. So understand me.”

“H.P.!” Her voice was furious.

“You understand me!”

Then, she collapsed into a small, sad ball. My mom had never been like this before.

“Okay, Mom. I’ll think about it,” I added quickly.

“Thanks, Helen Patrick. I knew I could count on you.”

 

Queep!

Queep was super mad. Actually, he was capital “M” mad. Why? Because he wanted the most wonderful painting ever, and so, he knocked down his neighbor’s house.

Queep was a big, scary monster who did things for no reason. He was green. Well, actually, he wasn’t green. He just wore a green cloak and never took it off, even in the summer, so he looked green.

One of the things he did for no reason was that he knocked down his neighbor’s house because he wanted the most wonderful painting in the world, even though his neighbors had nothing to do with it. He did it because he thought his neighbors were taking his packages, and he was expecting them to come in the mail (but he didn’t even order anything.)

The neighbors were out, but when they came home, they saw their house, and taped it back together with Scotch-tape that had been sitting in the freezer forever. His neighbors didn’t know Queep, because he only went out when they weren’t there.

His neighbors were humans. Their names were Buggy, Woggy, Shuggy, and Baby Welmer.

Whenever Queep opened the door to tell the world that he wanted the most wonderful painting ever, a big, red bird with a tongue taller than the Empire State Building, appeared and whacked him on the head (with his long tongue.) That was the only thing that Queep was scared of.

That night, Queep remember-dreamed of when he was born. Queep was born out of a black hole.

Based off of what you already know about Queep, you may think his house would be yucky and moldy like a normal monster’s house. But his house was so nice because he didn’t sit on anything, he didn’t touch anything, he wore a new pair of inside shoes every day, and he wore gloves, even if it was the hottest day. He lived in a big mansion, so it was hard not to touch anything. Even the neighbor’s house was dirtier. Queep hated dirt. If he saw dirt, he screamed.

***

One day, Queep went outside to tell the world that he wanted the most wonderful painting ever, and the big, red bird appeared. He stuck out his tongue, and he whacked Queep. It hurt because his tongue was made of electricity. So Queep got electrocuted.

Queep shouted, “Go away, bird!” but it was in Queep’s language, so the bird didn’t understand, or it just didn’t listen.

So Queep went inside, and he turned on the microwave for no reason. And then the house got hot, because the microwave was on. But Queep was still cold, even though it was summer. And so, he turned on the oven, and he was still cold. So he turned on the stove, and he lit a fire in the fireplace. And he sat on the chimney. And the smoke just pushed him off. He fell headfirst on the neighbor’s roof and smashed it open.

And they got mad. Especially, Baby Welmer. And Baby Welmer whacked him and then turned into the big, red bird. And Baby Welmer, when he turned back into a baby, was just himself again, as small as a peanut.

Queep remembered a time when he had gone to the peanut factory, and he ate so many peanuts and felt good after. And so, Queep ate the baby. And then Baby Welmer turned back into the big, red bird in Queep’s stomach. He stuck his tongue out of Queep’s throat, and Woggy pulled him out.

Queep screamed his head off and it made the whole ground shake. His head really fell off. So he taped it back on. But he couldn’t talk because his vocal cords were disconnected. So Queep ran to the bank and picked it up and threw it on the neighbors. But the neighbors weren’t there because they were still in their house.

While he was out, Queep thought of the painting of the bear with no face in the big, gold, swirly frame, and thought that it was the best painting ever. So, he headed towards the painting store. He put on a human disguise. But the painting cost too much money. And Queep only owned play money. So he tried to prank the guys at the store. But, when he put the play money in the machine, the machine got jammed, and Queep couldn’t buy it.

Queep then headed to the doctor to fix his head and vocal cords. After the doctor had fixed him, Queep headed home and took a nap.

Queep woke up a few hours later with a cold. He ran to the town hall with his tote that Baby Welmer had made a few years ago. Queep absolutely loved the town hall. The reason Queep loved the town hall was the elevator. Queep rode up and down, pressing all the buttons.

After visiting the town hall, Queep remembered that the local shoe department, where he stole extra shoes for inside, had closed down, so Queep ‘borrowed’ an iPhone belonging to an extremely fat woman who was always on social media, mostly Twitter. Queep didn’t like her for some reason. He didn’t know why. Maybe it was her strong perfume or something. Queep asked Siri where the nearest shoe store was. Siri said it was at 222222 Ralone Ultra Avenue. So, Queep set off to find it.

Thirteen hours later, Queep arrived in a miniature motor plane at 222222 Ralone Ultra Avenue, and boy was it ultra, because it took Queep thirteen hours just to get to 222222 Ralone Ultra Avenue.

Anyways, Queep flew right into the shop and landed. Right at first sight, Queep loved the store itself. The shop owner screamed. All the customers ran out of the shop, dropping all their items.

“My customers!” the shop owner wailed.

He fell to the ground and fainted. Happily, Queep grabbed all the shoes he wanted, and ran around the shop. Since he hated the shop owner, instead of calling the paramedics, Queep jammed the pay machine. Queep felt bad about doing this because he loved the store itself. Suddenly, Queep realized how late it was, so he ran out of the shop, cursing in his own language.

By the time Queep arrived home, it was 6:45 A.M. which meant Queep hadn’t slept through the whole night, but Queep didn’t care, so he just landed his miniature motor plane and whizzed inside his big, fluorescent doors. He had a nice, fizzy Pepsi and some Cheddar Bunnies in ice cream. Then, he spilled the Pepsi in his ice cream too. But really, Queep was tired because he just rested his cheek in his ice cream, fell asleep, and sleep-sang, “I like to eat apples and bananas!”

The next day, Queep remembered that his birthday was coming up soon. Queep’s birthday was on February 30th, which only came every 8 years, so Queep celebrated only every 8 years. This made him look much older than he was. Queep got out of bed and cartwheeled over to the television and turned on CNN. When the commercial came on, Queep headed to the bathroom, but found out that his toilet had broken down, along with his bathroom sink and bath. So he headed to the neighbors’ house to use their bathroom, but he accidentally walked in on Baby Welmer, who screamed and turned into the big, red bird and Queep quickly round-offed away. Well, Queep still had to use the bathroom, so he went in his kitchen sink instead.

Later, Queep decided to go to Starbucks. He got a hot macchiato using the scaring trick that he did at the shoe store. Queep could feel the warm coffee sloshing down his throat. Queep then put his human disguise on and then headed to the painting store. When he arrived, Queep saw the painting and instead of the usual rush of warmth throughout his body, he shivered, a lump forming in his throat, and a pit forming in his stomach. And for some reason, Queep left.

When Queep woke up, he knew he dreamt about something, but he didn’t remember what.

Meanwhile, a small one-and-a-half-year-old baby, who was traveling alone, boarded the train in Larxington Alley Train Station. The conductor simply scooped her up and plopped her down on a backwards facing window seat. The conductor put up some “Baby For Adoption”  signs in the station, and re-boarded the train. The baby pressed her nose against the window, fogging up a spot on it. She watched the blur of color as the train sped. Every so often, the train would come to a halt, the doors would slide open, a bell would ding, and a low voice would come over the loudspeaker and say the stop. For instance, “This is Larxington Alley Train Station.”

Finally, the train stopped and the low voice said over the loudspeaker, “This is Grassy Field Meadow Train Station.”

Finally, the little baby was picked up and brought to a small building called “Grassy Field Meadow Orphanage”. The baby was too young to know where she was, but she knew she wasn’t where she came from. Grassy Field Meadow was a terrible name for it, because it was a city.

Meanwhile, Queep was eating raisin bread soup mixed with a warm coca-cola, because Queep didn’t like when coca-cola was cold, so he always heated it first. After he ate, he ran out to town to watch the trucks on his favorite bench. He liked the bench because it was right across from a construction site. He liked to watch the big trucks push the cement around and build stuff. He especially liked the trucks that picked people up when they had to reach things. After a while, he got another warm macchiato. He brought his macchiato back home so he could pour it in his soup, which was getting cold. But, on his way home, he tripped on a rock and scraped his knee. He had to limp home, and when he got there, he put on 12 bandages.

Queep fell asleep but was woken up by the phone ringing. He didn’t answer it. A few minutes later, the phone rang again. Since the phone was bothering him, Queep decided he would go back to town. All of a sudden, Queep decided he wanted to leave “The Town Of Bore” (aka: Grassy Field Meadow.) He ran to Grassy Field Meadow Train Station and waited in a two hour line to stamp his tickets. But when he got to the booth, a sign said they do not serve any animals or non-humans.

“No! No!” Queep thought out loud, which wasn’t a good thing, because many people stared at him, and then, when they came back to their senses, they ran away.

Soon, Queep was positive that the lady in the booth was gone. She was a familiar lady, who Queep soon remembered was the one he stole the phone from. The smell of strong lavender perfume was still in the air. Queep wasted no time stamping the fat lady’s signature onto his tickets. Queep had gotten two seats because (no offense to Queep) he was kind of a big guy.

Queep just made it onto the train that the baby just so happened to be on. Queep sat in the backwards facing window seat that the baby just so happened to be sitting in, and Queep, just vaguely, could smell the scent of baby powder. He wondered why.

Queep soon heard a low voice come over the loudspeaker. It said, “This is Larxington Alley Train Station.” Queep stepped out of the train, got a warm macchiato and sat down on a bench. He watched two small girls giggling and talking. His warm macchiato trickled down his front. A pit formed in his stomach. He saw a mother kissing her small baby boy. Queep’s eyes filled with tears.

“I want someone to love.” Queep whispered to himself.

He began to cry.

No! Queep thought. I’m crying in public!

Suddenly, something caught Queep’s eye. It was a sign that read, “Baby For Adoption”  and in smaller letters it said, “Call 012-345-6789. Phone booth.”

It’s serendipity! Queep thought.

He took a train straight back home, and when Queep arrived at his house, the phone was still ringing. Queep picked it up.

“Hello, this is Greenfield Girl Scouts! Would you like some cookies?”

Queep put the phone down. It continued to ring. Queep shut down his home phone. He grabbed his stolen cell phone  and immediately called the number on the paper. 012-345-6789. Queep had it memorized. The line was busy. Queep’s heart sank. He tried again. Someone answered.

“This is Grassy Field Meadow Orphanage!” a woman said, ‘How can I help you?”

“Um…” said Queep, “Baby #7?”

“Ah,” said the woman, “Yes. Can you be here at noon on Friday, March 1st?”

“Yes!” Queep exclaimed happily.

That was Queep’s birthday, on the Queep-Calendar! (It has February 30th every eight years.)

“Bye!” said Queep.

He couldn’t wait. Queep warmed some Coca-Cola and poured it into his day-old soup. After eating, he went to sleep, knowing the next day would be great.

The next morning, Queep gobbled up his breakfast, and whizzed outside in his miniature motor plane. He arrived approximately eight minutes before noon. Queep politely parked his plane and walked inside.

Suddenly, Queep realized he might scare the lady at the front desk. Oh well. Queep thought, and he walked inside.

The lady (surprisingly) didn’t run or scream or stare. Instead, she took him to a small room labeled Rm. #7. Queep’s heart was racing. Would it be hate at first sight? Queep hoped not.

When Queep set eyes on the small baby girl, he smelled the baby powder on her. She was terrific! This was definitely love at first sight.

“So…” said Queep, “Can I keep Marcy?”

“Who’s Marcy?” the lady asked.

“I named the baby.” said Queep.

“You sure can!” said the lady.

She smiled genuinely. And that is just what Queep did.

Oh, and that painting? Queep didn’t need that thing anymore. Because Marcy just loved to do art.

 

Disappointment

Chapter 1                                                                                                    

Once upon a time there was a beautiful city in America. The city was called New York.

I woke up this morning feeling happy. It was a beautiful day in NY, the sky was clear, the sun was shining, and I was happy!

But it was Monday. Moody Monday. I brushed my teeth, took a shower, and ate my food. Then, I ran to school. First period was English. We started with a test, and I felt confident. I had been studying for this test for weeks. The class started. Finally, time was up. We passed our papers to the teacher. My test was going to be returned by the end of the day. I had third, fourth, and fifth period. After third period was lunch. For lunch was pizza! Yay! After lunch, I had two more periods before I got my test back, and I could go home. The second to last period was math, and the last period was history.

Before I went home, I dropped by my English room to get my test back. I looked at my score and… No! I got an F. A big, fat, red, F! I looked at my pink and grey sneakers. Then, I walked to my apartment with my feet dragging behind me. I opened my colorful backpack, took out my books, and started studying for my math test, eager to get an A on my math test. I looked at my test again, then I looked at the name bar and instead of my name, I saw the biggest loser’s name in the name bar. This test paper was not mine! The next day, I went to school, went straight to the English room, and I saw Dud, the biggest loser in the class. He was copying down my answers on a piece of paper that looked just like the real test, except this wasn’t. I was speechless.

Right then the teacher came in and asked, “What are you two doing?!”

Dud answered quickly, “Emily told me to copy down answers for her next test or else she’ll get the whole school to go against me!”

I said in a loud voice, “No, I did not!”

Instantaneously, my teacher said in a slow whisper scream, “Emily detention. Now.”

I was in shock, but I managed to squeak out, “I did not do anything!”

The teacher said, “Emily. Detention or Expelled.”

I quietly walked out of the room without another word.

 

Chapter 2

Detention was awful. They made us sit quietly without saying a thing. The gym teacher made me do seventy-five push-ups while doing my math homework in my head.

The next day, I went to Dud and told him, “You have gotten me in a lot of trouble, and now it’s time for me to get you back.”

Dud looked horrified.  Then, I walked to Wendy, my best friend. I started telling her about Dud and detention.

Wendy said, “Let’s make sure during lunch when the entire school’s there, we insult and embarrass Dud so he’ll be sorry.”

 

Chapter 3

During lunch, I got everybody’s attention.

I stood on the table and screamed out, “Dud wears underpants to school that have pictures of his own face on them!”

Everyone started laughing.

Yes, mission accomplished, I thought.

I felt kinda bad for Dud, but I knew I got him back, and the school was against him. After lunch, the school was teasing and mocking Dud by calling him “Dud on the butt.” Dud was even more gloomy and depressed than usual. During classes, he wasn’t raising his hand or doing his usual Dud things, as in raising his hand or participating.

Now, I was actually starting to feel bad for Dud, a.k.a. the biggest liar in the world. I don’t think I should have embarrassed him in front of the school. Instead, a better choice would have been talking to him and the teachers personally and figuring things out. But, it wasn’t too late to have a conversation.

So, the next day, I asked the teacher if I could talk to her about something with Dud. During the conversation, I told the teacher that I didn’t tell Dud to cheat. I apologized to Dud and told him I felt terrible for embarrassing him in front of the whole school. The teacher was proud of me for putting in an effort to figure things out between Dud and me.

 

Chapter 4

Now, all that was left to do is have a conversation with Dud a.k.a Dud on the butt. I asked Dud if I could have another conversation with him.

He said, “Sure, whatever.”

We met at recess, and had our very important conversion. I asked him why he copied down my answers. Dud told me his parents were divorced, and he lived with his dad. His dad was really strict and expected him to get an A on every single test, quiz, or assignment. He also told me that his mom had died from an asthma attack one year ago.

The most surprising thing he told me was that his real name was Dudley. I asked him why he did not use his real name at school. He said his name was a mistake, and that when he was applying for school here, his name got misspelled. Then, the teachers started calling him Dud, and then, the kids started calling him Dud. I told Dud a.k.a Dudley that I was really sorry for him.

Suddenly, the bell rang and it indicated that we had to go to our next class. I told him how nice it was to finally have a conversation with him and figure things out. Dudley smiled.

 

Chapter 5

Finally, the end of the year had come along. I was feeling good about next year, knowing Dudley wouldn’t be giving me the evil eye all year. We were saying our goodbyes to our friends and teachers. On the last day, I said goodbye to Wendy, my best friend, to Dudley, to my teachers, and to everyone else. Dudley and I made eye contact and went our own ways.

 

The Adventures of the Puppets

Once upon a time, there lived someone named Puppet 3. He was always scared. The thing that scared him the most was the witch. She lived in a cave in a forest.

One day, Puppet 3 got chased into the woods by a lizard that was only one inch tall. On he ran and left Puppets 1 and 2 behind.

On the way, he got frightened and almost fell in poop! While Puppet 3 was off, the witch caught Puppets 1 and 2. She carried them off to her cave! Puppet 3 was still on the hike. He checked his lunch box to see if there was any food.

“No,” said Puppet 3, “I forgot to pack myself food!”

He kept going on the trail, but he still didn’t find any food or houses.

Puppets 1 and 2 were now working for the witch, and then, after one day, she planned to eat them up. Puppets 1 and 2 were not scared. They were brave! Then, she locked them in a cage. Puppets 1 and 2 were really scared now.  

After 100 minutes, it was nighttime, and in the night, the cave looked even scarier because there was a statue on top that glowed green and looked like a bear! Meanwhile, Puppet 3 got to the cave. Then, he got frightened by the green statue and he almost fainted. Puppet 3 went inside to look for food. Then he saw Puppets 1 and 2 in a cage.

He asked, “What happened?”

Puppets 1 and 2 said, “A witch locked us in a cage while you were away!”

Puppet 3 asked, “How can I get you out?”

Puppets 1 and 2 whispered, “You need to get the key.”

Puppet 3 asked, “Where is it!?”

“I don’t know!” shouted Puppet 1.  

“Shhh,” said Puppet 2.

Puppet 3 went deeper inside the cave until he saw a small office. And inside it, there was the key. He tried pulling the door, but it was locked! After ten minutes, the witch came inside her office. Then, he remembered he found a gold coin on the hike. He put it next to the window so the witch could see it, and he hid by the wall.

The witch went out of the door and said, “This is my little day! I found a gold coin in my cave! I’m going to put it in my collection.”

Then, she left, but she left the door open. When the coast was clear, Puppet 3 went inside, he got the key and ran to the front door step.

He said to Puppets 1 and 2, “I got the key!”

He unlocked the cage and Puppets 1 and 2 got out. Then, the witch came running out.

“Hey! What are you doing with my dinner! I was just about to eat it.”

The witch got angry and she made the statue come to life. It turned into a big bear with horns! It was forty feet tall.

“Hey!” shouted Puppet 3 to the monster. “I heard that you’re the fastest monster that can run in circles. I don’t believe you. I don’t think you can do it.”

“I can,” the monster said with a grunt.

“I don’t think so,” said Puppet 3.

“I’ll show you,” he said.

And he ran in circles ten thousand miles per hour. Before the monster was running in circles, the witch had gone inside. She didn’t see what was happening. He ran for one hour.

Then, the monster said, “I need to sit down.”

And he thought the witch’s cave was a stool, so he sat on it and broke everything!

Puppet 3 said, “I also heard you can jump through the sky into outer space. And I don’t think that’s true, either.”

“I can do that!” and he jumped all the way to outer space.

But then the witch came back to life!

She was so angry!

Then, the monster came falling down from outer space because he was too heavy to float. The monster crushed the witch again. The witch was so tired that she fell back asleep.

She said, “I’m so tired, I’m going to sleep for ten million years!”

Then, the monster tripped over a ten foot boulder and crashed into one hundred trees. Then, there was the biggest tree in the world that was ten million feet tall. The monster touched it with one finger and it broke and fell on his head.

Puppets 1 and 2 asked Puppet 3, “How did you do that?”

Puppet 3 said, “I didn’t do anything. I only tricked the monster into running in circles and jumping into space.”  

They walked back home as they talked about the day they had!!! They lived happily ever after…The End. Or is it?

***

Once upon a time, there lived someone named Puppet 4. He was very lazy.  He spent most of his time sleeping and never helped anyone out! His friends, Puppets 5 and 6 once went on a road trip.

They asked Puppet 4, “Do you want to help us get the car?”

Puppet 4 said, “No,” with a grunt.

Puppets 5 and 6 did not know what to say, so they just went and got the car by themselves. They felt sad. They went on the road trip without him.

On the way, they called Puppet 4. Puppet 4 didn’t even bother to pick up the phone. He got up, walked slowly to the refrigerator, got some yogurt, and went back to bed. He turned on the TV. He watched “The Baby Dora” show.

While Puppets 5 and 6 were on the trip, they found a diamond. Puppet 4 was fast asleep and spilled his yogurt on his head and on his blanket. He had put cherry in the yogurt and the stain wouldn’t get out of his bed.  

Puppet 4 woke up and said, “Oh no! My blankets! My bed! It’s covered in cherry stains. I’ll go to the store later and get the stain remover. Actually, I’ll ask my friends.”

But he couldn’t reach the phone, so he just stayed in bed.

Puppets 5 and 6  were still in the car trying to call him. Finally, they just gave up. While they were driving, it was nighttime, and Puppet 4 was still fast asleep. Then, the car lights went black and they couldn’t see anything. They saw green glitter in the air going by really fast above them. Then blue, then red, circling above them. They heard a whoosh. They didn’t know what it was. They switched the car to autopilot and looked at the glitter, but autopilot broke because they were driving too fast. They crashed into a really big tree and some bushes, and they flew out of the car all the way to a tower.

“Hey, where is the diamond that we found?” asked Puppet 6.

But then, ropes came out of the sky and tied them up. They didn’t know what to do. Then, Puppet 5 had an idea.

He said “We can use that spiky plant to cut our way out.”

They pulled the plant out and cut the ropes open. And then, they walked a little bit closer to the tower. But then, a chain came out of the ground and held them. Puppet 5 took out his phone and called Puppet 4 again.

Puppet 4 shouted, “Stop annoying me when I’m sleeping!”

“But we’re stuck in chains,” answered Puppets 5 and 6.

“I’ll rescue you later,” said Puppet 4.

But then, the towers doors opened and three witches came out. Then, in the tower, they saw a blue light for one second. Then, they saw one of their really sharp car parts on the floor. They cut the chain with it. Puppet 6 ran. Then, two witches grabbed Puppet 5 and locked him up way way way up on the 100th floor of the tower.

Puppet 6 was still running around. The third witch tried to find him. Finally, the third witch caught Puppet 6 and locked him up too. After thirteen minutes, Puppet 4 got up and started sleep walking. He made himself some snacks and banged himself against a wall. Then, he opened the door and got out of the building. He ate his snacks and rented a car. He drove and drove and drove.

After eighteen hours, Puppet 4 finally got to the tower! He snuck into the tower on the first floor. One of the witches was making potions. Then, next to her, there was a diamond. She put the diamond into the pot. While she was stirring the diamond in the pot, he quickly and quietly ran up the stairs. When he got to the second floor, he saw an elevator button. He pressed it and then, he heard the doors open on the third floor. So he walked up to the third floor and got into the elevator.

He said, “I wonder what’s at the 100th floor.”

He pressed the 100th floor button and the elevator went up 4, 5, 6, 7, 8…100. The doors opened and Puppet 4 got out of the elevator. Then, on the floor, he saw a potion, and he quickly put it in his pocket. He lifted his head up and saw two witches walking by. He hid behind a wall, but then, the witches turned around and saw him.

They pointed their wands at him and they turned him into a dolphin. At the same time, he also shot his potion onto one of the witches. That made the witch disappear. Then Puppet-Dolphin (Puppet 4) jumped up and grabbed the third witch’s wand out with his mouth. He turned the third witch into a microscopic animal. Then, he pointed the wand at himself and turned back into Puppet 4. He went into the witch’s office and grabbed the key and unlocked the cages. Puppets 5 and 6 got out of the cage and got into the elevator with Puppet 4. They pressed the button for the third floor and went down, 100, 99, 98…..3.  

They went really quietly down to the first floor. The witch was still there making a potion. Puppet 6 went down to the floor and crawled to the pot. Luckily, the witch didn’t see him. Puppet 6 took the potion pot and held it with all his might. He dumped it on the witch’s head. It covered her whole body. Then, the witch slowly got bigger and bigger and bigger until she was 1,000 feet tall. Puppets 4, 5, and 6 ran outside the building. The witch got so big, she was too big to fit into the tower. Then, she crushed the whole tower, and it fell into pieces. Then, Puppets 5 and 6 saw the car pieces on the floor from when their car crashed, and then, they found the engine of the car. They climbed onto the engine and turned it on.

The engine roared. It went super fast, but Puppets 4, 5, and 6 were too scared, so they jumped off. The engine went so fast, it ran into the giant witch’s leg. She wobbled and fell to the ground. She crushed a lot of trees. Then, Puppet 4 took the potion out of his pocket. He had a little bit left. He zapped the witch and the witch disappeared. The witches were never heard of again. Finally, Puppet 4 woke up.

He asked Puppets 5 and 6 “Where am I?”

They said, “You were saving us.”

None of the puppets figured out how Puppet 4 got there. They lived happily ever after…

 

The Two Friends

Every time Bob went to school, the Squirrel kids would point and say, “You’re not so smart.”

When he got home, he would tell his mom, “Mom, people made fun of me.”

His mom would say, “It’s okay.”

She would pat him on the back, and then, she would forget about it.

One day, on a weekend when they were a eating lunch of fried acorns and berry soup, a girl raced up their tree. She had golden-brown hair and was wearing buckled jeans, a turtleneck shirt, and dress shoes. It looked like she was going somewhere fancy.

They asked, “Why are you in our house? Are you a robber?”

“No! Kids were scaring me!” said the girl.

“I’m so sorry,” said Bob’s mom. “You know, you are a giant to us, and you could eat us right now. But you won’t, right?”

“I don’t know,” said the girl. “I’m really hungry right now…”

“Just in case, go behind my back, Bob,” said Momma Squirrel.

“Don’t be scared of me,” said the girl. “I love animals. I never eat them.”

Bob looked from behind his mom’s back and came back out.

“Hello, my name is Isabella,” said the girl.

“Hello, my name is Sue,” said Bob’s mom. “My son’s name is Bobbert.”

“My name is Bobbert.”

Isabella looked at her hands.

“Oh my god, they’re getting smaller every second. Why am I shrinking?”

She felt confused and excited at the same time.

“When you go in this tree, you start shrinking!” Momma Squirrel interrupted.

“Oh, that’s so cool.” Her face was blushing because this was so amazing, “People and animals will always be your size, so you will never get hurt?”

“That is correct,” said Momma Squirrel.       

“Do you have any food for me that I could eat?” she asked, scrunching her eyebrows.

“The only stuff I have is berry soup and fried acorns.”

“How do you eat this stuff then?”  

Momma Squirrel heard a ka-kaw in the light blue sky. “Oh no! That’s a bird up there in the sky! It may eat us!” Her mouth was open. She was so scared and frightened.

“I can hide you,” said the girl.

“And tell me where you are gonna hide me!!!” said Momma Squirrel.  

“Hide under my T-shirt,” said Isabela

“But that is gross!” said Momma Squirrel.

“You want to die, or be in a gross place?” said Isabella.

“Okay, let’s go, Bobbert,” Momma Squirrel said.

She picked him up and crawled up Isabella’s t-shirt. She crawled under her shirt. The bird was soaring down, but then he stopped. He looked at Isabella and said, “Ka-Kaw,” before flying away.  

“Thank you for saving us!” said Momma Squirrel and Bobbert.

“You’re welcome. Can I please stay a little bit longer? It’s so much fun in this tree!”

“Okay… just a little bit longer. Bobbert needs to go to sleep.”

“May I please have the popcorn that we found at the carnival?” asked Bobbert.

“Okay, but just a little bit,” said Momma Squirrel. “This was a crazy day today,” Momma Squirrel said to Isabella. “That’s why Bobbert has to go to bed early.”

“I have to go now. My parents are calling for me. See you tomorrow,” said Isabella.

***

The next day, Isabella asked her parents if she could go to the park. Her parents, Raul and Lucy, asked why she wanted to go the park.

“I met my first ever friend at the park!”

“Who are they?!” Raul and Lucy asked. “Who are these friends?”

“They aren’t people.”

“Then, what are they?”

“They’re two squirrels.”

“Ew! That’s so gross! Show me immediately! I need to call the exterminators,” said her mom.

“No! They’re nice! They helped me make a friend.”

“But they might have rabies!” yelled her dad.

“But they’re so nice to me!”

“I won’t hurt them if you show me how ‘nice’ they are,” said her mom.

“Okay, I guess I’ll show you,” said Isabella.

They walked to the park together. They walked in a line, and when they got to the park, the mom stopped.

“Where are these squirrels of yours?” Mom asked.

“Follow me,” Isabella said.

They followed her into the park. They passed two hot dog stands, the Park Slope Zoo, and an ice cream parlor in the park. Then, they saw one tree all by itself. It had a little ladder on the back of it. You could take it off, but it would be hard. Only squirrels could do it.

“This is the tree,” said Isabella.

“It looks like an ordinary tree,” said her mom.

“Don’t judge it by its looks,” said Isabella. “Come over this way. There’s a little ladder that we can climb up behind the tree, but it’s hard to see.”

So Lucy and Isabella climbed up the tree.

 

The UFO

THUNK.

Oli hit the mind control helmet with the special hammer. He was on the SS Take Over, a spaceship one-eighth the size of Earth. It was a white, thin sphere.                                                             

“The mind control helmet better be ready by ‘QUI YEDTH,’ or as the humans call it, July Fourth,” Zam barked.

The aliens were motivated by their terrible, atrocious planet.

“Okay, boss,” said Oli, a little on edge about Moragh. Moragh was their worst commander. No one told him though. Oli thought he was better than those humans.   

***

“Ruff,” barked Larry’s young, black-and-white beagle, Boston.

Larry and Evan, and their alien friends, Smorglf and Bloghj, were hard at work because they were on high alert after the incident. They kept working on the spaceship, day after day, night after night. Finally, it was going to work.

Vroommm!

The spaceship took off with the gang in it. They were in space.

THUNK!

Evan whipped around. He saw a ginormous spaceship that was ninety times bigger than the one they were on. It was the SS Take Over.

“HUMANS,” a dark voice said. “BEWARE! I SHALL BE YOUR WORST NIGHTMARE!”

“Crud,” said Bloghj.

“Double crud,” said Smorglf.

***

Three minutes later, the gang was in a jail cell. On the wall, there was the calendar. Smorglf gave Larry a paper that read:

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Rio Wsb Ree Mio Cgy Xch Qui Yui Ndr Ghf Wes Ikon

One wsed, two Koio, three htc, four yed, five bhnj, six bhn, seven bhjikj, eight bujonj, nine bhgc, ten gyh, eleven bhyg, twelve ikolp, thirteen vtgyh, fourteen sedz, fifteen hyuni, sixteen nikol, seventeen bynuf, eighteen edrgs, nineteen gyjrv, twenty ftn,  thirty fink

Larry understood. They were going to be in there until “Qui Yedth,” July Fourth. All of a sudden, he thought he knew what the aliens’ plans were. Most people were in the same place, so the aliens could keep them hostage on Earth. Then, since they’d have Earth, the aliens would take the humans and make them work. Or something like that.

***

It was July Fifth. 363 days till the invasion.

“Morning role call!” yelled the prison guard. “Sunji, Gim, Ku, Qas, Rni, Hoy, Waq, Caes, Smorglf, Bloghj, Strange animal, Humans.”  

Everyone gasped.

“Humans, tell me your names.”

Larry replied, “Larry. L-A-R-R-Y.”

Then, Evan said, “Evan. E-V-A-N.”  

“Who is the strange animal that will not talk?” questioned the guard.

Larry replied, “You mean, Boston, my dog. They don’t talk.”

The guard understood and continued, “Des, Cheraw…”

(The list went on and on, but I don’t want you to fall asleep because of boredom. Back to the story, then…)

Zam said, “Rni, your time has come.”

“NOOOOOO!!” Rni screamed, clanging his cage. The bottom of Rni’s cage opened up. Rni dropped down and got sliced up.

***

Boston whimpered at the sight of the jail food, Gogooj Dojier, a big, black cup that was edible, with a green, mushy liquid in the middle.

“What the heck is this?!” Evan yelled with fury at the alien who gave him his food. “Who would even eat this atrocious thing?! I mean, really! It’s a black thing, like a flower pot, with a green liquid in it!”

The alien replied, “This is your special meal, and you are complaining?”

“Special? You call this special?”

“Why, yes. I do!”

“Then you don’t know what special means!”

“Yes, I do!”

“No, you don’t!”

“Yes, I do!”

“No, you don’t!”

“Yes, I do!”

“No, you…”

Evan couldn’t finish his sentence.

“Enough!!!” yelled the guard, outraged. He threw Evan to the side with tremendous force. Evan landed on the hard, concrete floor, elbows gushing out fiery, red blood. He felt as though every bone in his body had snapped into a million pieces. For a split second, he couldn’t think of anything else but the pain.

Evan, with the help of Larry and Smorglf, got up to his feet. He stumbled across the room, then was gently placed on the bench as they all started to chat.

***

“Sir Zam, one of the Earth brats was complaining about the lunch meal, so I shoved him aside,” the prison guard said, kneeling on one foot in front of the aliens’ all-powerful leader. “There was red stuff coming out of him, and he needed help up by his fellow cellmates. After that, they started chatting and cha–” He was cut off by Zam, who yelled in fury,

“You fool, I told you I needed them in top shape if I’m going to beat the…the, nevermind. Oli, destroy him.” He pointed his green, slimy finger at the guard.

***

Evan was badly injured. When lunch break was over, he was helped to the cell he shared with Larry, Smorglf, and Bloghj, when two aliens wearing red crosses hustled over. They took Evan, shoved a sleeping pill in his mouth, and ran away with him.

Larry screamed at them. Then, he ran after the aliens. They weaved corners, jumped bushes, shoved aliens, and then ran through a doorway. Larry was stopped by more guards, and he was escorted back to his cell.

The red cross guys placed Evan on the x-ray table. They examined him and saw that the bones that were broken were split into more than two pieces. They also saw, without the x-ray table, twenty-seven bruises, thirteen cuts (two of which were on his elbows,) and five scars.

Larry was pacing back and forth in the damp, cold prison cell, waiting for Evan to come back and praying that he was okay.

***

When Evan came back, Larry hugged him with every muscle in his body. But Evan couldn’t feel a thing. Then, Larry threw a truckload of questions at him. Evan calmed Larry down.

Evan said, “Larry, bad news. I will need seven months to fully recover.”

Larry told everyone, “Well, now we need to make a plan to either wait seven months or figure out a way to carry Evan. We are going to vote. All for waiting seven months?”

No one’s hand went up.

“So, it’s settled then. We need to come up with a plan to carry Evan.”

“So what’s the plan, boss?” asked Bloghj in a mocking voice.

Smorglf rolled his eyes.

Larry ignored Bloghj. “We’re going to swipe some spoons from the serving table, two each. Then, we will tunnel behind the picture of Zam. We’ll have to start at 5:00 P.M. sharp, because guards are on duty from lunch until then, and end at 12:00 A.M. sharp. After we go far enough, we will tunnel at an angle, so that we will get to the floor of the janitor’s closet. Then, we’ll take security uniforms. We need to fool them long enough so we can reach the escape pods. Got that?”

“Yes,” they replied, simultaneously.

***

The next day at lunch, everyone swiped two spoons. Later that evening, they tunnelled and tunnelled until it was about 12:00 A.M. the next day. They swiped two more spoons each, because the old spoons had snapped because of the wall. They did this for four days, until they reached the closet.

(I’m NOT going to explaining what they did for those days. That would just be plain

annoying.)

It was 11:34 A.M. when Larry and Smorglf reached the closet. They decided to wait until 5:02 P.M. to do the escape. They put a coat on the floor, covering the tunnel, just in case.

At 5:02 p.m., Larry and Smorglf were in the front, followed by Bloghj (he was carrying Evan,) and then Boston in the rear of the tunnel. Smorglf put on separate suit, while Bloghj carried Evan under his suit, so that Bloghj could still use his arms, and he had four legs.  Larry carried Boston around his neck under his suit, with all four legs out. Then, they walked over to a map of the ship with a teleporter next to it.

Larry said, “The escape pods are in section three, part six of the ship.”

They all got in the teleporter and wizzzippp. They were in front of 520 escape pods that could each hold twelve people/aliens. They got into one of the escape pods and put in location the location “Earth.” The pod took off. Ziiiiiiiiiiiiiinnnnkuick.

They were safe. For now.

 

Nothing But Different

Prologue

I hug my knees to my chest. I’m probably the most bullied fairy in Crystal Hills. What most people don’t know is that being a fairy isn’t just totally about having powers. It’s also about what power you are born with and if you can control them. If you have one to two powers, then you are just fine. If you have three powers, you are in the “popular group,” or, as I know them, the “bully group.” The most popular powers are fast flying, underwater breathing, shape shifting, and healing. I have seven powers: invisibility, shapeshifting, frost (like my name), psychic abilities, and fire and water control. My last power is unheard of, forbidden. My name is Frost Winterstorm, and I’m here to tell you my story.

It all started when I was around two. All I remember was the fire that was enclosing my swaddled body. I heard my parents running outside. Every time I think of them, I see their faces close to my own, and then this black arm takes them away. Later, I found out that I was taken to the orphanage by an old woman. They found a note under me that I still have now. It has a picture of my parents and it says:

 

Dear whoever found our bundle of joy,

Her name is Frost Winter Fall. She should be taught well for she is really smart. When she is of the age of 16, she can go out and try to find us. Our names are Cas and Lago Winterfall. Tell her to please find us soon.’

~ her mom & dad

 

Chapter 1

Right now, I am in an ice-rink. Sort of. Since I have psychic, water, and frost powers (and I can fly), I can make a floating ice rink. I have been skating ever since I was three. It’s finally summer vacation.

“Frost!” I hear a voice call. Looking down, I see my best friend, Nightstorm. She flies up.

“Sup,” she says.

“Wanna skate?” I ask.

“Sure.”

One thing you should know about Nightstorm is that she is a girl of few words. She gets bullied a lot for being a quiet nerd. We both are in the same area. I had been giving her lessons on ice skating. Now, she can skate awesomely.

I start to daydream. In a week, it’s going to be my 16th birthday, and I may or may not get a new power. What am I going to do now? What am I supposed to do? Where am I supposed to go now?

My concentration breaks when I hear Nightstorm skate up to me. Looking up, I see her eyes full of concern. Since one of her powers is mind-reading, she probably read my mind.

“Frost,” she says softly, pulling me up. I follow Nightstorm. We fly across town until we get to a hut on the border of the forest. This is Nightstorm’s house, where she lives with her mom, dad, and grandma.

Motioning me to stay outside, when she comes back, she is holding a book in her hand that says only one word: History. Nightstorm pulls me up to the little play house we made together when we were five. She points to the title.

“This book tracks everyone that ever lived,” she says. “It also says where they are now. Maybe it can find your parents?”

“Yeah, but how would we find them? There’s so many people in the world!”

Nightstorm is flipping through the book until she stops at a page. My mouth drops open as I see a picture of them. My parents. Nightstorm looks at the map closely.

“They’re in… in… in… you know where! Oh you know where, on the towers of thunder that were once owned by a rich businessman named Earl Gray,” she says.

Earl was caring and kind. There was one room in his tower that was forbidden to go into. One day, he stepped into that room. The next day, he was found on the floor sleeping. He was sort of in a coma but his eyes were open, full of fear. The curse spread through the house, everyone falling under a spell. Whoever entered the castle immediately fell under what is now called the phantom’s curse.

If my parents are there, how will we get them out?

Nightstorm taps my shoulder.

“Your birthday,” she says. My eyes light up.                                                                                           

“I could get a force-field power that might protect us from the phantom’s curse,” I say. My eyes then look like a candle that got blown out. “But what if I don’t?”          

 

Chapter 2 : A few weeks later

Well, today is my birthday. Wahoo. Right now, I feel overcome with pain. Every year, when I get a power, I get overcome with pain first.

Nightstorm comes over and helps me sit up while I listen to different songs on my Night phone. I stay completely still. If I try to move, every part of my body will hurt. Nightstorm comes in with some soup… and a neatly wrapped box in metallic blue. I look up at her expectantly. Nightstorm just puts the box down on the very tip of my bed so it touches my feet.

Opening the box, I see small, orange ears poking out of the box. I stare in shock as I see a furry face poke out of the box. It’s a fire-fox!!! They are a really rare type of fox that can be over 2,000 dollars. And pups are even more expensive!

“What, where, when, how?!” I stutter, wanting to know where she got the tiny fox. It comes over and crawls under my hand.

“Where? Under a box. When? About a month ago. I think she was terribly abused by her previous owner,” she says, beaming at my face that is lit up with joy and excitement.

“Don’t do anything. It’s night time, so you should sleep,” Nightstorm says, covering me with a blanket. I soon fall asleep with my new pet right beside me.                                                                                                                                

 

A few hours later (epilogue)

I stretch my hands up to the ceiling. Finally. The fire-fox jumps up and climbs on my hair. Without realising it, my hair turns red and orange. Nightstorm walks in holding a bowl of oatmeal.

When she walks in, the oatmeal nearly drops on the floor, but I summon a plate under it. She stares at me with a blank expression before jumping up and yelling.

“Frost, Frost, Frost, Frost, Frost!” she says. “YOUR NEW POWER IS SUMMONING! AND YOUR HAIR! YOU’VE REACHED YOUR MAX POWERS!!! YOU HAVE TO TELL ME THE POWER!!!”

When we first became friends, I told her that when I reach my full power, my hair would turn red and orange, and I basically turn into a “mini god.”

Looking over at her, I hesitate and take a shuddery breath and say, ”Teleportation.”

She walks up to me and hugs my trembling body.

Then, I break down crying because I was reason that my parents got taken away. Because that power is like if you killed someone. My parents sacrificed themselves for me.

So I cry, feeling depressed as Nightstorm leads me to my bed. I eventually cry myself to sleep with the fire-fox curled next to me.

As I am sleeping, Nightstorm mutters, “Well… she is nothing but different.”    

 

My Pet’s Life: A Series

1

Once upon a time, there was a two-year-old Boxer named Moksh. He was the youngest dog in the house, right behind Cricket and Valentine. Zeus was the only hamster in the house. Zeus was half-a-year old. Zeus was in a cage because otherwise, Moksh, Cricket, and Valentine would eat him! Moksh was pretty much always hungry. Today, Moksh tried to eat his owner’s bacon before he went off to school! He only got one bite, so he was still hungry. The owner just gave Moksh the bacon, so he would leave him alone. Moksh ate two pieces of bacon in total.

When the owner came back from school, he was angry to see Zeus was on the loose, Moksh was chasing Zeus, and Cricket and Valentine were chewing on the walls and the couches and the beds too! Everything was ripped up! So he put all the pets in cages before he went to school, but not Zeus, because he was in Moksh’s belly! Moksh was too full, so he barfed up Zeus, who was still alive!

“Sorry for eating you, Zeus! Can you help us get out of these cages? We’ll never try to eat you again if you help us,” Moksh said.

“Fine, but you better keep your promise!”

Zeus crawled through the opening in Moksh’s cage and opened it from the outside. The pets never misbehaved towards Zeus. But they were still hungry! So, they had to misbehave one last time to get food.  Moksh got Zeus his food on the owner’s desk and Zeus got the dogs their food by crawling up the wall with his long hamster nails. Then, once Zeus got to the food, he ripped a hole in one side and all the food poured on top of the dogs. The dogs ate their way out of the pile of food.

THE END.

2

“You want to eat Zeus? Because we never promised not to eat Zeus!” Valentine said to Cricket.

“Are you sure? He gave us a whole pile of food to eat!” Cricket said to Valentine.

“Well we saved him,’’ Valentine said to Cricket.

“No, Moksh did. Not us,’’ Cricket said to Valentine.

Later at the door, Zeus was panicking. His water bottle was empty! Zeus went to the store and paid for a water bottle and bit open the cap. But when he opened the water, he fell in! His hamster claws latched onto the top, and slowly yanked himself out. He dropped all the water onto the floor. Then, Valentine, Cricket, and Moksh ran to lick up all the water.

Valentine said, “Zeus, can you drop some more?”

Zeus ran to the sink then pointed the faucet at the dogs, then turned it on high.

‘’AHHHHHHHHHHHHH! TURN IT OFF!!” Valentine said.

“But I thought you wanted water Valentine,’’ Zeus said.

Valentine jumped onto the table and grabbed Zeus by his tail with her claws.

“You better go in your cage and never come back!” Valentine said.

Zeus took his claws and shoved them into Valentine’s nose. Valentine let Zeus go, and he fell into the drain pipe. Luckily, the drain pipe was clogged with food. Valentine switched on the garbage disposal, but before Zeus got killed, Moksh saved Zeus by knocking Valentine off and turning off the garbage disposal. To actually say sorry, Valentine filled up Zeus’s hamster bottle, and Zeus filled up their water bottles for fun.

THE END

3

“I want a new dog!” Moksh said.

“Me too!” Valentine and Cricket said.

“I want two more hamsters!” Zeus said.

Five Minutes Later…

“Let’s go to PetCo and and get more pets!” Moksh said.

All the pets went through the doggy door. Once they got to PetCo, which was right next to the house, they marched through the automatic doors. Then Moksh grabbed two Chinese hamsters, just like Zeus. Valentine and Cricket bit through a cage and recruited a Golden Retriever.

“Hey guys, my name is Milo!” the Golden Retriever said. “Why did you let me loose?”

Moksh said, “We need new family members, so we recruited you!”

Later, on the floor, Zeus said to the hamsters, ‘’Guys! What are your names?”

“I’m Hades! And I’m Poseidon!” they said together.

“You want to become part of our family?” Zeus said.

“Yes!” They said together.

They all went home and had a good night’s sleep.

THE END

4

“Ho ho,” Zeus said walking past Moksh.

“Oh Zeus, you need a bath. You smell as bad as a skunk.”

“Ya!” everybody agreed.

Moksh turned the water on. Well, he cracked the drain plug. Zeus went in the sink and the drain plug popped off. Zeus went down the drain pipe into the sewer! Moksh, the others dogs, and the hamsters ran outside and started to take off the manhole cover to the sewer. The hamsters used their little claws to hook onto it, and the dogs used their strength to pull the hamsters until they got it open. Moksh jumped down into the sewer with Poseidon and Hades on his back, and they saw Zeus floating along until he went through a grate that was too narrow for the dogs to get past. Zeus grabbed onto the grate and was hanging there, hoping to be rescued.  Milo and Valentine jumped down to help.

Hades and Poseidon jumped onto a little board and floated to Zeus and got him. But then, they forgot how to get onto land, because they were stuck at the grate. So Moksh jumped in and pushed a little board to the other dogs. When Valentine rescued the hamsters, she raced to the house with them to cook them for dinner!

Cricket and Milo raced behind Valentine, but Valentine had locked the doggy door. Milo busted through the window and Cricket followed him. When they came in, the poor little hamster’s claws were burning as they were trying to stand away from the bottom of the hot pan! Cricket tackled Valentine while Milo turned the stove off by breaking off the knob.

Then, they all heard a big crash sound, and they all turned to see Moksh break open the door. Moksh put Valentine in the cage and they lived happily ever after… until next time.

THE END

5

One day, Zeus, Hades, and Poseidon were talking about bowling. They got their tickets online by using their owner’s accounts, but the dogs made them get tickets for them, too. When they went to the bowling alley, the guy said, “No pets allowed.” But the dogs showed the security guard the pets’ tickets, and the security guard let them pass.

The dogs helped the hamsters get to the bowling lanes by carrying them on their backs. The dogs helped the hamsters push the balls down the lane. But when it was Zeus’s turn, Valentine helped him by putting him into the bowling ball and pushing it down the lane. Zeus flew out and fell right onto Moksh.

Zeus told Moksh what happened, and he was angry, so he ran toward Valentine, and squeezed her nose into the bowling ball. Moksh and Milo did a double bowling ball, Moksh held Valentine’s tail and Milo held the bowling ball. They both hit the ball and Valentine down the lane, and there was a strike!  

Valentine rolled and popped out from the tube where the balls return. Her fur was shredded up.  When it was her turn she didn’t hit the pins; she hit all of the pets instead. Then, she grabbed all the hamsters in her paws and ran outside of the bowling alley to the docks by the water. She took a yacht and went far out to sea. Luckily, she found a waverider and left the hamsters on the yacht, and she jumped on the waverider and returned to land. She went to a gun store and bought a rocket launcher and some oil. She returned to the yacht and poured oil all over the boat, but by then the other dogs had stolen an empty Disney Cruise Ship and went to the yacht.

They honked at Valentine, which scared her, and she accidently shot the rocket launcher too soon. It hit the yacht and the boat caught on fire. She rode away on the waverider, while the other dogs started to save the hamsters. Then, they found the rocket launcher full of ammo, and they shot into the water slide on the Disney Cruise Ship. Once they got onto the water slide, a couple of feet away from the hole in the slide, they shot it again behind them. They went flying out of the hole onto Valentine’s wave rider. Moksh was left on the cruise ship to drive it. Everyone else was on the wave rider with Valentine. Milo tackled Valentine and Cricket drove it back to the cruise ship. Moksh threw a rope and they all climbed up to the cruise ship. They locked Valentine in a room with only cauliflower and water.

The hamsters thanked the dogs for saving them. They all stayed on the ship and returned to land, only to get more food. They watched TV, explored, and played around. They never forgave Valentine, and she stayed locked up. All the other dogs and hamsters lived happily ever after.

THE END.

Sandy Kayla

Chapter 1

It had been raining for weeks. At least, that’s what it felt like to Sandy. It had actually been raining for two days straight, and for Sandy, that was unacceptable. Especially on a weekend.

“What are you supposed to do in the rain?” she wondered. She spoke that aloud. “What are you supposed to do?” She stared gloomily out the window of her bedroom. She knew that other kids would probably be watching TV, but Sandy hated TV. When she looked at that screen of death, her eyes hurt like fire. Why would you want to watch something that you could act out yourself?

“Be quiet.” Sandy’s older sister Eliza’s snap from the other room jolted her back to reality. “I’m trying to text.”

Sandy saw that her 3-year-old brother, Dennis, was crying, yet he was still asleep. They shared a room, and she hated it.

“Be quiet, little brother,” she moaned.

“Sandy!” Her mother scolded, running into the room to comfort Dennis. “Denny has a name.”

“I know,” she admitted. “But at this time, I don’t like to use it.”

“Cassandra,” her mother sighed.

“Sandy,” she immediately corrected.

Her mother sighed again. “Just, please, Sandy, try to get along with your family.” Sandy could hear her dad snoring and she shook her head.

“It’s not possible.”

Before her mother could answer, Sandy pushed her way out the door and down the stairs to the basement. The basement was a comfort to Sandy. It was the only place that Dennis wouldn’t follow her to, the only place where Dennis’s cries were drowned out. It was the only place that Eliza would not bother her about her texting. It was the only place that Sandy could be alone on a rainy day. But only on a rainy day. Any other day, it was time to play outside. However, Sandy’s mom never allowed anyone to play in the rain (and she was still shaky about snow). She hated if anything in the house got wet. In the wintertime, Sandy and her siblings had to shake out their snow on the front porch before getting hot chocolate.

For Sandy, the rain was nothing. When she ran and played in the rain and snow, she felt nothing, only joy.

For Sandy, she always had to be doing something. And so she decided to search the basement, every corner, every box, every hole, for something to do. An adventure.

“But how do you search for an adventure inside?” Sandy wondered aloud.

“Do you always ask for help before you try?” The voice slipped through Sandy’s ears and rang in her head. The voice was like honey; however, she knew that even if you put honey on a rock, it’s still a rock. Sweet, but firm, and it made you swallow it with resentment. Sandy could easily picture the person’s voice as a honey-covered rock. Or, honey-covered rocks. The voice was like a chorus, with many voices singing in harmony.

“Are you one of my mother’s friends?” she asked suspiciously.

“Me, I am everyone’s friend,” the person said happily.

Sandy bit her nails and wondered if it was a mistake that she left the light off. “Show me your face,” she demanded.

“I will,” the person said. The light clicked on and Sandy screamed.

“What are you?” Sandy screamed, scrambling backwards. She tripped on her feet and fell onto her butt.

The girl (was it even a girl?) had purple skin, 3 ears, 16 arms, with 2 hands on each arm, 5 eyes, 2 noses, 7 mouths, 20 legs with 3 toes, and finally, wild blue hair.

“I do not know the meaning of your words.” All 7 mouths spoke at once.

“You’re not human,” Sandy concluded. “Are you from another planet? I come in peace!”

“Oh,” she nodded. “I come from the planet Qazxcvbnhgfdertyhjk.”

“What?” Sandy said.

“I said, I come from the planet Qazxcvbnhgfdertyhjk,” she repeated. “And I am Kliuhfhntfhszjmdgbhedxhnmghuk.”

Sandy sighed. “I should have known that this would never come easy to me, like everything else in this world.”

“In the language of the Earthians, I am Kayla, from planet Oba-Snorkel,” she explained.

“Get out!” Sandy shouted. She jumped up and put her fist up as if she were going to fight. “GET. OUT.”

“Why?” Kayla asked sweetly. “I bring you adventure.”

Sandy lowered her fists, and then put them back in fighting position again. “How do you know that I can trust you?”

“Because I am your only chance…” Kayla began to fade away.

“Good riddance,” Sandy thought. But one part of her felt the urge to go with Kayla. There’s nothing else to do, it said. She’s your only chance for an adventure. Sandy sighed, realizing that it was right. She had to go with this strange creature or else she would be stuck in the basement doing nothing.

“Wait!” Sandy shouted. “I want to go with you!”

Sandy grabbed Kayla’s hand. She felt like she was being ripped apart, slowly, part by part, piece by piece… everything was white… there was nothing… nothing…

“Sandy… what is this?”

“Denny’s voice,” Sandy thought. Then she realized in horror what she had just said. Denny’s voice!

“Dennis! Why, why, WHY do you have to follow me?” Sandy shouted.

“Because…”

All the pieces, all the parts of Sandy came back, and she wasn’t in the whiteness anymore. She was in a dark, dark world, with fire blazing the sky. No one was around but her and her brother. She felt clinging on her leg. She shook Dennis off.

“Mom and Dad are going to kill me for bringing you along,” Sandy moaned. “Why can’t you just stay at home, little brother?”

“I wike ‘venture, too,” Dennis said in his defense.

“Ugh,” Sandy groaned. To herself, she muttered, “I hate little brothers.” Dennis started to cry. “Oh, um, I didn’t meant it,” Sandy said quickly.  “I don’t hate you.” Dennis cried even more. “Please stop,” she said kindly. Dennis didn’t stop. Sandy sighed and picked up her brother. “Come on, stop,” Sandy pleaded. “That’s not how you start an adventure.”

Dennis stopped crying. Kayla appeared behind him.

“You Earthlings are getting along. Good,” Kayla said happily. She looked up at the sky. “I could say the same, I wish, for the sky.”

“What happened to the sky?” Sandy asked. Dennis whimpered and hid behind Sandy’s back.

“Sky no goodie,” Dennis whimpered. “Sky bad.”

“Glornorks are the cause,” Kayla whispered. “Vicious monsters, they are. When there are a lot in one place, fire becomes the sky. They hate us, yes.”

“Hate is bad,” Dennis said.

“But our adventure in not that,” Kayla said quickly. “That is not for you, no.” She took Dennis’s hand. “Come along, child.” She waved at Sandy. “Let’s go, yes?”

“No.” Sandy stood tall. “I’m going to fix the glornorks problem.” For some reason, Sandy couldn’t stand to see the fire filled sky, the scorched ground, the dark, dark world. She felt she needed to help…but why? She had just met Kayla.

Kayla threw back her head and laughed. “You’re kidding, yes?”

“No,” Sandy said darkly. “I will succeed.”

Chapter 2

Kayla, shaking her head, led them out of that empty place and to a village of huts. Huts with scorched roofs. Vendors were set in the center of the town. There was a small well in the middle of all the vendors. Little aliens played about, and everyone looked somewhat like Kayla, except some had turqoise skin and others had pink hair. Sandy shuddered. One alien was enough, in Sandy’s opinion.

“Come, earthlings, I will lead you to my home,” Kayla said cheerfully.

Dennis’s pudgy hand was suddenly not in Sandy’s hand anymore. She turned to see Dennis playing tag with two little…

“Are they called kids or…” she wondered aloud.

“No,” Kayla said seriously. “A goat’s babies, they are not, yes?” She held her sides as she chuckled at her own joke. Sandy rolled her eyes and ran to Dennis and pulled on his chubby arm.

“Let’s go!” she snapped. Dennis looked up at her with his big bulging eyes, tears forming. Sandy sighed. “Please, let’s go.”

Dennis waved goodbye to his new friends. “Bye, Sassoona! Bye Momo!” Sandy dragged Dennis over to where Kayla was.

Dennis!” Sandy hissed. “Who knows what kind of alien germs those kids have?”

“No germies, Sanny,” Dennis assured her.

Shh,” Sandy whispered. “Kayla could get offended.”

“No secrets!” Dennis shouted. Sandy hastily put a finger to her lips.

“Our destination we have reached,” Kayla shouted.

Dennis clapped his hands together excitedly and ran inside the hut, forgetting all about their argument. Kayla ran into the hut as well. Sandy walked in calmly. There were four rooms: two bedrooms, a bathroom, and a kitchen/eating area. A little boy pranced out of one of the bedrooms. Kayla scooped him up. “Roger, say hi to the earthlings, yes?”

“No,” Roger pouted. Kayla sighed and set him down. “Cooperative, Roger is not very,” she told her.

“BE QUIET, I’M TRYING TO LISTEN TO MUSIC!” The loud yell of a teenage girl made Sandy jump and think of Eliza.

“Ugh, Talia is so annoying,” Kayla whispered to Sandy.

“I CAN HEAR YOU, YOU LITTLE NITWIT!” Talia screamed, music blaring from the bedroom.

Boom, boom. Ba-ba boom, boom. Choca, choca. Chicka, chicka. Ba-ba-ba-ba-ba-ba-ba boom.

Kayla rolled her eyes. “Usually, Dad is here,” she said. “But he’s been gone lately a lot.” She dropped to her knees, feeling the dirt floor.

“What are you looking for?” Roger asked, turning around.

“Nothing, keep playing,” Kayla said hastily.

Roger shrugged. “Go hide,” he told Dennis. And then he began counting.

Ma, bé, see, lu, ca, ni, nu, la…

“Found it!” Kayla shouted. She glanced at Roger, who was staring at her oddly. “I mean, I found a dust crocodile!”

“You’re weird,” Roger said, and kept counting.

Kayla waved Sandy over to a small door. She lifted it, grunting as she did so. Roger had ran off, looking for Dennis. When she opened the door, there was a compartment with bottles and paper. Kayla thrust her hand into it and came up with a bottle in her hand labeled “Grandpa.” She poured the entire bottle onto three pieces of paper and started muttering a chant. Sandy could barely hear but she could just make out this:

“Ana benee lo

Con sa bùta

Men oo yatee

Con sa la ta bee tha

Men tee ta

Con a loo

Menta

Comalay”

And then, an old alien’s face appeared on the paper. “Kayla, is this an emergency?”

“Yes, Grandpa, a dire emergency,” Kayla assured him. “How to defeat the glornorks, I need to know.”

Kayla’s grandpa laughed so much that tears rolled down his cheeks. “Kayla, you’re funny! Now what’s the real emergency? And where’s your father, by the way?”

Kayla sighed and looked at Sandy as if to say, “See what I have to do now?”

“The real emergency, that is, Grandpa John,” Kayla said. “And Dad is…not here.”

John stopped laughing. “Kayla, the joke is over.”

“A joke, it is not!” Kayla insisted.

“Kayla,” John sighed. “Stop, okay? Stop. multiple people have tried to defeat the glornorks. They all failed.”

“Oh, Grandpa, please,” Kayla pleaded.

“I’m not putting my granddaughter in danger,” John said firmly.

“Please,” Kayla asked. “For me, and my friend Sandy.”

“Sandy,” John muttered. His mouth turned into a big O. “Show her to me.”

Kayla moved the paper into Sandy’s lap. It felt warm. John’s eyes turned huge. “She is here!”

“Huh?” Sandy’s face scrunched up in confusion.

“There is a prophecy that told of a human girl who would come to Oba-Snorkel and save the planet from their crisis.” He took a big breath. “You are that human girl.”

“What?” Sandy screamed. Her voice was down to a whisper now. “That’s not true, I’m not good enough to be a savior.” She sighed loudly. “Ugh, all the responsibilities.”

Kayla took back the paper and exchanged a rapid fire conversation in the language Kayla spoke naturally. Then, Kayla turned to Sandy. “Come. The way, I know.”

“What about Dennis?” Sandy asked uneasily.

“Too dangerous, it is, for a little kid,” Kayla said, shaking her head. Kayla tapped the side of her forehead, then shook her head. “Said Grandpa that when you defeat the glornorks, home, all humans will go.”

Sandy let out a breath of relief. Dennis would be safe and (most importantly) he wouldn’t follow her.

“First, the Kanooky Pits of Menniti-Lalo, we must go,” Kayla declared. She put the potion and the papers back into the compartment and led Sandy out the door. Kayla pointed to the left. “That way, the Kanooky Pits are.” Kayla pursed her lips. “Let us hope no tourists there are. You see, the burning coldness and freezing hotness mix is an attraction of tourists coming from other planets. It is like a, what do you humans call it? Oh, a pool, yes?”

“Yes,” Sandy muttered. She hoped that the “freezing hotness” was not so, well, hot. They went to the center of town where all the vendors were. They were shouting their prices trying to drown out everyone.

“Abalabas! Only la beniciis!” “Menalos, menalos, menalos! Ca beniciis!”

“DELABOTOES! BÉ BENICIIS!”

Kayla walked right past all of the vendors to the well.

“Where you going this time, Kay?” A vendor asked.

“The Kanooky Pits, Papa,” Kayla answered. Then, her face scrunched up in confusion. “Papa, you don’t work as a fruit vendor.”

Kayla’s dad dismissed the accusation. “I thought you hated the Kanooky Pits.”

“Sandy wanted to see them,” Kayla lied. Kayla’s dad didn’t even look at Sandy. “Have fun.”

Kayla jumped into the well. “Jump, Sandy!”

Sandy looked uneasily down the well. “I’m not fit enough to.” Suddenly, there was a big gust of wind. It started to pull Sandy into the well. She clung desperately to the side of the well. She turned around to find Kayla’s dad holding a flute.

“Good luck with the glornorks,” he said.

“How did you–” Her fingers were suddenly pried from the well and she was falling…falling.

Chapter Three

And suddenly, she was at an entrance to a…theme park. There was a huge gate with a sign that said The Pits Park on top of it. Kayla was waiting by the gate.

“Quick, you took, for beginner,” Kayla observed. “Most newcomers take 1 hour or more. 10 minutes, you take. Usually, Papa would go with me, yes, but he has more important thing to do, obviously.” Her gaze averted to the floor, then she pulled Sandy’s arm. “Come, before a line there is!”

She started to run, dragging a reluctant Sandy behind her. “You wanted this,” Sandy told herself. “You’re going to have to deal with the Kanooky Pits, no matter how hot or cold it is.” Sandy sighed, realizing that she was right.

They came to a zig-zaggy line of belts connected between stanchions. “Control the line, is their purpose,” Kayla told Sandy. Sandy shivered, realizing that no one was in the line. They would have to go now. They ran through the zigzag line until they reached the front.

“Two Kanooky Pit Sensations, please,” Kayla said to the security guard.

He held out his hand. “Ten beniciis, miss.”

Kayla placed two coins in his hands and walked right past him. The coins were changing color in his hand. Sandy ran to catch up with her.

“What kind of metal is that?” Sandy asked.

“Menthalinee,” Kayla replied. “From planet Gagalooka. It’s stronger than your puny titanium. Almost unbreakable.” They stopped in front of two lava pits.

Not lava, Sandy thought. Kanooky.

It was orange-ish red, with blue running through it. When its bubbles would pop, it would spray purple liquid. “Kolani,” Kayla said of the purple liquid. “Healing powers, it has.” Then, she jumped into one of the pits. “Come on,” she shouted. “It feels good” Sandy sighed and looked uneasily at the Kanooky Pit. She closed her eyes, then jumped in.

Hot. The first sensation. Hot, hot, hot. Hotter than man could explain. She could feel herself sweating, blisters forming on her skin. “How am I still alive?” She thought. And then, the hotness went away and coldness seeped into her body. She relaxed, then immediately began to shiver wildly. She ran her hands up and down her arms, trying to create warmth. Through her suffering, she heard Kayla say something to the guard:

“Asmanté.”

And then she was pulled under. She fought and fought her way, trying to reach the surface, but whatever was pulling her would not let go. So she went limp and let it pull her under. She held her breath, determined not to die. Her face was turning red from her holding her breath so much. She had to get to the top, had to find air…

She stopped holding her breath and found that she could breathe. Grasping the wonderful air into her dry lungs, she was pulled deeper and deeper…

She appeared in a cave, right next to Kayla. “The Asmanté Caves, this is,” Kayla said. “The main lair of the glornorks.” Sandy shivered, and looked over her shoulder.

“We have to stay very quiet,” Kayla whispered.

Sandy bit her fingernails, and fretted. I’m not good enough, she thought. What was I thinking? I can’t defeat the glornorks.

“I can’t defeat the glornorks,” she said aloud. “I can’t, I can’t, I can’t!” Kayla put her finger to her lips frantically but it was too late. The glornorks were already there. The glornorks were big, pale purple blobs, with red eyes. They reeked of onions, and made strange gargling noises. They formed a circle around Sandy and Kayla, shouting strange words, holding razor sharp blades. Kayla and Sandy moved closer together as the glornorks made the circle tighter and tighter…

Kayla gasped. “Dad?”

Kayla’s dad stepped out of the crowd, wearing a feather crown. “Hello, dear.”

“Why?” Kayla dropped to her knees and put her head in her hands. “Why?”

“I really wish you hadn’t gone looking for trouble,” Kayla’s dad said. His eyes turned red. Kayla quietly cried.

“How are you a glornork?” Sandy asked in disbelief.

“Kayla’s grandfather is not my real father,” he sneered. “He was a ridiculous fake father.” He lead one of the glornorks to the middle of the circle. “This is my father.” His father was a short glornork, with gray hair.

Kayla kept crying.

“I waited for the right moment to strike at my village as I did all the other ones,” he continued. “Now was the right time, I guess, since Kayla was all entranced by her grandfather’s silly prophecy.” He put his face right into Sandy’s. “How does it feel to be a failure?” He threw back his head and cackled evilly, morphing into a glornork.

The glornorks came closer and closer, led by Kayla’s dad…

Suddenly, Sandy felt something she had never felt before. It surged through her bones, and strengthened her body. She felt power in her lungs.

Confidence. It was confidence. A beautiful feeling she had never felt.

She began to shake. She shook with power with confidence. She got on her hands and knees and her whole body shook.

“Sandy?” Kayla asked timidly.

Sandy heard nothing. She shook and shook and then, BOOM! She wasn’t herself. There was light, powerful light, coming out of her. She was in the air, and she burst out of the cave, practically touching the fire sky. And then, there was a white light. Only light. Just white light.

And then, she and her brother were back in the basement. Sandy’s eyes filled with tears as she thought of Kayla.

“I’m so sorry, Kayla,” she said.

Knock knock knock knock.

“SANDY!” Eliza screeched from the other side of the door. “IT”S SUNNY OUTSIDE, MOM TOLD ME TO TELL YOU THAT. NOW I’M MAD YOU INTERRUPTED MY TEXTING,” Sandy heard Eliza shout. “YOU’RE SO ANNOYING”

Sandy grabbed Dennis’s hand and ran outside to the backyard. Eliza was sitting on a beach chair, texting. Dennis was standing next to Sandy, with his arms crossed, just like Sandy was doing. Sandy sighed. “Some things never change,” she thought. And she smiled. Somehow, she liked it that way.

The King

It was cold. Cold, dark and gloomy. The day was a sad one, and no one felt that anything was right. It was as if everything was darker. No one had light in them. No one felt anything. The only thing anyone knew was the darkness. Happiness was scarce and the hope was drained. Nothing was good in the world anymore.

March 3

Nothing is better than knowing your subjects are safe. The attacks were getting worse now, and I wanted to make sure that there were peaceful nooks for the butlers and maids to hide when the cannons came into the harbor. The people who manned the cannons were obviously from the Kingdom of Delar. They were power-hungry, and always dressed in black. When I traveled there to sign a treaty, (that was obviously not working) I saw how stressed they all were. Everyone in my kingdom knows that stress brings unhappiness, and unhappiness brings suicide. No one wants to commit suicide, unless they are unhappy in life. Sometimes death is not always a bad thing, though. Sometimes death has to be there, for our own good.

My carpenters were making small rooms with big locks, preparing for the next shooting. It was every day now. Every day, the people in black came to kill me, with their big cannons. They didn’t want to kill anyone but me. Fortunately, the people wouldn’t let it happen. Thank god for the people. They stormed the boats everyday with their torches, chanting “God save the king!” And I was the one who was supposed to be protecting them. Sometimes I feel like I am not good enough for them. It’s like they are my ruler. Would the Kingdom be more successful without me? Would there be less deaths? Would the Kingdoms stop fighting against me if I were dead? Would people stop fighting for me, and live happily for once? Without me, three hundred-and-fifty-two people would have been alive right now.

That night in bed, I could not sleep. What I thought this afternoon was still in my brain. It was like a virus in my head, growing stronger and quieting other sense. I knew that eventually, it would take over my body.

March 4

At first I didn’t feel like death was a sad thing. As I pushed the blade into my heart, I started laughing. I was going insane. I was dying and I couldn’t stop it. For the sake of my subjects, for my people, I decided to approve of death, to bring it upon myself, so they would not mourn too much.

The pain was not as bad as I thought it would be. It was sort of like a feeling. When you know you are going to die, when you are dying, then you do not feel scared anymore, you don’t dread it, you just let it happen. I felt that it was easier for me to kill myself, rather than my insanity kill me. I felt that it was easier to know when death happened, rather than wait for it.

Then it happened.

April 1

I was at the wrong place at the wrong time. It was the first day of April when everyone noticed the king was missing. The guards said that they were looking everywhere for him. Where was he? I didn’t know the king, but I wouldn’t think he would run away, or be crazy enough to hide himself from the world.

Everyone said the king was an amazing man, but I felt he was a spoiled brat who didn’t do anything for himself. Once, when I was trying to compel a rich lady to give me some pie, the king came out of the castle. Everyone bowed on the ground, everyone except me. I had been dragged too many times to the docks to fight for the king. What has he done to help me? To him, I am just some thief who is doing the wrong thing. No. I am not just a thief. I am a boy who wants a life, a real life. Not just a life of sleeping on the cracked rooftops of the broken buildings of the city. I want to live in a building, not on top of it. I don’t want to grow up homeless. The king couldn’t see that though, he could only see a young crook whose only intention is to steal other people’s food, other people’s belongings.

The guards glared at me. They obviously thought I was trouble. I was the only one standing besides the king. At that moment, our eyes met. A meaning of understanding gleamed in his pupil, just as he turned away. That was the very first time the king saw me.

Now he was gone, just like that. The guards were kind of stupid, though. They looked for his body everywhere but the castle. So, so stupid. For once, I felt bad for the king. He spent so much time training his troops, yet they were so dumb.

The next move I made was the action I regretted most. It was such a bad idea to go into the castle. I hated the king. Why did I even care if he was missing? Why did I want to find him? I was just brainwashed by the guards’ stupid moves. I quietly crept through the corridors, hopeful that no guard would spot me. I assumed that the king’s room would be at the top floor of the tower, so I started up the stairs.

The massive door creaked as I pushed it open, but no one noticed. I tiptoed around the room, searching all of the closets and under the tables. I came into another large room, that was obviously his bedroom. The quarters were huge. There were four rooms, just for the king with the all of the fanciest furniture. The bed was in fact a King sized bed, and it had regal red and gold sheets. And there, slumped on the bench at the foot of the bed, was the king, with a knife in his chest. I couldn’t believe it. I walked over to the king, and tried to pull the knife out, thinking it was fake. It wasn’t. I screamed. And then fainted.

April 2

I woke up to the smell of death. The smell of rotting dust and carcasses. The smell of bad meat. My cell was not big, but I shared it with a large man. He had short dreadlocks, and a small mustache. His dirty pants went below his ankles, but he wore no shirt. I thought that he must have been very cold, for I had a long-sleeved shirt on, and I was still freezing. If he was cold, he didn’t show it. He was screaming through the bars of our cell. At first, I didn’t understand what he was saying. Then, as I shuffled a bit closer, and became more awake, I realized why I was here.

“I didn’t kill the king!” the man shouted. “I owe every single moment of my life to the king! I would never do anything to hurt him!”

I couldn’t believe my ears. I found his dead body, I did them a favor. Did they seriously think I killed him? I didn’t kill the king.

April 3

The next day were the trials. I was thrown into a big truck with three other men, who were bigger and obviously stronger than me. A large mob followed the truck to our destination, and I was pelted with carrots and potatoes.

I was thrown onto a tall stage, still being bombarded with vegetables. I couldn’t understand why they thought I killed the king.

A jury was set up on both sides of me, and judge was in front. He called the session into order. “I would like to start by asking you some questions,” he said. “First of all, did you kill the king?”

“No. I am innocent,” I said, trying to keep my voice under control.

“Well, what is your alibi for the date of April first?”

What would I tell them? The truth would be too obvious. “I was, uh, visiting someone,” I said, hoping that they wouldn’t see that I was lying.

“Then why, sir, was your body found next to the king when he was found dead. And why were your fingerprints all over the knife that was in the king’s body? You, sir, are not innocent.”

I couldn’t believe it. I really couldn’t believe it. I felt like a million bricks had fallen on my shoulders. I didn’t do anything, but I was going to die. I would die, because I was blamed for something I didn’t do. I didn’t kill the king.

April 4

They gave me two days before the stabbing. Two days. Two days of depression. Two days before death. Death is a harsh thing. It happens when the world wants you gone. It happens when you don’t like the world. It happens when it is time to happen. And then it was time.

April 5

I had never felt so depressed. All of my dreams of having a good life going to waste. Now I was going to have no life at all. They put me in chains and paraded me through the streets like a circus lion. I felt bruises being made from the food that was being thrown at me. Bruises that I would soon not feel.

As I looked around I realized why I always felt so out of place in this town. I was not a cruel person. I did not use violence to get my way. I didn’t want to hurt anyone. Then I realized, sometimes violence is necessary. If you are threatened, then you should be able to defend yourself.

I started to develop a strategy in my head. A strategy that could get me out of this awful situation. A strategy that had to involve a few lies.

I confidently stepped up to the stage, next to my assassin with a blade in her hand. I took a deep breath and spoke what were supposed to be my final words.

“People of the Kingdom, I would like to start by saying that today I am proud to die for our king. Our brave king was sick, and he died. Yes, I found him with a knife in his back, but I did not kill him,” I said, stepping up closer to the front of the stage.

“I did not kill him. He did!” I shouted, pointing at some random man in the crowd. “I saw him stab the king on April first, and I tried to stop him.” I struggled to figure out the next part. I thought I would tell a lie based on the truth.

“I tried to pull the knife away from him, and that is why my fingerprints were on the blade. Then he punched me and knocked me out.” It took a second for the people to comprehend what they just heard.

As they tackled the innocent man, I bolted off the stage and sprinted to the city. Unfortunately, the guards were too smart. They ran after me. I stopped and put my hands up.

“What do you want?” I asked them.

“Come with us,” one of them said.

“Why?”

“You still owe things to the king. Also, we need to justify that you didn’t kill him.”

I mumbled a swear word and then followed them back to the stage. Suddenly, I realized what I had just done. I just put an innocent man in my place, and now he might die. I was a monster. How could I have done such a thing? Even in a moment of panic, it is not okay to shove someone to death, innocent or not.

April 6

April 6 was the day they checked the security cameras. It was the day when I was put in jail for a day, for lying about what happened. It was the day when the innocent man slapped me five times. It was the day when they figured out who killed the king.

It all started when I was taken into the castle for a meeting with the king’s butler. The butler was the king’s best friend, and he was mourning for the loss of his comrade. No one knew why they were friends, but they were. I didn’t see how anyone could be friends with such a man, but he was. He just asked me standard questions, such as, “Did you see anything out of the ordinary where you found the king?” and “What sort of position was the king in when you found him?’” I felt bad for this man. His best friend had just died, and he was so depressed, and he had no one to blame.

Later, I went back to the sight of the crime: the king’s bedroom. The place was trashed. Books were thrown on the floor and couches were upside down. It was truly a mess. Nothing was how the king left it. Nothing, except the security cameras.

It was sort of funny how the guards were so stupid. Of course, they didn’t look in the security cameras, yet they wanted to find out who killed the king. They should have known to check the security cameras, before anything. How else were they going to find out who killed the king? Did they really care about him?

April 7

I don’t exactly remember how I got the guards to agree to check the security cameras. I probably just told the truth: they were stupid and didn’t check the security cameras before arresting people. They were about to kill me, but they hadn’t checked to confirm that I killed the king.

As we walked into the security room, I saw how unorganized this kingdom really was. I saw random computers sitting on coffee tables, the guards that were supposed to be protecting these files sleeping on the couch that was randomly in the middle of the room. I saw people’s files strewn across the floor, papers everywhere. Now I saw why the guards didn’t check the security cameras. They were too lazy to find them.

Anyway, while the guards were escorting me I fell asleep on the couch, I was the one who went through all of the computers and found the security footage from March 1st to April 1st. As I scanned it for anything odd, I noticed something peculiar. The king had been spending a lot of time staring at the white wall. I wondered what he was thinking about. Did he know that he was about to be killed? Did he know that he was going to die?

Then I reached the date of March 4, at 11:35 p.m. It really was one of the saddest things I had ever seen. He was sitting there, with a knife to his heart. And he was laughing. The crazy man was laughing.

The king was dead. He killed himself.

April 8

After I showed the guard my discovery, they were instantly stripped of their military gear. They place their hats and jackets on the ground, and they wept. Even I shed a single tear. But I did not cry because the king was dead. I cried because the king was insane. I cried because he killed himself too early. Although the shootings had stopped, this kingdom was still a mess. It was still unorganized. The king died too early.

April 9

April 9 was the day when we released the footage. April 9 was the day when all was lost. April 9 was the day when the happiness was stolen from the people. All was lost. The king was dead, and he killed himself.

But of course, the people were stupid enough to think it was their fault. It wasn’t. The king was going insane. He was not good enough for our kingdom anyway. He stayed in his castle, and didn’t talk. The schools in the kingdom were even older than him, and the living conditions were horrible. This kingdom could be amazing. We just needed a good king.

April 10

I started to think of people that we could elect as king. I started a list of possible nominees. I started with people who knew the king well. Maybe his butler? I put him down on the list. Other than that, I didn’t think anyone really knew him. Then I started to try and think of people who were completely loyal to the king. Well, every single person in the kingdom except me, I guess. Who else would be fit to be king? I though about the king’s family. Did he have any family? I made a note in my head to ask the butler about that.

As I walked to the butler’s quarters, I thought about the life of a king. They must always be tired. They have so much work piled on them, and they probably have no time to sleep. Being a king would be hard, but if the person were capable of doing all the work, then they should be able to do it. I think I would be willing to be king, but it would be really hard.

I knocked on the butlers door, and a man, who looked like he was on the king’s council opened it. He was wearing a white, silk robe, and had a magistrate hat on. He was very short, but he had a serious expression on his face.

“He’s here!” he called back over his shoulder. I was a little confused. This was not the normal way to greet someone.

“Uh, who is?” I asked stupidly. The councilor rolled his eyes, and let me into the small room. The walls were painted a light pink, and there were picture frames hanging on them. There was a small bed in the corner, it had white sheets and a large book at the foot. Standing next to the bed were the councillors, and of course the butler.

“Sir, I have taken it upon myself to tell you this news. The council has given you a choice.” He sighed. “The first choice, you can go to jail, and spend twenty year there for theft and lying to higher ranked people. Or, the second choice. You can become our king. You obviously know this kingdom better than anyone else. You are smart, and talented. You can trick people better than anyone else, and you know how the people feel.”

At that point, I was speechless. “Yes.’’ I whispered. “Yes, yes, yes. I will absolutely become king!” I couldn’t believe it. Surprise and excitement rushed through my veins.

Everyone smiled. I just hoped that the people would like me. What if I was a bad king? I would just have to try my best.

May 2

May 2nd was the day of the coronation. The whole kingdom was practically there. It was quite a festivity. There was more food than I could ever imagine. The plates of roasted meat and vegetable. And the drinks. Oh my god, they were amazing. I had never tried soda before, but it was like a sweet explosion in my mouth. It was so much better than water. The games were amazing. They were all on large shiny touch screen tablets and were really fun. I tried a few myself. The coronation was more of a party than a ceremony. At the very beginning of the party, I was crowned and had to recite a pledge, but that was all of the ceremonial things. Then we had fun. I was still very young for a king, so I could play all of the games with ease. I had never eaten so much in my life, but now I had unlimited food, drink, and fun. And work. But the work was easy if you knew how to do it. Signing reasonable treaties, and making the right changes at the right times. I had a feeling that I was going to like being king.

September 19

“And why, sir should I sign your treaty?” I asked King Jorge of the Kingdom of Delar. “Our country is so much stronger than yours, we could easily win against you in a war, and you broke the last treaty the king signed with you. You wanted to kill him. We don’t need to trade with you, nor do we need anything you have. The Kingdom is doing just fine, without your help.”

“I still don’t like how you call your region The Kingdom. It isn’t the only kingdom in the world,” he mumbled.

“Well, it’s the most important. Now sir, I don’t think this treaty is going to work. We aren’t getting anything out of this. The Kingdom is amazing, without your help,” I said sternly. Sometimes I was a little mean to other kings, but it was all for the sake of the people.

“John, will you please escort this man. I feel that he is not fit to be aligned with our country.” With that I turned back to my other work. We were building five new schools for the children of the Kingdom, fit with laptops, books, and other supplies. I felt that this was one of the more important projects of the kingdom, besides rebuilding all of the living building, of course.

I think I am king so I can make this kingdom a better place, nothing else. I do not feel the need to kill myself, like the other king decided to. For the people, I will make this kingdom amazing. For the people, I will be a good king.

The Attempt

As Annie ran and ran out of the house and into the grass field, running strenuously and becoming tired after just a couple of minutes, her grandmother lay half-conscious on the floor of her bedroom. She was swimming in a pool of alcohol as her soap opera ended, but she didn’t have the faintest idea of what Annie was doing. Annie probably thought that her grandmother wouldn’t know anything about what she was doing or where she was going and what she was hoping to accomplish, because she was intoxicated half of the time, anyways. That’s why Annie would and could never depend on her. Annie ran through the fields, ignored the animals and tractors, and instead headed towards the flowing river nearby. The river water was a pearl black color as you could see the river build up to a storming waterfall.

Annie walked around the river’s perimeter, still on the grassy field that surrounded it, and kept walking in the cold, dark night until she saw the drop where the waterfall was located. It was a steep decline in the field, as well as the water which made the horrifying sound of water plummeting from the edge, and what Annie decided to do was take her little sack of necessities of food, water, stationary, a compass, and flashlight, all of the necessities that she needed, and chucked them down toward the land surrounding the lake. Thankfully, the sack hit the grass with ease and none of her items broke or got damaged. Annie ran back, constantly looking to the side and behind her to see if her grandmother was coming for her, even though she was very far away from the house.

She then jumped into the river, fully aware that she was still in her clothes, but soon regretted the decision she had made. As she cursed under her breath, she tried to find a way to swim to the side, but water coming the opposite way stopped her from doing that. She wasn’t prepared.

The water felt cool on her skin and instantly wet her hair but her heart starting pumping as she felt herself moving along with the water, gliding gently experiencing a pure  even though it would be a good one or two minutes or so until she actually reached the waterfall.

During this time, Annie tried to look towards the side to see if she could spot her belongings to make sure no one had stolen them, but she came to the almost immediate conclusion that she wasn’t going to see from how high she was up. As she let time pass, she heard the sound of heavy water seep into her ears. She looked over and saw the exhilarating drop that was to come. All she could see was the lake below her where water was thundering into, and the loud sound of water falling the horrifying height. Slowly she closed her eyes, even though they rapidly shook over her eyelids.

And when the drop came, her body screamed with fright, wanting to swim back to the land and run back to the house, but it was too late. Her stomach dropped as if she was on a rollercoaster, and she went dizzy as she twisted around and dropped down. Her body instantly heated up over one hundred degrees. Even though the drop lasted a couple of seconds, it still felt like torture to her. Her arms went up and her body had possessed her. The forces of gravity seemed to rebel on her. She screamed for a faint second and couldn’t breathe as she was sucked into the heavy stream of water that was falling with her. The feeling felt like death, and she couldn’t bare the intensity.  Until she splashed with a loud, painful, discombobulated hit, and everything went dark.

About thirty seconds later, Annie woke up two or three feet deep into a lake and quickly moved her legs to resurface. She swam, cold and tired, yet very worried, to the surface to retrieve the sack.

When she looked inside she discovered that the bottle of water was colder and the granola bars she had packed were scattered throughout the contents of the sack, but it was still edible. Even though she was cold and her clothes were sopping wet, and she could not believe the intensity of the previous events, she threw her sack on her back and continued throughout the night into a gloomy woods, where she found a tall tree to sleep on that wasn’t home to any creatures. She climbed up branches of the tree, which were hard and grippy, and found a tall, thick branch a couple feet up that she was able to spread herself on. She used a soft spot of the sack as a pillow to lay her head on as she slowly drifted into sleep…

Annie experienced herself falling throughout her dream. The feeling of her stomach dropping, her heart pumping, and her body landing on a hard surface. While the feeling was not as intense of the plummet from the waterfall, Annie woke up shocked and screamed in fright, as a chipmunk had pushed her off of her spot on the tree and her sack, too, which fell on top of her with a bang just a couple seconds later, causing an invisible bruise on her left cheek. Annie cried and cried in fear and sadness, that in all reality, it was not possible for her to escape this little farm town and her evil grandmother. She was not able to find anybody that could take care of her. She was not able to find freedom for herself where she lived. She gave up. Maybe the girls will be nicer this year. They’ll probably be nicer or else she’ll be telling the principal and her grandmother, but in reality, she wouldn’t do much help for her.

She ran back through the forest, up through the incline where the waterfall was, her crying tremendously with her sack bouncing up and down on her back. She was so out of control she fell into the grass, getting some grass-stains and not knowing what to do with herself. She couldn’t believe it. She wanted to go to where she was home. Then, she heard a voice.

“Hey!” the voice screamed, sounding like a woman. “What are you doing here?”

“I’m sorry, I’m sorry!” Annie wailed, still in tears, her face laying flat in the grass. “Please don’t get me in trouble!” She lifted her head up and saw the woman come towards her with a flashlight.

“Oh my dear God,” the voice stated. “Aren’t you little miss Annie Walker?”

“Yes, yes, that’s me.”

“What are you doing in this part of town, huh?” the voice yelled again. “This is about twenty minutes from where you live.”

“How do you know where I live?” Annie demanded.

“I attended your family’s funeral,” the voice said. “I was good friends with your parents. They shipped a lot of chopped trees to me. Helped me out for making wood to throw in the fire.”

“What’s your name?” she asked.

“Can’t tell you that,” the voice said again. “Come inside and dry off. I’ll give you some hot tea to drink.”

“That would be very nice of you,” Annie said.

And then she entered the house. It was nice, cozy and warm. Everything seemed to be made of logs. The walls were made out of logs, the surface holding the picture frames were made out of logs. Hell, even the shower and bed were made out of logs, but the bed had a mattress with pillows on it. The house was very small, which made it feel very quaint. A man, Annie assumed it was the woman’s husband, was sitting on a couch was reading a newspaper article and complaining that none of his stocks were sold and he wasn’t able to make any profit. Things about those “damn investors” and “stockholders” although Annie didn’t know a single thing he was talking about, but she assumed it was about the Great Depression.

The woman talking to her led her to a bathroom so she could shower and she laid out some pajamas for her to change into after. The hot water felt good against her and putting the shampoo in her hair made her feel better again, even though she was tired and lazy. The pajamas were nice and soft and she instantly went back into the living room where she sat by the fireplace, and a beverage of some sorts was waiting for her.

“Turns out, I didn’t have hot tea, after all,” she said. “But instead I made you a cup of hot cocoa and marshmallows because it’s so cold outside.”

She looked inside and saw steam rising up from a brown, chocolate-smelling beverages with white balls of sugar thrown in for an extra taste. Even though it was hot, she appreciated the refreshing taste while the mallows made it extra sweet. The woman sat down next to her, looking eager to find out more about what’s happening.

“Where have you been, Annie?” she asked. “Why are you down in this part of town? Your grandmother must be worried sick.”

“Relax,” Annie pushed. “She’s drunk half the time.”

“That’s an outrage!” she exclaimed. “How does she get her alcohol?”

“She just told me she hired someone,” Annie admitted. “That’s all I know.”

“What are you doing here?” she asked.

“I need to run away,” Annie confessed. “I can’t live with my grandmother. She’s so evil and drunk. I can’t bare it. I was attempting to run away across the country to find other relatives I could settle in with. But I guess I failed.”

“Why is your grandmother so evil?”

“She’s an alcoholic!” Annie exclaimed. “She’s drunk, glued to that damned radio set, and spends all her money on illegal alcohol! We’re going poor. There’s no more good food in our house. Most of it is basically covered in mold.”

“Well, you’re safe here,” she said, and Annie took a sip of her cocoa. She finally felt warm. She finally felt safe. “Where were you planning to go?” she asked.

“Los Angeles,” Annie exclaimed. “Sunny Los Angeles. Home of Hollywood. That’s where my uncle lives. He’s the greatest man on earth! He’s so fun. I love spending time with him.”

“I’ll get you there,” she promised. “I’ll get you there.”

“Who is this lady?” the man yelled, getting up from the couch and making his way over to the woman. “What is she doing in our house so late at night.”

“George, this is Annie Walker,” the woman soothed. “She’s the daughter of the victims of the funeral we attended.”

“Oh, well, hi Annie,” the man said, as he reached out his hand for her to shake. “It’s great to finally meet you.”

“You too,” Annie said, calmly. “Thanks for letting me stay here.”

“Anytime,” the man said. “Why are you here?”

“Like I was telling your wife,” Annie started. “I’m running away from home because my parents are dead, my brother’s dead, my grandmother’s a drunk, I’m bullied at school, and I just can’t deal with my life.”

“Your grandmother’s a drunk?” the man asked. “How is that possible? It’s completely illegal.”

“She hired someone who goes to speakeasies and pays for smuggled alcohol and delivers it for her,” Annie said. “That’s all I know.”

“Where do you want to go-”

“Los Angeles,” Annie cut the man off. “Where my uncle lives. He’s the greatest guy on Earth, you know. He’s so nice to me. We go down to the beach and he buys me hand-pumped milkshakes.”

“We can get her there, can’t we, George?” the woman asks sympathetically. “Right?”

“We can get her there right now,” George says, and Annie’s hopes rise. “We have enough money for a train pass. Go get into some clothes and put on some shoes. I think we have a size that fits.”

Once Annie dressed into a long-sleeved shirt with a fur coat, she put on some boots they had that were very warm. After she took both of their hands, they confidently walked out of the door to the house. Out to the train station. Out into the night.

Magic is Really Real

Finding magic hasn’t happened to anyone, until now. I think I was the first one to ever feel magic. I think all the power I used came from my bracelet. When I got it at the store, the label said that it was magical. I have started exploring its powers right away. The bracelet doesn’t look magical–it is just blue with red dots. You could buy it anywhere. Suddenly, I use the bracelet to open a wormhole to another world. I wonder why the wormhole is blue and red, the same color as the bracelet. I look inside the wormhole and see that the world is black and white. I try to look inside a little more, but I start turning white? Just then, I hear my mom calling my name.

“Frannie, it’s dinnertime. Come eat.”

I take the bracelet off and the wormhole closes. As I run, I try to find an explanation of what happened. I think about what I should tell my parents, or if I should tell them at all, but right now at this second I can not even describe how I’m feeling. I don’t know what’s happening!

When I am at dinner, my mom says: “Frannie, are you excited that school is over?”

“Yeah,” I say. “I can’t wait for our vacation to Hawaii. I’m going to go pack right now. I’m just too excited. See you later!”

When I enter my room, I see that my wrist is turning white!! I put on the bracelet and, this time, see that the nails on my right hand are turning black. I take the bracelet off and put it on again. This time, my neck turns white. Then, I see a storm outside. I take the bracelet off and the storm disappears.

My mom calls my name. I run to the kitchen where she is washing the dishes. She says: “Honey, make sure you pack everything.”

I reply: “I will.”

I run to my room then I realize the bracelet is still on me. I thought I took it off–well, that’s the least of my worries right now. I open the door to my room and see the portal right in my room. I take the bracelet off to keep it from destroying my house. Right when the portal is about to close, I jump in.

At first, I don’t see anything. Then, I see something. Well, really, I hear something. It’s a voice. The voice is dark and gloomy. It says: “Your mission is to save this world and put it on the map.”

All I do is look up. The sky is black and white! The people are black and white!! I am black and white!!! I freak out. I see a bubble. It gets closer to me. I feel my body inside the bubble. It turns out that I am in the bubble. I float up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up and up until the bubble pops.  I start falling and falling and falling and falling and falling and falling until I reach the ground. I feel pain. I hear the voice again.

“You have twelve hours. Good luck.”

Suddenly, I feel more pain. Why do I have twelve hours? Then, it hit me. Maybe this voice knew that I was spending the night in my room packing. Next thing I know, I’m walking in the streets. I hear some music coming from a house. I look inside a house window. It looks like people are having a party but it’s not a party because they are all gloomy. I don’t know. I’ve only been in this world for two minutes.  I see a girl walking out of the house. I run up to her, but she looks different compared to the other girls. She’s smiling. Then, I realize that she looks exactly like me. I start talking at the same time as she does. We both ask the same question:

“What are you doing here?”

The girl says, “I just bought this bracelet and every time I put it on a portal opens up.”

My jaw drops. I almost faint.

“Same here,” I say, “and, by the way, my name is Frannie.”

“I’m Jenny. Jenny Frannie Leaf.”

“My full name is Frannie Jenny Leaf.”

As we walk, Jenny pulls me along. I see two motor bikes.

“Let’s get on those bikes,” Jenny says. “We can go wherever. You want to go faster?”

I see a mountain at the tip there is a cage of color. Wow.

“If we get past the things up there we can make the cage full of color explode and the town colorful again,” Jenny adds.

Wow, I think to myself again.

We start climbing the mountain. After about five minutes she says, “are we there yet?”

“Are you crazy,” I say. “It has only been five minutes.”

As we climb, we pass through spikes and thorns. Then, we see the top of the mountain. I stop, think about the top of the mountain, and, suddenly, I’m there. The bracelet can make us jump or move faster. I call to Jenny.

“Just think of the top or just run up the mountain and you’ll be there!”

“I think I’ll just think of the top.”

“Remember, when we were running to the mountain the bracelet made us go faster? Everything is making sense now.  

“I mean, finally. It’s about time”

I can tell that Jenny is trying. I don’t see her anymore and think that she must’ve jumped. When I look behind me, she’s nowhere. Then I turn around and she’s right in front of me. She says: “Did you just see the pyramids?”

“Just come on.”

We both run. Then, we see another world. Then, Jenny uses the bracelet to see extra far. She sees the cage of color that belongs to the other town. Then, I look at my watch only. There are only five hours left (it had been only forty-five minutes). Then we rush even more. There are guards in front of the cage. I realize that I can jump so I secretly jump to the other town, grab a pair of scissors, and jump back to the cage. I cut every part of it except for one. I look at Jenny and she nods. I close my eyes and cut the last part and there is a giant explosion of color. Suddenly, we drop and land on a map. On the edge of the map is a little island and it’s labeled F.J. city.

“It’s ours!!!” I yell. “It’s our city.”

I start to tear up a little bit.

“You’re free to go,” the voice says. “Thank you for all the loving work you did for your city. We gave you both the bracelets because we knew you could change the city. You made it colorful and now you can keep the bracelets because we trust you. Just think of the portal and you can go.”

“Are you ready?” I ask.

“Let’s go,” Jenny says.

We hold on to each other, think of the portal, and walk straight into the wall. We hear the voice laughing.

“I’ll take those!” it says and swipes our bracelets away. “Do you think you can just come here and stay? No way! I had to give each one of you the bracelet somehow. It’ll lead you here. When I found you, you guys knew it wasn’t real didn’t you?”

Jenny whispers, “yes.”

“So you’ve been lying to me this whole time?” I ask. “I don’t know what to say to you. You’re a liar. Now, I know.”

Jenny looks at the place where the sound is coming from. She sees it.

“This girl, Frannie,” she says, “helped me see that anything is possible. Even though she doesn’t know it, she’s taught me a lot.”

Jenny pulls a lever and a door opens.

“Run, Frannie. Run!”

I run into the portal and get trapped inside it. What do I do? I see Jemmy fighting the voice. She pulls a lever and the portal keeps moving. I see that the color is spreading and the voice is fading. I see it, and it’s gone. My day was hectic. I think that I better go home and rest. When I went home, my parents were staring at the television. It was saying:

“These two girls, Frannie and Jenny, saved this town. As a reward, they will have a city named after them.”

After all the hugging with my parents, I decide to write a letter to Jenny. The letter says:

Dear Jenny,

I am so glad I met you during my journey. You are one of the sweetest girls I have ever met. You helped me save the town, and I couldn’t have done it without you. Frannie plus Jenny equals F.J. city. I am so happy I met you and, remember, if I had to pick someone to save a town with, I would pick you!

Best wishes,

Frannie J. Leaf

Finally, four weeks later, she writes back. I guess the mailman had a hard time finding her. And guess what? It turns out that we’re twins! Her letter says:

Dear Frannie,

Thank you so much for saying all those things.  I am so sorry it took me so long to write back. Thanks for everything and also my dad said that we’re twins!

Sincerely,

Jenny

I hope Jenny and I meet up sometime. After all, Frannie plus Jenny totally equals F.J. City!

THE END

The Tale of Arcaror

Koll was sitting under the eaves of a farmhouse to take shelter from the pouring rain. He heard a pathetic sound coming from a gutter and went to take a look. There was a pathetic little baby bundled up in dirty rags. Koll could hardly feed himself, but he could not leave a baby there to die. So he decided to adopt the little orphan. He called him Arcaror, which meant “Rain.”

Arcaror lay on a bed for the first time in weeks, waiting for Koll to return home from work. His adoptive father worked as a farmhand to support Arcaror and himself, but they could not afford housing. An innkeeper had been particularly generous and given them a room since business was slow. Indeed, it always was, as the planet was a very sparsely populated colony, and they were in a farming village. The innkeeper lived off the land and ran the inn as a side venture. The door swung open, and Koll limped in dejectedly. He looked much older than his usually merry self. Arcaror asked, “What’s wrong?”

“I lost my job.”

Koll explained that he would have to move to the only city nearby to find work.

It was a long journey and there were many perils along the way. But they all paled in comparison to what awaited them outside the city gates. The Ragnoils, a subspecies of Honim, feed only on Honim flesh, and their eyes burn red with the evil of their mind. A Ragnoil who lived in the city often waited outside the city gates, trying to prey on travelers. This had earned him a few meals and many a bruise, so he learned the ways of the sword and hired two “bodyguards” to assist him. When Arcaror and Koll arrived at the capital city, they found three strangers blocking their path. One carried a broadsword, but the two beefy men on either side of him were too proud for weapons. The red-eyed man with the sharp teeth grinned and yelled for the men to attack.

Koll knew these men were no joke. Their muscles could kill. He picked up a cobblestone, and with the precision of one who had once thrown stones to live, hit the bigger of the two men in the head. His companion did not stop to check if his partner was alive. He felt no remorse for the death of the man he had murdered. But it unnerved him nevertheless. He tackled Koll, bringing him to the ground. They fought viciously.  Koll’s vision blurred from the pain. Koll felt his body numbing as the big man bludgeoned him. But then it stopped and Koll could feel the pain again. After it subsided, Koll stood up and saw the man’s limp body, covered in punctures and blood. Arcaror stood, staring at a bloody spearhead. He couldn’t believe what he’d done. There was no time for guilt however, as the Ragnoil was charging at them, and his blade looked sharp.

Koll felt fear, fear worse than when his father left him in the woods as a small child. His lower body was on fire, and the world was spinning. Koll’s eyes widened in shock as he fell to the ground for the last time. Screams filled the air. Arcaror could not believe it. The man had killed his only friend in the world. He shuddered with rage. The Ragnoil was about to strike Arcaror down too, but then he noticed his red eyes. The Ragnoil remembered his half-human son. This boy looked exactly like the baby he abandoned. He felt a strange sense of guilt. Even Ragnoils weren’t monsters all the time.

That thought was interrupted by Arcaror slamming his fist into his head. The Ragnoil staggered backwards, confused. Arcaror wanted vengance. The Ragnoil would pay. He hefted a large rock over his head, and cracked his enemy’s skull. But there was no glory in killing, even a terrible cannibal. The Ragnoil explained as he died that he was Arcaror’s father and had abandoned him because he knew he could not care for a half-human. Arcaror refused to believe that this cruel creature was his father. But it made a little bit of sense. Why else would his eyes be dark red like blood? Why did he crave raw meat? Why did the religious people who saw him avoid him?  He knew why now. He was half demon. Koll had seen what Arcaror was capable of. Now he needed to talk to him one last time.

“Arcaror,” Koll mumbled with his last breaths, “Don’t kill again, unless you have to…”

Koll’s voice cracked and trailed off. Koll was gone. Arcaror buried his face in his hands, and his face was wet with tears. But Arcaror eventually left that place, and moved on. Arcaror entered the city. Everywhere there were new smells, and the city was packed with refugees from the countryside, for many crops had failed, and there were now industrial factories that attracted unskilled laborers. Smoke bellowed out of many chimneys and lamb roasted over hearths. But Arcaror noticed another thing about the city. Everyone seemed to be gathered around a large field in the middle of the city. Arcaror heard chanting and screaming. He was very curious, so he asked a vendor what was going on. The old man thought for a moment, staring into space, before replying, “Err, something about a project to fix up a crash-landed spaceship and send an astronaut into the universe. At least, that’s what the ads said. Admission is three kings. As for me, couldn’t care less. I have a stall to run.”

Arcaror was surprised. He thought that the planet was very primitive. He read a lot for someone his age, and the books he had read were all religious, meaning that they believed that the galaxy was populated by demons and pirates. Arcaror knew in his heart that he was a demon, and embraced it. He would stow away on the ship.

Arcaror ran through the crowd to where there were guards warning the people to stay back. A huge hulking behemoth of metal and fuel tanks was attached to a makeshift scaffold, and the astronaut was waving to the crowd outside the rocket. He entered the scaffolding. Arcaror didn’t have much time left. Arcaror ducked under a guard without being noticed, and ran towards the rocket. He was spotted and the guards raced after him, but he had made it to the scaffolding. Scrambling up a rusty ladder, Arcaror heard a low rumbling and the frame began to vibrate. The guards ran back as fire scorched the grass and the scaffolding started to melt. Arcaror leapt for the door and desperately tried to wrench it open. Just as it was becoming unbearably hot, the door budged. Arcaror let out a sigh of relief. He was off the planet for good.

Arcaror saw the lone astronaut hunched over his instruments. After two days of waiting, he’d grown impatient and decided to finally see space. It was dizzying, with millions of stars. And right ahead of them was a planet that glittered like a broken diamond. The planet was covered in cities and small lakes. As the rocket sailed into the atmosphere, the rocket began to burn up. “What’s happening?” shouted the astronaut.

The air defense system of the planet was firing at the ship. The ship was burning. A missile smashed into the rocket, and the engines failed. Now they were in freefall. Arcaror relished what he thought would be the last moments of his life.

The Tale of the Alien and the Human

Once upon a time, there was an alien with two arms and three fingers. He was green, and had two giant eyes close to the bottom of his head and a little smile. He was two feet tall.

The alien came from Mars but he was on Earth. His language is called Oink and those of his species just say “Oink, oink, oink.” He was 2,000,003 years old – these aliens can live up to 5 million years. They sprout out of the moon when they’re born, and then they fly to Mars. This alien came to Earth in a balloon and then decided to explore. He hadn’t know that he was going to be exploring another place, nor did he know exactly what a balloon was… He thought it would take him to another place on Mars, but it actually took him to Earth. When he got to Earth, he saw that it was too green.

“Oink, oink, oink (This is too green!)!” he exclaimed, wanting to go home.

He saw a green ball and then fell on his butt. He landed in Alaska. He was seeing just green – too much green – when he saw a green ball: Earth. He saw a human!

He has five fingers! the alien thought. Why are their eyes all the way up there?? Why aren’t they green!

“Well, hello there,” said the human.

“Hello,” said the alien with a small wave.

“What are you?”

“I’m an alien. What are you?”

“I’m a human,” said the human, like it sounded obvious.

“What do you like to do?” asked the alien. He was feeling unsure if the human was nice. He noticed that the human had clothes on.

“I like eating ice cream,” said the human.

The alien excitedly replied, “Me too.”

They became friends and had a long chat about their favorite ice cream flavors.

After the human left, the alien started trying to make a plan. (The alien did not have a name, so he never thought to ask humans for their names.) He saw snow, trees, bushes, but no people. He thought he could build a sled and a slope. On his sled, he would go up the slope and off to Mars. But, the alien was pretty stupid – he didn’t realize that that wouldn’t be high enough.

Nevertheless, he built his sled with some tree bark and put some bushes on it to sleep on, because he knew it would be a long way. Then, he shaped the snow into a big slope. It took a week.

“This is going to work!” he said.

He ran and jumped onto his sled, and went up the slope. Then he slid back down, tumbled off his sled and fell on his head. He crossed his arms and frowned and said, “humph.”

If he couldn’t make it back to Mars, he would never see his family and friends again. So, he went into the forest. His new plan was to climb the tree and make a spring board. He thought he could make it out of two flat pieces of wood and a few twigs for the springs.

When he finished making the springboard, he tried it. The twigs immediately broke, so he tried to find stronger ones. Once he was done with that he tried it again, but he was thinking so much about how to prevent the twigs from breaking that his contraption didn’t even spring. He only got one inch off the ground.

So, he brought the springboard to the top of the tallest tree and then set it up in the middle. It fell through slightly, but he didn’t notice. He jumped on the springboard and it sank even lower… and fell out the tree. Because the alien picked the tallest tree, he had a longer drop.

He landed on his back. His whole butt turned purple. He was tired, so he went to sleep. Then, when he woke up, he saw the same human! He immediately went to greet the him. “Hello there, again. Good morning. Why are you here?” asked the alien.

“I went camping and I’m going back home. What have you been doing?”

“I have been trying to get back to Mars.”

“I wonder when the next rocket ship is going up to Mars. Oh, wait – I read in the newspaper that there’s a rocket ship going to Mars in a month!”

“Oh, wonderful, wonderful, wonderful news!”

The human called the police. “This alien needs to get back to his home planet, Mars. I heard that there’s a rocket ship going there sometime soon and was wondering if this alien could use it to get home,” said the human.

The police came. The officer said, “Okay, I will let the rocket ship people know that there will be an alien aboard the rocket.”

***

The alien was at the airport – he was going to Disney World to have fun and explore before the month was up and he had to leave. He had heard about Disney World from the human and thought it sounded like fun. The alien boarded the plane and got a lot of snacks. On the plane, the flight attendants sold jalapenos, and because he didn’t know what they were, he decided to try some. Then he freaked out because they were so hot. He stuck out his tongue and tried to breathe fire. The woman next to him said, “dairy helps.”

So, he bought some milk and drank it, which helped. Soon, the plane ride was over and the alien got off the plane. He bought dinner at the airport, checked in to his hotel, put down all his bags, and went to Disney World.   

He saw a lot of rides and parking lots, cotton candy, and ticket booths. First, he went to the ticket booth. When he reached the front of the line, he got 85 tickets and went to see what rides there were. He got in line to see the Disney Princesses, but he didn’t know what they were so he didn’t know what to say to them. Once it was his turn, he had figured out what the activity was about: there were a bunch of ladies dressed in fancy dresses named Cinderella, Snow White, and Belle. He thought it was pretty boring, so he left.

Then, he saw a big castle. A bunch of the towers were blue, but the rest of the structure was white. There was one gigantic tower in the middle, and the castle was humongous.

“Ooo, aaahhh,” he said.

It felt kind of weird because he was only two feet tall and the castle looked like it was five billion feet tall. He had never seen a building so tall, since there were not any on Mars. He went into the castle, and again he said, “Ooo, aaahhh.” He walked through it and went on a couple of other rides, and then he went back to his hotel to get some sleep.

***

After he had woken, he went to a diner to eat brunch. He ordered a bagel and cream cheese with sprinkles and ketchup on top. Then, he saw the mustard and decided to put that on too.

“I wonder if my fellow aliens have noticed that I’m gone,” he said. He missed them, but he didn’t notice because he was having so much fun.

When he was done, he left the restaurant. He went upstairs to his room to watch TV, but found it very boring because he couldn’t figure out how to turn it on. He then went to the garden and sniffed the air. It smelled like flowers for some odd reason, and he didn’t know why. It looked very different from mars.

“Earth doesn’t make sense. Why does it smell like flowers randomly? Mars makes sense. But Earth doesn’t.”

Mars had other aliens and Earth didn’t. It made him feel lonely.  

He still had extra tickets, so he went on tons of rides. He came back to his hotel room, took a nap, and when he woke up it was lunch time. He went to a restaurant for lunch.

After that, he went back to his hotel room and finished unpacking. By the time he was done it was dinnertime, so he went to McDonald’s and got a burger.

Once the month had passed, he went back to the airport and boarded the plane. He made sure he didn’t order the jalapenos again. Once he got to Alaska, he met the human at the airport who brought him to where the rocket would take off.

“Goodbye!” said the human.

“Goodbye! I had a nice time on earth,” said the alien.

“It was nice meeting you.”

“I might go back to Earth someday.”

“Okay. If you do, come visit me.”

“Okay, goodbye!” The alien was a little sad. He looked at the rocket. He was nervous to go on the rocket ship because he had never been on one before … and also because it was making really loud noises, and it was gigantic. His arms were flopping all over the place and his feet were doing a tap dance. He saw a pink tutu outside the rocket ship, so he ran outside and put it on. He started doing ballet, not knowing he was doing something that actually existed. He called ballet ‘Oink’ and danced for one hour. He was having a lot of fun and found that ballet helped his nervousness go away, so he danced all the way back to the rocket ship. He was tired and fell asleep during liftoff.

When the alien woke up, he was almost back to Mars. He also realized that he was floating. He ate nuts for breakfast and played around with flying until lunchtime. It felt really weird to be flying since he hadn’t done it before. He ate lunch, which also consisted of nuts, as well as some dried strawberries. And, for dessert, he ate an ice cream sandwich. In only a few minutes, he would be back on Mars – he was so excited.

After five minutes, the he arrived at Mars! He got off the spaceship. His friends and family were already waiting for him.

“Strange. I’ve never seen an animal like that,” said his friend about a human that was also in the rocket ship.

“Bye bye, humans! These are humans – the people you saw on the rocket ship,” he explained to his family.

The Two Sisters

The woman in pitch black coat and velvet cloak suddenly turned. She was looking at the petrified, shivering, ready-to-faint Sara. Sara knew why she had been called, but Diana did not get to the point right away. She knew her sister too well. Sara would say that she didn’t do anything and make up an excuse. Diana was tired of it and would not let that happen. This time, Diana would show Sara what it felt like to be alone, to be abandoned.

There was only one person Diana could trust, confide in, and who would understand. Mom had died three years ago and, ever since, Diana had to live alone. Sara told everyone that Diana’s favorite color was black and that she loved rainy days but, in truth, her favorite color was bright pink and she loved the sun, especially when it was at its brightest. Sara was a fibber.

Diana did not take too much time with this.

“So,” Diana snapped, “how do you feel about yourself?”

Sara was extremely surprised. She’d never been spoken to like this in her life.

“S-sorry,” she stuttered.

“It sounds like you’ve never used the word sorry before,” Diana said. “Well, I should let you go, but next time if I ever find you doing this again, I won’t let you off so lightly.”

“W-well then, I-I sh-shall be o-on my way,” Sara said, heading towards the door.

“And I shall be on mine,” Diana said entering her room.

In actuality, Sara had nothing better to do. She ended the conversation just to get away from her ‘evil’ sister. She had hoped it would be another one of those times when Di had taken it lightly and asked her to tea afterwards. Sara would have been happy to accept.

Well, she thought angrily, if Di isn’t going to be nice to me I’ll just be worse to her.

But how? That was the hardest question. It would take quite a while for Sara to think of how she would take revenge on her sister. She had not learned anything in school or in college, all she had thought about was her complexion and how she looked. Once, she had forgotten to turn in her exam paper and absentmindedly put her cosmetics case on the teacher’s desk instead. She had gotten very embarrassed and made it up to the class – or thought she did – by wearing a new dress and looking extra pretty the next day.

***

Now, coming back to Diana. She was answering a few invitations to tea parties and dinner parties, saying very politely that she had something else planned. But when she glanced at the last letter, she saw something totally different and ran out of her house to post the letter.

I am not going to tell you who that letter was by, but this is what she had answered to the last letter: I would love to have tea with you, truly yours, Diana Ross.

***

The basic reason why Diana had answered the letter with a yes was that she was the only one invited. Also, the girl who had invited her was her best friend at school. As she arrived at her friend’s house, she could smell the fresh daisies, feel the dew on all the plants, hear the sound of animals, and see the beautiful view of the mountains behind.

At first, she was too shy to ring the doorbell but she gathered up her courage and said to herself: “It’s only me, after all, so there’s no reason to be shy”. She raised her shaking hand and rang the doorbell, so lightly that the whole button didn’t get pressed. It rang anyway, although no one noticed it at first. Eventually, her friend realized someone was at the door.

“Why Di,” said Bell, “when I last saw you, were happy and bold. But now, you look so meek and cold.”

Diana laughed. Bell had put her at ease.

“I love your poetic passion,” she said.

“I love it too,” replied Bell. “You seem a little bit more like yourself now. Well then, why don’t you come inside and make yourself comfortable? We were just preparing tea. We weren’t really expecting you to come sooo early,” Bell said, reluctantly.

Now, Di was feeling slightly uncomfortable. Bell never spoke reluctantly. She always planned what she was going to say before actually saying it. And, knowing her friend, Di knew right away that Bell was hiding something. Diana spoke from her heart so she spent no time beating around the bush.

“Come on, you’re hiding something,” Di said. “These kind of tricks don’t work with me.”

“M-me? You think that I-I’ve been hiding s-something from you?” Bell said.

Diana thought that Sara’s soul had gotten into Bell.

“Admit it, Bell,” she said.

“All right, all right. I’ll admit it,” Bell said guiltily. “But I just can’t tell you what it is.”

But Diana did come to now after all.

The ground began shaking and Bell took Di’s hand and led the way up to the library. She went to the history section and pulled a book which turned out to be a doorknob. The door swung open leading to a secret passage. Diana gasped.

“It’s amazing, isn’t it?” said Bell with a grin. “Now, I’m going to tell you the whole story.”

They sat at the table and Bell began.

“So you know how my mom and dad died when I was a baby? My mom when I was born and my dad a few days later? That he left me with my aunt who treated me like a child who had murdered her sister? Once, I went exploring and the exact same thing that just happened to you happened to me. The ground began shaking and I ventured deeper and deeper into a secret passage. As scary as it was, I was not afraid. The deeper I went, the more it began to go underground. Then, something gave me a start. It was a ghost. And not just any old ghost, it was my mother. She was the only ghost who could go through things and hold things. She told me something that I don’t want to reveal to you but have to. She said that she liked being a ghost and that she had been happy to die. There was something else she said, something amazing. She herself had hoped that I, Bell, would find this passage. Then, she disappeared, leaving me in awe. Suddenly, she came back and said: “I just forgot to tell you not to tell your aunt about this. She was a horrible sister to me.”

“Like Sara is,” said Diana.

“I’ve been wanting to tell someone about this,” continued Bell, “but I never knew who until you came. I knew I could trust you. I hope you can trust me.”

“Of course I can,” said Diana.

“Well, then, that’s my story,” finished Bell.

“If I ever have something as a secret, you’re the first person I’ll tell. Why don’t you come to my mansion often? It’s quite deserted, you know, and we’re quite similar; we have big houses and no parents. We can hang out together a lot.”

“Why don’t we go to tea?”

“That’s a great idea, I’m starving.”

“We prepared green tea, scones with jam and cream, and cookies,” Bell said. “I hope you like it!”

“I don’t like it, I love it. I just wanna run down and eat everything on the table.”

“What are we waiting for?”

The girls happily went downstairs hand-in-hand to a round table. The scones, cookies, and tea were so tempting. Not a crumb was left on their plates. After that, Diana had to work so she left to go home. They promised to go to each other’s houses at least twice a week.

***

At home, Diana signed some checks. The whole day, she had a smile on her face. She wasn’t afraid of going out anymore. It had all come back to her. She could remember her childhood days when she was playing in her neighborhood playground. She and Bell would swing on the swings, slide on the slides, talk so much, and have so much fun. That was not going to stop. Even though she was an adult now, she was not going to stop. She was going to go out more often, have more fun, and hang out with Bell more. And her mansion was not deserted anymore. It was full of her and Bell’s laughter.

A lot more of her school friends came to visit. She hosted a dinner party – not a big one, just with five-seven guests – but had an amazing time.

***

Sara was planning to take revenge on her sister. She had no idea that Diana was having so much fun. She was just sitting in her room, bored. She was evil and always would be. Cheaters never win, but she hated to lose. This was one of her weaknesses (she had too many weaknesses for me to list). She was more talkative than Diana but she talked so much that nobody wanted to get close to her. Talking was her life and if anybody butted in on her speech she would look at them with an evil eye. She never expected to be interrupted and considered herself grand. Also, she expected to be waited on in her house. For instance, if I were to have tea with her, she would expect me to serve her.

Sara was not the richest sister. Her house was big, but not as big as Diana’s. She had nice clothes, but not as nice as Diana’s. Her mother and father’s will gave most of their money to Diana, not Sara. They had no living relations. Her mom and dad were only children and orphans.

Sara had gotten long fingers from her father. Diana had gotten her mother’s light hair and blue eyes, along with her father’s wide smile.

Diana was naturally beautiful but never bragged about it. Sara was not so beautiful but bragged about it anyway. Sara thought she was the best even though Diana was smarter and nicer. Diana was born to be nice. Sara was the opposite. You would never know that they were even sisters if they stood side by side.

Their mother and father had both died of an unnamed illness. It was highly contagious. Their mom had died first but the dad had gotten it from her and died a few days later. This was a tragedy to Diana and Sara. It affected their relationship a lot. Diana had loved her mother and Sara had loved her father but, after both of them had gone, the sister had nothing to do more than quarrel. Of course, they didn’t argue in public but they didn’t get over their arguments for months. It was a weird combination. One, smart and quiet and the other, loud and foolish. They grew further apart after their parents’ death.

***

Bell was satisfied with her friendship with Diana. The two of them were super close but there was one thing that Diana did not know about Bell: Bell had an older sister who had run away from their aunt one night and never returned. Bell had gotten a message that she was alive. Bell loved her older sister, Elizabeth (Beth). Bell was worried about her sister as she had not received recent news of her. That day, when there was a knock at the front door, Bell knew exactly who it was. Beth was the only person who knocked instead of ringing the bell.

When Bell opened the door, she flung her arms around Beth.

“So, how is everything?” said Beth.

“Wonderful, but quite lonely. It’s more wonderful when you’re here and, this time, don’t run away. Please?”

“I’m never going to,” Beth said. “I realized that it’s better to be home than anywhere else and, most of all, that I missed you. I remember the fun times we had – playing hide and seek, tag, and throwing balls. I hope we can do it again.”

“We are going to have the most amazing time ever.”

“Is it time for dinner yet? My stomach is growling.”

“It’s before dinner but that doesn’t mean that we can’t have a snack. Why don’t you get comfortable? Where were you all this time? You have to tell me everything.”

“I will. I’ll tell you every single thing.”

“Every single thing,” echoed Bell.

***

Sara and Diana were arguing. Sara had left the mansion, her cheeks red with anger. She got mad easily and was sensitive. Diana, on the other hand, had triumphed. She had won the argument. Her day had been good. If she had to rank it out of 100%, it would have been a 99.5%.

She danced her way to the kitchen. She had loved dancing when she was a kid, just like her mom. The two of them had danced and danced and danced until they fell flat on the floor laughing. This memory put a sad smile on her face but then she remembered that she could still be a child if she wanted to. She could see herself running round and round the mansion again and again, going crazy and not thinking about rules of etiquette. She was being a kid, a real kid, and it was so much fun. Those fun, happy, and memorable times were gone. Those times when her mother was alive and would hold her hand and put her to bed, were gone.

Sara, on the other hand, hated being a kid. She thought that it was better to be grown up and respected. She wanted everyone to look up to her, even though that isn’t the right way to think.

Diana was invited to a big dinner party on Friday. She was so excited. She picked out a beautiful gown, did her hair, and was ready to go. The bell rang and Diana rushed to the door, knowing that it was Bell because they were going to the party together. They shivered in excitement. When they reached the house, they rang the doorbell and were escorted inside. Their friend greeted them with big hugs. They returned them warmly.

The party went smoothly. There was food, drinks, and dancing. After the party, Diana was so tired that she almost fell asleep in the car. The moment her head touched her pillow, she was fast asleep.

Sara had also gone out that night, but she didn’t go anywhere interesting. She just watered her plants. She used to love gardening but she had long since forgotten. Now, it seemed like a chore even though her flowers were pretty.

Her back ached as she bent down. She was suddenly hit with all of her good memories. She could remember her childhood with Diana, her friends, and Diana’s friend – what was her name? – Bell. The three of them would have fun picking flowers from the gardens, dressing up, and posing for silly pictures. Tears welled in her eyes as she thought of those things. Then, suddenly, a memory from the day before her mother’s death popped into her head. Bell’s sister had come to her and swore to be her best friend forever. She’d introduced herself as Beth and had put her arm around Sara when her mother had fallen asleep for the last time. She had discussed her plans to run away with Sara but had actually left sooner than Sara had expected.

Before she realized what she was doing, she ran to Bell’s house and rang the bell.

Beth opened the door. Sara threw her arms around her friend. Bell was not surprised. She knew that Sara and Beth had been close – she had been close to Sara herself – and Diana was the only one who didn’t know Beth. Bell would tell Diana when the time was right, but the time was not now.

Suddenly, there was a knock on the door. Dreading who it was, Bell opened the door. It was Diana.

“I-I’m sorry, Di,” said Bell. “I know I should have um … told you about this earlier. I hope you’re not mad.”

Diana’s frown turned into a smile. She burst into laughter.

“You expected me to be mad at you? You should have told me.”

“Oh, Beth didn’t want me to,” said Bell.

Sara, who was in the background, got a scared look on her face when Diana’s gaze fell on her.

“I know we haven’t been the best of friends but, this time, I’ll be better if you will,” Diana said.

“Of course I will,” Sara replied.

After ten minutes, Beth had been fully introduced to Diana.

***

Now, we shall come to an end. A happy ending, of course. The girls later called themselves the Fantastic Four, went on crazy adventures, and lived happily ever after.

Aliens!

Hi, my name is Frank and I will be narrating.

Blue beams shoot out from their heads. Big, fat, green aliens attack people with their minds. They want to take over Earth because they do not like their planet. They don’t like their planet because it is dirty. It is dirty because they eat too much and they trash stuff too much. They corrupt people’s minds. They make people do what they want them to do. They make them steal food for them, as they eat everything. Then, the aliens eat the people. They spit their bones out like chicken bones. Then, they make humans steal money for them. Then, they eat them. The aliens are really mean. They like to eat Hawaiian people the most because Hawaiian people taste like coconuts.

The aliens live on the sun. They are obese. They are constantly trying to eat each other. They hate sports (that’s why they are so fat). Their ships are their bodies. The smaller aliens ride inside the mouths of the larger aliens. They also like to eat American people because American people taste like bacon and eggs. They hate mint sauce on their lamb chops. They like to eat sausage dogs because they taste like sausage.

They think that toy money is real money. They hate exercising. They have a holiday called We Hate Fitness when they find all the fitness equipment in one nation and throw it in the ocean. They usually start with Hawaii, and finish with England. Soon, Hawaiian people will become extinct because of the aliens. Then, after that, the aliens will eat all the American people. They’ll start in New York and end in L.A. Then, they’ll go on to eat the Canadian people because they taste like bacon.

Soon, Canada will become extinct. Then, they’ll eat Japan. They like sushi a lot. Then, they’ll eat Italy because they like cheese, pizza, and spaghetti a lot. Italians will also become extinct. Then, they’ll eat the Australians who will also quickly become extinct. Then, they’ll eat Africa for the fried fish. Then, they’ll eat Europe. No one is going to stop them.

Soon, the Aliens will become extinct because there will be no humans left to eat. Soon, they’ll have to eat each other. They’ll look at their dogs and lick their lips. They’ll destroy supermarkets for more food and, when there is no food left, they’ll eat babies, sons, daughters, grandparents, and so on.

Then, when the there is one alien left, he’ll just eat himself. Soon, zombies will come to Earth. Soon, a zombie will become president. His name is Zonald Zrump. There’s also another zombie named Zernie Zanders. Zarack Zbama is the president right now. There is another person running against Zernie and Zonald. His name is Zeb Zush. There’s also Zilliary Zlinton.

They like to trash talk to each other.

The sport that zombies play is called walking. The fastest player walks one millimeter per hour.  A game goes on for five years. The slowest player goes 0.000001 millimeters per hour. Although humans hate it, zombies love it. The best person at walking is Zsain Zolt. YouTube is called ZouTube. It isn’t very popular,  though. The only thing that ZouTubers say is, “Bububububuubuuuubububuub” and their videos only last one second. Everybody hates ZouTube.

ESPN is called ZSPN. Cartoon network is called Zartoon Zetwork. Zartoon Zetwork is the same as ZouTube. Sponge Bob is called Zponge Zob. Patrick is Zatrick. Squidward is Zquidward. Nobody likes the show. It only has one like because all the other zombies are slow at clicking the like button. It takes five years to click the like button.

Zombies eat themselves. The eat their own arms, grow new ones, then eat the new ones. And they keep growing again. And eating again.

Later, Zonald Zrump becomes president. He will start World War Z. Sadly, nobody voted for Zonald Zrump yet. They didn’t vote for anyone because they were so slow at everything. It will take them twenty more years to write down who they want to vote for. They don’t like to write because they’re so slow at it. They hate writing a lot. Every time a zombie writes, it takes them two years to write one letter. After they write one letter, they have to keep going on and on and on to make one sentence. It takes approximately twenty-five years. After twenty-five years, it takes them thirty years to mail it to someone if they have to. If they place the letter somewhere, it would take forty years. And, if they place it in a box, it would take sixty years.

After all those years, Zonald Zrump became president. When he starts World War Z, all the zombies try to eat each other. He makes people hate each other. He makes them eat each other. He creates chaos. After 200 years, they finally ended the fighting. Then, they decided to take up soccer. Each game takes 100 years to complete. It takes three hours to make one goal. The fastest goal ever was in 50 minutes. The man who made it is named Zeo Zallcott. The second fastest goal was in 60 minutes. It was made by Zector Zellerin. The third one was made in 70 minutes. It was made by Zamie Zardy. The next goal was made in 80 minutes. It was made by Zebastian Ziovinco. The next one would be made by Zaul Zogba. It would be made at the two hour mark.

One game a person named Zaheem Zterling made a goal in 30 minutes. Even though he ran a little slower than Zeo Zallcott, he ran really fast and made a goal. The latest goal ever made in a zombie soccer game would be in the 99th year on December 31st. It was made by Zer Zertesacker. But then a person made it even later than him. It would be the 99th year on December 31st also, but it was made on the 59th second of the game. It was made by Zabi Zlonso. It was a great goal, but he scored when it was 50-0, so he made the score 50-1, and it was for the cup. It was in the Zampions League.

So, his team lost. The other team’s name was Zrsenal, they got all of the really fast players. So that’s how they got it 50-1. Their goalkeeper was Zanuel Zeuer. He was the best goalkeeper in the world. No one on the other team scored except for Zabi Zlonso. The other team’s name was the Ztrikers.

Soon they tried to take up football, but they decided that it was too dangerous because it ended up with a bunch of people being decapitated and having their arms and legs cut off. So, they tried basketball but failed because when they jumped and they fell back down their legs broke and they would always have to find extra players. After they found extra players, extra players would get injured too. So they gave up on that too. Finally they took up baseball, but when the players got hit by the ball they shattered. And when they hit the ball, their arms fell off and they ran without arms. It’s a good thing that only pitchers had their arms always. Everybody else’s arms got destroyed.

Soon, only pitchers were in the game. There were no first basemen, catchers, second base, third base, shortstop, or outfield at all. Only pitchers cause everybody else’s arms got destroyed. They gave up the game. All the pitchers loved the game though because their arms didn’t get destroyed, but then soon their arms also fell off too because when they threw the ball it flew along with them too. But they had extra arms because of everyone else’s fallen off arms, but soon they also gave up the game. It’s sad that they gave up the game, but nobody liked it. They only game they could play was soccer, but then they decided to play another game, something called hockey. But then sadly they also gave up that game because when they were skating they accidentally chopped off each other’s legs, so they couldn’t move. They gave up.

After one attempt they said, “Bububububbubububuubu.” (Translation: goodbye hockey, we hate you too much).

So, they only played soccer, they couldn’t play anything else. The zombies all died out. So nothing stayed there for at least twenty-five years until the chocolate came. To be honest, the chocolate didn’t do anything, they just stayed there until something called the Blob came. The blob could only go, “blubbyblubblubblub” or they can just say, “blub.” So, their three leaders talked together, (they were the only ones who could speak one other language called English).

The oldest one said, “this planet is good, it has tons of chocolate to eat!”

“Eating chocolate is yummy,” said the youngest one.

The middle-aged one said, “Let’s live down there. We can just eat all the chocolate before we eat each other.”

So the oldest one said, “I’ll start with you.”  He ate the middle, then the youngest. Then, he yelled at his people, “go down and eat the chocolate! Then eat each other! I don’t care who eats who. Whoever comes in from the top I will eat.”

Soon, a Blob came up. His name was tubby. Later, the oldest one tried to eat him and he succeeded but, after 200 years, the oldest one died. Then, the food people came but then they died because the planet was so hot. The sun was very close to the planet. The food people got boiled. For  9,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 years, nobody came. Nothing happened during that time. After that time, a robot civilization came and used the food people to survive and eat and fuel their bodies. After a while, the robots’ batteries ran out and they all dropped dead.

Now, I will tell you who the last human was. His name was Frank Richardson (me). Frank was in the army when the aliens invaded. He deserted the army so he couldn’t get eaten by the aliens. The army was too busy getting eaten to chase Frank. So, Frank hid in a basement with 200,000,000,000,000 pounds of food and water. He survived for 30 years.Then, he got eaten by aliens. He had no family (sadly, they’d gotten eaten by the aliens). He didn’t care about anyone!

During the time that he was alive, he texted the second last human on earth who was a Mongolian man. He didn’t know any english which wasn’t good for Frank. Frank decided to make an airplane to meet the Mongolian man. Then, he found a translator app on his phone. He used it to translate the mongolian letters. They read: Help, I am going to get killed!

Frank decided to make his plane faster. He finished the plane, packed his stuff, and set out on the journey. Then, he got a text saying: I am getting digested inside the alien body get away from this place! Frank tried to turn around but 90 aliens surround him and dive-bombed his plane with their teeth. He got eaten. Sadly, he never got to talk with the man in person. He made and designed planes. He also flew in airplanes.

***

THE END

***

R.I.P FRANK Richardson. 2056-2099

***

Frank’s dead.

***

I am not that sad that he died. I am actually happy.

***

Sorry, Frank Richardsons of the world.

Cherry-Red Sweater

It’s always the question you don’t know the answer to that the teacher calls on you to answer. You were absent the day they studied that topic. You ask her to repeat the question; you know exactly what she asked. You’re just stalling for time. Beside you, Kimber is bobbing up and down with her hand in the air like her chair has some sort of spring on it. You stare glumly at the cherry-red of Bree’s sweater in front of you, twisting a brown strand of hair around your forefinger. The teacher repeats the question, adding that this is going to be on the test next week.

You sit up straight, remembering your guidance counselor saying that if you failed your next test you would have to go to summer school. Summer school would mean missing the painting camp you and Victoria were going to be CITs at. You had been planning for years – staying in the CIT bunks! Getting to bring candy! Being in charge! You couldn’t miss CIT year. No way you were missing that.

But you don’t know the answer – while they were studying this, you were at home with strep, re-reading The Hunger Games for the thirteenth time. Is that your fault? The teacher repeats the question for the third time. You bite your lip. “Um, I don’t know… ” You cross your fingers and jiggle your knee, hoping that she’ll explain it. She doesn’t, but rather tsk-tsks at you and asks Kimber to explain. Teacher’s pet, you think, slumping down in your seat, your cheeks the color of the cherry-red sweater. Bree smirks at you. You stare, embarrassed, at her sweater. Cherry-red. The teacher tells you to pay attention because you don’t know this. The class snickers, and you bite your lip again, trying not to cry. Eighth-graders don’t cry. After all, you’re thirteen and a teenager now. But you’re still a ‘kid,’ everyone says. The teenager is Bree, with her cherry-red sweater, her brown curls, cherry-red lip gloss, patent-leather purse, skinny jeans, cherry-red flats, blush, eyeshadow, mascara, and a ninth-grader boyfriend. You’re still wearing that too-small sweater vest and no makeup, tall yet childish. You wish you had that cherry-red sweater. You would look so much more grown-up in it.

That afternoon, your counselor suggests you start tutoring with a tenth-grader. Your new tutor is named Brunhilde O’Byrne. You notice that both Brunhilde and the counselor are wearing cherry-red sweaters. You end up passing your test, and your parents take you out for dinner. You don’t eat your dessert: cherry pie, red guts spilling all over the plate.

The Other Side of Me

Chapter 1  

“Pay attention, Kate,” calls my teacher. I immediately look up to see what she’s saying. I wish I could tell her what keeps me from paying attention everyday, but if I said anything, the Terces Society would be in trouble big trouble.

“Ring-ring,” the bell sounded.

Finally, it’s time to leave and I can get ready for my biggest mission yet. I am gathering up school supplies to bring home when my teacher tells me to come to her desk. I am prepared: all I need to say is “Sorry, I would love to chat but I have to get on the bus or it will leave without me.” Then I run out the door.

After I do this, I hear her calling out to me. “You don’t have a bus pass,” she says. I keep on running. I don’t worry about being caught. The only thing I’m worrying about is what is yet to come.

I know the route by heart but I am so nervous, I feel like I’m lost. I turn the corner and see the building. It’s tall and gloomy and grey. There are many huge signs on the front that say things like “under construction,” “back off,” “beware,” “hard hat zone,” “danger,” etc. The signs are meant to keep strangers away from our top secret files. When strangers walk by they think it’s an old scary building under construction. I am so used to the building now that I am never scared of it, but now may be an exception. As I walk up the stairs I can feel my hands shaking.

When I walk in the doors, I hear the front desk lady say, “Hi, Kate, stop by your dorm room to pick up your stuff, and then go to the archives to pick up your file.”

“Okay,” I respond. The front desk lady’s real name is Lily, but I don’t like to call her that because it doesn’t suit her. She’s pretty nice but very strict, and is very good at keeping spies in and strangers out.

I go upstairs to the fifteenth floor, room number 15B. I take out my key and it slowly turns in the keyhole, making a soft clicking sound. My dorm is a soft mint color. I have a small living room and kitchenette. All the other kids share a dorm, but I got my own because I am the best spy in the whole Terces Society… but I think it’s more because they felt sorry for me after what happened five years ago.

I am getting together all of the things I will need: spy uniform, disguise, flashlight, rope, duct tape, gun, pocket knife, etc. I am almost ready and am walking out the door when I realize I am forgetting something, the only thing I have left of my parents. I rush back into my dorm. I run into my bedroom and open the bottom drawer of my dresser. Under my t-shirts I find a photograph of my parents with me as a baby. Looking at the photograph makes my eyes water, so I bury it under all of the stuff in my spy bag.

I am eight again, and I am in my bedroom. The door is locked and I can’t get out of my room. I start to get really, really scared. I look around and start to scream and cry. All of a sudden everything becomes dark. I hear a terrible scream come from downstairs. I suddenly have an idea. I run my hands along the wall and find the window. I open the latch on the window and climb onto the edge, and I jump into the night, landing on two feet. I walk to the front door and find the key under the welcome mat. I unlock the door, wondering what will be behind it. I run in and walk to the living room. My parents are lying there completely unmoving and covered in blood. I am too late, I can’t save them.

I take a quick glance at my watch. 4:27. “Oh no, I will be late to start my mission!” I sprint down the twelve flights of stairs. When I get down to the third floor I turn the corner and walk into the archive. I am searching for the file on my mission when I see Mr. Brown, the president of the Terces Society. I don’t see him often because he is always cooped up in his office.

“Hi Kate. Here is your file,” Mr. Brown says to me, passing me the green folder.

I take the folder and my bag and walk downstairs through the doorway. My heart is pounding so hard, I feel like I can’t even walk. I am terrified, but I don’t even know what my mission is yet. I slowly open the folder. I can feel my hands shaking. One third open. Two thirds open. Finally, the folder is open.

I see a picture of the criminal who I need to catch. He has pale skin, almost transparent, and I can see his veins popping from his skin. There is a huge bloody gash across his face. His eyes are bulging and bloodshot. He is creepy but something about him is familiar. Then I remember who he is he is Murderous Marvin, the worst villain in the whole universe. All of a sudden, I start to cry because I remember how my dad used to tell me scary stories about him when I was little. I can just hear my father’s voice. Now I have to learn more about what Murderous Marvin has done.

Chapter 2

I read through the file. It shows that he has stolen a top secret file from the Terces Society.  I am terrified, and I know that we have some really important and secret things in the archive. If someone reads the files, the Terces Society will be in danger real danger. I have only two questions. One: what did Murderous Marvin take? Two: why did he do it?

The file doesn’t have a lot of information, so I don’t know what I will do. I have to go back upstairs to do some research. This time I take the elevator up to 15B. I turn the key in the knob and walk inside. I walk through the door to my bedroom and climb up the ladder to my loft. I love the loft; it is cozy and bright, with a big skylight above it. I have a big day bed right below the skylight. When I go to sleep I watch the light go from blue to pink to black. My favorite time is when it’s raining at night. It makes me feel safe and warm.

I come back out of my thoughts. I know what I need to do. I sit down at my desk and log into my computer. A long time ago, when I started having missions, finding the files for the mission was really hard and time consuming because the archive is so big. I decided to make a computer program to help me. I hooked up sensors to each one so that I know where the files are in my computer. I need that program now so that I can see what file was taken.

I scroll through the missing files. There are five. Immediately, I know which one Murderous Marvin took the top secret file about the president, which is very important. Our president’s name is James Smith. The file has a document that President Smith received in order to declare World War III. Luckily, I stole the document so that Mr. Smith couldn’t sign it.

If Murderous Marvin gets ahold of the document, he could forge the signature and start WORLD WAR III!

My Life On The Street

        

Author’s Note

This is a true story based on my grandma’s dog Cody. He did live with an owner but ended up on the street. I made up what happened in his life but some things are true. This story is written from Cody’s perspective.

INTRODUCTION

My name is Cody. I am one year old and live in Missouri on the street. I lived with an owner but, one day, she let me out and never back in. She taught me how to eat my food when she said it was okay, and to slow down when I ran too fast down the stairs. But, now I am alone. I have no one to care for me.

Chapter 1

One stormy Saturday, I needed to find food. All that was close to me was a half-eaten can of black beans. I gobbled that down so fast, but still had to find other things to eat. As I ran down the block, a flash of lightning struck near by. I desperately needed somewhere to hide.

Luckily, I lived in a mostly nice neighborhood. It could get lonely and sad sometimes, though. The wind picked up speed. It started howling. Trees swayed. By now, I was shivering. My teeth started to chatter. I walked for a while, not sure where I was going. I made a right then travelled north for a few minutes. Before my eyes was a huge garbage dump. I walked up to the fence and slowly headed in.

Wow! I thought to myself, There is so much garbage! I bet there will be a lot of food too!

I stepped onto the garbage. It smelled really bad. Cautiously, I climbed up the garbage that towered over me. I found a piece of fish. It was rotting, but I ate it anyway. I searched some more without luck. It was getting late. Stars lit up the sky around the crescent-shaped moon. I retraced my steps back home by sniffing. I peed on a fire hydrant. Something smelled peculiar. It smelled like another dog. That might not seem funny to you but there are no dogs where I live. Even if there were dogs in Missouri, there wouldn’t be any near here. It’s a mostly deserted town.

In the 1860’s, there was a legend that said a big bulldozer came through this town. It knocked down a house that had seven dogs and three humans in it. That was just the beginning. The man driving the bulldozer was named Wrecking Ransacker. He’d lived in the house that he knocked down and –– get ready, this is the creepy part –– it was his ghost who made the town deserted. After he died, his son and daughter took over his house. They were very poor, and the house cost a lot of money. They sold it to three nine-year-old girls. Of course, the girls had seven dogs named Petula, Petunia, Rosy, Daisy, Sunflower, Daffodil and Buttercup who were all King Charles Cavaliers. They were black, grey, and a dirty white.

One stormy night, Wrecking Ransacker was so mad at his kids that he knocked down everyone’s homes on the block. All the houses had dogs because there was a dog park nearby, only one block away from Deserted Dessert street, and these dogs were in their homes alone with their owners when the bulldozer came through.

The sky turned pitch black. I decided to come back to this garbage dump tomorrow. I slept on a small cotton blanket I had picked up at the dump. The storm calmed down and, soon, I fell asleep.

Chapter 2

After a good long rest, I had lots of energy. I headed to the mysterious fire hydrant. Along the way, I passed an opened can of raspberry jelly. I took a nibble of it, but it was too sweet for me. I went on my way. By the time I reached the fire hydrant, I was sweaty from the sun. The storm had cleared and it was bright out. Just in case you ever go to Missouri, let me tell you what this fire hydrant looks like. It was green with polka dots–no other hydrants are green so it will be easy to spot. The hydrant is on Deserted Dessert street. Finally, I reached the hydrant. I decided to be careful in that area – who knows what crazy things or people would be around.

Before I knew it, I had jinxed myself.

Chapter 3

Crap, I thought to myself.

An old lady appeared at a window in a long black cloak. She sat down, knitting needles in her wrinkly fingers. I ducked behind a garbage can that held a pink, blue, and white striped umbrella along with one brown shoe. The rest, I didn’t care about. As I peered out from behind the garbage, the lady’s eyes shifted to me. I jumped back behind the can in a flash. Her eyes blinked in disbelief. The next thing I knew, she had disappeared into her stone room.

***

I headed to another block on Deserted Dessert street. As I walked, I gulped down a bite of avocado.

“Ccrreeeekk!!” A noisy door opened from a house. Paint peeled from the sides of the house. It was painted brown with lumps. It looked like the painter wanted to make it look ugly.

Like a spy, I rolled onto my back and flipped over. I tried doing a cartwheel but failed.

The lady headed out with a big sack. It was full. Full of stuff. I couldn’t tell exactly what was in it because it was black and sealed shut with a piece of red ribbon. The lady looked left, then right, and crossed the street. The bag gleamed in the sunshine. She threw the bag onto the street and said: “¡Uf esto es manera de pesada!” (Meaning: Ugh, this is way too heavy.)

Luckily for me, I could understand spanish from my old owner.

“¿Por qué siempre tengo que hacer el trabajo duro?” the lady asked. “¡No es justo! ¿Por que mi marido dosis no haga el mismo trabajo?” (Meaning: Why do I always have to do the hard work? It’s not fair! Why doesn’t my husband do the work himself?)

The old lady kept on muttering under her breath. It scared me to think that the creepy old lady had a husband. I left. On my way home, something terrifying got in my way.

Chapter 4

“Hey look! I just scared that wimpy dog!” A boy in a ragged ripped shirt said, laughing hysterically.

His friends joined with him.

“Hahaha!” a boy giggled wildly.

“Let’s chase him!” another boy joked.

As I said, he was joking. But his friends didn’t realize that. They started to chase me.

“Wait, guys…” the boy’s voice trailed off until it was barely there. “… I was just joking …”

I ran for my life, growing and barking at the boys. They ignored me. When I couldn’t run anymore, I dived into a shallow pool. The boys dived in after me.

“Brjkde wfhdhcvqbe!!!” A a boy yelped in terror. After being in the freezing pool for a few seconds, he hopped out.

I paddled with my front paws and tried not to drown. Gasping for breath, I made my way to the edge of the pool. I jumped out, shook myself off, and started running again.

Good. A house. Maybe they will let me in!

I didn’t want to get my hopes up. I headed down the cracked sidewalks that were made in 1913. My long fur flew with the breeze. Every once in awhile I took a peek back to see where the boys were. Their hands were sticking out as they tried grabbing my tail.

“Woof, Woof!” I barked loudly as possible.

A person started walking to the door. She peered out and as she realized that I, a dirty dog, was at the door. She turned around. The house was made of stone and had two chimneys. The door was painted a bright red which popped out from the dull, grey stone.

“Skedaddle!” screeched the lady.

I leapt off the ramp leading to her house.

Wait a minute, I thought, I smell something familiar…

Chapter 5

I raced back to the boys and wagged my tail so hard that it almost fell off. This was a risk. This time, they didn’t start chasing me. They were actually nice! They pet me and I did a soft, nice, quiet growl.

I think I’m starting to like these boys, I thought with a lot of enthusiasm.

I did a little woof as my way of saying goodbye.

“Bye!” The boys said in unison.

I gave one last bark goodbye. They were my new favorite humans!

I headed off now, not worried about anything.

Chapter 6

I walked down the hot pavement. My feet burned like they were on fire. In front of me was that green fire hydrant! I almost went blind. This was the most unexpected thing to ever happen on earth. Just then, a big fireball came down from the ski and landed in front of my face.

What? The? Wha?

I was confused.

I looked up in the sky and…

Uh oh.

1,001 fireballs were coming down! They could land on me!

I had to think fast. I unscrewed the lid of the fire hydrant.

Woosh!!! The fire hydrant sprayed water everywhere!

The fireballs went out!

Yippie!!! I thought happily.

The fireballs left a burned spot on the ground. Now I could get to business. I sniffed the fire hydrant. Sniffed and sniffed. It smelled different.

Huh? I thought.

This was strange. I couldn’t smell it as well as I could a few days ago. It seemed … dull.

Wait a minute … I realized. Ah ha! I got it! When the water sprayed it cleared away the pee smell. I am so smart!

It was disappointing because I was intrigued by that doggy smell. I wandered to a nearby garbage can and ate a sunnyside-up egg. Yum. That type of egg was delicious. I left the garbage can and returned to the fire hydrant. Dreadfully, the strange lady was there but wasn’t wearing her black cloak. She had on a pretty skirt with flowers and a red crop top. She was wearing a lot of makeup and her hair was done in a neat bun. Her long pointy fingers were painted with black and white, zig zag stripes. Her pair of black heels matched her outfit perfectly. That was when it hit me.

“Miranda?” The lady in the flowered skirt called.

Just then, the lady in the black coat came through the door! This hit me by surprise. I hid behind the garbage can.

“Juro por mi corazón que acabo de ver el más lindo pequeño perrito derecho imaginables lado de la calle.” (Meaning: I swear to my heart that I just saw the cutest little pup imaginable right across the street.)

“¿Qué? ¿Cómo es eso posible? Tengo el perrito más lindo en este mundo. Por el amor de Dios. El perrito más lindo en el mundo!” (Meaning: What? How is that possible? I have the cutest pup on this world. For crying out loud. The cutest puppy on the world!)

Miranda, the lady in black, walked out of the room with a humph. Her head was tilted high. The next second, Miranda came back into the room with a puppy named Maya who was a big golden doodle who loved to play. She rolled onto her stomach for a belly rub. I got a bit jealous because I have always wanted an owner who would take me for walks. It made me feel sad, but also more determined to get an owner to care for me.

Chapter 7

The lady in the flowered skirt went to get a glass of red wine, came back, and walked to her car. She crossed the street and looked around. She saw me. I growled, even though I knew that she didn’t want to harm me. She got out her blackberry phone and dialed: (324) 802-9672. That was the number of an animal rescue truck. She waited patiently with me for exactly 13 minutes and 43 seconds. She counted. She also was humming Row, Row, Row, Your Boat. I quietly hummed along with her. She turned and looked at me. I quickly stopped humming and looked up at her with big eyes. She bent down and pet me.

Chapter 8

A big, white van pulled up across the street from where the lady and I were. Two men hopped out in tan uniforms with pins on them. The pins had pictures of dogs, cats, birds and every animal you can imagine. Even a donkey!! They picked me up –– Mr. Stan and Mr. Louis. They also had name tags on along with all those cool pins. The van had big bumper stickers that had their phone number, with a dog on them. They held me high in the air for photos for a new bumper sticker!! Inside the van, they had metal bars. I couldn’t go to the front of the van. It seemed like jail. I got to sit on a big, fluffy, soft, white cushion. Of course, in jail they wouldn’t have a cushion in the police car. At least from what I know.

By this time, the lady was gone. Dust flew from behind the car. Do you want to hear something terrible? Here, you know what? I’ll tell you. They were taking me to the vet! My old owner took me once and I bit the vet. Let’s do a quick addition problem: Me plus vet equals mad. The lady at the desk, talked to Mr. Stan and Mr. Louis.

“We’ll be back in 30 minutes,” concluded Mr. Louis.

“Yes we will,” confirmed Mr. Stan.

“That will work just fine,” said the lady at the desk, Molly.

And that was that. I waited in a dog pen that had a husky and a beagle.

“Dog?” A sweet looking nurse called me.

I growled. Molly got me out of the pen which was unfortunate because I wanted to stay, play with some toys, and sleep on the cushion. I growled and growled. I hated the vet. I sat up on a table that had a matting on the bottom. Since I knew that I hated the vet, I peed on the table. The vet wasn’t in the room yet but Molly was. She didn’t know how to handle this bad-for-her situation.

“Um … Janitor Jake? Can you come and … clean this mat? Cody peed on it.” Molly asked through her walkie talkie.

“Sure.” Jake replied crackly through the walkie talkie.

A minute later, Jake appeared with a garbage bag and and new mat for me to sit on. Just then, Dr. Sanders came in.

Chapter 9

I looked through the door as the vet came in. He was wearing a long white jacket with name a tag that read ‘Dr. Sanders.’

“Hi Jake, Molly,” Dr. Sanders said casually.

Then, he turned his attention to me.

“Hi!” Sander said cheerfully!

He gave me a light pat on the head. I growled at him and tried to bite him. Luckily for him, he was able to pull his finger away a millisecond before I was going to bite him.

“Ready to get started?” questioned Sanders.

I gave a low, mean bark.

He got out a stethoscope and put it on my heart. The assistant who I haven’t yet mentioned sat in the corner of the room to check off if things were looking good or bad.

“Heartbeat is fine. Yes it is, cutie. Yes it is!” Sanders said.

“Good.”

This went on and on. Even after Mr. Stan and Mr. Louis came back.

I couldn’t sit on the table anymore. They were in the middle of giving me a tick and flea medication when I hopped off the table. Dr. Louis, who was quite large, started chasing me around the room. He started to break a sweat after I made him run around the table once. Once!! Mr. Stan got mad and started yelling. He had lost his temper.

“Why would you do that, dog?”

Mr. Louis was panting. That was the end of the terrible check-up. On the way out, Dr. Louis paid the check ($307 plus tax). On the way out, Molly gave me a treat.

“You want a treat for being such a good little doggy?”

I wagged my tail and barked. Just as Molly was about to put the treat in my mouth, Mr. Stan took it away. I bit his finger as hard as I could and didn’t let go. He screamed like a five-year-old girl who was in terrible pain. I finally let go and he dropped the treat on the ground. I quickly, without anyone knowing, ate the treat off the ground. Molly gave me a soft pat on the head as if she were on my side. In my ear, she whispered something.

Molly joked, “it’s okay, buddy. He was mean. And scared like a chicken from a tractor.”

I liked her. Mr. Louis took Mr. Stan to the bathroom. His finger was swollen when he came out. Mr. Stan grabbed me and, of course, I growled.

“Shut up,” Mr. Stan said, paranoid.

I went back into the car and Mr. Louis started driving again. He stopped at a gas station. He went into a tiny supermarket and came back with three large bags filled with potato chips, coca cola, gummy bears, one tiny circular dog treat, peppermint patties, two milkshakes, and two cheeseburgers. Mr. Louis tossed the dog treat to the back seat. I gave a tiny bark.

“Oh. Now the dog is nice. Why did you even get him a treat?”

“Well … maybe … I like him a little? Fine. I like Cody and all his energy.” Mr Louis was afraid to break this news.

I gave another bark, except this time louder.

“Let’s face it Louis. You can’t run. At all.” Stated Mr. Stan.

“Can I run, Cody?” I nodded my head yes because really, he was kind of nice. I also barked.

Mr. Stan got madder by the second because I like Mr. Louis more than Stan (not) The Man. My new nickname for him!

Chapter 10

The car ride was so long. Another time, Mr. Louis got more food. He came back with one piece of gum and a bag of dog treats for me! He even sat in the back of the car with me! There was nothing for Mr. Stan. Poor him (not).

We finally got to the shelter. Mr. Louis picked me up and carried me out of the car to the door. I walked inside and saw many dogs. They all looked nice. They started howling as I walked through the door. It was painted hot pink with blue stripes. The handle was in a shape of a dog–a shih tzu, in fact. I saw big kennels with big dogs with smaller kennels with smaller dogs. The place had hard wooden floors. It seemed like a place that I wouldn’t like. I barked with my tail down and my teeth gritted. They scooped me into a kennel. Surprisingly, it was a big kennel like the ones that the big dogs got. I felt so special. I had three t-shirt rope toys, a water bowl, a food bowl, and a cushion to sleep on. Pretty lame. I sat in the corner. Louis watched me. I could tell that he felt bad for me. He knew that I liked the open.

“Rachel? Are employees allowed to adopt the dogs?” I heard Louis ask.

“Ye–” Rachel got cut off by Louis.

“Yippee!!!” shouted Louis.

“–but not until after a full year because someone else may want to adopt that little cute pup.” finished Rachel.

“What? But I really want to adopt Cody,” Louis protested.

“Too bad.”

Rachel shooed Louis off.

The next day, Louis called in sick. That was unfortunate. Early that morning –– not too early –– a visitor came to the shelter. He was wearing a pair of navy jeans with a white t-shirt. Right away, I knew who it was but I didn’t bark or do anything. It seemed as if the person had made sure that his beard was extra long.

“May I help you?” asked Rachel, sweetly.

“Yes please … I was wondering if you had any small black and white shih tzu’s?”

“Yes we do. You can go and look for yourself,” Rachel said.

The man started walking when Rachel stopped him.

“Louis? Is that you?”

“What?”

“Louis. It says your name on your shirt. And your last name.”

“Okay, I admit it. I was trying to adopt the dog under disguise.”

“Let’s get to work, Louis.”

“Fine.”

Louis walked over to me and rubbed my neck. I love neck massages. Louis took me out of my cage a cradled me like a baby. If you’re wondering where Mr. Stan was, he quit his job. I bit him too hard. He was so mean anyway. I didn’t really care.

Diary of a Shy Girl

September 28, 2014

Dear Diary,

Today was the first day of 4th grade, and it was a terrible day at my new school. The most popular girls in school already hate me! It’s because I was so shy at school. I didn’t say one word the whole day, and now I wish I had said something to them.  

I was put with the worst homeroom teacher in 4th grade. She is so terrible because she is very strict, she makes us do two hours of math class every day, and worst of all she she shouts at you if you are not looking at the board any time during a lesson!

We have so much homework even though it is the first day of school, and my class is the only class that has homework today. I can tell it will be a very terrible year.

When I got home, I ran up to my room and locked the door. I would not let anyone talk to me or come in for the rest of the night. It was very hard to do my homework tonight because I was so sad.

Goodbye for now,

Zola

September 29, 2014

Dear Diary,

I am eating breakfast, and I am about to go on the bus.

I am hiding you in my desk. I am having math class. We are in the middle of a boring lesson about fractions.

Oh. What? The teacher just called my name. She is asking what I am doing.

Goodbye for now,

Zo~~~~~

I am in the principal’s office right now, and I am not supposed to be writing in you. If I get caught, I will be sent home. The principal is on a phone call and is standing outside the office. I hope he doesn’t come back in. When I left you my teacher took me here. Then she told the principal what I had done.

Tomorrow there is a Fall Festival. I don’t know if I will go.

Goodbye for now,

Zola

September 30, 2014

Dear Diary,

Today is the Fall Festival. Mom says I am allowed to go if I start talking to my classmates at the festival. She gave me some money to go on rides and get cotton candy and pizza. I think it will be very fun, and I will try talking to some people in my class. See you at the festival!

Goodbye for now,

Zola

I am at the festival. This is what the festival looks like. It is crowded and noisy and smells like popcorn and lemonade. There are colorful tents. Some have red and white stripes on them, and others have blue and green stripes on them. There are scary rides because we are getting near Halloween! Some rides spin around and around while spooky monsters pop out at you. Some rides are nice and fun for little kids. Over there is one of the most popular girls. Her name is Emma. I am going to go over and try talking to her. Here I go! Wish me luck diary.

Good bye for now,

Zola

Dear Diary,

Let me give you an update on what just happened. I went over to Emma and I said, “Um, um…hi. I was wondering if you wanted to go on the Death Scream ride with me?”

Emma told me, “No, you little baby. I bet you are too scared to go on it by yourself. You just want me to go with you.

And then I said, “Oh, I’ll go on it by myself then.”

And then Emma said, “You’re way too scared. You just want me to think you’re brave.”

But I still wanted to go on the Death Scream, so I got tickets and got in line. The line was so long. When I finally got to the front of the line, and the person who starts the ride  said, “Next.”

I got on and braced myself. When the ride started, I was getting jerked around like I was a piece of paper. I let out a shriek and squeezed up in a ball so I could write in my diary. My hands are shaking so much so it is hard to write.

Goodbye  for now,

Zola

October 1, 2014

Today at school, Emma came up to me and said, “I saw you go on that ride. I was wrong about you. Do you want to be friends?”

“Sure!” I said.

“Can you forgive me for what I said yesterday?”

“Sure!” I said again.

We linked arms and skipped off down the hallway.

And that is how my day was.

Now I have a friend.

Yours truly,

Zola

Siblings

Chapter 1

Some siblings play with you, some fight with you, some are your best friends, and some do all of the above. My sibling does none of the above. Well, for now. My brother is my best friend. We used to play together, study together, talk to each other in the night, and trust each other with our secrets, but now we can’t do any of those things. He was recently paralyzed, but now we are teaching him how to walk, talk, and do math. We are turning him into the boy he used to be.

I am Meg and I will tell you how my brother, Matt, became paralyzed. We live in New York City. Nine months ago my brother was walking across the street and a car was speeding. My brother tried to back up and the man in the car tried to slow down, but it was too late. The man in the car hit my brother, and he screamed. My brother fell to the ground and he didn’t move. My mother got a call and she ran to the street where he got hit. I ran after her (let me remind you my brother was totally fine before this). We took ten minutes to get there. We were panting so much. When my mom and I got to the street he was being pulled into the ambulance. We went in with him. He didn’t make a sound. He didn’t move. My mom surely thought he was dead. There was blood all over his body. I couldn’t think straight.

My mom was crying and crying. Once we reached the hospital they took him into a testing room. I was sitting outside of the door crying because by now I thought he was dead too. I did not want my best friend and brother to die. Once they came out they said, “He is alive,” (I sighed with relief) but, he was paralyzed. At that point my mom stopped crying and she said, “Can you treat him?” they said, “Yes, but, he will be needing therapy.”

So, one month after that he got paralyzed he started therapy. Now, eight months later he can finally walk. He can finally have a full conversation. He still cannot read, write, and do physical activities. So I, Meg Warner, have volunteered to help.

I am younger than him, yet at this point, while he is being trained and he is going into eighth grade, I know how to do more activities than he does. That does not mean I am smarter than him, it just means we have to get all of the knowledge he has out of the back of his brain. Every day I work on math flashcards, reading flashcards, and spelling flashcards with him. We started off with preschool flashcards. He did well at those. Then we did kindergarten, which still wasn’t terrible. Then, everything up to sixth grade was fine, but seventh and eighth he is blanking out on. So those two grades are what we will have to teach him. He is getting the math of seventh grade, but his spelling is not great. So we don’t really work on math. We have been working on reading and spelling for weeks and he still can’t get it right.

Now, after weeks and weeks, we are going to the doctor to see if he has dyslexia. The test was positive. He has dyslexia. That makes the process of teaching twice as hard. So now I can not teach him, the doctor will. That is just the start of my brother’s story.

Chapter 2

About My Brother

So my brother is a normal boy and I still believe that. He just needs to learn what he already knows. My brother was born August 3rd, 2003. He is two years older than me. He is twelve and I am ten.

We live in a brownstone building downtown. I can’t tell you exactly where for safety reasons. We have a big house and we also have added a training room for my brother for when his physical therapist comes.

He goes to the Anderson School and I go to The Dalton School. Well, now he isn’t in school, he is technically homeschooled but with a doctor. When I was a baby, he loved holding me and taking care of me. Now it’s my turn.

His favorite sport is tennis. He also likes playing soccer. He cannot do any of those anymore. As a small child he was on a soccer team and, before the accident, he was ranked seventy-fourth in the tennis Eastern Conference. He keeps telling me he wants to play tennis, but I say, “No you can’t. That will hurt you more.” He gets mad and storms off. I never intend to hurt his feelings, but he thinks he is still the boy he was before the injury. I tell him, “We are trying to turn you into that boy,” but he has to be taught. He still is the same boy but he has to be trained to be as smart as he possibly can. He also has to be able to do physical activities.

My brother and I have almost as much fun as we used to. He can talk, walk, and have fun with me. The thing is he can’t play catch with me, tennis with me, play soccer with me, skate with me, and pretty much do any sport with me. He now talks to me like he did. In the night we talk but a lot of nights he is in the hospital. We are both lonely those nights.

His spelling and writing is the level of my grade, which actually isn’t that bad considering that he has dyslexia and I am not bad at writing and reading. Technically he is doing really well.

Chapter 3

The Bad News

We are walking with him down the street (we take a wheelchair just in case), when my mom got a call. You know when your mom gets a call and then all of a sudden she goes serious? Well, that’s what happened. As she picks up the phone I see a contact that says “Matt’s Doctor.” I get scared.

After my mom puts down the phone, I ask her what happened and she says, “Matt has to go to the doctor right away.” I am traumatized by now so I just sit and watch. She calls my dad, and he comes straight to the hospital. They say, “Matt has a tumor.” They say something about taking a CT scan. They think he has cancer, but I don’t believe it. It can’t be true, can it? We go straight to the hospital. We take an uber to get there. It comes so quickly, and we get to NYU Langone. They take him into a room to take a CT scan. We have to wait outside of the door on the chairs. He comes out with different-colored wire things on his head. One is red, one is blue, one is green, one is yellow, and there are also other colors. He is very drowsy, so we take him home and he falls asleep.

Through those days we are very scared for the result.

We finally get the results and they say, “He has a brain tumor.” I start crying. He walks up to me and hugs me. I am so sad. He almost fully recovered from being paralyzed, and now he has a tumor. The nurse tells us he will have to stay there overnight. When he is conscious he says, “I want to have the surgery so I can live, pursue my tennis dream, have a normal life, and not remember all of this happening to me. I definitely don’t want to not have the surgery because the tumor will kill me. I am very scared for the surgery.”

I try to stay strong and say, “You’ll be fine. I have to go, bye.”

In the night I am worried and lonely. I don’t want my brother to die. “The tumor isn’t big,” they said. They said, “The surgery isn’t that hard but it is risky.” My parents are trying to decide if he should have surgery. If he doesn’t have surgery, the tumor will spread and he will die at some point. If I have a say in it I will say yes because he would be fine after that (hopefully).

Chapter 4

The Decision

So my parents are talking all night and the doctor says, “If you want him to have the surgery it will be tomorrow.” They finally agree on letting him get the surgery. The doctors say, “It might make teaching him two times harder.” I know he will be the same boy. So the next day we see him on the chair in the hospital. They give him a shot that will make him fall asleep and then they take him into the other room. I am so scared. My brother could be dead in two hours or he could be a healthy kid in two hours, but my hopes are up.

I have been waiting in the waiting room for two hours and he’s not out. Is he okay?

The doctors come out with my brother on the chair. He is unconscious. They say, “The surgery went well.” I am so happy I jump out of my chair and hug him. (Remember he is still unconscious).

The doctor says, “He will have to take Tylenol or Advil for his headaches.” The doctors say, “He just can’t do any physical activities or physical therapy for two weeks.”

He stays there overnight. In the morning we pick him up from the hospital and he acts normal, but we have to take him in the wheelchair because he can’t walk until the physical therapist comes. We talk. I ask him how he felt. He says, “I’m fine,” but he has a headache. I tell him to go ask Mom to give him Tylenol. He says, “Okay.” He goes and asks.

Chapter 5

Physical Activities

Two weeks have passed and he wants to start tennis again. My brother can’t move very fast yet. He can’t walk because he isn’t allowed to, and now he has forgotten how to. So we get the physical therapist to come, so soon he will be able to play tennis. The physical therapist says, “It will be easy to teach him how to walk and run.” The problem is that he can’t move fast. He takes three days to get his legs to move fast. Then it takes three more days to get him to get a tight grip on the racket. It takes five days to strengthen his leg and arm muscles. He is able to play tennis. He tries out for a tennis team called The Ravens.

He gets on the team! He has a match in one day, which is the state’s match. He has been trained really well and I think he is ready.

We go to the match. He wins the first set six to one and wins the second set six to zero. He wins!!! We celebrate by buying a cake and eating it while watching Lemonade Mouth the Movie! The minute he won I knew he was totally fine.

Is There A McDonald’s In Beach Haven

SLAM! I crash to the ground. “Ow!” I say. Asher slammed his locker door and “accidentally” kneed me in the stomach. That’s how tall he is. Not that I’m short.

“Hey! Watch where you’re going!” Connor says.

“How about she watches where she’s going!” Asher says while he walks away.

“Are you okay?” Emma says. Connor, Emma, Lisa, and I are a group.

“He’s a jerk,” Lisa says.

“He should be suspended,” Connor says.

Suddenly, I get dizzy. Having people say a bunch of things at once doesn’t help a throbbing head. But then I start wondering, Why does my head hurt when he kneed me in the stomach? I hear more noises:

“Hey! Back off!”

“What was that for?”

They grow fainter and fainter…

”Olivia. OLIVIA!!!” My eyes dart open. Lisa is standing in front of me. “Hi,” she says.

I look around me. I am lying on a bed in the nurse’s office. I see Emma talking to the nurse, and Connor talking to the principal.

“Whats happening?!” I ask. Everyone stops to look at me.

“You’re awake!” the nurse says.

“Yeah,” I say. I pause for a second. Something is wrong. I’m forgetting to do something. “OH NO!” I scream. I grab the Band-aid on the nurse’s desk. I forgot to wash it. I walk to the sink and run the Band-aid under cold water. I smile as I turn the water off and dry it. Everyone is staring at me. “What?!” I say. I place it on the nurse’s desk. I walk back to the bed and lie down.

3 YEARS LATER

“Wake up!” my mom says.

“I am awake!” I tell her. “It’s summer! Why are you waking me up?!”

My mom sighs. “It’s too late to be sleeping still.”

Under the covers, I take a look at the clock. It reads 8:48. “What do you mean by ‘too late’?!” I reply.  Silence. I realize what she meant. I told her yesterday I would go shopping for her at the Pearl Street Market. “Ugh.” I roll out of bed at start picking out my clothes as my mom leaves the room. I decide to wear a beach cover up. It looks like a dress so I’m pretty sure no one will notice. I walk into the bathroom and brush my teeth and brush my hair. I walk into the kitchen where my mom usually is. “Mom, I’m ready!” Silence. “Hello?!” Silence.

“Hello big ten-year-old sister!” Liam, my little brother jumps out of the kitchen. He is only four years old.

”It’s not my birthday. I’ve told you a million times to buy a calendar. I’m already ten!” I say back to him.

“Oh,” he says. I walk away from him and look for my mom. I find her in the living room, staring at the TV, wide-eyed with my other little brother, Jackson. She looks scared. On the TV, it says BREAKING NEWS.

“Mom, I’m ready.” She looks at me and turns off the TV quickly.

“Okay sweetie, be safe,” she says.

“Yeah, be safe,” Jackson echos. I give him a weird look.

“Oookay. Bye, Mom. And, uhhh, Jackson.” I walk outside and hop onto my bike. Out of the corner of my eye I see my mom and Jackson waving. Jackson’s acting too mature to be eight years old. I get so lost in my thoughts. Why are they acting so worried? What happened on the BREAKING NEWS? I get so lost that I forget to make a left on Pearl Street and go so far that I’m in front of the “Welcome to Beach Haven” sign. I turn back and (finally) make it to Pearl Street Market.

I lock my bike and walk inside. I love Pearl Street Market. It looks like an old fashioned market and it smells like a new book which is the best smell ever. I stall sometimes because I don’t want to leave. There is always a bowl of Hershey’s Kisses on the counter, so I take a couple and put them in my pocket.  I pick up the basket and grab everything quickly. I wasted a lot of time getting lost.

Out of the corner of my eye I see BREAKING NEWS on the TV.  I do a  double take. I stare at the TV just like my mom did. The news reporter says, “…got in a fist fight at McDonalds due to… ”

Bump!

“Ow!” I say.

“Sorry!” the girl says. She’s about to walk out the door when I stop her.

“Emma?” I say. She turns around and looks at me.

“Oh. Hi,” she replies.

I haven’t seen her since the first day of third grade, when I got a concussion. We were lost so we ended up in the middle school floor. Then Asher kneed me in the stomach and I banged my head on the ground, and… stuff. I changed schools because my mom didn’t want me at that school anymore, even though Asher got kicked out of school. In that school, you get kicked out easily. Emma walks back inside.

“Did you hear what happened on the news?” I ask her.

“No,” she says and stares at the TV. I stare at the TV also.

“The person who got in a fist fight just seems so familiar,” I tell her.

“But my brain’s telling me not to look anymore.” She looks over to me with wide eyes.

I hear the TV say, “Asher Gray….”

I look at her with wide eyes also. “No way,” I tell her. I look back at the TV.

“Asher Gray, the person who started this fight, attacked Leonardo Smith. Asher did run away after. If you have anymore information, call 1-800-CRIME-STOPPERS.”

I turn back at her and say, “We have to find Leonardo Smith.”

“Why in the world do we have to find Leonardo Smith?” Emma asks.

“Because,” I tell her, “We want to know information about where he might have gone and then report it to the police.” I say it all in one breath. I gasp.

“Well,” Emma says. “Where are we going to start?”

“McDonalds,” I tell her. I drop my basket and run to my bike. She follows me. We both hop on our bikes and start pedaling.

“Where is this McDonalds?” Emma asks.

“I don’t know,” I say.

Emma rolls her eyes. We start pedaling around until we find a McDonalds. There is a bunch of caution tape around it.

“I think this is it!” I tell her. We are only on Main Street, so we aren’t that far away from home. Home! What if they think something bad happened to me!? And the breaking news that they saw…

Oh no.

We arrive at the McDonalds. Looking through the window, we see knocked over chairs, garbage everywhere, and tables knocked over also. “Okay,” I whisper to Emma as we jump off our bikes, “here‘s the plan. We pretend that we are cousins of Leonardo and are longing to know where he is. Got it?” She nods. We walk in the McDonald’s and see police talking.

“Excuse me?” Emma says.

“Hey! What are you kids doing here? Get out!” the policeman says.

“No, please! We are cousins of Leonardo! Do you know where he is?” I say.

“Why didn’t you come to the hospital when your family went?” the police officer asks.

“We were uhh… ” Emma says. She gives me a kick in the shin.

“Ow!” I say. “I mean we were uh… camping,” I tell the police officer.

“Yeah. Camping,” Emma adds.

“Okay,” the police officer says.

“Your cousin is in the Beach Haven hospital — ”

“Okay, thanks!!” Emma says. We jump on our bikes and head toward the hospital.

“Emma. My mom is going to be so worried. She was looking at the TV like she was scared this morning. She is going to think something is wrong,” I tell her. She says nothing back. I tell her to make a right turn. When we get to the hospital I hit a bump and I feel my bike go lower and slower. “Stop!” Emma slows down. We stop in front of the hospital. “Oh no, oh no, oh no!!! I think my tire broke,” I say. I set my bike down and look at the tire. There is a small hole, and it doesn’t go all the way through. In the trash I see a roll of duct tape. I take it out and measure a piece. I think about how I’m going to cut it, but I use all of my strength and pull it off. I put it on the hole.

“It probably should still work!” I say to myself. Emma and I lock our bikes and walk in the hospital. We walk up to the front desk.

“Hello,” Emma says. The receptionist turns around to look at us.

“Why hello there,” she says. “What can I do for you?”

“We would like to see Leonardo Smith please,” I say. She click-clacks away on her computer.

“Alright then. Is he expecting you?”

Emma pauses. “Um… we are… We are detective cadets for the police and we need to find out more information. About, you know.”

“You’re cadets for the police?” the receptionist asks. Not like she wants to know, she asks like she wants to know if we are kidding.

“Yeah. We are more mature then we look, you know,” I tell her.

“Alright,” she says. “Room 515.”

We walk through all the long hallways. 407, 408. “Where’s the elevator?” I say to no one in particular.

“515 is on this floor you know,” Emma says.

513, 514, 515! I peek through the window and see Leonardo laying in the hospital bed. He has several bruises on his face. I can’t see the rest of his body, and I’m kind of glad I can’t. He could have some really bad injuries. There is no doctor or nurse in the room that I see, so I push open the door with Emma trailing behind me.

“Hello?” I say. I’ve now confirmed that no doctor or nurse is in the room, so Emma and I walk in further.

“Hello,” Emma says to Leonardo. “We are police cadets. We need to find out more about the fist fight at McDonalds. So. Tell us everything.”

Leonardo looks at Emma like she’s a madman. “What?” he says.

“Did you not hear me correctly?” Emma asks politely. “What I said was we are police cadets and we need to find out more information about the fist fight at McDonald’s. What we really need to know is, did you see where Asher went after he ran away?” He nods like he’s taking it all in.

“No.”

“What?!” I say a little too loudly.

“No,” he says. “But I saw where he ran away to, not where he went after he ran away.”  Emma and I sigh with relief. Not only was he believing the story about being a police cadet, but he knows where Asher ran away to!

“He went to the apartment right next to the McDonald’s. That’s all I know.”

“Okaythat’sgreathanks!” Emma says excitedly as she pulls me by my arm out of the room. We run back down all the hallways.

We run past the receptionist, who shouts, “No running!!” She’s probably thinking, I should have never let them in. We finally make it outside. I look at the tire on my bike. It is still duct-taped, but it looks fine. It should just go a little slower. We get on the street, and I find out my predictions were correct. It goes a little slower. Okay, a lot slower. But I can’t do anything about it now. It takes us thirty minutes longer than we planned to get there. I check my watch. It reads 11:38. I cringe. Mom is going to be sooo mad. We park our bikes in front of the McDonald’s where the fist fight happened.

“Oh gosh,” Emma says with a sigh. The apartment looks gloomy and old and unwelcoming.

“We need a break,” I say. Emma’s stomach growls loudly.

”A lunch break,” she says. I feel bumps in my pocket. I take them out and see that they are Hershey’s Kisses from Pearl Street Market. Emma takes half of them and eats them quickly. Chocolate is her favorite food. I eat the rest of them. “Are you ready now?!” She groans as a response. I take it as a yes. I drag her onto the parking lot of the apartment. I almost stick my hand inside a cobweb. I shiver.

We make it to the end of the parking lot. Now in front of us are big numbers that read 675. There is a door that leads to the dark, gloomy, (you guessed it) lobby. The light is flickering. There is no lock on the door, so Emma pushes the door open. There is an elevator in front of us, and the staircase to the left.

“Let’s take the elevator,” Emma says. We walk in the elevator and I really don’t want to because it’s creepy and scary and I want to get out.  Emma is already one step ahead of me. ”What floor should we press? How about six?” She answers her own question.  She presses the button and the doors close. I double take on the button six. It says, FLOOR CLOSED.

“Why the heck did you press that if the floor is closed?!”

“Because it make it more mysterious!! Oooh!” It’s like we switched places.  She was scared to go in first and I wasn’t. Now she’s not scared and I am! We make it to the sixth floor and manage to step over the caution tape before the doors close. Standing in the hallway of the sixth floor, there is no caution tape. But over one apartment there is caution tape.

“Let’s go in that one!” Emma says.

I hide in my fear. “Sure,” I say.

Emma pushes open the door. Surprisingly, it’s unlocked. There is broken glass right near the doorway. We step over it walk inside. The whole time I’m scared that someone will jump out of nowhere. To the left I see a picture of Asher.

“Emma. This is Asher’s house,” I whisper. There is a ruffle sound. My heart skips a beat. We look around and see nothing. In front of us is the living room. Emma motions for us to go there. The room has a TV sitting on top of a shelf. There is an orange couch across from the TV. The walls are a dark yellow and peeling. I walk closer to the TV and see that it’s on. The Cartoon Network flashes on the TV.  I step back. I hear another ruffling sound. A vase tips over, spilling water and flowers and glass all over the floor.

“Emma, we should leave,” I whisper.

“I’ve told you a million times!” says a high pitched voice.

“Emma! Who said that?!”

“Geez,” she says. “It was the TV.”

“Emma we should really go. Someone is in here besides — ” Clank!

Emma and I run out of the apartment. Run as fast as we can!!! We take the stairs instead of the elevator, and I slip and fall. “Are you alright?!” Emma asks. I get up and keep running. We finally make it to the lobby of the apartment and run out the door and through the parking lot. We run to our bike and pedal.

“TO MY HOUSE!” I shout to her. She wouldn’t have heard me if I didn’t shout because the wind was blasting in our ears. I pedal as fast as I can because of my tire. We make it to my house in a good amount of time. I freeze at the front door.

“Just open it,” Emma says. I don’t want to open it. I’m scared. When my mom gets mad, she gets MAD.

“Prepare for.. .well… you’ll find out,” I laugh nervously. It takes all of my bravery to push open the door.

Jackson and Liam are watching TV on the couch. Jackson looks at us. “Olivia’s here!” he says to Liam and  and turns off the TV. “Where have you been?!” Jackson demands. “You are four hours late. You scared us to death!!!” Jackson says, not noticing Emma behind me.

“Well, we were just trying to find a little more information.” I start walking around the living room slowly. “About the um… fist fight that you didn’t tell me about… ”

Without skipping a beat, Jackson says, “Mom didn’t want me to tell you because she thought you would be scared.” I realize I don’t see Mom anywhere.

“Where did she — ”

“There was a fist fight?!!” asks Liam. “That’s totally radical,” he smiles. I roll my eyes. He doesn’t know anything about what really happened.

“Where is Mom?” I ask as I finally get a chance to finish my sentence. My heart is beating out of my chest. That stuff that happened in the apartment really creeped me out.

“You are so lucky.”  Jackson says. “We — ”

“Mom is taking a nap. You are so lucky we aren’t going to tell on you,” Liam interrupts. Liam loves to interrupt.

“Yep. She started taking a nap right after you left,” Jackson adds.

“Wow. That’s so weird.  Why would Mom be taking a nap in the morning? And she must be napping hard if she’s been napping since I left,” I say.  All of a sudden, Liam starts bursting out laughing. Jackson also.

“BUNNY EARS!” Liam shouts. I turn around and Emma is smiling. Now I realize that they were laughing because Emma was doing bunny ears at me. I roll my eyes.

“I just want to get to the good part!!” Emma whispers to me. “Allow me to explain,” Emma announces just as the boys stop laughing. “We are trying to find Asher and report him to the police. We just visited his apartment. Well, most likely his apartment.  There was a lot of paranormal activity. We didn’t get to visit it long enough so,” she says. “Who wants to go back?”

The boys shout,“MEEE!”

“What?!” I say to Emma.

“We can’t just leave them here!” she says.

“We can’t just take them with us!” I shoot back.

“Let’s go!” Emma says and runs outside. I sigh. This is going to be a long day.

Jackson gets his bike from the garage. Emma and I are ready to go. Except one person. Liam.

“Where am I going to go?!” Liam asks. Emma looks at the basket on my bike, then at Liam, and back again. I can see where she’s going.

“No,” I tell her. “You are not going to — ” Emma picks Liam up and drops him in the basket.

“Yay!” Liam says excitedly.

“Is this even legal?” I ask Emma. She doesn’t say anything. “Liam, hold on really tight. Okay?” I tell him.

“I will. Stop worrying!” he says. Emma does a head count. We all head back to the apartment. This Liam-in-the-basket thing actually works, except everyone is staring at us. Emma shouts directions to everyone. She has a good memory. The one thing I always liked about Emma is that she is really brave. Her not wanting to leave that apartment is somewhere between kind of weird and brave.

“Faster, faster!” Liam shouts. I try to go a little faster. I’m still creeped out. My heart is beating really fast. I do not want to go back to that apartment. We make it to the apartment and I have to use all my bravery to get off my bike and lock it. Jackson and Emma wait for me to get Liam out of the basket.

“That was so fun!” Liam shouts. I shush him and tell him that in the apartment, we have to whisper. Liam looks at the apartment in terror. He is about to scream but I shush him again. We walk silently across the parking lot. Same things as last time. Finally, we are standing in front of the apartment door. It’s so scary. I can see it on everyone’s faces also.

“Okay. This is really scary. Like, I’m scared. And you are. And… okay. Well everyone is,” I say nervously. “Just, don’t… or try not to… scream.” Everyone nods.

“Who wants to do the honors?” Emma asks. Nobody answers. “Okay then,” Emma says, “I will.”

Emma pushes open the door. We step over the broken glass, and walk into the living room. The TV is still on, but right when we walk in, it changes to Law & Order. There is a ruffling noise. We all turn around. Liam gives me puppy dog eyes.

“Fine,” I say. I pick him up. He smiles.

“Stop it. No. PLEASE!”

We all get scared. Who said that?

“It was the TV,” Jackson says. Emma starts walking down the hallway. We all follow her, even though we are scared out of our minds. The silence rings in my ears. The hallway is a light blue. I think that’s  a strange color choice, but I can’t focus on that right now. There are pictures of Asher and his family on the wall. This is definitely Asher’s house. We come to the end of the hallway and I hear Liam whimper. There is a closed door at the end of the hallway. Emma opens it and we all walk in. It’s a bedroom. It must be the parents’ bedroom, I think to myself. White walls with a red canopy bed. It looks like a normal bedroom, except it has a weird vibe.

“Let’s split up. Jackson and I explore the hallway. Olivia and Liam in this room,” Emma whispers. Everyone nods. Emma and Jackson go to the hallway and shut the door.

I cringe. I walk back to the door and open it. I look up and see that something is weighing down the canopy on the top. I’m about to put Liam down and investigate more, but the bed skirt ruffles. Like something or someone is ruffling it. Liam, at the worst time, screams at the top of his lungs. I jump and cover his mouth with my hand. Emma and Jackson run into the room.

“What is it?” Jackson whispers. I point to the bed skirt. Nobody moves. We just stare at the bed skirt. It goes like that for a long while. Suddenly, I have a plan.

I put Liam in Emma’s hands, who is very surprised and not quite ready and almost drops him. I carefully climb onto the mattress and grab the thing that was weighing down the canopy without looking at it. It’s a box. I unlock the the chain and I’m about to open it when…

“Hello?!” says a voice. It’s a familiar woman’s voice. I can see Emma’s face go from confusion to scared.

“I don’t think they’re in here!” the voice says.

“Well, we have to investigate, don’t we ma’am?!” a deeper voice says. We hear footsteps in the living room. Where are we going to go?! I do not like the situation I just got put in. We are in an apartment that we didn’t even know about until a few hours ago, trying to find someone who started a fist fight, with paranormal activity, with my brothers and best friend, trying not to get caught, and now there are people in this weird apartment. What the heck are  we going to do?

“Let’s sit in the living room and talk about this,” the deeper voice says. Emma quietly points to the closet in the hallway. It’s a large closet, big enough for all of us to fit in. I wonder how we are going to do this. Emma quickly runs to the closet and opens the door. She signals for us to come in. We run in as quickly as possible, with my heart beating really hard. We all make it in and Emma closes the door. SLAM!! I give Emma a look.

“What the heck?!” I whisper-shout to her. She cringes.

“Sorry!” she whisper-replies.

“What was that?!” the voice says.

“I don’t know. Want to go take a look?” the deeper voice says. I’m shaking my head. No. Please don’t take a look. Please don’t!

“As long as I find my kids!” the voice says. Suddenly, I get a horrific thought. The voice wasn’t just “the voice” anymore.

It could be my mother.

I use sign language to to tell Emma, “It might be my mom.” My teacher taught us sign language. She gives me an “OMG” look.  Jackson looks at us like we are the weirdest people alive because he doesn’t understand sign language. We hear footsteps come closer and closer.

“Do you want to open it?” The deep voice asks. I assume it might be a police officer.

“Wait,” my mom says. “My kids could be anywhere. I just saw their bikes outside.”

“If they could be anywhere,” the police officer says, “They could be in here.” I  close my eyes. Liam actually starts hugging me. This has never happened before, so I hug him back. The door creaks open. Without even looking I say, “Mom?!”

Flight

        

Chapter 1

A Day in my Life

While brushing my teeth, I realized this would be the last week of school. Then it would be summertime. Because my younger brother, Jackson, would be at sleepaway camp the whole summer, it would feel like I’d have the house to myself. The absence of him definitely makes the NYC apartment a lot more bearable. Since his school got out before mine, Jackson was already at camp, meaning I could get to school on time for once without having to drop him off first. I stuck my head outside my bedroom window five stories up to test the temperature. It was a sunny day so I grabbed a tank top and shorts from my drawer, put them on and ran out to get some breakfast. My name is Georgia Meriwether and this is about the best summer I’ve ever had.

On the way to school I watched the pigeon man, as I do everyday. He sits on a bench in Central Park covered with bird seed and awaits attention from his frumpy grey friends, as well as tourists and other onlookers who might give a tip. Walking by today, I saw him with his scruffy grey-brown hair spreading the brightly colored seed mixture across his shoulders, while some unusually albino pigeons were pecking aimlessly at his ankles. With his small earnings from tips, he could only afford to buy a pack of trail mix, a small coffee and some more bird seed. I tipped him a dime, as I did everyday and keep on walking.

I arrived at school at 8:00 a.m., right on time, and my teacher, Mr. Pipington, greeted me with a smile.

“Get all the work done that you need to get done,” he said, “Then read right away when you’re done.” Since I hadn’t yet finished my science homework, I sat down and started reading my weekly science book, “Why Can’t Penguins Fly And Other Bird Mysteries.” Sitting there reading, I learned that, according to researchers, the reason for why penguins can’t fly is that penguins are such good swimmers and no bird can excel at both. Then I started wondering why kiwis, emus and ostriches couldn’t fly. I would have to ask Mr.Guarski, our science teacher, later. You see, Mr. Guarski was an ornithologist (bird scientist) before he became a teacher so he’s basically a birdy dictionary.

The bell rang at 8:30, when I had just finished my report. Because I loved 6th grade science class, I hurriedly got up, unlike some of the others, who were intentionally getting up slowly and dropping their books. I hurried down the stairs and stepped into the science lab, breathing in the acrid smell of lizard feces in the process. I sat down at my desk at the front of the room and waited for the rest of the class and Mr. Guarski to enter.

Chapter 2

Rori

Today Mr. Guarski had brought in Rori, his pet cockatoo, for us to watch. He wanted us to take notes on how it behaved as a bird in captivity, then compare it to the birds we saw outside. His cockatoo looked different than the usual white body with yellow crest. It was slightly pinkish and its crest looked like a sunset. There were bright orange and yellow rings of color, spreading outward to the very tips of the bird’s plumage.

“I’m going to let her out so you can see how she acts,” Mr. Guarski said. “You ready Rori?”

Everyone except for Mr. Guarski jumped when the intelligent cockatoo let out a soft caw, as if replying to Mr. Guarski’s question.

“Kids, that’s something to take note of. Please write in your notebooks, ‘Responds to owner’s command,’ ok?”

I scribbled that down and then looked up to see Mr. Guarski opening up the cage. Rori opened up her wings and swooped up and out. She flew around the hanging light then landed back down lightly on the table to peck up the seeds Mr. Guarski had just lain down, then went back up again. Next Mr. Guarski showed us another one of Rori’s tricks. He threw a treat up into the air and Rori swooped up and grabbed it. A piece of my dirty blond hair blew into my face in the rush of wind left behind.

“Now we’re going to let her explore the classroom,” Mr. Guarski said. “Tirana!” he called to my best friend, “Can you and Georgia go around and close any open windows?”

Once we had closed all the windows, we went back to our seats. I watched as the beautiful bird strutted around the classroom, pecking at different chairs, books, rugs and even Ari Lorenza’s head. The whole class, even Ari, cracked up when that happened. We watched the bird in amazement for another fifteen minutes, then I had an idea that would affect the rest of my life. ‘If bats can fly, and they are mammals with solid bones, why can’t humans fly, too? Why hasn’t somebody invented that before?’ I thought about this more at home after school. I was suddenly shaken out of my thoughts by the silence of the kids around me. I looked up and found that I was face to face with Rori. She gave me a questioning look which turned into surprise and then finally settled on a look of peace. I would’ve never thought a bird with such beady black eyes could give a look of peace. The thing that surprised me the most though was that I wasn’t the least bit surprised that the bird was on my desk. Then just as soon as the moment had begun, it ended and class continued as usual.

Chapter 3

My only barrier

When I got home, I crashed on the couch and started thinking. I thought about the way the bird had looked at me. With such unnatural peace but at the same time, natural peace. I thought about the idea I had had earlier. Then I thought, I could be the inventor of human wings. My summer is completely free and I have the time. Maybe I could do it with Tirana. Then I remembered that she would be in Ecuador, visiting her family. My mind was turning into a tornado of thoughts, swirling and swirling and swirling and swir —

“Stop,” I said to myself, accidentally out loud. Then in my head I said, I need to write this down.

I started making a diagram of how I would create the wings. Since bats are the only true flying mammals (not gliding mammals), I used them for inspiration. On my computer, I found thousands of bat pictures; bats hunting, bats hanging, bats eating and even bats pooping in tiny bunny rabbit costumes while nibbling cheese puffs. The only pictures I really needed were the pictures of bats flying. In the pictures of bats flying, I noticed that all of the bats have their bellies down to the ground. I start drawing a horizontal person on my paper. I looked back up at the pictures and studied the wings. A bat’s wings have three bonelike supports embedded within, that prevent the wings from being limp, useless flaps of skin. I drew arms out of my person and then drew a harness connected to wings, big pieces of undecided fabric cut into semi-rectangular shapes. The wings would have fastened sleeves that would go over your arms. Then I drew a few channels of lightweight wood, like the bones in a bat’s wings.

Next I looked up birds. The birds I saw had the same position flying, belly down, but instead of three thick supports, there are many thin supports overlapping, the feathers. I wondered what the difference was because I knew both systems work. I thought “Birds and bats must fly differently because they’re different species.” I looked up some videos of bats in flight and compared them to videos of birds in flight. I found that the birds could soar without much flapping whereas the bats had to flap more often to keep aloft. I went back to my paper and drew the same person but this time I drew them with feathery wings instead of boney and leathery. I decided that I would make the wings this way because: 1. It wouldn’t tire the wearer out as much and 2. Gliding sounded fun.

“I’m home!” my mom called as the door slammed.

“Mom! Mom!” I said. “Look at the drawing I made.” I heard her take off her shoes as she walked over to the couch. She sat down and I started telling her about my idea. After I told her everything I planned and showed her my drawing, she opened her mouth to say something.

“Georgia honey, I don’t think we’re going to be able to do this. It seems impossible. People have tried over many years and still haven’t succeeded. You can do it on your own time, but I’m not going to give you materials to build it. You’re going to have to get them yourself.”

I was about to say, “But it’ll work! I know it will!”

But she cut me off and said, “I’m not going to help you.” And walked off to change out of work clothes.

Chapter 4

Maggie’s Job

It was the last day of school and Ari brought in doughnuts. I was eating my Boston Cream doughnut with sprinkles and getting chocolate all over my face. Today was basically just a day of gathering things to take home at the end of the day. Since today was a half day, I would have time at home to think about what I would do over the summer and how I would put my idea into action without my parents helping me.

At home, I went to my room and thought about how I would get the money to make my wings. Maybe I could do what other average kids would do — have a lemonade stand or sell cookies? But that seemed boring. Maybe I could volunteer? I went to my computer and looked up “jobs for kids in NYC.” I found websites like, “Dog-Walking! A Perfect Job For Kids” or “Help Clean Up NYC — Kids Welcome!” I wanted to know if there was anything involved with birds, because they were my favorite animal and I might be able to learn something new for my project. So I looked up, “Bird sitting jobs” and found a lady who lived in a building across the street from mine. She had an African Grey parrot for a pet and was going on vacation for a month. Therefore, she needed somebody to take care of her pet. Perfect!

I dialed up the phone number and called the lady.

“Hello?” I said. “I’m calling about the bird sitting job.”

“Oh!” a friendly voice replied. “Would you like to come over now? I’m home.”

I agreed, hung up, and walked over. I knocked on the door and a friendly voice answered.

“Wow, I didn’t know you would come so soon.” A nice lady with puffy brown hair remarked, “My name’s Maggie Waterbury, but you can just call me Maggie.”

I told her that I lived just across the street, loved birds, and would love to take care of hers while she was gone. She told me that the pay was $300 for the month, $10 a day. I was amazed because I expected it to be much less and asked her when her trip would start.

“Well, I’m leaving on May 31st, so you can start taking care of her on June 1st.”

That was in two days and a great time to start my project. “How much food do I give her?” I asked.

“You can give Fluffernut one cup of bird seed a day,” Maggie replied.

“Thank you so much!” I said, assuming Fluffernut was the African Grey Parrot.

“No, thank you,” she replied.

At home, excited about the conversation I just had, and how soon I would be able to start my project, I rewarded myself with some chocolate chip cookies from Barney’s, our neighborhood bakery.

Chapter 5

Fluffernut’s Needs

It was a hot day when I walked over to Maggie’s apartment. I could tell summer was truly starting because beads of sweat were falling into my eyes and I was still getting a sunburn, even with SPF 100 sunscreen slathered all over my body. I walked through the door and heard an excited squawk from Fluffernut. I wandered through the house, looking for the parrot and finally found her spacious cage next to the living room couch. Though dull in color, Fluffernut was beautiful. Being completely gray with exceptions of white feathers around the eye and a couple of red ones in the tail, it’s hard to be a beautiful bird. Fluffernut still pulled it off. Her feathers weren’t scruffy. Instead, they were smoothed down in amazing fashion. I stared in awe for a while, then remembered the job at hand: feeding Fluffernut. I walked into the kitchen, which I found when looking for Fluffernut, and pulled a list from Maggie out of my pocket:

Fluffernut’s Needs:

  1. Give one cup of food to Fluffernut each day
  2. Give one cup of water to Fluffernut each day
  3. Clean Fluffernut’s cage once a week
  4. Let fluffernut fly around living room for five minutes each day

I went into the kitchen and find a measuring cup sitting on the counter. I filled it with seed and then poured it into the bowl labeled ‘food’. Then I filled the measuring cup up once again, this time with water, and poured it into the bowl labeled ‘water’. I went into the living room, set the food and water bowls down, then closed all the windows and the door. I bent down to open Fluffernut’s cage, opened it, and let her fly around the living room. I set a timer on my watch for five minutes. Once that five minutes had passed, I went to catch Fluffernut and found that she was already coming down toward me. She must have an inner timer I thought. I caught her and gently put her back in the cage.

“I’ll see you tomorrow!” I called to Fluffernut, even though I knew she wouldn’t reply.

Chapter 6

Putting my Project to Action

On Friday I received an email from Maggie saying that a $70 check should arrive soon, hopefully on Sunday afternoon. I received the check on Saturday but that was fine with me. Actually better for me, now I could start making my wings sooner than later.

“I’m going to out!” I called to my mom who, at the moment, was making sausages for dinner.

“Out to where?!” she called back.

“The store!” I replied.

“That’s fine with me just as long as you come back before 7:15!” Perfect. It was 6:45 so I would have a whole half an hour to gather my materials.

At John and Susan’s, the hardware store, the first thing I saw was the burnt out light. It was surprising because one of the prominent things they sold was light bulbs. Then Susan came up to me and greeted me.

“Hello, are you looking for anything in particular?” she asked “We have metal, wood, plastic and even fabric.”

“That’s perfect,” I replied “What’s the most lightweight wood you have?”

“Ummm…” She hesitated “Ah! We have balsa wood. It’s only 7.5 pounds per cubic foot. Would you like me to lead you to where it is?”

“That would be great, thank you!” I said as she led me to an aisle labeled ‘Wood.’ Since there were so many shapes, sizes and types of wood, the wood aisle was a very wide, long aisle. Standing at the entrance of the aisle, I could see sections like ‘boards,’ ‘planks’ and ‘posts.’

“What shape of wood are you looking for?” Susan asked “As you can see, our store has lots of variety.”

“I’m looking for some sort of thin stick…” I trailed off, not knowing what I was looking for was called.

“Right this way,” she said, leading me to the section with a sign labeled ‘Rods’.

I mind slapped myself. Mind slapping was something my mom and I made up a couple of years ago. It meant to mentally slap yourself in the face instead of physically to avoid the pain and embarrassment.

“Thank you!” I counted out 30 balsa wood rods, 15 per wing, and continued, “I’m also looking for some fabric. What’s the strongest you have?”

“Well we have kevlar, it’s strong and light,” she replied, “Would you like me to lead you there?”

“That’s great!” I said, “And yeah, could you take me there, I really don’t know my way around this place.” I checked my watch and saw that I had only spent ten minutes of my time. 20 minutes before I had to go home.

The checkout was really easy and John was a really nice guy. I was surprised to find that the total cost was only $40. That meant I would still have money for more materials and even more money after the month was up. Then I remembered I only had seven minutes left to get home so I hurried back.

Chapter 7

Making Wings

I got home at 7:10, giving me just enough time to find a place for my load before dinner. I ran upstairs to my bedroom and put my bags on my desk. I realized I’d forgotten to take off my shoes, and ran back down to return them to the mudroom.

After a dinner of potatoes and sausages, I went upstairs to start my project. I wondered if I should cover the wings with feathers, like a bird. I decided not to because it would make the wings heavier and create drag. The first thing I did was design a harness. The harness was going to be a waist loop and an under-leg strap with straps up the sides of the body that attached to the wings. I cut out a loop for my waist and measured out one strap of kevlar to go under my legs. Then I measured up my arms to make the straps that would go under them.

Once I had finished cutting everything out and sewing it together, I tried my harness on. The underarm straps were too long so I shortened them to a perfect length. Now that the harness was done, I continued on to the wings. I split my basla rods into two groups of fifteen. I arranged the rods in a pattern that made them from the armpit outward. Next I cut out a piece of kevlar in a squarish shape. I put the rods on top and then cut out another piece identical to the previous one. Then I sewed the two pieces together with the rods inside and then sewed around the rods to keep them in place. The first wing was done. I repeated this process on the next wing and then made sleeves for my arms. I wrapped a piece of fabric around my arm and then did it again for my other arm. Then I attached everything together. Sewing the arm pieces to the underarm straps and the wings and then sewing the wings to the underarm straps. Now that everything was together, I tried it on. It felt surprisingly light, like I could flap my wings now and be flying.

“Georgia!” my mom suddenly called, “The ice cream’s out and it’ll melt if you don’t come and get it!”

I hurried downstairs and found a bowl of chocolate ice cream waiting for me.

Chapter 8

Flight

I sat up in my bed, ready for the day. The day I would prove humans could fly with wings if they’re created right. I jumped up, changed out of my pajamas and went out to have a quick breakfast of cornflakes. After, I went straight back to my room.

I slowly slipped my legs into the harness. I slowly slipped my arms into the sleeves. I wanted to try it fast but I also wanted to be careful. I decided I would start by jumping off the bed. I climbed up onto the bed and jumped. Time slowed down. I flapped my wings but that, too, happened in slow motion. I started to go down but I flapped harder and went up, up, up. I could now touch the ceiling. My wings were working! Now that I had gotten the hang of it, flying was easy. I was figuring out how to turn already. I wondered if I could go up straight from the ground. I flapped less and less until my toes touched the ground. Then I started flapping again and I went up! I decided to go downstairs to prove my mom wrong. Humans flying with wings is possible!

When my mom saw me, she jumped. She obviously didn’t think I would actually make wings. My dad, not even knowing about my plan, was even more surprised to see me like this.

“How did….” my mom sputtered.

“I’ll tell you,” I say, “Just after I show you this.”

I swooped off the ground like it was no big deal. But inside I felt super proud. My parents stared in awe as I flew around the living room.

I landed and then told them the whole story. From the beginning of the day that I had the idea to when I first flew.

Later that day I went outside to test it.

“You’re gonna be famous!” many people said to me.

I just nodded in acknowledgement and flew back up into the sky. It was an amazing feeling to be soaring over NYC and I realized that birds are very lucky animals.

When the Two Worlds Came Together 2

         

Chapter 1

It was the same as last time, but now I was in an enormous oven.

It started exactly a year after our last war. I was in the park with Bryan, Eliza, and my new baby sister April. April was two months old. She was long and had dark brown hair and green eyes. In my opinion, she was the most beautiful baby. In her hand she had a stuffed animal that we called “magical unicorn.” She brought it everywhere.

We were talking about the dance next week. Bryan and I were finally together and he had asked me about it. The most popular boy in the grade, Liam, had asked Eliza so now we were going on a double date tonight. I was so excited. This was going to be my first dance!

Suddenly, we heard a loud noise overhead and a person in all black came down on a long skinny rope and grabbed Eliza and Bryan by their waists. I started to run away, holding April in my arms, but I was grabbed and pulled up too. What was going on? What did I do? Was this some sort of punishment? I was scared out of my mind. We were brought onto a large plane. I felt something squirting on my face, and then I blacked out.

I woke up about an hour later. We were in a dark room and it was all black. April was crying softly, and I could sort of make out the shadows of my friends.

“Are you guys there?” I whispered.

“Yes,” they responded.

At the moment, I was terrified of what was going to happen to us. But, mostly, I was worried about what was going to happen to April. What did a tiny baby do to deserve this?

“We need to get out of here,” I said. And that was when the human walked into our room.

“Come with me,” he said.

He was about my height, skinny, and had jet black hair sticking up. Then I recognized him. He was Al Mary. He was the famous criminal who had just broken out of the highest security prison in Pennsylvania! The prison was Alcatraz 2. I knew if we didn’t follow him, then he would kill us. So, I walked out of the room…

Chapter 2

He walked into a glass room and sunlight poured in. The clock on the wall showed us that we had been asleep for thirteen hours. I bet our parents were very worried about us. I thought about what they were doing right now. They could have been looking for us, putting up signs, and calling our other friends. I looked down and immediately felt nauseous because, as some of you know, I am deathly afraid of heights. We were at least 300 feet above our city. I reached out for Eliza’s hand. M.R.S. Rose walked into the room. Now, thank God, we were going to be okay!

M.R.S. Rose was our third grade teacher. Even though she was my favorite teacher, why was she here? Was she the one who kidnapped me?

“Welcome,” she said in an ice cold voice. “You will join us or die.”

“What the heck does that mean?” asked Bryan.

“Why did you take us?” said Eliza.

“Because you guys are the strongest kids I know. I didn’t mean to bring the baby along. But now I realize that I can use her for ransom! Or kill her!” responded M.R.S. Rose.

We were thrown back into the dark room after I started begging for a phone call with our parents. Now, I remember seeing M.R.S. Rose talking on the phone during lunch and recess. Thoughts were racing through my head all at the same time. I really didn’t want to work with M.R.S. Rose, but what choice did I have? If I didn’t join, April would be killed. I couldn’t risk that. Also, I really wanted to know what M.R.S. Rose was doing. That was when I thought of my plan.

After checking for video cameras and microphones, I told everyone my plan.

“We are going to join M.R.S. Rose. And once we know of her plan, we are going to find a phone to call our parents. It’s not very complicated, but it is risky,” I said.

“That sounds great,” said Eliza.

“I hope it will work,” I replied.

Chapter 3

“We swear on the life of April that we will follow your orders and do as you say,” we said in unison.

“Great,” said M.R.S. Rose. “Now come and get your uniforms.”

We walked into the other room and were horrified by what we saw. Bryan was supposed to wear black pants, fancy shoes, and a white top. Emily and I were going to be forced to wear the shortest pink skirts we had ever seen. We were supposed to wear a white top too. It was like we were playing dress-up or something. After we had changed, one of the guards motioned for us to follow him into a deep dark tunnel. We did.

We came out on the other side of the plane. I had a really good view of the plane. It was silver and very big. It was sort of like a big house with windows everywhere, but there were no doors and there was an open end. We were then told to stand guard and make sure that no one tried to come on the plane for a few hours. April was to stay with us and not make a sound. If not, we would be in trouble. We stood there for hours. We watched the sun go down. Finally, people brought us some dinner. After gobbling it down, we kept watching the end of the plane. As the clock reached 10 p.m., another guard came out and told us that we would be here for the rest of the night. He walked off. Then Bryan saw the phone.

The phone was just sitting there on a table in the corner of the room. It was camouflaged and very big.

“We should call right away,” said Eliza excitedly.

“No. We need to know M.R.S. Rose’s plan,” said Bryan.

“We’ll call when we learn more,” I said.

The next morning we found out more.

“Come in my darling children,” a woman said. “My name is M.R.S. Miller. I am the general here and I will be telling you our plan.”

Just my luck, I thought. After this, we can go back and call our parents.

“Our goal is to take over the Earth,” she said. “M.R.S. Rose is our leader. We do whatever she wants. She promised that she would give each group a piece of land to rule and do whatever we want with. All of you people against us will be our prisoners. Now, in one week we are going to go down and take over. And this is going to happen with war…”

We walked back to our post at the end of the ship. We had decided that I would make the call. Bryan and Eliza would keep watch. We ran to our places and I picked up the phone. It started beeping. I knew what that meant. I slammed down the phone and groaned.

“It’s broken,” I said.

After our shift, we walked back to our new room. We had changed back into our normal clothes.

I said to them, “Guys, there is no way our parents with be able to help us. We need to escape ourselves…”

***

Later that night we had another shift. We started walking back to our post when I saw something that caught my eye. Three parachutes were there and could be useful to jump out of the plane. This was our chance to escape.

“Look guys, parachutes,” I said. “We can use them to jump off of the plane.”

“Great idea, Anna,” said Bryan. He kissed me on the lips softly.

“Get a room,” said Eliza.

I pushed away. Wow, that was exciting! Then I remembered what we were about to do.

I thought to myself, This is going to be terrifying! “Aaaahhh,” I shouted.

“Shhh,” whispered Eliza.

We hadn’t even jumped. We checked the parachutes, got ourselves strapped in, and were about to jump. Then we heard the pounding of footsteps behind us. It was the guards, and they had heard me!

“Jump,” Bryan shouted. We grabbed onto each other’s hands and jumped as if there was no tomorrow!

“Wahooo!” we all shouted.

I held onto April as hard as I could. I kept my eyes closed. We were going as fast as a cheetah.

As we got closer to the ground Eliza yelled out, “Pull the yellow tab.”

When we did, we gradually slowed down and landed on the ground. I thought to myself, That was horrible!

Chapter 4

We started walking towards the main road. It was about a mile away from our house. But we had to hurry. We didn’t want M.R.S. Rose catching up. We started running and we finally reached my house. But where was my family?

We walked around to the back of the house and found all of our families talking to the police. They ran towards us and brought us into a group hug.

“Where have you been?” shouted my mother.

“We were worried sick,” my father said.

“Yeah,” said Bryan’s mother. “We want to know everything.”

We went into the house and told the story.

***

“We need to go tell the mayor,” said Bryan’s father. “He will know what to do.”

We decided that Bryan, Eliza, my mother, Bryan’s father, and I would go, and everyone else would stay at the house. After a long car ride with lots of traffic, we reached the mayor’s office. After waiting, (again!) for an hour, the mayor called us inside.

The mayor was a big man who was very serious but loved children and always listened to people’s problems. So, we told him what had happened to us.

He listened carefully and said, “This is a big problem. We need to focus on this immediately. But we need help. M.R.S. Rose has already gotten at least half of the world’s population on her side because of all the brainwashed criminals. They’re probably spread out everywhere, So we’re going to need the help of our good friends the aliens and the demons…”

Chapter 5

“Can we go and find them?” I asked.

“Yes,” said the mayor. “But you need the help of your friends Emily, Jason and Leo. You are all so strong together. You can get anything done. We need you.”

Those words made me want to help more. I knew I would do anything to help.

That night, we put together a bag of all the stuff we would need to drive there: food, phones and clothes. We also had knives just in case we had to fight. I’d used them before. At dawn the next morning we started walking to the entrance of the demons main cave. The demons lived in the mantle of the Earth. It would take us three days to drive there and another three days to drive to the alien’s spaceship landing spot. This was going to be a long trip!

The next morning we were all shouting.

“No it’s not!” she said.

“Yes it is!” he said.

“No it’s not” she said.

“Shut up guys,” I shouted. ““Emily is right. That is Connecticut. Jason, please be quiet.”

“Hey look, there’s a metamorphic rock. Metamorphic rocks have been under the Earth in the mantle unlike humans. Humans would not be able to stand the heat,” Jason said.

I turned around and pulled the pointing hand out of the baggage. “Thomas, what the heck are you doing here?” I asked.

“Ummm, I wanted to come with you,” he said.

“Do Mom and Dad know?” I asked.

“Yeah, I left them a note. And Ki-Ki’s parents know too.” he said,

“Wait, why would my parents know too?” asked Bryan.

“Because Ki-Ki and Maya are here with me too!” he said.

“Why did you bring them!?!” asked Emily.

“Because they wanted to come,” Thomas said.

Maya and Ki-Ki popped out.

“Well it’s too late to go back now. I’ll call our parents and let them know that we have the little ones,” I said.

***

After the phone call, we kept on driving. Two hours later, we pulled up to a deep looking cave. We got out of the car and started walking inside.

“Welcome,” said a deep dark voice, “to the diamond caves. We are the demons. What may we do for you?”

“Hello, we are here to see your leader,” I said. “Please tell him that it’s Anna and friends here.”

We heard a crackle and then footsteps. Then a demon walked up to us.

“Hi Anna! Remember me?” she asked.

“Of course,” I replied. “You’re Amelia, the demon who showed me the way to your leader last time.”

“Yeah,” she said. “You remember me! Now follow me and I’ll take you to my leader.”

Chapter 6

We walked down a tunnel and into a very light room. In that room sat the demon leader. He was reading a big book that had writing on the cover: A Demon’s Guide to Eating Healthy. I didn’t know that demons could even read!

“Hi sir,” said Emily. “We have been sent to talk with you about joining us in a fight.”

“Sit down. Sit down,” said the demon. “Please call me Raymond. Now tell me what this fight is about.”

After explaining everything to Raymond, we bartered with him. “We will join you,” Raymond said, “if next time we are in a fight you will join us.”

“Agreed,” Jason said. “But we need you now.”

“Then let me just rally up my troops and we will follow you,” said Raymond. “But don’t you think that we should get the aliens on our side also?”

I responded, “And that’s where we’re going next…”

Again after a 3 hour drive, with all of the demon troops following us, we reached the aliens’ landing spot. It was a dark brown color with no windows. It was in the shape of a circle. After telling the demons to wait there, we walked into the building. We were pulled up into what looked like a tornado! It pulled us onto the spaceship and plopped us down on the ground. We were all too stunned to say anything.

“Welcome to the alien spaceship, please state why you are here. My name is Riley and I want to know all about you.”

“Hi,” said Emily. “We need your help. We need to talk to your leader.”

***

“Come in,” shouted a squeaky loud voice. “So, Anna and friends, welcome back. What may I be able to do for you?”

“We need your help sir,” said Jason. “Can you give us your army to fight against half of the humans?”

“Of course,” he responded. “For a price. We will one day need your help too. So if we ever need to fight against anyone then we need your army to help us.”

“Agreed,” said Eliza. “But we need you now…”

Chapter 7

“We’re back!” we shouted.

“Welcome,” said the mayor. “I see you have brought our good friends with you. Let us get you comfortable. We have emptied two hotels for you. Please take a room and enjoy while I talk to the children in my office. We will meet tomorrow outside the Ritz Hotel. Goodbye.”

And with that they all left and we were alone with the mayor. “Now tell me,” he said. “What did they want in return?”

We told the mayor everything. “Wow,” he said. Well if that’s what they want then that’s what we’ll give them.”

So we left and went home to rest for tomorrow. “You’re back,” shouted my parents. “Maya and Thomas, don’t you ever do that again. We almost called the police.

“Sorry,” they said. “We won’t do it again.”

“Now go upstairs and get ready for bed,” said my mother. “And we want to talk to you two.” As soon as they left, Jason and I started whining, “We didn’t do anything, it wasn’t our fault, they snuck into the car by themselves.”

“Oh don’t worry,” said my father. “All we wanted to say is, you will not be fighting in this war.

***

At midnight Jason snuck into my room and sat on the bed. “Anna, Anna, wake up.”

“What the heck Jason,” I whispered. “It’s the middle of the night and you’re going to wake up the whole neighborhood.”

“Sorry,” he said. “But we need to talk. I’m going to war…”

“No You Can’t,” I said. “Mom and Dad won’t let you.”

“I don’t care,” he responded. “I’m leaving.” And he stomped out of the room. Whatever, I thought to myself, I’ll talk some sense to him in the morning…  

Chapter 8

The next morning I woke up to police sirens outside of the house. I ran out of my room and downstairs.

“Stop,” said Maya. “Mommy said you need to go get April. Then we get to watch TV!”

“OK,” I said. “But what’s going on?”

“I don’t know but Mommy said to —”

“Yeah, yeah, yeah, I get it,” I yelled. I ran upstairs and grabbed the kids. Then I ran back down plopped Maya and Thomas down in front of the TV and ran outside. And what I saw I will never forget.

That morning I fainted when I saw him.  There was blood everywhere. So much blood. I woke up two minutes later. Lying on the ground was Jason. The paramedics were working on him. From the looks of it, he had been hit by a car. One of the paramedics then shouted, “We’re losing him, we need to get to the hospital.”

“Run inside Anna,” shouted my dad. “Grab your sister and brother and come with us.”

At the hospital they wheeled him into the emergency room. We ran in after him. By this point I was freaked out. I was thinking to myself, who has done this? What had happened? When had this happened? And then I realized that because I had told him he couldn’t join the army. He had run away. He had RUN AWAY!!!!

Three hours later the surgery was done. Jason was unconscious but stable. He would never be able to move his left arm again. But thankfully that was all. He had an IV, a broken leg in three places, and his heart had to be re-started twice. He had six broken ribs too. But other than that he would be alright. It turns out the guys in the car who had hit him were drunk. They were now in jail. The Mayor’s orders. And the fight with M.R.S. Rose was starting tomorrow…

Chapter 9

“And now we fight!” shouted the Mayor. And the troops charged forwards! I was standing up next to the Mayor with Eliza, Emily, Leo and Bryan. Everyone except Jason who was still in the hospital. The armies were going to meet M.R.S. Rose and her army. All of our parents had told us to not get involved in the fight. And after what had happened to Jason, we all agreed. Now we were about to go have lunch with the Mayor. But, just then we were grabbed by three men in ninja outfits and pulled onto M.R.S. Rose’s plane. Again…

“Where are we?” shouted the mayor.

“Shhh,” said Eliza. “We’re back on M.R.S. Rose’s plane. We need to find a way to get off.”

“Hey look,” said Leo, “There’s a door. We can see where it leads.” We walked towards it and Bryan put his hand on it.

“Ouch!” he shouted. “It’s electric. There’s no way that we’ll get out now.” And that’s when the door opened.

“Welcome back,” said M.R.S. Miller. “And for those who don’t know me, I am the general here. And you will now follow me.” We walked into a room with flowers everywhere. And sitting at a table was M.R.S. Rose.

“Hi kids,” she said. “Come, follow me.” We walked down another hallway and into a side room that we had missed before. In the room I saw something that terrified me.

A giant oven.

Chapter 10

“Nooooo,” I shouted. I can’t go in there. I’m claustrophobic!”

“And that’s why you’re going in there,” said M.R.S. Rose. “Until the mayor surrenders I will keep you in there.”

We walked into it and she closed the door. I was pushed into the middle of it. It was at least 100 degrees In there. As M.R.S. Rose walked out of the room she said, “And if you don’t surrender then you will die.” And she slammed the door behind her.

“Come on Leo, you can do it!” I shouted. But just as I said that Eliza and Bryan both fainted because it was now at least 125 degrees.

“Keep on going,” said the Mayor. “Soon I’m going to faint too.”

“I got it,” Leo whispered. And the door clicked open. We dragged Eliza and Bryan outside and closed the door. A few minutes later Eliza and Bryan woke up and we walked into the hallway. And ran right into M.R.S. Rose.

“HAHAHA! Look at this, M.R.S. Rose,” I said. “We’re winning the war and we’ve escaped. You can see now that we are going to win this war.”

“Yes children, you’re right,” she said. “So now I will give up and give you the win and the world.” And with that she pulled out a knife and said, “I have never been good enough for this world, for my parents, for my students, and for anything. So now I say good-bye.” And with that she stuck the knife in her heart and fell to the ground.

And at that second, she was gone.

Chapter 11

I sat in my room for the rest of the day. The funeral had been horrible. And the worst part, M.R.S. Rose was dead, and I hadn’t done anything to stop her. I knew that I would live with this forever. But right now I needed to think of all the good things that M.R.S. Rose had done for me and all of the other kids she had taught. She had been a good person till the depression and the craziness had hit her. I would remember her forever. And I hope other people would too. I heard a knock on the door and I ran downstairs. There were Eliza and Bryan. I’m so lucky to have them. And now my life would be back to normal.

A Grimm Life

April 11, 2006.

It was cloudy day and it looked like it was about to rain. I, Violet, was just getting out of school and going home. My mother worked at the Mount Sinai as a nurse, so she always got home from work late. Ever since my father died on a business trip, Mom has had to work extra hard for money to help the family. I have a little brother named Zack and a golden retriever named Butterscotch. So when I got home my brother was watching my favorite Disney movie, Aladdin, so I started watching too. It is the best Disney movie ever, in my opinion.

Everything was normal until the TV got blurry and turned off. Then it sprung back to life but it was on a channel that neither I nor my brother had seen before. The man on the screen was tall and wearing a black cloak. He reminded me of Jafar the evil sorcerer from Aladdin the Disney movie. He was carrying a staff with a snake head.

The strange man started speaking in some kind of foreign language and then he said “You will never stop me, Grimm family.”

Then I got scared. Grimm was my father’s last name. How did that man know me? I momentarily forgot that my brother was still in the room. I kept watching until he screamed. I looked back at him, and he was petrified and pointing behind me. Then I heard a crash, so I turned around and I saw a red parrot holding a book in his beak. Then I noticed that the book wasn’t just any book, it was the last gift my father left for me before he died. He said not to open it until the secret was revealed. I realized that the parrot looked like Iago, also from Aladdin. All of this was so weird I just wanted to collapse on my bed and wake up and this would all just be some nightmare like the ones I got when I was younger. Then the ground started to shake and my brother started crying. I wished my mom was here to comfort me. I ran over to Zack’s room, but he wasn’t there anymore. Then a creepy shadow appeared behind me and I screamed. The figure covered my mouth and tied my hands, and then took me away. Blackout!

When I woke up I wasn’t in my room and I couldn’t see Zack. I recognized that I was in a rose garden. I heard someone talking so I decided to go ask where I was. I walked inside a castle and I found the person who was speaking. I soon realized she was not a person but a teapot, like the one from Beauty and the Beast.

I was desperate to find my brother, so I asked the teapot anyway, “Hello, have you seen a little boy with brown hair and hazel eyes?”

The teapot looked at me and shrieked, “Aren’t you a Grimm descendant?”

This is crazy, I thought. Even a teapot knows my last name. “How do you know my last name?” I asked the teapot.

“Because your father was the king of Fairyland, duh.” And that was the end of the line for me. First a creepy man communicates to me via TV channel, then my brother disappears, and then I find out my dad was a king of a make-believe land. I wished I was at home in my bed watching TV with Zack and Mom and laughing over Zack trying to catch popcorn in his mouth while Mom frantically tried to clean it all up.

I asked the teapot who the king of Fairyland was currently and she said, “The sultan of Agrabah, or as most people know him, Jasmine’s father.”

“Mrs. Potts,” I heard a singsong voice call, “may you please help set the table?”

I thanked the teapot and set off to find my brother. I had a strange feeling someone was watching me, but when I turned around no one was there but a snake with glimmering emerald eyes. It was strange, but I had no proof that someone was watching me.

***

I got so tired after walking for an hour. I had seen many famous fictional landmarks such as Sleeping Beauty’s palace and Rapunzel’s tower. When I saw Rapunzel’s tower I heard a strange noise. It’s probably nothing serious, I thought. It’s Fairyland. It was amazing but I was exhausted. I saw a little cottage that looked very cozy and decided to knock on the door and ask if I could stay the night.

When I knocked on the door a young little girl with blonde hair answered with a whimper. She said, “I’m sorry, I didn’t know who owned this house. I did not mean to intrude.”

“Wait, did you say ‘intrude?’” I asked suspiciously. “Because this isn’t my house.”

Her eyes got big. “So the so-called rumor that people were speaking about, with the bears, was true?” she asked, frightened.

“Possibly,” I said reluctantly. I did not want to scare the little girl.

Then I hear a loud growl and a stomp and I rushed to hide but the little girl was not quick enough. There were three bears standing in the doorway and they started chasing the little girl, which I figured out was Goldilocks. While that went on for about a few hours I decided to look around for a bit. I was looking through some drawers, and then found a book that looked very familiar. It was my father’s book!

How did it get here? I wondered. I quickly shoved the book in my bag and took off. I felt kinda bad for leaving Goldilocks there to deal with those bears. But that feeling wore off soon enough. When I looked at the note on the notebook it had changed. Now it said, Open me. Now is the right time.

I opened the notebook and a piece of paper fell out. I picked it up and saw that it was a map of Fairyland. It showed every place in all of Fairyland, even secret passages. I was very hungry so I went to the ice cream store. I ordered a mint chocolate chip ice cream and continued on my journey to the palace of the sultan.

I was walking when I ran into a lady with a fur coat and a weird accent. She was chasing some poor puppies all around the cornfield. So I just crept away. I was getting really nervous. What if they had killed Zack already? What if they were torturing him? It was too gruesome to think about. I wish it was me who was taken, and not him. He was too young to deal with this kind of stuff. I just wanted to get to the palace, tell the king what happened, and get it all fixed. So I finally reached the palace.

“It looks exactly like it does in the movie,” I muttered. The palace was big, white, and very welcoming. I felt like a princess.

“What was that?” A familiar voice said. It was the teapot.

“Oh hi,” I said in a less than enthusiastic voice. The teapot was very bubbly and talkative (not my favorite qualities).

She said, “I was thinking, how ‘bout if I was your guide to the palace?”

I was in a horrible mood so I said the worst possible answer. “Sure.”

So the teapot and I kept on walking to the sultan’s castle. Mrs. Potts talked about every landmark we passed. Luckily we got there before I took dire measures. I practically ran to the castle door. But that seemed too easy. I was right. There were two rows of guards once I entered the castle.

“Halt. What is your name, madame?” said the guard.

“I’m Violet Grimm,” I replied in a confident voice. The second I said my last name all of the guards gasped. They all bowed and apologized for doubting me, and I requested to see the king. The head guard personally escorted me to the king’s throne room. Once I saw the king’s throne room it was my turn to gasp.

Oh my gosh. The whole room was covered in turquoise and diamond jewels. If I had less than half of those jewels it would solve our family’s money problems. Then I heard a deep voice which broke me out of my “trance.” I quickly came back to reality and rushed to ask my question.

“Excuse me, I was wondering could you help me find my brother. Someone kidnapped him. My name is Violet Grimm and my brother is Zack Grimm. A man in a tall black cloak and holding a snake staff took me here but I don’t know who took my brother or where he is.”

His face turned from smiling to a big worried frown. “That person that took your brother was a group of fairytale villains called the VKN (Villain Kidnappers) and the head of that society is Maleficent but she makes Jafar do all the work.”

“Ugh, that Jafar. What a traitor,” said the king, disgusted. “I will definitely help you find your brother. In fact, those villains have been capturing people all over Fairyland. I’ve been trying to stop them for a long time.”

“I have a map of Fairyland so if we need it, we can find shortcuts,” I said.

The sultan was very surprised. “I thought there were only two copies of those! And I have one of them…. How did you get it?”

“My father was the old king, so I got it from his notebook,” I said.

The sultan had a look of surprise on his face, but then quickly shook it off.

“I heard a rumor that Jafar’s hideout was in the Cave of Wonders. Luckily that’s not very far from here. I can arrange some transportation.”

One hour later….

I couldn’t believe we finally reached the Cave of Wonders! The cave looked exactly like it was shown in the movie –– a giant tiger head with an opening mouth for the entrance. The cave was as big as the palace. I was feeling overwhelmed.

When we entered, we heard a deep, scary voice that said, “Only the Chosen One can enter.”

The king told me to enter and when I did, the cave said, “You are the Chosen One.”

When I entered, the cave collapsed and the opening closed. I felt very alarmed.

I tried to make the most of it, but there was nothing to see the positive side of anything in here. All that was left to do was wait until someone came to save me from this evil cave. So I decided to look around, I mean I was in a cave full of gold.

I was looking around when I tripped over something. When I looked down I found a lamp. I almost cried tears of joy. I wouldn’t be trapped here for the rest of my life. I rubbed the lamp and out came the infamous blue genie. I shouted as fast as I could have, “Genie I wish to get out of this cave.”

“Your wish is my command, madame,” said the genie in a mocking voice. And with a snap of his fingers we were back outside.

Genie said, “You only have two more wishes left.”

“Okay,” I said cautiously. I rushed back to the palace, eager to tell the sultan who I had found. When I got back to the palace, the sultan looked like he had some good news to tell me too.

“We caught Jafar and asked him where your brother was. He told us the location. He is in Rapunzel’s tower. We can head there tomorrow.”

“I also have some good news. I found the genie!” I said.

“Genie, can you help us?”

“I would get your brother, but there is a shield that blocks my magic around the tower,” said the genie. “It’s practically impossible to get in. If you want help to find a way to get into that tower, you should ask Rapunzel herself.”

I said, “That’s a good idea! We will find her tomorrow.”

They headed into a limo to go to Rapunzel’s palace.

***

When they walked into the door, there were a few guards standing in their way.

The guards all stood in a semi-circle, blocking the doorway. One of them said, “No one can enter but Rapunzel’s relatives, or if you have been requested.”

The King whispered to Violet, “I got this.”

The King walked up to the guards and said, “I am the king of Fairyland. You must let me in.”

Some of the guards looked scared but the head guard stayed put. The sultan got very angry and ordered him to leave. Finally, Rapunzel walked out of her door and said, “It’s okay. They must come in.”

Rapunzel had very long, blonde hair and was wearing a light purple dress and a flower crown. She invited them in with a smile.

“So what did you want to talk about? I have a very busy schedule.”

I said, “We wanted to know how you were supposed to get into your old tower.”

Rapunzel’s smile slowly changed into a frown. “Why would you want to get up there?” she said.

The sultan replied with a grim frown. “Her poor brother is trapped up there by Maleficent and Jafar. Luckily we captured Jafar but Maleficent is still loose. We want to get her brother out of there before he gets hurt.”

“I of all people would know how that feels. I will come with you. And you’ll need a rope.”

“Thanks a lot for all you have done for me,” Violet said gratefully.

***

We (the sultan, genie, Rapunzel, and I) finally reached Rapunzel’s old tower. I remembered that weird noise that was coming from Rapunzel’s tower. It was Zack. I called his name and I heard a muffled reply. I deciphered his words to be saying, “Help me, Violet!”

I yelled for Rapunzel to help set up the rope. I told Zack to catch the rope when he hears the word “CATCH!”

5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

“CATCH!”

Zack caught the rope and slide down.

When he got down, I gave him a big hug.

I told him about everything that happen and at the end his facial expression was so funny. It was a cross between scared and relieved. I was so happy to have him back. I remembered about my two wishes left. “Genie, my second wish is to make Zack forget about everything that happened in Fairyland,” I said. “I will miss you guys so much. I had so much fun here in Fairyland.”

The sultan said, “I just realized something. You are the rightful heir to the Fairyland throne.”

“Oh my gosh. I didn’t notice that,” I said. “We can be co-rulers” I said with a smile. “But I will need a way to transport here without being kidnapped,” I said.

“Of course,” said the king. He handed me a snowglobe with a mini map of Fairyland in it. “Whenever you shake the snowglobe, you will transport here.”

“Genie, my last wish is for you to transport us home.”

Blackout. When I opened my eyes we were home. It was my happily ever after.

The Annoying Ravens

James was getting tired of the exploding raven. The first time it had appeared, he had been in the shower. Then… boom.

The raven had appeared in an explosion of feathers. Nearly losing his balance, James stumbled backwards, hitting his head on the wall of the shower. Then, he grabbed the shower head, cocking it back like a baseball bat, and aimed at what looked like was the center of the explosion. To his surprise, a rather fat raven emerged. The shower head was already on its way. Then, the shower head suddenly stopped, jarring his arm. “Now, now,” the raven scolded. “It would be an awful shame if I had to kill you.” James was so surprised that he dropped the shower club. Then he punched the raven, and the world turned upside-down.

“Will he be okay?” he heard his mom ask in a worried tone.

“We don’t know,” he heard someone say. James thought of leaping up and saying “Ta-Da!” or pretending to be dying and then asking for infinite video game time. Then he realized that in the state his parents were in, they might take it rather emotionally. So instead, he just opened his eyelids. Then he fainted.

When he came to, he was scared to open his eyes. When he did, it was the same as before. His vision was different. At least he still had color, but his vision was like being inside Ironman’s suit. In other words, his vision was sharper, and had more detail. He was back at home. He didn’t know why, but he guessed the doctors thought he was better. Then he saw the raven in the backyard. His rage began to build up, except this time it felt like he was channeling something unearthly and powerful. He stepped out of the house and his vision focused on the raven. No, not the raven. Then he realized that his new ultra-vision 2000 was warning him. A orange glow was building in the beast’s maw. Then a beam of highly concentrated fire erupted from its mouth. Wow, James thought, Nice weapon. Then he concentrated extra hard on the beam of fire, pointed his finger at it, and lightning began pouring from his finger towards the beam of fire.

The lightning hit the beam of fire, splitting it in half. Fire kept on pouring from the raven’s mouth and lightning kept on coming from James’ finger. The lightning and fire were at a standstill in the middle.Then, James leaped up, and to his surprise kept on going. I got a really cool makeover, James thought and dived at the raven. The raven pointed its mouth at James again, and fired. Then James dived to the left and incinerated the raven with his lightning. Then, he saw a police officer point his gun at him.

“Hands up!”

James couldn’t control his rage. He just had a gut feeling that this man had helped tell the raven to attack him. He whirled around, dropped like a stone, and incinerated the policeman. Then he banked left and flew of into the sunset.

Congratulation, James, James thought, You’re now an official enemy of the USA! The US had declared war on him, calling him a mutant, a murderer and a terrorist. James thought this was an exaggeration. After all, he had only blown up three factories that were producing anti-mutant weaponry.

Then, James heard a slight sound, maybe a pebble dislodged, or someone breathing. He threw himself on the ground just as a jagged lightning bolt passed over him. It did not let up. Using his elbows and forearms, James dragged himself behind a rock. Peeking around the corner, he saw a boy around his age staring at the rock. He’s too focused on it, James realized.

Slowly, making sure that he couldn’t see the other boy, James crawled backwards to a distant circle of shrubs, then started circling back towards the other boy, being careful to stay out of his sight. Then, when he was behind him, James jumped on him.

James fell on empty air.

Whirling around in a crouch, James whirled around and took a bolt on the leg. James backflipped over a boulder. Then, in the few seconds that he had, he concentrated. To his surprise, the charred skin started to grow back, leaving him drained. James tried lightning, but it didn’t work. Flying didn’t work either. I’m too drained to use my powers, James realized. Then he had an idea. If the boy was like him, his senses must be as sharp. James threw a rock at a trunk. The boy looked back over his shoulder just one fleeting glance and James tackled him. They hit the ground rolling. Eventually, James had the boy in a chokehold, fist raised. “Who are you?” James yelled.

“My name is John,” the boy replied

“Why did you try to kill me?” James asked.

“Why would I not?”

“What do you mean, ‘Why would I not?’”

“Because the world hates us mutants. They fear us for our power.”

“But how does that justify you wanting to kill me?”

“I tried to kill you because I thought you were someone who wanted to kill me,”

James was so surprised that he dropped his fist. He removed his chokehold and extended his hand to the strange boy.

“It’s a hard and cruel world out there for us mutants. But together we can go further than we can alone.”

The boy took his hand and stood up. Then, an artillery shell exploded in front of them. James and John looked at each other and instantly knew what they had to do.

They flew low over the ground, (James didn’t know how he got his powers back) trying to stay under the sight of the people who were trying to kill him. As they got closer, they saw a large artillery cannon. It was aiming at John. “NOOO!!!” James screamed. Concentrating with all his strength, he put on an extra burst of speed and fired lightning. The artillery shell was already on it’s way. It had barely left the cannon. Gathering all his strength, James shot a white-hot bolt of energy at the cannonball and it exploded, instantly killing the artillery crew. Then, he fainted.

When he came to, James’ whole body tingled with power. “I want to go out and kill those people who took our lives away from us,” he growled.

John nodded sympathetically. “I have those moments too,” John admitted.

“I’m sorry, John.”

“Sorry about what? You saved my life!”

“No, I know that. But sorry for troubling you with my troubles,” James said.

“Your troubles are my troubles, James.”

“What do you mean? We’re different people!”

“Yes, but as far as we know, we’re the only mutants with these powers.”

James nodded. “You’re right. But we still need to find out what those ravens are, who they’re working with, and what we can do to stop them.”

The next day, John and James set out to explore the world and discover more about their powers, how to to focus them, and who gave them to them. The first thing that they saw was a long row of sensor triggered AA guns pointing at them. They were guarded by hundreds of soldiers. As they flew closer, the nearest AA gun pointed its long barrel towards them and fired with a high, whining sound. John and James dropped like stones until they were about halfway to the ground. They had evaded one shot, but unfortunately, 67 more barrels were pointing their way.

”Fall back!” John yelled. They whirled around and flew away at top speed. When they were far enough, they settled on a grassy knoll.

“We need a plan of attack,” James said.

“Maybe we could use a diversion?” John asked.

“Maybe, but I have a feeling those are seasoned warriors down there. They know there are two of us from a few hours ago, and if only one of us appears, they’ll keep a watch,”

“Maybe we could attack in force?” John suggested.

“No, no, no, and no,” James answered. “We can’t possibly take down a few hundred heavily armed warriors. We can’t even go above because of the AA guns,”

“Can’t we go over?” John questioned.

“Now there’s an idea,” James said.

It was D-day. James and John were ready, fully rested, and alert. They climbed as high as they could while still breathing. Then, they arrowed forward.

The plan went wrong almost immediately. As soon as they broke the cloud cover, they saw planes and helicopter gunships patrolling the airspace in front of them. Almost immediately, they all started firing.

“FALL BACK!!!” James yelled.

The next morning, on the knoll, James and John conferred.

“So. Guess we can’t go through or over,” John said.

“And I saw planes circling all around us,” James said.

“So that means we’re surrounded,” John let that hang.

“Wait… I might have an idea…”

The next day, James walked as close as he dared to the AA guns, wound up and hurled a rock really hard through the AA guns. As he expected, the AA guns’ barrels couldn’t turn fast enough.

James turned around and was about to run when he started hearing the soldiers talking.

“What was that??!!”

“I dunno. But did you see where that object came from?”

Then, a thin young man walked up probably a sentry.

“Yes, I did. It came from the east — the direction of the mutants,” the sentry said.

“Probably testing the rotation speed of the barrels,” someone grunted.

“Yeah. Worrisome.”

“Why?” a soldier asked.

“Kid, if a rock can fly fast enough straight through, so can they,” said someone with a gruff voice — probably an old-timer.

“Yeah. I’ll ask someone to start putting up a electric fence all around the perimeter.”

Hearing this, James flew back as fast as he could and explained the plan to John.

Then, John said “Good idea. Any deadline?”

“Yeah,” James said.

“When?”

“Tonight,” James answered.

“Tonight?” John yelped. “Why?”

“They guessed our plan when I threw the rock.”

James and John flew as close as they could without being spotted. Then, they zipped across the landscape. But as they got closer, they saw that the electric fence was already up. There was no going back now.

“SHOOT!!!” John screamed. James grasped the meaning instantly. Meanwhile, the AA guns were moving faster than they expected. There was an AA gun directly in front of them. They could see the inside of the barrel, the shell coming out… At once, lightning burst from their fingers, incinerating the shell and the AA gun. They kept the lightning up. Suddenly, James and John stopped, a shell passing and inch in front of them. Now there was nothing between them and freedom- except for one huge electric fence.

“Overload it!!” James screamed. They poured all their anger, desperation, and fear into these lightning bolts. The many streams of lightning hit the electric fence, which absorbed it. Sparks started to dance across the surface of the electric fence. James and John were getting closer now. 50 feet… 25 feet… 12 ½ feet… 6 ¼ … 3 ⅛ … the sparks on the fence abruptly stopped and John and James smashed through the fence and continued on. After they flew for around 50 miles, they set down.

“I can’t believe we made it!” John said

“Yeah, the overloading did it.”

“But now we should be on the move, or else we might get surrounded again.”

“Yeah. Wait — what’s that?” James was looking at a newspaper that was blowing through the wind. He snatched it out of the air and glanced at the headline.

Mutants discovered, president announces new factory in Ontario dedicated to the research of anti-mutant weaponry and armour will open on Friday, August 12, 2094. (5:00 p.m.)

“It’s Monday the 8th now,” John said. “We have four days to shut down that factory.”

“And we’re in Oklahoma right now.”

“Yeah, but we have to do it in a time when the factory is empty,” James said. “We shouldn’t use our powers to kill innocent people.”

“Innocent!!??” John asked incredulously. “They’re trying to kill us!”

“But you never know. This might the only job available for some people!”

“Fine,” John said in a tight and closed voice. “But only if it doesn’t delay our mission.

Tuesday,  August 9, 2094

(5:00)

(Oklahoma)

James and John woke up, bathed in a nearby stream, and started channeling their powers. First, they did target practice. James set up a target around 50 meters away, then 75, then 100, etc.

Then, John did the same thing, except around 50 meters away from the original range. John went first. He looked at the 50 meter target, pointed his finger, and fired. The single bolt slammed into the wood target, knocking it over. James jogged over and looked at the remains of the target, which were a few charred, smoking pieces of wood. James whistled and said “Sweet.” Then, he moved out of the way. John incinerated the 75 and 100 meter targets, but narrowly missed to 125 meter. John filed that away. Then, James went. His score was the same as John’s.

They were going to test their healing powers, but John said, “Maybe we should do this in the evening, so it will be easier for us to sleep.”

“Good idea,” James said. Then, they started flying.

The landscape was beautiful. They passed over neat rows of farms and crisp little villages, (They tried to go high over the civilized land, so they wouldn’t be spotted) and went around bustling cities.

Finally, John said, “That looks like a good spot. Let’s set down.”

Tuesday, August 9, 2094

(22:41)

(Missouri)

“We’re on the border of Missouri right now,” James said. “We’re making good time.”

James and John were lying down in the soft heather and pine needles, when James heard something. He was instantly alert. “What’s that?” he asked.

“What’s what?” John asked sleepily.

“I heard some leaves being crushed!”

“Probably an animal.”

“Okay.”

They went back to trying to sleep, but James just couldn’t. Then, he saw four dark, shadowy forms crouching over John.

“JOHN!!!” James yelled. John rolled to the side as a sharp object pierced the ground where he had just been. James sprung up. John did the same. Then, they started shooting the lightning. Within a few seconds, it was over. Four men in camouflage fatigues carrying daggers were on the ground bleeding from charred holes in their stomachs. John was panting, a wild animal-like gleam in his eyes.

“Are you okay, John?” James asked uncertainly.

“Yes! I’m feeling better than I ever have!”

“Umm, okay?” James said. “Well I guess we should search their bodies.”

It turned out that their assaulters were F.B.I. agents sent by the president of the USA to assassinate them. They were part of a company of 900, camped in the nearby woods.

“We’ve gotta move,” John said.

Wednesday, August 10, 2094

(7:27)

(Missouri)

John and James were getting better at target practice,  and destroyed the 125 meter target. Then, they started their new practice session: discovering new powers. That morning, combining their minds, they discovered something powerful, more powerful than the lightning, inside them. They couldn’t use or identify it yet, though. James was still worried about John though. The way he had looked last night had scared the wits out of James. It looked like maybe John liked the killing!

Just then, a tranquilizer dart whizzed past James; it was only his fast reflexes that saved him. Without a word, James and John took of into the unknown…

Wednesday, August 10, 2094

(21: 53)

(Illinois)

When James announced that they were in Illinois, John said in a closed and emotionless voice, “Let’s spend as little time in here as possible.”

When James asked why, John wouldn’t say. Then James started pestering. Eventually, John threw his hands in the air and screamed “Fine, Fine! I’ll tell you. I live in Illinois!”

“Ah,” James said in his wise voice. “That must hurt.”

“Oh you have no idea,” John said.

“I live in Arizona,” James said. “That’s where I first met the raven.”

“The raven?” John asked.

“Yeah,” James said. “That’s how I first discovered my powers.” When John gave him a curious glance, James elaborated.

“The raven first appeared in a explosion of feathers. Nearly losing my balance, I stumbled backward, hitting my head on the wall of the shower. Then, I grabbed the shower head, cocking it back like a baseball bat, and aimed at what looked like the center of the explosion. To my surprise, a rather fat raven emerged. The shower head was already on it’s way. Then, the shower head suddenly stopped, jarring my arm. ‘Now, now,’ the raven scolded. ‘It would be an awful shame if I had to kill you.’ I was so surprised I dropped the shower club. Then I punched the raven and the world turned upside-down.”

“Creepy,” John said.

“Yeah,” mused James. “But it’s curious how it could talk and stop the showerhead.”

“Yeah. Must be some kind of sorcery”

“Yeah. Anyway, we should catch up on our sleep. Be awake at 5:00 sharp with your gear.”

Thursday, August 11, 2094

(5:00)

(Illinois)

The next morning, the J team suited up, and did their daily target practice. They both still got 125 meters, but John singed the side of the 150 meter target. Then, they took off. At first, their flight was beautiful and peaceful. Then, they heard a soft swish and a whole carpet of surface-to-air tracking missiles rose to greet them. Using his huge brain, John solved a complex math equation in his head that mathematicians and soldiers had been puzzling over for centuries. (John+James)+Missiles=No More (John+James). Using inductive reasoning, James realized that John and him were the people in John’s equation. The missiles clumped together and became the bane of (J+J!!!).

James yelled “Follow me!” and dived towards lake Michigan. John understood James’ plan and followed him. With the missiles hot on their tails, they zoomed towards the lake. They splashed into the lake and the missiles exploded on the surface, instantly covering their backs in blisters. Being careful to stay low on the lake, the J bros zipped across the water towards Ontario, the factory, and their future.

As they zipped across the water, leaving a column of steam in their wake, clouds of steam gathered in front of them. Frowning, John dispelled the steam with a lightning bolt and the Imperial Michigan State Ani-Mutant Naval Force was revealed in all its might and glory. In front of them and blocking their way, were 2 aircraft carriers, 8 cruisers, 15 destroyers, and 4 submarines (don’t ask me how all this fit in lake Michigan). Over a loudspeaker a voice boomed,

Mutants! Surrender yourselves and we shall do you no harm. Fight, and we shall destroy you! Run, and we shall chase you down to the very end of the earth! Escape to land, and we shall call in the military! The US has declared war on you two, and they weren’t bluffing when they did it!”

At once, countless guns and missiles turned their way. “Oh shoot,” muttered James under his breath. Then, he and John backflipped and shot away, randomly shooting lightning bolts over their shoulders to cause confusion. Behind them, were a cloud of missiles and torpedoes chasing them like a nest of angry hornets. They burst out of the water, past the SAMs and continued on. The torpedoes tried to follow them, but they exploded on the shore.

“Phew,” James said. “That was close.”

“Yeah. Too close,” John said.

They continued on until they were on the Canadian border.

Friday, August 12,

(6:30)

(Ontario)

It was D-day.

John and James woke up and destroyed the 150 meter target. Then, they headed towards the factory. They were above and behind the fenced off factory. Long rows of people waited outside the factory. It was 15:00. The factory’s inauguration was supposed to be at 17:00. The factory was enormous. There were hundreds of armed guards milling around the factory. The factory’s front side was enormous, with four guard turrets. The back was less tall, but there were two extra towers on the front that could guard the back. There was a trapdoor on the front of the building. The front wall was made of glass, but James guessed that it was bulletproof. The back was made of reinforced, bullet proof steel. On the front roof, James saw a machine gunner and a few snipers. There was an enormous lightning rod. There were holes on the side, with guns pointing out. “There’s a lot of security,” James said. “We need a plan of attack,”

“Yeah,” John said.

“I suggest we take the back then take the front from the back.”

“Okay,” John said.

It was 16:15. James was sweating. The guards were looking bored, and not alert. Circling around, James and John were in position at 16:30. They were behind the towers. James held up a shaking 3 to John. 2…  1…  ZAP!!! 2 guards collapsed, stone dead. Quickly, J and J crept behind the ledge.

“We’ll take it by force,” James whispered.

With a fearsome shout, J and J rose over the ledge, lightning blazing from their fingertips. One tower collapsed. The machine gunner collapsed, never to rise again. Another guard tower bit the dust. One of the guard tower’s supports collapsed, knocking over both towers. Then, John collapsed dead. Screaming in rage, James killed the sniper then knelt over John. “NOOO!” screamed James. John eyes flickered open, then they closed forever.

James infiltrated the interior of the factory, but he felt a strange emptiness next to him. He encountered a few guards, but they didn’t live long. He got to the center of the facility and destroyed the core. Then, he escaped, his conscience plagued by the possibility that he could have saved John.

War and Peace

Chapter 1: What Happened?

“Get Out Of The Divide!”

The world turned dark.

“Ategnatos, are you there? Hello?”

I slowly opened my eyes and felt pain in my head. There stood my mother.

“You’re alive!” she said. “I can’t believe it.”

Then, I felt another wave of pain in my head. I managed a quick smile but felt one more wave of pain. This time, it caused me to clutch my head while almost screaming, it felt as if my head were ripping apart. I looked into my mother’s eyes and tried to open my mouth to speak but I couldn’t. I looked around the room for a wax tablet and pointed to it. My mom quickly got it along with a sliver of wood too. I carved as questions kept popping up:

Quid accidit? Cur malum caput meum? Úbi sum? Cur ego lecto? Ubi est Pater?

I was going to keep writing when my mother put her hand on my head and I slowly fell back to sleep.

***

When I woke up for the second time, my father –– who was chief of our village in Gaul –– and mother were at the foot of my bed. I looked at the tablet which I had written on before. It now contained several answers to my questions. I realized what had happened. It was the divide. I had been so stubborn that I had stepped in the divide. The village enemy had shot five arrows in my head creating a large hole. The piece of paper said that I was very lucky that the arrows did not reach my brain. I could not believe I had stepped into the place with the most bloodshed. The most war. It all happened in the divide. Everyone who died in war died proudly for their village in the divide. I tried to get out of bed but I was stopped firmly by the village doctor.

“Get rest,” he said. “You will need it if you want to make a full recovery.”

Now, I knew what had happened. I had wanted so badly to make my father proud, to make the village proud. I had gotten it in my head that the only possible way to do this was to fight in the divide and serve my village like all young warriors did. But my father had refused to let me go. He had said that I was too young and weak. He had said that he was not ready to lose me. I was born a delicate baby and even as I grew up, I could not keep up with other kids. I was so sad to see all my friends go off to war while I was stuck here doing chores, waiting for them to return every night. My father had said that my day would come and, now that I had proved myself to be so irresponsible as to go out in the divide and not tell anyone, I would probably never get to go out to war for as long as I lived.

Chapter 2: The Talk

Just as I was about to go back to bed, my best friend Veteporix walked in.

“Ategnatos, is that you? You’re alive! I can’t believe it.”

I wondered why everyone was so surprised to see me alive. I looked at the very bottom at the piece of paper. It said:

Fili , oportet loqui.

I had a bad feeling about this. If my dad wanted to talk with me, I was doomed. He would tell me that I was such a disappointment and everything about how I shouldn’t have done what I did. Under this at the very bottom of the page he wrote:

Cras autem dicemus. Utinam meliora sunt .

At least he was aware that I was hurt. Veteporix was looking at me as I realized he was still in the room. I looked at him and he said: “Are you ok?”

For the first time that day, I responded in a raspy voice. “I don’t know. All I can do is hope.”

***

I woke up early the next morning because I was thinking so much about my talk with my father. He’d said it would be this morning. I waited anxiously for my dad to come and, after what seemed like forever, he walked in with his most prized war general right behind him.

He said, “can you please wait outside, Caturix?” The general slowly stepped outside. My father turned to me. “Did you get my note, son?”

I managed a simple, “yes.”

He responded quickly. “Then what are we waiting for?”

I nodded my head in agreement when inside I was very nervous to find out what he would say.

“So, son, I have been thinking about your irresponsible behaviors, going into the divide without a generals’ or my permission. I have also been thinking about how you are the last kid your age who is not fighting for our village. I then thought that the reason you have never made me proud is because I have never given you the chance. I have decided to give you one. As soon as you are well, you will guard the gates to the village along with one other soldier. If you are successful, you will be promoted, if you disappoint me I can at least say that I gave you a shot at it. A chief’s son should be given a chance to be a great warrior, to serve his village. Here is yours.”

I could not believe my ears! After what I had done my father still decided to give me a chance. This is what I had wanted all along. My thoughts were interrupted by the voice of my dad.

“So? What do you say, son?

I responded with a quick “my pleasure dad,” as I did not want him to change his mind. “You won’t be sorry.”

Chapter 3: The Mysterious Legend

It has been 6 months since I was in the divide. I would start my new job today. I could not wait to prove myself to the village and make my father proud. I looked at my hourglass and rushed out of bed. I arrived at the gates of the village only to see the angry face of my dad.

“You are late!”

I can’t believe I had already gotten off to a bad start.

“I thought you would impress me,” he said. “I will leave you to this.”

He handed me a shield sword and a set of armour and went off to battle.

My first day was not as I expected. All I did was watch warriors from our village go in and out. I was so bored and wanted so badly to go with them. I knew that if I did, my father would not trust me anymore I would never be able to become a warrior.

On the walk home from my first day, I saw my dad who was calling me, “son! Over here!”

I walked over to where my dad was standing. He was right outside our druid’s hut.

“Come quickly, Cicero is unconscious and is saying strange things. I walked inside the hut and sure enough Cicero the druid was saying random words while lying on the floor. As I listened closely, I heard what he was saying: “It will come, the day will come. Run, save your lives. They will kill you all. Until there is nothing left.”

I looked at my dad with a worried face. “Is it true? Is the legend true?”

“Let’s not believe an old man who has almost gone crazy. And, really, do you think anything is more scary than the enemy village winning? And plus, we need to get him some medical care.

Despite what my father said, I was still very worried. What if the legend is true?

Chapter 4: Is it True?

I woke up even earlier than I had the day before to make sure that I wasn’t late. When I reached the gates of the village, I heard someone calling me.

“Ategnatos.”

I cocked my head toward the sound. It was Veteporix.

“Come here,” he shouted soon after.

I quickly ran toward him.

When I reached him, he looked around then whispered, “follow me.”

Confused, I followed him into the bushes. After a little while, we came upon the greatest thing I have ever seen: a 50-foot-tall tree with a ladder reaching all the way to the top. When we reached the top, there was a large room with an armour stand, a weapon rack, many slabs of stone, many carving tools, rolls of papyrus, wax tablets, bowls of ink, and an amazing view of the enemy base and the rest of the forest.   

I looked at him in surprise. “Did you build this?”

He looked at me and nodded.”Do you like it?”

“Why wouldn’t I? This is so amazing!”

I started to explore some more when I realized that I should be guarding the gate. I ran down the steps and yelled out to Veteporix: “Meet you here at 7 p.m..”

I then rushed back to the village. Luckily, no one had noticed my absence. I walked in front of a gate as if nothing was wrong.

That evening, I snuck out to a village. Just as I was climbing in the bushes, I bumped into someone. Worried, I hid in the bushes. I slowly peeked out to see who it was. To my luck Veteporix’s face popped out of another bush. We got up and started walking.

“I was scared for a moment when I bumped into you,” I said to Veteporix.

“Me too,” he responded. “We have to make sure we’re not followed.”

When we reached the tree house, I lit a candle so we could see in the dark.

“I have something to tell you.” I said to Veteporix.

“What is it?” he responded.

“It is a legend. Yesterday I was walking home from the gates of the village and my father called me. Cicero was unconscious saying random things. When I listened closer I heard that he was talking about a legend. He said that someone would come and kill us all until nothing and nobody was left.

“Is it true?” he responded.

“That’s what I want to find out. But I need your help. Tomorrow get Cicero and bring him to the tree house. Around five a.m.. Hopefully then we will get anwers.

Chapter 5: The Bloody Battle

I rushed out of my hut careful not to wake my mom. Before I knew it, I was walking up the steps of the tree when I heard a voice.

“Ategnatos, come quickly!” it called.

I realized it was Veteporix calling me from the top of the tree house. I quickened my pace. When I got to the top, I saw Veteporix writing as if his hand was about to fall off while Cicero was blabbering about all sorts of things. All of a sudden Cicero stopped talking and turned to me.

“How are you Ategnatos?”

“I am good,” I responded. “What is going on?”

“Oh I was just answering Veteporix’s questions.”

I turned to Veteporix.

“Did you get any useful information?”

“Not really.”

I turned back to Cicero when I heard a loud war horn.

This war horn was not at all like our war horn. It’s sound was fuller and made a different sound. Cicero was saying random things again, but this time, it had something to do with the legend:

“They are here. Run, save your lives.”

Just then I heard a loud bang and a crash.

I looked to where the sound was was coming from. There were huge rocks being hurled at our village. I looked closer to see where they were coming from. There was a wooden platform with a giant spoon on top. People who were not the enemy village were wearing full armour with with weapons. As I looked farther in the distance, I saw even more armed people. I looked around and realized that we were surrounded by at least 10,000 men who were attacking both us and the enemy village. I now knew the answer to the legend. It was true. Cicero was right. Unless we fled, these people would kill us all. They would conquer our village and take our homes. I looked at Cicero and Veteporix in a worried face.

“Follow me,” I said, “we must protect the village.”

I rushed to the village gates, only to find many bloody dead bodies of our villagers.

I turned around and found my father who was in a frenzy telling everyone to grab armour and a weapon.

He looked at me. “Son don’t just stand around, help.”

I quickly grabbed a set of armour and a sword. I looked at Veteporix and signaled for him to do the same. We stood in battle formation. Then my dad spoke: “We will fight as one. We’ll have no mercy! We shall die proud! Charge!”

“Charge!” everyone echoed.

The bloodiest battle our village has ever seen had just begun.

A tear dripped down my eye as I saw the dead bodies of people I had grown up with, shared memories with. They were gone, and I would be too if I showed any mercy.

I heard a loud scream come from the enemy village. I looked toward them and found them in the same situation as us. The perfect battle plan then struck me, it would not only save our village –– or at least what was left of it –– but it would also make these people never want to set foot in our territory, as they would be too scared. I ran to my dad.

“I have the perfect battle plan, let me tell you!”

“Son, it is too late. We can’t regroup without being attacked.”

I realized that convincing my dad was not going to work. I had to do this the hard way. I ran back to the village and went to the weapon hut. I found the war horn rack and picked the loudest, scariest horn. I dashed out of the hut when I bumped into my mom. She stroked her hand through my hair.

“Stay safe son,” she said in tears.

“Don’t worry, I will.”

As I was leaving the village gates, I realized it was only a matter of time before it was too late. I dashed through the bushes until I arrived at the tree house. As I arrived at the top, I quickly grabbed a wax tablet and began carving my battle plan. I got my war horn out and my perfect plan was in position. I cupped my hands over my mouth and blew the war horn as loud as I could. I looked at the battle field and realized all the attention had turned to me. This was the perfect time to execute my plan.

Using the materials in the treehouse, I created a shadow puppet. I hid behind one of the walls and lit a lamp. I shadowed the puppet over the lamp creating a large version of a tiger. I peaked out of the tiny hole in the wall of the treehouse. And as I expected, the enemies were beginning to back off. I kept moving the tiger in a way that made it seem like it was coming closer and closer. As soon as it was as close as it could be, I jumped down from the treehouse and ran towards the battlefield. While the enemy was still in terror, I ran toward my dad and told him, “Regroup everyone, including the enemy village.”

Soon enough, everyone was grouped together circling around me. I heard some protests from members of the enemy village.

They were saying, “Why should we listen to you? Why should you lead us?”

I responded by saying, “I may seem little and the least qualified person to lead you, but I have a plan that could save us all.” I pulled out my wax tablet and showed everyone my battle plan.

They all nodded in agreement.

I then said, “battle formation!” Surprisingly, everyone listened. People are desperate in times of hope.

“Charge!” I screamed. Just like that, we were driving off the enemy despite our odds being ten to one. If you are smart you can always overcome strength.

Chapter 6: United As One

As we were chasing off the enemy, I heard one of the enemy soldiers say something.

“Julius Caesar will be angry with us for our defeat. He will say that us Romans should be stronger after conquering Greece.”

I then realized who these people were. They were the so called Romans who had conquered almost all of Europe. One day, two years ago, I remember my dad getting a letter from a foreign Gaulish village saying that they were under attack by Romans. I reckon this won’t be the last time we see them.

As everyone headed back to their village, there was a lot of work to do. When I was in the weapon room, putting my things away, my dad walked over to me.

“Son,” he said. “That was some battle strategy out there. How would you like to be a general in war? Maybe you could come up with all our battle plans. I’m sorry I didn’t give you enough of a chance before. I should have trusted you.”

This is what I had wanted all along, to make my village and my father proud. And I had done so today. I turned to my dad.

“I accept the position,” I said.

My dad walked out to the center of the village and loudly blew the horn for a village meeting. Soon enough, everyone was in the center of town looking at my father. He then gave his speech:

“This is one of the bloodiest battles our village has ever fought and we would never had won if it weren’t for one fighter. I would like for us all to thank my son, Ategnatos. He served our village and made us all proud. I would also like to thank him for reuniting us and the former enemy village. I have organized a feast for all of us to celebrate.”

There was a roar of celebration. The next day, we would work on combining our villages to make one mega village. The next day, we would unite as one.

The Three Wolves

 

Chapter 1: Cinnamon

I don’t recognize Mom. Who is this woman? She’s pretty for a mean woman. She has red hair and it looks like she tried to dye it black (like our … well … real Mom) but completely failed, and blue eyes that she hides under a cap. This morning, she says to my dad: “I didn’t know that you have disgusting children.”

Dad replies, “Well, you should’ve noticed by all of the toys on the floor. Stop talking about them like they’re dog poop.”

Why does Dad not look confused about who this woman is, and why she’s in our house?!

“Where’s Mom?” I ask Dad in a whisper.

“That’s what I’m trying to find out,” Dad whispers back, reaching for the home phone.

“Don’t you dare!” The woman slaps Dad’s hand away from the phone.

“Why not?” I say, snatching the phone away from its post. The woman snatches the phone away from us and spits in our faces. I run up to Kevin’s and my room and tell him what’s going on.

“Stay in here, Ivy,” Kevin says, and I climb into his bunk and curl into a ball.  

Later, the Weird Woman spanks Kevin and me after we did something wrong. She’s trying to charm Daddy, but it just isn’t working!

“Stephan, get me a glass of wine, please,” she says.

“Why don’t you get it yourself?” I ask her.

She spanks me.

“Ivy, don’t you dare say that again!”

So, that’s our day. Speak, spank, ‘don’t you dare do or say that again!’, spank. Ugh!

I walk down the quiet street to the spice shop. Cinnamon is what Kevin wants. He says he’s, well, too sore to go out, but he promised me a yummy breakfast. Weird Woman is listening to bad music in my parents’ bedroom and Daddy went to work so we’re alone in the house.

This woman is … definitely not our real mom. I can tell. I know it. I bet Dad and Kevin know it too. It’s like the woman is putting us under some sort of spell, because as I find the spice store and look at the shopping list Kevin gave me, I don’t seem to have the courage to ask the spice guy for help. The spell (I’m not sure if it’s really a spell) feels like pressure, because in my head, I hear “if you tell him about me, your family will be in great danger!” Who is this woman? What does she want? Why is she here? Two small bottles of cinnamon is what Kevin wants. I buy them and leave.

I squish the morning dew with my turquoise and lavender sneakers. I can’t wait to see what Kevin will make me.

At the house I sit down at the kitchen table.

“Thanks, Ivy!” Kevin says when he sees the two bottles of cinnamon. “I promised you I’d make you something, so I will. You like cinnamon buns, right?”

“Uh huh,” I say, sticking my finger into the cream cheese frosting he’s making. He slaps my hand away playfully. We always fight a lot, but ever since  this morning, we’ve been good. We’re trying to support each other during this first rough day with Weird Woman by being playful. But I know a few things: we both hate this woman. We miss Mom and we feel confused about what’s happening here, I feel scared and Kevin feels under pressure.

Chapter 2: My Stories

After a hearty breakfast, I walk outside and sit down in the grass. I think …  well … I think that there’s this woman who thinks we’re rich so she’s probably trying to take over our real mom’s place. Maybe Weird Woman captured her and put her in a secret place?

The sky’s a bright blue. As I stretch out onto my back, an idea for a story comes fluttering in my head. No, Ivy, I tell myself. You’re already working on a story. A good one, too. But I pull out my notebook just the same, and start jotting down my ideas quickly before they disappear. Mom and I write together all the time and I’m trying to distract myself from all of the confusion happening here. Even though I never finish my stories, she always tries to encourage me to. I’m writing a story about an ancient treasure, but I just got an idea for a story about two kids and their cousins searching for Atlantis, the famous underwater city. I never finish my stories. All the time, ideas just pop into my head and I start a new story. It’s annoying, ‘cause I keep thinking I’ll finish my stories, but I never do. Ideas for what Atlantis should look like bloom in my head. Okay, twists of seaweed surrounding the walls… smells, of course, like the ocean…

Chapter 3: We Hate “Mom”

Weird Woman is home. She’s putting her messenger bag down in the hall, and she interrupts our little family dinner. Daddy’s home, and Kevin and I made spaghetti and meatballs for dinner. We eat happily, and talk too. My Dad’s trying to get rid of this woman who’s trying to take over, but she insists on staying. He’s always trying to stop her from beating us but she just pushes him away as if that’s a way to gain his respect.

“Get me a chair, please, Stephan,” the woman moans. She ruins everything. Daddy doesn’t get her a chair. She gets it herself. “Get me a plate of spaghetti and meatballs, Kevin,” she says, and when Kevin doesn’t move she yells “now!” Kevin runs to get her a dish.

It’s bedtime. Kevin and I get hugged and kissed by Daddy.

“We’ll be alright,” he whispers as he closes the door. I hug my little teddy bear and look up at Kevin.

“Do you think we’ll be OK?” I ask him.

“I dunno, Ivy,” Kevin says quietly. “But we have to stick together, okay?”

“Yeah, alright.”

“That’s a good girl.”

Usually I would’ve shouted at him for being treated like a dog, but Weird Woman is here, and sleep pulls me down before I can say anything.

Chapter 4: Change Hill

It’s morning, and Weird Woman is spraying us with water in a small, plastic bottle to get us working like slaves.

“Get up, squirts,” she says. “Get your bad butts ready for school!!!”

“But it’s Saturday,” I moan.

“And it is September. School starts in October,” Kevin says groggily.

“So what? Your school is chores! Now get going!!! I hate kids,” she mutters under her breath.

After a boring morning full of being yelled at by Weird Woman and dull chores, Dad says we’re having our afternoon together without her, and she locks the door to tell him she’ll keep the house safe. Dad, Kevin, and I decide to buy school supplies and a few treats. Then we decide to go to Change Hill, which is like a natural magic. At first, it’s the autumn leaves with large oak trees covered in orange and brown and yellow and red leaves (mostly orange and brown) then you cross a crystal blue river (well, a little stream) to a large beach shaped like a hill, and it looks like you’re going to fall off if you look down. The crystal blue river has green grass bordering it on both sides, then it changes to sand or the autumn type of world. It’s really neat.

We invite our friends Jack, William, and Violet to come to Change Hill. I talk to Violet about Weird Woman who gives me clever comebacks. They didn’t know about Weird Woman until Kevin and I talked to them. Jack, William, and Kevin talk and talk about Weird Woman and some boring soccer stuff I don’t care about. I’m wearing my favorite dress: a sailor’s dress with an electric blue headband that has a thin bow on it. I’m wearing jeans and my favorite lavender and turquoise sneakers. Under it is my bathing suit, for swimming across the stream. It feels uncomfortable, but I’m always prepared for things like this. We finally swim across to the beach side, dare each other to look down over the hill, and swim back. We change back and take off our bathing suits, then we wash our hair in Jack, William, and Violet’s outdoor shower. We stay at their house for a while and then, we go home.

Weird Woman is asleep. We go through the windows so we don’t wake her up. I pull the thin, pink, flowered curtains of my bed closed.

“Ivy?” Kevin suddenly says. “Here’s your teddy bear.” I open the curtains and snatch the teddy bear from Kevin’s hands and feel in the pocket where we secretly pass each other stuff. Inside there’s a candy necklace with a little note. It says:

Ivy,

I know you hate  Weird Woman, so I have a plan for finding our real mom. We get up at midnight, and we sneak out of the house with a change of clothes, my pocket knife, a flashlight and a map. We’ll go to Change Hill and meet the three wolves, OK? I’ll tell you who they are at midnight, when we’re up, alright?

So, have a good night.

Your brother,

Kevin

PS: don’t ask me who the three wolves are. Remember what I said about telling you at midnight.

I turn the slip of paper around, grab a spare pencil, and write:

Yeah, OK, Kevin. Luv you. Goodnight.

Your sister,

Ivy

Then I toss the piece of paper to Kevin and I tear a page out of my notebook.

Dear Daddy,

We’re trying to find our real mother, and don’t let Weird Woman enter our room or see this note, please. We love you.

Yours,

Ivy and Kevin

Then, I put a change of clothes and the rest of the materials Kevin wants in my monogrammed messenger bag, which is a winter blue. I tuck the messenger bag under my pillow, and then I grab my note to Daddy and slip it in his bedroom, which, thankfully, he does not share with Weird Woman. Then I pull my curtains closed and go to sleep.

Chapter 5: Midnight

Kevin wakes me up and says, “you can eat the candy necklace I gave you.”

I slip the candy around my neck and nibble at it a bit. Then I say, “I wrote a note to Daddy last night.”

“Good. Where is it?” Kevin takes the messenger bag from me.

“I left it in Dad’s room,” I respond.

“Cool,” Kevin says.

“So, who are the three wolves?” I ask.

“They’re these wolves made of enchanted leaves that help everyone in times of need,” Kevin replies. We walk quietly up to Change Hill. It’s very pretty at midnight. The moon is high and full, and, in front of us, three creatures that are brightly colored or different shades of green come foreword.

“Hello,” the green one says, “We are the three wolves. How can we help you?”

Chapter 6: the Three Wolves

I gape at the creatures. Kevin is the first one to speak.

“Our mother is captured by this mean lady who’s trying to take over the household. I think she thinks we’re rich, so we’re trying to stop her and get our real mother back.” The green wolf nods.

“My name is Greenleaf. I will give you the power of nature.”

“And my name is Pineapple. I will give you the power of weather,” the wolf made of a random-mix-of-colors said.

“And my name is Rosie. I don’t have a power to give you, but I have Knowledge,”  the rainbow wolf says.

“Go past the beach down to the water. There you will get swept up by the foam. The foam will tell you what to do, and then come back here. You will have your powers. Ivy, you will have the power of nature. Kevin, you will have the power of weather. When you come back up, we will be gone. You must get past the obstacles coming up.” Greenleaf gently nudges us toward the beach. “Now, you must hurry. You have one minute to get to the foam and back. And you have fifteen minutes to get past the obstacles and save your mother. I will give you an hourglass.” Rosie slips a chain around my neck. An hourglass hangs on the bottom. It’s a big hourglass. “NOW!” Rosie shouts as the sand in the hourglass starts falling. We run and run and run. There, we discover an adventure.

Chapter 7: the obstacles

We have our plan. The foam told us. Our plan is a secret. You’ll see what it is later!!! I practice my nature talent by making the vines twirl. Having nature as a talent is fun.

I suddenly see the obstacles ahead. Bushes and bushes of crazy thorns. A fiery black dragon, the most powerful type of dragon ever. A tall enchanted black castle. Mom is trapped in that castle, with the thorns and the dragon blocking her escape. And plus, she’s probably tied up in there. Ouch.

Kevin and I look at the obstacle before us. Then we remember our talents. As I try and get the thorns to just move, a twirl of vines comes toward me, and I drop the process immediately. But then I wrap everything in moss, and the tips of the thorns are softened, so we can get through.

Now the dragon. It’s Kevin’s turn to use his power. “Ivy, what’s the dragon’s main weapon?!” Kevin yells over the roar of the dragon.

“Are you dumb?! FIRE!!!” I shout.

“OF COURSE!!!” Kevin cries, slapping his hand to his forehead.

“And rain stops fire!!!” I shout.

“DUH!!” Kevin roars back. See what I mean when I say we fight a lot? Kevin closes his eyes and lifts his head as a downpour of fire falls toward us. Then a downpour of rain hits our faces and the fire. The dragon roars in agony as rain pours down his/her throat and stops the fire. As he/she thrashes about, Kevin and I slip into the castle and rescue our real mom. We place the hourglass down on the autumn side of Change Hill to give it back to the Spirits. As we walk back, our powers seem to seep out of us.

At home, I make Mom hot chocolate and she tells us all about being stuck in the castle. “It was dark and scary,” she says, “and I was tied up in ropes. There were spider webs and spiders and bugs and all sorts of stuff like that. As I was being forced to march up to the top tower, I saw a whole skeleton lying in the corner.” I shudder.

“Elizabeth,” Dad says, “you know I wanted to help, but Agatha was forcing me to stay with her.”

“I know that, Stephan, don’t…”

“Agatha?!” I interrupt. “Your enemy from college?! Is that who that horrible woman was?!”

“Yep,” Dad says.

“Worry,” Mom finishes. “I chased her off. By the way, Ivy and Kevin, who told you where I was?” Kevin and I look at each other.

“It’s a secret,” we reply together.

“Alrighty,” Mom says. “Let’s go over to Jack, William and Violet’s, and let’s tell them the whole story.” As Kevin and I walk behind the chatting Mom and Dad, we smile at each other. The real mom is home. Finally!!!

Ellen

chapter 1

monday, april 15th, 1989

It was a cold day in spring. I had my vest on and a big breeze of wind filled my shirt.

I was in Washington Square Park and suddenly I felt something soft and small. I looked down and saw it was a kitten.

I looked to see if it had a collar but found nothing so I picked it up and went home. While I brought her home I thought about if I wanted a kitten or not. And then I remembered that I had wanted a cat long ago — well not that long ago — but still. I got home and I had made my decision: I would have a kitten. My mom was very happy that I brought home this kitten. I had been thinking about the name with my mom. The ones that I liked the most were Jill, Luna, Elise, Ester and Elliott. I picked Elliott.

I personally don’t like my name, which is Ellen, after my grandma. I wanted her name to be the best to make up for my name. I went out to the pet store and got some cat food and cat toys for Elliott. When I got home it was about 6:30 and my mom and dad were setting the table.

My mom said, ”You should really grow your hair out longer.”

I said, ”You know I like my hair short so I don’t need to put in all those clips.”

Elliott had black and brown hair and white boots. (I especially liked the cat fur boots). I tried to pet them but she ran away. I tied a string into a ball and then I found some wood and left some sting over so I could fling it. That got Elliott moving — my plan had worked!

               

What Happened in 1870, Italy

Italy, 1870

Annabell sighed. It wasn’t fair that she had to be stuck inside while almost every other child in the kingdom was playing outside in the warm weather. She was restless. She couldn’t sit still. So she decided to evade all responsibility and run outside, dodging supervision, if only for a few seconds. About two minutes later she was taking the secret passage under the palace and was at the edge of the palace grounds, running furiously as her nurse, Florence, shouted after her.

Exasperated once again, she yelled, “Stop at once, young lady! That is no way for an heir to the throne to behave!”

Annabell was heir to the throne of Italy, since she had no brother, only two younger sisters, and her mother, the king of Italy’s great love, was dead, and heartbroken, he would not marry again. Annabell was also her father’s favorite, so if she died from one of the many causes of death to the children of Italy, the whole kingdom would be plunged into mourning. With that thought, the last that she would ever think, looking back toward Florence, Annabell ran out of the gardens and into the street. A carriage came to a sudden halt, but not soon enough.

* * *

Italy, 2015

Annabell sighed. The sticky, hot day was doing nothing to spoil her want for adventure. She wanted something with death, drama, long-ago royalty and maybe even some romance. Phooey. Fat chance. Being the daughter of the president in a historical country, they still lived in the palace, so maybe there was a secret passage other than the one leading from one of the bedrooms to the courtyard that she could discover. Or she could abandon her doubtful idea and simply explore the already-found secret passage.

She started off toward the bedroom, which she had learned from her tutor was the room of the Annabell she was named after, who she had been told had died in 1870 from an unknown illness. She started down the corridor, wishing that instead of the modern electric lights (which pretty much ruined the mysterious atmosphere) there could be oil lamps instead. Walking along the corridor, watching her shadow fade and strengthen as she walked through the electric lights, something exciting happened for the first time in her ten-year-old life.

She saw a glint of shiny leather-a bound spine, some parchment pages. A notebook? A diary? But who owns it? Annabell wondered. She picked it up, because of course that’s what you do when you find a diary hidden (Or lost? Annabell wondered) in a secret passage! Annabell opened the diary. Of course, with her luck, it was blank. Disappointed to almost-tears, she searched the corridor for any other exciting clues or treasures, but none came up. She walked back to the dead Annabell’s room, wondering if writing in a possibly old diary was defacing historical property. Deciding it was up to her, and that there was nothing special about it besides the fact that it was old and had a beautiful shiny green cover, she took out a pen and wrote down the date:

July 15, 2015.

Annabell didn’t know what to write next, when, instead of her blue ballpoint script, black, hastily scribbled crayon surfaced on the page:

I’m so sorry.

She didn’t know what to believe now. It could be some kind of computer screen that wrote back, and it was glitchy, so that was why someone had tossed it into the secret passage to forget about it. But what happened next made her doubt that.

This is Annabell.

Annabell? Annabell thought. The dead one?? This couldn’t be possible.

I’m sorry for what I did.

What did she do? Annabell wondered.

Of course you know.

But she didn’t! What could dead Anabell have done?

I should have just written in this diary like my father suggested.

What did you do? I don’t know, she wrote.

I died. I was the heir to the throne. My soul has been trapped here, blind.

Annabell was kind of amazed at how regretful dead Annabell was.

But it’s not your fault you died. It’s not your fault you got sick.

I wasn’t sick! Don’t you know I was run over by a carriage?

No! I was told you died from an unspecified illness.

Lies!!!

Italy, 1870

“The people will be outraged if they find out that Her Highness Crown Princess Annabell tried to run from the palace and died in the attempt!” The King cried out.

“Your Majesty, we could tell them that Her Highness died of an unknown sickness,” said the adviser.

“Yes,” The King said, his voice heavy with grief. “You have my permission”.

Italy, 2015

Annabell couldn’t believe it. What would she do now?

Please free me!

Annabell wasn’t sure she had read that right.

How?

No one wrote back. Annabell thought about it. She knew from instinct that Annabell had to get rid of her regret to be free from the diary. Annabell wasn’t quite sure how to do that. Maybe if she buried the diary with Annabell’s body, then her soul would be reunited with her body? She decided to give it a try. Annabell knew that her parents would never let her out of the house to go to the royal graveyard. Maybe she could pull a dramatic escape and leave in the middle of the night? Since she had no other pathetic options, she realized she had to give that one. For the rest of the day, she tried to keep herself busy and not think about the escape.

* * *

12:53 a.m.

Annabell’s bedroom was in a tower, so she pulled a dead Annabell and went through dead Annabell’s bedroom and into the secret passage. A minute later, she was out in the courtyard and making her way through the gardens to the graveyard. She felt like a character in a mystery book. She had an excuse ready for the guards: “I couldn’t sleep, so I decided to take a quick walk.” Annabell hoped she wouldn’t have to use it. Thank her lucky stars, she passed unnoticed. When she got to the graveyard, she walked among the gravemarkers, eager to find dead Annabell’s, bury the diary next to her coffin, and then get back to bed. This was freaking CREEPY! She stopped near the grave stone that said:

Here lies Annabell Gallini

April 3, 1860-July 15, 1870

Died at ten years old from an unknown illness

Loving and adventurous daughter and elder sister

May she rest in peace.

Annabell took a moment of silence for her namesake, and then began to dig. She dug a deep, rectangular hole, and placed the book inside it. Annabell then covered the book back up again. Having sudden inspiration, she dug up a rose and replanted it on top of dead Annabell’s grave. She slowly walked back to the palace, thinking about all she had done. She went back to bed, relieved and satisfied that her work was done.

The Future Earth’s Concrete Takeover

I am Tiki, a robot pirate, in the year 3000. “I have brought you guys from Union Square: Mathius, Eden Hazard, Jo Green, Bobby Smith, and Trexer, to join me on the quest to the Lost Island to find the treasure that can help us save Earth! I want to introduce Bobby, a great friend of mine, to my whole group. He and I are awesome friends. We always go to the movies, whenever a new movie comes out. All these years we have polluted Earth, and it is almost too late to save it.”

Nature is slowly disappearing and more of Earth is being constructed by people. We need to act fast!!! Seventy-five percent of Earth is made of water and man-made sites. As nature is disappearing, places are moving around like Mount Everest, the Rocky Mountains, and the Colorado River. We are passing all of those places so we need to be careful not to get lost.

“You are the chosen ones since you each have a talent that will help during this mission to the Lost Island, with which you will help us overcome obstacles on the curious and dangerous path.”

“Now I need you guys to hold on to the back of the flying motorcycle and ride along to the beginning of the path to the Lost Island.”

When we arrive I feel a breeze of wind sweep by and catch sight of a golden dot that stands on the top of the horribly dangerous Mount Everest, after the loss of nature on Earth. I have a feeling it is the treasure and that is what worries me, it looks so difficult to get up there. I tell my group, “We need to move fast, there is a timer set on a week then the world will become dirty, old, and gray.” It sits dirty, camouflaging in the gray rock.

I decide to use the flying motorcycle since it is big enough for all of us to fit, fast and we are in a rush, and every half an hour it provides a healthy snack if we are hungry.

When we leave, Trexer keeps fire breathing because he thinks it will warm us up. Bobby Smith keeps scaring wolves trying to attack us. Mathius keeps taking sharp rocks that could be useful along the way if in danger. Joe Green looks scary toward the big green scary crocodiles and they go back in the water. Eden Hazard can steer the wheel well and is very trustworthy. These are the reasons why I choose these adventurers for this mission and the help they provided me.

“Oh no, there is a river! How will we get past!” said Eden Hazard.

I tell them, “I have a boat stuck to the bottom of the flying motorcycle for these types of emergencies.”

But be careful, it had a rough current that could swish us away if we moved just one muscle!!! Luckily the paddles were robotic so we didn’t have to paddle and we could stay still. I notice that my teammates are looking a little freaked out, but my instinct tells me they are the correct people to assist me on this quest to the Lost Island. We arrived at the Rocky Mountains where we all start worrying about if we would make it or DIE!!!

We start climbing up the mountain, named Carl, the easy mountain. For this one we don’t need the rope we use for steep downhills and uphills. Everyone thankfully makes it up safely. The second mountain is steeper and we need a rope from the storage to pull us up, so Eden Hazard and I (I asked if I could call him Ed and he said no) set it up. In the meanwhile the others were eating: apples, bananas, grapes, strawberries, and other fruits (it took five minutes.)

I am excited and scared while I climb up the Mountain Lily. At that moment I realize I had feelings and that robots don’t have feelings, unless I am half human, half robot. I am amazed, I never thought of this chance that I might be human or half human. I am STUMPED, I never had this image in my mind.

While I daydream I slow everyone down, but thankfully I don’t let go of the rope and still have a firm grip on the rope, so I don’t fall down. At the top we take a water break and eat some more fruit, especially me and Ed-en Hazard, who set up the rope while they ate last time. My instinct tells me to go right, it is a shortcut, but the others want to continue forward. I don’t want to break up but I am the leader and they need to follow me, not me following them. AND THAT IS HOW I DECIDED!!!

“We are breaking up,” I tell them in a firm voice LIKE if I were Hillary Clinton. “I am courageous, adventurous, and I don’t need you guys!!! I can find the treasure alone!!!” I set out, worried about my ex-teammates. I make a fire and with my robot half put out a tent for the night. I instantly regret leaving my teammates because now I am alone. I am weaker and I don’t even have my flying motorcycle device to help provide healthy snacks and get me around quicker, which reminds me about the timer put on a week. I am on day two, Tuesday, only but I suspect others are up for the hunt to so I want to hurry. “Next stop Crocodile Lake,” I say. The golden dot soon looked more rectangular than circular and I got more certain it was the the chest that held the weapon to make Earth young and beautiful again. The more time passed the more I missed my teammates.

I can’t bear another moment without them. I am setting out to find them once and for all, whether or not it means losing the last chance to save Earth. I care for my teammates unlike others I knew of. I walk for miles, hungry and thirsty, and then I finally see them, my teammates. It is worth it, I told myself. I can hear my friends, not teammates, friends, calling me, seeming relieved that I am back to lead them, looking like they regretted the decision too. We greet each other and I change clothes, since I was dirty from the venture. I hope they learned their lesson after what happened and know that I learned a lesson too.  

We start our quest across the Colorado River, with me so happy to have my flying motorcycle back. I see a shark in the water. I warned Mathius but too late, he already lost an arm. I ask Ed to wrap the cloth around the arm and stop the bleeding. We cross the river and find a mountain, but not just any mountain, Mount EVEREST, the most dangerous and tall mountain on Earth, but with the golden chest right on top! We chose to do something daring, a combination of climbing, flying, and hiking!!! The quickest and safest way up.

We fly up with the motorcycle, finding dead bodies with blood spread around them and arrows in their chest. Then we jump out, leaving the motorcycle/plane in the air. Climbing up we get arrows shot at us out of nowhere, thankfully they miss everyone. Then on the easier course we are able to hike up and get going. When we reach the top we find the device and a little plant that had a note saying:

Dear Adventurers,

Inside the chest is the device you came for spray the acid on the plant to make the whole world beautiful. Then a path will appear toward your motorcycle/plane.

Sincerely,

THE PLANT

P.S. Only one drop can make the world beautiful again.

I bend to take the key but Bobby takes the key already and opened the chest. Surprisingly enough, Bobby was trying to break the device. We try to stop him but I realize the acid would come out of the glass container when he broke it and spread out to the plant. While we wait though, I thought of how you have friends that you can’t trust, and you have others that make up for that friend. And how either way you will always remember them even if you do everything to avoid remembering them. Then the path to the plane appears after Bobby had smashed the device. I can’t believe Bobby turned on me we use to do so much together before, and we were best friends! Our favorite thing to do is go fishing during spring, and if one of us were sick the other would not go fishing. We (not including Bobby ) walk toward the plane and drive home, leaving Bobby to walk 600 miles by foot, not even accomplishing his goal.

*  And that was how my friends and I saved future Earth *

Just Run

Not so long ago there was a poor girl in a village. The village was located in the kingdom of Chanistia. There was a girl in the village, her name was Jasmine. She had red hair like fire and blue eyes like the sparkling ocean. Although she had beauty, she didn’t have kindness. The only reason why she was mean is because she had lived in a poor village for so long. She wished for riches but she knew they would never come. Jasmine always wished  to meet the queen but she knew she would never get to, just like she would never get riches. She worked in the fields day and night. Her hands were bleeding and had large blisters on them.                                                                                              

One night, when Jasmine was lying on a pile of hay (her makeshift bed), she heard a sound outside. Pitter patter, pitter patter. Then, the sound suddenly stopped. Then it started again. It sounded like heavy pairs of footsteps pounding on the dry soil. She was startled. She didn’t dare take a peek out the window, but why not? She crept out of the pile of hay and took a peek out the window. What she saw made a cold creepy chill climb up her back.

Savage-looking men and women came marching into the poor little village. They were covered in dirt and wearing scraps of deer skin and boar skin. They looked like barbarians but were very skinny, like they had not eaten in days. Still, the looked strong enough to invade a poor village like Jasmine’s. But were they even going to invade the village? Were they just walking through? But why would they walk through? They were walking in the direction of the dark forest. Everyone who went in the forest never came back.

Jasmine got so scared she didn’t even think about her parents and to save them, or of her dog, and her sister, she didn’t care, she just ran and ran. She ran through the kitchen and grabbed her water bottle and some food and ran. She didn’t care where she was going or how she was going to get there. And that was the biggest mistake of her life.

***

“Just run. Just run. Just run. Run,” Jasmine said, determined to keep on running although her legs felt like jello that sat in the sun for too long. She ran past skinny trees with no leaves. She ran and ran and ran until she found a house. The house was very skinny and tall. It was made out of black bricks with no windows with one small door. The door had a shiny brass handle and it was made out of wood. The wood was painted grey. Jasmine had heard of the fairytale Hansel and Gretel, so she did not dare to knock on the door. She walked around the house, studying it. It looked very old with cobwebs scattered all over it.  She sat next to a nearby tree and opened her bag that she packed full of food and water. Suddenly, she heard a screaming noise from the house. She was very scared. Then she ran away. Then she heard another screaming noise from the house. Someone was yelling for help. “I shouldn’t be worrying about other people now,” she said. “I just have to worry about saving the village. I need to think of my plan,” she muttered.

Then she thought, But what if that person was me? I would go help them. But that person isn’t me so I don’t care. Anyways why am I even thinking about saving the village or a random girl. I don’t know, I feel like I have changed. But… if I save her then I can mock her and tease her about how stupid it is to be captured. It’s a deal! She ran to the house and didn’t even think about knocking. She opened the door and peered inside. All she saw was darkness. She couldn’t see a thing.

“Damn it, I should have brought a lantern,” she said. She decided to walk inside with her hands outstretched so she wouldn’t bump into anything. As soon as she walked two steps, her hands felt something slimy and sticky. She was disgusted, and also startled. “Ew, what is this?” she said. When her eyes adjusted to the light, she saw what it was. It was a girl that was cut in half. She screamed so loud that someone could hear it from miles away. The screaming continued.

Someone screamed, “Help, help! They’re gonna kill me!” This was too scary for Jasmine. She ran out of the house. But what if that person is going to die? I have to save her, she thought. So she went inside again and felt around with her hands, hoping not to touch anything slimy again. Finally, she reached a wall. She touched it and she moved to the side. She felt a hand railing. She slowly made her way upstairs. Each step she took, the staircase creaked. It seemed like no one had walked up this staircase for years.

“Then who could have been trying to kill the poor girl up there?” she whispered. When she got upstairs, she kept on walking, then felt a doorknob. The doorknob was covered in layers of dust. “No one must have touched it for a long time,” she said. “Who could have been screaming?” But before she could open the doorknob, this white cloud puffed through the door.

“Hahaha, you fell for my trick! Everyone falls for my trick! Now I will stab you to death.” said the white cloud. Jasmine was too scared to scream. She wasn’t sure what would happen next, but she would probably be cut in half just like the girl downstairs. She should have never come into this house.

This must be what happens when you try to help save someone, she thought. That made her even more mad and angry and frustrated. She didn’t feel scared anymore, she just felt mad. This is what happens when you run away from home and try to save the village all by yourself when you’re only fifteen years old. She put her hands out and tried to grab the ghost, but she knew she would fail. But she didn’t fail. She succeeded in grabbing the ghost.

The ghost screamed a high pitched scream, “Aaaaah! What, did you touch that girl downstairs?” screamed the ghost.

“Ugh, yes, indeed I did,” Jasmine said. “It was disgusting. Did you do that?”

“Do what?” said the ghost.

“Cut her in half.”

The ghost said, “Yes, I did.”

“Why, though?” said Jasmine.

“Because that’s what ghosts do,” said the ghost. The ghost slipped out of Jasmine’s hands, grabbed the knife on the table, and tried to cut Jasmine in half. “Just one quick stab,” said the ghost. “That’s all I need.”

“Well, you won’t get it!” said Jasmine. She grabbed the knife and ran downstairs.

“You think you can get out that easy?” said the ghost.

“Oh, yes I can,” said Jasmine. The ghost paused. Then, a gust of wind shot out and blew Jasmine back. She fell down the stairs. The doors closed behind her. Then she tried to stab the knife at the ghost, but the ghost was too fast. He moved away quick. He flew through the door of the house. “He locked me in here!” Jasmine screamed. “How sneaky!”

Then, the ghost said, “Really? You think you can’t go through the door?” the ghost said.

“Of course I can’t,” said Jasmine. “I’m not a ghost like you are! I’m not dead.”

“Oh,” the ghost said. “I didn’t know you didn’t know.”

“Didn’t know what?” said Jasmine.

”Never mind,” said the ghost, ”I guess you don’t know.”
”Whatever,” said Jasmine. She used the knife to try to break the door down, but she failed; she only made a couple of little dents in the door. Then, finally, she tried one more stab and the door fell right over. But the ghost was not there.

”Ugh! How could I have let him get away?” said Jasmine. Where did he go? she thought. Her head hurt and she felt dizzy. She stumbled over to the tree where her bag was and lied down. I need to think of a plan, she thought, But why would I want to think of a plan? I don’t want to save that dirty little village of mine, but I have all my memories there. I should save it. I´ll just save the village.

How about I go to the queen and ask her for some soldiers? she thought, She would never let me. But the queen is a kindhearted person. She would definitely let me take her soldiers to defend the village! I’m too tired to decide right now. I´ll decide in the morning.

Then, Jasmine thought: Where should I sleep? The dark forest is way too dangerous to sleep in. I should find a safer place to sleep. I could climb on a tree and sleep on it; nobody would find me there! So Jasmine climbed the tallest tree she could find and lied down. Then, she got up again. This tree is not sturdy enough. I need to find a tall tree with a sturdier branch.

She climbed down the tree and climbed up another tree next to it. On that tree, she found a perfect branch. Her eyes felt heavy, and she closed them. ”Finally,” she said, “Time to rest after a big day of fighting ghosts.” The tree felt comfortable, even if it wasn’t her regular haypile back in the village. She missed her village so much.

Then, she fell into a deep sleep. She dreamt about her saving her village. In her dream, she travelled to the queen and her for soldiers to help fight the invaders; the queen happily obliged. ”Of course you can take my soldiers to save the village!” said the queen.

Suddenly, Jasmine woke up to the sound of birds chirping. The birds were squawking their miserable songs of the dark forest. She wearily sat up and opened her eyes. What she saw was definitely not the same part of the dark forest she had been in. She wasn’t on the edge of the dark forest, but rather in the dead center, where the goblins’ cave was. She wasn’t on her branch anymore; she was in a goblin cart covered by a net.

”Ahhhh! Where am I?” Jasmine screamed.

”You’re in the goblin cave,” said the goblin pulling the cart, ”We’re gonna eat you once we get you into our cave and put you in our cauldron.”

”How could you get me down from that tree branch?” Jasmine asked.

”Ropes,” answered the goblin, ”That’s why you have that bruise on your arm.”

Jasmine looked at her arm. ”There’s nothing there!”

”It’s the other arm,” said the goblin.

Then, Jasmine looked at her other arm. It was bleeding, blistered, and had bruises all over it. “That’s not just a bruise,” Jasmine said, ”That’s a full-on cut! So you cut people up and just put them in a cauldron to eat them? Really? That’s what you do?”

”Yep. That’s what we do,” said the goblin, “Every single day.”

”Goblins are mean and cruel,” said Jasmine.

”You’re no prize either, lady.”

”Geez, thanks,” said Jasmine sarcastically.

For the rest of the ride, Jasmine was quiet. She was too busy forming her plan. She kept on picking up little sticks, little pieces of straw, and leaves from the floor. ”What are you doing, little girl?” asked the goblin.

”Nothing,” she said, ”I’m just cleaning the path.”

When the little cart finally made it inside the cave, Jasmine was ready. She put the leaves and the straw inside her bag. ”Give me that bag,” said the goblin.

Ugh, why did I do that? thought Jasmine, I’m such an idiot! Jasmine gave the goblin her bag and the goblin shoved her into her cell, locking the door. How can I ever get my bag back? Jasmine thought. Then, it hit her. ”May I please have some food from my bag?” she cooed, ”I’m just a poor little village girl and I haven’t eaten in days!”

”That’s what everyone says. You’re not getting a clip to pick the lock on the door from your bag.”

”I’m not getting a clip,” said Jasmine, “All I want is some food. My food is wrapped up in the little pouch in my bag wrapped up in a silver cloth.”

”Alright, fine.” The goblin was too dumb to understand. Thankfully, Jasmine put her plan and her food within the silver pouch. Jasmine pretended to eat her food, but also got out her plan and stuffed it within her pockets. Then, the goblin said: ”At 5:00 pm, I will take you out of your cell, and you will be eaten.”

Mmmm, he thought, She will be so good and juicy. I have not eaten in days!

Finally, it was 5:00 p.m. The goblin unlocked the cell and grabbed Jasmine. He pushed her down the hall, taking one left and one right. Then, they got to the very skinny corridor and had to squeeze through it. When they got to the cauldron room, all of the goblins were there, licking their lips.

Then, the goblin said: ”Everybody, leave! She has to take off her clothes before she gets into the pot. Nobody wants to eat clothes!”

”Ewww! Clothes,” the goblins said as they left. But Jasmine didn’t change. She put the doll that looked like her and was made of leaves and straw into the pot and entered the skinny corridor.

”I’m ready!” she called, and then she ran and ran and ran out of the goblin cave, never to return again. She ran and ran and ran to the edge of the dark forest, all the way to the snowy mountains of Chanistia. These were going to be some very cold travels.

Jasmine ran and ran and ran until she found a cold mountain. Thankfully she had brought her winter clothes. She put on her long pants and put on her furry winter coat. “I’m ready,” Jasmine said, “to climb this mountain.”

She started to run up the mountain, but slipped back down. This is gonna be hard, she thought. She sunk her feet into the soft snow and then sunk her arms into the snow, too. Although it felt cold, she had to keep climbing. She started climbing up the mountain, sinking her arms and her legs into the snow. Finally, she made it almost halfway up the mountain.

Jasmine kept on climbing and climbing until her fingers felt so numb. So numb she thought she had frostbite. She kept climbing and climbing until she looked at her hands again. They looked purple. Oh my gosh, she thought, I do have frostbite. Even though she had frostbite, she still kept climbing, determined to get to the queen. For some reason the frostbite didn’t hurt … at … all.

Weird, she thought, Maybe I don’t have frostbite after all. Jasmine kept on climbing until she reached the top of the mountain. Finally, I made it! she thought, But now I have to go all the way back down the mountain again.

She hiked in the freezing cold snow for a couple of more minutes, and then she made it to the other side of the mountain. Maybe I could just sled down, she thought, But that would be dangerous. Jasmine slowly climbed down the mountain backwards, sinking her feet into the snow, just like how she climbed up the mountain.

Suddenly, a pile of snow fell from the top of the mountain and came tumbling down towards her. The snow fell on Jasmine’s face and made her stumble backwards. She fell over backwards and slid down the snowy mountain. “Oof!” she said when her head hit a chunk of ice at the bottom of the mountain.

Jasmine slowly stood up and stumbled back. She looked around and noticed that she was in the middle of a village. It was small, but noticeably more wealthy than Jasmine’s own village. She remembered that she stole some coins from the goblins, so she grabbed the gold coins and ran to the nearest house. She knocked on the door and a friendly-looking woman appeared. “Hello, child! Why did you knock on my door?”

“I knocked on your door because I haven’t eaten in days. May I please buy some food?”

“No, sorry. There is a different house down the block. That is the grocery store. You can buy some food there.” The woman slammed the door in Jasmine’s face.

Jasmine went to the house down the block, just like the woman said. She opened the door. “What are you doing here?” said the man, “Knock first before you enter! This is a private house, not a grocery store!”

“Excuse me, then. Where can you find the grocery store?”

“There is no grocery store in this town,” said the man, “Now get the hell out of my house!”

Jasmine checked the next five houses, but everybody shooed her out. “Ugh,” Jasmine said in despair, “Will anything go my way?” She slumped down in a pile of snow leaning against a house.

Suddenly, she heard a shrill voice. “Hello, child! Would you like to have some food at my house?”

“Finally,” Jasmine answered back, “A nice and willing person! I’ll be glad to eat some food at your house!”

“Okay,” said the woman, “I’ll open the door.”

When the door opened, Jasmine walked inside, and all she saw was an old lady sitting in her rocking chair. There was nobody by the door. “Oh, hello,” said the old woman in the same shrill voice, “Would you like something to eat?”
“Uh, yes. That’s what I came here for,” said Jasmine.

“Okay! Then sit in this chair, and I will cook you some food.” The old woman went into another room and slammed the door. Jasmine heard some cackling from the other room. Suddenly, the old woman swung open the door and magically turned the chair into a hot cauldron, boiling with water.

“Ahaha!” said the old woman, now dressed as a witch, “You didn’t even know I was a witch! Such a foolish child.” The witch laughed once more. “Hahaha! You will make a nice human cake for my son’s birthday party!”

Jasmine tried to get out of the cauldron, but she was stuck. She then noticed that she had chains on her wrists and ankles. “Hahaha! You think you will get out?” said the witch, “You are more foolish than normal children!”

“Actually, I’m not,” said Jasmine, “The ghost tried to kill me, and I escaped. The goblins tried to eat me, and I escaped. I can easily escape from you!” Jasmine got a clip from her fiery red hair and secretly picked the locks from under the boiling hot water. When the witch was in the other room, getting her spices and ingredients for the yummy cake, Jasmine emerged from the boiling hot water and ran outside. She ran and ran and ran and didn’t stop. She ran out of the village and into the forest. Then, she kept on running. She ran and ran and ran and ran. Soon enough, she made it out of the forest.

Finally, she stopped running. Jasmine was breathing really hard. I’ve been running from a ghost, a goblin, and a witch, and the only thing that helped me was to run, she thought. Then she looked up. She saw a large mountain, but what she saw on top of the mountain was amazing. Finally, she gasped, I made it. On the mountain there was a humongous crystal castle. It had big golden doors and many windows. There were four soldiers guarding the golden doors. They wore shiny silver armour and had bronze swords. She climbed up the mountain as fast as she could, gripping each little rock and pushing herself up. She was so excited; she couldn’t wait to meet the queen. This had been her dream for years.

When she made it up the mountain, she ran up to the golden doors and asked the soldiers, “I need to see the Queen. Can you let me in?”

Both the guards said “NO,” in a booming voice at the same time. “Only royalty may enter,” said the guards.

“But invaders have taken over my village,” Jasmine said, “May I please ask for help?”

“NO” said the guards again, in the same loud booming voice.

“Ugh” said Jasmine in despair, and she walked away. “Just open the doors!” she screamed, getting very mad. The guard ignored her. She started kicking the guards foot, but finally she gave up. She sat under the nearest tree under the shade and lay down.

“How hard is it to get in?” she yelled. Then she sat up, and she thought of an idea. Maybe I could go through the moat, and go through the gate and into the castle, she thought. “Okay, bye-bye!” she said to the guards. Jasmine did her best job to clean up her clothes to look nice for the queen. Then she walked around to the back of the castle. She took three deep breaths and then said, One . . . Two . . . Three . . . GO! And jumped into the moat.

She swam straight through the icky moat until she touched a gate. She was skinny enough to swim through the gate bars. She squeezed through and finally got to the surface. She was huffing and puffing. When she looked up, she saw she was inside the castle. She was in a fountain! She got out of the fountain dripping wet. She saw guards in the same shiny silver armour and servants, some in aprons, others in suits. She also saw a spiral staircase up to the mezzanine. Everyone stared at her.

“What are you doing here young lady?” asked the guards.

“We need to get you cleaned up,” said the servants.

“How did you even get here?” asked some others.

Jasmine ignored them. She ran up the spiral staircase searching for the Queen’s room. Then she ran back down the staircase.

“Um excuse me, but do you know where the Queen is?” she asked the servants.

“She’s in the throne room,” said the servants. Then the guards turned around.

“Don’t just stand there!” said a guard to the others. Then all of the guards ran up the staircase chasing Jasmine, but Jasmine was too fast. She slipped right out of their reach. Jasmine ran and ran and ran up another spiral staircase to the third floor. She ran to the other side of the floor and found a big silver door with brass handles. She knocked on the door and waited for an answer, the guards at her heels. The guards didn’t dare run anymore now that they were at the Queen’s throne room. Then, the Queen opened the door to the throne room.

She had so much makeup on she looked like a doll. She had cherry red lips and a poofy lavender dress with ruffles all over it. She wore baby blue high heels with crystal hearts all over them. The dress had long fluffy sleeves covered in ruffles of lace. She had sharp blue eyes and a stern look. Her cheeks were pink just like her shiny earrings.

“Hello, why are you here?” asked the Queen in a strong British accent. “And you just interrupted me, how rude. Also, why are you so dirty? Only royalty can step foot in this castle.” Jasmine could tell that it would be hard to persuade the Queen to lend her some soldiers for her village.

“Excuse me,” asked Jasmine, “I’m here because invaders invaded my poor little village.”

“What is your village called?” asked the Queen.

“Panadel,” said Jasmine.

“I’ve never even heard of it!” said the Queen.

“It’s a poor village next to the dark forest,” said Jasmine.

“A poor village next to the dark forest? Why would I help such a poor little village like Panadel? I only help rich villages become richer!” she laughed. “Okay, send her out!” she said to the guards. “It’s not worth it to help poor little villages like Panadel.” The guards grabbed her arms and shoved her out.

“Never come back,” the guards said. “You are a disgrace to Chanistia.”

Jasmine lay on the ground. She didn’t know what to do. Jasmine had been through all of this for nothing. The queen had just said ‘no.’ Should she go back? Should she stay here? What should she do? If I go back, maybe I can save the village myself, Jasmine thought, No, that would be impossible. I’m just a normal girl.

“All that for nothing,” she said, “I’ll just go back. Then, they’ll capture me and I won’t have to worry about anything ever again.” She started climbing down the mountain and ran through the forest, the snowy village, and then climbed the snowy mountains and slid down. Then, she ran through the dark forest and all the way to the village. When she saw the village, she was surprised.

She saw the invaders wearing deerskin and whipping the villagers if they did not do their work. Jasmine was outraged. How could the invaders come in and force them to work? Jasmine couldn’t just go back and give up! She had to think of a plan! She couldn’t give up now! Jasmine thought and thought and thought. She didn’t know what to do. What if the plan failed? What if she got killed? There were so many questions!

I’m gonna think of a plan that nobody will notice, said Jasmine, Maybe I will kill the invaders off one by one. But how will I kill them? A bow and arrow? My village is too poor to have bows and arrows!

I can make a bow and arrow, she thought, using wood and string from the forest. Jasmine cut down branches from trees using a small knife she found. She collected old cobwebs from dead spiders and braided them all together to make a strong string. Finally, her bow and all of her arrows were completed. While she was making the bow and arrows, she saw all the invaders and counted all of them. She made arrows for each invader and five extra if she missed.

She climbed a tree and sat on it. Every day, she would kill two invaders, starting now. She put an arrow on her bow. Jasmine was very, very good at aiming. Finally, she found her target, who was a young man. He had long brown hair and wore a boarskin around his body. Then, she let go of the arrow. The arrow shot through the sky and finally fell down and hit him. The arrow speared through his chest, and he collapsed to the floor. Jasmine quickly climbed down the tree and ran to the man. She slipped him away so that none of the invaders would notice. She dug a large hole and stuck him inside.

Every single day, this continued. After the fourth day, she had already lost nine arrows. Day after day, this continued. Nobody noticed, until the last day. There were only two more invaders to kill. “Where did everybody else go?” one of them said to the other.

Jasmine had gotten so good at aiming that while the two invaders were standing next to each other, Jasmine had shot two arrows at the same time; one headed for one of the invaders, while the other headed towards the other. They both died at the exact same time and fell to the ground. Jasmine dragged both of them into the forest and buried them with everybody else.

All of the villagers cheered. “Yay! Jasmine saved the day!” But then, they stopped. Jasmine slid down the tree and came into the village. “Why did you stop cheering? What happened?”

A single villager stepped forward. “We are so sorry for your loss,” she told her.

“What loss?” Jasmine asked.

“Your parents,” she said.

“Oh no…” Jasmine whispered.

“I’m sorry,” said the villager, “The invaders would not let them look for you, but they did so anyway. Eventually, the invaders killed them.”

“Oh my gosh,” said Jasmine, “My parents! I should never have left them!” Jasmine cried and cried and cried. She hated the invaders so much. “I should never have run away,” she said, “I should have protected my parents.”

Two days passed; then, two more after that, and two more after that. Jasmine was still crying. She didn’t even get to say goodbye to her parents. They were just… gone. When she was cleaning out the house one day, she found a letter in her father’s desk drawer.

It said: ‘To Jasmine, I love you’ on the front. Jasmine opened up the letter.

Dear Jasmine,

I should have told you long ago. It is hard to explain everything in one letter, though. You are actually half fairy. I didn’t tell you before because we thought you would tell everyone and you would be in grave danger, because people would force you to grant them wishes and keep you captive just like they did to me. That also might explain why you can do magical things.

Love,

Your father.

Jasmine was scared. She didn’t even know if it was true. Was it a prank? Was her father really a fairy? Was Jasmine a fairy? Was this true? Jasmine remembered what the ghost said. “Really? You mean you don’t know that you can go through the door?” the ghost had said.

Also, the frostbite didn’t hurt much, Jasmine remembered, I guess I am a fairy!

Jasmine would keep her village safe now. She would find it more resources. And she would teach them how to defend the village so no more invaders would ever come back.

Jasmine had lost her impulse to be rude and mean, but now, after her journey and the death of her parents, she had learned to never give up. To always keep trying, even if so many bad things and setbacks happened.

Jasmine looked out at her poor village and thought of how she could change it to make it safer. Jasmine put down the letter and for the first time she felt safe.

Behind the Screen

I had been waiting for this day all year long.

It wasn’t Christmas. Or Thanksgiving. Or even my birthday.

It was the last day of school.

For as far as I remember, I had never enjoyed school. It just wasn’t fit for me, as some people say. I would prefer to be at home, hacking my computer or playing Minecraft. But this was my favorite time of the school year –– the last day of school, the last period: Only an hour away from freedom. I couldn’t help feeling happy.

I drummed my fingers on the lockers as I walked down the hallway. My last class was math, which I wasn’t particularly good at. Usually, I dreaded going to math class and facing my strict teacher, Mr. Foster. But today was different. As I neared my math classroom, I thought, Only an hour to go! What could possibly go wrong?

When I walked in my math classroom, I caught Mr. Foster staring at me, trying to catch my eye. I didn’t notice, because I was too busy thinking about escaping school and being free. Just one hour! I kept repeating to myself. Then I’m free!

When class finally started, I couldn’t help squirming around in my seat with excitement. Mr. Foster stood up, and announced that he was going to pass out our end of the year math tests. That got my attention. I hadn’t really paid attention to the test, but I couldn’t fail… could I?

Mr. Foster frowned as he reached my desk. When he dropped my test on my desk face-down, he whispered to me, “Meet me after class. We need to talk.”

That really got me worried. I didn’t dare look at my grade, so I just left the test sitting there. I noticed a few kids staring at my test, and I squirmed around some more. A kid named Ash sitting next to me leaned over.

“Hey,” he whispered. “What did you get? I got an A. My mom is going to FREAK OUT when she finds out that I got something wrong.”

“Shut up,” I whispered back to him. “Stop bragging.”

“Hey, just let me see your grade, will you?” Ash asked, irritated. He reached over for my paper.

“NO!” I shouted. But it was too late. He had grabbed my paper off my desk, and sat back in his chair. All eyes turned to us.

Ash’s eyes opened wide as he stared at my paper, open-mouthed. “Lemme see!” Kids from all around called. Even I went up to have a look.

“Boys and girls! Go back to your seats!” Mr. Foster shouted. Nobody besides Ash had time to see my grade. Not even me.

“Here, you can have your test back.” Ash handed me my test. He still seemed shocked. What was my grade? Part of me didn’t want to know.

Mr. Foster sent everyone back to their desks. He began a lecture about keeping your grade to yourself. I didn’t listen. More important thoughts were floating around in my head.

Like my math test.

The rest of the math class was okay. Everyone kept giving me weird looks, while I tried to ignore them. Finally, when math class ended, Mr. Foster called me over to his desk. But I knew I had to see my grade first.

Slowly, I flipped the test over with my eyes glued shut. Nervousness flowed through me as I opened my eyes to take a peek.

When I saw the letter written on the top of my paper, I gasped. I stood up and ran out of the classroom, ignoring Mr. Foster’s calls. I grabbed my belongings from my locker along the way, and sped up as I ran out into the hallway and outside, sobbing.

* * *

I didn’t take the bus home that day. Instead, I ran home, crying the whole way. I didn’t take any notice of anything around me. I just ran, as if it were a way to escape from my teacher, my worries, and my grade.

When my house appeared in sight, I suddenly slowed down. Why was I running home? I thought. Great. Now I’m here early, and my mom is going to suspect that something is wrong. I guess I’ll have to hide out here.

So, quietly, I snuck into the front yard and hid in the bushes. It was uncomfortable, and prickly. Suddenly, a sharp branch poked me. I rolled over and crashed into the door.

“Ouch!” I shouted. I gasped. Did my mom hear that? I crawled back under the bush.

The front door suddenly opened and my mom stepped out.

“James! What are you doing, hiding in a bush? Is something wrong?” she asked.

I hesitated. “Uh, well, Mom,” I began, “I…I just like hiding in bushes. It’s… a new fad, hiding in bushes.”

Mom rolled her eyes, as if she didn’t believe me. I didn’t blame her. She knew that the only place where I would willingly hide in a bush was in Minecraft, and I was nowhere near a computer.

Mom sighed as she let me inside. “Well, you couldn’t have been hiding in a bush just because you felt like it. Come on inside and show me what’s wrong.”

Reluctantly, I followed. I knew I was doomed. For the first time in a while, I wish she would return to the way she once was –– too busy to see any of my grades.

I followed my mom into the living room and we both sat down on the couch. “So, I heard you got your final math test back today,” my mom told me. “How did you do? I hope you didn’t just rush through. This test is very important, you know– you could flunk a grade because of it.”

I shifted nervously in the couch, not daring to respond. My mom just sighed. “Well, if you’re not going to tell me, I guess I’ll have to look for myself. James, go get your test.”
I wasn’t about to give up just then.“Mom… I… uh…”

My mom turned to look at me. “Yes?”

“Well, um… I…”

I had no idea what to say. So I said the first thing that came to mind.

“I LOOOOVE hiding in bushes!” I told her loudly.

My mom shot me a weird look. So instead of arguing, I got up and pulled the math test out from my backpack. I handed it to my mom.

For a moment, my mom seemed to be in complete shock. She shook her head as she stared at the paper. “Oh, James,” she sighed.

“Well, Mom, you always say that an A-minus isn’t an A, so…I guess…”

My mom just shook her head. “James, go upstairs. Go hack your computer or play some Minecraft or something. I need to think. And don’t come down until I tell you to.”

Think. That word never meant anything good. I hated, HATED when my parents told me to leave just so they could think, and anger began to flow through me. Sometimes, I just couldn’t believe my parents.

Once I was upstairs in my bedroom, I loaded up Minecraft. Gaming was a way to make me forget about all my worries and whatever’s going on in life. It was also the perfect place to express my anger.

I chose a random server at the top of my list and logged in. In the chat, I typed, “I HATE MY FAMILY! All I feel is asdfghjkl;!”

A new message popped up from a moderator named NerdyGamr21. “Dude, don’t use so many caps. This is your last warning. Also, I highly doubt that your family would do something worthy of your hate.” And, then and there, I was kicked from the server.

I logged back in.

I used caps again.

This time, no warning. I was permanently banned.

Haha, they could never get away with banning me. I hacked myself back in. This time, I only stayed for about two seconds, enough to type, “Well, you wouldn’t understand what is going on in my family” in the chat.

I slammed down my computer screen. I had expected some pity from the players, not a moderator who banned anybody who disobeyed the rules. He was not at all comforting. In fact, he sounded a lot like my mom.

As I was thinking about that dumb moderator, I suddenly heard the sound of the garage door opening. Was it my dad? Apparently, it was. I cringed. Even though he would never yell at me, I knew he would be disappointed to see my grade.

I heard footsteps coming in the house. I squatted down and mashed my ear into the floorboards to eavesdrop. I could hear my mom, standing up from the couch. A small bang sounded.

“Oh, good, you’re here,” my mom remarked. I heard my mom’s footsteps. “I need to talk to you.”

They began whispering. I couldn’t hear much of what they were saying, but I heard my name involved. It didn’t sound good.

After a while of talking, I heard my dad say, “Mmm. Okay. I’ll go talk to him.” I heard the sound of a paper crinkling, and then my dad’s footsteps up the stairs.

I quickly realized that ‘him’ was me. I sat up and jumped up on the bed, trying to act casual. I opened a book and pretended to read.

A few seconds later, my dad walked in. He had on his “let’s get down to business face.” He sat down next to me and held out my test.

“So, James,” my dad began, “Can you explain your grade to me?”

“Can you really expect me to do well on that dumb test? It was so hard, and I bet nobody really got an A on it. So somehow, you think I can? I might not be super dumb, but I’m not the type you would expect to ace a test as hard as that one! I wish I could, but…”

I searched my mind for a random excuse. Nothing came to mind.

My dad shook his head and sighed. “Honestly, James, I wish you would be more careful sometimes. Now let’s go over this test.”

I sighed inwardly. There was no way out.

“So let’s see. Five wrong here, three wrong here, and six wrong here.” My dad turned to face me. “Looks like you need to work on algebra,” he told me. “That’s a skill you will need for next year.”

My dad flipped a page.

“Come on, James, I’m sure your teacher has explained this to you before. Why can’t you remember this? You have been paying attention in class, right?”

“Well… sort of,” I answered. My dad eyed me suspiciously. “Well… no,” I admitted.  

My dad looked at me from the top of his glasses, but didn’t say anything. He just flipped the page silently.

“Next page. Graphing data –– I remember your tutor taught you this before, but ––” he looked down at the page –– “17 wrong.” My dad turned to look at me again. “You have got to do better. There are only 20 questions on this page. What percent of questions did you get wrong?” He questioned.

I couldn’t believe that he was trying to make me ashamed of my grade by making me do the math. “Hey, how should I know?” I replied, annoyed. “You can’t make me do this!”

My dad stood up. “James, I want you to actually think about this grade. This is serious ––  it can affect your future. I’m going to go downstairs and speak to your mom.” And with that, he left me in my room. Alone.

Part of me felt angry for saying what I did. But most of me felt that my dad deserved it. Why were my parents becoming such jerks all of a sudden?

But I didn’t think about it for too long. With a sigh, I plopped myself down onto my gaming chair and opened up my computer. When all went wrong, Minecraft was the solution. Hopefully, the dumb moderator wouldn’t be there.

* * *

After a long time, my dad finally came upstairs. “James, I’ve made an arrangement for you. The math teacher said that your final grade was an F, and that is not enough to move on to eighth grade. So, you’re going to have to take the test again.”

I nearly fell off my seat when I heard his words. Repeat the test?! How would I do that? I had already failed miserably. How could they expect me to do well this time?

My dad somehow knew what I was thinking. “James, you might think that I’m expecting too much of you. But you can do it. From now on, study every day and you’ll do well.”

I couldn’t believe it. Every day? I was no nerd!

Just as my dad was going to leave, he stopped himself. “I almost forgot –– here’s a packet to help you study. I want it complete by tomorrow.” Then, he left.

I looked through the packet. 10 pages?! My dad really was expecting too much of me! Sure, maybe I could do 10 pages in a week. But one day –– impossible.

“Well, better get started,” I told myself reluctantly. I picked up my pencil and stared down at the paper. Algebra?!! On the first page?!! I shook my head. Nah, I’ll do that later, I thought. Opening up my laptop, I loaded up Minecraft. I have better things to do.

I logged in to the server where I first met the moderator, NerdyGamr21. Surprisingly, he was also on. It was almost as if he knew what I was doing.

Trying to ignore the dumb moderator, I went straight over to the parkour. But then, something in the chat caught my attention.

In the chat, NerdyGamr21 had typed, “Hey, xXProclassGamerXx, if I’ve been here for 20 minutes, how many seconds have I been on for?”

At first, I laughed. Somebody must be having the same problem as me, I thought. But when I noticed players gathering around me and try to punch me in the face, I realized that xXProclassGamerXx was me!

I burst out of the circle of players congregating around me and walked over to where NerdyGamr21 was standing. I told him privately in chat, “SHUT UP!,” and I left.

Imagine a system of gas pipes. There they are, sitting there, minding their own business, until somebody nearby lights a match, and the whole thing blows up. That’s how I felt when StupidGamr21 or whatever his name was insulted me –– I was exploding inside. But I just sat there, glaring at the screen. How dare he insult me!

I’ve had enough gaming for now, I thought. The only problem was that there was nothing else to do. I could do the math packet, but… that was too much work for me, and avoiding the packet came first in my mind.

But something in my mind urged me to finish the packet first. It was a huge burden, and I felt that facing it was the only way to make it go away. Fine! I thought, giving in. My dad will be pretty mad if I don’t do it anyways.

When I looked deep into the problems, I realized that they were not as hard as I thought they would be. I got through the first page in about 40 minutes, and started the second.

I finished the rest of the packet at the same rate. When I was finished, I had already eaten dinner, and it was nearly time for bed. I yawned. Even though the packet was the worst form of torture, I felt a strange type of pride in finishing.

That’s enough for today, I thought. I sat down on my bed, and put my head down on my pillow. I fell asleep instantly, exhausted from all the work. I think I deserve a rest.

* * *

The next few days came and went the exact same way. Each day, my dad would give me a packet to finish. I would also play Minecraft, but I would try to avoid the server where I had first met the moderator, even though it was my favorite.

By the fifth day of following this routine, I was getting really tired of these math packets. The pride of finishing one was wearing off, too, once I realized that I was getting several problems wrong.

My parents seemed to have changed a lot. I realized that my mom was beginning to go on the computer much more often, and my dad was always whispering to her in a small voice. I was beginning to get slightly suspicious.

That day, I went downstairs into the office and went on my mom’s computer. I pressed ctrl+H to check her history. When I her history, my jaw dropped open.

Tuesday, 4:21: Minecraft. Just twenty minutes ago. This wasn’t right. I closed the page and checked her home screen. Sure enough, Minecraft was downloaded.

I clicked on the icon of the green block of grass. The Minecraft launcher appeared. At the bottom left corner, I saw her username.

NerdyGamr21.

No, this couldn’t be right.

For a few moments, I just sat there, staring at the screen of her computer with a blank look on my face. How could my mom be a moderator? I thought. It occurred to me that my mom knew more than she let on. But that didn’t stop me from being angry at her. In fact, I was furious.

“MOM!” I shouted at the top of my lungs. My mom came running into the office.

“James! Is anything wrong? What are you screaming about? Why are you sitting at my computer, and what are you doing on it?”

She leaned over and glanced at the screen. “What –– oh, James.” Her voice dropped.

“Y-you knew. You knew the whole time that I’ve been playing on the computer, haven’t you? You’ve been watching and humiliating me on the server!”

“James-” my mom began.

“I’ve had enough.”

I stormed up to my room. When I logged on to Minecraft, I realized that there was a new addition to my list of servers. Surprised, I clicked on it.

There was only one other person on the server. NerdyGamr21. Wow, my mom was sure smart.

In chat, I typed, “What are you doing on here?”

A few seconds later, a response appeared. “I’ve come here to talk.”

“About what?”

“You. And your computer. And my job as a moderator.”

I didn’t respond. I sat back in my chair, watching the screen, waiting for my mom to go on.

“I just wanted to bring you closer to us, and your responsibilities at school. I never meant to humiliate you. I just felt that you being with your computer had brought us apart.”

I was about to respond, but it was just then that I realized that I had been spending so much time behind my screen instead of with my family. If I had been out and about more often, I would have realized what my mom was doing earlier on. But no. I had chosen to hide in my room, away from my family, away from my responsibilities at school, with my computer as company.

But this was going to end. I slammed down my computer screen. After years of hiding, I needed to face reality. Not the players in Minecraft. Reality.

I walked down the stairs and into the office. “Mom?”

“Yes?”

She closed the screen of her computer. “Do you want to talk to me?”
“Mom, I…”

My mom sighed. “I know, James. I understand that you find the computer very addicting. That’s the problem with most modern children these days –– they spend so much time behind the screen and don’t know how to spend time with their family. You’re not to blame –– it’s just all this technology. It can be tempting.”

I nodded. “Yeah. Some people text their parents instead of walking 10 feet to go talk to them.”
My mom nodded. “Exactly what I mean. You see, hardly any of these kids nowadays remember that they have parents right next to them. I have to admit, ever since I started playing Minecraft, I’ve really been addicted to this computer.”

“When was that?”

“Oh, just a couple months after you began playing Minecraft. At first, I was curious about what you found so fun about playing Minecraft, and I wanted to try it for myself. So soon, I realized how amazing the game was, and became addicted. When I realized that I was spending too much time on the computer, I decided to take a break. And now I’m back, to bring you back to reality, too.”

I nodded. “Well, I think I’m back. Don’t expect me to give up Minecraft completely, but I guess I have to face reality at some point in time.”

My mom smiled at me. “Well, speaking of reality, I think it’s almost time you take your final math test. Why don’t you go upstairs and study? You will take the test sometime next week. And don’t tell me you’re not ready, because the computer is no longer in your way.”

* * *

For the next few days, I studied hard. I tried to do as well as possible, and even my dad was proud of my progress. “Great work, James,” he told me after I had finished one of his packets with only three mistakes.

But as the test got nearer and nearer, I got super nervous. What if the same thing happened again? Then I wouldn’t be able to advance to eighth grade! I would be left behind with everyone teasing me.

However, despite my nervousness, part of me was still hopeful. I had studied hard, passing shouldn’t be a problem… should it?

When the day finally came, I had pretty much dropped the hopeful part of me. Nervousness dominated. “What if I fail?” I told my mom in frustration.

“Don’t worry. You only need to get a B+ or better to pass,” my mom told me. “You’ve been studying so hard, I don’t think it’ll be a problem at all.”

Easy for you to say, I thought.

My mom told me that I would be taking the test over at the school, so we hopped into the car. During the ride to the school, I fidgeted in my seat, playing with the seat belt. My eyes were glued to the view outside. There was a tense silence inside.

When we finally got to the school, I had calmed down a bit. Ok, I told myself. It’s just a test. I’ve been studying so hard, and I am bound to do well.

I followed my mom into the building, and I was greeted by the vice principal, Mr. Price. “Hey, there,” he greeted us. “I’ll assume you’re Ash. Are you here to retake the test?”

For a moment, I was shocked. Ash had to retake the test too?

Maybe he hadn’t gotten an A after all, I thought. But before I could think of something witty to tell of him, my mom tapped me on the shoulder, bringing me back to my senses.

“Uh-no,” I told Mr. Price. “I mean, I’m here to retake the test, but I’m James Larson. Where do I go?”
The principal led me inside the school and into room 214. “Here. Your mother will remain outside while you take the test.” I looked inside. A dozen other kids were sitting at desks scattered around the room. “We’re just about to start the test. You can go find a seat anywhere.”

I nodded, and chose a seat at the front of the room. Soon, the tests were handed out, and the time started. I grabbed my pencil and began right away. I couldn’t fail again.

* * *

“Okay, time’s up.” Our instructor, Mr. Snyder, came around to collect our tests. “Pencils down. As soon as I collect your test, you may leave the room.”

I dropped my pencil and glanced upwards. Just in time, I thought. I stood up as Mr. Snyder took my paper from me. With a last glance at the retakers, I left the room.

My mom was waiting for me outside. “Well?” she asked. “How did you do?”
“Fine.” I glanced down at the floor. We left the building in silence.

“Well, I’m excited to get your test scores,” my mom told me.

And I’m nervous, I thought.

* * *

A few days later, I found a package in the mail addressed to me. Must be my test scores, I thought. I brought it back inside, afraid of what it might hold.

“Mom?” I called as I enter the house. “The test scores came.”

Footsteps sounded from above. “Coming!” she replied. “What did you get?”

I shrugged nervously. “Who knows?”

For a moment, we both just stared down at the envelope.

“Are you gonna open this?” my mom asked me.
I shrugged. “You do it,” I told her. She ripped it open.

I didn’t dare look at her. I could hear the paper crinkling, and then a faint sigh of relief from my mother. I looked up and my eyes met with the beautiful A- scrawled at the top of my paper.

I couldn’t contain my happiness. I grinned at my mom, and took the paper from her. I went through my test. Only 3 wrong answers in the whole thing! “I knew you could do it, James,” my mom told me as she patted my shoulder. “I knew you could.”

I nodded, placing the test on the nearby table. Well, now that that’s off my mind, I thought, I guess I’ll go play some Minecraft. I began heading upstairs, but stopped midway. I looked down at my mom, who was looking me in the eye.

For a moment, there was silence. We just stared at each other. Then, instead of continuing my way up, I turned around and headed back down towards my mom. She looked at me, surprised.

“Aren’t you going to play some Minecraft?” she asked me.

I shook my head. “Of course not. I have my family with me, and that’s all that matters. I don’t care if I win a game in Minecraft, or if there’s a new update. I’m tired of hiding behind that screen.”

My mom smiled. “Well, I’m glad. So, you wanna go out for a celebration? We’ll go to Veneto’s, your favorite.”

I nodded. “Hey, why not? Let’s go!”

As we piled into the car, I felt a surge of happiness. Though I had enjoyed playing Minecraft for a while, I had finally found something even better –– just spending time with my family. Right there in that car, I promised myself that I would never be so closed off again. I would try to make some friends and spend more time with my family, and avoid that computer screen that blocked everyone out of my life. It was as if the wall separating me from my family had been broken down.

We were united once more.

Epilogue

That was how my brand-new life began. That night, I packed my computer away into my suitcase. It would remain there for a while.

I began to spend more time with my parents instead of hanging out, alone, in my room. We had tons of fun together, and went out for dinner together often. Together, we learned more about each other, which formed an unbreakable bond between us three. At the end of the month, I couldn’t imagine how I had been able to withstand so much time away from them.

But with all the fun I was having, there was no room for regrets. I enjoyed my time, and, as they call it, lived life to the fullest. I had never felt better –– and it would never have happened if I were still hiding behind the screen of my computer. Never once did I feel any pain at all for giving up hacking, because feeling what I felt inside, I knew it was the right decision.

A Big Fall

“Okay girls, practice is over!” Coach beckons us over and we jump off the beams. “Good practice, Kiera, watch out for your landings. Britt, keep your legs together on your roundoff. And Katherine, work on you back handspring,” she informs the other three girls.

Then, she looks at me.

“Noelle, keep working hard, you’re our All State elite champion. The big championship meet is tomorrow.” A shiver of excitement runs down my back. Soon, I will be flying through the air at the National Championships. My dream! Coach dismisses us and I follow the other girls into the locker room.

“Noelle, are you nervous for the championships?” Kate asks me.

“No, not really,” I respond as I turn on the shower.

“You’re so lucky!” Britt tells me. She’s also an elite gymnast, but Britt doesn’t qualify for the National Championships.

“Come on guys, you guys aren’t competing,” I try to hide my pride.

“Well, don’t worry. We’ll be watching and cheering you on,” my best friend, Kiera, encourages. We scramble into my mom’s car, chittering nonstop.

“How was practice?” she asks.

“Great, now can we please go? We’re going to be late for third period and Mr. Netoon is so strict,” I urge my mother.

Without another word, my mom steps on the pedal and we’re off. A few minutes later, the car screeches to a stop in front of the middle school. Kiera and I run into Mr. Newton’s classroom and choose a spot.

***

Algebra, so annoying! A few hours later, after school, I’m doing my homework as I start to draw my routine on beam out of stick figures on the sheet. I’m certainly an Elite in gymnastics, but definitely not in math.

***

Before I know it, my mother is calling me for dinner. I’m done with my homework, finally. Standing up from my chair, I slam shut my textbook. Dinner consists of broccoli, tofu, a salad, and, my favorite, beets. As an Elite gymnast, we’re practically required to eat healthy, sucks. I start to eat my dinner in silence.

“So, Noelle,” my father starts, “we’ll be cheering you on at the competition.”

“Cool,” I exclaim and jab at my food.

Ding dong! The doorbell rings. Who could it be? I glance at my mom, who is wearing an I-know-something-you-don’t-know smile. A girl with midnight black hair and stone brown eyes walks in with her mom. “Noelle, this is Mrs. Reeves and Delia. Mrs. Reeves and Delia, this is Noelle,” my mom cheerfully introduces us. “The Reeves are our new neighbors I decided to invite them over!” my mom explains.

Mrs. Reeves and her daughter look serious. Too serious.

“I heard you’re the best in Maine and you’re heading to Champs tomorrow,” she drawls with a slight Texas accent.

“Um, yeah,” I stammer.

“Why don’t you girls go up to Noelle’s room and hang out?” my mom suggests.

I lead Delia into my room. Clearly she’s impressed. My room has a white loft with a desk underneath. On my desk I have a Macbook Pro and an iMac. On my wall, I have a poster signed by Taylor Swift. My closet is filled with designer clothes. All of my furniture is white with designs I painted on them. Basically, my room is the room every girl would want.

“You know, I could have made it to Champs. I don’t believe you’re the best,” she glares at me, regaining her snobby attitude.

Yeesh. “Well, I guess I’ll just have to prove to you tomorrow when I get first,” I saunter out of the room, grabbing my phone, and text Kiera.

NoelleHandstand1: Kiera! Save me! There’s this girl here named Delia who thinks she’s better than me in life!

KikiA42: Jee good luck dealing with her!

NoelleHandstand 1: u know what, I’m gonna go practice my bars routine in my garage.

KikiA42: OK tell Delia to go away. C u tomar at early morning practice B4 the Champs!

NoelleHandstand 1: BYE!!!

I slip my phone into my pocket. I race downstairs. As I push open the garage door, I yell to my mom where I will be. I ignore Mrs. Reeves’s snarky comment. She’s just as bad as her daughter. I pull on my grips; without them I would slide off the bars. I take a deep breath and my routine takes over me. Soon I land with a satisfying thunk on the blue mat. Panting, I grab my water bottle. I take a huge swig out of it and I get on the beam. My instincts take over and before I know it, I’m doing all sorts of complicated tricks. Suddenly, my mom comes out.

“Whew, Noelle it smells like a sweatshop in here,” she holds her nose and glances around. “Well, I just came to tell you that it is time for bed,” she finishes, closing the door behind her.

I groan and slam the garage door. The championships are tomorrow and my parents and coach are all about me winning. I mean, I’m excited to go because it has been my dream my whole entire life, but my coach and parents are a little extreme.

“Win or die!” is literally what they are all saying. Uhhh, so much PRESSURE.

A few minutes later, I’m staring up at the light pink wall of my bedroom. I may have fallen asleep, but my thoughts are still rushing through my head like a long flowing river. I wish that Delia — the devil, should I call her? — never ever came into my life. Who did she think she was, with the right to make fun of me? I also have wished, multiple times actually, that I wasn’t the best gymnast in the state. Oh, sure, I have all that fame, but I don’t think anyone has ever thought about how much PRESSURE is put on me. Half of me loves the fame but the other half is dead. They clash in a battle, 24/7. I’m in the middle. The coaches always say that I’m going to do fine, I’m perfect. But do I think that? Sometimes, not really….

***

“And you’re gonna hear me r-r-roar!” My alarm blasts Katy Perry’s “Roar!” as I groggily sit up. Then, I fall right back down, flat on my face. Today is the big day and I was having thoughts of doubt in my sleep. But, of course, first comes early morning practice. I don’t get it, why do they have practice on meet days; especially a meet as big as THIS. Grudgingly, I trudge to the bathroom and start to brush my teeth.

***

I take a running start, leap on the springboard, and do a flawless Yurchenko vault. As I stick my landing I hear my coaches whooping. Of course. How could I ever worry about Delia? Everybody knows that I’m gonna do fine. I perform flawlessly on beam, bars, vault, floor. At the end, Coach comes up to me.

“Noelle, we’re very proud of you, you have created a spotless reputation and we wish the best for you this afternoon. Just remember this, we’re extremely proud of you.” Yeah, all that cheesy stuff. After that was said, I go into the locker room to meet up with Kiera.

“So, I saw your texts of desperateness; is Delia really that bad?”

“Oh yeah!” I reply, not missing a single heartbeat.

“Well, gotta go, my mom’s taking me shopping for some new clothes, I’ll see you later,” Kiera leaves me alone as I smooth out my leotard for later. It’s red and blue, with a white line separating where the colors meet up. I’m so jittery as I shove my things back into my duffel bag and run out to meet my mom. Just like me, she’s jittery.

“Okay, Noelle, here’s your schedule. First you are warming up. You go to the practice room and practice for thirty minutes, and then it’s go time.”

***

I fly through the air on my final flip as I let go of the white bar. As I land with a refreshing thump on the dark blue mat, the enormous crowd goes wild. Maybe my coach’s pep talk helped. Or possibly it was the tight leotard that I had stressfully pulled on. Whatever it is or was, I end up with a 9.89. Currently, I am in first place so far. I stroll to my next event, bars, with ease. Obviously, I will do flawlessly.

As I have predicted, I do impeccably, and I am extremely relaxed as I start on the beam. I raise my arms to the judges and take a deep breath. Nothing can go wrong now, one more event. My starting pose is an upside down split with my hands gripping tightly on the chalky beam. Once my energetic music starts up, I don’t even bother to pay attention to everything. I know I will do fine. Normally, my senses would be on high alert; even on small meets. But, what really could go wrong? I have done everything impeccably.

I swing up on the beam. Perfectly with the rhythm, I do a pivot with my leg sticking out behind me. Then, I do a split leap followed by a quick back handspring. The whole time I am with the music. Then, I lie down and bring my legs all the way on top on my head. I unroll and do a handstand pivot. My next move is an aerial. Before I know it, it is time for my final move. I study the beam in front of me, and right on cue I start my double tuck and somersault. Do I finish it? Nope. Not at all….

***

The next morning, I groan as I pick up my gray crutches. Struggling, I force myself up from my bed. My mom calls me for breakfast and I slip on an outfit. It takes me a while, but finally I make it downstairs and to the breakfast table.

“Hey grumpy,” my mom ruffles my hair.

“Hmf,” I mumble as I glance at my phone to check the time.

It’s 7:30 and I have a gazillion texts. Kira has told me “relax,” and “it’s okay,” about twenty times. Delia is texting me fake pity faces that I chose to ignore. My mom and dad have been spoiling me since I woke up (there was a balloon and a brand new leotard on my bedside table) but it makes no difference. What was done is done.

I still have the clear image. I leap into my double tuck and somersault.  I hear the crowd cheering and I think of Delia. That little — all of a sudden, my feet and legs are going everywhere and I’m out of control. What is happening? Before I know it, it is too late. I lie sprawled across the blue mat, crying in pain. My mom and coach immediately rush over and help me up. My leg is bursting with pain and my coach sits me down. He asks me what hurts and I blurt out the whole thing, except for the Delia part. He tells my mom to call an ambulance. Soon, I am lying on a white hospital cot while the doctor announces the bad news. I have broken my leg.

“Honey, do you want Cheerios or Wheaties?” my mom asks, snapping me out of my daydream. Well, more like day nightmare.

“Cheerios,” I reply frankly and text Delia back.

NoelleHandstand1: Shut up you jerk.

I hit send; I’m not even thinking about what I’m doing. I just do it, like the Nike motto. Then, I delete her chat and clutch my phone. I feel as if I will get in trouble, but I don’t care. I’m now Rebel Noelle, committing crimes left and right. I’m done.

I wake up to the sound of my mom yelling for me. It’s only six and I don’t have to get up until 7:30. What could possibly be wrong at this time in the morning? I do a march-ish stagger to my mom’s room to chew her out for waking me up, but I soon as I see her face, I know it’s a bad idea. My mom is holding her phone like it was a bug and she has on a bewildered face.

“NOELLE! Look at this! Delia’s mom just sent this to me; apparently, you called her daughter a jerk AND you told her to shut up!” I have never in my life seen my mom so mad!

“Well, Mom, she was being mean to me and and — ” I don’t get to finish because my mom starts lecturing me again.

“That’s it, young lady, your phone is gone, for a week.” She opens her hand and I drop my phone into her palm. There is no use arguing.

“And, you have to find something to occupy yourself. Right now you have nothing to do,” she adds. Wow. Gymnastics was my life and my mom was already trying to replace it. I stomp away.

School seems to last for a year. Finally, I streak down the halls, well more like stagger, as fast I as I can to freedom, but something catches my attention. There is a two feet by four feet poster that says:

Art Club

Join Today! Meets Tuesdays

My mom did say that I have to start something new. Why not art club? I mean, as reluctant as I am, I also thought this sounded fun. When my mom says to do something, I have to do it. As I scribble my name on the signup sheet, Kiera comes by.

“You’re signing up for art club?” she asks.

“My mom’s making me,” I reply. Kira shrugs and we walk out of school together.

I slam the door shut as I announce that I’m home. My mom greets me and  takes my backpack.

“Did you pick up anything new?” she asks as I sit down.

“I signed up for art club,” I grudgingly reply. “We meet Tuesdays after school.” I grab my bag and march upstairs to do my homework.

***

“Today we are going to draw a person. You can make him/her doing whatever he/she is doing. Just remember, use your imagination and try your best,” Mrs. Ziegler beams at the art club. I pick up my pencil and start sketching. I promise myself that this will turn out terrible. First, I sketch a head, a body, arms, and legs. My girl is posing as if she just ended a back handspring. Her foot is slightly up and her arms are raised like a champion. Now, to add some facial features. Soon, she has a short, curly, blond ponytail and a smiling face. For my final touches, I sketch a leotard and a beam. The art teacher comes over and glances at my paper.

“Wow! You did an excellent job!” she picks my paper up and pins it on the board. My face turns red as all the kids crowd around and praise my character. I’m both proud and embarrassed. I can’t believe this, I’m having fun in something other than gymnastics. The rest of the time passes in a flash and soon I’m running out of the building to meet my mom.

“You sure look overjoyed!” My mom pulls out of the parking lot as I smile widely.

“The teacher posted my artwork on the board in art club and everybody liked it,” I explain.

“Great job! This is Facebook-worthy!” My mom does her happy dance and pulls over. Just so you know, my mom is a facebook freak.

“Say cheese!” She snaps a picture and pull up back onto the road.  

As soon as we get home, my mom posts her post and writes her caption. The whole time I was happy. I wasn’t thinking about one thing: Delia.

“Hi y’all!” a girl with black, raven hair drawls as she walks into the art room for art club.

Delia.

She plops down on the seat next to me and ‘accidently’ pushes my paper onto the wet floor. Groaning, I pick it up.

“What are you doing here?” I ask her.

“Well, I saw your mom’s post on Facebook and I decided to give art club a try,” she replies innocently.

My friends, Whitney and Kloe glance at me wearily. I give them a look as if to say, “Delia is not good news.” They seem to get the message. Before I have the time to think of a snarky comment to Delia, Mrs. Ziegler claps her hands.

“Class! As you may know, we have an art expo coming up. Only one student’s work will be featured from this club. Here are the list of contestants. Delia Reeves, Whitney Bernen, Kloe Mccarthy, Michael Zeidman, Joyce Lee, and Noelle Greenfield. Good luck!” The thing we are drawing is a person. It can be a boy or girl, and it can be doing anything, anywhere. I doubt I can win. The first day I was here, I drew a good character but I don’t know if I can do it again. Besides, Delia is competing. Isn’t she rumored to be good at life? Suddenly, I have a great idea. I raise my hand.

“Mrs. Ziegler, are we aloud to use artwork that we have drawn before?”

“Yes, of course,” she smiles.

“Are you too scared to lose?” Delia hisses in my ear.

“Nope, just preparing to beat you,” I walk away.

Gingerly, I take my framed picture of my gymnast down. I decide to use my original picture and trace it and color it in. Taking out my black Sharpie pen, I examine my paper. Tracing is an easy feat. Slowly, I trace my drawing, making sure I don’t mess up. Then, I take out my colored pencils and start shading lightly. When I’m done, I have a colorful image of a gymnast. Perfect.

“Mrs. Ziegler, here’s my art expo entry,” I hand the teacher my artwork.

“Great! Results will come out this afternoon. You are the last contest entry,” she replies.

I am so nervous throughout the whole day. Everything passes in slow motion. At one point in the day, Delia stops me.

“Noelle the Nobody! After today, that will be your brand new name. It suits you perfectly anyways.” She smirks and saunters off.

Soon, I stand in the crowd waiting at the art room. Delia shows up.

“I am so gonna win!” she singsongs in my face. Mrs. Ziegler comes out.

“The winner is…”

“Delia Reeves!” Delia yells in my face.

“Noelle Greenfield!”

I can’t believe my ears. Mrs. Ziegler holds up my entry. I catch Delia slinking away into the crowd. Finally, I have proven Delia wrong. I have won.

***

That night, I lie on my back and stare at the light pink ceiling of my bedroom. I am happy I have won but I feel like there is a hole in me. Inside me, I really truly just want to be flying through the air on my Yurchenko vault or doing back handsprings on the beam. But, I have finally realised that the true meaning of life isn’t about doing one thing. It’s about being flexible and trying new things. I slowly drift off to sleep as I dream of my victory. I have won in something other than Gymnastics.

Epilogue: Six Months Later

I do my final move on my floor routine. A split. A flexible one. My smile is wider than ever. After my leg healed, I was able to go back to gymnastics, but I had to freshen up my skills. Finally, my coach let me compete as an Elite gymnast again. My coach gives me a ‘high ten’ and I head to the award ceremony.

You’re probably wondering about Delia. Well, I told my mom that Delia was provoking me. My mom told her mom. Mrs. Reeves was steaming mad at my mom and me for ‘framing’ her dear Delia. So, she transferred her daughter to some rich boarding school place because apparently we were a ‘bad influence’ on her. I haven’t seen her in months.

As for art club, I still do art competitions, and I still do art club after school on Tuesdays. Now, I do Gymnastics, Art Club, and flute. At the end of the day, the more skills, the better. Even if you try and fail, it’s better than not trying anything new. I run up to my first place block and wave to the crowd. My life is not gymnastics. It’s not art. It’s not flute. It’s being me, Noelle Greenfield.

Glitter and the Magical Fig, Part 1

Chapter 1

Once upon a time there was a beautiful unicorn who lived in a magical world where all her dreams came true. The unicorn was called Glitter. She lived with her mother and father. They were named Sparkles and Fire. They never let their daughter out of their sight.

Where the unicorn family lived, the land was always covered with fresh grass and beautiful trees. One particular tree grew delicious and sweet figs. One day Glitter woke up with the bright sun shining in her eyes. At first Glitter wanted to sleep some more. But then she sat bolt up. She just remembered that today was a very special day.

“It’s my birthday,” she cried out loud. She rushed to her parents and saw a big surprise. Her mother and father had made her a triple layered cake made out of grass. This must be a very special birthday! thought Glitter. Otherwise, they wouldn’t have made such a delicious treat.

“Happy birthday honey,” said Sparkles. She cuddled her daughter and then became serious. “Your father and I have been discussing about this and we have decided to let you explore on your own.”

Glitter gave a squeal of joy. This was a very special birthday. She was speechless with joy, although she managed to say, “Thank you.”

Sparkles nodded and flicked her tail. Glitter knew what that meant. Her adventure was about to begin. As she began to race off, her mother called after her, “If you find the fig tree, do not touch any figs.”

Chapter 2

Glitter was happily chasing a monarch butterfly when she ran into a tree and a bunch of leaves showered all over her. Muttering stuff under her breath, Glitter got up. Suddenly, a trembling sensation tingled all over her. It felt good, like everything she ever imagined would come true. A voice in her head said, Look up, Glitter. She did and then gasped in awe. This was the beautiful fig tree where all your dreams come true! All of the muscles in her horn were yelling at her, Get those figs, just reach up and break off the stems. Grab two of them!

But just before she grabbed them, she remembered her mother’s words. They played over and over in her head. “If you find the fig tree, do not touch any figs.”

Glitter shook her head to clear away her vision. Quickly, she grabbed only one fig and hid it behind her back. Then she raced home. When Glitter arrived her mother, Sparkles, asked “Back so soon?”

Glitter just nodded and put on a fake smile. “I just didn’t feel comfortable without my parents,” Glitter lied.

“Tell us all about this exploration of yours,” said Fire with his booming voice.

Glitter retold her parents about her adventure and then went to bed early. But just before going to bed, Glitter ate the fig.

Chapter 3

Glitter shifted in her moss bed. She had trouble sleeping. Glitter decided to take a stroll in the forest. Just when she was about to reach the fig tree, an enormous tiger jumped out the tall grass and started to stalk Glitter. A heartbeat later, the tiger jumped at the frightened unicorn.

But Glitter couldn’t move. Her legs were frozen with fear! Just before the tiger took a chunk of Glitter’s body, a huge booming voice yelled at the striped predator. “Stop playing around.”

All the tiger did was nod in reply and then run back in the grass.

Then he ran away. Glitter turned to thank whoever had saved her, but he had run away. She did manage to catch a glimpse of the vanishing tail. It was orange with thick black stripes. That must be the tigers father, Glitter thought.

Glitter then woke up with a jerk. That was the worst dream ever, thought Glitter. She was so haunted by her dream that she ran to her to get some air without telling her parents.

Chapter 4

Glitter was still shaken up by her dream. She realized that the only place that would calm her down was the fig tree. She ran all the way there so she could come back without her parents noticing that she was gone.

As Glitter emerged from tall grass, she saw the amazing fig tree. She walked around the bottom of the tree, when the other side of the tall grass started to shiver. Suspicious, Glitter edged toward the swaying grass.

Then the grass stood still. Surprised, Glitter stood straight up. Suddenly a huge tiger jumped out of the grass, baring his teeth in a snarl. The startled unicorn fell backwards and twisted her ankle.

Then it hit her. The fig actually made her real dream in the night come true!

While she was reasoning with herself, the tiger had landed delicately beside Glitter.

Oh no, Glitter thought. There is no one in sight to save me. Not even the tiger from my dream. Is this really how I’m going to end my life?

Chapter 5

Glitter was lying on the ground with the tiger towering over her, mouth watering. He raised his paw, unsheathed its claw, and swiped gently at her without making a deep wound.

Why is he just playing with me. Glitter was confused.

The next time the tiger raised his paw, he made a stinging blow. Glitter tried to howled in pain. But no noise came out.

The tiger seemed amused. A big sneer grew on his greedy face. He made another blow, this time a little harder though. This time, Glitter made an ear-piercing scream. The tiger jumped back, his fur standing on end.

Then there was a loud rumbling sound and Fire, erupted from the tall grass. He head butted the tiger with his horn, and then turned back and looked sternly at his daughter. “GO BACK HOME NOW!” He was so angry.

“You look like you’re about to explode,” said Glitter cheerfully.

“No time for smile, Glitter. You disobeyed orders and there will be consequences.”

Glitter hung her head and walked beside him without another word.

Chapter 6

Back home, her mother was pacing in the grass. “Thank goodness you’re alright!” said Sparkles when she saw her daughter. “We’re lucky you weren’t hurt. I can’t believe your immaturity. This is very disappointing, Glitter. Promise me you will never go to that tree again, okay?”

Glitter nodded but secretly she wasn’t making a promise that she would keep. Then she went to her moss bed, and closed her eyes. Just before going to sleep, she whispered to herself, Tomorrow I am going to that tree and getting another fig. Then she drifted off to sleep.

Epilogue

Glitter was walking along the stream. She was headed for the fig tree although her mother had banned her from going there. Her pearly white body was glimmering in the moonlight. Her horn was glittering more brightly than usual. Her hooves were moving ever so lightly, and making no noise. As Glitter moved closer to the fig tree, her confidence started to ebb slowly away.

“What if my parents find out what I‘m doing?” Glitter said to herself out loud. “They will ground me for sure.” Glitters two minds chittered together for a while until Glitter made her decision.

“No one will find out what I’m doing,” Glitter reminded herself. “But if they do, that will just be an unexpected coincidence.”

Quickly, Glitter snapped off one more fig and brought it back home. “That was the best thing that has happened to me. It felt so good,” Glitter said to herself.

Then Glitter curled back in bed, with the fig hidden just underneath her legs, and went to sleep with a smile.

Gilbert the Raccoon and the Fighting Rabies

Hi, I am Gilbert the raccoon, and I am very different than other raccoons. Not only do I have gray and white stripes down my back that kind of look like a horse’s saddle, I also weigh 27.1 pounds, and I am the first raccoon to play baseball. But let me tell you after today plenty more raccoons will play baseball.  As a matter of fact, instead of Major League Baseball or MLB it will be Gilbert the Super Awesome Totally Great Raccoon Baseball League, also known as GTSATGRBL.

I play baseball to make the world a better place. I hope that soon I will be able to move out of my parent’s trash can and be able to live in a trash can of my own with my wife Wanda and my child Fitzgerald. Fitzgerald is a delicate little raccoon only weighing 22.3 pounds, but with the way me and Wanda are raising him he will at least be thirty-eight pounds.

My wife Wanda is sweet like caramel, soft like a cloud, kind like a fellow bird but yet, I think she is weird like a half-bitten pencil, unappealing like a unwrapped stepped-on candy, and personally I think she smells like the dump. If I had the choice I would abandon Wanda and put her back in the trash can she came from, but that is not a choice at the this moment. My ugly wife (I would like to refrain from the phrase “wife”), but anyway, the person I live with who happens to be named Wanda has a gross blob of gray fur right on her rump. She also has a mustard stain on her face that is most likely because she eats like a barbarian.

Fitzgerald is weird like a horse in a tree, unappealing like a rotten apple, and he smells like a porta-potty but yet I love him like I love half-eaten box Chinese food. If I had the choice I would stuff him in a bag and tie him up so he can go everywhere with me. Just as an extra precaution I would smack him with a baseball bat just to make sure he will be quiet, that is how much I love my little Fitzgerald.

As I mentioned earlier I play for the Boston Red Sox and like any baseball player or baseball raccoon our goal is to cross home plate, but for me I fear home plate. Every time I cross home I get a carrot and so do all the other players. But the only thing that scares me more than home plate is carrots! David Ortiz also know as “Big Poppi” crosses home the most that is why he is the biggest on our team. When I cross home plate, I want peace and I want to be able to relax not get showered by raccoonade or get feed carrots bigger then me (personally carrots are step lower than the dumpster and the dumpster sets a pretty low bar, I didn’t even know the made bars lower than that!).

But that’s enough chit chat for me, Hanley Ramirez is up to bat and I am up after him.

As I suspected a ground out to third Hanley is safe but Pedroia is out at second. As I step up to bat I feel heavy but there is no need to call the medic I am a 27.1 pound raccoon with a very heavy bat over my shoulder.

The pitcher throws a ball and I do not swing at it. The next one is a strike, but third time’s a charm as I swing at the ball with all my might. I see it fly. It flies past first base and past the outfield and its gone oh no! I hit a home run!! Did I mention that when you hit a home run and cross home, you don’t only get a carrot and a raccoonade shower, but you get a pecans! I hate pecans more than carrots!!!

As I run the final stretch I realize that the whole team isn’t at home plate waiting to serenade me. They are just in the dugout clapping, and there are no carrots or pecans. Is this it? Am I finally gonna get what I have wanted all along, peace and quiet!?!! And oh, look at the grass blooming tall and the flowers budding and trees growing! I did it I have reached home plate zen!!!

Fifteen years later, Gilbert was voted into the raccoon hall of fame. Gilbert was an inspiration to raccoons everywhere. He went on to teach the homeplate zen club and he decided to coach the Fighting Rabies team which is based out of Guatemala. At age 473, Gilbert went on to change the rules of baseball to whenever you cross home, your teammates must wait in the dugout with flowers and blades of grass that have been prelicked (if you are someone who watches baseball, you know that you don’t actually wait in the dugout with flowers and prelicked blades of grass, but that is because at age 473 Gilbert was not alive but if Mr. Gilbert was still alive we know that was what he would have done.)

As Gilbert exited the field he finds a police officer running toward him. What is happening why is he running towards me? “Sir! Sir!” yelled the police officer. “Your son has called the police department saying that your wife left early yesterday morning and has not returned!” As Gilbert looked at the police officer as cool as a  cucumber he realized a splotch of mustard on the police officer’s face.

“Why should I be concerned? Just because she is my wife, that doesn’t mean I have to love her,” I say sharply.

“Huh, well I think Wanda deserves better,” said the police officer, now starting to sound like Wanda.

“Wait, Wanda is that you in there? Look, I am sorry I didn’t mean to say that to you,” I say slightly confused and embarrassed.

“Well you did!” said the police officer that we now know is Wanda.

“Well you can’t expect to be a caring, sweet, and kind wife and me not to hate you,” I said doubting myself.

“Well actually I kind of expected that if you get lucky enough to get someone like me then you should cherish the moment because one day you are going to die and in heaven you will be hoping that I die with you but I won’t so poo on you.” said my stupid kind of really sweet and I loving wife Wanda.

As I think about a list of pros and cons about Wanda, I realize that the pros outweigh the cons by a lot! The pros are: She is kind, sweet, caring, joyful, selfless, courageous, brave, and don’t forget smart. The cons are: she is a raccoon but then again so am I. Maybe I have been dumb. Maybe Wanda is right. “Wait!” I yelped. “Please stay, I love you and I will never ever let you go again. We should return home as a fat marry couple,” I say, kind of becoming more cheerful.

“You are right for once. We should return home together but let’s leave out the merry part because I don’t do marry my only emotions are sassy, angry, and totally awesome,” said Wanda with a sassy, angry, and for the first time ever totally awesome tone.

I have never been this happy before it is almost as good as home plate zen.

The Package

           

“Ding dong!”

I ran down the stairs and nearly tripped over myself. I have been waiting for this for months! Excitedly, I flung open the door and the mailman handed me a ripped up box that looked like it had been dropped in mud and water. I took the box from the mailman, trying to only hold it by a clean corner. I took the scissors from my desk, and cut the box open. Inside of the box, were packing peanuts and a bright red envelope that was blank. Curiously, I opened the letter and there were two slimy pieces of paper. One of them said “Creator” and one said “Eraser.” At this point, I didn’t even know if this was what I had ordered. I reached inside of the box, and there was only another small envelope. What was different about this one was that it was rainbow. I hoped that this was my new shirt, but I wasn’t so sure. I opened the envelope, and there was a yellow pencil. I threw the pencil on the ground, expecting it to make a loud sound. I was surprised when it made a DING! I picked up the pencil, still infuriated and started to draw on a piece of paper. Just when the pencil hit the paper, the pencil started to say,

“ERROR. ERROR. USE PACKAGED PAPER. DO NOT USE REGULAR PAPER.”

I fell on the ground from the startling noise, and I grabbed the red envelope. Disgusted, I took out the “Creator Paper” and I started to draw on it with the pencil. With the pencil, I drew a cat, which I always wished I had. Sadly, my parents were both allergic to every animal so we could never get a cat. A couple years ago, I learned how to draw very realistic cats. After I finished, I admired the work and patted myself on the back. Just as I did that, the cat’s colors started to fill in, and the picture was getting thicker than the page. The cat’s grey fur started to grow rapidly, and the cat was now real and alive. My eyes got really wide and I started to grin.

“This must be a dream!” I said to myself. I pinched myself to make sure, but I was definitely awake.

“YOU’RE DRAWING IS COMPLETE. THANK YOU FOR USING REAL DOODLER ANIMATIONS,” the pencil said in a pleased tone.

The cat was now off of the page and on the floor, meowing. I jumped up and down in excitement and pet the cat. The cat was purring a lot and I went to the fridge to get last night’s chicken dinner leftovers. The cat gobbled it up, and meowed in delight. I was in a trance, thinking about how I finally had a cat. I went back to the desk and picked up the pencil.

“This pencil is so cool. I could do so much with it! Maybe I could make all the popular girls new IPhones so I can finally hang out with them and be cool!”

I ran over to the slimy piece of paper, and started to draw clothes, phones, and shoes. I packed all of the things and ran over to their sleepover party that I heard about over their Snapchat. I was so excited. I could become popular! Then, everyone would like me.

BUZZ. I rung the doorbell and waited. I stamped my foot on the ground repetitively until Lauren opened the door with a smirk on her face. She was the leader of their group, so I had to get cool with her before anyone else.

“What do you want, nerd?” Lauren said coldly.

“I-I got you and your friends some gifts,” I trembled.

Lauren called her friends Isabella, Amy, Alexa, and Claire downstairs. They crowded around the doorway and stared at me, like they were judging my clothes and face. My heart pounded faster than ever before, especially when Amy snached the bag out of my hands.

“Let’s see. IPhones? Clothes? Shoes? We have all of these! Why do you think we would want these? Do you think we are poor or something? I’m disgusted! Get out of here! You are ugly and gross, and you will never be part of our group, EVER!” Amy roared.

She threw each of the phones on the ground, which made a heart-shattering noise, and she threw the clothes and shoes in the garbage can. All of the girls laughed and shooed me away. I ran as fast as I could back to my house. I could feel the hot tears streaming down my face as I ran. I just wanted to be happy. I didn’t need those mean girls. I could just be with my cat. When I got home I ran upstairs, grabbing my pencil and paper and calling my cat to my room. My cat cuddled with me as I drew my revenge. I drew the perfect thing that I knew would stay with them forever.

***

Confidently, I strutted back to their house with my revenge. I knew this was what they all deserved. I buzzed the doorbell then ran away. My revenge stood on the porch and waited. Lauren opened the door again with the same smirk on her face. I guess that’s just how she greeted people. How sad.

“Who the heck are you and what do you want?” Lauren said while cringing at their beauty.

“Well first of all, who do you think you are, talking to my girls and I like that? Like jeez, get a grip. And I want you to explain to me what are you wearing. Do you think that actually looks good? You got some bad taste.”

Lauren’s smirk got less intense and she called her group downstairs.

“Are you looking to start a fight?!” Lauren said while snapping her fingers in my popular girl’s leader creation.

Lauren and her friends stepped outside and onto her lawn while my group followed. I went more into the bush to hide myself.

My group glared with the evil eye at Laren’s group. The names of the people were Olivia (the leader), Emma, Caitlin, Maddie, and Amelia. Lauren walked up to Olivia and looked up to her. Lauren and all of her friends were very short compared to my girls.

“Oh my god. Look how short you and your friends are. You guys are like little toddlers. How weird,” Olivia sneered as she flipped her brown hair.

Lauren’s eyes got slightly wet, and her friends were just in shock.

“And by the way, you guys look like snotty pigs,” Olivia laughed.

Emma, Catlin, Maddie, and Amelia laughed. I cringed empathetically for Lauren and her friends when they ran back into the house. I came out of the bushes and thanked Olivia and her friends, but I knew that I had to get rid of them, so thankfully I had the “Eraser paper.” I swiped the eraser across my revenge, and they disappeared immediately. I sighed and walked home. On the way, I was thinking about all of the times that I had been bullied, and how I felt before when they were bullying me. Yes, I did feel good that they got a taste of their own medicine, but I had a pit in my stomach. I remembered what my mom always said to me, “Treat others the way you want to be treated!”

I felt like I had let myself down. I knew better. I thought about how I would feel if I was Lauren and her friends. I knew I would feel bad. When I got to my house, I went upstairs and sat on my bed with my new cat and made an oath to myself to go by what my mom had always said, ‘Treat others the way you want to be treated.’

Happy Day

He stood on the balcony of his huge castle wondering when the rain would come. King Cookie waited and waited, but nothing came. Olivia, the otter, noticed this and decided to cheer him up. Olivia was King Cookie’s best friend. She knew that he loved rain, but also adored dogs. He was not able to have a dog for his whole life until his wife died. His wife, Queen Cookie, was allergic to dogs, but of course when she died he was too sad to remember that he could now have a dog. Olivia rushed off the balcony that was surrounded by vines, and out of the castle. She took her carriage and off she went into the village.

Olivia had never been into the village for she lived with royalty. She decided to ask someone for directions to the pet store. “Excuse me, do you know where the pet store is?” she asked a little boy wearing a necklace with a raindrop on it.

“Go away you nasty beast,” he said.

“He isn’t a very nice child,” Olivia thought as she ran away. Soon she encountered an old lady carrying a bunch of bird cages, one yellow, one green, and one red bird. “She must know where the pet store is, after all she is carrying pets,” Olivia thought to herself. “Do you know where the pet store is?” Olivia asked.

”Walk down the street, turn left and there it is,” the old lady said.

”Thank you so very much,” said the otter, and scurried off down the street. When she arrived at the pet store she examined all the dogs. To her left was a huge brown dog with a collar that had spikes on it, this did not fit the King. On her right was a tiny puppy Golden Retriever, the King could not handle puppies, they would pee everywhere. Everything she said was either, ‘too small,’ ‘too fat,’ or ‘too weird.’ Suddenly she came across a medium sized black dog named Gracie. She bought a leash, a collar, and the dog. Olivia got back in her carriage,and drove back to the huge brick castle. The otter went to the balcony where King Cookie stood. “I have a gift for you,” said Olivia.

“Is it the rain that shall never arrive?” announced King Cookie dramatically.

“I am very sorry to disappoint you but no, it is a dog,” said Olivia quite disappointed.

“A dog!” exclaimed King Cookie. As soon as King Cookie had a chance to turn around and pet the dog he fell in love with it.

“Her name is Gracie,” said the otter. Soon King Cookie ran to the throne room and played with Gracie.

At dinner King Cookie was happy but Olivia could still tell that he was sad about something. “What’s wrong?” asked Olivia.

“The rain has not come in 10 days,” said King Cookie. The rain came every day in Cookielandia, but not since waterkeeper John left, his grandson Charles has been doing his job until he returns. “Tomorrow morning I shall return to town and ask Charles what is happening,” announced the King.

“But you have never been to town, what if someone kidnaps you, what will you do then,” Olivia said, now worried.

“I expect that my servants will save me,” said King Cookie.

“The servants are on their holiday,” said the otter.

“Well then you will save me,” said King Cookie proudly.

“What if I don’t want to,” said Olivia.

“You will have to,” said King Cookie, with his nose up to Olivia’s face.

King Cookie was walking down the road, when suddenly he felt something on his back.

”What is on my back!” He demanded to know from Charles.

”I don’t know,” said Charles. “Waterkeeper John is back, I am not in charge of the rain anymore,” explained Charles.

“Are you saying this is rain,” said King Cookie, suddenly happy. “YAY!!!” He squealed happily. Now that the King was happy, he needed to make everyone else happy too. First he would help his best friend, Olivia. He ran back to the castle in joy. “I am sorry for shouting at you, Olivia,” said King Cookie. “I know what you are saying but I do not believe you,”Olivia said and ran back to her bedroom,where she was planning what to say to the King.

When she came back she said this, “My friend, A.K.A. the King would never apologize, so to prove that you are really King Cookie I want you to take this test,” and she handed him a test. The test was a multiple choice test. These were a few of the questions: what is my favorite dessert? a.) cake b.) ice cream c.) brownies or how many shoes do I own a.) 100 b.) 2000 c.) 1, and many more questions. When King Cookie had finished his test, he handed it to Olivia, and Olivia had finished correcting the test. Olivia realized that ‘King Cookie’ was really King Cookie.

”I am sorry for thinking that you were not the real King,” said Olivia apologetically.

”I forgive you,” said King Cookie. Now King Cookie AND Olivia were happy. They decided that they would go see the waterkeeper. They had a cup of tea and had a little chit-chat. ”You’re grandson is an awful waterkeeper,” said King Cookie.

”King Cookie, that is not how you talk to waterkeeper John!” whispered Olivia to the King. ”Oh it’s alright,” waterkeeper John said, “he is an awful waterkeeper, “he continued, and they all laughed their heads off, (not literally!) That day was September 4th,and so from now on September 4th is Happy Day!

THE END          

The Journey

I can’t sleep. I have been tossing and turning for hours, and it’s impossible for me to drift off. Since it’s almost midnight and my parents are asleep, I might as well go outside and take a walk in the backyard.

I lit my lamp and tiptoe downstairs to the yard. The stars are very pretty tonight. It feels like true nighttime, and I can see all of the lightning bugs and stars that provide light. I can feel the cold night air and the cold wood under my feet. I sit on the back porch swing and admire the crescent moon that always helps me fall asleep. I start swinging back and forth, and, somehow, the natural world helps me drift off to sleep.

  When I wake up, a man dressed in all black with a scarf around his face is sneaking  through the yard. I woke up as he stepped on the creaky step leading to the porch. He definitely wasn’t expecting that, because what he did was so loud my parents and grandmother woke up. He picks me up and takes me off the porch swing and holds me with a deadly grip as he is running through the yard and out to his large truck and throws me in the back and locks the doors. I look out the window, and I see my parents running as fast as their legs can carry them to try and rescue me from the truck. I pound on the doors trying to let them know where I am so they can rescue me from this man.

When they don’t come to me I yell “Mom, Dad, I’m locked in the back of the truck!” But when I look out the window, I see them get dragged back to the house by a person that came with them, and they must not have seen me through the windows. Before I can react, we drive away at full speed. I am devastated.

I curl up into a ball in the corner and cry. I can’t believe what is happening. I am getting kidnapped. I wish I hadn’t gone outside and had stayed in my bedroom and looked at the nature from the window. I wish I had been able to fall asleep tonight and not have tried to do this. I could have just tried reading my book for longer, but I had to go outside.

After what seems like a million hours the truck finally stops. I pop up and bang on the door and plead for someone to let me out, but when I look out the window I realize that we are parked in a dumpster, and no one is there except the people who kidnapped me. They would never let me out. But then, someone opens the lock! I push open the doors and sprint through the garbage with the man hot on my tracks and right when I am about to escape he grabs me.

I scream so loud he cups his calloused hand over my mouth. He ties me up with a rope and drags me back to the truck and props me up on the back wheel.

“Listen, I am going to tell you why I kidnapped you.” He said this like he desperately wants me to be quiet. “We need you on a mission to save the world, and this is the only way we can recruit you,” he said.

“Why couldn’t you just call me?”

“Because your parents can’t know about it. Parents always say ‘No,’ to it so we have to take you. I can’t say any more until we get to headquarters, so let’s hurry up.”

I was glad to know the truth, and I think it is so cool that I can save the world, so I didn’t argue. But, I do want proof. “Where is your badge?” I ask him. He leans towards me and inside a pocket in his shirt there was a gold badge with advanced in blue letters. Now, I believe him.

“Follow me,” he said as he motions for me to come with him. He led me to a couple of chairs in the middle of the dumpster and tells me to sit on one. He sits on the other, gets out a remote control, presses a button, and we take off.

When we land, we are outside an ugly shack surrounded by an old picket fence with a fat old man that is bald and has hazel eyes. How is this headquarters? I thought.

“Password?” the guy says in a deep voice that sounds like sandpaper.

“Black,” he responds. All of a sudden, the dumpster morphs into a valley, and the ugly shack and picket fence morph into a fancy building with a golden gate with spikes on top. The man that kidnapped me enters a combination, and when the gates open, he leads me down a pathway and enters another combination to get into the building. What I see next is awesome.

It is a huge space where people with badges are constantly coming and going, testing fancy gadgets, and using computers. It is all so cool. The guy takes me to the front desk where a lady with her auburn hair in a perfect bun is sitting.

“Who is this?” she demands to know.

“This is Sophie,” he told her.

“Okay, let’s tell the organization she’s here.” She types something into her computer and a couple minutes later a lady in a suit with a retired badge came.

“Hi Sophie! I’m Cara, your retired agent mentor. Come with me,” she tells me.

She leads me to what I think is supposed to be an office space since there are chairs and a desk, and she tells me to sit in an armchair by a desk. She sits down in the other chair and starts talking to me.

“So, I am going to help you prepare for your mission and give you some information about it. An agency called, ‘Other Plans Agency’ is run by bad guys, and they’re trying to take over the world. Your job is to stop them.” She tells me.

“Why me?”

“Because we think you have the ability to stop them, unlike the agents who have tried previously. What you have to do is find their base and look for the cursor.”

“What’s the cursor?” I ask.

“It’s a small device that can destroy an agency, and it’s the only way to stop him,” she tells me.

“Okay, I think I can do it.”

“Great, let’s get you set up,” she says.

We walk down a hallway and go down an elevator, and when the doors open, we are in a huge room. It is full of shelves and shelves of gadgets, and it was so cool.

“Okay, you want to look for gadgets that you think will help you sneak around, and you can only chose four gadgets.” I walk around the room and look for cool gadgets. I choose a freeze gun that I can use to make people freeze, an invisibility ring to make me invisible, a bomb to cause a distraction, and sneaking shoes to sneak around. It was really cool.

“I picked out my gadgets,” I tell Cara.

“Okay, now I will show you your ship and give you your badge,” she responds.

I am super happy I get my own ship and badge!!! I think to myself with excitement.

We get on a moving sidewalk to what the agency calls the dock. It is an outdoor room with huge vehicles that look small to non-agents run by people in neon uniforms so you can see them when it is agent rush hour and so many people are coming and going. Cara shows her ID to a lady with straight chestnut hair that pours over her shoulders.

“Why do you need an ID?” I say after we pass the lady.

“Because we have very heavy security,” she responds.

“Oh I almost forgot you’re going to need an ID to get back in.” She pulls a card out of her back pocket and gives it to me. “This is your ID. Put it in a safe place on the ship, and don’t take it with you on the mission because it can easily get lost,” she tells me.

“Okay, which ship will I be in?” I ask Cara.

“Ship 197,” she tells me.

We walk down to the end of the dock to a huge yellow ship with the number 197 in black writing on the side. “This is your ship I am going to show you how it works but first I have to give you your badge” Cara says. She pulls another thing out of her back pocket but this time it was a gold star with beginner in navy blue writing. “You have to keep this in a safe place at all times and only wear it at the agency. This CAN’T get lost,” she tells me.

“Okay, can you show me the ship now?”

“Okay, but you need to use your ID to get into it.” I scan my ID on the scanner and the doors slip open. It’s really cool.

It is like a mini house it has a huge window in the front with a chair and tons of buttons,  it has a lot of food and water, there is a bathroom, and a safe, which is a perfect place for my ID and badge.

“Okay, I will teach you how everything works,” she says. “When you press the big red button in the middle, you say where you want to go in the microphone. All the other buttons have labels, and the safe combination is 1357. I think that’s all you need to know. Any questions?”

“Where am I supposed to go?” I ask.

“Oh I have a notebook of tips for you it has everything you need to know.” She gives it to me. “Good Luck on your mission, Sophie.” She walks out of the dock. I am on my own.

***

I open my book of tips and on the top of the first page, it says, “Tips on Finding the Enemy’s Base” in bold writing. The first tip is to look them up on the computer, but I don’t think I have a computer. Out of the corner of my eye, I spot a clear cabinet with a laptop inside. I pull it out and follow the directions very carefully. I go to a website that helps you apply for agencies called “agent.com” and search “Other Pans Agency.” Under the picture of the building, which is their base, it says that the address is only revealed if you want to create an appointment to learn more about applying to their agency. This is a setback. I didn’t know that agencies are so protective.

After thinking for a long time, I got a plan. I decide I will call the agency and pretend to want an appointment to learn about applying for the agency. At the meeting I will ask about the cursor and get them to reveal its location. After I leave, I will wait in the ship until everyone goes to bed and then I will sneak into the base, get the cursor, and be on my way.

I pick up an iPhone that was also in the cabinet and call 212-929-1646. The phone was ringing for a couple of minutes and then a someone finally answers. “Hi, this is Other Plans Agency. What is your purpose of calling today?” he says.

“Hi. I would like to schedule an appointment to learn more about applying to this agency,” I tell him.

“Good. What is your name, and what time do you want to come?” he asks.

“My name is Sophie Maud, and I would like to come tomorrow morning” I say.

“Great, you will be coming tomorrow at 9:45 a.m. with Mr. Alento,” he responds. “You will be coming to 000 Center valley.” He tells me before hanging up. I put the phone away and say, “I want to go to 000 Center Valley.” The ship takes off, and my mission officially starts.

The ship goes so fast I don’t even feel it moving. Suddenly I notice I am pretty hungry, so I make myself a ham and cheese sandwich, and, when I finish, the ship stops. The ship is outside a town of abandoned houses with a faded sign in the front that says “Center Lane.” I know this is a disguise for their base, because our base looked like a variation of it. The sun is just rising, and the clock says 5:30 a.m. Since I have 4 hours and 15 minutes before my appointment, I decide I will pass the time in my ship. I walk back into my ship, close the door, and look through the book of tips that will hopefully answer some of my non-urgent questions.

I figure out that along with the safe on the inside of the ship, there is one on the outside to put my ID in so that I can get it after the mission. I also figure out that along with food and water, the ship is also full of weapons. I spend the rest of the time watching TV (another thing I found out in the book), and then it is finally time for my appointment.

I grab my bag of gadgets that I also put a knife in, and, when I get back out of the ship, I figure out that the homeless guys who sit around were obviously security guards. I walk up to one of them and tell them that I am there for an appointment. The guards then reach into their pockets and pull out a red sticker that says visitor on it and escort me to a big building in the middle. They unlock the door with a gold key from one of their pockets, and I see an oak front desk in the middle of a courtyard surrounded by doors.

“Tell Clementine the person at the front desk why you’re here, and she’ll let you in.” One of the guards whispered and then they left.

Just looking at Clementine was scary, so I had no idea how I was going to get enough courage to talk to her. Her hair was done in a tight bun, her icy blue eyes stared at you like she wanted you dead, and her mouth was closed in a perfectly straight line.

“Um, um, I came here for a 9:45 a.m. appointment,” I managed to tell her. She looked through a huge binder that probably was a list of appointments, because on one of the pages it said Sophie Maud 9:45 a.m. with Mr. Alento.

“Okay Sophie, you may enter door A and take the elevator to the basement. Mr. Alento will be there waiting for you in room 101,” she says. I did as she asked, and she was right. Mr. Alento was there waiting for me.

Mr. Alento had dark black hair, brown eyes that were almost black, and a long mustache. He is sitting on a rolling chair behind a brown desk with a reading light and a huge pile of papers on it. He motions for me to sit on the chair in front of him, and when I sit down and put my bag on the floor, he starts talking. “Welcome Sophie. I heard you are interested in applying for other plans agency,” he tells me.

“Yes I scheduled this appointment to learn more about this agency.” I say.

“Well lucky for you I agreed to tell you some valuable information about our agency.” he responds, “This is the most unique agency you’ll ever find and it is very hard to get in,” he says. “We only trust the best of the best with our dangerous missions and valuable weapons.”

“Wow it must be very hard to get in” I thought. “I am very interested in weapons and gadgets,” I tell him. “What are some of those things this agency has to offer?” I ask.

“We have every gadget and weapon possible,” he says. I knew that wouldn’t get him to mention the cursor, so I had to think of another way.

After a long pause, I figure out what to say. “So what mission are you guys working on?” I ask him.

“We are currently working on trying to take over the world and only the cursor can stop us,” he says.

“Who has the the cursor, and where is it?” I ask, but I quickly regret what I said because I revealed that I was trying to get information.

“You’re busted!” Mr. Alento yelled.

I had to escape fast. I tore open my bag of gadgets to get my distraction bomb to make a distraction and make a run for it. Since Mr. Alento sounded the alarm, there was double the noise, which I thought would make it easier for me. But, it didn’t. Everyone came in this direction, and we would cross paths. I ran out of the room as fast as my legs could carry me and decided to take the stairs, but unfortunately Mr. Alento probably called for backup. I only got halfway up the stairs when I bumped into an army of security guards with strong muscles. Before I got a chance to react, they grabbed me by the arms. I wiggled and squirmed and did everything in my power to get out, but I couldn’t. I was caught.

The security guards took me back down to the basement and pushed the elevator button. When the elevator came, the security guards pressed the button marked “D,” which I think stands for “dungeon.” We were dropping down for a long time, which made me think I would never see the sun again. When we got out of the elevator, we were in a freezing, dark room with stone cells around a small table that was the only thing that provided light and on that table was the curser. The security guards dragged me over to a cell, attached metal chains to my ankles, and locked the cell behind them. Then, they were gone.

All the cell had was a cot and an egg crate to sit on. It is so upsetting to be imprisoned. Now, I need a whole new plan to get the cursor. Every day, someone comes to feed us scraps from the agents food for breakfast and dinner — that is how I kept track of the days. The person who fed me is named Gerry, and he is really nice. On my fourth day in prison, when Gerry came to feed me dinner, he said he would help me escape.

He said he is secretly a spy for our agency, and he wants me to take the cursor back to our agency so Other Plans Agency can’t destroy the world. His plan is to give me the keys then set off the alarm in the gadget room to cause a distraction. I would put on my sneaking shoes, grab the cursor, and sneak out. It was the perfect plan, and we were going to do it right now.

Gerry gave me the key and went up to the gadget room to set off the alarm. You can only hear it very faintly from here, but I could still hear it. I opened my cell, put on my sneaking shoes, grabbed the cursor, and ran. I ran so fast, I wasn’t aware of my surroundings. Luckily, I got out of the agency without getting caught. I ran to my ship, got my ID out of the safe, and scanned it to get into the ship. I was finally safe.

Then, I heard a knock on the door. I looked out the window to see who it was, and it was Gerry! I opened the door and let him in.

“Go to the agency now they are hot on our heels!” he says urgently. I press the red button say that I want to go to the agency, and we are on our way.

“Thanks for helping me escape,” I say to Gerry.

“You are welcome,” he says. “I would do anything to get the cursor back to our agency.”

When we get there, I show a man in a neon yellow uniform my ID, and he opens the gates for us. When we get in, Cara is there waiting for us.

“Did you guys get the cursor?” she asked us. I get it out of my bag and show it to her. She gasps. “I knew you could do it!” she says. “Would you like to destroy their agency?” she asks me.

“Sure,” I say.

I turn on the cursor and speak into it, “Destroy Other Plans Agency.”

The screen responds, “Destroying…” for a while and then it says, “Complete. Other Plans Agency is destroyed!”

Now, I can go back home.

The Alien Invasion

 

Once, there were two rivals. The humans’ world was facing aliens from space. Aliens were setting a plan to launch a missile, followed by an attack. The humans knew because their antenna saw it in outer space. It meant the world could explode. The world’s military had to join forces to protect their world. The humans decided they had to defend and attack. They were going to make a nuclear bomb in case anything went wrong and make aircrafts able to travel through space and fight. They were sure that they would win. The humans would regret that later on when they were not able to figure out how to to build all of this stuff. It was almost impossible to make all of it.

Meanwhile at HQ, Mark James Owens, a soldier, was enjoying a nice sleep. He woke up to a strange noise and pulled out his knife and gun from his pocket and looked around. Something lunged at him and started thrashing at his arm. Mark smelled pee and knew it was an alien. He pushed the stupid thing that smelled like pee off him, nailed him down with his knife, pulled the trigger of his gun, and shot the thing in the head. It was a loud shot. Now, he realised what was going on. The aliens were attacking. He reported the news to Commander Johnson. He shouted into the main radio, “Aliens attacking main all stations.”

In three minutes, all stations and guns were ready. Everyone had their bravest faces on. Mark was at the main gun. In an instant, a giant spaceship came into the atmosphere.  It was a giant, black spaceship the size of the planet. Billions of ships exploded out of the big ship.They shot out lasers out of cannons. They could kill five men in one hit. Alien soldiers started running toward the base. They had laser guns ready to fire. They blasted their guns at the wall. The wall held, luckily.

While the aliens tried to destroy the wall, the humans took cover and aimed their guns at the wall. Then, at that second, a rocket smashed into the wall. When the dust cleared, there was a giant red hole in the wall. The soldiers shot at the alien soldiers, but the aliens fought back. Mark aimed the gun at the ship. He blasted the cannon at the ship, which blew up into a mushroom cloud. There was a hole in the ship. The men were dying from the impacts. They launched our aircrafts at the aliens. The rockets made a bit of damage.

After a while, the aircrafts turned around. The commander surrendered ending the first battle. The world was losing 0-1. Over 3,000 soldiers died at the first battle of the war. That’s when the humans realised that they were outnumbered. The aliens had better technology than the humans. They had to attack, which meant that the humans had to go to outer space. They launched their spaceship into space. When they saw the ship, behind it were five more ships.

Mark swerved to avoid the shots of cannons. In one minute, seventy spaceships were destroyed. Mark blasted a hole in one of the ships. His best friends, James and Lily, were behind him. Ships were exploding. Mark and his friends shot torpedoes and rockets at a ship. James dropped a bomb on one ship. There was a big gash in the ship.

The humans had only 75 ships left for the battle. A ton of ships were on fire.

“There, fire!” James’ ship was shot by a laser! He turned around and headed back for Earth. Lily and James turned around and headed for Earth. A few hours later, the whole fleet turned around and surrendered. The Earth had lost to space again.

The whole world was mad that they got crushed. Three months later, good news came: scientists had made a new missile strong enough to blow up Texas. Lily went out to space and fired the missile at the ship. It blew up in a towering fireball. The Army was happy.

They had a better chance of winning the war. They made a lot of missiles like that. They had to defend now. It had been two years since the aliens first attacked, but when the aliens attacked this time, the world was ready. They launched their aircrafts and started doing great. Lily blew a ship up with the new missile they made. After a while the aliens ran out of energy. The humans blew up all the ships except for the biggest one with the missiles. Mark blew up one with a bomb. The biggest one flew out to space. The humans were happy. All they had to do was destroy the ship. They were deciding who should drop the nuclear bomb.

When they decided, Mark was chosen. He flew the aircraft to outer space and dropped the bomb on the ship. It blew up into a giant explosion. Mark was overjoyed. He flew back to Earth. On Earth, the humans celebrated their stunning victory. Mark was a true hero. Now one would ever forget that day. The news headline was:

“Aliens Lose. Mark James Owens: Hero.”

Mark James Owens dropped bomb on last ship that belonged to the aliens. Already 20 interviews in 3 days, and fame is rising.                   

 

The End.

Boing and the Evil Noodles

Once upon a time there was a panda. The panda’s name was Boing. Boing’s life was almost perfect. There was only one thing Boing wanted… NOODLES! He really wanted noodles. Boing had only eaten noodles once in his life. And he had loved them. But, he was allergic to the chili peppers Mr. Smigs put in his noodles. His tongue started burning whenever he ate any. There was only one noodle shop in the tiny panda village called Panda Town and Mr. Smigs was the owner. But, Mr. Smigs only knew how to make noodles with chilli peppers.

Three years later it was Boing’s birthday. His parents gave him noodles! He said, “Oh wow! Noodles!” Boing decided he would save the noodles for later. He wanted them to last as long as possible.

That night Boing was lying in bed and he tasted a noodle. It was very spicy. He said to himself, “I wish these noodles were less spicy.”

Suddenly, a mysterious voice coming from the noodles said, “If you want me less spicy you will have to do it yourself.” Boing was too scared to respond. “Well?”

Boing said, “How do I do that?”

“Figure it out!”

“O-okay,” Boing said as he shook with fear. “Never mind. You are perfect,” said Boing.

The next morning Boing said “Good morning, noodles!”

The noodles said, “What’s so good about the morning? You get woken up from your beauty sleep!”

Then Boing finished the noodles. Guess what he saw? Boing saw a genie bottle with devil horns! Boing went outside. He rubbed the bottle and a genie devil came out! The genie devil lunged at Boing and he was scared! Right at that moment, Boing became a tiny ball, the size of a beach ball, and tripped the genie devil. Then Boing became aware he had powers. SUPER powers! He realized that his emotions controlled his powers. Whenever he got scared, he could turn into the size of a beach ball. He was very happy.

Suddenly, a gleaming ball of light fell into his hands. It was pure happiness. Boing threw the happiness at the genie devil! The happiness burned the genie devil. The genie devil tried to cast a spell but Boing duct taped the genie devil’s mouth shut. Then Boing realized he loved using his powers. Little heart bullets shot out of his mouth! They all hit the genie devil!

Boing could control when his powers happened. When he was happy or any of the other  emotions the power for that would be most powerful, but even when he was feeling sad, Boing still could be able to bring the sun down or turn into a little ball but it wouldn’t be as powerful.

Then, Boing’s sister Ellie came out and said “Boing, what are you doing?”

“Uhh, nothing.” said Boing.

“Hmmm,” said Ellie.

“Okay.” Ellie said, and went away.

In the meantime, the genie devil had gotten the tape off his mouth and said, “Okay, okay. You win. Take me to jail,” said the genie devil because he thought anything would be better than having to be in this backyard anymore because he doesn’t want to have Boing hurt him again.

“Sure! I’ll take you to jail,” said Boing.

He called the police and said he had found an evil genie devil. He sent him to genie jail.

Boing thought that since he had just taken a genie devil to jail, he had to be on the good side. “I guess I’ll be a superhero then, if I’m on the good side.”

And then when the police got the genie devil, they said, “Boing! You caught the most wanted genie devil that has not been seen for a million years!”

“What’s this genie’s name?” asked Boing.

“Dino.”

“We will give you any prize you want,” said the police officer.

“I would like NOODLES!”

THE END

Unknown Worlds

Part I. Snake Attack.

Far away near The Amazon, a scientist was testing an external growth serum on creatures when something went horribly wrong. The creature expanded to fifty feet and dragged him into the depths of the swamp. Gradually, the water turned red, with screams echoing off the branches.

***

Twenty years later, a 15-year-old boy named Henry took a trip to The Amazon. He had brown hair and a mischievous grin. He wore blue jeans and a leather jacket. He was 5’10”.  He was getting prepared with all the gear and medications in a small Brazilian town when news reached about an enigmatic creature let into the swamp, quickly dragging people into the mud, and the people were mysteriously never seen again. He didn’t tell his parents because he knew he would be forbidden to go after they heard that. He had wanted to go since he was five and he was not wasting his chance to go to the Amazon.

After he was done packing up, he got into his Jeep and they calmly drove over to The Amazon. After two hours passed, they finally reached their destination, a bubbling swamp with croaks echoing and a slithering noise from the branches.

The guide said, “Maybe we should move to another area.”

Henry responded saying, “No. This area’s perfect.”

The guide said, “Sorry. I’m just a little creeped out by snakes.”

Henry thought, There’s something worse up here than snakes. Henry lazily trailed off with the crunches of leaves falling behind him. Henry thought, Wow! This place is beautiful, when he heard something by the swamp. He turned around to look, but nothing was there. He kept on walking and he felt like someone, or something, was watching him.

Henry slowly kept wandering into the forest, losing himself, hearing something calling to him. He kept following the voice, directing him towards an unknown destination. “Come to me, follow the path,” he heard a voice hissing. Gradually, he saw bones of animals devoured by the creature. He saw crocodiles fleeing from the forest. As if in a trance, he ignored all that he saw, and the voice was hissing, and the hisses became clearer. “Come to me to save your family,” it whispered. Quickly it heated up, and he saw more bones littering the floor, and he snapped out of the trance, unaware of what he’d been doing.

And then, slowly, a creature revealed itself from the trees. It was gigantic, a humongous snake with fangs, seven inches long, poison dripping from the teeth. It reared itself into a formation to strike and jutted forward, missing by an inch. It rapidly struck, quickly maneuvering to get a clear shot. And then he remembered, in the article it said it was part-wolf and part-human, so he thought, If I kill that thing, the other snakes will kill me. So he kept dodging and maneuvering to avoid the strikes from the monster. He thought of a plan, and darted behind a tree.

He kept going around the tree while the snake coiled onto it and followed him. He kept continuing the process until the tree cracked and lost its balance, then crashed down on top of the snake. The snake was struggling under the weight of the tree. He went to follow the path, but there wasn’t any, so he followed the first steps he took, and continued in that direction for half an hour.

After he reached his destination, he saw that the Jeep wasn’t there and he saw car tracks rolling into the town. He was trapped in the jungle. Seven years ago, I thought the jungle would be fun, not like this, he thought. He was wandering around trying to find an exit, and then he remembered the snakes. They were slowly coiling up on his feet, dragging him into the swamp. And then he heard his parents calling to him, “Come follow the tracks, you’ll find us at the end of the trail.”

He shook the snakes off and followed the trail for hours and hours. He saw his parents, but they were dead. He started sobbing and thought, It should have been me. They were right near the shore, getting washed up into the bank. He felt a sudden urge to attack that monster and destroy it. He kept following the trail.

On the way he found a small branch and a large rock. He sharpened the ridge of the branch into a sharp blade, and then continued on to find the snake and kill it. But by the time he reached it, he saw a horde of black mambas, cobras, and king snakes. Behind it was the giant cobra. It was staring down at Henry with a giant black hood and red fiery eyes. It formed itself, ready for a strike. It shot forward, striking a tree, and got its fang stuck. When it pulled back, the fang got ripped out of its mouth, and it hissed in agony. It hissed in a foreign language, demanding all the other snakes to attack. And then, Henry hurled his giant stick into the giant cobra’s heart. It toppled over and crushed all of the smaller snakes.

And then, his parents came out from the bushes and said, “You passed the test.”

Henry gasped and said “What the heck? Is this another April Fools’ prank? Because it is the first of April,” he said as he eyed them suspiciously.

He figured out that the snake was an animatronic being, and the coding was to command all the smaller snakes. He also figured out that the story with the scientist and the growth serum was just a rumour they spread after they let the animatronic snake into the jungle. And then his parents said, “You are now ready to take a trip to the other planet called Earth.”

Part II. Trip to Earth.

Henry was really scared. He was going to a new planet, unknown by everyone. It was in a different galaxy, many light years away. But surprisingly, they got there in only weeks. It was very different from his home planet. So moist, so many different creatures and plants. Henry was awed by all that he saw on the new planet. And his parents explained that there were different parts of the planet called continents. They also explained that they might settle on this planet depending on whether their investigation went well. They also told him that they went on a top secret mission when he was younger, onto a different planet that was the home planet he had lived on when Henry was very little. So they were coming back to Earth to settle there again. They had tested him before to see if he had the courage to learn the truth. They told him there were sudden eruptions from a certain volcano that were caused by monsters battling each other and that the eruptions were caused by monsters underneath the crater. They were going to a place called Hawaii to investigate the eruptions and the battles. There were many mountains that spewed molten rock out of craters. They were going inside of one volcano to explore the infrastructure.

It took a few days and hours to get to Hawaii from the United States. By the time they got there, they were trudging up a giant volcano, one near the middle of the island. It was 17,000 feet tall, and it was active during the week. A few days ago, it burned down half of Hawaii. They went to see what caused all this destruction from one of the volcanoes, but many others were burned down by the explosion. There were many different creatures that tried to slow them down. Snakes and lizards kept trying to bite their legs. Henry got bitten once and his leg started aching as he limped up the mountain. By the time they got near the crater, he saw lava bubble beneath him, and it started heating up. He was sweating like mad. And then they attached a rope to the edge of the crater and climbed down.

By the time he got inside lava started spewing up to the height he was at. Henry almost fell off the edge. As he kept trudging around, part of the rope touched the lava and started burning up, incinerating quickly. Henry started to freak out. He thought he was trapped inside again. He stared open mouthed as his parents walked across the edge and got lowered by another rope down to ground floor. The lava bubbled up, and something emerged from it. It was a hideous black form with giant claws. It reminded him of a manticore. It struck its scorpion tail right where Henry was. He asked his parents if this was another test, but it wasn’t. Slowly, a few more rose from the lava. They all struck, and clawed where his parents were. A few more things emerged from the lava. But they weren’t manticores. It was a giant being with a sickle. It swiped above all of their heads, missing by an inch. Then, something larger than all of them emerged. It was a hideous beast, 200 feet long, roaring as it destroyed everything in its path, causing an eruption, destroying a bit of Hawaii.

Henry took a giant piece of molten rock and hurled it straight at the beast. It hit him and scratched him. It roared in pain, but it managed to pick it up and throw it back at Henry. He quickly did a forward roll and the molten rock crashed right where he was. His parents found an odd piece of molten rock shaped like a sword. They hit it against the wall of the volcano, and realized it was a sword. They tossed it to Henry, and he swiped at one of the legs of the beast. It crashed on its knee and hit Henry and caused him to fly backwards and lose consciousness. He saw a fogginess of his parents fighting off the beast, and then lost consciousness.

By the time he regained consciousness, he saw the beast hitting the wall, causing a rockslide. The beast was strong, but idiotic. It hit so hard that a giant piece of rock fell on it and almost crushed it. He picked it up and hurled it over the volcano. Henry thought, Oh god, as the monster picked up some rocks and hurled them at him. He thought that would be his last moment. But then a gorilla with snakes for limbs quickly crashed through the wall of the volcano and knocked the giant beast against the wall.

As Henry starred, the giant gorilla pummeled the huge monster. Henry thought about ways he could use this to his advantage. He found the rope that his parents used to escape while he was unconscious and gradually pulled himself up. By the time the gorilla destroyed the giant beast, Henry was lazily pulling up to get to the crater. When the giant gorilla noticed this, he hit right where Henry’s rope ended, and by the time Henry got to the top they deliberately hurried down, and the giant gorilla hit the inside of the volcano once more, causing a rockslide that destroyed the volcano and everything inside. You could hear the roars of the giant gorilla when it was getting crushed by rocks. By the time they got to their ship, they took off and Henry thought, Some adventure, while they were rocketing back to home.

The End.  

Animals Running Away

There is a donkey called Dunkypunky. His owner, Bob, doesn’t know that Dunkypunky and the other animals can talk.

So, one day Dunkypunky was planning to go on a boat with the chickens and the cow. “The owner doesn’t even give us food so let’s make a plan to escape on a boat,” said Dunkypunky.

“Okay, let’s make a plan and tell the chickens if they want to escape too,” said the cow.

“Do you guys want to escape and get food to eat because our owner doesn’t give us food?,” said Dunkypunky to the chickens.

“But first we have to make a plan,” said the chickens.

They were planning how to get out of the farm. The owner is mean and doesn’t give them food and gives them old hay that is like a month old. The owner doesn’t like them so he doesn’t take care of them. Since he’s always in his house reading, they can open the door of the farm and lock the door of the house so he can’t get out.

They ran to the bay and got on a boat without the owner. But they were kind of in trouble because they didn’t have the keys to make the engine start. But since the donkey was so smart, the donkey was looking at all the buttons and found the one that said start. He put his hoof on it and it started. Five chickens were on one side of the wheel and five chickens were on the other side. When Dunkypunky wanted to go to the left, the five chickens went to the left and when Dunkypunky wanted to go right the other five chickens moved to the right.

The owner of the boat came out of his house, which was right in front. He didn’t see his boat, and instead he went on a motor boat that goes very fast. He saw the chickens and the donkey and the cow on his boat. So he called 911 and the police were in the water surrounding them.

Since the boat they were in was hard to stop they crashed into the police boat and kept going and the police boat sank. They were going deep into the ocean where there were sharks and they met with a great white shark but he was good. “I will lead lead the way to Greece,” said the shark. He led the way for them to get out of Croatia.

One day they got to Greece and they got out of the boat and they saw a cruise that was about to go. They jumped on without anybody seeing and they found an empty room in the basement and they stayed there. Five days later, the cruise went to Spain and they went to bullfight. The bull was their friend. He said, “If they kill me, I will not see you. If I don’t I will still not see you.”

Luckily, the bull didn’t get killed and they saved his life since he was such a good bull. In bull fights when the bull is very good they let them go in the wild. The bull went to the forest and got lost from the animals. Then the animals went to the airport. From Spain they took a plane to New York City. They got out and the owner of the farm was there in New York in the airplane. When they was getting their bags he turned around and saw the animals. When the animals were running out of the airport, they took a taxi to Brooklyn. The owner of the farm’s friend who didn’t know they were the farm’s animals kept them as pets. But they didn’t know that the farmer was going there.

The farmer went and said, “You have a chicken, a cow, and a donkey for pets.” An hour later he noticed that they were his animals and the animals jumped out the window. And the owner started to chase them.

When they were running in the street, they saw a homeless dog and said, “Do you want to help us run away from our owner?”

The dog said, “Yes.”

So they went to the pet store to rob the food from the pet store and the alarm went off. So the police in the pet store were chasing the animals and the animals didn’t know what to do. Police were surrounding them so the police trapped them and put them into a cage and took them to the pet orphanage. But then since the donkey was so smart he asked the cow to kick the door open and the cow did kick the door open. But then the police saw them and they were surrounded. The chickens went to the police and crashed into them. The police fell. The dog bit their hands and they ran out. They went to the same airport and met a new friend that was a cat was on a leash so the cat bit the leash off and robbed the tickets off her owner. There were enough for the ten chickens, the one dog, the cow, and the donkey, and for the cat. And then the plane they had business class tickets and then the TV they were watching the news. They were on there. So they saw that and it was very dangerous because in every single place in the world there were police looking for them except in Antarctica.

So their plane took them to Africa and they took a train to South Africa and from South Africa took a plane to Antarctica. In Antarctica they met another friend that was a polar bear. That polar bear pretend he was good but he was actually a police polar bear. He said, “Come, I’ll take you to where my friends are.” In the water they were on the polar bear’s back and the polar bear took them to South Africa. In South Africa there were police that trapped them and put them in the jail where El Chapo was. El Chapo was a new friend for them, so they helped El Chapo go out, and El Chapo helped them to go so they were a new team.

When they got out the police, were looking at their cage and the police saw they were not there. They saw a little hole that was tunnel and there was a car in that hole. They took that car all the way to Egypt and from Egypt they took a plane all the way to England and then England they went to the London Tower.

And they got the queen’s crown and then the alarm went on and the police chased them everywhere so they went to the airport and they went to New York in New York. They went to the NASA but they had to pass security, so the chickens bit the police and Dunkypunky kicked the police and got the biggest space shuttle and took them to a planet that doesn’t exist and that was called Zombie Prigg and they made zombies that were eating people’s brains.

They were in trouble because the queen zombie didn’t like human brains but they liked animal brains so the zombie started chasing them. So the space shuttle went to another planet called Jupiter and there they were safe. Before leaving they took the queen’s crown. They said goodbye to El Chapo and El Chapo stayed there. They went to Mars and there they started to build a base that nobody knows about right in the middle. Nobody saw it. It was invisible, and only they could see it.

They went to Earth with the space shuttle and then they bought an alarm and a lot of metal. So they went back to Mars with the space shuttle and they put an alarm and they made a force field made out of metal. So they got the queen zombie and contacted her by blue tooth and said, “If you protect our space we will give you our brains.” But then they went to planet Jupiter and told El Chapo, “Come and look what we made for us.”

They went back in the space shuttle and they showed him the base and since it was invisible, they pressed the button that made it visible. He saw it was like a castle.

The animals said, “We can work together to make the police stop chasing us. We could give you the queen’s crown and you could live in this place.”

They went back to planet Earth and the animals made a deal with their owner, “If you treat us nicely and give us food, we will stop running away from you.”

The owner said, “Okay,” then gave them food.

They had a lot of food and in the space shuttle they put all the food. When it was nighttime they went back to Mars and gave them the queen’s crown. El Chapo was living in their base.

And El Chapo said, “The animals are dead. Tell the police to stop wasting their time chasing them.” But they actually went back to Zombie Prigg with the queen zombie and they were the most important animals there because they gave the queen other animals so the queen could eat those brains. So they had a gigantic base like a castle made out of gold and diamonds.

“And if they help the queen to make another planet like a storage for brains,” the queen said, “We will let you live in our castle.”

They helped her to make the storage planet and it was bigger than the sun. But there was still one brain that couldn’t fit but since there was no gravity it just stayed there floating and the next day the queen ate it for breakfast. Then that day at night, NASA sent a space shuttle to discover this new planet called Zombie Prigg and they brought two police and saw the animals weren’t dead. So the police started chasing again. Then the animals went on the space shuttle that NASA brought to Mars and they said to El Chapo, “Can we stay in your base till the police go out of Zombie Prigg?”

He said no because he already saved them once. The spaceship that the animals robbed from NASA. NASA people and the police went on another NASA space shuttle to Mars and saw the animals and put them to work for the president, Donald Trump. Since he treated them so bad like their own older, they called El Chapo to say, “Can you help us take his brain out and give it to the queen of Zombie Prigg?” And he did help them.

They didn’t have a space shuttle to go to Zombie Prigg with his brain so they built their own space shuttle that could only work for five months and then it runs out of battery. But Zombie Prigg was five months and a day away so they asked El Chapo if he could rob them five tons of gasoline, and he did so they could get to Zombie Prigg. So they got on their space shuttle and went to Zombie Prigg and gave Donald Trump’s brain to the queen zombie and she ate it!

Since Donald Trump didn’t have a brain, he turned into a zombie, so Hillary Clinton became the new president. Since she was so powerful she conquered the whole world and she gave ten thousand billions of dollars to the animals and with that, they paid the police to stop chasing them.

Then the animals told the owner, “if you treat us nicely, we will really stop running away from you.”

“Can you guys talk?” said the owner.

“Yes we can talk,” said the animals.

“Okay but I’m sorry I didn’t give you food because I didn’t have enough money to give you food. But now the police gave me five hundred billion dollars so now I can feed you,” said the owner.

The owner did give them food and they lived with the owner in the farm. Now the owner  let them be free in the backyard and they had a lot of food and lived and had parties every day with piñatas.

“Hey, I can break the piñata with my feet, look!” said Dunkypunky.

Kaboommm!!!

“Hey, I can get the candy,” said the cow.

Then the chickens said, “I can pin the tail on the on the donkey.” They got it. They did pin the tail on the donkey.

“The reason we are celebrating is because we are back home,” said Dunkypunky.

Marigold and Luki-luki

Once, a princess named Marigold ran into a forest. This was a B-I-G mistake because Luki-luki the Dragon lived there. The dragon came out of his cave once a week and the day that he came out was the day that Marigold ran into the forest. Marigold was picking flowers right outside the dragon’s cave when he came out. The first thing Luki-luki saw was a small 16-year-old girl with a dress on. A pink dress on. Her glass heels looked like the most uncomfortable thing he had ever seen.

“What’s with those weird shoes?” asked Luki-luki.

“My mom says I should be daintier,” said Marigold without turning around, “because I’m almost seventeen.” Finally, she looked up from her flowers. “What are you?” Marigold screamed after she turned around. The flowers dropped from her hand.

Luki-luki said,“Drag-on I ham.”

“I don’t like dragons,” Marigold said, her voice quavering.

“Shhh,” said Luki-luki.

But Marigold ran away instead of answering. She ran all the way out of the forest and back to her castle, just over a bridge. She told the guards to get their swords ready because there was a dragon chasing her!! The guards did as they were told. When Luki-luki came, they saw him: 13 feet tall, green-scaled, and slimy. They were disgusted.

“Ew!!” one guard said.

“I didn’t come for this,” another said.

“Uhhh, guys?” the last said. “Where’d he go? ” Luki-luki was flying right over there heads.

“Poop alert!!” the last guard said as a round purple-spotted and blue squishy thing fell on their heads.

“Ewww!!!” the guards said… but Luki-luki was already gone.

“We must warn the princess.”

Meanwhile, in the hall…

“I told you, Mom, I dropped them,” Marigold said. “I did pick them!”

“Sweetie,” the queen said, “did Cinderella drop her flowers?”

The queen was C-R-A-Z-Y about flowers. Her dresses were either made out of flowers (which she actually despised) or had flowers on them.

“Cinderella didn’t even pick flowers!!”

“How do you know?”

“Because she’s my best friend!”

“Has she ever been in a garden?”

“No. And besides, I see you drop your flowers all the time!!”

“GO TO YOUR ROOM!!!” the queen yelled. As she did, the castle walls echoed and Marigold’s eyes started watering. Not because of the queen’s words, but because of the loudness. As the princess walked up to her room, she saw her mom walking daintily but sophisticatedly away.

Luki-luki was flying over the castle looking for Marigold. He was so lonely in his cave and he missed his friend, Luna. But Luna had moved far, far away. Luna was another dragon, who happened to hate where she lived.

Luki-luki and Luna had thought they would marry each other. Apparently, they were wrong. Luki-luki shook his head. He needed to focus on his plan.

  1. Get into castle (He really was sorry about the ‘poop’ incident. He just hadn’t done Number Two in a while.) Check.
  2. Find Marigold.
  3. Give back flowers.
  4. Convince.
  5. Have friend.

“Find princess,” Luki-luki whispered to himself.

There were ten floors and ten rooms on each floor. Luki-luki decided to look on the highest room on the highest floor. He found the Marigold sitting on a bed. He decided to go through the window.

CRACK!!!

Marigold  jumped, surprised, and turned around.

“You’re the dragon I saw earlier, aren’t you?” Marigold said.

“Drag-on I ham. I ‘ave flours,” (I have flowers) Luki-luki said while holding the flowers.

“Sorry I ran away earlier, I-I guess I just got scared.”

“Thank you,” Marigold said, “but I don’t need — ”

Knock, knock.

“Sweetie?”

“That’s my mom!” Marigold hissed. “Quick, hide.”

As you might think, how will a 13 foot dragon hide in a princess’s room? Well, he can’t. Luki-luki was sad to go, for he’d only gotten to step three, but it would have to do. He didn’t want to turn into a dragon burrito, like his parents had. They had written him a letter saying,       

We didn’t want to go, but we had to. Shelia and I, we left Luki-luki to live on his own. During our time, humans were our worst enemies, especially in daylight.

Boka-boka had turned burrito first, right in front of my eyes. The humans were all chanting, “Wrap, wrap, dip em’ in sour cream, 18 feet tall, scared of everything!”

We left you right outside a beautiful cave. Our taste of beautiful is dark, and murky, and buggy – everything a growing dragon needs. Well, almost – we had everything but a friend. We are sorry, Luki-luki. Really sorry.

Meanwhile, back at the castle…

“Honey,” the queen said as she came in, “I’m sorry about earlier.” Then, she saw the flowers. “You got me more flowers?”

“Uhh — yeah?”

FLAP, FLAP.

“Wait a second,” the queen said. “What’s that? And why’s your window broken?” The queen went over to Marigold’s window. “Is that a dragon?”

“Uh, yeah?”

“I am so —” she gasped, “jealous!!!”  

“Anna eyde?” (Wanna ride?) Luki-luki asked.

“Sure!”

Marigold, the queen, and Luki-luki lived happily ever after.

The Finals

Ding ding ding!!! I switched off my alarm clock, but then five minutes later, DING DING DING!!! Fine, I gave in, I rolled out of bed fell on the wooden floor of my tiny room. I got up and changed. I ate a banana and chose my shoes; soccer is all about shoes. I ran at top speed to the field my team was playing at. I took my hand and wiped the sweat off my forehead as the sun beat down on me. I drained down a bottle of water and joined my teammates in warming up.

“Bring it in, Bring it in,” yelled coach.

He gave us our positions.

“And Johnny” he said to me, “you’re striker.”

I nodded my head. The ref took the captains and did the coin toss. We got ball first!!! I took my position and waited for the ref to signal. I looked up, the stadium was huge, bright blue, and newly polished. l saw my family there, they were in the fifth row by midfield, perfect seats.  Once he blew the whistle. I rolled the ball so smoothly across to my teammate for the kick off. The ball glided across the grass as it slowly made its way to its destination. The ball reached my teammate, he passed it back to our midfielders so they wouldn’t steal the ball right away, a typical way of starting off a game. After that I pushed up to grab the space of the upper half of the field. The ball was sent to my feet. Once I had the ball it felt magical weaving past the defenders. I took a powerful shot at goal, but the goalie stretched out as far as he could and made a diving save. As soon as he got his hand on the ball I knew he was as great goalie. But luckily, the spin on the ball made it roll the other way out of bounds on them, it was a corner. Our right defender got the ball and got set for a corner. He put his hand up signaling that he was about to take it. The ball came soaring through the air right to me! I bumped the ball into the back of the net using my head. The crowd erupted, everyone was screaming, our team started celebrating, there was nothing better than being up early.

Beeep Beeep Beeep!! It was halftime, and we were up 1-0. We got water and went into a huddle with our coach.

“You guys have played a great game so far, great goal Johnny, but if we raised the intensity just a little bit we would be up 2-3 goals. This game is far from over, we have got to go out there and attack the net more aggressively.” We got back to our positions. As soon as they kicked off they made a mistake and we won the ball. Instead of playing back we pushed up forcing the other team to bring attackers back to defend. I didn’t want to just dribble and make the game boring, so I took a shot and the top right corner netting welcomed the ball to his home. 2-0. I leaped into the air with excitement and threw a fist into the air. The crowd was screaming in delight, for this was a home game for my team.

Though we scored the other team was quick to react. They quickly dribbled down the field and took their first shot of the game. It hit the post and went in the back of the net!! In a snap of a finger the crowd became silent. Everyone was astonished and no one dared to speak. After that our team tried to slow down the pace of the game. We were worried the other team would score again.

I looked up at the scoreboard: one minute!! Surely we can’t lose now, I thought. I looked up at the game, what the other team had a penalty!!! A penalty is a shot for the other team from a pace inside the penalty box and the defenders have to be behind the ball, this is a great opportunity for the other team to score!! If they miss this they will be ashamed of themselves. But they didn’t, it was tied and going to extra time.

At the start of extra time we got the ball first. My friend passed me the ball, I dribbled past two defenders. I passed my friend the ball, and he shot the ball. It went into the back netting! The ref blew his whistle, signalling that the goal didn’t count because my friend was offsides. When a person is offsides it means that they were in front of everyone and they got passed the ball. But my teammate clearly wasn’t offsides. I got really mad at the ref and ran over to him.

“That’s not fair,” I yelled at the ref. And the ref gave me a yellow card. A yellow card is a warning. If you get two yellow cards, you get sent out of the match. If you get a red card you get sent out of the match automatically. I didn’t want to argue more because then I would’ve got a red card.

The goalie kicked the ball far off to the other side of the field. Their striker controlled the ball and took a shot, and it went into the back of the net. It was 3-2 them, when it should have been 3-2 us. I was furious.

We were taking so many shots on goal but none went in! We were controlling the game. I kept telling myself that it was one goal but I knew that the clock was ticking, and I knew this was the championship match. We’d come all this way, we couldn’t lose now. Just then I had a flashback of last year when we lost lost, how devastated I was, it was such a disappointment, but what I remember most was the walk home. I was ashamed of myself too embarrassed to show my face to people.

Five minutes left, I thought to myself. I played my heart out. I looked up at the clock, time was running out. There were only seconds left in the match. I dribbled the ball and then tapped it through one of the defenders legs. It came out the other side. I ran and got the ball. I ran past another defender. I saw the clock. There were only five seconds left. I knew I had to take a rushed shot. I shot the ball right before the clock turned zero. The goalie deflected the ball, but not hard enough. It went into the back of the net! The game was going to penalties.

Our coach called us in. “Guys, that was a close one. We nearly lost two times in a row. But now we’re not going to lose it. We have to go out there and score every penalty. We have to make sure we don’t miss one. Because if we miss one we leave the door open for the other team to score and take the lead.”

The ref blew his whistle and he called the captains over to do the toss for who would take the penalty first. We won the toss again. And I chose to shoot first. It was our team’s penalty. It went into the back of the net. Great, I thought, but they scored as well. The penalties went on and I knew that if I scored we would win. I lined the ball up, I thought to myself, this is it, this is what I’ve been waiting for all my life, the opportunity to be the star of the team, the star of the league. I closed my eyes, the ref blew his whistle, I shot the ball right down the middle. The goalie anticipated that that ball would go to the right hand side of the net, where most of my shots went earlier. He dived to the right but my ball was down the middle. I love that sound the ball makes when it hits the netting, kind of like the sound a basketball makes when there’s a swoosh. And right there on point it happened again. The crowd roared I ran to the corner flag and jumped back facing the crown [the Ronaldo]. It was awesome for we had won the championship match for the first time!!!

 “And the 2016 junior soccer championship goes Arsenal,” as the presenter gave us the trophy. Everyone was so happy, I could hear my family, they were so proud of me, my coach was proud of me, my team was proud of me, but most of all, I was proud of me.

The Goblet of Doom

Four young siblings were sitting at the dinner table. The room was dark and gloomy. The dinner table was made out of dark wood. They were eating chicken and the adults were drinking wine. Lilly, the second oldest, noticed her goblet looked different than all the rest, but she didn’t know how to describe how it was different. Lilly was a small girl at the age of nine. She had long brown hair and small brown eyes. She was wearing a long silk dress.

She looked at her oldest brother, Liam. “My goblet looks different,” she whispered.

“Well, you just have a different goblet than the rest of us do,” he said. Liam was very stubborn and loved getting his way.

“What’s wrong?” Isadora asked. Isadora was eight and very adventurous. She loved mysteries and would do anything to solve them.

“Lilly has a different goblet.”

“What?” Mirembe asked. Mirembe was the youngest, just seven years old. She was small, skinny, and always alert.

“My goblet looks funny,” Lilly whispered. Their parents, Minerva and Arthur, looked at Lilly, concerned.   

 “What’s wrong?” their father asked.

“Oh, nothing,” said Lilly. “We were just talking about jousting.” Their father nodded.

“Let’s find out why this goblet is here,” Isadora said, smiling.  

That night, the four children were in the family library, trying to find books to read before bed. “Hey look,” said Liam. “I found a book that says ‘Goblet of Doom’ on the cover. It has a drawing of your goblet on it,” he said to Lilly.

“Let me read it,” Lilly said, yanking the book out of Liam’s hand.

She read, “The Goblet of Doom is a very peculiar-looking goblet, though it can’t truly be described. It can multiply two times, making three goblets. One of them will make you die, but the other two will just be normal goblets,” Lilly read. She looked at the back of the book. There was a message tied to it with a strand of thread.

Mirembe grabbed the message from Lilly and read: “If you have found one of the goblets, know that there are two more. Three people must participate in this challenge. Two goblets will give you special powers. One goblet will make you die. You’ve got to find the three goblets and each of you must choose one to drink. One goblet is in a church, one is in a tavern, and one we do not know.”

“Well, I guess mother and father didn’t just give you a different goblet,” said Isadora. “Let’s find out what really happened.”

“Well I found one of them and I didn’t die,” said Lilly. “I guess when I find the other two goblets, I will get a special power.”

“I don’t think it’s safe to try to find the other two,” said Mirembe.

“Of course we should try to find it,” said Liam. “I want special powers.” He ran to his room and began to pack his bag.     

“Stop! What will we do when our parents see that we’re missing?” Lilly said.

“It’s nighttime. They’ll think that we’re asleep,” said Liam.

“You guys can do whatever you want, but I won’t drink from one of those goblets.” said Mirembe.

“Are we going to get going or not?” Isadora asked.

“Yes,” said Liam. The three other kids followed their brother out the door.

“I think I’ll go back,” said Mirembe.

“Don’t you want a special power?” Liam asked Mirembe.

“Well, I guess.”

“Let’s go,” whispered Isadora.

“Hey, let’s try to find a goblet in the graveyard,” said Liam.

“No, of course we shouldn’t! That’s not one of the places in the book,” said Lilly.  

“One of them is in the tavern,” said Mirembe.

“Come on,” said Isadora. All of her siblings ran after her. They walked through the town marketplace to get to the tavern. It was dark and gloomy when they got there. There was one man sitting behind the counter with a little candle on a saucer. The man had a long beard and looked bored.

“Hello,” said Liam. “May we please have a drink of water?”

“Yes,” said the man very grumpily as he got up to get the drinks from the back of the tavern.

After the man left, Lilly asked Liam, “How’s that supposed to help us, unless one of us coincidentally gets a special goblet?”

“I don’t know,” said Liam. “But let’s try.” The four children sat at a table. They saw a knight drinking a cup of wine.The man came back with four goblets filled with water. He placed all four on the table. Each of the kids took a goblet. Liam looked at his.

“Hey, mine looks just like the one at home!” Liam said.

The man turned around. “What did you say? You’re not talking about stealing my goblet, are you?”

“No,” said Liam.

“I know you said something,“ said the man. He approached Liam and took a knife out of his pocket.

“Run!” screamed Lilly. Liam took the goblet and ran. Isadora jumped on top of the man.

“Go away!” she yelled.

“You’ve taken my goblet!” screamed the man, who continued to run after the children.

“C’mon! This looks like a safe place,” said Mirembe. They ran into a little shack. Liam slammed the door.

“That was close,” said Lilly. “Do you have the other goblet, Liam?” Liam took the first goblet that they found in the house out of his bag.

“We need to get going,” said Isadora. “We need to find the next goblet.” Mirembe slowly opened the door to make sure the man wasn’t still there.

“All clear,” Mirembe whispered. Liam went around Mirembe and began to run towards the old town church. His siblings followed him.

“Wait, why are you going to the church?” Lilly asked.

“Because, that was in the book too,” said Liam. They walked slowly, making sure the man was out of sight. Lilly walked in front. The wind started to blow. “I’m getting cold,” said Liam, and he began to shiver.

“Come on!” said Isadora as they approached the church. Lilly ran up to the door and opened it with a creak. Isadora jumped in front of Lilly and began to check the church for the last goblet. Mirembe followed up and began to search with Isadora. Liam looked upstairs as carefully as he could. The church was dusty and dark. It smelled like garbage. They found rare prayer books, old papers, and scrolls. But they couldn’t find a goblet.

Lilly sat down and leaned against the wall. She felt something weird behind her. She saw five bricks had moved and there was a tunnel that she could fit through. “Hey guys, look what I found!” Lilly screamed. All her siblings ran up to her and looked in the tunnel.

“I’ll go in first!” Isadora screamed. Isadora slowly slipped into the tunnel.

“I don’t think this is safe,” Mirembe whined.

“Oh, this is perfectly safe!” Liam said and slipped into the tunnel to follow Isadora.

“C’mon,” said Lilly, “this tunnel can’t be too dangerous.” She slipped into the tunnel and Mirembe followed behind her.

“I see light!” Isadora screamed.

“I can’t,” yelled Mirembe. “It’s pitch dark down here.”

Liam pushed Isadora aside and jumped into the light. He could see light above him. He couldn’t make out what was above him, it was just light.

“What do you see?” asked Lilly.

“Nothing,” said Liam, “it’s just light.”

“It can’t just be light!” screamed Isadora. Mirembe passed everyone in front of her and

jumped into the light. She disappeared.

“What happened to Mirembe?” Liam screamed in terror.

“I don’t know, but this can’t be good!” screamed Lilly, her voice echoing around the church. Isadora jumped into the light and she disappeared as well.

“Oh no! What are we going to do?” Isadora and Mirembe disappeared.

Suddenly they heard Mirembe’s voice scream, “I’m here. Jump into the light.”

“But how?” said Liam.

“Oh, c’mon,” said Lilly and she jumped into the light.

Liam stood there trembling. What was he going to do? He couldn’t just stand there. Maybe he should go back to mother and father and tell them. “No,” he said to himself and jumped into the light.

Liam felt cold, then everything went hot. The light started turning blue and green. He felt himself fall. Everything went black. When his vision came to, he saw Lilly staring at him. “Are you an angel?” Liam asked Lilly.

“No, of course not! I’m your sister.” Said Lilly. Lilly helped Liam up.

“Where are we?” said Liam.

“I don’t know!” said Lilly. “But this can’t be good.”Suddenly Isadora ran up to Liam.

“Finally, we’ve been waiting five minutes for you!”

“Sorry,” said Liam.

Mirembe ran up to them. “What are we going to do now?”

“I don’t know, but we got to do something.” said Liam. Lilly saw a small shiny piece of metal on the ground. She got closer. It was the goblet! She picked it up.

“Hey, look what I found!” Lilly screamed. Everyone else came over.

“Now all we need to do is drink from them,” said Liam. They walked back towards the light. Suddenly, they started spinning. Lilly squeezed her eyes shut. She opened them. She was in a big graveyard. Isadora and Mirembe were gone, but Liam was lying right next to her. Lilly was holding all three of the goblets.

“Where’s everyone else?” Liam yelled.

“I don’t know,” said Lily, “but we better drink it fast.”

“Why do we need to drink it now?” yelled Liam. “Why do we even have to drink it at all?”

“Because, don’t you want one of the special powers?” yelled Lilly.

“Well, one of us will die!” yelled Liam. It was just then that Mirembe and Isadora ran up to them.

“Hey! Where were you?” yelled Lilly.

“Well, where were you?” yelled Isadora.

“I don’t know but I don’t care. We need to drink from these things fast,” yelled Lilly.

“I saw a fountain over there,” said Mirembe. Lilly left and went to fill up the goblets with water. The fountain water was cold and dirty, but she filled it up anyway. Then she ran back with the goblet to where the others were sitting.

“I filled them up,” yelled Lilly.

“Wait a minute,” yelled Mirembe. “There are three goblets, and four of us. What should we do?”

“Well I guess one of us won’t have to risk dying, but won’t get a power either. Maybe only three of us should do it,” said Lilly.

“Well you three can do it, but I’m not,” said Mirembe.

“Well, I already drank,” said Lilly, “So I guess it’s Liam’s turn now.” Liam picked up the small goblet. Liam slowly drank the water. Once he had drank it all, he placed the goblet down on the ground.

Isadora picked up the next goblet. “If you guys didn’t die, then how am I gonna survive?”

“You can’t,” Liam said, “Just drink it already.”

“No!” said Lilly.

“Do you want the powers or not?” yelled Liam.

“Well… yes,” Lilly sighed.

“Well, in order for us to have the powers, someone needs to drink from the third goblet,” said Liam.

“Oh, fine, you can have the powers,” Isadora responded, and brought the goblet up to her lips. She was about to take a sip, when Mirembe jumped on top of her and pushed the goblet out of her hands.

Lilly caught the goblet in midair. Liam grabbed the goblet and started running towards the fountain. Isadora stood, surprised and wet. She blinked, and then she fell to the floor.

Mirembe screamed. “You didn’t drink it, how could you die?” she yelled.

“I don’t know!” yelled Lilly, as she tried to pick up Isadora. It was just then Liam was running back with the cup. Water came out of the sides of the cup as he started running towards them. Isadora shrieked.

“What’s happening?” Mirembe yelled, and leapt on top of Isadora. Lilly tried to pull Mirembe off of her.

Liam came over to them with the goblet. “Drink it!” he yelled.

Isadora pushed Liam backwards. Mirembe caught the goblet that still had water in it, and shoved it down Liam’s throat.

“No!” Lilly shrieked. Liam began to choke and he started looking pale. Isadora leapt to her feet. Isadora started charging at Liam but he pushed her back. Isadora looked at her brother and ran to the other side of the graveyard; she was terrified. Mirembe leapt on Liam and tried to strangle him.

“That’s what you get for trying to murder my sister!” yelled Mirembe.

“Leave him alone!” yelled Lilly, and pulled Mirembe off of him. But it was too late. Liam was already dead. Liam’s eyes creepily stared up at them.

“What do we do now?” said Isadora.

“Aren’t you supposed to get powers?” Mirembe said to Lilly.

Suddenly, Lilly felt a small tingling feeling, and felt kind of sore. Lilly’s eyes were forced shut. She opened them again. She had small pink wings, and she was hovering above the ground. She looked down, and Liam stood up. His eyes were staring creepily at them, and his skin had turned green.

“What happened to you?” Lilly shrieked.

“He probably has the power to come back to life!” yelled Isadora.

“He’s a zombie!!!” yelled Mirembe, and she lept onto Lilly’s foot, which was hovering above ground.

Liam pulled a knife out of his pocket.

“Where’d you get a knife from?” yelled Isadora. Liam didn’t seem to hear her. Liam didn’t seem to be charging after any of them. He was only staring straight at Mirembe.

Lilly jumped in front of him but Liam just walked around her and started charging for Mirembe again. Liam paid no attention to anyone around him — he just kept on walking towards Mirembe with the knife. Isadora jumped on Liam and pulled the knife out of his hand. She tossed the knife to Mirembe. Isadora jumped off of Liam. Liam started charging at Mirembe again. Mirembe charged after him at the same time! When she got close enough she threw the knife at Liam. The knife hit Liam straight in the head but he didn’t die. He kept walking at Mirembe with blood pouring out of his head.

Lilly flew toward Liam. Liam sprouted a small pair of wings and started flying at Lilly. Lilly emptied out her pocket and threw everything she had at Liam. Lilly found a small rock in her pocket. She threw it at Liam. One of Liam’s wings fell off and he started wiggling in the air. Liam started gliding to the ground, he started screaming. Mirembe found a small pile of rope on the ground. She tied one end into a small circle and lassoed it into the air. She closed her eyes and pulled on the rope, she had caught Liam in the rope. She pulled him to the ground. Mirembe wrapped Liam in the rope. Lilly glided towards the ground and looked at her near-dead brother. Lilly felt an urge of sadness as Liam closed his eyes for the last time. Lilly bent down next to Liam and then she realized something… Liam was dead. “Come on, let’s go home,” said Lilly gloomily. Mirembe and Isadora followed her home.

Lilly knocked on the door, and her mother answered. “Where’s Liam?”  she asked. Lilly looked at Isadora and Mirembe.

“He’s dead,” Lilly sighed.

“What do you mean?” her mother asked “are you playing some kind of game?” Lilly thought to herself what am I going to say?

“I killed him,” said Mirembe.

“What do you mean?” her mother hollered.

“I’ll show you what we mean,” said Mirembe.

Their mother followed them to the church where they had found the third goblet. “Where’s the light?” said Lilly, searching around. Nobody could find the light.

“Will you tell me where Liam is or not?” their mother asked.

“We told you, he’s dead,” said Isadora and Mirembe at the same time. Their mother stayed silent. The three children ran from the church, leaving their mother behind.

“What are we gonna do?” Lilly asked her siblings.

“I don’t know!” Mirembe cried.

“Well, what kind of graveyard did you remember teleporting us to?” asked Lilly.

“I don’t know, it looked like the graveyard next to the church in the town next to us,” said Mirembe. Lilly got her mother and brought her to where her siblings were standing. Their mother followed them to the graveyard. They searched around for Liam’s dead body, but they finally found it. All of them wished they had never found it and had searched forever. Their mother stared at the corpse in disbelief. Liam’s eyes were wide open, staring up at her creepily. Their mother started to shriek. Mirembe looked at her brother. Why had she killed him? Why did she have to be so mean? Then, Lilly could only think of one thing to do. She ran. Lilly ran and ran and then took off into the air. Her mother was trying to chase her down below.

Lilly flew too fast to think. The tops of the trees scratched her as she flew by. She didn’t care. She would fly and run until nobody could find her.

She finally landed. It wasn’t until then she realized that Isadora had been hanging on to her foot when she was flying.

“What are you doing here?” Lilly asked her.

“I didn’t know what to do! I had to come with you. I left Mirembe back with mother.”

“Well, what are we gonna do now? We’re lost in the middle of the woods!” said Lilly.

“We’ll build a shelter, of course,” said Isadora.

“What? What do you mean? How?” Lilly exclaimed.

“You just watch, said Isadora. She began to collect logs and push them over to where they were sitting. Lilly began to help Isadora push the logs. Together, they began to pile them up until they had made a small shack.

“We need to make sure it’s stabilized, we need to tie the logs together with vine,” said Isadora. She began to collect vines. Lilly helped.

They tied the vines together to make them stronger and then used them to tie the logs. Lilly and Isadora looked at their creation.

“Pretty good,” said Isadora to Lilly.

“Now let’s find food,” said Lilly, and she began to fly and search the area for fruits. Lilly came back with a stack of coconuts, apples, and mangoes. They began to eat and dump the rest into their small shack. They collected pine needles to make beds. Days passed and their lives were well.

“I don’t care what happened to Mirembe or anyone else, but I think we should stay here,” said Isadora. And they did.

One day, Lilly was sitting outside the shack, sewing together animal furs to make clothes, when an old man approached her. The man was wearing a black cape and walking with a cane. The man approached her holding a knife. Lily screamed and shut her eyes, suddenly she started spinning. Around her she saw flashes of Liam screaming or when they were finding one of the goblets. The memories flashed as she spun. Then everything went black. She was still screaming.

She opened her eyes. She sat up in bed. She was in bed in her bedroom. Isadora was sleeping in her bed on the other side of the room like she normally was. She looked at the clock. It was two in the morning.

“Liam! Liam!” was the only thing Lilly could think of.

She jumped out of bed. Then she realized she was still in her nightdress, the one that she had back at home. She ran across the hall to Liam’s room and opened the door silently.

Liam was sleeping in his bed breathing normally. Then Lilly realized something.

It was a dream, all a wonderful, adventurous dream.

THE END

W.P.A. Boot Camp

Ah, another day waking up in my igloo. For some reason my clan hasn’t gone full tech, but it’s kinda nice without a screen every five inches.

“Paws!” That’s my dad calling me for a hunting mission.

Oh well, I think… better grab my spear.

A few hours later, I’m dragging a ton of fish to my clan. My dad will be so proud!

Wait a minute, what’s that smell…? Smoke, fire! My clan! The fish can wait. As I clamber over the hill, the smell of fire increases, and, as I look down on my clan, I see cats setting fire to everything and killing any arctic fox they see. That’s when my brain goes into shock and I faint. It’s like I’m dreaming but I can still hear things around me.

“An arctic fox,” says a voice, “He’s the last one,” says another. “Let’s bring him in.”

I wake up in a hospital bed with my head throbbing, and as hold my head I feel something strange behind my ear. Suddenly, a voice says, “I wouldn’t do that if I were you.” When I look up I see a grey and black cat.

The next thing I know, I have the cat in a headlock. “What have you done to my family!” I scream at the top of my lungs.

“I don’t know,” says the cat. All of a sudden, his suit lights up with green electricity and I fly back. “And I’ll have you know that not all cats are bad, and my name is Scout,” he says. “And, the thing behind your ear –– it’s the one thing keeping you from going bonkers. Anyway, I’ll see you in the training room.”

“Wait, what?” I call after Scout, but he does not answer.

I eventually find my way to the training room. There is a polar bear, another cat, Scout, and an owl. I look up and there are three owls in a window. The polar bear is the only other animal that looks as confused as I do. I am about to walk up to him, but then Scout sees me and signals to the owls to start the training. That’s when I notice that all the other animals have similar devices to the one behind my ear, but they are all different colors.

Weird, I think. I don’t think it matters, but hey, you never know. That’s when training begins, and a voice on the loudspeakers says, “Press your Winged Paw.”

“Wait, what?” I say for the second time today.

“The thing behind your ear,” explained Scout. His Winged Paw is in his chest, and it formed the green chestplate like the one he had in the hospital room.

So, I press mine, and a visor goes over my right eye and a blue tube goes down my back, the latter forming into a backpack of sorts. Then, two tubes of blue energy go down my arms and form bracelets, each emitting two prongs of electricity. That’s when I notice that everyone’s suit is different. Full body armor with white plasma tipped parts for the owl. Chestplate and helmet with pink plasma tipped swords and pistols with pink plasma bullets for the other cat. Chestplate filled with green electricity and nanobots that can form into katanas and plasma rifle for Scout. A visor that completely covers his eyes and an orange electricity chestplate with earthquake gloves for the polar bear.

If this is a team against the cats, then defeating them will be easy, I think.

Soon, I learn that the other cat’s name is Gothy, the polar bear’s name is Polar, and the owl’s name is Snowy. Scout explains what’s going on to Polar and me (we are apparently the new guys).

“This organization is called the Winged Paw Alliance, and was formed to defend against the Cat Empire. The thing behind your ear was made by Snowy the owl, our technician and hacker. Gothy is our assassin, Paws is our demolition expert, Polar is our tank, and I’m your comman––”

“Wait, wait… what? Demolition expert?” I stammer.

“Yes,” responds Scout, “and your backpack is full of explosives.”

I pull one out and chuck it, and Gothy nimbly does a front flip and catches it. “Those are sticky bombs, not grenades,” says Snowy.

“Sweet, better to stick to my enemies,” I respond.

“I like this kid,” says Gothy through her helmet, which has roboticized her voice

“Gah, I give up,” responds Snowy.

“Stop messing around, guys! We have a lot to cover –– keep in mind that we are still outnumbered by a thousand to one. So, let’s get started,” says Scout,

“Wait, what?” responds Polar, “You’re sending us on what’s basically a suicide mission and on something I didn’t even sign up for!”

“But, Polar, we need you!” responds Scout.

“Yeah, Polar –– I too was brought here against my will, but these guys are fighting for what’s right,” I say, agreeing with Scout.

”I don’t care!” screams Polar. “I didn’t sign up for this war, so I don’t intend on fighting in it!” before storming off. I try to comfort him, but Scout holds me back and slowly shakes his head. I look back at him but he’s out of sight.

I’m starting to get used to this new gear, even if it’s taken two days… But hey, that’s what happens when you’ve lived in a no-tech environment for your entire life! It helps to incorporate my clan’s form of martial arts because it gets the moves flowing together. But, I miss Polar. I know I wasn’t really friends with him, but it feels weird without the giant white furry mass in the room.

I am practicing a backflip and electricity strategies to evade shots when Scout finally breaks it to me: “Um, Paws?” Scout asks, his voice wavering.

“Yes?” I respond.

“Well, you know that in your clan, there were no survivors?”

“I already put that through my head,” I say.

“That was the last arctic fox clan,” he tells me, and I look at him, surprised. He continues, “You’re the last arctic fox in the world, Paws.”

“No, it can’t be true!” I yell.

“Paws…” he says, trying to comfort me.

“I need someti–time alone… “ I mutter.

I reflect upon my fate in my room. I want to avenge my clan, but then I remember that it’s much bigger than that: my clan is gone and there’s nothing I can do. But, here, I’ve made new friends. I can’t sit here forever wishing my family were alive; I have to look at what I have now. I know that revenge won’t bring my family back. Revenge won’t bring my clan back. Revenge won’t bring any arctic foxes back. But, I will fight in this war, and not for the sake of revenge –– I will fight for the sake of all the animals that will die if don’t fight in this war.

“Cat Empire?” I say to myself. “Hit me with your best shot.”

To be continued…

Last Resort: Antarctica

Chapter 1: How This Day Works

There I was. On the ice raft with Uncle Lee, Aunt Monica, and Jackie and Will, (my cousins). My parents died when I was still an egg. Soon afterward, my aunt and uncle came and saved me before I got too cold and died. Yeah, that’s my life. I never met my parents and never hoped to see them soon. I was shy but full of courage. So, back to  my “family” and me.

The hot day was making my family boil up. They bathed by the shore, flipping and twisting in the icy water, but not me. I did not like to swim. I stood in the hot air, waiting and watching what was around me. All the other penguins were having fun and playing in the water while bathing.

I have never really been like all of the other penguins my age. I never seem to be satisfied with what I do. But I really like that about myself. I think if my parents were alive they would be proud to call me their penguin. My name is Mia Ottiline (but you can call me Otti or Mia for short) and I live in Antarctica. I don’t have much of a family, as I mentioned, but I do have a best friend and his name is Kevin. We have been friends since we were eggs, or at least that’s what his parents have always told me. We are inseparable. He doesn’t mind that I don’t like to swim because he doesn’t like to swim either.

However, one day Kevin and I wanted to take a dip in the water, but we knew if the other penguins saw us they would make a scene. It was Kevin’s idea to swim at night. Kevin has always been the bold one. He even looks different from the rest of us. He’s got polka dots on his white tummy, which he says are for good luck. And it has to be true, because he’s the smartest penguin in our grade. One day, when my instructor told me that I got a question wrong, I fumed inside. On the outside, however, I looked cheerful and happy. Kevin quietly turned to me and explained the answer and why it was so. I wrote it down.

Back to that life-changing day. I still felt hot so I was running back to the fish hunter lake when I heard a sound like a dying penguin. I was terrified, so I ran to the frozen river bank. But then I realized it wasn’t fair. I could never run away from my family, who had done so much for me. So I turned around and felt my mind boggle. A big structure was steaming in the water. Animals were standing on top holding big chunks of black ice, and surprisingly they were all the same size. Little pellet-like objects were being released out of them, striking the penguins. Honestly, it seemed kind of stupid. I ran back to my clan to see a sight I never could have imagined that I would see. Penguins, even the bravest of them, were scurrying all around. Did they know something I didn’t? Then I saw it. The blood as red as, well… blood. My heart was pounding. There were seals, sharks or even, wait — that was Kevin.

Chapter: 2 The Last

I was surprised. I never knew Kevin to kill a seal. Honestly, at first I thought the blood was his own. Even if it was a baby, that still was an accomplishment. That would make a good dinner for the clan. But then they ran away. The blood was spreading like water on the hard frozen ice. Some dove into the water while some were heading toward me. I felt a little scared. The animals started moving off the structure. They were jumping off of it, some of them not even surfacing. I was scared because some of the penguins were dropping dead. I mean, really scared. Aunt Monica was down and Will was too. There they were, over half of my family, my inspiration, gone. I had to waddle. Cliffs and cliffs. I was so confused until then… it hit me. I remember now. A twig sketch in class clearly  described this situation. Men. Yes that’s what they’re called. On, oh, a boat. With — wait — guns. The killers of us. They wanted us. They were willing to… Ahhh. That was a horrible sound. I turned around to the boat. It crashed into the ice raft, killing all of the water bound penguins. There are hardly  any left between the boat crash and and the shooting, but I know some have escaped. I also remember from the lesson where to go. The ugly penguin.

Chapter 3: Memories

Uncle Lee found me first. I was only two weeks old. He ran up to my nest. He is my mom’s brother. He wrapped his strong, loose wing around me. The icy wind was blowing against my bumpy shell and his slick wet fins. He just held me and gave me a sense of warmth. “Please don’t worry. We’ll take care of you. I’ll bring you back to your big cousin Jackie.”

The night grew dark, and I hatched too early. My body felt cooler than being frozen in ice. I looked up at my uncle. He ran me to the water and try to show me how to swim. Aunt Monica was back making a nest, preparing for Will. After my swimming lesson, he tried to throw me in the water. I was too small to refuse, so I gave in. I never came back up until my uncle dove in and saved me. He knew I wasn’t ready but he didn’t know I had no interest at all.

In a way, I was shunned by my community. They blamed my parents’ deaths on me. They said my parents never wanted children and they abandoned me for that reason. I was the unwanted child of one of the most important people in the community. When I was one, my cousin Will hatched. His body was big and powerful, yet his head was small and simple. He was too different from me. As soon as his father threw him in the water, his dives were so elegant, yet powerful. He went on to become the most well known adolescent swimmer in all of the ice raft.

Jackie is somewhat like me. She isn’t the most powerful swimmer in the flock. But she has a hook for the boys. That’s why she’s allowed to be the pretty one on the sideline. Uncle Lee said she must get married soon, the day before the attack, for she’s going to be nearly eighteen. But now, that can never happen, at least not now.

Now me. Who was I? Who am I? I’m the orphan penguin that no one would ever dare to talk to. No one will tell me about my cadaverous parents whom I never met. I can only assume that they died hunting, but how would I know if no one would ever tell me? Legend has it that they disappeared like melting ice. Wow, that’s helpful. Sorry, sometimes I lose my temper. Well, years later, here I am.

Chapter 4: Making Memories

Here I am, by the frozen river bank. I dive into the deep line and through the hole to the safety under the frozen ice. I scurry around some more to find my part of the den until I reach it — a map I drew of the ice raft when I was seven, on my journey with Will and Uncle Lee when we went on an exploration of the entire thing. That’s one thing I like about the boys in my family. They don’t mind taking me on all of their boyish trips. I know my way around but it can still be very dangerous. Suddenly, I hear men’s voices.

“Hey, boys. Look at this. Looks some little ice friend of ours calls this miniature canyon home. It ain’t nothing like the Grand Canyon back at home, is it boys? Why, just look at that little hole. Looks penguin-sized, don’ it? Any of you fit through there? Hey Luke. You’re slim, ain’t ya?”

“Sir, I’m only your personal servant. I don’t have the skill to do any of the dirty work. I’m only fourteen.”

My heart is pounding so loudly, I am surprised that they can’t hear me through the ice.

“Get down there, boy. It’s an order.”

So then I hear him jump into the “canyon” with a thump. He reaches inside the hole. I place myself against the wall. I know I am never going to make it to the ugly penguin. I try to burrow myself into a hole, but the ice is rock solid. This is the end.

“Nothing in here, boss.”

“How do you know when you wiggle your finger around like a little princess? Now, tell me.”

“Sorry sir. I’ll go in.”

I think that I am safe. But of course I’m not. He comes in feet first, which I guess is better. Next his body. Then his arms. Then his head. I am peeking around the corner from my room. He crawls around. Then he sees the tiny opening to my room that he could never possibly fit through. He turns his head into the hole and notices me. I just close my eyes and wait for the blow.

“Awww. I can’t kill you, little thing. Wait ten minutes after I leave to go.”

I felt like crying. This young boy just saved my life! He crawls out and yelled:

“Nothing, Boss, and that’s final.”

“If you say so. Let’s go.”

I hear their feet clamber away. I look at the map one last time to create the perfect mental picture. I’m not good at drawing so here’s what it looked like:

Shore=flat plains=thin ice=hills=the climb

I packed some food and began.

Chapter 5: Journey

I’m on the flat plains close to the thin ice but close to the edge/wall of the ice raft. I feel the earth turning colder and colder on me. The sun’s setting and the worlds in the sky come out. I have to find shelter. My back is aching. I am freezing. This bright sunny day has turned into a harsh unforgiving night. I know I have to still believe in myself and keep going. I have a quick feeling overcome me that I know I am going to be the hero. I am going to win this time. All my life I have lost and lost. I can’t bear to fail again.

As soon as I find some cave in the wall, I’ll eat and go to sleep. That’s what I think, at least. There’s a giant hole in the wall that I am approaching. When I reach it, Jackie and Kevin are in there talking!

“You guys! I missed you! Thank you for making it out alive!”

And before they can answer I run up to them and hug them. I don’t remember much after that, but that sure was a good night.

Chapter 6: Finally

Can I get things straight here? Because I don’t think I’ve been very clear on the ugly penguin. He’s a penguin. And a very ugly one. He smells like old fish and his hair bristles are all knotted. He doesn’t believe in royalty or fineries. Everyone thinks that he’s the wisest penguin of all time, but of course he doesn’t believe that. He’ll help you in any situation and tell you what to do. I feel amazed to talk about him now and I feel a sense of confidence.

I really feel that way when I wake up this morning on top of the ice raft with the wind blowing on my face. Jackie is to my left and Kevin is to my right, and in front of me, with his subtle grin, is the ugly penguin, and he speaks to me.

“Hello, my precious daughter.”

El Fin

Lavanasium

Chapter 1

Once upon a time there was a planet called Lavanasium. It was a horrible place, and it only had volcanoes. Everything was sad. There was no light anywhere. No kids were playing. It wasn’t a nice planet. Everyone in this planet wanted to do something to make this change but they didn’t know how. In this planet there was a little house made of metal. In that house there lived a Mom named Eliza, a Dad named Mark, and a really special girl named Elizabeth.

It was a peaceful dark night as usual. Eliza was playing checkers with Mark. Elizabeth was reading a book. Then, all of a sudden, a green weirdo with a cane, green eyes, no hair, and a cape just came barging in without any invitation.

He said, “I am the greatest villain of all time. If you don’t obey me you will have to fear me for the rest of your life. No matter how small I am, I can do big things,” said the green weirdo.

Elizabeth said, “Are you sure?!”

“Definitely sure,” the green weirdo said.

Then when the green weirdo didn’t even notice Eliza and Mark were standing and doing this really weird spell. It sounded like they were speaking Chinese. They had to twirl stuff with their arms together. This spell turned the green weirdo into a little green man about 5 centimeters tall.

Everyone was huddling around him and he said, “what are you, giants?”

The whole family just said, “actually, you shrunk.”

The green weirdo said, “you shrunk me?”

“Of Course. After you said that you you were evil, we had a feeling that you were here to kill us.” The family replied.

“I wasn’t going to kill you, but now I am,” the green weirdo said.

“Are you sure that you can kill us when you are that size?” The whole family asked.

“Of course I can. Muahaha! But, you will see that I will get revenge very soon! Even still today!” the green weirdo said.

My Mom and Dad were very scared. They said that we will have to be very alerted just in case he did come back. I was scared. Why did my parents even do the spell? He wasn’t even going to kill us. But, now he is because of that spell, that spell that ruined everything.

We were all calm until the door opened. We didn’t see who it was. It just opened. My whole family paused, then I looked back at my parents. They weren’t there just when I saw him, that green weirdo. That’s when everything changed. He had my Mom and Dad trapped in his car. He stayed with me and talked and talked.

I didn’t even pay attention until I heard the word volcano.

That’s when I said, “Wait what did you just say?”

Then he said, “You weren’t listening, were you.”

“No I wasn’t,” I said.

“Okay. I will tell you again. As I was saying, my minions are with your parents in my car bringing them to the biggest volcano in the entire world. It is going to explode in approximately ten days.” The green weirdo said.

“Why would you do this to my parents what did they ever do to you?” I said.

“Well, they did turn me into this little man. I can never turn back to normal. So, I am going to be a green little 5 centimeter guy forever,” he said.

“That’s only because you said that no matter how little you are, you can always do big things.” I said.

 Chapter 2

The green weirdo left. Now, what am I going to do, I thought, I’ve got to get my parents back, but I don’t know how. I don’t even know where the biggest volcano was and which one was about to explode.

I saw the car driving away with my parents and the green minions waved back at me while laughing. I felt frightened and hopeless.

Out of desperation, I ran after my parents hoping that the car would stop. My mind was focused and I ran so hard, I broke a sweat. Suddenly, the car stopped. I was confused and worried that the minions saw me running and planned to hop out of the car to hurt me. In the car, much to my disbelief, I heard the minions confused also.

I said, “What just happened, some sort of magic?”

Then, my parents hopped out of the car and look surprised.

They said, “We never thought it was true, Elizabeth! But, we have passed our powers onto you!”

I said, “I can’t believe it, I actually have powers! My wish came true!”

My parents replied, “You have telekinesis, honey!”

I was confused and asked, “What’s telekinesis?”

“It’s the power that if you concentrate, and you think about moving things, they move wherever you want them to. Basically, what you just did,” they said.

Suddenly, the minions put a spell on my parents that made them do whatever they wanted. The minions made them get back in the car.

I suddenly felt scared and nervous of the journey ahead. I suddenly knew what I had to do.

Chapter 3

I chased after the car. I realized I was running super fast, faster than I’d ever gone before. I was running so fast that I didn’t notice a tree right in front of me, so ran right through it. I got goosebumps and felt a little funny. I had no idea what just happened. I stopped in my tracks and tried walking into the tree again. I had another power, but I didn’t quite know how to explain it.

Well, after the morning I had, anything was possible. It was clear to me now that I had super speed and invisibility powers. I knew that I could use my invisibility powers AND my super speed powers to save Mom and Dad. I felt empowered with these new discoveries.

I didn’t know exactly where this volcano was, so I followed the car wherever it went. I realized I was surrounded by a lot of trees on an isolated highway. I kept running. Suddenly I saw a small shape that looked like a volcano. We were getting close! I heard the volcano bubbling. I kept on running. Each step of the way brought me closer and closer. I saw smoke coming out of the volcano because of the heat of the lava. I was getting scared and just wanted to see my parents and know that they were okay.

The volcano was very close, and there was only one bridge to cross before we got there. But, there was one thing I was scared of, just one thing: heights. I remembered all the good times we had together and I was not going to let them down because I was scared of crossing a bridge. So, I powered through my big fear and walked across the bridge even though I was afraid.

Once we got to the volcano, the minions found a secret entrance. They did not know that I had invisibility powers to walk through solid objects, so I slipped in right with them. My parents were tied up with rope and had duct tape on their mouths. Suddenly, I saw a button. A red button. I wondered what that button did.

Then, I heard the minions talking about the button. “If you press the button, the whole world will change and there will be no more volcanoes and everything will be beautiful. There will be day and night again. We can’t let that happen. Thankfully, there is a code that needs to be entered in order to press the button which nobody knows: 5223,” the minions said.

After I heard that, I had a tinkle in my nose. And all of a sudden, I sneezed and everything went quiet.

Chapter 4

“What was that? Who’s there? Come out at once!” said one of the minions.

I didn’t say anything. I had goose bumps. This was impossible. I had to show myself. I realized that my parents didn’t know that I had these powers. But, they did know that I sneezed, so they they knew that I had the power to become invisible.

Well, I knew that I had to show myself. When I did, everyone gasped. Thankfully, the green weirdo wasn’t here.

The minions said, “He is not here yet, but he will be here when he finds out that you are here and want to save your parents.”

I begged, “Please don’t tell him!”

But it was too late. They had already called him.

He came and said, “I knew you would come. There is one thing that is very important in this cave that button! If you press it, there will be no more volcanoes. But, you don’t know the code to open the lid. So, ha!”

I headed to the red button while he was he was saying this. I entered the passcode and he didn’t even notice because his eyes were closed.

I put the passcode in, opened the lid, and pressed the button. I closed my eyes because I was scared of what was going to happen. Then, I opened my eyes. The Green Weirdo suddenly disappeared. Nobody knew where he was. There were no more volcanoes. We were standing on grass and it was daytime. There was light, there was happiness, and it was all beautiful.

I went directly to my parents and untied them and took the duck tape off of there mouths. We hugged each other for 30 seconds.. We went back home and everyone was playing and having fun in their front yards. It was a great sight to see after years of misery.

Gummy Wars

Chapter 1

Plot

Once upon a time, in a very magical universe, a war was started in Gummy World.  It was between the Gummy Worm Empire and Gummy Bear Country. But, let me tell you why. The Gummy Worm Empire was trying to take over the Whole Gummy Universe, because all they wanted was power. On the other hand Gummy Bear Country was fighting for the freedom of the rest of the  Gummy Kind! The Gummy Worms were fighting with bows and arrows. They would be kept in an arrow bag made out of twizzlers. The arrows were made out of pocky and sharpened chocolate chips. The Gummy Bears’ weapons were also bows, arrows, and swords. The swords were made out of pocky with a sharpened chocolate chip on top. But both of them had edible silver armor and marshmallow shields.

In the middle of the fighting was a young soldier named Bear Han Solo, but everybody called him Solo; which was kind of ironic because he was single. His job was to protect the king and his daughter’s chariot. As he was fighting, he dodged an arrow. Then he saw one flying through the sky. He jumped up and tried to grab it, but his friend and fellow soldier, Henry, knocked him over because he was about to be killed by another one.

Suddenly, they heard a shrill scream and turned around. It was from the gummy bear princess, Rosetta. They turned around and looked. Her father was the one who took that arrow to the neck. He was dead! Dun dun duuuun!

Solo ran to save the princess from a gummy worm soldier, but boom! He was clonked in the head by a marshmallow axe.

Ten hours later, he woke up in the gummy bear infirmary.

“Uuuuuh,” he said and looked up. He saw Henry there.

Henry said, “Wow. You took a big clunk with that marshmallow axe.”

Then, Solo remembered everything that had happened.

“But the princess! Where’s the princess?” he yelled.

“Ssssh,” said Henry. “You’re going to wake the other patients. She got captured by the Gummy Worms! We have a week to surrender, otherwise it’s off with her head!”

The next day, Solo was already better. He and Henry had just gotten a cup of hot cocoa and started brainstorming ideas for battle.

“How about we use marshmallow axes too?” said Henry. Then, Solo had an idea. And Henry thought it was a good one, too. Five minutes later, they were at LeShaun Bearflez’s makeup and hair salon. He was the best hair and makeup artist in the country! When LeShaun saw Solo, he said, “Han Solo! Han Solo! Good to see you! Good to see you! What can I do for you today?”

“I need you to disguise me as a gummy worm,” Solo responded.

At first, LeShaun was very confused. And then he got it. He ran toward a closet, and grabbed a gummy worm suit and some mold to make a face mask. Two hours later, Solo looked exactly like a gummy worm soldier. And if you saw him, you would think so too. Now he was ready for battle, in disguise.

Chapter 2

The Plan

Solo and Henry went to Henry’s place for some tomato soup and to devise a plan. They wrote down the steps on a sticky note. It looked like this:

To-Do List

  1. Tell General Bearkins our plan
  2. Make a fake ID so the Gummy Worms think Solo’s on their side
  3. Get a position as a Guard for the Gummy worm castle
  4. Save princess Rosetta and get out of the castle without being seen
  5. Kidnap the Gummy Worm Queen Emily

“Wait, we’re going to kidnap the queen?” Solo said, after reading the list.

“Yes,” said Henry, “She is pregnant with the heir to the throne. If we can kidnap her for a week, we win the war!”

“Maybe,” said Solo, “But first, let’s do the top four, and then we’ll consider that”

Chapter 3

Completion

Solo and Henry hurried to the battlefield to complete the first step: tell General Bearkins their plan.

“General Bearkins! General Bearkins!” Henry hollered. General Bearkins turned around and grabbed his weapons.

“What are you doing here, worm soldier?” he said, when he saw Solo. Solo took of his masked and showed General Bearkins that he was really himself. General Bearkins was very confused.

“Why are you dressed as a gummy worm?” he asked.

“That’s exactly what we’re here to tell you!” said Henry. After explaining their plan to General Bearkins, they got his consent, with a bit of advice.

“Your plan is brilliant, I have to admit,” said General Bearkins, “But there is one minor issue. They have chips in the IDs, and I’m pretty sure you don’t know how to make them. But I know a guy. All I need is a picture of Solo in his suit with the mask on, and you’ll have your new ID in an hour or less!”

“Well, now we can cross of the first two items off the list!” said Henry. “Now, we just have to wait until we get the ID. But in the meantime, let’s go and get you some worm weapons.”

15 minutes later, Henry and Solo were at Gilmore Blacksmith’s Metal Shop.

“Hey, look over here!” Said Henry, “I found those Twizzler arrow bags they use!”

“Great,” said Solo as he reached into his pocket for some Jelly Beans. Here, Jelly Beans are used as currency. He pulled out five jelly beans.

“This will do it!” said Solo.

After they paid (there was a very long line), they went back to the battlefield and found General Bearkins with the ID.

“Here you go Solo,” he said, “You’re all set!”

“Great!” said Solo, “Now, I’m off to find the Worm General Wormkhan.”

Chapter 4

Mischief

As Solo approached the worm side of the battlefield, a security worm came up to him.

“Hey you!” said the worm, “I need to see some ID”.

“Uh oh!” thought Solo as he slowly pulled out his “ID”. And as the security guard scanned he prayed that it would work. Beep. It had worked!

“Yes!” Thought Solo. “Wormtail?” Said the security guard. Solo looked at the “ID” card, apparently his name was “Gabriel Wormtail.” And if you saw Solo’s face you would be laughing your head off! “General Wormkhan will give you a position he’s near the castle, on the right”. Said the security guard.

Once Gabriel…..I mean…… Solo got to the castle, he saw the dungeon. Inside there was a tiny cell with an even smaller window, he could make out a very tiny figure. He started to walk closer, but then he thought “don’t want to act suspicious, so I’ll check it out later”.

Solo turned around, looking for General Wormkhan. Then he saw him, he was a tall worm with big muscles, an oval-ish face, and his red skin was a pattern of red with black strips. Solo had to admit in his mind he was a little scared of the General.

When Wormkhan saw Solo he yelled, “Hey you come over here for roll call”. Solo quickly ran over to Wormkhan, now he was doomed. Solo sat in a seat next to a worm named Wormer. He looked a bit more friendly than Wormkhan. While Wormkhan call attendance Solo prayed the Wormkhan wouldn’t break his back.

Then he heard Wormkhan say, ”We have a new recruit today and his name is Wormtail.” Solo couldn’t believe it! He was on the list!

“Now,” said the General, ”Wormtool, one of the the guards for the castle, has been injured and I’m giving you his position he said and turned to Solo.

What luck! thought Solo, Now I can cross that of the list.

 In the middle of the night Solo snuck out of the soldiers quarters, and towards the tiny cell he saw the day before. He knocked on the door, and inside was Princess Rosetta. She was practicing karate and making some very loud sounds, but she heard the knock.

“Who is it?” she asked.

“It’s a Gummy Bear soldier, I’m here to rescue you” Said Solo.

“Do you have a key?” She asked.

“No” He said.

“Then I’ll kick the door down,” She said, “Step back.”

Solo stepped back. Then five seconds later, there was a big bang! And the door fell. Solo stepped in and saw the princess. Then, a deafening alarm started going off. She said, “Wait, you’re not a gummy bear! You’re a gummy worm!”

Solo took off his mask. “I’m in disguise!” he said. He punched the window open and they jumped out. They started racing down to the white chocolate river and jumped on Twizzler logs. By dawn, they made it all the way to the gummy bear side of the battlefield, but there were worm soldiers chasing them. He took the princess to her palace, and told the guards to make sure she was safe. Then, he took off his worm suit and face mask, got into his battlefield clothes, and started fighting.

“Hey, where’s that guy, Wormtail?” said Wormkhan, “Gabriel Wormtail? Did he run away?” He looked around. “Wait, where’s the princess? Where’s the princess? Does Gabriel have something to do with that? Go see if the princess is back on her side!” Then, the worms started charging for battle, and so did the gummy bears. The battle lasted five hours. And during the fighting, Henry found Solo and the two of them raced to their base.

Henry said to Solo, “Did you rescue the princess?”

“Yes,” said Solo. “And now we have to go capture the pregnant queen of the worms!”

Chapter 5

Details

“Now you listen to me!” Said Henry. “Let’s devise a plan at my place with some tomato sandwiches.”  

Back at Henry’s place Solo and Henry decided that Solo would sneak through the Licorice Forest back to the worm base and into the soldiers quarters.

“Wait, what if they ask where I’ve been, what do I say?!?” said Solo nervously.

“Good point,” Said Henry. “How about, ‘I had to go back home because my mother was in the hospital?’”

“That could work,” said Solo.

“Then you’re off! Go! We need to win the war!!!!” Said Henry.

Solo quickly hurried out, not because of what Henry said, he was always intense like that. Solo didn’t feel well. He felt weird inside and kept remembering the princess. “How beautiful she is,” he thought. “And she knows karate.”

Now this is one of my favorite parts, because as the narrator, I don’t get to do much but now I get to sing a song. Yay! And it goes like this: Solo is love sick, Solo is love sick and he knows and he know it. He’s in love with the princess, in love with the Sorry, I’m getting a little off topic. Anyway, back to the story.

Now, Solo was in the Licorice Forest and yes, the trees are made out of Licorice.

“The Licorice is shiny, like her beautiful eyes… Oh no! It’s happening!” Solo kept thinking the same things, and now he knew for sure. He was in love with the princess, Rosetta.

Noooooo!!!!!!!!!!”

Back at the Gummy Bear castle, Rosetta was in her room still going over everything that had happened to her, then she remembered Solo.

“I’ve got to thank him, for rescuing me,” she thought, “I wouldn’t have been able to break that window without edible silver armor.”

Chapter 6

Capture

“Wow, the castle is so grand, like Rosetta. Oh my god, would my mind stop doing that?!” Solo thought, when he finally made it to the castle. Solo came in through the back of the servant’s quarter. There, he found Wormkhan.

“Wormtail, where have you been?” said Wormkhan, in a booming voice.

“I…I…I was at the hospital because my…. my mother was in the hospital and I had to be there,” said Solo nervously.

“Oh,” said Wormkhan in a soft voice. “Uh… well, now is your time for duty. I am uh… I’m going to uh… use the restroom for a minute.”

After Wormkhan walked away, Solo was a bit confused why Wormkhan was being so sensitive. Solo went back to his place and looked at the cell and then he asked another soldier named Wormtool

“Where did the princess go?” Solo asked, though he really knew the answer.

“She escaped with a meddlesome gummy bear. Ugh, too bad the security cameras didn’t catch it.”

“The security cameras!” Solo thought, “I have to destroy the footage!” He ran to the technology room and found the footage. Nobody was there, so he rewinded it back, erased all of it, and ran back to the servant’s quarter. Someone had left a sock there, and he tripped on it.

“Oof!” he said, and his mask fell off and spun across the floor. He looked up to find Wormkhan.

“Aaaaaaaah!” screamed Solo, but in his mind he was thinking of running away. So he ran and tripped on another person’s sock.

“Why are people so messy?” he thought, as he accidentally knocked down a photograph of Wormkhan’s mother. Solo stopped and hid behind a corner. He saw Wormkhan’s mouth drop open, and he did something very unexpected. Wormkhan started crying. Everybody was confused why he was crying and he came up.

“Mother! Sally!” Wormkhan wailed. Everybody was confused and stunned, but it only took Solo a few seconds to realize the opportunity he had. Since there were no guards in the upper castle, he ran up and found the queen in her bedroom. It was true: she was pregnant. He snuck up behind and threw a piece of cotton candy over her mouth and tied it. Then, he picked her up and started running down the stairs. Still, nobody realized what he was doing! He started running through the Licorice Forest.

Wormkhan had recovered from his breakdown, and remembered Solo.

“There’s a gummy bear in the castle! Everybody search the castle!” he screamed

Meanwhile, Solo was running through the licorice forest. He was about to make it to the bear side.

“Huh.. huh….. Huh…” he huffed. He didn’t want to be rude or anything, but the queen was heavy. Then, he realized the queen was sweating.

“Uh oh,” he thought. “She’s going into labor!”

“Infirmary infirmary! I captured the queen, but she’s going into labor!” Solo yelled when he got back to the Gummy Bear side. Everybody was confused at first, and then five minutes later they had come with a rolling bed, put her on it, and rolled her into the operating room.

Two hours later, he was allowed to come in. The baby was a boy. His eyes were blue, but the rest of his body was rainbow.

“I’m very happy for you, but you are still our prisoners,” Solo said, “We will lead you into your room now. We will take care of the baby, but you must go into your room now for some safety tests.” She nodded and was lead into the room.

“Solo, I have a message from the princess,” said a palace servant, “She wants you to come see her.”

Chapter 7

Heart-Break

Twenty minutes later, Solo was at the Gummy Bear palace with the Gummy Bear servant. He was making his way to Princess Rosetta’s bedroom. The servant knocked on the door.

“Princess Rosetta, Solo is here to see you,” said the servant.

“Come in!” replied the princess. Solo was a bit nervous going into the princess’s bedroom. When he came in, she told Solo to sit. He tried to sit down on a chair, but he slipped and fell on the floor. The princess was in shock, and the servant was trying his hardest not to laugh.

“Pardon me for my clumsiness,” said Solo. Then, he made sure he actually sat down on the chair.

“Thank you for rescuing me,” said the princess, “Now you can have anything you want in Gummy Bear Country, under the price of 5,000 jelly beans”

“Five thousand jelly beans!” thought Solo, “Wow, that’s a lot!” The servant’s mouth had dropped open with shock.

“I don’t want money,” said Solo, “All I want is you! Ever since I met you, I have loved you.” Now it was the princess’s turn for her mouth to drop open.

“I… I…” she hesitated, “I’ve already fallen in love with someone. You may not have me, but you can have the 5,000 jelly beans.” She turned to the servant.

“Please escort this soldier out of the castle.” Solo was heartbroken and defeated as he walked home. When he got home, he put on his favorite movie, Gummybusters, and ate little tomato candies. Then, he noticed the time. He had to go back to the battlefield and fight. As he was walking, he saw a young maiden named Emma-Louise. She was beautiful, he had to admit, and she turned around and saw him.

“Hey I know you,” she said, “You’re the one who saved the princess and kidnapped the Gummy Worm  queen! You’ve done a lot for the country. On behalf of all of us, thank you!”

“I know this is a little bit weird, but would you like to go out tonight?” asked Solo.

“Sure,” said Emma-Louise, “I would like that!”

Chapter 8

Celebration

Later, as Solo was fighting, he realized that he wasn’t really in love with the princess. He was just shocked that he actually saved someone. In all the old Gummy fairy tales, once you save someone you fall in love with them. He was just going off of that. He realized that he actually liked Emma-Louise. Then, he saw a huge troop of gummy worms charging onto the battlefield.

“Uh oh!” said Solo. Then, Henry had an idea.

“Hey! I know a guy who makes Pop Rock Bombs!” said Henry, “Why don’t we get some?” They rushed over Gillmore Blacksmith’s metal shop, and found him there. They split the cost, and started running through the Licorice Forest. They snuck into the Worm Castle, and went into their storage units. Solo knew his way around. Then, they placed the Pop Rock Bombs there, and Solo closed the door and ran. boom! They started running back to the Licorice Forest. There was a big bang, and half of the castle was blown up.

“YES!” they screamed in unison, high fived, and ran back to the Gummy Bear side. The Gummy Worms had called a pause, and were holding a group meeting in the remaining half of their castle. The Gummy Bears took the opportunity to hold a meeting too.

“Wow,” said General Bearkins, “I wonder who blew up the castle?”

“We did!” said Henry, with his arm over Solo’s shoulder. “We blew it up!” Then, General Wormkhan blew a whistle, and they went back to their positions. One of the Gummy Worms came in holding a white flag. They had surrendered!

“Now,” said General Wormkhan, “We will surrender if you give us back the queen.”

“Deal!” said Solo, and brought out the queen with her newborn baby in her arms. Wormkhan was so surprised.

“You went into labor?” he asked her.

“Yes!” replied the queen.

Everyone went back to their own side to celebrate. The worms celebrated the baby, and the bears celebrated victory.

“Hooray!” said Solo. Everyone in Gummy Bear Country was flooding the streets, waving the Gummy Bear flag with pride.

“Well,” said Solo, looking out at the streets, “We can call that a huge adventure!”

The End!!!

Heaven’s War: Chapter 1

Lightning cracked. Rain poured, but I could still see the stars. That’s what was important. Nothing bad could happen while I had my stars. I gripped the railing as hard as I could while the boat rocked back and forth. My hair whipped against my face and I struggled to block out the screams and go back to my memories of my best friend:

Marlee laughed. I smiled at my joke. Her light hair bounced behind her back. She was giving me a spa from our yard, something she loved to do to me. I made jokes to her as she plopped and rubbed mud into my hands and legs. We giggled as she tried to put cucumber slices on my closed eyes, but each time they slipped off. She eventually gave up. When I opened my eyes I saw my brother Zander snapping a picture of her.

“Out!” I screamed. He giggled like a pig and scampered off. He had a little crush on Marlee.

We looked at each other. The ends of her lips turned up into a smirk. I chuckled. She cracked up. I joined her. The second we stopped, one of us would smile or giggle or mock snapping a photo, and we’d burst into laughter again.

Back in reality, I held Zander tightly as he heaved everything in his body over the side of the boat. He choked as a massive wave approached. As I began to realize what was coming, my world seemed to move in slow motion. I threw my head back so I could see the purple star and wished with everything in me as the wave engulfed us. My eyes were still open all throughout the boat tipping, I kicked a fish, and reached the surface. I looked for my family. I still just couldn’t set them apart from the other dark, screaming figures. I thought about dying. It reminded me again of Marlee:

“I have a secret.” Marlee burst into my bedroom. She made jazz-hands and then quickly put them down. She jumped once.

“I’m going to visit my cousins on the other side of the country,” she told me. She was grinning ear to ear. She jumped again and fell on her butt. She spread herself out on the floor. “Yay!” She giggled uncontrollably. She kicked her legs in the air.

“No way,” I squealed. “Really?”

She nodded, jumped up and grabbed my hands. We hopped up and down, squealing.

I sat down and hung my head. “But I’ll miss you so much!”

Marlee sat down next to me. “When you miss me, think about this: Wherever you are, we look at the same stars.” She pointed to the sky and chose one particularly big dot.

“When I’m gone, this star will turn purple. That way you will always know we are looking at the same sky.”

“You’re just saying that.” I glared at her.

“You say that like it’s a bad thing!” She said. She ran out of the room, screaming with a sort of excitement I wish I had shared.

A few days later I was lying under my blanket. My pillows were were wet from tears. It had been three days. The star hadn’t turned purple. I still checked every night.

One week later a letter arrived.

The Case Family

Mr. Mira Case, Ms. Lilith Case, Ms. Angeles Case, and Mr. Zander Case

Invitation

Event: Funeral

Location: Mall St. Diana, Ilouw

Time: 11:00 am

Who Died: Mrs. Marlee Kinder

Car crash

I felt tears welling up behind my eyelids, but they never poured. It was almost as I died for a second. The world filled with whipped cream. I could feel myself floating. I could hear Marlee, but not talking, laughing, shouting, or crying. Just her voice. Doing nothing.

Then a sniffle caught my attention. Zander was whimpering. And suddenly, reality seemed all too harsh. That’s when the tears came.

I wandered somewhat aimlessly over to the window. I looked at the sky. I looked next to the sky near the neighbor’s house, a pale, violet star shone bright, blue like Marlee’s eyes, but also purple, just like she’d promised.

The Turtle’s Adventures with Friends

BOOK ONE: A LITTLE TURTLE AND A MONSTER

Once upon a time, there lived a turtle and a monster. I am the turtle, and my name is Laylay. The monster comes every spring and scares our village. It is a huge, navy blue octopus and tries to eat the turtles by scooping us up. When the octopus comes, we hide down in the sand by the water.

It’s spring now, so I am hiding with everybody and our fish friends. We are afraid and shaking. We are all quiet. Today is Tuesday, and we know the monster is coming today.

It’s here right now. When the octopus comes, he tries to find us. He usually can’t, but sometimes he finds one turtle. Then I see it. The octopus is in my friend’s sleeping area. He is trying to get her with his tentacles. My friend is screaming as loud as fireworks.

What shall I do? “Help! Help!” I call out. “The monster has my friend!” I’m running and I wish I were faster.

All of the turtles and fish come. We make a plan to get her back. We are going to sneak right up on the octopus and tie a rope around it. Then we will get my friend back. But I am too scared to go. I stay back while everybody else goes to where the octopus is, one by one. While they are gone, I think about my friend, and the monster attacking her. I wish that the monster wasn’t there. I wish I were braver.

The turtles and fish are gone for ten minutes. When they come back, everyone looks fine, and they have brought my friend back. I feel happy again. I hug my friend.

She says, “Guess what! The monster went away.” My friend smiles.

I say, “Good morning! I’m really happy to see you.”

“You, too,” she says.

We start to play hide-n-go-seek. 

BOOK TWO: A TURTLE RAN AWAY

Once upon a time a little turtle named Fancy lived in a rock house. She wanted to swim across the ocean because one of her other friends did it. One day she woke up early and she went around the sea, but she didn’t get to go all the way because she was too small and the ocean was so large. She saw nothing but the blue water around her and the beige sand. She felt sad and started crying because the other turtles were not with her.

The next day all of the turtles woke up and they knocked on the wooden door of her house made of rocks. No one answered the door. They thought Fancy was asleep so they opened it. They swam in and looked at the bed and Fancy wasn’t there. They thought she ran away so they started looking for her in the coral, but they couldn’t find her. The turtles started to quietly cry. Then they set off to travel around the ocean. They finally found her. Fancy was sitting on the sand not that far away. They hadn’t seen her before because they didn’t look outside of the coral.

“I’m so happy to see you!” Fancy said.

“Us too,” the turtles replied. “Let’s go back!”

Then they all swam back and had a party in the middle of the rock houses. The turtles danced, ate, and started to make a book about the time Fancy ran away.

THE END

The Weird Things

THE MISSING GARDEN

Hi I’m Caden. Remember [it changes everyday] not to ask my [I count time differently] age. I am a good swimmer. In the ocean there is a brick wall. Each brick is a different color. If you touch the wrong brick you will get trapped in a brick [same color] wall. Inside there is no ocean anymore. It is la la lupsy land with mount [the fruit] everzest. I HAVE A MESSY GARDEN [it is in weird places] with beautiful plants and foods people take and eat, and/or sell at day.

Zzz. I woke up, I went outside… my garden was gone! Wwwhaaahhhttt. The garden, not the plants! Somebody stole my garden. I climbed my house [I am good at climbing [grabbing on, not walking] walls] to the roof.

“Who stole my garden?” I asked.

My magic chimney said, “Stinky Fat Fart Guy ate it.”

I was a little afraid that he might eat someone else’s garden.

 THE the the the END eeennnddd. 

DO NOT MISS THE NEXT BOOK: THE MISSING MAGIC CHIMNEY                                                                                                   

BOOK  TWO  #2

THE MISSING MAGIC CHIMNEY

My magic chimney is magic. It is made out of slime and every time something falls inside, it bounces out. The chimney talks and knows who did everything. It knows what whoever did what. So a while ago Stinky Fat Fart Guy ate my garden. I gave him an oven that gives him any food, drinks, or money.

Zzzz. I left bed [I stood up]. I went to the fireplace to talk. Sometimes when I was outside, I looked outside at the chimney, and when I was inside, I looked up to talk. But my magic chimney was gone. Since it was gone I could not ask it. I was unhappy because I was afraid something would disappear that belongs to someone else. Zzzz. I walked outside. A big red  book was sitting on the roof in the chimneys spot.

It had no pages, only the front and back and a note that said, “Find the three pages.”

Zzz. I woke up. Three pages appeared and said:

“Dear Caden,

I took a vacation to the Philippines. I will come back soon. Sorry it came late.

From, the Magic Chimney.”

THE END               

Do not miss the next book, The Missing Pet Turtle, book three.

THE  MISSING PET TURTLE

Do I have a  pet turtle? YES. I bought him perfectly YESTERDAY, which was twenty-four hours ago in my time. I wanted to have something in case the chimney was gone.  He lives in a GIGANTIC TANK.

Zzz. I could not find him. Since he was big, he might be far away from where I am looking. I jumped into the tank and put on a scuba-diving outfit. I swam and he was gone. OH NO! My magic chimney is still in the Philippines. My pet turtle was one of the things I cared about.

Zzz. A medium white envelope was floating in the tank. The letter said, “Dear CADEN, All your strawberries disappeared. From, THE MAGIC CHIMNEY.”

Their was a hole in the word “your.”

Zzz I woke up another  envelope was in the tank. The letter said, “DEAR CADEN, One turtle is in the ocean. From, the Magic Chimney.” There was a hole in the word “turtle.”

Zzz. another envelope was in the tank. The letter said, “DEAR CADEN, THE MERMaids wanted TO EAT BANANAS. FROM, THE MAGIC CHIMNEY.” There was a hole in the word “wanted.” Zzz. another envelope was in the tank. It said, “YOUR STRAWBERRIES WANTED TO SEE ME.” There was a hole in the words “to see me.”

THE  CODE said “MY TURTLE WANTED TO SEE the Magic Chimney.”

The end.

Next book: The Missing Mountain

THE MISSING MOUNTAIN

Now the Magic Chimney came back. I told the Magic Chimney, “Take care of my turtles. I bought another one and I named the green one ‘Tur,’ and the blue one ‘Tle.’ I’m going to dinner on Mount Everzest.”

I went to a restaurant called Dancing Bananas and Chickens!!! The menu was:

CHICKEN CONGO LINES $5.00

CHOCOLATE BANANAS $7.00

FRIED CHICKEN $9.99

FROZEN BANANAS $4.99

BANANA CHICKEN $20.99

FRIED CHICKEN $6.43

FROZEN CHICKEN $1.10

CHOCOLATE CHICKEN $77.89

DANCING BANANAS $44.44

I ordered chicken congo lines and dancing bananas for dessert. I came home. I looked at Mount Everzest. It was GGGOOONNNEEE. Not the stuff on it.The MOUNTAIN. I told Tur and Tle and the Magic Chimney that it was gggooonnneee.

       The Magic Chimney said that mountains move over time. Now it was in Los Angeles. I visited Los Angeles, and the mountain has the Palisades, part of Santa Monica, Westwood, and Brent Wood. I came back.

THE END

Undaunted Courage

It all started when Brandon’s arch-enemy blew up the White House, the Capitol building, and all the museums and memorials on the east bank of the Potomac river in one explosion. Brandon and his assistant Stanley Dalton were visiting Washington D.C. to tell President Rosemary J. Staten, Vice President Michael T. Evans, and Secretary of Education Jerome J. Johnson about their new invention and how to use it. Brandon was just nominated for smartest ten-year-old kid charted. He had invented a one hundred percent correct, infallible lie detector.

The clock chimed twice when Brandon’s evil arch-enemy, Doug Brooks and his assistant Alan Walker, marched in carrying sixteen portfolios. All of them were practically spilling. Brandon clenched my diamond charm that his Grandma Holly gave him when he was five, a day before she died of a heart attack.

“Brandon, meet Doug, who has just invented a tester that can harmlessly go into any software and disable networks and CPUs,” President Stanten cheerfully announced. Doug spared a second to shoot Brandon a withering glare, and Brandon sent one with an equal amount of hatred to Doug. Stanley looked like he was going to implode. He was shaking and sweating and once Brandon looked at him he dropped all of his papers and ran into the bathroom.

“Look at that pathetic human. Brandon must be insane to have hired him,” Doug whispered to his assistant. As he said it, his eyes turned a freakish green and when Brandon looked at him, he formed a green light in his palms and shot it at Brandon. Brandon ducked and the green ball shot out of the window and smashed into Pennsylvania Avenue. A huge green ball rose from the crater and its diameter grew to almost thirty feet before exploding. Doug and his assistant teleported away right before the White House crumbled to ruins. Brandon saw Stanley, the President, Vice President and the Secretary of Education all spiral into the air. But Brandon couldn’t, because his teleportation cube was with Stanley. Brandon heard an alarm ring in the distance before he was sucked into a pitch black world.

Beep, beep, beep. Brandon opened his eyes. He was in a hospital and a machine was trying to keep him alive. He groaned at the dull pains all around my body and that got the doctor’s attention.

“Brandon? Are you alright? We just finished cleaning the chunk of muscle that one of the rocks cut off. You’re going to have some huge scars on your legs and face. You’re in Florida and got transferred from Annapolis to here. Orlando,” the doctor said, anxiety splattered on his face. Brandon guessed it was because his dad had threatened to sue the doctors if Brandon wasn’t better within the week. Brandon groaned and fell back asleep.

Brandon woke up again in the middle of the night. The doctors were absent and he had a pile of presents on his bed side table. He groaned. They were all from girls who would pester him to ask him out or something. The top letter was from Mom. The second he read the word ‘Mom,’ he started crying. His mom was also in a hospital with blood, breast, and lung cancer, and a brain tumor. He had just visited her the day before the meeting. She was better and she said he was a prodigy but she also mentioned she knew he was capable of more things. He was puzzled but at the time, Brandon and his dad’s flight from Los Angeles was to leave in two hours and he and his Dad had to rush to the airport. He didn’t want his Dad to know because he was strict and only gave terse replies to answers.

Brandon fell back in his pillow and cried himself to sleep.

The next day, the doctors did a blood test. Brandon had never needed one because he was rarely sick, so his parents never thought he needed one. During the blood test, two doctors fainted, one doctor gasped, and the rest looked like clueless monkeys. Brandon saw what was on the machine, and it said, “System error. No known explanation.” Then, for no reason, he felt the scars on his legs that the doctor said would be there. They were gone, disappeared, vanished.

“Uhh excuse me? One question. Where are the scars that you said would be on my legs?” he asked. They looked at his leg and three more of them fainted, leaving four gaping doctors who stared at his leg where no signs of injuries could be seen.

Soon, Brandon’s injuries were healed and he got ready to leave. He was told to go to the airport and wait for his dad. They were going to go to West Palm Beach. The doctors were still surprised by Brandon and his tests results. Brandon felt like gasping at them and the machines. He decided that they needed brain updates. All of them. He was soon out of the hospital. A wave of fresh, warm air greeted him. It was around 9:00 and nobody was around. He strolled around the area and went to downtown.

It was the opposite of New York City. The apartment buildings were low, and about six floors, and Business Buildings were just nine to ten floors. He crossed 8th street and continued his way to the airport. The second he rounded the corner, a man in a trench coat grabbed him by his  head and stuffed him into a suitcase. Brandon suffocated in the suitcase for ten minutes until the bottom of the suitcase opened and the suitcase stopped bumping along the pavement, indicating the kidnapper had stopped, and sounded like he was smoking.

Suddenly, in a flash of green light, a tunnel opened leading to a platform above a land of paradise. A group of girls were at a base of a mountain. They raised their hands and muttered some words before the mountain rumbled and out exploded a stream of lava that turned into rubies upon touch! Another group of boys were walking in a barren courtyard. They put a grape into a burning hearth at the center and in a flash of sparks, the columns of marble around the courtyard were covered in grapevines and soon, they bore fruit. The boys high-fived and patted each other on their backs, eating fresh, juicy, purple grapes. Brandon walked around the platform until he noticed a woman, in a wheelchair, around the age of thirty-six, beckoning toward herself. She was clearly motioning Brandon to come to her.

Brandon froze. “Mom?” he said weakly. The woman smiled. “Mom!” He started running toward her. She started running towards Brandon. He embraced her so hard she said laughing, “Loosen up! I’m going pins and needles.” They both started crying tears of happiness.

“I’m so glad you’re alright! I was worried sick. Your father is waiting down there, see?!” Brandon looked down. Dad was in the courtyard with the boys, clearly teaching them how to play football. He looked up and waved. Brandon waved back and all the boys started pointing and whispering.

Stanley waved to Brandon, looking perfectly normal, except that he had a purple staff. Stanley put his  staff up into the air and wrote, “Is Brandon alright? All of the campers are anxious to meet him.”

Then Brandon’s mom pulled out a neon yellow staff and wrote, “Brandon is fine. All is well.” The golden letters shown in the air, and disappeared.

Brandon didn’t realize his mouth was opened in shock, until his mom noticed. “Why are you suprised? I thought you would know by now what you are. Remember the bus driver with the horns? Doug and the green explosion? The time were you found yourself suffocating inside a palm tree in Mexico when you went to sleep in the Ritz Carlton, Philadelphia? These things were not just coincidences. You are a magician and so am I.”

Brandon was speechless. He had a hard time believing what  his mom said. His mom laughed.

“You had proof when you saw me take out a staff and write golden letters in the air with golden particles the size of teensy weensy atoms.”

Brandon gaped at his Mom for a few more minutes before he answered. “How are we going to get down if I don’t have a teleporter and both you and dad refused to use teleporters?”

Brandon’s mom stared at him looking utterly bemused. “Opinions change. I put some sense into your dad’s brain after I decided to use teleporters.”

“But where are the teleporters?” Brandon asked, exasperated.

She smiled. “You will see me perform one more spell before we go down for a tour. Here I go. Summonialo Teleporters!”

Two teleporters zoomed out of a black portal and clattered on the glass platform.

“Ready?” asked mom. Brandon nodded. She flicked the box open and requested “Nuanen Welden!” Strangely, Brandon understood what she had said. Nuanen means beautiful, and Welden means forest. Nuanen Welden means the beautiful forest. The teleporter started humming and Brandon, using previous knowledge, knew that was the ten-second warning. The box opened once more and a purple portal rose out. Brandon and his Mom grabbed hands and walked into the portal.

They spun through hyperspace. Images of other places raced past  them. Brandon caught glimpses of other areas. Cairo, Beijing, New York, L.A., Las Vegas, and tons of other cities. Then the portal opened up and they walked out to a huge marble doorway. On top read, “Astori! Fri Cai Vinr! Nai Onr Jan Oloso!” which means, “Welcome Friends! Make yourself at home!”

Brandon was still puzzled by his knowledge of this language. One day, I master French after one month of hard work and the next I learn a unknown language in two minutes, thought Brandon.  

After the entrance, they came upon the clubhouse. It had a huge pool, a patio, a pool table and a casino from what Brandon could see. Then they arrived at the mess hall. Brandon saw a huge campfire with strange symbols around it. The fire was still red hot in the ashes. Next they proceeded to the amphitheater. A huge outdoor stage was surrounded with layers of seats in a half circle. Then the party of two arrived at the cabins. Each of them had a symbol and a word in the unknown language. As Brandon began to call it. They read, “Fire,” “Water,” “Earth,” “Ice,” “Air,” “Electric,” “Animal,” “Plant,” “Mind Reading,” “Future Predicting,” and right in front was the knowledge cabin. Brandon peeked inside to see just a blank, swirling, black mist.

“Brandon! Please don’t do that. It’s forbidden in Nuanen Welden,” Brandon’s mom called out after she was greeted by the group of girls from the volcano. One of them offered a ruby bracelet to Brandon’s mom and she accepted it warmly.

“Mom, why couldn’t I see anything? That mist was not a portal, so why could I not see anything?”

Brandon’s mom looked like he should know this, but resumed a normal expression. She replied, “That’s because you haven’t passed the trial of the cores yet.”

“What is the trial of the cores?” Brandon asked.

She explained that you have to go through three days of obstacles to find out which group you are in. She also mentioned she was a mind reader, so Brandon realized how he could never force a lie past her. She also knew what was troubling him. Then a huge wooden manor loomed up in front of them.

“That is the haunted manor. Twenty-three years ago when I came here, one magician went in and never came out. Every night there is a explosion, and blood starts to seep out of the tallest room in a waterfall. Then a wave of pain seeps through you and you fall into a nightmare. Only two months ago did we find out how to stop the pain, but you will still have nightmares and they are about what you fear the most,” Brandon’s mom whispered, dropping her voice with a shudder as if she could still feel the pain.

Then they passed a cathedral that loomed higher than the haunted tower. It had a huge gold bell on top. The edges were beautifully carved marble and the stained glass art was made with so perfection it looked so realistic. Then Brandon realized that the people in the glass were moving. He gasped and pointed at the glass tiles like a baby that first saw a bird. The people actually glanced at him and some waved. The party pasted the archery range and they saw a huge wooden tower that had broken ladders leading to the top. Then they ventured on and then, the big golden bell struck seven times. It was seven o’clock, and campers poured out of the cabins and training areas.

“C’mon, the feast has begun!” cried Brandon’s mom, looking happier than he was when he was given the Nobel Prize for the rocket boots and the teleporter he invented just a few months ago.

They followed the campers into the mess hall. In just a few hours’ time from when they had passed the hall during the beginning of the tour, there were piles of mashed potatoes, rivers of cranberry sauce, heaps of rotisserie chicken, mountains of spaghetti, hills of Caesar salads and lakes of stews and soups. Brandon sat down with his mom and his dad at the high table.

Brandon noticed that the campers that were in the cabins were know whispering and pointing at him. He ignored them like the paparazzi that followed him wherever he went. Then Brandon began to pile some of the baked yams and the steak onto his golden plates. He asked where was any of the drinks and a server stared at him with a expression of pure horror. She strode away, now bearing a expression of exasperation.

Leaning to his left, Brandon asked his dad, “Why did that servant looked so scared when I asked where the drinks were?” Brandon’s dad looked amused and then replied in a soft tone Brandon had never heard him use. “The drinks are forbidden within a ten-yard radius of the sacred hearth where we do our daily sacrifices at the strike of midnight so we are not pained by that mysterious person up at the top of the haunted manor. We have to sacrifice a ice pearl, a lava ruby, a water sapphire, a leaf emerald, and the rarest, most precious gem of all: the knowledge diamond. It has been a millennium since a knowledge camper came here. They have been extinct because they attract to many spirits and aliens then they can fend off — ”

He had trailed off because Brandon’s diamond charm rose off him and was giving off a brilliant white light. All around Brandon people started bowing on one knee. Then Brandon’s dad said, “Rise Brandon, son of Ilirea, start of the new age of the Knowledges.” Then the diamond started spinning. It spun and spun until it shot a solid pillar of white light up into the sky. It shot through the atmosphere, hurtled past the planets, exploded through the kuiper belt, spun through the Milky Way and it smashed into the alien planet of Nar Gazvoda.

One billion aliens escaped on space ships before they saw their beloved planet shatter into a trillion tiny asteroids. They wanted revenge on that planet and they set off toward Earth, following the light that still shone and destroyed neighboring planets. Then, the light hit the oldest star in the universe, which was a trillion miles in circumference.

It started shaking, and then parts of the star started to rumble. It shook, then pieces of the star exploded and the star ended its life in the biggest supernova that sent the spaceships zooming at the speed of sound.

Meanwhile, at the camp, everyone had gotten up, and tensions broke. The campers all lifted Brandon on their backs. They had just arrived at the cabins when they heard a huge BANG, and they witnessed a supernova. The star’s light and streaked the sky red, orange, yellow, and purple. The asteroid belt had been greatly disrupted and the asteroids flew in the direction toward earth.

The campers saw and set Brandon down to get staffs. Then the first asteroids came barreling down and the campers all muttered “Relashio,” and the asteroids reversed and crashed into each other. The meteors were equally as dangerous as the asteroids, because they traveled twice as fast.

Up in Augusta, the rest of the world saw a spectacular meteor shower until it started plummeting through the atmosphere. People screamed and fled. One by one, the meteors plummeted down, crashing and exploding worldwide known landmarks. The Forbidden City, the World Trade Center, the Leaning Tower of Pisa, the Pyramids of Giza, the Sydney Opera House, the Statue of Liberty, the Big Ben in London, the Eiffel Tower in Paris, St. Basil’s Cathedral in Moscow, Blue Domed Church in Santorini, the Great Sphinx of Giza, the Great Wall of China, the Taj Mahal in India, Machu Picchu in Peru, The Burj al Arab Hotel in Dubai, Christ the Redeemer in Rio de Janeiro, Mecca in Saudi Arabia, Agia Sophia in Istanbul, Turkey, and thousands of other fascinating landmarks that some people will never see.

Every death and destruction of a human of a landmark was a spear in Brandon’s heart. He had been to all those places and yet millions of people might never see one of them. The meteors swirled and crashed into the earth. Then the bigger asteroids came crashing in and a huge eruption of dirt, grass, rock, trees, water, and lava shot out of the ground as the asteroid crashed into the Gulf of Mexico for the second time.

Brandon woke up from his groaning. He was electric-tied onto a mat on the wall. He was in a solid titanium cell. He could hear voices on all sides of the cell. He had the strange sensation that he was hovering over a large fire. It was sweltering in the cell. The cell itself was a oven, and Brandon got the impression whoever put him in the cell wanted to cook him alive. Brandon started struggling against the electric-tied rope and all he got was a painful electric shock up against his ribs. He realized that his legs were both broken, and even if he managed to get off, he would have no chance in finding a way out. He let go and let himself fall into another coma.

When Brandon came fully into his senses, he was in a completely different room. It was decked out with a spa, bed, dinning table, a maple desk and a teleporting closet. Two aliens were whispering in the corner. He struggled against the binds and realized that it was not eletric anymore. He fell limp but then a strange glow started forming in my chest but expanding so rapidly that Brandon felt as if he were going to explode. Then a scream erupted from his mouth and the light burst in a huge beam. The beam erupted into a web and a it started criss cross into a huge circular dome around Brandon.

Then another light shot from his mouth and started twisting itself right the center of the dome. Then a stream of white light collided with the blue light and started spinning. The aliens who were talking had stopped and watched as the light shone ever brillianter than before. Then the light stopped twisting and started solidifying in a spear? No, a staff!? Brandon looked at the staff in bewilderment then the staff rose into Brandon’s outstretched hand and he clasped it hard in his sweating palms.

Then he shouted, “Summonialo Teleporter!” and a teleporter whizzed through the air and landed in Brandon’s other palm. He opened it and yelled the only place that had ever felt like home, Nuanen Welden. He crumpled when he hit the ground because it was so rocky. The place looked deserted and Brandon thought so until a voice rang out.

“Brandon!” A camper came running out of a wrecked cabin. “We were so worried. The aliens took you. How did you escape. You would need a staff — ” The camper’s eyes fell onto the staff topped with the blue swirling sphere.  “Wh-wh-where did you get that staff!?”

“Later. Where are my parents?” Brandon questioned.

“They’re alright. But their current whereabouts in the camp are unknown,” the camper answered. Before the camper could speak, the camper turned white and started speaking the ancient language so fast that all Brandon heard was gibberish. Then, the camper’s eyes turned a ghostly white and projected a beam of light that spoke to Brandon.

“You shall go south in search of peace between aliens and humans. You shall encounter many dangers along the way. You shall find peace in the golden light. Brandon, Elizabeth, Benedict, Harvey, Stanley, Jeffrey, Ronaldo, Amanda, Heather, Judith, Richard, and Benjamin shall go. One person shall perish in his sacrifice for peace for both aliens and humans and the golden light. If you fail, the world will be consumed in darkness and famine. One shall betray the group of ten. Three will be sacrificed on there own will. He, the leader, shall bring his biggest desire to rest by accomplishing it at his end.” The camper collapsed in a heap.

Then, the voice of Brandon’s mom echoed through the campus. “Brandon, Elizabeth, Benedict, Harvey, Stanley, Ronaldo, Amanda, Judith, Richard and Benjamin, please report to the clubhouse immediately for discussion. Bring your staffs along.”

Brandon scrambled over the rocky ground toward the clubhouse. Along the way, more people joined him, running and jumping along to the clubhouse.

Then all ten people pushed on the door and the door swung open with such tremendous force it flew off it’s hinges. The oldest looking one held up an emerald green staff and whispered in a low deep voice, “Reparis Door,” and the door rose into the air and latched itself into the hinges. Then all ten of them crept into the clubhouse, Stanley squeezing Brandon’s arm so hard that it turned purple.

Then, Brandon’s mom’s voice called out through the darkness.

They all raised their staffs (except Brandon) and shot balls of bright, golden light that spewed warmth and a shower of golden sparks. The light illuminated the room and Brandon saw his mom sitting behind a large wooden desk that Brandon suspected was oak and was elegantly carved. A quill was scurrying across, writing exactly what the camper said. Then, the quill exploded and turned into a wax stamper and banged the paper.

Then, Brandon’s mom looked up and said, “So, the group of you have been chosen to start the first quest that has happened in a eon. I want to give you all my knowledge about how to complete the quest. You should know that if you directly walked out of the camp and flew up to the real world, you would find yourself in Augusta, Maine.”

Everyone nodded their heads except Brandon. He thought it was Orlando since he was kidnapped in Orlando and slid down that slide.

There was  a moment of silence before a bell started chiming. Thirteen times? A clock never chimes thirteen times! Then, a sound of chaos met their ears, and Brandon assumed it was a warning bell.

Brandon’s mom stood up and yelled, “Go to Atlanta to find peace!” before they heard the sound of spaceships zooming down from the periwinkle sky.

“RUN!” Stanley yelled. They all scrambled out of the clubhouse and Harvey conjured a shield around them. Campers were battling aliens, and Elizabeth whispered “Ascendium Stairo!” and a long staircase made out clouds appeared. They all sprinted up and into an unrecognizable world. The city was in ruins. Fires were burning and the remaining buildings that were still standing were either leaning at an incredible angle or  had huge chunks torn away or were charred black.

Then Elizabeth tried to conjure a cloud jet but as soon as she had muttered the spell and a cloud started forming, the sky turned red and the cloud exploded into a shower of lava and the team scattered. Harvey conjured a compass from nowhere and said, “That’s south, and we should go south.”

The team started south. They passed ruined cities. They made it to North Carolina before an obstacle came. The team had just entered a ruined city that seemed like Charlotte when they came upon a park that was completely unharmed. The group was tired and sore and all ten of them sat down on benches when the ground started rumbling and a hydra burst out from the ground.

The hydra pelted them with poison but Ronaldo waved his staff and the ground started trembling and geysers erupted straight out of the ground. Water splashed everywhere and the hydra spluttered out a wave of yellow water. The team ran and dodged geysers. Stanley shot fireballs at the hydra. Benedict sent a tornado spinning at the hydra and a ghostly green head went flying into a tree and disintegrated into a shower of sparks. The tree quickly caught fire and sparks were flying. The hydra roared and cracks started appearing on the ground. Amanda froze the ground into slippery ice and started pushing the hydra back with icicles.

By the time the icicles had stopped flying, the hydra was covered in cuts. Then Richard and Judith at the same time, turned the ground into coral and the hydra was poisoned as soon as the coral touched him. Benjamin started wrapping the hydra with lightning and Brandon had no idea what to do so he raised his staff and thought, Please save me, when an orb of light formed at his staff and disintegrated the hydra. The team started whooping.

They arrived at Atlanta after weeks on I 85, when the team was refreshed. Atlanta looked like Charlotte in every way until they realized a mile out of the city, and a circle of landmines surrounded the city. They made their way through until Benedict held up a watch and said, “Goodbye team.” He pressed a button and the mines started exploding.

The team raced through the landmines and sprinted away. On the way, Ronaldo fell and was consumed, and Harvey died while trying to punch Benedict. The team of seven watched as the fire advanced on Atlanta. Suddenly, spaceships descended and the team quickly found themselves surrounded by aliens. They battled desperately through the apocalypse and found themselves in the courtyard of Brandon’s old boarding school.

The world was at its final stand. Disease, war and destruction were consuming earth. Most of Asia and Africa had fallen. The Asians and Africans that had escaped to the other continents (including Antarctica) found the other continents as bruised and battered as their own. Brandon and his fellow magicians sent spells flying into the sky and ricocheting off stones and trees with their staffs. They were in the courtyard of the boarding school Brandon went to a whole year ago. It was a alien apocalypse. Every second another magician went down. Then, a golden light burst from the front of Brandon’s staff and made a shield around him. The shots from the blasters just turned into golden light. He suddenly remembered what the camper told him. The quest for the golden light! The Prophecy of the light.  The camper spoke to him four weeks ago.

“One person shall perish in his sacrifice for peace and the golden light. One shall betray the group of ten. Five will be sacrificed through their own will. The leader shall bring his biggest desire to rest by accomplishing it at his end.”

He was going to die. He was to bring peace to the warring world and never see it. He told himself, “Make your mom proud by doing a recognizable act to salvage the world,” and he let the power he was channeling from his knowledge diamond go. For a second, he was engulfed in a golden light so brilliant that he thought he was in a solid golden coffin.

Stanley was overrun with aliens when he saw Brandon rise into the air with a golden shield and explode. The light shot a beam into the air and the world started repairing. The light picked up the ruins of cities and rebuilt them again. It regrew burnt crops and healed destroyed forests and with it, brought peace. The aliens slowly started fading and soon, all that was left of them were melted guns and a couple of blasters. The remaining group rushed toward where Brandon was but all that was left was the knowledge diamond. Elizabeth started crying, Amanda and Stanley silently started grieving over their friend. They opened up a portal and teleported to Nuanen Welden. The whole Nuanen Welden was cheerful until they found out that Brandon was gone. The funeral was held that day and all the knowledge diamond was burned. Everyone was crying. For the funeral, Stanley made a speech.

“Brandon was a good friend of mine. We went to the same boarding school and he made me his assistant last year. So much has happened in a year. We grew up and matured together. We built a teleporter, a chemical vacuum and a lie detector together. We fought through aliens together. Brandon was always an honorable and loyal friend. He helped rebuild the world by sacrificing himself. We were together. The one thing I learned from our friendship is that you are more powerful when you are together.”

Royal Disaster

        

“I’d like to welcome Erica Middleton to this class,” Mrs. Evans, a 7th grade homeroom teacher at Riverside Middle School, announced on the first day back from Winter Break.

A timid girl stood up at the front of the room, shivering at the thought of even standing in front of her class, let alone speaking to the students sitting at their desks.

“Hi? I’m Erica Middleton, and I moved from England?” Erica spoke softly with a slight British accent.

Another girl with a short bob of blonde hair spoke up, “Um, Erica, do you even know if your name is Erica or not?”

“Lacie, when did you become the teacher?” Mrs. Evans asked sharply. She glared at Lacie Kibbel, the leader of the popular group.

“What? I was just pointing out that she should have told us rather than asked us.” Lacie rolled her eyes.

Erica

I knew from the beginning that Lacie was not going to like me. After all, I was shy and unpopular. Probably the exact opposite of her. Lunch came so slowly, all the teachers kept asking me questions. Like, where did I move from? Why did I move? What school did I use to go to? When I answered, every time, Lacie Kibbel snickered. Which, of course, made practically half of the class snicker.

But then lunch finally came. I deliberately sat at the table farthest from Lacie’s group. So I sat at an empty seat where I thought I was safe from other people. I was wrong.

“Is anyone sitting here?” a girl named Brianna asked. “And you’re Erica, right?”

“Yes. And are you… Brianna?” I asked back. “Are you friends with Lacie?”

“Yes, I am Brianna and no, I am not friends with Lacie. She claimed I was her worst enemy in 5th grade. I think she forgot about it a week after,” Brianna ranted. She sat down next to me. “I hope you aren’t like her, she is so…annoying, popular, and stuck up.”

Across the room, I could see Lacie and her popular group looking at me and pointing. I pulled out my phone and saw Lacie’s smug expression turn into a shocked one. I could see her mouth forming the words, “She has an iPhone 6S?” I laughed to myself softly. Then I texted my cousin, Kate. Kate Middleton, the world-famous Duchess of Cambridge. I know, you’re probably really shocked right now –– or… not. Her dad is my dad’s older brother, so that’s why we have the same last name. I texted Kate, about my ‘situation’, and she was really sympathetic.

“Who was that?” Brianna asked, curious.

“Oh, just my cousin,” I answered nonchalantly. Then conversation turned to the usual. None of were us talking, just eating in silence.

Soon enough, recess came. As I stepped outside into the frigid winter air, Lacie strode up to me, sneering.

“Oh, were you just… let’s see… texting your dear mum? Who had to save her salary for years just to get you that phone? Huh, Erica?” Lacie taunted, as I debated with myself to tell her about Kate.

Don’t do it, don’t do it… I begged myself. So I didn’t. I walked away and began to jump rope.

Lacie

“Hi Erica” I saw my best friend, Sage Blick, yell to the new girl. “Wanna do a jump roping contest? And I like your shirt, it’s really pretty.”

“Of course!” Erica replied. “Your shirt is pretty, too.”

Lots of my other friends followed Sage’s lead and complimented Erica on her designer clothes. None of them have complimented me on my clothes. Mine are much nicer.

I strode up to them and eyed Sage. “Um, I’m pretty sure Sage doesn’t want to talk to you, she’s just… faking it. Right, Sage?” I nudged her –– more like shoved her –– and she finally agreed with me. Was I seeing things, or was there a flicker of disappointment in her eyes?

During the next period, I had a little talk with Sage. Long story short, she was glad that she didn’t have to be in the popular group. Seriously? And worst of all, she went to hang out with Erica.

“Lacie, do you have any good book recommendations?” Miranda Jis asked me. That girl loves to read, and she can be, well, pretty crazy without a book. Anyways, we ended up talking about a lot of books. So then I recruited her as my new best friend. Of course she said yes because my puppy-dog eyes and blinding white smile and good fashion sense are pretty hard to resist.

I had expected that, by the end of the day, Sage would have come up to me and apologized. She didn’t. She almost seemed to like her new life as a loser was better than when she got special treatment as my best friend.

In Social Studies, Ms. Norman gave us partners for the Lewis and Clark project. I got paired with Sage, and Miranda was paired with Erica. Why do all the bad things have to happen to me?

“Ms. Norman?” I asked sweetly. “Can Miranda and I be partners, and can Erica and Sage be partners? Please?”

“No, Lacie. You must do the project with Sage, and Erica must do it with Miranda. Understand?” Mrs. Norman replied curtly.

“Yeah… Sure, whatever you say…” I muttered, rolling my eyes.

Erica

Miranda and I got together to brainstorm for our project. She really is nice, even though she’s Lacie’s best friend. It really is hard to believe that she would ever be as mean and as harsh as Lacie, since Lacie trained all her followers to be mean and harsh, like herself.

So, on Friday, Miranda and I hung out at my house. We got some work done, but mostly talked and laughed together.

“Erica, you’re so nice. I wish that we could be best friends,” Miranda said thoughtfully. “I know, you and Sage and Brianna could become part of the popular group, and we could be friends. That way, all your friends and my friends could form a super mega awesome group.”

I smiled weakly. Did she not know that Lacie was basically my mortal enemy? But, oh well, she liked me, and I would do anything to make sure I didn’t get another enemy.

“Uh, sure.” I faked cheeriness and smiled, but inside I was thinking: Oh no, please don’t do this to me, please don’t. Don’t you know that your new best friend is not nice? That she hates me? Please, Miranda.

But Miranda seemed oblivious to all this and left happily. Then I went to contemplate what I needed to do on Monday. Maybe I could fake being sick, or tell Miranda I didn’t want to. I didn’t want Lacie to tease me 24/7. Thousands and thousands of possibilities popped into my head. Then suddenly a small voice at the back of my brain woke up.

Hey, wait a moment., the voice yelled at my thoughts. Since when does Lacie Kibbel control what you do and don’t do? Last time I checked, you’re supposed to think for yourself, Erica.

“Fine,” I wanted to yell. “Fine, I’ll think for myself, now stop bothering me.”

On the dreaded Monday, I walked into homeroom trying to look confident. I guess I did a pretty decent job, since Lacie whispered in my ear, “Think you can overcome the popular group, huh? Well, you can’t.”

Later that day at lunch, Lacie didn’t miss any chance to insult me. When I was buying a slice of pizza, Lacie sneered, “Ah, I see that you don’t really care about your appearance –– pizza is really fattening, you know. I got a salad.” Lacie waved her salad in the air. “But on second thought, pizzas are the cheapest meal, so that’s probably the only thing your poor mum can afford.” The kids in the cafeteria gaped open-mouthed at us. Some of the popular group was glaring at me, but what did I do? Just bring out the nasty side of Lacie?

“Well sorry, Lacie, but I’m pretty sure that last Friday, you got and extra cheesy pizza and a double order of deep fried french fries. Is that true?” I asked, almost mockingly.

“Oh… Well, you must have seen one of your BFFs,” Lacie said. Then she said something that sounded a lot like ‘Sage Blick’, and turned back to me. “You got that meal. Didn’t you, Sage?” Lacie smirked, as Sage turned a shade of bubblegum pink.

“You know what? I think I have a headache. I’ll go to the nurse,” I scooted out of the cafeteria as quickly as I could.

Before I left, I heard Lacie howl with laughter. “You’re admitting defeat, aren’t you? Poor peasant girl.”

Lacie

After Erica left, I went back to eating my salad in peace. But I never thought that those losers would have the guts to stand up to me.

“Seriously?” Asked Sage. “Lacie, I was your best friend for four years. Those first two years, you were the greatest friend I could imagine. You were so nice. I never imagined that you would be so rude to another classmate, but those last two years… I didn’t see a speck of that old type of you. Nothing meant more to you than popularity. It surprised me. I would gladly be your best friend, if you ever became your old self again.” By the time Sage ended her speech, she was close to tears.

“Seriously, you’ve been really mean to Erica, Lacie,” Brianna spoke up. “I know that you love your popularity, but seriously? Unless you actually become nice, not your fakey-fakey type of nice, Erica’s going to become the new popular girl. And… you’re going to be out of the game.”

“Oh well,” I stuck my nose in the air and puffed up my chest. “I’m pretty sure that you two and your poor friend Erica will never overthrow my popular group.”

All of a sudden, to my surprise, one of my loyal followers decided to go to the loser’s side. I gasped, then quickly regained my composure. What was going on? Well, at least I still had the majority of the grade on my side, the right side, so I thought.

One by one, my popular group walked over to the loser’s side quietly. Soon, only Miranda and I were left.

“Miranda, I knew you would stick by me, we’re BFFs forever,” I put my fist in the air, ready for a fist bump. But Miranda shook her head.

“I’m really sorry Lacie, but…” Miranda started inching toward the loser’s side.

“What is going on here?” I exploded. “Somebody explain, right now.”

“Um, well, I guess that I think Sage has a point?” One of my former buddies mumbled. “And, I guess, you should be nicer to Erica?” I glared at her.

Then Miranda, the biggest traitor of all, started talking.

“Um, Lacie? I think that everyone here thinks that you’re being way too nasty to Erica. She doesn’t deserve any of that. I know that Erica is actually really nice. Please, Lacie, please just give her a chance.” Miranda asked, on behalf of all the losers.

“No way.” I practically yelled. “She comes from a poor family. If we were in England, we would say that she is a poor peasant girl. Why would I want to befriend her?”

Sage just sighed, “Lacie, you are hopeless.”

Erica

The next day, as soon as I sat down at my usual lunch table, the whole popular group swarmed around me. What was going on? I felt just a bit of sympathy towards Lacie –– having the popular crowd practically worship you one day, and have them ditch you the next. I had no idea what had happened.

“Um, Erica?” Lacie asked, her voice sugary sweet. I knew immediately that this niceness was all fake. “Can I sit here?”

“Sure,” I replied. It was the least I could do for Lacie, after all, she just got ditched by her so-called friends.

Lacie sat down gingerly, smoothing her skirt down. She was still rude to me, but her ego seemed to have been cut in half.

At lunch, it it felt like the first day of school for me all over again. Questions were asked over and over again, but this time by different students. Only Lacie was quiet.

I, meanwhile, was texting Kate. In case you don’t remember, Kate Middleton is my cousin. Like, the duchess.

Erica – Hi, just BTW, Lacie doesn’t

seem to hate me as much now.

I dunno what happened.

I think I should tell her about

how you’re my cousin.

Kate – Awesome If you decide to

tell her, just don’t say it like a big

deal. Just casually. Tell me their

reactions.

By the end of the lunch period, several questions about my family came up. I told them all about Mom and Dad. But I didn’t mention Kate at all. Then, finally, at the end of lunch, I stood up to dump my garbage out, and said, “ooh, and by the way? My cousin is Duchess Kate Middleton.”

That practically freaked everyone out, especially Lacie.

“What?” Lacie screeched, horrified. “You? That’s impossible. You’re a liar, and your family is poor. It is absolutely impossible.” She glared at me, her posture radiating hatred.

I shrugged: “Oh well –– if you don’t want to believe me, then don’t. See ya.” I started towards class, but Lacie stopped me by pulling on the back of my sweater.

“Erica Middleton, you are a liar and a fraud. If you actually pay attention, you will notice that nobody believes you. Just tell the truth,” Lacie snapped. “Just admit that your family is unbelievably poor. After all, it’s the truth.”

“Well,” I replied. “Like I said before –– don’t believe me if you don’t want to. Your choice. I might come to school with proof tomorrow or the day after that, Lacie. You might just want to wait and see.”

“I don’t need proof to know that you are lying, Erica,” Lacie snarled.

“Okay, Lacie. I don’t care if you believe me or not. Just drop the topic,” I said without turning around. Then I walked to class.

Lacie

Erica just said to “drop the topic” But I can’t, really. All my life, I have obsessed about the royals, but I’ve never met one. I have always wanted to be one. But then Erica said that she was related to a royal. More specifically, Kate Middleton. Like, she is absolutely so pretty, and so perfect, and I really want to be just like her.

But, that proved my suspicions. As soon as she said, on the first day, that she was Erica Middleton, I had a sneaking suspicion that she was related to her. After all, their last names were the same, and they both were from England.

That night I went to bed, but it took forever to go to sleep. I tossed and turned, thinking: What if Erica was related to Kate Middleton? Then what would happen to my empire? What would happen to me? I thought worriedly. As I fell asleep, I hoped that the next day would be be a lot better.

The next day, as I walked into homeroom, I noticed the slight chatter. Mrs. Evans saw me come in, and said: “Oh, hi, Lacie. Erica told us that a special guest from her family was coming to visit. She’s arriving in a couple of minutes.”

I nodded, having a feeling that it was Kate Middleton.

A couple minutes later, an announcement was made for the 7th grade to go to the auditorium. Erica was going to meet her guests with two friends, for an up-close meet-and-greet. She, of course, chose Sage and Brianna. I was so jealous. Even though I never wanted to be friends with Erica ever, I still wanted to meet Kate Middleton.

When we got to the auditorium, Brianna and Sage sat down excitedly with us. They were whispering to my former friends. I could make out some of what they were saying.

“You’ll be surprised,” Sage said. “She is even prettier in real life.”

“Yeah,” Brianna added. “She even signed the Polaroid photo that Mrs. Norman took of me, Sage, Erica, and her.”

Then, finally, Kate Middleton came out. It was so awesome, like a dream come true, I was sooo happy. Well, until I remembered that Erica had made it happen.

“Hello,” Duchess Kate said, in the most gorgeously awesome British accent, “It is a pleasure to meet all of you. My cousin Erica speaks of you so often. Your school, Riverside Middle School is just so beautiful, and I’m sure that the teachers here are so very kind.”

Then she went on and on and on about living in Great Britain, and yada yada yada. Instead of listening, I looked at her absolutely awesome designer outfit. She was wearing a super pretty navy and white striped sweater, and skinny jeans. Also, her high heels were, just, fabulous.

Now, as she started walking around, Erica started to hand out pictures of the royal family: Queen Elizabeth, Prince Philip, the Duchess of Cornwall, Prince Charles, Prince Harry, Prince William, Princess Kate, and baby Prince George. They weren’t signed, but oh well, they were still awesome.

When she finally got to me, Princess Kate asked me, “Are you Lacie?”

“Yeah,” I replied. Erica probably told her all about me. Of course, it probably was super, um, negative stuff. But still, she knew me from my face.

“I love your outfit. Erica told me you weren’t the nicest to her, but to your close friends you were really nice. And I think that you probably should branch out more –– even to kids that you don’t want to be friends with. Be nice.” Kate Middleton said to me. My idol was having a conversation with me. I knew that she was vaguely hinting that I should have been nicer to Erica, but my main focus was: Omg, Kate Middleton is talking to me, and she actually said she loved my outfit. All I was wearing was an oversized lime green hoodie, and some jeans.

Then, I actually thought about what she said. She told me to try to be nicer to Erica. Even though Kate was doing it for Erica’s good, I couldn’t erase it from my head –– Kate Middleton told me to be nicer to her. So of course I was going to do it. But, I would be forcing myself –– I never wanted to (and probably never will) be nice to Erica.

I don’t know why, but I just despised Erica from the beginning. Probably because she was super pretty, and Sage liked her so much. She was the best at everything. Her life was definitely absolutely perfect. It would be so fun to be her. Glitz, glam, and glitter. She must be so happy. What about maids or servants or something? She should have that stuff in her house, shouldn’t she? After all, her family is royalty. How come she got lucky, so that she could be related to Kate Middleton? How come I couldn’t be Erica?

“Lacie,” Mrs. Kim, the math teacher snapped. “Concentrate.”

“Okay,” I replied meekly. I worked on one problem, then stopped to doodle on the margins of my paper. Soon enough, Mrs. Kim spotted me doodling again.

“Miss Kibbel, I’d like to see you outside. Now,” Mrs. Kim frowned.

“Yeah what?” I asked, glaring. It was so embarrassing to be called out of class, especially since the teacher was Mrs. Kim. She is the most carefree teacher in like, ever.

“Lacie, I’m disappointed in you. I thought you were a good math student.” Mrs. Kim reprimanded me.

“Well, I guess life hasn’t been so nice to me, and I know I need to concentrate?” I said Hopefully, Mrs. Kim would let me off the hook.

“No, Lacie. You have to concentrate, and life’s not fair. Your excuse is not valid. If I see you doing that again, you will be sent straight to the principal’s office. Do you understand?”

“Yeah sure, whatever,” I shrugged.

Later that day during lunch, I sat at my usual spot at the popular table. If Erica wasn’t stopping me, I wasn’t going to stop. I was sitting next to Miranda, and we were sitting across from Erica, Brianna, and Sage. All the other girls sat at another table, because Erica asked them to. It wasn’t like they wanted to, Erica had complete and total control over them.

“Guess what, Erica?” Sage said to Erica, obviously wanting me to overhear. “Today in math, Lacie got called out of the room, by Mrs. Kim. Didn’t you, Lacie?”

“Wow, Mrs. Kim? She’s literally the nicest teacher ever,” Erica gasped, surprised.

“Yup. She got in serious trouble. I heard that she got close to seeing the principal.” Brianna added.

“I did not,” I interrupted indignantly. “Just because you’re BFFs with a girl whose life is perfect, and she’s related to royalty does not mean that you get to insult me, Sage. I’m not sure if you’ve realized it, but you’re kinda popular. And I’m not. You shouldn’t be picking on a non-popular person seriously.

“Well, Lacie, that’s basically you,” Erica said, as if it was the most obvious thing ever. Which, by the way, it wasn’t.

“Well Erica, I don’t think that you should be part of this conversation because your life is absolutely perfect. You’ve never experienced what I’m going through right now. Just saying, you have everything you could possibly want. And you’re so greedy, you want even more. And of course, your parents spoil you. Don’t hide it, because it’s––”

Not the truth,” said Erica. “Do you really think that my parents are as carefree as yours? Have you seriously not thought about me as an actual human?”

I shrugged. “Well yeah, duh, you’re a human. Like, everybody knows that.” What was the big deal? She was still related to Kate Middleton.

“Have you ever moved across the ocean, and had to leave all your friends? I’m telling you, I’ve cried myself to sleep practically every single night since I moved to Riverside,” Erica looked at me with tears in her eyes.

“Yeah, so? It’s not like you don’t have friends here,” I pointed at Sage and Brianna.

“Do you know how much it hurts to be insulted over and over again by the same person? I’m telling you, it is like you’re being poked with multiple needles hundreds of times in a row.”

“So? That’s happened to me. It doesn’t hurt,” I sneered. Out of excuses yet? To be honest, I had never been poked like that before, but…

“My parents are strict as can be. The reason? My cousin. They don’t want me to grow up thinking that I’m royalty, because I’m not. My cousin is, and I’m not spoiled. Kate Middleton sends me all these clothes. My parents would never do that. Ever,” Erica sighed. “Convinced yet?”

The other table was watching us, and so were the boys.

“Clothes? Seriously? Your parents don’t buy you clothes?” I screeched.

“They do, but only the necessities,” Erica said sadly. I began to feel a pang of sympathy for Erica.

“So Kate got you every expensive thing you own?” I asked, in awe.

“Yup,” Erica nodded. “And, are your parents stay-at-home?”

“Only Mom,” I replied. What did that have to do with anything?

“Well, both of my parents work full-time. It’s not like I sit around chilling all day after school. I wash the dishes, wash the clothes, clean the house, and so much more. Do you do that, Lacie?” Erica asked. Now, I felt full on bad for her. She had to do practically everything in her house. I couldn’t imagine doing any of the things she does.

“I’m sorry, Erica,” I said genuinely. “I really mistook you for a princess, like your cousin. I guess… well, you’re not.”

Erica looked at me with an expression that was a mixture between amusement and annoyance. It was as if she was saying, Well, isn’t that obvious?

“Your family isn’t even richer than mine. So, I guess I hope that you’ll accept my apology. I know you probably can’t trust me too much, but please, just give me a chance,” I asked.

After I realized that Erica was actually a normal person, I just felt that she was so much… better than me in so many ways. She was just… herself. She didn’t care what others thought about her. I admired that. Maybe that was why I just hated her, she was so much more comfortable in her own skin.

“You’ll have to build up my trust first. If you really want me to be your friend. Seriously,” Erica replied. She wasn’t exactly forgiving me, but it was a step.

“Good morning, everybody.” Mrs. Evans said, grabbing our focus.

“Good morning, Mrs. Evans,” we chorused.

“Today’s project is a partner project –– and you are to write a 4-paragraph essay about the definition of bullying, and what you will do if you see somebody getting bullied. I’ll assign partners. So… Sage and Brianna, Miranda and Bridget, Erica and Lacie,” Mrs. Evans rattled off a list of names. As soon as I heard my name and Erica’s together, I froze.

Erica? And me? Was Mrs. Evans blind? Couldn’t she see that Erica and I were not friends? At all? I thought that she was trying to be a ‘kind and thoughtful homeroom teacher. That was not kind or thoughtful at all. It was as if she wanted to put us together and torture us. I could see that Erica was upset too. Finally, she turned to look at me and shrugged. I sighed. If Mrs. Evans wanted us to work together, then we had to.

“Now… you can get together with your partners and start working. If you don’t finish, you’ll have more time tomorrow,” Mrs. Evans smiled. “And, just saying, this will help the Board of Education with the anti-bullying system, they’re your audience. If you have any questions, just come up to me.”

“So…” Erica said. “I guess we’ll have to work together.”

“I guess,” I replied. “So if we see bullying, we report it to an adult at home or at school. Right?”

“Yeah. The definition is when someone repeatedly picks on someone else because of a certain characteristic,” Erica added. “So, I guess we’ll start writing.”

She took out a piece of lined paper and started working on our essay in her super neat handwriting. I wanted to compliment her about it, but I didn’t know how.

“I… like your… um… handwriting,” I blurted.

“Thanks, Lacie.” Erica smiled genuinely. “Yours is nice too.”

“Let’s focus. Do you want to write the whole thing? Or should we take turns?” I asked.

“I’ll write,” Erica replied. “So, the intro paragraph should be about the main thing. In this essay, you will learn about the definition of bullying and what students will do if we see someone getting bullied. Hopefully, this essay will help with the anti-bullying system.”

“Great. Next paragraph is about the definition of bullying,” I added. “So… From our past experience, bullying is when a person repeatedly picks on someone else because of a certain characteristic that they have. For example, whether or not someone wears glasses, or has braces. Something that makes bullies bully people is when they feel insecure about themselves.”

“And sometimes, the bully has been bullied by someone else, so he or she will bully others.”

All of a sudden, a thought flashed through my mind. Even though it was vague, it was specific enough for me to know that, even though I didn’t want it to, the thought was true. It was completely true. I was a bully. I was the one person who repeatedly picked on someone else because of a certain characteristic. I had bullied Erica Middleton. For a completely invalid reason, I had picked on Erica from the first day she had come to Riverside Middle School. She had made me feel insecure about myself from the very beginning. The way that Mrs. Evans cherished her as a student just irked me. There was no point in hiding it –– I was the bully that made Erica’s life miserable. I could feel myself shaking.

“Lacie,” Erica said in alarm. “What’s wrong? Are you okay?”

“I…” I whispered. My eyes filled up with tears. “I’m sorry. I’m a bully. I’m nothing but a bully. I shouldn’t even be writing an essay about how to prevent bullying. I’m a bully. I’m worthless.”

“No you’re not, Lacie.” Erica exclaimed. “You’re who you are, and nobody can change that. Lacie, you’re yourself. You shouldn’t be intimidated by someone else, you’re special in your own way.”

“Well,” I frowned. “I guess.”

* * *

Erica

On the last day of school, Lacie and I hugged goodbye.

“Bye, Lacie.” I called as we went our separate ways. “Be sure to write.”

“Bye, Erica,” Lacie hugged me. “Thanks for being such a good friend. After all I did to you…”

“You’re a great person, Lacie. I probably haven’t acknowledged it too much, but you’re a great friend. Just be comfortable in your own skin,” I smiled reassuringly. “See you next year.”

“Yeah, see you,” Lacie called. “All I wanted you to know was that… you’re not at all what I expected.”

Michael Gets Sucked Into A Game

One day, Michael had to do chores but he didn’t want to. He had to wash the dishes, but instead he went into his room and played video games. His mom and dad were talking on the phone. Sometimes, usually on Wednesdays, his parents would stay at home to take care of him, but the rest of the time they were at work. He only played video games when they were at work. His parents made work calls in the basement where it was quiet, so Michael made sure to play video games in his room, which was out of earshot of the basement.

So, he went to his room and started playing the video game “Survive” on his computer. The point of the game is to survive through obstacles. There’s one big mission and a bunch of other smaller missions. You start out as any person the computer chooses, and then there’s a path you have to follow. There’s also a wall, which is twenty feet tall and five feet wide. Then you have a choice of what obstacle to try and beat, and then you have to get over all your obstacles before you can finish the mission. At the end, there’s a giant glowing star that contains all the secrets of the world. There are forty nine missions and the one big mission in total, and Michael had just finished twenty five percent of all the missions.

Then, while Michael was playing, he got sucked into the video game. He felt his body getting smaller and smaller. And then he just suddenly appeared in the world of the video game. There was a stone path inside the trees. He went down the path and then tried to go through the obstacles.

When he saw the wall, he tried to climb it but it was too steep. He tried to walk around it, but he was too tired. He wanted to give up, but he didn’t — he really wanted to go over the wall. He had the choice to make stairs, make rope, or just climb the wall. He tried climbing the wall but it didn’t work because it was too tall. He tried to use stairs but it took a really long time and he really wanted to get over. Finally, he chose rope, and climbed up and over the wall.

Michael thought about how he was going to complete the other missions. He was kind of scared. He’d done a few of the missions so he knew what was coming up next. After a while of walking, he got to the next mission: a bridge with some lava under it. You have to cross the bridge without falling into the lava. He was very scared. He wanted to go home but did not know how. He had to finish the mission before he could go home. He went to a factory and got some iron. And then he wanted to build it onto the bridge so that he could cross, but then he realized that the iron would melt from the heat of the lava. So he used bedrock instead, which worked out perfectly and allowed him to cross the bridge. Michael was proud. After that, he’d finished 39 missions out of 49 missions. When he started the 40th mission he saw a giant spider web and didn’t want to get stuck in it. So, he just went around it, which was kind of weird, because you’re supposed to have choices and choose one. Anyway, when he got to the 49th mission, he heard all the secrets of the world.

  When Michael got all the secrets of the world, he felt lonely and wanted to go back home. No one was with him, and no one could help him. Then he realized that he shouldn’t play video games all day. He missed his parents.

After he thought that, his body grew larger and larger. Suddenly, he appeared at his desk, in front of his computer. At first, his parents were really worried that he had run away, but then they were really angry because he’d scared them.

“You scared us. And now you have to do chores all day!”

“Okay,” he said.

The Heist

           

Prologue

Jack Desi Jr. was sprinting as fast as he could through an alleyway; behind him a rather large man was chasing him. He had just taken a small bag of skittles from his grocery store.
“Venir ici bask coquin!” If you don’t speak French, that means, “Come back here, you scoundrel!”

Jack vaulted over a wall and landed in a small garden. He kept running, and soon he arrived at his own house. He told his dad what happened. He knew his dad would not be mad, he never was. He found his dad lifting weights in the garage.

“Wow, if you think that’s cool then listen to this story…”

***

After weeks of planning it was finally going into operation. We had planned with backup plans that went through the whole alphabet, twice. In case you are wondering, my crew and I were going to throw the biggest heist in history.
“Alright guys, let’s go over the plan on more time. Matt, you’re going into the museum and staying in the pre-hollowed base that we built earlier right? Right.
“Claire, you’re gonna invite the guard in sector B6 to a bar downtown, ‘kay? Eric, please don’t mess up the fake security footage. That could land us all a spot behind bars for up to 100 years!

“Carlos, when you blow a hole in the vault wall use as little explosive as possible, noise could attract guards and that would be terrible. Wheels, have the bullet proof van ready. Now Jose, have the fake van ready. Drive it over the edge of the dam. At the LAST minute, open your parachute. We want the cops to think we’re dead. Now everyone, get ready.”

They seemed relatively calm, except Eric, but this was his first big heist so I couldn’t blame him.

This was going so smoothly. We had even done dry runs at the warehouses in the abandoned parts of town. I could see Carlos packing C4 into his bag (he was a heavily built man with a thin beard), Jose strapping on his base jumping suit. Wheels was putting on his driving gloves and doing meditation to relieve his stress. “Now, masks everyone.” Since this was the biggest heist in history we decided to wear clown masks. We would be known as… THE CLOWN GANG. Now Wheels had gotten our van running. Before long we were arriving at the service entrance of the museum.
“At ten o’clock… we move in.” This reminded me of my past… oh, my very first big robbery, it was wondrous. I had robbed a jewel emporium. I can still smell the gunsmoke and burnt rubber of my tires. The cops had a road block about a 100 feet from my speeding car. It was at that moment that I veered into the woods and into a river. I floated down stream I then hit a rock and climbed out and ran away. Robbing always gave me an adrenaline rush that I didn’t get doing other things.

As I daydreamed, Carlos reminded me, “Boss, it’s ten o’clock.”

I thanked him and said, “Move in.”  We walked toward the door as planned. Matt opened it from the inside. We all looked pretty creepy sneaking around in our clown masks. “Carlos, go to the vault.”

He knew where it was, we had spent hours pouring over maps of the museum. As he arrived at the vault I saw the last guard disappear with Claire to that bar. I looked over to see Carlos running towards me.

“DUCK!” he said. A split second after those words, a shock wave plowed me backwards. I was fine, and as promised the vault door had a smoldering hole in it. I stepped into the vault. It was heaven for any thief. It was a mess of priceless jewels, artwork, and artifacts. We started stuffing it into sacks as fast as we could. By now the guards had arrived at the scene of the crime. We ran to the roof; we had expected some guards to still be in the building and had come up with a plan to escape, which we were about to execute. As we arrived at the roof, Eric pulled a gun out and pointed it  at me and the rest of the crew.

“Jack, stop now, I’m with the police!”

“Eric,” I said calmly, “You know I have the guts to shoot you, yet you don’t. I trusted you Eric. You were part of this team.” I didn’t want to do this but I had to.

Carlos handed me a gun which I took, but kept it behind my back. The wind from the police helicopter whipped my hair around. I pulled out the gun and time seemed to slow down as my finger wrapped around the trigger. I took careful aim, and pulled. Eric went flying of the roof, his bulletproof vest had saved him and he landed in a bush, but he was stunned.

Then I heard a voice from the helicopter say, “JACK DAISI! STAND DOWN!”

“NEVER!” I shouted back. I was doing this for a dirtbike daredevil, and Zara, my fiance. We had met a demolition derby someplace in Texas. Fortunately, she approved of my line of work and thought it was very mysterious. Then my crew and I jumped of the roof and onto a mat we had placed there earlier. We sprinted to a van. Wheels hopped in the drivers seat.
“Go, Go, Go” I shouted.

We drove off into the night. The cops were soon on our tail, a roadblock was put up but Wheels just rammed it and kept on driving. We got to our secret base in northern Canada. It turns out the old saying is wrong, Crime does pay!   

 

EPILOGUE
Jack Daisi took his share of the loot and moved to France where he bought a small mansion in Provence. he later started a small family with Zara had one son who is now eight. They led a easy going life and Jack retired from his life of crime.

Claire Moji stayed in N.Y  and bought a brownstone in Brooklyn. She has stayed single (so far). She has a current profession as a bartender.

Eric Wilson is alive but is recovering in a Swedish rehab center. The doctors say he is making steady progress and will be out by 2018.

Carlos Brenes moved to Mexico where he used his explosive skills to help immigrants get past the wall after he blows holes in it.

Adam Smith (a.k.a. Wheels) took his share of the money and opened a meditation place in San Francisco. He is living in a studio apartment.

And finally Jose gave up his life of crime and became a base jumping instructor.

Island of the Flins

Jack

It was a dark and stormy night. Boom! Thunder shook the earth. A tree five feet away caught on fire. All I could ever remember was being scared, my Ma dying when I was two, and my Pa going away to find another place besides this one. He never came back. Nobody ever came back. With only my six year old sister to keep me company I learned to hunt, survive and stay strong, however the fear always stayed with me. The fear of getting bitten by a shark or sacrificed by the Flins — a tribe of people so crazy they sacrifice one person a year to please their gods. I was a Flin when I was two, but then the Flins decided to sacrifice my annoying sister who had just been born. My Ma couldn’t let it happen so she sacrificed herself for little baby Zoe. My Pa then took Zoe and I to a cave, away from the Flins.

Boom! The second bang brought me back to life. I looked around, scared, the fear having never left me, then I turned around and sprinted east towards the family cave. I suspected the Flins were waiting by the trees of the hammock that Zoe and I slept in. The family cave had at least both shelter from the rain and protection from the Flins. Hah, no more Flin troubles tonight, or so I thought.

When I got to the Ocean it was fully dark. I lifted the vines covering an old canoe with its paint chipped and wood splintered, and then I slid it soundly into the water. I paddled maybe seventy-five or so meters. I stood on a tall rock, however this was no ordinary rock, for it was a hidden cave, the family cave home, except for the two rotting bodies in the back.

I dreamed about Zach. He had always been the greatest brother ever, or so I tried remembering. He was 15 back then. I never had to be strong when he had been alive. He had no fear. I had fear because he had no fear. I remember the shark bit his head off for lunch! I wanted to commit suicide too back then, now that both my mother and brother had died, but Pa held me back. Now with Pa gone on a month long expedition that he did not return from, the only reason I didn’t sacrifice myself to the Flins or jump into the ocean was because I had to look after Zoe. I could not lose another family member or I’d be alone with only the Flins to keep me company. Then it hit me: Zoe! Where was Zoe? Then I snapped awake.

Zoe

“Where is he, that no good scoundrel, of a trouble maker, of a brother. I swear he is trying to starve me. Well with no dinner I better get to bed,” I told Mango my pet parrot. As I lay down staring at the stars I thought about the huge meal Jack was probably forging as a surprise combination of both dinner and breakfast. I sighed. Nothing was wrong, maybe he was just sleeping with mom and Zach in the family cave. Brrr, that place gave me the creeps. I closed my eyes and counted parrots who looked like Mango. I loved Mango. I dreamed about my last birthday, when my dad went on another expedition and got me Mango. Jack got a knife. Good times, I thought. Good times. Then I was awakened by the sound of crackling fire and the burnt smell of smoke.

I looked down. The Flins were burning the tree! I climbed down just in time but the ape skin I was wearing around my body got slightly burned. I may have escaped the fire but I did not escape the Flins when they piled on top of me, I wanted to bite like a shark, trick like a fox, but I did not because that’s what the Flins did, and no matter if they sacrificed me or my brother, I am not a Flin.

I woke up chained to the ground by a tree stump. This was torture. I knew something the Flins wanted. This was torture at its worst level. I knew this torture. In the five years I was a Flin I went to school where I learned about the Flins’ savage ways. Torture was one of them, and this was the Flins favorite kind of torture.

A crate of ants was placed to the ground on my left. Then the Leader of the Flins, who every Flin just called “Leader,” stood over me and asked me where my father went. I knew I was in trouble as soon as he said that. I had no idea where my father went. My only chance of being set free was to make up a believable lie. However, I had to act like my father told me never to tell where he was going. This meant I would have to survive the first round of torture.

I closed my eyes and shook my head. The Leader let about fifty ants out and poured a jar of honey on me. I never liked honey much. Jack loved it, he said it was sweet. I thought honey was bittersweet. Despite my protests the Flins loved honey, and they loved to use it in this torture. I thought pouring the honey on might actually be more scary then when the ants started to slowly eat me alive. I was wrong. It was just the first few seconds when I thought up a lie to use. I said that my Pa really had never left the island and he was just hiding from the Flins. The Flins did not believe this lie and the Leader poured half the ant farm on top of me. I was too worn out to think and I said the one truth I did know. I blurted out that my Pa was really just trying to find the bigger island.

The Leader stared at me then said, “Ok, I believe you.”

He unchained me and poured a bucket of water on me which took care of the ants but still not the sticky honey. He then said that he would let me go if I promised to become a Flin for the second time in my life.

I said “I’d rather you just find the bigger island, your people can move there and my family can stay on this island.”

“Don’t you get it?” the Leader said, “The bigger island is a myth. Your father was very foolish to go on a suicide mission into shark infested waters.”

“My father was an intelligent man and you know what I think, I think that my father’s going to find that myth of an island and that you won’t even listen to him and my family’s going to live on the bigger island while you Flins starve on this one.”

“Don’t you get it?” Leader interrupted. “I am your family.”

“That’s what you think,” I snarled back. “The Flins are not my family.”

“I am both a part of the Flins and your family, just like you are, Zoe.”

“No you do not get this I am not related to you, Leader.”

“Yes you are,” Leader whispered. “Zoe, I am your Grandfather.”

Jack

“Zoe,” I called. “Zoe.” Where is she? I thought. Oh no, the tree was burnt. I climbed up the tree and I saw her hammock with Mango in it, besides that empty. Mango looked sad.

Mango then croaked “You filthy brother, you brother.”

I sighed. These were one of the consequences when your sister had a pet parrot. I said goodbye to Mango because I had a strong feeling I might never see her again. I climbed down the tree and ran off to rescue my sister.

I knew the setup of the Flins camp by heart, for I used to live there. I ran straight into the camp and spotted a whole colony of ants swimming in sticky honey. Hopefully, I thought that was left from when someone stole from the Flin store. I ran, adrenaline pumping through my legs, helping me run faster. I went straight into Leader’s tent. Zoe was in the corner tied up and gagged. She made a tiny shooing motion with her hand. I put a finger to her lips and pulled out the present I had gotten from my father after he went on his last voyage. It was a knife. However it was a very sharp knife, and it was made out of some material that glinted silver in the moonlight. Only Leader had a knife, and his was made of bone.

I struck past the first rope freeing Zoe’s right hand, then I struck down on the knot around her right knee then I cut up the left side and Zoe was free. She hugged me then I pulled her gag away and I screamed, for Zoe’s tongue had been cut off.

The sound of the scream carried throughout the Flins camp and pretty soon we were surrounded. The Flins were preparing a feast because they had decided to sacrifice young Zoe for the second time in her life!  I pulled out my knife and made a swinging motion. All the Flins took a couple steps back and then I quickly, unexpectedly spun around and chopped a hole through the back of the hut. Then I ran, pulling Zoe along with me while behind us the splintering hut collapsed.

I knew exactly where to go: the family cave. I knew Zoe would hate it there but it was our only chance to escape the Flins. We ran, the Flins nipping at our heels just like little dogs would. I knew even before we got there we could not ride the canoe, we would have to chance it by  swimming in shark infested waters. Then the ocean came into view, and I knew we would never make it. But then I started fighting my eyes. I could not believe what I was seeing. My Pa was waiting for us in a brand new canoe. Zoe and I jumped in, and my dad rushed out and slashed Leader in the chest.

Then the Leader took one last wild swing with his knife and got Pa right in the head. Now both of my parents were dead. Zoe started to cry because she could no longer talk. I then took it upon myself to be strong, the fear no longer haunted me. As we paddled off the island I looked at a map that Pa had left in the canoe. It gave us all the information we needed to find the bigger island. To find a home.

Fear the Fuzzy

A long time ago, there lived a colony of ducks. They were the kindest, sweetest animals of all time. They were led by king Quacks-A-Lot, a wise king. Though all the birds were generous and trusting, the exception was Prince Elrond the Fuzzy. The prince of the colony had only one goal: to rule the world. The king rejected his son’s dark desires and locked him up in the confines of a castle. The need for power residing inside the heir to the throne was to powerful. One night, Elrond broke out the window and escaped on a quest to rule the world!

The Prince of Adorability would face many perils on his way to the farm big city, where he would begin his rise to power both economically & politically. First he tripped, causing him to get a rock lodged in his fuzzy windpipe, he had to hit himself repeatedly before the rock was launched out of his mouth, and landing with a thump on a boulder.

Then, Elrond came face to face with JJ the Cute, a wandering hero and his chicken arch-nemesis. They met in Boulder Road, a short distance from the city. The two decided to settle their differences once and for all with a fuzzy face off! Elrond lept upon the back of JJ who tossed him at a boulder, then Elrond tossed a rock at his enemy, the resulting impact knocked him out. “Fear the fuzzy! Fear it!” screamed Elrond, with a webbed foot on his rival’s fainted body.

After much walking a cow fell out of the sky. It was completely random and would forever stay unexplained, but a dead cow nearly crushed everyone’s favorite fuzzy villain. After a short moment of disbelief, elrond walked on to the Farm Big City, Moo York.

Shortly after arriving in Moo York, Elrond noticed that the election for senator would be held soon, and then it hit him, “I should run for senator, then eventually for president, and wage a full scale nuclear war with all other countries so I can rule the world!” So, the prince got his name on the ballot and, being a prince, thought politics would be easy. He was soon corrected.

He got the latest poll. “What? I’m only second, Piggy Piggerton is in first? That guy is such a loser. I know, I’ll send an attack ad out against Piggerton.” That’s exactly what he did. The attack ad wiped Piggerton from the race, but all his voters joined the Moo Cow campaign instead. “More ads! More false accusations! I need to win!” Once again the attack ad worked and, being the only candidate left Elrond the Fuzzy became the senator of Moo York.

After a couple months of being senator and earning the people’s trust, Elrond went and put his name on the ballot for president, 2016. His main opponents were Ted Moos, and his former political rival, Piggy Piggerton. But through horrible comments and disgusting remarks, our villain got himself on top. With the primaries almost over, Elrond thought that this election was in the bag. “This election is in the bag!” Elrond said to his campaign manager, Angelica Armadillo one night.

“Um… sir, you might want to see this.” Said Angelica turning on the TV. On it was a vicious attack ad against him from Piggy Piggerton!

“Do you want a fuzzy nutjob running the Moonited States of Ameriduck? No, you don’t. So vote for Ham, because yes we can! I’m Piggy Piggerton and I approved this message.”

“This is an absolute outrage. He’s beating me now,” exclaimed Elrond. “I know, I’ll challenge him to a duel before the primaries end.” So he did. Elrond beat him up in front of a crowd, after which Piggy exited the race.

After the primaries, the fuzzy prince had won, and then, he easily defeated his opponent is the nationals, Moo Cow, another old political rival. Now Elrond the Fuzzy is president of the Moonited States of Ameriduck, the MSA.

Now that he was president, Elrond hatched a plan to start the Third World War, aggravate our allies, and attack our enemies. It was simple. One day Elrond was arguing with a political enemy when the enemy tripped, he helped him up and looked up to see… a camera. “There goes my evil image!” Elrond told Angelica after the meeting.  

“Actually, that might be a good thing, Erond,” Angelica stated matter-of-factly.

“Why?” Elrond asked.

“Because now your popularity among the non-evil population went up!”

“Cool,” Elrond said. Later that day Elrond had a realization. He controlled an extremely large portion of the world right now, so maybe he should just be president of the MSA for now. But when he’s older… look out world, you’d better fear the fuzzy.

The Village

“Afia, go tend to your sick brother!” my mother shouted, as she plucked the chicken whose distinct smell filled our crumbling mud brick home.

As I sat on the quilt that was temporarily my and my mother’s bed, I listened to the sound of ambulances carrying more corpses to their burial area. My heart began to sink. I wish this were a dream…

“Yes, maman.”

I grabbed a protective suit that I stole from the local market. It consisted of a trash bag, duct tape, goggles, gloves, and a swimming cap. I slipped the suit on very quickly and crawled up to my brother Abioye, who had been fighting the Boag virus. I did this with extra precaution because I didn’t want to disturb him in his sleep. I crept in closer and closer until I was right above him. I put one hand on his shoulder and whispered Réveillez-vous in his ear – that means “wake up.”

My brother didn’t move. He just lay there, lifelessly. I let out a shriek and ran to the village’s spigot – or doctor – where my mother was washing the chicken for dinner.

“Maman, Abioye is lifeless! He… he… he… died.”

“What?!” she screamed, falling backwards onto the bumpy dirt road and bursting into tears, which made an ocean around her.  As soon as we got home that night, she ran into Abioye’s room and kissed him, hoping that it would wake him up.

I stood a great distance away and shouted, “Maman, don’t do that! It’s very dangerous – you could get the virus!”

She turned and hit me with one of Abioye’s wooden dolls. I gasped for air. The pain was almost unbearable as I ran to the makeshift bathroom, and I rubbed my cheek with the backs of my cracked hands. My palms were aching for some oil. As I pondered how Maman could do such a horrible thing, I realized that her anger was actually grief and despair.

That night, I woke to the sound of my mother’s extreme gagging. Oh no, I thought, my mother has contracted the Boag virus

Ever since my father was killed trying to fight Islamic Rebels, my mother has become very protective of her kids. I have tried to step up by taking on more responsibility in our home, such as doing more house chores, helping watch over Abioye, and being a sort of village doctor. Even though I am 16 years old and have no professional medical experience, numerous hospitals in the area have rejected our sick due to overcrowding, and I must help in any way I can.

Before the outbreak, president Aimee Bello didn’t prepare us; she only prepared the wealthier towns. Everyday, when tending to the “rejects,” I pose a serious health risk myself.

I was sitting on the floor in the sparse room that I shared with Abioye before he fell ill. I realized that I should not reuse the same protective suit, because it had Abioye’s germs on it and, consequently, the virus too. I would have to bleach it to kill the virus,  but, since I don’t have the resources, I would have to burn it instead. I grabbed the oil and the match and gathered the grass in one pile. I lit the match and then dumped the oil in one area. A big wave of heat blew towards me. I grabbed a nearby stick and tossed it on the suit, and then I got a cloth to cover my mouth with so that I would not breathe in the fumes. After the suit was done burning, I had to figure out how to get another one…

I crept up to the market door that creaked every time somebody opened it…This would make the task a whole lot harder. While I was grabbing all of the items, I began to get frantic. I bumped into a crate of coconuts and made a loud thud noise, which caused the owner to notice me.

Arrêtez! Arrêtez! Arrêtez! Stop!” screamed the enraged owner.

I ran and ran until I got to my doorstep, where my mother was wearily washing our well-worn clothes by hand.

“Maman, go inside! You are in the early stages of the Boag Virus!” I said, alarmed.

“Afia, these clothes won’t wash themselves.” she responded, clearly determined.

“Hey, Afia,” she hesitated. “I have a question. Why were you at the market?” my mother asked in a firm voice.

“Um, Maman, I had to get the protective gear to cure the ill villagers.”

“Where did you get the money from?”

I felt like I was getting interrogated, little droplets of sweat rolled down my thin face. I took a big gulp, and in a crackly unsure voice I answered her.  

“I stole again…It was for a good cause, though.” I responded in a guilty voice.

“Shame on you…”

I convinced Maman to lay in Abioye’s shady room. I slowly backed into our cooking area and suited up for the day’s work.

I walked down a light brown dirt road that led me to Ms. Okafor’s round house. I walked right in because Ms. Okafor was not able to get up. In a weak voice, Ms. Okafor asked me for a glass of guava juice.

While I was hooking up medication to her arm, a young villager, who was very skinny and had big round eyes, came to the door and said that Maman was in deep distress and coughing up clots of blood. My Maman was knocking on death’s door.

My First Earthquake

CHAPTER ONE

“A huge tornado is coming, so be prepared,” the weather people were saying on my TV in my room. Even though it was sort of a big deal, they didn’t have a new expression on their faces. Only the same ones that they had every day when they were talking about the president going to, like, Israel or something like that. But this was sort of big. Not as big as a earthquake.

I took a bathroom break, and as I was washing my hands, I heard something like very serious damage to the state. Quick as a flash I dried my hands, unlocked and opened the door, sprinted back to my room, and hurled myself onto my bed. Two things happened then. Number one: the expression on the weather people’s faced had changed severely. Number two: the people had just said something that made my heart sink. I’ll repeat it for you even though it might make me a little uncomfortable. Okay, here we go: An earthquake is headed right to where my family lives in Los Angeles.

AN EARTHQUAKE!!! Don’t people die in these kinds of things? Both my older brother and my younger brothers are autistic and it is hard. They were both screaming at my poor mother who had to look after them while an Earthquake was about to explode. I decided to help out, because with no Father my mom can sometimes wish we weren’t there, but she has a kind heart so I don’t think that she would really give us up to some orphanage.

“Tessa, can you come down here to help me?”

I plopped off my bed, thinking of when to tell her about the terrible news that I did not want to talk about at this moment, thank you very much. When I reached the kitchen, there was food everywhere. I decided not to tell her the news just by the strained expression on her face. Also, it might not have been the best idea not to tell her because if she found out that there was an earthquake and that I knew about and that I didn’t tell her there would not be some happy, smiling faces.

“So what do you need help with?” I asked.

She seemed to be trying to clean up from dinner but I could always be wrong. “Cleaning up from dinner and getting the boys to the basement to talk about this upcoming earthquake. I have some big news that may not be the best.”

Okay, I was a little bit worried right here but I wanted my mom to have at least one good child so I did as she asked. When we were all settled in the basement “main room,” my mother started.

“Okay, this is really hard for me, but will be the hardest for you all.”

I sucked in my breath so hard into my soul that lung started to hurt and I got a little dizzy. When I found my breath again I asked her, “What is it, Mother?”

My brothers chimed in too. “Yeah, what is it, Mother?”

I couldn’t tell if they were mimicking me or wanted her to go on but I found it annoying either way. “Alright, I’ll say it, even though I will probably cry. But I’ve made up my mind and there is nothing in the world that will make me change my mind. I think it’s for the best. Okay, I’m going to have to let you guys go to an orphanage.”

CHAPTER TWO

This was the worst thing that could ever have happened to me. I felt like screaming my lungs out which is exactly what I tried to do.

“WHAT!!!” I screamed at her. I wanted to cry. I had expected her to say something like, “Calm down, Tessa, it’s no big deal,” because usually she didn’t understand what was a big deal and what wasn’t, but she didn’t say anything. I think by saying this she had realized that with a family like ours a lot of things were a big deal to me.

Something that did not help my brain think was the fact that my brothers kept saying, “We go on vacation without Mommy.”

I tried to close my mouth to be quiet but my jaws forced against it. Tears welled up in my mother’s eyes and mine. I ran to her for dear life. She took me in her arms and held me. When I stopped shout-crying I looked her in the eye and said, “I’ll do anything. I’ll be the mother of this house for you. I’ll do the dishes make the dinner just please don’t give us up.”

“Oh I’m not giving you guys up,” she told me.

“You’re not?” I looked at her. Was she playing a joke on me? A terrible joke.

“No, I’m only giving you up.”

I didn’t understand that. My vision blacked, and I went falling to the ground.

***

I woke up by the motor of the car gliding on the earth. In just a moment we were arriving at the orphanage. I didn’t even remember saying goodbye to my family. The car came to a thundering halt.

I rubbed my eyes. They were teary. I must have cried in my sleep. The door opened and a teenage kid stepped out.

“Hello, are you here for the orphanage?”

I jumped out a little tingly from all the cramped stuff in there. “Um, yes, but I don’t want to talk about it right now. Are you the manager person?” I asked him, even though I knew that this would be a very weird and interesting orphanage.

“No. The current person who runs this orphanage is on his honeymoon. He just got married last week. He just recently suffered from a horrible wife and pretended to be dead, just because he hated his wife. It is a very interesting story about his three kids and how his wife kicked him out without being able to say goodbye to his children. Anyway, I am a normal orphan and am happy to tell you all about my story. Oh, almost forgot, I’m Logan by the way.” He shook my hand.

“Um, I’m Tessa. My father died and my mother threw me out for no apparent reason.” I turned around to look at the car. It was my last way to get back home. But it was drifting away into the forest. Logan took my bags and led me inside for a tour. I looked around. It had looked like a cozy place to live.

“So in here is the dining room and here is where our manager works,” he said pointing to a chair with armrests. “And here,” he led me into a room with multiple cot beds, “is where we orphans all sleep together. Two more rooms. The kitchen and the chill room.”

He went away to leave me alone. I had not heard or paid attention to anything he had said because I was to focused on my plan to get out of this place. But I was really tired and I might as well spend one night here. I walked into the bedroom and set my bags down at a vacant cot. I lay down and closed my eyes and didn’t wake up till morning.  

CHAPTER THREE

Meanwhile back at Tessa’s original home, the mother had found out that her husband had not actually died and was seeking revenge from the lie. She was going to try to kill him without the autistic boys knowing that they have a father. She needed help of an ex-friend of her husband’s, but how?

***

Meanwhile at the orphanage, which was Tessa’s last home, the manager, a.k.a. the person who owned all the orphans, came back from his honeymoon in Europe, and Logan informed him that the newest arrival had run away and he described her life to him. Logan also reported that Tessa would be out all alone in the earthquake, which was due to happen any day now. The description that Logan gave Tessa about the manager was exactly a description as Tessa’s dad, and yes he was Tessa’s long lost dad.

CHAPTER FOUR

Now back to me. The weather had picked up a little and got chilly and windy. I didn’t mind. I never thought that she would be hearing about the earthquake in my own home and then experiencing it as a runaway orphan. But I knew the truth: I would die in this earthquake. It was funny to think about that I had been scared about the earthquake when I would have been inside my regular home but now I was outside with no specific home. When I couldn’t run any further, I stopped to take a rest at a rocky beach. Then a thought struck in my brain. I’m not going to tell you because it is going to be a surprise. I untied a boat from the dock and jumped in. I had never kayaked before, but that doesn’t mean that I’m bad at it. I looked around for a something to steer myself with and I found this long stick with flipper things on the end. I was about halfway in the ocean when a whirling noise arose.

The start of the EARTHQUAKE. I paddled faster, thinking I would not be at the first Island in time. But I don’t even know why I was thinking that because I was going to die anyway so why don’t I just suck it up and let it happen now? But something in me made me want to go so I tried to force it down but it surged up to fight the rest of my other ideas so I was headed to the island. Suddenly I thought I was so close to the island that I almost reached out to touch it.

BUMP. The front of my boat hit the sand slope of the island. I got out and huddled next to the palm tree. It was so windy that mist that turned into tears glided down my cheeks and onto the marshy sand at my feet. I minded this time. I wanted to be in my own home with my own whole family and my mom not being evil.

“Tessa,” the wind whispered in my ear.

I sat up, alert.

“Tessa,” it said again louder this time. I looked to see where it was coming from. In the fog ahead was a tall figure in a boat coming right towards me. I braced myself feeling a little bit threatened. He came closer and I say who it was. It was someone very identical to the last picture is saw of my dad and then it hit me, he was my dad!! He stood up in his boat and that like a cue for me to stand up, too.

“Tessa,” he shouted through cupped hands.

“Dad… ” I said, not because I was one hundred percent sure that he was my dad, but just to see if he responded to that. He did and once reached me he ran to me and swung me into his arms. I didn’t need to know if he was my father. The way he had picked me up in my arms was the only way he has ever picked me up and nobody had done it that way. That is how I knew he was my true father.

“How did you find me?” I asked when he put me down.

“Logan said he had found a missing boat, and that I should try to look for you here,” he smiled down at me.

“So you came out all this way in and earthquake just for me.” I felt proud to have a dad like mine.

“Oh, yeah about that earthquake, um, we need to get to the orphanage right away or else we’ll die, and I don’t think you really want to die.”

My dad didn’t look worried, but I think he might be but he doesn’t let me know if there’s anything to worry about.

“You guys can come back home and live with us the way we were always meant to be.” A familiar voice echoed around the island.

“Mom?”  I asked.

“Linda?” my dad was confused. “Where are you?” all three of us said at the same time.

Dad and I said we were on the other side of the island and the my mother appeared, running to us. We both held our arms out and she ran into them. Then we all went home.

The End

You may be wondering what happened with the earthquake, and I’ll tell you. My family spent it in our basement sitting, laughing and drinking hot chocolate while the wind was roaring hard in the whole sky about our neighborhood streets.

The Real End

Excerpt from Aliens Attack

Part One

I heard an explosion in the distance. I did not know what was going on or what I was going to do. The aliens were attacking. They were invading Earth. My friend and I were hiding in a cave in the Catskill Mountains with our family. I felt so bad because I had a secret that I had not told my family. My friend Melha was not human. She was an outcast of the alien tribe who was invading Earth. Also, the aliens could take on human form.
A couple days ago, my real friend Melha and I were at school before the invasion happened when there was a loud explosion. The aliens came into the school and aimed a gun at me, but Melha took the bullet for me. I fell onto her body and cried my heart out. I had to kill them for Melha. She was a true friend. To this day, I will honor Mela’s sacrifice.

But the worst thing about the alien invaders was that they could only die from one mineral named Zoink Noink. Zoink Noink is a rare, neon green and neon yellow colored mineral. Luckily, there were three orbs of Zoink Noink located on Earth. The only way I knew about this was because I had a big book of minerals and their legends. I was not really sure if this rock existed, but it was worth finding.

Earlier today, I was in the mines mining, and I saw a lime-ish light. I dug deeper and deeper, until I found an orb of Zoink Noink. I was overjoyed. I had a quick idea: I could craft a sword and slay aliens with the sword. But it was a totally a crazy idea because how was I going to craft a sword with nothing that crafts a sword in my possession? There was one way to get my materials: to go to the crashed alien ship and use the materials there to craft a sword. But there were aliens guarding the area, so no human could go in. I had to risk it for Melha. But how was I going to get out of our cave? There was only one way: I could ask Mela’s alien to take my form while I gone.

“Melha, can you take my form while I am gone?” I asked.

“Yes, but what for?” said Melha.

“I have to craft a sword and slay the aliens with it. Thank you,” I said while I bolted out of the cave.

When I got to the ship, I saw an alien walking away from the ship. I walked up to him, and I stabbed him in his heart. His face looked shocked. He was really surprised by the Zoink Noink mineral. He died. I felt bad for a second, but then I thought, This is for Melha. I took his clothes and smeared his blood and guts all over my body. I looked and smelled horrible, but it was a good disguise. Hopefully, it would work. I walked into the spaceship, and everything was going smoothly… for now.

I saw the sword crafting room, and I bolted to the room so fast. I saw the anvil and the hammer. The anvil was black. The top was very flat and high. The hammer didn’t look like it had come from Earth. It was blue and very easy to use. I flattened down the Zoink Noink and made it into the shape of a sword. I was sweating very hard, but at least the sword was complete. But I needed a handle. I saw an epic, silver handle on the wall. I yanked it off the wall, and I put it in my sword. I was surprised that it was a perfect fit. Now I had the ultimate sword.

Oh! Aliens were coming, and I had taken off my disguise already. I grabbed my sword and knew the aliens would not hurt me if I had the sword. I realized just then that it was not a crashed spaceship I was on. Computers were beeping everywhere, and there were a lot of aliens everywhere. Why would a lot of aliens and broken computers be on a crashed a spaceship? I was on the main control center of the aliens!

I was not even sure anymore if I could get out of the ship. And I could not even use a sword. So I had to get out. I saw two vents. One of the vents went to the main control room, and one led outside, probably to get the bad smell of the aliens out. Wait, what? How could I see though the walls? I knew one person who had that power. Melha, the alien. I knew how I got this power: when Melha touched me, it gave me the power.

But I didn’t care about that power now; I only cared about getting out. I banged my sword against the vent. I crawled out, but fell into the dump. Eww! It smelled so bad in there. I got out of the dumpster, and I ran all the the way home. But I didn’t know the aliens were following me. I ran into the cave, screaming that I could defeat the aliens and that we could take back our home. But I felt a slimy touch on my back. I turned around and saw an alien invader.

Wait! Oh no! There were twenty alien invaders. Counting the Emperor.

“Wait! I thought I had killed that girl,” screamed the Emperor.

“No,” said Melha’s mother. “She is not dead.”

“Yes, she is,” I said softly. “At school, the day the invasion happened, Melha got shot by a bullet.”

“Why did you not tell us, Jackool?” screamed her father.

“I did not want to worry you,” I said. “That matters not now.” I took my sword and killed five of the aliens.

“Ekkkkk! No, he has the sword!” shrieked the aliens.

I threw the sword and sliced another ten in half. Five were left alive. The Emperor snuck out the back and took my mom. I was too focused on killing the aliens, I didn’t notice he left. I finally killed them all.

I yelled, “Is everyone okay? Where is my mama?”

The emperor must have taken her when he fled. I had to find him. I had an idea where he went.

Long Live King George!

There once was a stapler. His name was George. George was very stubborn. Because of that, he never, ever, ever wanted to staple a piece of paper again.

One year in George’s life, all of his staples were used by a human in a school, so he became very ill. He was sent to the hospital for staplers. The hospital was haunting to staplers because the doctors and nurses were humans. All staplers thought humans were terrible things because the leader of all staplers (the king stapler) also ran out of staples (from stapling lots of the Decision Committees’ papers together) and didn’t live through the walk to the stapler hospital. The doctor couldn’t save him. The old king’s name was King Hoxlin. He was a wonderful king, and everyone loved him. He might have lived if he had a queen. The queen would have been the one to save him.

Because there was no leader of the staplers anymore, everything became so chaotic. Tests were starting to be taken for who should be the next king of all staplers. George tried to take the test, but he couldn’t until his staples were replaced.

George took the secret tunnel from his cave to the hospital. He saw the light of the hospital at the end of the tunnel. He stepped into the light of the giant hospital. He looked up at the bright, square lights on the high ceiling. Before he knew it, he was being dragged into a room by a doctor and two nurses.

“Sit here,” said the doctor pointing to a chair. Humans knew exactly how to cure staplers because they had so much experience. George sat down. The doctor left the room. One of the nurses, named Ms. Doctor, went rummaging through a closet. The other nurse, named Ms. Patient, got out her clipboard and a pencil.

She asked George, “What’s your name?”

“George,” answered George.

“Age?”

“10.”

“Leader?”

“Well… I don’t exactly have one.”

“Huh,” said Ms. Patient, and wrote an X next to the word “leader.”

That poor pencil. And that paper, George thought. The pencil losing its tip, and the paper getting scribbled on.

“Hello, George!” said the cheery doctor, walking back into the room. “I’m Doctor Nurse! You can call me Doc.”

“Hi,” said George nervously.

“I have your new staples,” said Doc. “If you would come with me, I will bring you to them.”

“Okay,” said George. He and Doc walked down a long hall until they came to another little room. There was a table in the room, and on the table, there were some staples.

“Here they are!” said Doc.

A few minutes later, George walked out of the hospital back into the tunnel, good as new. George felt his way through the darkness until he was finally back home. George looked over at the tables where one took the test. The line was now curving around the whole cave.

I guess I’ll have to wait in this ginormous line, thought George.

He walked over to the end of the line and stood there looking into space. The line was so long that George slept in it for three nights, and finally, finally, he was at the front! He sat down at the table and looked at the test on a piece of paper.

Q: How will you improve our lives?

A: I will make sure we never get hurt with extra security, and I will make all of our lives fair.

Q: What will you change?

A: There will be a queen so that more work can be done.

Q: Do you think you are capable of being king?

A: Yes.

The next day the king was announced by the Decision Committee (George’s sister Ellie, his mom Amanda, and some other staplers) who had made the decision the night before. The decision for who was going to be king was fair because it was anonymous.

On stage, the Decision Committee was setting up the podium. George saw Ellie. She was wearing a long, blue dress over her black, metal body. Her long, blonde hair was tied into a bun. She had a pretty, blue flower next to the bun. She was wearing a long, pearl necklace with a diamond in the middle of it. There was sparkly, blue eye shadow over her eyes. Amanda wore an orange dress with white flowers. Her hair was a long and flowing gold. She was wearing a necklace of emerald.

All the staplers crowded together.

“The king is… GEORGE!!!”

A cheer went up in the crowd. Surprised, George got up on stage, smiling. His mother took the golden crown from the red, velvet pillow. She placed it on his head, acting more joyful than he had ever seen her.

“Long staple, King George!” cried his mother.

“LONG STAPLE, KING GEORGE!” repeated the crowd of staplers.  

“Well done, King,” said Ellie, handing him an envelope. He opened it up. It said:

Dear King George,

Congratulations! I am super proud of you! I think that you will make this place amazing. I am excited for that! I read your test and I think you really are capable of doing this. I think that the idea about the queen is really smart. Because I am part of the Decision Committee, I have some ideas of who your queen could be because I think that they would help. Here they are:

Lilly

Stephanie

Abby

Danielle

Lindsay

Chloe

If you don’t want to have any of them as queen, it’s okay with me. The Decision Committee and I also decided that because you said that you wanted extra security, we will apply it. If you need help, you can always ask me.

Love,

Ellie

“Thanks Ell,” said George.

“You’re welcome, King George.”

That day, there was a dinner party set up for the new king. It was in the Dining Hall. There was a big chandelier over the table. It lit up the dark room. George was at one head of the table, and Ellie was at the other. George sat in a chair that looked more like a throne. It was wooden with dark patterns on it. There was a pillow on the seat of the chair that was red velvet like the pillow that held the crown. It had golden lace on the edges and green jewels connected to the lace. There was also silver thread that sewed the pillow together. It could’ve been the fanciest pillow in the world. For dinner, there was chicken, pasta, and meatballs. For dessert, there was a cake that said Congrats!, some cupcakes, fruit, and frozen yogurt. It was a fantastic meal.   

The next day, King George joined the Decision Committee meeting.

“I would like to have Sara as my queen. I didn’t like any of the choices on the card,” he said. George had known Sara his whole life and they were always friends. “She would help with everything I wanted to do. I mean, the things I wrote about on the test. How about this: We give her a test to see if she can do the things that she would have to do as queen.”

“Alright, King George. Should we get started on making the test?” asked one stapler in the Committee.

“Yes. You should.”

Everyone in the Committee meeting walked out of the office, except George and Ellie.

“Come on, King,” she said. George got up and left the room with Ellie.

That night there was another dinner celebration for King George.

The next day, the test was ready for Sara. She was pretending to sleep, but she couldn’t get away with her trick. It was time… time for torture. Sara got out of bed and got dressed slowly. She was stalling. She went to the Decision Committee’s office, and there, sitting on the table, was the paper that had the test… the dreadful test. Sara started.

It had been an hour and twenty seven minutes. She had three minutes left.

“I need to hurry up!” said Sara, rushing more than ever. Her time was running out!

“Time’s up!” said George, entering the room.

“Here,” said Sara, handing him the test, feeling incredibly nervous.

That night, the Decision Committee looked over the test.

“She messed up,” said Amanda.

“And she didn’t finish,” added Ellie.

“B-b-but,” said George “No! She will be my queen if I want her to! I’m king, so it’s my choice! Remember, my choice! No more of your terrible decisions! The end!” He stormed out of the room. The Decision Committee and their office was silent. Completely silent. All except for the ticking of the clock on the wall.

Later that night, King George saw Ellie. ‘“Um, Ellie… Listen, I’m really sorry. Can I, well, um, still be king?”

Ellie nodded.

“Good. I mean, thanks.”

Ellie nodded again and walked away.

“Ellie… ”

In bed, George said to himself, “I can’t have Ellie mad at me, not with her on the Decision Committee. What have I done… what have I — zzzzzz.”

“Did you hear what happened yesterday, Queen Sara?” asked King George when he saw Sara the next morning.

“No, I — what?! Did you say ‘queen’?” asked Sara.

“Mmhmm,” he said.

They looked at each other down the long hall.

“You are a wonderful king,” said Sara.

“And you will be a wonderful queen,” said George.

EPILOGUE

       Two months later

It was the wedding day of King George and Queen Sara. There were food and drinks. It was so much fun! There were dancing staplers and singing staplers. King George went over to Ellie.

“Um… Ellie?”

“Yeah?”

“Are you still mad at me?”

“Not really.”

“Okay, but really, I’m sorry. I didn’t want to hurt your feelings or anything. I just thought that because I’m king, I get to choose my queen. When I said all that stuff, I didn’t really mean it. Do you forgive me? It’s okay if — ”

“Yes, of course,” she said, interrupting him in a nice way. And they both smiled.

Travels in Time: Rosie in the Revolution

Chapter One

Homework done?

Check!

Piano played?

Check!

This was the short checklist Rosie Lubliner mentally went through every time she wanted to time travel. This 9-year-old, unusually clever, inventive girl had actually created the very first time machine. She loved her brand new invention. She had accidentally invented it after she had finished her homework. One day, she was messing around, trying to build a time machine… then she went in and just pressed some buttons, and it worked. She had been so excited.

Rosie stepped inside the giant box, and pressed some buttons. Her time machine was a big metal box. It was a very simple machine. It had five buttons in it, and a keypad for typing in what year you wanted to go to.

She shut her eyes, and wondered what it would be like to live during the time of the American Revolution. The last time she had time traveled, Rosie had accidentally changed Egyptian history. A couple of days before his actual death, a pyramid had fallen on King Tut’s head. This time, hopefully things would stay as they were intended to.

The sharp buzzing sound shook Rosie back into the present, or rather, the past. The doors to the time machine opened and said two words: Thirteen colonies.

Rosie nervously stepped outside. The geeky girl had traveled to 1765, which was the time of the Stamp Act. She knew that this time was a dangerous one. The Patriots HATED the Stamp tax. People were tarred and feathered every day. Stamps were burned on the streets. Angry mobs attacked tax collectors.

A deep loud voice startled her out of her day dream. “Hello! I’m John Baker, fighter in the Continental Army. Who art thou?”

“Um… Er… Uhh…” In all of her time-travel experiences, nobody had ever spoken directly to her, nor had anyone asked her name. “I’m Rosie. Rosie Lubliner.”

“Hello, Rosie Lubliner. Art thou a patriot?”

“Yes… er… certainly.”    

“Wonderful,” John Baker said. “But the battlefield is no place for a young girl such as you. Let me lead you to a safe place.”

“Okay.” Even though she wanted to see action, she didn’t want to die!

“Follow me.” So Rosie followed John. He lead her to a horse cart. “I will take it upon myself to lead you to Pennsylvania. I have a friend named Benjamin Franklin who works at the gazette.”

Rosie was thrilled. What could be better than meeting an all-time famous man who was practically the hero of the American Revolution? She jumped at the chance.

“Sure! I would love to! I think I have heard of him.”

“Splendid. He is quite a nice man,” John Baker replied. Little did he know that his friend Benjamin Franklin was soon to be world-famous.

The carriage bumped along the dirt path for a good three hours.

This future Militia leader sure is nice! she thought.

When John and Rosie arrived in Pennsylvania, she was so tired she could have fallen asleep while she was walking. But then she caught a glimpse of Ben Franklin, and she straightened.  

OMG, OMG, OMG!!! Rosie was super excited. She loved Benjamin Franklin. He was her idol. After all, he was a founding father! And a great inventor, just like her! She was so psyched to meet him.

“Hello, young lady. I am Benjamin Franklin,” Benjamin said. “What art thou name?”

“Hello! I’m Rosie! Rosie Lubliner,”  Rosie said.

“Benjamin, would it be okay if Rosie stayed here and helped you with the gazette?” John Baker asked.

“Why, yes! I would be delighted to have such a lovely young lady working in my shop.”

“Farewell, Rosie,” John said.

“Goodbye,” Ben and Rosie spoke at the same time.

Rosie looked around the gazette shop. She glanced at the printing press. It looked so cool. So old fashioned. It was the original Benjamin Franklin printing press! It was so awesome to see it in person when it was still being used! The press was big and wooden. She touched it. It felt smooth.

“Rosie, would you like to print this piece that I just wrote?” Benjamin asked Rosie

“Um… okay. But I don’t know how to use one,” she said.

“I shall teach thou, then.”

“Okay!” Rosie was thrilled to learn how to use a real printing press from the 1700s!

There was a moment of silence between them.  

“Are you any good at writing?” Ben asked suddenly.

Rosie blushed. She didn’t want to brag, even though, at school she aced every class, including language arts. “Uh… yes.”

Benjamin Franklin didn’t seem to notice her slight hesitation. “Wonderful. Then let us get started!”

 

Lorenza’s Eventful Day

I woke up excited.

“I GET TO SEE MY LITTLE CADENZA.”

I’m Lorenza if you didn’t notice! I ran off to Centa Academy as fast as possible, since I missed the flying shuttle. I snuck up behind her. “BOO!” I yelled, scaring Cadenza. She jumped pretty high. I took her hand and jumped up and down. “OH MY GLOB IT’S BEEN FOREVER.”

She looked pretty tired, but oh well. Cadenza grumbled pretty softly, ”Hey Lorenza.”

I waved ultra fast, showing my enthusiasm. “Aren’t you happy to see your bestest friend for beyond life!” I declared very loudly.

Her friends, or what I assumed were her friends, walked over. “Hi! Hi! Hi!” I greeted everyone jumping around in joy. They all shrugged and smiled except for two. The girl I believed whose name was Ruba was smiling extra wide with her dog in her arms. The girl named Ying came over.

”You look so nice!” I jumped around.

“You do toooooo!”

Later on in the day I woke up after taking a nap. I couldn’t help being excited again! I knocked on team Sera’s door which is where she normally is. “HEY GUYS WHAT’S DOWN,” I exclaimed. I hugged Cadenza extra, extra tight.

“Hey Lorenza, can you, like, give me air?”

I got off her. “Oh sorry Cade, just haven’t seen you in, like, forever.” I noticed Zwea. “Aw, hi little guy.” I kneeled down to his height. I chased him around the room wreaking havoc. “WEEEEEEEEEEEE.” This is more than I could ever ask for. After a while I got tired. I tucked myself inside an extra bed inside beacon. And off to sleep I went. “Zzzzzz squi squi squi squi. Zzzzz squi squi.”

Nikki’s Message

Violet stared at her screen, sighed, and buried her face in her hands, feeling stuck. What was she going to say to her best friend about the move? She wasn’t even sure what to tell herself. Suddenly, #ultra_giggles sent her an instant message.

“Hi Violet, it’s me, Nikki,” Violet read aloud.

She typed, “Hi, back,” and hit send.

“U have a creative IM name,” came the reply. That was sarcasm, of course. Her IM name was just simply Violet. Violet smiled and changed her IM username to “books4life”. She was the 5th grade’s #1 nerd. Nikki was the most popular, so since Violet was her best friend, it protected her from the usual treatment for nerds. No, Nikki wasn’t just Violet’s friend so that Violet could do her homework. Not once had Nikki asked Violet to do it for her. Instead, she only asked for help and guidance. The other popular girls could never figure it out.

Once, Miranda had complimented Nikki, “That’s smart, now that you have Violet, you don’t have to do school projects anymore.” Nikki had gotten so mad that Miranda isn’t part of the popular group anymore.

Nikki messaged, “So, about the move…😢”

Violet took a deep breath and poured her heart out. “Well, I’m not really sure what to tell myself. I’m mad at my dad for losing his job and getting another in London. He says London is going to be amazing, which is why he got a job there. I can’t believe he did that without even consulting me and mom. I’m afraid to leave my friends, but I guess I really have no choice. I’m afraid that without you, people will do horrible things to me, like what we see when we look at other nerds, who are teased and harassed. I know I’m afraid of a lot of things, but you would be too, if you were in my place. Yes, I also know that it’s not soft on you either because I’m your best friend and I’m moving, but I just hate that we might not ever see each other again.” She pressed send.

“Whoa. These heartfelt things are supposed to be for letters, not IM. And who said I was ur best friend? JK. I am.😄” replied Nikki. It may sound arrogant and annoying for other people, but Violet knew Nikki better than anybody. Nikki was just avoiding her own emotions. She often did this, especially because she liked discussing other people’s emotions rather than hers.

Even though the two friends lived next door, they were using IM just to get into the habit, since this is how they planned to keep in touch.

“Maybe we should text everyday at 4:30 pm so we’re not constantly asking ‘R u there’ and ‘Hello?’ over and over.”

“Now she was avoiding the move topic,” Violet thought. “It’s crazy how if you’re around someone for a long time you develop a sixth sense about what they’re thinking and doing.”

“Okay. Maybe. I still don’t know what my new schedule is, so it’s confusing sometimes. I have to go. See you at 4:30 pm tomorrow. I mean, text you.”

She didn’t really have to go, but Violet needed a break. She felt overwhelmed by the whole thing, even though they didn’t really touch on the main subject at all. She stood up and flopped on her bare bed. She stared at her sky-themed ceiling, the only thing that was the same as before in her room. Everything else was boxed up, ready to be imported to London.

She liked her home here in New York. She closed her eyes and remembered the terrible things she’d yelled at her dad earlier. “You could’ve got a job in New York too, you know!” and “It’s ALL your fault!” coursed through her mind.

She inhaled deeply, and sat up, looking around the room. She stood up and walked across the room and entered the hall. She took a look at the boxes and flew down the stairs, feeling sick of the brown boxes with “To London” scrawled across the tops, reminding her of what was to come, making it impossible to be happy.

She burst out of the front door and slammed it behind her and leaned against it, panting. She laid on the grass, and looked into the robin’s egg sky. Tomorrow, at this time, she would be in London already. Her family was boarding the plane in a few hours.  Just then, Nikki leaned over her vision. “Aaah!” cried Violet, scrambling to her feet. “Nikki! You scared me out of my skin!” she exclaimed.

“Hey, frieeeeeend!” Nikki laughed. “I just wanted to give you this.” She handed Violet a leather-bound book, then watching, amused, as Violet’s face turned from happy to shocked.

“OMG! This is so cool!” Violet hugged Nikki. “I can’t believe it! How did you get everyone’s picture?”

Nikki shrugged. “I know a lot of people.” She blushed. In the book were pictures of everyone Violet knew, reading, just as Violet usually was, with a note and a signature underneath. Nikki had written “U will always be a bookworm in my heart.😀–Nikki XOXO.” Violet smiled.

“I have something to give you, too. Wait here.” Then she ran inside the house and searched the crate of things that weren’t supposed to be packed, like the family’s backpacks, toothbrushes, and a framed picture. Violet took the picture and bolted down the hall and into the front lawn, where Nikki was sitting cross-legged, picking at the grass.

“Here.” She held out the picture frame and then it was her turn to watch Nikki’s reaction.

“Whoa. You still have it?” Nikki asked, eyes wide, clutching the picture. Violet shrugged. Nikki had drawn that picture in kindergarten, giving the finished product to Violet, insisting that she keep it, saying that it was the ugliest picture anyone had ever made in the whole wide world. Violet had accepted it, and because she thought it was rather pretty, stuck it on her bookshelf, and it had been there ever since. It consisted of Violet and Nikki in front of the tree they had planted together, all by themselves.

“VIOLET!!” came a voice from the house.

“Oh, that’s my mom,” said Violet, feeling sad that she might have to go.

“VIOLET!!!” the voice called.

“Coming!” Violet called back. “Listen, I have to go. I’ll see you after a few.” Then, she waved and dragged her feet back to the house, through the front door and into the kitchen, where her mom was cleaning out the cabinets.

“You know you can’t just go outside without telling me. That’s dangerous,” her mom said, eyes still trained on her task of packing the plates. The plates were the only things that weren’t packed up, but her mom was almost finished.

“I was only on the front lawn, so I technically wasn’t even off the property. I can take care of myself now, mom. We’re even moving to London.” Violet’s voice broke.

“Are you still mad at dad?”

Violet nodded to her mom’s question.

“Well, we’ll have to forgive him someday, and I’m sorry for you but you know, it’s hard on dad, too.” she gave Violet a hug, and Violet breathed in her mom’s scent deeply.

Then, remembering Nikki’s gift, she said, “Look, mom. Look at what Nikki gave me.” She held out the album and looked through it for a moment with her mom before adding, “And speaking of Nikki, I have to go to her house to say goodbye one more time.”

Her mom smiled sadly. “Alright. You go on then.”

Violet went outside and crossed the street, running up Nikki’s front steps. She had barely rang the doorbell before Nikki flung the front door wide open. She wasn’t smiling, but she wasn’t frowning either. She was there to embrace Violet, and she was there to support her when Violet started crying.  “I’ll miss you.”

“Me too. Work on your English accent for me.” Nikki tried to be firm.

“I will.” Violet’s voice was squeaky, and Nikki had never heard her voice like that before.

“Bye. IM me when you get on the plane. Hopefully there’s Wifi.” Nikki had a determined look on her face, as if she was bent on keeping her eyes dry. Violet nodded, wiping away tears. Nikki hugged Violet tighter.

“You’re hurting me.” Violet whispered.

“Let’s savor our last hug.”

“Okay.”

“I’ll really, really miss you. Don’t ever make another BFF. We have to stay best friends, promise me that.”

“I promise.”

“Good. Now go away before I start crying.”

“Your eyes are glassy.”

“I know.” Nikki smiled. Then she broke the hug and said, “Let’s do our handshake for the last time.” The two girls repeated the handshake that they made on the first day of their friendship, on the first day of preschool. Clap three times. Shake hands while pressing thumbs together. Fist bump. Turnaround and high five.

“Bye, V.” Nikki was crying now.

“Bye.” Violet was crying, too.

“IM me.”

“Okay.”

“Go now.” Nikki pushed Violet away, turning towards her front door.

“Bye, Nikki.”

“Bye.”

Violet ran towards her house, crying silently. That was the last time she would probably ever see Nikki in person. It was so overwhelming.

She skipped up the front steps and flung open her front door, face to face with her father.

Violet pretended not to see him, pushing past him and going up the stairs. Her dad yelled after her, trying to get her attention, but she still made sure to ignore him and slam her bedroom door loud enough to get the message to her father. I hate you. Go away. You ruined everything.

Her phone chimed. “#ultra_giggles has messaged you.” She rushed to her phone.

#ultra_giggles: hi.

books4life: hey.

#ultra_giggles: 😢😢😡😡😔😔

books4life: don’t make it worse.

#ultra_giggles: sry.

books4life: sok.

#ultra_giggles: did u 4give ur dad yet?

Books4life: no.

#ultra_giggles: maybe you should. It’s not his fault he got fired.

Books4life: ya it is. If he didn’t show up late for that conference, we  wouldn’t have to move. So, if he picked his job over a doughnut, we would still be here.

#ultra_giggles: get over it. Accept ur fate. *virtually shakes shoulder*

Books4life: gtg

Conversation ended.

Violet stared. Accept her fate? “Had Nikki already gotten over the fact that I’m moving?” Violet thought. She brushed that away. That’s not possible. Then Nikki must be saying something else. Maybe, she was saying that everything is going to be okay? Or maybe she was saying, since it was already done, there was no use in regretting the past?

She made a mental note to text Nikki, “Whoa. These heartfelt things are supposed to be for letters, not IM,” when she got on the plane. That was what Nikki had said earlier, when Violet had poured her heart out about the move.

Violet plopped on her bed for the second time today. She closed her eyes. She was going to have a new life, that’s for sure.  She could do this positively or negatively, and what Nikki was saying, is that it’s better to do this happily than grumpily. Violet smiled to herself.

She gathered herself up, opened her door, and cheerfully called down the stairs, “Hey dad, when is our flight?”

The Heart of an Athlete

Madison and Rachel have been best friends since preschool. When Madison and Rachel started 5th grade, Rachel said, “Can you come to my house today?”

“Sorry, but I’m the captain of the field hockey team, and apparently the best one so far. I can’t miss one practice,” said Madison. “But maybe we can have a sleepover on Saturday.”

“Okay, I will be there,” said Rachel.

When Madison got to field hockey practice, her teammates were doing drills. Madison went to her drill partner and co-captain, Kirsty.

“Sorry I’m late!” Madison said.

“That’s OK. I don’t blame you!” Kirsty said.

“So, what are we working on?” Madison asked.

“Jabs,” Kirsty replied.

The next day at school, Rachel stomped up to Madison and said angrily, “Where were you? I texted you sixty times last night!”

“I’m sorry. I was just texting my teammates about what they need to practice,” Madison said.

“Whatever happened to friends for life and having each other’s back?” Rachel shot back.

“I said I was sorry!” Madison said with a bitter tone.

“Well, I don’t want to hear your apologies. And you know what I also don’t want?” Rachel said.

“For me to me to keep playing field hockey?” Madison asked.

“No – I don’t want to go to your dumb sleepover on Saturday!” Rachel stormed off, leaving her best friend behind.

When Madison and Rachel got on the bus, they sat as far away as possible from each other. When Madison got home, she tried to rush past her sister, Alex.

Then Alex yelled, “Mom! Madison is home!”

“Alex!” Madison yelled softly.

“Hey, Madison!” Mom said.

“Hi, Mom.” Madison groaned while trying to crack a smile.

“How was school?” Mom asked.

“Fine… just fine,” Madison said.

“Ok, go get washed up. Chili for dinner,” said Mom.

“Ok,” Madison said and went up the stairs slowly.

The next day at school, Madison walked up to Rachel and said, “Rachel, I need to talk to you.”

“No, you don’t,” replied Rachel.

“I know you’re mad, and I don’t blame you, but I sent a text to my teammates saying I was going to have a sleepover,” Madison said fast.

“What! First you stop texting me and you go to texting your teammates, then you have a sleepover with them when it was just supposed to me and you!” yelled Rachel. “So if you want me to make new friends, I’ll make new friends,” Rachel , and ran away.

The next day, Madison saw Rachel in the middle of the CCP (Cute, Cool, and Popular) group. So Madison grabbed her teammates and walked up to Rachel.

“Things are about to get ugly in school,” Kirsty muttered to Grace, another girl on the field hockey team.

“So, Rachel, this is the girl who used to be friends with you?” Jessica, Rachel’s new best friend, sneered.

“Yes, but I can’t believe I was even friends with her!” Rachel laughed.

“Ok, Rachel, you have to stop – this is not you! For the last time, I’m sorry, but your doing this has gone way too far,” Madison said, and then turned to Jessica. “Jessica, you have to stop turning my best friend into something she’s not.”

Jessica glared at Madison like she was a wad of gum on her shoe and said, “Look, Madison, Rachel may have been your best friend in the past, but she isn’t right now.”

Madison looked at Rachel. Rachel smiled and winked. When they were little, that was the signal for I set them up or I have a plan. Madison turned back to Jessica, but before she could talk, Jessica said and grabbed Rachel’s arm, “Come on, Rachel. Let’s go get some lunch. I just have to use the bathroom quickly. Go on without me, I’ll meet you there.”

In the dining hall, Jessica had noodles with red sauce. She could not find Rachel, who was hiding in the crowd at Table 5. When Jessica was getting to the end of the bench to go sit down, Kirsty put out her leg and tripped Jessica.

Grace sneered. “So, Jessica, having a nice trip?”

The whole room cracked up with laughter. Jessica was covered in food stains, and she ended up on the school newspaper. The headline said:

More Sloppy Than Joe

After the lunch humiliation, Rachel wanted to write a note to Jessica about what she’d done. The note said:

Dear Jessica,

About lunch… I felt so so happy that that happened. You thought I would turn against my best friend, but nope – I turned against my fake best friend! For a moment I forgot who that was, but then I remembered, wait, I’m writing to her! You! So, why don’t you

 

  • Cry me a river!
  • Build a bridge!
  • And get over it!

 

Hoping you the worst. Your fake bestie, Rachel.

Rachel slipped the note into Jessica’s Locker.

Rachel was not looking forward to flute practice. Madam Kiska was going to cry about her no good ex-boyfriend. When Rachel did get to flute practice, Madam Kiska was ready to cry. She had tissues and no music stand. Rachel could not believe her parents were paying her teacher for their daughter to solve her problems. It was the worst two hours of Rachel’s life.

The next day, Rachel and Madison’s world was right again. Madison asked Rachel, “Hey, Rach, the team and I need a water girl. Would you be our water girl?”

“I’d love to,” Rachel said.

“Great! And about our sleepover — can the team join in? You kind of are part of it now, so will you come?” Madison asked.

“Yeah, I’m coming, and the team can join us anytime they want,” said Rachel.

But since Jessica’s world was not right, she wanted to make it right. Jessica walked up to Rachel and Madison. “Sorry, Rachel has other plans. Guess it wasn’t meant to be. Bye-bye,” Jessica said, pulling on Rachel’s arm, but Rachel held back. Everyone just glared at that girl. If anyone knew what Rachel’s plans were, it was Madison; she was Rachel’s best friend and would have known of any plans she had, and she didn’t have plans today.

“What?” said Jessica.

Principal Pearl came and said, “Jessica, they are looking at you because that is a lie.”

“She is my best friend, and you don’t know anything!” Jessica yelled and talked back.

“Well, maybe I don’t know everything, but I do know who is going to detention,” said Principal Pearl.

Jessica looked around and asked, “Who?”

“You! You are,” said Principal Pearl.

Then, before Rachel and Madison knew it, Saturday came. The big sleepover was here. The rules said that you could not wear make-up. When everyone came, they pigged out on M&Ms, pizza, ice cream sundaes, double fudge cupcakes, candy, chips, and washed everything down with soda. They were having way too much fun playing Truth or Dare and telling scary stories. Then, doorbell rang.

Madison yelled, “I’ll get it, Mom! I’ll be right back.”

Madison got to the door. Madison turned the doorknob very slowly and opened the door. It was Jessica.

“Jessica, what are you doing here?” asked Madison.

“I’m here for the sleepover. Duh,” said Jessica.

“I sorry – you weren’t invited because you’re such a fake. A Barbie doll is jealous,” Madison said, shooting Jessica a dirty look.

“Well, I’m still sleeping over,” said Jessica.

“You are right. You’re sleeping over. Over at your house. Even if you were on the list, my rules state no make-up, so goodbye,” Madison said, slamming the door in Jessica’s face. Madison went back to her room, happy with her world. She had the heart of an athlete.

Funny Culprits

Certain people say that the world is like a calm pond, and that anytime a person does a small thing, it is as if a stone has dropped into the pond, spreading circles of ripples, farther and farther out, until the entire world has been changed by one tiny action.

Emmett was thinking about what his teacher said. “That’s my car. You shouldn’t peek into other people’s cars.” Emmett was lucky that Mr. Cope didn’t put him in detention. Emmett always thought that Mr. Cope was weird. He had all of sorts of strange habits. Like he would always park his car right in front of the window he was closest to. Once, he made the second grade teacher move her car.

But what Emmett saw in Mr. Cope’s car was super crazy. Actually it was insane. Emmett couldn’t get it out of his head. He kept on seeing the purple blankets over something huge. Then, Mr. Cope’s dog tackled the purple blankets, and rolled into the driver’s seat with them, and Emmett saw a wooden coffin.

Emmett’s mom invited Mr. Cope over for a BBQ. “But why?” Emmett asked.

“I used to be good friends with Mr. Cope in college. Also, I want to discuss the death of Mrs. Lant with someone other than your dad,” his mother said plainly. Mrs. Lant was Emmett’s next door neighbor, who died (or was murdered) a week ago.  

At 6:30 p.m., a blue car rumbled down Emmett’s driveway. A door squeaked open. A tall and bulky man in a suit stepped out of his car. “Hello Mrs. Tarn,” said Mr. Cope happily. “This is wonderful.”

“Thank you. But really. The pleasure is all mine. I haven’t seen you in forever!” Mrs. Tarn was beaming.

“It’s great to see you too,” said Mr. Cope, bulging with happiness.

“Hey Mr. Cope!” Mr. Tarn said, out of nowhere. “Nice to see you. Did Sasha show you our new sailboat?”

“Thanks for reminding me, Doug. Mr. Cope, just yesterday we got a new Four Wind sailboat. It’s the one right next to the big pine tree,” Mrs. Tarn said. “Would you mind me showing it to you?”

“Not at all Sasha,” Mr. Cope looked towards the dock. After their welcoming conversation, Mr. Tarn, Mrs. Tarn, and Mr. Cope walked off to the dock. During this whole time Emmett was peeking inside Mr. Cope’s car. The purple blanket wasn’t there. But what was the same was that the coffin was there. The coffin actually looked sad. There weren’t any painted designs or special carvings.

“So lonely,” Emmett said, looking at the coffin. He sighed, and then looked toward his parents, and his hideous teacher. And, quite by accident, his teacher looked at him.

“Mr. Cope, would you like to say hi to Emmett?” asked Mr. Tarn, obviously noticing his gaze toward him.

“Yes actually, that would be very nice,” Mr. Cope replied, and walked towards Emmett.

“Uh, hi Mr. Cope,” said Emmett, cleary shocked.

“Hi Emmett. Have you noticed what’s inside of my car? Well it’s a new project that I have been working on. Your mom already knows. I’m very excited about it.”

“Cool,” Emmett said meekly.

“Do you want to go in your new Four Wind sail boat? Your dad let me try it. We can talk more about my project there,” Mr. Cope took the coffin out of his car, walked over to the dock in front of Emmett’s house, and put it in the sailboat. Emmett followed, and got in. Mr. Cope untied the boat, and raised the sails. Soon they were out at sea. The water was a beautiful blue and green, with glimpses of the sun light.

“Anyways, back to my project.” Mr. Cope opened the coffin. Inside, Emmett saw Mrs. Lant. He was stunned.

“Emmett, are you okay?” Mr. Cope was grinning. Emmett stared blankly at Mrs. Lant.

He stood in the same boat as the notorious villain and looked out at the sea. Emmett was silent for what he thought was forever.

“Can we go back now?”

“Wai —” but Emmett wasn’t going to wait. He took hold of the sail and turned it around towards home. As soon as the sailboat hit the small dock in front of his house, Emmett scrambled out and sped-walked to his bedroom. He remembered going to Mrs. Lant’s funeral, a few days ago. She was a great next door neighbor; young, nice, and she always had some type of candy waiting for him. But the thing was, Mrs. Lant died at 33; she obviously didn’t die of old age. She was the picture of health. Mrs. Lant was just found dead. She was murdered.

Mrs. Tarn called Emmett outside for dinner, and after a while Emmett reluctantly gave in to his mom’s repetitive yells.

“Emmett!! What took so long?! Sit down and eat your dinner. It’s getting cold.”

“Sorry Mom,” Emmett mumbled. He obediently sat down in a metal chair, and started eating in silence. He was shaking because of the coffin, and Mr. Cope.

“I must be leaving now,” said Mr. Cope, as he went over to the dock, picked the coffin up, and carefully set it inside of his trunk. “Bye Mrs. Tarn. Bye Mr. Tarn.”

“Bye Mr. Cope. Until next time,” Mrs. Tarn said, just as Mr. Cope’s blue car rumbled out of the driveway.

“So, Emmett, how was your boat ride with Mr. Cope? I saw that he took his experiment with him,” Emmett’s dad asked. Emmett was thinking of all the possible things he could say. If he told his dad what really happened, his dad would just tease him. And his mom would hear what Emmett said, and give him a good talk about how he should never fib, and how he shouldn’t tell made up stories.

Grown-ups, Emmett thought, always causing kids so much trouble. So instead, Emmett lied.

“It was pretty cool. Mr. Cope told me the meaning of his, um, fake coffin project,” Emmett said, very uncertain of himself.

“Very nice,” His mom plainly replied.

“Yup. Pretty cool. Did Mr. Cope tell you the meaning of his project?” Mr. Tarn asked. Emmett’s dad was a scientist, so he always wanted Emmet to talk about science.

“Uh, yeah. He, um, said that it was to, uh, um, figure out how coffins um, preserve people,” Emmett said, looking very hopeful.

“Oh. Hmmmmm. Interesting,” Mr. Tarn replied.

“Mom, can I be done with dinner? I’m tired,” Emmett said. But he felt more dizzy than tired.

“Sure honey,” Mrs. Tarn said.

The next morning was a weekend, and that, Emmett thought, would give him some time to plot out a plan to turn Mr. Cope into the police.

After a while, here’s what Emmett came up with: Walk down the street a few blocks, until he reached Mr. Cope’s house (# 316), then, he would go up to his car, tap the window of the driver’s seat three times, (Emmett was always spying on Mr. Cope, so he knows that if you tapped three times on the driver’s window, Mr. Cope’s dog would pounce on the lock that opens the door) and watch Mr. Cope’s dog unlock the door. Finally, he would take the coffin home, and wait until the right moment (which he hadn’t figured out yet), and turn the coffin into the police, along with Mr. Cope.

Emmet was sure that it would work. He decided to carry out his plan on Saturday, which was tomorrow. However, today was Friday, which meant school, which meant Mr. Cope. Emmett would just have to ignore him.

But when Emmett arrived at school that morning, Mr. Cope wasn’t there. Instead, principle Racker was there, making an announcement to the class.

“Good morning class. Today, as you can see, your teacher isn’t here, so I’m bringing in our new substitute teacher. Please behave.”

“Yes Mr. Racker,” the class replied in chorus.

“Aha, there you are Mrs. Stan. Please come in,” Mr. Raker said to a beautiful teacher, who looked young, and kind.

“Hello class. I’m Mrs. Stan,” Mrs. Stan’s voice had a hint of Irish, but was smooth and bright at the same time.

“Okay Mrs. Stan. I’ll leave you to it.” And Mr. Racker left the room.

“Now that he’s gone, we can have some fun,” Mrs. Stan said. Emmett was confused. What teacher wants to have fun? It wasn’t that Emmett didn’t want to have fun. It was just that it was weird.

“So, let’s have a vote to see who wants to do what. You have the option of art, or the history of mummies. Who wants art?” Emmett and about ten other people raised their hands. After Thursday, Emmett did not want to know anything close to the topic of dead people, including mummies.

“Okay. Now, who wants the history of mummies?” Ten hands went up. “Well then. Art it is.” Half of the class booed, but Mrs. Stan just flashed them a sad smile. Emmett was relieved. Right away, Mrs. Stan started art. First there was a lesson (boring!), but then free art started. All during free art, Emmett pondered the reason why Mr. Cope wasn’t there. Maybe it was because of his sailboat ride. But, Emmett couldn’t stand the tension. He raised his hand, and Mrs. Stan pointed to him.

“Do you need anything?” Mrs. Stan asked.

“Oh, I, uh, just, um, wanted to know why Mr. Cope isn’t here today,” Emmett said.

“Oh right! He isn’t here because he was busy at home.”

“Okay. I was just wondering,” Even though he didn’t say it, Emmett knew that there was something more to Mrs. Stan’s answer.

When Emmett got home from school he drew out his plan, and hid it where no one would be able to find it. Emmett’s room was good for finding hiding places. It was in the attic of his house, and had two bookshelves, his bed, an extra bed, a desk, an old couch, a closet, and many boxes with old fashioned trinkets and his toys. Then, Emmett sat down on the old couch in his room, and started to read an old book about mummies. After about an hour, Mrs. Tarn called Emmet down for dinner.

“Good honey. You came down on time. Unlike yesterday,” Mrs. Tarn said. She sometimes was cranky after work because of her cranky patients (she was a doctor.)

“So Emmett. How was your day?” Mr. Tarn wasn’t nearly as cranky as Mrs. Tarn sometimes was. Mostly because he was a scientist, and he didn’t have to deal with annoying patients.

“It was good. We had a cool substitute. But she was sort of weird. She wanted to have fun.”

“Ohhhh. Interesting,” Mr. Tarn said.

“Nice honey. What did you do with her?” Mrs. Tarn asked as she poured gravy on her mashed potatoes.

“Mrs. Stan taught about some famous artists, then we imitated their style of art, and then we   did free drawing. Oh! And she also taught science.”

“Did you say Mrs. Stan? I know her. She’s Mr. Cope’s daughter. She changed her last name when she got married,” Mrs. Tarn dished herself more salmon.

“She is? Wow. Well, good night. Bonne nuit,”  Mr. Tarn said as he kissed Emmet on the forehead and left the table.

“Hmmm. I didn’t know that. Cool,” said Emmett, confused. “Mom, can I be done? I’m sorta tired.”

“You can go to bed now if you’d like. Good night sweetie.”  

“Good night mom.” And Emmett hurried up stairs to his room.

This is crazy! Emmett thought to himself. Mrs. Stan is nothing like Mr. Cope. And now, I know that if Mr. Cope isn’t at school, then Mrs. Stan will be at school, and I can’t trust either of

them. He couldn’t wait until fifth grade. And tomorrow I have a lot of work to do. Tomorrow was when he was going to “make his move” on Mr. Cope. He went over the plan five more times in his bed, before finally falling asleep.

The next morning, Emmett got up. He did his normal morning routines, so he wouldn’t arouse any sliver of suspicion in his everyday parents. When Emmett finished his breakfast, he told his mom that he was going to the park. But of course, Mrs. Tarn told Emmett that he could not go to the park until at least 10:30 a.m.. So, to pass the time, Emmett decided to go upstairs and read more of his book on mummies. But after about ten minutes Emmett’s boredom took over.

“Mom! Can I go to the park now?! Please!!!!!

“Don’t yell, Emmett. And yes, you can go to the park,” Mrs. Tarn sighed.

“Sorry. Bye Mom,” and with that, Emmett rushed out of his house, and towards # 316, Campbell street.

Mr. Cope’s house was very old, and painted all white. In his front yard, there was a crab apple tree, that looked almost as old as his house. On Mr. Cope’s front porch, there was a big wooden lounge chair that had no cushion. Emmett had seen Mr. Cope’s house many times before because of his spying trips, so he knew where everything (or at least almost everything) that had anything to do with Mr. Cope was.

Emmett started making his way to Mr. Cope’s car. “This is great! Mr. Cope’s dog is here, and the window is open.” Emmet was thinking outloud. “Wait. Where’s the coffin?!” The coffin wasn’t in its normal spot in the trunk. Emmett decided to check Mr. Cope’s windows. After looking through three windows on the first floor, Emmett found the coffin inside of Mr. Cope’s bedroom. And the window was open. The problem was, the window that was open was a window that was at the top of Mr. Cope’s bedroom.

What do I do?! Emmett thought to himself. He was clearly stressed. Oh of course! I’ll just climb up this crab apple tree… The crab apple tree was huge. But, Emmett was a champion tree climber. He could do this. Emmett grasped hold of the snaggled lowest branch (which wasn’t very low), and pulled himself up. Then, he planted his feet on the branch next to him and stood up, holding on to the highest branch (which was very high). Now, all he had to do was slip through the window.

Do I really have to do this? Emmett thought to himself. What am I thinking?! I have to do this! Mr. Cope is a culprit! He might murder me!!! Yes. I really have to do this. Emmett took hold of the window and peeked in. The coffin was on the floor next to three boxes of plastic bags, and a few matches.

Uggh! How do I get in here? Emmett looked down at the floor of Mr. Cope’s bedroom to try and find a clue about how to get down. A squirrel scurried up the tree. Emmett was terrified of squirrels. He screamed and almost fell into Mr. Cope’s bedroom. The squirrel started to scurry up the tree, closer to Emmett. Emmett screamed again, and let go of the branch that he was holding… Even though he couldn’t feel it, Emmett fell almost fifteen feet.

“Owww!” Emmett moaned to himself. He had a scrape on his hand, and a bruise on his knee. “Well, at least I escaped that squirrel. And I’m also in Mr. Cope’s bedroom! This is great. Except for the horrifying squirrel part…”  He looked around Mr. Cope’s bedroom. It wasn’t as scary as Emmett thought it would be. It had a normal bed, a dresser, a bookshelf, and two closets. It was actually kind of empty. Emmett tried to lift the coffin, but it was way too heavy for him to carry. Emmett decided to look for a cart. After looking for about five minutes, Emmett found a small cart just big enough to fit the coffin inside. Emmett slowly but surely lifted the heavy coffin up. He carefully set it in the cart, his arms shaking, partly because of the weight, and partly because of his relief that Mr. Cope didn’t come back from wherever he was.

“Yes!” said Emmett. “I’m almost done. All I have to do is take this home…”

After about 10 minutes of endless brakes and pulled muscles, Emmett finally opened the door to his house.

“Emmett, what are you doing with Mr. Cope’s science project?” Mrs. Tarn asked.

“Oh! I’m, um, Mr. Cope let me borrow it.” Emmett was shaken. “I’ll be upstairs…” Emmett went as fast as he could to his room, which wasn’t very fast because he had to carefully push the cart stair, by stair, by stair. When he finally got to his room he opened the coffin, and found Mrs. Lant, as dead as can be, laying down “peacefully” as Mr. Cope’s victim.

Emmett sighed. Poor Mrs. Lant. “Died on April 2nd, 2012…Stupid Mr. Cope killing innocent people.” But then Emmett noticed something. April 1st through April 10th was when Emmett had a substitute, because Mr. Cope was visiting Peru.

“Wait. That means that Mr. Cope didn’t murder Mrs. Lant. Someone else did.” Emmett was stunned.

The End

Dellya

Dellya Dillon lived in a small, poor village south of where the waters meet the skies. Two years ago, she had been assigned a pen pal from the next land over, but writing materials were scarce, and Dellya hadn’t been able to send more than three letters. Her pen pal, named Sono, had described his village to be prosperous and joyful. Dellya wished for this in her own home.

Once every month or two, a traveling merchant would come to town with pencils and paper. If she could scrape together enough Helios, Dellya would buy a small package. One day, the man came through in his wagon, and Dellya ran out to the road after finding five Helios on the dining room floor, hoping to be able to write Sono again. The seller recommended to her a beautiful pencil that almost seemed to glow a little! She handed him her coins and he gave her the pencil and a slip of paper.

At home, Dellya read the note. It informed her that her new pencil had powers! It would grant her unlimited wishes. Dellya didn’t take long to think about her first request. She wished, of course, to live in Sono’s village.

Dellya was immediately transported to Sono’s house. She explained what had happened, and he offered to let her live with him and his family. Dellya accepted. She ate better than she had in her whole life combined and went to bed content.

Upon awaking in the morning, Dellya felt a knot in her stomach. She took all day to figure out what it was. After supper, she realized that though there was no doubt Sono’s village was richer, safer even, she missed her family. So, she went to her new room in search of the magical, glowing pencil, only to find she had forgotten to bring it with her. She ran out the back door, weeping. She had been sitting on the back steps for a few minutes, crying, when she heard a voice behind her.

“What seems to be the matter?” Dellya whipped around. There was a unicorn, and it was talking to her!

“I want to go home!” Dellya cried.

“No worries, I can take you there. Where is your village?” The unicorn asked. Dellya told him, and next thing she knew, she was sitting on his back as he raced across the land at an unbelievable speed.

In no time at all, Dellya was back in her hut. She used her pencil to ask for the things needed to send a message of explanation to Sono. Then, she put the pencil away. She decided she was very happy with the life she had and wouldn’t be needing it for a while.

Cinderella

Once upon a time, there lived a lovely doll named Ella. She lived in a very big doll house in a girl named Mia’s room. Mia was at summer camp in Maine and she was gone far away because her real house was in California by a lot of grapes. Her dad made wine. She always watched her mom taste test. Her bedroom was huge because her family lived in a big house. She had many dolls that she loved so much. She had teddy bears and Barbies and American Girl Dolls. Ella and her dad and mom and stepmother and sisters were all American Girl dolls. So was the prince. Mia’s bed was in the corner and the dollhouses were on the walls. In the middle Mia had the prince’s castle.

Now don’t you want to hear about Ella’s enchanted story? Back to Ella’s story. Listen up. She had a mother and a father who gave her everything she wanted, including a horse, many dolls, and her very own dog named Bruno. Her mother got sick a lot of times. She always got better. Her father worked as a lawyer. Everyday, he would get up and make pancakes, then leave. Her mother would get up and take her pills. Ella, however, always woke up early. She would make her silk bed, then get dressed, eat, and go out to feed and play with the birds, dog, and horse. Everyday, she would help her mom get better. Now, she lived in 1813, so, her mom did NOT get good a pill to get better. Her mom had hard times with getting better. But, for days she stayed alive.

One day, her mom got a very BAD sickness. Not one person could make her better. Her father stayed home from work. Sadly, she died the next day. Ella cried and cried. Sometimes her dad called her Alice in Wonderland. Her dad also saw that she was very sad. Her father looked around the dollhouse for a new wife. The dollhouse was a HUGE dollhouse. It was broken into five sections. Each section had a doll family in it.

One day, her father yelled, “I have found a new wife who has two great daughters.”

“Really?” Ella cried.

“Really,” her father said. A little later, her new ‘mom’ arrived.

“Hello,” she said. Her voice gave Ella goosebumps. She was dressed in a green dress that flowed behind her. She had a hat that had a veil which covered her face. The veil was black. She had orange-red hair tied in two tight braids. She was very scary. “I said hello,” she yelled.

“Oh. Hello. Sorry. I did not hear you.” Ella replied.

“Now, where are our rooms?” her scary voice boomed through the hallways.

“I-I-I’ll show you.” Ella said. She was very scared.

“Are you scared of me?” Stepmother said.

“No.”

“Good.” she yelled.

“Here is your room. These are your children’s,” Ella walked down the hallway. Her kids were named Lea and Sia.

“Let’s go unpack,” Sia said.

The next day, Ella awoke to the fighting of Lea and Sia over who got the better bed. She ran to her father’s room.

“Oh father, are you okay? You don’t look so good.” Ella jumped onto the bed.

“Ella, my child. I know. And I will not get better. So, I will go on a journey to get the care. Your stepmother knows, I shall pack now.” he said.

“No. Wait. I will do that. You rest in bed.” Ella yelled quickly.

A few days later once Ella’s father left for a nurse house, a knock came on the door. Ella opened the door. It was a man. He brought news.

“What news?” Ella asked.

“Your father is dead. Your family does not have a lot of money.” Ella heard the man say.

“Oh Ella, we are doomed. How are we going to live. So sad. So sad. If we don’t have a lot of money for food and water, how are we going to buy fashion. Our reputation is ruined.” Ella heard a voice behind her say. She felt a shiver go up her spine. Ella turned around. It was her stepmother.

“Oh stepmother, Just let the maids go!” Ella managed to say before she closed the door and started to weep.

“Oh girls. You fight too much, I wish you two had two bedrooms,” Stepmother said.

“Oh. My bedroom is big. Maybe Lea or Sia could take MY room.” Ella offered.

“Oh, yes. That would be awesome. You shall sleep on the top floor, the attic.” evil Stepmother yelled and laughed.

Her voice made Ella feel like she was far, far, far, far from the sun.

“Um, okay. I’ll pack my stuff,” Ella agreed.

“Great. Now, since the farmers and maids are gone, and my daughters and I will never do housework, will you?” Stepmother said as she fixed her black hat. As she tugged at her veil, an evil grin came across her face.

“Well, will you?” Stepmother said as she looked at her hand carefully.

“Um, um, okay. I guess,” Ella said. She was very tired.

She watched as Stepmother pulled at her dress to make it go longer, even though it was about a yard long. She reached into her silky green gown and pulled out a pair of yellow gloves. She carefully put them on. She clicked at the button on her cape.

“Good,” she said. Her voice trembled, like Ella.

The next morning, Ella woke up early. She went down the stairs. She pulled out a pan and spoon.

“Good morning. I see you are making food for three. You shall eat in the cellar. You understand the story, right?” a voice called out. Ella knew that voice now. Was it Sia or was it Lea? No. It was Stepmother. Ella turned around to face the evil woman.She was in the middle of a chair and a table with a cake on it. She was clawing at the cake.

“Oh yes Stepmother. I do,” Ella said, she was SUPER tired. Ella could not help looking at what in the world she was wearing. A pink gown with pink high heels. A purple hat that stood tall on her head. A black veil covered her face. The only part you could see was an evil smile with evil twinkling eyes.

Ella turned back to work. Flip, flip, flip. Plop, plop, plop. That was the noise the pancakes made.

A little later, the three were eating upstairs.

“Ella, what is that on your face?” Lea sweetly asked. She was not really trying to be nice. The truth was, it was so cold in the attic that Ella came down and fell asleep by the fire.

“Hey, guys, I have the most perfect idea.” Sia suddenly said.

“What is that perfect idea of yours?” said a mean Lea.

“Let’s call her CINDERella. Yeah, because she does clean and has ashes ALL over her face.” Sia said, smiling.

“Yes!” Stepmother and Lea said together.

A little later, Cinderella went to get the mail. She had to go to the Barbie dollhouse to get the mail.

“Thank you so much.” Cinderella thanked Allie Henderson, a barbie, when she gave her the mail. An about an hour later, Cinderella came in the door. She yelled up the stairs, “Mail is here.”

“What a bad way to call us down like that,” snapped Stepmother, “you should know better.”

“Well, um, sorry. That’s what I used to do, sorry again.” Cinderella said. She was very scared. She fell back.

“Well your little family does not own this place anymore. So you better stop RIGHT NOW.” Stepmother yelled. Her face was SO red Cinderella thought she looked like a tomato. Stepmother whipped out her red gloves and put them on. She also clipped her cape on.

“Hear me young missy?” Stepmother yelled so loudly something fell off the table. Cinderella ran to pick it up.  “Hear me!” she yelled SO loudly.

“Yes, yes I do.” Cinderella said. Her hand was trembling. Stepmother whipped out her makeup. She put on her lipstick. And she looked at herself in her mirror for a little while.

“Now, let me see about the mail. Why don’t YOU read it to me, er, us!” Stepmother peered over her shoulder. Cinderella considered this. Why was she being treated like this? She thought about it some more. She could always run away. But her thoughts were blocked by a voice that made Cinderella think it was the end of the world.

“I said read.”

“Oh yes, um I was just —”

“Just read it.” Stepmother was at the end of her rope. In fact, she was tugging at her glove to prove it. Cinderella still did NOT read it. She thought Stepmother could just do it herself. After all, she was self-centered. And, not to forget, always thinking about herself. Stepmother snached the mail.

Suddenly a big, “Yes.” filled the house. Two figures fell down the stairs. First Lea, then Sia.

“What’s the news Mommy?” a screechy voice, Sia, screeched.

“Oh Mother, do you have headphones?” Lea asked. “Sia has been singing for half an hour. Her voice is like a stray cat.”

“No, wait. I shall sing my song. It is called All Night.” Sia DID sound like a stray cat.

“Oh please no. No! Instead, guess what? Practice your dancing. Why? Because we just got a letter for going to the royal ball. The prince needs to get a wife.” Stepmother’s voice boomed the house again. Stepmother handed the letter to Cinderella. She held it up to her face.

Dear Doll,

This letter is for you. You may not share it. Come in a royal dress. Here is the letter for you and you only:

A Royal Ball for Prince

Where:  Barbie Dreamhouse

Why: Prince needs wife to marry

When: Tomorrow at 7:00 to 1:00 in the morning                                                      

Who: Every young lady and man in the land will come

How: Get a dance partner and dance, prince will chose wife

From,

The Prince Charming

Cinderella read it three times. She put a big smile on her face and turned around. She knew she could go. A chance to get away. Yes. She had not noticed that the rest of them had been watching her. She bumped into Stepmother.

“You think you that you’re going, huh, am I right?” Stepmother asked.

“Well, of course. After all, it did say ALL the people in the land.” Cinderella said bravely.

“Well, well, well. Are you challenging me now? Oh well really?” Stepmother took a step closer, speaking very meanly. Now their noses were almost touching.

Cinderella took a step back. “No.”

“You will make our gowns. If you refuse, you shall be out.” Stepmother roared in anger. Cinderella was very scared. She ran to her attic.

“Hey, Girlfriend. The wool is down here.” Lea yelled up the stairs.

“Yes, I know.” Cinderella said sharply.

“Okay, I understand. Please, rude girl.” Sia said even more sharply.

That night, Cinderella finished the dresses. She thought it might be nice to make a gown for the ball for herself. Even though she knew she could not go, she thought she could always leave after them.

She used the colors that were left: pink, purple, and green. She did not exactly like the end of it.  

She ripped it apart and did it again. This time she was happy with how it turned out.

She found some silk pillows and sheets. The bed was much comfier. The dress was very comfy.

The next morning, she got up and ready. Today, she decided to wear the gown that she made last night. When she got down, everyone else was already there.

“Cinderella, we were waiting for you,” said the cruel voice that belonged to Stepmother.

“Yes, I’m sorry. I know.” Cinderella answered as she rolled her eyes.

“Good.” Lea said as she stuck her nose in the air.

“So, what are you wearing? It’s just that, you’re not going to the ball.” Sia said as she handed the coffee pot to Cinderella.

Cinderella put the coffee pot on the shelf as she said,”Yes, I do know. I thought I’ll just have my own party by myself. I made this.” Cinderella was now pointing at her dress. She turned to Stepmother. As for today, the black hat and veil, and a yellow dress and green cape.

“No, you have to clean, cook, and sew.” Stepmother called to the earth. She put on her green gloves and flipped her two orange/red braids, then, left the room. A little later the three mean people were leaving the house.

“Bye.” Cinderella called out. Once they had completely left, Cinderella ran to the garden and wept.

“Why are crying, my darling?” a soft voice asked. The lady was dressed in a pink gown with pink ruffles and silver sparkles. She was wearing black high heels with orange and green pumpkins.
“Who are you? If you shall answer that, then here is my answer: I want to attend the ball, but my Stepmother and Stepsisters won’t let me. Won’t you tell me who you are?” Cinderella asked.

“Oh my, child, I am your fairy godmother. Now, you said you wanted to go to the ball? Well, you can’t go to the ball? You can not go looking like that.” her fairy godmother said.

“Well, I can’t go at all.” Cinderella tried to say.

“Well, why can’t you? So, get me a pumpkin. Hey, will you?” she said with a mysterious voice.

“Um, okay,”

“Great, now let me just —” fairy godmother started to say as she put the pumpkin in front of her. She puffed up her pink ruffles on her pink dress. Then, she took something from behind her back. It was sparkling and Cinderella did not know what it was. A wand. With a swish of the wand, the pumpkin turned into a beautiful carriage. With more waves of the wand, a coachman and footman appeared.

“Now, for your gown and slippers,” fairy godmother said joyfully. Cinderella magically changed into a puffy blue dress with glass slippers.

“Oh thank you.” Cinderella said to fairy godmother.

“Oh now, there is one rule. Just remember to return home by midnight. Otherwise these things will turn back.” she said. And with a little wave her wand, Cinderella was off to the ball.

A little later, Cinderella arrived in the Barbie Dreamhouse. The prince lived in his palace, but the Dreamhouse had a bigger dance floor.

The prince was already dancing with someone. But when he saw Cinderella, he dropped his partner’s hand and ran over to Cinderella. He took her hand and started dancing with her. The pretty Barbie was mad. She ran over to a teddy bear and started to gossip about Cinderella.

After dancing, they went out to the garden to dance since there was too much chaos inside. Cinderella thought this was the best night she had ever experienced. They talked about life and favorite things and gardens. Cinderella was having a blast. All of a sudden…

Dong. Dong. Dong. Dong. Dong…

Cinderella ran out of the garden and down the stairs. Then… plop. Her shoe had fallen on the stairs. She still ran. After a little while, Cinderella arrived home. She ran upstairs to the attic and hid the single slipper that she still had. Then, she went to bed.

In the morning, Cinderella was making pancakes when Lea yelled, ”Hey, the prince is going around to see whose foot fits this mysterious slipper.”

Cinderella ran up to get in the gown she made two days ago. She got a bench from the attic to sit on. She dragged it to the balcony. Cinderella sat and waited with her hands folded in her lap like a princess. She knew that it was her time to become the Queen. She practiced being perfect in every way. Click, click. She heard the door say. Ella ran to the door. It was locked. Then she had remembered when she made pancakes. She was humming and dancing when Lea had said the news. Then, she ran to the attic.

Ella called out the door, ”Let me out please. Why did you lock me in?” No answer. Cinderella peeked through the hole. No one. She ran to the balcony. The prince and the men were coming down the road. She was running out of time. She came up with a plan. She got her bag and packed up all her dresses and belongings. She ran to the balcony with a rope. She tied it to the pole. She put her bag over her elbow and held on to the rope. She saw the prince getting out of the van. Cinderella wrapped her legs around the rope. She slide down to the window. It was locked. All the others were locked, too. Plan failed. She thought she could just go to the bottom, but no. The rope was getting loose. The prince was walking to the door. She climbed back up and went in the house and found a lipstick and paperclip. She put them in the lock. It did not work. She went out to the balcony again. She ran to the rope. She untied it and tied it again. This time she forgot her bag. She looked down. The prince was entering the house. She climbed back up and grabbed her bag and slide down. This time the prince was in the house. She put her foot on the ground. But her other foot was stuck. She untied her foot. She was free. A life in the castle was glowing in her mind. She ran to the door. It was locked. Oh no. She ran to the window next to it. She took out the lipstick and the paperclip. She put it in the lock. Yes, it worked. She climbed in. A table was in front of it. Cinderella ducked under it, knocking something off it. She dove to pick it up. She got it, but the duke and prince turned and left the room. She put it back on then went to the room. The duke said, ”Who wants to try it on first?” Yes. Cinderella thought. He just arrived. She watched what happened “Here. You may try on the slipper first.” the Duke said to Stepmother.

Did not fit.

“Now, you may go next.” he said to Sia.

Did not fit.

“Now you next.” he said to Lea.

Did not fit.

“Okay, let’s go.” the Duke said.

Cinderella walked in the doorway with her beautiful gown.

“What is going on?” she asked.

 “Excuse me, but will you try this slipper on?” the Duke asked.

He leaned over to where she just sat down.

 “It’s a perfect fit.” cried the prince.

Cinderella watched Stepmother’s face burn with anger as she left her dollhouse section forever.

A few weeks later, Cinderella and the prince were married. The new King Charming and Queen Cinderella lived happily ever after.  

Now you know what life was like for her. So don’t go telling their story to Mia. There life will not be the same (not that she would believe it.) Stepmother and her daughters ran away to Mia’s living room because they could not stand the fact Cinderella would rule over them. Cinderella did make a best friend. Her name was Belle. She has brown hair and eyes.  Ella really did live happily ever after.

Jungle Story

In a hole in the ground, there lived a hobbit. Everyone feared him. Legends had been told that if you went in that hole, you would never come out. But not all legends are true…

“Hello, Samantha, how are you doing on this fine day?” John asked.

“I am doing very well, thank you,” Samantha replied. “Great day to take a walk. Would you like to come along with me?”

“I would love to go anywhere with you,” John said. “IAN!”

“Yes sir.”

“Do my job here at the front desk of the Italy Hotels here until I come back from taking a walk with my lovely lady, Samantha. You know her, don’t you?”

Ian nodded his head. Ian was a young man nobody cared about. Nobody believed in him. Samantha was the love of his life, and John knew that. John was always bragging that he got girls. Ian thought he was a failure.

So while John and Samantha were out on their little date, Ian had to work. He hated working, and John also knew that! John tortured Ian so much that sometimes he couldn’t even sleep.

John came in the door, with Samantha laughing, and John said, “We had such a great time. Tomorrow calls for good weather. Maybe we can go out again.”

“I would love to,” Samantha replied.  Ian’s heart sank.

***

About a month later, in the middle of June, Samantha and John were out on a walk, when John came running through the door of the hotel.

“HELP!” John shouted.

“What happened?” Ian said, rolling his eyes. He’s probably playing his trick on me again, he thought.

“It’s Samantha! She’s gone!”

“Don’t play your little tricks on me again.”

“I’m serious. Please believe me; it’s for Samantha’s sake. Please help me find her,” John pleaded.

“I’m done with your little tricks. Just stop,” Ian said seriously.

A tear rolled down John’s cheek. “Please.”

John never cries. This must be serious. If he is joking I’m going to get him… Ian thought. “Fine,” Ian agreed. “Let’s go.” John led Ian to the last spot he saw her.

“She was right here!” John said. “I just left to get her a present! I came back, and she was gone!”

“I’ve got a plan. But you need to be serious,” Ian said.

Ian took John to the apartment that he had rented, then got a notepad and pen. He offered John a seat. He made two cups of coffee, put them on the table, then took a sip. He was serious.

“Some of these questions will sound silly, but they have purpose,” Ian said. “Now, what was Samantha wearing at the time?”

What does this have to do with anything? John thought. “Umm, she was wearing a pink sequin dress. And the same colored hat with feathers,” he answered.

“Thank you. Second question. Did she say anything before you left?”

“Not really. She just said: ‘Wow, the moon looks so pretty. You know the jungle well, don’t you? Let’s go into the jungle.’ Then I said: ‘Not yet. I need you to stay here. You’ll be happy.’ Then I left, then she left.”

Ian’s face lit up. “Thank you so much.”

***

The next day, around 8:00 a.m., Ian called John, who was sleeping, and woke him up.

“What do you want?” John said in a drowsy voice. “I’m sleeping.”

“It’s Ian. I’m picking you up in my car. Get ready.”

“Ready for what?” John asked.

“Samantha.”

Ian got to John’s house. Of course, he wasn’t on his porch, waiting for Ian. Ian knew he wouldn’t be there, so he found parking, walked up to his door, and rang his doorbell. Brriinng! That’s how John’s doorbell sounded.

I should really move out of here, John thought. John came out with dark circles under his eyes. Ian looked at John from head to toe.

“You are wearing different shoes on different feet,” Ian said to John. John blushed.

“Well, umm, you know I wake up at 10:30 a.m.,” John said, “If I wake up before that time, I get cranky.”

“You can go back to sleep. I’ll just save Samantha by myself…”

“NOOO!” John shouted. He knew Ian couldn’t do it by himself. But even if he did, he would be lonely and Samantha would fall for Ian. And that couldn’t happen for John. “I’m coming with you.” John led Ian back to the last place he saw Samantha. “It was here. What are you going to do now, smarty-pants?”

Ian hated being called smarty-pants. “Well, look here, I just found a pink sequin trail.” Ian said, trying to outsmart him.

“What does that mean? Just some lousy metaphor again?”

“No, she was wearing a pink sequin dress, right? It’s a trail of her dress!”

“Yeah,” John was embarrassed that he hadn’t seen that. They followed the trail of sequins until it stopped. “Why did it stop?” John exclaimed. “It doesn’t make sense!”

“I remember she had a coat. That probably stopped the trail!” Ian realized. They kept going straight.

We are never going to find her. I wish we could have a real detective find her,and not just some amauter, John thought.

“Look here!” Ian shouted. “I found something!”

“What is it?” he said, groaning. “I am so tired, and hungry, and thirsty, and—”

“Stop complaining and come over here! I found something and it’s important,” Ian said. “I found a notebook. Here’s what it says: ‘In the jungle, always go straight, then two lefts and a right.’ Why would she write that?” Ian asked himself.

“Well, she did tell me that her father knew the jungle and used to take her when she was little, and always told her that in the jungle you always ‘go straight, then two lefts and a right’ and you’ll find something interesting. And we were going to go to the jungle after I came back, but as we know now, she went to the jungle before me.”

“That’s it! All we have to do now is follow what the note says!” They went straight, took two lefts and a right, and then stopped.

They came to a hole.

The hobbit’s hole. The one that everyone feared. Samantha went into that hole, and she would never be coming out. Even John was scared, and he was never scared. But Ian was brave and confident. He was going to go in that hole.

“You’re going to go in?”John said, laughing.

That was the time where the only confidence Ian had died down. The angel on his shoulder told him to stand up for himself, and the devil on his other shoulder told him to give it up. But always follow the angel, and that’s what he did.

“I’ve got a plan. We’ll go back to the—” Ian said. But before he finished that sentence, rain started pouring down on the two men. That meant they couldn’t go back to town. So they had to survive the night in the jungle. Since Ian was the clever one, he had a plan.

Ian created a path from the hole and a cave he found. John and Ian ran down that path, hoping to find food in the cave.

They got to the cave, which was dry and toasty. Sadly for them, there was no food.

Ian wished he had food, umbrellas, and all he needed to survive in the jungle right in front of him.  

“Perfect!” Ian shouted, “I can use an umbrella to get us food!”

“Ian, there aren’t any umbrella shops in the jungle. Don’t act stupid,” John told him.

“I know that! I can make an umbrella!” Ian said with a big smile on his face.

“How are you going to do that? Magic?”

“No! Nature! I can take sticks and a leaf. I will get food.”

“Oh, great, thanks. Now, go make the umbrella. I’ll wait here,” John said, yawning.

He is so lazy. Doesn’t he ever help out? Ian thought. Ian got sticks and a big leaf. He let the leaf dry but then realized something. How could he build an umbrella without glue?

He groaned. “Why didn’t I think about that?”

“What’s wrong, Buddy? Magic didn’t work?” John said, trying torture him.

“No, I don’t have glue. Never mind, there’s no food yet,” Ian replied.

“I wouldn’t do this in any other situation, but you’re getting me food, so I have something you can use. Sticky Glue, the superglue. I’d never do this any other time because I hate you, but you’re getting me food, and I’m really hungry, and —” John went on and on.

“Okay, thank you, but you are getting food soon, so STOP COMPLAINING!” Ian shouted. John rolled his eyes.

Ian put together the umbrella by getting one stick, then making a hole in the leaf, then putting glue around the top of the stick. He put the part of the stick with glue in the hole of the leaf. He broke small sticks and glued them to the bottom of the leaf so it had some structure. He went outside, and the umbrella worked!

“I am getting food,” he said. But just as he was about to step outside into the pouring rain of the Hawaiian rainforests, he realized something. Where was the food? He had to find it! He didn’t know where the food was!  So there was a 54% chance he would get lost. But he had to risk it. He was hungry, and so was John. Especially John. He wouldn’t stop complaining! But something in Ian told him he had to save Samantha. And he wouldn’t stop.

Ian was running, searching for food. He found some berries but wanted to keep looking. Then, Ian heard something growl. He stood behind a bush. It was a bear! Ian opened his mouth to scream, but no sound came out. The bear growled at him again. This is when the sound came out. “AHHHHHH!” he screamed. “HELP!”

That’s when somebody came running to Ian.

“Here, Jenny, girl, come on; go back to your cave. This is a friend.”

And the bear listened to the man!
Ian didn’t know exactly who this man was, but for some reason he recognized that voice.

“Hey, Ian! What are you doing in the jungle?” the man said.

“Dan!” Ian finally recognized him. “What are you doing in the jungle?”

“I go every summer for a week. What are you doing here?” Dan said.

“It’s a long story,” Ian sighed.

Dan was Samantha’s crazy uncle. He always had liked Ian and wanted him to marry Samantha, but he knew about John and how Samantha liked him. He didn’t like John. He thought he was irresponsible and lazy. Dan trusted Ian, and Dan would have liked to have a nephew.

“Why are you out here in the rain?” Ian asked.

“I have to survive here, so I go out in the rain,” he said proudly.

“You can make an umbrella,” Ian told him. “It’s easy. I can make one for you if you’d like.”

“I would like that; thank you,” Dan said.

“I need help finding food. I got a few berries, but I need more. I also need to feed John. And if I don’t bring back food he’s going to bully me again,” Ian told him.

“Oh, John is with you. He is so mean to you. I don’t trust him,” Dan replied with a stern face. “I’ll help you find food. I don’t want John torturing you again. Come with me. We are going hunting.”

As Dan led Ian to a fish pond, they started talking.

“How did you get that bear to listen to you?” Ian asked.

“Oh, that was Jenny, my brown bear friend. She didn’t want to hurt you. She just thought you were an enemy.”

Wow. That’s so cool! I wish I had a friend who couldn’t bully me, Ian thought.

“Where is Samantha? She didn’t come to say goodbye to me yesterday when I came here.” Dan was starting to get worried.

“She went into the hobbit’s hole. I’m are going to get her out.”

“Oh, I know I want you to believe in yourself, but here I can’t tell you that now. She’s never coming out.” Tears rolled down Dan’s cheek. “The last time I saw her…”

“We need to keep going. I am starving, and so is John,” Ian said, trying to keep Dan’s mind off Samantha.

“Okay.”

They got to the pond, and Dan went in. He felt for fish, trying to grab some. He grabbed four pieces of fish. Ian went back to cook the fish.

“FOOD!” John was so happy.

“We have to cook first,” Ian said. John rolled his eyes. They cooked the fish then ate it.

Yum, they thought.

It stopped raining. They needed to get back to town, so they got ready. Ian went to see Dan. He was going to save her!  

It was about an hour walk from town. They were both really tired. John wanted to stop, but Ian wouldn’t stop. He had to complete his mission.

They got back, and Ian drove John back home. Then, went back home. They both collapsed on their beds.

The next day, Ian woke up early, around the same time as the day before. He was about to call John, but thought: Why? Why should I bring him along? He is my enemy, and he is no help. I’ll do this on my own.

He left to go to the hardware store to buy a rope ladder to go into the cave and to come out. He got to the hole. He was really tired, but he wouldn’t give up. He put the ladder down and climbed in. He was scared, but that wouldn’t stop him.

“Samantha!” he called out.

“Ian? Is that you?”

It was her!

“Yes. I’ve come to get you,” Ian was really excited inside.

“Oh, thank you! I want you to meet someone,” she said, smiling. She led him deeper in the hole.  “This is Hayley the hobbit,” she said. “She’s really nice.”

“The hobbit is nice? That’s great!” Ian smiled. “Let’s go.”

They got out, and Ian said one more thing before they left. “Will you marry me?”

“Yes!” she answered. “Thank you for saving me.” They went to tell everyone and then John, who was very jealous. And then they told Dan, who was holding tobacco-filled jars. He got out of the forest earlier because of Samantha.

“I brought Samantha back. And we are getting married,” Ian said, with a big smile on his face.

“Thank goodness!” said Dan, laughing, and handed him a tobacco-filled jar.

THE END

Quest for the Overworld

Book 1

Jeb was an individual alone on a wheat farm with Rufus, a dog, and Snuggles, a cat. His wheat farm was located in a small village called the Legancine Village, in Minecraft. Jeb had built an iron golem guardian to guard the village, as no one in the village liked attacks by zombies. One day, Jeb wandered into a portal in the forest, built with iron and gold around it. Jeb was very suspicious, as he knew Minecraft: His friend Notch had created Minecraft, and he knew he hadn’t added a portal like this. This was unusual. Suddenly, Jeb felt a tug on his arm, like the force was saying, come with me! The force had pushed him into the portal! Jeb closed his eyes, fearful and curious about what would happen next.

-A few minutes later-

Jeb suddenly woke up in a whole new world. He saw nothing, only black landscapes all around him.

This is strange Jeb thought. I know Notch wouldn’t create something so dangerous like this. He had lost six whole hearts on his fall down to this strange, creepy world. He only had two hearts left, and if something attacked him, he knew he would respawn, which would not be good. He also knew he had to regen, so he waited and ate three pieces of steak out of eight total, which he always kept in his inventory, for an emergency. He also considered EATING his diamond sword, but he decided that diamond would not taste so good. So, instead, he put his diamond sword away in his inventory. Suddenly, two people dressed in leather armour appeared right in front of Jeb. This was very surprising to Jeb, and he fell backward in surprise.

“We need your help,” one said. “I’m Steve, and she’s Lucy.” He pointed to his co-conspirator rudely, and said, “The silver dragons of the Overworld have taken over the overworld! We need your help!” He looked like he was desperate. Looking at the man’s eyes, Jeb couldn’t feel anything but sorry for him.

Finally, he decided. “OK, I’ll help you.” So, Steve, Lucy, and Jeb started off to the QUEST OF THE OVERWORLD. Steve and Lucy led Jeb to their shelter, a small home in the middle of a small forest. It was pretty simple, with a small porch made of wood overlooking a small garden, and the walls of the home, stone. Once everyone was inside, Steve closed the door. Jeb admired it. He adored it. It was a small, cozy house, with two beds in the middle of the home, with a small couch in the corner. Suddenly, a big blast knocked the room violently, back and forth. It felt like an earthquake, except a thousand times bigger. At last, when Jeb and the others could stand up, they found the couch turned upside-down, and the beds knocked to the corner of the room. A small lamp was shattered, on the floor. Jeb was shocked. What just happened? Lucy immediately ran to the computer, which now, lay a small, broken screen, even though she could still use it. She turned on the news.

“OH MY GOSH!” Lucy yelled. She turned the volume up to high.

“Breaking news: The Overworld has crashed into the Underworld! The most dreaded place, the Underworld has intercepted through!” The headline of the news said. Meanwhile, Steve was grabbing binoculars, potions, armour, TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and TNT, and other stuff. This was bad. This never happened, and it was probably the worst thing to happen.

“What’s going on?” Jeb asked, and Lucy turned her head to say, “Griefers have taken over the Overworld!” she says.

“What are griefers?” Jeb questioned again.

“Oh, griefers are evil people sent from the evil world of the Underworld. They are people with scary outfits, and they like kidnapping people because they’re evil. The Overworld would turn evil with them!” said Lucy.

Just then, Steve called out, “Time to go!” The three friends set off for a quest of the Overworld.

-2 Days Later-

“Shh,” Steve urged Lucy and Jeb, “They’re coming to the Overworld.”

Suddenly, Steve yelled, “The griefers are here!” Steve, Lucy, and Jeb started throwing TNT blocks everywhere, far away, aiming at the marching griefers.

“Probably all of the griefers in the Underworld are here to launch the attack,” Lucy said. Some of the griefers exploded, but, most of the griefers managed to escape because of Steve’s call. The griefers had escaped their first attempt.

“NO!” Steve yelled. The plan was that Steve, Lucy, and Jeb would hide behind a big boulder, and while the griefers were coming, they would throw TNT at them and explode them. But, the problem was Steve had called too early, and that warned the griefers to escape. “We have to try another way. We need to think outside-the-box,” Jeb said thoughtfully. The group journeyed to Steve and Lucy’s house, careful not to let the griefers see them. Thankfully, they were headed in the opposite direction.

“Okay, so, we’re going to go to the Underworld by using the Potion of Invisibility, and we’re going to blow up the main headquarters of the griefers to destroy the people behind this,” Steve says. The group was at Lucy and Steve’s house. Jeb thought this was a relatively good idea, as a make-up, since Steve messed up the first attempt. It was good. So, after the plan, Steve, Lucy, and Jeb set off with TNT and Potions of Invisibility. After a long journey to the border of the Overworld, which was now crushed, they drank Potions of Invisibility to get past the griefers that were guarding the border of the Underworld. It was now also crushed and littered with human bones. But the problem was there was no big gap between the griefers, and there was no way they could get past them. The potion was wearing out. Suddenly, Jeb took out his diamond sword, and with three clear strikes aimed carefully and destroyed two griefers.

Then he whispered to Steve and Lucy, “Run!” And they ran. As fast as they could.

-A Few Hours Later-

“Hmm, I think the headquarters are somewhere here, in this thick forest,” Steve says. They were wandering into a thick forest, with a large mountain at the side and a map with the recorded route to the headquarters. Steve had grabbed it from one of the griefers when they were running away.

“Smart thinking,” Lucy said after they were out of the danger zone. They rounded the corner of a small tree and found a large building, smack right in the middle of the forest. It was huge. The group snuck in with their hands gripped onto their swords, ready for any surprise attack. Suddenly, there was a rustling noise from above. Three silver dragons appeared in front of them, startling them. Their scales were so glittery in the light that the group was almost blinded by them. Their claws were huge; one strike from it could give you a huge cut all the way from your neck to your waist. Jeb immediately started swinging his sword, and with seven clear strikes he destroyed one dragon. Meanwhile, Steve and Lucy were each fighting one dragon, but their swords weren’t powerful enough. They had only iron swords, so Jeb ran in to help them. Steve was fighting this tremendously powerful beast, and with four more strikes killed dragon number two. Then, Steve and Jeb ran to help Lucy, who was losing fast. With three strikes from Jeb’s sword and with five strikes from Steve’s sword, they were able to kill beast number three.   

The group stopped for a breather. Jeb suddenly realized that if the dragons were guarding the entrance, the griefers and the dragons must be together. Suddenly, the group heard a muffling noise and someone shouting, “HELP!” Jeb recognized that voice. He could recognize it anywhere. It was Notch, his long lost friend that had created Minecraft! He was captured! That’s when Jeb began to realize something bad. If Notch was captured… then who was controlling Minecraft? Was it the griefers who made the portal? No. This couldn’t be. Jeb tried to think in a different way, but he wouldn’t stop thinking about this situation. At last, he decided to ask Notch about this.

“Come on! My friend Notch is the creator of Minecraft, and he’s trapped! We have to save him!” Jeb said to Steve and Lucy. As the group sprinted in, Jeb was determined to get out of the moist forest. His face was like an overripe strawberry. He wasn’t used to this kind of pressure. The group sprinted to the jail cells. It was a horrifying sight: the fortress was very dark inside, with only damp lights lighting the halls. Spiderwebs covered the damp walls, making the fortress look like a dungeon. Notch was sitting there, tied and gagged. Jeb immediately opened the door of the jail cell. While Lucy and Steve untied the ropes on the legs, Jeb worked on the tape covering Notch’s mouth.

When he finally got it off of him, Notch yelled, “Oh, Jeb, I am so glad to see you! Jeb, the griefers have a secret weapon! They’re about to launch it on the Overworld!”

“SHHHHH!!!” Steve said, trying not to alert the guards outside the fortress. But it was too late. The yell had alerted the guards. Within seconds, alarms went off and guards started storming the halls.

“WHO’S THERE?” one of the guards yelled loudly, as Jeb, Notch, Steve, and Lucy opened the sewer grate and climbed in. Lucy was the last one to climb down, so she pushed the sewer grate back into position.

-A Few Minutes Later-

How long do we have to be here? Forever? Steve wondered.

Suddenly, Lucy yelled, “Hey, look at the grate above! There’s a helicopter up there! It must be a landing pad. I think that’s our way out of this place!” She looked excited.

The group carefully removed the sewer grate, making sure not to trigger any alarms. If they did, the griefers could hunt them down in seconds. The grate finally cracked, and then it moved. They climbed out. Carefully. Lucy pointed to the helicopter quietly, using only motions, not words. The group sprinted quietly up to the helicopter. They looked inside. Steve opened the door, and led them inside. Notch was in the cockpit, on the wheel. He had created Minecraft, so he knew how to operate these things. The others sat in the passenger seats, and Jeb took the guns. Notch started the engines, and the propellers started spinning. Takeoff!

The helicopter lifted off the ground, and flew higher and higher. Suddenly, six fighter jets appeared from the building, startling Notch. The helicopter flew out of his control, spinning wildly off the ground. The fighter jets opened fire. Jeb knew he only had one chance to push these fighter jets to the ground. The helicopter was spinning, lower and lower. The propellers were stopping. Suddenly, Jeb found all six of the fighter jets in his target. PTOOM! PTOOM! KABOOM! For a second it looked like all the fighter jets were shot. Then two fighter jets flew out of the black smoke, alarming everyone, especially Jeb. Suddenly, the helicopter started up its engines again. Notch grabbed the wheel and put it back on course for the Overworld. The helicopter was back in control. The helicopter steadied itself, and began to gain speed. Yet the two fighter jets were following close behind, firing at them. Two of the bullets made their way to the tail, and blew it up, which made the helicopter lose control again. There was almost no hope now. Jeb was targeting one of the fighter jets, and four of the bullets reached the jet. The jet spun wildly out of control, hit the ground hard, and exploded. Meanwhile, the other jet followed closely behind, opening fire again. The helicopter was just a few feet off the ground.

“Hang on!” Notch yelled, as the helicopter was knocked onto the ground, engines smoking. The group evacuated out the burning helicopter very quickly. Within seconds of their quick escape, the helicopter burst into flames. Notch checked his compass. They were only about a half a mile away from the Overworld. Jeb pulled out his gun and shot the remaining jet which was speeding toward them, opening fire again. It fell to the ground, bursting into flames. Suddenly, there was an earsplitting sound. PERSHOOM! KABOOM!

“What was that?” Jeb questioned, even though everyone heard it. With that, the group sprinted as fast as they could to the Overworld.

-In The Overworld-

“Stop the shield!” The group heard someone yell. A purple mist started reducing. The group ran in, not knowing what was happening at the moment. The group had finally reached the Overworld after a long journey. Jeb looked at the Overworld, terrified of what was unfolding before him. Trees were on fire, and the skyscraper, that was once the tallest building in the city, was now just a pile of burning metal. The other buildings in the city were on fire, too, with nothing to save them. Jeb saw a group of people that must be the people of the Overworld. They ran in, meeting the Overworld.

One of the people from the Overworld was telling Steve and Lucy, “We suffered another attack from the griefers while you were away!” Jeb heard them say, “That’s why we built this laser shield generator to shield us from their attacks!” Suddenly, in the middle of their quick reunion, another HUGE blast.

“Quick, get in!”

The group heard someone yell, “They’re coming!” The group ran in, and the generator started glowing. A purple mist shot out, immune to the shield and the people of the Overworld. A huge blast came; this one was the biggest of all: PERSHOOM KABOOM!!! A fierce blue laser shot through the griefer’s headquarters, then to the Overworld. It was targeting the city of the Overworld! Unfortunately, the shield was not powerful enough to block the laser beam. After ten seconds, the shield flickered and gave way.

“OH, NO!” Someone yelled. The people of the Overworld ran… and ran… and ran…

-A Few Hours Later-

The people of Minecraft teleported them back because they found out the incident of what happened to the Overworld, being taken over by the griefers. The people of the Lagancine Village decided to fix this, so they made the most ultimate weapon of all: The Ultimate Ender Pearl to teleport them to safety. The landscape was a bright, blue sky with healthy trees. The group was teleported to the entrance of the Legancine Village. The bunch of houses, farms, and other things were there at the Legancine Village. The group discussed where Steve and Lucy were going to live now, while Steve, Lucy and the other people of the Overworld, watched in terror as their world collapsed to pieces in the portal.

They gasped and said together, “It’s a nightmare.” The city bursted into flames. Jeb finally decided that Steve and Lucy could live at his house, with six bedrooms and three guest bedrooms open to them. Jeb felt grateful about this.

“Thanks, Jeb,” Steve said. “As a present for saving us, I could tend the crops for you.” Jeb smiled, but it was a smile with an expression that was sad for them. He wasn’t only sad about their home, he was also sad because after this long, intense journey, the group was covered from head to toe with bruises and cuts.  Even their clothes were worn with soot from the crashed helicopter and fortress escape. It was a long, good friendship. They were heroes of the day. Notch returned to making Minecraft and deleted the portal.   

Election Day

It was Election Day, November 18, 3046, on a Tuesday. Millions of people were entering the building to vote. Security guard George Mudd was standing at the entrance, checking people’s bags and their election passes. He looked at his watch, there were two hours until the election started. An old woman with a childlike look ran towards the door. She was running towards the booths in the next room.

“Hey you, I need to see your pass!” She gave him the pass and was about to walk off until the security guard said, “Hey, don’t think you can fool me. You’re just dressed up as a…”

“I am not a girl!!!” she shouted in her most elderly voice.

“Yes you are,” he shouted back.

“No I’m not,” she shouted again.

“Okay, you can go in, but I’m going to send another guard to supervise.”

As George Mudd sat back into his chair he was doubting his decision. Should I have let her in? Will something go wrong? Who is she? Is she going to hurt the candidates?

Meanwhile, while they were arguing, another man named Bob the Builder, who was an old man, passed through the doors without being seen. He sneaked down the aisle and went into the room where Eve Vil was preparing her speech in front of Camila Higgins.

“I think everyone should learn the English language, people should have unity, and there should be the same human rights for everyone.”

“Great! I’ll be waiting for you in a hour.”

When she left, Eve Vil said to herself, “I don’t care about unity, everybody will worship me, and there will be no human rights. HAHAHA.”

Hearing that, Bob the Builder jumped out of his hiding spot and, with his knife, stabbed Eve Vil multiple times. She dropped to the floor, and blood was splattered everywhere. He dragged her quietly to the closet, quickly put on his costume, and walked through the back door that led to the voting room. He grabbed his walker and opened the doors of the voting room and was about to step out of the building when the security guard said, “The voting hasn’t begun yet.”  

“I know,” he said in his regular voice, forgetting that he was an old man, and walked out. Bob the Builder slowly started walking back to his house.

In the voting room, the two candidates were going to give their speeches.

“Hello, our presidents will be making their speeches. First, Nacho Cheese will speak.”

“I think that all nachos should be half price and nachos should be free to the poor to end hunger. I also think there should be unity and justice for the country.”

Camila Higgins came running over to the interviewer screaming, “Eve Vil is dead!”

George Mudd jumped up out of his seat and ran over to where Eve Vil was preparing. There was a knife in her body. Then, he knew who it probably was: it was the old man who left the voting room before it started. The security guard ran toward the exit. He looked around. He didn’t see anything. He ran down the block and saw the man enter a building. He dashed toward the building. Bob the Builder started running too. Bob the Builder made a sharp turn at the next block and hid in a restaurant. He ended up in a kitchen. No one saw him. After a few minutes, he quietly and quickly walked back to his house, taking another route.

George stopped running. He realized Bob the Builder wasn’t an old man. He was only dressed up as an old man. He had lost him.

He walked back to the election building. Just as he sat down, a girl came out of the voting booths, carried out by the two security guards.

“I knew she was a girl,” he said. “Call her mom and send her home.”

The two security guards grabbed a taxi to drive her home. When she got home she was grounded for two weeks. The guards came back to the voting room, sat on the couch, and fell asleep. George Mudd knew that he failed to do his job. His job was to protect people. He put his head down on the table and next time he knew had to be more vigilant.

In the voting room Nacho Cheese was screaming, “I won! I won! I’m the only candidate! I won!” People around him were miserable. People were booing. He didn’t care. He was just celebrating by shooting Nacho Cheese everywhere.

The End

The Witch of Staten Island

In the time of 1827, there were two soldiers who just came back from a furious war. They were in the Navy, but they ran away because they did not want to get injured, or worse, killed! They needed to find some shelter because there was a terrible storm going on. They found a little cabin in the country, which was the only shelter in sight.

The two soldiers went into the little cabin to spend the night. When they started to settle in the cabin, they heard something moaning in the kitchen cabinet. The two soldiers walked into the kitchen slowly without making any noise. They opened the kitchen cabinet and just like that –

“Ahhh!”

One of the soldiers was gone!

The soldier who was still there looked in the cabinet, and the only thing that he saw was a dead body in the hands of a creepy doll. He went to look out the window to see if the storm was still going on, but the only thing that he saw in the window was a witch. The soldier locked all the doors and all of the windows, locked himself in one room with a window, found a pitch black blanket, and hid under it.

Everything was quiet. The soldier pulled the covers off of him, and the window swung open. The soldier walked up to the window. He watched what he thought was a horse going into the bushes, but then he saw the creepy old witch go into the bushes! He watched the whole scene. The witch jumped into the bushes, and she came out with horse ribs. She put them on the water, and they floated away.

The soldier carefully put the blanket away, quietly walked out of the tiny haunted cabin, and followed the witch into the distance. When the witch reached her destination, it seemed like she was talking to a black shadow that was shaped like a bull, but it seemed like they got into a fight (it got physical).

The shadow dude started stabbing the creepy witch! The creepy witch pulled the shadow’s tongue out and walked away, but the storm was still going on. At the same place that they were, a tree got struck by lightning! The tree fell down and hit both of them. The witch got up and got really angry, and the witch pulled out the shadow’s heart and lungs and ate it.

THE END! HAVE A NICE DAY!  

Deal

When I walked into my room, I saw him.

“What the heck are you doing in my room, Winston?”

“I heard you had Doritos, and I’m really hungry,” answered Winston, my 15-year-old brother. Winston was always being annoying. It was as if it were his full time job, if 15-year-olds had jobs. But I had a job, and I was already late.

“Well, those Doritos are mine, so get out of my room!” I shouted at him as I grabbed him by the collar and threw him out. As quickly as I could, I changed into my work outfit and ran out of the room and down the stairs.

“Bye, Mom, I’m leaving!” I called to her. As I had thought, the answer soon came out of her bedroom, which she practically never left after her divorce with Dad.

“Bye Cathy, don’t forget your keys!

I sighed and grabbed my keys out of the key bowl and walked out of the front door into the misty morning air. I began to wish that I had brought a coat, but I was too lazy, so I just began to walk down the street to work. I liked where I worked; it was a sort of makeshift safe haven for me. I was a barista at a small coffee shop. Yes, I know, I have a weird taste in safe havens, but they work for me. As I finally reached my destination, I thought about what excuse I would make for my lateness. Settling on the usual, “I was helping a hobo across the street” to make me look like a better person, I walked into the shop.

“Sorry Miss Barnes, I was helpi…”

“Yeah, yeah, Cathy, you were saving a puppy from a burning building, go get to your workplace.”

I smiled. Miss Barnes owned the coffee shop, and sometimes, I felt like she was the only one who understood me. Still smiling, I walked over to the coffee maker and began to wipe it down.

“Hey, Cath.”

I sighed as I heard the familiar voice: Brian Wallden, the human version of accidentally getting chili powder in your eyes. Every morning, he would show up at the coffee shop exactly four minutes before it opened, order the same, exact cappuccino and smoked ham and parmesan cheese sandwich, and then sit at the same, exact table in the corner on the left. Even worse, he would always sit there for exactly 23 minutes and lowkey flirt with me.

“Hey, Brian, what would you like to order today?” I asked him, my voice laced with sarcasm.

“You know? I think I’m going to try something new today. How about a latte?”

“Why the sudden change, Brian? You might hurt yourself,” I answered flatly.

“You know, it would be nice to have someone to share the latte with, Cath.” Oh God, here we go again, another 23 minutes of Brian’s usual nice guy act.

“No thanks, Brian, I already ate this morning,” I lied. Looking at the clock, I saw that Brian had already been here for 26 minutes. What was his plan now?

“Aww, have I overstayed my welcome?” asked Brian. I glared at him so hard that I could swear that my gaze could burn through metal. ”Woah, Cath, I was actually going to offer a peace treaty.” I raised an eyebrow at him, wondering what lie he’d use today. “If you go out on one date with me, I’ll never bother you again. Deal?”

I thought hard. Was I really prepared to spend a couple of hours with Brian so that he’d never bother me again? After thinking for a couple more minutes, I turned my head back to him and made the worst decision of my life. “Deal.”

Searching for Home, Chapter 1

“Stop, wait!” I screamed. The spaceship door was closing, and I could see the pilot getting ready for takeoff. I saw my mother’s panicked look when she noticed I hadn’t boarded the ship with her. But before she could do anything about it, the spaceship was already hurling through space.

***

I opened my eyes. My shirt was drenched with sweat. I pushed my long brown matted hair out of my eyes.  I always dreaded going to sleep because I’d get dreams, bad dreams. I’d dream of ghosts or vampires, but now I dream of reality, which is much more horrifying than any monster.

I climbed out of my tattered tent to watch the sunrise. As many times as I watched it, it was always breathtaking. The beautiful burst of color in contrast to the dark sky made the forest glow. It was magical. This wasn’t actually a forest; it used to be Central Park.

I stayed away from the city because the White Masks targeted New York City. So I stayed in the woods. The White Masks came out of nowhere. First, they bombed major places all over the world: The Eiffel Tower, The Statue of Liberty, the Great Sphinx, the Big Ben, the Great wall of China, and even Disney World. Then, they, promising safety, rounded up civilians, but those who believed the White Masks were never seen again. I shuddered, thinking about what they had done to those poor people. I didn’t know who these White Masks were, all I knew was that they wore white masks that only revealed their eyes. They wore suits and were tall and skinny.  I didn’t even know if they were human, but they must’ve had a lot of power to bomb and corrupt our world.

I rummaged through my backpack. I realized I only had a small amount of food left. So I decided to go back to the city to get food.

***

I walked to the nearest grocery store: Trader Joe’s. I climbed under a fallen tree and past the burnt playground, always keeping a low profile, even though I was probably the only human left or even living thing left on this planet. The thought of that made me shiver. I, a 13 year-old girl was all alone on a great big planet.

***

It was 2 days before I turned 13. My sister, Octavia, ran ahead of me into the Trader Joe’s. “Kristina, come on! You are so slow!” Octavia teased me.

“Oh, really?” I said, and I started to run but my sister had long legs and she always beat me when we raced. My sister distracted me, making up games and taking me to the sample station, so I wouldn’t realize my dad was buying me a cake. I acted as if I didn’t know but I knew exactly what cake they were getting me. Buttermilk cake with chocolate frosting.

***

I sighed. I didn’t cry anymore. The first month I cried until there were no more tears left. I loved my sister so much, but I couldn’t save her. I shook my head and remembered what I came for. “Water, food. Water, food, water, food, water, food,” I repeated to myself. Sometimes I wondered what kept me from going crazy. Some nights, I’d stay awake until morning, repeating to myself that somebody would come for me.

***

I walked into the Trader Joe’s. It was nearly empty. I grabbed the last protein bar, beans, rice, and Poland Spring water bottles. I started walking out the door when, suddenly, there was a soft thumping. It was faint, but I could hear it. I walked closer. At the back of my head, something was telling me to run for my life. But, curiosity got the best of me. As I followed the sound, I realized it was coming from the men’s bathroom. I wiped my sweaty hands on my brown shorts that used to be pants but that I cut because it was way too hot. I opened the door, ready to fight, but there was nobody there. Instead, in the corner, there was a box. And this box was moving.

I lifted the cardboard box’s lid, my heart thumping, and inside was a brown shepherd puppy almost as big as the box. I was so relieved it wasn’t somebody trying to kill me. But then I put my attention back to the dog. Why was the dog here in the middle of a Trader Joe’s? I touched the dog gingerly. I loved dogs but, hey, you never know. The dog winced in pain. I realized it was covered in blood, but it wasn’t the dog’s blood. Next to the dog was a man, under the sink. I panicked and backed away, but the man didn’t move. I moved closer and realized he was dead; there was a bullet embedded in his chest. I felt nauseous, and, suddenly, I fell to my knees. I mean, sure, I’d seen deaths before, but this was sickening. I grabbed the box with the dog in it and ran. I didn’t know where I was running to, but I kept on running, past a parking lot, and into Central Park. I kept on running until I was as far away as I could be from the dead man. I thought I was the only person left on the planet. Who was that man? Who killed him? And where is this dog from?

I sat down on a rock and looked at the dog. I almost felt like smiling when I looked at him. “Don’t worry; other humans will come and get us like they took my mom and dad. They’ll take us far from here. To another planet where we can start a new life. Where we can live life easily without worrying about surviving.” I lied to the dog, because there was a .0001% chance of that happening.

Now I’d really done it. Now, I was talking to a dog. However, I guessed I’d have to name him. “I’ll name you Argos.” I said.

A Different Life

          

“Kayla, dinner’s ready!” My mom says.

“Okay, be there in a sec,” I reply. I love dinner. It’s my favorite meal of the day. After a long and hard day of school and then a walk to my favorite neighbor, Margaret’s house, I get to come home to a yummy plate of mac ’n cheese, or mashed potatoes with some fried chicken, maybe even lasagna!

I race downstairs after finishing my last problem of my algebra homework to find on the table vegetables with potatoes that are not mashed! “Uh, what’s this?!”

“Well, your stepdad told me that the foods we were eating were not the healthiest, and he said we should try something new and healthier.”

“WHAT!?” I say with attitude.

“Be respectful to your mother Kayla,” My stepdad Eric says.

“Uh, great.” I murmur angrily. We sit down at the table. I grab some potatoes and try to mash them with my fork so they would at least look a little like the perfect meals I used to have. I take a bite. “YUCK! What is this? Where’s the salt?!” I say while chewing this disgusting piece of unsalted potato.

“Eric said salt is way too bad for you and can cause life problems when you are older,” my mother says.

“Well, I can’t eat this without salt,” I reply angrily.

“Eric says-”

“Enough with Eric already!” I storm up the stairs and stomp into my room. I slam the door behind me. Tears start to fill my eyes. I can no longer hold them in. I turn to my pillow and let the tears stream down my face and absorb into the pillow.

After my face is completely dry, I think to myself, Everything was fine before Eric. I used to come to dinner with a smile on my face and with a mouth full of delicious food. Everything is changing and I hate it. With those last few words, I get into my pajamas and hop into bed. I dream that my dad is still alive, and Eric never met my mother.

BEEP BEEP! I hear my alarm go off. I get up and change into my uniform, which is a beige shirt with a logo that says, “Williams Charter School” or WCS for short. I also slip on my black skirt with buttons on the side. I run down the stairs and get myself some Chex Mix and milk. I sit down at the shiny brown table and eat my breakfast. When I’m done, I skip to the bathroom and brush my hair and my teeth. Then, I grab my pink bookbag with sparkles on it and walk to the curb to wait for the school bus.

When the bus arrives I am about to step on when I hear Eric scream, “Kayla! You forgot your lunch. I made some sandwiches. Here’s your lunch.” He hands me my lunch bag.

Oh no! He gave me my old lunch bag from first grade that has Barbies on it! I’m now in sixth grade and hate Barbies! When I get on the bus I try to hide my lunchbox but it falls on to the floor and everyone sees the Barbies on it. I get so much laughter. IT WAS HORRIBLE. I walk to the seat I share with my best friend Melanie and sit down.

“You like Barbies?!” she asks.

“No. Eric packed my lunch in the wrong lunchbox. I’m telling you, he’s ruining everything!” I say with anger.

“It’s not that bad. I have a stepdad and once you get to know them, they are fine. Believe me, I was exactly like you when I first met my stepdad. It takes time,” she says.

“I sure hope you’re right, but nothing can replace my old dad. He was PERFECT.”

For an hour and a half people keep on asking me if I like Barbies. I always tell them, “NO!”

But they always say, “OKAY!” or “SURE.”

Finally, we arrive at school. I first have drama with the most annoying teacher in the universe, Ms. Den. All we do is warming up exercises. When I walk into the classroom I see all of the kids have already sat down at their tables and they have their idea journals out. I sit down next to my other friend, not best friend, Layla.

“Now class, today we are going to perform a play for each other. You can do it solo or in pairs of no more than three.” Ms. Den says in her annoying accent.

Everyone pairs up and I turn around to ask Layla if she wants to be my partner and I see Layla has already partnered up with her best friends Alexis, Carly and Kyle, so of course, I am all alone. I decide to go solo.

“Choose a topic to act about now and then start writing your script down.” Ms.Den says.

I write about my life. After twenty minutes, Ms. Den says it’s time to perform. I decide to go first to get it over with.  

“Make sure everything is appropriate and respectful,” she says.

I start to perform. “My life was great. I had amazing meal every night for dinner and I was so happy. But then, an evil monster named Eric came into my life and ruined everything!” I notice Ms. Den’s face goes from a smile to a frown as I keep on performing.

In the middle of one of my sentences, Ms. Den says, “Okay Kayla, that’s enough. I would like to have a talk with you outside please.” We walk outside and chat.

“You wanted to see me,” I say.

“Yes, I said to perform something respectful, and that was not respectful at all! Now I need you to apologize to the class for that disrespectful piece, please.”

“What! I’m not doing that. That is my play, and I’m not apologizing for doing it. I said what I had to say and it’s true. Eric is ruining my life!”

“If you don’t apologize I will have to email your parents.” Ms. Den says.

“Parent,” I remind her. “Eric is not my father and never will be!” With that, I storm back into the class and sit down. As I sit down, I see Ms. Den walk angrily to the principal’s office right across the hallway. I think to myself, Maybe I should have just apologized. But whatever. I said what I had to say.

At the end of the class, I go to lunch. After I have my sandwich, I throw away my Barbie lunch bag. After lunch I have two more classes, which are math and English. At the end of the day, I walk out the door, glad I finally get some peace and quiet while walking home.

“Honk Honk!”

I turn to see my mom and Eric in our car. GREAT! I hop in and put my seatbelt on.

“We got an email from Ms. Den saying you had a disrespectful play in drama about Eric. Would you like to explain?” My mom says impatiently.

“I’ll pass,” I say sarcastically.

“Kayla Rose Smith!” my mom says.

“Fine. All I said was that I hate my life now ever since Eric arrived. That’s it,” I say, annoyed that I have to explain everything I do.

“Well, when you get home you are punished, so no television even though it’s a Friday, and no snacks,” My mom says furiously.

After that, there is silence for the whole ride back home. When we arrive at home, I get out of the car and slam the door. I walk up to the house and unlock the door with my emergency pair of house keys. I stomp upstairs to my room and stand there. While I am up there, I write all about Eric in my diary.

I miss my dad more than anything. It was a year ago. I wish he wouldn’t have smoked. I wish he didn’t get lung cancer. I wish he never had died. After writing about Eric and thinking about my dad, I sit down on my bed and cry. I miss my dad so much, and I can’t believe mom could even try to replace him.

“Kayla, dinner’s ready!” My mom says. I wipe the tears in my face away, walk down the stairs, and sit at the dinner table. I grab a plate and put some of the strawberries from the salad onto my plate. There is silence.

Finally, my mom says, “Listen Kayla, I know getting a new dad is tough, but you at least have to give it a try.” I ignore her and continue eating the strawberries that are sitting in front of me. My mom lets out a sigh. After I finish my strawberries, I put my plate in the sink and walk back upstairs without saying anything.

I start to do my English homework, which is to read chapter ten of A Mango Shaped Space. After ten minutes, I finally finish the eight page chapter. After reading, I get out my algebra homework and finish all of my homework for the weekend.

Tomorrow, I’m getting out of the house to have some alone time and think about what has happened. With that, I hop into my pajamas that have hearts on them and I go to sleep.

The next morning, I wake up and I check the clock. It’s 10:30! I’ve never slept in for that long. I get into a pink top and some jeans, and I run down the stairs. I grab some frozen waffles and put them into the toaster. Then, I grab some syrup and eat my warm, crusty waffles. After I eat, I run down the hall to the bathroom and brush my hair and teeth.

As I am walking out the door my mom says, “Honey,” “Where are you going?”

“For a long walk.” With those words I race down the block and stop at a red light. When the light is green, I walk all around the neighborhood.

Then Margaret, my neighbor, walks up to me and says, “Hi Kayla.”

“Hi Margaret.”

“Last night you looked pretty angry when you slammed your car door and stomped up to your house. I wanted to ask you something.”

“Like?” I say curiously.

“Well, I have a ton of spells and you look like you are unhappy with your life, and I happen to have a potion to change someone’s life. Would you like it?” she asks.

“Sure.”

“Follow me.” We walk down the block and into her house. In her house, she has tons of potions. She grabs one and gives it to me. She tells me to say what I want my life to be like and then, I have to take a sip of the potion.

“I wish my life was all different right now and none of this happened.” I say. As I sip the potion, I see everything disappear.

Then I wake up on the sidewalk. I walk back to the house and walk through the open door.

“Awww look at you! Eric check her out.”

I wonder what they are talking about.

“Adorable! Let’s keep her.” I am so confused. I walk up to my room and it is so weird. It is like I am crawling on the floor. My face was so low to the ground. I also am not feeling so good. I go to the bathroom in my room, and I am smaller than the toilet! Then I walk to the mirror on my room floor and I take peek. I am a Yorkie with a bow! I freak out and scream. But when I scream, all I really do is bark!

I wanted to change my life, but I didn’t mean like this! All I wanted was Eric to not have met my mom and my dad was still alive and we got him cured! I didn’t want to be a dog!

I have to fix this. I run back down the stairs and to the door. I can’t reach the doorknob so I start scratching the door.

“Aww, you want to go out and play? Alright,” my mom says as she opens the door for me.

I sprint out and race to Margaret’s house. I bark at the door until Margaret opens it.

“Oh, hi. I have something to tell you about the spell, Kayla.” She says in her raspy voice.

“Bark! Bark.” I try to say, “Look what you did to me,” but all that comes out is “Bark.”

“Um, I can’t really understand you. How about we play Charades, and I can figure out what you are saying. Okay?”

“Bark! Bark!” I wag my tail, and that’s how she knows I say “Yes.”

We walk to her living room and start to play. I start to act. I pretend I am walking just like yesterday, and I get stopped because of Margaret.

“Oh. You were walking and looking for a place to do your business.” I put my tail down so she knows that she guessed wrong. “Uh, you were walking down the street when, uh..” I wag my tail showing her she is going in the right direction. “Oh, and then you stopped to talk to me yesterday!”

I jump in the air with happiness filling my heart, and I start to bark.

“What’s next?”

I start to pretend we are talking, so I start to bark and wag my tail.

“Um, Oh! That’s us talking, isn’t it?” I bark and wag my tail again. Next I walk all the way to the door and finally pretend like I’m walking inside.

“I get it! You are talking about yesterday and how I gave you the potion. Yeah, um about that, I remembered about three years ago I had a mean friend, so I mixed the dog potion with the life potion so she would turn into a dog forever. I forgot to make a new life potion! I’m sorry.” She says with a frown.

My tail droops down and I whine. “Oh! But I do know how you can become a human again! By tomorrow morning, you have to convince your parents that you are Kayla, or you will turn into a dog forever.” I bark at her to try to tell her that she can tell them.

“Oh, but the trick is, I can’t tell them, only you can. I can help but I can’t directly tell them. Oh Kayla, I’m so sorry.” Magaret says with tears filling her eyes and a frown on her face. My tail goes between my legs and I walk slowly home.

When I get there, I bark at the door until someone opens it, and I walk slowly up to my room. “Where’s Kayla?” I hear Eric say.

“I don’t know, but she should be back by this time. It’s almost dinner.” I hear mom say. She sounds really worried. I walk back down the stairs and go up to my mom and start to bark.

“Quiet, Lily.” My mother says. They already came up with a name for me?! I give up. I slowly walk to a bowl that is lying on the floor, and I pick it up and show it to Eric. He drops some of the chicken that he is cutting up for dinner, and I eat it. After I’m done I go up to my room and lay on my bed.

I think to myself, what will convince my mom that I am Kayla and not Lily? Tomorrow I better come up with a way, or I will be stuck in this short and furry body forever!  After a moment of silence I hear my mom crying in the other room.

“It’s okay, she can handle herself. I bet tomorrow morning she will be here and waiting for breakfast.” Eric says. That doesn’t help.  She keeps on crying. I go into her room and sit beside her and rest my head on her lap. After thirty minutes or so, she finally stops crying and goes to bed. I start to whine but after ten minutes, I go to my bed and go to sleep on my pillow.

In the morning, I wake up and see that my mom inserted a dog door, so I go out of the dog door and go to Margaret’s house.

“Bark, bark.” I scream at the top of my lungs.

“Coming,” Magaret says. When she opens the door she says, “Oh Kayla, it’s so nice to see you. Is there anything I could do for you?”

I try to do Charades. I pretend I am Margaret and I slip Margaret’s business card into my house to give my mom and Eric a note that I’m Kayla. Margaret does not understand. I try twelve more times and she still doesn’t get it.

On my thirteenth time Margaret says, “I can’t understand what you are doing, but I have an idea. How about today in the afternoon, I go by your house and slip in my business card. It says that I can turn people into dogs or change their lives or something like that. They might get the idea that I changed you into a dog!” I drop onto the floor and then get back up and show her I agree by wagging my tail. I walk back home and go to my room and wait for my parents to get a business card. Hours pass, and I am getting worried, but then I hear something.

“What’s this? A business card? It says, ‘Try my potions like a dog, changing life, or love potions. They really do work!’ Oh, it’s from Margaret, our crazy magical neighbor. Kayla always likes to go over there to check out or even try her potions. I can’t believe she’s still not home. What if a bad guy took her or something?” Mom says in a worried voice.

“Wait a sec. You said Kayla likes to try her potions, right? So maybe she tried her potion and now she is something else.” They sit at the dinner table and think for over thirty minutes until Eric says, “Maybe she drank a potion and now something happened to her.” I walk down to grab the card out of mom’s hand and sit it down next to me. I pray that she will notice that Eric’s completely right and that she should listen to him. “No, that’s probably not it.”

“I don’t know, let’s see. If she doesn’t show up by dinner, we will start thinking that idea, okay?” My mom says.

“Alright.” Eric says.

I slowly walk back up to my room with my tail between my legs. Once I get to my room, I sit on my pillow. I think, what could I possibly do to convince mom that I’m Kayla?

It is noon, and my mom gave up. I can’t give up. I run down the stairs and bark at my mom.

“What is it, Lily?” She asks. I grab her sleeve and go out the door. She comes out the real door. Then I race down to Margaret’s house and bark at the door. After five minutes, Magaret comes. She was making tea, she explains. I bark and bark.

“Hi Margaret.” My mom says.

“Hi, is there a reason you came to visit?” Margaret asks.

“Uh,no.” My mom replies. This conversation is not working out, so I run inside, go to the potions, grab the dog potion and put it in front of my mom. Then I grab the life change potion and put it in front of her also.

“Wait a minute,” my mom says. “Lily, are you Kayla? No, that’s crazy. But Eric said something like this could happen, and now I kind of believe it.” Mom says to Margaret.

“Follow what you believe in.” Magaret says. My mom bends down and says.

“Kayla, is that you?” With those words yellow dust starts sparkling around me and before I know it, I am human again!

“Mom!” I say happily.

“Oh Kayla! I missed you so much. Eric was right! Oh my goodness.” My mom says with tears streaming down her face.

We walk home and when I get home, I go to Eric and give him a big hug and say, “Thank you.” My mom joins the hug and we live happily ever after.

THE END!!

Hawaii Gone Bad

“Do we have to go mom? I really don’t want to go to Hawaii,” I said to my mom. She was taking us to the cruise ship. We were in New York and the pier was full of people. And somewhere in that crowd was my worst enemy, Ali. She was going to Hawaii, too. She was even staying in the same hotel as us. It was going to be horrible. Our parents knew each other from high school. They were in the same classes. They didn’t know that Ali was mean to me.

She would always shout down from her room, “WE’RE OKAY! WE’RE GETTING ALONG AWESOMELY!” when really she was punching me and giving a black eye. Of course my parents noticed the black eye. But they always thought I was the one who deserved the black eye, because she was just defending herself, because I’m a boy so they thought I started it. I wish I wasn’t a boy. Once I even made that wish on a star.

I had packed some books, some clothing, everything I needed. It was going to be horrible. I’d always wanted to go to Hawaii, but now I wanted to go home and eat some chocolate chip cookies. I love chocolate chip cookies. We got on the cruise ship and it was just my luck that Ali’s family was right down the hall. I went to sleep, but it was very hard to. I read for some time, then I got sleepy. But I couldn’t get to sleep. I just kept thinking, Ali could come in and punch me anytime because my parents think she’s nice and I have my own room.

The next day, I went up to the top of the cruise ship. There they had a bunch of pools, ice cream, a buffet, and an arcade. I went to the water slide. I heard the captain’s voice calling over the loudspeaker, “Get on the lifeboats! We’re sinking!!!”

I grabbed some food and hopped onto a boat. (Of course I brought chocolate chip cookies.)

Ali was in the boat.

No one else was.

Help me!!!! I thought.

We called to our parents to toss us a rope, but they couldn’t hear us. None of them could hear us. The boats paddled in the opposite direction. We didn’t have any paddles. We had our hands. And soon they were specks on the horizon.

What felt like a million hours later, we’d finished all the food, even the chocolate chip cookies. We’d finished all the water. We were getting close to land. It wasn’t Hawaii, maybe it was one of those distant islands out there, but still, it was land. We paddled toward it. When we got close enough we jumped out and swam out towards the land. When we finally got there we flopped onto land and just lay there for a while. The island looked like a perfect beach — zero seagulls, zero dead fish, zero pollution, and uninhabited. The water was clear and the sand was speckled with pink. There were pieces of coral and beautiful shells scattered around. There was a big forest of beautiful greens, and we could hear thousands of parakeets and parrots squawking like crazy.

“I wonder why they’re all squawking like crazy,” I said.

Ali was walking towards the forest. Ali said, “Do you hear that rustle?”

I listened closely and said, “Yeah.”

I want my mommy! I thought.

We started running into the forest, which is one of the stupidest decisions I’ve ever made. Suddenly, a giant figure rose above the trees. It was probably ten stories high, maybe more, and it had teeth that were as big as the biggest daggers. It had eyes the size of dinner plates and I don’t want to explain the rest! It started chasing us. We ran through the forest as quickly as we could, but it was too fast for us. I tripped over something. It was a dagger. I stashed it in my pocket hoping the monster was just trying to play tag. It wasn’t. We were the first source of human meat that it had ever seen in thousands of years, and he wasn’t going to let us get away.

“Turn this way,” Ali screamed.

“No, this way!” I responded.

We kept arguing for thirty seconds.

Then I said, “How about we go the middle way?” BIG. MISTAKE.

We were running through the middle path and we tripped over a trip wire and got caught in a trap.

“If I could punch you, I would!” Ali said.

“Jeez Ali, why do you have to be so mean all the time?” I said.

“Why do you have to be such a dweeb all the time?” Ali retorted.

“Bully.”

“Dweeb”

“Bully.”

“Dweeb.”

“… Monster,” I said.

“HEY,” Ali said

“Noooo, really, a monster!” I yelled.

Ali screamed. We struggled and struggled to get out, but it didn’t work. The material was too strong. Then it went dark.

Ali was still screaming. So was I. Then I remembered.

The dagger! I thought.

“ALI, I’ve got a dagger. We can cut our way out.” I made a really big hole in the stomach, big enough for both of us to get out. It started shrinking rapidly.

“Okay Ali, c’mon,” I said.

Ali looked really pale, like a ghost. She fell down and fainted. I tried to drag her through the hole. She summoned enough strength to say, “Go on… without me.”

I said, “NO.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“YESSS.”

Then she was gone.

Wow Ali’s not such a bad person after all, I thought. I rushed back to the beach part of the the island and I saw a rescue boat. My parents were on it. So were Ali’s. I told them the whole story and to my surprise, they believed me. They said that everyone in Hawaii believed that this island was cursed, so everyone stayed away from it. They guessed because they saw me floating off in that direction, that I was stranded there. After they got to Hawaii, they got a rescue boat and sailed over here. Ali’s parents were very sad, and my parents promised me double dessert for a month for the way that Ali treated me. They mourned with Ali’s parents, though. I went to the funeral. It was very sad, but they didn’t have Ali’s body to bury, so someone made a body in a very similar way, like hers. I placed chocolate chip cookies on the grave afterwards.

THE END.

The Day That Jack Ran Away

Every day, Jack would look out the window of his room and watch the trains. He also saw something not that common every day. Each day, a man would pass by Jack’s building, get out of his car, and stare for hours at one of Jack’s windows. Jack had three windows in his room. Jack would look out of the opposite window that the man was staring at and watch the man. Jack thought this was a very odd action to perform. But, the man still did it.

Jack had foster parents. He used to live with his grandmother because his parents died in a car crash, but there was a tragic fire in the building that Jack and his grandmother lived in. Only Jack had a chance to escape it.

Jack did not like his foster-parents. They were very mean to him. Every time Jack did not eat his dinner, they would send him to his room and not even say, “Goodnight”. Those nights, Jack was very hungry.

Since he didn’t like his foster parents, this caused him to run away.

Jack’s foster parents’ names were Bob and Claire. Bob and Claire made a lot of money. They let Jack go to school by himself because they had to leave for work very early in the morning. Jack did not like his school. Kids were mean to him and called him names. And his teacher was mean. Jack refused to go to school. He would not get good grades because the rare times he went to school, he did rubbish. Not because he did not know the answers, but because he didn’t want to answer them. Jack was actually very smart. He skipped a grade because he was so smart. He was only ten and in sixth grade.

One day, Jack decided to run away from his foster parents. He made the decision to use all his saved money for a bus trip to San Francisco, California.

It was July 13th when Jack was waiting in the line to the bus for a trip to California. When he stepped on the bus, he felt glory to be free.

The bus was going up a bumpy hill, and Jack was going up and down. He was hungry. He forgot to bring extra money to stop and eat food. While everybody went outside and ate food, Jack had to stay inside the bus and not eat food at all. Even the bus driver was outside. Fortunately, he had packed a sandwich and applesauce in a zip-lock for the trip.

He said, “Wow! Aren’t I smart?” He started to eat his sandwich. It was a ham, cheese, and mayonnaise sandwich. When he finished his sandwich, he ate the applesauce with a spoon. When everybody came back in the bus, the bus finally moved. He fell asleep in the bus because of the good meal.

The next morning, an old lady woke him up. She said, “Little boy! Move! The bus is in danger!”

Jack said, “Wait, my stuff!”

The old lady said, “Your stuff doesn’t matter right now. We’re all gonna die!”

Jack replied, “Yes, it does. I have my special teddy bear in there.”

The old lady answered, “There’s an earthquake coming near!!!” The old lady stopped talking and picked up Jack and his suitcase out of the bus and jumped over a small crack. The bus had fallen in a big crack. She walked quickly to where all the other people were.

Jack said, “Holy cow! There’s been an earthquake and I didn’t know! Why didn’t anybody tell me?”

The old lady said, “Mhhm-hmm.”

Jack saw that there was a whole bunch of wood and sticks on the ground. And not too far away in the distance, everybody could see a hardware store. They spent at least fifteen minutes walking to the hardware store. No one really talked while they were walking. They did not talk because of the situation that they were in. After the old lady saved him, Jack thought they were friends. He was only talking to her.

Everybody asked Jack, “Why are we walking there?”

Jack answered, “Because we could build a wagon to carry everybody to San Francisco. And if no one cooperates, then I will do it all by myself. And you guys will stay here.”

Everybody said, “Ok! We will help.”

This wagon had a hole in it so people could steer with their feet. It was something very old-fashioned, but nobody cared. All everybody wanted to do was get to San Francisco. It took two hours to get to San Francisco.

When they got there, they were all very excited, especially Jack. Jack walked to his grandfather’s apartment at 1950 Val Street Apartment 1B. There were three people who wore beautiful clothes sitting outside his grandfather’s apartment. They were some of the richest people in the apartment. These people recognized Jack as the grandson of the owner of the building, which was Jack’s grandfather, John.

Jack said, “Excuse me,” to those people. They moved quickly. Jack said, “Thank you”. They replied, “You’re welcome.”

Jack did not have to go up any stairs because his Grandpa’s apartment was on the first floor.

He knocked on the door, excited. His grandfather answered the door and said, “Oh… my grandson. Long time no see.”

Jack said, “Grandpa!” and hugged him.

His grandfather asked, “What are you doing here, Jack?”

Jack answered, “Um… I came here to visit. Like you said, long time no see.”

“Oh. I have had no one visit me here. I’m very happy you came to visit.” Jack knew why no one visited his grandfather. It was because he was always grumpy, or he always looked grumpy.

Two days later, Jack and John were watching the news. There were two adults on the news saying that their foster child ran away. And then there was a picture of Jack. John looked at Jack.

“Is that you?” he asked.

Jack replied, “Um… maybe. Actually! No! That’s my twin brother.” (wink, wink).

John said, “Twin brother? Your mom was my daughter. She would have told me if she had two kids.”

Jack knew he was lying but he did not want to go back to New York. And from the stories that his mom used to tell him about his grandfather, he did not want to deal with him. When Jack’s mother went to her friend’s house after school without asking permission, she got in trouble, and was grounded for a week. She tried to talk to him about it, but he was very stubborn and would not listen.

That night, John packed Jack’s things and put them in his car. In the morning, when Jack woke up, John gave him breakfast and told him to get in the car. Jack realized that John was driving out of town.

“What are you doing?” asked Jack.

“I am bringing you to your foster parents,” answered John.

“What? But they’re mean to me! Do you want me to suffer? Or be happy here with you?”

“I want you to be happy with your foster parents. Why would you run away? Now everybody is going to think I stole you, but you, instead of being a responsible ten-year-old, wasted all your saved money to get here on a bus. That was a very dumb thing to do.”

Jack said, “I know it was. But I will never be happy with them. So I do not know what you’re talking about.”

After arguing for the whole ride to New York, they finally got there. John carried Jack out of the car, because Jack refused to get out. John told Jack to stay right there on the sidewalk while John grabbed his suitcase. But Jack did not cooperate. He went back in the car and held on to the seat because John tried to pull him out. After an hour or two, Jack finally got persuaded out of the car. He went up the stairs to Claire and Bob, his foster parents’ house. John knocked on the door just like when Jack knocked on his door in California and lied to him.

When Claire opened the door, she said, “Jack!” and hugged him and kissed him. “Why did you run away?”

Jack answered, “Because you guys were mean to me.”

Claire and Bob both were saying, “We’re sorry. We’ll never be mean again.”

Jack said, “It’s fine. It’s just that I want my mom and dad back.”

That night, they all watched a movie, except for John, because he had to go back home to his job. Claire and Bob let Jack have popcorn and pizza. They had a mini-party. Jack decided to never disobey or leave Claire and Bob again. And he always thought that his mom and dad were happy for him, that he had a family to love and take care of him.

The Contest

Maila Eliss

I was in Ms. Letterman’s classroom for double english (blah) “trying” to learn about the use of pronouns in speech, whatever that means. Honestly, I was more focused on the classrooms big, open windows and high ceilings with big lights. I was completely zoned out when I heard Ms. Letterman say briskly, “Maila, Sara Ann, and Emilia please come up to my desk after class. The rest of you are dismissed.”

Wait, what! Class was over already!? I must have done a better job zoning out than usual. Anyway, I headed up to her desk, along with Sara and Emilia. I thought they were afraid they were going to get in trouble, but not nearly as much as I was.

“Girls, first things first, you are not in trouble. You have been chosen for the district speech writing contest.” Oh great. More English class. Wait a second, this could make people at school respect me. “I have chosen you for a variety of reasons, that I will not get into right now. The team is not only composed of you girls, but of-”

“Well, who are they?” cut in Sara. Sara could be a little sharp around the edges, and really competitive. She’s really tall and blonde, but I might just think that because I’m one of the shortest kids in the grade.

“Sara. I was getting to that.” Ms. Letterman sighed. “The other two are Kalliope Howard, and Emilia’s sister Katlin, but I believe she goes by Katie.”

I had to admit, I was a little surprised by the addition of Kalliope and Katie, but Emilia seemed both highly surprised and completely livid.

“So you too now!” she cried, “Oh, look at the little twins. Let’s put them together for everything.”

Clearly this was not why Ms. Letterman put them both into the project because she sighed and softly replied, “No Emilia. That’s not why I put you together. I put you together because you have gifts that complement each other. My five choices will meet in my room at lunch.”

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

People say I’m hyper, but I just try to have a positive attitude about life. Like the speech writing contest. Even people’s attitude about the first meeting. We all arrived early, though when Emilia arrived and saw me she started crying, then ran out and didn’t come back until just in time. When she got back she started being Little Miss Teach.

“Does anyone have any topic ideas?” she simpered.

“Basketball!” crowed Sara.

“Cheerleading or gymnastics!” I exclaimed, my thick, curly hair bouncing as I hopped from side to side. Emilia and I looked almost identical, except for one thing; my hair was curly and hers was straight. Okay, fine, I did curl mine and she did straighten hers when we stopped hanging out, but who really cares. Oh, yeah, she was a half inch taller than I was.

Maila was really quiet the whole time. All she said was, “Interactions with nature.” Sara and Kalliope said it was real smart. Maila blushed like crazy. Not to be rude, but it was really unlike Maila to make a suggestion that really hit off. But it was Kalliope who shocked us the most.

“Love and Loss,” was all she said. This was a very sweet statement for a girl who looked like Kalliope. She was fairly tall. But her hair, which pointed straight up, added a couple of inches. So I was like whaaa?? Then she gave a little cough and returned to her usual icy tones, and informed us that she was going to get lunch, so good-bye.

Meanwhile, Miss Teach was saying, “If we alter that a bit, we could use it. I like that theme!”

“Yeah it also applies to a bunch of stuff.” Sara said. Sara also said that she was going to go eat.

“Not yet,” Miss Teach said. “To work together requires some group cooperation. We should talk a little about ourselves.”

“‘Kay” Maila said sweetly, “What’s up with Kalliope?”

The response she got wasn’t pretty.

Kalliope Howard

If you’re wondering about that meeting, don’t. All I can say is my dad is dead. That’s why I was icy towards people, and why my topic idea was love and loss. A couple days later I got a text from Sara. I liked Sara. Sara was cool. Anyway, Sara asked if I wanted to come over to work on the speech because everyone else was already there. I said ok, where. I got her address and went over.

“We are electing officials and positions,” Emilia said. I was like ok.

“Sara’s the writer because she writes the fastest and Maila’s doing format and I’m the captain.”

“Excuse me,” said Katie, “I’m delivering the speech.” Emilia completely ignored Katie. There was something going on between those two. They were twins, but before that project, I had never seen them together.

“You want to be the typist?” Emilia asked.

“Sure, why not” I replied softly. I really hated the way they didn’t know that every moment you don’t spend with someone is a moment wasted. I know that oh-too-well. After the meeting Maila held me back.

“Do you want some chocolate?” How does she know chocolate is my weak spot? “I know where Sara hides it from her parents. I also know you’ve got something hidden.” She said. “Whats wrong?” I wanted to tell her, but I didn’t know why.

Don’t tell her.

She’s a good person.

I barely know her.

She seems to care.

I don’t know what she’ll do.

I wanted to trust her.  

I told her most of it. I still kept a little bit to myself.  Maila just seemed easy to open up to. I didn’t really know why. Maybe it was the way that she didn’t confront you. Or maybe the way that she seemed to care. Or maybe I just needed someone to talk to. Then she took her turn.

It felt good to tell someone.

Sara Ann Jones

Our next meeting was at Maila’s house. I got there early, and guess what! She had an older brother in college who played basketball, and they had a hoop! I asked if I could play. She rolled her eyes and said, “Be my guest.”

So I shot hoops for a bit. I could use all the practice time I could get, with the championships coming up in March, just a month away. Eventually, Maila stuck her head out and called to me, “Emilia just texted me and told me that she and Katie are on their way. You should probably come in now.”

“Okay, fine,” I grumbled. “Where does the ball go?”

“Eh, I don’t care. Just dump it somewhere,” came Maila’s soft response. I couldn’t believe it! Maila, who treats every plant like a like a living thing (yeah, plants are living things, but who’s counting) didn’t care about where a precious basketball went! Apparently I was saying this aloud, because Maila hollered, “You know, not everyone cares about basketball. You’re kind of biased. I already told you. Emilia and Katie are on their way, and Kalliope probably is too.”

Maybe I am biased. Maybe I care too much about a sport.

Emilia McQuinn

I walked over to the meeting at Maila’s place, trailing ten steps behind Katie, because she refused to walk next to me. It was really annoying. I remembered the day she stopped talking to me.

It was the first day of junior high. Katie and I were headed to our new school. Katie started doing cartwheels and backflips. One of the superficial girls on Katie’s gymnastics team, named Cassidy, came over and started animatedly chatting and giggling. Then, the girl looked at me with disdain in her eyes.

“Why are you hanging out with the nerd?” That was what did it. Katie looked really uncomfortable.

“Well it’s be- she’s my sist- I don’t know,” Katie grumbled.

“You’ve come to the right place, girl. We’ll help you out,” Cassidy said. And with that they walked off.

I really miss having her as a sister. I don’t know why. We reached Maila’s house, and just as I turned onto Maila’s driveway, I heard Kalliope yelling.

“Hey, Emilia and Katie! Wait up!” I looked up and saw Kalliope sprinting towards us as fast as she could.

“Let’s go in, I’m frozen.” Katie whined. We all raced in and walked in on Maila and Sara having a little scream fest which they abruptly stopped when they saw us walk in.

“Just because you love something doesn’t mean that everyone does,” said Kalliope in a voice like ice. “I’ve learned that the hard way.” Wow. There was certainly more to Kalliope Howard than met the eye.

We didn’t do much that meeting. Sara jotted down what we said. Partway through, I got an email from Ms. Letterman. Talk about awkward! I read it aloud.

“She says, ‘I received word that the contest is being held at the town hall-’”

“WHAT!” yelled Maila and Sara.

“-at 3 p.m on Sunday, March 3rd. However the rough draft should be ready in about a week.’ Guys, we really need to bust a move.”

It was now a race against time.

Maila Eliss

The next five days were a flurry of activity. We had two hour meetings practically every day. But it still felt as though we wouldn’t be done in time. Sara and Katie both reassured us that no matter what activity you did, you always felt really rushed.

Finally, on the day of Ms. Letterman’s deadline, we finished. Emilia was freaking out. She thought that we didn’t do our best because we kept disagreeing on fairly important topics, but everyone else told her we were fine. Sara insisted throwing a party to celebrate. Emilia and Katie volunteered their house. No one objected. We heard a knock, and the door swung open.

Katie’s friends were here, and not for the party.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

I had never been more ashamed of myself. They were my friends. At least the people I called my friends. It was Cassidy and her group. The group that until this project, I hung out with every day. Let me back up a little bit.

In  5th grade gymnastics class, Cassidy was a little snarky, but she was always nice to me. Well, fairly nice. Then in 6th, when she tried to pull me away from Emilia, I let her. It wasn’t all her. Emilia and I had a huge fall-out that day, but we had been slipping for a little while. I had been waiting for a chance to break the chain holding us together. Just because I had a sister didn’t mean I had to spend all my time with her. In fact, Emilia and I had complained together about how people associate us together. So I guess I understood why she was upset. But she never made an effort to talk to me. I regretted it now.

Anyway, Cassidy was here now.

I don’t know what to do.

Sara Ann Jones

We all exchanged glances and nodded towards Katie.

“What are you doing with them?” Cassidy asked Katie snarkily.

“What do you mean, them?” countered Katie. At those words, Emilia stood up and stood with her sister.

“No matter how we’ve been acting towards each other, we are still sisters, and sisters stick together.” she said, softly to Katie. I glanced at Kalliope who had tears running down her cheeks and Maila who was sitting next to Kalliope in silence. I looked at her in surprise, but she didn’t seem to notice. Maila made eye contact and mouthed,

“Let them be.” I nodded. As we walked out of the room, We overheard Katie tell Cassidy off.

“None of my friends talk to me and my sister that way.” Cassidy responded, in mock surprise.

“But Katie, I thought that you were our friend?”

“Maybe you were. This is our house. Go,” Emilia said. And, as surprising as it seems, they did.

We all were hiding something. And I wanted to know why.

Kalliope Howard

We all assembled in Emilia and Katie’s bedroom.

“We’re all hiding something” Sara said sternly, “even me. Somebody, talk.” When nobody responded, Sara drew in a sharp breath.

“Fine. then I’ll start. Maila might know this, but not because I told her. Basketball is my life. With two older brothers, sports are just what you do. The basketball tournament is really important to me.” she finished.

“These past two years all I’ve wanted is to have my sister back. That’s why I joined student government and became active in school. I don’t know how you only children stand it. But now that I have her, I don’t have anything bothering me. Except the fact that the contest is next week and I’m so freaking nervous!” Emilia said the last bit quickly, and we all laughed until Maila took a turn.

“When you’re small like me -I’m 5’1”- you get looked over a lot. Athletically, and uhh… other ways.” she said quietly. “Kalliope, it’s your turn.” I really didn’t want to talk about it but it warmed my heart to see the rest of them open up to each other and me. So I did.

“My father died right before the start of 6th grade,” I began. “That’s why I ice people out sometimes, and act like a snob. Emilia- I admire your ability to cope with something that bothers you without turning on other people. That’s what I’ve been hiding.” Katie was the first to speak.

“And we all thought you were a self-centered brat!” she exclaimed.

“Katieeee,” Sara groaned, softly punching Katie in the shoulder.

For once since dad passed away, I felt good. Like I belonged. It felt good.

The feeling you belong is one of the best feelings ever.

Emilia McQuinn

I had a sister again, and it was more wonderful than I remembered. I told the gang about us, as did Sara, Malia and Kalliope. Kalliope’s story was so sad. We all were sitting there quietly when Sara called,

“Guys, do any of you remember why we were here to begin with!? Let’s party!” We all laughed. Leave it to Sara to think about partying at a time like this. Our party was great. We all hung out and had the time of our lives.

But in the back of my mind I had the constant reminder that in just ten more days until the contest began.

Maila Eliss

The next seven days were like the calm before the storm. Kalliope went back to her group. Sara and I went back to our friends at tables right next to each other. The only change was Katie. She sat with Emilia and the other student government kids.

On the eighth day, the storm hit.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

Two days before the contest Ms. Letterman called us in during yard. She told us a lot of stuff about the contest. It pretty much all went over my head, but Emilia claimed that she knew I wouldn’t be paying attention, and took notes for me. Here they were:

  • We all will go out and bow, but only the performer (you/Katie) will deliver the speech.

 

  • DRESS NICELY

 

  • The actual contest is at 3 p.m., but we should get there at 11:30 a.m.
  • There are going to be hundreds of people there

The next day, we got called up to rehearse.

Throughout rehearsal I thought about how I fear tomorrow.

Sara Ann Jones

Kalliope and I arrived first. Her usually colorful hair was black as night. She was wearing tall brown boots and a black dress. Dangling from her ears were long silver chains. She looked even more fearless and intimidating than usual. How could that be?! Me, you ask? I was wearing a denim dress with tiny white polka dots. I actually brushed my hair that morning. Can you believe it! Maila came in next.

“Oh my God! You look amazing, Maila” Kalliope gushed. Maila blushed a little. I completely agreed with Kalliope. Maila looked stunning, and nothing like the shy little girl we began the project with.

“Thank you. You guys look great as well,” Maila replied sweetly. Then Emilia and Katie entered the auditorium. They didn’t dress the same, or do their hair the same, but that was what made them look so at ease. Just as they reached us, Ms. Letterman bustled out of one of the doors.

“Ready, girls?” she said. We all nodded.

“Well then, let’s go.”

I was more terrified that I had ever been, and more thrilled than I had ever been.

Kalliope Howard

We walked into a huge room filled with other teams. I was so scared! Ms. Letterman told us that teams would be called out one at a time to rehearse, and then perform. It all happened so quickly. We sat around for a bit, then until they called Katie. She went in and out quickly. We sat for a little while longer.

“The Stoneybrook Superstars,” called the announcer. This was it. We stood up.

I was so afraid.

Emilia McQuinn

It was our turn. Katie walked to the mic nervously. Her shoulders were hunched and her fists were clenched. She began to read and recite. I hadn’t heard the speech before; only Kalliope and Katie had seen the complete and published thing.

It was beautiful.

Katlin “Katie” McQuinn

“Good afternoon, all. When I was a really little kid, I had a gerbil. I really loved that gerbil. But it being a rodent and all, it died, and I lost it. I was really upset, but life went on and I stopped mourning the loss. But it was hard anyway. My friend Kalliope lost her father and had a hard time with it. I don’t blame her. She was close to her father. She adjusted, and while it was hard, she has done it. She dealt with it bravely. This is something that I hadn’t learned to do then, when I was a little. I wish I had. Thank you.” I said.

We went back to the waiting room after giving our bow. As soon as we got there, Sara took of her shoes, and groaned softly, “These things are medival torture devices” she grumbled.

We sat there for what seemed like hours, but it probably was like 20 minutes. During that time, we all did one of the following;

  • Bit our nails
  • Talked A TON
  • Sat and ignored everyone
  • etc..

Then someone said,

“All teams report to the stage. We are announcing the winner.

What if we weren’t the champions?

Emilia McQuinn

I couldn’t breathe. I was petrified onstage. I wanted to be chosen so badly. I wasn’t listening to the announcers. Until I heard the words, “In third place, the Fairfield Falcons!” There was a loud whoop from the back of the stage. The Falcons went up for their medal.

“In second place, the Hartford Heroes!” More cheering. Why couldn’t they just get to first place. The auditorium felt strangely claustrophobic.

“And in first place, for the gold is……… the Stoneybrook Superstars!” Oh my God. I couldn’t believe it. That was us! We all turned towards each other. Only Sara could speak. She let out an ear-splitting whistle. The rest of us regained ourselves, and started cheering.

“And that’s all for today, folks! Superstars, Heroes, Falcons, see you in Boston!” the announcer hollered into his microphone over the noise.

We were going to Boston for round two!

Epilogue

After the contest, things mostly got back to normal, but the experience changed them all a bit. Obviously, Emilia and Katie were together a lot, but Maila could be found playing basketball with Sara, and not against Maila’s will! Kalliope was a little more relaxed around people, and got rid of her dumb haircut. She was able to recognize that her dad would never come back, and accept it. Sara’s team made it to the championships, but didn’t win them. She took it surprisingly well, at least after cursing at the opposing team loudly for five minutes. After the contest, Maila got the recognition she anticipated. All was well. Until the Boston contest…

Jack’s Bakery

Once upon a time, there was a hard-working, ambitious young man named Jack who wanted to open a bakery. Jack loved baking because when he was a little boy, he liked cooking desserts with his mom. He cooked chocolate cakes, chocolate cookies, and lemon cookies. Jack and his mother used special ingredients that made these the best cakes and cookies in his small town in Louisiana.

Jack needed a lot of money to buy the store and ingredients for his bakery.

Jack’s mom said, “You should have a garage sale to earn some money. I have plenty of stuff to sell, like your old bike.”

So Jack cleared out his mother’s garage. Inside, he found lots of books, an old radio,  a toolbox, and his old bike. He had to clean these old things up in order to sell them, and he worked for three hours in the hot sun getting ready. He put up lots of signs. Then, many people came and got what they needed and paid Jack lots of money.

With the money he earned, Jack opened his bakery, which he called “Fun for Everyone.” His mom gave him a cookbook, and she told him to take good care of it because she made all these recipes from her own heart. Jack’s bakery was very successful. He had five bakers who cooked the goodies. They baked incredible chocolate cakes, vanilla lemon cakes, cookies, and delicious, warm, tasty peanut butter cookies. Jack also made ice cream cakes for little kids’ birthdays. Lots of people came, and the line of customers was almost to the street.

Then, one day, Jack looked outside and saw that a new bakery had opened up across the street. The sign said “Goodies.” Jack got really mad and went over to the other bakery. He couldn’t believe it! It was his best friend Alex stealing his customers.

“What are you doing here, Alex?”

“I am doing my business, selling sweets to the customers. Look, they love it!” said Alex.

“Well, I don’t like what’s going on here, Alex,” said Jack. “I thought we were friends. You need to move someplace else.”

“Why do I have to move? Why don’t you move?”

Jack did not want to move because he was there first. It was a good spot, and he had a lot of customers before Alex came.

Jack stomped back to his bakery. He was very mad and also very worried that he couldn’t make enough money to keep his bakery open. Jack decided to visit his mom and talk to her about what was going on.

When Jack got to his house, his mother was making a chocolate cake. This made Jack feel a little bit better because it was his favorite dessert.

“I feel like blowing up Alex’s bakery,” Jack said.

“Don’t be mean. He’s your friend!” said Jack’s mother.

“But if he’s my friend, why would he own a bakery right next to me and steal my customers?”

“Maybe he has some reasons why he opened a bakery there. You need to go talk to him.”

Jack went back to Alex’s bakery. Alex was closing up and counting his money. When he saw Jack walk in, first, he put the money back in the cash register. Then, he said, “What are you doing here, Jack?”

Jack asked Alex, “What was the reason you put a bakery right next to mine?”

“Because my parents don’t have any money, and I need money for their clothes, food and house.” Alex hung his head.

Jack patted Alex on the back. “Now I get why you put a bakery next to mine. Because you want to make some money for your family. I have an idea.”

The next morning, when customers arrived, they saw one bakery instead of two, and Jack and Alex working at the registers together. The new bakery was called “The Friendship Bakery.” There were lots of people coming in for treats such as chocolate cookies, cakes, ice cream cakes, delicious, warm peanut butter cookies, and vanilla cookies and cakes.

They earned more money than before because they worked together. Jack gave some of his money to Alex’s family, and he kept some. Alex bought Jack a segway so he could ride it. He still had $200 left, which he used on clothes, and he got himself a mountain bike.

They both lived happily ever after.

An Intruder Mystery

This is what my party is going to look like. Oops, I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Camille, and this will be my tenth birthday party. There will be streamers, costumes, a stage, and all we need is the cake. Okay, now it’s time to get some sleep.

In the morning, I wake up. I go down to check on the party room. I am in shock. The streamers have fallen, the cake is almost eaten (FYI: that was hard!), and the stage has tons of cracks in it. I am very, very mad. Maybe, that’s it! I will call my friends! I call my friends. Mia says, “I’ll help you look for the intruder!”

The next day Mia comes and she says, “Where do we start?”

“Look at this,” I say. It is a card with black ink that says, “Mona.”

“It’s a clue!”

“How about we go through the neighborhood and see if there is anyone named Mona!” says Mia.

We look through the neighborhood. When we get back home, we think about everyone we found in the neighborhood. Nobody’s name is Mona, so we decide to go to the mall. We start looking for Mona there. We go up to random people and say, “What’s your name?”

When we get to the first Mona, she looks like she is in her late twenties. She has long brown hair and is wearing all black. She is frowning. She looks like she is in a grumpy mood all the time. We ask Mona what job she has. She says, “Detective.” Just then, Mia elbows me.

“Look at the black feather with a bottle of ink Mona is holding,” Mia whispers to me.

“Thanks for the catch,” I whisper back.

I get out a little piece of paper from my pocket and ask Mona, “Here, can you please sign this?”  

“Why?” Mona asks.

“It’s just our business,” I say.

“Why?” Mona asks again.

“I think….hmmmm….ummm…um…umm…we have a club!” I say, sweating.

“What kind of club?” Mona asks.

“Girl scouts!” Mia screams. “Our mission is to gather as many Monas as we can and bring them to Camille’s house.”

“Yes, my house,” I say.

“I still do not want to sign,” says Mona.

“Are you thinking what I’m thinking?” Mia whispers to me.

“What are you thinking?” I reply.

“I don’t know if she’s the thief?” Mia whispers.

Both of us start sweating again.

“Just sign it!” Mia screams at Mona.

“I still don’t want to,” Mona says.

“Other people are going to sign it too, we just want you to sign it first,” Mia says. “Last night, did you visit a house?”

“No,” says Mona. She gets up. Her face is bright red. “You children are very, very, very naughty.” She storms away.

***

We go to Mia’s house. I turn Mia’s computer on. I open up a document and type on the top SUSPECTS. I write Mona from the mall. Then I go home.

When I walk in the door I trip over a pair of  scissors on the ground. Writing on the scissors says “Mona Again.” Next to the scissors is one red high heel. I look on the bottom of the shoe and it says “J. Crew”.

The next morning I go to Mia’s and bring the scissors and the red shoe.

***

“Guess what!” I say to Mia.

“What?” says Mia.

“I found these last night!” I show her the scissors and the shoe.

“Another clue! I’m getting really suspicious about this Mona,” says Mia. “But what does the shoe mean?”

“Let’s go to the mall again today and go to J. Crew,” I say.

“Why?” asks Mia.

I show her the shoe and say, “That’s why!”

We go to the mall and find Mona at J. Crew buying some very, very high heels.

Mona tries to stomp away, but Mia gets hold of her hand and says, “Stay!’

Camille shows her the scissors. “Are these yours?”

She says, “Yes,” very, very fast.

Mia whispers to Camille, “Now, are you thinking what I’m thinking?”

“Yep!” I say.

So you’re the person who crashed Camille Clause’s birthday party!” says Mia.

“Okay, let me tell you why. My daughter was not invited to your birthday party,” says Mona.

“So just because your daughter did not get invited you ruined everything!?!” says Mia.

“YEAH!” says Mona.

“I will invite her!” I say.

“MYSTERY SOLVED!” Mia and I say together.

“YAY!” we scream.

“I’m very sorry. I can pay for another place to do a birthday party if you would like,” says Mona. “Maybe we could have it at my house.”

When I get to Mona’s house, it is covered with streamers in my favorite colors, pink and purple and green. Inside, there is a big indoor pool with a bouncy house leading into it. In the next room, there is clay shaping and face painting. In the last room, there is a trampoline and a big pile of presents wrapped in colorful wrapping paper and ribbons. In the kitchen is the cake. It has two little scoops of ice cream and a big candy heart that says, “Happy Birthday Camille.”

“Thank you so, so very much!” I say to Mona. Then, Mona introduces her daughter. Immediately, I recognize her. She was my friend in preschool. Her name is Anya.

“I am sorry I didn’t invite you before when I was writing the invitations,” I say.

A little later, Mona lights the candles and everybody sings “Happy Birthday.”

I blow out the candles.

I hope I always have a birthday party like this!

At the end of the party, as I am about to leave, I say thank you to Mona and ask if I can have every birthday party at her house. She says yes. I feel happy about how the day went and I can’t wait for another mystery.

The Old Man and the Soda

There once was an old, cranky man. He did not enjoy his job where he would sit at the base of Mauna Loa and sell soda. He had learned all the languages of the world, as he met customers that would climb up to the top and look at the volcano. His whole life he spent sitting at the soda stand. He had been sitting there since he was old enough to talk. He never attended school, never had friends, and never had a passport. He never left this area of 10 by 10 feet.

He had a small house at the back of the stand where his entire family lived including his aunts, cousins, and great-grandchildren. They always had water to drink and mush to eat. Never did they eat or drink anything else, for breakfast, lunch, and dinner. They were very poor.  

One day, his family grew rich and moved out into a penthouse in New York. The poor man asked to live with his family and get a share of the money.

The family replied, “Never in a million years. Not if you were the last person alive.”

He was still the old poor man at the soda stand.

One day he felt so sorry for himself, he opened a soda and it made the hissing sound soda always made. The old man never heard this sound, which is why he jumped with fright from the soda. The sound eventually stopped like it always did.

He took a sip of Sprite and it sizzled in his mouth. This was the best minute in the old man’s life. He finally felt happy. With this happiness, he climbed up to the top of the volcano. He was amazed in that moment. He decided to travel the world. To travel the world, he would need a passport. Having no money, he could not buy a passport. He swam over to New York to ask his family to lend him 100 dollars to buy a passport. Of course his family was a little crazy during the move, so he felt he had a good chance.

The family said, “No way!” and told him they did not want anything to do with him.

Sadly the old man walked home kicking a stone along the path. Going through his head was, why would his family be so rude to him? He had supported them till they got all rich, making them food and all.

Once he arrived home, he sat down and counted his money. He had only twenty dollars saved up. He decided to tell the tourists his story and hopefully they would donate extra money. He tried this plan the next day.

The next day he told a French tourist, “Bonjour voulez-vous un soda? Et voulez-vous faire don de l’argent supplémentaire pour moi afin que je puisse voyager dans le monde et obtenir un passeport s’il vous plaît. Je suis allé dans ce domaine toute ma vie entière,” which translates to, “Hello would you like a soda? Would you care to donate extra money to me so I can travel the world and get a passport, please? I have been in this area my whole entire life.”

The tourist replied, “Sûr pourquoi pas et j’espère que vous obtenez de parcourir le monde,” which means, “Sure, why not? I hope you get to travel the world.”

The old man was happy once again. He jumped up as high as his old man legs would let him, which was only like 3 inches high, but it was still a jump of joy. He gave a high pitched squeal like one of a little girl — the first one of his entire life.

The old man continued to ask the tourists, but not all people gave him money, especially not the New Yorkers. They said he was just a regular hobo selling soda. He was just cleaner and had a lot more clothing.

Over a long time, he gained up enough money for a passport and a boat. He traveled all over the world all from North America, South America,  Africa, Europe, Australia, Asia, across the Great Wall of China, and finally, Antarctica. He felt his life was complete. His heart was settled. He thought he would want to do more, but he felt happy. He forgot completely about his awful family. He missed his stand and wanted to go back to his customers, so he went back to his little old soda stand and continued selling soda at the volcano, feeling happy and telling all the customers his story and recommendations of where to go.

He is still at the base of Mauna Loa Volcano. If you go to Hawaii, you can still see him sitting there at the volcano, and he will tell you the story of his life.

Love for the Amazon

Chapter One

There are a few things you need to know about me before I start the story.

I am Elizabeth Andrews, and I am eleven years old. I do not go to school, and that is because I live in the Amazon Rainforest.

We have lived there ever since our plane ride home from Australia. As we were flying over Venezuela, our plane had a malfunction and crashed. Everyone but my family was killed in the accident. My family is Ma, Pa, Alexander, and me, Elizabeth.

Before we crashed, Ma worked in a South American restaurant, so she knows how to treat and cook the plants and animals we find in the forest. Pa was an architect, so he built our hut out of trees from the forest.

Even Alexander is good for something. He’s great as whittling, so he made things like our silverware, cups, and anything else that can be whittled. He is thirteen, and I think it’s cool that he can whittle so well.

I don’t know what I’m good for. Whenever I think about it, all I can settle on is writing. Whenever I go on a plane trip, I bring a bunch of journals in my suitcase. I document every little thing that I see in the rainforest. If I find a pretty flower or interesting leaf, I usually sketch or close it in my nature journal. I even have a book for drawings, though I’m not a very talented artist.

Our plane crashed when I was only seven, so we have been here for four years.

Miraculously, nothing happened to any of our luggage in the crash. That’s why we have regular clothes in the middle of the Amazon. Ma washes them, so we can wear them over and over again.

I really hope that we don’t go back to civilization, because I most likely would not remember anything about New York City.

We sleep in hammocks that Ma and Pa made out of these huge leaves. They are actually pretty, pretty comfortable!

I actually really like living in the Amazon Rainforest. The only problem about it is that we have to be careful about what we eat. There are lots of poisonous plants, but also we can’t cook a baby animal.  If we did, then Ma would find out and be mad at us.

Sometimes, I have random memories of the crash. When it actually happened, it went by so quickly that I could barely remember it for a while. Once I realized that the only way to remember was to get to work helping my family, my mind was still blank as a piece of paper.

That is almost everything you need to know about me for the story to make sense. When the plane crashed, all of the passengers but me and my family were killed. All of their luggage was really ruined, but ours didn’t even have a single scratch. Also, every member of our family was in different aisles.

Chapter One and a Half

I looked out of the window, seeing the tops of trees. “Ma, how much longer?” I asked.

She looked at her watch, and then at the screen on the back of the seat in front of her. “About twelve hours, Elizabeth.”

All of a sudden, we felt a huge jolt. Out of instinct, I looked out of the window. “Ma?” I asked, my voice shaking. “Either those trees are growing really fast, or… ”

“WE’RE FALLING OUT OF THE SKY!” a man yelled.

Even though I was only a seven-year-old writer and traveler, I was smart enough to know that it was fine to be scared right now.

I heard the pilot yelling very unsettling things, like: “The radio’s down!” “The engine’s busted!” “The controls are stuck!” and “Dang plane!”

I closed my eyes to shut myself out of the chaos and terror.

My whole entire life flashed before my eyes. The first day of kindergarten, I was crying and holding onto Ma. The start of first grade, hugging Ma goodbye. The beginning of second grade, dodging Ma’s kiss and running over to my friends. The end of second grade, posing for pictures. So far, nothing significant had happened to me. I then realized that if I died in the next ten minutes, my life would be a big waste of seven years. Then, I opened my eyes. As far as I could tell, no time had passed since I’d closed them.

Chaos was erupting in that small airplane that seemed like the end of me. All of a sudden, the overhead lights flickered and then went off. Then the overhead bins popped open and a few of the smaller suitcases and bags fell out. All of the people who were in aisle seats now leaned in and lifted their legs.

I put my face in between my knees and when I lifted it up, my knees were wet. I then felt my cheeks and realized tears were rolling down them. I took a deep breath.

Soon, I heard a crash that nearly deafened me. I looked out the window and saw both wings caught on trees on either side. The plane seemed to be too heavy; I saw it gradually sagging.

All of a sudden, the wings snapped off the plane, and we tumbled to the ground.

And then the world went black.

Chapter Two

I dropped down from the tree I was in, and grabbed Ma’s woven basket that I had filled with fresh mangoes from the tree. I hurried back through the trees I had known so well. Once I was only a little ways away from our hut, I stopped and listened to the sounds of the rainforest. A few different birds chirped, a limb on a tree cracked, and I heard Pa yelling for me.

“Come on, Sammy, there’s more over here!” I heard a man yell.

Wait… That’s not Pa or Alexander… I quickly sprinted away from the voices I didn’t recognize. Once the hut was in sight, I dropped the basket of mangoes and ran to Pa.

“Pa!” I yelled.

“Oh, Elizabeth, there you are. Where is that basket of fruit you were going to bring back?” I don’t think he noticed the sweat on my forehead. I tried to slow my fast breathing and panting.

I said, “I heard a man talking to another person named Sammy.”

Pa laughed. “Do not be silly, Elizabeth. There is no one here but us.” Then, he left the hut, grabbing his handmade axe. I stood there, feeling dejected.

***

Later, when I was collecting berries for Ma, I heard a different voice. “Jim, the sun’s going down. Can’t we just camp here?” This time, it was a woman. “This is ridiculous!” I guessed that it was Sammy.

I grabbed the basket of berries I had filled and raced back to the hut. When I arrived, I saw Ma and Pa sitting at the table.

“Ma, Pa!” I exclaimed. “I heard more voices. It was a man and a woman.”

I looked back and forth between them. Ma walked forward and took the basket of berries in my hand.

“Well, Elizabeth, this is a very… interesting matter, but can we eat supper now?” She put her hand on my golden brown cheek. “Nobody is here but us, love. I don’t think you got enough sleep last night.”

She sent me to an early sleep, but instead, I ran away from the hut and far into the trees. I found one that I could easily climb, and I did. I sat atop the highest branch and looked at the sunset. The place where the orange melted into that blue, blue sky was a gorgeous pink. The colors looked like someone had painted strips with lumpy acrylics and smudged it with their finger. I closed my eyes and laid my head against the thick tree trunk.

Images of myself growing up flooded my mind. Baby Elizabeth, toddler Elizabeth, first smile, starting daycare, and everything up until second grade ended.

There was no more to think about. All the other significant events were trapped in a lost, locked box in the back of my mind, and they were never going to be released. Each year that passes, that box is going to get bigger and bigger.

I opened my eyes only to discover more darkness. The sun had gone away completely, and I couldn’t see the hut. I quickly jumped down the tree and ran in the direction I thought I came from. But then I found nothing. I ran in the other direction, but again I found nothing. Then I ran back in the way I thought I would find the tree, but instead I saw a dim light, and I expected it to be coming from the hut. I ran toward the light, and it got brighter as I got closer.

All of a sudden, I came into a clearing that was the source. Instead of our hut, I saw a campfire with two small tents. On a long log, there was a man in a tan shirt and tan shorts. There was also a woman in a matching wardrobe. He stared, seeming as surprised to see me as I was him.

“Jim, it’s a girl!” the woman said.

The man, Jim, said, “I see, Sammy. There must be a whole family of them.”

Sammy and Jim stood up, and then they approached me slowly. “Slow, Jim. We don’t want her to attack. She probably can’t speak.”

Then, Jim slowly said, “Hola. Us, Jim.” He pointed to himself. “And Sammy.” He pointed to Sammy.

“I can talk, but I don’t speak Spanish,” I said.

Both Jim and Sammy flinched and did double takes, fighting hard not to laugh.

Chapter Two and a Half

When I first opened my eyes, I didn’t know where I was. All I could think about was Alexander, only nine at the time. The first thing I did when I woke up was cry out, “Alexander!” Then, I sat up.

The sight that I saw was the most awful thing I had seen. The ruins of the plane were all around me. I couldn’t see any bodies, but I already knew they were all gone. Then, a pile of rubble stirred, and Alexander appeared from under it.

“Hello?” he yelled.

“Alexander,” I called. He looked over.

“Elizabeth, are you hurt?”

“No, are you?” I said.

“My legs are stuck under the seat,” he said.

I stood up and made my way over to him. I helped him lift that blue ripped leather seat. He stood up with me, and we looked around. We held onto each other, and I was trying hard not to sob.

Suddenly, I heard Ma’s voice, muffled. “Hello? Anybody?”

Alexander and I hurried over to the voice. “Mom! It’s Elizabeth and Alexander!” I called.

“Children, let me out please. I am under this pile of clothes,” she said. A suitcase had popped open and spilled on her. All the clothes were dirty and ripped. Once we had moved the clothes, we walked around looking for Pa.

As Ma was stepping on the rubble and trash, Pa’s voice yelled, “Ow! Where are we? What happened?” We dropped to our knees and dug through the mess. Soon, we found him. “Who stepped on my arm?” he said. None of us answered. “Are you guys alright?” We all nodded and fell into a long hug.

I finally broke the silence by saying, “What do we do now?” We all sat there, but the question wasn’t letting me think about my family. Would we ever get home? Would we be stuck here forever?

Chapter Three

Jim and Sammy offered me a piece of meat. I told them about my family in the forest.

“How did you get here?” Sammy finally asked.

So I told them about the crash, that the only survivors were me and my family, and how our luggage escaped without a scratch.

Sammy’s last question was, “How long have you been here?” She looked a bit worried about what the answer would be.

“We’ve been here four years. I was seven when we crashed, and now I am eleven.” Sammy then came forward and embraced me with a hug. “It’s fine, I really like it in the rainforest,” I said. She didn’t seem to believe me. So then I pushed Sammy away gently and told them both, “I have to go. My family is going to be waiting.”

This wasn’t true, because I had snuck out of a window in my sleeping area, but I knew my family wouldn’t bother to have checked on me. Then I ran away, and not long after, I found my hut. I was right, my family didn’t know I had been gone. I decided not to tell Ma and Pa about Jim and Sammy, because they would tell me that I was wrong.

I got into the hammock and fell into a light sleep. My family had never even known I had left.  

***

The next morning, I wrote in my article journal that I keep. In that journal, I pretty much just write every few weeks in a journalism style. It’s fun. Then, I walked over to Ma and Pa.

“Ah, Elizabeth,” Pa said.

Then, Alexander walked in. “Ma, do you need me to do anything for you?”

“No, I do not need you. Alexander, don’t work yourself ragged. Take a break from all of this work,” Ma told him.

“But then, I will have no choice but to think about the airplane crash!” he exclaimed.

“Do you mean that you haven’t thought about it yet?” I asked.

“No, and I really don’t want to.”

“Well, you can’t hide forever. Just go and do some whittling,” I advised.

He grabbed his tools and sat outside of the hut. I shook my head to myself and picked up a piece of fruit Ma had laid out. Then, I hurried out to the river with one of Pa’s fishing nets. The net seemed so much smaller when compared with the rushing water. So I tossed it out over the rough waves and sat down with my journal.

This was my drawing book, so I drew a line down the middle of the page. Then, I added a circle. Then many more shapes, until I had a big structure in the shape of something else. I couldn’t remember what it was, but I knew it would mean something.

Suddenly, as a fish leapt out of the water, I snapped out of my trance. Once I had looked up, I realized it was two fish. Then, they touched each other in the air before falling onto the net. I thought of the shape my design had made. A heart.

I picked up the net and hurried back to the hut. Once Ma had the fish cooking in the oven, I suddenly heard a gruff voice call, “Come on out. We know you are in there.”

I felt my heart start beating a million miles an hour. What’s going on? Who is that? How did he find us? I thought frantically.

We all hurried to stand outside the hut.

“Gather your belongings,” an officer said. His uniform was covered in medals and badges.

“What’s going on?!” I asked.

“Get in that helicopter, you’re coming back to civilization.”

Two Sides of A Coin

 

Prologue – 1936

Introductions

Part 1 – Johan Volkhardt

War… Death… Disappearance… Economy…These are all the difficulties that young Johan Volkhardt faces every day of his life. It’s World War II, a time of great danger for many, but that’s just one of the main worries that Johan faces. Not only has the war started, but he also has lost his father, leaving his family in a poor state. Young Johan has to learn to help his family and cope with this horrible situation. But he has one hope: the war could soon end…

Part 2 – Prison

Far away from the city of Munich where he once lived, Johan’s father is full of despair. He was forcibly taken from his home after he refused to join the war and fight. Now he’s in a concentration camp with no hope of escape… just wishing that his family is alright….

Chapter 1 – 1938

Two Sides of A Coin

Part 1 – Heads

“Johan! Get up from that bed now or you won’t get any breakfast!” called Gertrude Volkhardt, his mother.

It was late into the day and he had overslept after such a hard day’s work the day before. “Coming!” he shouted back. He got off of the creaky bed and went down the thin, narrow staircase. As he got downstairs, he saw his younger sister, Ann, at the table with a bowl of small green vegetables and wearing a look of disgust. Cabbage soup again… he thought. Although he truly didn’t like it, he already knew he had to eat it or he wouldn’t get anything at all for the rest of the day. After eating the disgusting soup, which he thought barely had any flavor, he got to work. He went to the back of the house and got his old, battered bicycle from two years before. People often said that he hadn’t grown much during that time. Maybe it’s the bad nutrition, he thought.

Part 2 – Tails

“Get up you foul beasts! And get to work,” called an officer. Wilhelm Volkhardt opened his eyes just a crack. The room was dark with little air passage through it, and the strong smell of sweat was stagnant. Several others were there, but he could barely see them. Wilhelm tiredly and slowly got up; he was starving. After a while, the sealed door was opened, and all the prisoners came out. In the sunlight, it was a lot easier to see him. He had an appearance similar to that of his son: blond hair, blue eyes, pale skin, and extremely thin.

Chapter 2 -1938

The Usual Routine

Part 1 – Delivery

Johan mounted his old, rusted bicycle and went off. He was off to deliver resources to the church about ten blocks away. Most times he was paid $1 for going on the trip. It wasn’t much, but even in such a poor state, it seemed like a miracle. $1, he thought, each time; every bit helps. He pedaled back home and gave his mother the money, then he went back out to try and help others and to try and earn more money. On his way around, he saw his friend, Olaf Bechtholdt, on the road. He was a blond haired boy, with brown eyes and a thin smile. It seemed like he didn’t want to be bothered: he had his head lowered and a serious expression on his face, but he came up to him anyway. “Hallo, Olaf,” he shouted as he passed by.

He didn’t respond. Just when he was about to round the corner, “Hans, get over here…” he whispered. Johan always hated that nickname, but he knew that it must be something serious.

“What is it, Olaf?” Johan asked.

Part 2 – Horror

Tiredly walking to the eating area, Wilhelm looked around. Several dead bodies were being pulled out of the room where he was just in. Officers quickly pulled them out looking disgusted. He shivered—that has happened many times and he still hadn’t gotten used to it. He slowly made his way to get food. There was barely anything to eat. He would usually only get a piece of bread (approximately weighing 300 grams), and if he was lucky, he would get a bit of cheese and potato skins. The bread was supposed to last for a whole day and the next morning, but that seemed impossible with all the hunger they had. Sometimes, prisoners had to steal pieces of bread from the deceased to live.

Chapter 3 – 1939

WAR!

Part 1 – Departure

Two years have passed since his father was taken away. They hadn’t heard anything from him. It seemed like just yesterday that his father was taken away to Johan. A few days after he refused to join the war, a bunch of Nazi officers came into their home and carried him out forcibly. One year had passed since Olaf had told him that his father died. He expected it would happen at some point. Their family was starving. Then one day, in the middle of the winter season, Johan Volkhardt received news. It wasn’t from his father, but it wasn’t good news either.

To whomever this corresponds,

You have been drafted to the

war. Depart your home in a week and

make your way to the army.

Johan, who turned sixteen years old this year, was being drafted to war.

“Remember, Ann, I’m leaving and you must do your best to help Mama,” Johan reminded his younger sister.

She broke into tears. “Do you… do you really have to leave?” she whimpered. “If I don’t go, the same thing that happened to Papa will happen to me,” he solemnly responded.

Part 2 – A Form of Escape

“Volkhardt!” called the officer. “Get over here!”

“Yes, sir…” Wilhelm groaned. Slowly walking up to him, he thought, What could it be? Am I going to die today? Once he got there, the officer started talking.

“We’ve heard news, Volkhardt…” Please tell me I’m not going to die… “Today, you’re going to be…” Killed? “..drafted to war.” I knew it, I knew…

“What did you say sir?” Wilhelm asked.

“Are you deaf, Volkhardt? I said, you’re going to war!” That’s just as bad…

Chapter 4 – 1939

Struggle

Part 1 – Survival

The next week, Johan left his head lowered, breaking through the wind and snow, wondering what would happen. He didn’t bring much, just the clothes he was wearing. It has a long way to go, so there was plenty of time to ponder over events. It was finally time to leave his home. Now it would be much harder for his family to survive, with only his younger sister and Mama there to earn money. Both men had left. He hoped they’d be ok and he could come back soon…

Part 2 – Into The Unknown

Guess I’ll have to leave now… Wilhelm thought. At least I could escape this horror for a few days, but war is just as bad… Wilhelm left the day after he heard the news. He had nothing so he wouldn’t really need anything to bring.

Silence on the road, away to war…..

What will happen to Johan and his father? Will they die at war? Will they be able to escape?

 

Bonus:

Ann’s Story – A First Person Story

Ann was a minor character in this book, but she has her own story to tell…

I was just 7 years old when my father was taken by the Nazi army. After that, I was only left with my caring older brother and mother. The house was pretty empty without him. It left us all extremely sad. I don’t know what would have happened if I didn’t have a brother like Johan. As soon as Papa was gone, he helped us as much as he could: taking care of me as a brother should and helping Mama earn money to help us survive. Now, 3 years have passed and it’s his turn to leave. I don’t know what we’re going to do, but I sure will miss him….

 

The Stranger

Once someone had figured out what was happening, it was too late. An earthquake hit London at precisely the wrong time. Panic filled the streets as people hurried towards the port, hoping to be lucky enough to be able to sail away on a ship. But Mother Nature said no. Unluckily enough, the earthquake had caused a tsunami, and the tsunami had destroyed all ships but one.

Hurriedly, the Griffiths family ran towards the last remaining ship; they were running their hearts out, but it wasn’t enough. The deadly combo of the earthquake and the tsunami were going to hit and kill them any second now. The last boat was rocking side to side, aggressively in the furious waves. The desperate family had given up all hope; they started their prayers silently to themselves. Then, with no warning, the last ship was hit hard by the waves and was knocked onto the port and fell on top of the Griffiths, enclosing them with no escape. At first, the family thought this would be the end, so they closed their eyes to not see the horror taking place. When they woke up, it was complete silence.

They crept out of the ship and took a step onto the rocky foot path. Janine, who was age eleven and the only girl sibling in the family, immediately pulled her foot back when she discovered that she had been standing on a dead body covered in blood. Jacob, ten, was checking his phone for any tweets or texts (he was addicted to his phone.) Then, as ridiculous as it sounds, he decided to take a selfie. Kevin, thirteen, was a high-achieving, popular person. He had all the “spotlight” according to Jamie, who was only eight. Their mother and father were hard-working people and had earned more money than you can ever imagine. Their mother was named Lucy and was forty-one; their father, Lucas, was two years older than their mother and was a brave and courageous man. Sadly, their grandparents (Lucy’s parents) had gone missing the day before the earthquake, which was also the day they lost the knife.

The knife was a precious item that was one of the major money-earning items their parents had made. It was a razor-sharp weapon combined with some of the strongest materials ever discovered. The knife could easily cut off your hand with no problem at all. It could also slice a door in half as if it were a piece of paper. It was so extraordinary, that someone had even offered the price of three billion dollars (!!) for the knife. But the Griffiths knew that if it belonged in the wrong hands, it could seriously cause some trouble, so they kept it to themselves… until now… The Griffiths were on a holiday in Hawaii, but when they came back, the first thing they did was check on the knife. As they did the secret combination, they opened the safe and found that the knife was missing! Their mother was so mad because of this theft, she refused to talk about it for the rest of the day. Everything was silent.

Now, back to the present. The Griffiths sprinted back to their home to check on all their precious belongings. They were all shattered to pieces in an unusual way; it seemed like it was man-made. A few things were left though, like clothes, food, etc. The family gathered the remaining belongings and went off to find shelter someplace else. On the way, a heavy storm took place. Rain poured from the skies above onto the Griffiths, but they continued on with their journey nevertheless with great courage. Jacob stopped suddenly and requested the whole family to wait for him. He then got out his phone and took a selfie and posted it on Facebook saying, “Check out this storm!” Annoyed, his father pulled Jacob’s hand and made Jacob drop his phone, which broke in the fall.

“Now look what you’ve done!” exclaimed Jacob angrily at his father.

“This is about survival! Not your useless, little phone!” replied Lucas.

With an offended look, Jacob stuttered, “M-my phone is n-not u-useless…”

“Oh, shut up!” shouted Lucas.

Caught off-guard, Jacob was surprised at how angry his father was, so he took a step back, tripped on a stick, and fell on the floor. When he was getting up, the floor formed a sinkhole, and Jacob fell right through and landed on his face. He got a scar from that twenty-feet drop. His face was bleeding, and he was screaming desperately for help, but he could not be heard due to the sound of the pouring rain and the raging storms. Then, out of nowhere, there was a sound of a stick cracking behind the Griffiths. They all turned to where the sound had occurred; there was no one. When they turned back, Jacob was gone, and there was not a soul to be seen.

Frightened, the Griffiths pelted away from the sinkhole and tried to find some shelter. That night, they all sent their prayers to Jacob and hoped he was well. They made a hut out of sticks, wood, and leaves…

Jacob’s eyes burst open, or should I say “eye” since his other eye was bruised and battered and could not be opened. He looked around the room. It was a small-sized cave. The cave was quite cold though, and had mold on the walls.

“Ah, I knew you were awake,” said a rough voice coming from nowhere.

“W-who are you?” squeaked Jacob.

Then, out came a man in an iron suit with scratches and holes in it. “I’m the one who took you away when you fell into that sinkhole. Did you know that sinkhole wasn’t actually a sinkhole? It was a trap I laid for your family. I was hoping that your parents would fall in though, but you fell instead. You’re quite useful actually… You could help me attract your family.”

Jacob shuddered at the thought of his family falling into this trap set up by this despicable villain.

“By the way, remember how your grandparents disappeared the day before the earthquake? Well, here they are…” Then, he stepped aside to reveal Jacob’s grandparents, bruised and covered in blood and locked in a cage. They were whimpering until they saw Jacob.

His grandmother exclaimed, “Oh, dearest Jacob! You’re so big now! Not when you were four, you were tiny back then! You’ve grown so much! I’m so glad to…”

But she was cut off by the villain. “Silence!”

But he was not to be heard. Jacob’s grandparents kept talking to him and ignoring everything else happening around them; they were extremely glad to see Jacob.

“That’s it. Say goodbye, you fossils.” The villain then opened the cage door and whipped out a weapon.

At first, Jacob didn’t recognize the item he was holding, but then he peered a bit closer and noticed the villain was holding the knife! His grandparents seemed to know it as well and were frightened at first. They knew that if they didn’t fight, they were going to die for sure. If they did fight, they might actually survive. No matter how desperate Jacob was to join the fight, he couldn’t do it due to the fact that there were chains holding him back.

The two elderlies jumped from their cage floor and pounced on the villain at high speed. The villain didn’t expect the grandparents to be so quick and was knocked over in surprise. The villain muttered something under his breath and elbowed Grandmother in the solar plexus. She fell down onto the floor in pain. He raised the knife above his head and steadied himself. Then, he swung at Grandmother, but he was disrupted when Grandfather tackled the villain. But the villain was ready for an attack and swung the knife randomly at Grandfather. Sadly, the knife sliced Grandfather and killed him. Grandmother immediately stopped and became very mad due to the death of her husband. She pounced on the villain like a tiger, but missed ever so slightly and accidently dived on the end of the knife. This left the married couple both dead…

At this point, Jacob thought there was no more hope: the despicable man was going to murder him any second now.

“W-who are you?” questioned Jacob while holding back tears.

“Me?” the man asked, then laughed an evil laugh. “I… I am the Stranger…”

“I don’t… I don’t believe you… ” gasped Jacob. The Stranger had been known for over twenty years for some of the worst crimes ever committed, and this one might be one of the worst. And with that, the Stranger stormed out of the room.

***

In the forest, Jamie moaned, “How long more do we have to keep searching?”  

“Until we find Jacob,” replied his father.

The Griffiths were using one of their first inventions, DNA tracker 2000, to find Jacob. The DNA tracker 2000 was a device that could track someone by putting in something like their blood, hair, etc. into the machine. It would beep when you were near the person you were trying to find. They had been searching for hours and hours for Jacob, but they had no result. Then, with no warning, it started beeping.

Beep, beep, beep.

Anyone could hear it. The Stranger mumbled quietly to Jacob, “Move, move. Follow me.” Jacob obeyed. They ran to a different room full of potions and liquids that nobody had ever heard of. “Sit down on this seat,” ordered the Stranger.

“But… ”

“Now.”

So Jacob did. The Stranger got out a jar of gooey, purple liquid and took out a handful. He spread it over Jacob like sunscreen, and then said, “Finished. Now they can’t track us with the DNA tracker.”

Jacob couldn’t believe how stupid he’d been to follow the Stranger and do what he said. He then decided to plan an escape plan to get out of the cave and be in the safe arms of his family.

Meanwhile, the Griffiths noticed the beeping suddenly stopped, and a confused look appeared on their faces. On one hand, they were relieved that Jacob was still alive and was close. On the other hand, they were annoyed that Jacob had disappeared when they had finally tracked him down. They decided to go back to their newly made home and roasted some dead animal body parts, which they had hunted down earlier, on top of a fire. That day, they ate roasted pig and cow meat, which was surprisingly tasty. Afterwards, the Griffiths settled themselves in their own sleeping bags and slept a heavenly sleep.

In the cave, Jacob was thinking up a risky plan. He first thought about stealing the knife from the Stranger while he was sleeping, and then slicing the door to get out (there was a lock on the door), but it was too risky and had a low chance of success. Then, he thought about stealing one of the Stranger’s potions — surely he had an acid potion — then, using it to melt a hole in the wall to climb out because using it on the door would cause too much noise. Finally, Jacob decided the best plan would be to go to the Stranger’s stash of items that he had stolen (he must have had a phone in there), and then he would contact his parents with a quick text about where he was.

So Jacob got up from his rock-hard bed, given to him by the Stranger, and cautiously crept over to a room labeled “Weapons.” Jacob shook his head while thinking, Nope. Wrong room, because he was already too obsessed by the idea of getting another phone. He then crawled over to another room, this time labeled “Storage room.” Jacob thought this must be the right room, so he slowly opened the door. The door creaked a little, so he slowed it down even more. Then, before his eyes, Jacob saw a large room full of precious and important goods and items. Jacob scrambled around the room, hoping for a discovery of a phone. After a few minutes of searching, the desperate child finally found a slightly cracked Apple iPhone. Silently celebrating, Jacob turned on the iPhone to discover it had run out of battery! Cursing under his breath, Jacob continued to seek for a working phone. Sadly, even after an hour of searching, Jacob had no result. Giving up all hope of finding a phone, Jacob walked out of the room with a long face, but tripped over something and fell with a surprise. But luckily, Jacob managed to save himself from the fall by landing in a push-up position. Angry, Jacob tried to find what he fell on and found out he tripped over a phone! Excitedly, Jacob turned on the phone, and to his surprise, it was on! But Jacob’s happiness was quickly interrupted by the footsteps of the Stranger, so he immediately ran to his bed and hid the phone in his shirt.

The next morning, Jacob woke up with a sense of elation. The Stranger was in his secret room, which he basically never came out of, doing God-knows-what while having no idea what Jacob was secretly up to. The ten-year-old got out the phone and pulled the blanket over his head, preventing himself from being seen. He then put in his father’s phone number and sent a text saying, “Hey dad. It’s Jacob. I’m fine. I’m in a cave underground where u found me with the DNA tracker. The Stranger captured me.” Jacob thought they’d understand, so he hid the phone in a specific spot in the storage room where it would be easy to find next time.

Back in the forest, Lucas Griffiths’ phone started rumbling. Mr. Griffiths fished his hand in his pocket and brought out his phone, which had a text from an unknown phone number. But the text was in the style Jacob wrote in, so he knew Jacob was alive and well and hoping for help. Mr. Griffiths then decided it would be best to show every other family member, so he did.

“Well, what are you waiting for?!” exclaimed Mrs. Griffiths. “Let’s go!”

“Hold on,” said Kevin. “Shouldn’t we be prepared when we break into the cave? Isn’t it a bad idea to run into the cave of the Stranger?”

Embarrassed, the mother of the Griffiths family replied, “Oh, yeah… Um… You’re right. We should be prepared… Um…”

***

1 month later…

The Griffiths family were armed and prepared to break into the cave that the stranger was living in. They had weapons and wore armour. They stood in front of the door to the cave with a rock to throw onto the door as a distraction.

Meanwhile, Jacob was lying on his bed while he daydreamed about futuristic computers. Suddenly, something hit the door. The Stranger stomped over and slammed the door open impatiently, but there was no one there. But as the Stranger turned around and was about to walk back in, the Griffiths family ambushed him and knocked him over aggressively.

“Augh!” screamed the Stranger. But he quickly recovered and swiped at Kevin.

Kevin managed to dodge it, swipe back, and scrape the villain’s armor slightly with his knife. The Stranger was annoyed he was losing a sword fight to a thirteen-year-old, but he was impressed. He then moved on to attack Jamie, since he was a small boy who was short for his age. The evil man tried to kick hard at Jamie, but missed due to the size of the boy and slipped on the rocky floor. Then, Janine, who was a shy girl, jumped on top of the Stranger and swung at his face with her fist and hit him hard in the nose. The villain’s nose had started bleeding atrociously and covered his face in blood. His nose was probably broken.

The family celebrated their victory over the greatest villain of all time, and everyone was glad to have Jacob back. As they were leaving, Jacob suddenly said, “Guys. Can you wait here for a second? I need to go to get this phone I stole from the Stranger.”

Everyone sighed except for Mr. Griffiths, who just grinned and said, “Classic Jacob” under his breath so no one would hear. Then, he replied, “Sure.”

Jacob then raced back to the cave. But when he ran into the storage room, he thought for a minute about what would have happened if he wasn’t so obsessed with his phone. All this probably never would have happened, but his thoughts were interrupted by a cold voice from behind him that said, “Ah. There you are.”

Jacob whipped around, and there stood the Stranger alive and (not) well. “H-how did you survive?” questioned Jacob, frightened.

“Did you really think a punch from a puny little girl would kill me?” laughed the Stranger evilly. “Now, say goodbye, Jacob,” whispered the cold-hearted villain.

But as he was about to swipe at Jacob, a dagger went through the villain, and the Stranger screamed, “Nooooooo!! I’ll be baaaaack…” Then, he was gone. When the Stranger fell to the floor, there stood Mr. Griffiths.

***

2 years later…

The Griffiths family moved to New York City shortly after the death of the Stranger. Mr. and Mrs. Griffiths remained the same. Kevin started playing hockey, and Janine became warrior-boy-like. Many thought she’s a tomboy. Last of all, Jacob despised phones and computers; instead, he fell in love with TVs…

But meanwhile, in the streets of London, there was a baby ready to be taken from its mother’s stomach. It was kicking desperately to break out into the free world. Then, once it was finally taken out, it was as joyful as you can imagine. After the married couple and the newborn baby left the hospital, they spent quite some trying to find which name would be most suitable for the child. Finally, when they decided on what name they should give, the mother delivered the news.

“Hey there little guy, you know what your name is?” asked the mother sweetly. “Well, your name will be Jacob. Jacob Griffiths.”

And the little Jacob Griffiths will soon discover his obsession with phones that will nearly end his life…

Bad luck never ends…

The end (Or is it…)

The Mysterious Box

One scorching, hot day, a little girl named Katie with beautiful, blonde hair, was wearing a blue dress with white polka dots. Her mother was wearing a striped shirt and a black skirt. Her mother took her on a walk to Central Park because they wanted to stretch their legs. On their way they passed an elegant shop that had all different kinds of things from different countries.

They noticed stuff like a chair from India, a chest from France, a vase from China, and a dress from Africa. Everything looked fragile. The door had a dusty, golden doorknob. They continued walking towards Central Park, but at the end of the window, there was a gap… Something was shining.

Katie’s mom stopped and said, “Katie come back.” Katie’s mother wanted to take a look inside because something caught her eye that she thought was really outstanding.

Katie wasn’t sure what it was, so she decided to take a look anyways. Inside the store, Katie’s mother saw a soft, pretty scarf, and on the scarf was a whole lot of animal patterns mixed up with jewelry.  

Katie’s mother decided to buy it, and she brought it to the counter. While she was paying, her daughter heard something calling to her. A whisper was coming from an old, mysterious, familiar box. The box was wooden and had two diamonds on each side. It was right by where the mixed up animal scarf was. She thought in her head that she’d seen it before.

When she was going to open it, the shopkeeper asked politely, “Please don’t open that box,” because he was scared. But Katie just ignored him because she was really curious what was inside. So she opened it…

But nothing was inside. It was 12:30 when they went out of the shop. Owls were hooting loudly. Katie and her mother went back to their fantastic home and went to sleep by themselves quietly. Everyone in the house was asleep except for one person: Katie. She couldn’t sleep because of the box.

She kept on thinking and thinking, What could be inside? She thought, It’s impossible to hear people calling your name when there’s no one there. Katie knew she had to go back to the shop. Katie was awake the whole night.

After that night, Katie asked her mother, “Can we go to that shop again?”

Her mother explained, “The shopkeeper doesn’t want you going there anymore.”

But Katie begged her. And eventually, her mother said, ’’Yes you can go,” because she was getting annoyed by her daughter asking this question every day and every second!      

They went off to the shop, and as soon as they arrived inside, Katie rushed right next to the mysterious box and opened it. This time, she fell inside the old, dusty box and found herself somewhere else. Katie felt really scared. She was trembling.

Katie found herself in a forest with rainbow trees and mixed-up animals where different parts of their bodies were switched. For example, a face of a dog, a body of a snake, hands of an elephant, and legs of an ant. All the animals were really surprised, and the trees looked very excited. The animals were all staring at Katie because the animals had an orb where they could see what was happening in the old, careless shop. The animals had had the orb since they were babies. In the beginning, when they were still babies, they would almost knock the orb down. But their parents caught them every single time. When they were older, they knew that they could see the inside of the shop, so they started to be more careful. Every day, they had looked for Katie. They knew Katie was the person that the king wanted to join their army.

They were all surprised to see Katie, but there was one animal who looked very polite and gentle and kind, who told her, “Go see the king.” The polite, gentle animal told her, “Just follow one path, and you’ll find your way.”

Katie only walked for five minutes, when she found a person who was wearing armor stuck next to a leafy tree. Katie said, “Hello sir?” He did not answer. She said louder, “Hello sir?!” He still did answer. So she decided to investigate the man carefully!

She saw that he had a dangerous knife through his left leg, so she took it out and his eyes lit open as quick as a lightning bolt. A witch had turned the sword into a magic sword that made him fall asleep for one thousand years.

One thousand years earlier, the man had killed the witch’s sister trying to defend himself. Right before the witch had stabbed him, he heard her say, “The only person who will be able to save you is the person who can kill me.” The man had waited one thousand years for Katie to come to save him. Katie had faced loads of hard challenges already in her life. Once, she got in a big fight with her mother and had gotten abandoned at a store. Another time, she got lost at a playground and had to find her own way home. As soon as the man saw her, he knew Katie was ready to kill the witch.

Katie asked the man, “How come you were stuck next to this tree?”

The man replied kindly, “A witch stuck me here, and I’ve been waiting for a thousand years.”

Katie said, “My name is Katie. What’s yours?”

The man happily replied, “Joe.”

Katie asked, “Would you like to go with me to see the king of this land? Maybe he can do something for you, like help you stitch that hole in your leg up.”

Joe replied, “Okay. I’ll go with you to see the king!’’

They walked for two days straight. Joe and Katie found two pitch-dark paths that looked the same. They didn’t know which one to go to. They went past the first one. It led back to where they had started. They tried the other one. It led to the place where they had started as well. They wondered and wondered how two paths could possibly lead back to their beginning. It was 11:20 at night so they decided to go to sleep on the cold, wet grass.

The next morning, they thought, Let’s go straight on the grass and see what happens, and eventually, it worked! Joe could see the castle with his very good eyesight. They decided to have a snack break because of their hard work. They had delicious grapes and crispy pretzels.

After they finished eating happily, they felt very comfortable. They lay on the wet, soft grass for 15 minutes!

Eventually, they continued on their way to the king. After two tiring days, they arrived at the king’s beautiful, gorgeous, outstanding palace. The palace was made out of solid gold. It had glimmering gems on the roof. They couldn’t believe their eyes, so they quickly ran to the door…  but unfortunately, there was a person wearing solid gold armor guarding it. Every person that went past the guard noticed a sword hanging down his belt and his remarkably ugly horse next to him. People decided to keep their thoughts to themselves because they didn’t want to get into a big fight with the guard.

Katie asked him, “Can we go inside the palace?”

The guard answered rudely, “No. You cannot go inside the palace. It’s the king’s orders.”

Katie responded in an angel voice, “Please?” Katie thought it would be easy because she was used to her mother saying yes all the time, and her mother knew she was spoiled little child.

The guard still responded, “NO! JUST GO AWAY!”

Katie knew it wouldn’t work anymore because she could see the desperation on the guard’s face. He didn’t want anyone to go inside. Katie turned back and asked Joe for help. They walked away to a big, shady tree and hid in the branches so the guard couldn’t hear what they were talking about!

Katie whispered to Joe, “Can you help us to get inside?”

Joe suggested, “Let’s find the keys to the castle.”

Katie thought that it was a good idea, but she asked, “How are we going to find the keys?”

“Let’s hide, and hopefully another guard will tell this guard where the keys are. Then, we will follow that person, and then, when he leaves we will get the keys!’’

It was late at night, so they decided to go to sleep on the branches of a big tree. Finally, early in the morning, Katie saw the guard telling the other guard where the keys were. She couldn’t believe her eyes! She woke Joe up and told him the good news. Joe was glad as well. He had a big grin on his face. They quickly followed the man, and the man put the keys at the back door. They hid next to some hay, and then as soon as he went away, they sprinted to the keys.

Katie asked Joe, “Now that we have the keys, how do we get inside with the guard there?”

This time, Joe was really worried. He didn’t know either. They went back to the tree with the keys. They thought about how they could go inside. After one week of thinking, Katie thought of something. On the last day of the week, the guards noticed the keys were missing. The person at the front gate ran away because he was so scared that he would get fired because he didn’t keep the keys. Katie woke up Joe again.

They were so relieved that after one week, they finally did it. When the guard ran home, Katie and Joe rushed inside. Everything inside was green except for the path. The path was greenish blue. It led to a fancy door. Katie and Joe were really nervous because they were afraid maybe it wasn’t the king inside the door. So they stood there thinking about who could possibly be inside. After two minutes, they thought the only person that could be in there would be the king because they heard him talking.

Katie opened the door, and there sat a fancy, clean man, and that man was the king…

***

The king’s face turned pale when he saw Katie. He basically wanted to faint because she was the person he was waiting one hundred and two years for, and finally, she came! At first, Katie thought that the man wasn’t the king; she just thought he was a stupid, drunk stranger because he had a ridiculous response when Katie walked inside.

Katie asked, “Who are you?”

Before he could answer he dropped on the cold, dusty, hard ground!

Katie stared at the filthy king. Katie was so scared. She burst out with tears.

But Joe realized there was a letter lying by the King, and then he shouted, “Katie, Katie look there’s a letter, and it says it’s to you.’’

Katie stopped immediately. She went to the letter and…

Dear Katie,

Go out of the castle, walk ten miles, and then, you will find two trees, and one will have a key hanging down from it. Take it, then, go to the next one, put it through a hole, and it will take you to me!

Yours Sincerely,

The Queen

As soon as Katie got the letter, she rushed out the door. Joe didn’t want to go with her because he was scared, so he hid somewhere. After Katie walked for two minutes, she realized Joe wasn’t there. She was shocked by this sight. She was now alone again. She wanted to go back home and just forget all about this, but she had to keep on going if she wanted to go back home. So she continued on her journey. It was only the afternoon, so she found a nice, cozy space by a tree and fell asleep!

The next morning, it was raining hard, and Katie knew that she couldn’t continue on her journey. She decided to stay by the tree another day, but ants were crawling around the tree, so she had to go to another tree.

After two minutes, she finally arrived at another tree. She put her head down and tried to fall asleep because it was raining hard, but she felt something hitting her on the neck. She wasn’t comfortable anymore, so she looked behind her, and there was a fancy, golden, precious key. She wondered if it was the key somebody sent to her. She went for the risk and took it. She ran to the other tree as quickly as a cheetah, and she found three holes. She tried one hole. It didn’t work. When Katie took the key out, it just had some branches and tree sap stuck on it .

She was disappointed and said, “Why isn’t this working?” She started to try the other ones, but the more she tried putting the key into the holes, the more tree sap and branches got on it. She threw the key into a hole in the ground, but Katie missed. Katie sat down on the cold, wet grass. She meditated because she was annoyed about missing. Her face was as red as an apple. Her face was on fire. But when she meditated, she felt calmer. The anger came out of her body.

She was ready to try again. She picked up the key. She stopped and looked at the key. She noticed writing on the key that said: Dear Katie, Good Luck. From, The Queen. She felt very special. Katie was energetic once again. She threw the key in the cold breeze. It flew as smoothly as a bird! It dropped inside the hole. Katie’s smile showed it all. Tears filled her eyes. After a long time, she finally did it!

She curiously walked to the hole to grab the key that was glimmering in the darkness. Her arm got caught by poison ivy reaching towards her. She didn’t mind because she was brave enough. She went to reach for the glimmering key, but something pushed her. She wobbled, but she was okay. Then, the wind began to blow. She was struggling to survive. When the wind stopped, she lost balance, and all of a sudden, she fell into the pitch black hole…

As she fell through the dusty hole, she screeched. She was trying to reach for the sky. She told herself she was invisible because she was really worried, and she wanted to tell herself positive things. But then, she landed on a soft, bouncy, cozy bed. She looked around…

Katie realized that she was at the queen’s outstanding, dusty palace! When Katie looked outside, it was scorching hot. She was confused because it was raining heavily…

At the beginning, Katie thought she had gone to another country or land. She was getting annoyed. Suddenly, she felt startled! Light shone on the colorful, dusty, red throne. Out of nowhere, the gorgeous queen arrived…

The queen was wearing an old fashioned robe and a glimmering golden gown. She was wearing silver, sparkly shoes, and she had a colorful crown.

Katie couldn’t believe her eyes. She was shocked by the sight. The queen’s face turned as white as a cloud. Her legs were wobbling. She was biting her nails. Suddenly, the wind was blowing hard. Katie didn’t know what to say to the queen. She backed up.

The queen was confused. She asked, “Are you Katie?”

Katie responded with a trembling voice, “Y-y-yes.”

The queen didn’t know if she was Katie because she expected her to be very confident. She asked, “Are you really Katie?” Katie took a deep breath and stepped forward and bowed as politely as could. The queen looked at her, and she confidently said, “Stand up.”

Katie tiptoed towards the gorgeous queen and kindly gave her the letter from her broken pocket. The queen stood there. She was frozen with the letter. Katie asked, “Hello? Hello?” Still no answer. She tried one more time…

All of a sudden Katie woke up in a shock in her own room on her own bed. She was pale from shock! Katie looked around. There was no queen, no Joe, no anyone. She asked, “Is anyone there?” No one answered. She asked louder and rougher, “Is anybody there?!”

Katie realized it was all a dream: the rainbow trees, the mixed up animals. It was all a dream. Katie’s eyes were watery. She sighed and flopped over to the other side of her bed. Katie wanted to continue on her journey to earn the gold! Katie tried to go to sleep again. She closed her eyes. She tucked herself in and thought that she was in the land she was in before. It didn’t work. She tried again and again. The more she did it, the more it didn’t work. Katie gave up. Because of this, everyone in the land got sick. Every night, she tried and tried to get back. But after a year, she forgot all about it.

All the people in the land started to fade away because Katie hadn’t come back again…

The end [or not…]

M.I.A.

Vinny and I had been best friends ever since kindergarten. We always had playdates, and we’d go together everywhere. Or that’s what I thought. I mean, we’d always be having fun together. Vinny seemed to be having fun. So today, I asked him if he wanted to come over to my house.

He said, “I uh, um — sorry, I can’t.” And then he ran off.

That’s weird, I thought. So I went home, did my homework, and didn’t do much the rest of the day.

The next day, while we were taking a math test, I whispered, “Wanna come over?”

He said he’d talk to me after school. So after school, I went to his locker, but nobody was there. After about ten minutes, I gave up and went home. The same thing happened the next day. I thought maybe his dog or ferret died, and he was just really sad and upset. So I gave it a rest. Later on, I started following him around, and he didn’t seem to mind. But then, I thought that maybe he didn’t like it. He also started to hang out with other kids.

So I figured out that there was some problem with me, at least in Vinny’s eyes. I had no idea what was up. I took some time to think if I had done anything to upset him. I couldn’t think what was going on at ALL. I mean, I couldn’t think of anything bad that I did to Vinny recently. I needed to figure it out. What could I do, you might be asking. Well to me, this is kinda rude, but it was the only way — spying on Vinny. I called it operation “Spying on Vinny!” Good name, huh?!

I started my work on Monday so I could have a good whole week to work it out. If I didn’t figure it out, I would quit the idea of trying to figure out what was going on. I started to watch what he did, who he talked to, and what he said. By Wednesday, I had no information and was getting worried. The day went by, and on Thursday, Vinny was sick. That means I only had Friday to figure out what was going on. When I got home from school, I didn’t know what to do. So I went with the only thing I could think of: Ask Vinny what the problem was. Luckily, Vinny was at school on Friday, so in fourth period, I went for it.

“Vinny,” I said. “What’s wrong?”

“I’m sorry — I just.” Then, he ran off.

I needed to know what was going on. When school ended, I realized that the day wasn’t done yet. I ran up to my room, hopped on my computer (not literally), and opened my email. I then decided that I shouldn’t send an email because he might not respond very quickly. I opened my iMessage and went to Vinny’s contact.

Me: Hey

Vinny: What

Me: R u ok?

Me: Honestly

Vinny: No…

Me: Then what’s up?

Vinny: You know my dad is in the army

Vinny: Well he went MIA

Me: I’m really really really sry

Vinny: It’s ok

Vinny: Dude, i’m sry i was mean to u, i just couldn’t, im sry

Vinny: Can we just be friends again?

Me: yea but who r those othr kids

Vinny: Oh they r my cousins, they r just visiting for a month because it is a hard time 4 our family

Me: Cool

Vinny: There’s someone i want u to meet

To Be Continued…

The Bomb in the Building

There are two 14-year-old boys, identical twins named Joe and James, who are complete polar opposites. They hate each other. They fight all day long, nonstop. They gab about each other’s faults to their friends. They both can’t stop making up stupid flaws about each other. These boys are both black-haired and six feet tall. They have black, square glasses. Being so tall, they are extremely clumsy. They trip over things 100 times a day. Being as skinny as sticks, their heads look huge.

They are locked inside a metal room, no place to go, no windows, no light. There is nothing in the room except matches and a piece of paper with a random riddle. They need to work together to find the matches and the paper, and to solve the riddle before ten minutes is up.

Groping through the dark, the two boys don’t find anything on the floor.

“Nothing!” they chorus.

“Hey, don’t bump into me!” cries Joe.

“You bumped into me! That’s your problem,” yells James.

“I don’t have any problems! You’re the one with the problems,” snaps Joe.

“Oh yeah, you bumped into me! Can’t you look where you’re going?!”

“Even if I did bump into you, it’s extremely dark in here. How do you expect me to see where you are? Now, shut up and continue our search for the match and the stupid piece of paper!” shouts Joe.

James is getting red in the face and is feeling around for Joe. He finds him.

“What on earth are you doing?”

Then, it hits him. Joe slaps James back. Soon, it becomes a terrible fight. Punches flying back and forth. They wrestle each other on the ground. The minutes tick by, one minute… two minutes… three minutes. Only four minutes left, and they’re still punching and slapping each other’s face.

They soon are up on their feet. Searching in the dark for the objects, James bumps his head on what he thinks is a wooden cabinet that they hadn’t noticed before. He looks inside. Nothing. He rams into it to see if anything falls off. Instead, it breaks, and he finds a concrete wall instead of metal. Oh, and he also finds the box of matches, which just fell onto his head. He lights one. The riddle is taped on the concrete wall. The wall has a keyboard near it. Joe comes over to the wall where James is standing.

“I guess this door needs a code, the answer to the riddle. Nice work, brother,” applauds Joe as he smiles.

“Thanks, Joe. Now, let’s get to work.”

The riddle says:

My first is often at the front door.

My second is found in the cereal family.

My third is what most people want.

My whole is one of the united states.

What am I?

“I can’t make heads or tails of it, but you’re the dumb one. You wouldn’t get it either,” says Joe.

“Oh really, I’m the dumb one? You were the first one to get an F on a test. In first grade!” erupts James.

They fight once more, now to determine who’s smarter. Only three minutes on the clock. They get up and stop fighting like babies.

“What is often at the front door? Mail? No, that can’t be it. Steps can’t be it either,” ponders James.

Two minutes left.

“A mat, there’s usually a welcome mat at the front door. We have one ourselves,” erupts Joe. “I just don’t get how that matters?”

“We’ll find out soon.”

“When it says ‘the cereal family,’ does it mean the company cereal brand, like Kellogg’s or General Mills, or does it mean the brand from those big companies, like Cheerios, Lucky Charms, Fruit Loops. You get what I mean, right?”

“I get what you mean, but you’re wrong. I think they mean the type of grain that makes the cereal. So it can be rye, barley, or oats. We’ll get back to that,” explains James.

“What most people want is a good education, but you can’t get that without money. Money, that’s what –”

“You’re right, Joe!” interrupts James.

One minute left.

“United States isn’t capitalized, so it can mean uniting together. Could it mean matrimony? Quick, type that in and see if it’s correct.”

James types it in. The door doesn’t open. Instead, written on the screen connected to the keyboard is:

How can you do this?

“What, we need to get married?!”

Second are ticking by. 20 seconds left.

“How on earth are we going to do this? This is the dumbest thing in the world!” erupts James.

Less and less time, ten… nine… eight… seven.

“We’re brothers though, why do we ne — ”

The building goes up in flames.

The flames lick the building to the ground. The fire department gets the warning and rushes to the sight. They warned the fire department that there are two boys stuck inside. The twins’ parents are told about the incident, and they jump in their car and race to the site. They are told that the reason why Joe and James went missing was because a mysterious man grabbed the boys from their rooms to this building. He set a bomb to ten minutes and started it as the boys were dropped in. They needed to find a way out of the building.

The fire department recovers the unconscious bodies from the building and puts them in the ambulance. The ambulance rushes to the hospital with the parents’ 2017 Mercedes E-350 tailing behind.

The boys’ hospital room has white walls with fluorescent lighting, which makes you blind when you first walk in. The boys wake up. They are blinded and can’t see each other. Joe is in agony. The doctor tells him he was fatally injured and might not live for long. They lie in their beds, thinking, thinking.

The last day for Joe has come, and he’s ready for it.

“James, I’ll miss you.”

“No, Joe! Why, Why, Why, Why?!”

James is in tears as Joe leaves the world forever.

Tooth Fairy Trouble

Tooth Fairy Kate is in her house made out of teeth in the clouds. She is making a car out of teeth. Since she’s tiny, her house is small. It’s white because once the fairies get the teeth, they have to clean them so that they can use them. (They have a little factory where the teeth go on a conveyer belt, and they have little workers that brush the teeth.)

She goes to the store to get glue. Her glue is special because it is magical. Once she finishes getting the glue from the store, she goes to her house to put the last piece on the car: a little canine for the door.

She tries out her new car and drives around, but then, the bell in the cloud rings, and it tells her that there’s a kid named Angelina who lost her tooth. Tooth Fairy Kate needs to get Angelina’s tooth. So Tooth Fairy Kate takes her new car and drives to the child’s house.            

She creaks open the window and goes through and sees the bedroom. She finds a tooth in a cup covered with paper, so she takes the paper off, grabs the tooth, and drops off a five dollar bill. She brings her car and puts it on the desk so that she can take a break, but she needs to go to the bathroom. So she flies to the bathroom. She flushes the toilet, and she leaves to go back to the room. There’s a little paper on the desk that has questions for her.

It says, “What’s your last name?”

She writes that her last name is Daisy.

And then, she sees the next question which says, “How do you know when a kid loses teeth?”

She writes on the paper, “There’s a siren that tells you there’s a person who just lost a tooth. It is the child that you choose.”

There’s a little sign on the paper that says, “Here’s a present for you. It’s a purse.”

There’s a little toy purse there for the tooth fairy.

Kate takes her car and drives out, but it’s raining, and she tries to move her car, but the car isn’t working. She gets out of her car, and she dismantles the car. She takes all the teeth and puts it in her little purse that Angelina gave her, which she tries to use to cover her head, but her wings get wet .

She lands, gets on the ground, and tries walking, but there’s stomping feet everywhere. It’s hard for her because she might get stepped on, and the humans are 100 times her size.

She keeps walking, being cautious, and makes sure that she doesn’t stand right in front of somebody and get stepped on. She hangs onto the bottom of a man’s pants, and then he walks into a car, where it’s dry. Kate stays on his pants until her wings are dry.

She makes sure not to get wet and hides inside the ankle of the man’s pants. He goes into a nice building that’s white and big. And then she hears another man say, “Welcome back, Mr. President.”

In Kate’s head, she’s wondering what a president is. Then, she remembers they have President Toothhead back at home, and she’s thinking that maybe he’s this place’s President Toothhead. So she hops out and finds this nice blanket and stays there to go to sleep.

In the morning, Kate finds herself in a room where a little girl is sleeping on a bed, and she’s on a nightstand under a blanket. She hops out from under that blanket and tries to fix her car, but she still needs glue. She has to go see if there is a place where she could find some. She sees that there’s this furry thing under the bed, and it has a collar that says, “Missy.”

Kate says, “It might be a dog. President Toothhead says to always be careful of those things because they might blow your cover.”

She sees the dog, and she gets her wand and taps its head. Then, the dog starts to float because she put pixie dust on its head. The dog starts barking, and the little girl wakes up and says, “What happened, Missy?”

Then, the girl tries to jump on Missy’s back, but Missy is floating. Kate doesn’t want the dog to bark and let the little girl know she is there. She put the pixie dust on the dog’s head so that the dog would only bark because it is floating, not because she saw Kate. Kate knows that this is her chance to escape, so she tiptoes out of the room. But she is too late. The little girl sees Kate and picks her up!

Meanwhile, at Fairytopia, the other fairies are scared and worried if Kate is okay.

Kate is put in a cage, and the girl stares at her. Kate tries to talk to the girl, but since Kate is so small, all of the noise the girl can hear is ringing. Kate takes some paper to draw out what she means. She draws rain, herself with a frowny face because her wings are getting wet, and a cloud with fairies, and a house which is where she lives. Kate labels that, “Fairytopia.” The girl understands and lets Kate out of the cage.

“Hi, my name is Brittnie,” the girl says.

‘’I was wondering if you could let me out, please’’.

Brittnie leads Kate to the window. “Thank you for coming. You gave me an experience I will never forget,’’ Brittnie says.

Kate is happy, and her wings dry. She flies out the window, but before she does that, she reverses the spell she put on the dog.

When she gets outside, she realizes that she needs glue for her car to put it back together. Her wings are not that strong, and they won’t be able to fly all the way back home. She goes back through the window, but for some reason, the girl’s room is already a mess. She cannot find the glue because the room has toys everywhere.

But then, Kate remembers that the glue is in the dresser. She climbs the dresser and falls into one of the drawers. Then, it closes, and she needs to get out! She remembers that she has powers, so she pushes some of her powers against the front of the drawer, and it opens a little. And since Kate’s tiny, she can fit through. And so, she finds the glue, and she climbs down and starts gluing her car back together.

When she finishes gluing the car back together, she takes a test drive to see if it is working. She drives all the way back to Fairytopia. Everybody in Fairytopia is wondering if she is fine. They are worried about her.

Tooth Fairy Kate tells everybody, “I had a hard time bringing the tooth back! You don’t even want to know what happened.”

The end!

Change

“Linda?” I whispered. It was late at night and the storm clouds were brewing.

“What is it, Josie?” she said sleepily.

“I’m scared.”

The thunder boomed loudly. I dove for her bed. I snuggled in and she made room for me. That’s how I spent the night: with my sister.

***

The next day, it was a warm, bright, sunny morning. I listened to the birds chirping their merry tunes as if to say, “Spring is here. Rejoice, oh, rejoice in the glory of spring.” I got ready to throw my frisbee, still listening to the merry tunes, listening to the leaves rustle, and smelling the smell of spring.

I threw my frisbee perfectly, letting it glide elegantly through the air. I got the feeling of being on a roller coaster. In my mind, I was with the frisbee; I was on the frisbee sailing over the green of the park, over the river, past people staring and pointing. I flew through the sharp wind, over stores and restaurants, cars and bikes, towers and skyscrapers. I felt like I was on a roller coaster, gliding elegantly through the air. I was zipping over people, high above city life . . . and then I was back, standing very still in the park, with my eyes watching my frisbee sail through the air.

My sister caught the frisbee. She tossed it back to me. I let it glide through the air. I let it glide over my head, skimming my hair. I let it come to a stop on the bright green grass. I ran to pick it up. I threw it to my sister. She threw it back. She laughed. I laughed. I ran over to her and hugged her tight. She hugged me back.  

“Do you wanna go to the pool?” I asked.

“Do you want to get ice cream and then go to the pool?” she replied, still laughing.

We heard the sound of an ice cream truck and we rushed in the direction of the music. I got a chocolate vanilla twirl and she got strawberry. She paid for both of ours with her pocket money and we skipped off to the pool. We had to finish our ice cream before we went into the changing room.

We both laughed when my sister spilled ice cream on her shoes, because the sole of the shoe said Foolproof. I gave her some of mine. We had fun in the pool, splashing each other until an elderly lady told us to stop. Her mouth was like a lemon, swollen and big. We spent the rest of the time laughing about that.

We decided to go back to the park. While we were relaxing on the green, green grass, Linda got a phone call. I studied her face to see what was going on.

After a long pause, my sister said, “Okay.”

I couldn’t read her face.

She put her phone in the bag, and without saying a word, she began to pack our things.

“Linda? What’s wrong?”

She slowly turned to face me.

She burst out laughing.

“I so got you,” she said, still laughing. We both fell on the grass, laughing and laughing. I felt as free as the frisbee, sailing over the park.

“Who was it?” I asked.

“Mom,” she answered. “She said that we have to go walk the dog.”

This produced a fresh bout of giggles.

Linda had a friend named Peggy. I really liked Peggy. When she came over, Linda, Peggy, and I would go and play. Peggy was a lot like Linda, so you can see why I liked her. She would call me Josie-Rosie and spin around, holding my hands, spinning, singing “Ring Around the Rosie.” It was a lot of fun when Peggy would come over.

I had a friend named Finney. Both of us liked Linda and Peggy. When Linda would have a playdate with Peggy, Finney and I would beg our parents if we could could have one too. One such instance, our parents said no. So I crept up the stairs to Linda’s bedroom, where I knew she and Peggy were hanging out.

I knocked.

No one answered.

I put my ear to the door. They were definitely in there. Maybe I hadn’t knocked loud enough.

I knocked again.

No answer.

I turned the handle. The door was locked. My sister’s door never had a lock. Maybe she got one yesterday; maybe that explains the drilling noise. That confused me. Why would she need a lock?

I ran downstairs to tell Mom, but she just sighed and said, “Your sister just wants her privacy. She’s growing up.”

***

One day, Mom sat us down and said, “Your dad and I are leaving for Spain in a week. We are going to leave you here alone because Linda is old enough to take care of you both for a week. Linda, I’m going to leave money on the table for you to use. Buy food for yourself and your sister. You guys know our phone numbers, so in case of an emergency, you can call us. Do not invite anyone into the house. Linda, we’re trusting you. Josie, behave yourself.”

On the second day that Mom and Dad were gone, Linda broke the rules. And she broke the rules big-time. She invited her gang at school over to have a party in the basement. I rushed to the phone. Seeing me, Linda pulled me aside, her eyes strangely bloodshot and her voice slurred. She said, “Listen up, girl: not a word to Mom, or else . . . ” She let the threat hang in the air. She turned slowly and rejoined the party. I stood in shock. That was not my sister.

At the end of the party, the problem of cleaning up occurred. Linda’s friends pointed at me, jeering, their voices slurred, their eyes bloodshot. The stench of tobacco filled the air. I struggled to breathe.

I ran upstairs.

Up another flight.

I ran past my sister’s room

I ran to my room.

I shut the door.

I sat on my bed.

Crying.

Sobbing.

This was not my sister.

***

The rest of the time that Mom and Dad were gone, every day, Linda would invite Peggy over and they would sit and drink. The smoke from their cigarettes billowed out from under the locked door. Sometimes they would emerge for a snack, stumbling down the stairs, their eyes bloodshot, their voices slurred.

The week without Mom and Dad was horrible. When they came back, Linda got in trouble; the remains of her party still covered the basement. Linda was angry for a week after. She hated me. This was not the Linda I knew. Her room was now off-limits to everyone, including Mom and Dad. They respected that and never went in! Why didn’t they care?

One day, when I knew that my sister was in the bathroom, I crept into her room. Everything seemed normal until I looked under her bed. What I saw made me gasp. Under her bed, tons of alcohol and bags of tobacco and cigarettes were crammed.

Half of me wanted to go tell Mom, and half of me knew that I would get Linda in trouble and she would hate me even more. But I didn’t have to decide.

“What the **** are you doing in my room?” my sister thundered from the doorway. I leapt up. My heart was beating so fast, I thought my chest would burst.

“I . . .”

“Shut up. If you mention a word to Mom, I swear I’ll . . . ” she said. “Get out of my room.”

I didn’t need her to tell me twice. I ran out of her room. I tried to put as much distance between us as possible.

I raced down the stairs.

I sprinted down the hallway.

I bounded down the steps.

I was in the basement.

I stared at the remains of the party.

I remembered my sister and her bloodshot eyes, her slurred voice, the gang jeering and pointing.

I shot out of the basement.

I darted up the steps.

I fled down the hallway.

I scrambled up the stairs.

I tore down another hallway.

I rushed into my room.

I slammed the door.

I cried.

***

A week later, Linda ran away. She left a note. On it, the words, “hate you, not coming back,” were scribbled hurriedly. She took her stash of alcohol, tobacco, and cigarettes with her.

I didn’t know how I felt about her being gone. I missed her old self.

I didn’t know about her new self.

Our house was quiet with Linda gone.

I didn’t really miss her.

That’s a terrible thing to say.

***

The next year passed smoothly and quietly.

I got B’s in most of my classes; I’d never gotten anything else.

Things were really quiet without Linda. My parents were devastated. They constantly blamed themselves for her unhappiness. They looked for her all over. They were still upset even though she took a bunch of money from them. I couldn’t recognize Linda’s room without the constant smoke billowing out from under the door. The house smelt strange without the constant stench of tobacco. It was . . . well . . . different, without Linda.

***

Linda came back on Tuesday, March 17th. She looked really different. She was wearing a simple skirt and top, not at all like the tube top she had been wearing when she left. She looked different without the useless makeup that had covered her face. Now, she had a light covering. She looked more grown-up. Mom and Dad took turns hugging her. She approached me slowly.

I had a horrible flashback of the party; of Linda approaching me slowly with her bloodshot eyes and slurred voice.

I turned and ran.

Up to my room.

I shut the door.

I sat on my bed, crying.

I knew that this Linda was different, but I couldn’t forgive her. I just couldn’t.

The door opened quietly.

Linda came in. She sat on my bed.

For a moment, it was silent. I buried my face deeper in the pillows.

“Josie,” she said. “I am so sorry. I really was horrible to you.”

I ignored her. That was easy to do due to my turmoil of thoughts, each pushing to the front of the line, trying to get attention.

“Josie,” she said again. “I really am.”

I still ignored her. But she should’ve gotten an award for persistence.

“Josie . . .” she tried again.

“Get out of my room.” I hadn’t really meant for it to come out rudely, but it did. Linda got off my bed.

She whispered, “I really am.”

Then she left.

My head was aching for the rest of the day, and the day after that, and so on.

***

About a week later, Linda came into my room with a gift. It was wrapped in the most beautiful wrapping paper, which must have cost her a fortune.

She left the present on my bed. On it was pinned a note: I’m really sorry. I opened her present. It was a camera—the expensive kind that I had begged for on every one of my birthdays.

***

A month later, my thoughts were still in turmoil when Linda quietly came into my bedroom.

“Do you want to go to the park?” she asked.

“No.”

“Do you want to get ice cream and then go to the pool?”

“No.”

“Josie, what do you want to do?”

“Leave me alone.” Again, it came out rudely, but I hadn’t meant for it to.

She left the room.

Ever since Linda had come back, my parents had been treating her like a queen. Well, everyone was treating her like a queen, as if she did something great, running away like she did.

***

One day, I was in the kitchen making myself a peanut butter sandwich when I heard Linda and Mom through the wall. I stopped and crept out of the kitchen. I approached the dining room door and put my ear to it. At first, I couldn’t make out what they were saying, then I heard Mom: “Linda, your dad and I are very proud of you for growing up and coming back. We really missed you.”

“But Mom, I’m not proud of myself.”

“If you’re talking about Josie, she’s just in a shock. She’ll get better.”

“No, she won’t. She has reason to hate me. I’ve tried everything. I even got her that camera that she has wanted for so long. Nothing works. I don’t blame her.”

“Sweetie . . .”

I gritted my teeth.

I sat there for a moment.

Not taking it anymore.

I went up to my room.

It’s wasn’t like I didn’t think she had changed. It was that I couldn’t forgive her for who she was. She seemed different since she’d come back; she seemed more grown-up, not playful, not fun, not the Linda she used to be. Not the Linda I used to love.

I banged my head on the bed. This was not helpful.

Ouch. I misjudged the distance between the bed and the wooden part. Ow.

I hung off my bed, my head almost reaching the floor.
All the blood rushed to my head.

I remembered a warm, sunny morning.

***

It was early in the morning, and I went into Linda’s room. She was sleeping on her bunk. Her bed was like a bunk bed, but it had no under bed. Just empty space.

“Come on, Linda. Wake up.” She stirred in her sleep. “Come on, Linda.”

“Okay, okay, I’m up.”

“What should we do?”

She sat up, a twinkle in her eyes.

“Let’s swing.”

“We don’t have swings.”

“Let’s make them.”

“How?”

“Grab a blanket.” I got a blanket.

“You can tie it to my bed, like this.” She showed me how to tie the ends of the blanket together to make a swing. She got in hers. I got in mine. We swung, laughing, giggling. We swung higher and higher, laughing, giggling.

***

That was it. I remembered no more.

Another memory took its place.

***

It was about to rain. Linda dragged me outside.

“Let’s build a fort,” she said.

The twinkle was in her eyes.

We grabbed chairs, raincoats, some food, and umbrellas. We finished our fort just as the rain started to fall. It had a bedroom and a food storage area. It even had a playroom! Our bedroom began to leak.

“Come on,” Linda said, a twinkle in her eyes.

We ran inside, laughing. We grabbed an umbrella and ran back, laughing, getting soaked. We repaired our fort. We ran outside, getting wet. We ran through the rain, laughing, dancing in the rain. We were soaked to the bone.

***

Another memory.

***

It was snowing. We built a snowman together, and an ice wall surrounding him. We went inside and dyed water with food coloring and splashed it all over our snowman and ice wall, laughing.

Linda had a twinkle in her eyes.

We went inside and had hot chocolate with marshmallows.

Linda had a twinkle in her eyes.

***

I missed that twinkle. I missed it a lot.

That was it. No more memories came to me. That was it.

I missed that twinkle.

I wanted to see it again. I needed to see it again. I had to trust Linda; it was the only way. I needed to see that twinkle.

I ran to Linda’s room.

“Come on, Linda. Wake up.”

She was up in an instant.

“What’s wrong? Is everything okay? Is everyone okay?”
“It’s just me, Linda,” I said.

She just looked at me.

“Can we go to the park?” I asked.

COP CHASE!!

Chapter 1

Kateri, Sam, Andrew, and Kasten were watching 3D Zootopia in comfy, leaned back, reserved chairs. Oops, sorry, I almost forgot about Marisa. She is Kateri and Andrew’s mom. She was there too, of course. Sam and Kasten were not part of the Derman family, but Andrew and Kasten were very close and Sam and Kateri had been friends for as long as they could remember.

“That was a good movie,” said Andrew as they walked out of the theater.

“Yep!” said Sam as they crossed the street. Then… vroom! Two cars came rumbling down the street. Thankfully, the group was safe. They had taken a street safety class together. Kateri, Andrew, Sam, and Kasten jumped on one car and Marisa got on the other. The cars kept on rumbling down the road… in different directions! Sam put his face down on the window and stuck his tongue out at the driver.

“What are you doing?!” asked Kateri.

“Distracting the driver,” replied Sam. “Look.” The car veered into an apartment building. The driver called 911. The car stopped and the ambulance came rushing. Kateri, Sam, and Andrew were not hurt, but Kasten had a big scrape on his arm. He burst into tears. Kateri quickly silenced him. “Hide!” yelled Sam. Andrew dove under the car. Kateri jumped behind a nearby trashcan. Kasten sprinted into a hair salon. Sam dove into a trash can.

“Shh,” whispered Andrew to Kateri, who was giggling from behind her trash can. Sam started yelling at Kateri. Andrew caught words like, “nitwit,” “scandal,” and, “stupid.” The police turned their heads.

“They saw us!” said Sam, “On three, run! One, two, three!” They all piled into the car. Then… BAM!

COP CHASE!! The two cars went rumbling down the street!

“I nicked the police belts,” said Andrew. “I’m quite a good pickpocket.”

“Hardy har har,” said Kateri.

“Hey, who asked you?!”

“Myself!”

Sam snatched the police belts from Andrew. He pulled out the police guns. “Nope! I don’t approve of violence,” said Sam.

“Why not?” asked Kateri.

“Because it’s… violence,” said Sam.

“Look, Sam!” said Kasten. “It’s a fortune telling place! Can we go?! Can we go?! Can we go?!”

“Huh. Okay, Kasten. But only very quickly.”

“I want to see if we’ll ever find Kateri and Andrew’s mom,” said Kasten.

They walked into the fortune telling place. It was called The Seeker’s Revelations. Kasten ran into the studio.

“Have fun!” said Kateri.

They closed the door of the studio. A moment later, Kasten ran out of the studio!

“What happened?” asked Andrew.

“You know what she said?! You know what she said?!” said Kasten. “She said she had a revelation. She said that she knew I was a seeker. She knew I was seeking for Kateri and Andrew’s mother. She said, ‘You will find her again, but you might lose her forever.’”

Sam walked out of the store, leading Kasten by his arm. “I don’t ever want to see that hateful woman again!”

Suddenly, a woman walked out of the studio. “Oh, did you call me hateful? Night will come and I will attack when you least expect it!”

Kateri waved her finger by her ear, creating the cuckoo sign.

“Did you hear me? Night will come, and expect attack will— wait, what?”

“Hahahahaha! Let’s go,” laughed Andrew. They jumped back in the car. The cops were getting really close to them.

“Hey,” said Kateri. “It’s my turn to drive!!”

“Okay,” said Sam. “But remember: we’re in a cop chase, so we have to switch quickly. This is not your normal day whatever,” Sam said as Kateri jumped into the driver’s seat.

Kateri started driving. She drove like she was drunk, even though she wasn’t. The cops were getting really close to them; even closer. Then the police crashed into the beat-up Mercedes Benz.

“Aww…” said Kasten. “I liked that car.”

“Hurry up!” yelled Kateri. “We’re gonna have to jump!!” Sam, Kateri, and Andrew jumped out of the car.

“Run for it!” yelled Sam. “Kasten, hurry up!”

Kasten was scared. He had never jumped out of a moving vehicle before. Sam, Andrew, and Kateri had a lot of experience from their car safety class, but Kasten had been too scared to attend the jumping part. The car went into a tunnel, and Kasten had still not jumped.

Aliens At Mars

Long ago, a group of people were assigned to go on a mission in outer space. Their mission was to try to get past Mars’ atmosphere. But what they didn’t know was, they had visitors on Mars.

The group of people were Noemie, Jeany, Nick, and Jack. On their way to space, they saw the beautiful sun. It looked like looking at a thousand stars and flowers all day long!! There was a camera out of the ship where they could see everything out of the computer. Finally, it was time they were getting closer and closer to Mars!!!

Suddenly, Jack said, “We’re losing contact with earth, man!!!”

Everybody started getting busy. All of a sudden, everybody started pressing buttons and switching switches.They were passing Mars’ atmosphere but they didn’t know it.

It sounded like this, “Vrooooooooooommmm. Beeb, Beeeee, beeb, beeb, beeb, beeb,  beeb, beeb, beeb, beeb.”

They smelled smoke. The smoke smelled like dead meat. The a/c caught on fire, but they put it out before it caused real damage to the computers.

Suddenly, they felt a big bump. Then they stopped doing what they were doing. They landed on Mars!

“YEAH!! We did it, man, we did it,” said Jack.

While they were celebrating, there was a big hole in the a/c. The mother alien quickly crawled in the hole, waiting for her prey. The alien mother was bigger than baby aliens. Aliens have big heads. The humans did not know there was was more than one alien. They also had mouths in their mouths!!!

Noemie, the leader, told Jack to fix the hole in the a/c. Jeany went too. They went together.

Jack looked in the big hole in the a/c and saw a big, humongous, ALIEN!! The alien slowly opened its mouth.

“HELP, MAN!” said Jack. “Help,  help, help, man!!!”

“Hey, Jack, I got the tools to fix the a/c. What do you say we get to work? Jack? Jack? Jack?! Are you playing a joke on me?! JACK!” said Jeany.

“Help!” said Jack.

The the alien zoomed into the pipes leaving a trail of blood!

THE NEXT DAY…

“I’m telling you the truth, Noemie!!! One second Jack was there, the other he wasn’t not! And after he said his last word, ‘Help!’ I saw a trail of blood in the pipes!” said Jeany.

“Stop with your lies. He’s probably pulling another trick on you. And ‘help’ was not his last word. He’s my man,” said Noemie.

“At midnight I did not see him in his bed! You do not think it’s a signal from an ALIEN? People who believe in aliens wrote a book about ‘em. In the book, it said the alien would take a person you care about and eat him/her alive,” said Jeany.

“Hey, guys sorry to interrupt, but we found a dude floating in space. His name is Fernando. Should we bring him in?” said Nick.

“Of course,” said Jeany. “Profile his ID.”

“He has no family. Nothing,” said Nick.

“Can’t be! Nothing at all?” said Jeany.

“Nope. He thought if he went on this mission, he’d get more money. His crew abandoned him in space. They went back to earth without him. He said he saw an alien.”

“I told you that aliens are on Mars, Noemi,” said Jeany.

“He’s lying. Aliens are not real. How many times do I have to tell you this?!” said Noemi.

“Until one of us dies, Noemi. Just wait and see,” said Jeany.

“Aaaaaaaaaaaahhhhhhhhhhhh!” yelled Nick. “Something is pulling me into the pipes! HELP!!!”

“Don’t!” yelled Fernando. “If you kill it, it will destroy the ship. It will make a hole in the air container causing us to lose oxygen,” said Fernando.

“Are you crazy?!” said Nick.

“Do you want to kill us all?” said Fernando.

“No,” said Nick.

“The alien has to let go of you at some point. But it will not leave us alone. We have to hurt it once, then it dies by itself. Hit this one ten times. It’s the mom alien,” said Fernando. Then, Fernando shot the mom alien ten times, letting Nick free.

Suddenly, Noemie fell down to the floor. An alien was pulling her in the pipes. Noemi tried to kill the alien, but it was too late. Jeany shot it, but their leader died.

“Who’s going to lead us now?!” said Nick.

“I will!”said Jeany.

“Now let’s let’s go and  kill some aliens!”said Jeany.

“Yeah!!” shouted Fernando and Nick.

So, they ejected into space and went home to earth. The aliens died on Mars. Hooray!!!

Cookie Dough’s Adventures in the Bedroom

One day, when Cookie Dough’s owner was at school and his owner’s parents were at work, Cookie Dough wanted to get some exercise, so he ran on his wheel, but he went so fast that he flung out of the cage and flew into his owner’s upstairs bedroom.

He luckily landed on the bed. Everything was light pink, purple, and magenta. Cookie Dough started jumping. He bounced so high, he almost touched the ceiling.

Cookie Dough stopped bouncing. He turned around. There was a huge bear. Cookie Dough backed up. He was confused, but then he realized that it was a teddy bear. He snuggled up with the teddy bear and fell asleep.

When Cookie Dough woke up, he started exploring the room again. There were dolls, and more stuffed animals, and a dollhouse. He went to explore the dollhouse. He went into the living room of the dollhouse, then the kitchen, then the dining room, which had hamster-sized food on the table. Then he went to the bedroom. Cookie Dough loved the little dollhouse. He jumped out the dollhouse window and onto the bedside table.

Cookie Dough was having lots of fun exploring the bedroom. He went onto the bed and bounced again. Then, Cookie Dough heard someone open the door. He hid behind the teddy bear. Then he heard someone walk up the stairs.  “Cookie Dough,’’ called the voice. “Mom, I lost Cookie Dough,’’ said the voice. He heard the person walk down the stairs.

“Don’t worry. We can get another hamster,’’ said another voice.

“But they won’t be as tiny or as fluffy or as cute. I love Cookie Dough,” said the first voice. Then Cookie Dough realized that it was his owner. He jumped off the bed and slowly went down the stairs.

“Cookie Dough!’’ yelled the owner. Cookie Dough’s owner grabbed Cookie Dough and put him in his cage.

Cookie Dough felt happy that his owner found him. Cookie Dough had a long day. He lay down and fell asleep.    

The Scary Night

The Scary Night

Day 1. January 23, 2010

I just moved into a new house. The house has three floors, including the one under the house (a.k.a. the basement). But… um… the outside of the house looks creepy. It looks abandoned; it sort of looks haunted, but my mom said that it wasn’t, and I believed her. When I went inside, everything was beautiful. The walls are white, and the floor is made out of shiny wood, and the stairs are made out of crystal. I went on every floor, even the attic. The attic looks okay, except I heard a creepy noise, and the same thing happened in the basement. The basement is interesting because whenever we turn on the light, I always feel wind, even when it is sunny outside. It’s dark now. I have to go to sleep. I’ll write how it was for the first night here.

Day 2. January 24, 2010

OMG, I just noticed that today’s my birthday. I wonder what my parents got me. So, yesterday I slept good, except I heard somebody whisper to me, “Be careful.” I got scared, so I quickly went to sleep. But when I woke up, I saw my dad on the floor. I quickly went upstairs to tell my mom. But my mom was unconscious. I called the ambulance. My parents were taken to the hospital. I was left alone. Then the same thing happened to me when I was about to go to sleep.

I heard someone whisper to me, “Haha… you don’t know what just hit you, little girl.”

I felt dizzy, and I fell on floor. The floor was hard and cold. I felt like I was dying. I felt like I was about to die, but I didn’t die. One hour later, my mom came back from the hospital. She found me on the floor. She carried me to my bed. That was the worst birthday ever.

Day 3, January 25, 2010

Yesterday was weird. I really don’t know why I fell on the floor; I just literally collapsed. I think that ghost got to me. My dad hasn’t come back from the hospital. I hope he’s not badly injured. Anyway, my mom is going to visit him again. So I’m going to stay home alone again.

One hour later

Okay, I’m home alone now, and weird things are happening already, and I’m already creeped out. All the lights went out. And something grabbed my foot and dragged me down the stairs. I ran as fast as I could when it let go. I ran into my room. I felt lightheaded; I felt like I was going to die. I locked the door.

Then, again, I heard someone whisper, “You’re gonna die, little girl.”

I screamed and screamed, but it didn’t go away. My mom is coming back tomorrow, which means I have to stay home alone for the night. My auntie lives nearby, so I’ve decided I’m going to sleep over there for the night…

Okay, I finished packing. I walked out the door… but as soon as I walked out the door,  something grabbed me, and I started getting burned up.

I screamed, “AUNTIE, IT’S ME, KAREN! HELP ME PLEASE!!!”

I started to cry because the ghosts were hurting me. I tripped over a piece of wood. I fell and hurt my head. That’s when I heard my aunt coming. Everything was blurry. The ghosts let go. My auntie took me to my bed. I fell asleep.

Day 4, January 26, 2010

My hands were sore. My head hurt. My mom, auntie, and dad were right beside me. I felt safe, but I really wasn’t. I stood up and looked at them. They told me to rest, but I didn’t want to. I looked at my hands. They looked burned and bruised. I looked at the blood, and everything that I went through came back to me, and I fainted. I woke up again. This time, I didn’t see my family members — I saw a priest. He asked me what happened.

I said, “ I was home alone, and these weird things were happening to me, and I don’t why.”

The priest went outside to talk to my parents, and he told me to try to rest. As soon as he closed the door, I heard someone whisper. After that, I felt something go in me. And my mom told me that I was getting possessed. My eyes were turning black, and my body was getting lifted. The priest and my family came in the room once they heard me hit a wall. The priest commanded the demon to put me down… it did, but when the demon dropped me, blood was coming out of my mouth. The priest said I had to leave the house or things would get even worse. Then, my parents told me to pack up, and I did, but they said it in a frightened way.

 

The Enchanted Clock

Where in the World Are We???

I closed my eyes, hoping it was a dream. I opened them again. It was not.

“Zoe, do you know where we are?” I asked, praying that she would not take it badly.

“How should I know?!!! We are stuck in the middle of passing time, and there is no logical way to get out!!!”

I hunched back. She was right. “I’m sorry, just thought I might ask.”

She glared at me. “What’s the big deal?!!! Every time I say something, you get so mad at me!!”

That’s when the argument started. “I did nothing wro –”

“You are saying that!? Are you kidding m — ”

“You are just being sensitive.”

“Am NOT!!”

“ARE TOO!!!”

“UGH!!!”

***

Finally, the argument stopped. We both looked at each other and attempted to walk away. But sadly, since we were still floating in the middle of passing time, we could not. We spun in circles and couldn’t stop after that. We had been there for hours and hours, but it only felt like ten minutes, and by each passing minute, it had been an hour in the real world. I decided to say something to cut the silence.

“Do you, by any chance, know any other spells or sayings that can help us get out of this?”

She glared at me, and I plugged my ears, protecting them from any screaming. All I heard was mumbling, and then she stopped and turned around. I kept my ears plugged just in case, and I saw her close her eyes and hold up the watch to the sky (that is, if there was any sky). All of a sudden, everything was spinning. There were all kinds of clocks spinning around us. All of a sudden, we started falling, faster and faster and faster until we thudded onto rock-hard ground.

“Now do you know where we are?” I asked Zoe, one more time. There was no response.

Back into the tree… or not.

“Zoe,” I called out, hoping there would be a response. She came out of nowhere, just standing there, completely silent.

“Are you okay?” I asked.

“Yes, I’m fine,” she said. “Time for me to ask a question. Do you know where we are?”

I stood there, silent, just as she did before, and I looked around. “I can take an educated guess?”

She once again glared at me. I stepped back, just to make sure nothing was going to happen, and then her eyes went back to neutral.

“Maybe we’re inside the tree?” I guessed.

She looked at me in a confused way, then started thinking about something. “That’s impossible. If we were back inside the tree, that means we must have gone back in time. But the clocks were spinning clockwise, so that means we must be going to the future, so that would make no sense.”

I thought about that theory. She was right once again.

“I guess you’re right,” I said. “But what if they were just tricking us?”

Zoe looked at me in her confused look again. “How can clocks trick us?”

I had no answer.

“Uhhh,” I said. “Not exactly sure.”

She looked at me, and then walked around to make sure there were no traps or creatures lying behind us or in front of us. “Well, this place seems to be completely harmless, so why don’t we take a walk around to see if anyone can tell us where we are?”

I thought about a place where someone might be. That reminded me of something that I saw when we were falling from the sky, or from wherever that white place was.

“I think I may have seen a village while we were dropping from wherever we came from,” I said, trying to see how useful I could be, but Zoe was already one step ahead. She already had a map out, and she was wandering around, looking where to go.

“I think we need to go north and past that river, and I think that village you were talking about might be there.”

I looked over to where she was pointing. “That’s kind of a long walk.”

Zoe turned back and gave me an annoyed look. “Do you want to go home or do you want to stay here? It’s all up to you.”
I felt pressured when she said that, so I didn’t know how to answer it.

“W-well, I think that if we find out that this place is actually just on Earth, and it’s a normal country with villages and towns and cities, I think it would be best to stay here instead of getting into so much fuss about getting home.”

Zoe was surprised at the answer that I just gave her, but she nodded along with me. But I wasn’t done talking. “But if this place isn’t a normal country, then I think it would be best to go home no matter what turns we have to take. I just want to make sure we don’t go too far from the plan that we made.”

Zoe disagreed with that comment. “I think that we should try our best and not worry about how dangerous our plan is. If it means getting home, it means getting home.”

I didn’t want to start another argument, but I knew that if we didn’t we would get into serious trouble.

“You know, Zoe, if we take too many turns, we will get into very dangerous situations, and that is not something that I want to happen right now. All-”

Zoe cut me off. “You have to! It’s our homes. Don’t you want to fight for that?”

She had a good point, but it wasn’t worth getting into trouble. “Please, Zoe, just listen. We can’t get into another argument. We might attract someone here that we don’t want to see right now.”

She completely ignored what had I just said and kept yelling and screaming. We spent about twenty minutes there, just yelling and screaming at each other, and I was right. We did attract someone there. I saw a shadow lurking behind a tree.
“Zoe, look! There’s something there.”
“Is it a unicorn?” she said sarcastically.

“I’m not joking!”

“Sure, sure. Come on, you see shadows all the time, okay? It’s not that big of a deal.”

“If you say so,” I whispered to myself. Sadly, she heard.

“Come on. Let’s just go north, okay? It’s the best thing that we can do right now,” Zoe suggested.

“Fine,” I said, and rolled my eyes in disbelief that it was the best. “But I’m still keeping an eye on that person… or creature.”

“Okay,” Zoe said. “But really, it’s nothing.”

I ignored her comment and kept my eyes peeled for anything on our walk north, but every few moments I could still see him.

“There’s really something following us…”

The Shadow Man (Don Don Don)

We walked as far north as I could remember. We’d been walking for days and the river was still days ahead.

“Can we please stop to take a break, Zoe? I can speak for both of us when I say that our legs are very, very exhausted right now.” Zoe knew that was true but she didn’t admit it.

“NO!! My legs are not tired,” she said.

“Oh, COME ON! I know they are.” She gave me an evil look. I didn’t say anything after that for a long time.

“Are we there yet?” Zoe annoyingly said. I did not answer. We kept walking, no breaks, food or water.

“Zoe, you go on. I really need a break.” She completely ignored me and kept on going.

***

I sat on an old tree stump and waited for a long time. I wasn’t exactly sure what I was waiting for, but I was waiting anyway.

“Zoe!” I called out. She turned around in confusion. “I think I may have seen the man again.”

She rolled her eyes at me. “You didn’t, because he doesn’t exist, and also, come on. We’re gonna be late if you don’t follow me.”

I didn’t listen to her and stood up. I walked the opposite direction, seeing if I could prove to her somehow that this man was actually real. She didn’t even notice me walking the opposite direction, but she didn’t care even if she did. Then I saw him again. This time he was out in the open and walking straight towards me with something sharp in his hands. I screamed, but noticed that right after I did, he vanished into thin air. I turned around and he was standing a little ways away from me. I stepped back and I noticed that there was a tree blocking my path to going any further, so I had to run. I ran past the deep forest and back into a wide meadow so there was no way to hide behind trees there. I just had to keep running. Zoe noticed me gone, and she saw the man chasing after something, so she chased after him. We all ran past the meadow and through a deep hole and up a giant hill and finally, we made it to the ocean. I had no choice but to take one of the boats that I saw out there and sail it across the ocean. I saw Zoe running, and I hid myself under an old tree that had just died with no leaves on it, just branches. I tried my best to keep myself hidden. The shadow man ran right past me and into the boat, thinking that I was already on one. She laughed when she saw the shadow man sailing out.

“Zoe, now do you believe me about the shadow man?” I asked.

She couldn’t lie this time. “Yes. Yes, I do.”

“Thank you,” I replied. “Now let’s go find a village so we can get something to eat. All I’ve been eating is nuts and leaves.”

“Disgusting,” Zoe whispered to herself.

“Come on, let’s go,” I said, pulling her toward the top of the hill. But as we managed to reach the tip, we saw the shadow man standing there, ready to throw something, but we weren’t exactly sure what it was.

A Way Back Home! Yay!!! Let’s Go Home!!

I stood still while I was staring into the blob of air that was standing in front of us.

“I thought you were on the sailboat,” Zoe said, very confused.

“I was,” he said in a raspy voice.

Zoe and I looked at each other, wondering why he spoke in such an awkward tone.

“Do you have a sore throat?” I asked him.

Zoe slapped her forehead. “No, that’s just how ghosts talk!” she said, as if I should have known that by heart.

“Well, how do you expect me to know?” Zoe glared at the ghost and then back at me. The ghost stepped back, knowing that this was not going to end well.

“You should know because everybody knows what ghosts are and how they talk.”

The ghost made a growling noise. We both looked up. He grinned, knowing exactly where to take us. I probably walked behind the ghost as he took us down the forest. On the other hand, Zoe was laying her feet down on the ground and dragging them.

“You need to go faster, Zoe. You’re taking way too long.” Then, I stopped. I looked at her then, and asked her, “Where’s your clock time-freezing thingie?” She gasped. It wasn’t on her neck.

“It must have fallen off when we were in the middle of passing time.” Zoe looked at me strangely. “Whatever happened to trying to find your brother?”

I gasped. “I completely forgot about him. He could be here or there, who knows.”

We ran the other way. The ghost chased both of us down to the same valley we passed earlier.

“Why are you taking us to the same spot?”

“Lyra, this is the same spot that we dropped to when we fell out of the sky.”

I smiled. “Then that means we might be able to get back in the tree and save my brother, and the entire world, if that’s what we’re trying to do.”

Zoe nodded. “That is.”

“Can we find a way to send us to a certain spot in the tree, or do we just get sent anywhere?”

Zoe thought about that. “I think there’s a chance that we can navigate a way to get to a certain place.”

I smiled, trying to keep my hopes up that she was right.

“I think we fell about thirty feet north from here.”

I fell on my back.

“More walking?” I said in a very tired and exhausted voice.

Zoe knew that it would be hard for me, but she couldn’t let my brother down.

“Maybe we can freeze time,” Zoe suggested.

I reminded her that she didn’t have her clock.

“Okay, so maybe freezing time isn’t the best idea, but we have to find some way to do it.”

Zoe held up her watch that looked almost exactly like the clock, and she said the same line that she did earlier, back when we were time travelling. I held onto her and I screamed. Everything turned white again. We were in the same position as before.

“How do we get out of this again?” I asked Zoe.

She remembered how we got out the past time that we did this. “You have to dream about where you want to go, and want it bad enough that you just fall right into that place.”

I looked at her, astonished. “Does that mean that you dreamed to be in the forest with that ghost?”

“No. I dreamed to be at a beach with my Grandma’s ghost, not an evil shadow man person.”

I looked at Zoe sternly. “Dream as hard as you can to get back into the tree.”

Zoe looked glum at me. “You have to do it too, if you actually want this to work. It’ll only teleport one person. Whoever’s believing it will teleport. So that means if we are both believing, then we will both teleport. We just have to try together.”

“You do mean-”

Zoe stopped me,  “I mean both of us. We both have to try, okay?”

I sighed. “Fine, I’ll do it.”

We both dreamed of being in the middle of Candyland inside the tree, and we both dreamed of lying on the whipped cream valley. Then, all of a sudden, everything spun around faster than it had before, and we landed right where we dreamed: smack in the middle of the valley covered in whipped cream and frosting.

“It worked!” I screamed so loudly that a flock of bird flew past us, angry that the noise got louder.

“Sorry!” I yelled to them, but they didn’t even squawk back.

“Isn’t this where I found that weird alive map that one time?” I asked Zoe.

“Yes. Yes, you did. Maybe it’s still here, and maybe it can help us.”

I smiled and looked around. I remember when she held it on her way out, when she was vanishing. It dropped in a puddle of melted chocolate. I stood up and ran south, exactly where she was standing.

“Why are you running over there?” Zoe screamed. Finally she added all the ends together and she realized that that map was the map of the tree, and that my brother was hidden east, and that meant that we had to go to the night time side of the land.

“Lyra, we have to go to the night time.”

I looked back at her, pretty much thinking exactly what she was thinking.

“But what about the map?”

“You dropped it in the puddle, so I’m trying to look for it over here. Can you help?”

“Okay, the truth is, Lyra, I dropped the map on the way there. I made a fake hologram of it to make you jump into the puddle.”

“Why? It’s just a chocolate puddle. I would just lick myself off, like a cat.”

Zoe sighed, because she was afraid to tell me the truth. “Because Max is actually hidden at the bottom of that puddle, and I thought if you would find him… you know what? Never mind.”

“Well, why don’t we start eating a bunch of whipped cream around the puddle, and then it would make a bigger puddle for both of us to jump into?”

I did feel betrayed that Zoe had hidden something so important from me, but I knew that she was just trying to help me, so I decided to let that one pass.

“I didn’t tell you, because there was so much on our minds and I knew that you didn’t trust me very well back then, and I knew that if I told you, it would just hurt your feelings even more than I already have.”

Zoe was right, and it was the right thing for her to do, but now that we both knew where my brother was, we had to get to it faster. We both stuck our fingers in the whipped cream and licked it. It tasted better than we both thought it would.

“Are you ready?” said Zoe.

I smiled the biggest smile that I almost ever had. “Let’s get licking!” I yelled.

We both stuck our faces into the whipped cream and licked as if it was the last thing we would do.
“Keep licking!” I kept yelling, and, “Don’t stop! Don’t stop!”

Zoe was panting. She almost sounded exactly like a puppy, tired from playing catch all day. “We’re almost there! I feel the chocolate on the tip of my tongue.”

I smiled and started helping her with all of my might. We licked and licked until we could only taste whipped cream, no matter what we ate.

“I’m starting to think we made this puddle for a baby shark,” Zoe said jokingly.

“Let’s just jump in no matter what creatures we’ll find! Who doesn’t want to swim in chocolate?”

We both held our noses and jumped in. We opened our eyes to see that we could actually breathe under it, and that our eyes didn’t hurt our get covered in chocolate.

“Look, those are memories of Me and Max riding on my favorite roller coasters in the best theme park.”

Zoe smiled. “Those are some of my memories of my old parents before I found the tree.”

We kept going deeper and deeper. “Come on, let’s try and see if we can swim just a little bit faster.”

I smiled to hear that I heard Max’s voice down below us. Zoe knew I was smiling, and she followed my action.

“Come on, just a few more feet and we’ll be there!”

We swam all our mights down to as far as we could. Soon enough, our heads banged on rock candy ground.

“Max, are you here?” I asked. There was no answer.

“Max!” Zoe yelled. Soon we saw two hands emerge from below us. “Max, is that you?”

We each grabbed one hand and yanked it up. It was Max, and he was covered in dirt and had cuts all over.

“Max, what happened to you?” I asked, while we were all swimming back up.

“I was forced to be locked up down past the rock candy ground, and forced to be there in the dungeon. The good news is, I found a way to escape the executioner.”

“Well, I’m glad you’re safe.”

When I said that, almost all the chocolate drained out, and we were just standing in a giant hole. We were all one foot away from the top.

“What do we do now?” I asked.

Zoe already had an idea. “Let’s grow a lollipop tree!”

I thought she was crazy. “THAT WOULD TAKE FOREVER!!”

Zoe smiled. “You’d be surprised.” She took some seeds from her pocket and planted them in the rock below us. We waited and waited.

“Can we just find a better plan?”

Zoe shook her head. “Keep waiting.”

She stomped on the ground, and a lollipop tree grew beneath, so I grabbed it, and one by one yanked Max and Zoe up out of the hole.

“Well, now that we’re all safe,” Zoe said, “We should get you two back home.”

Zoe’s clock was now hanging on her neck again.

“Come on. I remember the way. I’ll never forget it,” I said, hoping they would actually follow me. They did, and we all got safely back to the same willow tree.

Zoe held up her clock, and it looked like she was scanning it onto a little box next to the bottom of the tree. All of a sudden, a little door opened, and all three of us crawled through. I stood up proudly next to Max to see that our house was in the same state as we left it in, except for the fact that our Mom was frantically looking for us.

“Mom!” Max screamed. She turned around.

“Lyra! Max! Where have you guys been? Some of your friends told me that you were in Tokyo, visiting the emperor.”

“No, we went through more of an adventure than that!”  I smiled, and my mom smiled back.

She turned to Zoe. “Who is this?” she said sternly.

“My name is Zoe Tamal.”

My mom gasped. “My real last name is Tamal! My sister had a child, and then one day she vanished!”

Zoe was shocked.

“Lyra, that means you’re my cousin! Same for you, Max!”

We ran around squealing and laughing.

My mom said something.

“You can move into my house until I find your mom. Lyra, Max, take Zoe up to the bedroom and get her settled into one of the rooms.” We took her upstairs and into our bedroom…

The End

We all got our water and went upstairs to our bedroom, and my mom came and gave us good nights.

“‘Night, Mom,” I said, not even trying to go to sleep.

“‘Night,” Max said, already half asleep.
“Goodnight, Aunt,” Zoe said, getting ready to sleep. We all closed our eyes, except for me. We all were about to go to bed, until I screamed:

“HELP!”

 

Hard Times with Luck, From Sarah’s Diary

October 12, 2015

Dear Diary,

My name is Sarah, and this is my first time writing in a diary. I’m twelve years old, and I live in Malibu, California. I like California a lot, but my parents told me that we’re going to move to Florida. They told me this yesterday. It was the same day I got this diary. When they gave it to me, they told me I might not like the changes, and it might make me feel better to write my feelings and whatever I want in this diary. That still did not make me feel better. Moving to Florida means that I can’t be with my friends anymore or surf the big waves they have here. It also means I’ll have to go to a new school. Anyway, the reason my parents and I are moving is because they invented a new video camera for people’s houses. The video camera is called V.C.A. (Video Camera App). You can check the camera from the app (the app is also called V.C.A.). Wait a minute! Just because they invented a video camera doesn’t mean we need to leave California! Maybe they’re hiding something! I’m going to ask them! I’ll be right back!

***

Okay, so, nothing good happened. They told me no one in California would invest in their product, but a big company in Florida did! Today has not been a good day at all!! Right now, all I want is to read a book and then go to sleep. See you tomorrow, Diary.

October 13, 2015

Dear Diary, today is a Monday morning. (A school morning! Ugh!) Today, I’m going to tell my friends the news. I have two super close friends at school. Their names are Emma and Jessica, and we’re all in sixth grade. Emma’s really funny and athletic, and Jessica is very fashionable and smart. Both of them are also super nice. Oh my gosh!!! It’s 7:47 and school starts at 8:00. Bye! I have to go!

***

I’m back from school, and my friends didn’t like the news either, but they told me we could make a group chat. That’s the same thing as regular texting, but with more than one person — Jessica told me about it. Unfortunately, I have a flip phone, which doesn’t have text, and my friends have the Apple iPhone 5. The only way I can talk to them is over the phone, but I can’t talk to them both at the same time. Emma and Jessica told me that I should beg my parents and if I do something nice for them, maybe I’ll get an iPhone 5. But today, I’m not any happier about the situation, so that will have to wait at least ‘til tomorrow or later today. Give me a minute; I hear a knock at the door.

***

It was my parents. At first, I was hoping they were going to tell me we aren’t going to move. Unfortunately, that was not it. They just told me dinner is ready, and I’m starving!! So I’m gonna go.

October 14, 2015

It’s a Tuesday morning. Last night, I read a lot of my book, so I’m going to write a small part of it down so I don’t forget:

Peyton ran from her house to her grandma’s house every night because she didn’t have her own room, and at her grandma’s house, she did.

I’m still not sure why she didn’t have her own room to sleep in or why she wouldn’t let her parents know. Well, her parents could have gotten into a fight with Peyton, but I’m still not sure.

Wait a minute!! That gives me an idea! Tonight, when my parents fall asleep, I can call the company on my dad’s phone and tell them my parents actually don’t want to create the V.C.A. anymore! I’ll just have to talk in a deep voice, like my dad, and find his contact book. This is risky, but I hope it works, and you know, maybe the companies in California will change their minds and invest in the V.C.A. WOW!! My parents haven’t called to tell me it’s dinner yet, and it’s 7:37, and we usually eat at 6:30. Finally, they are calling me, and I’m starving!! And wow, what great timing that was!!

***

Dinner is finally over!! That took forever!! I don’t know why my mom made so much food, but it was really good!! Twenty-seven more minutes until I sneak into my parents room. It’s 9:42 right now, and everyone must be in bed by 10:00.  I also think I should wait five extra minutes.

***

It’s 10:27. That’s because I was so nervous, so I waited a lot of extra minutes. So, first, I have to find his contact book, and then his phone, call the company, and talk in a deep voice!! I don’t know if this is a good idea now. It’s risky, and I could be in BIG trouble, but on the other hand, I could stay in California and be with my friends! Ummmmmm… I have made my final decision, and it is that I will take the risk! Wish me luck!

***

Wow! It took forever just to get my dad’s contact book and phone. Now, I have to look through the contact book and call the company… found it!! My dad made it easy for me to understand, which is a good thing! My dad named it “INVESTED COMPANY FOR V.C.A.” Okay, it’s time time to call!

***

I called! Wow, that was scary!!! I hope I sounded like my dad! Anyway, here’s how the call went:

Company: Hello, this Marc. How can I help you?

Me: Hi, this is Jack [my dad’s name]. I wanted to cancel my product-making and your investment in it.

Company: Okay, but first I’m going to call your wife, since this is major, and tell her a code. You are going to have to tell me it so I can make sure this is really Jack.

Me: Okay.

I totally freaked out!!! I had no idea what to do, so I just ended the call and hid the phone and the contact book in my laundry bag, right next to my bed. I made sure to hide them both under clothes. Then, I turned off my light and went to sleep.

October 15, 2015

It’s morning, and I really hope my mom never heard the phone ring! I also hope my dad isn’t awake yet and looking for his phone, because if he is, I’m in big trouble, and my mom can call him and find where his phone is!! However, Marc still may have called my mom! I never should have done this, but right now I have to go eat breakfast and my parents always eat with me!! I just need to act like it’s a regular morning. Okay, I’m going. Wish me luck!!

***

That was, like, the longest breakfast of my life!! My parents never brought up anything different; all they said was that they are so excited about the V.C.A. and asked me if I was packed for school. I don’t think they noticed anything that happened. Oh well. It’s off to school for me! I just wonder when I should put my dad’s phone back. I can’t do anything now because he is in his bedroom, getting ready for the day. Wow, I have to go! School starts in twelve minutes. Bye!!

***

Okay, so, school was fine. I just got to my room… I hear a knock at the door. Give me a minute.

***

It took me so long because my parents somehow found out what I had done!!!  Apparently, Marc never called my mom. All that they know so far is that I took my dad’s phone, and it wasn’t because it rang. It was because, apparently, since my parents created a video camera, they have video cameras all over the house, including my room!! So then, my parents forced me into a time-out for thirty minutes and then had a talk with me for ten extra minutes. It’s already so bad, and they don’t even know that I called Marc or anybody!! Today has not been a good day… I hear another knock at the door and I know this time that it’s my parents, not my friends. Whatever they have to say will either take five minutes or five hours.

***

This keeps getting worse!! They asked me why I stole the phone! I’m still not sure why they didn’t ask that the first time they talked to me, but either way, it doesn’t help. Apparently, since my dad has an iPhone 5, he can see who I called, but before I knew that, I told him that I heard it might flood so I needed a phone to call the police in case I needed to know what to do. Now, I realize that was a really bad response. However, my dad asked me if I was telling the truth, and I said yes. And then, he said, “But I thought you had your own phone?”

Then, I said, “I couldn’t find it in the dark.” Then, he asked a good question — for him!!! Well, pretty much all of his questions for him have been good. Anyway, he asked me how I could’ve found his phone in the dark.

Then, I just said, “I don’t know.”

My dad had then said, “Well, it seems to me that you have told many lies.” Then I was thinking, how did he know? I wanted to fight back, not asking how, but I couldn’t. It just burst out of me!

I questioned, “How did you know?”

My parents said that there’s a button called “Recents” to see who you last called. Then, I knew I was so not going to get an iPhone 5 if I asked anytime this month. Anyway, that has nothing to do with this. I only had a few more seconds before I was punished. This is because my parents started to call the company that I called last night. Then, somebody picked up. I was hoping Marc wouldn’t pick up, and he didn’t! I was glad… until his friend told us he had to leave to do some other job he had there, and also said he would leave us with somebody else. And guess who that somebody else was? It was Marc!!! Marc introduced himself and asked for my parents’ names.

They said, “Jack and Paula.”

Marc said, “Oh, yes. Shall I call Paula and tell her the code?”

My parents asked, “What code?”

Marc told them, “The code to close your business and end our investment in it.”

My parents shouted, “What?” Then, they said, “No, no. That was a mistake. Someone else had the phone.”

Marc then just said, “Okay. Goodbye, and have a nice day.”

My parents stared at me and then, said, “Go up to your room.” So, my plan didn’t work out. Not one part of it. If my parents want to talk to me, I’ll either be asleep or almost asleep. I’m so tired from worrying and stressing out about that situation. Bye, Diary.  

October 16, 2015

It’s another school morning, and I can already tell today is not going to be good. Anyway, I have nothing else to write right now. I’m going to go to the kitchen. I hope my parents aren’t going to say anything too bad.

***

It was a regular day at school, except I was even sadder… except for this one gift that Emma gave me. But first, let me tell you about what happened before this. I told Emma and Jessica about what happened. They told me I was determined to try to stay in California and I tried my best. They also said that they hoped I liked the gift that they were giving me. It was a small bag with a red ribbon that tied the handles together, and tissue paper inside. After you lifted all the tissue paper, there was a small box. When you opened that small box, there was an iPhone 5 inside!!! That was the best thing that happened to me all week! Emma told me it was her old one and she didn’t need it anymore because her parents got her the new iPhone 6. I really didn’t care what type of number my iPhone was. Just the fact that I had an Apple iPhone was awesome!! I thanked Emma and Jessica. I mean, even though it’s not really from Jessica, I knew Emma made Jessica a part of the whole thing, so I just went with it. They also told me they already charged it, and Emma’s parents got me my own phone number, so the phone is totally under my control!! Emma told me that Jessica would help me create passwords and show me how to do the basics and make it as easy as possible for me to use to use it. I do already know a few things, since both of my parents have Apple iPhones, but I definitely could use some pointers. So Jessica is meeting me at my house and should be here any minute now… oh! The doorbell literally just rang, but I’m going to let my parents open so they don’t think I planned this whole thing out without telling them. Which I didn’t, because I didn’t know I would get my own iPhone!! Oh, Jessica’s right outside my room with my mom. I’ve got to go.

***

I had no idea learning everything about the iPhone took two hours! Well, really, it only took one and a half hours, but telling my parents about it took thirty minutes. I was so relieved that my parents accepted the gift. For a minute, I thought they would tell me that I cannot accept it. But the minute after that, they were totally fine with it, as long as I didn’t use too much cellular data per month. After Jessica showed me how to use everything on my phone, my parents helped me set up passwords, and then, my Apple iPhone 5 was complete!

October 17, 2015

I can’t believe it! I only have about one more week before we move to Florida, and I’m switching schools in the middle of the school year. Another disappointing thing is that I won’t be able to write in my diary that much, or at all this week because we have a big test on Wednesday, and that is the day before we leave for Florida. Anyway, I know my parents are still really mad at me about the whole me-taking-my-dad’s-phone situation, so I’m going to have to do a lot of nice things for them since they approved Emma giving me her old Apple iPhone. So, I decided even though it’s going to be super hard moving to Florida, I’ll be nice for them and not complain about moving to Florida. Wow! It’s getting late. I’ve got to go to school now.  

October 25, 2015

Oh my gosh!! I cannot believe I’m writing in my diary on the plane! I’m super nervous! I can’t believe I’m going to live in a new house and go to a new school. And yet, all of that is going to happen in a new state!! The plane ride just started. We are in the air and have four and a half hours left, so I have a long time on the plane. I’m sitting in between my mom and my dad, since we are in the same row. When we were in the airport, I was texting Emma and Jessica. At school, I said goodbye to all of my friends and teachers. Then, it was off to the airport. The night before, I packed the last of my things. We are shipping the rest of the stuff. We shipped most of our furniture. The rest of the furniture, we gave to people who don’t have so much money. Anyway, to pass the time, I’m going to watch a few movies.

***

I’m in my new room, which is empty! This room is huge, and I like it! My parents’ bed and my bed should be here by now… and now, the doorbell just rang. I bet my parents are getting the door. Give me a minute. Someone’s knocking on my door.

***

My bed just came, and apparently, my parents already got bedding. My bed is really soft.  Right now, I’m going to check out everything in my new room and what it has in it.  

***

I like my room. It definitely needs some decoration. But all my furniture is coming tomorrow, so I’m going to go to sleep because I’m so tired.  

October 26, 2015

I just remembered that my teacher would e-mail me my grade from the test. I’m going to check it right now.

***

I got a 97! I’m going to tell my parents right now!

***

My parents were proud, and also told me that my furniture and all my stuff came, so they helped me move my furniture up, so now it looks like an actual room. I’m going to spend the rest of my day putting in the extra stuff in my room.

October 28, 2015

I’m super nervous about this new school, so my mom is going to take me early. I have to leave now. Anyway, I hope today is going to be good! By the way, my room is complete and looks nice.

***

Wow! My school is only five minutes away by car! School was good. I made one new good friend named Alexia, who is coming over in five minutes. Anyway, my teacher is a girl and is super nice. Florida isn’t so bad after all. I think all this new stuff is not such a bad thing.

The Weird Week

1 – One Fine Day

It was a sunny day. It was time for Ashley to walk her little puppy. She put on her hot pink bow and yellow pants with her best friend. They got some new blue pants. They were rich, so yeah, the dog was pink!                                

2 – Too Rich

Ashley had too much money. She had a whole store with dog toys and pet toys. Now, she had too many toys. So she gave the store and all the toys to the town.

3 – Lunch Time

It was lunch time. Ashley bought all of the food stores because she was going to have a party with the whole world. She stuffed each country in a little bathroom the size of a dog house. It was the not-best party ever!!!

4 – In in in in in in looove

She was 24. She saw a 24-year-old boy who was so so so handsome. She fainted. She woke up in her room. The boy was there, too. He drew “iwhaiuthrthodhdhdwhieR8yuuryueq8989387ry39owu34eywi8ur6” on the walls. But she was still in love.

5 – Wedding Time

Ashley had a wedding, but no flower girl, so they had to throw the flowers. But they got flowers in her hair! It was the worst wedding ever!!!

6 – Kid Time,Ya!!

Yaaa!!! Ashley and Ken’s kids were born in one day and born at age three. They were twins. Wawaaa!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Then, Ashley went to deep sleep. Then, the babies came out.

7 – School Time

It was time for Ashley’s kids to go to school. She put the clock to 1:00 in the morning. But school started at 1:00 pm. She did that because she forgot to get the backpack stuff. They put on their school uniforms, ate, and had to wait one hour. When the school bus got there, they went to school for 30 minutes. San was a boy, Sandy was a girl, and they were going to school together. When they were going to school, Ashley took a 20 minute nap. Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz. So Ken picked the kids up.

8 – Reading Is Fun

When San was watching TV, Sandy was reading. They read and watched for three weeks. Now they were reading 2,000 more books for homework. They each had a pink and blue birthstone that could give them powers when they read.

9 – Robbing House

When Ashley was asleep, two robbers put them in jail for a replacement. They woke up somewhere very different, and the kids were still at home. Then, they got out their birthstones, and everything went back to normal.

The End!

The Rise and Fall of Emily Dixons

I hate myself.

Well, I don’t hate myself— I hate the way I dress. I hate the way I look.

The girls at school always make fun of me. They say that my clothes are irrelevant. They try everything to break me. But it won’t work. I love my personality; I just hate the way I look. I get taunted. Tortured. I can’t do anything.

I really want to change. I want to dress well. Nothing looks good on me, though. I just want to have something that I can rely on. I want to look pretty. I really do. The truth is, I’m just scared to look pretty. I’m afraid I’ll still be taunted. I don’t think that I could be pretty if I tried.

All the girls seem so confident. I’m just that shy kid that sits in the back. I have friends. But I’m quiet, and my friends don’t seem to know who I am. They think I’m like them. But I’m not. I’m creative and amazing and I want to be something that I know I’ll never be if I tried. Don’t tell anyone, but I have a burning passion for art. I just want to paint my life on that canvas. But I never will.

I have all these feelings bottled up inside, ever since the first day of eighth grade. I’m a ticking time bomb, counting down the minutes until I burst. The second hand on the clock is ticking. It’s matching the beat of my heart. The time’s about to be noon— when all the kids get up and leave.

11:59.

12:00

Coming from room 301, there is a girl who screams louder than a car honk, going on for one full minute. That girl is me. Emily Dixons.

***

How did I end up here?

How did I end up in the guidance counselor’s office?

Why did you scream?

Why are you angry?

Is something wrong?

I was distraught by her stress ball. I was getting my anger out. I squeezed, and squeezed, and soon, in a matter of time, the stress ball popped open, the white foam oozing out into my hand, onto the floor into a big puddle.

The guidance counselor told me to leave right after that.

***

I saw a therapist a week after that. He gave me pills.

***

I felt the same. Cold-stone Emily Dixons, master of ugly.

After my morning OJ, I felt different.

I picked out my nicest clothes. I organized everything in my backpack.

I got an A-plus on my homework that day.

Best of all, Aviva Goll didn’t torture me that day. I felt confident.

***

When you feel good about yourself, you feel good about others. You trust them. You feel them. I was nice to people. I was getting A’s. Everybody liked me.

Aviva Goll did something that really got on my nerves, though. She stood up on the lunch table, and screamed something so ballistic and wrong into the air.

“Emily Dixons wets the bed! She peed on my backpack last year!”

What?! I didn’t! I got really annoyed. So I gave up. I let her have it all. Why try to be something you can’t be? I tried to be like Aviva. I really did. But she has it all. The friends. The clothes. The social acceptance. Aviva has everything I desire, however, I’m sure she’s not into sharing.

Then I had my second glass of OJ that morning. The world had turned upside down. The OJ tasted a bit different. It had a bit of a bland taste. Oh, well.

Then a third glass of OJ at lunch.

I was a completely different person.

***

I had a smile as long as a piece of gum when you stretch it out.

I was nice. I was starting to dress differently. This kept going. The Magic OJ was working. I always made sure to drink my two glasses of OJ before I went to school.

I was getting comments like these:

“Nice shirt, Em!”

“Love your backpack!”

People were noticing me. I was the exact thing that Aviva said I wouldn’t be. I was the shining star; the whole thing the school looked forward to seeing. The Magic OJ was doing it all. The Magic OJ could do no wrong.

I was finally the person who I wanted to be.

***

My bucket list— yes, I have a bucket list:

Emily Dixons’ Bucket List of Magical Adventures

  • Dress AMAZING
  • Head of Student Council
  • Make the School PURPLE
  • Rule the jazz band

***

This is my chance.

I’m completing my bucket list!

This is Emily Dixons’ Rise to Stardom. This is the day where I start completing my dreams. I’m finally going to rule the school. This was my chance to show everyone that I can do as much as them. I dress nicely. I’m nice. I have totally amazing beliefs. I, Emily Dixons, promise to make the school fabulous in any way that I can.

I started with the student council. I was easily elected in a landslide. It was me versus Snotty Nose Sammy. Nobody wanted a snot-ruled school.

My first order of business was making the school purple, which is my favorite color. I declared the following day Purple Day. I bought purple ribbon, purple streamers, purple construction paper, and just about everything purple that I could find at the craft store.

We did it! We purplefied the school. One by one we made the walls the sweet shade of the most detailed lavender, the bulletin boards displaying mountains of purple construction paper. I don’t think a lot of the kids liked it, though.

“YOU GIRLY-ED UP THE SCHOOL!” I was told by all of the boys. They didn’t think my work was too good.

That got me down. But, when I got home, all I needed was a glass of the magic OJ.

***

I did it myself.

I got home, grabbed the thick plastic bottle of OJ, and poured it into the cup.

I did it myself.

I drank it all in 30 seconds.

I did it myself.

I felt nothing? Why did I feel nothing?

Because I did it myself.

***

My lightning bolt of power did not reach my body.

It didn’t work. I did it all myself. My newly-born motivation. I did that myself, right? No. I didn’t.

“Mom, the Magic OJ didn’t work!” I whined to my mother.

“WHAT! I haven’t given you OJ since yesterday!” My mother yelled, with a burning passion that was still elegant but fierce.

“I poured it myself,” I replied, calmly.

“Oh, honey. It’s time we tell you about the pills.”

That’s what led to the great Emily Dixons Fall of 2013.

***

I could do this myself.

All I needed to do was walk in there and be a leader. I convinced myself I was motivated to do this.

However, I wasn’t motivated until I had the Magic OJ.

I’d just lost my life.

***

Mom gave me Magic OJ this morning. This was the magic stuff. The pill stuff.

I wish I could handle my own battle. I wish I could do this myself. It’s like I’m standing in a black hole and there are steps but I would have to be hoisted up to reach them. I’m standing in a black hole with nowhere to go, nothing to say, nothing to do, just waiting for someone to mystically help me accomplish what I wanted to do myself.

Wishes are complicated things. Even though you know they’ll never come true, you want it so bad to the extent where you would murder someone for it. You still have that little sliver of hope, locked away inside the safe you call your heart where nobody could find it even if they tried.

It’s hard to fight yourself. It’s hard to believe you would ever come to a disagreement with yourself. But you do. Your brain is defying the logic, saying, “I CAN, I CAN, I CAN!” Only to be let down with failure.

Failure is complicated, too. It’s hard to accept the fact that you’re wrong. After all the work you’ve done, your certificate of achievement is that what you did was a waste. A waste of time, a waste of energy. You’re a waste in life. You’re a failure.

Yeah. That’s what you think until you get your kryptonite. Your Magic OJ. The thing that brings you back.

That’s the secret of humanity. Bounce back.

That has me thinking.

***

I walked in there on Monday with a serious face. That could at least make me think that I could handle this.

The band room was right there. Room 435. I made sure that Mom packed me more Magic OJ just for this. I grabbed it out of the side pocket on my backpack and drank it all in 3 gulps.

I grabbed a saxophone and a book. I learned everything in what felt like a minute. In ten minutes, I could play five songs.

I led the jazz band. We played my favorite songs, like Miley Cyrus’ new album, and Katy Perry’s new album.

I don’t think anybody liked it, though. They all said I was doing pop songs and that we needed classic jazz songs, like Louis Armstrong. Who the heck is Louis Armstrong? I had not heard of him before. Was he like Elvis Presley? I think that’s who my parents listened to when they were my age.

People were getting really angry. I had to pull out my secret weapon. Katy Perry’s “Roar.”

So I did. That’s how I ended up being the only one in Room 435, surrounded by instruments screaming to be played.

I spent last period emptying spit valves.

***

I had a secret weapon.

I’ve always wanted a place where I could just scream. I could get all my emotions out with a good ‘ol scream. So I started the Emotion Center. Room 436 was vacant, so I asked the principal, and she said I could transform it.

But people weren’t using it correctly. I wanted it to be a scream center.

They were using it to cry and to whimper. I demonstrated like so: “AHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH!”

I was in the guidance counselor’s office again.

***

Who are you?

***

I thought I could do it.

I could rule the school.

But I didn’t.

People have personalities. People are who they are. People may try to change who they are, but it’ll never work.

I can do things. I can. I may never rule the school, but I’ll always be here. I can do things. I can draw. I can make things with my hands. With my brain. I have a purpose in this world.

You do, too. You have a purpose. You can do something, too. You can. You really can. You have to just go and find out what it is.

Maybe you’re good with animals. Go volunteer at the animal shelter. Do what you need to do to make you happy. Whatever it is. Just do it. That’s what I did.

***

It was so fast.

They welcomed me quickly, while still keeping elegance and class. The Art Club was so nice.

Anias, shy but friendly. She was so talented, making the most intricate patterns.

Jeffrey: his people-drawing skills were flawless. He drew a sketch of me in five minutes and it was incredible. He didn’t miss anything. Even my mini-pimple on my forehead.

Samantha, whose environment paintings were incredible — she could capture every speck of a star in the night sky.

Iggy, who could do no wrong with her detail. She drew my plastic water bottle and I thought for a minute it was a photograph.

And me, Emily Dixons, who was the happiest person on earth. I could finally be who I wanted to be: an artist. I never thought I could, though. I can do anything and everything I wanted.    

I came at the November mural project. Nobody knew what the mural should display. I knew exactly what that mural should state.

Glitter. Markers. Crayons. I was so happy. I was doing what I’ve always wanted to do. It doesn’t matter about looking pretty, or having the newest thing. It matters that you feel good about yourself.

I rose up. I had a bit of stardom.

I fell down. I was something I wasn’t.

Do what makes you happy.

Epilogue

“That was my rise and fall,” I said to Mrs. McKinley, the eleventh grade English teacher.

My final essay was complete. Now everyone knew who I was. The pills I take in the morning. The clothes I wear. When I found out who I was destined to be. An artist. They knew my well-being was artificial — that I was depending on cold stone medication. I’m happy about that.

I got home only to find a nice, fresh glass of Magic OJ sitting on the counter. Eleventh grade was finally over.

Pointy

Once, there was a piece of paper named Pointy who wanted to go to Italy so he could get his favorite Mozzarella Ice Cream. But somebody kept trying to cut him into pieces, because he was jealous of Pointy, because Pointy could drive. He didn’t know where the airport was, because he was only a piece of paper. He decided to go to the subway station, where he could look at the map. When he got there, everybody was surprised to see a walking paper. The security guard came and took him to the dungeon.

“No live paper allowed!” he said.

“Why not?” Pointy asked.

“Because you will scare people.”

Pointy was very scared. When he got to the dungeon, he had to hold his nose because it smelled like rotten eggs. He was in a very small cage, and his head kept flopping over. Then he realized he was very thin, so he wiggled out of the bars. He went back, and made a friend named Mo. Mo was a turtle.

“I have a map,” Mo said.

Pointy was relieved. He took the map, without the security guard seeing him. He studied it carefully, and went to the airport, by driving in his mini car. He had arms and legs, so he could drive. The thing was, he hadn’t passed the driving test, so he was zig-zagging down the bicycle road. Luckily, nobody saw him except a bicyclist.

“Move out of the way!” he said.

“Why?” Pointy asked.

But the bicyclist already had zoomed ahead. Pointy got to the airport. He suddenly felt scared, because he had to go through security. Instead, he decided to hide in a woman’s  purse. The woman went through security. The purse smelled like dirty coins. He thought the woman should hurry up. When the security guard saw a paper with legs and arms, he threw him away. He heard the woman say, “I didn’t put it in there!”

Pointy made his way out of the garbage can, and snuck into a man’s purse, though he wasn’t sure the man was going to Italy. He noticed a sign that said Italy plane to the left coming in 5 minutes. Pointy walked to the left, and counted to sixty, five times. He followed a bunch of people that were walking on a plane. He sat in a comfy seat in the very back. Unfortunately, the man who wanted to cut him up was there.

“Yay!” the man exclaimed. “Pointy is here to cut up!”

Fortunately, the security guard took away his scissors. Pointy was terrified because he didn’t know. He ran, and buried himself in the pilot’s pocket where he would be safe. When the pilot went on the runway, Pointy folded himself up so nobody would see him. He did not know how long the plane to Italy would be, and he thought it would be about two minutes. When Pointy discovered it was not that long, he was so sad, because he really wanted Mozzarella Ice Cream. When they finally got to Italy, Pointy was so happy, because Mo was there!

“Hi! It was a long trip,” said Pointy.

“I had to sneak to Italy. I didn’t know you would be here,” Mo said.

“I came here to get Mozzarella Ice Cream,” Pointy said.

Pointy was so happy because he didn’t spend any money. Mo was so slow that Pointy felt he was running, when actually he was walking.

“Wait!” Mo said.

Pointy looked back.

“Sorry, I’ve got to go. I have to admit, you are the slowest friend I’ve got,” Pointy said.

“Okay,” Mo said,

And he tried to run up, but was so sad, he hid in his shell. Pointy pushed him up the hill. When Mo got out of his shell, Pointy said, “Sorry, Mo.” And went up the hill.

Mo was very sad, but Pointy didn’t care. He had to get Mozzarella Ice Cream. He did not care about Mo at all, though he could hear him crying behind him. Pointy could not find the Ice Cream Shop. His arms were tired from pushing Mo up the hill, but Mo had already plopped himself into the lake. Pointy saw lots of people with binoculars, but he didn’t hear anyone saying that they were going to an Ice Cream Shop. Pointy felt hopeless, when he remembered he had the map in his pocket. He looked at it, eyeing every word, but he realized there was nothing that said Ice Cream Shop. He felt upset that Mo gave him a map that didn’t mean anything to him. He felt that Mo should have it. Even though it was lighter than a feather, he felt it was as heavy as a sunflower seed. He threw the map in the lake, and hurried on. Pointy saw Mo get out of the lake. Mo looked much happier, and it seemed he forgot about what Pointy said to him because he said, “Hi, Pointy, I am so happy to see you!”

Pointy was sure he had a memory problem.

“Where’s the map? I need it,” Mo asked.

“I threw it in the lake,” Pointy said.

“Why?” Mo asked, but Pointy had already run ahead.

“Wait!” Mo wailed, and he cried all over again.

Pointy thought that he could find a shop by himself, because Mo was too slow. Mo was really trying to catch up to him. Pointy thought it was funny, so he ran so that he couldn’t see Mo, because he didn’t want Mo to have the Mozzarella Ice Cream. Pointy didn’t like him anymore. Mo knew that, so he was asking for somebody to pick him up and bring him to Pointy. Pointy was so mad at him that he ran back down and scared him so much, he went in his shell, and so nobody wanted to pick him up. Pointy saw a place with binoculars. He thought they would help him see an Ice Cream Shop.

“Can I have binoculars?” he asked.

“No,” the man said. “But you can go sightseeing.”

Pointy was disappointed, but he agreed to go with the man, whose name was Bob. Bob took him around some Italian restaurants, and showed him around where he lived. Pointy thought it was fun, watching all the different birds. Bob helped Pointy put Mo in the garbage can, because he was following them.

“Then,” Bob said, “The Ice Cream Shop with Mozzarella Ice Cream is around the corner.”

Pointy nearly swore he heard the garbage can rustle, but he didn’t say so. He was too excited about the Mozzarella Ice Cream. Bob said that sightseeing was over. Bob gave Pointy a map of where everything was that he showed him— including the Ice Cream Shop. Pointy was so happy. He had traveled to Italy to get this Ice Cream. He went around the corner, and saw the shop. He went in. It was cold, and there were so many different flavors, but when he got to the Mozzarella section, he was so angry because Mo was there. He quickly darted in line before him. Mo was speechless, and he started to cry, again. Pointy pointed out that Mo cried three times in his adventure to get Ice Cream. When the shopkeeper heard his story, he agreed to let Pointy skip Mo in line. Mo was heartbroken. He didn’t know what to do.

“I want the last scoop of Mozzarella Ice—”

“Noooooo!” Mo wailed. “I wanted that.”

And he started to cry again.

“I see what you mean,” the shopkeeper said.

Everybody in the Ice Cream Shop turned to look at Mo. Mo’s cheeks turned red, and he burst out of the shop.

“I am not happy!” he said, and ran off without looking back.

Pointy repeated himself for the shopkeeper.

“I want the last scoop of Mozzarella Ice Cream,” he said, and he was very pleased to say it.

The shopkeeper got him Mozzarella Ice Cream, and he was delighted.

The End

The Adventure of Christian and the Ancient Tour Guide

The Adventure of Christian and the Ancient Tour Guide

Once upon a time, there was a guy named Christian, who was pretending to work at Writopia. Writopia is a camp where kids have fun doing writing activities. Christian was pretending to be a good writer and was pretending to work at Writopia. Christian was a guy who wanted to become a tour guide, like the ancient tour guide in the legend. He had very crazy hair. It was big, curly, blonde hair that went around everywhere, his skin was light, and he really liked Star Wars… or did he? Maybe he was just pretending to the kids that he liked it. But nobody knows that for sure. It’s his mind.

One day, after Writopia camp, he set off to be taught by the ancient tour guide. Legend says that he lives on a very tall mountain above the clouds, and the top of the mountain touches space. It is a secret, invisible, and very tall mountain. The legend says that the ancient tour guide lives there. Christian set off to the mountain. He walked and walked. He walked past Arizona, he walked through Mississippi, and he swam the Atlantic Ocean up to Bulgaria.

There, in the middle of Bulgaria, he found the mountain of the ancient tour guide. He had anti-invisible goggles, so he could see the mountain. So he set off. It was a long journey to the mountain, and Christian had packed a lot of stuff. Sleeping bags, food, a tent, and a walking stick, and a few toys (a big, fluffy teddy bear and toy cars and toy trains) and books (mystery books and legends about the ancient tour guide, of course, and books to log his progress and draw and take pictures), and a computer to send messages to the Writopia camp. But that was so they would not know his secret identity. Secretly, he was trying to turn Writopians into his tourists when he finished with his training.

He walked for many days, and he slept and ate. It was very tiring, and Christian was always complaining and mumbling and whining to himself. Finally, he got to the ancient tour guide. The tour guide was just an old man who was standing straight, very still against the sunset. He looked creepy to Christian, and Christian soon realized that the tour guide was a thousand years old. He realized because he was very good at seeing how old people were using his magical power that he was secretly hiding. He knew how old all the kids and adults were in Writopia, and he wrote that in his log. His log, because he was walking so much, was getting as big as the mountain, and he had to knit a backpack out of grass for it.

But then, a big bear came out. The bear was just going out to pick some blueberries, but then Christian started running, which was very bad. (You shouldn’t run when a bear comes because the bear will think you’re food. You should just walk away slowly, without looking it in the eyes.) Christian started to run, even though he shouldn’t have. The bear thought he was food, so the bear started running after Christian, and Christian was very freaked out, but it was a good thing he was with the ancient tour guide. The bear almost gobbled him up, but the ancient tour guide put a net over the bear, and it made the bear’s mind think that Christian was a predator that was going to eat the bear. The bear was so freaked out, that he ran all the way up the mountain, to the top of space, where he couldn’t breathe, and the bear ran all the way down the mountain.

Then, the ancient tour guide started teaching Christian. But Christian was a very bad student. He was very noisy, and he didn’t pay attention, and when the ancient tour guide said, “You should go slow, not fast,” Christian went really fast and bumped and put his head in a crater. A piece of Mars had dropped down when the moon hit Mars once, a very long time ago, which did not really happen, but in this story I will use it.

Anyway, Christian vowed he would overcome the obstacle. After many years of training, Christian became a very good student. He worked very hard, and he was trained by the ancient tour guide. He went slower because of the bad jokes that he had to tell to become a tour guide, and walking backwards while talking (especially telling bad jokes,) he learned to be slower so his crowd could stay together and focus. Of course, his crowd was Writopia.

He also was trained to know lots of things. He had to know about everything on his tour, so the ancient tour guide helped him memorize everything by taking him on a little tour. The ancient tour guide dropped lots of books on his head once when he didn’t participate, and that’s another reason why he got to be a better student, because it hurt him. Luckily, Christian had very puffy hair, so the books didn’t hurt him that much. But also, for Writopia, he was the tour guide of everywhere in Bulgaria, especially the big, invisible ancient mountain, which lots of people have bumped into because it is invisible.

So, as Christian walked, he stumbled upon a rock, and I’m sorry to say this, but he fell down and broke his leg, and it hurt a lot. But he was carried to a hospital by birds. The birds were Australian ostriches in Bulgaria, and because Christian was very heavy, it took thirty Australian ostriches to carry him.

While he was recovering, all the time he was thinking, No, no, no, I have to get back to Writopia. No, no, no, I have to be taught by the ancient tour guide. I have to keep on going with my life. But, in a few months, he recovered and he went back to Writopia. He got back to Writopia because the thirty ostriches carried him back across the sea. The thirty ostriches could walk on water. The ostriches were gray and brown with very long necks and very, very, very long feet, and their feathers were all puffed up, like a peacock.

When Christian got back to Writopia, his hair had gotten even more wild. He met lots of friends at Writopia, and one of the friends here is telling this story. Anyway, he kept on walking, and when he got there, he pretended to type, but actually it was an invisible bug who typed for him. He just pretended to type the keys, because he didn’t actually know anything about writing or typing. He was just sitting there eating Goldfish.

Then at lunch, a bunch of Christian’s buddies at Writopia went around him and made up nicknames for him. But he actually needed the nicknames to make his tour guide name. His nicknames were Banana, Cucumber, Fried Eggs, Humpty Dumpty, Pineapple, Kiwi, Tidal Wave, Cherry, Pickle, Broccoli Head, Younger Blonde-Haired Billy Joe, and, the best ever, Charles! His tour guide name was CucFriEggHumDumPinKiwTidWavCherPicBrocHeaYouBloHaiBilJoeCha, otherwise known as Charles Brocky. At lunch, he always had to take a carrot, a chip, and a pretzel for the story. He made a story out of fruits. This had to do with his tour guiding, to make up bad joke stories.

Then, after Writopia was done, he started changing the kids’ minds with his magic power that the tour guide gave him, changing all the kids’ and grown-ups’ minds to become tourists. The tour guide gave it to him, actually, by dropping the books on him. He looked like a Hawaiian hula dancer when he was spreading the power.

And those were his years at Writopia. There were actually only two years, and his last week was the week that I’m writing this all. At the end, on Friday, he took us to the mountain. Christian told us all that he was going to take us on a tour, and we couldn’t say no, so all the people at Writopia had to go.

So, at first, everybody was like, “Oh, this going to be a terrible tour! I don’t want to go. This is such a big mountain.”

We all got to the mountain by the thirty ostriches that made babies, so now there are ninety-nine ostriches. There were not that many people at Writopia, but Christian was very heavy. So we started off. We had to pack a lot of stuff, and Christian carried most of our stuff with his magic tour guide powers. He raised his hands in the air, all the bags went into the sky, and he told the bags to follow us as we go, and the bags did it. So that made us all think that Christian was actually very talented.

Christian started walking backwards and looked at his tourists (us, Writopians). He first started with saying bad jokes.

Christian said, “Listen up. You must all call me Charles Brocky!” And we did.

Christian told us about the moon that hit Mars a few years ago, and made a piece of Mars fall down as we passed the giant crater. We (Writopians) thought that Christian was very talented and worked very hard.

As we walked, he talked and gave bad jokes and told us all about the tour and all about his training. But still, we disliked his lack of reading. He couldn’t read very well. All the kids, one day, told him to tell them a story, but he couldn’t read, so he didn’t tell them the right story, and all the kids knew that story, so he got very bad credit. We decided to teach him how to read. But, once the ancient tour guide dropped books on his head, Christian was a very good student.

At night time, at 6:55 PM, we taught him how to read. He learned to read by 7:52 PM. Then, we all woke up at 6:45 AM. We reached the ancient tour guide at 9:56 PM, but we got too tired, so Christian actually told us a good story. The story lasted sixty seconds, because he read it so fast, like a rap, and we enjoyed it and that made us very tired.

Then, Writopians said, “Hey, Charles Brocky, when you go back to Writopia, can you teach us how to read a story that fast?”

“Sure.”

We found Christian cleaning a spill at the camp tent. This made us think he was helpful, and we learned every detail about his life. We learned that he liked to clean up spills, and he liked to spill them too, then clean them up. We looked at the floor. It looked so shiny after that.

Then, the ancient tour guide came in the tent when Writopians were still asleep, but Christian was still awake because tour guides don’t sleep a lot. He said, “Good work, pupil. Or should I say, Charles Brocky?” Then, the ancient tour guide said, “CucFriEggHumDumPinKiwTidWavCherPicBrocHeaYouBloHaiBilJoeCha, good work. Very good work.”

In the morning, Christian took us all to meet the ancient tour guide, and he told us his legend, and he did a whole tour about the ancient tour guide, and we all shook hands with him. We started going back home, very happy and thinking Christian was the best ever and thanking him for letting us go on his tour and giving him lots of money. He gave us another tour on the way down the mountain on the other side. We saw he was very good at walking backwards. He walked backwards down the mountain without bumping, and told lots of bad jokes. His jokes were even worse than last time.

Once, it was dinnertime, and we had soup. There was a fly in one of our soups, so the person from Writopia said, “Christian… I mean, Charles Brocky… what’s this fly doing in my soup?”

Then, Christian said, “Looks like the back stroke.”

Everybody laughed so hard that the soup came out their noses.

When we got to the end of the mountain, Christian was telling so many bad jokes that he slipped on a rock right at the bottom of the mountain. He was a perfect tour guide, but right when the tour ended, he slipped, and we had to all catch him in our tent.

Christian was so embarrassed that he turned all red and he ran all the way up to space in a second (because the top of the mountain touches space, I will tell you again).   Christian was so embarrassed, he jumped off the tip of the mountain and he started flying. He ended up at his house, but he couldn’t fly anymore after that. He got the flying power from too much embarrassment; when you’re so embarrassed, you can do amazing things.

Then, Christian decided, That doesn’t matter. I will do another tour again, but I will never work at Writopia. I am too embarrassed. And they will stop calling me Charles Brocky. That’s it.

What will Christian, or Charles Brocky, do next?

The Weird Potion

In a small town in California, there was an evil man named Dr. Ricker. He looked just like a regular doctor, wearing an all-white outfit. He was making a potion to poison the drinking water of the town. This potion would make everyone very sick — they would throw up and grow weak. He always dreamed of ruling the world, so he started with this town. By making everyone weaker, he would grow stronger and be able to take over all of California. This was his first time trying out a plan like this because he didn’t want the townspeople to know his strengths and weaknesses and be able to defeat him. His biggest strength was how smart he was. His biggest weakness was that he couldn’t run fast, and he wasn’t very good at tricking people.

In his big lab at the town’s hospital, he finished mixing his last batch of the potion. He put paint, red pills, and purple liquid moss into a great mixing pot and mixed it for two hours.

“Okay! Let’s get this into the water supply!” He laughed.

Later, he went to the supermarket where they kept the canned goods that needed tap water to be made, like canned and frozen orange juice that needed hot water. He told everyone who walked by how canned goods were more nutritious these days because doctors had figured out a way to pack them with healthy ingredients. A gigantic crowd swarmed in front of the whole display and began buying all of the canned goods, completely wiping them out. When he came out of the market, he started laughing tremendous, evil laughs and walked back to his lab.

Meanwhile, a poor, homeless man named Chris decided to peek up and watch the television in the house he was hiding under. The little boy who lived there was in his wheelchair in front of the TV. He had big glasses, freckles, and straight, brown hair. Chris had always seen little kids teasing the boy, and Chris really wanted to show him that even with his disability, he could still be a hero. He saw a news reporter talking about this weird color in the water that had come out of nowhere and was harming the townspeople.

Even though Chris was just a poor townsperson, he wanted to destroy what was harming everyone and become known as a hero for the little boy. Because doctors usually gave the information to the scientists at the hospital, he knew he had to go there to begin searching for answers.

He walked down the block and turned right to arrive at a police station. He felt very brave, knowing he was on a mission to save his whole town, and he marched over to a police officer.

“Can you give me a ride to the hospital?” Chris asked.

“Why?” The police officer asked, confused.

Chris told him how he needed to find out more information about why everyone was getting sick, and the police officer agreed. They started driving toward the hospital, and whenever Chris looked out the window, he saw people throwing up and everyone growing weaker and weaker with every footstep. Chris felt sad and sorry for the people. He knew what it was like to feel sick.

Chris and the police officer stopped at the hospital and waved goodbye to each other. Chris walked into the hospital and asked the man at the front desk if he had any information about why everyone was sick.

“Follow me,” the man told him.

Chris followed him down to the basement. On his way, he saw a case full of sharp knives. The front door man led him into a dark, cell-like room with no windows.

“Stay here,” the man said calmly.

“Okay,” Chris agreed, uncertain.

The man shut the door and walked quickly up the stairs to a red button on the wall. He punched the button.

“Ahh!” screamed Chris, when he noticed that he was tied up. He was scared, but then, he realized it was the same type of rope he had used to tie up his belongings every night and every morning to make sure they weren’t stolen. The knots tied in the rope were usually very weak because it was such a cheap rope. Chris had a pocketknife in his pocket, but he couldn’t reach it. He noticed the blade was sticking out a bit. He scrunched himself into a little ball until the blade touched the rope. He squeezed a little bit more and cut the rope that was tying his hands. He cut the rest of the rope and quietly took off the sweaty blindfold. Then, he thought about the case of sharp knives, so he ran down the corridor and opened the glass case.

He thought to himself, Now, no one will overcome me. He took off, searching for someone else to help him. Then, he noticed that he hadn’t gone upstairs yet.

The first room he saw was Dr. Ricker’s lab, where the evil doctor was pouring his second-to-last batch of the potion. He walked into the room and knocked over a bottle of purple liquid by accident. There were bottles of purple liquid going up a tube and into the mixing bowl.

Dr. Ricker turned around. “Whaaat… are you doing here in my lab?“ Dr. Ricker said, hiding his potion behind his back, hoping Chris wouldn’t notice.

“Are you the one who’s been making this liquid that’s been harming the townspeople?” Chris asked him. Dr. Ricker knew this was going to happen, and he was prepared. He told him that no, he wasn’t, and he tried to change the topic.

“Have you heard about the scratch ticket that was worth three trillion dollars? I won! And I’ll give all the money to you.” Dr. Ricker knew Chris was homeless just by looking at his rags.

“Then, what is that purple liquid behind your back?” Chris asked.

“A drink I bought from the store,” Dr. Ricker casually replied.

Chris stuck the knife out from his belt and said, “Are you lying ?” The room seemed to get hotter every time they breathed in air.

Dr. Ricker said in his evil voice, “You really want to fight?” and stuck out a long dagger that glimmered under the light. They took two steps forward, and each started hitting the other’s knife, trying to hit it out of each other’s hand.

Clang! the swords went. One of the doctors outside heard the noise and told the other doctors. They followed the sound and reached Dr. Ricker’s lab. They saw the potion drop out of Dr. Ricker’s hand and decided to call the owner of the hospital.

The man from the front desk had also heard the noise, and he quickly ran up. He saw the fight and took the longest dagger from the case he had walked past earlier. He went back to the lab and started fighting on Dr. Ricker’s side. Chris was nervous, but he stayed brave because he was saving the whole town from the bad guys and their potion. He wouldn’t give up because he wanted to be known as a hero for the little boy and save everyone.

Just as Chris started losing grip on his dagger, the owner of the hospital ran in and yelled, “Stop!”

The other doctors told the chief all about how they saw the same liquid in the tap water. They tested it out on one of the unaffected, and he started throwing up and falling down. The owner of the hospital called the police to take Dr. Ricker and his sidekick to jail.

When the police came, Dr. Ricker shouted, “You’ll still see me here, but in another world.”

Everyone said, “Pff, who cares? You’re going to jail!”

The mayor of California and the President of the United States of America awarded Chris the medal of bravery and had a big celebration in the town square.

The little boy in the wheelchair came up to Chris and told him that he had really taught him a lesson because now he knew that even though he had a disability, he could still be a hero.

Chris said, “This all happened because I saw other kids bullying you. I decided to prove that even if you are different from regular people who have some money, you can still be a hero.”

As for the sick townspeople, the doctors examined the potion and started to think about a pill that could solve their sickness. Then, they finally got an idea for a pill. Finally, they told the messenger boy to bring the packets to all the houses in the town in California.

Terry the Donut

           

CHAPTER 1

Hello from Donut Land! My name is Terry, and I like to say I’m brave. But I’m not because in Donut Land, we have just been attacked by the vicious popsicles. They stole all of our topping armor. Now, my donut army and I are planning a comeback.

“When should we attack?” asked Frank.

“Tomorrow afternoon,” said Pete.

“Why?” I asked.

“Because I know they are going out to lunch to celebrate their victory,” said Pete.

“Oh,” I said.

“So, we go to castle first. Then, we find. That’s the plan?” asked Thomas

“First, we sneak into the hall for our topping armor. Then, we raid the castle for anything we like. BUT, we have to leave at 5:00 because that’s when they’re coming back. So that gives us five hours.”                                     

CHAPTER 2

After the plan, we all went to bed.

“Terry,Terry! It’s time to wake up!” said a voice.

I slowly opened one eye, and then slowly opened the other eye. I looked at my clock. “12:30!!!!!!!!!!!!” I shouted.

I sprung out of bed, quickly dressed, and went down to the hall to where the others were. Everyone was there except Frank.

“Where’s Frank?” I asked.

“Oh, Frank went up to wake you up,” answered Pete.

“Oh,” I said, embarrassed. “Oh, and here he comes now.” I looked at my watch. It read 12:48. “We better get going now,” I said. “It’s 12:48.”

“Yeah, but it only takes us five minutes to get there,” said Pete.

“But then we’ll have extra time,” I said.

“Yeah, I guess you’re right,” said Pete.

CHAPTER 3

As we all started walking to the castle, I said, “So we take whatever we like?’’

“Yup,” said Pete. “BUT we first need to find our armour.”

When we got to the castle, we snuck around to the back door where Pete knew there was a secret entrance. He’d been to the castle many times before because he helped make it back when he was friends with the popsicles. But first, we had to say a password. The password was “Pop.” The ground started to shake, and a door formed in the side of the castle. As Pete opened the door, it creaked a little. Inside were a few spiderwebs, and as Pete stepped, the floorboard creaked and groaned. It was dark, and there was loads of air conditioning. The donuts shivered a lot.

We passed an old chest and then turned a corner. Pete stepped on something, and the next thing I knew, he was gone. I heard a voice coming from below. It was Pete. He had fallen down the trapdoor. I knew exactly what to do. I turned the corner and looked in the old chest. There was a rope, and there was a potion for night vision inside. I quickly took both of those things. I hurled the rope down to Pete. I threw down the potion of night vision so that he could see. It landed on him with a smash.

He said, “Who threw that at me?”

I said, “I did. It’s potion of night vision. It said so on the bottle.”

Pete said, “Wow. Thanks. It really works. I can see loads of things now.” He grabbed hold of the rope and climbed up. He said to everyone, “Step over the trapdoor. It’s really deep.”
We came up to another chest. This time, Jacob opened it. He said there were some toppings in there. He gave it to Pete, and Pete’s app said it was my armor.

CHAPTER 4

I put my armor back on. It was warm.

“No fair,” said Frank. “I want my armor back as well.”

Pete said, “We’ll find it soon.”

And then, we carried on walking until we came to another chest. There were two chests this time. Inside, they had loads of night vision potions. We all smashed them on ourselves. In the next chest, we found a sword. It was Frank’s sword. The sword was made of gold with an iron handle and diamond on the end.

“Yay!” said Frank.

And then, everyone else said, “No fair. We don’t get a sword.”  

We carried on walking and walking and walking. But no other chests came. We came to another hallway.

Pete said, “We might need to split up now.” He split us into groups. He said, “Terry, Thomas, Zack, and Frank, go right. Jacob, Luke, and I will carry on straight.”

In Pete’s group, Pete said to Jacob, “I wonder where this place goes. I hope it doesn’t lead to another trap door.”

Meanwhile, in my tunnel, I found a chest. Everybody crowded around and looked inside. There was only one type of thing: some swords.

“Let’s see whose swords these are,” said Terry.

“Well, I know who this one belongs to,” I said. “It belongs to me. And this one might belong to Thomas. And this one might belong to Zack.”

So everybody got their swords except for Pete’s group.

CHAPTER 5     

Meanwhile, Pete found a chest. Pete opened it. Everyone crowded around to see what was inside. There were armor and swords. Pete sorted them.

“So this armor’s Jacob’s, and this sword is Jacob’s, this sword is mine, and this sword is Luke’s.” Pete checked his watch. It read 3:35. “Oh, great,” said Pete.

“What is it?” said Luke.

“It’s 3:35,” answered Pete. “So the only thing we can hope for now is the end of this tunnel.”

“And meeting the others,” said Luke.

“And that,” said Pete. “So who doesn’t have their armor?”

And Luke said, “I don’t. And you, Frank, and Thomas don’t have your armor either. We still need to find them.”

Meanwhile, in my group… I kept walking and walking, but nothing came. Our group started to get worried because they thought we were going the wrong way. Then, something came into view. There was not a chest. There was daylight.

I said, “Everybody, we should turn back. This is the wrong way.”

So we all ran back because we needed to find the others. We kept running and running in the same direction. Then, we came up to the hallway split. We turned right. I checked my watch. It read 4:00.

“Oh no!” I said. “The popsicles are coming in one hour.”

So the others and I ran as fast as we could down the hall until we came to a chest.

“Don’t look in that chest,” I said, “because Pete’s group has already been here so it will be empty.” We saw more chests but we didn’t open them.

We kept running until we saw something moving.

CHAPTER 6

I thought, Phew, we caught up to them. But then, I thought, That can’t be them because there’s only one thing moving.

When we came up to it, it was a robot programmed to fight anything that was like a donut. As soon as it saw us, it started kicking, but we ran right past it. When we looked back, it was running after us.

I shouted, “Keep running everybody!” Then, I saw three people in the distance, and they were moving. I knew it had to be Pete and his group. I screamed, “Run! Run! There’s a robot chasing us!”

Thomas screamed, “There’s a robot chasing us!”

Pete looked behind us and saw the robot chasing us all. He started running as fast as he could. We came up to the chest. I didn’t stop running, but looked inside it. I saw a blur of something that looked like a slow potion and a gun.

I said to the others, “Pick up what’s in that chest. Quickly! Trust me, I think there is a gun and some slow motion potion.”

Thomas picked up the gun. It was a machine gun. And Luke picked up the potion. He threw it at the robot. The robot started going really slow. We all slowed down and came to a stop. Then, we started shooting at the robot. The robot’s arm came off. Then, its other arm came off. Then, its legs and head. It died.

We started walking. Everybody was panting because we’d been running really fast.

“I need a break,” said Pete.

But I said, “No, we can’t take a break now. It’s 4:30. They are coming home in half an hour, and we still have armor to find. We also have to find swords.”

CHAPTER 7

We kept walking and walking. Then, we saw a door at the other end of the hallway. I opened it. There were two flights of stairs. So we started walking up them. And we saw a chest. Let’s see what’s inside it?

What we saw is that there was only one thing. A sword. It belonged to Thomas. Then, Thomas said, “Yay! I finally have my sword.”

We walked up the other flight of stairs. It had a marble floor and paintings on the side of the walls. It had a very high ceiling.

Pete said, “We’re inside the main castle now. Now, we really need to try and find the rest of our armor and swords.” “

I checked my watch. It was 4:45. They were coming in fifteen minutes. We had to find our armor and swords now.

“We have to start running. We can’t walk anymore,” I said.

Then, something caught my eye. In the far right corner, there was a chest. I started running towards it. Everyone ran after me in a pack. I opened it. There was all of our armor. We took it all.

CHAPTER 8

I checked my watch. 4:58. “Guys! We have to go now, it’s 4:58!”

“Let’s go!” said Pete.

We ran out the door and to our castle.

As we approached our castle, we heard a voice. I looked behind me. It was a popsicle. “Hey, wait up,” he said.

We stopped. Pete said, “What is it?”

The popsicle said, “We’re sorry for stealing all your armor, we just wanted to protect ourselves from melting.”

“Oh,” said Pete. “Well, I think we can help you.”

“You can!?”

“Follow us.”

We walked back to our castle and walked up to to the top floor. We opened the door. Inside was our armor maker. We asked what armor he and his friends would like. He said, “Gold armor please.”

“Coming right up,” said the computer.

“Can I have twelve gold armors, please?” said the popsicle whose name was Mate.

“Okay,” said the computer.

After all the gold armors were made, Mate said, “Thanks so much for helping me!”

And that’s how the donuts and the popsicles became friends again.

Lost/The Lucky Quarter

Once upon a time, there was a beautiful, young lady. Her name was Cameron. She lived with her kind sisters, the oldest named Stephanie and the youngest named Jasmine. They all lived in harmony.

One day, Cameron went into the forest to deliver some presents and goods to their sickly grandmother, but on the way back, Cameron forgot her map at Grandmother’s house. She raced back, but got so lost on the way, she couldn’t find her way back home. At night, she was super hungry, but all she had was a few warm blackberries. After she gobbled them up, she fell into a deep sleep amongst a couple of rocks.

Meanwhile, the two sisters were worried.

“Where is our dear sister?” asked Jasmine.

“Just wait, young one. She probably fell into a deep sleep at Grandmother’s again.” said Stephanie. “Don’t fear. She will be home tomorrow. Now you go to sleep. It’s almost midnight, and you know what happens at midnight.”

Cameron woke up on the same rocks as before. She stood up, and a great big yawn escaped her lips. She saw a small brown hut in the distance. She walked towards it. A handsome, young man walked out the door and spotted Cameron.

“Please sir,” said she. “Please help! I am cold and hungry!”

“Don’t worry,” said he. “This will be your new home. I am Mortimer, son of Mister Gagman. Father, we have a new member of the family.”

What Cameron found, after a few years living with the Gagmans, was a quarter on the sidewalk. She picked it up, and it flew her back home to her sisters. But that was not all. She brought Mortimer and Mister Gagman with her, and Mortimer and Cameron got married and they all lived.

Epilogue

It’s the quarter and I’m getting a bath. Don’t look! It’s an ugly sight. Wait, quarters are ALWAYS naked!

Dessert Disaster

One morning, I woke up to the dim light shining low on my hot pink curtains. Time for a new summer, I thought. I went to open my porch window. I was happy summer had arrived, so there was no doubt about it. I had plans. My mom and dad weren’t the type of parents who stay at home all summer. They worked at their office all day, so my dad brought me to my friend Sofia’s house.

Sofia waved to me. “Hi, Audrey! C’mon! I have something to show you! C’mon!” Sofia yanked me in. My friends, Leora, Chase, and Alexandra were there. Sofia sat us all down. She held something in a yellow wrapper.

“So, what is it?” I asked, eagerly.

“Yeah, tell us!” Alexandra squealed.

Sofia opened the package. It was a delicate, triple-chocolate fudge cake with a pound of the finest, darkest spoon of vanilla that seemed to make everyone’s mouth agape. Sofia’s cake had a golden shade of too-sweet sugar that could water anyone’s lips constantly. I gasped in awe.

A feeling came over Leora. She grew so envious that her mood seemed to darken. Why should Sofia get that precious cake? Leora kept staring at the cake. She wanted to take the rest. She wanted to go and steal the chocolate cake so she could eat it. However, the multiple times Leora tried to take it, when she had to be thinking up plans to snatch it, run, and hide, her friends kept holding her back. So, Leora could only think of one thing. She planned to trick her friends, especially Sofia, and lie with a good excuse, to finish up her plan once and for all. But how?

Meanwhile, I was giggling with Sofia and laughing at Alexandra’s jokes.

“That’s a funny dance, Alexandra. Show us some more!” I told her sweetly. Alexandra hooted and did some more moves.

I called out, ”Oh. Leora, what are you doing? I hope you’re over that cake because — ha, Alexandra… It’s fun. C’mon. Show us some disco dance moves!” I blubbered in laughter.

Leora shook her head, plastering a fake and sweet expression on her face. I shrugged and turned away. Leora was just about to snatch the cake when — ”Leora!!!”

Oh no. Sofia was glaring at her, crazy mad. ”Grrr… What were you thinking?! You had to think that you should steal the cake?! It’s mine. And I wasn’t about to even think my BFF would steal it,” Sophia shouted. “Stop it. Okay?”

“I’ll stop.” Leora said. But guess what? She had her fingers crossed! Sofia turned away.

I saw the others glare at Leora constantly for what she had done. I frowned. That plan was mean. Why did she want to do that? This was like the “Cake Crime.” OMG, I could see the headlines now: “Girl Robbed a Special Cake,” “Girl Arrested in Jail.” “Brrr…”

I glared back at Leora. This was terrible. Sofia would probably not be friends with Leora anymore! Oh no! I had to fix it.

Apparently, I was right! Sofia refused to be BFF’S anymore with Leora. So Leora started to hesitate about her plan. She didn’t want Sofia to not be her friend! Oh no. No. She had to get her BFF back.

This wasn’t worth it, Leora thought.

Leora went over to Sofia, and she apologized, “Sorry for stealing your cake, Sofia. I don’t know what got into me.” Sofia just glared at her. Leora explained, ”I shouldn’t have tried to trick you into letting me steal it.”

Are you kidding me?! You weren’t even thinking about me, or the other people who do wish they had the cake, did you? Also, why would you stoop that low? You’ve lost the specialty that made me even want to become your BFF in the first place!” Sofia growled.

“But I really, really loved it. And the way it looked, the cake was so sweet and scrumptious… and truly bewitching.” Leora mumbled.

“Stop it! I’m not your friend, okay?” Sofia argued, now furious. Leora stomped away.

***

THE VERY NEXT DAY…

Sofia yawned heavily. Ever since Leora had gone home, she’d been having nightmares! She even unfriended Leora on Facebook.

Cake eater, she thought. Cake stealer. How could she? How? The cake was from the finest bakery, for goodness sake! Golden’s Bakery, a bakery that only the wealthiest people can afford. $123 for a lick of homemade, rich, caramel ice cream, $673 for the greatest taste of pecan pie, $231 for a sip of a pink, apricot, and delicate strawberry smoothie! A cake was $879!!!

Sofia hadn’t even even saved up all her allowance to purchase it! She had to combine all her family’s money and cherished treasure to buy it! Yes! It was that expensive!

“Leora will be sorry when she sees what she missed!” Sofia muttered.

And so, tension rose up between Sofia and Leora as they argued. Sofia’s heart raced. She was trembling. She’d never lost a friend. Not one. She thought miserably, I need help. She sighed. Who can help anyway?

“I can.”

“Huh? Who are you?” Sofia asked.

“I am the Narrator. I help tell all the stories.”

“I can talk to Narrators?!” Sofia asked.

“I guess you can.”

“I don’t get it. Why me?” Sofia asked.

“For one reason: you really need help, and when someone needs help, I have to make my voice visible to people.”

“Oh. Can you help me? I really want Leora to do something with that apology because I know Leora crossed her fingers when she said she wouldn’t do that again. So I didn’t believe her, then she got mad, and I felt worse, and then, I decided to be nice to her even if she’s not my friend,” Sofia blurted out.

I nodded, clearly wise and understanding. “I know. I can’t help at every moment because that’s illegal in the rules of a Narrator, but I suppose I can tell you that Leora may be mad at you only because she wants you to be her bestie again. So, do you want to be her friend again?”

Sofia squeezed her eyes tight, holding back tears. “Not quite. I don’t know what to do. Because she wanted to stab me in the back and steal my cake, I’m not going to be.” Sophia opened her eyes slightly now. “And now I feel horrendous,” Sofia sobbed.

I became invisible. “Sofia, but Leora is just the same way! Think about how sad she’ll be that you don’t want to be her bestie anymore.” Sofia’s eyes darted over to the window.

She sighed and shook her head. “I am not her friend, still. But thanks for your help, Narrator.”

I faded away. Sofia sobbed. Would this be any worse? Could Sofia ever reunite with Leora?

***

Meanwhile, Leora was fuming mad. She tried to say sorry, but how dare Sofia turn her back on her! She cried herself to sleep.

In her dream, a calm voice actually entered and said, “You can’t turn your back on Sofia. She’s your friend. Get her back.”

Leora awoke with a start. Who would dare interfere with her friend issues?

I felt really bad for Sofia and Leora. That storytelling magic is the most powerful magic for a Narrator to achieve. If only I could do it. Okay, here it goes: “The ice cream truck comes toward 22nd Avenue. Just as I said, an ice cream truck comes toward 22nd Avenue. I did it! Now, to save the day.”

I transported myself to Sofia’s room and flew to the top of the writing desk. I whispered, “Sofia and Leora are friends again.” The room whizzed and whirled.

“Did I do it?” I asked, eagerly.

“Okay everyone.” Sofia sat them all down.

“Well, what is it?” Leora asked.

“Yeah, tell us!” Alexandra squealed.

Wait a minute. This is the day Sofia showed her cake. Oh no! I whizzed them back to the past! The beginning of the story has been copied!

I gulped. I was so in trouble. Sofia was going to be sooo angry at me if she found out. I panicked. If anything changes now, then the “future” is going to be altered! Hey, wait a minute. I can still keep them as BFFs! All I have to do is keep them from fighting! Yes!

I watched as Leora began to get envious with pride. I flickered away to the cake and inhaled. Time to do this.

Okay. Sofia and Leora are BFFs permanently. Leora’s mood lightened. I’m doing it! Sofia and Leora then joined Audrey and Alexandra who were laughing again. Looks okay so far… Leora kept on laughing and talking to Sofia. Yes! I fixed the past! I did it!!! The cake isn’t going to be stolen, and everything is fine once again.

It was a great day for Leora and Sofia, as they played in the setting sun. They kept on laughing with Audrey and Alexandra. The leaves were now turning a light shade of orange, and people were smiling delightedly. The sun was shining, and the wind was blowing gently. I was so proud of saving the story, I decided to enjoy it too.

THE END

Nacho Cheese for President

On a place called Tropical Big Island, there was a superhero named Nacho Cheese. He defeated bad guys with his nacho cheese sauce powers. He also had some signature moves such as the Nacho Fist Punch, Nacho Chip Projectiles, the Wet Nacho Willie, and best of all, the Big Nacho Cheese Powder Fart. However, he was now saving the day by running for president!

In the town square, Nacho Cheese crashed into Bob the Builder.

“Who are you?” Nacho Cheese asked.

“I am Bob the Builder,” said Bob.

“I am Nacho Cheese,” said Nacho Cheese.

Bob was old, had gray hair, and couldn’t stand straight. Meanwhile, Nacho Cheese had a Mexican mask and a unique mustache.

“What are you doing here?” Nacho Cheese asked again.

“I am here because I want to know what Eve Vil would do as president,” Bob said.

“Well, if you want to know, go to Eve Vil’s speech,” Nacho Cheese said.

“Well, okay,” said Bob. “Hey, what are you even doing as president?”

“I will create a foundation where I will help the poor and hungry,” Nacho Cheese said.

“Why, thank you, superhero,” Bob said.

“You’re welcome,” said Nacho Cheese.

At the election, Nacho Cheese had met his rival candidates: Eve Vil, Violet Blick, and Camilia Higgins. Violet Blick’s cover as an adult was blown, and she was eliminated. It turned out Blick was a child when her stilts and makeup were gone.

Just because he was a superhero, the voters decided not to vote for Nacho Cheese, and Eve Vil won the election. Nacho Cheese was saddened by this. But then, Eve Vil caused chaos around the island! But don’t worry, Nacho Cheese was here to save the day! He did his Nacho Fist Punch and launched his Cheese Sauce to hold off Eve Vil. He then told the citizens to go on a ship for a little while. Vil freed herself from the cheese sauce and tried to find Nacho Cheese. Nacho Cheese then found her and used all his powers. When he found out they didn’t work, he had to do his most special move yet: the Big Nacho Cheese Powder Fart. Vil couldn’t stand the smell and was defeated. The voters realized they were wrong about Nacho Cheese, and he became president. He repeated his speech and did what he had to do to become president.

“Hello, it is me, Nacho Cheese. I may be your average everyday superhero, but now, I am running for president! I shall now tell you what I will do as president. I will start a foundation that will help the poor and hungry. I want justice for what the bad guys did to me. And finally, I will always save the day, even if i’m president. And now, I will be the president of Tropical Big Island!”

Nacho Cheese and the citizens of Tropical Big Island lived happily ever after.

“Wait a minute!” exclaimed Nacho Cheese, “I forgot about Camilia Higgins!”

“That’s right!” said Higgins herself, “You forgot about me!”

“You know, you’re perfect for the role of the president,” said Nacho Cheese.

“But why?” asked Camilia Higgins.

“All those things I said at the speech, I can also do those things as a superhero,” Nacho Cheese said. “So you can be president.”

Since the voters hated it when Nacho Cheese put his arms up and yelled “Nacho Cheese!” Camilia Higgins was president instead. Even though he didn’t win, Nacho Cheese started his foundation, and everybody lived happily ever after.

THE END

The Great Lunchbox Mystery

Leigh was an ordinary boy. Red hair, green eyes. Every day, his mom packed him a sandwich and water. But when he got to school, he had pasta, sparkling water, and a cheesecake. As the years passed, he got more food from his lunchbox: pizza, cakes, Coca-Cola, and silverware.

Then, lightning sprouted from the air and put a golden crown on his lunchbox, and it started to float. Leigh grabbed his lunchbox and followed it up to the air. Once they were at the top, they were in Lunchbox Land. Lunchbox Land was basically made of lunchboxes: lunchbox houses, lunchbox playgrounds, lunchbox floors, lunchbox everything. Leigh was shocked. He fell onto his back, pretending it was a dream.

Then, his lunchbox grew legs, then arms, and then a head. So you understand me? Even eyes! And then he said, “Hello, Leigh.”

Leigh was confused. He had no idea what was happening. Leigh rolled his eyes and said, “Where did you come from?”

“I am magical,” his lunchbox replied. “My name is Shake Your Booty. How may I help you?”

“I am good. Who are you?”

“I am Shake Your Booty. Oh, then, I will go to my castle.”

“What castle?”

“That castle.”

“Oh! Can I go in?”

They walked and walked until they got to a huge mansion. They opened the lunchbox doors. As Leigh stepped in, he saw a beautiful table, giant golden lunchbox stairs, and best of all, a sculpture! “Is this me?” He asked.

Shake Your Booty cried, “Yes, this is you! You are my boss. I like you being happy. Other kids don’t have the luck that you have.”

As he entered, Shake Your Booty said, “This is your room. Enjoy! You have it for one week.” Shake Your Booty yelled, “Bye!” and shut the door.

Leigh accidentally wobbled and pressed a red button on the floor. The whole room was about to explode. It exploded, all right, but with human stuff. A bed, clothing, a bathroom, and a rug appeared. Leigh ran all the way to the end of the room and tucked himself into a ball. And all of a sudden, he could fly.

“What the lunchbox?” Leigh said and fell asleep.

The next morning, Leigh found a giant cake in his room and Shake Your Booty too. He was singing, “Shake your bootay! Shake your bootay! Na, na! Baby this is how you do it!”

Leigh rolled his eyes. What was happening to him?

Leigh tried to break the floor to get home. It wasn’t possible.

Shake Your Booty said, “Hellooo! Do you want the big cake or not?”

“Oh, no, thank you,” Leigh replied. Then, they tried looking for another lunch box that came from the earth. But they were so hard to get into one of the holes. Then, he went up to the room. He found The Guide Out of Lunchbox World in his drawer. It had appeared with the room.

So, first, he needed a hammer of Lunchbox Zitia. But, it was at the top of the mansion. So he took the elevator and got the hammer. Then, he needed to find out where he came out of. So he went to Headquarters. He asked, “By any chance, do you know where I came out of?”

“Name of your lunchbox?”

“Shake Your Booty.”

“Where do you live?” asked Building, a lunchbox that worked in Headquarters.

“Plastic Street.”

“Okay. Follow me.”

So Leigh followed Building to where he came out of. He crashed to the ground. Then, he jumped in the hole and landed on his roof. The hole closed. He was safe!

Shake Your Booty was ruined! He decided to send his spy to look for Leigh.

Then, he said to his spy Tupperware, “You shall find Leigh. You can use the tools in that box. If not, you are banished from Lunchbox Land.”

So Tupperware set foot. On the way to Leigh’s house, he broke the ground. There was Leigh’s house! He jumped off the floor and onto the roof. And then he slid down and walked through the door. He had a smile on his face, and he was cartwheeling on the floor.

“I don’t know. I just held onto my flying lunch box, and I was in another dimension!” said Leigh.

“Okay. You are grounded. Go to your room!”

“Okay.”

Then, Leigh went into his room. There was his old lunchbox!

“Ha, ha. Get ready to become a lunchbox!”

“No!” Leigh ran to his mom. They both shook in terror.

“So, this is your lunchbox?” said his mom.

“Yes!”

“Run for your life!”

“The bomb.”

“What bomb?”

“The bomb that I hid in the yard this morning. I can make it explode, and my crazy lunchbox will get destroyed.”

“Do it.”

Leigh hit the red button.

BOOOOOM!

The ground shook. Dirt and stone flew up into the air. And in the hole, lay the two dead lunchboxes.  

What Are the Chances?

Luma was lying on her bed, her nose buried in a book and her hair spilling out every which way on the comforter.

“Luma, come, come!” Her mother called from down the hall. “Adam is here!”

Oh, awesome! Luma thought. Adam is my favorite cousin because he’s so reckless. Maybe I can learn something from him. She quickly put a bookmark in her novel and laid it on her bed. She jumped up and ran to the front door to greet her cousin.

“Hey, L!” Adam happily said. “I’m so glad I got to come here.” He unclipped his helmet and hung it on his bike handle just a few feet from their house.

I wish I was more like him. Luma sighed, yearning to be more like the daring Adam. Always going on adventures on his bike, climbing everything in his line of vision.

“So, I was thinking maybe you can show me how to ride a bike?” Luma asked, embarrassed.

Adam laughed. “You? No offense, Luma, but you don’t seem like the type who can ride a bike.” He looked at the slightly hurt expression on her face and quickly added, “But I can teach you. If you want.”

“Jeez, Adam!” Luma sighed. “Just teach me! I want to be….” She trailed off.

“You want to be…?” Adam asked. “Tell me.”

Luma looked down at her shoes. “Okay, I want to be more like you. I mean, you’re so fearless! You go on these explorations! And here I am, reading books and typing words for stories. But you won’t get it. It’s just who you are.” Luma looked at Adam. “There. That’s what I wanted to say.”

Adam looked at her, bewildered. “You want to be like me? Wow.”

Luma looked surprised. Why is he so confused? “Wow, what?”

“I always wanted to be like you!” he laughed. “I’m always wasting my time going out and about but never focusing on my homework or grades. You make it look so effortless to be at the top of your class. How do you do it?”

Now it was Luma’s turn to be confused. Him? Wants to be like me? It was like she was in some alternate universe. She had never thought in a million years that Adam her carefree, crazy cousin would want to be like her.

“Okay, I’ll make a deal with you. I’ll help you with your schoolwork,” Luma explained. “And you will help me be the zany person I’ve always wanted to be.”

Adam thought about it for a while. “Okay! I’m cool with that deal,” he grinned. “Now let’s go to the bike shop and teach you how to ride a bike!”

***

“Ahh!” Luma wobbled unsteadily on a dusty bike from the rental store, going so slow that a turtle could beat her in a race.

“Sit in the center of the seat!” Adam instructed. “Pedal more forcefully!”

“I’m trying! I’m trying!” Luma said, exasperated. “This is harder than I thought!”

“Keep your hands tight on the handlebars!” Adam shouted. “This is only the start of being bold. Get used to it.”

Luma processed this thought. “You’re doing this to be bold,” she mumbled. “To be bold.” With each chant, she gained speed, just a little. Soon, Luma was riding around the park, steering the wrong way a couple of times but, overall, doing very well.

Adam smiled as Luma removed her helmet. “You are doing so well. I’m proud of you.”

“Hello, Mr. Cheesy McCheesy,” Luma playfully teased. But really, Luma was satisfied by how much progress she made.

“Okay, what’s next?” Luma kicked up the kickstand of the bike.

Adam looked around the playground, thinking of what training to give to Luma. Then he smiled. “Obstacle course.”
Adam made up the course as he went. “Okay, so climb up the ladder, but with no hands. And instead of crossing the platform, go along the very edge and crab-walk to the slide. Go down on the rim of the slide, try not to fall down. Then, sprint to the mini-slide and walk up it to the bar over there, climb up there, jump down and you’re done! It might seem overwhelming, but it’s easier than you think it is.” Adam took a breath. “I’ll time you.”

“Okay. I’m ready.” Luma stretched out her hamstrings and rolled her neck around.

Adam set a stopwatch and counted down from five. “Five… four… three… two… one… Go!”

Luma dashed off, jumping and climbing and running and sliding all over the place. She had laser focus and did not think of anything other than finishing the course. When she finished, Adam had a stunned look on his face.

“Fifty-four seconds!” he said a little too loudly. “How?”

Luma laughed and wiped the sweat off her forehead. “Well, I guess the bike ride inspired me.”

“If you keep it up, you’re gonna be way better than me!” He punched Luma playfully.

An ice cream truck chimed nearby. The cousins rushed over to the vehicle, eager to get a cold, sweet treat.

When they got there, the man in the truck greeted them. “What would you like today?” He pointed to the various options on the side of the truck.

“I would like a strawberry ice cream in a medium cone, please,” Luma asked.

When the man handed her the delectable cone, she handed him the money and sat down at a nearby bench. Adam repeated Luma’s transaction, but his flavor was triple fudge.

Adam walked over to the bench and sat next to Luma. He took a few licks of his ice cream and then turned to Luma.

“OK, L. I held up my end of the deal for today now it’s your turn. Once we get home, let’s hit the books!” Adam laughed with Luma.

But secretly, Luma was having a very important discussion inside her head with herself. I’ve never been a “mentor,” per se, she thought. I might teach him the wrong things, or make it too easy or too hard. He might be learning different things in his class, or I might teach him the advanced subjects…. The more Luma thought about it, the more the worries rolled in like big, salty, scary waves.

Luma could not show that anxiety. Adam would be suspicious, and that would be a disaster.

“Yeah. Hit the books,” Luma said weakly.

***

When she got home, Luma hung a sign on her door:

*Attention!*

VERY important study session proceeding inside this room.

If it is an absolute emergency (or it’s dinnertime),

PLEASE KNOCK! DO NOT BARGE RIGHT IN.

Thank you for your cooperation.

Luma & Adam

After hanging the sign, she turned and shut the door. “Okay, Adam, let’s do this. I’m returning the favor. So, I took the time to gather books from my own collection and from the library on numerous subjects.”
Adam was blown away. Stunned. Shocked. Luma had done all of this for him? Really? His heart filled just a bit at how much effort his cousin had put into his tutoring.

“Adam? Is something wrong?”

He looked up, frightened in the slightest, at Luma. I can’t show my gratefulness. I’m the cool one, after all. Despite these thoughts, Adam couldn’t push aside his urge to thank Luma for all her effort. You can’t. You need to look like the “no big deal” kind of guy.

“Ugh. I’ll just do this myself,” Adam angrily said to himself.

“Adam? Are you ready?” Luma tapped his shoulder.

“Oh. Uh, yeah, just, thinking about something…” Adam plastered a fake smile over his face to make it seem all okay.

“What were you thinking about?” Luma cocked her head to the side in curiosity. “You looked very deep in thought.”

“Um…” Adam searched frantically for a topic to say he was “thinking” about. “Um, ice cream.” He looked briefly startled by his sudden outburst. “Yeah. Ice cream: all the flavors… chocolate, vanilla, rocky road, peanut butter chocolate.” He once again faked a smile. “Yum, yum!” He said, too enthusiastically.

“Okay…” Luma said, slowly. “Very, um, interesting, topic. But enough talking. Which one first: algebra or history of Asia?”

“Algebra,” Adam said confidently. Math was the only subject he was decent at.

“Okay, here are all the books. Let’s go through every single one.” Luma put a huge stack of books in front of Adam. He started to sweat. Luma’s words echoed in his head.

Every single one.

Every. Single. One.

Every. Single. One.

“It’s going to be a long, long night,” Adam sighed under his breath so that Luma couldn’t hear. “A very, very, very long one.”

***

By that time, they had gone through countless books of completely boring and long equations and numbers, filling out as Luma had promised every single page. And when he thought he had done all that he could to master math, Luma happily placed in front of him a tower of worksheets.

And then, when Adam had finally thought he was finished, Luma chirped, “Time for history of Asia!” And put a large book in front of Adam’s face.

He just groaned.

Then, when the impossible became possible, the duo finished all the books Luma had in store, plus the worksheets, plus the pop quizzes Luma had somewhat cruelly put in store for him.

“Adam, I am very proud of you. You got algebra down super quickly, and you’re making progress in ancient history of Asia!” she smiled. “I know this is absolute torture for you, but you made it through. For today.”

Adam smacked his forehead. Oy, why did I agree to this? But even he had to admit, it was kind of dare he say fun to learn something new. Plus, Luma told him, this stuff was advanced, and if he could get that down, then the things his class was going over was going to be super easy.

Finally, after what seemed like hours and hours, dinnertime arrived.

Rap tap rap. Luma’s mother was knocking on Luma’s bedroom door. “It’s dinnertime,” she said. “I made chicken pot pie, Adam’s favorite!”

“Ooh, yum, chicken pot pie!” Adam jumped up, all too happy for dinner.

As Luma and Adam walked to the dining room, Luma commented on how he was going to be so ahead in his class.

But Adam, once again, was having an important meeting in his head. The thing is, he worried, I’m really afraid that I’m going to forget everything I learned today. Then I’ll have to do all that studying again, just because I forgot all the work I did. I cannot tolerate the misery I went through today, he thought, exasperated.

When the pair arrived in the dining room, the adults bombarded them with millions of questions.

“Luma, I heard you learned how to ride a bike! That’s great, but why, sweetie?”

“Adam? I saw some heavy books in your backpack. What’s the meaning of that?”

“Adam, you’ve never been interested in studying.”
“And I thought you never cared for going outside, Luma.”

“What is going on?”

And much more.

So, the cousins had no choice but to tell all about their deal: Luma telling about her bike ride, Adam telling about the torturous indulging study session.

The adults laughed and “awww”-ed as the cousins told their somewhat intriguing tale over chicken pot pie.

After dinner, Adam and Luma said goodbye to each other.

“Hey, L… maybe in a week you could come over again? Because that would be great.”

Luma’s mother, standing nearby, happily nodded. “That seems like a great idea! I’ve always been forcing Luma to go outside, but now that she finally has a desire to, I’m more than happy to let her over! I remember when Luma blah blah blah…” Luma’s mother went on about some sort of childhood memory that, personally, no one cared about.

Adam half-listened. Sheesh, he griped internally. When did Luma’s mom get so chatty and annoying? He laughed to himself. And when did I get so sarcastic?

Five long minutes later, Luma’s mother came to the end of her speech.

… and that’s why I will never buy chocolate from the man down the block!” She laughed. “Oh, sorry, Adam, I got a little carried away.” She smiled apologetically.

“Uh-huh,” Adam said, still partly paying attention. But then he realized someone was actually talking to him, and snapped back like a rubber band. “Very nice tale, Auntie Holly!” he said, as if he had actually been paying attention (he’s full of baloney).

“Really? Well, I’m glad you liked it.”

“Yeah, well, I’m going to ask my mom to go home now. I had a great time! Bye!” Adam went off to find his mom.

“Luma,” her mother asked. “I’m just interested why do you want to be more adventurous?”

“I don’t know,” Luma lied. “I just want to.” She started to play with her hair.

“I know you’re lying,” her mom said. “You always fiddle with your hair when you lie. C’mon, tell me.”

“Fine,” Luma sighed, annoyed. “But let’s go to the sunroom.”

“Sure.” As the mother and daughter walked down the hall, Luma noticed that, out of all the pictures of her, there were no pictures of her being active. The pictures looked still and bleak against the mahogany wall with just her sitting there, reading a book or writing on her computer.

The woven-rope carpet seemed to cut against her feet as she thought of her wasted thirteen years of keeping her nose in a book instead of going outside, or playing soccer or even just going on her front lawn.

When they reached the sunroom, Luma took the hanging seat with orange pillows and her mother took the rattan couch with matching orange pillows across from Luma.

“I’d just like to become more adventurous, because everyone at school thinks I’m the smart one. I mean, that’s great and all, but now my best friend Kacee joined the basketball team and, ever since, she’s been drifting away from me. Suddenly, she’s ignoring me.” Luma looked down.

“Oh, hun, it’s great that you treasure your friendship with her. But if you feel that you’ve become more daring and she still ignores you, maybe it’s time to find new friends.”

“Thanks, Mom.” She hugged her mother, and at that instant, as Luma gazed at the infinite night sky, she saw that even through the thunderstorm clouds, the rhythm of life would continue on.

***

“How was the chicken pot pie?” Adam’s mother asked.

“Great, now can we go home? I already said bye to everyone,” Adam asked.

“Sure, just lemme say goodbye to Auntie Holly.”

His mom walked out of the dining room for a couple of minutes and then came back.

“Okay, let’s go.” They opened the door, saying goodbye once more as they walked out, and headed down the path and got in the car. The sky was a beautiful purple and midnight blue, and it seemed to shine triumphantly

“Adam,” his mother said in a tone that Adam knew she was going to ask a question. “Why were you studying with Luma? And why did you have War & Peace: Starter’s Edition in your backpack? You’ve never wanted to study. All you wanted to do was ride on your bike or jump off everything. I’ve been constantly urging you to study because your GPA has dropped over time. But nooo, you always were out and about.” She sighed. “What’s your new and crazy plan now?”

“I’m just… changing my act.” That was partially true. He was changing his act; he was being more studious. But there was always more to the truth.

“Adam, just tell me,” his mother said, tired.

“Okay, okay, I’ll tell you. So a couple of weeks ago, Carter got a glimpse of my math test scores. He had every right to be mad I always made up excuses to not go to his ‘study sessions’… I said my grades were great. But now, since he’s found out, he’s been ignoring me, and it’s so annoying. I just want him to be back to normal. I asked him how I could make it up to him, and he said by raising my grades. He’s being a nice friend, but in the weirdest way. I just want Carter to be my friend again.” Adam hung his head.

Adam’s mother smiled. “Adam, you’re doing the right thing. I get it. And also, you’re making me a very happy mom. This is a win-win situation!” They both laughed, and at that moment, looking at the outstretched road in front of them, they realized that even though there was traffic and confusion and annoyance in their lives, the road of life moved on.

***

A few months later, the hard work Luma and Adam had done paid off.

Luma joined the basketball team, and Kacee apologized for being so exclusive. Now, Luma plays basketball like she’s been doing it since she was born thanks to Adam.

Adam’s grades, after many lessons from Luma, had gone through the roof. His teachers praised him endlessly and Carter returned to normal and atoned for his harshness towards Adam’s GPA. Adam even aced the English exams and said they were “a piece of cake” thanks to Luma.

But, of course, the two had to stay true to their former identities.

Luma still read and wrote like crazy, but not as much, and now she knows when to stop and go outside. Adam, on the other hand, still accomplished ludicrous feats of danger, but never put that before school and academics.

The cousins were glad they were exposed to the other person’s life.

They didn’t know what kind of problems were in store for them, from friends to homework, but they promised they would help each other.

Additionally, if they ever had a dilemma, Adam and Luma would hold a Quadruple C: Cousin Conflict Conference Club for whenever they had an issue.

But, whatever they went through, they knew that life would always go on.

The One-Dollar Bill

        

Chapter 1

Hi This is Me

Hi. I’m a dollar bill. I’m here to tell you the story of how many homes I travel to. I travel to at least one hundred homes every week! This is the cycle: I go from the MINT, to the floor, to someone’s pocket, to someone’s house, to the store, to someone’s house, to the floor again, and so on. No one could ever find a way to keep me. That’s when I visited a bank. Oh, somebody finally found a way to keep me, and I couldn’t get out! I heard that person’s mom call her Imali. When Imali put me in the bank, I was so happy I finally didn’t have to get thrown around everywhere! I kept on getting folded so I could fit in someone’s pocket. I feel loose now. When I got folded for the first time, I cried. I was so scared that I was gonna die and I was gonna leave my mom, the ten-dollar bill and leave my dad, the twenty-dollar bill, and my brother, the five-dollar bill. Besides, I was the youngest. The one-dollar bill. It’s the one that gets used the most. It’s the one that gets lost in five seconds. It’s the one that no one cares about — except Imali.

Chapter 2

Wow!

Imali is the one that loves one dollar bills. I have a lot of friends now. I’m with them right now. Their names are Washington, Sasha, and Buck. They are also one dollar bills. We usually play robot with the buttons inside the bank. But we still get moved from time to time because some of those buttons that we push aren’t good. I love the bank, and Imali comes to visit us every month to put more one dollar bills in the bank. She has over 250 dollars in one-dollar bills. Not all of them are nice, but I still play with Washington, Sasha, and Buck.

Sasha is my best friend, but Washington and Buck play with us too. When we play robot Buck’s usually the robot, and we push him against the wall playfully. Buck is always the first one to volunteer to be the robot. Washington is more of a learning type, so whenever he plays robots it’s usually just to see what the buttons do, but at least he’s playing. Whenever Imali comes she doesn’t know that we’re alive, she just thinks we’re little pieces of paper that pay for stuff, but we know the truth. Imali still treats us like we’re alive. We can tell she thinks we’re not alive. From the books we’ve heard her read, we’re aliens to her. I’ve heard that aliens are green, and we’re all green. I heard aliens were from space though, we’re from the MINT.

Chapter 3

Not Fair

For Washington, he didn’t get thrown around, he didn’t do the money cycle. He just got put straight into Imali’s hands. He tells us stories all about it. Once he said that he was given to Imali. None of us believed him though, and he always tells us that the guy that gave him to Imali was named Benjamin, and I told him that Benjamin was Imali’s dad’s name. Right then and there I had a plan. I was going to write a letter to Imali to ask her if her dad worked at the MINT. Then Sasha told me there was no way to get paper or pen.

Then Buck said, “We’re money. We’re paper.”

Then Sasha said, “But, smarty pants, we don’t have a pen.”

Buck said, “Right, we don’t have a pen! How are we gonna get a pen?”

I said, “I have a plan. When Imali comes next month she’ll probably have a pen. All banks have a pen. Then when she puts some more money in I’ll reach into her shirt pocket and take out a pen. Is there any possibility of anything bad happening?”

Washington said, “Let me calculate that.”

Washington thought for five minutes.

Then he said, “Yes. I’ve thought of at least ten things that can happen badly.”

Sasha said, “Okay, then tell me.”

Washington said, “So one, Imali might not have a pocket on her shirt. Two, even if she does have a pocket on her shirt she might not have a pen on her shirt. Three, if she does have a pocket on her shirt still she might not have a pen there, she might have a pen on her jeans pocket. Four, she might not be wearing jeans, she might be wearing shorts. Five, her mom might put the money in the bank.”

Then Sasha said, “Stop. Her mom definitely has a pen in her purse.”

Washington said, “You just interrupted me. Six, her mom might not be wearing a purse. Seven, you don’t know for sure that her mom’s gonna have a pen in her purse. Eight, even if her mom does have a pen in her purse, how are we going to get in her purse? Nine, even if we can get in her purse we don’t know where she would keep a pen. Ten, we don’t know how long it’s gonna take for either to get the money. They might get up too fast, and we might get stuck with them!”

Chapter 4

Why are you so Negative?

I said, “Why are you so negative? All of those have a chance of happening, but that’s because you always say stuff that’s just too worrying.”

“I’m just trying to be safe. You asked if anything wrong could happen, and I told you. Now if you want to do this plan we need to sleep. We’ve stayed up for months.” Washington moaned.

I said, “Okay. Let’s go to sleep. See you next month.”

They slept for months and months even though they meant to sleep for one month they slept for five!

When I woke up I saw Imali and she looked way older than she had before. Her mom was singing happy birthday. And after she finished singing that she said she was 11 years old. The last time I saw her she was only 10 and 7 months. And now she’s 11?!

“We must have been sleeping for more than a month,” I told Washington and Sasha.

Sasha said, “Is Buck still sleeping? He’s usually the first one up to play robot. He must have stayed up for years!”

Then Sasha woke up Buck. She said, “How old are you Buck?”

He said, “The same age as Imali. Ten.”

Washington said, “Actually Imali is eleven.”

“What?!” Buck exclaimed.

Then Sasha said, “Today is Imali’s birthday, and we’ve been sleeping for five months.”

Buck said, “Wait, so Imali is older than me?”

Then I said, “Yeah.”

Washington said, “What’s the longest you’ve stayed up for?”

And Buck said, “Why do you need to know?”

“Because you’re usually the first one up, and you were the last one up,” Sasha said.

Buck said, “Okay. The longest I’ve stayed up was seven years.”

Then Washington said, “Seven years? The longest we’ve stayed up was one year! What have you been doing for seven years at night?”

Buck said, “Playing robot.”

“For seven years straight? That’s crazy!” I said.

“She’s right,” Washington said.

Buck said, “Whatever. We need to take the pen and make the note before Imali and her mom leave!”
“Wait that’s not Imali’s mom! That’s her dad.”

Washington said, “And that’s Benjamin!”

Sasha said, “Yay that’s good! Now we don’t have to struggle to make a letter. We know that Benjamin is Imali’s dad and works at the MINT. And we also know that that’s how you didn’t do the money cycle. If you didn’t go through the money cycle how come we all did?”

Washington said, “Because I was the first piece of money Benjamin touched at the MINT, and he knew that Imali loved one dollar bills, so he gave me to her.”

Sasha said, “If you knew that then how come you didn’t tell us the entire time?”

“Cause you never asked,” Washington replied.

“So exact,” Sasha said.

“Do you think that’s why you’re so smart?” I asked.

“Yeah! Because my brain didn’t have to go through the money cycle it’s fresh.”

Chapter 5

Imali’s Dad

Sasha said, “I’ve been watching Imali and her dad, and they haven’t left yet.”

I said, “I’m the best at hearing humans, let me hear what they’re saying.”

I listened and I hear Benjamin saying, “I need to take the money. My daughter wants a Fisher Price small car.”

The bank manager said, “Oh! One of those cars that kids can drive themselves?”

Imali said, “Yeah except I want one for big kids.”

“Yeah,” Benjamin said. “She wants a convertible. All the kids in her school want them, and now she has a chance to get one. She thinks it’ll bring her lots of playdates.”

The bank manager said, “Yeah it sure will. My daughter wants one of those too.”

“She has $300 in there,” Benjamin said.

The bank manager said, “That sure is a lot of money for a ten year old. Alright I’ll give you the money.”

Imali said, “Yes! I finally get a car!” And she did her victory dance.

Benjamin said, “Hold on, you didn’t get it yet. We’ll go to the store right after this.”

Then I saw the bank manager walk toward us. I told Washington, Buck, and Sasha to hide behind the buttons, and I jumped to the bottom of the pile of money. I saw the bank manager pick up all the bullies and I felt so relieved. I saw him reach for the last bit of money, and I was getting scared.

Chapter 6

The Attack

I jumped out of his reach to where Buck, Washington, and Sasha were. I saw them folding themselves as small as they could and squeezing themselves into the buttons. I was the one that got folded the most and I fit the smallest. The bank manager looked towards the buttons, but he didn’t see us. He just pushed one. That was the one that Buck was in. Buck zoomed back with the button.

Washington asked, “Why is Buck zooming back? And why is the button zooming back with him?”

Then Sasha said, “Finally, something I know and you don’t! Because the bank manager pressed the buttons too hard.”

Then Washington said, “Hey, just because I’m smart and fresh from the mint doesn’t mean I know everything.”

“I know,” Sasha said.

They heard Buck screaming for help. They heard him saying he was in a different bank account with one-hundred-dollar bills. And they were all mean.

He heard them saying, “Why’s a one-dollar bill in here? You don’t belong in here, we’re one-hundred-dollar bills? You’re a one-dollar bill! My owner doesn’t want one-dollar bills! He only wants one-hundred bills! And if he sees a one-dollar bill in here, he’ll be mad!”

Buck said, “Well, I didn’t wanna be in here! The bank manager just put me in here.”

A hundred-dollar bill said, “You don’t even know the bank manager’s name? How about this. I’ll give you a hint. It sounds like Larry. Except with an H. And it ends with an I.”

“So, is it L-A-H-R-I?

The hundred-dollar bill said, “Yes.”

Another hundred-dollar bill asked, “Why did you give him such an easy hint? You practically told him how to spell it!”

Buck said, “Whatever. I don’t care. I just want to get back to my friends, Sasha, Washington, and Sika.”

Then, a one-hundred-dollar bill said, “What kind of name is Sika?”

Buck said, “It’s an African language, Akan.”

A hundred-dollar bill said, “How long have you known this girl Sika?”

“Since I went to the bank for the first time. And that was nine years ago. Since she was two. I’m ten, Sika’s twelve, Washington’s thirteen and Sasha is eleven. And our owner’s name is Imani.”

The hundred-dollar bill said, “Why are so many of you named money?”

“What do you mean?” Buck said.

The hundred-dollar bill replied, “Well, you’re named Buck. Buck is one dollar. Washington is on the one-dollar bill. Imani means money in a European language, and I know her dad, and her dad’s name is Benjamin, and Benjamin means a hundred dollars. And the bank manager’s name is Lahri, and that means money in an African language. And Sika means money in Akan language, like you just told me.”

Buck was stumped. He wanted to know too. So he just said, “My friend Washington would know, he’s the smartest dollar ever.”

The hundred-dollar bill gave him a stern look.

Buck said, “But you’re very smart too. You knew that all of those names meant money.”

The hundred-dollar bill was actually liking this guy and wasn’t being mean anymore. Washington, Sika and Sasha didn’t hear him screaming anymore, but they were still thinking of a plan to get Buck out of the other bank account.

Chapter 7

The Plan

“I’ve got a plan,” I said after a long four hours of  thinking. “One of us can get a rope and one of us can hold the rope while one us gets Buck and then when one of us gets Buck one of us can pull them back.”

“That sounds like a plan,” Sasha said.

“Yeah,” Washington repeated.

“So who wants to get Buck?” I asked.

Sasha screamed “Me!”

“Okay. I guess that means I’ll hold the rope,” I said.

“Where are we gonna get a rope from?” Washington asked. He paused and said, “Ohh yeah! We can get a rope from the back of the bank account. Lahri always keeps a rope in there in case of a robber.”

Before you could say “Let’s go,” Sasha had the rope and was running down the place that Buck went down.

When she got to Buck she yelled “Pull!” and I pulled them back.

Chapter 8

It’s So Scary   

“Yay! They’re back. We missed you so much,” Washington said.

“We’re so so happy you’re back!” I said.

“I’m so happy I’m back too because those hundred-dollar bills are kind of mean.”

Sasha me tooed him. None of us noticed the bank manager talking to angry Benjamin.

Benjamin was saying, “My daughter wants that car and she is going to get it, because it’s her birthday. I still need four more dollars.”

Lahri said “Sir, I tried to get all of the money.” Benjamin gave Lahri a look. “But I’ll check again, sir.”

Lahri saw the last four dollars and he didn’t wait a second to get them. The four friends were getting picked up and and they were scared. Two big hands twice the size of them were squeezing them so hard they could throw up. Lahri hands the dollar bills to Benjamin and Imali screams of joy.

She says, “I’m gonna get a ca-ar! I’m gonna get a ca-ar!” Then, they leave the bank and go to the car shop. While they’re going to the car shop, Sika was saying all the reasons why she wanted to stay at the bank. “Reason one: I want to stay at the bank because I’ll be safe from doing the money cycle. Reason two: because I like playing robot. Reason three: Because I won’t ever be able to see my friends again after we’re in the cash register. Reason four: I won’t be able to ask Buck how old he is. Reason five: Sasha won’t be able to say ‘Smarty Pants’ to Buck.”

Then, Washington said, “Why do you have to be so negative? We don’t know that we’re never going to see each other again.”

Then, Sasha said, “How about we do something to keep our minds off of being spent? How about we play robot in the wallet with credit cards?”

And then Buck said, “I want to be the robot!”

We all said simultaneously, “We know!”

Then Buck said, “I was just making sure.”

When we got there, we knew that we were only getting spent for Imali’s birthday, and we were happy for her. She chose a blue convertible and one of her friends was at the shop, too. Her friend asked her for a ride home and that was it. We were going to go through the money cycle again. We were going to get folded again too, but hopefully someone puts us in a bank again, and hopefully that’s a kid, because kids are the best money owners. They’re the most fun.

The End

The Big Cat Adventure

One day Justice and her best friend Kimberly were working on their science project about cats, because they loved cats. The only thing that they wanted in the world was a cat.

They were almost done with their project when all of a sudden, a trash can tipped over and fell on Kimberly’s head. Justice stood up to see if anybody was in the classroom, but she did not see anybody. So, they rushed to the bathroom to get all the stuff off of her. The teacher came in the bathroom and told them that they could go home.

As they were walking down the street, they saw the same man that they saw every day in the candy store talking to the merchant. But as they were crossing the street, they saw the same man in neater clothes. They also heard people saying that he was the richest man in the city. Kimberly and Justice were so confused.

They opened  the door to Kimberly’s house and went to her room to get ready for their sleepover. After they ate dinner, they worked on their project. There was good news and bad news. The good news was that they completed their project, and the bad news was everybody in the city was sick with a stomach virus.  But, Kimberly and Justice were not sick.

Kimberly and Justice went for a walk. They noticed that the cat adoption center was closing down. They went inside to see what was going on. They asked the storekeeper why he was closing down. The man said that he was sick and all of the cats were gone.

For two minutes they were staring at eachother. They asked why the cats left. The storekeeper said they did not leave. They were stolen by the most wanted person in the world. His name was The Black Dove.

For a moment it was silent. The storekeeper also said that everywhere The Black Dove went, he would put a curse on the city with his magic wand. Justice told Kimberly that they had to go and find The Black Dove. At first, Kimberly said it would be too dangerous, but after a few minutes, she changed her mind. They went to their houses, packed everything they needed, and went off to find The Black Dove.

As they were walking,  they found out that they were in a swamp. Kimberly said, “OMG, it smells like a  mix of rancid mayo, pickles, and a local dumpster, rotting in a hot garbage bag in July.”

Justice actually liked the smell of the swamp. A few minutes later, they were in the in the deepest part of the swamp. Halfway out of the swamp, there was a note on a strange rock that looked like a plate of cheese. The note said, “BEWARE OF TRAPS PLEASE.”

This could not be true. They took the note with them anyway. As they were crossing a very old, long log, the two girls got caught in a net. It must have been one of the traps to stop them from finding The Black Dove. They looked in their bags to see if they could find anything to get them out of the net.

“This is all your fault, Justice!” said Kimberly.

“My fault? What did I do?” asked Justice.

“If you did not want to come here and get your stupid cats, we would not be stuck here,” Kimberly said.

“STUPID? I thought you loved cats,” said Justice.

They were fighting for fifteen minutes. After they were done fighting, they continued looking for things to get them out of the net. Kimberly decided to turn back and go home but Justice chose to keep on going.

Before they could leave, they had to get out of the net. They found a rope in their bag. They cut the rope in half, cut the top of the net, and wrapped the rope around a tree. They used the other half to slide down the rope.

So, Kimberly went back home and Justice went to find the lost kittens. Justice was really scared and felt bad that she had no one to encourage her. She started to get so scared that she almost thought of turning back. But she had to save those kittens. As she was walking, she found herself in another city. And there she saw the same man in the candy store talking to the merchant. She went inside to get a closer look at him. She noticed that it was The Black Dove, because she remembered that the man in the cat store said that he pretends to be someone he is not. So, she thought that he was pretending to be poor, so he could fool the merchant and steal things.

Justice said to herself that she should just follow him, and maybe it would lead her to the kittens. She followed The Black Dove and he lead her to his hideout. While The Black Dove  was sleeping, she found the cats and took them back home.

Everybody was well,  and it was all because of Justice. She called Kimberly and said that she was sorry. And they became best friends again.

But, all of a sudden, The Black Dove came for the kittens. Kimberly went up to him. She looked at him. She was the first one ever to scare away The Black Dove. He had a black outfit. His face was half white and half black. And he had a curly mustache. Just by looking at him, The Black Dove got scared and ran to his hideout. Justice felt really upset that she did not scare The Black Dove, but she felt happy for her best friend because she helped the city.

Everybody was safe, and Justice and her best friend Kimberly finally got their cats that they wanted. And they lived a happy life.

THE END

Days on Pages

      

“Ow!” Owen’s father screeched. He had just banged his head on the ceiling.

Owen was cleaning out the attic with his father when he found a dusty, old box with books in it, which matched the rest of the attic: dusty, creepy, and cobwebby.

“What’s this, Dad?” Owen shouted with satisfaction from across the attic. In his hand, he held hundreds of books with his ancestors’ names, initials, and photos from the present. Some were black and white photos of people, young and old, who looked like him and his father, only they were wearing things that people don’t wear anymore, like top hats!

Owen’s dad walked over from what was, in Owen’s opinion, the “creepy” side of the attic to have a peek. “What’s wha — … Wooo!!!”

CRASH!

“Ow! I found your skateboard!” Owen’s father told him, looking really dizzy. “Now, what do you need?” Owen’s father wobbled over carefully. “Oh, that. Those are all the books that your ancestors wrote.”

Owen looked at the books again, then thought to himself, My ancestors wrote these? How was I unaware of this?

Puzzled, he asked his dad, “So, you’re not the only author in the family?!”

“Oh no, I’m just one of them,” his father replied.

If I hadn’t felt bad enough that I couldn’t write as well as my father, now I’d be the only one in my whole family who couldn’t write a book! Owen thought to himself.

***

So that’s when it all started. It had been a few months since that day, and Owen still hadn’t done any better, if not, he’d done worse. Ever since then, he feared failing his family because he couldn’t write a story like them.

This morning, Owen was eating breakfast when he decided to ask his mom for a good idea for a story.

“Hello, Owen! Did you have a good night’s sleep?” Owen’s mom asked.

“Yeah, it was fine,” Owen groaned.

“I had the best dream last night where I had all the food in the world and — what do you want for breakfast today? Do you want cereal, or some waffles? Oh, I know, how about pancakes? Here, let me start cooking … ”

Owen’s mom rambled on and on about food, until Owen finally asked her, “Do you have any good ideas for a book, Mom?”

“How about a cookbook?!” Owen’s mom immediately replied.

Owen immediately regretted his decision because his mom loved food and cooking so much — heck, she was even flipping 12 pancakes for the family as she spoke! On that note, Owen stood up, grabbed his skateboard, ran for the door, picked up his backpack, and skated off to school, leaving his mom behind with all the food.

“What about your pancakes with extra butter and whipped cream with a cherry on top and a side of waffles with a side of bacon, eggs, and toast with a side of — oh, never mind.”

***

“Today in writing class, we are are going to learn about how to make realistic fiction stories,” Owen’s teacher told the class as she wrote on the chalkboard. “If you don’t have any ideas, then, a good thing to do is to write down everything you’ve done that day, like a journal!”

And there it was! Exactly what Owen had needed, some actually good advice.

A journal, of course! Owen thought to himself.

***

When school was out, Owen couldn’t wait to write in a journal. He ran home and got all the money he had from his piggy bank, ran to Staplers, bought an orange journal with a squiggly line pattern for $7.86, and then ran back home and started to write.

Today, I went to school and learned to write in the journal and I– Owen recited.

Owen suddenly had no idea why he had been so excited. Now that he was doing it, he felt a flash of complete boredom in his mind.

Owen kept on recording stuff over the next few months (boring or not) such as brushing teeth, getting in bed, pulling up the covers, putting his head on the pillow, and writing in this dumb journal.

As weeks passed, things were rough and boring: Dad got tons of fan mail (which, to Owen, felt like it was being shoved down his throat that he couldn’t write). Mom kept talking about food, food, food, while Owen wrote in his journal more and more.

Everything was always the same, and nothing was ever different. That was it.

Until one day, when Owen finally had an idea.

***

“Beat’cha!” Owen shouted. He was playing at his friend Lukas’ house.

“This game blows!” He threw his controller past the flatscreen.

“I might return it back to Games Galore!” Lukas shouted, his face turning the color of Owen’s red shirt.

“You’re the one who bought it and lost the mega power up,” Owen chuckled.

Owen yelled. Lukas’ little brother Benny had just waddled into the living room and ripped out all the pages in Owen’s orange journal.

Riiiiiiiiiiiip!

“Oh God! No, no, nooo!!!” Owen shouted over the pages.

Benny froze and ran away.

Owen tried to put the pages back together, but they wouldn’t go back, and to add to that, he couldn’t find the right order they were supposed to be in.

Suddenly, he looked at all the pages laid out in front of him and thought, This could be my story, the story about trying to find the right story to write!

“Of course!” he yelled. He ran back to his house and got to work.

Owen’s book was about a ten-year-old boy named Nick, who, like Owen, searched for the right story and finally found it!

***

Now, 30 years later, Owen is the most famous author in his family, and he has twins. His story was a hit, a blockbuster book!

“Daddy,” Owen’s son and daughter asked him one day, “do you have any good ideas for a story?”

Owen smiled.

Under the Skin

       

Part 1

“Jake! Wake up! You have to go to school today,” my mom called from the kitchen.

“I don’t want to go to school. No one is going to want to be friends with me. I’m going to be a social outcast,” I moaned, still in bed.

My mom came into my room and opened up the window shades. I moaned and covered my eyes.

“Close the windows.”

“Honey, I told you that’s not going to happen. I’m absolutely positive that you’re going to make good friends. You are going to be completely okay.”

“Mom, I told you to knock before you come in.”

“Okay. I will be downstairs when you are done getting set.”

I took a quick shower and walked to the closet where I took out my burgundy uniform that had a touch of navy blue on it.

Uh-oh, I need to comb my hair, I thought. My hair was long and spiky at the top with gold color in it, like always. I started to think that the one thing I was happy about, which was that I would not be made fun of for being fat, because I was tall and skinny.

I went downstairs to eat the breakfast that my mom had prepared for me. I took my oatmeal and sat on my orange La-Z-Boy couch in the living room.

“Eww, this oatmeal tastes so bad,” I called to my mom.

“Jake, if you go to school looking that depressed, you’re going to start to look like something that you’re not,” my mom called from the kitchen in a voice so annoying that I couldn’t stop myself from saying what I did.

“Mrs. Fiona, or should I say Miss Fiona, can you please stop nagging? You’re going to drive me crazy. This probably why Chris is not here anymore,” I said in the most official voice that I could muster. Chris is my dad who died in a mysterious accident.

“If you mention that name again, you’ll wish that you could not talk at all.” Mom was absolutely pissed at me.

“Okay. Okay, just don’t hit me.” I was scared because when I had called her that before, she didn’t yell at me like she’s doing now. I knew that I should not have mentioned Dad’s name. She was super emotional when someone said his name in disrespect.

“Well Mom, I’m off to school,” I called, slinging my backpack over my shoulder and leaving in a rush before she could drag me back into the kitchen to scold me.

***

Woah, this school is massive, and it’s pretty cool-looking too.

I looked up at a castle-looking building. It had two humongous gates with a brilliant red carpet leading to them. It had two towers that looked like places where people sat to defend the the castle. There was an archway of trees lining the red carpet.

I was told that the school was named Excalibur. That was a pretty weird name. There were also pretty weird characters here. The students were bringing unusual looking animals in through the school gates. All of the students were wearing black robes with white stars on them. One of the male students had a animal that looked like a griffin. Others were bringing in animals like owls, parrots, and more animals that should not be there.

That’s when I saw it. A monster that seemed to be made out of a gas surrounding the other students. I saw it quickly change its direction to face towards me. When I saw it notice me, I started to run, knowing that if that horrifying beast were to catch up to me, I would most likely die. I thought that I was running so fast that I mostly looked like a maniac.

When I got inside the school, I was desperately gasping for my breath. What was that thing? It looked like a demon!

That’s was when I first stepped into the Underworld, but I didn’t know it at the time.

I looked around me and saw another monster around the people in the school. I said in a loud voice, “You guys need to get out of here. There are demon-looking monsters everywhere.”

For a moment, people started to evacuate. Though, when they saw nothing outside, they started to come back. It seemed like only I could see the monster.  

Everyone was annoyed that I wasted their time. They started to push me, yell at me, and punch me. I ran to the library to get away and hide while it calmed down outside.

What’s going on with this school? I said to myself. Now, I have to deal with both making so-called ‘friends’ and trying not to die while doing it!!!

As I walked to take a seat in the library, I saw a book in the library called The Demons Of The Real World. The book was pretty dusty, unlike the other ones in the library. It was a book made out of leather that was fading away.

Huh. Well, it seems like it will be interesting enough, I thought.

In the real world, there many unworldly creatures that could not be seen with the regular human eye. The only ones who can see them are the descendents of the original phoenix family. The monsters feed on the souls of mortals. They normally flock to places with groups of humans. The only time that a mortal can see them is when they’re on their deathbed, or when the person who sees them is a noble warrior of the race. These people are the chosen ones, who can slay them. If you see someone with a pentacle on the back of their hand, they are an ally.  

The rest of the book was completely unreadable. It was like someone did not want the reader to know more. Maybe I would be able to read the rest of the pages over time.

I hid the book in my uniform, so I could take it to read it more. I tried to show the book to some of the other students, but they all thought that I was a crazy man. They all said that there was nothing in my hand.

Shatter!

All the lights went out. That was when I saw it again it, but this time it was not after me. It was one by one eating the unsuspecting students. All of a sudden, I felt my body lift up and go out the window…

“AH! Let me go, Let me go,” I said. I was absolutely terrified at that moment.

“Ha, I knew that we didn’t need this little brat. After all, they have me,” said the person who was taking me away.

“Also, I didn’t know that the prince of our family could scream like such a girl,” he said in a deeper voice than before.

End of Part 1

Tales of a Toad

     

Mr. Toad

Gretchen and I do not get along. Gretchen, the dumb “know-it-all” parakeet that lives with Owner and me, is sooo annoying!!! She only cares about herself, and worst of all, Owner only cares about Gretchen! It’s like I don’t exist! Life was perfect until she came along.

“How was life before she came?” you might ask. Well, that’s what I’m here to tell you.

I was sitting in my box when Owner came to me. “Hey, Mr. Toad,” he said. “Wanna play?”

Of course I do, I thought.

“Let’s go!” Owner took me out of my box and put me on the floor.

“Want to have a hopping race?” he asked.  I nodded my head. We started leaping across the floor. Then, I felt my stomach start to rumble, and I realized I was hungry. I hopped back into my box and hopped around in circles. That meant that I was hungry. Owner went into the other room and got my food. I was sitting in my box when Owner came to feed me.

“Today is a big day,” said Owner. “I am getting a bird.”

A bird? I thought. What’s a bird?

“A bird,” said Owner, as if he was reading my mind, “is an animal with big, yellow wings and clawed feet.”

This bird sounds scary, I thought.

Owner gave me a couple of grapes and a snail for breakfast. Then, he went out of the room to eat his breakfast. I liked the snail, but not the grapes. I went to my cave to sleep after breakfast. When I closed my eyes, I heard the door creaking. Owner must have left to get the bird. I fell asleep.

I heard Owner walk into the room holding a big cage with a yellow thing that had wings. That must be the bird, I thought.

“Okay, Gretchen, welcome to your new home.”

Wait, new home? Gretchen’s staying? I thought she was just visiting!

“Squack! New home! Squack!” said the parakeet.  Then, she snapped her beak and flexed her talons. I was a little scared. I ran into the cave in my box and hid. I woke up and realized that it was a dream. I was still scared of a parakeet coming, but at least I hoped it would have a better name than Gretchen.

“Squawk! New home! Squawk!”

I had heard that before. The parakeet must be here. I was scared, really scared. I went back into my cave and hid like I did in my dream. A big, metal cage was set down next to my box.

“This is Mr. Toad,” I heard Owner’s voice say. “He is your new roommate.”

Roommate? I thought. She’s living in here? Oh no!

“Squawk, Mr. Toad, squawk!”

“Ribbit!” I let out a croak.

“Mr. Toad, this is Gretchen,” said Owner.

Oh no, that is her name, I thought. I didn’t like her already.

“Here, Gretchen, have some food,” said Owner.

Gretchen’s food looked tastier than grapes (which I hate,) but definitely not as good as snails (the absolute best food EVER!!) You really should try snails.

Anyway, I decided to try some of the birdseed to see if it tasted anything like snails. So if your Owner gets birdseed, heed my strong advice: DO NOT TRY TO EAT IT!!!  Seriously though, birdseed is even worse than grapes.

Now, back to the story.

Gretchen ate her food.

“Well, Gretchen, Mr. Toad, I have to go to school. See you soon!”

I heard another voice come from another room. “Alexander, you’re gonna be late!”

“Coming, Mom!” yelled Owner.

He walked out the door. I turned to Gretchen in disgust. “Parakeets are not welcome in this house.” I felt kind of guilty for saying that, but I knew that I wouldn’t be the number one pet anymore while she was around.

“That’s a very unfriendly welcome for a very…” She blinked her long eyelashes. “…a very friendly toad.” Gretchen winked. Oooh, how I hate that bird! Gretchen’s pale blue eyes flashed.  

“By the way, your food tastes worse than grapes!” I croaked. “But it fits you perfectly.”

“Oh yeah?” Gretchen squawked. “Watch this.” I gulped. “Squawk! Hungry! Squawk!” She flapped her wings up and down frantically. “Squawk!”

“Oh, here’s some birdseed, dear,” said Owner’s mom as she fed Gretchen.

I hopped around in circles. That meant I was hungry. Nothing. “Hey! Why am I not getting any food?” I asked Gretchen.

But she just shook her head. “Mmm, mmm, mmm.”

“Hey! Not fair! How did you even do that?”

“’Cause parakeets can talk. Toads? Mmm, mmm, mmm.” I just huffed and went to sleep.

But when I woke up the next morning, Owner and Gretchen were already awake. Playing. Having fun.

“Squawk! Fun! Squawk!”

“Yes, Gretchen. Fun.”

“Squawk! Happy!” I couldn’t believe my eyes. They were rolling snails, hopping in circles, doing all the things that Owner and I used to do when I was his. But it got worse. Gretchen kept glaring at me.

Then, Owner said something. I didn’t understand it, but it sounded like, “Okay, Gretchen, I have to use the bathroom.” That’s when Gretchen pushed me out the open window.

Okay, look, I have absolutely no idea what I’m doing, but here goes nothin’!!! Ooh, look at that store over there! I wonder what it sells… Hey! What’s this? Some kind of joke? No, wait, it’s… it’s… a mini snail! Now, let’s do a taste test… Blech!! WAAAAY too sweet! But it’s — delicious! Ooh! Here’s another! And another! Yummmm! All these mini snails!  

What will I ever do? Hey! Stop it! Wait! Aaaaah!

Dark. Lonely. Trapped behind bars. I’m too young to die! What was this place? Nothing there but food, water, and a lot of other animals. There were cats, and dogs, and this fat, pink thing that smelled like Owner’s bacon, and a really creepy red and green parrot that kept yelling, “Squawk! I’m a macaw! Squawk!” He reminded me too much of Gretchen. It was dark, noisy, and moist in there. A dog barked at me. A cat hissed. I shuddered. I ran, but there was no cave to hide in. Just this stupid, empty cage. But at least Gretchen wasn’t there.

Owner’s voice echoed in my head. Welcome to your new home. Your new home. New home. Would I be here to stay? I didn’t want to find out…

Yep, still here. I wonder where I am. I wonder how Owner’s doing, partying all day long with Gretchen. Having fun. I wonder if he misses me, or even notices I’m gone. I miss him. I just hope he misses me…

Gretchen

“Where’s Mr. Toad?” Owner cried. “I miss him!”

What was up with Alexander? He’d been like this all week! I didn’t think he’d miss Toad so much.

“Squawk! Bored! Squawk!” I wanted to cheer him up. But he only kept on moping. I almost felt sorry for him… No. I made a choice. I had to stick to it.

Mr. Toad

The next day was a big day for me at the animal jail. A tall, skinny man with a small beard walked in. He took me out of my cage and held me in his hand. I squirmed and tried to wriggle out. I was scared. Real scared.

“Here you go, ma’am”, he said cheerfully. He gave me to a young, blonde woman.

“Thank you, sir!” she said. “I’ve always wanted a toad.”

“Okay, Mr.  Toad,” the woman said as we went home. “My name’s Annie. I’m yer new owner. I’m 28 years old, and I play the guit-tar and the trom-bone. I ain’t got no husband, but I do got Peter. You’ll meet him.”

When I got to her house, I saw something wrong immediately. Right there, lying on the floor in front of me, was a… a…

I don’t really know what it was, but it had big, scary, yellow eyes, and it was black and white with white whiskers.

“Rrribbiiiit!” I croak when I’m nervous.

I expected it to pounce on me, but instead, it just said, “Whazzzup, brother? Heard you were comin’. The name’s Peter. Whazz ur name?”

“Umm, Mr. Toad. H-hi, P-peter. Yeah. Hi.”  

You’ve probably realized that I’m scared of a lot of things, but this really gave me the heebie-jeebies. Would Peter be my best friend? My worst enemy? Again, I did not want to find out…

Yesterday when I woke up, Peter was staring down at me. “Hey, pal!! Wanna play?”

“Um, okay.”

“Sweet! Whatcha wanna do?”

“Uh, dunno. What do cats do?”

“We play the trombone!” He ran to the other side of the room and got a big yellow thing from its stand. He blew on one end, and a noise came out of the other end. The noise was bad at first, but then, Peter played a song on it.

“Cool, man!”

“I know, right?”

“Hey, can you help me with something?”

“Anything for you, brah.”                     

Gretchen

Toad is running through the woods. He has a big black and white thing running next to him. I am sitting on my windowsill, watching. Toad leaps onto the windowsill, so does the big black thing. I jump back. Toad leaps onto me. I scream in fright! I fly into my cage, but Toad is hanging onto my tail. He’s stuck in my cage with me. He sticks out his long tongue into my face, and my eyes widen as it hits me between the eyes. I let out a long, high wail, like “Ahh!”

I woke up and realized it was just a dream, but I had a hunch that it might be real.

I had to warn Alexander! I flew out of the cage and into the living room. I saw Alexander sitting on his chair, crying.

“Alexander, Alexander! Mr. Toad’s coming back with the giant black and white thing!”

Alexander kept crying. “Yes, I know you’re hungry, Gretchen,” he said. “You have plenty of birdseed.”

“No, I’m not hungry! Mr. Toad’s gonna try to come back to get back at me!”

“Gretchen, go away…” Alexander moaned.

Why is he so upset? He doesn’t play with me anymore, he just sits on his chair and cries.

“Why did Mr. Toad leave me? Everything was perfect until he left.”

Wait, he misses the toad? Naw. I went back to my cage to have a quick rest.

Mr. Toad

“This is the house where Owner lives.”

There had to be a way to get back at Gretchen. And what better way to do it than with a cat on my side. But how?

“We gonna have to jump in there,” said Peter. We had a plan. We’d run across Fifth Avenue and jump through the window.

We ran across the intersection, jumping across cars. Full disclosure, I was terrified. At a red light, a navy blue car stopped right in front of Owner’s bedroom window. Now was the time! I hopped on it and then hopped up to the window.

I just missed the window! The light turned yellow. A few seconds and I drove away on the car!

“Peter!” I yelled, “Help me get up there!”

“Here, climb on my back,” said Peter. I jumped on Peter’s back, and he hooked his claws on the brick wall just as the light turned green, and he started climbing up the wall.  I looked down. We were two stories above Fifth Avenue. If I fell, I would fall into thick traffic.

Peter grabbed the window sill of Owner’s window and pulled himself up. I hopped through the open window and into Gretchen’s cage.  Gretchen was asleep but when she heard me hop in, she let out a loud, long wail, like “Ahh!!!”

“Squawk! My dream came true! Squawk!” Gretchen flew out, leaving the door of her cage open. I hopped out behind her and hopped into the living room, with Peter behind me.  

“Owner! Hello, it’s me. Mr Toad! Hello?” I was surprised to find Owner sitting in his chair, sobbing. “Owner? What’s wrong?”

Owner turned around in his chair.  “M-m-Mr. Toad? I-is that you?”

“Yes! Yes! It’s me!” I wailed, “Why won’t you notice me?”

“Mr. Toad, you came back! I thought you hated me.”

“Squawk! It’s my fault! Squawk!” said a bird-like voice from the bedroom.

“What do you mean, Gretchen?” said Owner.

“Squawk! I pushed Toad out of the window! Squawk! I’m so sorry.”

“Gretchen? You would never do that…” said Owner.

“It’s true, he never wanted to leave you. Squawk.”

Owner scooped me into his hands and hugged me. He said with a tremble in his voice, “Never leave me again.”

“You’re forgiven, Gretchen,” I whispered from Owner’s arms.

THE END

Super Powers

Athena was always a good kid. She got straight A’s, and she never got in trouble. But that all changed when she went back to school. On her 12th birthday, the day before school, she wished she could have super speed. All of her brothers and sisters laughed.

“How could you possibly get super powers?” asked her eldest brother, George.

“You never know,” said Athena.

She was right. The very next day, she was so excited for school that she slipped on her bathrobe and started to run uncontrollably fast.

“AHHH!” said Athena. She started to slow herself down.

Once she got back inside, she took a shower. She changed into her favorite outfit, her cozy bunny sweater with a jean skirt. She slipped on her favorite sneakers and grabbed her bag. She stole a donut from her sister, Virginia, and took off. She eagerly waited for the school bus, but when it got there, she became speedy again. Athena raced faster than the wind into the bus. The other kids stared and started to whisper. How could things get any worse? Then, Wendy, her best friend, boarded the bus. She sat down next to Athena, and Athena told her everything.

Wendy and Athena both went to their lockers, and when Athena closed hers, she found Beatrice Loop waiting for her. She was one of the fastest kids in school, and the biggest bully as well. She always smelled like tobacco, and she always spat on people when she got angry. Everyone tried to keep cool when Beatrice was around.

“Hey you, Ant! Want to race after school? Meet me at the field after 7th period,” said Beatrice.

Once Athena got to her math class, she started talking to Wendy. “She wants me to race her after school. What if I lose?”

“Then you know you’ll get a wedgie in front of the entire grade, including the boys,” said Wendy.

Athena thought for a moment. What if she used her superpower? Wendy clearly read her mind. She would always believe her friend, no matter what.

“You should totally use your super power.”

***

Finally, the horrid time had come. Beatrice Loop was waiting for her. Athena winced.

“Get ready to lose, sucker!” scoffed Beatrice. “On your mark… get set… go!”

Athena took off like a bullet. Beatrice tried to catch up, but it was no use. She continued to run until she saw the finish line. All the kids gasped. Athena blushed. Beatrice finally came back, red-faced and angry.

As soon as she got home, Athena was attacked by her little brother, Andy. She strode over to her mom.

“Hey Mom, what if I told you that I have the ability to run super fast?” asked Athena.

“Ha ha ha, you must be joking,” said mother. Athena noticed she was starting to sweat.

“I’ll show you.” Athena began to race across the room.

“Oh sweetheart, go up to your room please,” said mother, kissing the top of her head.  She raced to her room. But she heard something from downstairs. She couldn’t help but take a peek from her room. Athena gasped. She saw two things. Her mother smoking, which she had never seen, and calling somebody. She tried to listen, but her mom was too quiet.

The next day, Athena told Wendy the terrible news.

“What? But your mother seems so… so… nice,” said Wendy. They walked to gym class together.

“Today, class, we will be working on running,” Coach Pattie said. About 75 percent of the class groaned. “Hey, listen up! I will have two contestants. You, Charlie, get up here!” Athena knew Charlie was the fastest boy in school. “And you, Athena, see if you can beat Mister Charlie here.”

Athena strode up to him rather confidently. She saw all of Charlie’s friends, like Mario and Felix and Luigi, cheering him on. Then, as if it were a One D concert, all the girls started screaming.

“On your mark… get set… go!”

Just like before, she took off like a bullet, running around the gym two times like Coach Pattie asked.

Coach Pattie hung her mouth open. “WOW. I have never seen someone so fast!”

All the girls and even some of the boys started questioning Athena about how she got so fast. She finally managed to get home with some help from Wendy.

As soon as she got home, her mother asked her to pack her bags. Athena was rather confused. “But why?”

“I’ll tell you on the way there.”

After some time in the car, Athena became restless. “MOM! I need you to tell me where we are going,” she said.

“Here,” said her mom. It was an alleyway in the city.

“Seriously, you’re taking me into a –” Athena was cut off as she was dragged into the wall. “Where are we?”

“We are at the Academy for Special Kids or A.S.K.”

Athena looked around. She saw high-tech gadgets everywhere. Then, a tall man dressed in a fine, white lab coat came toward her.

“Why hello there, young lady! You must be Athena,” said the man. “I am Dr. Bob.”

“Please don’t make this worse,” mumbled Athena.

“I’ll show you where all the other kids are waiting.”

Athena gulped. She was rather nervous. When she stepped inside, Athena saw other kids just like her. She smiled as she sat next to a girl who appeared to have purple hair. Athena was rather surprised.

“Hey, I’m Ivy,” said the purple-haired girl.

Then, Dr. Bob started to speak. “Hello, children! Today, we are going to test your skills and see if you are eligible to become a superhero! Up first, we will have Athena!”

Athena stepped up to the judges. She nervously looked at them and started to run. Faster and faster Athena went, ’til everything was a blur. She finally slowed down a few minutes later.

“Oh my! She will definitely do,” said one judge. Athena she sat back down. As she watched all of the contestants, she went to join Ivy.

“Man, you were sick! You were like a blur.”

“I was?” Athena blushed.

“Yeah, mate. You were pretty much the fastest one here.”

For about a year, Athena learned how to control her super speed. She made many friends, including Ivy. She sometimes missed her old life with Wendy and imagined what she would be doing at that very moment. But Ivy tried to cheer her up, and that usually did the trick. During the summer, Dr. Bob told her that it was time for her to go. She said goodbye to Ivy and promised to text her every day.

***

“Yes!” Athena exclaimed on her first day of school. She felt like today would be better than her last first day of school. Hopefully, Beatrice wouldn’t pick a fight with her. She couldn’t wait to see Wendy. As she waited for the bus, everyone smiled at her. Then, Athena saw Wendy. As if it were in slow motion, she ran to Wendy as fast as she could.

“Oh Wendy, I missed you so much!”

“Me too. Me too.”

They held each other in a tight embrace. They hadn’t seen each other in a year, and were so excited. Then, they were off to school!

Beatrice was nowhere to be seen. Apparently, Athena had already frightened her a year ago, when she beat her in that race after school. Athena was glad. But Athena couldn’t help but be annoyed by the millions and millions of questions her classmates asked. It seemed like Athena was more popular than last year. But when somebody needed help, she was always there. Athena became Super Speedy Girl! Sometimes, things could get pretty out of control.

But on a particular day, a Wednesday in fact, Athena was on her way to art class when Beatrice once again came up to her. This time, she smelled like fresh mint. Perhaps she had stolen a mint from somebody because she smelled pretty bad when she smelled like tobacco.

Is it just me, or did Beatrice get a little taller while I was gone? wondered Athena.

“Well, well, well. If it isn’t Little Miss Show-Off and the cowgirl,” said Beatrice. She had a huge smirk on her face and was towering over her by the second. “Ready to be beaten up?” She was cracking her knuckles.

Oh boy, thought Athena. “Well, if you’d excuse me, I should be on my way,” she said rather boldly.

“You know what? You’re a little baby. You always cry, and you always get what you want. Well –”

Athena started to get angry. She ran as fast as she could around Beatrice, creating a giant vortex. Beatrice was caught in the middle of it. When Athena stopped, she sent Beatrice flying all the way to the field. Just at that moment, Mr. Snickers, the principle, came out in time to see Athena send Beatrice flying.

“Excuse me, Miss Prince! Come to my office immediately!” he exclaimed.

“How dare you blast Miss Loop! Athena, you should know better after you went to A.S.K.” Athena was as still as a statue. Her lips were sealed.

“ I… I didn’t mean to, really. It’s just that (sniffle) she was making fun of me, and I didn’t like that!”

The principal was also still. “Unfortunately, I have to expel you from the school. I know this might be hard, but here at Dragon Academy, we cannot tolerate such behavior. After your last period, collect your things.”

Athena could have cried. But she still sat there, stone faced.

Since that horrid day, Athena had to leave Dragon Academy. She sobbed on that day. Everyone was very sad.  The school made cards for her, and some even bought her presents. All the teachers gave her little presents too. Finally, it was time for her to move on, even though she had to leave her best friend and some of her favorite teachers behind. This school just wasn’t for her anymore.

“Well, Wendy, I will miss you, a lot,” said Athena.

Goodbye Dragon Academy, hello Applewood Junior High, she thought as she drove away from Dragon Academy and would never have to see this school again. She wondered if the people at her new school would be just like her? Would she ever see Wendy again? She had many questions, but she would have to wait and see if they were true.

Ah Ha Moment

Hi, I am Will. I am the first male cheerleader at U.C.L.A.

My life was terrible before I decided to be a cheerleader. I got shaken down for lunch money every day. I wanted to be a doctor. I was torn. I liked being a cheerleader, but there were no professional male cheerleaders in the NFL.

Now that the Rams had just moved to L.A. the owner, Stan Kroenke, offered me a spot on the 2017 Rams cheerleading squad.

I was overjoyed. I raced home to tell my mom about the offer. My mom was not happy; she was the one who paid my U.C.L.A. bill because she is a doctor, and she wants me to be a doctor too. My mom said that I better decide to go to medical school.

At midnight, there was an emergency, and my mom was called to the hospital A.S.A.P. My mom made me go because she said it would be a good learning experience. We rushed to the Red Cross Hospital emergency room going 25 miles per hour above the speed limit. It did not matter because nobody was on the roads at this time of night, but still, this was one of the rare times that I was glad that my mom had chosen to be a doctor, not a professional race car driver.

When we got to the hospital, my mom ran into the emergency room, and I pulled out my phone. But the battery was dead, and I needed a charger, so I decided to ask my mom where a charger was. I knocked on the door, and she did not answer, so I walked into the room and saw my mom performing heart surgery!

I screamed, and that was when I decided to be a cheerleader, no matter how hard my mom tried to change my mind.

 

A TV Detective

There once was a detective who lived in multiple places, but today he was living in a castle. It was called Hogwarts. He was going to be filmed and questioned about what he did for a living, so he had to be ready. He had a list of questions that they were going to ask. The most exciting part was that if they liked it, they would put it on TV.

When they came, they interviewed him, and he loved it so much that he wanted to be on TV for a living. They thought it was so good that they offered him to be on TV. He made up his mind and went to get a job on the Real Detective Show.

Then, he did his show, but one day, a bunch of clowns invaded as a part of the show. How on Earth was he going to figure out how to solve the mystery? He went to complain that it wasn’t a mystery.

Then, it hit him. It was his job to figure out who the clowns were. He did fingerprints and everything, and finally, he had five suspects. It occurred to him that there were five clowns.

He had cracked the code. That meant more viewers, and more viewers meant more money. He was so excited and screamed so hard, people thought he was crazy.

 

Middle School, My Terrible Luck

Chapter 1: Day #1

I was so not ready for this. Hi, I’m Sophie. Today was my first day of middle school, and if you’re poor, living in the projects, that means it’s the worst day ever. My mom didn’t understand that I, Sophie, plus “poor” and “middle school” equalled “bad.” So here I was, almost literally swimming in a pool of my own sweat.

The bus finally came after what felt like forever. I picked a careful spot in the back. Don’t want to make the first mistake on the bus!!!

I was now at the front of the school. Hashtag so nervous! I closed my eyes and went into the school. I almost immediately felt like I made the wrong choice. I looked down and quickly went to my class. I got a seat in the back, so l wouldn’t get noticed that much.

“Hello, class!” said the teacher. “I’m Ms. Tom. I will be your homeroom teacher. Now, here are your locker numbers that you will be using.”

Everyone went to the lockers. I also went, but I kept my head down. I was walking to my locker and somehow tripped over my own foot. I could hear everyone laughing. I was pretty much the biggest dork in school already. I hurried up and went to my locker.

Then, I ran straight for the bathroom. I took a deep breath to cool down. By the time I got out, the bell had already rung. I had science for second period. I walked down the hall to the science classrooms. I felt pretty happy that it was a few rooms away, cause if it wasn’t, I would have exploded.

Science class was pretty boring. If you want me to show you how boring it was, then here’s exactly what the teacher said, “Blah, blah, science, blah, blah, archaeologists, blah, blah, dinosaurs, blah, blah, listen, blah, blah, pay attention.”

See what I mean? I was pretty excited that science was over, because art class was next. I love to color, and I want to be an artist when I grow up. When it comes to art, I listen to everything the teacher says. Today, we were trying to paint self-portraits of ourselves. I pretty much had the best one. After art class, I was pretty bummed that it was over.

Then, after art, we had lunchtime and recess. And now, here’s another part where I had to be careful where I went, because I could make the second biggest mistake of my life. During lunchtime, I tried to stick to sitting where everyone truly likes art. Tried to stick to my own kind. But as soon as I tried to sit down at the table, other people came crashing down, and I had to sit somewhere else. But then, something caught my eye. I saw three girls who looked like princesses, and they had so much makeup on for some reason. Then, I found someone sitting next to me.

She said, “Hey, I’m Carol. Those girls over there, the one in the front is named Missy, the one on the left is named Brianna, the one on the right is Mia. They’re already basically the most popular girls in school. And Missy’s parents are basically the richest people in the world.”  

“Oh,” I said. As soon as Missy saw me, she immediately came over to talk to me.

“What are you wearing?” she said. “You look like a homeless person who lives in the woods.”

I could not believe she was talking smack about me in front of my face. I was about to say something, but I kept my mouth shut. Missy walked away.

I said, “I immediately hate her, especially the way she walks. She waddles away with her high heels and her diamonds. I especially hate the way that people run after her, admiring her hair and stuff.”

“Right? She is so annoying.”

“Yeah, she’s awful.”

Instead of worrying about Missy, I had to worry about where I was gonna sit for lunch. I found an empty table, so I went straight to it. Carol sat with me too. After lunch and recess, I went straight to writing class. It was so boring, again with the “blah, blah, blah.” I couldn’t wait till school was over.

After that, we had sports. Sports was pretty much the worst thing at school, besides lunch. We played dodgeball, and I can’t tell you how much I hate dodgeball. For some magical reason, I always got hit with the ball. It hurt really bad because we played with bowling balls. Anyway, this was how much it hurt, and this was how much I hate sports. And the warm up was the worst: We had to do fifteen pushups and run a lap five times, and that was just the first course. Then, we had to do pull-ups and hang there as long as we could while they timed it. I honestly only did it for two seconds. After sports was over, it was time to go home. Hallelujah!

 

Chapter 2: Day #2

Basically, it felt like I was having deja vu. The same thing happened, we got the same “blah, blah, blah” science stuff and art. But today, we had music. I have the worst singing voice ever. But this time, I was actually surprised that my voice sounded… better.

After music, I was out of breath, but the bad thing about that, was that after music, I had sports again. Sometimes, I think that teachers and principals like their kids being tortured, so they torture them for a funny show. Well, it’s actually not funny. It’s heartbreaking.

Today, the only good thing that happened was that my mom made breakfast. Her famous pancakes. They were good, but sometimes you have to watch out because they say a message. If there are pancakes, my mom’s in a good mood. If there are pancakes and bacon, my mom got extra tips from the store because she’s usually not able to afford that. If there are pancakes and bacon and strawberries and blueberries, that means something horrible has happened.

“We got some news today. Grandpa Muffin is moving in,” said my mom.

I practically almost spat out my cereal. “Nooooooooooooooo!!!”

I went to school grumpy.

Why do bad things always happen to me? I said in my head. It’s not fair.

I was grumpy until I realized I was going into art. A smile stretched across my face. Just what I needed to cheer me up. After art, I found Carol again, and we went to the cafeteria. Good thing I had brought my own lunch.

“The cafeteria ladies are witches,” Carol said. “They put poison and fart spell in the meatloaf. Never eat the meatloaf!”

“Got it.” I took my grilled cheese sandwich, Oreos, apple juice, fruit snacks, and Fruit Loops. Mmmm.

And then, I saw Missy. I could not believe what Missy was eating. She had a fancy butler serving her steak. Fresh steak!!! I got so mad and jealous!!

“Ugh!! Missy. I have a plan!!”

Worried, Carol said, “What are you up to?!!!”

     

Chapter 3: Day #3

I made a plan to spill pudding on Missy at the right time. First, I convinced my mom to let me bring pudding. When Missy went to the bathroom, I followed her. While she went to the stall and started doing her business, I put all of my pudding in my mouth.

Blargggh!!!” I pretended to throw up.

“AAAAAAAHHHHHH!!!” she screamed in a high-pitched voice.

“Missy?” said Mia and Brianna. They rushed into the stall to help, but as soon as they saw her, they were disgusted. “Eww!!! What is that?!”

Missy passed out on the floor. The pudding covered her whole body except her diamond crown. Mia took the crown.

“Crowns are only for clean and pretty girls. Queen Mia forever!!!”

Missy was mad about earlier. She thought it was me, which was true. After second period, she put a note on my locker that read: Hey loser, I know that you spilled pudding on me. You’re going to regret that. It’s on!!

Missy was so… evil!!!

I tried to avoid Missy, but that’s hard to do when someone threatens you. So I just went to class. After that, it was pretty much a normal day.

After school, I had to go home and meet Grandpa Muffin. I don’t like when he visits  because he’s so bossy and boring and grumpy. He’s always yelling at us to get a cup of root beer and basically everything for him.

Since I was already bad at school, this was gonna make everything even worse. When I came home, thankfully, Grandpa Muffin wasn’t home. I dropped my backpack and found my mom in the kitchen. I started to groan.

“Why does he have to come today?” I didn’t really wanna tell my mom what was happening at school. I just wanted to lay my head down, but I couldn’t do it because somebody was visiting.

Finally, Grandpa Muffin came. I tried to greet him, but he dropped his humongous bags in my arms. What did he even keep in this stuff? Weights? I was about to scream, but then my mom looked at me, so I had to keep all the anger in. When I finished greeting Grandpa Muffin, I went to my room and screamed into my pillow. Why does the bad stuff always happen to me? What did I do? I just lay down on my bed, and to cheer myself up, I finally got a piece of paper and started coloring.

At first I just wanted to scribble, but I knew that wouldn’t help me, so I drew a world where everything happened perfectly, just the way I wanted it. This was a world I wanted to be living in, but instead, I was living in this world, the opposite of that world, where nothing happened perfectly. I kept on groaning in my pillow, but then, I fell asleep because of my anger. I mean, there was nothing better to do.

 

Chapter 4: Day 4

This morning, I hurried up trying to get to school because I did not want to run into Grandpa Muffin. I didn’t even know what happened yesterday, but Grandpa Muffin was NOT sleeping in my room. I got breakfast and started tiptoeing out of the door, when suddenly, Grandpa Muffin screamed at me.

“Where are you going?!” he yelled. I jumped up out of surprise.

“I’m going to school.”

“Before you go to school, get me a root beer.”

“This early in the morning?”

“Just give me the beer, child.”

I went to the fridge and started talking to myself. “Grandpa Muffin is the worst. I have better things to do than give him beers all day.” I gave him the beer and hurried at once to school. Right now, I almost thought that school was way better than Grandpa Muffin. School was basically the same thing every day: I went to science where the teacher “blah blah”d every day, I went to art and made the best drawing, I went to writing where the teacher “blah blah”d again, I went to sports and got hit with dodgeballs, and then, I went home.

But the twist to my new routine was that I had to give Grandpa Muffin beers in the morning and right after school. Grandpa Muffin was like one of the teachers at my school. They thought they were doing us good, but it was actually heartbreaking. Then, I just did my homework, and tried to avoid Grandpa all day. I was so glad when my mom came home, so I asked her the one question I’d been waiting to ask her.

“Where is Grandpa Muffin sleeping?” That’s when it got dark. My mom sighed for a few seconds and took a deep breath.

“Sorry, but Grandpa Muffin is sleeping in your room.” I opened my mouth, but nothing came out.

“Why can’t Grandpa Muffin sleep in the guest room?! It’s not fair!!” Just when I had thought it couldn’t get any worse, it did.

My mom said, “Sorry, but life isn’t fair.” And all I could think was that for me, life was never fair. I stomped into my room, went to my pillow, and screamed approximately 1200 times. At first, I thought that this was my fault. In my head, I wondered why I was such a pushover, why I let everyone control me. But then, I realized it was everyone else’s fault but mine.

 

Chapter 5

One day, the teacher asked if anyone wanted to sign up for a baking session. At first, I wasn’t considering it, but then, the teacher said it would give you extra credit on your progress report. Then, I thought, my progress report is probably just straight Fs, except for art class, so maybe I could earn some extra credit to boost up my progress report. Because if I didn’t get at least a B or C, my mom would be so mad, and I would be sooo grounded. The teacher said that it started tomorrow, so I had to wait a whole day, but that was fine by me. And the baking session might give me some time away from Grandpa.

When I got home, Grandpa Muffin asked me to turn on the TV. The TV was right in front of him, two feet in front of him, but he didn’t want to turn it on. Ughh, old people are so lazy.

I asked my mom for her cookbook and said I had to borrow it for a baking session. She gave it to me because she thought it would keep me from screaming into my pillow because of Grandpa.

“I’m so glad you’re gonna put your screaming behind you and do something different.”

“I mean, I’ll still keep screaming, but I’ll scream less, and it will at least give me some time away from Grandpa.”

“That’s good enough for me.”

I took the cookbook and started looking for a recipe for tomorrow. First, I looked at chocolate chunk cupcakes, but then, I flipped passed them because my teacher was allergic to chocolate. Then, I saw blueberry muffins, but I wasn’t trying to make muffins, because then, Grandpa Muffin would eat them. Then, I saw chocolate chip cookies. I thought about them for a while, but eventually skipped them. Then, I saw butterscotch cookies, and after thinking about them for awhile, I decided to go with butterscotch. I started baking. I had my mom try the first batch, but she said they were too hard. The second try, my mom helped me, and they were just right. I put the cookies in a special place so no one could touch them. It was a good thing that the baking session was first thing in the morning.

 

Chapter 6

I went straight to the baking session the next morning. There was a teacher trying out the cookies. I couldn’t believe people got paid to eat cookies. She must have had her life planned out perfectly. I wanted to be paid to eat cookies!

Turns out, I came in second place, so I’d have to find something better than butterscotch cookies. You would never believe who came in first place… It was Missy! She probably paid some cafe guy like $1,000 to bake something delicious so she’d win.

“Tomorrow,” I told my mom, “we have to bake something perfect, so I can rub it in Missy’s face.”

We looked at the cookbook, and I found a brownie cake. I remembered the teacher who was judging tomorrow was only allergic to peanut butter, so I tried the brownie cake. I baked the cake, and my mom tried a small piece. She said it was perfectly fine, so I decided to use it tomorrow.

The next day, I met up with Carol. She was reading the newspaper. I found out that there was a school dance, but I wasn’t really interested. When I went to class, I heard that I got first place!!! Missy was there, and she was so mad. It was a perfect show for me. I just love when my plans come together. Then, I went to my locker, and something squirted out and landed right on top of me! It was sticky, sticky yogurt. I bet it was Missy; she was probably just jealous I had won something with my own work.

All the parents got a flyer for the dance. My mom got excited because she thought I would go, but I told her I wasn’t going because I wasn’t interested. My mom convinced me to go, but I asked her how she would get the money to buy me a dress. My mom said that we could have a bake sale! I could use my cooking skills and use cakes and cupcakes and cookies to buy a new dress and heels. So my mom and I started baking, and we baked and baked and baked and baked so much, that for the first time ever, I saw Grandpa Muffin turn on the TV himself and get himself a root beer. If my mom wasn’t here though, he’d have made me get him his root beer and turn on the TV for him, even if it was two feet away. See how terrible he is?

My mom and I baked all the cupcakes and cakes and pastries that we needed and started selling. Carol was our first customer, but then, she decided to start helping us sell everything. Soon enough, we had about thirty customers. By nighttime, we had about $180, enough to buy a dress, heels, and maybe some new earrings. The night of the dance was two days away, so I had to start getting ready. We decided to do a bake sale one more time to get some money for a new necklace, and so that I could get my hair done. For the first time ever, it would be untangled. We did the same thing over and over again for two more days until something finally changed.

On the night of the dance, after school, my mom took me to do my hair and get ready. She dropped me off in a taxi, and I walked in. The first thing I saw when I walked in was a disco ball and a red carpet. It turns out the carpet was only for Missy, but I was determined not to let her ruin my night. So I went up to Carol and talked to her. She introduced me to some of her friends, and we all went to the table to get some snacks. Then, Missy was talking into the microphone.

“Hello classmates! Welcome to the dance that I created.”
You created?” I said. “I’m pretty sure that the teachers created it. Just because you’re rich and famous doesn’t mean you have to lie.”

I had already made a plan because I knew Missy would be on stage. I went behind the stage and pulled a rope. There was a big bucket of pudding where she was standing, so I released the rope, and the bucket fell right up on Missy’s head! There was so much pudding. I went back to my seat, everyone was laughing, and I was whistling innocently, but Missy knew it was me.

“You ruined my night!!” she said.

Your night?? It’s everyone else’s night, too! Not everything’s about you.”
Missy ran after me, but then, I tripped her, and she accidentally stepped on the skirt of her dress, and it got ripped off. Everyone was laughing while Missy ran away. What parents would even let her inside of the car? She ended up having to walk home, and I, Sophie, never had to worry about Missy again. I finally realized that if something bad is going on in your life, you can’t just complain, you have to do something about it.

 

The Foxes’ War

One late November morning, after catching a rabbit, Bramble trotted into a hollow log so she could eat it alone. She started to get tired, and fell asleep. When she woke up, she heard a gunshot and a human yelling “Fox!” Bramble dashed out of the log. When she looked back, the log was on fire. She didn’t stop running. She had to find somewhere to hide. Just then, she saw a hole. She crawled inside, and she heard more yelling from outside. Then, a bullet landed right next to her, and she decided to go deeper into the tunnel.

Bramble sniffed the air. It smelled as if another fox, specifically a juvenile male fox, was digging the tunnel. As Bramble went further, she saw another fox lying down in the tunnel. He was weak, and he lifted his head up.

“What are you doing in my tunnel?” he growled.

“Humans are outside,” Bramble barked.

“Who are you?” he growled again.

“I’m Bramble. Who are you?”

“I’m Rufus. The humans chased me so I dug this tunnel.”

Rufus stood up, and slowly walked to the entrance. Then he crouched. Bramble stood up and did the same. There were no humans outside. Bramble placed the rabbit she had caught right outside. They trotted out, and soon they heard another gunshot. The tunnel that Rufus made was destroyed. As soon as Bramble grabbed the little bit of rabbit meat that was left, Bramble and Rufus ran away from the humans that destroyed the tunnel. Soon, they were in a clearing. Rufus looked around. He saw a big grayish green machine that had a star on the side of it. There was a long horizontal tube that was sticking out of the upper front. Then, a bullet came out of the tube, and Rufus realized that it was a gun. Bramble started sprinting for the forest.

“We’re not safe!” Bramble yelped while dodging a bullet.

Rufus followed Bramble, and after a while it started to get dark. They slowed down as they got deeper into the forest. Bramble dug a neat den, unlike the one Rufus built. Then, they ate the little piece of rabbit that was left, and went to sleep. When they woke up, It was raining. Bramble and Rufus were cold and shivering. They huddled against each other for body warmth, but the rain didn’t stop, and after another day of rain, Bramble became sick.

Rufus walked further into the forest. Then, he spotted a few tents. He went back to Bramble and he carried her on his back to the tents. He dropped her off near the tents.

“I’m going to get some food. You dig a den,” Rufus quietly barked.

Rufus poked his nose under the side of the tent. After he sneaked into the tent, he froze. There was a gun lying on the floor, and it was pointing towards him. He moved to the side, and crawled under a little plastic table. Then he smelled something. When he looked at what was on the table, there was a big, brown, non-bloody chunk of meat. He put his paw on it and it was warm. He sniffed it, and he smelled different herbs and spices. He grabbed the piece of meat with his jaws. Then, a large round white platform came crashing down and broke to pieces. Rufus was so startled that he flung the chunk of meat across the tent.

A human with a dark green and gray uniform came storming into the tent. He glared at the cracked platform and then at the lump of meat. He walked back to the entrance of the tent, turned to stare at the meat one more time, and stomped away.

Once the human was out of sight, Rufus grabbed the meat and dashed out of the tent with the meat held firmly in his jaws.

“I got food,” Rufus barked once he got to the entrance of the little den that Bramble dug at the base of a tree.

Just then, Bramble crawled out of the little den and sat up, looking at the proud little den that she had just created. Then, she felt a little vibration, and she lay down on her back and rolled back. A small explosion blew up her den. Bits of dirt went flying all over the place. Bramble growled. She was furious. She started brushing all the dirt around while lying down with her front paws and tail. Soon she uncovered some wires. She bit at the wires a little bit, and sparks came flying out. Rufus lept beside her and nudged her to the side. Rufus grabbed a long branch and put out the little fire that had started.

Rufus carried Bramble slowly walked to another spot near the tents.

“Dig.” Rufus barked.

She started to dig her den there. Rufus dropped the meat off to the side and helped dig the den. Slowly but surely, the two foxes dug a small den, just big enough for both of them to fit along with the meat. As Bramble crawled inside, Rufus used his nose to push the lump of meat into the den. Once they were both inside, Bramble helped herself to a big bite of meat. It did not taste like anything Bramble had eaten before. After they halfway finished it, Rufus brought it outside and buried it. Then Rufus came back into the den and they both fell asleep.

When Rufus woke up, Bramble was coughing. She had inhaled a lot of smoke from the bomb, and from the fire. Rufus trotted outside to get water. Once he found a small pond, he sprinted back to the big mass of tents. He sneaked inside a tent, and sniffed around. Then he found a odd-shaped hollow rubbery object with strings on it. He brought it outside, and suddenly he heard a human say “Where’s my boot?” Then, he ran all the way to the pond. He threw it into the water while still gripping tight onto the string. When he pulled it up, it was full of water. He dragged the water-filled boot right outside of the den. He motioned for Bramble to come out, and when she did, she was still coughing. She thrust her head into the water and spilled some while she was drinking, but she was definitely looking better.

After a few days, Bramble was fully healed and was ready to move on.

“The humans are coming closer,” Bramble slowly growled mysteriously. That convinced Rufus.

After walking for some time, they reached a hole. Bramble cautiously sniffed around it, and it smelled of mouse.

“Copy me,” Bramble quietly ordered.

Bramble lay down next to the hole. Of course, Rufus did the same. Bramble closed one eye, and left her tongue hanging out of her mouth. Rufus followed. After a while, a mouse came out. Thinking that the two foxes around him were sleeping, the mouse slowly tiptoed out. Without warning, Bramble pounced on the mouse and swallowed him whole. Then Bramble stepped to the side, and let Rufus try. When Rufus pounced on the next mouse, it was too fast and dashed back into it’s hole. Rufus tried again, but did not succeed. Soon, Rufus was so busy trying to catch the mouse that he did not notice another bigger, older, oranger fox sneaking up on him. Then, the older fox pounced.

Rufus snarled. He pounced on top of the older fox again, and knocked the older fox onto the ground.

“Who are you?” Rufus growled.

The real question is who are you?” the other fox growled back.

“I’m Rufus,” Rufus growled sounding annoyed.

“Call me Ken,” Ken growled in response.

“Now!” Rufus barked loudly.

Bramble jumped off a small tree and landed directly on Ken holding him to the ground.

“What do you want?” Ken snarled.

“Let us stay here,” Bramble calmly barked.

“Only over there,” Ken barked as he pointed to the space in between nine trees. “No hunting, fishing, trashing, or making noise beyond those trees.

“Fine.” Rufus barked.

They walked to their territory space that they had earned. They sniffed around. It wasn’t too bad, considering that there was some rock, a whole pond, a rabbit hole, mouse holes, and quite a few trees. Rufus decided to mark his new territory. He put scents on the trees all around their territory, and then helped Bramble dig a nice large den. Then they hunted for turkey and when Bramble got tired, she went to eat berries.  

The next day, Rufus woke up to a howling sound. He peeked outside, and there was a coyote. He dashed back into the den. He nudged bramble to wake her up. Bramble peeked outside. There was a coyote. He was prowling around. Then, he sniffed the air. He smelled a strange scent. He started sniffing the ground. He started coming closer and closer to Rufus and Bramble’s den, when a bullet came out of nowhere and knocked the coyote onto the ground, unmoving. A human came running. “Bingo!” he said. As he bent down to pick up the coyote, he turned his head and saw the hole. He picked up his gun and aimed it into the hole, but before he could shoot, Rufus snached the gun from the human’s hands and brought it deep into the hole. The human was confused. He reached into the hole with his arm, but Bramble bit his hand. Then, he screamed and ran away.

For a few days, Rufus’ territory was peaceful, but that didn’t last long. Rufus woke up to a strange noise. He peeked out of the den and he saw a strange bird. It was dark green and gray and it had a thin black wing growing out of it’s head that was spinning around in circles. It had long talons, with only two claws on each talon. It’s tail was long, with a little feather on the end that was also spinning in circles. When it started to get closer to the ground, Rufus realized that a human was sitting on this bird. Then he realized that it was not a bird at all, It was a flying machine. It came closer and closer to the ground. As it came closer, there was more wind. Soon, the entrance of the tunnel was blown away from the wind. Then dust started blowing into the tunnel so much, that the tunnel became very small. Rufus and bramble frantically dug and dug, but there was no success.

“Follow me,” Rufus gently growled.  

Rufus rubbed the dust from the ground onto his back. Then, he rubbed some of the mud right at the entrance of the den on his back. They were the same color as the flying machine. They crept out of the den, Rufus in the lead. The flying machine was not flying now, and the human was busy planting a brown thing connected to wires in the ground.

Rufus and Bramble climbed onto the flying machine. Then, he hopped onto a small ledge that was slightly padded. Bramble hopped onto the other one. On the ledge, he could see a platform with round things that were sticking out. Then he turned. The human was walking back now. When he saw Bramble and Rufus his walk turned into a run. Bramble was so frightened that she lept onto the platform with round things that were sticking out.

Suddenly, the machine started going up. The human was far below on the ground. The machine was going higher and higher. When the machine went above the tallest trees, Bramble got scared. She put her paw on another circle. Then the machine stopped. It was hovering in mid-air. She had to remember that the big red circle was stop. She tried pressing another circle, but a human’s voice appeared. “Copter seven,” the human’s voice said. “Have you set off the bombs yet? I repeat, Have you set off the bombs yet?” then, the voice became unclear. “H-a-v-v-e y-y-o-u s-e-e-t o-o-f-f b-b-o-m-b-s-s y-y-e-t? I re-re-peat ” then, the voice got cut off.

“Don’t step on that one again,” Rufus yelped.

Bramble stepped on a different one. A giant black thing came out of the front of the flying machine. The black thing landed on a tree. Then there was a loud explosion and when the smoke cleared, all that was left of the tree was a big black stump. Bramble decided to press a different one. She stepped on another one, and that made the machine fly forward, and higher. Then she leaped onto the big red one. The machine stopped. Bramble decided to press another one. At least one of them must be down! The one that she stepped on seemed to not do anything. She was impatient. She pressed the same one again, and suddenly the floor slowly opened. Then, the padded ledges that Rufus and Bramble were sitting on changed. Very light puffy things got strapped onto the foxes’ backs. Then the padded ledges tilted. Rufus and Bramble fell off the machine. Above them, the machine flashed red, and it started to fall.

Bramble kicked and pushed, but could not get the puffy thing off of her back. Suddenly the puffy thing exploded, and Bramble started to fall very slowly. Rufus did the same. When Rufus and Bramble looked up, there was a big white flat thing above their heads that made them fall slowly. Those straps were actually helpful. Soon they were near the ground. They smoothly landed on a tree. Rufus pushed off the white flat thing, and climbed out of the basket he made with the straps. As he climbed to Bramble, he realized that not only had she also made a basket with the straps, but she had fallen asleep in her basket. He crawled under the white flat thing and pushed it off Bramble. Then Bramble woke up. She shook herself off, and started to climb down the tree. They stopped at a long branch with a hollow hole in the tree for the night.

The next day, when they woke up, they realized that they were sleeping in the same hole as a squirrel, except the squirrel was deeper into the hole that Rufus and Bramble. Rufus cornered the squirrel, but when the squirrel woke up, it immediately dashed in between Rufus’ legs. Rufus explored deeper, and there were more squirrels deeper in the tree. He managed to catch one, and he greedily ate it up. When he climbed out of the hole, Bramble was there waiting for him. She looked at him, and when she saw that he had eaten a squirrel, she looked at him smartly, looked down, and jumped off the branch into the water. Bramble was so fast she caught a fish when she dove down. Rufus rolled his eyes at her and made his way down the tree. When they got to the bottom, Bramble had caught four fish. Bramble ate one of them, but since she was so hungry, she ate two instead. Bramble and Rufus started wandering around the forest.

It started snowing. As Bramble and Rufus kept walking in the snow, they saw a clearing. It was the same clearing that they had been a month earlier. As they looked around, Rufus saw the giant gray and green machine with long oval tires and the star and the gun. When they walked further, Bramble saw the flying machine that the humans called a “Copter” lying sideways on the ground. After they walked even further, Rufus saw the tents, except some of them had fallen down. Bramble saw the place where her old den that got exploded by the bomb was. Then, they walked past their old territory with the coyote rotting away in the snow. The forest was now peaceful, and this is how the Foxes’ war ended.

 

Epilogue

Soon, Bramble and Rufus got used to the forest. When they were exploring the area around their newly built den, they came to a giant hollow tree. They peeked inside. Inside of the hollow tree there were two little fox pups. They looked scared. Rufus cautiously sniffed them. There were no scents on them. That means they were probably abandoned. Bramble placed her tail around them as a blanket and one of them made a purring sound. Then she tore off a bit of fish and placed it in front of them. The second one ate it up. Bramble gave the whole fish to them. They finished it in no time. Then, Rufus went to go get more food for them, while Bramble stayed to watch them. Once Rufus was back, he had caught a chipmunk. He placed it in front of the fox pups, and they gobbled it up. Then, Bramble came out. She had dug into the tree so the tunnel could be deeper. Then she gently picked up the fox pups and brought them into the deepest part of the den. It was getting dark, and snow was falling, so with the fox pups huddled around them for warmth, they went to sleep.

 

The New Dentist (Part II)

“Mom, why do we have to get braces?!” I yell at her. I am not happy at all.

“You have to get braces. I don’t,” she answers, as if nothing was wrong. How does she do it?

I’ll look hideous. Headgear stinks. My friend Lipa had to wear it. She looked so bad. I can’t shave all of my big hair. Then, I’ll look like I time traveled.

Mom could have at least told me why I had to switch dentists, or not switch and have two. I should have known Mom’s little plan. I was super suspicious of her. Why didn’t I ask? Because, she knew I was suspicious? Now, I can’t help but feel really mad at not just Mom, but even myself. How could I let her get to me?

“Ninaloo!” I hear her call my name. It may be Ninaloo, but I go by Nina. I’ve told her that a million times.

“CALL ME NINA. NOT NINALOO! I’m not coming,” I say.

That’s when Mom sees how mad I really am! So, is she going to do anything? Of course not. She’s a mom. What’s she going to do, magically make my teeth perfect? Even if she did have those powers, she’d probably still let headgear do the work. Just because we’re rich does not mean we don’t need headgear.

Mom always says that I’m fortunate. Some kids don’t get headgear and have real problems with their jaws and may not be able to eat. Too bad. Mom’s also a dentist. Bleh. I hope when I’m an adult or go to an adult dentist, I don’t have to go to her. By then, I think I can pick my own dentist.

Don’t you readers think so? I mean, it’s just so unfair. Mom does not understand at all. It’s frustrating.

 

Zoe

Chapter 1

One day, Zoe asked her parents if she could go see the wizards. They said “Yes” and asked her if they could go along.

“Sure, you can,” said Zoe.
“We’re here!” said Zoe, ten minutes later.

“Hi Richard. Hi Bob. Hi Coco, and hi to seventy six more of you,” Zoe said to the wizards, who all return her greeting.

“This is my mom, and this is my dad. I think you can remember them,” she continued. Her mom tried not to freak out, so she took a deep breath in and out. Her dad shook a wizard’s hand. Zoe’s mom was nervous that the wizards would harm her daughter, but her dad told her to calm down.

“If they try to hurt her,” he muttered, “remember, I used to take karate classes. I still know a few skills.” He tried to do a backflip while kicking, but he fell right on his face.

“Are you okay, sweetie?” said Zoe’s mom. Zoe started to laugh.

“What are you laughing at?” her parents asked simultaneously.


Chapter 2

When they got back home, they ate dinner and got ready for bed. When everyone was in bed, Zoe blew up a balloon and put it on her pillow. Then, she put the covers over the balloon so it would look like she was sleeping under the covers. She snuck out the window went to the wizards.

But, on her way, she heard footsteps behind her. She turned around but didn’t see anything. The footsteps got louder and louder. When she turned around again, she saw someone with a black mask on. He picked her up and put her in a van.


Chapter 3

He put tape all over her except for her hands and arms. When he left the room, she remembered that she had scissors in her pocket. She cut the tape off her and ran home. She slammed the door and put her hands against the wall, panting loudly.

She has a lot of questions in her head, like “Why was he trying to kill me? Why? Does he only kill kids, or adults too?” Then she ran to the wizards.

Fifteen minutes later, she arrived at their dwelling. “Wizards! Can you please give me a potion that makes someone fall asleep?”

“Okay,” the wizards said. And then she asked if they could give her a potion that would make someone change their personality so that they stopped kidnapping and killing people. Soon after, when she found a cup of coffee with a lid (so that it would look like normal coffee), she poured the personality-changing potion into it, because she knew that the guy loved coffee –– she had seen him dancing and bobbing his head while drinking five cups of coffee.


Chapter 4

Zoe knocked on the door of the van and placed the cup of coffee in front of the van door. Then the man opened the door and saw the coffee, but he didn’t know it contained a potion.

She went to the other side of the van so that he wouldn’t see her. That’s when she saw in blood letters the words “BE CAREFUL I’M DANGEROUS.”

Nonetheless, he drank the potion and fell asleep. Then, he woke up and noticed that he was a different person. He felt like a nice guy –– not a killer or a kidnaper. He danced all around and was heading for Zoe.


Chapter 5

Zoe took a few steps back. She was afraid he would try to kidnap her again. However, he came over and gave her a hug, but she was still scared so she ran to her house.
Zoe went to bed and tried to forget about what had happened. She couldn’t fall asleep. She felt very confused. She picked up her phone and called 911, and she told the person on the line that there was a guy who tried to kidnap her.

She saw a timer and realized that it said “five hours left until this potion will expire,” which meant that in five hours he might try to kidnap someone else. She wanted him to go to jail immediately.

Five hours later, the man said to himself, “What am I doing behind bars?!”

Zoe said, “Oh, maybe someone called 911. I wonder who did.”

He replied, “You did it!!!”

 

Gummies in Times

gummy-1

Once upon a time, there was a world full of candy. It was currently a Saturday night, and all the candies were coming together for a party, as they always did on Saturday nights. There were many different types of candies, like gummy bears, jelly beans, gummy worms, and many other types of candies. At the party, there was cake, games, drinks, and many other things to do. Everyone always had so much fun! The gummy bears hosted this one, and everyone always loved when the gummy bears hosted the parties. The party was coming to an end, and everyone was leaving to go home. They were getting ready for the next night where they would be getting together with their own candy.

There was a little gummy bear called Gum-Gum. He loved movies about time travel, and he wanted to show the gummy bears the beauty of time traveling. He’d always been dreaming of time traveling, but he didn’t want to do it alone. He wanted to show them so that he could go with someone or some people, so that he would have an adventure with friends. He would be hosting the gummy bears’ party tomorrow night.

He started to make a list of what he would need for all his friends, and his relatives, and all the other gummy bears. He picked a movie they would watch, made sweets, hung up pretty posters, and set up some games, until he was satisfied with the work he had done. The gummy bears split from their family when they are three years old, because they can take on the world then, so he lived alone.

The next day, it was time for his party. Everybody was having so much fun, then he called everyone to come watch a movie. The movie was called “GUMMY IN TIME” and it was about a gummy bear who went back in time to see many beautiful sights, meet many different people, and have an adventure. At the end of the movie, it was time for dinner. At the dinner table, they were talking about going back in time themselves. In their home they weren’t able to travel anywhere, except for where they were. They didn’t have airplanes or time machines or anything like that, so they wanted to build a time machine so they could go to different places, to different years, to different months, to different days, to different weeks. They then started making plans for where they were going to go.

Monday morning, all the gummy bears were all still at Gum-Gum’s house, yawning because they stayed up so late talking. They started to think about building the machine, and some bears started to go out and get some parts.

“How about we go tell Alaboo, the ruler of Candy World, about our idea?” asked Gum-Gum. Everybody cheered in agreement. Gum-Gum and two of his friends, Gummy and Gumby, went off to tell Alaboo.

“Sir Alaboo,” said Gum-Gum, “We have a message from the Gummy Bear Community.”

“And what is that message you have for me?” asked Alaboo.

gummy-2

“We watched a movie last night at the Gummy Bear party about time travel, and we want to try it!” said Gumby enthusiastically.

“No way! You’re staying right here in Candy World!” yelled Alaboo.

“We shall time travel,” replied Gummy.

“No!” yelled Alaboo.

“Yes!” said Gum-Gum.

“No!” replied Alaboo.

“YES!” screamed Gumby.

“Definitely not! I declare war on the gummy bears!” said Alaboo. “Guards! Send them out!” The bears decided they had to tell the community, so they rushed home, full of fear.

They held a Gummy Bear Community meeting, and decided to put aside the time travel project in favor of preparing for the war. They went to get some weapons, because nobody in the stores knew there was a war yet. They decided to tell some candies about their time travel idea, and they joined their team. Some candies did not like the idea, and went to joined Alaboo’s team. They built shields, and took self-defense classes. They wrote a night guard schedule, and went to sleep with the night guard on duty.

In the middle of the night, all the gummy bears were woken up by a bell. The other team had started to attack. Everybody ran out of their houses, grabbing their shields and weapons. The night guard had already started to fight a gummy worm. It was shot by the night guard, and it fell to the ground. Everybody on the other team looked, because they did not expect to get taken down this early. In this moment, the gummy bears took down two more worms. Alaboo was watching from his castle, and was very disappointed in his team. Gum-Gum accidentally shot a bullet, and took down a jelly bean. They had taken down a good part of Alaboo’s army. Even though Gum-Gum had shot a jelly bean (on accident), he was having quite a hard time holding the gun.

“Gum-Gum!” Gum Gum heard his name being called.

“Gum-Gum, watch out! There’s a bullet coming at you! You’ve got to limbo it.” So Gum Gum limboed the bullet. The other team was trying harder to win. Gum-Gum needed to change this. He picked up his gun (even though it was very heavy) and shot it. He took down a Sour Patch Kid. So the other team was starting to get mad. They were starting to lose. They wanted to try harder. They shot and they took down one gummy bear. But that was only one of them. So Gum-Gum shot three bullets randomly in three different directions and each bullet got down another candy. One of them got down a gummy worm, one of them got down a jelly bean, and the last one took down a gummy bear that went to the other side (because he didn’t want to time travel). People started high-fiving Gum-Gum.

“Get back to work,” he said. “If we want to win, we must stop high-fiving each other and get back to work.” And then everybody started shooting randomly and each one took down five gummy worms except for Gum-Gum, who took down three jelly beans and two gummy worms.

“Watch out, Gum-Gum,” Gum-Gum heard Gumby saying. “There is a gummy worm coming toward you!” Then Gum-Gum jumped into the air and shot his gun towards the ground and killed the gummy worm.

There was another one coming towards him. He jumped up into the air again and killed that one. From the side there was a Sour Patch Kid running towards him. He shot that too. Finally, the other team surrendered. Then all the gummy bears went inside to celebrate winning the war. But then Gum-Gum said, “Why didn’t Alaboo want us to be able to leave candy world? Why doesn’t he like us traveling?”

Then Gumby said, “Yeah, why?”

Then a gummy bear called Gamby said, “None of us know!”

“Then we shall figure it out,” said Gummy. Gamby says, “But first we shall get back to our project.”

“No we shall not. We have to figure this out first,” said Gum-Gum.

“When the war was happening, this is what Alaboo felt like (to the Star Wars theme song) gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum gum guuuuuuuuum,” sang Gum-Gum!

“Gum-Gum, let’s get back to work on figuring this out. It’s your question,” said Gamby.

Then a gummy bear called Gumby said, “Everyone knows that I used to work for Alaboo, right?”

“Yeah, but it is not time to brag about it,” said Gamby.

“No, that’s not what I am saying! He has a diary!” said Gumby.

“So what!” said Gamby.

“It might say why he didn’t want us to leave candy world!” said Gumby.

“Great idea, Gumby,” said Gum-Gum, “But who will go?”

“We’ll have to figure that out,” said Gumby.

Then a gummy bear called Glamby said “I’ll go.”

“Me too,” said Gum-Gum “but we need one more gummy bear to come with us.” Then a gummy worm slithhhereddd in without any gummy bears noticing…

He shouted “I WANT TO…”

“AAAHHH” screamed all the gummy bears. Then they got their weapons and hid.

Then the gummy worm finished his sentence, “I WANT TO TIME TRAVEL WITH YOU! I killed a Sour Patch Kid, a jelly bean, and a gummy worm. Oh, and by the way, my name is Okoh!”

“Okay Okoh, but before we start making our time machine, we have a question for you: why didn’t Alaboo want to let us leave Candy World?” asked Gum-Gum.

“Oh, that’s because he wants to have the power over you, and if you find a better place that you like more than Candy World then he won’t have the power over you, ‘cause he’ll be here and he’ll have the power here. If you’re somewhere else, he won’t have the power over you.”

“You have to give us a reason why we should trust you, ‘cause you’re a gummy worm,” said Gum-Gum.

“Well I wouldn’t have told you that information, and I wouldn’t have killed those three candies if I wasn’t trustworthy, and I have the candies that I killed to show you that I’m trustworthy so you can believe me that I killed them. So here you go,” said Okoh.

“Okay, we can believe you. And also, you have to put those dead candies into your bag again! It’s a little creepy,” said Gum-Gum. “Okay, now we must show you our time machine we built and start going back in time.”

“Yay!” said Okoh.

So everybody piled into the time machine and Gum-Gum pressed the buttons randomly and it ended up that they went back in time to 1780. (Oh and by the way, the year they were in was 1932). WHOOOSSSHHH went the time machine.

“WELCOME TO 1780,” said the time machine. Finally they landed. Then the time machine said, “You have reached your destination. The time in 1780 right now is three o’clock. So everyone turn your watch to three o’clock.” Everyone did.

“I love this time machine,” said Okoh, “Now how do you open the door?”  

Gum Gum wasn’t close enough to the door to open it, but he said, “There’s a password on the door to open it. Press red, then green, then yellow, then red again, then green three times.” So Okoh did that and the door opened.

“WHOOOAAA!”

“Does 1780 look amazing?” said Gum-Gum.

“That’s not what I’m WHOA-ing about,” said Okoh.

“Then what are you WHOA-ing about?” said Gum-Gum.

“How you open the door!” said Okoh.

“Can’t you just get out already?!” said Gum-Gum.

“It’s a little squishy in here,” said Gumby.”

“C’mon, give him some time to WHOA,” said Gamby.

“Okay Gamby,” said Gumby.

“Does my dress look good for this time period?” said Gamby.

“No” said Okoh.

“Really?” said Gamby.

“Really,” said Okoh.

All the women had their legs and arms covered. The men were wearing very fancy suits, like crazy fancy. Everyone groaned, ‘cause the women gummy bears were wearing very short tank top dresses and the men gummy bears were wearing black tank tops and white pants.

Then Gamby said, “Y’know I said we should give him some time to WHOA — let’s just get out of here already!”

“I need a new dress. We all need new clothes,” said Gum-Gum.  So everybody just pushed by him and ran to stores to buy new clothes. The gummy bear men bought very fancy suits. The gummy bear women bought very fancy dresses that covered their legs and their arms. Everybody met together in the end and planned what they were gonna do in the year 1780, but nobody really knew a lot about 1780 (such as myself).

“How about we go meet George Washington!” said the twins Uku and Bom Bom. They were Sour Patch Kids who came to the gummy bear side. So everybody ran off towards his house, which was very near.

“I heard he had over fifty dogs in his life!” said Uku.

“You don’t have to brag about what you know,” said Bom Bom.

“This is boring,” said Gum-Gum. “I thought time travel was gonna be fun! Let’s just get to George Washington already to make it fun.”

“Yeah!” said Gamby, and so did Gumby. “I heard he never went to college. Maybe we can teach him a little bit about what you learn in college!” said Gamby.

“Stop trying to brag about what you know, Gamby. Let’s just go meet George Washington already!” said Bom Bom.

 

Two days later.

“I thought you said it was gonna be a quick walk to George Washington’s house, Gamby,” said Gum Gum.

“Come on, we’re almost there, I cannot even see it!” said Gamby.

“Well then, can you see it already? You’re the only one who gets to walk without carrying the time machine.”

“Well I can’t even see it already, we’re so close I can’t even see it! And I told you that a million times. Actually I only told you three times. But who cares! I told you millions and threes of times.”

“This is not very fun time travel. Now, I see his house already! Yay!” said Gamby. Then, she started running.

“I’m getting so annoyed! Where’s Okoh?”

“Right here,” said Okoh, sticking his head up from under the time machine.

“Oh no! He’s under the time machine! Everybody pick it up!” And then Okoh came up from under the time machine, and then everybody piled in with him. He closed the door with the password that he loved doing and then they went back to 1932 in Candy World.

“I wonder how much fun Gamby’s having in 1780 with George Washington,” said Gum-Gum.

 

Meanwhile…

Gamby was with George Washington, leading him out to meet her friends, when she saw that everybody had left and the time machine was nowhere.

“Oh no! They went back to 1932! Can you help me build a time machine to go back to Candy World in 1932 with my friends?” said Gamby.

“Only if I can come with you,” said George Washington.

“Okay, you can, but I just need help! I want to get back to my friends.” Gamby and George Washington went to Candy World while Gum-Gum went to Alaboo’s castle and told him that he was right all along, and that time travel wasn’t fun, because it was boring and he liked his cozy bed more than other time periods.

Alaboo revealed that he had stuck a video camera into Gamby and he said he wanted to time travel because Gamby looked like she had so much fun. When they were gone, Alaboo had made his own time machine and he had stepped into the time machine and went off time traveling.  

George Washington and Gamby came back. Everybody hugged Gamby and said hi to George Washington.

“He’s very nice,” said Gum-Gum to Gamby.

Then everybody had a party together because it was Saturday night. Without Alaboo.

 

The New Dentist (Part I)

Nina

I’ll code after I do my homework. My mom always says do your homework before you code. Today’s different. I have to go to the dentist. I hate the dentist. It takes so long to get there, even though they only check your teeth for five minutes. My dentist is way too serious. He has this way of “amusing” his patients. He’s not very good at it. His idea of amusing is when he says, “I’m a plane coming through your mouth.”

How babyish! Today I’m relieved I have a new dentist. Her name is Catie. I think it stands for Catherine. I hope she has a sense of humor.

It turns out she’s super nice. She also has a great sense of humour. At first she was a bit crazy but now she’s super fun! She always finds ways to amuse me. Once she even said, “Being a dentist is like being a super smart nerd.”

Sometimes I just don’t get her. When I asked my mom, “What did she mean mom?”

She said, “Ask her yourself.”

I wasn’t trying to be funny but it might have come out that way because I said, “I can’t. I sound like blo blah glab. So mom, what are you going to do?”

“I’ll tell her to make more sense.”

So next time I saw her she said, “My dentist likes pizza.”

“Whatever,” I said. I hate pizza. It’s sooo gross.

Next week mom said, “We have to go to the dentist.”

I answered, “Why do we go to the dentist every month?”

“I thought you liked your new dentist,” Mom said.

“Mom, is there something wrong with my teeth?”

“Darling, stop complaining. She’s just getting to know you.”

So off we went to Catie’s office yet again. Hooray. Mom said we had to. The car smelled like chocolate & grape tylenol. Yuck!

Mom why is there grape Tylenol in the car?” I asked.

“There is no Tylenol in the car,” Mom stated. I did not care. Did she think I would? When we arrived, I saw my friend Lipa coming out of the office.

“Lipa, your dentist is Dr. John,” (my old dentist). “Why are you here?” I asked.

 

Mom

Nina always is complaining about the dentist. She hates Dr. John. She thinks he’s super babyish. Nina doesn’t really understand why he is so serious. It’s because he really cares about his job. Today I took her to the orthodontist. She thinks Catie’s a dentist instead of being an orthodontist. She won’t go to the orthodontist so she may flip out when I tell her Catie’s an orthodontist. In the office Nina finds all the machines overwhelming. She can’t figure out why there are so many machines in the office. I think Catie’s a bit annoyed with us. She gives Nina lots of x-rays. Nina is getting really suspicious. I think I’m going to need some help. I guess we’ll just have to wait for Mike to come home from his business trip. I have no idea what to do.

It’s a disgrace. Nina is driving me crazy. I think she’ll never like me, if not love me. It’s crazy her feelings depend on what I make her do. It’s really annoying she doesn’t understand why braces are so important. I wish she knew what I meant. Sometimes it’s really hard to know she doesn’t always love me like she should. She should think about her actions. I can’t really see in the grown up world. After all, her 13th birthday is coming up.

On the phone with Mike:

“Hi Mike. What should we do for her birthday?” I asked him.

And he answered, “Don’t do anything.” He hung up. I guess I’m not getting much out of this phone call.

“Should I call my mom?” I asked myself. No. Mom may be napping. Shoot, she’s home, I thought. I really was hoping she’d ask for a sleepover and of course she comes straight up to my room.

Whaaaa.

 

Catherine

Jeez, Lily’s crazy. Why do I have to be “a dentist.” I think that Lily should just tell Ninaloo, A.K.A Nina, I hate being the new amusing dentist. It stinks. I’m thinking about quitting because of them. I’m an orthodontist for her best friend who had to wear headgear. She thinks it looks hideous. She’s turning 13. I think she can handle knowing I’m an orthodontist. I also don’t see why Lily made me write an entry in the braces diary.

By the way, Lily is Nina’s mom. Nina complains about having machines in the room she’s in. She’s a scaredy cat. Once I was pricking at a loose tooth and she flipped out. I was an hour behind because of her. Too bad Nina’s mom was at the store. The worst time was when I molded her retainer. I put edible silly putty in her mouth and I said it was an X-ray. She thought I was crazy. What can I say. My one question is why Lily won’t let me be serious? Lily just tells me to be humorous. I really hate Lily. She’s completely crazy. She needs to get more sleep. I don’t know. Not that I care. What’s her problem? I can’t see why she is so outrageous. Sometimes it gets overwhelming. Well, here they are. Today I’m doing a normal tooth check. I don’t do this kind of stuff. It’s not my expertise.

I think Lily has lost reality. Lipa is coming to the orthodontist before Nina. I’m so telling her to tell Nina who I really am. I did, and she didn’t listen to me of course.

 

Dr. John

Why does Nina hate me? It makes no sense. Lily says everything with Catie is going well. I’m losing a lot of money since she stopped coming to my office. Thank goodness she’s coming back today. Last night I was on the phone with Lily.

“What should I tell Nina when she comes here instead of Catie’s office?” I asked, and of course she gave me the worst answer she could probably possibly give.   

“I’ll deal with that. You really don’t have to worry.” I worried anyway. Guess what Nina’s first question was when she walked in? “Why am I at Dr. John’s office and not Catie’s?” I went straight over to Lily.

“You said you’d take care of this!!!” I screamed at Lily. All of a sudden Nina got sort of shy and quiet. I was getting really irritated. Why did I ever want them back? Guess what Lily answered?

“I did. It’s just Nina. Oh, she’s suspicious of you.”

“How do you know that, Lilyann Carlee?!!!” I screamed again.

“I’m her mom. I’ve lived with her her whole life,” she answered quite calmly compared to my tone. I hate Lily. Catie and I have been communicating about Lily. We both agree about her. I wish we were done with them. Too bad Nina has to be 16 to start going to an adult dentist. Too bad she’s only turning 13. I wish I kept my old job. I can’t wait for them to move. Which I don’t think they’re thinking about doing. Too bad. That would be nice though. Catie and I can only wish. When will our lives get any bit easier? It’s hard to go through this drama. Can’t Nina be just a bit more responsible? (sighs)

That night I was on the phone with Catie.

“Hi Catie, how are Nina and Lily doing at your office?” I asked her.

“Annoying, of course. Shouldn’t Nina be old enough to handle braces?” She sounded very annoyed.

“How about I write Lily a letter?” I asked, hoping to cheer her up.

“Let me take care of the letter.” I bet she was smirking. I think we had set a trap. A good one. Hopefully she could pull off her part. I wish I could write our plan but that wouldn’t be appropriate because Lily and Nina both write in this journal. I don’t think Nina cares about what anyone writes, even hers. All I know is she’ll be really mad at me later today when I show up at Catie’s office. I don’t think Lily will either. I’m really worried what will happen. I think Catie and I both have a risk of losing our jobs. I hope that won’t happen. I’m not very good at interrogating. I know Nina is. I hope I can get around it. I have to go now. I’ll ship it to Mike ( Nina’s father ) in Las Vegas. Him, I can tolerate.

 

Mike

Lily may be the worst wife anyone could have. I wish I could be in charge of this family, not that I care. It’s only that Lily didn’t make much money to begin with. Now that she’s fired, she makes no money at all. I have to make all the money for nothing in return. That’s the only reason I was so rude to her that night on the phone. I really care about Nina and I want her to lead a good life. Lily is planning all these stupid braces. I wish she’d pay more attention to being fired. I hate her idea to get Nina braces. Every orthodontist Nina’s been to says she has perfect teeth. I really wish I could be around Nina more. I wish Lily and I could just get a divorce and be done. I love Nina. I want to get a divorce while Lily doesn’t have a job because then I’d  be the only responsible parent.  

Nina

Dad and I have been looking into jobs for dentists in Maine for Mom. Dad’s trying to get a divorce. I hope this all works out for Dad and me. Mom is so mean. I know Dad’s trying his best to handle Mom but it’s not working out too well. I hope Dad solves all these problems.  

 

The One and the Best Girl: Books IV and V

BOOK IV

Boom boom!!!!

“What is that sound? It is loud!’’

Boom boom  

“It’s the volcano. Run!!!! Run RUN,” said Papa.

Papa and Daisy kept on running!!!!

(Pause: Hi! My name is Daisy. If you watched my other stories, I moved to NYC but I wanted to hang with my grandpa (Papa), so my mom and dad said that for the summer I can stay with my papa! Papa lives near Pompeii. Back to the story.)

BOOM BOOM!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! They swam and swam and swam! The lava got closer and closer… It was right behind them. Papa ran out of breath. He stopped for a second, but the lava was right behind him. He didn’t know what to do, so I picked him up and ran! I ran out of breath.

Haaaa haaaa haaaaa haaaaa I did not know what to do… The lava got  closer… my breath got more and more heavy…

I ran as fast as I could but i could not run any more.

“Hot dogs.’’

“who said that?’’ I said. I looked in front of me. There was a island. I ran to the water side and I swam. Me and my papa swam as fast as we could.

We got to the island. We never in 1,00,00,0,00000,0000,0000,000,9999,99999,555,5555,5555,555,44 years knew about this island. We walked around and looked for the hot dog guy. There he was right in front of us. “Free Hot Dogs!” he said.

He looked like an alien. He had five eyes and a small mouth. His eyes were gold and he had a unibrow. He was very short. He was as short as a dog. I went over and asked, “Why do you have a unibrow?”

He said, “Hello to you too. I will tell you a story. Before I tell the story, would you like a free hot dog?”

I said, “No thank you. Tell the story! Tell the story!”

“Here I begin, I was three, my brother was trying to teach me how to do a unibrow. I didn’t know how to. I wanted to prove to people at school that they were wrong and that I could do a unibrow. Everybody laughed and made of me because I was so short, so I went to school the next day and I showed everybody. That night I tried to do it again. I lifted up one eyebrow and I did it. The next day I went to school and I showed my friend who always made fun of me because I was short. Then I showed him my unibrow. I could not re-do it. And that is the end of my story.’’

Papa couldn’t really speak. His eyes were wide open. I think I could see kind of his brain. In my own brain, I saw him doing that exactly.

Then we said “thank you.’’ Then we left. We got a boat and started to sail. We saw this girl. She looked quite like my mom. I called my mom, nobody picked up. So we sailed over to the island that looked familiar to me and we walked through it. “We are home!’’’ We feel so happy to be home.

 

BOOK V

 

5/3/16

Dear diary,

Today at school we got a script for a play. I am so excited. The play is ’’Into the Woods,’’ and I did it in ten minutes. I know it’s crazy, but I am so good at it. I have one sentence memorized. I have one month till the show! I am so excited! I am bad at writing in a diary, but at least I know I am bad. I got you last summer with my grandfather, so I finally decided it was time to starting writing! I love it! My grandfather is here ’cause of Pompeii, but in the end, I loved him here! Each day he picked me up from school and we went to the ice cream store!

The Hair got my prince and at the end we will get married! We talked about it at lunch! I am way more excited than him! But tonight before bed I am going to practice one  or two more times. My dad said to go to sleep when mom or dad turns out the lights I have to go to sleep. But just this once I’m going to practice!

 

5/10/16

Dear diary,

Today at school we got to practice five times, and it was so cool! Tomorrow night I am going to see Hamilton! I am going to wear a glittery dress that has a rose on it. I have a writing class and I do not want to go. But I have to. :(

 

5/11/16

Dear diary,

Today I went to Hamilton, and it was…

Cool

Scary

Funny

Fun

Long

Sad

Awesome

And very very sleepy at one part!

 

5/12/16

Dear diary,

Today at school my teacher said we are moving the date of the play to May 27th. I said “NOOO!’’ It was so bad! :0 I stuck out my tongue in my mind. :p So tonight I practiced so many times!

 

5/27/16

Dear diary,

I did the play. It was so fun! I got a trophy! It was so fun!

 

The Peculiar Elephant

Once, there was a weird elephant. He had a long, smooth nose, which was gray, just like other elephants. But the weird thing was he also had butterfly ears!

He did not like his butterfly ears because they were so embarrassing, and everyone at his jungle elephant school laughed at him. But the elephant doctor, Annie, said there was no way to get rid of them.

He walked past someone’s garden, and then, he saw a butterfly fly away and thought it would be cool to try and fly.

At first, he couldn’t really manage to fly. He jumped off a high roof. He flapped his wings a few times, but he still dropped. It felt painful, and he almost sprained his leg. He asked the butterfly to teach him how to fly.

The elephant followed the butterfly’s instructions thoroughly, and after one time, he could fly. After the second time, he flew for a few minutes, but then, he dropped again. So he realized he could fly, but he needed to learn from the butterfly. But after he practiced, he still didn’t know how to fly for a long time.

First, he told his classmates he could fly. He said, ”I… I can really fly!”

His classmates did not believe him, so they said, ”If you say you can really fly, then prove it!”

He took a deep breath, but he was so nervous that his legs were shaking. And he did not manage to fly! He jumped, even though he was nervous, but then, he forgot to flap his ear wings and dropped. He felt so embarrassed.

His classmates snorted and said, “You liar, ha ha ha!”    

He stayed after school in the playground, and when everyone was gone, he practiced again and again by jumping off a high wall. He put a mattress on the ground so it wouldn’t hurt when he fell, and he kept practicing because he really wanted to prove to his classmates that he could really fly.

When he came home, his parents were very worried. They said, “Where were you this whole time?¨

The elephant said, “If I told you, I am very sure you will not trust me!” Then, he walked away with a sad face. He did not sleep well that night. He had a lot of pressure, and he also kept having nightmares.

The next day, he went to school with a tired face. One of his classmates passed by him, laughed and walked away.

The elephant was getting more nervous than before. When it was recess time, his classmates challenged the elephant to fly again. The elephant thought about what the butterfly had told him, and he jumped. He jumped so high, that the classmates could not see him anymore. The elephant flapped his wings, he soared high up in the sky, and he landed safely on the ground.

His classmates were shocked, and they said sorry for laughing at him. The elephant was very popular now! He also performed to his parents, and they were so proud of him. He lived happily ever after. All because of his wonderful and powerful butterfly ears!

 

Treemania

The pirates were being chased by the Eminadlian army. Eminadle was a terrible country ruled by the terrible king, King Fariton. King Farition was a ruthless King who wanted perfection. Every thing he did was, and had to be, perfect. Eminadle was a big kingdom that also specialized in perfection.

Now, these pirates that I was telling you about were led by the great Captain Madoline. Captain Madoline was a female (surprise, surprise) and led a crew of pirates called the Frustrated Failure. Their ship was called The Last Hope. The pirates spent their time raiding other ships and being chased by the Eminadlian army. Let me introduce you to the crew:  

There were twenty of them, including Captain Madoline. Captain Madoline was the bravest captain that sailed the seven seas. She was daring and adventurous. Bob was the brainiac of the crew and always knew what to do. Joe was the cook and cooked excellent meals. Mary was perky and always happy to help out. Bessie originally came from a ranch before she ran away to join the Frustrated Failure. Kate was mostly below deck and helped the seasick pirates. Billy kept an eye out for dangerous sea creatures. Sally kept an eye out for obstacles and other things the ship might bump into. James was always at the mast and kept an eye out for land, as well as the Eminadlian army. Ruth was the “maid” and made the beds and did the laundry. Dink was the cabin boy and swept the floor and helped the cook. Sam was the best with weapons and helped the other pirates train and exercise.  John was very friendly and came to the Frustrated Failure in search of adventure. Josh was the cook’s assistant and was very mischievous. Sara was the treasure keeper, had blue-streaked hair, and wanted the Vikings to win the Super Bowl. Spencer was the prison guard and was very easy going. Lillie was first mate and was very happy. Alex kept track of all the parrots and was called the Parrotman. Katie was happy and always cheerful. Steven was the shark bait. The pirates tied him up and lowered him in the water every time they wanted to catch a shark (they pulled him up just in time though).

***

One day, Sam said, “I am tired of running away. Why can’t we just stand and fight?”  This comment was met with murmurs of agreement. All of the crew was tired of running and ready for some excitement and fun.  

Bob piped up and said, “I have read in one of my books that there is an island called  Treemania. Why don’t we go there and fight?”  

Then, Captain Madoline came to where they were having their conversation. “What is Treemania?” she inquired.  

“Treemania is a giant treehouse that has all sorts of booby traps. How Treemania works, nobody knows. The treehouse seems to run on a secret power and is basically a giant fortress that protects people. It was made by the great magician, Allen Dor, to protect his family. In the fortress, there are ten levels. Once you pull the lever on the top level, every fifteen minutes, the treehouse will shake, and you must find something marked in blue to hold onto or to go into.”  Bob was a little out of breath after giving an explanation like that.  

“Let’s do it!”  cried Captain Madoline. “A new adventure awaits the Frustrated Failure!”  

“Hooray!” shouted the crew.  

“But be warned,” said Bob. “The treehouse is very hard to find because it is placed on a small, moving island that moves along in a large circle around the Bahamas.”

So the Frustrated Failure set sail for the Bahamas.

Finally, after a week of searching, James yelled, “Land ho!”

***

All the sailors excitedly peered over the edge of the ship. Behold! Before them was an island, and on it was the biggest tree they had ever seen. It took up the whole island!  And perched on top of that tree was a giant treehouse! The treehouse was built of strong wood and stone and was ten stories high, just as Bob had said. On the trunk of the tree to the treehouse was a stone staircase that was finely carved and decorated. The pirates were in awe as they stared at the treehouse. Captain Madoline parked The Last Hope on the island so it would not get left behind when the island started moving again.  

The crew gingerly climbed the staircase and entered Treemania. Treemania was even bigger than it had seemed on the outside. Inside the treehouse was all sorts of stuff. A giant set of monkey bars hung over a large gap. Under the floor, the crew heard sounds of splashing and grunting: crocodiles. The stairs were like the ones that they had used to climb up to Treemania. Each level had a different obstacle.  

The second level’s obstacle was a giant trapeze with platforms high above the ground, and if you fell, it was certain death (and crocodiles.)  

The third level had a maze that had cubbies and random spots colored in blue.  

The fourth was open, and the floor was covered in tiles, some blue and some not.  

The fifth level looked like a giant chess board with massive chess pieces. Some of the squares on the chessboard were blue.  

The sixth floor was just doors, but to confuse people, some of the doors were painted blue.  

The seventh floor was empty except for statues and some blue cubbies.  

The eighth floor was like a giant foosball set. Some of the players were red and had red tiles around them, and some were blue and had blue tiles around them.

The ninth floor was completely barren except for some patches marked in blue.  

The tenth floor was made up entirely of stairs, some of which were blue.

As the crew made their way up the steps, Captain Madoline kept a watchful eye out of each window for the Eminadlian army and King Farition. When they reached the tenth floor, which was helpfully stocked with a spyglass and window, Captain Madoline and the crew started searching for the switch to start the magic when they needed it. Finally, Sara found it beneath the top step, and it took the whole crew to lift the heavy step.

Suddenly, James, who was looking out of the window, exclaimed, “The Eminadlian army is here!” Everyone started panicking.  

“Calm down!” Captain Madoline yelled. “Nobody is going to get anything done by panicking.” The pirates quieted down immediately. “Sara, the minute they get in here, can you and Lillie flip the switch and make sure that the stair is fully covering the switch? We don’t want the pirates to see the switch and turn Treemania off. The rest of you, split up and go to different levels. Don’t waste any time. Let’s go, go, go!”  

The pirates split up and ran in different directions. Captain Madoline rushed downstairs, where the army was already climbing up the steps. King Farition strode in (perfectly of course), and Captain Madoline yelled, “Now!”

All the way upstairs, Sara and Lillie quickly flipped the switch and covered it with the step. The Eminadlian army swarmed into the treehouse. Captain Madoline and Bob fought for their lives while hanging from the monkey bars. After a while, Captain Madoline was dueling eight soldiers, and the rest of the crew were battling four.  

Suddenly, the treehouse gave a mighty shake, and most of the soldiers in the army fell onto their knees. Captain Madoline and Bob were hanging onto the only blue bars.  They sighed in relief as the other bars shook violently, making the soldiers fall into the lake filled with crocodiles.  

Meanwhile, on the second level, Katie and Joe were swinging from the trapeze and knocking down pirates. When the treehouse shook, Katie and Joe almost lost their grip, but they didn’t, and a trapdoor opened up, and all the soldiers fell through into a cage.

On the third floor, Ruth and Mary were running for their lives in the maze. When the treehouse shook, Ruth scrambled into a cubby while Mary ran into a spot covered in blue paint. A second later, logs came tumbling down into the maze, crushing the Eminadlian army.  

At the same time, on the fourth floor, Kate and Alex were fighting back to back, taking care to only step on the blue tiles. Every now and then, a parrot would fly out of Alex’s shirt pocket and bite a soldier’s finger. Later, when the tower shook, huge spikes poked out of all the tiles except the blue ones, poking painful holes in the soldier’s feet and giving Kate and Alex the upper hand in the fight.  

Billy and John were fighting on the fifth floor on top of a giant chessboard, only standing on the blue tiles. It was a good thing that they were doing so, because after the treehouse shook, the chess pieces started playing a very fast game of chess, squishing soldiers on the spot.  

On the sixth level, Sally and Steven were running through doors (only the blue ones, of course.) The soldiers, Sally, and Steven were bumping into one another and dueling every now and then. The pirates who were in white-doored rooms were in trouble because the doors stubbornly refused to open, trapping the pirates inside.  

Meanwhile, on the seventh level, Dink and Bessie were fighting and dodging statues. When Treemania shook, Dink and Bessie dived into a blue cubby as the statues came alive and started shooting the soldiers with laser beams. Dink and Bessie snickered in their sanctuary.  

Spencer and James, on the eighth level, were standing on blue tiles of a foosball set and swiping at the soldiers from behind the metal men. After the treehouse shook, the red men came to life and started kicking the soldiers out of the treehouse.  

On the ninth level, Josh and Sam were battling while trying to stay inside the blue patches. When the treehouse shook, giant bags of rocks came crashing down on top of the people who were not in the blue patches.  

Meanwhile, on top of all that, Lillie and Sara were jumping from step to step, avoiding swords and staying only on the two blue steps. While Treemania shook, the other stairs suddenly grew walls and were lifted out of the roof, where the stairs tipped and the soldiers fell into a lake of toothy eels and piranhas.

But one soldier managed to jump out of the box, and landed hard on the top step, which had not gone up as the rest did. The stone step fell away, and he turned off the switch. Immediately, the steps that were going up and in the process of dumping soldiers out came back to the ground, the wall around it disappeared, and soldiers streamed out. On every level, all the machines and stuff turned off and disappeared. The soldiers chased the pirates to the top level. Captain Madoline made a run for the switch, but was quickly stopped by a wall of soldiers guarding the switch.

“Do you have any last words, pirate?”  King Farition sneered. Suddenly, a ghost stepped out of nowhere.

“No, it can’t be…” Bob whispered.

“Who?” asked Captain Madoline, paralyzed by the funny ghost.

“It’s the ghost of Allen Dor!” exclaimed Bob, smiling. The ghost smiled at them, waved, and then flipped the switch again.

“Any last words, pirate?” King Farition pressed. He seemed to not have seen the ghost.

“Yes,” said Captain Madoline. “In the blue, we are as good as new!”

All of a sudden, Treemania gave another shake. All of the steps boosted up and dumped all of the soldiers in the lake, leaving the Frustrated Failure on the blue steps. After that, the Frustrated Failure made their permanent home on Treemania and lived happily ever after.

 

Louie

Book One

 

1

Louie, a fluffy, white Maltese with his tongue always sticking out, was having a nice nap in his room on the S.S.L. cruise ship. He liked the beds even though the boat rocked a lot.

“Louie, wake up! It’s breakfast time! We’re gonna go soon!”

He woke up, feeling hungry. “Well,” Louie yawned. “Breakfast, then home.”

Louie ate fast (as usual!), and his owners took him home by plane. The cruise was in Florida. He came in from New York, and he was going to his new home in California. He chased his tail which meant he wanted a walk. He liked chasing his tail better than saying “I want a walk,” even though he could talk.

 

2

The main thing that Louie’s owners had to remember was to make sure Louie did not see water towers. He had a huge fear of them after he heard that a good dog got locked in one for no reason. His owners knew that Louie had a fear of them because he told them. Louie only talked when he wanted to, and he only did it whenever he felt it was necessary or he just wanted to say a little something. His owners bought their new house while they were on S.S.L., so they didn’t know the city too well, and they didn’t know that a water tower was only ten blocks away from their home. Unfortunately, the owners went that way on Louie’s walk.

Louie was in the middle of having a chat with a pug. He was telling the other dog about his fear, when the pug said, “Really? You’re afraid of water towers? There’s one right behind you!”

Louie screamed, “AHHHHHHH! WATER TOWER!!!!” Louie ran so hard, that his collar broke off of him. He ran into a forest that had known many dangers, and no one who went in came out alive.

 

3

Louie’s owners were running behind him shouting, “LOUIE! COME BACK! YOU DON’T KNOW THE DANGERS OF THIS FOREST!”

But Louie was too far ahead, so he really didn’t hear them. As soon as Louie couldn’t see the water tower anymore, he thought, Phew, I’m safe! But what he didn’t know was that there were poisonous plants everywhere, a deadly sea monster in the lake, rattlesnakes, and black widow spiders. Or at least that was what people knew. Louie walked a little bit forward and then, looked down to see what he had just stepped on.

He thought, Hm, a little smooth, but why do I want to chew this? I’m gonna look at what this is. He looked down and he jumped up above the trees. It was a skeleton!

 

4

“AHHHHHHHHHH!!! SKELETON!!!” Louie screamed as he ran farther into the forest. Soon, Louie saw huge spider webs with giant black widows on them! And rattlesnakes! Louie was horrified! He ran back while avoiding poisonous plants.

He thought, Oh yay, I’m almost out, I’m safe! till he saw…

 

5

“A SEA MONSTER!!!” The monster was the most dangerous part of the whole forest. The sea monster was green, with huge claws and five eyes (one on his head, one on each arm and one on each leg). Its teeth were very sharp and were twenty feet tall. Its mouth was so big, it could swallow a whole public bus in one swallow without chewing it. It had four humongous horns on the top of its head that were so sharp, that it was sharper than a spear. Louie trembled in fear, and the monster gave a huge “ROAR!” Louie started to fight the monster for a little bit and realized that his weak spot was his right shoulder — he kept on swallowing when Louie was closer to his right shoulder. Louie realized that if he jumped just the right height at just the right place, he could maybe kill the monster.

Louie delivered a bite into the monster’s shoulder which started to kill him.

The monster said while he was dying, “Oh no! I am what made this forest dangerous, and I loved it when the forest was so dangerous!”

The monster died, and the forest was no longer dangerous. The skeletons became people, and there were no black widows or rattle snakes. Louie ran through a field with plenty of plants that aren’t poisonous by the touch to his owners, like dandelions, wonderful grass, even a little bit of some strawberries, apples, blueberries, raspberries and blackberries, and tomatoes (for some reason there was a lot of food!) His owners saw him running to them, so they had their arms open as he ran towards them.

 

6

They got Louie a new collar and learned where the water towers were. They always kept a blindfold, but he rarely used it.

Louie knew that the forest was now not dangerous anymore, but he still didn’t trust it. He thought that maybe there were some poisonous things left, so his owners never went that way.

They were very nice, and since one was a chef, she brought Louie’s favorite food home. His favorite food was chicken, waffles, eggs, French toast, and for dessert, he loved the biggest ice cream sundae that they made with his favorite flavor, chocolate chocolate chip.

Louie thought, It’s been a long day, and I’m sleeping late tomorrow!

 

7

Ever since he had gone into the forest, Louie was a little bit less scared of water towers and never used the blindfold much. He realized that the forest was much scarier than the water towers. Before, water towers looked like they almost wanted to eat him, but after the forest, he saw that they weren’t that scary looking, and he mostly got over his fear.

Besides, now Louie knew that the water towers had a lot of water in them, and Louie liked to swim. If he did ever get locked in, because he had made it out of the forest, everyone promised that they would give him food for the water tower. After he had gotten out of the forest, he also became a bit of a celebrity because no one had come out alive before, and it was always dangerous. Louie had made it out unharmed, and the forest was no longer dangerous since it was under the curse of the sea monster, which he killed with a bite.

 

Book Two

 

1

It was good that Louie was tiny, so if he thought that people and dogs were getting out of control, he could just squeeze out of the crowd.

After he got fame, he befriended Marnie the Dog.They liked to go on doggy trips three times a month, where they got to go to doggy spas, but they went to the dog spas very rarely, since Louie did not like them, and Marnie only liked it once a month. Louie didn’t like the chances of getting a poodle cut because he thought that he’d look silly with all of that fur, especially with all of the bald spots he’d have. He also thought he had to wear bows if he got one, and he would only wear them if they were bowties, and he only liked to wear them two times a year.

Louie’s owners weren’t always happy about him being famous, especially when his fans came into the house, unless it was only Marnie. When the fans came in, usually they made a mess in the house, and they would usually be there for about an hour. Maybe a little bit less, maybe more. But they liked Marnie because she was small, and she was a very sweet dog. Oh, and she didn’t have the problem of making the house a mess.

Louie was in love with Marnie, but he didn’t want to tell her right away. He waited about a month after they had gotten one doggy spa treatment together, then he told her.

He said, “Marnie, I’m in love with you.”

Marnie replied, “Really? Then let’s get married as soon as this is over!” After that happened, they held paws more, but they didn’t kiss, they nuzzled (they thought it was gonna be too gross if they kissed.)

 

2

Louie still had some fears left of water towers, but it only came up whenever he saw the one near the forest in person. Sometimes he was there at bad times, like when he was getting an interview for Pup Magazine. He was being silly a little bit, by barking instead of answering, which made everyone crack up, and chasing his tail when he was asked how he told his owner when he wanted to go for a walk. The reporter didn’t know what he meant when he chased his tail.

He went slightly crazy because of the water tower. He was jumping up and down and whimpering and shaking. His paws were in front of his chest, and he soon calmed down when the reporter took him to a different place. It was right in front of Louie’s house, which Louie’s owners were not very happy about. Marnie wasn’t happy either, since they were almost trampling her.

It was many hours later when some of Louie’s really big fans came in and yelled at Louie about his fear of water towers.

One said, “You can’t be afraid of water towers!”

Another said, “You can’t because it’s such a weird fear!”

That made Louie feel sad. His tail started to droop, and his head dropped. Even his tongue looked like it had drooped. Marnie got very mad at this, and she started to bark, growl, and scratch, and chased them until they left.

Louie was still feeling upset about what they had said, so his owners and Marnie comforted him. They gave him hugs, Marnie nuzzled him, and they told Louie that it was totally normal to have a fear of anything, and that there were some people who were afraid of knees, and there were some people who were afraid of books (these are fears in real life). After Louie heard this, his tail started wagging again, his head perked up, his tongue didn’t look droopy, and he had a big smile on his face. Soon, it was time for bed. Louie walked to his owner’s bed, Marnie jumped up too. Their owners got in bed, and they all fell asleep.

 

3

That night, Louie had a nightmare about his fans chasing him and then eating him. Louie didn’t get a very good sleep that night because of his nightmare. The next morning, more fans had come to complain about his fear. Louie decided to put his house off-limits to fans. Even so, they climbed up the side of his building, and one even gave him poisoned chicken because he didn’t like the fear so much. Louie then said how he was only scared of them and only afraid of one water tower, and he had to see it in person.

Louie decided that it was time for a doggie trip, but he never told anyone except for his owners and Marnie. Louie didn’t have a private jet or anything, so he used a public airplane to go to Ecuador. Louie knew they thought it wasn’t too obvious that he would go to Ecuador. He knew that his fans thought he would be going to China or Florida. He knew that they weren’t going to think about any other countries or states since Florida was the most likely place, and he was pretty sure people would think he was going to China. But he also thought about how people think about that and assume he’d go to the most obvious place — Florida. He knew that people would never think he’d go to some place like Ecuador.

He stayed there for about a month. By then, he knew that everyone had forgotten about his fear of water towers and realized that he was only afraid of one. Just in case, he took the long way back, which took him another month. Luckily, he made no stops in China or Florida, and none of the planes crossed North America or Asia, until he got back home to California.

 

4

By then, everyone just forgot about him even being afraid of water towers. In fact, no more articles about Louie were involved with water towers anymore. However, Louie had been in Ecuador for too long, and he was required to go back and move there. Otherwise, he would only be allowed to stay in North America. This was a very tough decision for Louie because he didn’t want to go back to Ecuador, but he didn’t want to not be able to leave North America. He and Marnie loved to visit France! Marnie and Louie would be so sad if they couldn’t go together to those places that were outside of North America.

 

5

Louie had just moved into a new home, only three months ago. His owners weren’t even finished unpacking yet. He didn’t want to move again, even farther from Florida. Besides, he knew that where he would stay, there would be a water tower literally in front of his house. This was the biggest water tower in Ecuador, and he knew that some people said that no one would actually give you food, no matter how big of a celebrity you were. No matter what promises you had on you.

Louie checked out the house, and he knew that even though it was an amazing house, no one would allow Marnie in the house, only because she wasn’t hypoallergenic. Most people who lived there were allergic to dogs.

Louie really didn’t want to lose Marnie. Marnie had been with him for almost two months now! He just couldn’t bear being away from her. He knew he was going to have to make the hardest decision of his life. Louie needed to know if that was the only house that was left. Luckily, he was also able to buy a whole hotel. However, they couldn’t let him. They said that hotels were too dirty, and that celebrities only deserved the finest. They probably didn’t understand that Louie was a dog! Louie decided that he would go to Ecuador, but he was sneaky.

 

6

He said he’d lived in the house, but he took Marnie in his suitcase. Of course, Marnie got out when they were doing the bag detection. So all of them went, but as soon as they found out that Marnie was there, they got extremely mad.

The truth was, they didn’t know that Marnie was actually hypoallergenic in secret. But like I said, it was secret. Marnie actually never knew it, but after they had spent about a week with Marnie, Marnie hadn’t even shed a hair on the ground, and none of the people were getting allergies from neither her or Louie. Louie and Marnie knew what that meant when they found out — they could stay together!

 

7

Since they couldn’t live in California anymore, the one owner who was a chef got a new cooking job, and the other one got another new job as a lifeguard on the beach.

Louie and Marnie loved running around on the beach, and they both knew that they had made the right choice to move to Ecuador.

 

Unordinary

It was another normal day: the blue sky, the scorching sun burning the faces of the people outside, and the sounds of the kids playing. I went into my bedroom closet to get my phone out of my jacket. But then, I noticed a framed photo I’d never noticed before. To get a closer look, I took the picture and looked carefully at the image. I knew something about the picture was weird, but what?

Maybe it’s just my head messing with me, I thought.

I got my phone from my pocket and looked at the text messages that I had received from my friend, Daniel: What are you doing man? I have been waiting all day for you.

My friends and I were going out in an empty field to play with water balloons. When we got there, we cleared out the place and started to play. Each person had 240 water balloons.

When I walked home, I noticed that there were advertisements everywhere, but that was not the only thing that was strange. For the first time ever, I realized I couldn’t read any of them right. The words had shifted into this other language I didn’t understand. I was creeped out, but didn’t show it. When I reached my house, I saw that my stepfather was home. My stepfather was mean, brutal, and lazy. He was the rather lazy and selfish type, and he had no manners.

”Go get me a coke from the fridge,” he yelled.

I took the coke from the fridge and gave it to my stepfather. Then, I went to my room. I looked at the strange picture. I stared and stared until…

“My real father!!!” I shouted.

When my mom came home, I was mad at her.

“Why didn’t you tell me before?” I said angrily.

“Tell you what?” she said.

“About my real father!!!” I shouted. “You haven’t told me this since I was born.”

“I — .” She continued, “He was a very special and unique person.”

“So special, I can’t even know about him?” I yelled.

“I’m sorry, but you are special too. You don’t even know who you are.”

At that moment, I was speechless. I didn’t know what to say.

”Then, why don’t you just tell me?” I said in my calm voice.

“I can’t. You must find out for yourself.”

At that point, I stormed into my room and slammed  the door. I was so tired and exhausted from yelling and screaming, I fell fast asleep. When I woke up, I found what I dreamed about strange. It seemed as if it were a memory or vision. I saw my father leave and never come  back. I was too upset about the whole thing that had happened yesterday night. I slumped into the bathroom to wash my face and brush my teeth. I splashed water on my face, brushed my teeth, and headed to the kitchen. I got a bowl and cereal, and ate my food. I felt awful for screaming at his mother.

“Wait,” I said. “Mom, I’m sorry about yesterday. I just wasn’t myself.”

“It’s okay,” she said. “You were right.” She walked out of the door.

Miles, my other friend, texted: Hey, what are you doing right now?

Not in the mood right now. Text you later.

I lay on my bed thinking about the whole situation. Am I so special she can’t tell me who I am? Who am I? Why can’t she tell me who my father is? I always thought I was another normal, ordinary kid. I thought I was normal. Not this weird, super-powered freak.

I just want to be a normal kid. I’d rather be normal than this unordinary person. I want to be me. Man, I hate my life, I thought. Nothing ever goes my way. My terrible stepfather, my poor family, and now, I have to put up with powers. Accept me for me, not that my life is perfect. My life is already terrible, I don’t want it to get even worse by changing even more.

After a little nap, I felt better. I went outside and walked down the block to where my friends were playing.

“What happened?” asked Miles.

”I’d rather not talk about it,” I said. “What are you guys playing?”

“Oh, we’re playing zombie tag,” answered Daniel. “How are you feeling?”

“Fine,” I lied. We played and played for hours until it was time to go home. I said bye to all of my friends and headed home. When I went home, my mom was waiting for me.

“Jack, there is something I need to tell you.”

I sat down. “Is this about me and my real dad?”

“Yes. I should have told you this a long time ago. You were born like your father who was

a merman. You can breathe underwater like him. I couldn’t tell anyone. I thought they would take him away from me. I know you should have known a long time ago, but I was scared for you to face the truth.”

I was so angry. Why do all the bad things happen to me? I just want to be another normal kid, but what do I get? Fins, a tail, and scales. I can’t believe it. Why did I have to be a merman. I just want to be ordinary, but now, it seems I have to be the opposite. I hate my life. I can’t wait for all of this to end.

The next day, I went to the pool to swim. I love swimmIng, and I am really good at it. The water made me feel calm. It was a place where I can actually think in peace. The water always made me feel peaceful and calm, the one place where I could put all my worries away. I got in the cool water and relaxed.

“Finally, peace,” I said. I lay down in the pool for 15 minutes.

“It’s as if I can breathe in water, or can I?!” I took a deep breath just in case and let it all out in the water. “I can breathe in water!!!”

“This is actually pretty cool,” I said. “Wow, I can also talk in water. This whole mermaid thing isn’t so bad anymore. Man, I wonder where my dad is right now?”

I sat for half an hour now, thinkIng about my real father. When I got out of the pool, I saw Miles and Daniel, and I said, “Hey.”

“What’s up wIth you, man. You are more stubborn than usual, and you don’t talk much.”

“Sorry, I have been upset because of my real dad.”

“Well, tell us when you feel like playing. We will be down the block playing.”

“Okay,” I said. I went to the bathroom to take a shower. I put my clothes on, and watched TV. I looked at my phone, picked it up, headed out, and walked down the block to my friends. They were playing tag at the park.

“Hi,” I said to my friends.

“Hey,” they said back.

I joined my friends in tag. We played for a couple of hours. The next thing I knew, it was six o’clock. I went home before my stepfather noticed. When I tried to creep upstairs, he noticed me.

“Where have you been?” he asked.

I said: “I’ve been out wIth my friends.”

“What friends?”
“Daniel and Miles.” I crept back upstairs and waited in my bed ‘til my mom came home. I told her about my day and asked her to tell a story about my real father.

“He was a good person,” she saId, “Very loyal and brave. When people found out about him, they took him away, and they tried to see how he worked.”
“That’s awful!” I said.

“I know,” she said, “I never saw him again. I don’t even know if he’s still alive.”

When my mom was done telling the story, I went to sleep. I was sad that I never got to see hIm. “What if I could find him?” I asked myself. “All my problems would go away. No rude stepfather. I’ll just have a normal life.”

I woke up the next day, energized and peaceful. I went to the bathroom to wash my face. I saId bye to my mom and headed out to play with my friends. I felt better than usual, energized and healthy. I always hung out wIth my friends. We would play tag or play with water balloons, but tomorrow, I would go hiking wIth my mom in the forest.

The next day, we packed everythIng we needed for the trip. When we got there, we made our tents and hiked through the forest. At night, we made s’mores and went to sleep. The next day, I saw somethIng strange.

There was a sign. It shifted into other words, words I could read. It said: To find your father, follow the river and look for another sign. Then, turn left, then right.

“Mom, I’ll be gone for a while. I will come before dinner.”

“Okay,” she said.

I followed the path. It was hard because it was rocky and rough. I stopped when I saw another sign: Beware, it said. I went left, then right. Then, I saw a lake full of water. There was a sign that said to go inside the lake, so I did just that. Before I knew it, I grew a tail and scaley skin. I swam farther down to find another merman.

“Return the legendary pearls, and you wIll see your father again.”

“What did you do to my father?!!!” I yelled.

“He’s right here, and if you want to see him again, you wIll return the legendary pearls.”

“What pearls? I don’t have them.”

“You can’t fool me, child. The pearls have gone missing, and you took them.”

“I don’t know anything about pearls. I just found out who I really am.”

“Look, child. We could do this the easy way or the hard way.”

“I don’t have them!” I yelled.

“If you give me the pearls, I will give you your father.”

“I don’t have them!” I yelled. I swam back up to shore, but the other merman pulled me down.

“What’s your problem, man?” I said. “I don’t have them!”

“Give them to me!”

I was so frustrated that he didn’t believe me, I pushed him down, and swam up to the surface. As soon as I came up to the surface, my tail shifted into normal legs, and my scaly skin turned smooth.  I thought about everything the other merman said. I was frustrated because people thought I was a thief.

I have to go back in there, I thought. I jumped inside the water. My tail and my fins grew back. I swam all the way down to the bottom of the lake. It was empty. I needed to find the pearls. I read the sign, and it shifted into different words.

It said, To find the pearls, turn left, then turn right, and run to the nearest river.

I turned left, and then, I turned right. I searched around to fInd a river. When I found one, I  jumped inside and swam all the way to the bottom. I saw another merman wIth things that looked like pearls.

“What are those?” I asked.

He turned around and looked at me like he never saw me before. He yelled, “You just fell into my trap!” He gave me the legendary pearls and yelled, “Hey look, everybody, he’s come back with the pearls!”

“I knew he took them!” somebody else yelled.

“I didn’t take them!” I saId. “This guy threw them to me!” I pointed at the guy.

“Who would believe you now?” said the person who gave me the pearls.

These pearls could show what happened in the past, present, and the future. I set the pearls to show the past.

All of a sudden, a video expanded for everybody to see.

“You just fell into my trap!” It played back and showed how the other merman passed me the pearls and shouted to everybody that I was a thief. They all looked at him and stood in shock.

“He’s the thief,” somebody shouted, “get him!” They all chased the guy who gave me the pearls. The merman from earlier apologized for accusing me of stealing the pearls.

”I think there is someone waiting to see you,” he said.

Another merman suddenly appeared right in front of me. “Is this my father?” I yelled.

“Indeed, I am,” saId the merman.

“I can’t believe it’s really you!” I yelled. “My mom has missed you so much.”

We swam back to shore. It was almost nighttime, so I had to hurry up. We walked back to our tent. I told mom that there was someone waiting to see her. She turned around. She didn’t know him at first, but then she gasped in sudden shock.

“Is it really you?” she asked.

“Yes, it is,” he said.

She said, “I can’t believe you’re really here!” They hugged for about two minutes. “Thank you, Jack. I could have never done it by myself.”

Meanwhile, my stepfather had heard we got lost in the woods and only tried to find us because of the money he could get.

I can use the money to leave this place, he had thought.

Like I said, he was a very greedy person. Fortunately, he got lost instead. When we heard he got lost, we were not surprised he had come back.

“Should we help him,” I said.

“No, I think he deserved it.”

I finally realized that this is who I am, and I need to accept myself.

Everybody hugged and lived happily ever after.

THE END!

Missing

“Last seen at Harry’s All You Can Eat Buffet, sixteen-year-old Julian Splitz, from Daily Makeup Tutorial dot com, has gone missing.”

Those words echo in my head from last night’s news. I need to find my sister, and I am going to do just that. I shake my head to get the sad voices out. I hop out of my bed, change out of my pink pajamas into my nice, red Adidas and my flower dress, and head down the stairs. I go straight to the living room. I grab the rusty, gray remote and turn on channel five, Eyewitness News, to see if they found Julian. Nothing.

It’s up to me to find her. Placing my hand on my heart, I say, “I, twelve-year-old Amelia Splitz will find my sister no matter how hard and how terrifying it gets.”

I race back upstairs to my bedroom and grab my dark green bookbag. I grab a flashlight, extra batteries just in case, a 100 dollar bill, and some scissors. I’m not allowed to use anything sharper than that, even if it means I can’t protect myself from whoever teen-knapped Julian. Before I go downstairs, I walk across the hall to my parents’ room. When I open the door, I see my mom sitting up with red eyes, like she got no sleep and was crying the whole night. I quickly and silently close the door so she does not see or hear me, and I walk down the stairs. Before I leave, I go into the kitchen and pack an apple, some bubble gum, Lay’s potato chips, and Cheetos.

I walk out the door and hail a taxi. “45th and Broadway please,” I say, in the politest way possible.

“You got it,” the taxi driver says. “Hey, have you heard about the missing teenager?” he asks.

“Um,” I think about what to say, and then, I finally find the right words. “I don’t watch the news because it’s way too scary for me,” I say. I don’t want anybody to find out what I’m doing because it’s top secret.

“Oh right, nevermind,” he replies quietly. After a thirty minute drive, he finally says, “Here is your stop. That will be $25.52, please,” sadly expecting more money for that thirty minute drive.

“Here you go,” I hand him a twenty dollar bill and then give him six singles. He gives me forty-eight cents back. “Thank you,” I say, walking out of the green taxi.

I walk down the block to come across Harry’s All You Can Eat Buffet. I walk inside. Nobody is there. As soon as someone sees me, she runs up to me desperately and says, “Welcome to Harry’s, the all you can eat buffet. Can I seat you?”

“Nah, I’m just here for a scavenger hunt.”

“No! Please just eat at least one thing! I need the money or at least a tip! Nobody has come here since the missing sixteen-year-old. Have you heard?”

“Um… no, I’m too young to be hearing violent stuff like that. Anyways, I’m just here on a scavenger hunt with my friends, and I need to find a certain food. I just need to investigate, so bye now.”

I walk around the corner to come across all of the dinner tables. I check for clues on every table. Table one just has some crumpled chips on the seats and chairs. Table two has nothing. As I am checking table three, I find a phone on the red chairs. It is Julian’s phone! I turn it on to see if anything was next on her schedule so I could go to that next place, but her phone is dead! I get so mad, I kick over a chair.

“Excuse me, are you okay?” the same waitress asks.

“Yeah, I just realized I was in the wrong restaurant looking for that certain food, so I will be on my way now. Bye.” I grab my sister’s phone and walk out of the resturant with my head to the ground.

I need to charge her phone. I need to go to see where she went next. Everything she does and everywhere she goes is on that schedule! I run home. I have no time for a taxi. After an hour and a half, I finally reach my house.

I walk in and go to my room. I start to charge the phone. As I am charging the phone, I start to think of places she could have gone after Harry’s. She could have gone to eat dessert at her favorite dessert cart, Waffles and Dinges. But they have dessert at Harry’s, so why would she go there?

After another thirty minutes of thinking of places she might have gone, I hear a buzz. I check the phone, and it says the battery is at one hundred percent!

“Yes!” I say, jumping in the air. After I finish doing my happy dance, I grab the phone and check her schedule. On her schedule, it says, “First go to Harry’s, next go to Sugar, the best candy store ever.”

That’s just where I’m going.

I race back out the door and catch the bus. After ten stops, I get off. I look around for the store Sugar, but there’s no sign of it. After the bus leaves, I realize I need to go another stop. I chase the bus so maybe it would stop so I could get on, but when it finally stops, I have run to the next stop. After I take a five minute break and eat two cookies, I walk over to Sugar.

When I get there, it is really crowded! It is going to be hard trying to find clues. My sister’s favorite snack is ice cream, so I go over to the ice cream section. I check tons of tables and try all of the flavors of ice cream, but there’s no sign of anything but delicious flavors.

After three hours, this guy in a green cap and black suit, who looks about 26 years old, and I are the only two left in the store besides the cashier.  He must have no friends because he keeps on asking me what friends are like. I do not have the time, so after answering five of his questions, I start to pretend I do not hear him.

After another thirty minutes, I see a card in the very corner of the room. I smile and pick it up. As I pick it up, I scream, “Aha!” But it is only a business card for a dry cleaner. As I frown, the guy in the black suit is staring at me.

I say, “Um, I dropped this a few days ago, and I really need someone to help me with my dirty clothes.” I don’t think he believes me because after I say that, he looks down at the floor and walks out the door. I sit down as I realize it is too late to continue tonight because the store is closing. I hail a taxi and go home.

When I finally arrive home, I pay the taxi driver and walk up to my room. I sit on my bed, thinking about how I failed to save my sister. As I keep thinking about my sister, tears start to fill my eyes. I can no longer hold them in. I turn to my pillow and let the tears stream down my face and absorb into my white cushion. That night, I skip dinner and go straight to bed in my outfit.

Before I let my eyes shut, I murmur, “Hang in there Julian, I’m coming.”

The next morning, I wake up and change out of my dress and put on some jeans and a purple tank top. I still have leftover snacks from yesterday, so I do not need anything. I grab my sister’s phone and go to the schedule. When I am on the schedule, I see words being typed in. It deletes her plans from the Cross County Mall to an old, beat-up mall near a dark alley.

Why is someone typing on Julian’s schedule? Who is it? I question  myself. I do not know what is going on, so I turn off the phone and walk downstairs. I pack one more cookie, and then I leave.

I hail a taxi and go to the beat-up mall. When I arrive there, I walk two blocks and finally arrive at the mall. I look around, no sight of anybody. Then, after about ten minutes, two tall guys in all black with black masks walk in front of the mall.

I hear them whisper stuff loudly, like, “Well, is she coming? What time did you put it on her schedule?”

“I put for exactly now, 11:30 sharp!”

“Well, Savannah should be coming soon.”

“Wait, Savannah? I wrote it in that girl Julian’s schedule.” As soon as I hear Julian, I knew I am in the right direction.

“What? We already kidnapped that one. She’s the popular one who will make us a ton of money with her makeup tutorials.”

“Oh well, I will just switch it then.”

“No, it’s too late. Let’s go.” The two men start walking away. I need to find Julian, so I decide to follow them.

They stop at the dark alley I have always been afraid to walk near. They walk to a door that has eight locks on it, and they unlock it. They walk in. I am left behind.

I am deciding if I should get the cops so they could break the door down, and I can save my sister. But then, I see an open window not too high above the door. Before I call the cops, I need evidence. I climb on top of a dumpster and a few cardboard boxes and finally hop into the window. There is a ledge when I hop through the window. I look over the ledge. I see three men in black suits and masks. Then, all the way in a corner, I see my sister tied to a chair with a handkerchief in her mouth, stopping her from talking.

I almost cry out “No!” but I hold it in. I hop back out the window and dial 911. “Hello, police department, what can I help you with?”

“Hi, you know the missing teenager? Well, I found her. She is being held captive in an alley on Blackberry Lane between Eighth and Ninth Street. Hurry!”

“Okay, we are on our way.” With that, I wait for them.

After about ten minutes, tons and tons of blue and red flashing cars appear. All the cops get out of the cars, and I show them where Julian is being held captive.

“The door is locked so you have to climb through the-”

I am cut off by the sound of a door being broken down. The loud bang must have scared me because I scream as loud as I possibly can. All of the cops walk inside holding guns that are loaded and ready to fire.

The guys try to escape, but they are surrounded by cops. “Oh great,” one of them murmurs. They both put their hands in the air and are brought into custody. Before they leave, the officers thank me and untie Julian.

“You are one brave cookie,” one officer named Officer Brown says.

“Well, I had to save my sister. I don’t know what I would do without her.”

“Thank you, you are the best sister ever!”

With that, my sister and I hug and walk home, side by side. It takes over an hour and thirty minutes, but as long as I am next to my sister, I am fine.

 

The Magic Flower

Once upon a time, there lived a girl named Laura. Laura’s favorite thing was chocolate. But her second favorite thing was flowers. Pretty, nice-smelling flowers. She just loved to pick flowers, and to play with flowers. And when they died, she even made a funeral for flowers. Now, enough about what Laura’s favorite things are. Let’s get to the story.

It was a bright Sunday morning, and Laura woke up a lot more early than usual (at 6:00).  She could not watch TV until 8:00. So she thought of what to do. And thought of what to do. And thought of what to do. And finally Laura had he it narrowed down to two things. She could sneak some chocolate, or pick flowers, She realized that she only had one choice, to pick flowers. She could not sneak chocolate, because her mom hides it.

So Laura went downstairs, to the porch, and to the backyard. She decided to try to find a new type of flower. A kind that nobody had ever found before. She looked here. Just a sunflower. She looked over there. Just a rose. She looked almost everywhere. But Laura could not find a new type of flower. She decided to give up after only fifteen minutes passed. Yes folks, I know it’s very short, but do not blame me. Laura is lazy.

Just when she got up, she saw something. It was big. It was beautiful. It was… a new kind of flower. “Wait a second,” she said. “Why would a new flower grow in my backyard and not someone else’s? Well, I’ll just check to be sure.” She googled it ten times, but there was no match. Yippie! It was a new discovery. Laura pinched herself, trying to wake up, but she could not. It was real.

She could not wait to tell all of her friends. But being so happy about flowers made Laura wonder about chocolate. She sighed. I wish I had some chocolate, she thought as she squeezed the flower tightly in her hands. Then suddenly the it started to shake. Its petals moved as if it was doing some kind of dance. Then suddenly… poof. A cloud of dust covered Laura’s sight. When the dust disappeared, she looked inside the flower. There it was. A creamy, hard, light brown bar of chocolate. She pinched herself about 1,115 times. (Laura had pinched herself so many times that it started to really hurt.)

She ate the chocolate. It was delicious. “Wow, this is a perfect combo,” Laura said, “flowers and chocolate.” She ran to her friend Mimi’s house. “Mimi. Mimi. Mimi.” Laura shouted the moment she got to Mimi’s bedroom.

“What do you want?” Mimi said, she was exhausted. “It’s three in the morning.”

“No it is not,” Laura screamed excitedly. “Set your clock to the right time. It’s 7:00. Come to my house now. There is something I reeeaaallyyy want to show you.”

“If I come to your house and you show me what you want to show me will you let me go back to sleep?” said Mimi as she took off her sleeping mask.

“Fine,” Laura said flatly. “But you won’t want to,” she whispered.

“What did you say?” asked Mimi.

“Nothing. Chop chop, come on, let’s go.” Laura yelled as she dragged Mimi out of her house.

“I’m sure what you dragged me out for is not worth losing all the wonderful sleep I was getting,” said Mimi.

“Hold this flower.”

“Why?”

“Because.”

“Fine.”

“Now,” Laura directed, “think of something you really, really want.”

“I want you to leave me alone.” Mimi said.

“Har-dee-har-har,” said Laura.

“Think of an object, like let’s say, a computer.”

“Okay,” Mimi replied.

“Now, close your eyes, think of a computer, and squeeze the flower.” Mimi did as Laura had told her and was amazed at the results. She. Was. Speechless. Mimi even pinched herself sooo many times that she had about a million cuts.  It took Laura three hours before she could cover all of them with band-aids. It also took Laura three hours before she could get Mimi to talk. “You can go home now, Mimi. I showed you it.”

Laura ran to her mom, and was about to tell her about the magic flower when she stopped. If she told her mom about the magic flower, she would use it against Laura. If she broke a window her mom wouldn’t let her use the magic flower and so she wouldn’t get what she wanted. So she decided to keep it secret. She said, “Coming, Mom. One second.”

So then she took the magic flower and she dug a hole next to her favorite tree. Then she ran to her mom yelling, “Coming Mom, wait just one second”

And her mom answered, “Okay Molly, I mean Laura. Heh heh”.

When she got there she yelled, “Hey mom, guess what, I found a magic f

She stopped. She had almost spilled the beans and told her mother about the magic flower.

“ A magic what?” asked her mom.

“A magic…fish pizza, That also includes pepperoni, mushrooms, pineapple, and relish,” answered Laura nervously.

“That’s just in your imagination,” said her mom.

“Yeah.”

“Ummm… okay.”

“Phew, that was a close one,” Laura said to herself.    

Laura’s mom called Laura over for brunch, because she missed breakfast.

“Mmm… this is delicious. I wish we could have this every day,” said Laura.

Then she remembered she could have it every day.

“Ummm, mom? I have to go to the bathroom. May I be excused?” asked Laura, who was proud of herself for not talking nervously.

“Okay,” replied Laura’s mom.

Laura ran to the hole she had made next to her favorite tree, and dug up the magic flower. Then, Laura took out the magic flower and squeezed tightly and wished that she could have brunch every day. The flower shook, and a cloud of dust appeared, but nothing was in the flower. Laura was worried for a moment, but then she realized that she would have brunch every day. Right that moment, Laura remembered that she reeeaaally wanted a pet poodle. So she wished for a poodle, and a cute little puppy appeared inside the magic flower. The puppy started jumping, leaping, playing, and peeing.

“Eeew,” screamed Laura in a disgusted voice. Then, the puppy started licking Laura’s face. “Stop licking me,” she yelled. The puppy started lying on the ground and crying with its sad puppy eyes. She took the puppy and hugged it in her arms. The puppy looked very cold, so she wished for a puppy jacket. The puppy jacket was black leather, and it was very stylish. It had gold buttons and a silver zipper and puppy pockets. The puppy looked very warm and started jumping on Laura’s head.

Laura was about to show her mommy the adorable little puppy that she had named Poppy the poodle, but she couldn’t. If she did her mom would get suspicious, and ask her how she got the poodle. Since Laura is reeeaaally bad at lying, she would have eventually told her mom.

Laura’s tummy grumbled. She buried the magic flower and went back to brunch. Now, there was even more food than before. There was a stack of pancakes that was three feet high, a pile of hot french toast, and a bowl of plump and juicy sausages.

“Mmm, I’m in heaven,” she said sleepily.

Laura ate and ate and ate and ate and ate and ate and ate, until she could eat no more.

“Ohhh… I’m full. I want to go to sleep,” Laura groaned.

Laura’s mom carried Laura to bed. Laura slept for many long hours, and before she knew it, it was morning.

“Time to wake up,” Laura’s mom shouted the next day.

“I don’t wanna go to school,” Laura moaned.

“Okay,” agreed her mom.

“Really?” asked Laura, who was starting to get excited.

“No,” her mom shouted at her. “The only way that could happen is if you found something magical…” said her mom.

At that moment, Laura remembered that she could do it because she did have something magical.

Laura ran to her backyard and dug up the magic flower. She thought of not having school and squeezed the magic flower.

Right after, she wished that she appeared in her cozy, warm, bed. Laura went back to sleep.

“Zzz….” She was snoring.

Laura had slept for three days straight without even noticing. Finally, she woke up. Laura went downstairs and dug up the magic flower. She wished for food for her puppy. She also wished for brunch for herself. Then, she woke up all her friends and told them to come to her backyard.

She said, “Think of something you really want and squeeze this flower, and you will get it.” So they spent the rest of the day wishing for stuff they really, really, really, wanted. When they had finished, she asked her mom if they could have a sleepover and she said no. So she took the magic flower and wished that they could all could have a sleepover and have their very own king-sized beds.

In the morning, Laura wished for breakfast. Then, she told them to go home. Laura wished for a bouncy castle. Then, Laura wished for a pet unicorn. Then, she wished that she had a mansion. Immediately, her tiny house turned into a gigantic mansion. Her friend heard the racket and asked if they could join. Laura said, “Yes.”

They jumped and played and when Laura wished for a pool, they swam in the pool. Laura threw a six months early birthday party. Laura wished for a trumpet dude named Billybobjoepenny to play a song for her everywhere she went. She wished for a butler. A red carpet everywhere she went. And to be famous.

When Laura was about to wish for a 200-inch plasma TV, her mom came in and told her to stop getting all this stuff. “Return all this stuff from where you got it,” said her mom. Then, Laura got so angry that she wished her mom would go away and never come back. Laura finished wishing for a 200-inch plasma TV.

Her friends asked if they could come and play with her, but this time she said no. Laura spent the rest of the day signing autographs and she was sooo famous. Laura wished for a spinny chair. She wished that she could go back in time and be the one to invent the lightbulb. She wished that she had a computer. She wished that she had an iPad, a phone, 365 shoes for every day of the year, all the clothes in the world, brand new socks, a billion dollars, a trillion dollars, and for Jupiter to be named after her, instead of a Roman god. She wished for a musical, a book, a movie, and a CD about her life. She also wished that she could have a video game about herself, and that she could have a puzzle and download every game she wanted for free, and that she got to meet her favorite singer, Taylor Swift. She wished that she owned every single book and movie in the world. She wished to go to the future to watch every movie that would ever be made.

Laura wished for everything you can think of. She wished for a personal trashcan, and that she could meet the Tooth Fairy. She wished that candy was healthy and that she could eat whatever she wanted.

Her friends kept asking to play with her, and she said no every single time. No matter how much they begged and pleaded and gave her gifts. She always said no. Laura wished that she could know everything that she hadn’t wished for. She wished for earplugs, so she wouldn’t have to hear her friends asking her to play all the time. She wished that she had a lifetime’s supply of dumplings and she wished that Billybobjoepenny could play better songs. That was the only wish that made other people happy.

Laura wished for the world’s largest pizza, she wished for a gigantic sandwich.

She wished that she had a cake. She wished that she could eat whenever she wanted, and not get fat.

But soon Laura realized that she was kind of lonely. She wanted to share her stuff with her friends. She went to her friend’s houses, but they did not want to play with her. The next day, the tax letter came. Laura got so many stuff that it was even more money than she had. She wished she had her mom back. Laura’s unicorn started to poop everywhere, and she couldn’t stop it. Laura’s poodle started to get really hot, but, when Laura when took the coat away, it was too cold.

When she tried to wish for her unicorn to be gone, she found out that she had to wish for all of her wishes to be gone. There was some things she wanted to keep, but she decided that having a normal life was better than having everything she wanted. She took the magic flower and screamed, “I wish that all of the wishes were undone!” as loud as she could. Then, everything disappeared and everything was back to normal. Laura took the magic flower and threw it as far as she could. It landed in somebody else’s backyard, and planted itself there.

Laura was happy her life was back to normal. A mile away, in the place she had thrown the magic flower, somebody else had discovered it. Billybobjoepenny was summoned again and the flower was now passed on to someone else….

THE END.

Zachary and All of His Adventures

Once upon a time, there was Zachary and his little brother, Josh. They had gotten their new house near the beach with their dad and mom. Their mother told them they could go outside, but to stay close to the house.

Zachary and Josh went to the beach, and Josh said “I’m scared of the water.”

So Josh ran away from the water, but Zachary picked up Josh on his back, and they both went down in the water. As they went down in the water, a slimy seaweed hooked around Zachary’s foot, which made Josh tumble off of Zach’s back and made them to go deeper in the water. They tried to get out the water and swim up to the shore, but they noticed their bodies going into this hole.

In the hole, there was a cable that connected to the sand. Zachary and Josh got out the water, and both found themselves in a sand maze. So then, they held each other’s hands really tight and looked around to see if they could get out. But then, they realized it wasn’t a maze. It was ladder, so they climbed out the “maze” and then, went back home.

Zach told Josh to stay in his room until he got back, or they would be in big trouble. So Zach stayed home with Josh, and he heard a crocodile biting on the door!!!

So then, they looked in the kitchen, and they looked for any weapons to attack the crocodile. All they found were knives, forks, and spoons, so what they did was throw them at the crocodile. The crocodile got stunned by all of the knives, forks, and spoons. Then, Josh went into the back of the house, and checked if he could find a stroller to hit the crocodile. After the crocodile heard that Josh was getting a stroller, it went to the back of the house. Zachary pulled the crocodile’s, tail, used the knife to cut off the tail, and grabbed three more knives to stab it. After he stabbed the crocodile, it chased after him. Then Zachary went into the house again, locking every door. Then, he realized the crocodile could have crawled through the hole, but the crocodile was dumb enough that it didn’t crawl through the hole. It jumped on top of the house.

Josh found the stroller, but he didn’t see the crocodile because he was too busy looking for it. He gave the stroller to Zachary because he was older than him, and then Zachary threw the stroller. It knocked the crocodile off the roof. Then, the crocodile opened its mouth, big and wide, and tried to snap at Josh. But then, Zachary threw a plate into its mouth, and then it started choking to death.

After that, Zachary and Josh said, “We need to clean up this mess before Mommy comes back.”

So they picked up all of the pieces and went to the store to buy new pieces and get replacements for what was there. After they replaced them, their mother came back and said, “Good job. You kept the house, clean and nice. I’m proud of you two.”

After she gave the compliment, a big dragon came and breathed fire around their house, so they were surrounded by fire. They had one thing: a big, giant flamethrower gun. They used the flamethrower gun wisely. They burned the dragon’s tail, then used the knife to cut off his tail, then the flamethrower in its mouth until it was dead. After it was dead, they pushed it into the ocean.

Then, they went to the beach and built a sandcastle, jumped in the sprinklers, and had fun. But not a single piece of the house was broken after the dragon breathed its fire. They all got bits and bits of water and splashed it onto the fire, and then the fire was gone and turned into smoke.

While they were getting water, they fell on a boat and washed onto sea, and that was all of them. They looked under the water, and they saw a megalodon’s fin. They swam as fast as they could, and then the megalodon bit onto the boat. Everyone started using the paddles and hitting it in the eyeball. They still had their paddle steamer on, and they broke it so it went into the megalodon’s throat. They still had the flamethrower fully charged, so they burned the megalodon to pieces, and they sailed back to sea. They also took some fish.

Then, they had a good family dinner, and they had ice cream for dessert.

 

 

The Thief

Part I

One morning, I wake up. I go to get dressed. When I open my closet door, a guy wearing black jumps out of my closet with a gun! I am so surprised. I don’t know why he is in in my room, but I have no time to think of that.

I go and run to my desk and get my gun out of my drawer. He tells me to put my hands on my head, but I don’t listen. He does not shoot me, but I fire one shot, and I miss. He shoots a bunch of bullets. He misses me, but he hits my desk. One of his bullets breaks my light bulb. It shatters all over my desk. Then, one bullet hits my foot, and I yell out in pain.

My parents come into my room. They take my gun and shoot the person in the head, then in the stomach. He has blood pouring out of him from all directions. Then, my parents call 911. The police and an ambulance come. The police puts crime scene tape all over my house.

Then, the ambulance takes me to the hospital. They tell my parents they will be taken in for questioning, and when I’m finished recovering, I will too. Today is a crazy day.

After a month of recovery, they fix up my room, and I am taken in for questioning. But I am innocent.

Part II

Today is the first day of August. Today, I go to be questioned at the police station. When I get there, they tell me to sit down in the waiting room. After about 20 minutes of waiting, they bring me into an office and tell me to sit down. Then, an officer sits down at the desk and tells me his name, but I don’t remember it.

He asks me questions like, “What did the man look like? How old did he seem? Did he take anything of yours? Do you have any other evidence of who he is?”

I tell him what I know. Then, he shows me some pictures of some suspects, and he tells me to pick which I think looks the most like the criminal.

Part III

Today is the day the police call me to the police station because they found the guy that broke into my house. When I get there, I go to the front desk, and the receptionist takes me into the same office that I was in when I was questioned.

In one chair is the guy who broke into my house. He is handcuffed. Then, sitting at the desk is an officer. When I sit down, the officer tells the thief exactly what he did and why he should not have done it. The thief is told to say why he did it.

The thief says it was because he was forced to do it.

Then, the officer goes out of the room, and he tells two officers in the break room to come into the office and arrest the thief. They come in, and one of them puts the thief in handcuffs, and the other one shoves him out of the office and puts him in a police car. The officer tells us that the thief is going to the local jail before he goes to court. The cop tells us we can go home.

Part IV

Today is the day that the thief is going to court to see if he is guilty for breaking into my house. When I get there, the guy is there, wearing an orange prison jumpsuit. I am right on time for the courtroom. The judge calls the case to order. The judge invites the city’s lawyer to present the case to the judge.

The city’s lawyer says, ”This thief robbed the house of the plaintiff. He almost killed the plaintiff.”

Then, the judge tells the defendant’s lawyer to present his side of the case.

The defense says, “That the thief was being blackmailed.”

The judge tells the jury to go into the deliberation room for about an hour and a half. I go to lunch right around the corner from the courthouse. After I am at the lunch place for five minutes, a security guard from the courthouse comes and tells me that the jury came out. I go out of the lunch place and back to the courthouse.

The jury is waiting for me. They have already talked to the judge. Then, the jury announces that they think that the thief is guilty.

Part V

The next day at school, everyone has seen what went on. Either they have read it in the newspaper or saw it on TV. When I get there, all my friends come up to me.

The first one says to me, “Dude, I heard you almost got shot. Are you ok?”

“Sure, yeah. I’m fine,” I say.

“What does it feel like to be in court?” my other friend says.

I say that it is pretty scary.

When I have my first class, the teacher has not heard that I was involved in the case.

So she yells, “Why have you been away for a whole month?”

I show her the CNN article on my phone that says, “Ten-year-old boy attacked.”

My teacher says, “Oh my God! I’m so sorry. I did not know.”

After that, she says that she will give me all A+s for the rest of the month!

 

The Missing Parrot

On a very beautiful day, Joelle went to the zoo in New York City. She walked around the zoo. She looked around, and there were elephants and rhinos and lions. She found a crowd around a parrot, who was named Chit Chat because it always talked. Chit Chat looked mostly red with blue and green and a little white. Chit Chat could always start a conversation.

Joelle and the zookeeper were very good friends because Joelle usually came  every day. Since Joelle was trusted by the zookeeper, Dave, he opened the parrot cage only for her. He did this so Joelle could play with Chit Chat. They played hide-and-seek, where Chit Chat flew into the sky and tried to find Joelle.

One winter day, Chit Chat disappeared. The zookeeper was so worried that his boss would fire him because Chit Chat was his responsibility. He was the one who got the parrot out of its cage without permission, and he wasn’t allowed to fly it anywhere. He was supposed to keep it safe. He tried to find it as quickly as possible.

“The parrot is lost!” yelled the zookeeper. All the people at the zoo heard the terrible news. Everybody felt bad for him, so they helped him look. Nobody found the parrot.

Then, Joelle remembered that most birds migrate, so she thought the parrot must have unlocked the cage somehow and escaped.

“YES,” she said. “I got it.” She quickly ran to find the zookeeper to tell him that Chit Chat probably migrated to California because it is warm. The zookeeper said she was probably right.

When spring came, the zookeeper still didn’t see Chit Chat come back. When he looked back where the crowd would usually stand, he noticed the cage was not there. He checked the houses of everybody who worked at the zoo. Joelle helped him. There was still one person that they did not check in the whole entire zoo.

“THE BOSS!” the zookeeper and Joelle said at the same time. The zookeeper said the boss probably did not have the parrot and his cage because he did not like Chit Chat.

Joelle went home to go sleep. The zookeeper did the same. The next morning, Joelle ran to the zoo as fast as she could.

The zookeeper asked Joelle, “What happened?”

“Today, we have to go into the boss’s house,” she replied.

“Once again, the boss probably doesn’t have him,” Dave said.

“There’s a chance the boss might have him,” Joelle said.

“Fine, we’ll go tonight,” Dave said.

While they waited for night, they walked around the zoo. Joelle got to feed the lions and the rhinos. She was not scared because she wanted to be a zookeeper when she grew up.

Five hours later, the zoo started to close, and Joelle had to hide behind the rhinos so the boss wouldn’t see her. If he saw her, he would tell her to go home and watch her walk home. Finally, Joelle and Dave were the only people left in the zoo. The zoo was dark except for the security lights. The bats in the cave were awake, and Joelle heard their wings flapping. This was Joelle’s first time at the zoo at night.

Soon, the boss was a mile away. Joelle and the zookeeper left the zoo and locked it behind them. Then, they started running after the boss. Soon, they started walking so they wouldn’t get too close to him. Then, they got to the boss’s house. It was a small cottage because the boss lived alone. Joelle and Dave knocked on the door.

As the boss opened it and said, “Hello,” they barged into the cottage. Immediately, they saw Chit Chat in a cage on the boss’s desk.

Chit Chat said, “Hello, nice to see you again! How was your sunny day?”

Joelle and Dave replied, “Good. How are you?”

“I’m great, thank you for asking,” Chit Chat said.

“How did you know where my house is?” the boss asked Joelle and Dave.

“Easy, we just followed you after you walked out of the zoo,” Dave said.

“But anyway, why do you have the parrot?” asked Joelle.

“One night when I was about to walk out, I saw Chit Chat looked lonely. I said good night and then, the parrot seemed sad. I asked him why he was so sad, and he said, ‘I am the only parrot. No one talks to me that much.’ So I took him to my house, and we started talking for the whole night, and I started liking him,” the boss said. “I felt bad about stealing the parrot, but I didn’t want to tell anyone because I didn’t want them to think I’m a thief.”

“Why didn’t you tell me and Joelle earlier?” asked the zookeeper calmly.

“Well, you would have asked me a bunch of questions, and I don’t like to answer questions. I was also afraid you would take the parrot back,” the boss said.

“We have more questions now that you’ve told us later,” Dave said.

“Everybody was freaked out about Chit Chat going missing!” Joelle said in a very angry way.

“Sorry about that. I’ll return him to the zoo tomorrow morning,” the boss said.

Joelle and Dave went back to their houses. The next morning, Joelle biked all the way to the zoo, and the crowd was back at Chit Chat’s cage. The people in the crowd were really excited. They kept on asking Dave questions like, “Where was the parrot?” or, “How did Chit Chat feel when you found him?” Joelle got closer to the cage and she saw Chit Chat. He looked annoyed by all the noise.

Then, Joelle and Dave went to the pet store. Joelle bought a parrot that looked exactly the same as Chit Chat. He was mostly red with blue, green, and a little white. He said, “Hello, how are you doing?” to Joelle. Dave bought a very similar parrot, but it was a female.

When they got back to the zoo, they left the male parrot with Chit Chat. Chit Chat slowly started to open his beak and say something.

He finally said, “Thank you so much for the parrot. I’m so happy because I got a buddy like me!”

When the boss came back from break, Joelle and Dave ran up to him and said, “We have a surprise for you!”

“Candy?!”

Joelle and Dave looked at each other, confused. “No, but it’s something way better,” they said. “Your very own parrot!”

The boss started jumping up and down and twirling. Joelle, Dave, Chit Chat, and the boss lived happily ever after.

***

Twenty years later, Joelle became the zookeeper of the zoo and cared for every animal.  

                                                         

Dramatic Fall: The Dramatic Story of When George Washington Went Skiing

It was December 25th, 1776, when George Washington buckled his boots and slid his feet into place on the dreaded wooden skis.

“I can do this,” he said to himself, nervously, before hopping onto the oncoming lift. He closed his eyes as his feet slid off the wooden plank. He took big, long breaths and tried to calm himself down. After he thought he was a good distance off the ground, he opened his eyes. Immediately, the chair lift stopped.

“It’s okay,” he said to himself. “It will start up soon. I will just lean back and…” He had fallen from the chair lift!

“I hold these truths to be self evident, that all men will survive falling to their deaths from chair lifts,” he chanted all the way down to the snow below.

When he hit the snow, he rolled all the way down to the the next flat landing. He stayed there curled up into a ball for at least ten minutes. When he finally had the courage to stand up again, he found his troops standing in front of him.

“Are you ok, General Washington?” they politely asked.

“Yes, I am fine,” George Washington replied.

“Let’s go to my house for tea!” one of the soldiers stated.

“Yes, but the only way there from here is to cross the Delaware river…”

 

Fred the Penguin

Chapter 1

A baby penguin named Fred wanted to make a nest, but he was too young. Young penguins don’t make nests; they collect rocks. When they’re adults, they make their actual nests. Fred lived in the North Pole. He was the best penguin at ice skating. He loved to ice skate. He ice skated with other penguins, and the other ones kept falling, but Fred didn’t. They were jealous of Fred. But still, he had different kinds of penguin friends, like adult penguin friends. The other penguins were better at catching food.

A seal named Bob always spotted Fred and wanted to eat him, but Fred was too fast. Fred was eating cheese puffs, when suddenly, Bob turned up. Fred swam very fast to the shore. He ran because Bob could bash and break stuff. Fred couldn’t be too close, because if Bob bashed into the ice, Fred could fall, and then, Bob could eat him. So Fred ran to somewhere safe.

Fred ran to other penguins. He called to them to go to Bob. The other penguins scared away Bob. There were too many penguins. The penguins felt excited, so they decided to have their own penguin party and invited their friends.

Chapter 2

Then, more seals came! They bashed and bashed and the ice kept on falling. Then, the other penguins went crazy. But Fred didn’t. He swam underwater, and then, he trapped the seals so they didn’t bash anymore. He was super fast. Then, he grabbed some cheese puffs, and he ate them — and then, shot them out of his mouth into a seal’s face. The seal went down. He crashed into the surface, and then, he died.

Fred swam away fast up to shore. The seals bashed, and he fell down. Fred fell down onto a seal’s back. He rode the seal and bashed into the other seals, and then, they fell down and died. The seal that Fred was on was Bob.

Chapter 3

Bob tried to get him off. Then, when he got Fred off … another penguin came, and his name was Flame. He distracted Bob while Fred swam up to shore. Flame swam very, very fast up to shore. Flame was an adult penguin. Flame liked ice skating. Bob was gone now.

Then, they saw a fin in the water. Flame said, “It’s a shark.”

Fred said, “No, it’s a dolphin.”

Then, they saw a shadow in the water. It looked more like a shark. Flame was right. It was a shark.

All the penguins panicked. They waved their flippers and ran around. They squeaked. Then, Flame swam underwater, and Fred and all of the penguins did too. They tried to kill the shark.

The shark said, “I’m good!”

So then, the penguins swam back to the iceberg.

Then, Flame said, “I see a fin that’s black!”

Fred said, “It’s a killer whale.”

Then, they swam underwater, and they saw two killer whales. One killer whale tried to eat the penguins. The penguins were too fast, and the killer whale swam away. The other one tried to eat them, but they were too fast, and then it swam away.

Then, they had another party. But then, another shark came and bashed into the iceberg, and a big chunk of the iceberg fell.

Chapter 4

The shark attracted other sharks. Five sharks came, and they kept on bashing until it was super small. The penguins swam underwater.

But then, a dolphin came and said, “Hop on!” and the penguins hopped on. The dolphin swam away. The shark followed, and then, more sharks came. There were a billion sharks.

The dolphin said, “Look!” And the other dolphins swam very fast. But they were underwater. Then, the penguins swam on the dolphins, so then, the dolphins went faster.

They went to a bigger iceberg, but then the penguins said, “There’s polar bears in there.” So they went to a different iceberg and they said “That’s good.”

They lived there, and the dolphins said, “Bye!”

Then, the sharks came and chased after the dolphins. Bob came. And then the sharks came, and Fred saved Bob from getting eaten by a shark when the penguins lifted Bob up onto the iceberg. So then, Bob became good.

Fred swam underwater, and then a lot of killer whales came. And then, Bob saved Fred’s life. He swam underwater, picked up Fred on his back, and then jumped onto the iceberg. And then, they became friends.

Since Bob was the leader of the seals, he said to the seals, “We’re friends with the penguins.”

And the seals said, “Okay.”

While Fred and Flame were ice skating, the seals guarded the iceberg because then, no enemy could come and ruin the party. The rest of the penguins were still jealous because they were not really good at ice skating. But Fred didn’t care.

 

The Smartest Gingerbread Man Runs the Marathon

Introduction

You’ve heard the other stories, I bet. Somebody makes a gingerbread man, he runs away, and eventually gets eaten. Well, my story isn’t like that. Maybe it’s the dough I’m made of, or maybe it’s my raisin brain, but I survived.

Chapter One

I was walking along the streets of New York, minding my own business, when I heard the clacking of teeth. The fox! I started running and heard the patter of paws behind me. Up ahead, I saw other running people. Maybe if I ran into that crowd, the fox would lose me. I ran faster into the crowd of running feet. I didn’t realize it then, but I had accidentally entered the New York City Marathon!

I felt the fox’s hot breath on the back of my neck, so I picked up the pace. I burst out of the crowd. Looking behind me, I noticed that the runners had numbers on their chests. Then I saw the fox’s gaping maw coming towards me. I turned my head forward and ran like crazy!

Chapter Two

We had been running for a long time. Ahead I saw a stand with water cups on it. I hurried past so none of it spilled on me, because water is my weakness. Then I looked behind me. The fox had a water cup in his mouth and an evil glint in his eye. To be fair, he always had an evil glint in his eye. I started zig-zagging because puddles of water had started to appear on my left and right. I knew eventually he would run out of water.

Up ahead I saw a black-and-white checkered stripe on the ground. I ran across and suddenly everything started getting really loud. I realized it was people cheering. I had won the New York City Marathon! But the fox was still coming.

Chapter Three

I jumped into the golden cup that was being held out to me and yelled, “Hoist me up!” in my squeaky little voice. The man looked surprised, but did as told.

Then he said, “Why are you a gingerbread man?’

So I said, “I was baked this way, mister.”

Of course he replied, “Mmm. You smell delicious.”

“Don’t you dare!!” 

“Don’t I dare what?”

“Don’t eat me, duh.”

“Don’t worry, I’m gluten free. What are you doing in the cup?”

“That fox is trying to eat me!”

The fox interrupted, saying, “Nyang nyang nyang!” Then he bit the man’s leg.      

Then the man yelled, “owww!!!”

“That’s gotta hurt,” I remarked.

“Get off my leg, you damn vermin!”

“Nyang nyang nyang!” the fox protested, not taking his teeth off the man’s leg. Then something went snap! There was a bright flash, and the fox was startled and let go.

“What was that?”

I didn’t know either, so I chimed in, “I don’t mean to agree, but yeah, what was that?” 

“It must’ve been camera,” the man replied.

“A cam-watzit?”

“Never mind. My name is Octavius, by the way.”

The fox interrupted, “What kind of name is that?”     

Octavius said, “I dunno.”

The fox said fancily, “My name is Cornelius Von Sigment.”

I said, “Wait, what?!” l never knew that!

Octavius said, “Ooh, fancy.”

While the fox and Octavius were talking, l slipped away. I needed to get away from the fox. I figured that the best place to go to get far away from him is the airport. I looked at the maps and decided to take the subway. The turnstiles were no problem for me — that’s one of the advantages of being short.

When l got to the airport, l hopped on the very first plane. I thought it was going to Vermont? I’d always wondered what that place was like. Anyway, l bet the two fancy-pants names (a.k.a. the fox and the man) were still talking. Haha!

Animal Story

Chapter 1

Once, there was a cat named Lovey Dove. She had a nickname that she hated. All the animals called her Lola Love, her nickname. She had to get rid of it.

One day, she went out in the woods. She found mud and a sleeping pig. She woke it up. She asked if the pig would help her get rid of her nickname.

The pig said she would help, if she told her how to make mud. Lovey Dove said, “How to make mud is dirt and water.” The pig understood.

The pig then said, “We need to know each other’s names.”

Lovey Dove said, “My name is Lovey Dove.”

Then the pig said, “I have no name.”

“Your name can be Nicky,” said Lovey Dove.

“I love it!” said Nicky.

The next day, they went to Atlantis to think. It was a relaxing place. They thought and thought and thought. Then Ally the Alligator came. She went down a slide and got so scared, she forgot about the nickname. Nicky said to get rid of the nickname, they had to get everyone down the slide. They told everyone that the slide was great.

The next day, everyone was lined up in front of the slide. All one hundred people lined up and went down. Two more people (Nicky and Lovey Dove) had to go down.

The messenger bird went on a forty-foot drop tower instead so he wouldn’t get his feathers wet. But he still forgot the nickname.

Chapter 2

Once, there was a dog who only got breakfast and dinner. Her name was Chewie. She was a dark brown labradoodle, and she was very small. She loved to sleep, and the owners hated her for that. She needed lunch, because she was starving.

The next day at lunch, she started barking and barking and barking. The owners thought she was being mean, so they locked her up in her cage. It was a big black cage, and she was really cold. She had to stay in there all night and she was really cold, so she couldn’t go to bed.

In the morning, they let her out. And she ran around outside because they let her outside. She needed to stretch, so she ran around. Then, she met a giant lizard and told the lizard her plan. The giant lizard was pink, as big as a bean bag, and belonged to the family. The giant lizard said, “We need to know each other’s names.”

Chewie said, “My name’s Chewie. What’s yours?”

The giant lizard said, “My name is Liza.”

Chewie said, “The owners are really mean to me. I really need your help.”

Then the giant lizard said, “How can I help?”

Chewie said, “I need you to get the parrot in the house and tell them that I need to have lunch, because I’m starving.”

“I’ll do that at lunch time,” Liza said.

“Got it!” said Chewie.

At lunchtime, the parrot (who was invisible) said, “Liza wants a cracker!” The owners gave Liza a cracker, and she gave it to Chewie. It wasn’t enough, and it wasn’t what the parrot should have said. But Chewie had another plan.

The next day at lunch, she asked the lizard to open the box that the lunch was in and then put her inside so she could eat whenever she wanted. It worked, but the owners found out the next day. They gave her to another family, and Liza snuck away with her. The family took Liza in and they gave them both breakfast, dinner, and lunch.

 

Sunflowers

Once upon a time, Alexandra planted a sunflower seed in early April. That’s me! She watered me for a long time, but I did not grow. I was so lonely in the garden. There were a bunch of roses in the garden too, but they were already grown! There were also some peppers, daisies, and tulips, but they were all grown up too! When I was first planted, I looked like a little round circle. I was the color brown when I was first planted, but now, I am light brown, and I am an oval.

Today, I am surrounded by dirt, and I got a little bigger!

“You are a really late grower, so you can’t talk to us!” the roses said to me.

“Well, it’s not my fault that I was planted late!” I said.

“It’s okay because we were planted late too! We’ll be your friends!” the peppers yelled. The five peppers were red and shaped like big triangles. At night, the peppers and I gossiped about how mean the roses were.

I said, “Wow, the roses are really, really mean to me.”

“Yeah, I’m glad I was here to help you and talk about it,” said one of the peppers.

The daisies were really friendly; they also said that they would be my friends. Usually, the tulips couldn’t say anything because they were asleep! They were always super tired because they all stayed up late at night talking to each other.

***

Now, I’m about an inch across. I’m still just a seed. It’s late April, and I’m not cold or warm. It’s super sunny out, but I need water to grow! It’s been ten whole days since it last rained.

“I’m dry, and I need water to grow,” I complained one day.

“Oh, you’re too dry, Sunflower? So you can’t play with us? If we touch you, you’ll crack and break into a million pieces!” said the roses meanly.

“Well, you’re not getting any water either! So I could crumple you into pieces too!” I said.

“Well, you’re just a tiny little seed, and we’re already flowers! So you can’t even talk properly!” the roses said.

“It’s no big deal, you’ll just have to wait until you grow up, Sunflower,” said one of the kind daisies.

Another daisy said, “You’re fine little sunflower. You’ll grow up soon!”

When night came, after ten days of no rain, it thunder-stormed over the garden at midnight. This woke up all the people sleeping in the house with rooms close to the garden. Since the rain woke Alexandra up, she looked out the window at her garden, and she saw the mean roses were leaning sideways from the wind. I woke up and saw the mean roses and laughed. I’m glad they’re gone. I don’t have to worry about those mean roses now!

The morning after the big thunderstorm, it was drizzling a little bit. At 10:00 AM it stopped drizzling, and I was almost full-bloomed! I had a big, green stalk, and I was three inches tall!  

“You’ve grown a lot!” the daisies said cheerfully. Alexandra came out and looked at me to see how much I’d grown.

“This sunflower is so beautiful!” Alexandra said. She went inside and went back to sleep because she was tired from being woken up at midnight by the rain.

“You should go back to sleep, because you were up all night. We saw you! You look tired,” the daisies said.

“Ok, I’ll head back to bed. I AM tired!” I said, and I went back to sleep.

***

I woke up to a lot of wind swirling around me! I am only five inches tall! I was scared that I might be pulled out of the ground. I’d never been in a tornado before! I had to see if the daisies and peppers were okay. When I looked to see where the daisies and peppers were, they weren’t in the garden! Then, I looked up and saw the daisies and peppers swirling around in the air. They landed on the ground with a THUMP. I cried when I realized that the peppers and the daisies were dead! I was so sad that I fell asleep.

***

The next morning, I woke up and saw more sunflowers and two tulips. One tulip is purple, the other is blue. Seeds must have dropped from the old sunflower, and new ones grew, and Alexandra must have planted the tulips a couple of days ago. Since they were still covered by dirt, they were protected from the tornado, but received lots of water from the thunderstorm.

“Hi! Can we be your friends?” the sunflowers said.

“Yeah, sure!” I replied.

I made friends with the other sunflowers and the tulips. Then, Alexandra came outside to water me and eat lunch. She ate cheese pizza while sitting on her white porch. Whenever Alexandra is outside, the flowers don’t talk because we don’t want her to notice.

Another day, two green caterpillars came into the garden and crawled on me.

“Hello! Would you like to be my friends?” I asked.

“No! We just want to crawl on you and explore you,” one caterpillar said.

“What do you want to explore about me?” I asked.

“We want to see if you are old or new. If you’re old, we’ll eat you! If you’re new, we won’t eat you,” they said.

Since I am now seven inches tall, when I sway from side to side, I can shake the caterpillars off. They got frustrated with me, and they went to bother the new sunflowers.

“Want to be friends with us?” the new sunflowers asked the caterpillars.

“We want to eat you! Are you new or old?” the caterpillars asked the new sunflowers.

“We’re new! So don’t eat us!” they replied. The caterpillars left and crawled onto the tulips.

“Get off us now! Or we’ll make you flop onto the ground,” the tulips said. The caterpillars finally left and went to another garden.

***

Later that day, I heard something buzzing, and I knew it was a beetle! A beetle came to me and said, “I’m gonna eat your leaves!”

“Well, I’m old, and I don’t wanna lose my leaves!” I said to the beetle.

“Ok, I’ll go to the other sunflowers then,” the beetle said.

“Oh no! A beetle is coming to eat us,” the new sunflowers shouted.

The beetle ate the leaves from the new sunflowers. The new sunflowers bent and died.

Poor new sunflowers.

Now, for the tulips. One tulip was sleeping, so the other one woke him up right before the beetle came.

The beetle said, “Hey tulips, I am going to nibble on your stem.”

The tulips said, “No, do not nibble on us,” but the beetle had already started nibbling the tulips’ stems.

The tulips started to tilt sideways because of the beetle. Suddenly, two ladybugs came flying into the garden and went to help the new tulips.

“Beetle, stop nibbling on our stems,” whined the tulips.

One ladybug piped in and said, “Yeah, stop nibbling on their stems because they are new, and they don’t want to be ruined really soon.”

“I’m not going to listen to you because you aren’t the boss of me,” said the beetle.

“Okay,” said the ladybugs. Then, they flew on top of the beetle and ate him!

“Thank you so much, ladybugs! You are really helpful,” said the tulips. The tulips also said, “You can come back here and visit us whenever you want.”

Then, the ladybugs flew away back to where they came from.

Then, some ants came. I said, “Hi ants! What are you doing here?

They said, “Hi, just exploring this place.”

“Can you go to a different garden?” I asked. Then, the ants left, and that was the end of that.

A couple years later, I died. It was so sad.

Before I died, Alexandra liked to look at me. She smiled at me, and I smiled back.

Linsay the Dragon’s Adventures in Fairyland, Part 1: The Only Dragon Left in the World

A long time ago, before your great-great-great-great-great-grandparents were born, there were millions and millions of dragons on our planet.

Some liked humans; some did not.

Sadly, a young boy hated dragons, even more than witches did, and everybody in Fairytale Land knows how much witches hate dragons. They would boil dragon bones and use parts of them for their horrid spells. And sadly again, there were many witches. You know, like the one in Hansel and Gretel, the one in Snow White, and the one in Rapunzel?

This young boy’s name was Elliot. He would catch dragons with his special dragon net. He would press a button, a huge net would appear, and he wouldn’t have to worry about anything because the net had a special sensor to sense dragons and throw itself. And he would cut the dragons into pieces and put them in the fireplace. Usually, dragons are immortal, but this young boy used a special potion to make them only have one life. That is why dragons would have rather had their bones boiled than visited this horrid boy.

Elliot hated dragons because his siblings told him that dragons always hated humans. The siblings thought that dragons always breathed fire. That is because the siblings did not know any better than to not capture dragons. They wanted revenge because a dragon killed their mother. They didn’t know that the dragon had had a sore throat, and when he had coughed, he had breathed fire, and this fire had accidentally knocked over a tree, which had hit and killed their mother. The dragon had tried to explain it was a mistake, but the poor dragon had already been put in the fireplace.

So, the sublings vowed to kill every single dragon in Fairytale Land. They got very close to succeeding, but they didn’t know that a mother dragon had just given birth to her first child. She’d named the little dragon Linsay. When she heard about the dragon kidnappers, and when she knew that she was close to her death, she put little Linsay in a basket and sent her down the river, hoping that somebody kind enough to take care of her would find her.

***

Many years later, when Linsay was about twelve years old, she suddenly realized that there were other dragons than her!

When she was a little baby, the basket had bumped into a tree. It sent little Linsay flying over to a forest. Luckily, a kind squirrel had found her. Her name was Taylor. She had always wanted to have a child, but she never had. Luckily again, she loved to take care of dragons. In fact, she was a nurse for dragons! So she took little Linsay to her tree and made a small shelter for her next to it.

Little Linsay had realized all those years that her friends and people she lived with were squirrels and deer and birds. But she had never seen a single dragon. When she asked Taylor about this, Taylor said, “Have you ever heard of the dragon killers?” Linsay said no. Taylor told her about the story of how Elliot’s mom got killed.

Linsay secretly felt a teeny bit sorry for Elliot’s family, but she didn’t think that every dragon deserved to be killed just because of one dragon.

Linsay asked, “Who’s my mom and dad?”

Taylor said, “I don’t know. I found you alone. It looked like you had just fallen. However, there was a note on you. I think you belonged to Lillian and Lucas. The note said, ‘Please take care of my Linsay. I believe she is the only dragon left on earth. Please make sure that she doesn’t get killed. Best regards, Lucas and Lillian.’”

Linsay had always wanted to meet her real parents. Even though Taylor said she was her mom, Linsay had never believed her about that, because she was green and red, and Taylor was brown and white.

So Taylor finally told her that she adopted her. She told her this when Linsay was five.

But unfortunately, that very same day, when Linsay was twelve, Taylor went to get food. An old, cranky deer heard about the squirrel adopting the last dragon. This deer, whose name was Derek, worked for Elliot. So, as you may have guessed, he went to Elliot immediately and told him that Taylor had adopted the last dragon. And he also shared the detail that Taylor was alone looking for food.

Elliot asked people in the forest where to find Taylor. He found Taylor collecting some leaves and nuts.

He asked Taylor furiously, “Where is the last dragon?”

Taylor knew immediately by the tone of his voice that he was Elliot. So she refused to tell. So Elliot locked her up in a cage, and kept asking the same question over and over. But every time, Taylor refused to tell him where Linsay was. Some forest animals were eavesdropping on this conversation. They wanted to help Taylor. Knowing Elliot’s character about asking people for help, they decided to trick him.

So when Elliot asked where Linsay was, they said, “Oh, she’s across the mountains. Make three lefts, eighteen rights, and the nearest tree on the left. You’ll find her there.” Elliot thanked the animals and went.

Again, knowing Elliot’s character, they knew that Elliot would soon find out it was a trick. So they went to Linsay’s tree and told Linsay to go somewhere else. The animals explained to Linsay that Elliot had captured Taylor. Linsay was very upset, and she asked, “Is she going to be alright?”

The animals did not want to say this, but they said, “We are not really sure. Elliot can be very harsh sometimes.” Now Linsay started to cry. The animals tried to comfort her.

Meanwhile, Elliot was still bothering Taylor with the same exact question. Every time, again, she refused. Elliot then had an idea. He decided to threaten her.

He said, “If you don’t tell me where she is, I will treat you with the same respect as I do with a dragon.”

Taylor still didn’t want to say anything. Every time she was tempted to tell Elliot, she remembered the note that was on Linsay when she first saw her. She kept remembering the line, “Don’t let her die.” She kept repeating that in her mind. So Elliot decided to throw Taylor in the fireplace.

And, in case if you don’t know, in Fairytale Land, people can communicate with each other by only using their minds. This includes animals, humans, and other fantasy creatures. So Taylor sent a mind message to one of her friends, who was a Blue Jay named Beatrice. First, Taylor asked Beatrice if Linsay was doing fine. Beatrice told her that they had everything under control. Taylor was relieved. And then, she asked if they could send help. She explained the whole conversation to Beatrice and said that she was going to be thrown in the fireplace. So Beatrice promised that they would send deer for help.

Soon, help arrived. They also had foxes with them because they knew that foxes were clever. The foxes helped them with a plan. They said that some deer could distract Elliot, and try to make a lousy attempt to get Taylor back. Then, deer behind Elliot would snatch Taylor and let her free while Elliot was distracted. So, they started this into action.

So the deer went to Elliot and said, “Oh, Taylor! There you are! We’ve been looking for you! Don’t worry, we’ll save you!” As according to plan, Elliot immediately thought that they were going to rescue her right there and then.

So, he put down Taylor’s cage and put both hands up in the air, yelling, “Oh no you don’t! She’s going to be right here with me. See?” But the deer had taken the opportunity to take Taylor, and then, as Elliot turned to look, he realized he had been tricked! Elliot was about to go after them, but they had already gone out of sight.

Elliot was very, very angry. He called for his siblings to bring heavy axes. The siblings agreed. They tried to track the animals down, but the clever foxes, knowing Elliot’s character, dropped a special trail which made it impossible to find them. Elliot was now steaming.

He yelled furiously, “I promise I’ll find you! I promise, I promise, I promise!”

But they were already out of earshot. Elliot was so angry that he threw everything he picked up, including his axe. His siblings had to duck in order to not have their heads chopped off. And, unluckily for the animals, he had picked up some and thrown them high in the air (and sadly, they were not birds). So some of the animals ended up getting sprained ankles and broken bones.

Meanwhile, Linsay was hiding in a den that belonged to a mole.

Linsay the dragon’s adventure in Fairytale Land Part 2:

The ONLY Dragon Left in the WORLD

In the mole’s den, Linsay asked her friends to help her think of a plan. They said, “How about you go on a quest to find them?”

Linsay thought that was a good idea. She asked a few deer, a couple of birds, and some of Taylor’s friends to come with her. The moles warned her to be careful of magical creatures and mischievous ones, too. They told her about the path of evil. They said that once she found it, and if she missed Elliot’s house, then she would never be able to find it again. They told her that the trail was bright, sparkling red.

Linsay started off on her journey. She took a map from the mole’s den to find her way through the fairytale forest. First, to get to Elliot’s house, they had to make five lefts, ten rights, fifteen straights, and pass the tenth tree on the left. After that, they finally encountered a strange creature. It spoke very weirdly.

“H-h-h-ello.”

Linsay asked, “Why do you speak like that?”

“I-I-It’s how I talk sometimes.”

Linsay asked again, “Why do you speak like that? Do you have some speaking problems or something?” Linsay did not mean to be rude. She was just curious. This time, the strange creature didn’t answer.

He had a head that looked like Pacman’s face, his body was like a lion on two legs, and he had paws like a lion’s on his feet, and his hands were like a human’s, but he actually seemed very cute. He had an outfit that was pink and frilly, and on his hind paws, there were torn ballet slippers, and his paws were showing.

Noticing that Linsay and her friends were staring at the strange creature, the strange creature said, “Why are you all looking at me like that? In case you’re wondering, my granny made me put this pink, frilly dress on. She thinks I’m destined for ballet! So she sent me out here to practice.”

Linsay began to giggle a little.

“Don’t you giggle at me! Didn’t your mother ever tell you not to giggle at strangers?” The strange creature’s voice was very high-pitched, as if it were an animal chirping its highest notes.

He said, “My name is Jiggleton the 58th. Yes that’s right, all my family members before me were named Jiggleton. Now, don’t laugh at me!”

Linsay said, “I’m sorry, sir. I didn’t mean to bother you.”

But secretly, Linsay thought he was very funny, odd-looking, hilarious, and everything else that would make you see him like a clown. Linsay bit her lips and cheeks to stop her from laughing again. She did not need any more trouble. Linsay thought that maybe the strange creature would help her.

So she asked him, “Have you ever heard of the trail of evil? We are looking for it right now.”

Jiggleton said, “Why do you want to look for such an evil path? My granny has told me about it, but remember, you always have to be aware of your surroundings. At least, that’s what Granny says.”

Linsay, again, had to stop herself from laughing.

“Okay, come on. If you promise to help me take off these itchy, frilly, pink ballerina clothes, and these tight slippers, I’ll help you.”

So Linsay and her friends took off the ballerina outfit, and the birds, using their beaks, cut the ribbon that was attached to the slipper to make it stay on Jiggleton’s foot.

Jiggleton said, “Come on now, do you ever hurry?”

Linsay replied, “If we hurry, we might not see the trail and we might not ever see it again! Once you find it, you will never find it again!!!”

“Oh! Granny never told me about that! How terrible!” So all of them went looking for the trail.

***

Meanwhile, at Elliot’s house, he and his siblings were catching more dragons. ”Ha ha ha!” they cackled.

The eldest was Tim, who was evil and actually the person who suggested capturing the dragon in the first place. He was very tall and skinny. He had many warts and bruises, and he was bald. His teeth were very crooked, and he had a single gold tooth.

The second, William, was very short and was the kindest of all the siblings. Sometimes, he even spared a few dragons, only to be caught by siblings again. He was fat and had a funny smile. He always grinned when he heard something funny.

The third one, Raymie, was actually very pretty. But she was very cruel and evil. She had encouraged Elliot to help them capture dragons.

The fourth was Elliot. In case you don’t know, Elliot’s face was shaped like a hexagon. He also had many warts, just like Tim.

The fifth was Carrie. She also had crooked teeth, and her face was as round as a circle. She loved to play tricks on her older brothers, especially Elliot.

The last one was tiny, little Tina. She couldn’t do too much (except throw rocks at Elliot’s face).

Back to Linsay and Jiggleton: they were looking for the path of evil. As they were looking, animals that passed by were muttering, “Who’s that strange creature?” Jiggleton was so happy to be out of that tutu.

He was prancing and skipping, and he urged them, “Come on, come on! Let’s not waste any time!” Poor Linsay and her friends had to run so fast to keep up with even Jiggleton walking.

Linsay asked, huffing and puffing, “How many more steps until we reach the path?”

“Oh, here we are. Oh no, no, that’s not it. That’s purple. Silly me,” Jiggleton said to Linsay. Linsay groaned.

“When are we going to be there?”

“Be patient… um… um… what are you?”

“Have you ever heard of a dragon?” said Linsay.

“No, actually I haven’t. I’ve seen so many squirrels and crocodiles and deer and birds, but I’ve never seen a dragon.” Linsay thought to herself, Oh right, I’m the only dragon left. So she told the story of Elliot and his siblings to Jiggleton.

Jiggleton replied, “Oh dear, oh dear, oh dear! That sounds horrid. We must put an end to this horrid beast, once and for all! And his siblings.” Linsay was very unsure about this.

“If I tried to stop him, he’d turn me into dragon toast! I don’t want to have butter on me. Nor do I want to have an evil boy kill me!” Linsay said.

To which Jiggleton replied, “Oh, my. Don’t you know the interest in trying?” Now Linsay was getting kind of angry.

“Then, why don’t you try ballet? Why don’t you try to do what Granny says to?” Jiggleton did not respond. He looked down for a minute, and then he said nothing.

***

Back at Elliot’s place, they were preparing a scheme in case, for some reason, Linsay appeared. He made his siblings stand guarding the area, and they made sure that no dragons got out of their cage. They wanted to have a lure for Linsay, which is why they didn’t kill from the past week’s hunt.

Meanwhile, a young bird (a robin, it was) was eavesdropping on this conversation. As you know, animals can communicate with their minds in this world. This robin knew that one of her friends was with Linsay, so she mind talked to her, saying what Elliot had said. The robin’s friend told Linsay everything. They valued this information. And they were mind talking for this. In case if you don’t know, in animal world, they can also read minds. Linsay was trying to get a signal from Jiggleton’s mind, but couldn’t get too much.

Back at Elliot’s house, his siblings were preparing a trap for Linsay and her friends. They decided to make a deep pit and put a cover over it.

Tim said, “When she comes, she will immediately try to find the dragons we captured. So if we let the dragons come right on top of the pit, she will immediately go to them.”

“How do you know that she even wants to rescue the dragons?” Elliot asked, who had caught the most dragons and knew their character.

“Because I do!” Tim snarled. ”Do you think that Linsay would want to go swooping up and grabbing the dragons and being the heroic hero she is? I think that that would be right, eh?”

Elliot was so scared by Tim’s snarling that he decided to keep quiet and agree with him.

***

Meanwhile, Jiggleton seemed to have forgotten all about their little argument and was happy and skipping again.

“Lalalalala,” Jiggleton sang.

“Jiggleton,” hissed Linsay. “Don’t sing so loud. You might wake the other animals up.”

“Huh?” Jiggleton yelled so loud that everyone had to cover their ears.

Some animals fell from trees, woke up, and started chasing them.

“See? I told you so!” said Linsay, “I’ve been living in the forest my whole life!”

“Oopsie daisy,” said Jiggleton, as he dodged a swooping peregrine falcon who had just woken up from its afternoon nap.

Linsay groaned. This person needed to get used to the forest, and learn better than to wake up baby chicks. Finally, as they ran, they found the rainbow trail. By that time, the animals had given up chasing them, so they were alone. In case you don’t know, the rainbow trail has all the color trails. For example, there’s an orange trail, and a green trail, and a blue fairy trail. So there had to be the evil trail. They kept their eyes wide open for a sparkling, big, red trail.

At last, Jiggleton whispered, “I found it.”

Linsay was delighted. She was about to squeal, but she remembered that there were other animals sleeping.

So instead, she whispered, “That’s awesome! Let’s go! What are we waiting for?”

So they sprinted towards the path.

The path was very wide. Extremely wide. As long as about three football fields. It wasn’t even a path! It was more like a big area, sort of. Indeed, there was a beautiful, red, glittery, sparkling path in the big area. It was more glittery than the rest. Linsay had learned from the moles that everybody in the wicked world had a different letter for their name, and it would spell that letter on its path to lead them to that person. There was an “S” and there was a “T” and there was a “W” and a “V” and there was an “A” and finally they found an “E,” for Elliot. So they took that path. The mole had told them that they could never find the same letter path. If they went down the “E” path, they would never find it again and someone else would, but they might find the “W” path, and then they would never see the “W” path again.

So they went toward the “E” path, being brave, being able to not see it again. If you were behind Linsay watching over, you would have seen them sprint with Jiggleton on their heels. DUN DUN DUUUN…

Linsay the dragon’s adventure in Fairytale Land Part 3:

The ONLY Dragon Left in the WORLD

So, as you know, the others had just sprinted to the path. They noticed that there were compasses everywhere, and maps, and spy cameras. And there were machines that were saying things like, “Three feet away,” and, “Eighty-five feet away.” As they got closer and closer and closer, the number decreased.

Finally, it said, “You are here, you are here, you are here,” in a robotic voice. And they indeed found Elliot’s house. All that time, when Linsay and her friends were trying to find the path, Elliot had a teeny surprise waiting for them.

“Well, well, well. If it isn’t my dear old friend, the last dragon.”

“Um, excuse me, the name is Linsay,” Linsay said.

“Ah, yes, yes, yes. The little Linsay is finally here. We have a little present for you, my dear.”

“Actually, I’m a dragon,” Linsay said. “You said so yourself.”

“I didn’t mean that ‘deer,’” Elliot snapped, “Now, come on. I’ll show you your present.”

Elliot led her to a big, big, humongous room. Linsay was shocked (well, actually, not too shocked) to see dragons hanging from humongous nets, as if they were cocoons, from the ceiling. The dragons were all caught up and tangled in each other’s tails and bodies. Linsay did not know this, but her parents were there in those nets.

A deer who was accompanying Linsay said, “Linsay, are you sure this is a good idea?”

“Linsay?” said one dragon, surprised. “Your name’s not Linsay, is it?”

“Actually, yes ma’am, it is,” Linsay replied.

Lillian turned to Lucas, which was a bit tricky since they were cramped together. Linsay had stopped to listen to this curious conversation.

Lucas said, “I think this might be her.”

Lillian said, “Who do you belong to? Is it Taylor? It can’t possibly be Taylor, is it?”

“If you’re talking about Taylor the squirrel, yes ma’am,” replied Linsay in a very positive and proud tone.

Lillian’s mouth was wide open ever since she had heard the name of her child.

“Wait a minute,” Linsay said curiously and mysteriously. “What are your names again? I didn’t quite hear that.”

Lillian squeaked in a very soft voice, “Lillian and Lucas.”

“Are you my mom and dad?” said Linsay, cocking her head like a cuckoo bird, as if she were trying to remember if she had ever seen those faces before.

They did look like her, but again, didn’t every dragon look like her? But there was something special about their scales. Everyone in fairytale land knows that dragons have different colored scales down their backs. Lillian’s and Lucas’ were red just like Linsay’s, while others were green, and orange, and all those others. Every dragon was green, though.

Lillian answered Linsay’s question, saying, “I believe so. We do have red scales down our backs.”

Linsay was very happy, and she flew up, trying to hug her parents, but it was a bit tricky since they were in that net.

“Don’t worry,” Linsay whispered. “I’ll get you out. I promise.”

Lillian and Lucas’ eyes were wide with concern. They didn’t want to lose Linsay again, but they wanted her to be careful. Finally, Linsay gently stepped into the trap and fell.

“Hahahaha,” Tim cackled. “I knew you would fall for it.”

But Linsay grinned happily. “Oh, but you forgot I have wings.”

Elliot gently kicked his brother in the shin.

“I told you we should have added something!” he exclaimed. “I thought that just a simple pit wasn’t enough. I knew she was going to bring friends. I knew it, I knew it, I knew it!”

“Ughhh,” Tim groaned. His face was big and fiery and purple as he watched Linsay hovering mid-air in front of his face.

“Oh, and you also forgot that I have fire,” she sing-songed.

“Mmmmmmmm…” Every sibling’s face was probably the angriest color it could get as they glared at Tim.

“Hehehehe,” said Tim, trying to calm them down. “Hey, we can always try again… hehehe?” But they were too angry to respond.

The other animals took this opportunity to use their beaks and hooves to cut off the nets and set the dragons free. First, a bird cut a net that was holding Lillian and Lucas. They flew free and hugged Linsay as hard as they could. If you were cramped in the middle of that hug, you would have had a heart attack, but luckily, dragons have a much stronger body than humans do, so the hug didn’t bother them one bit. Finally, Linsay breathed a big, big, big, big fireball with some other dragons helping her, and it was heading straight toward Elliot and his siblings. Unfortunately, all of them were burnt to a crisp.

Linsay yelled, “That’s a taste of your own medicine! Enjoy!”

Before they were burned, everyone was still glaring at Tim, and Tim looked really helpless, actually, but they had no time to examine because they were already burnt.

“I wish your mama had taught you to not burn innocent dragons, and you’re gonna learn your lesson, and I guess you did. I’m looking at your records right now, and you have killed 8,555 dragons, which is basically three quarters of the entire population. Luckily, one quarter of the population is right here. And since they have babies, it’s about half. So haha to you,” Linsay hollered again.

So everyone went back to their dragon homes, and, as you may have guessed, they all lived happily ever after.

 

Knight of the Chalice

Once upon a time, in the land of Jesteria, a wise king ruled over his country with his daughter, a vain princess. He needed to find a suitable husband for her, but no one dared come near her for her vain nature. Then, one fateful day, the princess fell ill. The king was very sad, but he knew about a way to cure her disease by getting the legendary gold chalice and having her drink from it. So the king set up a contest: whoever could bring the chalice to him could marry his daughter and get a share of the kingdom. However, if you returned empty-handed, you would die.

Many hopeful princes and knights attempted the long journey to the chalice, but all failed and were beheaded. The king had all but given up hope. He was sitting upon his throne, his head in his hands, when suddenly, a man clad in iron armor ran up to the throne and bowed.                                                  

“I am a knight come from the Kingdom of the West, here to attempt to get the golden chalice and your daughter’s hand.”      

“Very well, but you must bring me the chalice by sundown, for that is when my daughter will die.”                                           

So the knight set out on his quest to get the chalice. After traveling for many miles, the knight came upon a large gate. An old woman sat in front of the gate.

“Will you lend me some food, young man?” asked she.                  

“Why, yes, old woman, I shall share my bread with you,” said the knight.

As he did, the gate opened.                                 

After eating the bread, the knight passed through the gate. Many miles later, he came to a river. The river was flowing at an alarming speed. The knight knew he couldn’t get around it, judging from its length, so he doffed his armor and waded across the raging river. There were many moments when the knight thought he wouldn’t make it.

But then, after crossing the river, the knight came face to face with a demon knight. The demon drew his sword and swung at the hopeful knight. He dodged and kicked the demon, knocking him out. The knight then saw, in all its bejeweled majesty, the golden chalice. The wine that poured from the sacred cup could cure any illness.

With the chalice, the knight ran all the way back to the king’s castle, ten minutes before sundown.

The princess drank from the cup and got better, then said, “Is this my new husband? He is a ragged peasant! I shan’t marry him!”  

The knight was so overcome with anger, that he threw the princess from the castle, her bones shattering on the ground below. The knight then took his share of the kingdom, for a promise is a promise. Even if the knight killed the princess, the king still needed to give him some of the kingdom.  And the knight had many more adventures, but those are stories for another day.

                                                     

Rainbow’s Adventure

Chapter 1: Home

Rainbow is a scarlet macaw. He lives in Jungle Island, Florida. A lot of tourists come through it.There’s a bridge where cars can go from the mainland to the island.

On his left claw, two of his nails have come off. He is rainbow colored and has a really pointy beak.

He lives by himself on a stick. He just sits there all day. He interacts with a lot of humans who visit.

Rainbow wants to go back to the real Amazon jungle, but he can’t fly because the keepers of Jungle Island cut his wings so he can’t fly where he wants to. So, he calls his friend who lives in the jungle using his bird telepathy, to come over and pick him up. He wants his friend to come with his other macaw friends and carry him to the Amazon.

His friend responds, “I’m coming with  my friends.”

“There’s a gorilla show right next door to me,” Rainbow says.

They wait for the night to come, and then they fly over from the Amazon to Jungle Island and pick up Rainbow. The zookeepers see that Rainbow is missing on the security cameras.

The zookeepers put the alarms on, and Rainbow gets so scared he says to his friends, “You guys, bring me back to my branch! I have to get back. Or else I’ll be in big trouble.”

They said they would bring him back because they didn’t want him to get in trouble. Once he’s back on his branch, Rainbow pretends to be asleep. The zookeepers come out from where they were hiding and one says, “What’s going on around here?” It is a man with a mustache, brown eyes, and brown hair.

Rainbow pretends to wake up from his pretend sleep and says, “Looking for someone, fellas?” (Rainbow speaks English).

Then they say, “You, young boy, are in big trouble. What were you doing a few minutes ago?”
“I was just sleeping, but then you guys woke me up. You guys are so mean.”

They say, “No we’re not, you’re the mean one. You’re lying to us.” Then, they get into a big, humongous fight. Rainbow starts pecking them with his beak. Both of them say, “Ow ow ow ow ow!” and they faint because of the pain.

Rainbow says, “Come on boys, bring me up! Let’s go to the Amazon and go have fun.”

Then a girl zookeeper says, “Not so fast, little bird. First, you’re coming with me.”

Rainbow says, “Uh oh, you see what I mean?” His friends pretend to be statues while he talks to the zookeepers.

The girl zookeeper suddenly feels sick, but she doesn’t want to get Rainbow sick, so she goes to the bathroom. Another zookeeper walks up to Rainbow and she says, “Little bird, I need to have a talk with you.”

Rainbow starts crying and says, “All I want is to be in the Amazon and be free. Why’d you guys cut my wings so I can’t fly?”

“Rainbow, you can be in the Amazon if you want. But we thought this would be a safer place for you because the Amazon is getting destroyed right now.”

“Oh no!” Rainbow says. “I have to save my friends!”

The nice zookeeper gives Rainbow prosthetic wings so he can fly. She always has an extra pair in the first aid kit, just in case.

Rainbow says, “Thank you so much,” to the zookeeper.

“My pleasure, Rainbow. But please, try and help the Amazon rainforest.”

Rainbow says, “Of course. Why would I want to not protect my home? I love my home.”

The zookeeper says, “Of course you do. Now go out there and give them all you got.”

He says, “I got it,” and he leaves. He tells his friends, “Guys, we have to save the rainforest! It’s being destroyed, and the whole Amazon might be dead by the time we get there. Come on, we have to doubletime.”

They go as fast as they can, and they make it. They call every single macaw, bird, and animal they can find in the rainforest, and they go to the heart of the Amazon, where people are starting to cut down trees. They approach the people who want the wood from the Amazon trees and say, “What are you guys doing? This is our jungle, not your little playhouse that you don’t want anymore.”

Then, the people say, “Well if you want your rainforest, you’re gonna need to get it from us.”
Every single bird in the forest says, “We’re gonna get our rainforest back.” All of the animals start approaching the men, and the men start freaking out.

They finally say, “Okay, you guys can have the rainforest.”

They have a huge celebration in the rainforest. They actually make use of the heart of the rainforest. They make it into a party center. And, they live happily ever after.

 

Chapter 2: Getting a Job

Since Rainbow had so much fun in the party center, he wants to start working there. He thinks, Hey, since no one is working there, I could be the boss and the DJ. He figures he could charge one nut for one hour of partying. He finds a big leaf, some mud, and a stick to draw with. He starts planning for the center – how to make it a fun place where animals would really want to go. But how can I make all of this stuff out of nature? We need somebody to build it, thinks Rainbow.

Rainbow flies back to the city with the leaf he drew his plans on and he goes back to Jungle Island. He asks one of the zookeepers if they could make that happen and he says, “No.” The zookeepers don’t try to get him back, because they’re happy that he saved the Amazon. As a reward, they’re letting him live in the jungle.

He flies back to the Amazon, calls his friends, and says, “Guys, we have to build this in a couple of days, okay? And just out of nature.” Then he adds, “It’s literally impossible!”

“No it’s not. We can still try! It never hurts to try,” his friends say.

Rainbow groans, “Okay, you win.”

One of Rainbow’s friends is a white macaw. Rainbow has two more friends. One friend is a blue macaw and the other one is a scarlet macaw. The blue macaw is named Blue, the white macaw is named Snow, and the scarlet macaw is named Silk.

Rainbow and his friends start building the party center. Rainbow brought supplies for everything, and then, he and his friends start building.

Once they are done, Silk says, “Look at our progress!”

A few hours later, there is an earthquake. Everything that Rainbow and his friends built is destroyed. Then, all of his friends went back to the heart of the rainforest and say, “Uh-oh…”

“What happened here?” says Silk.

“Where’s our party center?” says Snow.

“Who did this?” asks Blue.

“The earthquake did,” says Rainbow in a mad tone.

“We have to fix this!” says Snow.

“But how?” Rainbow says.

Silk says, “Rainbow, get the supplies that you got before. We can build this thing again.”

“Okay…” groans Rainbow.

Rainbow flies out to get the supplies.

“We’ll help,” says Snow.

“Thanks, guys.” Rainbow says.

“Come on,” says Blue. “Let’s get those supplies and build another party center for fun!”

Then, other animals, like the lions and snakes and tigers, the other birds, crocodiles, frogs, and everybody else comes to that part of the rainforest, and says, “What has happened here? It was so nice before!”

“The earthquake happened,” says Rainbow, flying in with the supplies. “Would you guys please move so we can rebuild this place?”

Everybody else says, “No. We’re gonna help you.”

“Thank you so much,” Rainbow and his friends say to the other animals. Rainbow shows everyone the leaf that he wrote on for the plan. Then everybody says, “Whoooooooa.”

“Oh, cool,” says a baby lion. “Look, mama,” but his mom doesn’t not come.

Then Rainbow says, “We’ll take care of you until your mom comes, which will probably be very soon. It won’t take long.”

“I’ll start looking for your mom, okay?” says Snow.

“Okay,” the cub says. “Thank you, Rainbow.”

“Are you gonna help us build?” says Rainbow.

The cub says, “Yes, please!”

“Come on,” Silk says, “We have to start building or else we won’t open on time.”

“Okay, Silk,” the cub says.

Then they start building.

“This is fun!” the cub says. “I can’t wait to tell my mom about this!”

“One problem with that,” Snow says, coming back.

“What’s the problem?” asks the cub.

“It turns out your mom was captured by humans.”

“What?” the cub says with a confused face.

“It looks like we’ll be your new parents,” Rainbow says.

But the cub doesn’t respond. The cub is crying in Rainbow’s wings.

“It’s okay,” Rainbow says. Then, Rainbow whispers to his friends, “You guys continue working. I’ll stay here.”

“What’s your name, little cub?” Rainbow asks.

“Charlie,” the cub says.

“Come on, Charlie, let’s get some popsicles.”

“No, I want to look for my mama!”

“Okay, we can look for your mom,” Rainbow says.

Charlie snaps, “Thank you.”

“Here, let me give you a ride,” Rainbow says, spreading his wings wide. “I will take you to where Snow saw your mother.”

“Here we go!” Rainbow starts to go up.

“Weeeeeeee!” Charlie says.

“Right here,” Rainbow says. He goes down to where Charlie’s mother was. When they get down on the ground, Charlie sees his mom locked up in a cage with poison ivy around her so that the other animals can’t touch her.

“Charlie!” his mother calls.

“Mama!” Charlie calls.

Charlie runs up to his mom.

“Not too close!” says Rainbow. “You don’t want to get poison ivy on you!”

Charlie’s mom says, “Thank goodness you’re okay.”

“We have to get your mom out,” Rainbow says.

“But how?” Charlie and his mom say.

“This is how.” The hunters come out from hiding in a cherry bush. “You two are gonna stay in the same cage and be stuffed and put in the American Museum of Natural History.”

Rainbow starts beating up all the hunters. He uses his beak to peck at them and scratches them with his claws. Then, Charlie starts getting up closer to his mom. Charlie doesn’t care about the poison ivy. He wants his mom back.

“Ouch!” Charlie says. “The poison ivy stung me, Rainbow!” But Rainbow doesn’t answer. He is busy beating up the hunters with his claws, his beak, everything he has. He pokes them with a super-sharp stick he made. Then, the hunters faint from pain.

“Charlie, let me take the poison ivy off while you go get the key from the hunters’ pants.”

“Gotcha,” Charlie says.

“Three… two… one… go!” Rainbow says. Rainbow takes off the poison ivy while Charlie goes to get the key. Then, Rainbow unlocks the cage with the key so that Charlie’s mom can go to Charlie, and Charlie can go to his mom.

“Goodbye,” Rainbow says. “I’m going to go back to the party center.”

At the center, the animals can bowl, play games, chat with friends and have birthday parties. They use oranges and bamboo sticks for bowling. There is a kid’s section where they can play tag, bowl, and play games, just like everything that they have for adults.

Rainbow looks at his claws, and he has big spots on them. He can’t feel the poison ivy, because his claws are rough. It is nighttime, so Rainbow goes to his house and starts to sleep in his bed.

The next morning, he wakes up early to get to his job. When he is getting ready, he sees that his poison ivy is gone. Then, Rainbow decides to put up fliers for animals to work at the party center. He decides to name the party center, “The Heart of the Amazon.” Then, he takes a picture of the Amazon and puts it on the fliers.

 

Chapter 3: Getting to Business

When Rainbow gets to work, all the other animals who want to work start coming. They ask Rainbow if they can work. Rainbow says, “Yeah, of course.”

There are frogs, snakes, tigers, lions and birds. The frog is the greeter. The lion is in charge of the bowling. The tiger is in charge of the kids section. The snake is behind the register. The birds are the cops to check if anything is going wrong.

Rainbow gives everybody a membership and a nametag. The animals get paid with nuts. At seven o’clock, the center opens. Rainbow asks everyone to get in position.

Everyone says, “Yes, Rainbow!”

Then Rainbow screams, “We’re OPEN!!!”

No one comes in for thirty minutes.

The snake says, “Where is everybody? We’re still empty.”

The lion says, “This is a real big emergency! There’s nobody here!”

Then, everybody else screams, “WE know!!”

The tiger says, “How come nobody’s here?”

“I don’t know,” Rainbow says.  “Maybe because we didn’t hang the fliers, so nobody knows about it. You guys, I’ll have my friends hang these fliers, and we can just wait here for customers.”

Rainbow calls all his friends and asks them, “Can you hang these fliers?”

“Of course, Rainbow!” they say.   

“I’ll help you,” Rainbow says.

“Thank you,” Rainbow’s friends say.

“Come on, let’s go,” says Rainbow.

Rainbow and his friends grab the fliers and start hanging them in the jungle. Once they are done, Rainbow and his friends wait five minutes. Customers are coming in to the party center, so they can have fun.

Charlie and his mom come, and they get a membership.

Rainbow says, “I didn’t get your name,” to the mom.

“My name’s Claire,” the mom says.

“Very nice to meet you, Claire.”

“Nice to meet you, too,” Claire says.

“Charlie can go in the kid’s section, if you like.”

Then, Claire asks if Charlie wants to go in the kid’s section.

Charlie says,”Yes, please.”

Rainbow says, “Come on, Charlie, I’ll lead you there.”

Rainbow takes Charlie to the kid’s section, which is next to the grown-up’s bowling alley. Charlie walks in the kid’s center. Later, he says, “I don’t want to go home” when it is time for them to go.

“Here, you guys can have a punch card. If you come here ten times, then you can come one time for free.”

“Thank you, Rainbow!” Charlie says.

“Bye!” Rainbow says.

“Bye!” Claire says.

“Wait!” Rainbow says. “I forgot. Every time a cub leaves, I’m supposed to give them a lollipop. So Charlie, you can choose a lollipop from here.”

“I’ll have this one,” Charlie says.  “Okay,” Rainbow says, “Bye!”

 

Baltimore Kitty

The first thing I remember is my mother licking me. I can’t see her, but I know it is her. I can hear voices too. Human voices that, at first, trouble me. But then, my mother somehow reassures me that everything is fine. I listen curiously to what those humans, a whole other species, think and say.

“Emily, we can not keep a whole litter of kittens. There are five kittens from this litter alone! Just think of all the other litters Queen might have with Sebastian.”

I make the decision that my mother is Queen, but who in the world is Sebastian?

“Richard, don’t worry. We are planning on selling the kittens after all.”   

I don’t really understand what that means, so I don’t really pay attention to the words being spoken. Instead, I listen to the strange sounds that come out of their mouths. One human has a light, airy voice, and the other has a more gruff, husky voice that reminds me too much of a dog’s bark. This thinking exhausts me, and I curl up beside my mother and siblings. Comfortable, warm, and very sleepy.

Suddenly, I feel a jolt and wake up in the back of a strange, rolling room. I’m still too weak to stand up and open my eyes, so I nuzzle my mother, who licks me until my oldest brother, Prince, diverts her attention away. There is nothing to do in this strange contraption. So I let myself be lulled asleep by the rolling of the strange thing.

“Hey Mittens!” says Chanel, my youngest sister. I can tell it’s her because she is the sister who constantly wants attention. Especially from mother. Also, she clips her words, even at three days old.

“Chanel, I’m sleeping.”

“Mommy told me what this thing is called.” And pausing for dramatic effect, she declares, “It is called a car!”

I am mad that Chanel knows this before I did, but I do not say so. Instead, I fall asleep wondering what a car does, other than scare little kittens.

***

Three months later

I have grown some lovely, fluffy fur. I can now open my eyes, walk around, and play with my sisters and brothers. The house I live in is a townhouse in South Baltimore. It is a red, brick house with ivy growing up the sides. I’m the cleanest kitty out of my litter, and that makes me very proud. My paws are a proud point of mine, hence my name “Mittens.”

***

One day, I watched Richard, my human, put up a sign I couldn’t read, but I did see the word “kittens” on the sign. I meowed at my mother and my father, the mysterious Sebastian. They immediately jumped up to the window sill. I could tell it was very hard for my parents to read the sign too, although they didn’t want to admit it.

“It looks like Miss Mittens has got herself a mystery,” purred my mother, nuzzling me. She didn’t seem to worry about it though, so neither did I.

Richard walked back inside, whistling as he walked. I rubbed his leg, expecting an answer. He bent down to scratch my head.

“Ohhhh Mittens, if only you knew.” Then, he went into the kitchen.

If only I knew. What does that mean? I wondered all throughout the day. I knew a lot of things. I considered myself a very educated kitty. I knew not to drink from the toilet and where my food was. I knew how to clean myself and many other important things.

While I was pondering in the kitchen, I heard a knock on the door and a sophisticated voice saying, “I heard that you were selling kittens. I only need one who isn’t a lot of work, likes laps, and doesn’t get fur everywhere.”

Who is this strange person at the door?

“Well, I have an idea of one you would love. Her name is Mittens,” said Richard.

Wait, that’s my name! Are Richard and Emily selling me? Before I could fully wrap my head around this terrible fate, Richard was picking me up and saying goodbye. Then, like I never mattered to him, Richard dumped me into the strange woman’s perfectly manicured hands.

I started to cry, “Mama, Daddy?”

They came running over. But it was too late. The woman was already paying my human. I was leaving everything I had: my bed, my humans, my food, my house, but most importantly, my family. I saw all my siblings pawing at the windows and doors. I thought of Prince, Winny, Bent, and Chanel, and how much I would miss them. They drove me crazy most of the time, but they were my pack. Now who would I play with? I curled up in the back of the woman’s car and waited for the drive to be over.

“Kitty, come out. We’re here,” the woman cooed. I looked around at my new surroundings. There was a pale blue townhouse with white shutters and a small porch. I didn’t notice anything pretty about it, because I had made up my mind to hate the place that was to replace my family and old life.

“Kitty — Mittens — whatever your name is, please get out of the car.” I went under a seat, very frightened. Finally, she sighed and picked me up. “Something tells me you’re going to be more trouble than you’re worth, kitty,” she spat at me.

After a week in the ill-decorated house, I was bored out of my mind. No one would play with me — well, except when the mistress (meaning the woman who “stole” me from my old, better life) tried to do fashion shows for me. She put on crazy, flashy, sequined outfits and high, high heels, and strutted down the hallway. I always ran away from her.

On my first day, I thought she wanted to play, so I attacked her legs. That didn’t end well. I  had the house all to myself because Mistress was gone all day for her “job,” which was really just a shopping spree, then treating herself to bubble tea and ice cold margaritas.

By the end of week one, I decided to run away. I couldn’t stand to live there anymore. Run away from hot pink, pleather couches and tacky pink chandeliers in every room. Run away from the worst life yet. So I did. I thought it would’ve been harder to leave a home and a human, but once I started running, I didn’t even look back.

***

It was sad how easily I got away. No one really knew I was gone. I wanted to go back to my old house very badly, but I realized that I would be sent away from them again. I wasn’t wanted at home. Of course, my real cat family would love me back. But to the humans, I was just another mouth to feed. It is terrible to not be wanted anywhere. I cried, realizing that now, not only did I not have any family, but I also had no shelter. I slipped into an alley and hid behind a trash can, waiting out the night.

“Hey Stocky, get up!” hissed an unfamiliar voice.

“Ughhh?” I moaned, not really knowing what was going on.

“Did you hear me? I said, get up. This is my territory.”

“Territory? Are you being protective of a trash can?”

“This is mine, anyway.”

“Fine,” I said, not really making an effort to move.

Just then, the cat attacked me. It scratched my ear. I hissed, startled. I was going to get up. There was no need for violence. But in self defense, I pounced on top of it, my claws digging into the cat’s back. The cat shook me off. I fell to the wet, garbage-covered ground.

“Just stay away. I’ll leave you with a warning this time.” And with that, the cat turned away and took its place in the spot I found. I slunked away, looking for something to eat.

I tried to catch birds, but I only succeeded in catching one. It was rather sad to kill another living thing, but I got used to it, because I was starving. Sometimes, the occasional mouse would wander into the alleyway, and I would be on it in a second. It really wasn’t much food to live by though. The water supply was also very low. There was a leaking water hose in the back of a bakery that made big puddles.

After two weeks of this, I was tired, hungry, and thirsty. This little alleyway had become my home, food source, water source, and protection from other cats. While I was thinking about the alley and how I’d gotten here, I smelled something slightly familiar. The smell made me think of the times when Richard came home with a sack of meat. Sometimes he gave the chicken to me and my family for a big, fancy dinner. Remembering this gave me a heavy heart, making me wish I was still there. I was still a curious kitten, so I followed the scent. I followed the scent all the way to a shop, where a man was hanging up meat on strings. Meat! Glorious, fresh, chewy, tender, yummy meat. I moaned at the man wearing a bloody apron. He turned his head to stare at me.

“Hey pretty kitty, you look a little young to be out on your own. Where’s your mama?”

I moaned again and rubbed his leg.

“Awwwww, are you a loner?” he asked, looking like he felt bad for me.

I sat down at his feet and looked up at him expectantly.

He stared right back at me, then he bent down to rub my head. I hadn’t been pet for a little while, so this felt really good. I licked his hand. There was a lot of salty, sweaty goodness on it because it was April, which is when humans’ hands are very moist.

“I like you, cat,” the man declared. “Wait here,” he told me.

I waited patiently and started looking around the shop. It was covered in meat and iceboxes. There were dirty aprons hanging in a corner. What was this wonderful place called? Just then, the meat man came back with a whole plate of meat.

“Here, kitty. I thought you’d be hungry,” he said, setting the plate down by my paws.

I ate all of the food up. It was delicious. Memories of holidays and “family dinners” came flooding back. It was the best food I’d had in weeks.

“Awwww, you must’ve been hungry,” the meat man said with so much affection in his voice. I went to the man again and rubbed up against him to say thank you.

The next day, I went back to the meat man’s shop. He smiled when he saw me.

“Hello, good to see you again, kitty.”

I meowed at him.

“Hungry?” he asked.

Yet again, I stared up at him expectantly. This made him laugh for some reason. I didn’t find a poor kitten starving funny. But hey, if this man was giving me food, I had nothing against him. Also, his intentions were always kind. After giving me a pat on the head, he strolled into his storeroom to find me something to eat and drink. When he came back, I was practically drooling — that is, if cats could drool. The smell was so tempting, so taunting, I ran at the meat man.

“Please, I haven’t had good water for days, and that meat smells so marvelous,” I begged. But of course in my wild plea, I forgot a key detail. Cats and humans can’t communicate. It’s just how it is. Although it drives us cats crazy.

“Here you go, kitty,” he said. “You know, I got to say that in all my years working as a butcher, I’ve never met such a nice cat.”

I felt proud that I was an exception to the nasty cat stereotype. I was also very happy to know what he was really called, a butcher. Then, I licked his hand to show my thanks and went away to my makeshift home.

I went to the butcher’s store everyday, so much that he just left out a plate of meat and a water bowl just for me! If the butcher didn’t have anything to do, he would watch me eat and talk, but most days he was busy. I loved that the butcher really cared about me as a cat and my needs. But one day, something happened to our relationship.

“Herald, we need to talk,” said the butcher’s wife.

“Yes?” asked the butcher.

“Our son Lewie called. We need to move out to California for a while to help him out.”

“To the other side of the country?” he asked.

“Of course. This is our son we’re talking about.”

“I haven’t heard from him for some time now. I wonder what the matter is.”

“Well then, let’s settle the matter with packing your bags and finding a house in San Diego.”

I walked up to the butcher and rubbed his legs over and over again.

“Oh kitty, someone will need to take care of you!” cried the butcher “But I know the perfect person. She’s a foster cat person, and she should be able to stop by and feed you.” With that, he went to his work room and made a call. I left the store feeling crushed. The butcher, my favorite thing about street life, left. With no warning at all. I was in the same situation that I was always in. I got too attached to someone, and then he left.

The next day, I went to the butcher’s shop to say goodbye. He was closing up the shop, but he snagged some chicken from his storeroom for me. I gobbled it up straight from his hand. He smiled a sad smile and said the last words he would ever say to me.

“Oh kitty, I’ll miss you a whole lot. You are so kind that you deserve anything good that goes your way. Remember that Erin is super nice. She’s the nice lady who is the foster cat person. You’ll be just fine.” I licked him. “Goodbye little kitten.”

I wished he wouldn’t go, but that’s the kind of cat I was. I just got attached and couldn’t let go. I turned my head towards home, not really knowing if I would go back to the butcher’s shop tomorrow to meet Erin.

***

That night, I wandered the city. Baltimore scared people at night, but I was never frightened of a dark night. It gave me time to think about my life and the new events happening in it. I made my decision to meet this Erin.

Who knows? I thought. She might be my second butcher. I’m also a very forgiving kitty. So I’ll go. I know it’s not Erin’s fault that the butcher left. It’s Lewie’s fault.

So the next day, I tentatively walked to the closed butcher shop. There was a young woman with short, brown hair, and a rather plain outfit standing outside. When she saw me, she looked surprised.

“Herald was right! You do come at exactly noon,” she said, as though a cat with a schedule was strange.

I went up to her and started looking for the meat by rubbing each hand, to see if there was something in it. She seemed to know my exact motive for rubbing her hands, because the woman who I assumed was Erin said, “Ooh you’re very smart, but the food’s here,” while pointing at the closed door. There was a cat water bowl and a cat food bowl right in front of it. I raced over and nibbled on the food. It was real cat food specifically made for cats, by humans. It was dry and made me thirsty, but it was good, like fries-for-humans-good. Soon, all the food was gone, and I did the same thank you that I used to do for the butcher. Then, I left to continue my day as a Baltimore street cat.

I decided to come back everyday. Erin seemed nice, like she really understood the whole cat species. Also, that food was really good. I went day after day after day. It was just like having the butcher here, minus the fresh meat.

I noticed that Erin started getting hesitant about letting me go off everyday after I ate my food. I could hardly wonder why though. I could take care of myself. It’s what all cats are made to do.

Erin got so hesitant that while I was eating, she told me, “Cat we got to stop playing these games. I feed you, you leave, and so on. I don’t think that you were born a street cat, and if you take so kindly to good food like this, I’m sure you wouldn’t mind a good roof over your head.”

That sounded amazing, like something you could only get in a young kitten’s fantasy. I then remembered, that life was once my own with yummy food and a roof over my head, but best of all, a family which I couldn’t ever get now. I turned to leave, depressed by this new thought, when Erin picked me up and put me in her car. The car was blue like the mistress’s car. I started to feel sick.

I will not puke in Erin’s car. I like Erin, I thought, trying really hard, knowing that a car was a point of pride for humans. Still, it was rather frightening to be dumped into a car knowing that your life could change dramatically.

When Erin got in, she was wiping dirt from her hands. “Whoo cat, you are filthy.” It was true. I hadn’t really paid attention to it, but I was disgusting. And on that happy note, I decided to take a nap.

When I woke up, Erin had me in her arms and was carrying me into her house, which smelled a lot like cats?! And a dog?! I thought I was going to get attention just for me, not other cats. But from the smell, it seemed like there were ten other cats and one dog. How would I get any attention at all? I was not excited about living anymore. I tried to squirm out of Erin’s hands, but she held tight.

“Kitty, I’m going to call you Tippy, and I’m going to put you in your litter box and show you where your food is.” She did just this. I was surprised by how small her house was. After all, she did have eleven cats now. Erin was rambling on about taking me to the vet. “And of course, I’ll need to get you spayed, and you’ll need to get shots.” I sighed and jumped from her arms. This was going to be hard.

***

I was in the car to go to the vet. It was terrifying. I was going into surgery so that I couldn’t have kittens. There wouldn’t be any mini-me’s running around ever.  I’ll never be proud of my accomplishments as a mother like my mother was, even if she didn’t get to enjoy us for that long. Erin told me that it was for the non-existent kitten’s own good so that people wouldn’t have to sell them.

Like people sold me, I thought. I actually didn’t want kittens, especially my own, to have the same terrible fate that I had. So I’m not to worry.

When we got there, I saw a vet. She gave me a shot after asking Erin some long and boring questions about insurance. I felt calm all of a sudden and sleepy, like I was a newborn kitten again. I couldn’t really remember anything else after that. It was all fuzzy. But when I woke up later, I was in a crate like a cat carrier. It was strange and terrifying. Being a cat, I like to have control of my own body and where I go. I had a weird sensation I couldn’t feel my stomach. It was terrible. I wanted to remember what had happened. I fell asleep again and the next thing I knew, I was on a table with vets all around me, and there was Erin.

“She seems fine, yes. Tippy has been taking this very well,” said one vet.

“Oh good, I hate it when cats take this poorly. It makes me feel bad,” said Erin, looking relieved.

“We studied her all night long. She hasn’t gotten infected, so I think you can take her home.” Was I really there for a night? It seemed like much shorter.

“Alright there, anything special I should know about her? Because you did a full check up, right?”

“Yes, we have her papers right here. Also, we can implant her chip too.”

“Let’s do that in a couple weeks.”

This statement was agreed by all, and before I knew what was happening, I was being shoved into a carrier and walked out of the vet’s office.

“Tippy, it’s almost over,” said Erin while driving.

For the weeks to come, I saw more of Light Street Animal Hospital then I ever thought I would. I was just carted off to that place. The vets knew me by sight, inside and out. But it was finally over.

I spent the days afterwards exploring Erin’s house for the first time. Oh, and having Erin film me in tunnels and walking around. I had been there for three weeks now. But I had been recovering from the treachery that was the vets. (Which meant lying in my own cat bed that Erin got for me and trying to sleep.) There were cat toys everywhere: mice, string, fake trees, scratching posts, and cat playgrounds. It was great.

The problem was other cats. I really didn’t realize how antisocial I’d become in my time on the streets. There were some kittens who were too playful, and others who were too lazy. It was really hard trying to find the perfect cat so after a while I gave up.

Surprisingly, I got along with the dog. He was a pit bull named Buzzer. I had long, meaningful talks with Buzzer. We’d talk about everything from the cats, to Erin and what life was like for Buzzer when there weren’t that many cats. We saw humans come in talk to Erin and look at cats. Soon we watched Wishlet, Embers, and Trouble all leave. With happy humans.

***

One day, I heard Erin talking to someone on the phone.

“Awwww, you saw the video. She is such a sweet cat. Yes, her name is Tippy, and she is two years in human years. Tippy loves humans, and she seems to get along with my dog too. I think you’ll really like her. She’s spayed, and has all of her shots. I don’t think that I should ask you to come over to my house merely because Tippy isn’t a big fan of other cats, and she is in her best light with people. Are you free Saturday at noon? Yes? Great! See you then.”

I stared at Erin and then at Buzzer and then back at Erin.

“Ummm Buzzer, what just happened?” I asked nervously.

“It means that you’re being adopted,” said Buzzer sadly.

“But what does that mean?”

“It means that a nice family wants to have you live with them instead of here.”

“But I wanted to stay forever with you and Erin,” I said. I didn’t want to leave another great home. Whenever I had to leave a home, something bad happened. I felt nauseous. It is the one of the worst feelings to know that you have to leave your home.

“If Erin said yes to them, it means she thinks that you and the family would live well together.”

“Oh,” I said, upset.

The next day was Friday. Friday meant my last day at Erin’s house. I walked around the entire house, saying goodbye to everything.

“Goodbye, Princess, the kitten. You were playful,” I said, trying to think of something good about Princess.

“Goodbye, Tippy, who I never really knew,” said Princess, grumpy because I woke her up from a nap. I didn’t feel bad though.

I said goodbye to the cat playground, the tunnel, and the mice, but the saddest object that I had to say goodbye to was my bed that Erin had specially gotten for me. I wondered who would get the bed when I left.

The hardest goodbye of all was Buzzer, who had been so nice and wise to me. He was the closest thing to a friend that I had here at Erin’s cat house.

“Goodbye, Buzzer,” I said miserably.

“Goodbye, Tippy,” said Buzzer, equally as miserably.

“Thank you for being so nice and interesting.”

“Thank you for being the only cat who would listen to me.”

Then I went over to my bed for one last sleep in that brown little bed.

***

“Come on, Tippy. Time to go into your carrier. It’s time to go,” said Erin. I didn’t want to go. I loved it here. Well, I sort of loved it here. I just didn’t want to move to another home again. But I did want Erin’s last couple memories of me to be good ones. So I went into the carrier, no problems for Erin.

In the car, I thought about the blue house and the blue car that I was in. I thought about my family and how I would never see them again. Then, I thought about the new family that I would be living with. I was getting very anxious. When I get anxious, I get sick.

I won’t puke, I won’t puke. Too late.

The retching started. Then, I puked all over myself. It was utterly embarrassing and disgusting.

“Oh, Tippy, it’s okay. Let’s pull over, and I’ll clean you off.”

I wanted tell her how sorry I was, but kissing or nuzzling her right now would have been utterly disgusting. She got a towel from her trunk and cleaned me off.

“Alright, Tippy. We’re back on the road and going to the Wisers,” said Erin, getting back into the driver’s seat and starting the car back up again.

So that’s what my new humans are called, the Wisers.

An hour later, we left the highway and went on to a back road that led to a small neighborhood. Then, we pulled up to a house with green shutters and a big porch. The house was mainly white, and I was intrigued by the size, since most of the houses in Baltimore are townhouses and apartments. I could hear excitement inside the house.

“They’re here, they’re here!” shouted a young female voice from inside.

“Ready, Tippy?” asked Erin, as if I could answer her in human. Erin picked up my carrier and started walking to the porch. When we got there, Erin rang the doorbell, and the sound was not too welcoming for cats. Immediately, the door was opened by a young, blonde haired girl, who looked nine.

   “Hello, come on in,” she said, bursting with excitement. Erin smiled and entered the house, which was as big on the inside as it was on the outside. The second the door was closed, Erin let me out of the carrier. I raced out and hid. It was scary being around new people in a new house. Erin sat down in a chair across from a big, brown couch. She started saying all the information about me that everyone in the room already knew. I hid behind a printer and watched the little girl and her father talk to Erin. The father looked equally as friendly. He had a big lap, meaning there was somewhere I could sit if I was very scared at this new place.

Before I knew it, Erin was done talking and was waiting for me to come out and meet the two humans. I eventually crawled out slowly and hopped onto the male’s lap. He looked very surprised, but happy.

“I think that Tippy has decided to stay,” said Erin. She seemed proud that I had found a family.

“I’ve always wanted a cat like this,’’ cried the blonde girl, happily.

This is how I got my family that I’ve lived with for years. There’s also a mom and another little girl. They think I’m part of the family, and that’s all I could ever ask for.

 

The Blood Bone

One sunny spring day, I was in my house with my older brother, Kevin, and my mom, Tally. Kevin and I are huge Lego fans. We have a massive Lego room in our basement, and we get Lego sets every week.

I asked Mom, “Can I go in the basement to get a Lego set?”

“Sure,” she replied.

Halfway down, I heard Kevin running down the stairs with me. He grabbed a Lego set and gave me the Legos I wanted. I then saw an old book on a rusty shelf, and the title was Mouse Time, with a painted clock without any hands on the cover. I thought it would be a cool book to read, so I decided to bring that upstairs, too.

***

The Next Day…

I asked Mom,” Can I read this book?”

Mom then replied, “No, because today, you have to finish this All About Alligators book first.”

I put it on a bookshelf at the left corner. I then put on the TV and played a game called “Plants vs. Zombies Garden Warfare 2.”

“Are you playing Minecraft?” asked mom.

“No, I’m playing PvZ Garden Warfare 2,” I responded. Plants vs Zombies Garden Warfare 2 is about this: You can be either a plant or a zombie. If you are a plant, you fight zombies, and if you are a zombie, you fight plants.

Suddenly, in Plants vs Zombies, a robot popped up and asked, “Do you wanna play ‘Mouse Time’?” I then stopped and realized that Mouse Time was the name of that old book that Kevin read! Also, this game is about plants and zombies, not robots! I thought.

The first thing I could think of was to ask Kevin what the book was about.

He then told me, “It was a weird book about a mouse in a strange place made of blue crystals. It was basically a book filled with logic puzzles, and it is over when the mouse solves all fifty of the puzzles.”

I thought, Strange, but not that weird. Also, is that all the book’s about? A mouse surrounded by crystals with a bunch of puzzles?

***

Two Days Later…

I finished my book and decided to read Mouse Time. I read the first five pages, and it said, ”Introducing: the Mouse!” Not exciting at all, so far, I thought.

“The mouse needs… HELP!!! There are puzzles that he can’t solve by his own! That is why he needs… HELP! The mouse needs some $! Why? Because he needs a home! He needs a friend! Then… BANG!! The mouse bumps into a wall, and realizes it is a … MAZE! He then knows that he can get money when he completes the maze!”

“Very… weird.” I said.

I then went downstairs in the basement and put the Mouse Time book where I found it on the same rusty shelf. I then went upstairs and went to bed.

***

In The Morning…

I woke up, ate my breakfast and decided to play a new game on the TV, called “Space Case.” The game was released yesterday. When I started to play, I saw a 2-D screen with a sandwich. Five minutes later, the screen said, “FIGHT!!!”

I then saw a weird guy who looked like a caveman, and he suddenly ran out of the screen and hit me! He somehow grew bigger!

“AHHH! Help! There is a guy in the house!!!” I screamed. He then cut a table in half with a hatchet and got ready to smash the sofa! I dashed to Kevin and Mom.

“Guys, come!!!” I shouted.

“Okay?” said Kevin, approaching the room.

“Look! I said, pointing to the table. It was not cut in half! I then looked at the TV. The sandwich was there, and the weird caveman disappeared!

“Yeah, what?” asked Kevin.

“No! There was a guy right here!” I shouted. Why does nobody believe me? He was standing right here! Also, when he cut the table, how did he not hear the noise? It was so loud, but no one heard it!

***

The Next morning…

I went into the bathroom, looked in the mirror, and started to brush my teeth. When I looked up, there was a reflection of the same guy from the game!!! I looked behind me and saw nothing. I then looked in the mirror again and still saw the weird person! I broke the glass and opened the cabinet, but the weird guy was not there!

I then found Kevin, and he was looking up. “Mom, Mom!” He shouted.

“What?” I asked. Kevin pointed up. Mom was stuck on the ceiling! One minute later, Mom came down, got a fork, and shouted,“RHAAAAAA!!!”, and she stabbed Kevin!

“NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!” I shouted.

I then woke up and realized that since I went in the bathroom to now, that was all just a dream! However, that weird looking guy could still be strolling around…I went into the room where I saw the guy run out of the TV, and then suddenly, I saw, Mouse Time!

Kevin was right by the book and said, “I saw you put the book in the basement! It somehow came back up!” I looked at the book and saw it disintegrate into thin air! When it was all gone, nothing was left but blood. The blood was in the shape of a bone!

“Kevin, let’s get Mom!” I said.

“Yeah, let’s go,” Kevin responded. We ran to Mom, and I showed Mom the blood bone, but instead, it was a real bone! I then said, “Mom, it’s nothing. Bye! Was my mind playing tricks on me?

***

The Next Day…

I went into the basement and saw a human body’s skeleton with a missing bone! I then bolted upstairs, grabbed the blood bone that turned into a regular bone, and got Kevin. We dashed downstairs, and I took the real blood bone and looked at the skeleton with a missing bone and attached the blood bone to the skeleton! It was an exact match!

“Wow, the blood bone fits into the missing space!” said Kevin.

“Well, duh, where else could it possibly fit?” I asked.

“Umm, not now,“ said Kevin, pointing to the Mouse Time book.

I thought, What? How did the book get down here again???

***

The Next Morning…

I brushed my teeth and decided to play “Space Case” again. Five minutes later, I looked out a window, and saw eight motorcycles, bolting ahead of one another. When I looked back at the TV, the same guy I saw a few days ago jumped out of the TV!

There was not even time to think; I hurried to Kevin, and said, “COME!” Kevin came over, and I realized that the guy wasn’t there! Instead, there was a bone.

“Huh?” asked Kevin.

“I don’t know, I saw that guy again, and… there’s a bone!” I said.

“Well, I guess there is another one!” said Kevin.

***

15 minutes later…

I was playing space case, and I then waited to see if that weird cavemen guy will appear again. I waited and waited and waited for the caveman to come, but he didn’t!

***

In the Morning…

I ate breakfast, brushed my teeth, and went in the basement with the bone that appeared when I saw the cavemen a few days ago and saw Mouse Time. I then thought, This must connect somehow, but how?

I then knew exactly how to connect it! I remembered that the book had a clock on it with no hands! I put the bone on the clock, and thought, The bone could be a hand for the clock, and — I then heard a loud noise, a clock spinning forever and ever, and I saw the giant bone on the little clock spin and spin. I saw the rusty old shelf blow up… and I saw a hole, so I thought, Why not go down?

When I went down, I realized that I was in the game “Space Case,” where the weird caveman guy lived! I realized that I was growing, just like the cavemen did when he was in my house. I went left and saw that there was that “fight” sign. I thought, He appears at this sandwich, so maybe you can go through the sandwich to attack him! I tried to go through the sandwich, and one minute later, I somehow went through the sandwich!

I then saw a spruce wood door, and I opened it. Suddenly, I saw the caveman, sitting right in a chair… I saw his hatchet right by the door, so I grabbed it, ran towards him and cut the chair in half!

He then quickly got out the chair and ran behind a desk. I then found some metal bars, put them around him, got the chair that was cut in half and put it on top of the iron bars.

“Hah, you’re trapped now!” I said. He didn’t respond at all. I then put the hatchet away and exited the sandwich.

***

Back in the House…

I told Kevin, “I went in the new game and defeated that weird guy I saw! That means that Mouse Time will never go anywhere ever again!”

“Also, today we got a new Lego set!” said Kevin.

“YAAAAAAAAAAY!” I shouted.

And that was the story of me and the menacing blood bone.                   

 

 

Finding the Gray

Maggie Lexing was bursting with excitement as she ran through the front doors of her house. From 3:15 to 4:30, her three younger sisters went to soccer practice, and her father was at work, so Maggie had time with her mother without anyone else at home.

“Hi, Mom!” Maggie said. “I forgot to tell you yesterday that everyone at school is going crazy about seeing their birth certificates! Brianna Curry found hers in the attic, and ever since then, the whole fifth grade has been trying to find their birth certificates. Can I see mine?”

“Well, honey, I don’t think that’s such a good idea. I mean, my parents never showed me my birth certificate, and my friends didn’t say a word about it. It certainly didn’t affect me.” Her mother wore a sad, frightened look on her face, an expression that Maggie rarely saw, especially when she was alone with her.

“Pretty, pretty please with a cherry on top? I want to be the first one out of my friends who finds their birth certificate. You never mentioned it, and I have no idea where it is.” Maggie saw the doubt on her mother’s face. “I don’t need it right now.”

Her mother sighed, as if knowing this would be a battle where she could fight, but she would never win.

“Okay, sweetie. I guess I’ll show you when your dad comes home.”

Maggie ran upstairs with a big smile on her face, waiting for her father to come home. Her mother sat in a wooden stool, dreading the moment Mr. Lexing turned the ebony handle of the front door and walked inside their pastel blue house.

***

Later that night, Maggie and her mom had an early dinner before Maggie’s father came home. Usually, Maggie had dinner with her mother and father. Her mom didn’t tell her why they were having such an early dinner, no matter how much she tried to get it out of her. Even though she was still curious about this, Maggie decided to let it go.

Her dad walked through the front door. As soon as she heard the sound of his shoes clomping on the wooden panels of her house, Maggie, who was up in her bedroom awaiting her father’s arrival, ran downstairs.

Her mom whispered something to him, and as he ran upstairs to get Maggie’s birth certificate, her mom sat her down on the beige couch in the living room. Finally, Maggie saw her father come downstairs with a very fancy paper in his hands. He handed it over to Maggie, and her mom gave her shoulders a tight squeeze.

Maggie took a deep breath and looked down at her birth certificate. It looked like it had been very carefully made. It had a gold border lining the edges of the paper, and everything was written in black, fancy print. It looked so official, and for a moment, Maggie wondered whether she wanted to read it or not. But, as usual, curiosity took over, and she started to read the beige paper. But her excitement quickly changed to confusion. Just as she started to read it, her mother stopped her.

“Sweetie, before you read it, we should tell you something.” Her mother took a deep breath and started explain, “Honey, we’ve been meaning to tell you that you’re, you’re, you’re — ”

“Adopted.” Her dad finished her mother’s sentence, and even though he spoke in a whisper, the word “adopted” still held the same meaning and impact.

“This says that ‘Maria and Carson Salzi’ are my birth parents, not you,” Maggie said, and, in a way, she was sort of agreeing with her parents.

Maggie’s brown eyes shone with confusion, but soon they widened as she realized the truth. “But that means, that means, that means you guys have been lying to me my whole entire life!”

Maggie felt as if her parents had physically punched her. She began to say something else, but stopped mid-sentence at the sight of her sister, Maya, who was coming downstairs. Maya was dressed in her hot pink pjs, hugging a brown stuffed bear in one arm and rubbing her sleepy eyes with the other. Since Maggie’s dad was a doctor, he often came home late from work, and Maggie’s younger sisters went to bed before he came home.

“What’s going on, Mommy? Cassie, Sally, and I can’t sleep, because there’s too much yelling.” Maya twirled her blond hair around one of her tiny fingers.

Maggie had always wondered why she looked so different from her sisters and her parents, comparing her dark hair to their blond hair, or her brown eyes to their blue eyes. But every time she asked the question, her father told her that they all looked alike, and her mother turned very hesitant. Now she knew the answer.

Maya smiled at Maggie sleepily, her blue eyes shining. Maggie avoided her sister’s eyes and looked at the floor, not returning Maya’s small smile.

“Nothing’s going on, sweetie. Go back upstairs and sleep. We’ll be really quiet, okay?” Maggie’s mom’s voice was sweet and caring as she spoke. She saw the little transaction between Maggie and her younger sister, and the fact that Maggie didn’t return Maya’s smile, broke her heart.

“Okay, Mommy,” Maya responded, too tired to argue. She stifled a yawn, said, “goodnight” to everybody, and ran upstairs.

Maggie and her parents continued their conversation quietly.

“We didn’t tell you because we never wanted you to feel any different from the other kids. We felt like we were protecting you by not telling you the truth, but now we know that we were wrong. Then you turned six and started to go to elementary school, and we kept saying we would tell you, but we never had the courage or the heart.” Maggie’s dad looked at the floor as he said this, not having enough bravery to look her in the eyes.

“So lying to me is better?” Maggie looked up at her parents, her eyes full of pain.

“We didn’t want to lie to you. It’s just, certain things got in the way, and we never took the time to tell you. We adopted you from the orphanage when you were two years old, because I got a call from Child Services. I told your mother, and she loved the idea as much as I did. And the next thing we knew, we were signing adoption papers for you. We had your sisters a few years later.” Maggie’s father explained the whole story from the beginning, still looking down at the floor.

“They’re not even my real sisters anymore,” Maggie said, more to herself than to her parents.

“They’ll always be your sisters, and we’ll always be your family. I’ll always be your father, and your mother will always be your mother.” Maggie’s dad looked saddened by her comment, but Maggie didn’t care enough to notice the sorrow and pain in his voice.

Then, her mother spoke in a soft, fragile, and hurt voice. “Honey… we just want you to know that we’re still your parents, and we still love you. We’ll still be a family. This doesn’t change anything between us.”

“This changes everything between us!” Remembering her sisters upstairs who were trying to sleep, Maggie didn’t yell, but raised her voice slightly. She stomped upstairs, fuming that her parents didn’t tell her about this sooner, but she stopped midway up the stairs to say one more thing.

“In case you’re wondering, you don’t have to come and check on me. I want to be alone right now!”

Maggie pounced on her bed, more nervous and unsure of herself than usual. She realized that learning she was adopted made the scary idea that the people with whom she shared all her doubts and secrets with weren’t really her family. Were they? Or were they just people who picked her up from an orphanage eight years ago and acted like her family? They were people who had lied to her her whole entire life. But now she knew the truth.

“Oh, I know you’re upset but — ” Her mother started to say something, but Maggie cut her off.

“I’m not upset, and I don’t care! At all. Did you hear me? I. Don’t. Care,” Maggie screamed at the top of her lungs. She pushed away from the the wooden railing that she was holding onto and ran to her room, slamming the door.

“I’m not going to cry,” Maggie told herself over and over again. “I’m not going to cry, I’m not going to cry, I’m not going to cry.” Repeating those words to herself, Maggie clutched her golden heart necklace that hung around her neck, got down on her knees, and cried her heart out.

Maggie could faintly hear her younger sisters waking up and questioning the reason for her outburst, but she couldn’t care less about them right now. She listened as the sound of her dad’s footsteps continued up the stairs and to her sisters’ rooms. She listened as her mother’s footsteps, which were more soft and humble than her father’s, climbed upstairs and into her room.

Maggie knew that her mom would say something or try and comfort her, but she knew that nothing could comfort her — she needed to sort this out herself. So, with her mother standing in the doorway, with the moon in its peak high in the sky, and with the stars taking their place in the night that would now fall, Maggie got into her bed and cried herself to sleep.

***

That night, Maggie dreamt about a world that was perfect; the clouds were made out of pink, fluffy cotton candy, the houses were made out of gingerbread cookies, and the grass was made up of every single candy in the world dyed green. There was no war and no sicknesses, and best of all, nobody was lied to, like she had been. But as she woke up, with the bright sun shining in her face, she knew that the real world could never be that perfect.

Maggie woke up, got dressed, and ate a piece of toast. Her mom greeted her with a friendly hug and a warm “Good morning,” but Maggie didn’t return her mother’s kindness. Instead, she did nothing, she said nothing, and she went out the door without a single word.     

She raced down the front steps of her big blue house and ran across the freshly cut green lawn, wishing that she could pick up a candy from the grass, like she could in the perfect world she had in her dreams. As Maggie jogged to the stop sign where she met her best friends everyday before going to school with them, she stole a quick glance back at her house. Maggie saw her mother in the window staring at her with a hurt look in her eyes. Maggie continued watching her three sisters get ready for school, and she saw her mother helping her youngest sister, Cassie, put her Sofia the First princess backpack on.

Then Maggie turned around and walked the rest of the way to the stop sign. She didn’t tell her friends about what happened the night before, and Callie, Molly, and Sophie, being true BFFs, didn’t question her silence.

At school, Maggie listened to her teacher, Mrs. Amos, drone on and on about math, and then science, and finally social studies right before the bell rang, indicating the start of recess.

***

During recess, Callie, Molly and Sophie decided to make a move. They had noticed that something wasn’t quite right with Maggie, and they knew that she needed to tell them what was wrong. Normally, she was a chatterbox, talking up a storm, but today, Maggie was way more quiet than usual. Her bright, brown eyes that usually shone with confidence, were dull and dreary instead.

So, her friends asked her what happened to cause her silence, and reluctantly, Maggie told them. Maggie continued on and on, pouring her emotions out to her friends, and her friends kept quiet, absorbing the feelings that she was dumping out. They knew that behind an angry Maggie was another part of her — a part that they seldom saw. They saw a heartbroken Maggie, and at the end, she got pulled into a big group hug by her friends. Then, Molly said something that not only surprised Callie and Sophie, but also Maggie.

“You can’t blame them, you know,” Molly started to say, ending the hug. As Maggie looked at her friend with a questioning look, Molly elaborated.

“I mean your adoptive parents. I mean, I know that you’re not that happy, but you should know that your adoptive family actually helped you. They took you inside their house. They are nice to you. They love you. They treat you like family, even if they aren’t your real family. In a way, you’re lucky to have such caring parents. I know learning that you’re… adopted can be a pretty big shock, but this doesn’t mean your family isn’t your family. They adopted you because they love you — a lot.” Molly finished, looking Maggie straight in the eye.

Maggie looked at her friend in wonder. The thing that surprised her the most was that Molly was right. Suddenly, Maggie realized that there were two separate emotions you feel when you get adopted. One is anger, the way you can feel at your real, biological parents. But the other is love, the way that you could — should — feel about your adoptive parents. Then, Maggie realized something that she hadn’t realized before. She realized that she was just using anger as a mask — she was hiding behind her anger. And she was taking all that anger out on her adoptive parents, when she knew that she really felt this way towards her birth parents. She also realized that what she really wanted was to find out what happened to her birth parents and why they left her at the orphanage.

She gave Molly a hug, and Molly seemed surprised to be receiving one.

“You look surprised,” Maggie said, laughing, for the first time in a pretty long time.

“I just thought you would be more angry at me than thankful to me for saying that.” Molly returned the hug, but she still looked nervous, like Maggie was going to unleash her anger at any moment, but this time on her.

“Actually, I’m really happy you said that. It made me realize that being adopted isn’t such a bad thing after all.” Maggie pulled away from the hug, as Sophie and Callie smiled.

“Well then, what are we doing here? Let’s go play tag with the boys!” Sophie started running away onto the green field of the school lawn, and one by one, Maggie’s friends followed her. As Maggie started to run after her friends, she thought about how she only had one problem left to solve — the problem with her family.

***

When Maggie reached the brick steps in front of her house, she slowly climbed them, one at a time. She walked through the front door and straight up to her room, making one tiny, little stop in between. Her mom was in the kitchen, and she looked surprised about the fact that Maggie smiled at her.

“Hi! I’m back from school!” Maggie seemed like she had had a major attitude adjustment since yesterday. Her mom smiled back at her, and Maggie continued up the stairs.

Even though Maggie still needed to apologize to her parents, she thought she should wait until her dad came home, and until then, she had something she needed to do. She needed to sort out her emotions–right now, they were like a swirling, twisted, tornado inside of her, and she needed to untwist the twister. And Maggie knew exactly how to do that. She needed to realize what she did wrong and fix it.

Maggie plopped down on her purple beanbag chair and started to think. She realized that after she learned that she adopted, she had let anger blind her. She was so mad at her parents for not telling her sooner, she hadn’t been super nice to them. She had been like a little devil, only thinking about herself, completely oblivious to the world around her. Rather than thinking about her family and how hard it must be on them to tell her, she took her anger out on them. She knew that they were just trying to protect her.

As she thought about some things, she realized that there were a lot of things that she had to do, a lot of things that she had to fix, and a lot of mistakes that she made, but there was one thing that she didn’t have to do. She didn’t have to rehearse her apology to her parents because, well, they were her parents, and even if she didn’t do the best with her apology, she knew that they would love her no matter what. She knew that learning that she was adopted made things seem black and white, two colors that everyone could see. But in the middle was gray, and you have to find the gray yourself–with a little help from your friends and family. Molly and her parents had helped her see the gray.  

A tiny hand placed on her lap jolted Maggie back to reality. It was Cassie- her youngest sister. Maggie smiled down at Cassie, picked her up, and sat her down on her lap.

“Can you play outside with me and Maya and Sally? We know that you were upset yesterday, so we want you to come and play with us. To make you happier.” Little Cassie looked up at Maggie, her big, blue eyes shining with hope.

“I can play outside with you,” Maggie responded. Cassie leaped off of her lap and ran across the hall to the bedroom she shared with Maya and Sally.

Maggie smiled as she heard Cassie’s voice, full of excitement, as she told her sisters the good news. Then, Sally and Maya came into her room and started to drag her out of her room and outside. As Maggie put on her purple flip-flops, she caught a glimpse of her mom, smiling at her. Maggie’s dark, curly hair bounced up and down as she ran around in circles with Maya, Sally, and Cassie.

They actually are my sisters, Maggie thought as they began to play hide-and-seek together. She was hiding behind a big evergreen tree as she realized this. And I guess that my parents really are my parents.

“FOUND YOU!” Maggie jumped and screamed as she turned and saw who scared her. Three little girls were on the ground, laughing their heads off, screaming with excitement.

“Oh, I’m going to get you!” Maggie started running after her sisters, feeling joy and love, emotions that she hadn’t felt in a while.

As Cassie, Maya, and Sally screamed, yelled, and laughed as Maggie chased them, Maggie’s mom watched from the window with a smile on her face.

***

After a few hours, Maggie’s dad finally came home. Maggie greeted him with a smile and went up to her room to work up the courage to say sorry to her parents. When she finally gathered enough bravery to talk and apologize for being the horrible monster she had become, Maggie slowly proceeded down the stairs.

Maya, Sally, and Cassie were already asleep in their room, and as she went down the stairs, Maggie thought how lucky she was to have such great sisters. When her foot landed on the bottom step, both of her parents looked up at her, probably expecting some kind of outburst, but Maggie surprised them both. Her eyes dropped to the floor, she took a deep breath, and she began her apology.

“I wanted to say that I’m sorry for being such a horrible daughter for the past day, because even though I know that I’m adopted, I know now that it doesn’t change anything between us because family is forever.” Maggie finished and realized that she hadn’t said such a good apology. Maybe she should’ve practiced her apology.

“We never blamed you — ” Maggie’s father started to say, but then her mother interrupted.

“And you were never a horrible daughter. You were just upset, and we understand. We just want you to know that we love you to the moon and back,” she finished.

Maggie took her eyes off of the floor and looked up at her parents. They came over to her and wrapped her in a hug.That was all they needed to say, and Maggie knew, for sure, that her apology was the best apology ever. But there was one thing she was still very curious about. She untangled herself from her parents’ arms, looked up at them, and asked the one question she was still very curious about.

“Can I meet my biological parents or my biological family?” She held her breath in anticipation and counted the seconds that passed by as her parents looked at each other.    

“Oh, honey, if you really want to, I suppose we could arrange something with them, but it’s really up to you.” Maggie’s mother felt happy that her daughter had used the word “biological” instead of “real.”

Maggie thought about what her mother had just said, and something clicked. In all the confusion of emotions and decisions, she hadn’t really thought about meeting her birth parents. All she really knew was that she wanted to meet them. But now, thinking about what had happened, she realized something.

“You know, I guess some doors are better off unopened.” Maggie had made her decision. She didn’t need to meet her biological family because she had the best family right here.

That night, as she slept in her cozy bedroom, tightly wrapped in her purple and white blanket, her head resting on her purple pillow, she had the same dream of a perfect world.

When she woke up the next day, Maggie put her hand in front of her face, shielding her eyes from the bright sun. Maggie knew that the world could always be as perfect as her dreams. She had found the gray.

 

Mitten’s Story

Hello, my name is Mittens. I once was a cat who lived in the streets, but somehow I got to live in a house with fancy and delicious cat food. It was just such a miracle for me.

There is one problem — the problem is the big Golden Retriever dog named Billy. My owner’s name is Erica – she likes Billy a lot and plays with him a lot. But why would you even want to do that? Sitting down lazily is fun enough to spend the whole day with me.

I just can’t understand Billy’s perspective of everything. Once, Billy tried to play with me, but I was so annoyed, that I puffed my claws out of my hands and feet within one second and scared Billy away. I continued to do that almost every day. Can’t that dog learn?

One day, I was lying on the couch peacefully. There were no sounds coming out from Erica’s room. It was very unusual, because mostly every day, she turns on her favorite songs very loudly. Even Billy was very quiet. I guessed he was in Erica’s room, playing with her. I was so happy and peaceful until Billy ran down and barked at me like a million times. I just tried to shoo Billy away by scowling at him, but that didn’t work. Billy barked more loudly.

I just wish Billy could speak Cat, or I could speak Dog, so I could tell him to please be quiet and go away. He is such a nightmare! He almost never sleeps! Why, oh why, did I get chosen?! Why not some other cat?   

The next day, it was much, much, much more horrible. Thanks a lot to Billy the dog. Billy made a big mess with Erica’s favorite ingredients for baking chocolate chip cookies. When Erica came down and saw that mess, she blamed me! I do not know why, but Erica and all other  humans think that the dogs are more mature than cats. First of all, who even created dogs in the first place?  

But blaming me was much more than just blaming. She kicked me out of the door into the streets. This was just so mean. Well, it was better than being stuck with Billy the whole day. At least that’s what I thought. It might not have been that friendly in the streets because of my old cat friends who still lived on the streets, and those cats envied me since I had a home with delicious cat food. I had bragged that I was just taken by Erica when I was walking on the streets. That was awkward and not what I thought it was going to be like.

I did meet them in the streets, and I tried to say hi.

They said, “Get lost.” That was mean.

Most of all, I was heartbroken. Now, I had more than one problem that I had to deal with. First, I had to find a way to get back home (Well, I can stay out here, but my wild hunting skills and ways have gone out of my head since I didn’t have to use them for a long time. I think I have lived in Erica’s house about one year… And I just got food for free for a year.) And I had to deal with the street cats. One of which I once was.

I tried to find a place to sleep. The burning sun was now slowly sinking down into the city. I found a bush that looked like something that would make a good bed for me. And it did.

I woke up the next day, surprisingly surrounded by almost all the street cats that I know of. They looked very angry. I tried to tell the leader, Shumurgleburg, that I was kicked out of my home, and I was so sorry that I bragged before. They didn’t care what I thought, though. They only tried to take revenge by scowling and coming closer, step by step.

“Now he’s saying sorry? I don’t even want to believe him now,” one of the cats whispered. “He bragged to us, and now, he doesn’t want to get attacked. Such a betrayer.”
And then, Shumurgleburg said, “Quiet down, cats. We should decide what to do with him after we talk to him and discuss what he did. We will give him the chance to be one of us again.”

After those confusing talks and whispers, they gave me food. Food!!! But after that, I fell asleep.

I didn’t know how long I was asleep, but I surely knew that it was morning. I was in cage-like trees. They were encircling me, and I couldn’t get out. I tried to scratch my way out, but that totally didn’t work. I tried to peek out to see if there were any other cats that were guarding the trees, but I couldn’t.

But I heard one of the guards saying,”It’s until he says sorry. Right?”

And I was NOT okay with that. Unless they gave me food. But I wanted to go back home and sit on the cozy and comfy couch, even though Billy was annoying.

I tried to climb up and jump my way out. I tried a few times, and about the tenth time, I managed to climb to the top, but the problem was the next step. I had to make a plan to avoid the other cats that were guarding me.

Hmm, I thought. I might jump and run as fast as I can, but I don’t think that would work. I only have one chance, so I gotta think.

I had a perfect plan. Since I was already here and met all of the cats, I knew that only one of the cats guarding had good eyesight, but all of them could hear well. So I thought of jumping off to the side where the cat with good eyesight was.

Though I tried, the cat with good eyesight warned, “Catch him! He’s escaping!”

After I heard that, I had to run for my life because, as I knew, they all had sharp and strong claws. If I didn’t run for my life, I would be dead. I ran as fast as I could. I was crying.

They caught up with me real quick. I was scared.

But right then, Shumurgleburg saw me and said to the guards, “Stop chasing him.”

And I was so surprised that he saved my life. After that, he led me to his castle that had a lot of comfy-looking bushes. He asked me to sit down, so I did.

He asked me loudly, “Can you please tell me the truth of why you came to Street Town? Please?”

“Okay. The dog that belongs to my owner made a mess of my owner’s favorite things, but my owner blamed me, and she kicked me out of her house. So that’s why I’m here.”

And so, Shumurgleburg said, “Okay, thank you for telling me. Are you hungry?”

I said, “Oh yes.”

“Okay, I will get you some food. Please wait here.”

After I ate that delicious meal, I couldn’t believe that I fell asleep again. I was in the same place as before: the tree jail. I managed to get up to the top (again.) But this time, I climbed down, even though my claws REALLY hurt. In the last part, I quietly jumped off. I puffed my claws into my hands and feet. It hurt so much. I tried to run, but I couldn’t. So I walked quietly.

I just couldn’t believe it! I walked all the way home. Now, I was in front of my home!!! I went into the new dog door.

While I was going in, Erica grabbed me and said,”Thank goodness, Mittens! I am so sorry. I missed you so much! Are you hungry? Oh my, Mittens! Your paws! Their bloody! Ohhhh, I am so sorry!” She was being dramatic.

I’m okay, I thought.

“I will take you to the vet, sooner or later. Okay?”

She hugged me. It was the best thing that happened to me. I was happy.

After that, I sat on the couch and comforted myself. Billy was quiet, and Erica stroked my head.

I fell asleep.

 

P.S.

To the people who are curious about the Street Town and the street cats: I sent a letter to Mr. Shumurgleburg saying sorry about everything I’d done to them, and they sent a letter back that said, “We forgive you.”

 

A Tall Disaster

Hi, my name is Jack, and I am the world’s tallest person ever. I am 2,000 feet tall. I live in L.A., and I need magical powers. The world will be awesome if I get these powers. I mean awesome!! Water breathing, flying in outer space, breathing in smoke, strength to pick up 100,000 pounds, and the power to convince people. If I climb Mount Everest, there are plants at the top that will give me those powers. They’re so colorful. Only one person has gotten them before because they’re also on top of a tree. They also only give me those powers if they are over eighty degrees, since they are normally frozen. This is the story of my journey.

First, I climbed San Jacinto. I took a tram up to 8,000 feet. I had to put my head out the window!!! Round valley loop (check!), Wellmans Divide (check!), San Jacinto Peak (nope!) There was a huge gap in the trail. I tried to jump over to get past it, but another one appeared.

“Ugh,” l said, “It will get harder when it’s steep. It stopped happening after that, and it was amazing. I came back on the tram.

Next, I climbed Mount Whitney. I drove to Whitney. Outpost camp (check!), Trail camp (check!), Mt. Whitney summit (nope!) It was the same as San Jacinto peak, except with boulders falling. When I came back, I was relieved. I flew in my super tall, private jet to Mount Mckinley. I climbed it! Whew! Those were a crazy two hours. I had to hop on one foot at one point. I slid down the mountain. There was so much ice! I grabbed the trees to stabilize.              

I ran around the block two gazillion times. I was so sweaty! (Allow me to fly you to Mount Everest, reader). It was crazy!!! There were huge, giant, diamond rocks everywhere!!! Luckily, I could step over them.

Uh-oh, avalanche!!! Quick, step off the mountain, and lets fly in a helicopter to chop off the top of the mountain with an ax, I thought to myself. I ordered a helicopter through my walkie-talkie because the snow had gotten too thick. Maybe I should only chop off the tree with the plants because that’s all I need.

The helicopter flew over the mountain, and I reached out of the helicopter and grabbed the plants with my long arm. Once I had the plants, I warmed them up for ten seconds in the helicopter’s microwave. I smashed them up into tiny pieces and put them into water, and then I drank the water. I felt the same as before, but with a sudden excitement.

I flew down when suddenly, I felt dizzy. I was teleported to another galaxy! I knew I had powers because I could see Pluto far, far away. I floated around in my helicopter in space. I thought that I could use my powers to get back. With my finger, I pushed my new flying powers into a hole in the helicopter, and I zoomed back toward Earth.

When I was about halfway done with the trip, I realized I’d have to face the atmosphere. I knew I needed to stop the helicopter before I reached the atmosphere because I’d burn up. I could breathe underwater and in smoke now, so I didn’t have to worry about not being able to breathe — but I would burn up if the helicopter caught on fire.

I pushed my finger back into the hole and drew my powers back from the helicopter. It stopped. I was glad that it worked! Now, I needed to find special space bricks to build a wall around the helicopter so it didn’t burn up in the atmosphere. I knew about the space bricks because my astronaut friend had told me about them once.

I turned on the regular helicopter propellers and went slowly to the nearest moon. I saw a big gap in the moon and flew inside. Inside were tons of space bricks!! They looked like regular bricks, but they were nice and smooth on the outer layer, and they were fireproof on the inside. I felt super excited that I found them so quickly!

Now, I needed to figure out how to transport all of the bricks. I looked around and saw a lever. I pulled the lever, and it closed up the hatch from the inside! Now, I didn’t need to worry about the helicopter or the space bricks floating away with no gravity. Then, I grabbed the spare Super Glue and nails I kept in the helicopter and used them to build the bricks around the helicopter. From the inside, I put a stick of Clarify-er so I could see through the bricks.

I opened a window for a second and pulled the lever up to open the hatch. I closed the window and put my finger in the hole again to put my powers into the helicopter. Then, I flew back toward Earth. Things got scary in the atmosphere. I could see fire all around, and smoke came in through the cracks in the wall. Luckily, I could breathe in smoke because of my powers.  I was scared that the space bricks might not work — but they did!

I flew back down to the hotel I was staying at in Everest. I landed on top and climbed down the ladder. I was so relieved and tired, that I went back into my room and went to sleep.

The next day, I remembered that the helicopter was rented, so I returned it. I flew back to L.A. to convince every lawbreaker to not break the law because I had superpowers.

I had beaten the lawbreaker Baleee to the peak of Mount Everest to get these powers. He was the baddest lawbreaker, who broke every law. I knew that Baleee was in his submarine trying to escape me, so I picked a random lake and quickly found him. I had brought some space bricks with me to cover the windows so he couldn’t see. I got inside through the top door and finally convinced him to not break the law anymore. I took off the space bricks and returned to the surface!

L.A. was now free of crime, but the rest of the world still needed a persuasive man.

 

The Boy Who Discovered Life

Once, there was a boy named Peter. He was a classic seven-year-old who lived in NYC. Peter liked his life, but thought it could be better. And for that, he had a dream. A dream to find a new life not on planet Earth! He was even more determined than his favorite football player, Eli Manning, was when he wanted to win the Super Bowl against the New England Patriots. There was only one problem. Where would he get a vehicle to take him far enough to discover a new life form?

One day, his parents asked him where he would want to go for vacation, since school was over, and it was a great time to go to a museum or something that would be less warm.

Peter told his parents, “I want to go see NASA.” He did this so he could find how rockets were made.

His parents said yes because it was a great idea and something they had never done. It was air-conditioned and had a good amount of tourist attraction. So one day, they set off by renting a car and drove all the way to the base of NASA.

After they had parked, they walked to the nearest hotel and bought a room for a week and a half. Then, they went back to NASA, and they bought a ticket for a tour of what Peter wanted: the making of a rocket.

“It’s good,” said his parents, “because it’s on display and very creative.”

After they got there, a tour guide took them to one rocket with about twenty other people. It was a model of the rocket that took off to the moon that landed Neil Armstrong. The NASA building, from the outside, looked like a big, white dome with a helicopter landing on it. Inside, though, when you went in, you would think it was a tunnel for big worms.  Nobody was scared, because they had a tour guide with them. But if you went one way or any of the others, you would find a room bigger than your apartment. Each room had a different section, but they were all related to discovering more about space in new ways.

One room showed how to launch a rocket. One room had instructions on how to build a rocket. In the room where Peter was, it was like two modern apartment buildings, and if you cut the apartment buildings in half, in one of them, you would find the rocket. The room smelled of gasoline, but otherwise was regular. If you looked in the other half, you would see a lot of big labels on all the parts of the rocket. The tour guide lead them towards the rocket. He took a key, different from all others, that looked like a big “N.” He turned a notch in what looked like the middle of the bottom part of the rocket. Somehow, a little hatch opened, and he told the visitors to come inside. He showed them the different parts, like the airbag compartments and the fuel holders. When they came out, he showed them the other side, where there were the big labels. He asked the visitors if they thought they could label all the parts of the rocket. No one could, except for Peter. When Peter went, he somehow named all of the labels in the right spots. When he did that, he thought he had a special connection with that rocket. He felt so weird that he couldn’t hear the tour guide congratulating him. After he had known, he had thanked the tour guide. It was so fun that they didn’t know that the day was over. So when they came back out, it was exceptionally dark. All they did was go to their hotel and brush their teeth and go to sleep.

The next morning when they woke up, they went right back to the NASA building. They asked for another ticket to another room where they would see how NASA launched rockets. When they were finished, they were amazed at how much work and money it took to launch just one rocket. They came back out to get a snack. They went to the Official NASA Snack Bar. In the Snack Bar, Peter bought a hot dog and gulped it down, and they went back to their hotel room to take a break.

While they were going back, Peter used some of his allowance to buy a little space kit with a rocket launcher and a rocket. It was a little, electric toy rocket with a little figurine space astronaut inside. You could put the astronaut in the rocket and put the rocket on the launcher, and it would go about five feet in the air. Peter thought that this was amazingly awesome, and that’s all he did the rest of the day. They thought this was so fun that they asked the hotel to extend their stay by one day, even though they still had a lot of time left.

When they woke up the next morning, they bought another ticket for NASA, this time to see another section on how scientists invented space suits for astronauts to get air and oxygen while in space. They also saw a mini rover, and Peter was amazed by what special wheels the scientists had to make so the rover could go on the moon. They even got to have a little ride in the mini rover.

When they went back, after the day, they had pizza. After that, they went back to their room and said that was one of the best days they had ever had, and that this was the best vacation they ever had.

When he went the next day, they went to yet another section, where he had fun touching fingerprints when he was not supposed to. He got in a little trouble, but not enough to get him kicked out. When he finally realized that this was not a good idea, he had fun just looking at pictures that scientists had just recovered from the robots on Mars. The fingerprints that he had touched were actually footprints from people that walked on the moon. When they went back, they asked to just see the room that they saw first, because that was where Peter wanted to go. They let him go for free. If you hadn’t known all this time, Peter always had his new favorite toy, the electric rocket launcher and rocket, in his pocket.

They went to the room, and accidentally, the little rocket that stuck out of his pocket touched the model rocket in the room. When this happened, a big red flash burst a hole in the NASA building. There was a big shout as the rocket sprouted from his pocket through the hole in the building. Peter was so amazed when the rocket launcher held up the rocket from his little toy. His toy rocket that sprouted became as big and as real-looking as the Apollo 11 rocket. His rocket launcher had also grown to hold up his rocket. Peter was so amazed and even more excited, because this was his chance to make his new life form. But he didn’t know how he would get into the rocket. Then, he thought of how the tour guide took that key from his pocket to open the model rocket. So Peter reached into his own pocket, and somehow, magically, the same looking key was in his pocket. He opened the door in his rocket, and he went about looking in his own new rocket.

It looked exactly like it had in the model rocket, but brighter, newer, and more real. He called from one of the windows, and he said to anyone, “Who wants to see a new life form with me?”

While this was happening, a big crowd of people had gathered around to see what the little boy did. They were so terrified and confused at what Peter had just shouted, but they were so excited that they just climbed aboard to see what adventure they would get into. Peter pulled his parents along and the crowd also, and ushered them all into the air tanks. He told them all to put on air tanks so they could get going on this miraculous adventure.

Now, Peter thought, all he had to do was see if this rocket actually worked. And he thought to himself his favorite saying by Ms. Frizzle from the Magic School Bus book he used to read: “Make mistakes, get messy, and learn.”

So he did just that. He put an air tank on. He went to the captain’s quarters and fired up the engine. The rocket burst and fired up into the sky. It was the first rocket in history to go into outer space without any investing. But not actually literally, of course — he had spent that five dollar allowance for the toy rocket.

When they got into outer space, all the tourists who had now become the crew held a great party. Peter somehow knew how to drive a rocket by what the tour guide told him. And the rocket soared out into the blackness. They saw stars and went right through the Milky Way. Somehow, this was not an ordinary rocket. It could go way past the moon. Since he was still excited, he drove his rocket all the way to orbit Uranus. They went back towards Earth, and made a figure eight between the sun and the earth. And then, they orbited the moon and saw what looked like another moon. As they got closer, they saw that this was no moon, but the next planet that all the computers had been sighting since 2016.

So as they got closer, they stopped right in front of a big sign, and the tourists started to go to the Captain’s Chamber and tell Peter to go back to Earth. Peter tried to keep on saying and saying and saying that he was going to find a way to get there, and it would be the best thing since nacho chips.

But as this happened, there was a big thunderstorm and a bunch of lightning in his hometown, New York. Suddenly, there was a massive updraft, and a flash of lightning went up, up, up, farther than the eye can see, out into space, and hit Peter’s rocket. There was no stopping the rocket now, as it went faster than the speed of light into the planet. He landed safely in the middle of what seemed to be another New York. It was the same horizon, just tall, tall, buildings. He knew that this was not another New York — that this was the destiny he had been waiting for all of his life.

He was welcomed greatly by a man who seemed to be the president of the whole entire planet. The president said that he had been waiting for Peter his whole entire life to tell him how these two planets could be connected into a great, big, friendly universe. The president looked like all the people there. They were like humans, but they would only be up to your knee. Kind of like Oompa Loompas from Charlie and the Chocolate Factory, but a little more human-like and didn’t always have jackets on. They talked in a very high-pitched voice, but not in a bad way, as friendly as a high-pitched voice could be.

Peter and the rest of his “crew” believed this president, and the president’s idea went on to build a space bridge. It was covered, of course, by unlimited air, so no one would have to wear a spacesuit. Everyone from both planets said it was such a delight to have this great, big planet. If you were wondering, the president named the new land Herat and the city Yorkerneck. The language that these people spoke was English, and the state they were in was Yecen. There were no countries, but only continents because this was a much more friendly planet than our beloved earth.

As they started building the bridge right in between both planets and it reached the side of Earth, they could not make it go downwards because it was way too steep. But the only way to Earth was by going downwards.

They thought and thought, but then, the president said, “You could use your invention of what I think is called a bridge. No, I mean, stairs.”

This time, Peter thought it was the only idea, so he agreed. It was hard for Peter to agree sometimes because he always wanted to be the hero, as you can already see by his discovery of a new life form. The presidents and prime ministers of Earth and the president of Herat both agreed on the idea of the bridge way before this idea. Once the plan for getting to Earth had worked, they started building toward Herat. Once they had reached Herat’s atmosphere, they discovered that they needed to go faster than the speed of light to get into Herat. They thought and thought until Peter came up with an idea, like a hero, yet again.

“Why don’t we use your invention of those ball-like things, kind like odd squad portals, but they can go anywhere?”

“Great idea!” exclaimed the president.

Portals were fast balls that you squatted in that took you through holes and transported you. Once the portals had been built, a great charm shower came down to both worlds. It was totally like magic to Peter.There was a grand election of representatives in both worlds. Peter won for Earth two billion votes to none. (There were only about two billion people in the world, and children were allowed to vote.) In Herat, the president won for their side about three-quarters of their planet to one quarter. The two representatives ran the two planets fairly and were very well respected.

Since Peter was only seven (now soon to turn eight), his mother and father helped him. But it was hard, since Peter wanted him to run himself. This was not a smart choice, since kids could not think like grown-ups about all the problems in the world. With the help of two parents, two grown-ups and one child could deal with a lot of problems, while one person could only deal with about two. Three could deal with about six, which is a lot more than two when you’re dealing with crimes.

When the parents found out, they tried to speak up for themselves, but it was no use. So what they did was go to Herat, across the bridge, and tell them about this problem. The Herat people sent some police to help and say the point. The police told Earth that it would be much better if they allowed the parents to think of one thing to do.

Peter allowed this, and the parents said, “Why don’t we elect some judges for both planets, so in crime cases, we can figure out better ways of punishing people and knowing if they are innocent or guilty?”

Both planets elected a good judge that was skillful and kind to the jury and to the person put on trial. After a long time of training police, one person was finally sent to the judge on trial. The judge finally found, with the help of the jury, that the person was just expressing free speech, telling everyone that it would be better if Peter was helped by his parents.

Once he was released, more and more people thought it would be better if his parents helped him, since they were catching so few criminals and making so little changes to the Earth. This was also happening because they thought that, with the help of the jury, the judge made better decisions, so if the parents helped Peter, Peter would do better in making decisions.

While this was happening, Peter was in his capitol, which happened to be New York now. He was thinking whether he should do a little thing that was bad, just to keep him in control. This bad thing was to not let anyone have free speech of talking about something that has not happened. This was found out by the people. They found out because they were allowed to look through the little windows, and somehow, by eavesdropping with a cop, they heard him talking to himself about this new plan.

They started reporting this, and so Peter had nothing to do, but call a Grand Election to ask if he could do this law or not. A Grand Election is an election that’s not for a person or representative of state, city, or country. It’s for a law, a change to the city, state, or country. (Like if you wanted to make Yellowstone National Park bigger, you would have a Grand Election. People would vote on whether you could do this by taking out more and more buildings, or you could not do that so it would be a beautiful place, but not as big as it could be if they took out buildings.)

After this, people called for a regular election for whether Peter’s parents could help him until he became eligible in American terms for president, which is thirty five years old, and he would have to live in America for fourteen years. The people won yet again, and Peter’s parents went to help Peter with the Earth. This was a major help.

When the parents got to the White House, they asked to privately talk to Peter. They told Peter, “Until you grow up and start thinking as a grown up, we will help you. We’re not challenging you so we can be bossy, we’re not saying that we’ll help you do stuff that you don’t think that we need to do. We’re not saying that you can’t do what you want to do, we’re just saying that we’re going to do extra things that you don’t want to do.”

Peter actually liked this idea, and said, “Yes, I will.”

In his mind right now, he was not that concerned whether they stuck to their word. Out of the years he had been with them, they had never broken a promise.

After a while of this happening, Earth was so much better, that Peter started to realize that you don’t always have to be the hero. You just have to help and make decisions for everyone and be kind, which is what he had been doing for about the last three years. What had changed when his parents helped him was that there were so many other things going on that so much more things could be done and could be caught. The parents were doing things, and he was doing things that all overlapped with each other to make such good ideas, that they were better than what George Washington could do.

One thing that he couldn’t have done without his parents was that now, he had learned more about law and better laws to use. His parents told him to make a law that you couldn’t smoke. He learned more over time. He learned that help was better and better than he could ever imagine before he had ever launched that rocket.

In Herat right now, everything was better because they could use more and more of Earth’s inventions. They could help Earth, and Earth could help them. They had more parks and saw that they could have more fun running around and playing football than sitting at home and watching cartoons. The more and more that Earth and Herat shared help, the more and more inventions could be made. When more inventions are made, more things can be done.

A scanner could be made to scan if anyone anywhere had a fingerprint that they were looking for, because the scanner could go through a portal made by Herat. And the scanner that was in fact made by Earth could scan anyone’s fingerprint without them even knowing. This helped a lot. More crimes could be stopped in both worlds. It was so much more peaceful than it had once been, and finally, all crimes had been stopped. Since Peter had turned thirteen, about seven years ago, there had been no crime since. Everyone had more fun, more peace, more parks, and it was even legal to sleep outside. More and more buildings were torn down, since more and more people started sleeping outside, and all the buildings they needed were supermarkets and toy stores. And more and more parks were being made so that there was so much room for everyone, and it was negotiated so well that there was no need for fighting.

It was also like this in Herat. And more and more people crossed the bridge to see what both Earths were like and how it was so big in Earth that you would have to fly or be shipped around the earth, while in Herat, you could just walk around the planet. This was the most peace you could ever have. Even in my life, when I’m playing my favorite sport, football, I’m not having as much fun as you could ever have in this planet.

 

 

The Star, the Heart, and the Flag

 

Chapter 1: Expulsion

They didn’t appear to me as bullets anymore. They were worse than the enemy, worse than anything the Kaiser could summon up. They were mindless shards of destruction and death, able to kill a man without remorse or any thought to the matter. But, that is what comes with war.

I am now fifteen, and a proud American Jew, but still cannot kill with the same mechanical intensity. I cannot fathom a time when I could use plastic soldiers and pewter cannons as playthings that could die and regenerate themselves in the span of a few minutes. Sadly, that was my mindset when I entered this war in 1914, and worse, that was my mindset when I volunteered to go on this mission. It is late 1915, and my job, along with three other recruits and a veteran, is to infiltrate the enemy lines in slight discretion. Then we must do as much damage possible before the rest of the advance unit arrived. We are halfway there, and one of us is already dead in a foxhole in no-man’s land. The force now consists of Me, José, Wilber, my closest friend and honorary American, and a weathered veteran known only as Apocalypse’s Fifth Horseman for his chilly demeanor. All of a sudden, the world exploded, or so it seemed.

Shells were everywhere, and that was our cue to attack.

“GO!” Somebody shouted at me to interrupt my reverie, and I hefted my gun into firing position and, according to some crazy unspoken wartime rule, began to bellow like an enraged buffalo.

“Aieee!”

“Hold the position!”

“Charge them!”

“We need a doctor!”

The sounds of battle were everywhere, the sound of death, that everlasting shriek cut short by the worse sound of silence. We charged into a foxhole, but as I got in, I realized how much water there was.

“You okay?” asked Wilber.

“Fine. You?” I said.

“Russell, I’m gushing blood! ” he responded with fervor, blood flowing in a steady stream from his thigh. I suddenly realized that the water in the foxhole wasn’t water, but his blood. I knew that he needed a doctor, but I also knew that the expedition could potentially break the German support lines, a crucial target. My mind was made up when José’s body tumbled into the foxhole, eyes glazed and chest mangled.

“Let’s go,” I said solemnly. The enemy was almost upon us. I had no choice, and I headed back to the trenches only out of necessity. Sadly, that argument did not land well with my superior. As I began to explain to him the hole in his reasoning, that Wilber would have died, and just how wrong he was, his nostrils began to flare and I backed down, causing me and the sergeant to sit in such a silence you could almost taste its bitterness and slime. The tension was unbearable, knowing that botching this procedure might result in the loss of my friend, companion, and fellow warrior. The doctor invited us into the army’s hospital room with a hurried wave of his hand, and, ignoring all discipline, I shoved my sergeant aside. I gave a sigh of relief. Wilber was alive! But my relief didn’t last for very long. As we were reunited, the sergeant spun me around and shoved two pieces of parchment into my chest.

“You’ve been discharged. Now get out before I make you.” he said quietly, but with a rage burning in his eyes.

I tried to make a case for Wilber’s being delirious but no one would listen. We’d been given a dishonourable discharge for running away in the face of the enemy, and were left to wander the scorched landscape. Bodies were strewn carelessly across the line, no respect for their families, and evidently no respect for them. The week had passed. We kept walking, running, walking, running, alternating between the two, an eternal rock and hard place situation. Days passed, we tallied them on our shared canteen. Then finally, we went from the fire into the frying pan one hot morning.

“Hey Russell?” Wilber’s shrill voice called out from the small dirty lake that we’d found, and exploited.

“What?” I called back irritably. “Did you fill the canteens yet?”

“Well, yes,” he called back.

“Then what is it?” I walked over to the lake, which we had renamed the Hope Reservoir. It was definitely unclean, but it was water, and it kept our canteens filled. We had utilized it to its complete fullest, even with the easily perceptible mold and moss at the bottom.. We had decided to use the trees the to make wood canteens with our supplies, so we could walk back to Paris or some other town in France, but we did not have a map and so it was very important that we stay, lest we end up in some German town.

Then I saw what he was talking about. He lay in tears with the rock that we used to tick off the days in his hand. But in his other was a nearly shredded canteen. I was at a loss for words. Then he shook his head, and pointed to the Hope Reservoir. At this I fell to tears. Our food and supplies were disappearing down into the lake. A dim voice kept saying that the canteen was an accident while ticking off days, and in his misery had accidentally kicked the supplies in. That voice turned out to be Wilber. After this incident, we decided to get going, and time became a dim factor in my mind. We trudged onward, and we began to become emaciated. Blood soaked the ground. God, this hurt. Where were we? Probably somewhere in hell. Maybe somewhere in Germany. Pain was the only presence in my mind, my stomach was cramping, and it felt as if it was imploding. My thoughts were everywhere, yet always focused around one objective: home. The sun appeared to be a blazing ball of fire, making me nostalgic, and reminiscent of the war. The light began to fade. Darkness was my home now, enveloping me in its soft folds, tempting me to give in. “Wilber, do you have any ideas to pass the time?” I asked desperately.

Wilber stared at me hard. “There aren’t even any sticks here, we can’t even draw in the dust, because there isn’t any. We don’t even know where we’re going! Haven’t you noticed all the repeating landmarks? We’re going in circles! We have to just pick one direction and then go with whatever we choose.” He paused for breath. “If we’re to survive, you’ve got to be more attentive.” I stared back at him, dumbfounded. What repeating landmarks? I just saw bloodied dirt and randomly strewn bodies, which I didn’t think really qualified as landmarks. We started to walk forwards.

“No, I noticed them,” I said stupidly. Wilber stared quizzically at me.

“Russell–food–war–thirst.”

What was he talking about, I wondered.

“Ilow dathe water canty.”

Now he was just speaking gibberish, but the next part alarmed me.

“Garmy Russol. Garmen spak amy.”

I deciphered this one quite well. What he meant to say was that he wanted to stab me! He must have let that one slip, the cursed traitor. It is all so clear now! He is a thief! I did not drop the food, nor destroy the canteen! All I did was take care of him, and he has turned against me! I must admit, I didn’t see such cruelty in him. But he’s the dark one, telling this darkness to come for us, trying to get me to bend to his will the whole time. I saw right through his plans. He should know better than to mess with me. He is staring at me now, head cocked as if I am some kind of demented specimen. He is German. He must be. No he isn’t. He protects me. He is merely leading me to the slaughter. The psychological battle rages on in my head. I break down in tears. I feel as if I am hit, and I fall right in front of Wilber as he also collapses again. The darkness finally overtakes me, and I surrender to its might.

Chapter 2: Kurt

I look up into the face of a young boy, but he is distorted by some unknown substance. It is the evening, so is it just darkness messing up my vision? No, there’s some gurgling sound as well. Wait. That sound is water! I have never liked the stale army biscuits more than when he forced them down my throat at that moment. They tasted like a species of cardboard, and yes, I mean species. They didn’t taste like normal biscuits, they tasted like crap, but delicious crap that I was eternally grateful for. The water flows across my face, and since my lips are cracked, it gives such incredible relief that was unrivaled by any pleasure I had back home, until I see the Kaiser’s crest on his shoulder. Wilber! Is he okay? What happened? My mind was prepared to burst with questions.

“Where is Wilber?” I asked with a frantic air. Was he dead?

Wait, isn’t Wilber German? Maybe. Keep an eye on him, I guess. I was delirious, so no, he is my friend. Anyway, the real question is, what German would help Allied soldiers? We had the French symbol, and he was definitely German. Something didn’t add up. “Friend awake,” said the boy. “Vision too fuzzy, but I have pistol to your friend and knife that go any moment into stomach.”

So that was the catch, the German was after information. Well, the minute he looked to Wilber, I would take out my knife, and the positions would be flipped. Wilber knew this as well, and smiled briefly at me. He slowly edged out of the boy’s vision, and when his eyes flicked to Wilber, I had already sliced his knife hand and Wilber had preemptively jumped out of the way. The boy screamed and dropped his knife, which I grabbed, and Wilber quickly grabbed the gun, and stood uneasily with the firearm pointed at the boy who lay in a sort of turtle position, with his hands raised in a half-hearted attempt to protect himself.

“Who are you?” Wilber said with a now rightly earned air of superiority. Wilber didn’t really know how to talk to people, a thing that had begun in his childhood when he had lost his whole family to a German shell while he was at home. He was an orphan when I found him in the streets after his immigration from Britain, and we had become friends ever since I ran away and we joined the French Army together.

“Don’t have camp,” the boy stuttered out in his broken English. “Have piles of dirt.” He narrowed his eyes in anger and spat at our campsite. Me and Wilber shared another look. He may be German, but insulting your captors tends to yield worse results than complimenting or praising them does.

“You were trying to extract information from us. The least you can do is grovel,” Wilber retorted, spit flecks flying out of his mouth in rage. In the army, we were known as The Orphan Duo, and our ages had become a carefully guarded secret, and one that we kept with our lives. But this German boy seemed almost fourteen, way too young for an army man, even by our standards.

“I not bow.” He seemed more confident now. “I never betray Kaiser Vilhelm.”

“Then that will be your own demise,” said Wilber, as he leveled the gun towards him.

“Stop!” I shouted as Wilber aimed at the German. Wilber turned to me questioningly.

“Russell, this traitor to the world killed my family. You don’t have a say in this. This is strictly personal between me and him. Don’t you know Germans are the most filthy type of organism on the planet? They are lower than scum, not worth the dirt he says our camp is made of. I have every right on the planet and tens of thousands of grieving families to back me up. What do you have? Some foolhardy chivalrous code will get you nowhere but death by snakes like this one. You cannot blame this choice on lethargy. You have to capitulate to these instincts, Russell, they are there for a reason,” Wilber said heatedly.

I sighed. Wilber did have a point, but he made a mistake in telling me to capitulate. I don’t give in to anything, and I wouldn’t start now. I knew Wilber would let down his guard easily with a well placed stroke, and so I tried to put on an indifferent and apathetic air.

“Look Wilber–” I began, but Wilber cut me off.

“That was a rhetorical comment, you don’t respond to it. We can either waste time arguing over this and then kill him, or take advantage of the cool night to get back to the Hope Reservoir. Your choice.” I glared at him. It was hard to argue with someone who wouldn’t let you finish a sentence.

“Wilber, stop and think for a second. If we went from the trenches, to the Hope Reservoir, which was parallel to the battle lines, we then went in circles, then randomly picked a direction, and now we see a random German strolling–” I was interrupted again, but by someone different.

“Then you are in Deutschland, obviously.” The German boy smirked, resembling a gangster, what with his word choice and fake western accent he put on. I suddenly felt an urge to go with Wilber’s strategy, but I stopped myself quickly.

“As annoying as you are, sadly, we’re going to keep you,” I said to the kneeling teen as he slowly moved forward, now back in his turtle pose. Wilber now appeared resigned to the German’s fate, but still wanted to belittle the German one last time as the boy crawled towards them.

“You know, Napoleon once said that an army moves on its stomach. I’m now sure he was talking about German soldiers.”

I couldn’t help sniggering at that last comment, but immediately reproached myself as Kurt became flushed, got up and dusted himself off. My guess is that we are somewhere near the French city of Somme, but we could be more near to Verdun or Switzerland. “So, what’s your name?” We needed something to pass the time before I could figure out where we were.

“Kurt,” the boy responded. “What do you plan on doing with me?” he said, trying to stop my efforts at enjoyment before anything came of them, his usual strategy. Kurt was really getting on my nerves, but he was our only chance out unless we wanted risk a hit or miss in a random direction, and end up in Berlin. The sun was already pretty low on the horizon, and by the time it became too dark to continue, we had laid down in a cluster of rocks, and I went on guard to watch the camp. I turned around and saw Kurt staring at my back. I turned around to look at him.

“What?” I asked, feeling somewhat unnerved. He kept staring at me until he finally said something.

“Say it again. What you were muttering,” he asked.

“You mean my prayers?” He nodded.

“If that’s what you call them.” Suddenly, I was struck with a thought. What religion did this boy – Kurt – identify with? Wilber was an Atheist, I was a Jew, but what did this new member of our crew believe in?

“Are you a Jew?” I asked tentatively.

“No. And no other religion either,” he said. Ah, so the boy was an Atheist, like Wilber. Darn. I wondered why they hadn’t bonded over the fact yet. Something was wrong. I felt another pair of eyes boring into my back. I turned around, Kurt’s gun in my hand, and prepared to fire as I turned. It turned out just to be Wilber angrily staring at me.

“What?” I asked, in a slightly provocative tone.

“He is not an Atheist.” Wilber stared at me with such intensity it made me flinch.

“How can you be so sure?” I asked him. I wondered if there was some kind of vibe that Atheists give off, but a secret signal that only other Atheists pick up on. I tried to imagine Wilber with a halo, or some kind of invisible radio signal that he radiated from his head or something like that.

“He’s too devoted. He fights for something, I can tell. There is something he hides from us, and he had better come clean.” A small smile appeared on Wilber’s face, but one devoid of real happiness. It looked more like a grimace or a scowl, but really, it was just a smile with no life. I backed away from his menacing smile, so as to make him focus the spotlight on Kurt. His eyes, though, never moved. He remained fixated on Kurt, as if he were some kind of grotesque specimen. Wilber followed his instincts when he ran from the German shell, he followed his heart when he immigrated to Britain from France on his family’s money, and from Britain to America as a stowaway. He’d followed his heart when he gave up monotheism. Wilber had followed his heart his whole life, and he would never take orders from anyone, or for that matter, give them. But most of all, Wilber knew people. Wilber knew when people were lying and what they were hiding from him, but his gaping flaw was that he didn’t know himself nearly as well as he knew other people. WIlber could not, for the life of him, decipher himself, and had really only branded himself an Atheist out of necessity. He liked to say that he was a powerful disciple and devotee to the heart, and I was fully prepared to see this seemingly innocent conversation go up in flames because of him. Kurt gave him a wolfish grin and stood up, fully prepared to meet the obvious challenge of his loyalty. He stood close to Wilber and, without pause, began his comeback with bravo.

“I owe my faith to only Germany. Religion is passing thought, of no real importance. Loyalty to your nation is what counts. Nations will stand, but Atheists are fools, Jews will die out, but Germans will always remain the utmost on the egalitarian chain. We are the true heroes of the war, and all that doubt us will fall. Nationality is the only thing that will persist throughout the ages, where beliefs will fail and religion will fall. And yes, my broken English was a fake. You, Russell, believed me for every moment for your religion, and Wilber here overlooked it, forsaking his true ulterior suspicions for exterior ones. You people are too predictable,” Kurt said.

Wilber and I sat in a stunned silence, too dumbfounded to speak, the grin still inhabiting Kurt’s face, making it look as if he presided over all this. He then went back to bed using his kingly walk, making him look smugly royal, as if he had just expounded the answer to the meaning of life onto peasants who were struggling to comprehend life at its smallest.

Chapter 3: Rats and Rabbits

After the argument the night before, I thought that we really needed to watch more attentively while in the camp. We packed our, well, nothing, as our camp was only really dirt and shrubbery. That day, as we set off to make our way across the French border, a thought suddenly struck me. We had a German prisoner, which we couldn’t take with us across the border. We also couldn’t leave him stranded here, although the minute I told this to Wilber, he raised his eyebrows and muttered, “Why not?” under his breath. We always had the gun ready, so that he wouldn’t call out to the Germans, but we are still worried about him being somehow like a beacon to German troops, that his mere presence, unless somehow guarded by bushes and shrubs, would alert them. Hunger now began to gnaw at me, like a feral animal trying to escape the prison that was my stomach. Finally, our weary sights turned to the abundance of game that seemed to surround us.

Kurt was almost to the point of trying to shoot the both of us, and to the casual observer, he would have no premise to shoot us besides the fact that we had captured him. Crazily, that was not the case with him. When I had first brought up the irony that we had had nothing to eat since Kurt exhausted his rations nursing us to health, yet we were surrounded with game, he looked at me with a somewhat destabilised look of insanity, and started to yell.

“Why are you complaining about hunger when we have my gun, bullets, and rabbits, all around us? You are swimming in a freshwater lake, and you are complaining that there is no water to go around.” He shook his head half in disgust and half, truthfully, in shock. Where he came from, utilizing nature was a part of life, an accepted fact that everyone seemed to understand and did so without hesitation or thought to it. In the matter, I was somewhat influenced by Judaism, not a huge amount, but somewhat, in my wariness against killing and eating in cold blood another living creature. It seemed much more innocent to eat meat that somebody else killed, knowing in some form or another that it wasn’t my fault, that it would be eaten anyway. Now pictures of the rabbit frolicking in a field harassed my mind. When I turned around, Wilber and Kurt were arguing loudly.

“You have no respect for any life!” Kurt screamed.

“I’m not the one who wants to destroy your precious life, you are!” Wilber returned with fury.

“I mean life that COUNTS, you IDIOT!”

“Well, at least I’m not committing regicide!”

“What the hell are you talking about?”

“You’re lower than a rat, I thought he had some authority over you! Frankly, I’d rather have the rat.” Wilber’s tension from the other day had boiled into today. Wilber’s grimace smile again resurfaced, this time in a more sarcastic form.

Suddenly, a bang rocked the ground around us. We were being shot at! Then I saw that Kurt, in a quick maneuver, had grabbed the gun, and shot the rabbit, leaving the rat to run away. Wilber stared at him with such an anger that I had never seen solicited from him before, and charged the few paces between them. He punched him in the jaw, and I watched Kurt crumble before Wilber’s stocky form. Then Wilber let out a cry of pain. Kurt had used a rock to hit him in the shins. He jumped on Kurt, elbow forward, and jabbed him straight in the nose, and I heard a crack. He got on top of Kurt and was immediately toppled off by Kurt’s hit to his right shoulder. He fell over, and as he tried to get up, Kurt slugged him in the stomach. But Kurt didn’t notice that Wilber’s left hand had moved behind him, and only realised the fact when he received a crushing uppercut that almost sent him towards Wilber, but he fell backwards. He then hooked Wilber’s leg and began to pull him downwards, all the while raining punches on his stomach, his mouth, and his cheeks. I suddenly realized that I had just been standing here the whole time, and I moved to intervene. I tried to break them up and received my fair share of punches in the process, but I finally succeeded in stopping them.

“What’s the matter with you!?” I asked heatedly, although I knew both their answer and the real one.

“Here’s the matter,” Kurt said.” You people are–”
“Would you shut up for just one damn second?” I said, then regaining my composure, went on.

“Here’s the reason that you two are squabbling like this: You don’t have any food.” Kurt started to get the gun, but Wilber stiff-armed him.

“Not yet Kurt. If I know my FRIEND…” He paused to slam in the emphasis. “He’ll have more to say on the matter, won’t you Russell?” He stared at me so hard that I flinched, for the second time in the last seventy-two hours.

“No Wilber, I hate to concur with Kurt, but he’s right. We need the food.” The dancing rabbit in my head began to bleed from the numerous bullet holes I now imagined him with.

“The rats will destroy the rabbit then.” He turned to me. “I thought it was the other way around.” It seemed like a very vague statement to anyone else, but to me it made perfect sense to me, and it hurt me to my core. Wilber sat down on one of the rocks in our den in disgust, and went to sulk in a corner. Whenever I came near him, he would show his front teeth, chitter, and turn his back to me angrily to prove his point. What he meant was that he thought that us, as pure creatures were rabbits to Kurt’s alter-ego of a rat. When I had joined with Kurt in their disagreement, I had betrayed him and became a rat alongside Kurt, allied against the rabbit that would allegedly always be Wilber.

Another crack rang through the air. I turned to Kurt, prepared to punch him nearly as hard as Wilber did, when I saw that the gun was lying on the floor near Wilber. My eyebrows creased in questioning, until I fell in pain as I felt my thigh implode on itself, my bone shattering almost instantaneously. The world began to go dark, and through my blurry vision I saw French troops coming in with machine guns from a group of trees, and a German sniper fall from an adjacent patch. Then I understood.

Chapter 4: Loyalty

I woke up in a bunker. Was Kurt just a dream? I feel sick. No, not a dream, because my leg is hurt. Then where is Wilber? Standing next to me. What?! I turn my head feebly toward Wilber. He smiled at me.

“Kurt ran,” he said gently. “You took a bullet to the left thigh, but the doctors say that they got it out, and fixed up your bone. We’re in Verdun, and if you’re better, I’d much rather fight alongside you.”
I smiled in return, and found that I could get up. Before I knew it, they had equipped me with the standard weapons, a Berthier rifle and a few grenades on my belt, and we were off again to the battlefield, with the same mission: maximum damage, minimum discretion. A storm of bullets were all around us, and Wilber and I faced them down together, as friends and allies once more. We were ordered to take down a particular bunker that had been a thorn in the side of the commanders for a while now, and we set off to storm it.

So far, so good. We were in the bunker, and we weren’t met with any resistance. We then went in with our new storming group of seven other men, but as we went through the tunnels and finally found the main one, two of our group immediately dropped dead to awaiting machine guns. There were about twenty Germans in there, but in the firefight that ensued, they lost sixteen, and all our men and reinforcements were dead. I had been shot twice, once grazing my ear, and once in my hand when I stopped a bullet from coming into my heart. Wilber was so far unscathed, but there was no way out of here unless these Germans either surrendered or died protecting the exit hole deep into their lines. Suddenly, two more Germans came from behind us and one used the butt of their gun to hit me in the neck, knocking me down, and Wilber, to avoid being hit in his own turn, fell as well. The Germans blocking the entrance approached us, with one of them walking forward ahead of the group

“Now you die,” the German said, holding a gun to my head. All of a sudden, another German came bursting out of the exit hole towards us, and shot the lead German in the back of his head. The soldier’s messy blond hair was all too recognizable to us. Kurt!

“Go!” he shouted. “There was a reason I didn’t shoot you when I had the chance. Follow your religions no matter how minor they are. I am happy to give my life to let two men realize their potential.”

He shot another German, and Wilber picked me up, slung me over his massive shoulder, and ran. I saw Kurt shoot another before receiving a bullet to the stomach. His face contorted in pain, he shot a soldier running after us. Now bullets peppered his body, and a bayonet appeared from behind him through his chest. He now fell, and the Germans repeatedly bayoneted him and shot him at close range. His eyes became vacant, an empty stare, as Wilber took me farther and farther out of the tunnels. My eyes fluttered rapidly as I started to lose consciousness, and I began to cry. Wilber, hearing my sobbing, knew what happened and also began to cry. I realized that Judaism and Atheism were powerful, but to have the strength and loyalty that Kurt had was beyond the power of any God or man on this earth.

      

The Mysterious Monster

One stormy night, a little, pink hamster named Tiny was looking for berries to eat with her family. Later, when she was sleeping, she got out of her bed to get a glass of water. But then, she saw a shadowy figure out the window. So she went outside in her coat and slippers, and she saw it moving closer to her. She wanted to go back into her house, but the door shut because of the strong wind.

“Oh, no, I am going to die!” she said to herself. Then, she ran as fast as she could like a car, until she stopped to catch her breath. Then, Tiny rushed home and unlocked the front door and went to bed. When she went to bed, she kept on thinking, What was the shadowy figure or monster outside?

The next day, she woke up early and ate breakfast. After breakfast, she went outside to look for the monster, and she left some food out. But when she saw nothing, she went back inside her house.

Then, her mom asked her, “What were you looking for?”

Tiny stood quiet for a moment, and then she told her a lie! Tiny said that she just needed some fresh air. But she was looking for a giant monster or figure.

One afternoon, Tiny was outside playing with her friend, Bun Buns. She was really nice to Tiny, and she was the color blue, and she was also a hamster. She had to leave Tiny’s house to help her mom. Tiny almost forgot about the giant monster outside.

When it was midnight, Tiny went outside in her coat and slippers to look for the monster. But instead of finding the monster, she found a giant cave!!!

“I think that’s where the monster lives!” she said to herself. So she went closer to the cave but she saw nothing. When she turned around to head home, she saw the monster! It was a big, hairy, humongous monster! Then, the monster grabbed her and went to his cave with Tiny!

The next morning, Tiny the hamster woke up and saw the monster still sleeping. She wanted to get out, but when she was so close, the monster grabbed her.

“You are not leaving until you tell me what you are doing in my cave,” the monster said.

“I did not come here, you brought me here,” Tiny added.

“No, I didn’t.”

“Yes, you did.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No.”

“Can I just go home?” said Tiny.

“Okay,” said the monster. “But come here at midnight.”

So Tiny went back home, and when it was midnight, Tiny went into the cave and saw the monster.

She asked the monster, “What is your name?”

“My name is German,” German said.

“So why did you ask me to come here?” Tiny asked.

The monster stood quiet for a moment. “Because I need you to stay here with me.”

“What? WHY?”

“Because if you go home, then you will be saying that you have seen a monster, and they will capture me, and I will die,” said the big monster.

Then Tiny realized that her mom and dad were going to go away for the entire year!!! And they had already left! So she agreed that she was going to stay with the  MONSTER!

The next morning, Tiny the hamster woke up and saw the monster eating breakfast. Tiny didn’t have anything to eat for breakfast, so she ran to her house, brought some food from her house, and rushed back to the cave.

“Can you be my friend?” asked Tiny.

“Okay,” said the monster.

So Tiny asked the monster, “What are we going to do?”

“Nothing,” said German.
“I can cook something for lunch. What do you want?”

“Nothing, I can look for something to eat,” said the monster to Tiny.

After eating lunch, Tiny’s mom called her and said, “I’m coming back this week, because the hotel is horrible. Bye!”

“Oh no!” said Tiny the hamster. “If they come here next week, they will see you! But it’s going to be ok.”

The monster was worried, so when it was midnight, the monster woke up Tiny and said, “Are you scared?”

“No?” said Tiny. “Why do you ask?”

“Because people could kill me!” said the monster.

“It’s going to be ok,” said Tiny to the monster. So the monster and Tiny went to bed.

In the morning, Tiny the hamster woke up very early and told the monster what they were going to do, but she heard nothing. She saw that the monster was still sleeping, so Tiny woke up the monster to eat breakfast. After eating their breakfast, Tiny had a call from her mother who said that they were coming home today! In the afternoon!

Tiny the hamster hid the monster in a big closet in the cave. She heard a knock on the door, and it was her mom and dad coming back home from the hotel! Tiny rushed to the back door of her house without letting her mom and dad notice her. Tiny unlocked the backdoor and went in the house and opened the door to her parents. But then, the monster got out of the cave and went to Tiny’s house to look for her. Her dad and mom screamed at the top of their lungs!

“A monster!!!” screamed her mom and dad.

“WAIT!” yelled Tiny.’’Please don’t hurt him! He’s my friend!”

“What?” said the parents.

“He is really nice. He wouldn’t hurt anyone. Please do not kill him!” said Tiny to her parents.

“Okay,” said the parents.

“Yay,” said Tiny. So Tiny and German the monster were both best friends, and they were really happy.

THE END

Forever in My Heart

Jack was a boy living a life all alone on an island. It was so very sad. He was a boy whose parents had been abducted and killed. He had white eyes, red hair, but also chocolatey-black skin. He was tall, but he still needed help getting up from bed every morning. He had his animal friends. One was named Sky. She was a dog who lived with him and kept him company. Kervin, his other friend, was a gorilla who helped Jack reach tall stuff and let Jack ride him sometimes so they could all see the island.   

He lived with Sky in his hut. It was a very poor hut made out of mud and straw. He used to be very rich and also good. He had a perfect life every boy wanted, but now he was mysteriously mysterious. His parents got abducted by aliens, so he was poor now. He didn’t know that his parents were alive. Yet…

The next day, he found a letter in the jungle. Kervin helped him get it, and Jack realized it hadn’t been there before in this place. He knew he had to read it. It said,

Jack,

If you are reading this, we are alive and together. But not as us. We are aliens. Don’t ask why, my child. But we are alive. There isn’t much time. Find us please!

Love,

Mom & Dad

 

The Trials of a Boy
He cried, cried, and never stopped. At the end, he had cried tears, tears of blood, just blood…
He stopped. He knew what he had to do. He had to save his parents, and he had to do it now.

 

The Story You Never Knew
The aliens are a lie
A lie
The lie
They are a lie
They wrote the letter
Evil


The Trials of a Boy 2.0
As days went by, he had to do stuff he had never done before. He jumped in water. He was an idiot. A big one! He forgot he couldn’t swim, and he couldn’t go back. He then drowned in the great blue sea.

 

Forgot It All
He drowned. He could not swim, and he was at the bottom of the sea. It was harsh and cold, and it smelled like chicken wings, and he felt nothing, he heard nothing, he couldn’t see, he wanted to forget it all. He couldn’t. What was happening was, he couldn’t stop it, he was confused and scared. He didn’t know why or how. How could he forget? He never forgot anything. It was now. He couldn’t stop time, or could he?

He then remembered he could stop time, space, and earth. He had to use it, even if his parents warned him about using it. He had to, to find his parents. He had powers, but it was from the aliens, and he didn’t know. He used them, and he found some seaweed and climbed on it.

While this happened, Sky and Kervin were worried and tried to find him. They got very scared.

Meanwhile, Jack was in the ocean and climbed all the seaweed. It was hard, but he still tried, and he went up it, and it was fine. When Sky saw him, she licked his face. Then, Jack unstopped time in the sea, and Sky ran to Kervin. Kervin had been so worried that he immediately hugged Jack and cried a bit because he had thought Jack died or left them.

They went to the hut. They had gotten some more materials so they could build a better hut. They had to because they were getting cold, so they upgraded the materials. They turned the wall into stone and the roof to wood logs. They were proud of themselves.
They went to sleep. While Sky and Kervin slept, Jack heard something very loud. He wondered what it was, so he went out to explore it. He thought it was a bad idea, but it was something that would change his life…

 

The Final Call
While he went to the jungle, he heard louder and louder sounds. He followed these sounds, and he found it said something secret.
                                             Jack…
                                               Jack…
                                                Jack!…

He was scared, yet so very confused. He ran and ran till his heart had no energy. He was scared. He wondered why the voice or something knew his name. He was scared, but he wondered if he could find his parents because that voice might have been them. He had two parents, and there were two voices. He heard the a voice say, “The two of us should leave.”

 

Ending to No Beginning
Nothing
Nothing but black
Nothing but white
Blankness, nothing
The light and the dark
The two, all, the three            


Playing the Game

The real truth is that the people are not real people. We should never trust anyone because they might be people or aliens. Now, I can’t trust myself. I don’t know. Please tell me why. Nothing matters anymore. I feel like nothing, like trash. That cannot be a true life — I can’t understand what to do — Am I the lie? Do I play the game — making all the silly rules — Nothing means nothing — or do I mean something — a new life, a beginning with no end.

 

The Final Showdown
This was the final point. Now that he knew the truth and the lie, it was difficult. But then, he started to sleep. The next day, he was abducted. He felt proud because he could finally meet his parents. He now knew everything of his past and was a bit sad because he left everything, even his memories. When he moved to somewhere else, it felt like he left everything he loved behind to go on to something else. He was  brought back to his parents.

He was one of them, an alien, and he was okay even though he couldn’t go back to play with Kervin and Sky. He tried, but they didn’t allow him because Earthly things were not allowed on the moon, which is where all the aliens lived.

Please tell me where my friends are? Please tell me how to get there? Please tell me who I am?  


Final Thoughts
The final thing he wanted to do was to see his friends, Sky and Kervin, but he could not. He wondered if he could see his friends, and he couldn’t, so he made a choice.

Stay here, never seeing his friends
Or
Try to find his friends

He wanted to see his friends, even if he might go and get in trouble, even if it meant getting ultimate punishment from the aliens and his parents. So at night, he went to the landing stations, and then, he went on a UFO. He didn’t realize that it said: Warning! May Explode!
He didn’t care, and he just went on. It then turned invisible, and he could see in the inside while he was inside. He pressed a button, and then it left.

Zooooooooooooooooooooooooooom.

Then, he landed safely on Earth.

At the mother laaaaaand…

Then, he heard ticking, and he looked behind him and saw that the UFO was going to explode in at least fifteen seconds. He had to get Sky and Kervin and himself out of Earth because it was going to explode! The bomb was only linked to destroy Earth, but he would miss Earth very much because he loved Earth so much. Earth was where he met all his friends and had his own home and did some crazy things.
Sky and Kervin hopped on. They went onto the moon because that was where they lived, and then he could hear that the bomb was ticking. It was already at one second. They flew to the moon to be safe. And then, BOOM!

He didn’t know what he just saw. He just saw his beloved home get destroyed. He cried. Then, his parents showed up and asked, “What’s wrong?”

“A bomb was on the Earth and destroyed it,” he sulked.

He just walked to his hut that they made, and then after another a day had passed, he remained calm about even losing Earth. He froze like ice.

Jack was on the moon with his parents, Sky, and Kervin. He was inside a small hut made of moon dust and moon rocks. Beside him was a black door that led to the outside, where the beds were. Aliens on the moon slept outside. The hut smelled like bacon. Sky and Kervin were sitting beside him.  

Sky said, “Let’s go out and have some fun.”

“No,” said Kervin.

“Why?” asked Sky.                       

“No,” replied Kervin.

“You’re no fun,” said Sky.

Suddenly, a flying hotdog appeared. It looked like a teacher. It had little glasses and a little bun.

Jack felt shocked, but very hungry now. Jack felt sad after all of his adventure because he loved Earth a lot, but had to leave. He could never go back, now that the UFO destroyed Earth. He didn’t feel like he fit in with his parents on the moon because he didn’t know how to behave like the other aliens on the moon.

He was the only person who loved Earth there.

He then went outside. He saw a big present tied with a green bow and blue wrapping paper. The green and blue reminded him of the colors of Earth. Kervin helped him open it while Sky licked it.  After they tore away the wrapping paper, Jack saw a fabulous playground, just like the kind earth used to have. He felt so happy and shocked that he cried tears of joy. His tears flew away into the moon air.

His parents popped out of a little box and yelled, “Surprise!”

“Even though we destroyed Earth, we wanted to give you this. We grabbed this before Earth got destroyed because we knew you would like the souvenir. Now you can remember Earth forever,” said his mom.

Jack hugged his parents. “Oh my God, thank you,” he said.

While Kervin played on the monkey bars, Sky played on the swings. Jack realized that even though Earth was destroyed, he could remember and cherish a piece of it in his heart.

 

The Suitcase in the Library

PROLOGUE:

In the middle of the night, the doors of the New York Public Library creaked open. Although it was called “The City That Never Sleeps,” everyone seemed to be asleep. Even the lions at the front doors seemed to be asleep. Except for one man. He stepped out of the doors to the library with an annoyed expression on his face. He was wearing a dark suit almost the color of the night sky. All of a sudden, a long black limousine pulled up. A short man stepped out of the car, whispered something to the man, and they both got back in the car. The car drove away. Two hours later, they were no longer in the city, maybe even the state. The car was driving towards a very, very tall building, almost three times the size of the Empire State Building. The two men stepped out of the car, and walked towards the building. As they walked towards the building, you could swear the car was driving away on its own. The car was taking the same exact route it took to get to the building, except the car was driving in the opposite direction.

***

“Wake up!” Lily’s three year old sister shouted.

“Why?” Lily mumbled.

“Because it’s time for school!” She screamed again.

“Rosie, you know I already have an alarm clock that works perfectly,” Lily said. There was a loud ring. “See?” Lily said with a smile.

Rosie started bawling. “Mommy! Lily wouldn’t let me be her alarm clock!” Rosie sniffled.

“Lily, be nice to your sister, she’s only trying to help” Lily’s mom said.

Lily grunted. “She isn’t as cute as you think. Thanks to her I was up in the middle of the night!” Lily said angrily. Her brown eyes were glaring at her sister.

Rosie started bawling again, and her blue eyes looked like they were made completely of water.

“Lily!” Her mom scolded. “Will you please stop tormenting your sister and get dressed?” Her mom looked like she was about to explode.

“Fine,” Lily said.

Her mom left the room. Lily put on her favorite shirt and threw her pajamas across the room. “Is it impossible for me to have one CALM day?” Lily sighed. In just two weeks Lily would leave for sleepaway camp for the WHOLE summer. No annoying Rosie, just her and her friends in a cabin far away from here. After Lily was done getting dressed, she ran to the kitchen to get breakfast. Out the window of the kitchen, Lily noticed a black car that looked a lot like the black car she saw out her window the night before.

“Lily, hurry up, you’re going to be late for school,” Lily’s mom said.

“Okay, fine.” Lily ran out the door as fast as she could. She got on the elevator and as soon as the elevator got to the lobby, she sprinted out to the bus stop. On the bus ride to school, Lily couldn’t help thinking about what she had seen out the window in the middle of the night. The man stepping out of the black car and the other man getting in. She wondered where the black car was driving. Just then, the bus got to a stop. Lily got off the bus and ran into the building and realized she forgot her backpack on the bus. She ran back to the bus as fast as she could and grabbed her backpack. As she got her backpack off the bus, she saw a man that looked a lot like the man she saw in the middle of the night. She ran back off the bus and back into the school building.

***

Lily sat up in her chair eagerly as she waited for the bell to ring so she could go home. Then the bell rang and Lily ran to her locker to get her backpack. After she got her backpack, she ran out of school and got to the bus stop so she could take the bus home. When Lily got home, she ran to her room so she could do her homework. She said hi to her pet turtle Green Bean and went to get a snack from the kitchen. When she got back she fed Green Bean and ate her snack. Like usual, at that moment Rosie ran into her room and almost knocked over Green Bean’s tank.

“Rosie please be careful with Green Bean,” Lily said.

“I want a turtle too!” Rosie said.

“But making Green Bean die doesn’t make a difference,” Lily replied.

“Lily, look! Long car, long car!” Rosie pointed to the window.

Lily looked over and saw that same black car, although it looked like it was driving on its own this time. Lily put on her shoes and looked like she was about to leave the apartment.

Rosie said, “Lily, where are you going?”

“To see that car.” Lily ran out of the apartment, went downstairs, and saw the black car about to turn the corner. She ran after the car and saw the car pull up in front of the New York Public Library. Lily saw the men step out of the passenger seat and she saw them walk into the library. Lily followed them inside. As they turned the corner into the nonfiction aisle, she noticed a small black suitcase sitting by one of the shelves. She kept following the men, and when she saw one of them about to turn around, Lily ran out the doors of the library and she kept running. She ran until she got to her apartment building and got on the elevator. She wished it could go faster to the eighteenth floor. She felt a little panicky because when she ran past the car, she saw that the car was driving on its own. She ran to her room, squeezed her stuffed teddy bear, and took a moment to calm down. Maybe I should go back to the library and see what was up with that suitcase, she thought.

***

“Did you hear those footsteps behind us in the library?” the shorter man said.

“I heard them thinking about the suitcase,” the taller one said.

“How come you get to be telepathic and I don’t?” the shorter one pouted.

“First of all, I’m telepathic and because I’m a better agent than you are, and second, don’t focus on that, focus on the suitcase,” the taller one said.

“So come on, let’s get the car and drive to the V.V.T.B.,” the shorter one said.

“Ah yes, the Very Very Tall Building. And please stop calling it the V.V.T.B.”

Two hours later

The men walked up to the front desk of the Very Very Tall Building.

“We’re here for the Suitcase Organization,” the tall one said.

“Okay, go up to the 304th floor,” the receptionist said. It was a very, very long elevator ride.

The men got off the elevator and walked towards a door that said Suitcase Organization on it. They opened the door and walked into a very, very big room full of rows of cheap plastic beach chairs filled with uncomfortable looking people. The men sat down on two pink ones with hearts on them.

“And I was expecting an inflatable baby pool,” the shorter one whispered to the taller one.

“Shh,” the taller one said.

A man almost seven feet tall and seven feet wide said, “Today we are here to discuss who the new ‘Suitcase Seer’ is. Does anyone have any questions or comments?” The taller one raised his hand. “Yes, Freddie Bob.”

“I heard the Suitcase Seer thinking about the suitcase in the library followed by thoughts about teddy bears, so I’m suspecting it was an 11-year old girl.”

“And did you see this girl?” the balloon man asked.

“No, she ran away before I saw her.”

The balloon man said, “Pathetic girls, always running away. Does Ricky Dave have anything to say?”

“No,” the shorter one whimpered.

                                                               

***

Making sure that Rosie was still asleep, Lily quietly put on her sneakers (in case she had to run away again) and her sweater. Lily made sure that she had her phone in her pocket (her mom had given it to her for her tenth birthday and she had only had it for a year) and she quietly tiptoed to the door. As Lily walked out of the apartment, she decided to take the stairs, even though it was a very long walk down. Lily looked at her watch. It was 10:30 at night. Lily was thankful that she didn’t live that far away from the library so it would be a short trip. Lily couldn’t see any stars since it was New York. But she did see the moon. It was a half-moon that night. After she was done walking the one block to the library, she was hesitant to go inside.

¨I am going to be in so much trouble for this,” Lily said to herself. She stepped inside the library and closed the door behind her. She walked quickly through the library to the nonfiction section. In that same spot, she saw the suitcase again. Not being able to resist it, she went over towards the suitcase and unzipped to see what was inside. She immediately saw a bright light. Then it was complete darkness.

Fifteen minutes later

“Hello?” Lily heard a voice say. Lily opened her eyes. She saw the figure of a woman over her.

“What happened?” Lily said.

“Honestly, I don’t know. I just heard a sound over here and saw you lying on the floor.” the woman said.

“Who are you?” Lily asked.

“Lily, don’t you know me? I’m the librarian here,” the woman replied.

“How do you know my name?” Lily asked.

“Don’t you have a library card here?” the librarian frowned.

“Oh. Don’t blame me, I was unconscious for- actually I don’t know if I was. Was I? But, you get the point.” Lily said.

“I wasn’t blaming you, and you were unconscious. For fifteen minutes.” the librarian said.

“I was?” Lily said, not sure if she believed the librarian.

“Yes. And may I ask how you became unconscious?” the librarian said curiously.

“Um, I looked in this suitcase-” Lily started to say.

“Suitcase?” the librarian interrupted.

“Yes, suitcase. Here, look,” Lily held up the suitcase to the librarian, unaware that out of the 7 billion people on Earth, only Lily could see it. The librarian, on the other hand, knew Lily was the one, and that the Suitcase Organization would be out to get her. Oh, if only they knew what was inside, it definitely WOULD NOT be worth it. The librarian chuckled to herself.

“What are you laughing ab-”

“Hide!” The librarian whisper-shouted as she heard the door creak open. The only people who would come to the library at 11:00 at night were either the library staff, the person who could see the suitcase, or a member of the Suitcase Organization. The librarian did NOT want it to be the last one.

***

“The wheels of the driverless car go round and round, round and round, round and round, the wheels of the driverless go round and round, to the New York Public Library,” Ricky Dave sang rather tunelessly.

“Will. You. Please. Shut. Up. You’re a  really bad singer,” Freddie Bob said angrily.

“Everyone in the Suitcase Organization is a really bad singer. You know Jeffrey Sam, Balloon man, founder of the Suitcase Organization? He can shatter a glass just by singing one note!” Ricky Dave replied.

“Ricky Dave, I told you to SHUT UP!” Freddie Bob yelled.

“Look, we’re here!” Ricky Dave said.

Freddie Bob took a deep breath… and punched Ricky Dave in the stomach. Ricky Dave threw up on Freddie Bob.  Freddie Bob pushed a button that cleaned his suit. Then he opened the door of the car and pushed Ricky Dave out. Ricky Dave blew a raspberry at Freddie Bob. Then Freddie Bob got out of the car. They both walked into the library and the door opened with a loud creak.

***

“Out of all the people the Suitcase Organization could have sent to steal the suitcase, it had to be Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave,” the librarian said.

“Wait, their names are Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave?” Lily asked.

“Yeah, everyone in the Suitcase Organization has two first names with a total of three syllables,” the librarian said.

“It’s so annoying to look for something that’s invisible,” Ricky Dave said.

“It’s not invisible, we just can’t currently see it,” Freddie Bob said.

“I’m pretty sure that’s the same thing,” Ricky Dave said.

“No it’s not.”
“Yes it is.”

“No.”

“Yes.”

“No!”

“Yes!”

“NO!!!”

“Okay fine, they’re not the same thing,” Ricky Dave said.

“Do you want me to punch you in the stomach again?” Freddie Bob said.
“Do you want me to throw up on you again?” Ricky Dave said.

“Fine.”

“Fine.”

“Let’s just keep looking for the suitcase,” Freddie Bob said.

“They’re weird,” Lily said to the librarian.

“Ricky Dave, I hear voices,” Freddie Bob said.

“Oh come on,” Lily said.

“And they’re coming from over there,” Ricky Dave said.

Freddie Bob looked right at Lily. Lily was so scared she could even smell her fear. “There!” Ricky Dave shouted.

Lily got so scared that she picked up the closest thing to her — which happened to be the suitcase — and threw it at Freddie Bob. Freddie Bob was very confused. He thought that a little girl had just thrown air at him, but surprisingly it hurt.

“Wait a minute,” Freddie Bob said. “That was the suitcase!” Everyone was running around the library looking for the suitcase. The only person not in the commotion was Lily, since she could already see it. When she thought everyone was most involved in the fight for the suitcase, she walked over to where she saw the suitcase and picked it up.

“She has it! She has the suitcase!” Freddie Bob yelled.

“GET HER!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!” Ricky Dave screamed.

“Oh no oh no oh no, IT’S THE END OF THE WORLD!!!” the librarian shouted.

Lily ran into the librarian’s office and locked the door behind her. She heard the closet door swing open and the librarian walked out.

“How did you-” Lily began.

“Secret passage. Be prepared to run, because I’m pretty sure Ricky Bob and Freddie Dave or whatever their names are saw me go into the passage. You still have the suitcase?” the librarian said.

“Yes,” Lily answered.

“Good. You’re going to need it. And not just for throwing it at Bobbie Fred,” the librarian said.

The librarian had her gray hair up in a tight bun, right on top of her head. Her glasses sat on the edge of her nose, like every librarian’s glasses should. Her green eyes were looking directly into Lily’s brown eyes. Lily’s mom often said Lily was lucky to have her dad’s eyes. Lily had never met her dad, apparently something happened to him around when Lily was born, and she had never seen him. She was a little bit jealous of Rosie, because Rosie didn’t need to worry about Lily’s dad, since she was adopted. Lily’s mom really wanted another child, but that was after her dad went missing.

After the emotional memory, Lily and the librarian heard the closet door swing open. “Run!” the librarian shouted. Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave were close behind them. Lily decided to throw the suitcase at them again.

“Ow!” Ricky Dave screamed. “She threw the suitcase at me!”

“Stop being dumb, pick it up,” Freddie Bob yelled.

Lily slid over and tried to get the suitcase before them. Lily had an idea. She ran the other way and ran towards the exit of the library. She ran out of the library and got into the driverless car. She got down and hid until the men came out. When Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave got out of the library, they didn’t see her. They decided they would get into the car and drive to the Very Very Tall Building. When the car started, Lily jumped a little, but she managed to stay hidden.

Two hours later

“Well, Ricky Dave, turns out we managed to get the suitcase after all,” Freddie Bob said.

“Not for long,” Lily whispered to herself.

After Ricky Dave and Freddie Bob got out of the car, Lily made sure they couldn’t see her, and then she got out. She couldn’t help staring at the building in front of her. It was almost three times the size of the Empire State Building. She decided to go into the building. She saw Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave go into the front desk and tell the receptionist that they were here for the Suitcase Organization. Since Lily wanted to follow them, she went up to the receptionist and said the same thing.

“304th floor,” the receptionist said. Lily got into the elevator and pushed the 304th floor button. It took about five minutes for her to get there. When she got there, she saw a door with the words “Suitcase Organization” on it in big print. Lily got down on her knees and opened the door and snuck inside. Lily was surprised to see many rows of broken rocking chairs. Some of them fell over about every two seconds. Lily went into the last row and chose the one that looked the least broken. A man that was seven feet tall and seven feet wide came up to a little stage at the front. He announced that there was some very important news from two of the agents named Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave.

“Please let me carry the suitcase up,” Ricky Dave whispered to Freddie Bob.

“Why should I?” Freddie Bob whispered.

“Because if I carry it up, maybe they’ll let me get telepathy too,” Ricky Dave said.

“Hate to break it to you, but that’s not a good reason,” Freddie Bob said.

“And now, without further ado, the two agents who have managed to get the suitcase,” Balloon Man said. Before Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave were even done getting up to the little stage at the front, Lily ran up to them and grabbed the suitcase.

“Freddie Bob, do you know her?” Balloon Man asked.

“Jeffrey Sam, I can assure you that she does not have good intentions,” Freddie Bob said.  

“Then I say, get her!”

The room was full of chaos. Broken rocking chairs became even more broken. Injured people became even more injured. And Jeffrey Sam accidentally swallowed someone. Lily managed to exit the room, but someone crashed into her.

“HI!!!!!” He shouted.

“Who are you?” Lily asked.

“I’M DANNY PHIL!!!!!!” He yelled.

“Uhh, hi?” Lily said with a confused expression on her face.

“HELLO!!!!!! WHAT’S YOUR NAME?” Danny Phil yelled.

“I’m Lily,” Lily said feeling weirded out.

“OH YEAH, YOU’RE THE PERSON WHO COULD SEE THE SUITCASE!” Danny Phil screamed, “HOW’D YOU GET HERE ANYWAY?”

“I snuck into Freddie Bob’s and Ricky Dave’s driverless car,” Lily said.

“I KNOW FREDDIE BOB AND RICKY DAVE!!!!! FREDDIE BOB IS MY UNCLE! HE DOESN’T LIKE ME THAT MUCH THOUGH!” Danny Phil yelled.

“Why doesn’t he like you?” Lily asked.

“I WAS LIVING WITH UNCLE FREDDIE FOR A LITTLE BIT AND I HAD ALWAYS WANTED TO JOIN A BARBER SHOP QUARTET BUT HE WOULDN’T LET ME AND MADE ME JOIN THIS ORGANIZATION INSTEAD! SO I THEN I STARTED LIVING WITH RICKY DAVE BUT THEN HE JOINED THIS ORGANIZATION TOO!” Danny Phil screamed enthusiastically.

“Wow,” Lily looked at Danny Phil with wide-eyes.

“YOU KNOW THAT GUY WHO JEFFREY SAM SWALLOWED — CUPCAKE BILL?! HE WAS MY BEST FRIEND!”

“Wow, I’m sorry.”

“DO YOU WANT TO HELP ME PLAN HIS FUNERAL?” Danny Phil asked.

“Okay,” Lily said.

“DO YOU WANT ME TO DRIVE YOU BACK IN MY DRIVERLESS CAR?” Danny Phil asked.

“Okay, but can you drive me to the New York Public library?”

“SURE, BUT I’M NOT DRIVING YOU. MR. INVISIBLE IS!”

“You got it!”

Together, Lily and Danny Phil walked to the parking lot of the Very Very Tall Building, and Lily was surprised to see that Danny Phil’s driverless car was really just a punch buggy painted pink. But it did actually drive by itself.

Two hours later.

Lily walked up the steps to the New York Public Library. She couldn’t wait to see the librarian again.

“Hello?” Lily said.

“Hi Lily. How was your trip to the Very, Very Tall Building?” The librarian asked.

“Oh, it was good, and this is Danny Phil,” Lily said.

“HI!!!!!!” Danny Phil said.

“Um.. Hi Danny Phil,” the librarian said.

“I think I might try opening the suitcase again,” Lily said.

“Well, what’re you waiting for?” The librarian asked.

“Okay,” Lily said.

She put the suitcase on the ground and slowly opened it. Inside, she couldn’t have been more surprised to see…………

A LITTLE BABY UNICORN!

Lily’s eyes were about as wide as oranges.

“You also get to be immortal,” the librarian said.

“How do you know all this?” Lily asked.

“Because I was the first person to ever see inside the suitcase…”

EPILOGUE:

“We are gathered here today to mourn the loss of my beloved friend, Cupcake Bill,” Danny Phil said for the first time, not shouting. “He was a very nice friend and he baked amazing cupcakes.”

Unfortunately, they did not have Cupcake Bill’s corpse. Instead, they had some “remnants”  in a coffin (compliments of Jeffrey Sam).

Lily almost started crying at Cupcake Bill’s funeral. Jeffrey Sam was not there, luckily. It was almost time for Lily to speak, “He always knew how much frosting and how many sprinkles to put on every cupcake. Cupcake Bill’s cupcake shop will be left in the care of Danny Phil.”

“Wait, what?!” Danny Phil said.

“Yes you’ll be running Cupcake Bill’s cupcake shop,” Lily said.

“THIS IS THE BEST DAY OF MY LIFE!!!!” Danny Phil shouted.

Everyone at the funeral started staring at him, “I mean besides for Cupcake Bill dying,” Danny Phil looked embarrassed.

“Okay, and now for the crying break,” Danny Phil said and then he started bawling.

Everyone at the funeral was crying. It seemed as though every single tissue box in the world was empty.

“CURSE YOU JEFFREY SAM!” Danny Phil shouted while taking a break to blow his nose. “WE WILL MISS YOU AND LOVE YOU FOREVER, CUPCAKE BILL.”

Then a little girl wearing a little pink dress stepped onto the stage, “I have no idea who Cupcake Bill is, but my sister went to the funeral so I did too.”

“Rosie, I thought you wanted to go to the funeral,” Lily said.

“But I still don’t know who Cupcake Bill is… who is he?” Rosie said.

“Okay Rosie, why don’t you get off the stage now?” Lily said with a fake smile on her face.

EPILOGUE OF THE EPILOGUE:

Lily had to say it was pretty cool to have a pet unicorn. By orders of her mom, Lily was forced to give Green Bean to Rosie, since it wasn’t fair for Lily to have two pets and Rosie not have any. Lily could tell Green Bean hated Rosie, because he went into his shell whenever Rosie came into her room. Whenever Lily came into Rosie’s room, Green Bean came out of his shell and gave Lily a get me out of here look. Sparkly-Boo (Boo for short), as Lily had named her unicorn slept in Lily’s bed and gave Lily big pleading eyes to take her in Lily’s backpack to school. Rosie called Boo Shnoogie (Lily did not know why). For Rosie’s fourth birthday, Lily’s mom decided tell Rosie she was adopted. Rosie wanted to know where her “real mommy” was.

“Hey Lily, we’ve got new next door neighbors! Their names are Mr. Bob and Mr. Dave!” Lily’s mom said enthusiastically. Lily hoped she was kidding about their names.

“Oh, that’s cool mom, but do you know what their first names are?” Lily asked.

“Their names are Freddie and Ricky!” Lily’s mom said.

NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Lily thought.

“Mom, is it okay if I go to the library?” Lily asked.

“Why not?” Her mom said.

Lily rushed out the door and ran the one block to the New York Public Library. She ran straight into the librarian’s office.

“Freddie Bob- Ricky Dave- Next door neighbors-” Lily panted.

“Okay Lily, what’s going on here?” The librarian asked. Lily took a deep breath… “FreddieBobandRickyDavearemovingintomybuildinginapartment18Cwhichisnextto18D

whichismyapartmentandcouldn’ttheyhavemovedinto17Cor16Cor15Cor14CandIwouldsay13Cbutthere’sno13thfloorinmybuildingbutmaybe12Cor11Cor10Cor9Cor8Cor7Cor6Cor5Cor4Cor3Cor2Cor1C? AndIdidn’tevenknowMr.Smithmovedout.” Lily said in warp speed.

“Slowly?” the librarian said.

“Freddie Bob and Ricky Dave are moving into my building in apartment 18C which is next to 18D which is my apartment, and couldn’t they have moved into 17C or 16C or 15C or 14C and I would say 13C but there’s no 13th floor in my building, but maybe 12C or 11C or 10C or 9C or 8C or 7C or 6C or 5C or 4C or 3C or 2C or 1C? And I didn’t even know Mr. Smith moved out.” Lily said normally this time.

“Well I have a plan. The Suitcase Organization has stolen all sorts of high tech devices from the government to find the suitcase.” the librarian said.

“So if we report them to the police…” Lily said.

“They won’t be your neighbor!”

The Middle

Welcome to the life of being in the middle.

I never have one perfect day. Everyone gets in the way of my perfect day. It’s always someone that ruins it. Every day, I think, Today’s the day, but every day, it fails. My mom has five children. I’m the middle child.

***

“Get up, you sleepypants!” Jack screamed.

I woke up in my bedroom with bags under my eyes. I looked out the window. It was still night.

“Help me turn on the computer,” Jack said slowly. That’s my older brother. He mostly texts his friends and does other pre-teen stuff.

I groaned and then walked to the office. I looked at the computer and showed him how to work it. “You just click the power button,” I muttered.

“Oh,” Jack said embarrassed.

Then, I walked out of the office. Down the hall, I saw the family picture that was taken very long ago. I arrived back in my bedroom. Then, I slammed my face onto the pillow.

When I woke up, it was still dark, and everyone was asleep. Everyone had his or her own room. I sneaked past all six bedrooms and into the kitchen. I quickly poured a bowl of cereal. I had a perfect bowl of cereal and a nice, peaceful breakfast.

Click! Clank! I saw my younger brother, Andrew, walk downstairs.

“I can’t sleep,” he whispered.

“Why not?” I asked.

“I had a nightmare,” Andrew whimpered.

“Don’t worry, it’s just a dream. It can’t really hurt you,” I said.

“I guess so,” he said with a worried tone. Then, Andrew went back upstairs.

***

When it reached dawn, everyone was awake. Dad had to take me, Andrew, and Chloe to school. Mom had to take Jack and Mia.

Mornings are chaos. Never in my life have I had a good morning. I wish that the day would come that I could have a perfect day, even if my siblings try to stop me.

In the car, I was talking to Chloe about her first day of kindergarten.

“Kindergarten sounds really scary,” she said, very frightened.

“Chloe, I’m sure you’ll have a blast!” I yelled.

“Really?” she asked.

“Really,” I responded.

Dad dropped her off, and it was just me and Andrew.

It was Andrew’s first day of second grade. Andrew wasn’t scared. He was really happy.

“Y’know, it’s a good thing that you’re excited,” I told Andrew.

Andrew gave me a smile.

When Andrew was dropped off, it was time for me to go to my first day of fourth grade.

But just imagine how scared Jack would be. It was his first day of middle school. And next year, Mia would be going to high school. That must be really, really scary.

Dad dropped me off, and I was scared to death.

I walked into Room 220, and I took a deep breath.

“Good morning, Gabe. May you please take your seat?” the teacher announced.

My seat was towards the back of the room. I walked all the way to the back. I couldn’t see the teacher from where I was sitting. Everything was a blur. I knew already that fourth grade wasn’t going to be my best year.

When school was over, I entered the car and was silent the whole ride home. Try number one for the perfect day was a failure.

When I got home, I wanted to go to bed early. And that’s what I did.

I was on my bed, thinking about whether I would ever get one perfect day. Everyone had a great first day of school except me. It is never fair.

“Gabe, are you okay?” my mom asked.

“I’m fine. I just had a rough day,” I said in a shy kind of voice.

My mom shut the door. I hoped to have a better day tomorrow.

***

  In the morning, I was the last one to wake up. I quickly put on my clothes, got my backpack, and ran into the car. When I got to school, I took my seat. This time, it was a

little easier to see the teacher, and we got to do this cool science experiment.

At recess, I met a kid named Lucas.

“Hi,” Lucas said.

  “Hello?” I whispered, “What’s your name?”

“Lucas,” he replied. “What’s yours?”

“Gabe,” I stammered.

“Goodbye!” Lucas said.

I just met a new friend on the second day of school! Today might finally be the perfect day!

“Back out of the way, kid!” a bully yelled in the hallway. He pushed me to the floor and laughed.

“Ow!” I yelled.

I was left on the floor in the hallway alone. And no one cared.

“Help!” I screamed. No one could hear me.

I had heard of this bully. His name was Tom. I got up and cleaned myself up. I hoped I’d never run into him again. Try number two was a failure. I knew it wasn’t true, that I wasn’t really going to have a perfect day. That day would never come.

Later, our family celebrated our dad’s birthday. We had to get all dressed up since it was a fancy restaurant, and everything they served there was fancy. The name of the restaurant was Astoria. My dad loves Astoria because their food is amazing.

I ordered chicken fingers to eat. I love chicken fingers!

“Cheers to dad,” Jack announced.

“Cheers to dad!” everyone yelled.

Everyone toasted high up in the air. It was an amazing night! It was very, very close to being perfect, but not perfect. Try number three had to be perfect, it had to.

***

I woke up in the morning feeling cranky. I yawned, and then I walked to the porch. I sat on the patio couch, looking at the beautiful sight of my backyard. It was right next to the woods. I had never ever been out there before. There was a river all the way back there, but its water was now polluted, and it was filled with garbage. Just looking down there made me want to go into the woods, but I had heard there were bears back there.

There was no school because it was Saturday. I was the only one up. I continued to look around my backyard. Then, I walked down the stairs and into my backyard. I looked around for a second.

“What are you doing out here?” Mia asked.

“Nothing!” I yelled.

“Are you trying to go out in the woods?!” she screamed.

“No, of course not!” I replied.

Mia gave an “I’m watching you” kind of look. She walked inside and slammed the door behind her.

I sat down and thought about the perfect day. Lucas was coming over that night for a sleepover, and I just hoped everyone didn’t embarrass me. I sat around, waiting for almost three hours. I stood on my head and got a head rush. Finally, when it struck 5:00, he arrived.

“Hey, Lucas,” I sputtered.

“Hey, Gabe,” Lucas replied.

“C’mon outside now!” I yelled.

Lucas followed me outside into the backyard. I walked into the woods.

“Are we supposed to go back there?” Lucas asked.

“It’s fine.” I lied.

We stepped foot into the dangerous woods. I was in a lot of trouble. The woods were very dark. I felt like someone was out to get me. I had goosebumps down my skin.

“Maybe we should go back,” Lucas suggested.

“No,” I said. I was as scared as Lucas, but I was very curious. I kept on walking forward.

“I’m going back,” Lucas sputtered. He went all the way back to the yard.

I stopped. I decided to go back. I turned around and went the other way.

When I came back from the woods, Lucas was gone.

“Lucas!” I yelled. I went inside and saw Lucas. But he was hanging out with Jack.

“Jack, get away from Lucas,” I sputtered.

“No way!” Jack yelled.

“Lucas is my friend,” I scoffed.

Then, Chloe and Andrew came downstairs.

“Oh, why is everyone down here?” I screamed.

Then, Mia came down.

“That’s it!” I yelled. I stomped to the office and slammed the door.

Lucas slowly opened the door.

“Hello?” Lucas echoed.

The lights were turned off. Lucas turned on the lights. I was curled up in a little ball.

“Gabe, I’m still your best friend,” he sputtered.

I didn’t answer.

“Gabe, c’mon let’s play,” Lucas continued.

Then, my head popped out. “You promise you won’t ditch me?” I whispered.

“I promise,” Lucas answered.

When it was 11:00, we started to go to sleep.

“Good night,” I said.

“Good night,” Lucas responded.

By midnight, we were asleep.

***

I stretched and groaned. Lucas woke up a few minutes after I did.

“I had a great sleep!” I yelled.

Lucas stretched his back. “I agree,” he said.

“Breakfast!” Mom yelled.

Chloe and Andrew were the first ones down, then Jack and Mia, and then me and Lucas. Mom made pancakes, scrambled eggs, bacon, and sausages. As we were eating breakfast, Lucas and I talked about our next sleepover.

After breakfast, Lucas’s mom came to pick him up.

“Bye!” I yelled. Lucas waved while he was in the car.

“That was fun,” I said. “Tomorrow, I have to start try number three for the perfect day. Yesterday and today don’t count.”

“Well, good luck,” Andrew whispered.

In my room I made a plan for try number three. If I didn’t follow the plan, I was going to fail again. I couldn’t fail. Try number three had to be perfect.

***

When I got to the classroom, nothing bad happened. So far, so good.

Until Tom came back. “Hey, chump!” Tom yelled.

I tried to ignore him.

“You trying to have a perfect day?” he laughed.

“Yes,” I muttered.

Tom dropped me to the floor. He also stepped on my foot.

“Ow!” I screamed.

“Oops. Sorry, does that hurt?” Tom said sarcastically.

“Yes, it kind of does,” I said.

“Oh, I’m very sorry,” he laughed.

All of the sudden, Lucas came out.

“Back off,” Lucas sputtered.

“I’m not scared of you,” Tom answered.

I was shocked. I didn’t know Lucas was tough.

Lucas grabbed my hand and took me away from Tom.

“You will pay for that, Lucas. You will pay!” Tom yelled.

“You saved me,” I stammered.

“I couldn’t let you get beat up by Tom,” Lucas sputtered.

“Thank you,” I responded.

“No problem,” Lucas said. Then, he was gone.

When I got home, everyone was having pizza and watching a movie.

“Can I have some pizza?” I asked.

“Sorry, but there is nothing left,” Jack sputtered.

“Fine,” I said.

I walked onto the porch. This day was definitely horrible. First, I got attacked by Tom, and now, my family had forgotten about me.

Why does the world hate me so much?! All I’m asking for is one perfect day. Well, I’m done with this. Looking at the damp sky made me wonder, why me?

“Gabe?” a voice said.

It was my dad. “Look, I’m sorry we watched a movie and had pizza without you,” he sputtered.

“It’s not about that, Dad. It’s because I never had a perfect day.” I cried.

“Wait, it’s about that?” Dad asked.

“Yeah,” I stammered.

“None of us ever had a perfect day,” Dad said.

“What?!” I yelled.

“It’s true. With a family of seven, it’s impossible to have a perfect day,” Dad laughed.

“Really? Then, what about the time…uh,” I said cluelessly.

“See? There are no memories of a perfect day,” Dad sputtered.

“Huh. I guess there isn’t?” I laughed.

Then, Dad and I started laughing hysterically.

“What’s so funny?” Mom asked.

“Gabe thinks that everyone has had a perfect day except for him,” Dad laughed.

“Really?” she asked.

“Really,” I said.

Then, everyone was laughing.

All this time, I thought I was the only one who had horrible days. But my whole family never had a perfect day. Who cared about having a perfect day? I had my family. When we got in, we continued watching the movie as a family.

And I went to sleep knowing that there is no such thing as a perfect day.

Spat’s Big Adventure

Once upon a time, there lived a spatula named Spat. She lived in a fridge because her parents were a head of lettuce and a tomato. She felt like she did not belong in the fridge. She was not fed metal or other things a spatula would eat. She was fed vegetables or fruit.

Spat wanted to be used to make a cake, but before that ever happened, she had to get past the meat warriors. The meat warriors were all different types of meat, like pig, steak, and filet mignon. Something about Spat was telling her that she could never get out of the refrigerator, but she knew that she could, and she was not afraid of the meat warriors.

So one day, she had a plan to escape during the nighttime. She made a fake clone of herself so she could get out of the fridge. She made a fake by getting a cookie for the head with two pieces of black licorice, lettuce for the skirt, and a popsicle stick for the body. The clone was ready, so she went to sleep.

In the morning, she put the clone on the bottom of the fridge so the clone would draw attention and she could get out of the fridge.

Finally, she got out of the fridge onto the counter to be baked with, but she was not going to be baked with. She was going to be cooked with.

“Now I know why Daddy Lettuce and Mommy Tomato would not let me go out. There are so many ways to get hurt,” she said.

She thought it would be the same as in the refrigerator, but not at all. She saw a garlic being squeezed. She thought that it was a garlic squeezer and didn’t like the smell.

“OMG, the garlic is being killed, and ummm, did I see that garic in the fridge the other day?” she said. Spat thought this was terrible, so she hid from the cook.

The next day was not much different, so at the end of the day, she found a schedule for baking. She read that next week, on Sunday at nine o’clock in the morning, the chef would come to bake a cake. So she stayed out all night and all day for a week.

The day finally came, the day she would be used to make a cake. She was so excited that she would be used to bake a cake. She was really excited. When she was being used to bake the cake, she got really sticky, so sticky that it was peeling her skirt. Metal color was coming off. It was the worst thing. She checked the chart to see if it was cake day because she had never been used to make a cake before and didn’t think it would be so sticky.

So this was supposed to be a cake, but then she realized that the bowl the chef used to make chicken was clean. All of the food was off, and then she saw the sink and realized that there was nothing to worry about. At the end of the day, her wish was granted. Everything came off just fine, and Spat lived happily ever after out of the fridge. The End!

                                          

Yellow Fever

Chapter One: Emma

The year is 1793. On a hot summer day in Philadelphia, my sister and I go to get some fresh food from market. We get some peaches, pickles, and biscuits. My sister is talking a lot, like she always does. I’m not listening. I am thinking about how my father is never around, and how my mother is around too much.

I am the oldest of three siblings, I have a younger sister named Hailey and a younger brother named Peter. When we get home from the market, my puppy meets us at the door. He has white fuzzy hair that makes him look like a baby polar bear. My mother comes in the living room. “You two are late, your French teacher will be here very soon and you haven’t gotten your books yet. Hailey, go upstairs and get all the books.” I watch as my sister heads up the stairs. “Emma go find your brother Peter,” she tells me. I find Peter, he was by the tree in the backyard, the one he and dad had planted four years ago.

My family hasn’t been this way my whole life. When Peter was just a baby, Hailey was  two, and I was three. Dad had gotten a job in town, so he was around the house often. Mom had a job then too. She owned a clothing store. One day dad came home, smiling from cheek to cheek. He told me, Hailey, and Peter to go upstairs so he could talk with mom, but I snuck downstairs to listen. I remember them talking about Dad’s new job (at a sailing company), and how he finally convinced Mom to let him take it. Little did I know that my dad’s decision to own a sailing company would change my life.

Lots of things changed. Dad’s new job allowed him to send more money home for us, though he was always at sea. We moved into a house that had fifteen rooms. That’s when I got a French and Spanish teacher. I also got my own room. I enjoy my new life, but I never get to see my dad, as good things have consequences. My room has a blue bed. At the end of the bed there’s a chest with all my clothes. Next to my bed, on the right side of my room, I have a desk and a bookshelf. I got to choose how my room looks. But poor Hailey. Her room was decorated by mom. It’s all pink, and she doesn’t like it. I don’t know what color Peter’s room is, I don’t even go in there anymore because it’s so messy. “Emma… Emma… Emma…”  I realize that I was daydreaming again. “Come on we’re late for class,” says Peter.

When we walk into class, our teacher says, “Vous êtes en retard.”

“Sorry we’re late but Emma was daydreaming,” Peter says. I like my siblings but when they do stuff like that, I get annoyed.

“It doesn’t matter whose fault it is, you’re both late,” our teacher scolds. I hate French class, it’s so boring. All I hear is talk, talk, talk, homework, talk, talk, talk, talk, and then there is some more talking. I’ll do what I always do, which is copy the homework from Hailey or Peter.

At dinner, mother tells us the latest gossip, “some man died screaming today. They say he was a sailor, and he had yellow skin.” Immediately my siblings and I all ask the same question.

“Was the man dad?” Mom’s face looked like she had been expecting this question.

“No, some guy named William,” she answers. It was a quiet dinner after that. Later we all head upstairs to go to bed.

Chapter Two: Emma

I wake up to screaming and realize that the screams are mine. I remember what I was dreaming about. I was standing in front of my Dad and watching him die, but I couldn’t help him. I open the door a tad to see if I have woken anyone up. All the other doors are closed. I head downstairs to eat breakfast. As I smear butter on my toast, Hailey comes in the kitchen. I didn’t notice she had come in until she tapped my shoulder.

“Hi,” said Hailey.

“Don’t do that,” I said coldly. I never have been a morning person. “I’m going upstairs to read,” I said. As I left the kitchen, I heard my sister mumbling something, probably a rude comment about me.  

That day we got a letter from dad. It said:

Dear family,

I hope this letter finds you in good health. I will be coming home in five days, but by the time you get this letter it will be one day. I can not stay long enough to be there for Emma’s birthday.

Sincerely,

Henry Hunter

After Mom finished reading the letter out loud, I stormed up to my room. I paced across the room. This is what was I thinking about:

-What have I done to deserve this?

-Does dad not like me?

-Is he really sorry about not coming to my birthday?

-What has he been doing? He’s been gone a year…

I go under my sheets and hide. I cry until I drift off to sleep.

Chapter Three: Emma

I awoke when I heard a loud noise. My eyes are burning from the tears, so I go downstairs to get some water. When I walk in the kitchen, I see Dad! I realize the noise was the carriage that Dad had arrived in. He smiles and says, “Happy Birthday!”

“But it’s not my birthday,” I say. I know he’s pretending like it is my birthday so that I will forgive him for missing my actual birthday. This is what I hate about Dad. Even when I’m mad at him, I can’t stay mad. But this time Dad’s plan won’t work. I have made up my mind, and nothing he will do, say, or even buy can change that.

Chapter Four: Hailey

My sister, Emma, gets everything. Emma thinks I don’t know that when I talk she doesn’t listen. She gets what she wants all the time. These are some of the thing that I don’t like about her.

-She is lazy.

-She has a bad mood in the morning.

-She copies my notes.

-She always “borrows” my stuff.

-She comes into my room without asking.

-She always talks about Dad like he is a bad guy.

What usually happens when Dad misses Emma’s birthday.

  1. Dad makes Emma a special breakfast.
  2. He says, “I’m sorry for missing your birthday again.”
  3. Then he gives her $10!
  4. She goes shopping.
  5. Then she comes back with no money, but 15 shopping bags.
  6. She hugs dad and forgives him.

I wait for Emma to come back from her shopping trip, but she doesn’t come back. I start to worry, even though she annoys me. Why is she not home yet? I go downstairs and Emma taps me. Then everything went black.

Chapter 5: Hailey (one week later)

Suddenly, I open my eyes and all I see is the pink ceiling of my room. I hear voices talking, but I can’t figure out who they belong to. “So, she had yellow fever?” One voice says.

“Yes.”

“It’s been a week, so she should be getting better soon.”

“I miss her.”  I try to talk but I can’t. My throat feels dry. I think my sister is the one who said she missed me. My sister has never said anything like that.

“Who has yellow fever?” I call out weakly.

The door opens and someone enters my room. I try to lift my head but it falls back down on the soft pillow. “You do,” says the unidentified voice. I think it’s Emma, but it turns out it’s only Peter. “Can I get you anything?” he asks kindly.

“Yes I would like some water for my sore throat.”

Emma comes into my room with her clothes and some trunks. “Hailey! I’m so glad you’re alive and that you survived the yellow fever. I thought I would never get to talk you again.”

“What’s happening? Why does it look like you’re packing?” I ask feebly.

“You’ve been sick and unconscious for a week! Dad thinks we should leave the country before anyone else gets sick.”

Emma was wearing a cloth that covered everything but her eyes. “Why are you wearing that on your face?”

“Dad wants us to wear these until the doctor says that you are healthy and okay to travel,” she answers. “Also, I’m sorry I’ve been a bad sister,” she says.

Suddenly everything that was on my list of annoying things about Emma disappears. “I missed you too,” I say. Then we hug. I don’t want to let go of my sister, because I love her and realize the value of our relationship. However, a loud shriek interrupts our loving embrace.  

The shriek is coming from my parents room. Emma says, “I will go see what’s happening and report back to you.”

“Yes, ma’am,” I say as I salute my sister and laugh.

While I am waiting for Emma to return, I get worried, since the shriek sounded low like a man’s. I think it was my dad, but that scares me because I have never heard him scream before.

Then Emma comes back, her mouth is dropped and her eyes are wide, like she’s seen a ghost.

She hesitates for a moment, and she says, “the doctor thinks Mom has yellow fever and she won’t live, or be able to go on the trip. Mom’s skin has a tint of yellow and she’s shaking, but she doesn’t realize it.”

Before I can respond, Emma tells me that Mom wants us to leave her behind and go on the trip.

Chapter 6: Mom

I open my eyes and feel the hot sun blinding me as I begin to wake up. I roll over to see if my husband is still asleep, but he isn’t there, so I assume he’s in the bathroom. I call everyone for breakfast, even though I am not that hungry. When no one comes, I decide to go check on the kids. When I go into Peter’s room, he is not there. Then I see myself in the mirror. I have yellow skin and bright red eyes. Then I remember that’s how Hailey looked when she had yellow fever and I have a flashback of me telling my family to leave the country without me.

I don’t want to eat, but I need to for strength. So I grab a peach, but drop it. I am too weak to pick it up. I go back to bed. All of a sudden, I am cold, and then a chill comes over me. I start coughing up blood. I try to scream out, but I can’t even breathe. I feel like I am close to death. I think about my children, my sweet, sweet children. I am ready. Death would be like a nap, I think to myself. Secretly I know that it will not be like a nap, because I will never wake up again. I close my eyes and feel the world darken and fade.

Chapter 7: Peter

We came back to town for the first time in a year where we had left Mom to escape the yellow fever. As we rolled into town, I didn’t recognize anything. It looked like all the buildings had been robbed. There are piles of rotten bodies stacked on top of each other and the smell of them is very strong. As I looked at all the shops and houses, I notice that some have wood covering the windows and doors. When my father, my two sisters and I reach our old house, and we go inside. There is a decomposing peach on the kitchen counter. The kitchen has been destroyed. The drawers have been flung open and our china is gone. It appears as if we have been robbed. When we go upstairs, we look all around for Mom. I feel tears start to trickle down my cheeks. In our parents room, where we expected to find Mom, no one’s there. On the bed, there is blood all over the sheets. Then Emma breaks the silence, “Someone must have collected all the rotting bodies!” As we look at the blood on the sheets, I realize that Mom had died and we were four family members who lost someone important because of Yellow Fever. I don’t think that I will ever forget my mom’s sacrifice.

EPILOGUE (2 years later): Emma

Without Mom, Dad is around a lot more. He makes sure to visit every three months. The days he is not here, our nanny takes care of us. Our nanny’s name is Isabel. Hailey is now fluent in French, and Spanish. She loves to cook too. Peter enjoys spending time with Dad and is starting school next year. And me? Well, I am now fluent in French, Spanish, and Latin. We all miss Mom, but this is what she would have wanted.

 

What Happened to the Candy Shop?

Once upon a time, there was a candy shop in Doll Town, France. And every night, all the dolls would wake up and walk to the candy store to buy candy. Until one night, the evil King Evil ordered his guards to destroy the candy store so all dolls could come to shops that only gave money to King Evil. And because of that, no doll would budge from their own yard. And because of that, the king then ordered his men to kill all dolls if they would not buy things from stores that gave money to the king. Finally, a new doll, named Joseph, came and took over the throne. And ever since, King Evil has never been seen and the candy shop got rebuilt.

Butterfly Madness

There once was a boy and his name was Sam. Sam was 10 years old. He had no brothers or sisters. He lived with his mom on a farm. They were poor. Sam was born in 1937. His father was killed in World War II.

Sam had no school. He only could talk to a cow. Cows were the only things living on the farm other than Sam and his mom.

One day, Sam could see a butterfly far away, so he told his mom.

His mom said, “Wow, we never see anything here!”

Sam went to see the butterfly. On the wings of the butterfly, he could see what looked like a map.

Sam said, “It must be some kind of pirates’ gold map!”

So he decided to follow it, and he took his cow and the butterfly. Sam didn’t have transportation, so he used his bike. When he got to his destination, he saw there was a big, dark cave in front of him. When he went inside, he saw there were some objects in there including some lights and digging tools. The butterfly map said walk 13 feet and dig three feet down. Five minutes later, he found a box so he decided to open it. Inside there was a whole lot of gold. He was so excited to show his mom.

When he got home, he showed his mom, so then they both left their farm and relocated. They released the butterfly and kept the cow and got a dog, and Sam got to go to school.

The end!!! (for now)

 

Piano Lessons

Once upon a time, there was a girl who started to have piano lessons. The girl’s name was Lucy. Lucy thought that she was horrible, but she was pretty good.

By the time she was ten years old, she was playing very hard piano pieces. Lucy was very impressed that she was playing hard pieces. Lucy just felt like she was getting better and better, and she became great at playing piano. She enjoyed playing “Jingle Bells” and “Deck the Halls.”

Her piano teacher’s name was Natalia. Lucy had blonde hair and liked to wear dresses. Natalia liked to wear jeans and T-shirts and had red hair.

Natalia always said, “Good job, Lucy.”

And Lucy said, “Thank you. But I think I am horrible.”

Then, Natalia said, “I signed you up for the school orchestra.”

“No, no, no, no, no, no,” Lucy said. “You signed me up?! You signed me up?! How come you didn’t ask me?”

Natalia said, “Because I knew you would be really good, and you are really good. Your first performance is in two weeks. You and the orchestra will be playing ‘Deck the Halls,’ so try to practice every day, okay?”

“Okay,” said Lucy.

Natalia said, “The orchestra needs you, okay?”

“Okay.” When she got backstage, Natalia said, “Congratulations!”

And Lucy said, “Thank you.”

Lucy felt very happy.

The performance was in the school’s auditorium. The auditorium was dark.

After the performance, Lucy and her family went back home. Lucy’s family said, “You did a fabulous job, Lucy.”

“Thank you,” said Lucy.

When Lucy and her family got home, it was eleven o’clock. When Lucy went to bed, the sky was very, very dark. It was past Lucy’s bedtime, and she was very tired. When Lucy got into her bed, she fell fast asleep.

The End.

Author’s Note: Take piano lessons. It is very fun.

One Day 3 Million Trillion People Died

One day, three million trillion people died. It happened when they went to rock climb El Capitan at Yosemite National Park. I was the person who cracked my head open and sliced my knees open. There was so much blood all over the mountain that we could not climb it. I also sliced my whole arm off, so then I went down in the storm with blood pouring. I was so scared when I went down. There was this guy who got his head cut off by a giant avalanche and other body parts sliced open.

Someone jumped off the top of the mountain and died. She was the best friend I ever had. Her name was Jackie, and the mountain had made her cuckoo-cuckoo. It made me the saddest person in the world. When I went to the hospital, I was hurt so badly that the doctor had to give me a robot arm. He told me to take it easy, but Jackie would want me to keep climbing because it was our favorite thing to do.

My next challenge was Mount Everest, so my group and I got on a plane to Asia to climb it. As we climbed the mountain, three people died with no peace, and I saw blood and only blood. Then I got hit by an avalanche and I got tumbled around a lot, but I escaped. When we hit camp, there was blood everywhere on the people and tents. The tents broke out of the snow because of the avalanche and got dragged away into the 30,000-foot-deep cracks. The group started screaming because there was so much blood, and some died. I was hurt badly but I could still climb the mountain.

When we got to the top, we could not breathe without oxygen tanks. I found out too late that the climbers had gone cuckoo-cuckoo and did not bring their tanks, so everyone else died, but not me. All of the people dying did not scare me, because I liked hurting myself. The plan was to go to Devil’s Tower in Wyoming next. So, I got a new group there. When we climbed we had to do the splits and it hurt, then everyone fell down and we just got so many scratches and people broke so many bones.

Then we went to Rushmore. I climbed it, but then fell off one of the faces to the bottom and broke two legs and two arms, covered in blood. I badly wanted to go to the hospital so medics came to bring me to the hospital. When they checked me I also dented my head all the way. Then after that day in the hospital I started to pour blood out of my body, and bones were sticking out of my body. Then the bed was covered in blood everywhere. I was in so much pain that I fainted. Then I got out of bed, still pouring blood out of my body and bones sticking out of my body. So we had to fix them up so I could climb the next mountain, so my doctor fixed them up so I could climb the next mountain.

The next mountain I wanted to climb was Death Wall. It is 5,000 feet above the ground. It was so snowy and we couldn’t climb it with rope. So we went up by bouldering the mountain. It was dangerous because if we fell, we would kill ourselves. There was a giant avalanche, and three million people tumbled down to the bottom of the Death Wall. They were bloody and dead. I felt really sad that everybody had died, but I earned $34,343,434,343,434 for risking my life. The guy who gave us money was a soldier. He gave away his money because he was cuckoo, but he didn’t have any more money so he went back to war and shot a lot of people.

I bought the biggest resort ever with the money. It was the world’s most boring place. I missed climbing mountains, so I decided to go join the soldier in war to help him fight and win the war against Argentina. Our countries were fighting because we hated each other and liked to fight.

In the war against Argentina, the other side had much better weapons. I did not have a gun, and I only had knife. I asked the soldier, “What should we do? Maybe we should not fight and just go.” Just then, the soldier got a rock stuck in his neck and stomach so he died cause he could not breathe.

Now I had to say something else to him. “I hate you!” I hated him because we wouldn’t win the war, and I wouldn’t get enough money.

I went home after the war. I couldn’t climb mountains any more because I got sick. I wanted to die like crazy because my life was so bad since I couldn’t climb anymore. One day I started to bleed when my robot arm fell off, broke, and shattered all over the floor. My bone was sticking out, and blood started to pour out. My bones cracked into pieces and I started to choke like crazy. I was paralyzed and I knew I was dying.

My ghost couldn’t remember anything from my life, so it started saying bad words. But then I saw Jackie and I started to remember when I climbed all my mountains. I finally felt happy.

My Move

   

*Diary! Secret! Mia’s diary!*

Chapter 1: We are Packing

I was sewing in my room. My walls were pink with black and white polka-dots. The curtains in my room were pink with black and white polka-dots too. The covers of my bed were green with orange polka-dots. I was sewing a scarf. I stopped sewing and went to check what Lexi was doing. Lexi was sewing mittens.

“For whom are these mittens?” I asked.

“For me,” Lexi said. “Who did you think I was sewing it for?”

“Don’t know,” I replied.

“Anyway, what were you doing?”

“I was sewing a scarf,” I told Lexi.

“For who?

“For Kira,” I answered.

“Well, okay, get out of my room,” Lexi said. “I’m not mad, but I want my privacy!”

“Don’t be so mean,” I said jokingly as I was going out of Lexi’s room.

I went back to sewing my scarf. My scarf was blue, pink, and yellow. I kept on sewing for half an hour, and finally I was done with the scarf. I went out of the house to give the scarf to Kira. Just then, I remembered that I wanted to wrap it in wrapping paper.

When I went to get wrapping paper, Mom said, “Slow down, girl, where are you going?”

“To get wrapping paper,” I replied.

“For what?” my mom asked.

“For a scarf,” I replied.

“Where did you get a scarf, and who is that scarf for?”

“I sewed a scarf, and the scarf is for Kira.”

“Wait, I want to tell you some news,” my mom said with a smile on her face. “And also call Lexi and Dad to the living room.”

“Fine,” I said.

I was really happy we’d have family news again. Family news was always something good. Like, for example, one time, it was that Grandma Emma was in town, or that we were invited to a birthday party. I skipped happily to Lexi’s room, and told her to go to the living room. Lexi went straight to the living room. I skipped to my dad’s room, and told Dad to go to the living room. Soon, my family was all settled in the living room.

“Lexi and Mia, Dad and I have some news for you,” Mom said.

“What news? What news?” Lexi asked, really happy.

“We… we are going to move!”

“Move? Move… where?” said Lexi. Her voice wasn’t as happy as it had been.

“To New Jersey,” Mom replied.

“Is Kira going to move?” I wondered out loud.

“No, she’s not.”

“Then I’m not going to move!” I yelled.

“Is my best friend going to move?” asked Lexi.

“Did you forget your best friend’s name?”

“No,” Lexi answered. “Her name is Lily. And if Lily’s not going to move, then I’m not going to move.”

“Yes, you are going to move,” said Dad calmly.

“Are we just going to move for fun, or is it because Mom is gonna open a store?” I said.

“Not exactly. Mom’s going to open a new store and my work has a new location,” Dad explained to Lexi and me.

“BUT WE CAN’T MOVE! I’M NOT GOING TO LEAVE KIRA!” I cried.

“Yeah, we can’t move,” Lexi said. I was sure Lexi was on my side.

“But we are going to move,” Mom and Dad said at the same time.

“So I have to give the scarf to Kira right now, right?” I asked Mom.

“Right,” Mom said. “Well, wrong,” Mom corrected herself. “She can visit you and — ”

I interrupted my mom. “It’s a long ride to New Jersey, right?”

“Yes,” my dad answered.

“So, we’re going to end up not visiting each other, right?” I asked.

“We are going to visit Kira, just not so much,” Dad said.

“Is not so much once a week?”
“No,” Dad said. “Not so much means once every two months.”

“No! I have to see her at least once every two weeks!”

“You can use Facetime,” Dad suggested.

“Does she have Facetime?” I asked.

“Yes,” Dad answered.

“Yes,” Mom said, “we Facetimed Kira’s mom.”

“You sure?” I asked.

“I’m sure,” Mom and Dad said at the same time.

“Well, anyway, I got some boxes. Go pack your things,” Mom said. “We leave in two days.”

“Can we leave in three days?” I asked.

“Well… I’ll think about that,” Mom answered, giving Dad a look. “But let me get the boxes first.”

I whispered something to Lexi.

“Lexi, on one two three, let’s chant ‘we’re not moving!’”

Lexi nodded her head.

“One, two, three!”

Lexi and I began chanting, “We’re not moving! We’re not moving! We’re not moving!”

“Yes we are! Yes we are!” Mom began chanting. She motioned for dad to chant with her.

Mom and Dad began to chant, “We are moving! We are moving! We are moving!” Soon the whole family was chanting. Lexi and I were chanting, “We’re not moving! We’re not moving! We’re not moving!” and Mom and Dad were chanting, “We are moving! We are moving! We are moving!”

Soon Mom started chanting:

“Let’s be quiet! Let’s be quiet!”

The Kitaigorodsky family quieted down.

“Start packing already,” Mom suggested to Lexi and me.

“But we don’t have any of the boxes,” Lexi and I complained.

“Oh, I forgot about them. Let me go get some,” Mom said with a sigh. Then she added, “It’s hard to live here with you and Mia screaming that you’re not going to move. We’ll just move, and everything is going to be okay.”

 

Chapter 2: Moving Party

I forgot all about my scarf! I had to tell Kira that I was moving, and I could not move because I could not leave Kira at New York when I’m in New Jersey. I had to think of a way, and fast, to convince my mother and father that we could not move to New Jersey. I had to think fast, but I couldn’t make up at least one lame idea. I went over to Lexi’s room. Maybe she’d have an idea. I asked Lexi, “What are you doing?”

“What do you think?” Lexi answered.

“Doing nothing,” I answered.

“Well, what are you doing?”

“I was thinking of an idea to convince mom that we could not move,” I said.

“That’s exactly what I was doing!” Lexi seemed surprised.

“Have you thought of anything?” I asked Lexi. “Do you even have one lame idea? Why are you so quiet?”

“Nope, nope, and I’m not quiet.”

“Well, now you’re not, but you were.”

“Can we change the subject?” Lexi asked.

“To what?”

“To getting out of my room.”

“Don’t be so mad at me, girl!”

“I’m not mad! I just need my privacy.”

“Girls, are you packing?” Mom called from the kitchen.

“Um, we’re starting to pack,” I said as I was running into my room. But then I added, “I HAVE NO BOXES!”

“Go get some in the kitchen, Mia,” Mom yelled.

“Okay, okay,” I said as I as was rushing from my room to the kitchen to get some boxes. “You think I can pack all my stuff by myself?”

“Yes,” Mom said.

“Well, I need your help.”

“Okay, okay. Just put your boxes in your room, and I’ll pack them when you’re sleeping or tomorrow morning.”

I ran back to my room with boxes and put them right next to my bed.

“Now what should I do?” I called from my room.

“Now you should get your pajamas, brush your teeth and go to sleep,” Mom said.

“What time is it?” I called.

“8:30.”

“But my bedtime is at 10:00.”

“You know how long you brush your teeth.

“Oh fine.” I quickly changed into pajamas and rushed to the bathroom. There was a clock in the bathroom. I looked at it. It was already 8:45. I started brushing my teeth. Brush brush brush. I thought this was the shortest time I had brushed my teeth! But when I was done, I looked at the clock and it was 9:45. I had taken a whole hour to brush my teeth. Usually, I only took half a hour. This was a record for me! Actually, two records. One record was that I brushed my teeth one hour, not half an hour. And I never make such a big mistake like this. That was already two records! I rushed to the bedroom and plopped on my bed. Then I looked at the clock. it was still 9:45. I had a lot, well, not a lot, of time to read in my bed.

When it was 10:00, my mom called from the kitchen, “Turn the light off!”

“Okay, Mom.” I quickly looked at what page I was on, put my bookmark in, put my book away, and turned off the light.

The next morning, when I woke up, I looked at my bedroom. It was empty, except for boxes. I looked in drawers, but in only one of my drawers, I found some clothes. I quickly put the clothes on, and looked around. Boxes, boxes, and boxes. Boxes, boxes, and boxes. It was like I was a robber, and lots of police officers were surrounding me. I quickly stepped over all of the boxes (a.k.a. police officers). I looked in the boxes, and the boxes were actually, well, huge! Bigger than they were yesterday.

Suddenly the phone rang. I dashed to the kitchen with all my might, and right in time I got the phone. It was from Kira. She had already found out that I was moving from her parents. I didn’t know how they found out, so I asked my parents. You know what they answered? They answered that when they were Facetiming Kira’s mom, they told her. And Kira’s mom told Kira. And then Kira suggested a moving party! I was going to a moving party at Kira’s house! It was just going to be, me, Kira, and her mom. And it was going to start now. I went to Kira’s house and knocked on the door. Kira answered it.

“Welcome to your moving party!” she said.

I looked around her house. It was all decorated with pink, with black and white polka dots, just like my room is! I hugged Kira and said, “I DON’T WANT TO MOVE!”

“If I were you, I wouldn’t want to move either,” Kira said, and then added, “and I mean it.”

“Tell that to my parents,” I suggested to Kira.

“What’s your parents phone number?” Kira asked.

“Why are you asking?” I asked Kira.

“‘Cause then I can call them now,” explained Kira.

“Can’t you just walk to my house?” I asked Kira.

“Fine, I’ll tell your parents after your moving party!”

“Oh yeah, let’s start the moving party!”

I walked into Kira’s house and saw all my friends from school. I was surprised that all of them were here! Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Areile, Kelly, Talia, Tara, and Nancy. I ran to Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Areile, Kelly, Talia, Tara, and Nancy to hug all of them. After all, they were all my friends. Kira ran to get something. She came back with a blindfold. She tied it around my eyes. She led me into the dining room and then she took my blindfold off. On the dining room table was a big chocolate cake and in the middle it said with icing: We’ll miss you, Mia! All around the cake were ten cupcakes. One for each of us. Also in the middle of the cake it said:

Mia is nice

Inspiring

Amazing

“Thank you so much!” I yelled with all my might.

We all sat down and I found nine presents under the table. The first one I picked up was from Pamela. I unwrapped it, and inside was six sets of nail polish. There were the colors of the rainbow in each set. “Thank you so much!” I said to Pamela. “My nails will always be painted no matter what.” Next I grabbed Kelly’s present. I unwrapped it. Inside were two twin dolls! “I love them. They’re so cute!” I told Kelly. Next, I grabbed Mallory’s present. It was a picture of Rachel, Pamela, Mallory, Ariele, Talia, Nancy, Kira, Tara, Kelly, and a picture of just me. Next, I grabbed Ariele’s present. It was a gift card to Toys R Us. Ariele told me that inside there was $150. “Oh my gosh! That’s a lot of money! Thank you so much,” I told Ariele. “Now my parents won’t have to spend money. Next I took out Nancy’s present. It was a book and a diary with a pen. I tried to open the diary. I could not. “How do you open this diary?” I asked.

“There’s a password,” Nancy answered.

“What’s the password?” I asked.

“Mia,” Nancy answered. I typed the password Mia, and then I tried to open the diary. It opened! And then I could change the password to whatever I wanted. This was amazing! No one could look in my diary. Also, there was a book. it was Wonder by R.J. Palacio. Next, I opened Tara’s present. It was a cookbook, and things for me to sew. The cookbook was called Cookbook of the Year. I looked at  all the recipes. Amazing! There were recipes for cupcakes and cakes and cookies. Suddenly I got an idea! I could start a cupcake club in New Jersey with my new friends. If I got any friends, that is. We could bake cupcakes for people and get paid for that. They could be $5 a cupcake. So if someone wanted five cupcakes from us, they would pay $25.

Next, I saw two presents left. I picked them up at the same time. I unwrapped them at the same time. One of them was from Rachel, and it was a laptop. One of them was from Talia, and it was earrings, necklaces, and bracelets. I ran to Kira’s room to put on the earrings, necklaces, and bracelets. I came back with the earrings on my ears, the necklaces on my neck, and the bracelets on my wrists. Everyone stared at me with OMG eyes. I stared at them.

“What?” I asked them.Their mouths just dropped open. No one said a word.

”What?” I repeated.No one said a word. I ran into Kira’s room and looked at myself. Oh! I laughed. I was just so, so pretty!!! Then I came back and quickly logged into my laptop. I quickly downloaded things on my laptop. We started playing games on my laptop. Then it was time to eat. Kira’s mom came into the room, and sliced the cake into ten parts. She gave a piece to each of us. The cake was awesome. It was chocolate and vanilla cake, and the icing was half chocolate and half vanilla too. It was yummy! Delicious! I could eat this cake forever. I told Kira’s mom that. And then in my new cookbook, she found the recipe for that cake. it was called “Chocolate Vanilla Cake.” That was even better! I could eat that anywhere. Mom could just bake it, and then tada! We could have it. And I could have this cake for my birthday party. Awesome and amazing!

Then parents started to come to pick their children up. Before they even came into the house, I motioned for all of my friends, including Kira, to come into Kira’s room with me. I wanted to tell them something, and that had to be private without anyone sticking their nose into my business. When we were all in the room with the door closed, and I told them all how I felt.

“I feel very sad that I have to leave you, and I feel nervous that I have to go to a new school, and that I won’t get any new friends,” I said. “I don’t want to move. And I want you all to know that –– I will miss you all the same amount.” I motioned to all of them that I was done talking. We all went out of the room.

While we were going out of the room, Tara said, “Everything will be okay and we can Facetime each other, and I’m sure you’ll find new friends because this is your second time moving.”

“But this is different. The first time I moved, it was from Queens to Staten Island. That was just different boroughs. But I’m going to move to a different state. That’s way farther. And we’re gonna end up never ever visiting each other.”

Suddenly Tara’s mom told her that she had to leave this second because her sister had a ballet lesson. Tara hugged me and said, “Don’t worry. We’ll at least Facetime each other, and I think we’re going to visit each other.”

Tara hugged me, and I hugged her again. Then Tara and her mom left. In five minutes, Mallory’s parents appeared. We hugged each other, and Mallory said, “Don’t worry, I’m sure you’ll find friends, and even if you don’t, we can Facetime each other and visit.”

“I don’t know about that visiting part,” I said to Mallory. “It’s a long way from New York to New Jersey, or New Jersey to New York.”

“But anyway we will get to Facetime each other.”

“Are you sure you have Facetime?” I asked Mallory.

“I’m sure.”

“You sure?” I asked Mallory, because maybe she made a mistake.

“I’m sure,” Mallory said to me once again.

“Triple sure?” I asked Mallory.

“Triple sure,” Mallory said.

“Then, bye,” I said and then added, “I’ll miss you sooo much!”

“i’ll miss you even more than you’ll miss me,” Mallory said.

“Nuh-uh. I’ll miss you more, and it’ll be more harder for me because I have to go to a new school find new friends, and I have to leave. You just have to let me leave, and you can just keep playing with our other friends. You don’t have to do anything! You don’t have to worry, there’s no nerves for you!”

“Do we have Facetime, mom?” Mallory asked her mom.

“Of course,” Mallory’s mom answered Mallory.

“Gygygaga” Mallory’s little sister said.

“So cute,” I said to Mallory.

“You think so?” Mallory said. “Spend a week with her. Then you’ll find out.”

“I’m not going for that,” I said.

“There you go. You proved my point,” Mallory said. “You don’t want to live with her.”

“We have to go!” Mallory’s mom said.

“Gygygaga,” Mallory’s little sister said.

“Goodbye,” I said to Mallory. Mallory and I hugged again. Then she left. Everyone but Rachel and Talia left because their parents had the wrong time so we played some games until they left. Then it was just me and Kira. Me and Kira talked a little bit and played some games. Then, I left.

I looked at the time when I came home. It was 3:30 p.m. When I came home, I told Mom that my moving party wasn’t a moving party. it was a amazing moving party. And that was true.

 

Chapter 3: Texting in the Car to New Jersey

I was riding in the car to New Jersey. I didn’t know what to do. I’d already been in the car a half an hour, and the ride to New Jersey was two hours. A whole two hours and I couldn’t do anything! I took out my phone and started texting Kira.

MK: Riding in the car to New Jersey.

KM: What do u see around u?

MK: Nothing. :(

KM: What r u doing?

MK: Riding in the car to NJ.

MK: What r u doing?

KM:Texting u.

MK: What were u doing b4 u started texting me?

KM: Homework.

“Uhhh! This so boring! Am going to ride in the car for two hours doing nothing?” Lexi yelled. I ignored her. I kept on texting Kira.

MK: :p  

KM: For what are u sticking out ur tongue?

MK: U still have to do HW, and I’m riding in a car.

KM: I’m giving u a look through the phone. :/

MK: Well I’m giving u a look through the phone!

KM: I see u have less nerves about the move now. :)  

MK: No I don’t!

MK: I feel WAY more nervous because I know there’s no chance I’m NOT moving now.

KM: Look I know u’ll find a new friend.

KM: U’ll be happy with ur new school, and it’ll be like u never moved.

KM: U’ll just have no me, and new friends!

KM: The first time u moved here, u told us how nervous u were to move.

KM: But u found us! it’ll be the same adventure like last time.

MK: But this is different!

MK: I was moving from a different borough.

MK: Now I’m moving to a different STATE.

KM: Wait, what’s a borough???

MK: it’s like Manhattan, Queens, Bronx, Brooklyn, and Staten island.

KM: Oh. Wait, then what’s a state??

MK: A state is NY, NJ, illinois, MA, and so on.

KM: Oh. Kk.

MK: So continuing.

MK: I’m moving further than I was this is totally different and it’s a two hour ride and we’re never EVER going to see each other again.

KM: I think we should end texting.

KM: I see ur getting upset, and I have to finish my HW

MK: Maybe we can text again soon? :)

“We’re here!” Dad said.

 

Chapter 4: The House

Mom had told me that she was going to unpack for me while I was sleeping. I had agreed, because it was good that I didn’t have to unpack. That would be hard. I wouldn’t had known what to put where, and it would take forever. But Mom seems to take only a minute or five when unpacking the family stuff. I looked in all my new drawers and everything. The room was completely empty. It was kind of like I was in jail, because in jail the person gets barely any stuff, and that’s it. There was nothing on the walls, just plain white. I had to remember to paint my room. Suddenly, I felt so sleepy. I lay on the bed.

That was a good nap. I looked all around my room.The walls were pink with black polka-dots. Everything was like my old room! Just my covers weren’t green and orange with green polka-dots. Wait a sec. This wasn’t my room. This was… Mom and Dad’s room. I went into my room. The walls were pink with white and black polka-dots and so were my curtains! Just like my old room! The covers of my bed were green with orange polka-dots. Mom and Dad and maybe Lexi had carried me from my room to Mom and Dad’s room! I took out my phone. I started texting Kira.This is how it went:

MK: at New Jersey

KM: When did u arrive?

MK: 10 minutes ago.                  

KM: exactly 10 minutes ago?

MK: About 10 minutes ago.

KM: U r a weirdo

MK: meanie!

KM: excuse me

MK: just joking

KM: I knew that

KM: u think that I didn’t know that

MK: I knew u knew that

MK: Whatever

MK: C u soon

KM: I want to keep on texting!

MK: fine we’ll say some more words and then we’re done talking

KM: do u not want to be my best friend anymore?

KM: we used to be twinsies.

MK: I want to be your best friend. Wait. let me correct that. I NEED to be your best friend. NEED.NEED.NEED.NEED.NEED.

KM: doesn’t look like it

MK: looks like it and I know it’s true

KM: o well. having fun in New Jersey?

MK: BORiNG

KM: what’s so boring

MK: well I don’t know a lot about this place. By the way, this looks basically like my old home

KM: o well.doing anything

MK: No

KM: I think it’s time that we should stop texting

MK: I think so to.

 

Hmmm. I think I should probably go out and try to make a new friend.

To be continued…

A Second Chance

 

a second chance pic1
Chapter 1: First Day

On her first day of tryouts, she got her gymnastics suit and her backpack and went on a plane. The plane was two hours. She was at the very back and there wasn’t anyone else next to her. She was feeling shy because it was her first day of gymnastics tryouts. She was wondering if she would get into the Olympics.

The teacher had said to them, “If you guys aren’t friends, I’ll kick you off the team.” Since it was a long time after the teacher said that, Maddie was thinking of Chelsea and maybe her other friends when Chelsea took the bus. Chelsea lived in Florida and Maddie lived in New York. When Maddie got out of the plane she took the bus. When she went to gymnastics, she saw Chelsea. She was shocked because Maddie and Chelsea actually weren’t friends, so she was extra shocked. Then they got teams, and Maddie and Chelsea didn’t have a team to go in, so they had to make their own group. But they barely got along. They kept saying mean things about each other’s ideas for the competition and they both wanted to win for the competition. So, they said sorry for real this time, because the wanted to win to go to the competition.

Then the coach came over and said, “Ready to start?” They both said yes and began. They worked on the floor and did the hardest stuff, because they wanted to go to the hard squad. They were glad that they were friends; it was better than just complaining. The only problem was that the other team was better than their group. They would never ever win, so they were really sad. They wished they would win but that would never happen. Well, maybe, but that would just be a dream.

Chelsea said, “What should we do about it?”

Maddie said, “Let’s both come up with an idea.”

The teacher said, “Come up with an idea, girls, quick! Before time is up and we practice.”

Chelsea said, “Quick, come up with an idea!”

Maddie said, “No, you are the one who comes up ideas. And I do it and you see if it’s right.”

Then Chelsea said, “Okay, I don’t want us to argue again. So, we should do what you say. You should do a handstand and a forward roll.”

Maddie tried to do it, but she kept on falling. They decided to switch places and Maddie had a good idea. She did a cartwheel, two back handsprings, and a fold-twist in the air. Chelsea did it and they both thought that they were going to get into the Olympics, and that they were better than the other teams. So, they kept on doing it over and over again until it was time for them to come up with a new idea and add it together.

Chelsea decided to do her routine from the last time she did gymnastics. They put it together and it worked out really well. Then, it was time for them to go home. Maddie called her mom and said, “Can we please have a sleepover with Chelsea? We need to practice our routine.”

He mom said, “Sure, just meet you tomorrow night.”
a second chance 2
Chelsea and Maddie went to the backyard of Chelsea’s home and practiced. Then they found out that the Olympics were in four days and they wanted to practice; but first they thought about each other and they thought it was nice to be friends. Then they hugged each other and then they went to work. They were really rushed so they both did the routine and they were so happy that they forgot when they were mean to each other. Then it was time for them to go to gymnastics and then they went and kept on practicing. Then it was time to go home and Maddie went home. Then four days later it was the Olympics day and they had to do the routine, and after the teams did theirs they found out that they won. Yay! Then the next day they went and the team was much harder so they worked their butts off. The teacher named Ella was so nice. Then they just found out that Chelsea’s mom is having a baby, so Chelsea had to sleep with the group and Maddie wanted to join. So the next night they went to the cabin and went to sleep. Then in the morning the teacher woke them up, except Chelsea and Maddie, because they were from her group and they needed sleep.

Then the teacher woke them up and they got dressed up and they went to work. Then they did hard things (well, kind of). Then they found out that the country they were in would have the Olympics in five days. So they really needed to get to work.

Then they picked a song called “Shake it Off” for the tryouts .

Chapter 2: Getting Ready for the Olympics

a second chance 3

Then they had lunch and they ate an apple and other great foods. Then it was time to do their gymnastics work. They had a hard time because they got it done and they were bored while they were waiting for others to finish their routines. Then it was time to do gymnastics. They did easy things like cartwheels. Then, it was time for lunch and they forgot their lunch boxes, so the teacher gave them lunch from the restaurant the teacher went to last night. They had pasta but it wasn’t as good as their mom’s. Then they went to sleep.The next morning, they practiced a lot.

Chelsea said, “Let’s do new things!”

Maddie said, “Okay.”

Then it was the day of the Olympics and they were doing the first competition. If Chelsea and Maddie won the competition they would win $1,000 and they would split it, $500 and $500. But, they wouldn’t be in the real Olympics — that happens once in awhile in that country. The next year, the Olympics would come. They almost didn’t win when Maddie was about to fall. Maddie felt disappointed for herself and for Chelsea. She was feeling that no one else would want to be her partner for the next competition. Her knees were shaking, but she didn’t fall and she was imagining her knees were shaking. Then, she hears Chelsea’s baby sister yelling and it wakes up her brain and she’s able to finish her routine. And they did their thing and they were on tv and they won. Yay! Then they got on the final team their moms and dads were watching. Then Chelsea saw her old friend.

Chelsea said, “Hi.”

Her old friend Zoe said, “I thought you did not like Maddie.”

Chelsea said, “Now I am her friend.”

Zoe said, “Well, now I am not your friend anymore.”

Chelsea said, “Why?”

Zoe said, “Well, I hate Maddie.”

But Chelsea did not care because she liked Maddie better than Zoe. The very next day, Chelsea went to Maddie’s house for a sleepover and they were doing their routine. They were doing a back handspring into a split and then a cartwheel. They wanted to go to sleep because it was getting late. The very next day they took a cab to the gymnastics place. They did their routine. Maddie said, “We should add more things to our routine.”

Chelsea said, “Good idea, but what should we add to our routine?”

Maddie said, “We should do bars.”

Chelsea said, “Good idea.”

“Thanks,” said Maddie. And then they tried it out and did a flip on to the bars and swung. But they didn’t like it: it was too short. Instead, they used the beam and did a dismount.

Chapter 3: Working on New Things

It was easy so they did it just fine. Then Chelsea went to Maddie’s house.  And they wanted to practice so they did it and they did it over and over again. Then it was time to go to bed but they could not go to sleep.

The very next day the teacher said, “We will be moving to a new class for the tryout team,” and they did. They got coach Mia. She is so nice; everybody likes her so she must be good.

The coach said to Chelsea and Maddie, “You are on the tryout Olympics.” Then it was time to practice, but they were bored.

They came up with a new idea. They were doing handstands into a roll. It was really fun, so they did that. Then it was time to have lunch, so they had a sandwich and an apple.

They had to eat healthy things because it makes you stronger. Then it was time for them to go home. So they went home together and they worked on a dance that was good. Then they had sweet potatoes for dinner. It was so yummy that they even had seconds. Then they went to bed and they fell right asleep. They were so sleepy. The next day was the competition, so they hurried to the gymnastics place and they hurried to change. They went to their teacher and they practiced. It was related to the Olympics. They forgot the competition was on Sunday and it was Monday, so they had to wait another week. Then they went to practice. And they added more to their routine.

Maddie said, “We should do a back handspring into a flip into a split.” That was the best idea she ever had.

Chelsea said, “Sure.” And they did the whole thing. Then they went home and they did their best to do well in the competition. Then they ate dinner. They had soup; it was yummy (Maddie’s mom is a great cook).

Before they went to bed, Zoe came in and said, “Sorry.”

Chelsea said, “It is okay.”

And then Zoe said, “Sorry,” to Maddie.

She said, “It is okay,” and they all hugged. Then they all practiced and they all went to sleep the very next day.

They all went to the gymnastics place and they said hi to the teacher and they went to work. They had to practice for the show but first they ate some cereal and then they went to work. After they were done they all chatted.

Maddie said, “I’m glad we’re friends,” to Zoe.

Zoe said, “Me too. I was wrong about you; you are nice.”

Chapter 4: Shopping

a second chance 4

Then they went to a shop to buy new phones. Maddie got a blue one, Zoe got a yellow one, and Chelsea had a red one. Then they went to buy some new clothes. They got the same things: green shorts and a black tank top. It looked great! Then they all went to Maddie’s house and they had a chance to go to the Olympics.

In the morning they went in the car and they drove to the gymnastics place: it was the day of the competition.

Then they changed and they did their dance and they went to do the best dance ever. When they were done, they won! They were the best ever. Then they all had treats: they had cupcakes and cookies and other treats.

Then they all did a high five. And they all were the best gymnasts ever. 

second chance 5

The next day they all got their picture taken and they were famous.

 

The End
second chance 6
This is when she is at the play date. The other picture is when Addie asks her mom to go to Chelsea’s house.

Atlas

The storm was raging. My mother and father ran to the lifeboats but they realized something was wrong –– my sister and I weren’t there.

“The children!’ my mother yelled at my father, and he quickly ran below the decks to find us. But we weren’t anywhere near the ship. We were far, far away from the boat, in the ship’s safest lifeboat. A while later my mother had no choice but to leave my father below the decks. But when the ship’s crew was lowering the lifeboat into the water, the ropes snapped in mid air and my mother’s lifeboat hurtled downwards towards the water.

“Mom!” yelled my sister. As the lifeboat went on its journey to find another ship that could bring us to New York my sister and I were crying over the deaths of our parents. A few hours later we safely boarded the Mississippi and heading toward Albany, New York.

Once we landed in New York, the Mississippi’s crew sent my sister and me to the nearest orphanage, but almost everything in it was so so old and dusty –– even the food! The only good part was the kids who lived in the orphanage they were all very very nice. But a few months later my sister and I could not stand the bad conditions of the orphanage so we packed all of our stuff, said goodbye to our friends, and left.

But that was about two years ago. Now we are working as doctors and scientists for the Atlas corporation. When we came to New York, we were wandering around the city until an undercover Atlas spy found us and took us to the main headquarters of Atlas. So far we have made dozens of grenades that unleash a deadly type of poison when they explode. We have also cured thousands of soldiers from wounds, poisons, and a deadly type of illness that will burn you alive. Ten years later, Atlas asked me to join the spies that go around bustling cities trying to find homeless children about at least ten years old, and I said yes. So my sister became a doctor, and I became a spy.

I still remember the first kid that I found on the streets. His name was Edward and he was fourteen years old. He started to live on the streets when he was ten years old because his parents died from a fire. It had started because their neighbor was cooking and he “accidently” lit a napkin on fire and dropped it into the pan that he was cooking with. It just so happened that there was oil in the pan. So yeah, his whole apartment exploded. So I brought Edward back to Atlas headquarters and the commanders trained him to be a soldier.

A few months later, I became a soldier and so did Edward. Now Edward and I are storming into battle at the Vespers main headquarters.

“Charge!” my general yelled at us. So we all charged into battle, thirsty for blood. In the next hour, bullets flew, men fell, and machinery exploded.

When we got back to base, my general quickly changed into his kitty pajamas and went to sleep. A few minutes later a group of Atlas soldiers snuck into the general’s bedroom. Inside the room, there were lots and lots of generals but their general was very conspicuous because of his pink kitty pajamas.

Suddenly all the generals inside the room woke up and started to yell, “!@#$%^&*”

Finally, when the founder of the Atlas calmed all the generals down, he told the soldiers very sternly that they should never ever sneak into the general’s room. Their punishment was to bathe in hot oil every day for every week of every month of every year for the rest of their lives. Edward and I both think the punishment was unfair but the general refused to release them.

A few days later my unit rolled into action at Bunker Hill. The first tent that my unit set up was the arsenal. Inside there were hundreds and hundreds of firearms. The next day, Edward, some of our fellow soldiers, and I boarded a battleship that took off towards the Atlas fleet. When we finally got onto the ship, we all took our positions. I probably got the most exciting job on the boat. I got to fire the gun! When we lost sight of Bunker Hill, we turned on the radar and the navigation device so we could see if any enemy ships were coming and where we were going.

A few hours later, our captain told us some big news. There was a whole fleet of enemy ships headed towards us. He told us to be ready if they suddenly attacked. When we could actually see the enemy fleet, we all opened fire. A few minutes later, we were surrounded by enemy ships and they blew us up. Edward and I were the only two crew members that survived.

By the time we spotted the island we were dead from thirst and water. We boarded the island and right away felt like it was better to die than to live. So right away we got out our army knives and tried to build a shelter so we could a least have a place to live in. By the end of the day, Edward and I had built the most magnificent shelter ever! (It was probably a lot better than Brian Robinson’s shelter.)

I told Edward to go and try to find some food, so he did. When Edward came back, I had already made the fire and was ready to cook the food. But when he came back he had some new cuts and also a huge claw mark on the side of his head. I asked him what happened, and he told me he had angered a huge chicken and it tried to kill him. Edward used his years of military training to kill the huge chicken. So after he told me the whole story he asked me to go with him to where he had killed the chicken so I could help him drag the chicken back to the shelter so we would have something to eat that night.

When we finally got back to the camp, the fire had already gone out so I had to make another fire which was pretty easy to make since I got first place in survival camp when I was fifteen years old. After we finished our magnificent meal, I told Edward to go to sleep while I tried to fix the radio transmitter and tried to call for help.

A few hours later, Edward woke and told me to go to sleep for a while. When I said no, he took the transmitter and started to do what I had done a few hours ago when he went to sleep. After a few minutes, I was so tired, I fell off the rock, hit my head on another rock, and blacked out. When I woke up, it was already morning and Edward was already back from the morning hunt with a bunch of wolves following him. Wait, what? A bunch of wolves!?

I asked Edward why he had adopted a bunch of wolves. Do you guys know what he said? He told me that when he was hunting, he heard the growls of the wolves and he seemed to understand what they were talking about.

In the morning, Edward confessed that the day before he had lied to me about the wolves. (Like I didn’t know that already.) He told me that the wolves had followed him back to camp because he had a hole in his bag of meat and the meat had dropped onto the ground. And then the wolves ate it and they followed him back to camp thinking they would get more food. But they didn’t, so they walked away.

In the morning, Edward’s loud cry woke me from my deep slumber. “Yay, yay, we’re saved, yay!!!”

I sat up and said, “Yo, keep it down, man.”

And he said, “But I need to signal that ship!!!” I took one look at the ship and wondered how Edward could be so stupid.

“It’s one of the Vespers’ ships!!!” I yelled at him. And then I saw her. Grandmama. “Stop it, Edward!!! That’s Grandmama’s ship!!!” I yelled at him. Then Grandmama turned her ship’s cannon toward our island and fired.

“Duck!” I screamed at Edward. He ducked and quickly fired back with one of the many coconut cannons that Edward and I had built. After a few seconds, I recovered from my shock and also started to fire back at Grandmama. Then I told Edward to stop firing because there was so much smoke we couldn’t aim correctly.

Five hours later, I said, “Hey yo, Edward, what do you want for dinner?”

And he said, “I’ll take some coconut water and that’s it.”

“Okay,” I replied.

In the morning old Grandmama ran out of ammo and ran to ask her fat son Samuel to deliver some ammo to her. While she was trying to radio Samuel, Edward and I took advantage of that and started to fire some coconuts at her ship, The Death Bed.

After a few minutes, Edward and I were looking at the ruins of old Grandmama’s ship The Death Bed, but I didn’t see that. With the last bits of her strength, she turned one of the ship’s last working cannons and fired at the island.

The next day, one of the Atlas ships found me and picked me up. When I got back to base, I learned that my sister had died of grief. Grandmama killed Edward when she fired the cannon in the last few moments in her life. My legs had been blown off in the explosion, so I couldn’t walk for the rest of my life. I hope I’ll be able to go for at least one more mission, but until then, Shadow Killer Out.

The Necklace Chase

It was eight o’clock at night when I realized that the necklace was missing, but nobody knew who could have taken it. Then I asked Sadie if she could help me find my necklace. Sadie told me to retrace my steps. That was when I realized a girl was looking at my necklace, so I took it off and gave it to her. I told Aliza that she could hold it but to give it back as soon as I was finished.

Sadie was watching this whole entire thing. Sadie saw Aliza running away with my necklace. In the bathroom, I could hear Sadie telling Aliza to stop running away with my necklace.

When I was finished with my business Sadie said, “Hurry Claire, we have to catch her!” Sadie and I started running after her.

Now we had to find Aliza!

“Where do we start, Claire?” Sadie asked me.

I said, “I was in the bathroom, how should I know?”

I said, “It’s raining. Maybe we can track her with her footsteps in the mud.”

“Good idea,” Sadie said.

“Hurry,” I said, “before her footprints wash away too.”

We were running in the rain hoping that the footprints will not wash away anytime soon.

Five minutes later…

“Sadie, do you see her footsteps?”

“No, I think we lost her!”

Now Sadie and I had to track her a different way. Sadie and I were looking for clues when suddenly we discovered that Aliza was a litterbug (yuck). Now that we knew Aliza was a litterbug, we were going track her with candy wrappers.

30 minutes later…

“Claire, I see Aliza. We’d better stay quiet so we can get her by surprise.” Sadie said.

“Okay, but how are you going to get your necklace back?”

The necklace was in Aliza’s pocket. Sadie’s idea was to throw a piece of candy so Aliza would bend down to pick it up and then the necklace would fall out of her pocket.

“Claire, do you have a piece of candy?” Sadie asked.

“Always!”

“Great can I have it … now?”

“Sadie right now is not a great time to eat candy!”

“It’s not for me. Just trust me, okay?”

“Fine.”

After Sadie threw the piece of candy, everything went as planned. I got my necklace back and found another one on the ground. I decided to keep it.                                                                                                                              

That was the biggest surprise of all. I would never have figured it out without Sadie’s help.

The Banana’s Life Change

Hello, my name is Banana, and this evening I was browsing the web on a website about trains. It is an amazing video game web. After that, I went into the bathroom to brush my banana peels. This was how I looked: I had really fluffy hair.

It was great to be a banana. I looked so beautiful… So I went to bed, and then I woke up. It was a really fast sleep. Bananas sleep really well. I looked in the kitchen to say “Good Banana Day’’ to my parents, but they were GONE!

This is how my parents usually looked:

They were two long bananas with furry lips and long hair they were hugging.

This was how they looked when they were gone:

They looked like NOTHING or ______. I was really sad.

Waaah!

But then a minute later the whole story zoomed right on my HEAD. I said, “Story, don’t zoom on my head!” And then I suddenly thought, I can go on a quest to find my parents.

I was going to have a super powerful spear and hair… hehe, AWESOME! So I took a stick from the garden and started training right away. I was swinging my stick at a wall, but then suddenly a massive lightning beam shot out of my body and vaporized the wall.

“WOW, that was new!” I shouted and vaporized another wall. “I am ready to fight anyone who stole my parents! They will get CHIP-CHOPPED TO A MILLION TINY LITTLE BABY PIECES BY MY SUPA BABY STICK!” I screamed extremely loudly. There was a strange creepy echo.

OH! I forgot to show you my stick. Here it is: it’s tiny and brown and little, and it looks like a baby little tree without the creepy eyes that glare at you and eat your soul. It destroys you and makes you die in less than two tiny little milliseconds. It makes you barf out yesterday’s breakfast (which was really yummy). Isn’t it AMAZING?! A second later I found out that the power wasn’t coming from the stick. It was coming from ME! That’s the last thing I remember before I fell asleep.

                                                              ***                                                                             
I woke up to the sound of grunting outside. It was like “GRAAA, GRAAA, GRAAA.” It was really annoying, ugh. Then I thought, All of that was a dream? But then I quickly flicked my arm, and a bunch of lightning flew right out. “YES, it isn’t a dream,” I said. Then I made my breakfast and ate it. This is how it looked: it had A LOT of amazing eggs and muscular pieces of bacon. Ooh, pretty good. My mom made it better. I was starting to miss her.

Then I went outside to check out the grunting noises. There was a massive donut eating my stick and saying, “BANANA WILL DIE! BANANA WILL DIE!” This is how it looked: it was really hairy and had FANGS!

It was REALLY CREEPY. He was also was holding a MASSIVE club. He was saying “HAHA, YOU HAVE COME TO FIGHT ME AND GET YOUR HEAD RIPPED OFF AND CHOPPED INTO TWO PIECES! I ALSO TOOK YOUR PARENTS!” in a really metallic voice.

I was OUTRAGED! I closed my eyes and then suddenly a plane just flew two meters by me. I looked down, and I noticed that I turned GIANT! And the donut still was pretty big. Then suddenly, the story zoomed right on my head. (Again, ugh.) So I thought, I am UNSTOPPABLE and I am going to get that evil, stupid, big, horrible, terrible, donut brat.

So I swung my big hand, and out flew twelve unstoppable blue lightning bolts. But the monster donut was quicker than he looked! He dodged the bolts and spat out fifty donut holes. I dodged and stepped on the donut monster. I squashed him, and then he turned into a thousand tiny donuts. The donuts jumped on me and bit me!  “MEAN TINY DONUTS!”

I summoned some lightning to take care of them (not in a good way), and they all got vaporized and turned to pink powder. And then I shrunk, and I was small again. “WEEE.” My parents were tied up to a tree. I went to them and broke the ropes. They hugged me, and we lived happily ever after.

Tim and Spud

When Tim looked back on it, he didn’t know when it started. Was it when Spud did the unspeakable, or was it when when his mother Leanne died seven years ago? No, he thought. It had started on his 12th birthday.

Sarah was in for the day. Sarah was his older sister, who was 18 and in college. Even Dad was in a good mood. Sarah had given him a scrapbook, and Dad was just cutting his cake (which was lemon, his favorite), when he paused.

“Dad, what’s wrong?” Tim asked.

“Sarah will you get the present.”

“What?”

“Oh, wait.”

Just then, Sarah walked out with the strangest dog Tim had ever seen. It was brown and gold-specked with a long pink tongue hanging out of its mouth.

“He’s all yours,” Tim’s dad said. Tim looked at the dog and it pounced on him.

 

********************************************************************************************************

Down, Spud!” Tim tried to pull his dog down. He sighed and gave up. Then, the ice cream came. Maggie O’Connor, the kid of the rich couple next door, was nice, but her parents spoiled her. She wasn’t that bratty, but her parents would do anything for her.  

Maggie taunted Spud with her ice cream. Then, he broke free of his leash and jumped on her. Now, Spud was a pouncy dog, but this was too much.

“The blood!” Tim’s dad yelled.

The hospital monitor bleeped. Tim stepped into the room. Maggie was lying on the bed, her blonde curls spread out. Tim wished that she would be okay and that her green eyes would open again.  

Her mother sat with her head in her hands while her father sat reading the Bible. No one looked up.

“Um… ” Tim began. “I’m sorry about Maggie.”

Mr. O’Connor looked up. “That is enough, Timothy,” he said.

“Okay, well, bye,” Tim said awkwardly. He went home.

“Oh no, oh no, oh no,” Dad said.

“What?” asked Tim.

“The O’Connors are filing a lawsuit against us. I don’t want to have to pay for this. We have to get out of the country, Tim.”

 

Chapter 2

 

Dad’s plan:

  • Cross the border to Mexico
  • If anyone finds out, go to Cuba
  • If anyone finds out, go south

 

Tim packed some clothes, a picture of his family, some school supplies, a flashlight, and three tubes of toothpaste.

Then they left with Spud, of course. They climbed into Dad’s gray Porsche, and Tim smelled his old home one last time. Tim clutched the photo and the car drove off.

They drove on into the sunset, never stopping. Dad drove all night, or at least Tim thought he did. He fell asleep against his best efforts at 9:45. When he woke up, the sky was brightening again. It was almost as if the sunset was sinking again. His dad threw something in the backseat.

“Um, what is this?” asked Tim. He read the label:

SUPA-Cinnamon! Cinnamon rolls: three per pack. Microwavable. SUPA_YUMMY!

EW! Tim thought. He tore it open and ate it because he was hungry. It did not taste good — at all. It probably would have tasted even worse when it was heated. He saved one for Dad and gave the other to Spud, who ate it hungrily. He stared ahead and took out his math book. He made a solemn promise in his head to do three hours of schoolwork every day, except for weekends, and got to work on fractions.

A few hours later, Tim said, “Dad, I’m hungry.”

“Wait until dinner. No lunch on the road. We’ve only got 13,489 more miles to go.”

Tim wasn’t very good at math, but he knew this would take a while.

 

The road was dull. It was hot, and Tim was bored. Three weeks had passed, Dad stopping at delis at 6:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Tim had been the proud digger of seven holes because of some bad sandwiches from delis.

Just then, they came to a big gate. A man was standing in front of it, looking bored. Dad drove up to him. To Tim, he hissed, “Say ‘YES!’” Tim had no idea what he was talking about. Dad handed the man two passports.

“Liam McKinley, history professor doing research on the social aspects on Mexicans?” he asked.

“Yes,” said Dad.

“Your son Adam McKinley is coming with you because his mother lives there?”

“Yes… ?” said Tim.

They passed.

“Could you have been more obvious?” Dad asked.

“Dad, what was that all about?”

“We did it. We’re in Mexico!”

They still had a while to go, and Dad stopped in a pub, promising he’d bring Tim back something.

Tim waited. At 1:55 a.m., Dad came.

“Dad!” said Tim, but stopped when he saw his dad. He was as drunk, but Tim did not know.

“Gotta go. Gave it away, stupid,” he slurred.

“Dad, you can’t drive.” Tim grabbed the keys, but his father grabbed them back. He looked at Tim with a fire in his eyes Tim had never seen before.

“GIVE THEM TO ME, YOU USELESS #%$@!” Tim leaned back, tears pricking his eyes.

He doesn’t mean it, Tim thought. But he wasn’t sure.

Dad drove a lurching five miles before he hit a sign and the car flipped over. Dad passed out, so drunk he didn’t even know what was going on. Tim helped flip back the car. No one was hurt. No one saw; no one was around for miles. Spud was in the grass. Tim knew what he had to do. He grabbed his dad’s phone out of his pocket. He went into contacts and saw the name Leanne next to a heart. Leanne was his mother’s name. Tim pressed Sarah, which was next to it. The phone rung. Please pick up, Tim thought. It rung again. Please, Sarah.

She picked it up and said, “Hello?”

“Sarah, it’s Tim. Dad is drunk, we’re in Mexico illegally, and the car is messed up. Come, Sarah, PLEASE come.”

“OH MY GOD, Tim, I had no idea. What town are you in?” Tim looked at the sign.

“El Diablo.”

“Ironic,” she said.

“I love you. Mom would never have wanted this.” The phone went dead. Tim slipped it back into his dad’s pocket and tried to think of a plan.

He didn’t need to. Dad was so hungover, they stayed in the car for two days, and then a taxi drove up. Sarah came out, Tim came out, and they hugged.

“Whassat? Dad said.

“Dad, we need to talk,” said Sarah.

“Tim, get in the car,” said Sarah. Tim got in the car and plugged in his iPod. He could still hear Dad and Sarah shouting at each other.

“HOW DARE YOU COME IN HERE INSULTING MY FAMILY?”
“HOW DARE YOU NOT TELL ME YOU WERE MOVING TO MEXICO?”
And on and on, just like that. Dad stomped off to the pub, and Sarah climbed into the car with Tim. Sarah took Tim’s hand.

“Timmy, how would you like to live with me?”

“You know, Tim, maybe you should, while I… get back on my feet,” TIm’s dad said.

They took a plane to Sarah’s house in California. Tim had convinced Sarah to let Spud come too.

“Well, we’re home,” said Sarah. “Here’s your room.”

Tim loved the blue room, which was perfect for a 12-year-old boy.

The school was also great. The kids were nice and they accepted him and Spud, who had mellowed down after seeing the neighbors’ dog, Felicia.

Maggie was fine, and so was her family. But one night, Tim couldn’t sleep. He went downstairs.

“Sarah,” he said.

She looked up. Her wispy blonde hair was in her face and her glasses were on the end of her nose. “Tim?”

“Is Dad okay?”

The words came tumbling out. It was not what Tim was going to say, but somehow he knew it was right.

“Oh, Tim,” said Sarah, hugging him. He hadn’t realized how stiff his body had been. “Dad is okay, he just needs to get a better life. He’s going somewhere where people will help him. I think he misses Mom.”

“I miss her too,” said Tim, “and I don’t even remember her.”

“I was only 11, but I miss her every day. But I see her in you, Tim, in your smile, in your laugh. Tim, Dad misses her, but it’s going to be ok. For all of us.” The siblings cried together until Sarah said, “I’m going to medical school to cure people with the disease Mom had.

Tim didn’t say anything, for he was asleep, and then Sarah lay down her head and slept with him.

Just a Girl, Part 1

Chapter 1: The Mechanic

Creak went the bulky android arm as I screwed it on.

“Here you go,” I said, handing an astounded old man back his newly-fixed android.

“Wow,” he said. “When old Darla broke, I never thought that she’d run again. Really,” he said, looking up at me with true happiness in his eyes. “Thank you, Julia”  

“No problem” I said, smiling.  The old man handed me 50 shonis, highly  overpaying me; but as I looked at him walking away with a bounce in his step, I thought I understood why.  Father had always told me, ever since I was a little girl, that being a mechanic is the best job you could ever have. You get to fix broken things and make people happy. Plus, it pays well. Father always got more than other mechanics even, because he was known throughout Newistonia  as being one of the best mechanics around. Back when Queen Maria still ruled, Dad would apparently sometimes go to the palace. But now that Queen Zarfina is in charge, everything’s different.

I straighten my long brown ponytail and put the CLOSED sign on the door of my small mechanic shop. I catch a glimpse of my bright green eyes in the glass and smile. According to Papa, my eyes are my best feature. I clamber into my hover. I turn it on and hear the familiar creak of the engine starting up. I pull back on the steer lever and slowly rise into the air. I love the feeling of flying above all the passersby without a care in the world. As I’m cruising along a memory floats back to me….

There you go,” Mom says. “Now, just put your arm on the lever.” I try, but let go of the startup drive in the process. The hover drops two feet in the air, but Mom swoops her strong arms behind me.

“You’re doing excellent,” she says, laughing. I smile as she carefully maneuvered our way down.

I frown and shake off the memory. Just after that fine spring day nine years ago when I was just nine, Mom had left to, “pursue her acting career.” Two weeks after that we received a sid link from the Speshona City Hospital, saying that Camilla Roberts had died of mental illness. We didn’t get any further information.

To get my mind off things I decide to send a sid link to Papa telling him I’m almost home. I’d already turned on my edonscreen when a maniac driver cuts me off. “$%&@#” I say and slam on the horn.

“Command unclear, Julia,” my edon, Ida, says.

“It wasn’t a command,” I say, rolling my eyes.

“Okay Julia” she says as I pull into the spot outside of our small town house.

I get out of my hover and lock the door. I walk up the front steps and open the front door.  “I’m home, Papa” I call out.

 

Chapter 2: Home Again

I walk in and go to Papa on the couch. He greets me with his usual “There’s nothing on T.V.”

“I love you too, Dad.” I say, and kiss him on the cheek. Suddenly he starts coughing. I frown. This hacking cough is one of his many ailments. He used to be a fine, healthy, middle-aged man; but when he hit 50 he started, as he put it, “getting old.” I made him stop working. What he mainly does now is watch football on T.V. and go for walks in the park. He doesn’t need to do that, but I want him to. It must seem like I’m being overprotective, but I just want to keep him as healthy as possible. I couldn’t bear to lose him, too.

I’m about to go to the cupboard and grab his medicine, but he says, “I’m fine honey.” I smile weakly. I put my arm down and open the fridge. “Anything good?” he asks.

“If half a slice of pizza and two chicken wings counts as good,” I reply.

“Can we order Italian?” he asks, as if I’m the parent here.

“Sure,” I say and send a sid-link to Bonnie’s Italian for three plates of their delicious steaming hot spaghetti. Our family loves Bonnie’s. My great-great-great grandparents went there all the way back in 5050. Now, 200 years later, Bonnie’s is still our family hangout. I sit on the couch next to dad and smile.

20 minutes later, I hear the buzz meaning weight has been detected near our front door. Our creaky old android Annie rushes to the door. She opens it to reveal the delivery android, Frank. We see a lot of him here.

“That will be 30 shonis,” he says, handing over our spaghetti. I put the money in his built-in cash register and close the door as he’s rolling away. I turn around to face Dad.

“Spaghetti time” I say.

Half an hour later, full with spaghetti we plop down on the couch. We turn on the news. What I see nearly makes me jump out of my skin. BREAKING NEWS: QUEEN ZARFINA, DEAD.

Queen Zarfina, dead??? It can’t be. I pinch myself on the arm and blink. Nope, the headline’s the same. It was no secret that she had killed her sister Maria to be queen. Everybody thought that she would do whatever it takes to stay queen. She has dozens of the best doctors in the world working tirelessly in her research labs. But I guess karma has caught up to her.

I turn to Papa and see he is wearing the same shocked expression as me. “Wow,” we say in unison.

 

Chapter 3: The Surprise

As I climb into my hover the next morning I still can’t believe that Zarfina is actually dead. It seems like she’s still here. Now I wonder who is going to be queen. She never had any kids, but no one ever worried about it, because like I said, we all assumed that she was going to live forever. Curious, I say to Ida, “Turn on newsfeed.”

“All right, Master Julia” she says. I look at the screen and the hover almost skids out of the lane. HONK. An old man glares at me as he passes me.

“Sorry!” I say. But honestly, anyone in my position would have done the same thing. Usually, handsome newscaster Tristan Cooper would cheer me up, but today, I want to punch him on the nose.

“WAR,” he says. Apparently everyone wants to be ruler. The first battle was only 2 miles from here in the rural Commentoy. “It could be coming to Speshona next.” Tristan says, before it cuts to ads.

I curse under my breath. “Ida, send a sid-link to Papa saying that there is a war.”

“I can’t do that, Master.”

“Why not?”

“Adam Roberts’ edonscreen has been disabled due to the fact that he is now a patient at the Speshona City Hospital.”

“WHAT??

 

Chapter 4: At the Hospital

I shriek so loud the old man driving next to me says, “Watch it, kid.” I’m so confused. Papa, in the hospital? He was fine this morning… Or was he? I don’t know.

“Ida, I need the directions to Speshona City Hospital. Now.”

“Turn left on Bridge street….”

“Papa!!” I call out down the long sterile hallway of the hospital.

I see a kiosk on the wall and type in Adam Roberts. Hall 6, Room 4, it says. I rush there and bang open the door. I see Papa lying unconscious on a white hospital bed. It’s my worst nightmare. I see a doctor taking notes in a corner and say, “What-what happened sir?”

“Are you family?”

I nod frantically.

“Adam suffered from an unexpected heart attack. He might not make a full recovery.”

“Not a full recovery?”

“He had been unconscious for 30 minutes before our sensor picked up on his body. Because of that, he was getting sicker and sicker before he received help. But we will try our best. And what is your relation to him?”

“He’s my Dad,” I say weakly.

“We will keep you updated, Miss Roberts,” the doctor who I now see has a name tag saying Dr. Roth says. He briskly walks out of the room.

I collapse into a chair next to Papa’s bed and squeeze his hand tightly. “Please be alright,” I whisper. “Please.”

When I wake up the next morning I’m blinded by the bright white lights of the hospital. At first I’m confused and expect to see my pale blue wallpaper, but then I realize where I actually am. I quickly open my eyes and see Papa on the bed.

“Jules,” I hear him whisper.

“Yes???” I say and jump up out of my seat.

“If I…”

“Don’t say it, Papa, don’t.”

“Well, keep running the shop for me. The month’s rent for the house is 400 shonis. You must have that.” Then he breaks into a hacking cough and I rush to get him a glass of water, tears pouring down my face. I try to hand it to him but he’s too weak to accept it. I anxiously pour it into his mouth.

“Papa…” Than he squeezes my hand. But soon, I no longer feel the pressure of his hand. Tears slosh down my face like big, heavy raindrops as a beeping sound fills the room.

A white medical android rolls into the room. It says, “Mr. Adam Roberts of Speshona, Newistonia has, as of 10:32 a.m., died. I will now take his body to the research labs.”

I stand there, helplessly, as the android takes away Papa, my papa, to some foreign research lab. I rush to the bathroom, sobbing,

 

Chapter 5: Hank’s Message

An hour later, all cried out, I sit in the clean white bathroom stall and think about how alone I really am now. No parents, or even annoying little siblings. I start sobbing again, but pull myself together.

“What should I do?” I mutter. I take a deep breath and take out my edon from my back pocket. In a shaky voice, I say, “Ida, locate my hover.” My voice breaks and tears start flowing again. I wipe them away and follow Ida’s directions to Lot 12, Row 49. I climb into the hover and rise into the air. The wind hits my wet face, making it red and raw. I try to ignore it and think, Just wait until you get home, Julia.

Just then, Ida says, “Incoming sid-video from Hank Brennan.” This lifts my hopes a little bit. I’ve had a crush on Hank since elementary school. Now he’s moved to Acconio, the capital, to work at the palace. But I still get to sometimes talk to him, even if it’s not often. His face appears on the screen and I quickly wipe my tears away.

“Hey Jules,” he says.

“Hey,” I reply.

“Listen, I don’t have much time to talk, but I just wanted to tell you something.” I nod. “So, the other day I heard some royal advisors talking about you in the conference room. They said that ‘Julia should be notified soon, it’s getting late. She needs to be here, now.’ So I just wanted to let you know that you should come here, to the palace, ASAP.” Then the screen goes blank. Hank has hung up.

Great, I think. Just what I need, a 200 kilometer trip to the capital. Although, it does seem like I should be there, but…

I frown and pull into the parking space outside of the townhouse I now live in, alone. I slam the door of the hover and run to the family room, where I fall down onto the couch, hug my knees together and start to cry, my back shaking with sobs.

 

Chapter 6: Getting Ready

I walk to the small chest where we keep the blankets and pull out an old, ragged brown one. It was Papa’s favorite. Wrapping it around me, I walk back to the couch and curl up in a ball, inhaling his scent of the mint gum he’s always chewing mixed with a tinge of Bonnie’s spaghetti sauce, and I am filled with nostalgia for my pop. What do I do, what do I do? I think, rocking back and forth. Well, I’ll pack for Acconio.

I smile shakily, grateful for something to do. I slowly walk to the room I’ve had my whole life, and go to the brown dresser in the corner. I pull out ten t-shirts, one (shudder) skirt, and eight pairs of pants. I go to my closet and take out my blue suitcase. I throw the clothes, as well as sneakers, sandals, a toothbrush, toothpaste, and five big shirts for pajamas into it. I grab an orange waterproof sleeping bag and a small travel pillow and throw that in there too. Then I get the brown blanket from the living room. Satisfied, I zip up the suitcase and call for Annie. “I’m going on a trip,” I tell her. “And I’m bringing you with me.”

20 minutes later, I have put Annie in the seat next to me in the hover, thrown my suitcase in the trunk and given Ida the directions to Acconio palace. I pull into the air and have Annie turn on music. Suddenly I wonder how long it will take to get there. I ask Ida this who replies, “17 hours.”

Not too bad, I think. If I spread that over the course of two days, I could get there by Tuesday. Then I remember when Papa and I used to go on road trips to the ruins of the American cities each year for years. Tears well up in my eyes, sloshing onto the leather seat in big heavy drops. I try not to think about how I’m going somewhere far away solely based on something someone overheard but about Ally Clarkson’s new song, “Rainbows!!” I laugh, and am slightly cheered up.

Later in the day, I’m bored out of my mind. Even though auto-drive has caused many hover crashes, I still set the hover to it. As the wheel turns, I turn on Ida and begin playing Candy Crush. I twirl the candies together and my thoughts begin to drift. To Mama, Papa… I begin to wonder about my mother’s death. When she died, I was too little to really understand. But now I wonder, why didn’t they give us further information. Mental illness??? Sorry, hospital, but that’s not much to go on. But maybe Pop got more information and just didn’t tell me. Poor, fragile nine-year-old me. Now I think I know what happened. Had Papa been hiding something from me? As I pull into a motel that looks like it’s from 2050, I begin to feel upset. My father’s perfect untarnished memory is now being ruined. I settle into a restless sleep in my room with a twin bed that barely fits into the room.

 

Chapter 7: The Storm

I wake up at around six the next morning, used to getting up to go to the shop. I grab my suitcase and walk out of the room. Instead of the transporter usually installed at hotels, there’s just an ugly, hot pink, tiny elevator. Well, this looks like it’s the best I’m gonna get, I think, looking down the empty hallway.

I shove myself in, barely fitting with my suitcase and press LOBBY. When I get there, I see the concierge asleep at the front desk. I slip a 20 shonis bill onto the desk and hurry out. I clamber into the hover and rise into the air. I see some storm clouds ahead and steer away, thinking once again about Mom. Hadn’t I seen the sid-link from the hospital saying Ma was dead? I think. But maybe the hospital was lying to Papa as well. I sigh. Maybe she really did just die of mental illness.

An hour later, I see a storm about  20 feet away. I press the WEATHER PROTECTION button on the front panel as Ida says, “Incoming sid-video from Hank Brennan.” Hank’s face pops up.

“I know why they want you here!” he says in an urgent whisper. I gasp, but then the screen is filled with static. I look out the window and curse when I see that we’ve hit the storm.

“Annie, can you try and fix the receptor?” Although Annie is an old android, she’s still equipped with weather protection. Or so I thought….

As Annie climbs up the side of the hover, a particularly ferocious wind hits it. The water gets in her head cables and I gasp as Annie’s dark brown eyes turn black. She falls down the side of the hover. “No!” I cry out as Annie tumbles down into the raging storm. I yank out the brown blanket and collapse under it, mourning dear old Annie. I peer out of the sides of the blanket and begin to steer. Annie….

 

Chapter 8: Newsfeed, Water, Getting There

Annie. How could she be gone? She’s always been there. The comforting, ever-present friend. She had been Papa’s android ever since he fixed her up when he was a little boy. Even though Papa’s gone, I thought that I’d always have Annie. She was the only connection I had with Papa left. Now….. I cry and wrap the blanket around me. About half an hour later I begin to wonder why they want me at the palace. Wrapped up in grief, I hadn’t had time to really think about that until now. I try to send a sid-video to Hank, but then realize that the internet receptor is now permanently damaged. I could fix it, if only I had the tools. I never had the best forward thinking abilities. Well, I guess I’ll just have to make do with what I have. Which is… nothing.

An hour later, I turn on newsfeed, thinking about the war going on. It seems like ages ago that I was driving to work and my life changed forever. “Now we are deep into war,” Tristan Cooper says. “It is spreading, and the palace guards have yet to do anything about it.”

I think about poor Hank, who is a palace guard. Newistonians are very strong-willed, so he and his co-workers must be getting tons of angry letters this very moment. I tune back in to hear Tristan say, “And the battles are getting closer and closer to our capital each day. In fact, channel nine has exclusive information on the recent battle in our own Speshona.” I gasp and think about all my friends that might have been harmed. As Tristan goes over the list of casualties, I cling to my seat and am relieved when I don’t see Big Joe, who has been like a grandfather to me, or any of my other childhood friends.

When the show ends, I realize that although I changed into a new t-shirt at the hotel, it’s sticking to my chest. I feel like a little kid again as I say “Ewww,” and pull over the hover. I go to the back of the hover and put up the wash partition. I undress and press the WATER button. “Aah,” I say as the warm water pours into my dirty hair. I’m so glad that I installed the shower update two years ago. At the time, I found it unnecessary, but now, I’m so grateful that I did. Thank goodness for dear old Papa, who said, “You never know when you’ll need a shower.” I laugh at the memory. 20 minutes later I’ve wasted hot water and gotten back into the driver’s seat. Then, towering in the distance I see the tall spikes of the Acconio palace.

 

Chapter 9: Arrival at the Palace

When I reach the palace gates, a guard brusquely says, “Identification.”

“Julia Roberts.” I pull out my identification tag, which the guard harshly scans. I remember going with Papa when I turned ten to get registered and be given an I.D tag. By the age of 11, all Newistonians are required to be registered with an I.D tag.

I sigh as the guard opens the gate and I drive through. Unsure of where to park, I pull the hover down on the side of the parking lot and climb out. I take Ida and shove her into my pocket. Sadly, there’s no Annie any more, so I just take my suitcase and walk to the front door. I spot a familiar face and wave at Hank, who smiles and opens the door. Looking left and right, he deserts his post and ushers me inside.

“I’m glad you came,” Hank says. “Where’s your dad? And… where’s Annie?” Right. He doesn’t know. This is going to be hard. I shakily take a deep breath and begin to tell him everything. About Papa’s death, and the storm. In a way, saying it makes me feel better, but it also brings back memories I’ve been trying hard to forget. Hank looks at me, his bright green eyes filled with sympathy.
“I’m so sorry, Jules,” he says, his voice barely more than a whisper. I smile weakly. Just then, his edon, which is clipped to his belt, buzzes.

Startled, I say, “Who’s that?”

He plasters a grin onto his face and says, “My boss, Royal Adviser Evan Patterson. He says to escort Ms. Roberts to her chambers.”

“How does he know I’m here?” I ask, clueless.

He points to the walls and I see that security cameras are on almost every single wall. “Well then, ‘Ms Roberts’ let me bring you to your chambers.”

I laugh, and hold out my hand regally. “Why certainly, Monsieur Brennan.”

He takes my hand and brings me down a long, carpeted (I would say hallway, but that seems too drab, sooo) corridor. He stops at a large, wooden double door. He pushes it open to reveal the most lavish room I’ve ever seen. Shocked, I stare at the queen size bed, large wardrobe and plush white carpet. I walk in, stunned, and plop myself onto the teal comforter. I’m ready to fall asleep, when Hank pulls me up and says, ”You havent even see the bathroom yet.”

“I have my own bathroom?!” I squeal like a kindergartener. Hank laughs at me, and I playfully punch him on the arm. “In my defense, I’ve never had my own bathroom before,” I say. He just keeps laughing, and leads me to the bathroom. A grin breaks across my face. There’s a separate bathtub! This bathroom is as big as my room back home in Speshona. I twirl around, taking in the shower with a thousand different settings on the shower head, the double sink…. I smile and walk back to the main room, noticing a door I hadn’t seen before. I push it open and see a humongous walk in closet, filled with ugly frilly dresses, but also, and I’m shocked to see this, a few plain cargo pants and about ten t-shirts. I happily pull them out. I only packed a few t-shirts, and have been running low on clothes.

Then I hear a buzz behind me. I turn around and hear Hank mumble something into his edon. I turn around and he says, “They want you in the conference room.”

Chapter 10: New Job, New Life

20 minutes later, I’m seated in at a long table with about 15 stern-faced men. They introduce themselves as royal advisers. The one name that I remember is Evan Patterson, Hank’s boss. “Julia,“ he says seriously.

“Hey,” I reply, unsure of how to address a royal adviser.

“We have some very serious matters to attend to….” It seems like he’s about to say something, but refrains. “Well, let’s just say that Zarfina never really was the true queen of Newistonia.”

My eyes widen. I mean, I knew she was never the best queen, but taking over someone’s throne… well that’s just pure evil.

“We unearthed some shocking information that some extremely upset palace doctors gave. We also found some files in her private quarters,” he continues. “We found out not only that she was never really the true queen, but also something more about her past. She was a poor orphan girl who Queen Amanda and King Andrew adopted. They took her in as their own,and raised her along with their daughter Maria.”
“Wait, so Zarfina was adopted?!”

Patterson nods angrily and I can tell he wants to get back to the story.  

“As time passed, most people grew to forget that Zarfina wasn’t their true child. When Amanda and Andrew died, the crown passed to their first-born, Maria. Zarfina became extremely angry at Maria because in her opinion the crown should have been passed to her.”

“Why? Maria was their first-born.”

“Zarfina was a mere month older than Maria, but the royal advisors of that time decided that the royal bloodline must prevail. As you may know, after just five months into her reign as queen, Maria mysteriously died. People have long suspected that Zarfina killed her, but there was never any proof. You probably don’t know that Andrew and Amanda did have another girl, Camilla.”

I gasp. “Like my mom Camilla?” He nods solemnly. “How do I know that you’re not lying? Besides, if that was true, everyone would know about this. Zarfina wouldn’t have become queen.” I say frantically, biting my nails.

Patterson smooths down his bright red and gold robes and sighs, “Alas, there is more to tell.”

I wrap my arms tightly around myself, worried about what Patterson is going to say. I take a deep breath as he continues with his story.

“Zarfina, that clever mastermind, blackmailed the palace doctors into inventing the most powerful brainwashing device that ever existed. She then used it on all of the citizens through parties and meetings. She made everyone believe that she was her parents’ only child, and that Camilla didn’t exist at all. Camilla herself is brainwashed. She now believes that she was the late queen Maria’s hand maiden. Now that Maria is dead, Camilla moves to Speshona and begins a new life.”  Shocked, I sit in the comfortable brown leather chair and begin biting my nails.

I think I know what’s coming.

“15 years later, she called Camilla back into the city. Camilla, having no idea about her true past, thinks that she is being called by the queen for some important business. She unknowingly lies to her family and travels to Acconio. Zarfina then –– ” he stops and says quietly, “I think you know what happens next.” I nod and tears begin to leak out of my eyes. All this time, my mother was the true queen. Which means… Patterson nods.

“You are the true queen of Newistonia.”

~ End of Part 1~

The Drum Set

Chapter 1

On a nice and sunny day, Stewart, the hero of the book, went to his uncle’s drum store called “Get Your Percussion Here!” So he went in, said hi to his uncle, then saw a drum he really liked. He looked at it every day.  And then finally, it was ten days until his birthday. Ten days later, he came back to the shop.

He asked his uncle, “Can I get a present here for my tenth birthday?”

His uncle said, “Sure, why not?” Then he went with his uncle to the drum he looked at every day. That drum didn’t only have the bass drum and the snare drum and the high-hat, and the low drum and the high drum, it also had the medium drum, cymbal one, two, and three, and the cowbell, and the main cymbal. He went to test the main cymbal. Once he hit it every thing that he saw stopped. Time stopped. Everyone around him stopped, even his uncle. The drums stopped. Something weird happened to his mind. It started to hurt. And he saw a picture.

Then he thought, maybe it could be the future.

He was like, “Why is everything frozen? Wait a second. Everything’s frozen! That’s awesome!”

Then he went outside his shop. Since the boy’s favorite food was candy, he went to Dylan’s Candy Bar and he looked at his watch to see what time it was. All he saw was 12:57 p.m. The seconds were 53 and they didn’t move one inch. Then he took some of his favorite candy bars, finished them, and threw them in the garbage. He went back to his uncle’s shop, went in and said these words: “Abra cadabra. I demand the world to unfreeze!” Then he looked at his watch. It was still 12:57 p.m. and fifty three seconds. Then he got a little bored. So then he wanted to go play the drums. After a while, he hit the main cymbal and then everything as he knew it started to go as if nothing had stopped.

His watch started to go, his uncle said, “Yeah sure,” and he didn’t know about Stewart stealing the candy bars.

Then Stewart said, “Wow!” with excitement. “Uncle,” said Stewart. “Can you please help me carry the drumset home?”

His uncle said, “Yeah sure, why not?” So they moved the drum to his house, said hi to his mom and dad, read a book, and went to bed.

The next morning he went to school. He had the worst day of his life. All his friends weren’t there and there was nothing to do, just him and all the girls in his class. He wondered where all of his friends went. When he came back home he rang the cymbal again. Everything as he knew it stopped. Time stopped. His parents stopped. And when he threw a book it didn’t go down, it just stayed in mid air. He went to his friend’s house and looked to see if they were home. Guess what he saw? He saw all his friends with chicken pox watching a movie, eating popcorn at Neymar’s house. That makes him feel he was just left out and they were not friends with him anymore.

He went back home. On the way, he went to the supermarket and took a snack or two. Then at home, he took his book, moved it back where it was supposed to be, and then rang the cymbal again. He thought, Should I keep this cymbal a secret, should I give to anyone, or should I just throw it away? You know what, I’ll just throw it away. And then he threw it out the window into the trash, read a book for a minute and went to bed.

 

CHAPTER 2

The next morning the first thing he did was look at his drumset outside. Then he was like, What the heck? Where is it? It was in the garbage. Where could it have gone? Then he looked at his room and right in front of him was his drumset.

Stewart said, “What in the world? How is my drumset still here? Didn’t I throw it out last night? This is so confusing. I wonder what happens when I hit them bottom of the main cymbal. I’m gonna do it now.”

Then Stewart hit the bottom of the main cymbal. A giant sized computer came out of the bass drum on the right side.

It said, “Hello Stewart, when would you like to go today?”

Then Stewart said, “I think you mean ‘where’ not ‘when.’ But anyway, how can you talk, Computer?”

The computer answered, “Oh, you programmed me ten years in the future.”

“Future? How do you know all this?” Stewart said.

The computer answered, “Because you made me. Ten years from now.”

“B-b-b-but how did you come from the future? This is just a normal drum set. I think…”

“But Stewart, it’s not. You made this drum set ten years in the future and then you came back here fifteen years ago and put it in your uncle’s drum shop.”

“Computer,” Stewart said in a confident voice, “why did I program you to come here?”

“Because five years from now there will be an alien invasion, and it’s going to destroy all of humanity and all of the world. You’re our only hope.”

“M-m-me? Why me?”

“Five years from now you’re going to survive the invasion, and in the future three years from now you are going to be super smart, but only if I tell you this. And Stewart, the next two years after those three years, you build something that can take you to space. You go there and look for aliens, ‘cause then they will still just be planning to take over Earth. You’re going to need to go to an alien, try to be friends with him and not say anything mean, and ask if you can take one of his hairs on his body. That will be some alien DNA. Go back home and make a machine that can make a forcefield around the earth to stop the aliens and in the next couple of months they can’t invade our planet and we can live our lives in peace. But don’t forget to test it in a little size on your alien friend.”

“But I’m not going to be smart enough to do that!”

“Remember what I said. Study hard for the next three years in school. Raise your hand as much as you want in class, and after school go home and do your homework and research on any device how to be smart. For the next three years. And also if you want to stop time with this drum set, just tap the main symbol and you can study for the next five hours of the day. And don’t forget, if you want to speed up time, which I don’t recommend to do, play the snare drum.”

“Okay, thanks, Computer.”

Now I will go and destroy the aliens that are trying to invade Earth! In the next book called The Drum Set: Alien Invasion!

The Revolution

“Your home planet, Planet X, was a very peaceful planet until it was invaded by aliens. You were just a baby and you were separated from your birth parents. You cautiously wandered into the town hall. You looked around and slowly started to walk forward, except after two steps you heard a crunch under your feet and you looked down. You saw that you stepped on the broken transporter tile, well, at least you thought it was broken. Slowly, you were enveloped in golden light, and then darkness. Suddenly, you appeared in the middle of a foster home on Earth. That’s when we found you. Being fellow aliens from Planet Y, we immediately understood your predicament and took you in. We brought you home and taught you how to improvise and how to survive. We taught you those things because when you are a survivor of a supposedly destroyed planet, and all of your family, relatives, and friends are dead, you have a target on your back. A big red one. Many monsters out there, or aliens, as you call them, would be rewarded by the Kraken, the one who destroyed your planet and many others, like ours. So we started to train you. We gave you lifelike illusions to teach you how to think on your feet. Then, in the middle of a practice session, when you were a little over thirteen years old, our little TV switched on and reported supernatural behavior and aliens being sighted on Earth. We were worried that they had come to get you, so we went outside to prepare. But we realized that preparing would do nothing when we saw what lurked in the shadows. And there he was. The Kraken. Waiting for us so he could kill us the second we stepped outside. As he crushed our puny little bodies, we shouted out to you, ‘Run, Warren! You don’t deserve the same fate as us!’ Remember, there can always be peace, you just need to find it. And remember Warren, wear your name proud, just as a true Peace would. To remind your enemies that they can never win, tell them your name, Warren Peace.”

Warren wanted revenge. His anger at the Kraken awakened his power to create things with his mind. He was thinking about his parents and what they said when he heard a voice in his head.

“Don’t worry Warren! We will always be in your head.”

Warren recognized that voice. It was the voice of his mother. Then Warren thought, “Is that a good thing or a bad thing?”

Then he heard his father’s voice respond, “You know we can hear you, son.”

“Sorry, but sometimes you can be a bit annoying.”

“Well, I guess every parent has their quirk. Well, back to the point. We believe in you. Now that you’ve discovered your newly-awakened powers, you should be able to build The Destroyer. But, it will take a year of work even with your powers. Once you’re done, you will have to shrink it to the size of a cup so you can put it in your pockets. Otherwise, you wouldn’t be able to move it because it will be the size of this whole house.”

“Ok, bye.”

The vision of them in his head flashed out of view. Warren mumbled to himself, “Ok, now I need to get to work.”

Two months later…

“Finally, I have all the equipment to build it,” he said as he’s walking into his house with the last of his supplies. Then he walked face first into a note that he wrote two months ago.

Remember, you don’t have to get supplies, you can just use your powers.

Then he remembered right after his vision, he had thought, “Wow, I need to take a nap.” But then he remembered that he always forgets things after naps. Therefore, he wrote a note so that he wouldn’t forget about his powers. But then when he woke up, he forgot all about the note. He should have put it in a better spot. And then a phrase that he heard on T.V. flashed through his mind: “Shoulda woulda coulda.” He slapped himself in the face and imagined that there were two hundred million dollars on his credit card. All the money that he just wasted back in an instant. He started feeling woozy and his knees gave way. He face-planted onto the cold wooden floor. It happened in a split second, but for him, it felt like it took an hour. Everything went black.

He woke up to the feeling of a cold washcloth on his head. He saw a kid about his age. He had the picture of Planet X and it’s many stars on his shirt (even though he had been a baby, he could still remember every single moment of terror that he went through on that day). He suddenly jumped up.

He screamed, “Who are you?”

The boy said, “How about a ‘thank you’? I just saved you from The Kraken.”

“Ok, thank you. I guess I was a little rude there. But seriously, who are you?”

“My name is Gagaroth. And I’m also from Planet X. It was very unfortunate what happened there. Now may I know your name?”

“My name is Warren. But how did you find me? And how did you even know that I’m here?”

“Well, our kind has a very special tracking system. All we have to do is envision the type of person, or even better, if that person has a name, and boom! We know the location of that person. You see, I’m looking for other survivors, and just happened to find you. I suppose you’re a little different from the rest of us. I walked in just as you conjured up the money out of thin air, and then you fainted. You realize there has only been one other that possessed the power that you behold.”

“So, what happened? Why did I black out?”

“You know, you need to be more careful. you should start with smaller things, if you use your power too much, then you start to get really sick. And it may cause death. But, with proper training, and it’s not that I’m recommending any specific trainers,” he gestured to himself.

Warren rolled his eyes.

“You can use more of your powers at any time without any consequences. I can help you with your problem if you help me with mine. Unfortunately, I haven’t found out a way to live life on Earth. You see, I just got here. Sometimes teleporting is a bit tricky, I suppose. Well, back to the point, I can’t seem to make a living, and since I don’t have your powers I can’t just make the money. Finding food, water, and housing has been a bit tricky. So the deal I’m offering you is for me to help you learn how to control your powers if I can live in your guest room. And you can spare a little food.”

“Ok. Seems like a good deal to me. But first, can I have some aspirin? I still have a bit of a headache.”

“Sure,” he pulled a bottle of Aspirin out of his supposedly empty pocket and held it out. “Here you go.”

Warren stared in wonder. “How did you do that? I thought you said you didn’t have the power to create?”

“Well, I don’t. But as my parents put me into the teleporter, they gave me this pair of pants. It allows me to pull small items, that would fit into a pocket, out of them. Conveniently everything except for money. Sense the sarcasm? Huh? Huh?”

“Calm down, man. I’ll get you some money. Except first you need to teach me how to do that without half killing myself.”

“Sure I’ll teach you. But I’m pretty sure you have 200 million leftover dollar bills from that incident from before. Doncha?” He held out his hand.

Warren looked around. He realized what Gagaroth was talking about. He saw piles of money everywhere. And when he said everywhere, he meant he couldn’t see the shining floor anymore. “Take what you want.”

“Really?” he responded into his pockets.

“Not a wise move, trust me.”

“Ok, b-”

“Nope, can’t take it back anymore,” he said as he rushed around the room, piling endless amounts of money into his pockets. Clearly, the effect was double sided, if you can pull anything out, then why not put anything in?

“Okay, now can you teach me how to use my powers?”

“Sure, let’s start next morning, 6 a.m. .

“Next morning?” Warren responded, annoyed for having to wait.

“Yes, next morning. Well, whatever and good night.”

He went downstairs to the guest room. Once he was gone, Warren felt a chill go up his spine. His head spun around and he saw what looked like a mix between a shark, octopus, hyena, panther, black mamba and cyborg. Suddenly, he heard a loud booming voice that echoed through his head. It said in a metallic voice, “I will do to you what I did to your planet, and your so-called puny ‘parents.’”

Warren said, “What the—”

The one thing he could see was a giant fist coming at him, and the next thing, darkness. When he woke up, the first thing that he did was rub the grogginess out of his eyes. It was a little blurry, but he could still make out that he was in a dark room with a giant figure looming over him. He heard the same voice that he heard before he was knocked unconscious.

“Good, you’re awake. You see, the reason that I brought you here is because you have something that I need. And if you don’t give it to me willingly, I’ll use force.”

He managed to mumble, “What do you want?”

The monstrous figure chuckled, “Huh. It’s not one thing that I want, it’s many things. The first thing that I’ll need from you is your employment.  And then I’ll tell you more about my plans.”

“What if I refuse?”

“Funny you should ask that. For your answer, why don’t you just look across from you.”

Warren looked to his right, he saw nothing. Then he looked to his left and he saw Gagaroth. He had wide eyes and a frantic expression on his face. There was one problem. He had a gag and his arms and legs were chained to a hospital bed. Just as he saw the chained up legs and arms, he realized that he couldn’t move any of his limbs either. When he looked down, all he saw were ropes and chains and a few red splotches here and there that he assumed were blood. The Kraken roared in rage and shouted, “Well, make up your mind! Are you going to work for me or not?”

The Kraken roared in rage and shouted, “Well, make up your mind! Are you going to work for me or not?”

“And if I don’t work for you?”

“I thought you would have guessed that by now, but I guess you’re even dumber than you look. But, I guess you do have the right to know. You see, if you refuse my offer, then I’ll torture your friend here. And don’t try to use your powers to stop me. I have an electromagnetic field that has momentarily made you helpless.”

Warren stared at him with his mouth hung so wide it looked as though he could swallow the Internet. He finally replied, “Ok. I’ll work for you. What is my first task, ‘Master’?”

“Hey. I’m not deaf. I can hear the sarcasm clearly. Keep it up, if you want your friend to die in front of your eyes.” He stood up and walked away, knowing that he had clearly won.

Now Warren wondered what to do. He was restrained and he couldn’t use his powers. Suddenly he heard, “Warren!”

He looked to his left and he saw that somehow Gagaroth must have gotten the gag off because it was now laying on the floor beside him. Warren said, “What happened? All I remember was his fist and then I was out.”

“Well, once he knocked you out, he came for me downstairs. He was so loud that I could hear your conversation all the way downstairs. But thankfully since I got that head start, I built myself a clone. And all offense to him, he’s stupid. He went after the clone even though it doesn’t look remotely like me.”

Warren suddenly felt embarrassed that he hadn’t realized that it was a clone. Gagaroth continued, “Then he walked into the room just as I put the microphone inside the clones mouth. And then he took the clone and I was just left by myself in the house.”

“So you’re really safe? You’re back at home? Where am I? Can you come get me? How are you able to make the clone so fast? Is this really all true?” He blurted out.

“Whoa there, one question at a time. So for the first question, if that was a clone, of course, I’m safe and at home. Also, you are currently a mile beneath your house. And, or course this is true. Also, I’m right behind you.”

“What! Free me!”

“Hold on, hold on, I’m not finished. I’m not literally behind you, but the little drone carrying an Ipad on Facetime is right behind you, so turn around and say ‘Hi!’”

Warren said, “I understand that you have a clone in here, but the drone…isn’t that a little much?”

“Well you see, I kept the drone in my pocket, well, my clone’s pocket, I mean. So when I noticed that we were clear I just sent it out so you could actually see what happened up here.”

“Well I’ll do that but first you kinda, you know, need to free me from my chains. How bout it, huh?”

“Sure.”

Suddenly the clone of Gagaroth broke free of his chains, took out an Adamant Knife and slashed the chains away from Warren’s body.

“There. Good now?”

“Yes,” Warren said as he hopped off the bed and spun around. He had a picture of what the drone would look like in his mind, but he never expected it would look like a cupcake with frosting.

Gagaroth noticed Warren’s confused look and said, “Well I didn’t really have much time, I only had a few times to pull it out of my pocket. You see sometimes I don’t control what the thing looks like, all I control is what it is.”

“Wow.” That was all he could say. His home looked like a construction crew teamed up with a bombing squad and his house was the target. The furniture was ripped to shreds, and all of his food was on the floor with bites bit into it. There were claw marks on the floor. Warren thought he might be able to fix things, but he would need some serious coaching from Gagaroth first. He wouldn’t want to faint again.

Gagaroth looked at Warren and said in a disappointed voice, “Yeah, I know, it’s bad. But it could be worse, at least we didn’t die.”

“Well, I guess you’re right, it could’ve been much worse. Wait a second! Did he steal the project that I was working on?”

“Yeah, why would you ask?”

“I need an advil,” he mumbled to himself. “Well, you see, that project I was working on? It was a thing that might be able to save our planet and bring it back to the way it used to be. And it would have been able to kill the Kraken.”

Gagaroth screamed, “DUCK!”

“Why is there a duck in my house? And if there is, why are you screaming at the top of your lungs?”

“No! I mean DUCK!”

“Seriously, what are you-” Warren suddenly caught his drift. He ducked his head a second before a boulder the size of his head slammed into the wall behind him. If that boulder hit him, he would be dead by now. It would’ve cracked his skull right open.

He muttered “thanks” to Gagaroth. Then he turned to his attacker. He expected to see the Kraken, but instead he saw a cute little butterfly…that was arming a catapult.

On the catapult, there was a sign that said: Oh you like my new little plaything?

Seriously, I hope you enjoy it.

Sincerely, THE KRAKEN.

 

Warren thought “How is he controlling that butterfly?” As soon as he thought that in his head, the old sign vanished and a new sign appeared.

This one said: So, you’re wondering how I controlled the little butterfly’s mind?

Well, here’s the simple answer. I got pro skillz yo.

Suddenly an image popped up in Warren’s mind. It was the Kraken stomping on this planet and saying “If you don’t become my servant, I will do to this planet what I did to yours.” Suddenly, someone said, “Drumroll, please! The mighty man himself: THE KRA-”

“Edward!” The Kraken roared. “It’s a little late for that.”

Warren said to the vision of the Kraken in his mind, “I’ll leave you two to discuss this. I’ll just go. So yeah, bye!”

He snapped his eyes open only to find another boulder flying at his face. He thought “It was a distraction!” but he didn’t have time to worry about the Kraken’s cleverness. He dodged out of the way and lunged for the catapult. He grabbed the butterfly in his hands, and he was sad to admit, he squashed it. He wiped away the guts and blood on Gagaroth’s clone’s shirt and then walked back to the catapult. He imagined he was holding a sledgehammer and then smashed it to bits.

Suddenly he heard Gagaroth’s voice saying, “Wow. You just imagined a giant sledgehammer the size of your body, and you didn’t even break a sweat. Seriously man, good job.”

Warren realized that for the first time, “Wow, that’s right!” Just as he finished celebrating, he took a step forward and fell on his face. Then everything was black.

When I woke up, I was in a hospital bed. I did not recognize my surroundings, but I did recognize the face that was hovering a few inches from mine. It was the face of Gagaroth, my best friend, and my only friend. He spoke, “Yeah, as you were saying, you didn’t faint at all that time.”

“Quit it with the sarcasm, okay? But really, what happened? I don’t really remember much, you know with the whole being unconscious thing.”

“So once you fainted, I walked towards you, and me and my clone brought you up to the house. Once we got there, we realized we couldn’t leave you there because the house was a wreck. So instead, we brought you to the local hospital.”

“What? How could you? We need to be off the grid! It’s enough that we’re running from monsters, but we can’t have the police knowing who we are! I mean, come on man! We’re probably going to cause some destruction if we destroy the Kraken. And we can’t be arrested after all of that. That would ruin everything.”

“You mean WHEN we defeat the Kraken. When. Have faith my brother, we can do this. We just have to bide our time. Also, you need to rest, you hit your head pretty hard when you collapsed. It was a big bump, and it needs time to heal.”

Warren lifted up his arms and felt his forehead. Instead of feeling his usually smooth skin, he felt a lump the size a tennis ball and instantly starting to panic. But then he remembered about his powers and summoned a Med Kit out of thin air. But this wasn’t just any normal first aid kit. I was the special first aid kit from his planet. He faintly remembered what it looked like so he summoned it from his memory. When he opened it, memories rushed back to him. Learning how to ride a bike, when his father patched up his knee when he scraped it on the sidewalk. And how his mother gave him some medicine when he got sick. No, he couldn’t worry about them now. He had work to do to avenge his parents.

He went back to the present, took out some Grocklack, and applied some to his forehead. In moments, the throbbing stopped and the bump decreased to the size of a little teeny pebble.

“Wow,” Gagaroth said. “Kinda forgot you could do that. But that reminds me. I haven’t fulfilled my promise yet. I have to show you how to use your powers with all your possible energy, without collapsing from the exhaustion of it. Because it would kinda suck if you defeated the Kraken, and then fell off the George Washington Bridge and into the water. You know what I mean? So first thing tomorrow morning, 10 a.m. , you’re going to the training room so I can get you back on your feet and teach you how to use your powers with maximum power.”

“Wow, that was a mouthful. But okay, I guess so. Let’s find a table so I can summon us some food for lunch. I assume it’s time for lunch, right?”

“Actually, it’s time for brunch, so even better. I saw some tables on my way here, let’s go over there.”

“Okay, let’s go.”

They walked over to the seating area and while the employees weren’t looking, Warren summoned some club sandwiches and some Coke. They ate in silence. Once they finished their meal, they went their separate ways to do some daily activities and just have some fun. You know, if you’re going to live on Earth as a teen, you should have some fun doing it. They said goodbye and the first very, very fun activity Warren was going to do was to clean up his house. When he walked in, he officially decided the world was against him, so he blew up the rest of the house with explosives. It was beyond repair. All the furniture was shredded, there were dirt marks and claw marks every few feet. So instead, he just decided to get a new house. He decided the perfect one for him and Gagaroth was a 37 room mansion on a cliff in Florida overlooking the ocean. So he summoned up some money (this time only a little at a time) and bought the house. After he furnished it, he summoned some blank pieces of paper and some pens, and started to draw up a battle plan.

The first step was to map out the Kraken’s hideout so that they didn’t get lost, because that would kind of suck. Once he mapped out the lair, he started thinking of ways to take down the Kraken. So far, the best one was to torture him for ten years and then slaughter him. I know that might sound gross, but trust me, he deserved it. But then he had to figure out how he was going to get the Kraken in a defenseless position. So far, his best idea was this: Gagroth would make some clones of himself and Warren, and then while they were distracted, Warren would slowly be building up weapons and ammunition. And explosives. Finally, once they realized the clones were, well, clones, they would come in and blow the whole thing up, leaving the Kraken and his crew exposed. While they stood there in shock (assuming that the explosion didn’t kill them) Warren and Gagaroth would come in for the kill with the new and improved DESTROYER 2.0.

It was going to be like the rocket slash missile he built before, except Gagaroth would build a smart computer inside of it, and add arms and legs. The missile would launch itself at the Kraken, hopefully killing him, or at least weakening him. If he wasn’t dead by then, a metal shell from the robots midsection would rise and the robot would become a killing machine with two energy chainsaws, the sacred sword, and 37 machine guns and bazookas.

So now that that was over, he summoned himself some early dinner and went to sleep. Later that morning, both Warren and Gagaroth went inside of the local gym. They had talked to the manager, and I’m not saying they bribed the manager to let them have the whole gym to themselves for the day, but they basically bribed the manager. Once they were all ready and warmed up, Gagaroth said, “The first step: always be calm and patient no matter what. Second: always have your goal in mind, and never change want you want to happen halfway through. There will be consequences. Third: never, EVER use your powers for evil. Only for good. Fourth, you have to have complete concentration. Fifth, when you become super famous, always remember how ‘Uncle Gagaroth’ helped you all that time. Ok?”

“Har, har, so funny. And when you said there will be consequences, what did you mean by that?”

“Well, first of all, have you ever wondered how the Kraken became so powerful?”

“Well actually, I never really thought of it. How did he become so powerful?”

“I’m going to tell you a story. It’s a long one but I think that you have the time to hear it. Ok, it all started when the Kraken was born. He was born on a planet like ours except it was all different. You may have heard of it, the legendary planet A. It was like ours in the sense that everyone was trying to make peace, except that it was also different in the sense that they expected so highly of everyone that when the Kraken, aka ‘Johnny’, was playing around with his friends and having some fun, he accidently cracked the portal and it sent a beacon out into space. It attracted all the monsters in that galaxy to the planet, they banished him to the planet of Askard.

At the planet of Askard, he was mutated, turned into a monster. He was stranded there until he came. He taught the Kraken how to have a thirst for revenge, and taught him how to live the life of a criminal. That was when he started his journey. Your planet was the 13th planet that he conquered. If you can’t stop him, then Earth will be the 15th.”

“That just means that we have to take him out soon,” Warren said.

“Agreed.”

To Be Continued.

The Wedding

It all started with my parents’ umpteenth wedding. Yup. My parents have been divorced more times than I can count. They do all of the divorce papers and everything, and then, about two weeks later, they both feel lonely and get back together again.

At first, I got sad when they get divorced. But now it’s just normal. Yesterday, they got divorced. I happened to have my best friend over, Jonny. So when he heard them saying they were getting a divorce, he looked at me with that I’m-so-sorry face. But I said I didn’t care and it was totally fine.  

Back to the wedding. I think this is their 100th wedding, so they made a big deal about it and invited everybody they knew. My mom started to get really anxious, as if she had never been married before, and started ordering me around.

We live in the suburbs of Chicago. I think it’s really boring, but my parents love it. My name is Jones. My mom, Josephine, got divorced with my father for the first time when she went into labor with me. I have brown hair, some freckles, and am five feet tall. I am 11 years old. My dad, Jack, looks exactly like me, except he’s six foot eight.

“Help Aunt Jo Jo in, okay, Jones?” my mom asked me.

Right then my world started ending. Let me tell you that she is not old, and that I don’t need to help her because she is frail. I have to help her by moving things away from the entrance, because she is too fat to fit in. So when I got down, things got embarrassing. It started like this.

“Aw, look at my baby boy! For some reason, you seem smaller!” she bellowed.

Actually, she probably just got bigger.

She then ran to me to hug me. I swear, I could see my life flash before my eyes. She basically tackled me. I fell to the ground.

I stood up, and asked, “Can you maybe be a little less rough?”

“Oh, of course, baby boy!”

So then it was sort of a real hug. It must have looked pretty weird because I was about as big as her finger, and I’m tall for my age.

“Now, be a good boy and remove all the flower pots and anything in my way so I can budge through the door.”

“Yes, Aunt Jo Jo.”

Well, it took, like, 20 minutes to get her in. But besides that, the wedding was good. People were a little cramped, because Aunt Jo Jo took up about twenty seats, but it was mostly okay. Until the vows. Here’s what happened:

The minister said, “Now it’s time for the vows.”

My father said,“Oh, we can skip that. We have done this tons of times, and it doesn’t really matter anymore.”

My mom said, “What do you mean? Is this just an excuse, because you forgot to write yours?!”

My dad said, “It doesn’t matter, Josephine! We have done this millions of times!”

My mom said,“You are always like this! Why would I even think of marrying you?”

I’m just gonna skip a lot of the conversation, because it got pretty ugly.

So ten minutes later, my mom and my dad said:

“We’re getting a divorce!!!”

They both stormed off. Wow. They have been divorced many times, but they have never gotten divorced at their wedding! That’s a new record for them.

Nobody in the audience was surprised. They just left. I left too. I wasn’t gonna help Aunt Jo Jo out. Not again.

………………………………..

My parents were divorced for about a week, and I thought it ended when I heard flirting coming from the backyard of my mom’s house. There are around ten houses on my block, and all of the backyards are attached. My dad’s house is actually right next to my mom’s house, so they were probably the ones flirting.

But when I went outside, my dad wasn’t there. My mom was flirting with the village drunk, Joseph. It was pretty hard to believe. Joseph is a heavy drinker, has a beer belly, and owns five mean pitbulls. And his house is the one that my mom says to always keep my distance from. He’s been married, like, five times before, and every one of the girls that he has married were huge and fat. And he is VERY conservative. My mom is a proud liberal. And guess what. My mom seriously just asked him out. Maybe this divorce is serious.

Apparently, the date went well. Joseph drank five beers, and got really drunk. He was polite and let my mom pay for it, and then they both came to my house. I finally got to meet him.

“So, this is the Jones I’ve heard all about, eh?” he said, not soberly. He then said, “You seem like a pretty good guy!”

I got a closer look at him. He looked like he hadn’t shaved in about six years, and there were tons of food scraps in his beard. I did not like him. Not at all.

He helped himself to a beer in the fridge, and then lay down on the couch with his shoes still on.

“I’m gonna teach you a life lesson,” he said. ”Education doesn’t matter. Just play football and get paid millions of dollars, and that’s all you need.”

My mom would usually be super against that, but she tried to ignore it. I saw her face turn red though, like she wanted to punch Joseph.  

So this was not good. I need to get him out.

……………………………………………………….

I woke up and went to my secret stash of candy and sweets for breakfast. Without sugar, I cannot stay awake, so I always need sugar at every meal. So, I opened the cabinet, unscrewed the loose screw, and opened the secret door.

But here’s the problem: all of the cakes and candy and food were gone. I glanced over at the couch, where Joseph was sleeping. On his shirt were cake crumbs, and by the side of the couch were candy wrappers.

I started to freak out. I would fall asleep in school, even during gym class, without sugar, I thought. I went to the fridge, and looked for some orange juice. At least that had some sugar in it. But when I looked in the fridge, instead of orange juice, there was a note. Here’s what it said:

 

Dear Kid,

Here’s a life lesson. Don’t eat too much sugar. That’s my job. If you are looking for the orange juice, it’s in my stomach and it’s not available. That’s all I have to say.

Signed,

Gosef

 

Wow. He was too drunk to even remember how to write his name.

I searched the whole house, and everything with sugar was gone. I was desperate.

I ran out to the deli, but it was closed, so I was forced to go to school without my morning dose of sugar.

First period, I have gym. We were doing the pacer test, which is basically running from one wall to another, but I was too tired to listen and did the endurance, which is just running. So while everybody was running from one side of the gym to the other side of the gym, I was running in a circle around the gym. The gym teacher shouted at me, and I didn’t hear a word he said.

I finally realized that I was running wrong, so I started the pacer. I ran back and forth about four times, and then I collapsed.

I was fast asleep, so the gym teacher had to carry me to my next class. I slept all the way to the end of lunch. But here’s the worst part. If I had been awake for lunch, I could’ve gotten candy. I missed my chance to not only have sugar, but my chance to eat too! So now, I was an incredibly tired boy, who was also incredibly hungry! I was even more screwed. It was all Joseph’s fault. I need to get him out.

I slept through science, and my classmates were tired of carrying me, so they just left me there. And I slept there until 5:30 p.m. Apparently the teachers had tried, and failed, to wake me up. They were getting pretty desperate, so the custodian punched me really hard in the arm, and I finally woke up. That custodian really can punch! I went home rubbing my arm.

When I got home, my mom was really mad at me for coming home late. I explained everything that had happened that day, and I asked her why Joseph was here and that I hated him. It took her a long time to say something good about him so she could prove me wrong. She ended up saying, “You just have to accept the way he is.”

Wow. We all know that she was dating him to get back at my dad and make him jealous. I went up to my room and went to sleep.

…………………………………………….

That morning, I got up early. I was ready to fight back. I knew the minute Joseph wakes up, he heads straight to a fridge to help himself to a beer. So I decided to pour oil right in front of the fridge. This was an easy, good solid prank – he would slip and fall on his back.

I waited for him to get up. Sure enough, he went straight to the fridge. But it didn’t work. He walked straight over it. He didn’t slip one bit. That was weird.

I tried again the next day, but with a different prank. I replaced one of the beers with maple syrup and cough medicine. But when he opened the fridge, he accidentally dropped that beer, and he just chose another one. Was he prank resistant?

Another day without sugar –– it didn’t go so well. At least I was going to live in my dad’s house for a week. He’s pro-sugar.

When I got home, something wasn’t right. He’s usually chipper.

“Dad?” I called out.

I heard a groan from his room. I ran up. He was lying in bed, miserable.

“Whats wrong?” I asked

He answered with some more groaning. I saw that the pillow was tear stained. Then I figured out why. He was sad because my mom and Joseph were together. He still loved my mom!

“Is it because of Joseph?” I asked.

“Yes.”

“Well, I hate him too. He took all of my sugar!”

My dad sat straight up. He knew that I had to have sugar. He was the same way. “He couldn’t have!”

“He did. You know what, Dad?” I asked him, “We should get him out. Together.”

“How?” he asked.

“I think I have an idea,” I told him

………………………………………….

Joseph came home from a long day at the bar. He had to leave because the barkeeper kicked him out for starting a bar fight. He opened the door of his girlfriend’s house and was ready to pass out on the couch. He sat down on the comfy couch and was happy until…

“YAAA!” The couch popped up!

“AHH,” Joseph screamed.

He ran out of the house and sprinted to the bar to get away from the haunted couch.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

My dad and I high-fived. He had dressed up in a couch suit, and we waited for Joseph to sit down, after which my dad popped up. We scared the crap out of him!

One of the few things Joseph loved in life (his couch) was taken away from him –– at this house, at least. Maybe he would leave now! He did not really love my mom, I don’t think, he just loved our couch and our food. He didn’t like our couch anymore but maybe he would love….

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Joseph finally built up the courage to go back into his girlfriend’s house. He opened the door and found someone sitting on the couch. She took up the whole couch. Her waist was the size of the couch. Trust me, it was an extra large couch too. Her finger was as big as his arm. There were crumbs all over her face and shirt. To Joseph, she was beautiful.

“Hello,” she bellowed. “My name is Jo Jo.”

“Do you like beer?” he asked her.

“Yes,” she answered

“Do you like food?” he asked.

“Hell yeah!” she said.

“Take me with you!” Joseph pleaded. “You’re perfect for me!”

“Okay, honey bun!” she said. She picked him up and squeezed through the door. They ran away together.

And those two lived happily ever after. They were almost the same people! As for Jones….

Both my dad and my mom watched the whole thing. When Jo Jo and Joseph left, both of my parents started kissing.

“That was horrible, Jack! I hated Joseph so much! All he loved me for was my fridge, my couch, and my food!” my mom said between kisses.

“I missed you so much!” my dad said.

“I never want another situation like this again! Let’s never get divorced again!” my mom said.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

After that, my parents didn’t get divorced any more. They didn’t want to have such a bad situation again.

We all lived happily ever after. As for Jo Jo and Joseph, they were happy too. Everybody was happier.

I was happier to not be around Joseph. My dad was not miserable anymore. My mom didn’t have to deal with Joseph anymore. We were all happier.

THE END

 

Epilogue –– Ten years later

 

We were all sad yesterday. We had to attend the funeral of Joseph John.

Yup. Joseph died. At the age of 73. He was drunk and climbed on Jo Jo’s back. She lost balance and fell out the window. Joseph died, but Aunt Jo Jo was saved by her fat belly. She started bouncing when she fell, but she didn’t get hurt. Aunt Jo Jo was very sad that day. They had been perfect together.

 

The author that inspired me to write this genre was Jeff Kinney, the author of the “Diary of a Wimpy Kid” series. The Genre is Realistic Fiction, but with Comedy in it too. In both my story and his book, Something bad happens to the main character, and they plot many schemes to stop it. None of the schemes work, but in the end, the bad thing goes away and they live happily ever after. Although it is a serious topic, I made it funny, because I like comedy.

The Titanic

One day Bob woke up. He remembered he was going to go on the Titanic. He was rushing because he was late. He got all of his stuff, grabbed his ticket, and he got some food and materials. He was going to play jacks and some cards with people on the Titanic.

Then he got in a taxi, and he told the driver to go to the Titanic. He got on the Titanic.

He was in room 100. He wanted to look outside to see a nice view. He met somebody outside on the deck. Her name was Scream. So he asked her, “Do you want to play jacks?”

She said, “Yes!” Ten minutes later, the ship crashed into an iceberg, and it was sinking.  They tried to get in a lifeboat, but it was too late. They tried to get in another lifeboat, but it was full. There were no more lifeboats. They were all full except the captain’s, but it was too far away. It had sunk already. It was near the end of the ship, but half of it was already sunken.

It became really cold. They had to get in a lifeboat! They tried to make a lifeboat, but it didn’t work! Bob took his axe and chopped some wood off the Titanic, so they could make a lifeboat. They quickly made it. They got some paddles, and they lifted it off. Then they jumped in it.

They got back to England and went to their houses. Then Bob said, “Do you want to go on another boat, the Titan?”

Scream said, “Sure! What day are you free?”

“Saturdays and Sundays.”

“How about Sunday?” Scream said.

“Sure,” Bob said. So they went back to their houses and they rested. They lived happily ever after!

Alexander Percy Lawrence Peter Henry Winkharp’s Cellar Peddlers (Excerpt)

The girl holding a basket on the street.

Filled with neatly rolled newspapers, plain white rags, and red apples without so much as a speck of yellow or green on them, the woven container is in almost perfect condition, as if someone has worked hard every night to repair its every scuff and scratch. All strange things, considering the fact that she is obviously homeless and extremely poor. There are many other girls much the same as her in looks, except of course for their patched-up baskets filled with newspapers, green apples, or white rags with remains of old stains showing through, but never more than one of these options lies in their contraptions. These children are scattered around quite a lot, almost hiding this strange girl if it were not for the calls advertising her goods. It is also evident that she is better-dressed than all of these forlorn-looking creatures, who are letting their last morsels of hope shine through small cracks in iron barred windows, hoping that the bits of golden warmth will be enough to attract customers on the crisp day. It is not. But she, just this one girl alone, with the blue-gray rag around her head and the simple sweater and skirt that must have once have been red, does not seem to be having any trouble attracting the busy passerby crossing the narrow street to her small walled in corner, surrounded on two sides by solid brick, drenched in a stench of rotten fish and murky fog from the old days. Yet the girl always seems to be standing on, or perhaps next to, a clean sheet something like a welcome mat that she invites her customers to wipe their feet on, perhaps to increase her chances of customers. But is this really the cause of the steady stream of pedestrians hurrying over from the street, not a rushing river, not any real type of river, but a forest stream, a stream just the same? I think not. Perhaps it has something to do with the extra coins dropped at her feet with a quiet whisper, “For your master, dear, blessings to him for all he’s done for our world.” the girl’s quick nod is a gesture of thanks, almost a “The same to you, for all your generosity.” Perhaps this has something to do with the words embroidered, neatly enough, on one of her sweaters:

Alexander Winkharp’s Cellar Peddlers

Chapter  1

It was quite a while ago when the first of what came to be the cellar peddlers sprung up, scattered through the narrowest streets of London, of which there remain many. It was the revolutionary idea of the great Alexander Percy Lawrence Peter Henry Winkharp, though few knew of his middle names. As one of the most generous of his time, Alexander had felt compelled to help those whom he saw every day standing in rags on the street. For a while, he did what one would expect from someone with these motivations: daily he would go out, delivering food and blankets to the poor. But Alexander did not feel satisfied. He wondered, rightly, why, if he happened to spill a bottle of shoe polish at the shoe polish factory where he worked, and had to pay for it out of his salary, and if he couldn’t afford extra food for the day, why should someone else suffer? For days and nights, Alexander wracked his brain for a solution. What he came up with was what would grow to become the Cellar Peddlers.

Alexander saved up enough to buy a few small cots at a junkyard sale. After fixing them up quite a lot, he sold them off again, making a reasonably sized profit; then again, these were cots. This simple process of buying, fixing, and selling once more to make a profit has been titled over our many years of existence as “Flipping,” and is indeed considered a distinguished profession in its own right. Alexander, though he would die before sinking to the level of his day’s low down “Flippers,” discovered that the art came quite naturally to him and made a mental note of doing it some more, secretly, of course, in the future. Now, enough on the subject of flipping, as this is not a matter that should venture to the center of your attention.

With a fraction of his small wages and the profit from the cots, Alexander did the most surprising thing you could imagine: he bought another four tiny, dirt-strewn cots that reeked with a vigorous stench of garbage. Alexander hurried to clean them up as fast as he could, for winter was approaching, and the extreme generosity of this person who challenges that of any other could not possibly permit his less fortunate friends to be forced to bear the harsh conditions of the winter, entirely out of doors and in the snow and slush – especially, with his plan in the workings, they might possibly, for perhaps just a couple of days, have a warm place to sleep and food for a day or two.

This done, on the very next Saturday when Alexander left his respectable shelter for his usual route – on which he often brought food to and dropped coins around the small community of beggar families where that rumor of his kindness had assembled – he stood atop the low rickety stoop of his building, scrutinizing the dusty, rat-ridden landscape beside the Thames, searching for just the right subjects on whom to test out his new plan, namely any groups containing children. He took a deep breath before taking a single step, remembering the long hours he had been up the night before, and thinking of the perfect way to do this. An announcement would not work. The ragamuffin families were not acquainted with him enough, and speaking to them as if he were their king would no doubt be dangerous. Nor would flyers, he knew, as many of the destitute population could not write their own names.

At last, though, in the darkest hours of night, Alexander knew that what he must do was speak to the groups he chose individually, to decipher the slang that made up their distinct tongue, and to convince them that he could indeed brighten their family’s’ futures. That he, though he lived in a tenement, lived throughout the entirety of its three low-ceilinged floors as its owner and was more than willing to share, if it were for the better.

So out and onto the roughly paved streets went he, out went the man with a heart as soft as silk and as big as an elephant. Out as a hero he would go when he was set to save the world, a feat which there is little doubt that Alexander achieved throughout his life. Out with long strides toward the first group he had set his sights on, whilst laying out the usual things he laid out on these trips: piles of food wrapped in thin blankets, dumpster clothes fixed up good as new, rusted trays nobody wanted except those who were sensible enough to know how to fix such a simple thing. But oh, save the sensible, for by the time any one of those poor souls who live in a world that seems so cold and far away from them got ahold of one of those trays, the once fine and shining metal under the rust was scratched and scored, and the crevices that lined the surface were filled with dirt. It was in this sort of moment that Alexander wished dearly that he had prepared much more. Through his head that seemed to be turning on and off repeatedly, he searched for the words he had planned so carefully in the night that seemed to have disappeared, calling to them and begging them to stay.

In vain Alexander tried to delay each placement of a gift, in vain he tried to ignore the ever-nearing lamp post, under which lay a few ratty blankets and tin cans, a home not fit for a hog, nor any living being. But a home it was, for a poor threesome of the human race itself: a man, a woman, and one small girl who had barely a scrap of cloth in her possession. They had lived in the shadow of the same post since before Alexander moved into the neighborhood, and the two groups were something close to friendly neighbors, but never daring to admit it and make the friendship official. However, it was truly because of them that any of the new arrivals had any trust for Alexander whatsoever, and they, of all people, he thought, as the lamp post grew nearer, would help him with his plan even if no one else did. Slowly, Alexander walked closer, comforting himself with the fact that he often stopped to talk with little Nellie and her family, and they would most definitely not be curious if he did so once more.

So Alexander took one last package from the sack he was carrying, and he knelt down to place it down. He recalled wrapping a thick shawl around a stack of warm cakes, then enclosing the package in old rags. Knelt in the same way as all those around him, the most generous man in the entire city lowered his head to exchange a few murmurs with the lamp post family. Nellie tugged at her mother’s dress and the two engaged in even quieter conversation before Mrs. Ledwell raised her head.

“It is true. You do seem to have something on your mind.” Then little Nellie raised her eyes and whispered in her own small voice, light as a feather.

“Relieve us of our curiosity, oh, if you could!” Nellie’s voice had always been subdued, her face always lowered, causing many to believe that her time of dreams and fantasies were over. But day by day, Alexander saw a glint in her eye, and knowing that the flame would hurt its master if extinguished, he liked to replenish it by slipping her a package of her own – a coin wrapped in a rag – which she would slip into the small brown box that the first coin had come in. Alexander often wondered how much she had saved up, for that was the only way a poor child knew how to use money. He believed she must be fit to be rich now, with all the little copper pieces filling her box. Then Alexander saw the faces of Nellie and her mother, and remembered their question. He recalled his thoughts and the plans he had made, just for this moment.

And Alexander spoke.

Tornado Boy

Hello, I am Emy, the main character of this story. My grandfather died reading a book (I do not know the title) because a tornado came out of the book. Now, let me tell you the story.

So, it was a regular day at school (Friday, if you want to know) and my friend Elvis kept reading this weird book. Because my name is Emy, he calls me Emmanuel.

Back to the book: it was all ripped up, and the title was Bressling. The pages were dark, the words were light. You could tell it was a very old book. One day, during recess, Elvis was reading this book. He said that he liked this book. I sat next to him, reading my own book. Suddenly, a tornado came out of the book and sucked Elvis in. I got so scared that I ran home.

I asked my dad, “What was the name of the book that Grandpa was reading when he got sucked in?”

“Oh, I don’t know… Bressling, I think. Why do you want to know?” asked my Dad.

Without answering my Dad, I ran to school terrified and breathing heavily. When I finally got to school, I took the book from Elvis’s desk. I looked. The title was “Bressling.”

“I knew it!” I said. I looked at the page where Elvis stopped because the book was still open to that page. I knew it was the correct page. Then, I looked at the sentence where he had gotten sucked in: “Then the book took in a man and a boy, Albert Senstein and Elvis Toddler.”

Albert Senstein was my grandfather. Elvis Toddler was my friend. “This book’s haunted!” said my friend, Nate. He was sitting in the room the whole time paying attention to his work until I ran to Elvis’s desk. Then I thought, The only way I get to Elvis is to read the book until a tornado sucks me in.

I started reading the book from the beginning. Then, a tornado came out of the book and sucked me in. The last thing I saw was Nate running out of the room. Next, I was falling from the sky and landed on the floor of a desert. Next to me was Elvis. He pulled me up and started talking.

“Hey! Emmanuel! Look at this old man. This is a character from the book.” He pointed at a white-bearded man. “His name is Zalen.”

“Hi, Zalen, I’m –– ”

“Emmanuel, I know. Hello, Emmanuel,” said Zalen, in an old, old voice that reminded me of my friend’s grandpa. That’s when I realized there was another man who looked about 72 years old.

I didn’t even know him, but he must’ve known me because he came up and hugged me and said, “Emy, I only saw you as a little baby. I always wanted to see you when you were nine years old. Now look at you –– you have grown. I am your grandfather who was sucked in by a tornado from a book.”

Then Nate came plopping on my head and said, “I started reading the book and then a tornado came out and I ended up here!”

I was annoyed. “So not only did I come here, but you did too. Now I have to get all of you out!”

Then my grandfather Albert looked at me. “Hey. Who put you in charge? I’m the oldest… I’m supposed to be in charge.”

Zalen looked at him as if he were blind and said, “I’m the oldest. Look at you. You’re 72. I’m 137!”

Then Albert said, “You’re in the book! You’re supposed to be inside the tornado!”

Zalen said, “Right, yeah. I wish the author of this book had never written it. Now I’m stuck here for the rest of my life!”

“It’s fine,” I said, “but how are we going to get out?”

Then Zalen said, “I know this witch that lives in the north. All we have to do is walk 100 miles to the north and then we’ll find her. She is the author of this book. She’ll know how to get us out.”

“Okay, not helping. 100 miles?!”

Zalen said, “Okay, fine, fine. But it’s better than nothing. What other choice do we have?”

“Good point. Isn’t there any faster way to get there?”

“No, sorry. We could camp. I have tents and food –– a whole lot of food!”

“Ok,” said five-year-old Nate, who did not know what was going on. He was only pretending to know what was going on.

Then, we heard a strange noise. The next thing we knew, Nate was gone.

We looked around for Nate, until Zalen said, “Where could he be? In this desert, there’s nothing but sand. There’s no hiding places.”

Albert said, “I disagree. There are cactuses all over this place.”

He was right: the desert was full of cactuses. I got an idea.

“How about the four of us split around and look for him? He always plays around with jokes,” I said. Then we heard the same noise again.

“It doesn’t sound anything like Nate,” Elvis said. “I think he is making one of his stupid noises.”

Suddenly, a little dwarf came out holding Nate.

Elvis said, “How much do you want for that stupid little boy?”

“Five hundred bucks,” said the dwarf in the same voice they heard earlier.

Zalen said, “You came to exactly the right person! I’m a billionaire!” Then he held up a wallet, which was not exactly a wallet. It was a big bag of money and gold. “I got it from my father!” he exclaimed, pulling out five $100 bills and giving them to the dwarf.

The dwarf said, “Give me another $500, or I’ll kill the boy.”

Then Elvis said, “Oh, whatever… Hey, dwarf, I know dwarves like big hats. Do you want this hat?” He took off his own hat.

The dwarf said, “No!” and pulled out a knife.

Then Elvis said, “I go to karate!” He wrestled the dwarf to the ground, took the knife, and threw it into one of the cactuses.

“I knew it would become useful someday!” said Elvis. He got off the dwarf and grabbed Nate. Then he said, “Don’t mess with me again!” The dwarf ran away.

Zalen took out a compass and said, “Go that way. Let’s go!” He pointed North, and we started walking. After 50 miles (we walked really fast) Zalen said, “Okay. My feet can’t walk anymore. Let’s rest.”

“Okay,” said Albert. “Do you boys agree?”

“Yes!” said Elvis and I.

“What about you, Emmanuel?” asked Elvis.

“I said yes!”

“Oh,” said Elvis.

Zalen pulled out a big tent and sticks from his backpack and started unfolding it. Then he put the sticks up and put up the tent and it was standing.

Zalen said, “Get inside the tent unless you want to stay outside. It’s getting dark.” Albert tried to go inside the tent but Nate pushed him aside and went in first.

Then Albert went in and said, “Nate! That was rude.”

Elvis got in next and asked, “Emmanuel, are you coming in?”

“Yeah,” I said, climbing in.

When I woke up, I was not in the tent….

 

I was not in my tent, and I was not even lying down –– I was in a chair. I looked around. There were other chairs, and Zalin, Elvis, Nate, and Albert were sitting in them. I tried to stand but could not because I was in front of a desk. So were my friends.

A man came into the room. He had dirty blonde hair, brown eyes, yellow teeth, black skin, black glasses, black pants, white t-shirt, and white sneakers.

He said, “Why don’t we take a test? Why are all of you the same? I’m not included.”

Then Nate raised his hand.

“Yes?” said the man. “Oh, by the way, if you cheat on this test, you will be eliminated. Oh, sorry –– did I say eliminated? I meant executed. Now that will calm you down.”

Nate said, “We all have to answer your stupid questions?”

“Um, no,” said the man.

Albert raised his hand.

“Yes?”

“We all have white teeth.”

“No.”

Then I raised my hand. “Yes, we are all captured, but we don’t care.”

“What do you mean?”

“You captured us, but none of us seem to care.”

“OH, now I get it. No. Now I will kill you…. Actually, no. I will spare you and give you one more chance. When I say ‘hey,’ you will race to the end of the room. I will kill the loser.”

We lined against the wall.

Then Albert said, “Hey!” and ran. When he got to the other side of the room, everybody looked at him, surprised.

Then the man said, “Look dude. I didn’t say ‘hey.’ You did. Get back to the other side of the wall. And when I say hey, you run. Is that understood?”

“Yes,” we all said.

Then the man said, “Hey!” and we all ran.

To Elvis’s luck, he got to the wall first. Then I got there and then Albert and then the limping old Zalin. We all looked at Nate, but he wasn’t running –– he was looking at the man.

The man said, “Okay. The little boy in the pajamas will be killed.”

Elvis wrestled the man to the floor and took the man’s gun and pointed at his face.

Then the man said, “Shoot, you stupid idiot.” He smiled a creepy smile that showed his yellow teeth.

Elvis shot. There was a great big sound that sounded like a bomb exploded. We all looked at the man, but the man was laughing. The gun was blank.

So, Elvis punched the man in the face, and the man fainted. Then, we found a bucket of bullets in one of the corners of the room. We loaded the gun and Elvis shot the wall. The gun worked because there was a hole.

“Let’s go,” he said.

We all stepped out and Zalin said, “What? This was the desert we were walking through until we woke up in that stinking room that smelled of rotten poop.” Then, we saw the tent. We all turned around and saw the room. But it wasn’t really a room –– it was a few cactuses built up into a room. We saw the hole we had gone through and then we understood everything: the man had taken cactuses, built up the room, and dragged us in there.

“I am keeping this weapon,” said Elvis.

“Listen, you kept the knife. Now you’re keeping the gun? You gotta be kidding me,” I said.

“Okay, fine, fine. You get the knife. I get to keep the gun.”

“No, I want the gun. You get to keep the knife.”

“No, I do.”

“No, I do.”

“Nope, I do.”

“No, I do.”

“No –– ”

“OK, can I say something?” asked Zalen.

“No!” Elvis and I said in unison.

“Okay,” said Zalen, and he walked away.

“Fine –– you get to keep the gun. I keep the knife,” said Elvis. He put the knife in his belt and handed over the gun. I put the gun in my belt (we both had belts because they were part of the school uniform).

Then we started walking. Soon, we had walked another 50 miles, and Zalen said, “Stop!” If we’d walked one more step, we would’ve crashed into a big hut with a roof that looked like a witch’s hat.

“This is it!” said Zalen. We knocked, and a very old woman opened the door.

She had a hat that looked exactly like the roof.

“Come in, dears,” she said in a very kind voice. Inside the hut there were many pictures. In the middle of the room there was a small black table, with pot of some green liquid on top.

“Can I drink that?” asked Nate.

“If you want to explode, yes,” she said, pausing. “Ah, yes, you don’t know my name and I don’t know yours. I’ll go first: my name is Minerva. What’s yours?”

“Zalen,” said Zalen.

“Albert,” said Albert.

“Emy,” I said.

“Elvis,” said Elvis.

“Poopy Pants!” said Nate.

“His name is Nate,” said Elvis.

“No, my name is Poopy Pants!” cried Nate.

“Alright,” said Minerva. “I believe that your name is Nate… but I am going to call you Poopy Pants.” Then she asked, “Why did you come?”

“We want to get out into the outer world,” I said.

“Who? All of you? And what do you mean by the outer world?”

“The answer to the first question: Nate –– well, Poopy Pants –– me, Elvis, and Albert want to get out. To the second question, we were trapped in a book called Bressling…” And I told the story about Bressling but kept forgetting to say Poopy Pants instead of Nate.

“Ah, yes, Bressling. I wrote it, and I cast a spell on it. And I read it and I got sucked in because I wanted to. And then I forgot something, so I cast a spell to write in the names that got sucked in. Now, all you need to do is drink this little potion that I am going to make right now… Here it is. Hokatee pokatee lokatee pookatee shokatee nokatee sokatee… ah, where was I…?” she interrupted herself. “Oh, right, yes. Noopatee kloopatee crumpatootatee, and, last of all… compoopatee! Oh, how dumb am I? I forgot the bowl, the water, and my wand.” Minerva got the bowl and the wand, and pointed at the bowl and said, “Shoompatee, gloompatee.” And then some water burst out of the wand and flew into the bowl. “Enough! Enough, you stupid spray!” The wand stopped the water and she said, “Now, what was the spell? Hokatee pokatee lokatee pookatee shokatee nokatee sokatee noopatee kloopatee crumpatootatee!” Then the water turned red, then orange, then yellow, then light green, then dark green, then light blue, then dark blue, then pink, and finally purple. And then it turned every color, in a mix. She took four cups and put them on the table. She took the bowl and poured equally into each cup.

“Alright. All of you who want to go back to the outer world, please drink this.” We all drank it except for Zalen. Then Minerva said, “Alright. Now, in ten minutes, you will go back into the outer world, in front of the book in the place where you were reading when you got sucked in. Why don’t you find something that’ll entertain you for the time being?”

Then, she pointed her wand at the table and said, “Shoompatee, loompatee, gloompatee, foompatee!”

A chessboard with chess pieces appeared on the table, and Elvis and I sat down at the table and started playing. “Thanks for the chess board,” I said.

She conjured a magic carpet using some other words I couldn’t hear correctly.

“Here you go, Poopy Pants,” said Minerva. Nate jumped onto the magic carpet and started flying around, and he went out the window and flew around the yard. Nine minutes later, the magic carpet landed. Nate got off. Elvis and I finished the chess game with a stalemate. Elvis was so close to winning –– he had a queen up –– but I drew into a stalemate.

Minerva shouted, “One minute to go!”

Sixty seconds later, we appeared in the classroom where we’d started.

“I miss Minerva and Zalen,” I said.

“I miss them too…. If we want to see them, we have the book.” Elvis pointed at Bressling. Then Nate started crying. We looked at him.

“What’s wrong now?” we asked him.

“I miss my flying carpet!” he cried.

I slapped my head. “He’s so stupid!”

Elvis and I ran home with Albert. We came home (by the way, I forgot to tell you, Elvis was my neighbor. I lived in apartment 5D and He lived in 6D).

My father sat up and said, “I do recognize you, Daddy. How the heck did you get here from that book?” He pointed at Bressling, which I was holding in my armpit.

Then Albert said, “You should’ve met Minerva.” And the three of us laughed.

 

Thanksgiving Turkey

This is what I look like. I have big feathers on my back, a big stomach, a red neck, a beak, two legs, and toes on each foot.

I am a turkey living on Farmer Brown’s turkey farm. It is November. So you know what that means, don’t you? I will be roasted and barbecued on the grill the day of Thanksgiving! Then you will see the fat part which is our breast. Then you see two legs. We are usually surrounded by gravy and cranberries.                  

I have to come up with a plan to get out of the farm before the horrible day, Thanksgiving. I spent all night thinking of a plan to get out of the farm. Finally, after a long time I come up with an amazing plan. I will disguise myself as an animal. I will wake up my friends and my mom, but not my dad because he was already roasted last year.

So I wake them up to tell them my plan. They are all really mad that I woke them up, but they agree with me and say that they will escape the farm with me. The only problem is that I don’t know which animal to disguise myself as. Also, Thanksgiving is only two days away. I hear a coyote howl and I know it is midnight.

Suddenly I remember Farmer Brown always shoos away the coyotes. I think that if I became a coyote Farmer Brown would shoo me away and never let me in again. I wake the other turkeys up again but they won’t let me talk, they just yell at me. I go back to bed frustrated.

Finally it is morning and all the turkeys are awake but not because of me. I tell them my disguise and we immediately get to work on finding materials for the disguise. I really hope this works. Nothing can stop us from not escaping. That is, unless we fail, which is probably 50 percent.We also have a 50 percent chance of succeeding.

 

(Only one day until Thanksgiving)

 

We find hay in the shed, for the fur. For the ears we use two feathers that we plucked from our body. The tail will be yarn from our name tags which are wrapped around our necks. Finally, since coyotes walk on all four legs we will need to make fake legs. My mom says that we can use sticks. I think it’s a clever idea. So we find sticks and practice walking with four legs. However, when we finish practicing it is already dinner time.

Farmer Brown comes out of the barn and says, “Eat up because you better be plump so we can roast you and eat you up.

I look at my friends and smile. We won’t be roasted.

Exactly at midnight we put on our costumes and howl. I am so nervous that my plan will work. So I tell the other turkeys, “I am sorry if this doesn’t work but you would’ve been roasted anyway. I enjoyed my time living with you. I was really sad that this might be the last time I ever see them again.”

Farmer Brown runs outside and yells, “Don’t go in my turkey farm.”

We run away and don’t stop until we were off the turkey premises.

 

(The day of Thanksgiving)

 

In the morning I hear Farmer Brown yell to his wife, Mrs. Brown, “The turkeys are gone!”

Mrs. Brown yelled at the top of her lungs, “Thanksgiving without turkey? NOOO!” Her voice echoed throughout the city.

 

SO REMEMBER, NEVER EVER EVER EAT A TURKEY EVER AGAIN BECAUSE NOW YOU KNOW HOW US TURKEYS FEEL ABOUT IT.

Ogre and Sophie and Most of All Sophia

Once upon a time… wait! I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Sophocles –– Sophie for short. I love the cool colors; blue, purple, and green. I am a boy. I am a leprechaun who is kind, and NOT full of mischief. I want to make the world better.

All the people in my village were scared of the ogre, but I thought that the ogre was probably actually kind. The ogre was just misunderstood.

One day, I was playing with my best friend Sophia, and we started talking about the ogre.

“Why are they scared of the ogre? I think he’s just nice. What has he done?” I asked.

“I agree with you,” Sophia said.

“Let’s find out, and let’s talk to her.”

“Sophie, why? I’m really glad you want to go see the ogre, but we need to do it in secret.  We can’t tell our parents. They’d be worried. Do you agree?”

“Yeah.”

“But I hate lying to our parents. What should we do?” Sophia was worried.

“Maybe just say ‘Hi’ to the ogre and run away?”

“That’s a good idea. Maybe we should tell them after. Then it’s not really lying.”

“That’s a good idea.”

They walk through the forest.  

“It’s so dark in this wood. Hold my hand, Sophie! I’m scared,” Sophia said.

An owl hooted.

“What’s that?” Sophia screamed.

“It’s just an owl.”

“Oh! Look!” Sophia pointed. “It’s her.”  

The ogre was singing a song about loneliness and love and how she wanted to have friends. She was playing the cello.

“Oh, how I wish I had friends, but I’m so ugly to the end. Oh, how I wish I had love, but I sigh and eat a dove.” She was holding a dove and apologizing for using the rhyme.

“Hello!” The ogre said, noticing us. “Who are you? You’re so cute!”

“I’m Sophie, and this is my friend Sophia! Who are you?”

“Why, I’m Pip Bounce.”

“I just wanted to know why the villagers are afraid of you.”

“I don’t know, maybe because I’m ugly. I was a princess, but a witch turned me into an ugly ogre! The only way to break the curse is if I become friends with the people of the village!”  

“M-maybe you could help the villagers. We’re having a harvest and we could use your height!” Sophia suggested.

“Good idea,” Pip Bounce said.

“Sophie!” My mom entered the clearing. “Where have you been?” She saw the ogre and screamed while running away, “AHH!”  

We all ran after her, and Pip Bounce followed us all the way into town, filling a large basket with apples.

“They’re friends with the ogre!” someone cried. Pip Bounce leaned down and handed apples to the people. With a flash, she transformed back into the princess she was. Everyone now knew she was a trustworthy princess who was actually kind.

The Ice Cream Monster

Jack was at the park eating ice cream. He was alone. He was sitting on a bench. He finished his ice cream and decided to play on the swings. He was feeling good. He was joyful. When it was night, he started to become worried because a big ice cream monster tried to attack him. The ice cream monster had a big mouth with goopy ice cream in his mouth. He had an ice cream ninja sword, and threw it at Jack.

Jack ran away. He ran to Manhattan, but the monster followed him. Jack stood up in a big tower, and he told the people, “Help! A monster is coming!”

They said, “We’re going to attack the ice cream monster!” They were getting ready to attack the monster. They used a lot of ice cream with a big pile of ice.

Jack was doing something different. He was trying to get an ice cream shooter. He got it from the ice cream material store. It was near the ice cream shop on Sesame Street.

He went back to the group. He said, “We’re going on the train to find the ice cream monster. He is always in the ice cream store next to Toys R Us.”

All of the police were blocking Jack when he went to the ice cream shop because the store was closed. One of the teammates distracted the police. Jack was distracting the police too. All of the teammates went inside the shop and the ice cream monster was inside. The teammate shoot the ice cream monster with a lot of ice cream and ice. It caused him to vomit ice cream. It caused him to have a broken eye and slime was going over him.

He fought back with a ninja star and one of the teammates fell down. Jack had sleeping potion and put it on the police. The police fell asleep. Jack came in in slow motion. His body is like he’s actually cool. His arms and his legs are moving slow and his arms are in his pockets. The ice cream monster had melted. And all of the teammates were happy and they went back home. Jack went to his mom and he told his mom that a big monster came, but Jack attacked the monster. All of the teammates said bye to Jack and Jack went back to sleep. And the teammates went back to sleep. And it was the next morning, and another monster came. They cooked up a plan. They smashed the monster with a big giant hammer and he was dead. THE END!

The Adventures of Digger and Scrappy

Chapter 1

“Hi, my name is Scrappy, and this is Digger. We’re in the shelter with all the other dogs. WOOF WOOF,” Scrappy said.

The shelter door opened, and two girls came in with their dad.

“Their dad looks like the president!” said Scrappy.

“He is!” said Digger.

“Wow!” said Scrappy.

The two girls came over to their pen and said, “I want those two!” Digger and Scrappy were so happy. The girls took them out of the pen and picked them up. Then their dad paid for the dogs, and they went to the car. Scrappy wondered if they lived in a house, so he asked Digger. Digger thought that Scrappy had lost his mind.

“Scrappy, they live in a mansion!”

“Oh, yeah,” said Scrappy.

Then they tried to guess the girls’ names.

 

Chapter 2

“Maybe Fuzzy!” said Digger.

“Or maybe Coco!” said Scrappy.

“Wait!” said Digger, “What about human names? We’re saying dog names.”

“Maybe Megan!” said Scrappy.

“Hey, Megan, are you excited that we’re going to Hawaii for Christmas?” said the dad.

“Yeah!” said Megan in an excited voice.

“Score!” said Digger. “Bridget, are you going to go in the pool in Hawaii?”

“Yes!” said Bridget.

“This is going to be great!” said Digger.

 

Chapter 3

They were in the park when Scrappy saw another dog. He wanted to play with the dog. The dog was a golden retriever like Digger. Digger was right next to Scrappy, so Scrappy started to walk over to the other golden retriever. Digger followed. Scrappy asked if they could play with the golden retriever.

The golden retriever said nothing. He couldn’t hear Scrappy because Scrappy was so small. Scrappy felt sad and began to walk away.

Digger asked, “Why are you sad?”

Scrappy said, “I feel tiny… That dog couldn’t hear me, and I wanted to play with him.”

“That’s sad,” said Digger. “I’m going to go talk to the dog and tell him that you want to play with him.”

Digger started to walk over to the big dog. He asked, “Can Scrappy play with you? By the way, my name is Digger, and this is my best friend Scrappy.”

“Hi!” said the big dog.

“Oh, I forgot, what is your name?” Digger asked.

“My name is Whiskers,” the big dog said.

“Good name!” said Digger.

He whispered to Scrappy, “Funny name.”

“Yeah,” said Scrappy, giggling.

A few minutes later the girls called them to leave, so they ran and jumped on them, knocking them down. They started to lick their faces. Then their dad called them from the front porch of the house. The girls stood up, with Scrappy still holding on to Bridget’s leg. Digger told him to get off Bridget’s leg, so he did. They started to run up to the house, and they went through the doggy door upstairs to their room.

Chapter 4

When Digger got up the stairs, he and Scrappy talked about what they were going to do the next day.

The next day, when Digger woke up, he looked around, but Scrappy wasn’t in his bed. He washed his paws in the little doggy sink and went down to have breakfast. When he got down the stairs, Scrappy was there waiting for him.

“Did you hear the news, Digger? They’re going to Hawaii!”

“Who’s going to what the what?” asked Digger

“They’re going to Hawaii!” said Scrappy.

“Who is going to Hawaii?” said Digger.

“Bridget is going and Megan is going and the president is going,” said Scrappy.

“Ohh!” said Digger. “Are we going?”

“No! Of course not. I wouldn’t even want to go. Get stuck in the airplane for, like, 100 hours? I wouldn’t even be able to stay alive for two minutes!”

“What did you say?” said Digger.

“Oh, whatever,” muttered Scrappy.

That night, Digger and Scrappy helped the girls pack their bags. The next day, Digger and Scrappy said goodbye to the girls. They felt sad and confident at the same time because they were going to be left alone.

 

Chapter 5: The Robbers

For the next few hours, Digger and Scrappy slept. The doorbell rang. They started to bark – a package for the president! Digger opened the door. The delivery man ran in, stole everything, (chairs, tables, and the medal that Megan had won) and tried to get out. But, before the robber got out, the dogs already had a plan. They got the rope from the basement, tied it to the staircase, ran across the room, out the door, put the doorstop in, and waited. Then, they took the table and chairs and smashed them into the door. A few minutes later the dogs were fast asleep again while the robbers were taking all the stuff, but they were faking it. The robbers got out the back door by cutting a hole in it with their knife. Digger and Scrappy woke up, and they climbed up the wall and wrapped the rope around the door. As soon as the robbers opened the door, a big punching jack-in-the-box punched them in the face. They fell down and landed on the table.

Digger and Scrappy called the other dogs from the neighborhood. They ran through the door and started licking the robbers’ faces. Finally, Scrappy came out and gave the robbers a supergalactic lick. The robbers got up as soon as they could and left.

 

Chapter 6: The Return of the President

Twenty minutes later, the president parked the car in the driveway. Digger and Scrappy climbed on the heater and started to bark. Bridget and Megan ran to the door, swung it open, and picked Scrappy and Digger up and twirled around.

“My little fluffies!” said Bridget.

They squirmed like worms until they finally put them on the sofa. Digger and Scrappy rolled around amd couldn’t see anything. Then, Digger bumped into Scrappy and he almost fell off, but he caught him with his paws. They ran up the stairs and jumped onto the girls’ bed. They ran after the puppies but went to the wrong room. Then Digger and Scrappy went to another room because they were coming to their room. Eventually, when they found them, the puppies jumped on their legs.

“Arf, arf, arf-dee-arf,” said Digger.

“We can talk, Digger!” said Scrappy.

“Oh yeah!” said Digger.

From that day on, Digger and Scrappy had the best life any dog could wish for.

My Life

Chapter 1

I hear my mother making breakfast. The sun’s warmth is on my face, opening the morning to another wonderful day. I walk out of my room down to the kitchen to get breakfast. I eat my breakfast, nice warm pancakes topped with strawberries.

“Ellie, wake up!” I wake up to my friend Claire lightly shaking me to get me up. All the wishes I’ve ever had were in my dream, disappointing me, waking me up to a day trapped in a building I don’t like. I am in an orphanage with other people, people who wish their lives were better. I get out of bed get dressed in the ragged clothes that the orphanage provided for me. I walk out my room, go downstairs to another disgusting breakfast of cold eggs that haven’t been cooked fully. Staring at the eggs, I get the feeling that I should eat them. I have gotten used to it. I’ve been here since I was five. I am fourteen`now, and still stuck in the orphanage.

I remember the day when I was five, waiting for my parents to pick me up at school. It was rainy and foggy. The only person who picked me up was this creepy woman, named Ms. Kunzier. She told me to come with her. She brought me to my house and told me to pack my bags. Then she drove me to this building covered with vines. “You’re staying here now,” she told me. A burst of pain shot up my back; a tear rolled down from my eyes, making its way down to my cheek. She opened the door and walked me to where I was staying. I remember thinking that I would be home soon. But I never went home. An hour later she came back to my room and told me that my parents had been in a car accident.         

***

I used to play outside in my backyard all the time. Now, I cannot go outside whenever I want. The only outside I have is my imagination. I imagine being outside, running free. No one to tell me what to do and what not to do. A big field of grass, trees swaying, the smell of fresh grass. The wind blowing on me. Running away so that no one can find me. Growing up on my own.

No one ever visits this orphanage. I guess it’s because of how creepy it looks. Only once a while someone comes around and takes a tour. I’m probably going to be in here until I’m 18, and then I’ll start a life of my own.

In the orphanage, my life feels a video game, with someone outside the machine controlling every move I make. When the video game gets too old or out of order, I will get out. The video game of life. Obstacles here and there popping up in my face. I wish I was like someone not in an orphanage, someone who has a perfect life.

***

I go back to my room, get into my bed and lay my head on the pillow. My eyes slowly close into a nice soft sleep. I slowly drift off into a weird dream, where Ms. Kunzier is pulling my arm and taking me to a tiny walk in closet. She ties me up in a chair. I jerk my body away from the chair to brake the rope. but the chair gets up with me and follows me wherever I go. I go to the door of the closet and try to get out, but Ms. Kunzier locked the door to keep me in. My eyes slowly open. It’s just a dream, it’s just a dream, I keep telling myself.

 

Chapter 2

“Hey, people!” Claire says.

“Hey!” Molly, my other friend, replies.

“What’s up?” I say.

“You know, the usual, nothing much,” Claire replies.

“Wait!” Molly shouts.

“Shhh,” Claire and I whisper.

“Sorry, but wait — I have an idea!” Molly says.

“Then what is it?” Claire replies impatiently.

“Um… I forgot,” Molly says.

“Ugh” Claire sighs.

“No, really… what were you going to say?” I ask.

“Well, it was probably a really stupid thought,” Molly hesitated.

“Just tell us,” I reply, ignoring Molly. “We’re your friends.”

“Okay, fine,” Claire says.

“It’s impossible, but it’s sort of about how we can escape from here. I mean, I never wanted to be here in the first place,” Molly blurts out.

“Same,” Claire and I say in unison.

“I’ve just always felt blocked up in a jail cell here.”

“Let’s think about a plan. Meet me in Secret Headquarters after lunch,” I say.

Secret Headquarters is a secret place that no one has discovered yet except for us. There is a little door in the bottom of the wall… actually, it’s not really a door, but a little square shaped hole in the wall that functions like a door. When you go inside, there is a little space where you can sit. When Claire and I met, we found a hiding place, and our friendship began. Six months later Molly came along and joined our little friendship. Claire and I showed her Secret Headquarters, and that is how we all became close friends.

When I get to Secret Headquarters, I find Molly quietly reading. “BOO!” I scream.

“Ahhh!” she screams, but then she sees me and starts laughing.

Shortly after, Claire barges into the room. “The worst thing almost happened… well, one of the worst things.”

“What?” I ask.

“Well, Ms. Kunzier stopped me and asked me where I was going, but I said I was going to the bathroom and she let me go,” Claire explains.

“Good thing she didn’t find out about Secret Headquarters,” I say. “Okay, anyway, let’s get started. First, let’s think of a plan.”

“The only way for us to get out of here is to get the key to unlock the main door,” says Claire.

“Well, I know where the key is kept,” replies Molly.  

“Where? How do you know?” I question.  

“Let’s just say that I went into her room once,” Claire answers.

“Was there actually blood and spider webs in her room?” I ask. Everybody says that Ms. Kunzier’s room is filled with blood marks and spider webs.

“Not at all, surprisingly,” Claire replies.

“That’s good to know,” I mutter. “So, back to the planning… How does tomorrow night sound to you guys for the first attempt of the escape?” I ask.

“Sure, I’m fine with that,” says Claire.

“What do you think, Molly?”

“I’m also fine with that,” says Molly.

“Okay, maybe at 1 in the morning, since Ms. Kunzier is probably going to be asleep… even though people say she sleeps with one eye open,” I add. “So, when she is about to close her door to go to sleep, let’s run up to it and push it a crack open. About one hour later we can get the key to open the front door. Sound good?”

“Yes!” says Molly.

“Sure!” says Claire.

“Okay, remember… tomorrow,” I confirm.

We walk out of secret headquarters, quietly chanting, “Escape attempt number one!”

I go to bed thinking that finally I will get out of here.

 

Chapter 3

The next day, Molly, Claire, and I try to get as much sleep as we can so that we’ll be ready for our big night. We pack what is really special to us. I get an old sack and put my stuffed bunny in it. My stuffed bunny’s name is Bun-Bun. I have had Bun-Bun since I was born. In the sack I also pack a bottle of water and some clothes.

At midnight, Molly, Claire, and I sneak to Secret Headquarters. We discuss what we are going to do, and prepare ourselves for the things coming ahead. At 1:30 in the morning, we hear Ms. Kunzier walking down the hall and going to her room.

”Oh my gosh, she is coming!” Molly blurts out. Luckily, in this case, Secret Headquarters is about a meter away from Ms. Kunzier’s bedroom. We hear Ms. Kunzier approach her bedroom door. We rush out to near the entrance of Secret Headquarters. When she opens the door, we quietly run out and slowly close her door until it is open just a crack. Exactly 45 minutes later we take a peek through Ms. Kunzier’s room and see that she’s snoring.

“Okay, Molly, since you are the quietest and you know where the key is, you are going to get the key,” I whisper. Molly tiptoes down to where the key is. Molly sneezes and Ms. Kunzier turns and moans a bit. Molly runs out of the room.

“That was close!” She whispers, relieved. When we get downstairs to the main door, Molly places the key into the key slot.

“Who is that?” a voice says. Molly, Claire, and I jump up in unison. Ms. Saltine, the orphanage maid, comes into the same room as us. “Found you! Girls, you know you should not be down here at this time of night,” she says.

“Sorry, we didn’t mean to–”

Ms. Kunzier cuts me off by coming into the room. “Girls! Go to your room. All of you will have to wake up extra early tomorrow and help make breakfast. We will be having fresh pancakes, and you girls will have fresh leftovers. And bonus! You will clean up all the dirty dishes!” She walks away and cackles her very annoying cackle. She never gives us orphans fresh food – we always have leftovers.

“Ugh…” We all walk back to our bedrooms.     

***

“Try again on your adventure,” Ms. Saltine says to us the next morning. We are all shocked. We do not understand what just happened. It takes us time to understand what she meant. Even though we just did a lot of work by cooking a meal for 25 orphans and are now eating food scraps, we feel like we just accomplished something. Ms. Saltine is on our side.

loser.com

“Donald Trump is a big fat loser because his facial expressions are not good,” said Peaches.

“Well, you need to pee every second,” said Donald Trump.

“Well, actually,” Peaches said, “I only pee every sixty-one seconds.” Peaches hated Donald Trump, because once, Peaches was on loser.com. He loved being on it because he wanted all the media, but Donald Trump took his place. They were enemies.

“You are a peach. You should be ashamed of yourself. And I am a real person.” Donald Trump made fun of Peaches.

“Excuse me? Hold up here. Your face is so ugly that when you wanted to join the ugly contest, they said no pros allowed.” Peaches stood up for himself.

“Donald Trump! Can I take a selfie with you?” a fan of his said.                                                              

“See, Peaches? People love my face so much that they want to take pictures with me,” Donald Trump said.

Peaches grunted, and Donald Trump went to take a selfie with one of his fans.

Donald Trump said, “You’re so fat that when you got locked in Sleepy’s, you had to sleep on the floor.”

Peaches said, “Shut up. Bye.”

Donald Trump said, “I have to go to a party with all of my fans.” Donald Trump threw Peaches in the garbage.

There was a homeless person named Calvin Klein. He was in the military, and he had no legs. He decided to help Peaches, not because he wanted to eat him, but because he wanted to help people who are hurt like him.

Calvin Klein took Peaches out of the garbage can and threw him at Donald Trump. Calvin put padding under Donald Trump just in case Peaches fell. Peaches and Calvin Klein high-fived each other.

Peaches started to have a population of fans walk toward him. The people were making a heart shape.

“Boo, Donald Dump.”

After, Donald Trump said, “I am walking towards my fans’ party anyway, so bye.”

A minute later, Donald Trump saw all of his fans coming toward the heart shape.

Donald Trump and Peaches started a debate.

Donald Trump said, “If anybody wants to marry me, I’m rich.”

And everybody except the man with no legs went to go from a heart shape in front of Donald Trump.

Obama came in, and since he was president, he had the right to put Peaches on loser.com. Now all of Donald Trump’s fans became Peaches fans. Peaches was so happy that he gave each homeless person $500 for food.

“My plan for 2020 is to get every homeless person a home and food.” One thousand people clapped and two people booed. Since the clapping was so loud, no one heard the boos.

So now, it was time to vote, and 90 percent of the whole world voted for Peaches except for Donald Trump’s wives and daughters. (The reason it was 10 percent was because Donald Trump married so many people.)

Untitled

Chapter 1

I admired the little brown houses as I walked through the quaint village. I stopped at the end of the road and saw a beautiful valley in front of me with a tiny stream. I could smell the jasmine and honeysuckle in the air.

Then a stranger with silvery blond hair approached me and with a welcoming smile. She said, “Welcome to the City of ––

Suddenly, she got shot in the back with an arrow. Slowly her eyes turned black, her skin turned grey, she looked at me with a disturbing smile and ––

I jolted up, banging my head on the wooden headboard of my bed. When, I wondered as I rubbed my throbbing head, are these visions going to stop? Although the beginning of the vision felt safe and slightly familiar, I did not like the end when the lady transformed into a creepy creature. Out of all the visions that I’d had, I felt that this one was the worst. Many questions started popping into my mind. How come these visions only started two months ago? Where was the beautiful valley that I saw? And most importantly, what do the visions mean?

“Kayla, the school bus is here!” yelled my mother.

I groaned. Those six words were the words that I dreaded the most every morning. The thought of walking into a seventh grade classroom full of judgmental kids and strict teachers made me shiver, especially when I could have a vision at any time. I grabbed my schoolbag and headed downstairs. Of course my brother was already waiting for me, tapping his foot impatiently when I walked into the tiny kitchen. Why was he so excited about school? I guess because he still was in first grade, and in first grade all you do is play games and read books. Sometimes I wished I was still a little kid: oblivious, carefree, and vision-free.

“Hurry up, Kayla!” My mother snapped me out of my thoughts.

“Yeah, Kayla, hurry up!” Henry (my brother) mimicked. Rushed, I shoved

a muffin in my mouth, grabbed Henry’s small pudgy hand, and hurried toward the dreaded school bus.

I dragged him into the seats in the front row as fast as I could. The kids in the back could be dangerous. They had bullied Henry before (he is very gullible) and I wanted to keep him as safe as possible. The ride to school seemed to go on for a long time, even though it was actually quite short. As we passed the fountain near the park, I thought about the memories of my father there when I was just a little bit younger than Henry.

In books where the protagonist’s mother or father dies, the character always remembers only a snippet or two about their parents. But I could remember every little detail about my dad. Weirdly, my mother never appeared in these memories, it was just me and my dad. Me and Dad racing down the streets of New York. Me and Dad sliding down the slides in the park. Me and Dad reading a book together. I also remembered the night he left. Before he drove off into the foggy night and left me with my mother he said, Reach deep down into your heart and remember.

Before I knew it, hundreds of children were rushing out of the bus. Grabbing my brother’s hand we pushed our way to the exit.

“Bye Kayla!!! See you after school!” Henry bounced away into the small building on the left side of the field of grass. Sighing, I waved goodbye to him and walked to the huge building on the right side. After putting all my books away, I found the English classroom. It was covered with school projects and decorations that brought back bad memories of the past years: Ms. Gutter’s attempt to make the classroom seem like a ‘happy environment.’ Ms. Gutter finally walked in, wearing her long weird robes (where did she buy those from?) and lipstick. Even though she was very cheerful, she always gave us a quiz every three days.

“Oh no! I forgot the classical music today! Why didn’t you kids remind me?”

… No response.

“I see, aren’t we all tired today!”

… No response. That’s basically how the whole class went.  

The morning flew by and soon it was time for history class. History class was the most boring class ever!! Ms. Rath drones on and on during the whole class, so you would understand my ‘excitement’ for history class. I walked into class and took my usual seat in the middle. Ms. Rath started her lecture about World War II (or something). She started talking about the book we were going to read when I felt a nauseous feeling in my stomach and the desks in front of me started fading to white. The whole world around me changed into diluted colors. I always felt this familiar feeling in my stomach when I was about to have a vision. Panicked, I stumbled out of my seat and trudged to the corner of the faded room, attempting to hide from the other people in the room. I looked out the window and saw…

the same breathtaking valley. But this time a dark, curly-haired little girl pranced through the green grass and spun in circles. Then another figure appeared beside her and lifted her up on his broad shoulders, let out a deep rumbling laugh that vibrated through my chest. I then felt a pang of familiarity that disappeared as fast as it came. When the little girl ran into the small cabin the whole vision flickered into a dark, cloudy scene with demon-like arrows flying into people’s hearts, but then the beautiful landscape came back.

A moment later, the desks materialized again and then the shocked faces of my peers popped out from the fog, and lamely I replied, “I have a stomach ache.”

… Silence.

“Of course you do!” Ms. Rath cut in, “Let’s get you to the nurse. Don’t worry, Kayla!”

Ms. Rath dragged me into the enclosed hallways and once we got to a small corner she stopped and faced me, her cheerful and serene smile twisted into a dark frown. “What were you thinking, going to school without consuming the right medication this morning? You never had a vision before during school, are you running out of the pills?” She scolds, looking down at me. I was shocked.

“Uh, I, um, what?” Ms. Rath’s anger bubbled down to confusion.

“Your medications, the one you take to prevent the visions. Your father gave them to you! You will obviously be getting visions when you are this far away from the City.”

I paused for a second, the shock of finding out that Ms. Rath knew about my visions faded away and was replaced by the realization that the question that had clouded my mind for almost a month had been answered.

“You know why I’m getting these visions? You know?”

“Of course I know! I was assigned as your father’s advisor when he took you and left the City. You grew up there, that’s why you’re getting visions. Why didn’t your father tell you all of this?”

“My father left me and my mom, and from what I remember, he never told me anything about this ‘City’!” After saying this, it felt like ten weights were dropped on my heart; I couldn’t take all this information. “Okay, I think I feel a little — ” I searched for the right words to say to Ms. Rath’s impatient face, “overwhelmed.”

Without saying anything else, I pushed past her to get inside the classroom to grab my stuff, ignoring the weird looks with confidence. Then I called my mom, saying that I had a headache and I wanted to walk home.

I finally took my first full breath of air walking outside onto the bumpy sidewalk; watching the big puff of air dissolve into the cold winter sky. This was how I escaped: I had to be by myself, outside with no walls surrounding me. I started to think about what Ms. Rath had said. She used to be my father’s advisor in this whole different city (that I didn’t remember), why would my father need an advisor? She had also mentioned that I grew up there.

That was why these visions seemed so familiar! There was also a medication I could take to prevent the visions? How come I didn’t remember all of this? By the time I passed the Choo Choo Train Park, where I had fallen and broken my knee a while back (I never played in there ever again), I figured out the answers to my questions, I needed to see my father.

I climbed up the stairs two steps at a time up to my room and flopped face down onto my old worn quilt. My aura of peace quickly faded away once I was inside my room. After a few minutes of silence, I heard the steps of my mother’s soft slippers climbing up the stairs. I sighed ready for her to interrogate me. She walked in and looked at me for a good ten seconds and then walked over to sit beside me. Her blond hair tickled my cheek.

“How was your walk?” She looked at me with kind eyes. I laughed. My mother always asked the smart and unexpected questions, I loved her personality.

“It was relaxing and it cleared my mind,” I told her, smiling. My mom nodded with an understanding face and we just sat there quietly. I then thought about my idea to find my dad. Should I tell her? No, then I’ll have to tell her about my visions and I can’t do that, there must be a reason for why my dad left. I then crawled into my bed to lay down and calm my pounding head. Soon after that, I felt the weight of my mom leaving the bed and walking out of my room.

 

Chapter 2

I loved little children. They were so innocent. Henry was innocent but he was also very smart and educated about the world. Kids were not judgmental at all. That was why I was excited when my mom told me that my baby cousin Maureen was coming over to barbeque with us. Finally, I had somebody to spill my problems to! I felt like telling Henry about our dad might be too overwhelming. I didn’t want him to feel the same way I felt and I didn’t want to frighten him.

After hearing the shrieking of my two little cousins entering our quiet house, I rushed downstairs. Immediately guilt crept over me when I saw Henry realize that he had gotten home on the bus by himself.

“Oh Henry, I’m so sorry I didn’t come down earlier when you came home!” I reached over to ruffle his fluffy blonde hair.

“That’s okay, I know you have a bad headache,” he replied. I felt lonely realizing that he and my mom didn’t know about about the visions, or about this whole other life in this crazy demonized city that our dad potentially lives in. A high-pitched squeal broke mye away from my thoughts ––

“Maureen!” I looked to the doorway and saw my tired but bright-looking Aunt Pearl (I had always loved that name) and Uncle Thomas carrying little two year old Maureen and her brother, Peter, who was two years older than her.

My mother shrieked as she ushered the small group of people into the living room.

“Hi! Come in, come in! I missed you so much.” That was probably true, my mother’s whole family lived in Brighton so having them come to visit us in New York state was only a once-in-awhile type of thing. Aunt Pearl nodded and followed my mom into the cheerful room chattering excitedly and admiring Henry’s artwork from school hanging on the walls. Henry makes a beeline to Peter soon after the family settles down. I think Henry liked to boss him around after being bossed around by me (I tried my best to not tell him what to do, but sometimes the orders just slipped out!) so he chosed to play with Peter. I brought Maureen to the small playroom filled with random toy trucks and cars that Henry played with. I watched her grab and whack a small purple car. I sighed remembering the happy carefree times before I got my visions, two months ago, I didn’t have to take some medication to be able to go to school and there were no gaping holes in my life.

“Maureen, do you know who my father is?” I asked her.  Her little blonde head perked up after hearing her name and she stared at me blankly. “That’s okay, I don’t know who he is myself. I don’t even know where he lives. I mean, is he still alive?” I rambled on and on about my dad not caring about what the little girl next to me was thinking. Suddenly, Maureen pointed at the window behind me, her face pale. Whimpers started to come out of her tiny mouth. I stopped, my mouth seeming to zip up like the jacket hanging on the wooden rack. I turned around slowly, this was probably how the characters in horror movies felt; that rush of panic in your stomach.

The person standing –– no, floating –– was smiling at Maureen with black, empty eyes. His skin was grey, and there was a black arrow that seemed to vibrate stuck in his back. A picture flashed through my mind: the woman who approached me in my vision. I shrieked when I made eye contact with his ghostly eyes. Weirdly, fear appeared in his eyes and the man started to disappear, limb by limb. I looked at Maureen, she stared back at me, and screamed.

My mother rushed into the room. She stopped when she saw my eyes. I looked at her, scared and confused. After she grabbed Maureen she walked toward me slowly and almost cautiously. I followed her gaze to the antique mirror that hung above the small table on the wall. I rushed to it and stared at myself. Frizzy brown hair, pale skin, orange eyes –– WAIT! I do not have orange eyes! I started to panic, I looked down at the scratched wooden floor and then stared at the mirror again. The fiery orange faded into its usual, normal, dull brown color that I saw every time I looked at myself in the mirror. I heard Aunt Pearl and Uncle Tom walk over and turn silent in the back of my mind. I looked to the left and saw Henry staring at me, his mouth wide open. I just stared at the mirror in horror, what am I? What thing did I become?

 

The night went by in a blur, and all I saw was the fear in my mother’s eyes, imprinted in my mutant eyes. Never in my life, had I felt so terrified and uncomfortable. My visions started to come into the world; they were actually real. So that meant that this city was actually real, this whole mess was real. There was a hole in my chest –– you know, that sour feeling that you get when you drown in panic and confusion. The feeling that I got when I was lost in the new gigantic building in the beginning of middle school? That feeling was taking over my heart.

My mother stopped talking to me altogether. I think she was still trying to wrap her head around the idea that I’m a creepy mutant person with wonky eyes. I’m also trying.

I realized that I was the only person in this realistic world who knew about these visions. Except… except for Ms. Rath. Ms. Rath knows about the City. She was my father’s advisor. It seemed like my teacher had more to tell me before I ran away.

 

During the evening, we went out to our well kept lawn to stargaze. I tried to make out each constellation but failed. How are you able to organize so many stars into one constellation?

I sighed when I went under the covers. Another day of potential visions. Another day of fear. Another day of confusion.

 

Chapter 3

My next mission was to find Ms. Rath and make sure that she told me everything she knew about my dad and my eyes. Without going to school. Do you really expect me to be able to go to school the day after having a frightening (and embarrassing) ‘stomach ache’? No you don’t. That was why I was never going back to that history classroom. Fortunately, I didn’t have a vision last night, and I was granted permission miss school. That means I had a whole day to think about my eyes. My weird eyes.

My mom and I were both a little bit rattled after the incident last night and I got a refreshing vision-free night to let the idea of my mutant facial body part sink in. I hoped my mom was as understanding as she always was. I sighed as I walked down the hall to the bathroom. It seemed like I’d been sighing a lot lately. I wondered why. I was stopped by Henry.

“I have been having dreams.” That sentence that came out of my brother’s mouth stopped me on my tracks. “Weird dreams. Weird dreams with big orange eyes staring at me, with Dad telling me to ‘remember’ or something like that.” Henry seemed to get more frightened with each word.
You have been having dreams about my eyes? Since when?” My brother may know more about me than I do.

“The first dream started two months ago, but I have only gotten three in total.” Henry paused, it seemed like he wanted to tell me more, but his emotions were holding him back. A few seconds later Henry whispered in a timid voice “I’m worried, Kayla.” My insides crushed. I was able to deal with my visions but the thought of Henry having to go through them too made me feel horrible.

“It’s ok to be afraid, Henry. I’ve been having visions too. They’re about our dad and a city where demons are invading. I’m trying to find out more about this mess and I think I know someone who might know more about our dad and my abilities,” I told him, trying to help Henry understand.  His eyes lit up, he probably saw this as some sort of adventure in the comic books… Kayla and Henry’s Adventure to Find Their History Teacher to Find Out More About Their Father!!!

I want to read that comic.

“Kayla, you may not think so, but I think your powers are really cool. In my dreams, your eyes have saved lives, actually, they called it Kratos?” Henry said thoughtfully. I saved lives? Me?

“You know what? We are going to find out more about this whole situation. My history teacher, Ms. Rath, knows about our father and ––

“Wait, your history teacher, the one who is friends with Mom? She babysits me while you’re gone!” Henry interrupted me. Ms. Rath babysits Henry? Knowing that she has been inside my home for something not related to school creeped me out. A lot. But that also meant that I could talk to her about everything. Finally, I felt so relieved to talk to someone about my visions.

 

Chapter 4

I stared at the demon towering over me, trying to get into its ugly mind. I snapped my fingers and the demon, with the five demons behind it, disappeared into ashes. I felt a fraction of my energy fade away as I stumbled to the safe house nearest to me. My energy seemed to be dissolving more and more every time I destroyed demons. I moved around the many injured people and went to go find my sister who told me specifically to meet her in the safe house near the Lily River after three in the afternoon. I heard shouts from out of the window and the whistle of an arrow. I wanted to scream in frustration. Why wasn’t General Lucien sending in the city’s powerful troops? Was he only relying on the talents of the Mutatia? The General’s intelligence seemed to be dimming after his advisor left. Our proud and beautiful city cannot be turned into a wasteland of demons.

“ Clairementine! Over here!” I turn my head to my sister sitting on the bench, finishing up wrapping a big bandage around a wounded Mutatia. I sighed at the sound of her childhood nickname for me. “Finally, I was so worried after the General sent the alarm to the Mutatia and you didn’t come back!” Her gentle face was eerily calm as she stared me down. I avoided her look by looking at my small signal panel on my wrist that was buzzing with an alert –– ALL MUTATIA MUST RETURN TO THE SAFEHOUSES BY THE FOURTH HOUR.  –– General Lucien. Oops. That’s why I did not recognize anyone on the battlefield.

“How did you even know about the alert, Grace?” I interrogated my sister. She sheepishly pointed at the wrist of her old Mutatia patient. I sighed and slumped into the dated, out-of-place, armchair. The springs squeaked under the new weight. I ripped of the silver mask that proved my status.

“Claire!” I just closed my eyes, not wanting to deal with anyone at this moment. “Claire! Wake up!” I inwardly groaned and opened my eyes. I see Brendan’s concerned face staring down at me. “Oh, good you’re awake.” I really wanted to laugh but I knew it would be unseemly for this situation.

“The General wanted all the captains to repower in the safehouses.” I nodded and dismissed my messenger. He still lingered. I turned my head and was about to question it when he said, “Most of your Saplings died overusing their power and the general was very angry.”

WHAT!!! Okay, calm down. I’m the leader I have to stay calm. “Oh! That’s awful! I will have to speak to him later to get some advice. Thank you so much for the information.” I said through gritted teeth. Brendan seemed to be disgusted at my lack of sympathy for the young Mutatia who died, but still understood my cue to leave. Even though he was almost a year older than me, it didn’t matter, he would still take my orders –– I was his captain. All of us trained and fought together equally. Anyone could also be your group’s captain, if you worked hard and wanted the responsibility. The responsibility. That was probably the worst part of my job. I was good at battle plans and organizing everyone and I loved being a leader; someone people could respect and look up to you, but I disliked having to always be bothered, always having to discuss things with other leaders, saying the right thing to be a good role model for my Saplings and, of course, making sure that they were trained the right way and using their privileged powers correctly. The young fighters were always so passionate about defending their city, they overused their talents, some were more powerful than others, and didn’t get to recharge in the madness of battle, therefore, they died.

I was used to all these tragedies –– people dying, turning into demons, etc.

I followed the signs of the safehouse to the repowering station, slipping my mask back on, and feeling a bit self conscious, as I do each time I put it on. Once I saw the small enclosed room, I waited on the line of Mutatia. Energy was extremely important to us. No energy? No powers, and no defending our city. Some Mutatia used different types of energy, but most used electricity. The general tried to experiment with other types of energy; water,  fire, wind, and solar. Different Mutatia reacted to different types, so the General decided to just use all of them. I was assigned to do tests on the energies for my project as captain last year. It took maybe about ten million years and ten million pounds of hard work to complete it. But the outcome was useful for my group and my battle friends. I figured out that the most powerful type of energy is electricity, and the least powerful was solar power. The line shuffled forward.

When I finished charging up I set off to find the General to talk about the situation. I tapped my wristband on my arm to to turn on the green light in the corner of the screen, to turn on my tracking device so my leader can know where I am. (You have to turn it off while in the power station). Every time I saw the lime green light flash on, I  felt a vibration between the vertebra of my neck which sent shudders down my spine. I seemed to be the only captain who has not adapted to this feeling, the feeling of people watching you and your every move. Maybe if they had chosen somewhere else to place the device, like my arm, I would not feel the vibrations.

Even though the battles outside my window are ruthless and bloody, the enemies do have some sort of organized plan that we have learned to live around. It goes mostly by hours. Because I have gotten used to the war scene after many years, I had learned the “schedule” and memorized it. I had to, all captains had to. Out of all the inhabitants of this city, the ones I pitied the most were the newborns, the toddlers. They have to grow up and figure out who they were while this war was raging outside their windows. While they took their first steps, and babbled their first words, there would be sounds of battle and demons in the background. Their first memories would be of having to hide in their shelters, and they would not be able to enjoy the amazing landscape of the city. While my childhood was full of oblivious, carefree, and battle-free memories: bounding down the valleys with Grace and spending time with my mother baking goods for our neighbors, (our city prides ourselves on the value of community that all children are being taught in their daily lives). There were little of these precious memories but I kept them close to my heart.

Sometimes I wondered if inhabitants of this city were actually going to experience that kind of life now that it has changed so much. Instead of superiors being the mayor, politicians, educators, the most important leader of our society was the General and people here looked up to the military: the fighters and their captains, and at the moment it was the Mutatia.

I wondered what the change “back to normal” will be like. Hard? Quick? Or will things slowly start to change. How will we ever forget the hours of when the demons will strike or when they rest and we can finally run back home that are lodged into our brain? I would never be able to stroll across town in the middle of the fifth hour (when the demons fight their second to last attack) calmly, weaponless.

Getting rid of these thoughts that came across my mind daily, I readjusted my mask that never seemed to form comfortably over my skin like it did for my fellow leaders. I then took a sharp turn left in a small alley way, ducking my head to avoid eye contact with anyone else.

 

Chapter 5

The General’s office was right in the middle of the city, for easy access. Usually he had many visitors, but at that hour, most inhabitants were “enjoying” their time in their homes. As I walked up the steps, a figure came into view. She had a silver mask on, covering her face the same way mine covers my face. The long dark braid that tumbled gracefully down her back was the only way I recognized the captain. Rayna. Funny how it took so long for me to determine who someone, that I have worked with for many years, was. She rudely bumped into me to acknowledge me.

“Oh, Claire, I did not see you in any of the safehouses. I was worried,” she said in a polite manner (but fake), even though she was obviously trying to embarrass me for not paying attention to the alert. She had always been like this, since we were younger and we just started learning how to be captains. Once, I smuggled in a bag of chips during a training to eat during break and, of course, Rayna was there and saw me take a bite out of a crunchy, greasy potato chip. She immediately told our trainer and he has hated me ever since. I have hated her ever since.

“I did not notice the message,” I replied stiffly. I did not want to give her any satisfaction with my tone.

“I heard what happened to your group,” she smiled. Wow, she just went straight into it. She didn’t even try to be polite this time. She was with me during the lecture about how keeping the fighters in your group safe and by saying that, she reminded me of why I should be ashamed. For once I was glad my mask was over my head because I am not good at hiding the emotions on my face. I roughly shoved past her, and strode up the rest of the stairs.

Never Betray Someone

Yesterday, my friend betrayed me. The teacher asked her if I was talking. I don’t know why. He must have thought I was talking because my hand was placed over my mouth. I was really uncomfortable in my chair. I didn’t want to get in trouble. I had already had a bad recess, and now I had a headache because my friend was really inappropriate at lunch. I don’t want to say what happened, because it was too gross.

Mr. Monserati asked my friend, “Is Matthew talking?”

My friend hesitated. She laughed and said, “YES.”

I really wasn’t talking. She betrayed me. She was no longer my friend.

Because I am not God, I did not forgive her for getting me in trouble. I felt mad at my friend. God would have felt sad for her because she committed a sin by betraying someone. Judas turned his master in for thirty pieces of gold. Judas saw his sin and hung himself. My friend did not do that – all she did was hang out with other people. Judas had also betrayed him. It is bad to betray. I hope she will apologize. If she does, I will forgive her. Amen.

A Vehicle That Can Fly: The War Against Syria

Chapter 1

We were in a big fight with Syria. One day, when I was flying to Syria to defeat them, I was talking to my pilot, Matthew. Matthew was my first friend.

“Take a left turn and shoot a missile,” said Matthew.

“Roger that,” I said.

Sometimes I would just get bored and talk to my pilot Matthew. We had nothing in common because I am a vehicle and so is he…

Matthew wanted a special army helmet. I wanted to help him by forcing the U.S. Army to give every soldier a helmet. It could save him from dying. It was bulletproof, and when he put it on, it would make the whole suit bulletproof and create a facemask.

I looked down, then up. I saw a whole group of Syrian army planes. They were green with army waves. So I talked to the captain, but he didn’t really agree with me. I said that it would be very good –– we could win everything. He still didn’t believe me. Finally, I convinced him, and he believed me. So he gave me and my pilot a helmet, but not anybody else. I didn’t really care. Everybody else cared. They said, “That’s not fair at all!”

They said, “That’s not fair at all!”

I felt sad. But the captain said, “Hurry up, get in the sky!”

I was too busy daydreaming, so he hit me. I finally stopped daydreaming and took flight. Maybe you don’t understand what that means … neither do I. But what I mean is that I took off. Now, let’s get back to the story.

 

Chapter 2

After that, there were a whole bunch of army planes pointing at me because they thought that I would start daydreaming again. I got mad and told everybody that I would stay focused. Finally, they left.

It was daytime and kind of windy. I started to run low on gas. There was still one plane next to me who didn’t believe that I had stopped daydreaming, so it passed over a tiny bit of its gas to me. I went as high as I could. I became frozen and I couldn’t control what I was doing. I was a little bit curious, especially about how to control myself again. I turned my jets on and was finally able to control myself again. We were all so happy!

 

Chapter 3

Then I started going so high, I almost touched space. I couldn’t go down. I tried and tried.

I asked Matthew to help me, but he was too busy watching TV on his phone. (He thought that I was controlling myself). He was watching CNN news.

I yelled, “Matthew!!!”

I realized that he was asleep and felt disappointed.

He eventually woke up.

“Where am I? Is it already night?” asked Matthew.

“Now we’re in space,” I said.

“What?? Why did we go into space? I thought you would be controlling!” he said.

“No! You never said that.”

“I did, but you were just daydreaming.”

I really was daydreaming. I was in big trouble. I just knew we weren’t going to win the war with Syria.

There were 300 stars all over the place! “Wow! I never thought that was actually true!” I said.

As I got back from space, I heard a reporter say that we had won! I got back and landed. I got pushed back by an airplane.

“Wow,” I thought. “I never knew that would happen.”

“Well, you know, it wasn’t really as bad as I thought it was,” I said to Matthew.

Matthew said, “Seriously, I don’t care.”

He was still watching CNN.

Masters of the Universe (Excerpt)

  

Book 1: The Monsters Army

Chapter 1

A group of three kids named, John, George, and Steve seemed like normal average middle schoolers, but even though they didn’t know it, they would soon become great heroes. One day, they were having a math test that would be fifty percent of their grade. Normally, people would be really freaked out about stuff like that, but these kids were calm; they didn’t really care about tests. After the test was over, they talked in the hall while going over to Reading.

After that, Mr. Goodman, the math teacher, walked over to them, mumbling, “…have to escort them to town, but the army of Cyclop Giants is coming to the school…”

Once the math teacher left, George said, “Well, that was weird.”

Steve and John agreed. They looked out the window, and all three of them jumped back in shock.

“Is it just me, or is there a giant army of Cyclop Giants charging towards the school?” Steve exclaimed.

“No, it’s not just you. This is pretty freaky now. I guess what Mr. Goodman mumbled was right,” George said.

“Does that mean we have to be escorted to some kind of town?” John asked,  startled.

“Yes, it does,” Mr. Goodman said loudly. He suddenly picked up the boys, flew out the window, and into the sky. Of course, the three kids were screaming. Mr. Goodman flew them to a giant city with massive skyscrapers, but it didn’t look like any city the boys had seen before, and since they traveled a lot, they’d seen every single city in the U.S. They highly doubted they had gone out of the U.S. in the last thirty seconds.

When they landed, they were greeted by a bunch of other high schoolers that seemed about fourteen years old. All of them seemed pretty weird. Some had big wings and sick jetpacks, as well as big machine guns and  awesome bazookas.

George was really into those weapons because he was really good with technology. He made a working jetpack when he was five!

John, on the other hand, did very strange things when he was little. He weirdly talked to a wolf when he was seven, and he saw a Giant jump off a building.

Steve seemed to like the fighting aspect of things, considering he was always getting into fights. If it weren’t for John and George, he would’ve broken at least five people’s arms by now.

The trio was pretty freaked out about what just happened and how they just flew to a giant city. Everyone was talking about cabins and who would be in which cabin, when John’s head suddenly started to flicker between a wolf and a human. When it finally stopped, a group of people ran over to him and guided him to a small house that looked like a wolf.

Everyone claimed John was the son of a guy named Hoxarth, the master of wolves and bravery. Right after that, George’s hands were flickering back and forth from sword to normal hands. Just like John, after his flickering finished, another group of people came over to him to bring him to a small place that looked that a workshop. Everyone said he was the son of Foldis, master of Technology and explosives. Finally, armor started flickering around Steve, and a group of people brought him to a house that looked like a battlefield. He was apparently the son of Battlemark, the master of war and strategy.

They were all freaked out, but they agreed that this was pretty epic. Steve’s cabin was filled with armor and weapons just like an armory. George’s cabin was like a workshop with everybody building crazy axes and epic battle ships. John’s cabin was a lot less active than George’s and Steve’s, but it was also interesting because some random people were turning to wolves, and some people were talking about going on adventures.

Adventure sounded great to John since he loved action and traveling. After the trio got a tour of the city and their cabins, they went to a group meeting at 8 p.m.

Godigon, the leader, asked John, George, and Steve to approach the front of the room since they were the newcomers. He also mentioned that the Cyclop Giant’s army was attacking nearby and mentioned if anyone was willing to stand up to an adventure that may cause death. The mission was to scout their base and maybe even stop the army from reaching the city. He also said if they succeeded, they would be rewarded greatly.

John, George, and Steve had the urge to stand up for the city they’d only known about for four hours and help the almost four hundred people, even if they had to risk their lives. This left everyone else whispering about how they were the first newcomers to go on a quest in a century.

Godigon stood up tall and said “It’s settled. These three newcomers will be the ones to go to California, scout the Cyclop Giant’s base, and stop the army from attacking the city by February 1st, six days from now. All I can say is good luck, great heroes.”

The discussion was over. Everyone had dinner and went to sleep. John, George, and Steve were going to have a long day ahead of them when they left for California. All three had very strange dreams. John dreamt about the army of Cyclop Giants sitting by lots of fires in a large military site, which could possibly be their base. George’s dream was less about the quest and more about Happy Party where the show went on fire. And Steve dreamed of the same, but with Wheel of Bad Luck. They were all going to have exciting days tomorrow.

The One and the Best Girl: Book III

Chapter One: Shopkins

Hi, my name is Daisy and I am ten years old. I have one Shopkins toy. My sister is only a year old and has twenty eight Shopkins. This is not fair – I hate that my sister has twenty eight. I like Shopkins because they’re little, and my dog doesn’t eat little things. I like playing with them with my mom and sister. For Easter or Valentine’s Day I can get more. Valentine’s day is next week!

 

Chapter Two: Valentine’s Day

I woke up with a basket on my bed! Inside the basket were shopkins! I opened them… I got the worst one! I looked at its name without noticing that it was a limited edition. It was called Roxie Ring. My sister came in and screamed, “Ahhh, you have a limited edition?”

That’s when I realized I got a limited edition Shopkins!

I opened the other one that was in the same basket. It was Sally Scent. My sister screamed again, “Ahhh! Sally Scent! That’s not fair!” (That time she knew from the beginning that it was a limited edition. Now, whenever she screams, it means that I have a limited edition.)

I opened the other one, which was –

“Ahhh!” My sister screamed again. “Sunny Screen! That is not fair!”

Before I could stop her, she opened the other one. It Papa Tomato. She hesitated before moaning again.

I went downstairs and found the pups still sleeping. Me and my sis found another present with both of our names on it, so we opened it together. It was from Mom and Dad, and it said that we were going to move to a bigger house because we were going to have four new siblings!

My mom was pregnant with quadruplets!

Crying, I went to my room. I was shocked. I called my best friend, The Hair.

“I am moving to NYC,” I said.

“What? That was what I was going to tell you! I’m actually moving to New Jersey,” he said, “but I’ll be right across the George Washington Bridge!”

 

Chapter Three: Moving Day

I woke to a moving truck outside of my window. I did not know that we were moving today (I thought that we were moving this weekend), but whatever!

We drove to the apartment. My sister had a blue and pink bedroom, and I had a hanging bed. There was even a playroom with a whole collection of Shopkins! I found seventy seven Shopkins outside of the box and forty four inside of another box, and I opened them all. They were limited edition! And, I got all the Shopkins from seasons one and two!

After, we went to the Empire State Building. It was so cool! The Hair came with us!

 

Chapter Four: School

The next day, I discovered that The Hair went to the same school as me. I could not find him, so I went to the principal’s office to see if he knew where he was. The one problem was that the principal was not in his office at the moment. I looked on each floor.

The principal was still not there when I went back to class, so I asked my teacher if he knew where he was. It turns out that the principal was in the classroom the whole time! I asked him if I could transfer to The Hair’s class. He looked scary, but luckily he said, “Yes, of course! Are you new?’’

I told him I was, and then I looked for The Hair next door.

That night I learned that my mom had had her babies when I was at school. Their names were Hayden, Molly, Hudson, and Sarah!

We lived happily in New York.

The One and the Best Girl: Book II

Chapter One

Hi, my name is Daisy. My sister’s name is Chloe. My dog’s name is Olivia. We have a playhouse that we like to hang out in. You need to put a cover on it overnight, or else it will get wet. Last night, I forgot to put the cover on the playset, and it got soggy and wet and nearly fell over. Now we’re going to get a new piece of cardboard to start off our new playhouse. But, I’m torn because I don’t know what color cardboard I should get! I’m thinking of getting blue, but I don’t know… I’m also thinking about getting yellow because that’s my favorite color, and whenever I think of the color yellow I want a banana. I started to get stressed out because I didn’t know what color to get.

I asked my dad, “Surprise me: yellow or blue?” So he ordered the cardboard, and we went home and waited for it to come in the mail. When it arrived, I opened up the package and saw the cardboard – it was awesome. We set up the new playhouse and my sister went in first. It was her first time walking. She walked because she was so excited. And the color was… dun-dun-dun… BLUE!

Meanwhile, it was time for Halloween. We had to get our Halloween costumes, so we went to the Halloween store. I didn’t know if I wanted to be a journal, a pencil, or a playhouse, so, as usual, I asked my dad to surprise me. And, as usual, to get the costume in the mail.

After, we went home, waited for it for ten days, and by then it was already the day before Halloween. We got it, and it was a… dun-dun-dun… a pencil! I tried it on, and it fit me perfectly, so now I had to go and find something for Chloe.

So, we went to the Halloween store again. She seemed to like Elmo but I said, “Nah, not for you!”

I asked if she wanted to be a matching pencil but my dad said, “No, too cute,” but then I had an idea.

“Even better! You can be a piece of paper!” I told my dad, as usual, to mail it to me. We got it that day. We opened it up and it was a piece of paper. Then it was time to find a costume for Olivia. She’s a mini-Golden doodle. We went to the store and looked for different stuff, like Cotton Candy, Robots, People… but nothing seemed to work! Then, me and my dad ran to a different Halloween costume store, and it was the best one ever. It was ice cream with a dog cone!

 

The next day…

 

It’s Halloween! We got all dressed up and started with a nice, simple halloween set-up for the party. Then, at around – hmmm –  two o’clock, we started the party. At around five o’clock we had dinner. Then we went out, all dressed up.

I carried my sister, and we went to one house that had a sign that said “We have a sale!” There was something for Nick Jeff that I wanted to get. If you all don’t know, Nick Jeff is the Hair’s brother. I got it and, as usual, I said, “Ship it to Nick Jeff.” I gave his address and after that I was pretty tired. I went home and went to bed.

While I was lying in bed, I couldn’t stop thinking about how badly I wanted a phone. I’m going to ask her for one for my birthday. If I haven’t told you yet, my mom said that for my birthday – which is around the corner – I can be on the cover a magazine!

The next day, I went to the playhouse with my sister and my dog. My sister helped me with my homework. My mom told us that we could play after I finished my homework, so my sister helped me with it, and soon it was time to play!

 

Chapter Two

It was the morning of my birthday and my sister was awake. She woke me up. She says “Happy Birthday!” in her baby voice, and then she brought me downstairs. There were so many balloons and presents. My mom said I could open up one, so I did. I opened the smallest one, and it was a ring! It had a golden diamond shaped like a heart and a golden band. I was psyched! I ate cake for breakfast. It was my favorite kind of cake: ice cream cake. My sister got it all over her face and her nose. She had ice cream snot all day.

Guests started to come, and I got more and more excited. I like to start opening my gifts before we do all the other fun stuff, so I opened them. I got lots of stuff, but my favorite two were a phone and an interview at an agency to see if I could get on a magazine cover.

Once everybody left, I opened up a small gift. It was a card that said Olivia was pregnant. There were going to be puppies in the house.

 

A few months later…

 

Soon enough the puppies were here! We went back to the old list of names, and decided that the names would be Liz, Hayden, Emi, and Rose.

The pups got big, but not too big! I wanted to get an interview for the puppies for Weekly Magazine because they were so cute, but I couldn’t because it was too much money. The interview cost $15 per hour.

When I finally saved up enough money, I told my parents, “I think today will be the day I go to the interview.”

They said, “No, because you have to practice for next week’s skiing race.”

So I went to the mountain to practice, but the next morning I went to the interview. It was a small room that felt like a lobby. The butler offered me water, and then I went into the room, which smelled like puppies.

The butler hadn’t told me that this week was puppy week, which I discovered when I sat down (in this beautiful hard wood chair) and one of the thirteen writers told me. He also told me that on January 20th next year they are going to feature my pups in the magazine! By the time I left it was dark outside, but I was so excited!

When I got home, I ate dinner and went to bed.

 

The next day…

 

Emi was not in bed with Olivia.

Olivia came in and told me she was missing. We looked and looked but could not find him. It felt like we’d looked all over the world. But then, I remembered that there was one place left to look: the interview room.

The next day we went to the interview room. He was there! I said to him, “Emi, you cannot do that ever again!”

On the way out, I learned that we were to come here next month.

 

Next month…

 

Me and my mom went to the agency, and Olivia and Chloe came a bit later with Dad. They did it – we saw all the magazines the puppies were in!

The One and the Best Girl: Book I

 Chapter One

This is Daisy. She is the best student in the whole class – she wants to go to school every day.

It was the first day in 3rd grade, the best grade, and Daisy was jumping up and down (Daisy loved school). She told her mom that she did not need lunch because she could get it at school.

‘’Ok,” said Mom, “let’s go!”

“Yay!’’ exclaimed Daisy.

 

12 hours later…

 

“I’m performing my first science experiment!” Daisy told her mom. “I’m gonna go upstairs and start.” She worked and worked, and then she worked some more. She skipped dinner and she went to bed at 10 p.m. – which was late for her. She fell asleep on the table while working on her project.

When she woke up, the table, which used to be blue, was gluey and full of red feathers. She cried and cried because she hadn’t finished her project, but then her mom said, “Believe in yourself, you can do it.”

Daisy tried and tried and tried. She went to school with a frown on her face.

“Why are you so sad, Daisy?” asked her friend Sofia.

“Because I didn’t finish my science project,” she moaned. “I’m so disappointed with myself.” Daisy’s stomach hurt.

“Why don’t you just go into the science room? You have half an hour to work, which means that you could probably finish it.”

So Daisy did, and half an hour later she was done with her project.

The next day, she went to get the table. She put it in the van and drove off, and told her mom that she hadn’t been able to finish her project.

Her mom said, “It is what it is,” and dropped her off at school.

Then, the school bell rang, but it turned out that someone was messing around and had rung it accidentally. Daisy was glad it was a joke, because she was counting on getting to school a few minutes early so that she could retrieve her finished project.

Daisy jumped up and down until her stomach didn’t hurt anymore.

“Wow!” exclaimed her teacher.

“I can’t believe I did it!” she said with a big smile on her face.

The first class was science. Daisy went to the science room and shared her project, which was a feather table on which she would see if sugar would dissolve in gatorade. She did it, but the feathers that were going to go on the gatorade to make it look pretty had just been glued. The jar of feathers fell over and stuck to the table. Finally, she put her project on the table and it became fixed to the surface, making her experiment easier to perform (and prettier).  

The next subject was writing. Daisy wrote about her science project.

Five hours later, she came home through the back door and saw a puppy! “Why is there a dog in the back of our house?” she asked her mom.

“Because you did it! You did it – you finished your project! The puppy is my reward to you.”

“Mom, I have something to tell you.” Daisy hesitated. “I wrote it all down and asked my teacher if I could bring it home, and she said yes, so I brought the note home so that I wouldn’t have to explain it to you. Anyway, I’ll be up doing my math homework.”

One hour later, her mom came up, and she didn’t look that mad. “That was the best story ever! I’m not mad that you glued the table, but I didn’t like that table anyway, because your dad picked it out. Now, let’s go out with your puppy, and while I’m looking for a new table, you can think of a name for him.

Daisy made a list of possible names for the puppy:

Rose

Kate

Hudson

Olivia

Jessie

Jess

Hayden

Emmy

Chloe

Liz

Elizabeth

“That’s enough, that’s enough…” her mom said. “Let’s think of less serious names, cuter names, like Dandelion, or Cloudy, or Bubbles, or something like that.”
“Let’s name him Olivia! I love it, I love it! Please, please, please?” Daisy pleaded.

“Okay, fine. Let’s go to the pet store and get a collar for him. What’s his middle name going to be?”

“Let’s make it… Cloudy!”

They went and got him a sparkly pink collar. Then they went to the furniture store and ordered a new table. It would come that afternoon.   

Later that day, the table arrived!!! Daisy and her mom opened the package… and it turned out to be a bed!

“What?” cried her mom. “This is not a table. This is a bed!‘’ Her mom shouted.

 

Chapter Two

The next day was Saturday. They sent back the bed and ordered the right piece of furniture this time. When it got to their house, they opened it up and discovered it was… a… nothing.

’What?’’ exclaimed Daisy.

They gave up on looking for a table. Her mom asked her, “Did you love that table?”

“Yes, I loved that table! But it’s okay if I don’t get it back.”

“You can get it back your own way! What do you want?”

“Let me think about it… let me go to the Hair’s house.”
When Daisy got to the Hair’s house, he said, “You should get a brand new rainbow TV!”

Daisy was about to walk out the door. She had been thinking for a while and did not have the patience for the Hair.

“Wait, what do you want?” the Hair chased after her.

“I want something, but I don’t need it… ” Daisy sighed. “Actually, for a long time I’ve wanted a rainbow shelf that gives me everything I want while lying in bed. But Nick Jeff never gave it to me. My mom says that Christmas is around the corner and I might get one for Christmas, but who knows? I might not.”

She ran back home and asked her mom to buy her a rainbow shelf that would give her anything she wanted while in bed. “And the Hair also said I should get a rainbow TV!”

 

Chapter Three

The next day, a big, big box was delivered to Daisy’s house. The box was almost as big as the house! She opened the package and found the biggest, most ginormous rainbow TV she’d ever seen! That was only the outside. In another box, she found a tiny rainbow TV, which was awesome. Opening the third box, she discovered the rainbow shelf.

Forty six hours later, it was Christmas. Daisy marched downstairs. The Hair came over. They started opening presents. The sad thing was, he wanted to open the rainbow shelf last. Nick Jeff got a new wand, Daisy got clothes for her dog, and then she found a note saying “Go to Mom.”

Daisy went to Mom. Mom said, “Go to Dad.”

Dad said, “Go to Grandma.”

Grandma said, “Go to Grandpa.”

Grandpa said, “Go to Mom.”

So, she went to Mom, who said, “Go get everyone who was in the circle.” When everyone came, she said, “We’re going to have a baby!”

All of them had the best day, and celebrated the coming of a new family member. Daisy’s mom had been hiding this for two weeks!

 

Two Months Later…

 

Daisy went to school, and she told her class that she would have to miss some class in nine months, because of the new baby. She didn’t tell her class that she was going to have a new sibling, but she went to the Hair the next day, who was very excited for her. Two months after that, the Hair began to visit every day to see if the baby had arrived yet. One day, when he asked if the baby had come, Daisy’s family, sick of his questions, groaned, “Nooo.”

 

Chapter Four

Daisy and her mom started thinking of names. They went back to the list of dog names. Then, they went to the doctor to find out if the baby was a boy or a girl, and they found out it was a girl. Her name would be… Chloe! The idea came to Daisy, and her parents loved it. Two months after that, her mom’s belly was as big as two watermelons. It felt like just yesterday Daisy learned that she was pregnant!

Two weeks after that, her mom went to her seven month check-up. The doctor wasn’t sure if it was a girl anymore. Daisy and her mom would find out for sure when the baby was born. Two weeks after that, she went back to school, and finally told her class that she was going to have a sibling.

 

Chapter Five

Two months later, it was time! It was 9:45 A.M. Daisy didn’t go to school – instead, at 10:30, she went to the hospital to visit her new baby sister.

“Hi, Chloe!” she cried. It was a girl. Daisy was so excited.

Chloe’s first birthday was September 12th, 2239. It was the best day ever. Her first word was “Daisy.”

 

Pure Blonde

“TESS! TESS, GET DOWN HERE! SET THE TABLE!” Mother yelled from downstairs.

I groaned. I brushed my long brown hair off my shoulders and face. I sat up on the hardwood floor and pushed my only blanket off. It was the middle of winter, and this was Angelica’s first baby blanket. By now it was worn and faded, torn at all four edges. It didn’t even cover my legs anymore, and came down to about my waist.

If there was one more snowstorm this season, I would most likely get frostbite or even hypothermia.

I climbed out of my faded red nightgown and put on an ugly dark dress the color of a half rotten orange. Then I put a gray apron over it. The apron had been originally white but Mother refused to wash it because it was mine. I now looked like a pilgrim.

I guess this is what you get if you are born a Moreno. A Moreno is someone born with brown hair to a pure blonde family.

A pure blonde family is extremely rare and extremely cherished. If you are pure blonde, you are very rich and every relative in your family is blonde.

I “ruined” our family. Our family wasn’t pure anymore because of me, the Moreno. At first, when I came to understand what I was, I was ashamed and never showed my face to anyone. But now, I was changed. I didn’t really care anymore because I’d adjusted to their cruelty. I was used to it by now.

I rushed down the stairs from the attic. The small, cramped, slanted attic was the room where I slept. I wouldn’t even consider it mine because Annie shared it with me. Annie, the terribly annoying, noisy, clumsy cat.

I kept on going down flights and flights of stairs of our huge house, zigzagging past maids and butlers, who served my family members but did nothing for me, the Moreno.

I sighed. I ran into the dining room to face Mother.

“TESS! You took longer than you should’ve. Now set the table for me and your two sisters,” Mother scolded, and shoved me into the kitchen. Mother and my sisters had never stepped one foot into the kitchen –– they’d never even breathed near the door of it. Only maids and butlers went in there. And me, the Moreno.

I grabbed the fancy and expensive white lace tablecloth and spread it across the table. I started to walk back into the kitchen but Mother stopped me.

“Tess! You know that there aren’t supposed to be wrinkles in the tablecloth!” Mother shouted. So I fixed all the little tiny wrinkles, even the smallest ones that weren’t noticeable at first. Then, I finally set up all the plates, utensils, cups, napkins, food, and drinks. I waited for my sisters to file in.

“Good morning Mother. I thought you were going to get rid of the little Moreno?” my oldest sister, Angelica, said. She was wearing her flowing white dress, and her luxurious, silky hair was tied back in a french braid three-quarters of the way down her back. She scowled at me.

“Mother! I am terribly hungry. May we have breakfast now?” my other older sister, Evangeline, asked.

“Yes, darlings, sit around the table,” Mother said, and they all sat down. I started to sit in a chair but Evangeline stopped me.

“Tess, you have to sit on the ground over there. You don’t deserve to sit with us.” Evangeline gestured to the corner where the kitchen wall meets the dining room.

Angelica handed me a plastic plate with a plastic fork, two strawberries, and a mini waffle. They get more food than I do because they are blonde.

I took the plastic plate. They didn’t want me to make their fine utensils and plates as impure as I am, the Moreno.

I sat down in the corner where Evangeline told me to sit. I looked down at my food. I shoved the two strawberries into my mouth because I was beyond starving. I quickly ate the mini waffle and then threw out the plastic plate, which was now pink from strawberry juice, and took the garbage outside and left it in the bin for the garbage men to collect.

“TESS! GO TO TOWN AND BUY SOME MILK AND EGGS!” Mother yelled, and I made my way through the rocky path without shoes. Mother never bothered to get me shoes; she thinks I’m not worth it.

I saw the town coming closer and closer. My feet hurt. All the little pebbles, sharp stones, and tiny pieces of broken glass were unavoidable and dug into the soles of my feet.

Then the town came full into my sight and was right in front of me.

I ran to the paved road. I sat down and started picking all the sharp things out of my feet because I couldn’t stand it any longer.

I stood up and was relieved. There was no pain at all anymore.

I walked down the road to the farmer, Farmer Greene. He always sells milk and eggs.

“Hello, Mr. Greene. May I please have some milk and eggs for Mother?” I asked.

“How many, Tess?” Farmer Greene asked.

“Five milk cartons and five boxes of eggs,” I responded. If I got fewer than five, Mother would kill me and send me out on that horrible road, and if I got more than that Mother would send me back to return it. Either would involve going back on that horrible, sharp, painful road.

“Here you go, Tess, have a nice day. My wife noticed that whenever you come to town you never have shoes, so she decided to go out and buy you some,” Farmer Greene said thoughtfully.

“Oh, I am sorry, but I can’t accept that. You see, I am a Moreno, and Mother would kill me if I did. I truly appreciate it, but you see, Mother… ” I started to say, but Farmer Greene interrupted.

“It’s okay, take them –– I will escort you home. When you are done shopping, come here when you are done, Tess,” Farmer Greene said. I walked down the street into the heart of town.

I continued walking down the side of the street and came face to face with Mr. Warner.

“Good morning, Mr. Warner,” I greeted him. Mr. Warner was in his 70s and was the sort of man who was very prejudiced against anyone who wasn’t blonde, especially Morenos.

“Shut up, you foolish child! Your mother should have sent you away, little Moreno. She is stupid enough to keep you! You are a disgrace to the Faircastle family name! You are as impure as ever! Get out of my sight!” Mr. Warner screamed, and everyone in town stared. He threw me to the ground and all my groceries flew everywhere around me.

I recovered and knelt down to pick them all up. Then a boy kneeled down and started to help me.

“It’s not fair for Morenos to be treated like this,” the boy said.

“Are you a Moreno?” I asked, and then I looked up to see his perfectly blonde hair with not even one hint of brown in it. He was very tall and had small freckles covering his nose. He was wearing the most expensive pixelgram t-shirt you could get and fancy jeans.

“No, I’m pure, but that shouldn’t make a difference. It is just hair color, people, come on! This is like 20th century discrimination all over again,” the boy said.

“I know!” I agreed, and stuck the last of the groceries back in the bag.

“I am trying to stop all this stuff. It isn’t really working. My father won’t change the law. He just won’t do it. He likes people to be separated,” the boy said.

“Wait, you mean your father is the king?!” I was surprised. I mean, really surprised.

“Yeah. By the way, I’m Brad,” he said. He looked sort of embarrassed at my reaction to him being the prince.

“ I’m Tess. Just Tess. Mother won’t even let me use my last name,” I sighed.

“Oh, I am so sorry. Maybe I can convince my father to change the law and make everyone equal. It’ll be hard but I’ll try. Meet me by that rock tomorrow, same time,” Brad called and turned to go.

I stood up and walked back to Farmer Greene.

“Here you go, Tessie,” Farmer Greene said kindly, as he helped me slip on my new shoes. They were the softest, best-fitting, most soothing things I had ever put on. I had never really felt comfortable being a Moreno and all, but this was great. I guessed this was what normal feels like.

We walked back home together.

“TESS! WHY ARE YOU WEARING SHOES?” Mother yelled furiously. She was like a lion and I was a defenseless lamb.

I quickly ran into the kitchen and put away the groceries. I left Mother to talk this through with Farmer Greene.

I finished up my daily duties. I am never allowed to have lunch.  At most I have two meals a day, if I am lucky.

I did the rest of my chores and was sent up to bed.

I sat down on the creaky floor of the attic and crawled under the blanket. Actually, I couldn’t crawl under it –– it was way too small for that.

I lay down. Annie jumped on the floor from the top of the ancient bedside table Grandma Bessie so “thoughtfully” gave to me (she just wanted to get rid of it), and an antique vase from 2017 was sent into the air and came down with a smash.

“Oh, you clumsy little cat. Annie! Look what you’ve done! I am going to get in trouble with Mother now. Annie, I wish you weren’t so clumsy… move into Angelica’s room and annoy her! I’d like to see that,” I said and shooed Annie away from the mess.

“TESS! You darn Moreno, stop being so clumsy and clean this mess up. When you are done, get into bed,” Mother scolded, and went back down stairs. I swept up the mess and fell asleep.

The next day I was sent to town. I walked there happily in my extremely comfortable shoes.

I met Brad at the rock. He seemed excited.

“TESS! Guess what! Look at this!” Brad squealed happily and showed me a hologram of the show News On The Go.

“Hello, citizens of Carolina! Today the King has changed a law. The law has been changed so Morenos will have equal rights and will be treated the same as Pures. If you are not treating Morenos the same, you will go to prison,” the hologram said.

I was beyond excited. Mother would finally treat me the same as Evangeline and Angelica. I would get new blankets, and I would actually get a bedroom and I wouldn’t have to share with Annie anymore. The best part was that I wouldn’t be a servant or slave anymore.

“That is amazing! Thanks so much, Brad! But, I guess that means I won’t come here much anymore,” I said sadly while looking at the ground. I couldn’t bring myself to look at him.

“You don’t have to be sent here –– you can just come here on your own and sit at the rock, and I’ll be there,” Brad suggested, and that brought my spirits back up.

And that is what I did. I was still despised by my family, who held onto the old prejudices, but outside I was treated as an equal. Life was great. Every morning I would head into town, but instead of looking like a pilgrim, I looked like a normal girl.

That was all I had wished for, and it came true.

I was free.

Song of the Wolves

Tala

I trekked through the damp forest, which had been washed recently from the rain during day. The night air felt damp against my skin. My moccasins made no sound as I walked on the soggy grass. I was quiet, trying not to disturb the newborn fawns and the deer who were sleeping. The wind brushed lightly against the trees, making them move and rock like a crib. The sound of water became louder, which made me know I was going in the right direction.

I finally made it to the clearing of my favorite spot. I sat down on a log as I watched the waterfall blend in with the moon, making the water look like stars coming out of the moon. The creek rushed the stars to a place I don’t know. I sighed, looking at the marvelous picture that was set before me. I love it here. Peace and quiet. It was a full moon, and the moon seemed bigger and brighter here than any other part of the land. It made me feel like I could touch it, even though it was impossible. The rushing of the water soothed my troubles and the view erased all of my thoughts. I sighed as I listened to the water splashing and closed my eyes. I knew that someday I wouldn’t be able to listen to this sound anymore. Something told me that there would be a time when I wouldn’t be able to sing in harmony with the water and the wolves at this place.

The wolves where our tribe is are named the Wolf Clan. I opened my mouth and let out a still note that echoed across the valley. I stopped and heard a wolf let out the same note. I started to sing the stories our ancestral people told us about the wolves, as the elders said. I sang songs of wishing for peace and forever bonding with the magnificent creatures. The wolf accompanied me as we sang a duet that no other Cherokee people can sing. A song so full of harmony that it seemed to be a single language. When we ended, I heard something run on the soggy grass. I turned around and saw a wolf, a young pup. Its eyes were like the moon, glistening and shining. It came close to me and sniffed my hand when I reached out. I walked in circles and it followed me.

“You should be my pet wolf. I will name you Usgiyi, which means ‘Snow Moon.’ You like the ancient songs, and while it is the snow moon, the elders tell stories in the village,” I said.  Usgiyi gave a playful yip and I rubbed its silver fur.

“My name is Tala, and you will be my companion forever,” I whispered. Usgiyi rubbed its face in my arm.  

**********************************

Ama

I was lying in my teepee, listening to the breathing of my sister, who was asleep next to me. I crept from the blanket and pulled on my moccasins. I opened the flap of the teepee slowly, and then crept outside. I almost tripped over my grandmother Tala’s old moccasins. I put them back where they were supposed to be and continued to go out. My moccasins thumped loudly against the dry dirt ground. I ran around the neighbors’ gardens and their huge wagons that they used from the marching, and bumped into a few rocks. I reached the huge lake a little bit away from the camp. I was sweating from the run and the warm, humid air stuck to my arm like flies. I breathed in the freshness of the lake and saw the moon’s reflection on the lake along with the stars, even though there was no waterfall like great-grandmother Tala had described to my mother. She had told me the stars shone brightly around the moon, like it was saying that the moon was special and important.

The mysterious owls hooted around and fluttered here and there, their feathers falling like the moon’s light dropping to the ground. I heard footsteps and turned around. I saw one of the wolves from our tribe. I sighed in relief and reached my hand out. I rubbed the silver coat and hummed the song my mother always sang, saying that Tala started the song with the wolves. The wolf caught on and we sang quietly, the song of the ancestors. The song that brought peace to the clan and helped us be at peace with the wolves who help us when we are in trouble. I knew it wasn’t as good as Tala’s, but I finally knew what it felt like to bond with a wolf like Tala. A bond I knew would last forever.

“I will name you… Svnoyi. I am Ama. I want you to be my partner forever,” I said, like Tala had said to her wolf. It liked that name. I smiled as I rubbed its soft, warm head against my cold arm. I remembered the stories of the old tribal camp and the march that the whites’ government made us march. I was angry at them. Because of them we had to move to new, filthy land with not many trees. A lot of our tribe, the Cherokee, died from the journey. I remembered the stories the elders told, the stories that Tala knew and  named her wolf after. I also remembered what Tala did for the tribe, and I wanted to be like her. To be brave and carry on the tradition of the wolves and our forever bond with them. I gave Svnoyi a necklace I was wearing.

“Here is a necklace I made. I have another one. I will wear it and you will wear yours.  This will show our bond. We will work together to save our people, like what Tala did,” I said.  Svnoyi nodded and jumped up and down, determined to do that.

 

****************************************

Immokalee

I was walking on a frozen path, huddled in a worn, faded jacket, my bracelet jingling from my shivers. I kept scolding myself that I was crazy, being outside in the middle of the night in winter in Alaska, the coldest state, but I kept going. Tonight was a full moon, and I wasn’t going to miss it. It was going to be a beautiful night. The coldness touched my arm, and making it ice cold and giving me goosebumps. The wind flew through the icy bare trees and made a howl against the icicles. Ice crunched under my tight leather shoes, sort of like a moccasin that was way too small for me. I wished that it was warmer, like in Oklahoma where great-grandmother Ama was. I hiked through the woods and finally reached my destination.

I swept away the snow on a stump with my hand, covered by a part of the jacket, before sitting down. I was staring at a river, which froze a few weeks ago. The moon reflected onto the ice, like it was stuck frozen in the river. The stars were twinkling, like they was trying to get out and help the moon to break free from the ice. I breathed, and my breath hung in the air like father’s tobacco smoke. I couldn’t stop myself from going open-eyed at the sight.

I was happy we didn’t have to pay to watch this scene, because our family didn’t have money since the Great Depression. I knew that looking at the moon angled on top of water was a family tradition in my Wolf’s Clan. I remembered stories that my mother used to tell me before she passed away from a disease that my father never told me about. Stories like what my ancestor Tala did when she hiked to Oklahoma on the Trail of Tears and what my great-great grandmother Ama did to save the tribe. I remembered that they all had wolves, and they bonded with them. I also remembered that it was Tala who first sang a song full of peace and forever bonding with the wolves who helped us when we were in trouble.

I sang the song, my voice echoing through the icicles. I sang the stories that were passed down by mouth and of the forgotten people who died while protecting our tribe and those who died while we were forcibly moved to Oklahoma. A howl accompanied me and I stopped, surprised. I looked around and saw a wolf. I sang, looking at the wolf. It sang with me and we continued to sing to the end of the song. I felt a huge bond between me and the wolf. It was a warm feeling, a feeling that someone loved and trusted me. It walked up to me and nuzzled its muzzle onto my leg.

“Hey, I am Imookalee,” I whispered.

It yapped.

“I think I will name you Nvda,” I said.

It nodded.  

“I want you to be my partner forever,” I said.

Nvda nodded.

I took off my cold bracelet and motioned Nvda to lift it’s paw. I put the bracelet on it’s leg. “This will represent our bond,” I said.

It nodded and I wondered how I was going to feed it. Father didn’t have a job and there are no animals in the winter time. But, I figured that Nvda would figure out on its own.

“I will make one like it and we will wear it always,” I concluded. I touched the glossy silver fur and Nvda gave a happy yap.

*****************************************

Amadahy

I stayed still in my bed. I made sure no one was awake when I crept out of my bed. My ancestor Tala’s moccasins, my other ancestor (a few generations younger) Ama’s necklace, and my great-great-grandmother Immokalee’s bracelet were in their special spot on my desk, glimmering from the moon’s light.

I slowly opened my door, little groans coming from the hinges, and crept down the stairs. I tiptoed across the living room and into the kitchen. I made sure not to rattle the pots and pans  on the drying rack. I shoved on my worn-out blue Nike sneakers and opened the back door slowly. I went outside, closed it, and walked to the woods in my backyard. I walked on the trail we made, but swerved to the left around a fourth of it and walked straight ahead. The trees swayed a little from the breeze and the leaves rustled. Fireflies blinked everywhere, making little lights to guide my way through the forest. The wind tickled my arm and my pajama shirt fluttered a little. I finally came upon a waterfall and a creek rushed the water to somewhere else. The moon blended in with the moon in the water, and the water was like stars coming out of the moon and rushing along the creek, like what Tala saw a few centuries ago. I am in the exact place where Tala saw her waterfall and met Usgiyi.

Here is my brief description of my family, Tala, Ama, and Immookalee, and me. I am currently in Tennessee, where the Wolf’s Clan was before. The Wolf Clan was part of a Native American tribe called the Cherokee. Tala lived near the end of the 1700s, around when the European settlers moved west in the United States. A few decades later, in about 1835, they were forced to move to Oklahoma. Ama’s story takes place in Oklahoma, about 20 or more years after the move. Then, Immokalee’s parents moved to Alaska when the Great Depression hit, which was about 1929, by horse and wagon, which took a really long time. All of them were pretty well known in the Cherokee history for their bonding with wolves and what they did with them. Tala and Usgiyi were the most well known out of the three of them, and were very well known for saving the tribe a lot of times. She sang about the stories when the tribe was fighting against the wolves when the wolves were too close to the clan. She sang that it was no use to fight them and that the wolves would help the tribe later. The wolves stayed and they helped the tribe when the ‘evil’ Beaver Clan went into the tribe to take over the land.

The wolves helped and they won the battle by taking the weapons and biting them. Tala also brought the idea of helping animals, which helped the tribe a lot. She gave hope to the Cherokees when they were marching to Oklahoma. She sang the stories and helped the others continue to remember the stories of their ancestors and the myths. Usgiyi had pups, which stayed with the tribe forever. She got the title “Singer of Hope and Peace,” and continued to help the tribe. She had a daughter later on, who later had Ama.  Ama loved Tala and she helped the tribe by also bonding with a wolf.

When the white people came, Tala and Ama stood up for the tribe and helped fight, and later they died together. Ama saved the tribe and the wolf helped too, which gave her the title “Warrior of the Wolves.” She had a girl before she died, who had the grandmother of Immokalee. Immokalee’s father moved to Alaska with her mother because he wanted to see the world, but was at the wrong time. He moved to Alaska, hoping to find leftover gold, which he never found.

After bonding, Immokalee stayed in Alaska, had a few kids, and lived with the wolves. She protected them from harm and poachers. She later moved back to the clan, who were still living in the same spot in Oklaholma. She lived there and inspired a few people to protect the land of the Cherokee. She got the title “The Bringer of Justice and Truth.” One of her kids had my great-grandmother. I came later on and here I am, in the 21st century. I feel proud of them, each facing a difficult time with a fellow wolf, who they trusted and stayed loyal to.

I closed my eyes and breathed in the air. I was sad that I couldn’t sing the song. It had gotten lost someplace in history after Immookalee sang the song with her wolf. Someone didn’t sing the song or didn’t pass it down, so no one knows what the exact words were. Not many people remember the stories the ancestors told of the wolves and the tribe, or even knew there was a song about it at all.

Not many people even know the Wolf Clan; only the people whose ancestors were in our tribe. Most are still in the same spot where Ama was about two centuries ago. I was sort of envious of my ancestors. They got to sing the song, but here I am, a descendent of some of the greatest people in Cherokee history, and I don’t even know half the lyrics of the song my ancestors sang.  

I opened my eyes and sighed. I knew I had to enjoy the view. There isn’t much chance to see it, since there is school on most of the nights there is a full moon.

I sang the beginning unknowingly, singing the first few lines. Then I forgot the rest, like I usually did when I tried to sing the song. I sighed, annoyed at myself. Then, I heard a faint howling in the rhythm of the song. I followed its lead and we sang, without words, of the song that my ancestors sang. I sang the parts I knew, but sang the notes for the places I didn’t. I heard the song echoing in the woods when we finished our duet. I heard something come behind me and I whirled around, my body in defensive mode. You never can be sure if a person might kidnap you, which is sort of common in the 21st century, but not really in Tennessee.

I relaxed my pose when I saw a wolf pup. It whined and put his head onto my lap. I awkwardly pet its head. I don’t have a pet. Its blue, beady eyes looked at me and it started to howl the song. I realized this was the wolf who sang the song with me.

“You are the one who sang it with me?” I asked the wolf, hoping it knew some English.  It nodded and yapped a few times.

“I am Amadahy. Nice to meet you, uh… wolf,” I said.  It sighed at the word “wolf.”

“I guess I will have to name you. I will name you Waya,” I said, thinking of my limited Cherokee language. Waya is basically “wolf” in Cherokee, one of the words my mother told me to memorize. It yapped (I am pretty sure it doesn’t know the meaning) happily. I remembered a story of the bonding, and I held out my bandana I was wearing.

“I want you to be my partner forever,” I said.

It nodded and lifted its paw, like it knew what to do. I wrapped the bandana around the leg and knotted it twice, making sure it couldn’t fall off. When I finished, it jumped into my lap and slept soundly. I smiled as I brushed its fur. I knew that I would pass on the rhythm of the song forever and ever and not make a mistake. I also knew that it was my turn to continue the tradition of the ancient song that brought peace and forever bonding to my clan.

Pete the Pirate Cat and Charlotte

Once upon a time, there was a pirate cat named Pete. Pete had always wanted to marry a cat that wore the most beautiful shoes ever. One day, he decided to go on his ship and search the mysterious islands of Hawaii. The first island he was going to search was Kauai. He held a ball to see who would wear the fanciest shoes. He met at least one thousand cats before a sleek black and white feline walked proudly to him.

“Hello, my name is Charlotte,” she purred.

“Hello,” he replied.

Charlotte was pretty, but Pete couldn’t help noticing her purple shoes decorated with sparkly diamonds. They were so magnificent that he knew that she was the one he should marry.

Pete asked Charlotte if she wanted to dance to the slow song and she said, “Okay.”

After the song Pete asked, “Will you marry me?”

When she first saw Pete, she immediately knew she wanted to marry him. She was very nervous because no one had ever seemed interested enough to ask for her hand, let alone even ask her out on a date. Charlotte was about to say yes, when suddenly a giant bear came out of nowhere.

The bear said to Pete, “I am going to get you, because you sprayed me with green spray paint, and I hate the color green.”

Pete knew exactly what he was talking about. Two years ago, he sprayed the giant bear with green spray paint because the giant bear was trying to steal Pete’s pirate ship.

Then Charlotte said, “Mom, I thought you said you were going to stop stealing boats!”    

“That’s your mom?!” exclaimed Pete.

By then, everybody at the party was staring at them. Shyly, Charlotte nodded. Charlotte’s mom was a bear, but her dad was a cat. They met when Charlotte’s mom was stealing a boat and the owner said, “Stop stealing my boat.” Charlotte’s mother liked that he stood up to her, so she married the cat who owned the boat.

Pete then said, “Why don’t you want your daughter to be happy?”

“I do,” said the giant bear.

“Well, if you want her to be happy, you will let me marry her,” said Pete.  

“I don’t think you deserve my daughter.”

“I do, and I’ll prove it to you by telling you why and spray-painting you blue,” said Pete. “I deserve your daughter because It was always my dream to marry some cat with the most beautiful shoes.”

“Oooh, I like blue, and that story makes sense so I guess you do deserve my daughter,” said the giant bear.

So he sprayed the giant bear with blue spray paint.

Then Charlotte and Pete got married. Their ceremony was amazing. Charlotte wore her shoes that she wore at the party. She also wore a sparkly purple dress with a real diamond on it. There were flowers, a huge cake with Pete and Charlotte on top, and there was also a turquoise arch with white flowers on it.

They lived happily ever after.

 

The End

The Secret Case File of Donald Trump

Case file noted by Guy T. Bloom of the paranormal branch of the FBI.

Prologue

Donald Drumpf was an ordinary man… NOT! He is by far, the best candidate that you can vote for…. but there is a dark secret about him that nobody knows…. and this secret is about to destroy the world.

Chapter One: What happened?

Donald Drumpf was sleeping in bed. And he woke straight up. He was having a nightmare about his science test at school tomorrow.

“At least I don’t have the pressure of running for president,” he said to himself, and went back to sleep.

“Yeah, I don’t think so,” said the ghost of a rogue wizard, before using his magic teleportation powers to go into Drumpf’s room. He started chanting a Darke spell while waving his hands over Donald Drumpf. There was a flash of light, and Drumpf woke up to a man in black wizard robes from the fifteen hundreds waving his hands over Drumpf.

“It’s already over,” he said. “YOU WILL AVENGE MY FRIEND!” There was a flash of light, and the wizard disappeared.

“Ah, whatever,” Drumpf said to himself. “I’ll just go back to sleep.”

Chapter Two: The Unknown Effects

That morning, when he woke up, he was worried about his test again. What are all the parts of the Bohr diagram again? he thought to himself. He went to the kitchen and poured himself some milk for his Captain Crunch cereal. When his parents got up and went near their son, strange effects started happening in their head. They wanted their son… to win some sort of election. They weren’t sure that he was going to, yet at the same time they were.

“Hey, son?” Mr. Drumpf asked. “Is there a class president election in your class going on?”

“Yes,” he answered. “But I didn’t tell you…. How did you know?” Now there was even more pressure on him. His parents wanted him to be class president? There were 43 kids in his class… that meant he had a  3.333…  percent chance of winning, because only 30 kids were running. At least he was good at math…

“Well, son, I expect you to win this,” Drumpf’s dad said.

“Look, Dad,” Drumpf started. “I already have a test today, and winning the election is even more pressure.”

“You will be grounded if you don’t get at least second place.”

“GROUNDED?! THAT’S INSANE! THERE ARE 30 KIDS RUNNING!”

“No arguing, Donald,” Mr. Drumpf started. ‘’You will win!” There was now a faint red glow from his father’s eyes.

“Dad? Are you oka –– ?”

“SHUT IT SON! YOU MUST WIN THE ELECTION!” his father said angrily, his eyes glowing a very bright red. Donald looked at his mother, because she would obviously be on his side. To Donald’s surprise, his mother had the same red eyes as his father, and she was pretty much just glaring at Donald for a few seconds.

She broke the silence by saying, “Must have son election win,” in a deep zombie like groan.

“What’s going on?!” Donald screamed, before running out of the house to his schoolbus. On the schoolbus, he met his friend Harry.

“Dude, my parents are going ins –– ” Donald started, before screaming. He saw the same red eyes he saw on his parents.

“Win election Donald must,” his friend groaned like a zombie, no… like his parents.

“Oh, shoot,” Donald said.

Chapter Three: The Deal

When Donald got to school, there was a crowd following him, all groaning like zombies.

“UURGGGH!” the kids repeated. From an aerial view, it looked like Donald was a powerful magnet, while the other students were magnetic sand.

“Win election Donald must,” they all chanted. Donald noticed that they all had red eyes.

“Um…” Donald started. “I gotta use the bathroom.” He dashed to the bathroom, and locked the door. He could still hear their constant groaning.

What is going on!? he asked himself. The ghost of the rogue wizard was right in front of him, yet Donald didn’t see him. The ghost then appeared to Donald. Donald flinched.

“Whoa!” Donald screamed. “Who are you?”

“I am the ghost responsible for everything happening to you.”

“Why did you do this?”

“Donald J. Drumpf,” The ghost started. “Be my apprentice.”

“Okay, rewind,” Drumpf said, confused. “WHY DID YOU NEED TO PUT THIS DUMB CURSE ON ME!?”

The wizard smirked. He then snapped his fingers. The constant groaning stopped. “You see, that’s what you can do to people if you get trained as my apprentice.”

“Why me?”

“Because I saw what a Darke heart you have.”

“Okay, you know what?” Donald started in a ‘smart alec-y’ voice. “I would have been your apprentice, but I was seriously going insane after you put that spell on me. If that was you, because I mean –– ” He was cut off.

“I was the person who put that spell on you, and you didn’t really freak out that much.”

“Well, give me some proof that I didn’t fre –– ” He was cut off by the wizard snapping his fingers. A misty projection of the scene popped up- He started chanting a Darke spell while waving his hands over Donald Drumpf. There was a flash of light, and Drumpf woke up to a man in wizard robes from the fifteen-hundreds waving his hands over Drumpf.

“It’s already over,” he said. “YOU WILL AVENGE MY SON!” There was a flash of light, and the wizard disappeared.

“Ah, whatever,” Drumpf said to himself. “I’ll just go back to sleep.” The projection turned into golden dust and fell to the ground before disappearing.

“Okay, maybe I didn’t freak out that much,” Drumpf said. “But I was really freaked out when the effects started happening.”

“I can’t disprove you that time.” The wizard said. “But will you be my apprentice?”

“Um, I don’t know. Let me think about –– NO,” Drumpf said. “You put my through the most dramatic night and day of my life.” Drumpf started walking toward the bathroom door.

“You know you haven’t suffered all the effects of the spell, right?” the ghost smirked. Donald stopped walking.

“What’s next, you make it so I actually fail everything that I do?”

“No, I made it so every single election you run, you win.” Drumpf thought he saw him mutter something under his breath, but disregarded it.

“And that’s a curse because?” Donald said. He could win EVERYTHING. This was insane.

“If you ever lose an election, the world will come to an end and everyone will be alerted it was you.”

“I mean, that’s kinda –– whatever.” Drumpf walked out of the room. What Drumpf didn’t hear in that conversation were the most important parts.

“No, I made it so every single election you run, you win. But the flaw is, you lose the power for your biggest election,” was what the wizard actually said. His next line? Here’s all the secrets: “If you ever lose an election, the world will come to an end and everyone will be alerted it was you. So be warned about your biggest election.” He was just following the code of conduct: You must state all of the effects of your spell. He started chanting a Darke chant to summon his master. A ghost of an old frail man appeared. He was also wearing robes.

“The deed is done, my master. But Drumpf didn’t accept the offer,” the Rogue Wizard said, bowing down to his master.

“The offer is meaningless now. So you did the deed, huh. Good,” the Wizard’s master began. “Very good.” The master then snapped his fingers. His apprentice began to shrink.

“What… WHAT IS GOING ON?!” the apprentice screamed with a feeling of betrayal, but he was more surprised than anything. “STOP THIS RIGHT nooow!” His voice was drowned out while he shrunk. His master created a bubble with his hands, and pointed his finger at his apprentice. The bubble traveled in the direction of his apprentice. When the bubble got to his mini-apprentice, he was encased in the bubble. The master then used telekinetic Darke powers to lift his apprentice bubble into the air, to eventually land in his hands. The apprentice  repeatedly smacked and punched the inside of the bubble. The master held the bubble in his hands as if it was a valuable vase…. then he crushed it with his bare hands.

“I didn’t need him,” he said to himself. “I looked into his mind… he was going to betray me… side with Drumpf. It’s over now. The world will fall to ashes. And all of it will be Donald Drumpf’s fault.”

Chapter Four: The Meeting

When Drumpf went out of the bathroom, he didn’t have a mob following him. He didn’t have zombies groaning “Election Win Donald Must” with red eyes. All the kids were back to normal. He wasn’t sure he could trust that wizard.

After school, when he got home, he did his homework in his room. Little did he know, the ghost master of the other Rogue Wizard was floating right beside him. He chose to appear to Donald. Donald flinched.

“Why do people keep –– ” Donald began, but was cut off by the Wizard.

“I hear that my apprentice has given you the offer of being his apprentice. Well, he said his apprentice, like he was supposed to.”

“What do you mean?” Drumpf asked.

“I mean you really would have been my apprentice.”

“Okay… you came here just to tell me that? I declined.”

“Well, he told you about the other effects, right?”

“Yes, he did.”

“Well in order for those effects to work, you need to shake my hand. I made a change to the effects.”

“What?”

“They won’t be zombies anymore.”

“Who?”

“The people who are around you, idiot. Everything else he said is still intact.”

“Okay, do I need to sign a paper or anything?”

“Nope, you just need to shake my hand.” He took out his hand for a handshake. Donald took out his. Then he made the biggest mistake of his life: He shook the hand.

Chapter Five: Cause & Effect

Donald then got used to winning everything –– he didn’t have to fit any requirements. He got cocky. He started going under those requirements on purpose. He started having bad debates for the debate club, he brought a stuffed animal for a dog contest, he didn’t even try. And he is being faced with the biggest challenge of his life right now –– becoming president of the United States. Little did he know that the wizard was rubbing his hands together, laughing so hard he fell to the ground. He had almost succeeded in avenging his son who tried to destroy the world himself, DomDaniel. The effects of the spell were going away. In only a few months, the world will be ashes. If only he had accepted the offer as his apprentice. Then they would stay together on the planet Dorghast, the planet of Darke ghosts. You could come in if you are not a ghost, but you needed a Supreme Darke Ghost to escort you. You get there via Darke flying, or using the NoAir spell in space, what he was planning to do after the world explodes, maybe after using a Shield spell for the explosion. The presidential campaign is still going on, so if you don’t want the world to explode, VOTE FOR DONALD DRUMPF!

Sucked In

Chapter 1

I slam the back door of the farmhouse and run over to the barn. I have just gotten home from the last day of school and am ready for a nap (a.k.a. watch a movie on my computer and eat popcorn). My mom is out and my dad is still at work, so I have the house to myself. But I love the barn almost as much as Biscuit (my dog).

A couple years ago, my dad cleaned out the hayloft and said I could have it. It’s now my favorite place in the whole world. I climb up the shaky ladder and plop down in a pile of hay. Woof woof!  My dog comes running over to me.

“Hey, Biscuit!” I yell and he jumps onto my lap, licking my face. “You wanna see a movie?” I ask him, and he licks my face again. I assume that means yes.

I grab my computer from the floor where I keep it and flip it open. A picture of my horse, Dusty, appears on the screen. My parents got him for me for my fifth birthday and now I’m 12, so we’ve been together for a while.

“Sandra! Where are you? I’m home!” my sister’s voice rings out.

I didn’t know she was coming home! I think.

Her name is Arra and she’s perfect, with her straight blond hair and blue eyes. Also, she has pink lips and rosy cheeks. My parents say I’m pretty, and I think so too, but my sister is beautiful. The hard thing to believe is that we’re twins. She takes after my gorgeous mother and I take after my father, with my straight black hair and not-so-pink lips.

“I’m in here!” I yell.

“Be more specific!” My sister likes to correct me at any time possible.

“The barn!” Soon I hear Arra climbing up the ladder. The first thing I can see is the top of her head before the rest of her body climbs up onto the hay loft. I groan. She eyes the movie that’s on the counter.

“Is that really Snow White? Is that what we’re watching?” she asks.

What we’re watching? I think. Oh no, no, no!

Instead, I say, “If it looks like a duck and quacks like a duck, it probably is a duck.”

When she looks puzzled I say, “In other words, yes, that’s Snow White. And yes, that’s what I’m watching.”

She plops down next to me, seemingly not taking the hint. I sigh and put in the disk. There’s a buzzing noise and it gets louder by the minute. Soon, my sister and I are covering our ears. Then everything is silent and I’m falling through darkness.

 

Chapter 2

There’s a zap, then a world forms around me.

“Where are we?” my sister asks.

I look around me and see a cottage. It looks so familiar.

But where have I seen it? I think. Then it hits me. There is only one place I’ve seen a cottage like this. And that’s ––

“I think we’re in the movie!” I yell. “But in the end of it, where I left off.”

“But that means Snow White’s inside the cottage choking!” she says.

“So you have seen the movie!” I tease and her face turns red. My sister and I run toward the cottage.

“Hello!” my sister yells as we enter the small house. I pause in the doorway.

“He –– ” and then there is a strangled scream. We race into a yellow room and find a girl with hair as black as coal and lips as red as blood lying on the floor. It can only be one person. Snow White.

“Ah!” we scream, and race to her aid.

“Quick!” I yell, “I’ll pick her up and you pat her back!” I grab Snow White and Arra grabs a broom. She starts to whack the her back. A apple falls out of her mouth and Snow White opens her eyes.

“Gasp! Wha- what happened?” she asks, touching her forehead.

“You were choking on that apple,” my sister says, sitting down on a chair nearby. I help Snow White onto a sofa and then sit down next to her.

“Oh my! Thank you!” she whispers covering her mouth. My sister yawns.

“You must be exhausted,” Snow White says. “Why don’t you stay with me? We almost never have visitors, let alone girls.”

“We’d love to, but what do you mean by we?” my sister asks.

“The dwarves,” says Snow White standing up.

“Oh right,” my sister mutters.

“What was that? Oh never mind. Follow me, please.” Snow White herds us out of the room and up some wide stairs. At the top she leads us down a long hall and stops beside a oak wood door. “The dwarves are out so there is plenty of room,” she says and opens the door.

I gasp. I can’t help myself. The room is beautiful. The fire place at the end of the room is polished, and there was a large bed with a pink canopy pushed up against the blue wall. My sister smirks and I turn away.

“Hey,” I say. “There’s only one bed. We’ll have to share.” My sister’s smile fades. Now it’s my turn to smirk. I think she’s going to say something, but she doesn’t. I guess she’s too polite.

That night, I can’t sleep. I can’t stop wondering about my parents. I wonder if they’re worried. I lay awake thinking. “Sandra? Are you awake?” my sister’s voice asks from the dark.

“Sandra? Are you awake?” my sister’s voice asks from the dark.

“Yeah.”

“Um, I’ve been thinking –– ”

“Yeah.”

She sighs. “You know how at the end of the movie the prince sees Snow White in the coffin and decides to marry her?”

I’m silent.

She continues, “Well, what happens if he doesn’t see her in the coffin?”

I think. Then I gasp.

“He will never see her or know her, let alone marry her!” I yell, jerking myself upright. “Arra, we might have just made a humongous mistake!”

 

Chapter 3

In the morning Snow White makes us a good breakfast of eggs and bacon. We laugh and talk but then it’s time for Arra and me to get going. We say our goodbyes, get directions for the capital (we stayed up late last night making a plan to visit the prince, you see), she gives us some money, and we head out.

We walk a while then reach a small village. We find an inn with a love bird on its sign and get a small lunch with the little money we have. Then we set out again. By around sunset, we come upon the capital. “Now what?” my sister asks as we enter the large town.

“Now what?” my sister asks as we enter the large town.

“We find an inn,” I say, confidently taking the lead.

“How do we pay?” she asks.

“We have some money left –– ah! Here it is!” We walk up to an oak wood building labeled the Just Right Inn. I open the door and we troop in. Right when we slam the door, it starts raining.

“We’re going to sleep in the inn, right?” Arra stares out the window wearily. I don’t respond. Don’t want to get her hopes up.

We trudge wearily out of the inn and into the pouring rain fifteen minutes later. There are no rooms left thanks to the annoyingly cold rain. A man dressed in royal clothing comes up to us and bows to Arra. “Your Highness,” he says, kissing her hand. “Into the carriage, the prince is worried sick!” He shoos us into a carriage despite our complaints and reasoning. Soon, we’re sitting across from each other on velvet cushioned benches. Then I get an idea.

“Arra!” I exclaim.

“Mmm?” she asks.

“This guy, and the prince too, they think you’re the prince’s bride-to-be. We could use you –– or whoever you’re playing as –– to our advantage.” I lean over and whisper the plan in her ear.

We finally reach the castle at around midnight. The steward rushes us down dank corridors and past suits of armor. We stop at a wooden door and he knocks. Another man in the same clothing answers and lets us in. He leads us into a waiting room and disappears into the room beyond. A second later he appears and beckons to us. By now the first steward had disappeared so we walk through the doors alone. The doors bang behind me and I wince slightly.

“My love,” the prince says standing up and smiling. He stops smiling as soon as he sees me. His brow furrows. “And who’s this?” he asks.

“She’s my cousin. She –– ” I stammer.

“You sure you’re related? You’re beautiful and she’s, well, not,” he interrupts. I jerk back in surprise, but before I can answer, my sister butts in.

“Anyway, she’s been reminding me of our childhood friend, Snow White, and I want you to meet her.”

Wow, Arra’s got this in the bag! I think to myself.

“Anything for you, my love. Tomorrow we will meet her! Now to bed, my beauty!”

He waves us out of the room. So far so good, I think smugly. Now for the hard part.

 

Chapter 4

The next morning the prince, Arra (also known as Lady Sabrina), and I get in a carriage, and are whisked away to Snow White’s.

When we get there, Snow White answers the door. She looks flustered. “Your Highness,” she says and bows deeply. The prince looks dazzled.

“Milady,” he says, and kisses her hand. She looks utterly surprised. “I hear you are friends with my bride-to-be.” Snow White definitely looks disappointed at the mention of the words bride-to-be.

“Please, um, come in,” she says, motioning for us to enter. But Arra holds the prince back.

“I need to talk to you.” The prince’s brow furrows and he resists, but finally gives in.

“Of course.” The “couple” walk around to the back of the house.

“Um, I’m going to pick some berries.” I bluff, then before she can object, I race around to the back of the house and duck behind some bushes just as the “couple” come into view.

“Um, listen,” says Arra. “I asked you to come here for two reasons.”

“And what would those be?”

“One, to see my friend. And two, I needed to talk to you in private.”

“Why?”

“Well, I don’t know if you’re the right person for me, or if I’m the right person for you –– ”

“You mean you do –– ”

“But I do know someone who would be good for you.” The prince was silent. “Snow White.” Arra slips the ring she found in her room last night off her hand and hands it to the prince.

“Well, she is nice, and pretty so I gue –– ”

“Great! I’ll go get her so you can ask her to marry you!” Arra dashes off around the house and I follow her. Snow White is waiting in front of the house for us. “The prince would like to talk to you,” Arra says as we approach Snow White. She turns beet red.

“Um, okay,” she says and runs around to the back of the house.

A few minutes later, (a few minutes that felt like a few hours) the two come back. I notice that Snow White is wearing a ring she wasn’t wearing before. I smile.

I’ve never been more relieved to hear a piece of news as I was to hear this news. “We’re getting married!” she said.

Then there is a loud zap and I’m laying next to Arra on the hayloft like nothing had ever happened.

“What just happened?” I ask, standing up and brushing the hay off my lap.

“All I know is that there’s hay all over me, and I need to take a shower,” she says, standing up.

Some things just never change, I think. Then she does something she hasn’t done since we were five. She hugs me.

Then again, some things do change, I think to myself and smile.

The Terrrerian

Once upon a time, there was a terrrerian that consumed stars. The terrrerian consumed stars by piling dirt up until he was at the stars. Then, he ate the stars after they fell from the sky. To get down from the dirt mountain, he flew from tree to tree until he found maple syrup. Then, he boiled the maple syrup to make sand. He used the sand in a mixifier with stone, and he got sandstone. He ate the sandstone, and then jumped from the mountain and landed safely.

He used the extra sandstone to greenify the hooligans that were smashing the buzzlight bottles, that were made by the magical buzzlight fairy, who made the buzzlight company. When the terrrerian greenified the hooligans, they turned green and stopped moving. The buzzlight fairy was very happy, so the terrrerian got a bunch of green bobbleheads that yelled at greenery. The bobbleheads were magical, so they could grant wishes. But, when the bobbleheads granted wishes, the bobbleheads yelled even more at the greenery, which would make the greenery sad. The greenery would cry, which made the greenery grow. When the greenery grew the bobbleheads evaporated slowly till there were no bobbleheads left. The greenery somehow had magic powers because the greenery absorbed the bobbleheads.The bobbleheads reproduced because one bobblehead refused to grant wishes, and then there were 100 bobbleheads again.The terrrerian accidentally wished that he had an obsidian skull, and then he got his face stuck in a skull made of sponge marshmallows. The terrrerian wished the skull off his face and wished for a walnut salad, but when he ate the walnut salad he turned blue. Luckily, he had one wish left, so he wished that he was back to normal again.

But then there were no bobbleheads left. He still had some walnut salad left, so he fed it to the stars, and the stars fell all the way down to earth. Then the earth dissolved and became a star planet. He jumped off the star planet and turned it into a huge sponge marshmallow that broke gravity. He made three-dimensional televisions, took them to the sponge marshmallow planet, and ate them.

When he ate the three-dimensional TVs he could travel into the three dimensions. Then he traveled into the world of Potonia and bought a reversal potion. Then he travelled back into his own dimension. He threw the reversal potion at the sponge marshmallow planet, and it turned into a regular planet. He jumped back down to his planet and realized that the hooligans that were smashing the buzzlight bottles. They were still smashing them because they were ungreenified.

The buzzlight fairy was really angry, so she tried to destroy Jupiter, but instead she turned Jupiter into a firecracker. The firecracker exploded into the sun, which sent the whole galaxy hurtling into space.The galaxy crashed into a humongous spiderweb and there was a galaxy-wide spider apocalypse. But the spiders were peace loving creatures, and said that they would forgive the humans if they made it illegal to hurt a spider. Then the humans outlawed hurting a spider and outlawed spider farming. The humans were happy living in a world with spiders. Everyone had no fear because the spiders would protect them.

 

SADLY, TH
you

ERE WAS

want

A MAN

THAT

LIKED TO

to

SUBLIMIN

eat

ALLY

carrots

MESSAGE

People, and he subliminally messaged everyone to eat carrots. When everyone ate the carrots, they had super eyesight. The terrrerian still needed to remove the hooligans that kept smashing the buzzlight bottles, so he ran around the earth really fast, and that turned the earth into a super-friction planet, which only a few creatures would not survive. One of those creatures were the buzzlight-bottle-smashing-hooligans. After that, the buzzlight fairy was happy, so she gave the terrrerian time in a can. When the terrrerian opened the time in a can, there was a potent poultry powered popcorn machine that exploded exactly every elephant Ecuador ever executed. Then there was a worldwide Ecuador-executed elephant deficiency, which started a nuclear fallout. Because of the fallout, the spiders started spewing superheated spasm gas. The gas disabled the nuclear fallout by personifying it and sending it on a trip in its favorite rocket ship.The only side effects of the superheated spasm gas is that baby chickens turned green, and all the spiders shrunk again.

When the terrrerian saw the green chickens he thought he had greenified them by accident. So he fed all the baby chickens his spare walnut salad, and the baby chickens turned yellow again. The unbalance of color was balanced, so everything that was green turned yellow. The terrrerian realized that he didn’t greenify the baby chickens, and they were green before. Then, thanks to the transdimensional televisions, the terrrerian totally consumed, he transported himself into the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension.

In the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension, everything was rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet. In the dimension, the terrrerian went into the color utility store and was going to buy a color unbalancer, but when the terrrerian walked in, he saw that a thief stole all the color unbalancers. Then everything in the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimention turned green because color spectrum looked like this: rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet instead of this: rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet. Because green was the same in both spectrums, the rainbowredorangeyellowgreenblueindigoviolet dimension turned green. Then the terrrerian bought a cannon and it hit the thief.

The terrrerian then put the color unbalancers back, and then got one for free because he got the color unbalancers back. Then the terrrerian went back home and used the color unbalancer. Then the color was unbalanced again. One side effect of the color unbalancer was that the hooligans were ungreenified, so they were yelllowified. Yellowifing something made it faster, stronger, and greenify resistant. When the terrrerian tried to greenify the hooligans they just smashed the buzzlight bottles faster. So, the terrrerian used a purplify potion to normalify the hooligans, and then the terrrerian greenified the hooligans using a green explosion.Then the terrrerian was hungry again. The terrrerian destroyed all of the stars near earth and destroyed Jupiter, so he visited buyyourownstar.com and bought a star,but the shipping was  $100,000,000,000,000,000. The terrrerian called Subway Steve and asked him to come to the terrrerian. Then Subway Steve came and the terrrerian rode him to planet with a realy confusing name: hfdjmzcnjnbvmcfk,l.kjhnmlkdfgjfkvlijbnndmgjbrn gnkhb5rilkfnghnktuhbnjhutjhutktjnbjknufmjrknvbtmbnhjkvthukbtnjkukidvmnkbktjhbvgrjnvnjxjkrmthn, AKA Planet 9.

The terrrerian went to planet 9 to get the star, but they ran out of stars, so the terrrerian used a crazily confuddled corn cob powered cod liver oil cannon to shoot cod liver oil at a star. Then the star was supercharged and spun to Earth. The terrrerian walked to earth and saw that the hooligans were ungreenified. The terrrerian realized that greenifying the hooligans wouldn’t do anything, so the terrrerian created a giant Buzzlight bottle and sent the hooligans to it. The hooligans stayed there and never bothered the buzzlight fairy again.

 

Or did they…?

The Buzzlight Fairy was just minding her own business, drinking a cup of tea and  watching buzzlight-bottles network. Suddenly she felt a massive pain in her side. She dropped her tea on the floor and the china shattered. This was no ordinary pain. It was as if a thousand knives appeared in her side. Suddenly the pain stopped. The Buzzlight Fairy then envisioned a being with immense capabilities, known as “the terrrerian”, creating a massive buzzlight bottle in place of Jupiter, which had been destroyed. She then saw the being place four hooligans on the planet who started smashing it immediately. The Buzzlight fairy became frustrated. Why would one make such a beautiful thing only to have it destroyed? It was then when the Buzzlight fairy swore she would get revenge against this being.

The terrrerian smiled gleefully as he saw the hooligans smashing the buzzlight bottle,without paying the slightest bit of attention to the buzzlight bottle that the terrrerian was holding. Then the ground started to shake as bits of the buzzlight bottle rose into the air. A blinding ball of light appeared. As the light faded,the terrrerian saw a fairy whose eyes were flaming. The buzzlight fairy.

“The buzzlight bottles you’ve destroyed. That you’ve sacrificed to the void. You must stop destroying them tonight or else your soul will take flight,” the buzzlight fairy said cryptically before disappearing in a ball of light.

The terrrerian then took the hooligans in a net and moved them to MarZ. On MarZ, there was zombies everywhere.When the terrrerian dropped off the hooligans off on MarZ, he expected the hooligans to get zombified, but they turned the zombies into Buzzlight Bottles! It turns out that the hooligans absorbed the magical powers from the bobbleheads, like the greenery, in The Terrrerian. Now the hooligans could turn anything they wanted into buzzlight bottles and smash them! The terrrerian tried to talk to the hooligans and asked them to stop smashing buzzlight bottles. All the hooligans said was “rfgfhtvfdzycuy,” and they walked away. Then the terrrerian felt a pulling force, like a vortex. A ball of light flickered to life and started to expand.Then it faded away and the buzzlight fairy hovered in its place.

“Hello, terrrerian. Now before you say anything, I must ask you; why did you make a giant buzzlight bottle just to have it destroyed?”

“I didn’t know that you existed before. If I knew, I never would have made it. I tried to stop the hooligans, but apparently they can turn anything they want into buzzlight bottles,” the terrrerian telecommunicated

“Can they turn each other into buzzlight bottles?” inquired the buzzlight fairy.

“I don’t know.”

The terrrerian then flew to MarZ. He took the hooligans to the nearest planet that didn’t turn into a firecracker and explode, SaTURN. On SaTURN everyone fell sideways.The terrrerian placed the hooligans in a small room and hoped the hooligans would turn each other into buzzlight bottles. What the terrrerian didn’t know, is that they placed the hooligans above the six percent helium that was on Jupiter. The hooligans turned the room into a buzzlight bottle and escaped. Before the terrrerian could react, the hooligans turned the helium into buzzlight bottles.Then SaTURN, with all the hooligans on it, started falling sideways. The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy, who was with him, chased SaTURN. Because SaTURN was falling sideways, it crashed into Uranus, Neptune and Pluto. Out of the disproportionate mush of planets the terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy saw the trapped hooligans.

“I got it!” said the buzzlight fairy, racing towards the hooligans.

No, I’ll do it, telecommunicated the terrrerian, speeding up. The terrrerian raced the buzzlight fairy to the hooligans but the terrrerian took them out of the planets first with a net.

I told you I could do it, the terrrerian thought.

“This time, my attempt will work,” said the buzzlight fairy.

The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy went to MarZ next. There, the buzzlight fairy tried to put a zombie mask on a hooligan, but the hooligan kept resisting. Finally, when the buzzlight fairy was able to put the mask on the hooligan, the other hooligans turned the mask into buzzlight bottles.

See? I told you it wouldn’t work, the terrrerian communicated telepathically.

“Why don’t we work together? It might work, ”said the buzzlight fairy defeatedly.

Fine, the terrrerian transmitted.

The buzzlight fairy and the terrrerian then created a plan. They were going to summon a magical warlock called Asmoth. To summon Asmoth, you place candles around an altar made of stone, place an axe on top of it and chant “htomnomsamusyberehi” three times. The thing about the axe is that it has a buzzlight bottle hidden inside it. When Asmoth is summoned, he will grab the axe and yell, “WHO SUMMONED ME?” When the hooligans see Asmoth pick up the axe, they will start attacking him. Then Asmoth will get angry at the hooligans and destroy them.

It was time to put their plan into action.The terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy set up the altar and brought all the hooligans to it.Then they put the axe on the altar and chanted the word three times. Then they flew away to a safe distance.They saw a tornado of axes which then disappeared, with Asmoth the warlock in its place.

“WHO SUMMONED ME?!” inquired Asmoth. He then picked up the axe. The hooligans attacked him. From the distance that the terrrerian and the buzzlight fairy could only see explosions of dust and massive mushroom clouds. Then they heard Asmoth say “I AM ASMOTH THE WARLOCK,YAS YAS YAS!” before his shape blurred, and disappeared. When they inspected MarZ they saw that the whole planet was no longer there. Another planet had been destroyed. Now the only planets left were Earth,Venus,and MerCUREy.

“Guess my job’s done here,” said the buzzlight fairy.

“See you around,” thought the terrrerian.

“Bye,” said the buzzlight fairy.

Then the buzzlight fairy disappeared in a puff of smoke. The hooligans were gone forever.

Or were they…?

One month after the disintegration of the hooligans, the terrrerian was on a beach walking past a tree. He kicked a rock at it. The rock hit the tree. Unluckily for the terrrerian, that tree was a palm tree. Palm trees have leaves filled with greenify potion, which is what makes them green. Normally, this wouldn’t have any effect on anything, but because of the Earth’s brief moment as a sponge marshmallow planet, the palm trees, which become super absorbent around sponge marshmallows, retain their sponge-marshmallow-like insides. The combination of the vibration of the rock hitting the tree, the sponge marshmallow minerals, and the greenify potion create a silent propulsion system for the palm tree. The palm tree then silently rocketed into the atmosphere, without the terrrerian noticing a thing.

As the tree zoomed past Earth, it passed the previous location of MarZ. The sponge marshmallow, which is a superabsorbent material, absorbed the disintegrated hooligans. The palm tree rocket would have crashed into Venus, but because Venus is made of iron and rock, which boost the effects of greenify potion, the palm tree rocket blasted straight through the center of Venus, leaving a cylindrical hole in the middle of it. Then the rocket, burning through the last of its greenify potion fuel, crashed into MerCUREy. The minerals on MerCUREy started to cure the hooligans of their death, reviving them.The hooligans combined with the palm tree, the sponge marshmallows, and the last of the greenify potion. The hooligans combined into one hooligan who could jump higher, was immune to greenify potion, and was extremely smart. The hooligan didn’t want to smash buzzlight or buzzlight bottles anymore.

The terrrerian, oblivious to the fact that he caused the resurrection of the hooligans, turned around towards the glimmering ocean and saw out of the corner of his eye the empty place where the palm tree should be. Then the terrrerian thought Wasn’t there a tree there? Then the terrrerian kept on walking.                                                                                                    

 

Two days later…

 

For the past two days, the hooligan had been working on a way to escape the nonexistent atmosphere of MerCUREy. The hooligan cooled the small amounts of hydrogen, helium, and oxygen in the air until they became a liquid. Then the hooligan put the liquids in a bowl and mixed it with the merCUREic sand. This created a gigantifier. The hooligan consumed part of the mixture and grew to the size of ten giraffes. Then he jumped to earth (with his super jump ability) and started to smash everything. The hooligan left smashed trees and upturned grass in his wake. Then the hooligan did something terrible. The hooligan combined the nitrogen in earth’s atmosphere with the merCUREic mixture he had, and threw the mixture to the moon. This caused the moon to enter a sped up orbit, making the moon go into a solar eclipse. Because the moon used all of its orbital energy in those five seconds, the moon couldn’t move for the next 100 years. That meant there was a solar eclipse for the next 100 years. MWAHAHAHA!!!

The eclipse was the first thing the terrrerian noticed. Then the terrrerian heard the smashing of trees and grass.

“TERRRERIAN,” said a voice.”I’M COMING FOR YOU!”

The terrrerian saw a massive figure stomping toward him. Then, he saw the figure was a hooligan, combined with greenify potion and palm tree wood. Then the terrrerian realized what he had done. The terrrerian realized that kicking the rock against the palm tree caused it to rocket into space and collect the hooligan dust. The terrrerian realized that the palm tree rocket landed on MerCUREy and revived the hooligans. The terrrerian realized that this was all his fault.

The terrrerian needed to defeat this monstrosity. He teleported to Potiona and back and threw a greenify potion at it, but the hooligan absorbed it and only seemed to grow more powerful. Then the hooligan picked up a star from earth’s sky and smushed it in his hand. He poured the starjuice on another star that he picked up. This made a starbomb that would explode and suck all the air out of earth’s atmosphere.

“I HAVE A STARBOMB,WHICH WILL SUCK OUT ALL THE AIR OF EARTH’S ATMOSPHERE,” the hooligan said. “IT WILL EXPLODE IN three… two… one.”

The bomb exploded and there was a blinding flash of light.Then all the air was sucked out of earth’s atmosphere.The terrrerian saw the plants withering, and turning brown.

Somewhere, somewhen, there was a Star-god. Star-god envisioned the hooligan exploding a starbomb, with the terrrerian standing frightened in the background. I must help this being, the Star-god thought before he teleported to the terrrerian.

The terrrerian turned around and saw a blinding flash of yellow light.

“I am Star-god. I am here to help you,” said the Star-god.

Then the terrrerian and the Star-god started fighting the hooligan. First, the terrrerian built a missile made of maple syrup and shot it at the hooligan, but the hooligan grew stronger and absorbed the maple syrup. Then the sun god tried to ignite a mini star and throw it at the hooligan,but the star couldn’t ignite because there was no oxygen. Then the terrrerian used a return-oxygenizer 5,000 to return the oxygen to earth, but he accidentally returned 5,000 times as much as there was before. Because there was 5,000 times as much oxygen, all the spiders became huge. Then the terrrerian saw his best spider friend Aragag.

“Aragag!” the terrrerian called. ”It’s been so long.”

“Terrrerian!” Aragag greeted. ”How are… BLEEEH!”Aragag said as he barfed on the hooligan’s shoes.

“HEY!” the hooligan said. “THOSE WERE MY NEW SHOES!”

The hooligan, in a fit of rage, lifted his foot to stomp on Aragag, but Aragag was quick. Aragag shot a web at him, but the web wasn’t strong enough. Then the Star-god extracted hydrogen from a star and coated the web with it. Then the Star-god lit the rope on fire, so if the hooligan struggled, he would get burnt. Then Aragag shot the hooligan at the moon. The hooligan flew into the moon, Venus and MurCUREy, sending all three planets hurtling into the sun with the hooligan. When the moon went into the sun, the sun absorbed the moon which caused the sun to send out a radioactive shrinkamatronization asteroid that fell on earth, which caused all the spiders to shrink and caused the oxygen level to return to normal.

The hooligan was never seen again.

Through the Woods (Excerpt)

Chapter One:  The Encounter of Sorts

Pat stared out of the thickly layered window pane at the flurry of small white flakes of snow that were quickly piling up upon the rough ground. He turned to look at the clock that he had nailed to the wall.  Its thin hands read 4:35. He knew he should be asleep, but something about the snow fascinated him. He thought of what Sam would’ve said. “Not surprised. You’re probably the strangest boy in Arkansas.” He would’ve chortled absent-mindedly in his thick Irish accent while cleaning his bowie knife that everyone in the whole town recognized. That’s what he would’ve said. But Sam was taken by a bear while hiking in Blackwood forest two months ago. Everyone assumed he was dead. Pat had gotten an entire lecture from his father about being safe when hiking alone in the wilderness, but Pat didn’t care. He loved Blackwood forest, and nothing would stop him from hiking there.  

Suddenly, Pat straightened his back. He thought that he must be seeing things because he had been awake for half the night. This species was rare around these regions and should be hibernating, but no. A black bear was trudging through the snow, its thick fur flecked with white.

Pat slung his satchel, with its fat four-hole button he’d found on the wooden table in the tailor shop, over his scrawny shoulder and rushed outside.  The cold immediately shot through his small stature and overcame his body. Still, Pat fought on and pulled forward toward the corner of the town with the big hill.

Once he had gotten there, Pat pulled his binoculars from the bag and raised them to his squinting eyes. The bear wasn’t very far off.  A mere twenty minutes north east. Pat’s hands were shaking.

Suddenly, his bony arms lost grip of the heavy binoculars, which swung down to his chest.  They knocked him backwards and the satchel flew to the bottom of the hill, making a loud clunking sound. He climbed back to the top of the hill and raised the device to his eyes. The gear that focused the vision of the lenses had been pulled far right. Pat saw a blurry black shape rushing toward him. Lowering the lenses, he saw the bear galloping towards him. A bolt of fright shot through Pat’s entire body and, in a wild state of mind, he dropped everything and sprinted toward Blackwood forest. The binoculars bounced against his chest and he turned to see the Bear gaining on him.

Pat caught a glimpse of the treehouse he had made thick in the trees of Blackwood forest one summer. It was constructed from the strong oak in one of it’s famous dark-wooded trees. Pat dashed through the thistles and brambles as they cut against his arms and legs. Finally, the treehouse was straight ahead of him. He struggled and climbed up the thick rope leading to the small cabin. Pat made it and felt the tree shake as the bear clawed against the bark. He sat on the wooden floor and panted breathlessly. He glanced to the corner of the room to see his BB-gun with it’s wooden frame and black markings smudged onto the end of the steel barrel as it glistened in the sunrise. He scooted over to it and reached for it, then propped it up against the balcony overlooking his small town and the barren wasteland of snow riddled with foot prints.

Pat peered down the end of the barrel and at the black bear who was retreating back north. He pulled the trigger and a brief burst of flame and sparks spurted from the gun. This was followed by a sluggish trail of smoke and a whistling sound. The small pellet flew through the air and easily punctured the bear’s thin flesh. It fell on its side, but Pat knew a single BB couldn’t’ve killed a bear of such power as a black bear. He pulled the binoculars to his eyes and squinted to see the bear up close.  It was a female, her thin flesh was dark in places, and her ribs were visible. Now Pat understood. The bear had been hunting for food because it was starved. Even though it had attacked him, Pat felt bad for the animal. He cared for and loved all nature.  

Pat lowered himself down from the tree on the knotted rope, dug into the emergency knapsack he had sewn himself, which was safely nestled in a secret compartment in the wall of the treehouse, to find a small jar full of salted pork. He dropped a juicy piece of the pork in front of the bear.

Afterwards, Pat decided to stay in the forest one night until the snow storm let up. He wasn’t worried about his parents. They were probably relieved he was finally out of their hair. Pat was content as he drifted to sleep on the floor of the cabin suspended in the tree.  

He awoke at sunrise to a horrible sight.

The ground was damp and littered with pine needles. Pat stopped to see it. A Blackwood was on it’s side. The lower half had been splintered by lighting, Pat gathered from the blackened ash-stained wood.  He counted the seemingly endless rings in the tree to see that this “Blackie,” as old countrymen say, was about 27 years old. A tree of that age could be the strongest wood in any market. This tree had fallen and covered hundreds of feet of land –– including Pat’s escape route. Pat muttered a curse, but he knew that he had always been preparing for a situation like this.

He climbed up to the treehouse and reviewed his inventory. He dumped the backpack onto the floor to examine his belongings. A six-inch Kings matchbox with 46 matches. A roll of thread with a pin jabbed into it. A thick hunting knife with a leather cloth wrapped around the blade, and a week’s worth of salted meat and a few onions that had grown deep underground while Pat was treasure hunting. In the treehouse itself, Pat had a 6-48 mosquito BB-gun with it’s signature long and thin barrel. There was also a small shelf with a jam jar of pellets, and 3 books: The Hardy Boys: murder in an alleyway, The Lord of the Rings: Return of the King, and Robinson Crusoe.

By mid-afternoon, Pat was bored and scared. Powerful winds made him shiver and dig his feet deeper into the mossy ground. He was sculpting a rock with his hunting knife. The rock was thin and had a needle-sharp tip. Many curves bore through it because it had been sitting at the bottom of Ratchet creek,  a playful brook that flowed through most of Blackwood. Pat suddenly dropped the rock as he heard a faint growl. He turned to see the black bear awakening, it’s eyelids slowly reaching toward the thick, dirty fur of the forehead.  Pat knew he was supposed to be frightened, but somehow he wasn’t. He edged closer to the bear and picked up the dew-stained piece of pork, then threw it closer to the bear’s mouth. She immediately gobbled it down and slowly pulled herself from the dirt, a swarm of fleas quickly succeeding from her thick fur. For the next few days, the bear would lumber alongside Pat, not making any sort of violent movements, not really interacting with Pat at all. Pat was a bit jittery about the presence of the bear, but thought about all of the incorrect things his father had said to him, and that this was fully indulging in nature. However, he lied awake at night wondering, what his friends would say. Bear boy! You love animals so much you’re practically becoming one! He drifted into an uneven sleep.

Pat sat on a small boulder, motionless.  He didn’t talk much and barely ever tried to socialize with others at school.  At his small school house, there were eleven boys and ten girls.  The two genders broke into separate groups and nobody in the boys group really had specific friends.  To Pat, all of the boys were pretty much the same.  But he was different.  

The bear scratched her paw against her flank to rid herself of what seemed to be a very annoying parasite. Pat found his eyes drooping and climbed to the treehouse to take a nap. Suddenly, his eyes were open again, and the blurred tint of his small wooden life force faded into focus. He peered out the frame of open air to see the sun glint through clumps of leaves. It was about 3:17 in the afternoon, according to his calculations from examining the sun.  

“You drool in your sleep,” said a voice suddenly from behind him. It made the hair on the back of Pat’s neck stand up straight. He immediately jerked his head around to see a girl. She was tall, with brown hair, and was staring at him with penetrating eyes.

Pat ignored any sort of salutations required for a situation like this, and blurted, “Who are you? What the hell are you doing here!?”

She tilted her head to the left and looked at him, unfazed. “Well, you seem very polite. I was out exploring here in Blackwood, when I noticed a Blackie on it’s side. I climbed over it, because I’m not a midget, and saw your treehouse.” She paused for a reaction and then pointed to the corner of  the treehouse. “Nice mosquito, by the way.”  

Pat stared at her in disbelief. “First of all,” he began, “people who can’t climb over 6 ½  feet tall trees aren’t midgets. Second of all, you just barge into someone’s home?  You’re the one who should be working on politeness.”  

She brushed her hair out of her eyes and said matter-of-factly, “I thought you would be an interesting person to meet.” 

Pat rubbed his eyes.  

“My name is Aliza, by the way,” Aliza said, sticking her hand out toward him.  

“Pat,” he said, simply swinging his hand out to join hers.  They sat there together on the wooden plank floor for a few empty minutes before Pat broke the silence by saying, “Well, time for you to go back to your jerk parents. I’m not going to be able to use you for anything.”   

“Excuse me?” Aliza said, raising her eyebrows. “What do you expect?”

Pat almost yelled, “You’re a girl. I’d like to see a girl hunt.”

Aliza huffed with anger and slapped Pat across the face. He was stunned as his cheek stung with pain. Aliza picked up his gun from the corner of the treehouse and said soberly, “Well, then, try and stop me.”

Pat walked behind Aliza uneasily as they stepped along the wet grass and dirt. Aliza raised a finger to her lips and rushed quickly to another, much younger, fallen Blackwood. She stabilized the gun in a ridge of cracked wood. She squinted one eye and steadied the barrel. Pat walked up next to her to see she was aiming at a rabbit, which was nibbling on some beige fungi.  She fired the gun briefly and it released the same flurry of sparks as before. Pat heard the whizzing sound once more, but the rabbits ears perked up and it ran stubbornly into a nearby patch of bushes.  Aliza cursed and Pat laughed, “You’re a good shot, but you don’t know anything about nature. Rabbits have some of the best hearing in the entire animal kingdom. They would be able to hear a BB coming easily.”  

Aliza jerked to attention before letting out a response probably littered with swears. She moved back into her hunting position, but angled the gun upwards and fired it a second time. An ear piercing squawk was heard and a small bird dropped from a branch above to the soft soil below. Aliza turned to face Pat and smirked. She jumped over the tree trunk and snatched the small bird from the ground, then walked back to the treehouse. Pat followed her reluctantly and grabbed some of the few dry sticks lying on the ground near him to start a fire.

“So, sure, you can hunt, but that is my treehouse that I assembled myself. I am not letting you sleep there,” Pat remarked by the fire late at night.

“Fine,”  Aliza responded soberly, “I’ll sleep on the ground.” Pat stomped his foot onto the dying fire, which made a slow hissing noise as it was quenched.  

“I’m turning in,” he said, lowering his voice unnecessarily and then marched off to the treehouse. Aliza patted the sleeping bear besides her whom she had been introduced to by Pat, and it growled in its sleep. She turned to a nearby patch of moss and lay onto it.  

That morning the sun shot through the old wood of the treehouse, spreading slats of masked light across the small room. Pat’s eyes adjusted to the smaller flurries of snow floating lazily down from the sky. He snatched his cracked glasses, which were sprawled on the ground, and fitted them onto his face. Suddenly, as Pat’s foggy vision subsided, he noticed his gun abandoned from the usual spot. Groaning, he looked out the window to see Aliza tanning a deer hide with the rock he had been sharpening the day before.

“Good morning!” she yelled up to him, her voice echoing across the sleepy forest.

“What have you been doing?” bellowed Pat.

“I woke up early, grabbed your rifle, and went out hunting,” she smirked. “The deer like eating the frozen dew. Then I cooked the meat and gave it to your bear.”  

“It’s not my bear,” Pat retorted.  

“Well, she basically lives with you,” countered Aliza.  And, how long have you been here? Who would want to live like this?”  

Pat scampered down the ladder.  “About 2 days, and I’m the one who would want to live here,” he paused. “My parents give me these boundaries –– I feel like I’m just an obstacle to them.”  

Aliza frowned. “Sorry about that.”  

“Well, that’s the real reason I’m out here. I could’ve climbed that tree, but I want to prove to them that I could survive by myself.”

“You can’t just stay out in this forest forever,” she looked Pat in the eyes. “You’re eventually going to have to go back.”

Pat turned away from her and looked up to a tree. “Well, I’m going to stay out here as long as possible. If my father was out here, he wouldn’t survive a month.” Pat chuckled, “He only hunts for sport and doesn’t care at all about the effects it has on this forest. We’re lucky that no one has tried using this forest for lumber.”  

Aliza tilted her head, “But you hunt too!”  

“I only hunt for survival,” Pat responded condescendingly.

“Thanks for telling me, that explains your attitude,” she said.  

Pat should’ve been offended by this, but he ignored the comment.

Aliza looked down and began, “Well, I have the opposite situation. My parents, they don’t care about me. I barely ever go to Blackwood, all I’ve heard about was when Sam went missing. Ever since, I have wanted to go out here and see if they would care. Seems as though they don’t.”

Pat glanced at her and smiled grimly. Suddenly, a noise in the bushes startled the both of them. They swung around to see a swaying light emerging from the clearing. Pat quickly grabbed his gun from the mossy earth and aimed it toward the noise. A figure came into view. He was bulky, had a crippled and grizzled face slashed with a long scar, and had short, darkened hair. It was Pat’s father.  

“What are you doing here, Pat?!”

“Father, I ––”

“You left me in the middle of the night to go to Blackwood?  You’ve been living out here for three days!” Pat opened his mouth to speak, but his father interrupted him, “We are going, right now,” his father gestured to Pat.  

“No,” Pat responded stubbornly.

His father stopped abruptly and turned to face Pat. “What did you just say to me?”  

Gaining confidence, Pat stood and rooted his feet into the ground, “I said no.” He paused. “You have been giving me obstacles and rules for my entire life! Will you for once just leave me alone!?”  The father looked disgruntled, as if this had never occurred.  

“Fine,” Pat’s father said, containing a bloody outburst of anger.  “Do you really want me to just let you die alone in this forest? Fine, then I will.” He looked livid.  “Sooner or later, you’ll come from this retched place and you’ll be begging me for a real home and food.”

A tear trickled down Pats face as he held an indescribable expression of sadness, anger, and hatred.  

The father trekked off into the darkness of the night and soon vanished. Pat sat back down as Aliza stared at him, dumbstruck with her mouth gaping, “What in the world just happened?”  

Pat leaned down towards the ground and said, “That was my father.”

Aliza responded candidly, “Well, yeah, I got that from context, but there is a girl and a sleeping bear right next to you, and he didn’t notice?”  

Pat looked up and said, “That’s because he’s a self-centered ––”  A gust of wind made the trees creak and sway, shielding Aliza from the curse Pat emitted. “He gets very unreceptive of thing that are going on around him when he is involved in certain exchanges.”  

“Okay… ” said Aliza, tilting her head, “but that doesn’t explain why he didn’t notice the bea ––”  

“Listen, Aliza,” Pat snapped, “My father’s an idiot.” Aliza raised her eyebrows and frowned.  “Now, it’s been a long day, so good night.” Pat croaked. Aliza scratched the bear once more in it’s favorite place, behind the ear, and went to sleep.  

To be continued…

Haunted House

Once upon a time, there was a haunted house. Inside, there were a lot of monsters. A little girl went inside the house. Then she saw a skeleton, and then the skeleton put a knife in her. She died. The little girl turned into a ghost. Now she was a monster! She had sharp teeth, eight legs, and was purple.

She called all of the monsters. The monsters came, and then they left the haunted house with their powers. They destroyed the EARTH. Then they made a huge time machine!

They all went inside of the time machine. They went to a nice world in the future! It had palm trees, flowers, trees, and bees.

The monsters said, “Ew, I don’t like this world, it’s too nice!”

They went in the time machine again. They went to Evil Place. There was goo and webs and slime everywhere. The monsters loved it. There was a lot of evil, and there was an evil guy who had sharp teeth and a knife! His name was Mr. Killer.

They were all evil too. They all worked together to make the biggest evil potion. Then they ran around in a circle and made a huge EVIL TORNADO!!!

In the evil tornado, they went back into the time machine and took their evilness into the human world. Then the tornado turned the humans into evil humans. They formed an army!

The army took over the world. After that, there were webs, trees were broken, and there were bats and skeletons.

They lived evilly ever after.

Battle of Revenge II: Traitors

Prologue

In the last story, Max, Finton, and Freddy had defeated Lord Robbers and were free of his threat… for a while. They were trying to figure out the medical potion to heal all of the men lost in the last battle. Their fleet needed to be repaired too, so there were lots of repairs that needed to be fulfilled. Meanwhile, Lord Robbers was also preparing his little surprise….

 

Chapter 1: Evil Meeting

Zilbon, Lord Robbers, Quantuo, Xanga, Jumba, Kaka, and Strangehead (members of the Red Strikers) were sitting down on a table back at Larbazako. Lord Robbers was showing them secret plans for some strange secret weapon that they were going to use to crush the Blue Lions and the Squag, which now was named the Blue Squags. The strange secret weapon was a laser, a very powerful laser that could destroy a whole base with one blast. They were going to go to Slankamos to destroy the Squags’ main building. The Squag’s main building was guarded by the Blue Lions’ troopers.

The 105th Legion was very powerful. It was the highest ranking troop squad of the whole Blue Lion space. The 301st Legion was the second highest ranking squad. They were planning to send thousands of Quinns, evil henchmen of Lord Robbers, to attack the place, but Lord Robbers knew that wouldn’t work. He needed more. He told all of his people that they had to lead the Quinns into battle. They all agreed to do it. At the mention of this, every person at the meeting turned on their superswords and stabbed them into their slots, making a blue hologram of their grand master appear in the center with all of the secret information. The only thing that could power this strange source of different blueprints was the super swords from every Red Striker. The master was very happy, but also extremely mad because they hadn’t killed the person the master had said to kill. The master’s name was Extreme.

“You have done well, my apprentices. But that battle we could not afford to lose.”

“Sir, they were outnumbering us,” said Xanga.

“I do not care,” screamed Extreme.

“Many of our troops died out there, master,” said Zilbon.

“We shall win our next battle,” said Jumba.

“Why don’t we discuss our next battle plans?” asked Extreme.

 

Chapter 2: Squad Healing Center

Max was very worried about all the injured soldiers because there were so many of them. Fortunately, a recipe could stop death, but it was far away in another land, guarded by many enemy soldiers. That was their next mission. They needed to pack up for it. Finton and Freddy were also coming. Trevor wanted to help, so he came too. Erin decided to drop them off at the spaceport. This is what Max packed: a gun, extra ammunition, lunch, a lot of food (food from different planets like Sakalato and Yfdghh,kb c), an extra bottle of hydrating juice, and a bottle of lava in which he would cook the actual food. In addition to providing a place to prepare his meals, the bottle of lava would keep the food from cooling, thus preventing rock from forming on it.                                      

Trevor also packed a super sword, a charge plug, two extra charging stations, food that Lulu had cooked for him, a training droid, and an extra robe.

Finton packed a rifle, extra ammunition (like Max had), frozen food, a blender to liquefy it, a bottle to drink to drink it from, some roots from trees you could eat, and vegetables.

Freddy, of course, packed five boxes of trick stuff, a mobile toilet, toilet paper, and a baby seat for the toilet. He liked copying other people, so he bought two packs of frozen food, sixty-five miniature trees, a giant lava bottle, and a twisted gun, bubble gum instead of ammunition packs, an extra pair of dirty socks, two extra underwears, a giant piece of metal, a soldering kit, and a second twisted gun.

Suddenly, Erin came into the room. “What’s going on? Time to leave, people. Rise and shine. We’re leaving,” he said. “The crawler’s here. Hello!?”

Suddenly everyone grabbed their packs and hurried out the door.

“Move it, move it, move it! This no drill!” Erin was obviously not happy.

Trevor followed his mentor out the door. When they got downstairs, the guards opened the door. Like Erin had said, the crawler was waiting outside, along with other Squags, who said said “Good luck“ and “Be safe.” Max and Trevor said goodbye to Lulu and Lucy. When they got on board the crawler, the driver helped them with their luggage.

“To the nearest spaceport,” said Erin. The driver turned the crawler onto the road as fast as it could go and zoomed away.

On the way there, Freddy took out one of his miniature trees and asked Finton, “¿Para qué se usan esos árboles?”

“You use the roots to make smoothies, dummy!”

Freddy suddenly had an idea to lift the humor. “So, waz sup, dude?”

Trevor and Max burst out laughing.

“It’s pronounced What’s up,” Trevor said.

Finton whacked Freddy.

“Waz dat for?”

“Stop fooling around, Freddy! This is real stuff, bud! We’re going all the way to the center of the whole enemy core,” said Finton. “And in your language, daz foi yo foolin’ around.”

 

Chapter 3: Second New Planet

When they arrived, they got a cart and put their luggage inside. Since Freddy was a weakling, Finton had to help him. Max was nervous. Trevor wanted everything he saw.

“Hey, look at that! That’s the new kind of bubble gum that came out precisely three seconds ago,” shouted Trevor.

“We have to walk three platforms,” said Erin. “No fooling around here.”

The stairs were as high as skyscrapers. Max and Freddy had never been to a spaceport, except for the one back at the base.

Suddenly, the stairs started moving. “Look at that! We don’t need to climb it!” said Max. The elevator ride was awesome. You got to see the whole spaceport from up there. There were thousands and thousands of platforms. There were starships floating in midair anchored with chain to keep it on the platform. There were millions of people and different aliens. There were guards keeping order. The restaurants served exotic foods of other planets. There was even a pilot diner.

Unfortunately, the gum Trevor wanted was sold out. There was a giant starship in front of them with big letters on it that said: Destination to Main Government Planet. Thousands of guards were guarding the top level. Erin ignited his super sword and the guards stepped away.

On the side of the platform, a little sign said: “Rating: ★★★★★ Food Served: Every Planet Known to The Government Space Possible: ∞.”

The doors to the ship opened. Trevor, Max, Finton, and Freddy walked through them. Erin said goodbye and the doors closed. The ride was on!

 

Chapter 4: Battle at Fortress Destroy

The juice was delicious, and the space cruise was going smoothly. The ride to the capital of the Government was nearly over, and Finton, Max and Freddy were at the diner eating, while Trevor was discussing how he loved to train. He said the battle was gonna be hard, so they all had to train their best.

“Hey, Finton! Mind passing me the — ”

BOOM!! Erh, erh, erh. The alarm had gone off. The space cruiser was under attack… Outside, thousands of enemy cruisers had just come out of the turbo engine, which was going at the speed of light. They were firing at the cruiser at full blast. Aboard the cruiser was Freddy’s greatest enemy, the dreaded Trick Destroyer — a gun that turned off every trick onboard the spaceship. Two soldiers came out of the hallway.

“Please report to the main deck,” said the soldiers. Trevor, Max, and Freddy rushed up to the top deck. Finton was commanding a huge army of soldiers. Every enemy cruiser was shooting at our cruiser.

“Fire at sector ten!” BABOOM!!! Smoke was coming out of the hole where Finton used to be standing. “Darn, that cannon!” Finton came out of a smoking hole. Two enemy cruisers were on fire. The cruiser had fire all over. Every battle station was smoking. The laser fire rained through the sky like flies at a garbage dump.  As the cruiser returned fire, Max, Finton, and Freddy went under the deck to ignite the turbo engine. Trevor tried to deflect the laser fire with his swinging super sword.

“Hit the turbo engine button, Freddy!”

“¿Cuál es eso?”

BEEP!

“Self destruct engaged.”

“Freddy!!!”

“Incorrecto.”

“Run to the escape pods!” said Max. Everyone was running to their escape pods.

“Where’s Trevor?” asked Finton. Trevor appeared right next to them. Smoke was all around him. His face was black.

“Stupid cruisers,” Trevor muttered. Two guards were standing around the last escape pod available.

“Run for it!” said Trevor. Beep. The escape pod was launched. Chances were lost.

“No!”

“Self destruct in ten… nine… eight, seven, six, five, four, three, two — ”

Finton pushed Max outside. Freddy and Trevor fell into space. Finton jumped out. The explosion pushed them forward, and a great big ball of fire behind them that used to be their cruiser was now debris fluttering around them. Now they were lost in space.

 

Chapter 5: Evil Knows How to Plan

“Success achieved! The boss will be extremely happy!” The members of the Red Strikers were having a giant party.

“They died! Three cheers for the trick destroyer!” There were all types of food at the evil feast.

BAM!

The door burst open. Jumba came in.

“We’re under attack.” Rocks started falling from the ceiling.

“The feast is ruined!” cried Lord Robbers.

“Send all units!” cried Xanga.

Diong, diong, diong.

The battle outside was tremendous. Thousands of wounded Quinns were lying on the ground. Few were left. The other side was looking much better than its evil match — only a few soldiers were down.

“Send more troops!” ordered Kaka. More came rushing out, only to be killed.

Suddenly, sides changed: the Quinns had taken control of the battle. They were forcing the 105th legion back to their ships.

“Retreat!” ordered the 105th general. The troops rushed back, and the Quinns fired the cannons while the 105th legion tried to escape. Many ships fell from the sky.

Despite their heavy losses, the Quinns had won.

“Now we can’t have a feast about anything! We didn’t win or lose!” Strangehead said.

“I wanted more of that candy bread!” cried Lord Robbers.

As they went back inside, a war drum sounded in the distance.

“What the heck was that?” said Zilbon.

“Quinns into battle positions!”

Ten rows of Quinns stood strong. Twenty spearmen were in the front guarding for any close combat intents. Out of nowhere came a band of aliens with swords, guns, and spears. They were green and had eyes like those of a fly, a green snout in the middle of their head, and brown robes.

AAAheee!!! Chang! Blahg, wago dapo boom! Chang wayyyaaagggooo! Tambow!!! Mwakamaka! Dwaga! Traga! Die!!! BOOM! Weheee!!!

“Now we have something to celebrate about,” said Lord Robbers, “I get my candy bread!”

“No, I get it,” said Xanga.

“Don’t fight, guys!” said Jumba

 

Chapter 6: The Continuation of Chapter 4

“Now what?” said Max. The space around them was peaceful. They had been floating for hours.

“¿No crees que va a venir una nave para salvarnos?” asked Freddy. Suddenly, a bright light interrupted their conversation, and Trevor turned on his super sword. A ginormous space cruiser appeared out of nowhere. Its shiny decks looked as beautiful as gold, and its twenty-six engines looked super shiny with flaming blue jets shooting out.  

“It’s a Model 58.73 Code 97597.725.7000. I used to have a bunch of those in my room,” said Max.

“Uh, looks like we’re boarding, people.”

Trevor was right. The airlock on the 27,000 foot-tall, 123,000 foot long, and 29,000 foot wide spaceship was opening, letting out seventy-five spaceships that were ten feet tall and twenty feet long.  

“Now that’s an airlock,” said Finton.

“I guess we board one of these ships!” said Trevor.

Max, Finton, Freddy, and Trevor boarded the nearest ship. There were fifty-seven Quinns  on board. “Ahh! Battle positions!” yelled Finton. He loaded his gun and aimed at the Quinns. That was when they realized the Quinns were all tied up.

¨Greetings, noble Squag Trevor!¨ said the mysterious, double-mysterious, even more mysterious, superbly mysterious, totally mysterious, amazingly mysterious, terribly weird, with a terrible face, weird, antennae-headed weirdo named Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “Welcome aboard my spaceship. We shall take you to meet my master.  Meet my loyal assistant, Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta.¨

When they arrived at the spaceport, the first guy they had met led them up the stairs to a door.  And when the door opened, what they saw was unimaginable.

 

Chapter 7: Normal Day for Erin

Erin was pacing through when he bumped into Simon.

¨Want to duel?” said Simon.

“Pleasure,” said Erin.

Erin pulled off his glasses. Simon did, too. They extended their glasses. Then, they burst out laughing!

“Hwahwahwahwa… dueling with glasses! Blahaha,” laughed Erin.

“So funny! So funny!” said Simon.

“This is serious,” said Erin. He turned on his super sword and slashed at Simon’s legs. Simon flipped backwards and extended his super sword in 0.3 seconds. Erin attacked. Simon counterattacked. Erin flipped backwards and lashed the air with his extreme super duo combo, stabbing into the middle of the air where Simon was supposed to be. Simon was actually behind him and Erin sensed him. He arched his blade backward, deflecting the jab. Then Simon and Erin burst into a two-hour laugh. Hahaha! They laughed hard because their swords were only styrofoam training superswords.

Erin waved goodbye to Simon and walked into the library. He loved to study, and he also loved to read. Erin had a lot of favorite series. He remembered that he needed to see how the mission was going. When he turned on his mission tracking computer, the screen turned blurry and his mission tracking computer exploded!

“Something must be going wrong!” thought Erin. He went to the main communications system to speak with Eramag, Sofia, Mateo and Aaron.

“Eramag,” Erin said. “I have lost communication with mission 5.0.2600261000.”

“Find communication with mission 5.0.2600261000 and increase to maximum capacity to see if there is any sign of this mission,” Eramag yelled at nearby communications officers.

“We’ll find ‘em,” said Sofia.

 

Chapter 8: Getting to Zanklazumos

Inside the doors were hundreds of troops of the 576th legion troopers.

“What the…?” said Finton.

“I didn’t know this!” said Trevor.

“Cool!” said Max. “I thought all of you guys perished!”

“Esto es assustador,” said Freddy.

“Welcome to the 576th legion troopers headquarters!” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“Let us show you around!” Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta said.

Around them was a large room full of computers. There were three floors to it and probably more because of the elevator. Lots of different troopers were working around the computers. Different things kept on popping up on the screens that they couldn’t even read. The computers were flat touchscreen pieces of transparent glass that showed what you were working on in the center. There was a lot of talking. It sounded like they were on a completely different planet… but they knew they weren’t.

Freddy secretly reached into his pack and pulled out a canister. The canister read “Super Stinky Fart Gas.”

“Esto va a ser bueno,” whispered Freddy.

There was a hissing sound in the air.

“What’s that sound?” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“I don’t know, sir,” said a nearby trooper.

Suddenly, the air smelled bad. Freddy pulled a whoopie cushion out of his backpack. Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta said, “Sorry for the stinky smell.”

Freddy placed the whoopie cushion under Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta’s behind. When Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta sat down a loud fart filled the air. Suddenly, another fresh coat of stinky air flew out. Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota says “Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta, how dare you fart in front of our visitors?”

Freddy couldn’t help but laugh.

“Freddy!” yelled Finton, Trevor, and Max.

“How dare you do that in front of our hosts! I am so ashamed of you!” yelled Finton.

Then they turn toward Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “Sorry for this misunderstanding. My friend is a joker,” said Max.

“And he won’t do it again,” added Finton, clenching his teeth and staring so hard at Freddy that Freddy started to sweat.

“Quieren prender el aire acondicionado,” said Freddy.

After a bunch of sorrys, the ship started to move.

 

Chapter 9: Mass Invasion

The fleet contained fourteen starships. Each one had one hundred billion troops, small blockade runners, blockade ships, troop deployers, troop transports, crew transfer shuttles, supply carriers, and X-class escorts to make a billionaire die of the zeroes. The fleet was an exquisite combination of different capital ships, frigates, and flagships, and all of them were prepared for a mass invasion of the planet Zanklazumos, one of the outer rim planets of the Red Strikers’ force. It contained the recipe to heal the lives of dead troops. It was guarded, but with strategy you could break in. They were going to use the plan below.Copy of Battle of Revenge II- Traitors (by Diego Gonzalez)

“This is going to be great!” said Finton.

“We’re going to have so much fun invading them!” said Max.

“Esto va a ser excelente!” said Freddy.

“What ship are we boarding?” asked Finton.

“You will be on board the troop transporter,” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. The troop transport descended. It was a steady, low descent. Freddy, Max, and Finton were aboard the troop deployer. There was very little light. The ambience was silent. Everyone was ready to deploy. The suspense was unbearable.

“Suddenly, the troop deployer blew up and everyone died. Even our main characters. Yes, I know you people say we can’t kill our main characters, but this story says otherwise. Yes, people, we killed them, get over it,” read the crew report aboard the troop deployer, named ALADA (which stands for Air Land Action Depositor A-transport).

“Ha, what story? And how could the main characters die?” asked Finton.

“Ja, eso fue lo mas chistoso, no se pueden morir los personajes principales,” said Freddy. The troop deployer safely landed on the planet and deployed the troopers. The air was smoky. Suddenly two Red Strike guards walked up.

“Identify yourselves!” they said. Suddenly, a crew transfer shuttle zoomed into its landing site. A figure dropped right in the middle of the two guards. A super sword extended from its hands and the two guards dropped dead beside him. Max and Finton drew out their blasters and aimed at the unknown figure. Suddenly, the blasters flew out of their hands and the ground erupted in front of them. Dirt flew and then it was all silent. The figure turned around and took off its hood.

“Seriously? You were trying to kill me?” said Trevor. “Not nice!” Trevor’s hand stretched out to reveal the electromagnet. He moved his hand up and Max and Finton instantly rose. He moved his hand to the side and back in the direction of Max and Finton. The blasters dropped into their hands.

“Sorry, Trevor,” said Finton.

“How could you scare us like that?” Max asked.

“It seemed like the right thing to do to save you lives,” said Trevor. They walked a long time til they reached the evil fortress. The door was bolted shut. Trevor placed some detonators and got out of there real quick. The door blew open.

“Aren’t you scared that they’ll find out we’re here?” asked Max.

“It’s not a stealth mission,” said Trevor. “They told us to get in there, get the recipe, and get out.”

“Yeah, but we shouldn’t warn them of our presence,” said Max.

“Of course we should! That way they’ll all come out and get their butts kicked,” said Trevor.

The massive capital ship landed, two turrets dropped out of the front. Trevor screamed at the camera that had also dropped down. “What! I thought you had enough arsenal to blow this planet to shreds!”

“That is understood,” replied the robotic voice. 4,000 other turrets came out of the bottom.

“Fire!” yelled Trevor. The turrets released so much laser fire that all three walls surrounding the base were smashed to splinters — or, more accurately, goo — because they were metal. And then, they walked in.

 

Chapter 10: Kill Them Now!

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota clicked the walkie-talkie.

“Prepare to destroy those crazy heroes!” said a creepy voice.

 

Chapter 11: Destroy Them

Back at the Red Strikers’ evil base, Lord Robbers was preparing the super weapon for transportation to Slankamos, and the massive weapon looked like a giant needle. It was seventy feet long, forty feet wide, and twenty feet tall. The big needle was being carried by a huge robotic arm into a spaceship that was going to carry it to Slankamos. Then, Lord Robber would look through the little screen, move his little joystick until the little mark was over the right place, and click the button that said FIRE. And then the giant laser beam would melt his enemies and he would defeat them once and for all.

Lord Robbers cackled, “HA HA HA!” before getting his little pad that fired it and testing the weapon by firing randomly into space. Lord Robbers clicked the big button that said fire. Suddenly, the hangar around them exploded in flames.

FIRE, FIRE, FIRE, the alarms blurted.

Lord Robbers cleaned up the mess and tried again, clicking the FIRE button a bunch of times. Water came down from the ceiling and a bunch of fire bots came out looking for the fire. He cleaned up the mess again and tried once more. He clicked the BIG red fire button and the giant green laser beam cut through the sky and KABLAMO — they heard an explosion.

“Was that supposed to happen, Commander?” Lord Robbers asked.

“No. It was not,” said the commander. Suddenly, a little screen popped out of the ceiling. There was a scared Quinn commander on it.

“OUR BRAND NEW SHIP WAS JUST BLOWN UP!” yelled the Quinn commander.

“Wait! Was it that one that I just wasted all my money on?” asked Lord Robbers.

“I think so!” said the Quinn commander.

“No! No! No! How could this happen?!?” said Lord Robbers. Lord Robbers accidentally stepped on the self destruct button and his brand new weapon blew up.

 

Chapter 12: Funny Does Not Mean Good

Every single computer screen on every Government-controlled planet showed a message:

“Haha! I am Lord Robbers and I will eat all your food by using this teleporting device! HAHAHA! I will also blow up your planet for the sheer fun of it! I will also achieve universal domination, and if you astrophysicists down there say that it is impossible because the universe goes on forever, and you quantum physicists thinking about the Schrodinger’s cat say that I have a 50 percent chance of world domination and a 50 percent chance of getting my butt kicked, let us change that principal to having 100 percent of world domination. Shaboom, suckers! So for the big shazam, I will blow up your planet!”

When the Government planet saw what was happening, they immediately reacted by calling forth an entire fleet and prepared to destroy Lord Robbers once and for all.

 

Chapter 13: The Preparation of the Super Weapon

Lord Robbers had decided to demonstrate his super weapon to the rest of the Red Striker leaders, by destroying a random civilian planet. He walked to his live feed media room in his ship, hovering above the main base (the cannon was actually on the planet below him and not on the ship.) He went to his console room and clicked the big red firing button (this was the right button). The green laser bolt flew toward the planet and detonated a whole entire city. The Red Strikers clapped and Lord Robbers said, “This laser is the emblem of our destructive name. We are called the Red Strikers. We strike and destroy! Clunk clunk clunk!” (He is a cyborg, so that is how he laughs.)

 

Chapter 14: The Deep Dark Hallways

Trevor, Max, Finton, and Freddy walked into the base. There was no one. It seemed abandoned. There was no light; the electricity was cut off. You couldn’t even see your hand in front of you. Trevor turned on his supersword. The sword extended from its hilt and started buzzing, glowing green in the darkness. They walked down the steel hallways, their footsteps resonating on the ground. There was a red light glowing in front of them in a circular chamber and a dark figure hovering over a panel. Max, Finton, and Freddy silently drew their guns. They were all holding Maf 2345’s (Maf is short for MFLP, which stands for Multi-Function Laser Pistol). The Maf had a tiny viewscreen in which you could select the good guy or the bad guy. If you accidentally pointed the gun at the good guy, it would lock the trigger and not allow the laser to pass. If you did, for some reason, sweep the gun over the bad guy and not pull the trigger, it would automatically do it for you. It also had a stun mode, a knockout mode, a kill mode, and a melt mode. They selected the dark figure in the chamber on their Mafs as a bad guy, and put it on knockout.

The man turned around and they finally realized who it was. It was Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota.

“Oh, I see you have come to my greetings party. Or garage sale, since I’m selling proton grenades! MWAHAHA.”

“You’re actually evil?” Finton said. “I didn’t know that!”

“No, but I have just told the secret location of your base to Lord Robbers! HAHAHAHAHA! And now that I am done with you guys, I will kill you all with a single proton grenade while I escape, smooching my crazy girlfriend who is dressed in a sports bra, even though it is extremely cold in here and she will probably freeze to death… which is sad. Now you will play your part. Please stand right where you are while I go click the button to deploy my hovercraft.”

Meanwhile, Freddy had gotten distracted. He had gone to the basement and captured the healing potion, which was why they were there in the first place. He went upstairs again and appeared behind Trevor.

“Ya tengo la poción!” said Freddy.

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota said, “How did you get that? It was covered by the maximum security fence.”

“Creo que fumigue” said Freddy.

“You farted, Freddy?” said Finton.

“Whoa, I didn’t know your farts were so powerful,” said Max.

“Well, it doesn’t matter,” said Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota. “You just stay where you are and let me click the button.”

“Hello, honey pie,” said Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota, Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota’s girlfriend.

“Ah, hello, sweet pea. I was just about to assassinate these evil people,” Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota said.

“Aw, but that guy looks really cute!” said Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota.

Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota set the proton grenade to fifteen seconds. He then clicked the button for the escape craft. Fortunately, Max and Finton weren’t stupid. They still had the Mafs, so they pulled the trigger. Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota and Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota fell to the ground, stunned.

Trevor, Max, Freddy, and Finton ran to the hovercraft and clicked the escape button. The explosion of the proton grenade resonated behind them. Unfortunately, they had to get out of there quickly, and since Yamakazamotamotamotadomanota Xambagotamezinitabedagota, Wamakazamotamotamotadomanota Zambagotamezinitabedagota, and his assistant Wombazengasambataheenga Zambeegotosanjamotameta were traitors, and so was the whole fleet. So they decided to escape in the stealthy way, a way which I will not explain right now. They hijacked a capital ship, went out into space, proton torpedoed all the other ships, and hit the megadrive button.

 

Epilogue

Lulu and Lucy were sitting at home for a girls night in when Lord Robbers snuck in. He grabbed them both by the neck and smashed them into his craft. Both of them were knocked unconscious, and Lord Robbers put them into his craft. The iron bars lit up and you could see Lord Robbers creepy cyborg face.

“Clunk clunk clunk!”

The cyborg’s laugh faded into the cool night air.

 

I Can’t Remember the Last Time I Used a Tissue

I can’t remember my college address. I’m 365,422 years old, and I went to college when I was 19. It was 365,403 years ago when I started. It’s been a while now. I live in an apartment above the clouds, in HEAVEN. It’s weirder in Heaven now. I have to remember my college address because I want to go to a movie with my girlfriend, and I have to give my college address to buy the ticket.

I will tell you how I died: All I wanted was a tissue. I had a cold. I was walking to the market to get medicine and a box of tissues, when I saw my neighbor in her yard. She was watering a Venus fly trap. It leapt out, and its head grabbed mine and swallowed me whole.

In my grave last night, I saw a blood curdling, rabbit toothed, polka dotted tissue box boasting pictures of llamas with hats.

“Finally!!!” I shouted. I peeked in.

The tissue box was infested with pencils and beetles. The beetles had already eaten half of the pencils, and it smelled of musty old cheese. My heart split in two. There were no tissues. I died for the second time.     

Camp River

I could feel the motorboat all throughout me. The vibrations circulated throughout my chest and arms. It was actually kind of uncomfortable, frankly, but the feelings were scaled down from the experience of the motor boat gliding along the black, shining water of the lake. Slight sprinkles of water tread from the back of the boat sprinkled on my back, causing me to get wet. They say you’re supposed to stay two motorboats behind the driver in front of you, but sadly the ocean has the same deal as the Los Angeles freeways-some people just stop in the middle of a ride.

“Move up! Move up!” I scream every time someone stops dead in the middle of the ride. I use the wheel, which really isn’t that sturdy or accurate, to turn left and go around. When I looked around to the driver, it was a teenager with chocolate brown skin whose legs had given up on him, leaving him dead in the middle of the water.

“Goddamn,” I said, and drove right in front of him and kept on going. The time: 5:00 PM. And it was already pitch black outside. But I had multiple things to do. Get back to the cabin, get dressed, get to dinner on time, which was at 6:30, and then try to make an impression on Sophie, the girl I liked at the camp who was going to be dancing at 7:45. But I put all those worries aside and focused on the cool breeze. The air slapping my cheeks as I drove the motorboat.

Josie, a good friend of mine who also goes to this camp, was sleeping right next to me. She was all about this activity. She first drove the boat before we switched in mid-ocean, but the peaceful driving and the serenity of the black sky made her fall right asleep. She didn’t notice how much water was on her, on her brown hair and freckled face. She was also drooling, which added to the stream. But I just let her sleep and kept on driving the motor boat. Looking back behind me, I couldn’t really tell what was back and was ahead. Everything was as black as a dark pearl.

It was that minute later when two unexpected things happened.. The clouds in the sky, black but puffy and thick like cream for Belgian waffles at breakfast, started to rain. I just imagined water flowing from the cream on those waffles as the water poured onto my hair and Josie’s cheek. Thankfully, Josie and I brought hooded sweatshirts on the hike here. The hike to the boat station was intense, and painful. We were both barefoot and the ground was covered in rocks, so it was very painful to walk. And when we got to the station, the wind started to pick up, so we had these sweatshirts. So, I lifted my back off the seat and raised the hood above my head and started to feel splotches of rain clash with the fabric.

Then, I lifted Josie’s back off the seat and lifted the hood over her head. She woke up and screamed, which completely startled me.

“What the hell’s going on?” she asked, and her head turned towards me. “Alex?” Oh, that’s my name.

“I’m just lifting your hood over your head,” I said. “It just started raining. Chill out.” The boat kept gliding along until we heard the boat bump against a sunken buoy in the water.

“Aaah!” Josie exclaimed, but I tried to stay as calm as possible, but I still wondered what the hell just happened.

“Calm down.” I said. But then the boats ahead of us started to speed up, so I put more gas in the tank and the levels on the tiny speedometer started to increase and kept increasing until I was going maximum speed. I didn’t pick up that the boats ahead had turned left, so when I saw the buoy, I actually became a bit scared that we were going to crash into the object and the steel chains holding it across and have a part of the boat damaged. So, I made a sharp left and the boat tipped. None of us were prepared for it. The motor stopped and we both fell into the black, cold water. The taste of the water was disgusting in my mouth and I could feel the koi fish that swam beneath me glide gently against my stomach, but I made my way up into the water and Josie did as well.

“Are you okay?” I asked, still bewildered.

“I’m fine,” she replied. “It just scares the you-know-what out of me.” I couldn’t help but agree. With all our strength, we pushed the boat back up on the surface and made sure the motor was running. Thankfully, no water got in the sensitive parts. We tried activating the flashlight so we could make an effort of trying to find out where we were on the lake. Dammit, out of batteries. And we left our flashlights, which were pretty good, back at the boat station. There was nothing left we could do, so we figured we just drive the boat forward without any way of knowing if we were supposed to go that way, or turn back and head to the station, which seemed impossible because of the blackness. So, we progressed. When we started, the motorboat was a bit bumpy when trying to spew out the gasoline, which worried me every single time. Thankfully, the engine got all the water out and we were back on the water again. Even though I couldn’t see behind me, I kept on looking back if there were any signs of light.

It was 5:30 at this point and my body was just ready to give up and leave me and Josie stranded in the middle of a lake for the night. We had been driving the boat for an hour and it only took us half the time to get lost on a wrong turn. I mean, we could manage to drink some of the lake’s water, even though it was probably infested with marine feces, cuddle up with each other, and use our hooded sweatshirts for warmth. We could wait until the morning when there was light and have a better chance of navigating where we were and how to get back. The thing is, we didn’t have a compass, or even a phone’s compass for God’s sake, and if we slept overnight, the motorboat might float and we would end up in an entirely different location.

But at that very moment, the boat bumped over another sunken buoy, startling me, which seriously had the slimmest chances of happening again. I was afraid we were going to tip over and Josie, who had been trying to stay as calm as possible, let out a small shriek. I was even worried that we were going to tip over again. I pulled to an abrupt stop, just trying to process what had just happened. Then I heard a sound.

A loud scream seeped into my ear, and I thought the voice was screaming hey.

I shuffle Josie. “Did you hear that?” I ask. “Is it them?”

“Let’s find out.” Josie said. So, I put all the gas on the motorboat until it was speeding across the water. And it was them. When we got there, there was a small group of motorboats in a circle. We stopped just near them.

“Camp River?” I asked.

“Camp River,” someone said, but it was too dark to recognize them by face. “One of the kids here went a bit too fast, fast enough that you two were blown off track. And, on top of that, it was pitch black. Give me your names so I know who you are.”

“Alex and Josie.” I confirmed.

“Aaah, it’s Raymond,” he said. The instructor. “You wanna start heading back.”

“Yeah, but I got somewhere to be, so can we go as fast and as spread out as we need?”

“Sure thing,” Raymond said.

“By the way, do you have four nine-volt batteries on you?”

“Why?”

“Our boat’s flashlight rain out of power, and that was the one thing we needed to try and find our way back to you guys.”

“Sure.” Raymond took out a little bag he had kept stored near the gas pedal and pulled out four backup batteries. We pulled our boat a bit closer to him and he opened up the flashlight compartment, which was located in the front of the boat, and replaced the batteries with the new ones. The flashlight worked, and Raymond closed the compartment tight. So, I left the flashlight on and we were off once again into the black of night.

 

 * * *

 

To get to the start of the hike which leads to the motorboat station, you have to get through a forest. This forest takes one hour to walk through and 25 minutes to a half-hour by running. So after I leave Josie, I take off at maximum speed through the forest, trying to avoid as many rocks and bumps as I can, even though it is still pitch black. So, I use my flashlight. I just can’t sacrifice being late to this dinner party and not making an impression while dancing with Sophie.

I don’t care about bumps. Getting up after getting hurt and continuing along is a piece of my psyche. So, after the first two trips, I still keep running, even with the cuts, and start to see faint light coming from a distance, but I still am perplexed that I am not anywhere near this light. That doesn’t mean my feet have stopped, though. Pacing from left to right at an incredible but almost impossible tempo for an ectomorph. Trying to avoid any obstacles nature gives. Rocks and whatnot. This forest, unfortunately, has tons of narrow turns up every way, and with only a teensy bit of clear vision, it is a mind game getting through the trail.

The running becomes painful on my feet after twenty minutes. Josie is screaming now, at me, even though she is probably a mile behind me, and I can’t understand what’s she saying. But I assume she’s lost.

Girls’ camp was a ways away from boys’ camp. The directors didn’t want any hanky-panky. But soon, about after five minutes, I see that my watch says the horrific time of 6:15. Trees leaves sway from left to right in synchrony but frantically. My flashlight is dimming, and my vision is scaled down at night by the need of prescription glasses, which don’t really work at night, but I don’t give a damn. I don’t seem to trip over as many rocks because the rocks that are falling are little pebbles and are tumbling towards me. I don’t care. The wind blows in my face and blows my hair backwards, and my breathing increases.

I’m stressed but brisk, though my arms are going to give out. I feel the tension all throughout. I’m racing and pacing and my mind is going out of the place. Like an Ozzy Osbourne song. I instantly feel like I’m going to lose consciousness, like my mind is going to collapse all over the place and I’m going to fall out dead. Dead. With no sign of rescue for months. That can’t happen, but I’m going completely insane!

 

* * *

 

But I soon exclaim,“Thank God!” because my feet land on the familiar surface of the rocky path the boy cabins are located on. And when I find my cabin, I use the fifteen minutes to quickly take a hot shower and get dressed into nicer clothes. My clothes are wet, dirty, and scrappy. It’s still raining, and my shoes got covered in mud on the run in the forest. And this time around, since there are tons of boys in the cabin, I don’t feel weird being naked around them like I usually do, because I’m that guy.

Their questions protrude my brain and I’m probably not conscious enough to answer them. They’re asking where I’ve been, and what happened? But I don’t have time to answer their questions. In a snap, my dirty clothes are thrown in my over-stuffed dirty laundry bag. And I’m in a black T-shirt with a padded leather jacket and black jeans, and running the same running shoes I was wearing before, no matter the dirtiness. And then it’s all me.

 

  * * *

 

I’m famished from all the previous events, and it’s nice to be in the environment of the crowded tables, water jugs, and overhead music, and the lighting is just the icing on the cake. I’m still flabbergasted that I made it here on time. My watch is 6:32 PM, so I got swiftly on time. It was just a matter of time before the future events of my evening were determined just by probability. I know Sophie’s the girl of my dreams, and I just can’t stand not to be with her, and this is basically the only opportunity. She’s smart, she’s intelligent, she looks hella good, and she loves writing. I need to love somebody that has the same interests and career I mean, if there was any alternative option to spending time with her, it would have to be doing girly activities with the rest of her friends. But she wouldn’t pay any attention to me –– I would just be a third wheel. She’s going to be dancing… I’m going to be dancing. She’s going to be dancing. It would make sense that we dance together. I’ve met her before, and we’re friends. I’ve seen her signals before.

For dinner there are calzones, an option of either beef and cheese or just cheese. I get two, one of both option, and I’m so filled I can’t have dessert, which is the camp’s signature apple pie. I’m digging into my food like a barbarian, so hungry, until I feel a forceful pull on the back of my shirt. I turn around to see Josie, scraped up and arms crossed.

“What’s up?” I ask. “What happened?”

“You’re just really an asshole, Alex,” she said. “I was screaming your name a mile back in that forest. A tick bit me and left a sting that left me in agony. Oh, the human ––”

“You don’t need to be overdramatic,” I reply. “And your scream sounded distorted from where I was. How could I tell? I was running non-stop with nothing else in my mind deserving attention!”

“You hear my voice, you run to help me. Isn’t every guy supposed to do that with every chick?”

“If every guy was supposed to do that with every chick, you’d have a flock of guys around you. Maybe like two billion.” I said.

“You’re such a class act jerk,” Josie said. “Screw you.” And she stomped off into the depths of the dining hall. But I didn’t feel ashamed of myself. She wasn’t really my friend, anyway. Maybe she was my “friend.” Should I feel ashamed? I go back to eating dinner until one of the other boys, Lukas, taps my shoulder.

“What happened back there?” he asked, puzzled.

“Nothing you need to be involved with,” I said. “Just a situation with a friend of mine.”

“A girl?” he asks.

“Yeah. So?” I sassily reply.

“Treating girls like crap won’t get you anywhere here.” he said. Why should I listen to Lukas though? Sure, this isn’t his first year here, but what would he know about my particular situation?

“You’re right, but what does it matter here?” I ask. “This is summer camp, not behavioral school.”

“Well, why won’t you treat people with respect?” he asked. “You’re kind of being a jerk… you don’t want to respect people.”

“Who are you to call me a jerk?” I ask, angrily. “Shut up!” And he turns away and continues to eat, and when I turn to my right to see him, I can see some small tears swelling inside his eyes. He is probably known for being the most sensitive in the bunch, anyway. He has a tendency to get really emotional. What a wimp.

 

  * * *

At 7:30, the dining hall was dramatically different than what it was earlier. A silver, glittery disco ball was hanging from the middle of the ceiling, and there were tons of tables spread all across the room. There was another table with food and soda and a big dance floor in the smack center. In fact, there were already even people on it! And to the corner was a DJ spinning some music on an old-school turn-table, which was pretty cool, I have to admit. The music got louder and more people started to crowd onto the dance floor. There were so many people, in fact, mostly nobody could find their way around.

Luckily, I could see Sophie, in a pink dress, alone in the corner of the dance floor, dancing by herself. Now was the perfect opportunity. I dropped everything and walk to her, weaving in and out of the crowd. I finally made my way over to her. My heart started rapidly thumping, and sweat starts to pump. When I reached her, I held out my hand.

“Would you like to dance?” I said, not sure if I would regret it.

“No” she said, her face turning angry and disappointed, which definitely caused my heart to drop and made me regret the effort I put into running through the forest.

“But why?” I asked, with expectation for a good reason.

“My best friend told me that you weren’t being that nice,” she said, her face angry. “That’s not acceptable. Not in a million years I would dance with you.”

“Who is your friend?”

“Josie.” Shit.

“Oh…” I said, then when she turned her head, I turned off and ran, weaving in and out of the crowd, but then made my way out of the dining hall. When I was far in a corner behind the hall, where nobody could see me, and started to cry. Crying in disbelief, regret, and overall sadness. Why did this happen? Was it me? Why am I asking, of course it was. Girls don’t want to hang out with jerks. It’s all logic. It turns out that my actions really do affect the outcomes of situations. What have I done?

 

 * * *

Later that cold night, I hear a few footsteps and turn to see a kid of no recognition to me but older than me, walking towards me. The cold air brushes against my face. He told me that he had been informed of the situation, but what he said to me that night changed the rest of my life and the rest of the decisions I would make for the rest of my session. “Disrespect does not find you well at Camp River.”

Kitty Ranchero’s Adventures

Part 1

There lived a kitten named Kitty Ranchero. He had gray fur, black stripes, and dark gray spots on his belly. He lived in a duplex near a rain forest with a nice man and woman. They didn’t have any children, but they did have a dog named Emma and another kitten named Perry, who was Kitty Ranchero’s sister.

 

Part 2

He wanted to find his sister, Perry. He wanted to find her because she ran away. She ran away because a guy named Todd saw Perry outside, thought she was a stray cat, and tried to capture and keep her as a pet.

There was a forest by their house so he thought she would run that way. He started to sneak out of his house and find Perry. When he walked into the forest, he realized that it was a rain forest. As soon as he got there, he realized that he forgot to pack up some stuff. So he ran back and packed up some green gum, tooth paste, some bug spray, and some magazines just in case.

When he finally got back to the rain forest, he started his search for Perry. It was cold and windy in the rain forest.

Part 3

The next day he started looking for Perry. Shortly into his journey — ROAR! Tigers jumped out from behind a bunch of bushes and wouldn’t let Kitty Ranchero go through. He was terrified but managed to pull green gum out of his backpack.

“This green gum is delicious. Would you like a piece?”

While the tigers were chewing Kitty Ranchero ran around them as fast as he could go. When he was safe he stopped to catch his breath at a river. But then he remembered that he hated water, and he couldn’t swim. He saw lily pads and walked across them.

He started to get very concerned about his sister. He was worried that she was alone and scared in the cold. He worried that she didn’t have any food or someplace warm and dry to sleep. It was later and darker. So he curled up in a pile of leaves under a plum tree. He dreamed of finding Perry, and going back home, and living happily ever after. But then he woke up and realized that he was still in the rain forest. He felt sad and cried for a while.

But then he heard a monkey in the distance. He heard the monkey say, “Hello. Are you lost?”

“I’m trying to find my sister, Perry. Have you seen her?” Kitty Ranchero asked.

“Wait. I think I saw a kitty. Is she light grey with blue eyes?”

Kitty Ranchero got excited and said, “You saw her? Can you please take me to her?”

“Okay. Climb up this tree and I’ll take you right to her.”

“But I can’t climb up trees,” he said sadly. “I’m a kitten.”

“How about you stay down there, and I’ll jump from tree to tree, and you can follow me from the ground.”

“Okay. Sounds good,” Kitty replied.

Kitty Ranchero started to follow the monkey through the rain forest. The monkey led him to a pond.

“Wait,” said the monkey. “I thought I saw Perry. Where is she?”

Kitty Ranchero felt angry and said, “Thanks for nothing! I’m just gonna go find Perry myself.”

“Okay,” the monkey said. “I like your snaggletooth.”

“Thank you. Sorry I got frustrated. I know you were just trying to help but I’m so worried about my sister. How about both of us keep trying to find her.”

“Okay. Let’s go.”

After a long day of searching they finally went to sleep on top of a tree. Unfortunately, there were mosquitoes everywhere and they couldn’t sleep. Kitty Ranchero asked the mosquitoes, “Hey, you guys want a bath?”

And the mosquitoes replied, “Sure! We’re pretty stinky!”

“Let’s climb down the tree and I’ll give you a bath in the pond.”

Once they get to the pond Kitty Ranchero pulled the bug spray from his backpack, aimed it at the mosquitoes and said, “You wanna a piece of this?”

And then he sprayed them in the face. The mosquitoes immediately started coughing and they flew away.

“Let’s never come back here again!” the mosquito leader said. 

Then, Kitty Ranchero climbed back up the tree.

“That was a great idea!” the monkey said. “Where’d you get that bug spray?”

“My teacher gave it to me at Kitty-garden,” said Kitty Ranchero.             

“Cool,’’ replied the monkey. Then, they both fell asleep on top of the tree.

The next morning they continued looking for Perry. Then they saw a dark and scary house in the middle of the jungle.

“I see Perry,” said Kitty Ranchero excitedly. There were vines and ripped curtains. Kitty Ranchero saw Perry in a cage with people guarding her.

“Wow, what’s going on?” said the monkey. Then a guy started chasing Kitty Ranchero and the monkey away. While they were running, Kitty Ranchero said, “By the way, I didn’t catch your name.”

“My name is Tails,’’ replied the monkey.

“I like that name,” said Kitty Ranchero. The guy, who had black ripped clothes, stopped chasing them because he was tired.

The people who were guarding Perry took her into the scary house. Before the door closed Kitty Ranchero and Tails ran inside quickly. When he got inside they saw that it was dark. They could barely see a thing. But then they saw a shadow of a man holding a lantern so they hid behind a box that said, “OPEN.” As the man passed by the box he smelled Tails and he almost got close to finding them but luckily, they ran through the hallway where the man came from. In the hallway they saw an open door leading into a room. And to their shock, Perry was locked in a cage right inside the room!

Kitty Ranchero’s eyes popped wide open.

“This is easy. Let’s just walk inside,” Tails said.

“But we don’t have the key to unlock the cage,” Kitty Ranchero said, “And there might be booby-traps!”

“Just come on, Kitty Ranchero.”

As they walked in the room, Kitty Ranchero stepped on a button on the floor and a cage with a gorilla in it dropped down from the ceiling and landed right in front of Kitty Ranchero. He screamed like a little girl.

“Whoa, whoa, whoa. What was that?”

“That was me,” Kitty Ranchero said, embarrassed. But then he remembered that gorillas loved magazines. So he took a magazine from his backpack and handed it to the gorilla through the bars.

“Here. You will love this magazine about a girl gorilla that you might want to go out on a date with.”

“Thanks!” the gorilla replied.

While they were talking, Tails found the key to Perry’s cage in a little box that was sitting on a table. Kitty Ranchero was so happy. Tails opened the cage and then Kitty Ranchero hugged Perry. But then Kitty Ranchero realized… it was a fake Perry! It was a robot!

Fake-Perry said, “Intruder!”

Kitty Ranchero and Tails ran out screaming like women. They were sad when they left, but then, one of the guards saw them. He said, “What are you doing in here?”

They ran out of the scary house. Outside they saw an evil king, who looked really ugly with a weird, small, stinky palm tree growing on his head. He was hovering over Perry, who laid in the grass. The evil king had big muscles and he was holding a knife to Perry’s throat.

Kitty Ranchero saw this and ran over to the evil king. He slapped his butt! The evil king turned around and got really mad.

Kitty Ranchero said, “Who are you looking at?”

“Did you spank my butt?” the evil king said. He was about to cut Kitty Ranchero with the knife, but Kitty Ranchero was so fast, he grabbed Perry and ran away with her.

Tails yelled behind them, “Hey! Wait up!”

They hid behind a tree and Kitty Ranchero said, “Are you okay, Perry?”

Perry started laughing and said, “I can’t believe you didn’t find me!”

Kitty Ranchero was confused. “How could we have found you?” he said. “You were so far away!”

Perry said, “That’s not a king, and those are not guards! Those are just friends, and they’re pulling a prank on you.” She told Kitty Ranchero that they set up all those obstacles themselves.

Kitty Ranchero was so surprised. “What?” he said. “I came all this way for nothing?”

“What’s going on?” Tails said.

“Never mind,” Kitty Ranchero said.

Tails said, “I’m getting out of here.”

Kitty Ranchero and Perry walked back home laughing. Kitty Ranchero felt both mad and happy at the same time.

When they got home, their master asked, “Where were you, dude?”

Kitty Ranchero cocked his head to the side. Emma, the dog, started to laugh and said, “I know all about this.” And the whole family, including the owners, posed for a picture.